Skip to main content

Full text of "Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia"

See other formats 


PROCEEDINGS 


ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES 


PHILADELPHIA. 


1881. 


publication  committee: 

Joseph  Leidy,  M.D„  Geo.  H.  Hokn,  M.D. 

WiLiiiAM  8.  Vaux,  Thomas  Meehan, 

John  H.  Redfield. 

Editor:  EDWARD  J.  NOLAN,  M.D. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

ACADEMY    OF    NATUKAL    SCIENCES, 

S.W.  Corner  Nineteenth  and  Race  Streets. 

1882. 


)^^aa 


Academy  of  Natural  Soibnces  op  Philadelphia, 

February,  1882. 

I  hereby  certify  that  printed  copies  of  the  Proceedings  for  1881  have 
been  presented  at  the  meetings  of  tlie  Academy,  as  follows: — 


^ges      9  to  24 

May            10,  1881. 

"        25  to  5G      . 

May            31,  1881. 

57  to  88       . 

June            14,  1881. 

"        89  to  112    . 

June            21,  1881. 

"      113  to  144    . 

August         2,  1881. 

"      145  to  160    . 

August        18,  1881. 

"      161  to  176    . 

September  13,  1881. 

"      177  to  208    . 

September  27,  1881. 

'•      209  to  256     . 

October       18,  1881. 

"      257  to  304     . 

November    8,  1881. 

"      305  to  384     . 

November  22,  1881. 

"      385  to  414    . 

.       December     6,  1881. 

"      415  to  446    . 

December  13,  1881. 

"      447  to  462     . 

.       February      7,  1882. 

"      463  to  478     . 

.       February    21,  1882. 

EDWARD  J.  NOLAN, 

Recording  Secretary. 


PHILADELPHIA 

W.  P.  KtLDARE.  Printer. 


LIST  OF  CONTRIBUTORS. 

With  reference  to  the  several  articles   contributed  by  each. 

For  "Verbal  Communications,  see  Greneral  Index. 

Arango,  Rafael.     Description    ef  new  species  of  Terrestrial  MoUusca  of 

Cuba 15 

Buckley,  S.  B.     Quercus  Durandii  Buckley 121 

Quercus  rubra  L.  var.  Texana 123 

Rhus  cotinoides  Nutt 125 

Chapman,  Henry  C,  M.  D.     Observations  upon  the  Hippopotamus 126 

On  a  Foetal  Kangaroo  and  its  Membranes 468 

Heilprin,    Angelo.     Notes    on   the    Tertiary    Geology    of    the    Southern 

United  States , 157 

A    Revision  of  the  Cis-Mississippi    Tertiary  Species  of   the    United 

States 416 

Remarks    on    the    Molluscan    Genera    Hippagus,    Verticordia   and 

Pecchiolia 423 

Note  on  the  Approximate  Position  of  the  Eocene  Deposits  of  Mary- 
land   444 

A  revision  of  the  Tertiary  Species  of  Area  of  the  Eastern  and  South- 
ern United  States 448 

Lockington,  W.  N.     List   of  the   Fishes  collected  by  Mr.  W.  J.    Fisher, 
upon  the  coast  of  Lower  California,  1876-77,  with  descriptions  of 

new  Species 113 

McCook,  Rev.  H.  C.     The  Honey  Ants  of  the  Garden  of  the  Gods 17 

The  snare  of  the  Ray  Spider  (Epeira  radiosa),  a  new  form  of  Orb- 
web 163 

Ryder,  John  A.     The  Structure,  AfBnities  and  Species  of  Scolopendrella.     79 

Stearns,  R.  E.  C.     Observations  on  Planorbis 92 

Wachsmuth,  Chas.  and  Frank  Springer.     Revision  of  the  Palseocrinoidea. 

Part  II,  Family  Spheeroidocrinidse 177 


/  S^  b  1^  "> 


PROCEEDINGS 

OF  THE 

ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES 

OP 

PHILADELPHIA. 


1881. 


January  4,  1881. 
Dr.  Jos.  Leidy  in  the  chair. 
Twenty  persons  present. 

Bhizopods  as  Food  for  Young  Fishes. — Prof.  Leidy  remarked 
that  last  September  he  had  received  a  letter  from  Mr.  S.  A.  Forbes 
of  the  Illinois  State  Laboratory  of  Natural  History,  Normal 
Illinois,  stating  that  the  3'onng  of  some  of  the  suckers  {Catasto- 
midse),  Hi/jjentelium,  Myxostoma,  etc.,  "  have  the  intestines  packed 
with  tests  of  Difflugia  and  Arcella.^''  Later,  Mr.  Forbes  sent  two 
slides,  with  some  of  the  intestinal  contents,  for  examination. 

The  slide  with  food  from  the  intestine  of  the  large-scaled  Mullet 
Myxostoma  macrolepidotum,  from  Macinaw  Creek,  contained  the 
following  species: 

DiFPLiTGiA  GLOBULOSA.  Shell  of  rather  coarse  sand,  with  laroer  o-rains 
around  the  mouth  ;  mostly  in  the  shape  of  the  segment  of  an  oval"  with 
the  oral  pole  truncated.     Most  numerous  form. 

Measurements  of  a  number  were  c^s  follows  : 

1.  Shell  0.18    mm.  long  ;  0.162  broad  ;  oral  end,  0.103  broad. 


0.18 

0.156 

0.174 

0.198 
0.198 


0.156 

0.15 

0.156 

0.168 

0.31 


0.103 
0.073 
0.09 
0.096 
0  108 


Difflugia  acuminata.     Shell  mostly  slightly  unsymmetrical  •    some 
with  a  slight  neck,  straight  or  slightly  everted  at  the  mouth  ;  a  few  with 
3 


10  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

two    points  to  the  summit ;  usually  of  minute  sand  and  comparatively 
smooth.     One  oblique  form  noticed  (No.  G),  approaching  D.  constricfa. 

1.  Shell  0.18  mm.  long  ;  0.108  broad  ;  oral  end  0.06  broad. 

2.  Shell  of  same  size,  but  with  a  short  neck,  slightly  erected  and 

undulant  at  the  border. 

3.  Shell  0.18    mm.  long  ;  0.114  broad  ;  oral  end  0.048  broad. 

4.  "     0.198    "        "       0.103      "  "        0.06        " 

5.  "     0.18      "        "       0.114      "  "        0.06        " 

6.  *'     0.163    "        "       0.09        "  "        0.06        " 

Nos.  1-3  of  fine  sand,  and  smooth  ;  Nos.  4-6  of  coarser  sand. 

The  slide  with  food  of  Eremyzon  succetta.  The  material  apparently 
consisted  of  the  superficial  sediment  of  the  water,  and  contained  entomos- 
tracans,  rotifers,  dipterous  larvae,  desmids,  diatoms,  etc.,  together  with 
the  following  : 

DiPFLUGiA  GLOBOLOSA.  Shell  0.15  mm.  long,  0.138  broad;  oral  end 
0.078  broad. 

DiFFLUGiA  L0B08T0MA.  Shell  with  trilobed  mouth,  0.09  mm.  long, 
0.078  broad ;  mouth  0.03  wide.  Several  measvired  of  the  same  size ; 
others  slightly  smaller.     The  most  common  species  present. 

DiFFLUGiA  PYRiFORMis.  Shell  0.43  mm.  long,  0.31  broad,  at  mouth 
0.09  broad. 

Arcella  vulgaris.    Variety  with  pitted  shell. 

Arcella  discoides.  Shell  0.18  mm.  broad,  mouth  0.036  wide.  Another 
specimen  0.15  broad,  with  mouth  0.054  wide. 

Another  rhizopod  shell  observed,  was  diflferent  from  any  pre- 
viously noticed.  The  shell  had  the  form  of  that  of  Arcella  dis- 
coides, with  no  trace  of  the  structure  characteristic  of  that  of 
Arcella,  but  composed  of  a  nearly  colorless  or  pale  yellowish 
chitinoid  substance,  incorporated  with  minute  spherical  granules 
of  uniform  size,  darkly  outlined,  scattered  irregularl}^,  isolated,  or 
in  little  groups  or  chains,  straight  or  irregular,  and  in  pairs,  or  up 
to  five  in  number.  The  specimens  measured  about  0.105  mm. 
broad,  with  the  mouth  0.03  wide.  A  chain  of  five  granules  of  the 
shell  measured  0.009  mm.  long. 

It  is  certainly  an  interesting  observation  of  Mr.  Forbes,  to  dis- 
cover that  the  young  suckers  should  use  the  rhizopod  shells  to 
olitain  as  nutriment  their  little  stores  of  delicate  protoplasm. 


January  11. 
Dr.  John  L.  Le  Conte  in  the  chair. 
Eighteen  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "Descriptions  of  new  species  of  Terrestrial 
Mollusca  of  Cuba,"  by  Rafael  Arango,  was  presented  for  pub- 
lication. 


1881.]  natural  sciences  of  philadelphia.  11 

January  18. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberqer,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty  persons  present. 


January  25. 

The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberqer,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-one  persons  present. 

Jos.  J.  Knox  and  Geo.  H.  Rex,  M.  D.,  were  elected  members. 
Chas.  Velain,  of  Paris,  was  elected  a  correspondent. 

February  1. 
Mr.  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.  in  the  chair. 
Ten  persons  present. 


February  8. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-seven  persons  present. 

Note  on  Treeless  Prairies. — Mr.  Thomas  Meehan  remarked  that 
the  absence  of  timber  or  arborescent  growth  on  the  grassy  prairies 
of  America,  still  continued  to  be  a  matter  of  controversy,  but  he 
believed  that  in  the  light  of  accumulating  evidence,  we  mip-ht 
now  come  to  a  positive  decision  in  regard  to  the  question.  The 
most  prevalent  belief  had  been  that  trees  would  not  grow  on 
these  prairies, — and  we  have  had  theories  relating  to  soil  or 
climate,  to  show  why  they  could  not  grow.  Then  there  were 
others  who  believed  that  trees  did  grow  there  in  ancient  times, 
but  had  been  burnt  off,  and  kept  burnt  off  by  annual  fires. 

Mr.  Meehan  considered  in  detail,  the  authors  who  had  pro- 
pounded various  theories,  and  the  distinguished  men  who  had  ad- 
vocated them,  and  said  that  it  was  evident  climate  could  have 
nothing  to  do  with  the  question,  because  in  these  prairie  regions 
there  were  often  large  belts  of  timber  lands,  projected  like  huge 
arms  into  the  grassy  regions,  with  precisely  the  same  climatal 
conditions  over  both.  That  the  soil  was  not  unfavorable,  was 
proved  now  by  the  artificial  plantations  everywhere  successful 
and  that  the  soil  was  unfavorable  to  the  germination  of  tree  seed 
as  suggested  by  Prof.  Whitney,  was  on  the  face  of  it  untenable 


12  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

from  the  foct  that  it  required  but  the  same  conditions  for  the 
seeds  of  trees  as  for  those  of  lierbaceous  plants,  the  number  of 
species  of  which  on  the  prairies  was  well  known  to  be  very  large. 
Another  great  gain  to  our  present  knowledge,  was  that  since  the 
annual  firing  of  the  grass}^  prairies  had  been  discontinued  by  the 
advance  of  civilization,  the  timber  was  everywhere  encroaching 
on  them.  Among  the  facts  which  he  otfered  in  proof  of  this,  was 
a  reference  to  p.  505  of  the  Yth  Report  of  the  Geological  Survey  of 
Indiana,  where  Dr.  Schneck  shows  how  land  which  was  once  grassy 
prairie,  is  now  covered  with  a  luxuriant  growth  of  forest  trees ;  to 
the  evidence  of  Major  Hotchkiss,  Geologist  of  Staunton,  Vir- 
ginia, that  the  Shenandoah  Vallej',  now  heavily  timbered,  was 
clear  of  trees  in  the  early  history  of  Virginia ;  to  the  discovery 
of  buffalo  bones,  in  caves  near  Stroudsburg,  Pa.,  by  Dr.  Joseph 
Leidy, — now  a  timbered  region,  the  buffalo  only  existing  in  open, 
grassy  countries ;  ^  and  to  various  traditions  of  settlers  in  some 
valleys  now  timbered,  that  the  land  was  originally  clear  of  trees. 
He  pointed  out  that  in  all  known  parts  of  the  United  States  at 
the  present  time,  except  the  arid  regions,  where  only  drought- 
loving  plants  could  exist,  the  natural  result  of  freedom  was  the 
succession  of  forest  growth.  Seeds  were  scattered  by  winds  or 
animals  over  acres  of  cleared  land  ;  if  such  land  became  neglected, 
these,  again  seeding  in  time,  extended  the  forest  area  continu- 
ally'. The  tallest  growing  vegetation,  lilic  trees,  crowded  out  the 
weaker,  and  the  forest  naturally  crowded  out  the  lower  growing 
and  weaker  herbaceous  plants.  He  illustrated  this  by  reference 
to  the  neglected  cotton-fields  of  the  Southern  States. 

From  all  this,  the  speaker  said  that  it  was  evident  that  there 
was  nothing  in  Nature  either  now  or  in  the  past,  to  prevent  the 
gradual  encroachment  of  the  forest  over  the  grassy  plains,  till  long 
before  the  white  man  came  here,  the  whole  would  have  been  com- 
pletely covered  by  arborescent  growth.  Were  there  any  artificial 
causes  equal  to  the  exclusion  of  trees,  and  j^et  permitting  an  her- 
baceous growth  ?  If  we  were  to  sow  a  piece  of  land  in  the 
autumn  with  some  tree  seed  and  some  seeds  of  annuals,  the  latter 
would  be  up,  flower,  mature  and  scatter  their  seed  to  the  ground 
before  the  next  autumn,  and  many  of  these  seeds  would  be  washed 
into  the  earth,  or  drawn  into  the  eai'th  by  insects  or  small  animals. 
But  tree  seed  would  make  young  trees,  which  would  not  again 
produce  seed  for  ten  or  more  years.  If  now,  at  the  end  of  this 
first  season,  a  fire  swept  over  the  tract,  the  seeds  of  the  annuals 
which  had  found  a  slight  earthy  protection,  would  come  up 
again  the  next  summer,  again  seeding  and  extending  the  area. 
The  trees  would  be  burned  down,  and  though  perhaps  many  would 
sprout,  successive  bui-nings  would  keep  them  confined  to  one 
place.     In  short,  under  annual  burnings,  herbaceous  plants  could 

>  Since  the  reading  of  the  paper,  it  has  been  brought  to  the  attention  of 
the  author,  that  the  bones  may  have  belonged  to  the  Wood  Buffalo. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  13 

still  increase  their  area  annually,  but  trees  could  never  get  far 
beyond  the  line  they  had  reached  when  the  annual  fire  first  com- 
menced. There  could  be  no  doubt  that  an  annual  burning  in  a 
tract  destitute  of  forest  growth,  would  certainly  prevent  the 
spread  of  timber,  or  of  any  plant  that  required  more  than  a  year  to 
mature  seed  from  the  time  of  sowing.  Now,  if  we  look  at  the 
actual  facts,  we  find  that  the  Indians  did  annually  fire  the  prairies. 

Father  Hennepin,  the  earliest  writer  on  Indian  habits,  noted 
that  it  was  the  practice  in  his  time.  There  is  little  doubt  but  this 
practice  of  annual  burning  has  been  one  extending  long  into  the 
past.  What  object  had  they  in  these  annual  burnings  ?  They 
must  have  known  that  the  buflTalo  and  other  animals  on  which 
they  were  largely  dependent  for  a  living,  throve  only  on  huge 
grassy  plains,  and  that  it  was  to  their  interest  to  preserve  these 
plains  by  every  means  in  their  power.  Low  as  their  power  of 
reasoning  may  be,  they  could  not  but  have  perceived  that  while 
grassy  herbage  throve  in  spite  of  fires,  perhaps  improved  under 
the  fiery  ordeal,  trees  could  not  follow  on  burned  laud.  What 
could  be  more  natural  than  that  they  would  burn  the  prairies  with 
the  object  of  retaining  food  for  their  wild  animals  ?  If  we  have  no 
difficulty  in  reaching  a  positive  conclusion  so  far,  we  may  now 
take  a  glance  at  the  early  geological  times.  Mr.  Meehan  then  re- 
ferred to  the  researches  of  Worthen,  Whittlesley  and  others  in 
Ohio,  Illinois  and  other  prairie  regions.  On  the  retreat  of  the 
great  glacier,  the  higher  lands  and  drift  formation  were  probably 
high  and  dry  long  before  the  immense  lakes  formed  from  the 
melting  and  turbid  waters  ceased  to  be. 

It  was  tolerably  well  understood  that  many  species  of  trees 
and  other  plants  which  required  a  temperate  atmosphere,  retreated 
southward!}^  with  the  advance  of  the  glacier,  and  advanced  to 
higher  latitudes  on  the  glacier's  retreat.  Thus  these  higher  ridges 
would  become  timbered  long  before  the  lower  lands  became  dry. 
Evidence  accumulates  that  man  existed  on  this  continent,  in  the 
far  west,  not  long  after  the  glacier  retreated,  though  '"not  long," 
in  a  geological  sense,  may  mean  many  hundreds  of  years.  The 
lakes  of  glacial  water  would  gradually  become  shallower  from 
the  deposit  of  the  highly  comminuted  material  brought  down 
from  higher  land,  from  the  wearing  away  of  rocky  breastwoi'ks  as 
in  South  Pass,  Illinois,  as  well  as  from  the  openings  which  would 
continually  occur  from  nature's  ever  varying  plan  of  streams 
under  ground.  In  all  events,  the  drying  of  these  lakes  would  be 
from  their  outward  edges  first.  Aquatics  would  give  way  to 
marsh  grasses,  and  these  to  vegetation  such  as  we  now  find  gener- 
ally spread  over  the  prairie  region.  If  now  we  can  conceive 
of  human  beings  such  as  we  know  the  Indian  races  to  be,  al- 
ready in  more  southern  latttudes — having  learned  the  fact  that 
firing  would  keep  down  trees  and  aid  in  the  preservation  of  the 
chase — following  the  retreat  of  the  glacier  to  the  higher  lands,  and 
still  as  they  advanced  northwardly,  firing  the  plains  up  to  the 


14  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE   ACADEMY   'OP  [1881. 

water's  edge,  it  would  certainly  account  for  tlie  absence  of  ar- 
boreal vegetation  from  these  immense  lacustrine  lands  from  the 
ver}-  beginning  of  their  formation.  Of  course  with  this  view  we 
should  have  to  look  for  some  evidences  of  man's  existence,  both  on 
the  lands  which  were  once  under  water,  as  well  as  those  which  were 
timber  lands  at  his  first  appearance  there.  He  did  not  know  how 
many  such  evidences  have  been  or  ma}^  be  found.  Man's  traces  in 
the  past  are  at  best  but  rare,  and  they  would  naturally  be  much 
more  scarce  in  the  lacustrine  regions  than  in  lands  dry  at  the 
same  epoch.  At  any  rate,  this  part  of  his  remarks  he  said,  must 
be  taken  as  mere  speculation ;  but,  as  we  could  see  on  the  basis  of 
sound  scientific  investigation  why  there  could  be  no  trees  on 
these  grassy  prairies  within  the  range  of  indubitable  history,  it 
was  a  fair  inference  that  some  such  cause  had  continued  from  the 
beginning;  namely,  that  annual  fires  had  ever  been  the  reason  why 
arborescent  vegetation  had  never  had  an  existence  there. 

The  resignation  of  Mr.  Edw.  S.  Whelen,  as  a  member  of  the 
Council  and  Finance  Committee,  was  read  and  accepted. 


February  15. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Nineteen  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  The  Honey  Ants  of  the  Garden  of  the  Gods," 
by  Rev.  Henry  C.  McCook,  D.  D.,  was  presented  for  publication. 


February  22. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Thirty-six  persons  present. 

The  death  of  Harry  C.  Hart,  M.  D.,  a  member,  was  announced. 

Mr.  Isaac  C.  Martindale  was  elected  a  member  of  the  Finance 
Committee,  to  fill  a  vacancy  caused  by  the  resignation  of  Mr. 
Edw.  S.  Whelen. 

Mr.  Charles  P.  Perot  was  elected  a  member  of  the  Council  for 
the  unexpired  term  of  Mr.  Whelen. 

Robert  P.  Field  was  elected  a  member. 

John  Brazier,  of  Sydne}^,  N.  S.  W. ;  Rafael  Arango,  of  Habana, 
and  Chas.  Mohr,  of  Mobile,  Ala.,  were  elected  correspondents. 

The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed : — 


1881.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


15 


DESCKIPTIONS  OF  NEW  SPECIES  OF  TERRESTRIAL  MOLLUSCA  OF  CUBA. 

BY   RAFAEL    ARANGO. 
Choanopoma  acervatnm  Arango. 

Testa  obtecte-umbilicata,  ovato-oblonga,  plerumque  decollata, 
tenuis,  plicis  transversis  irregulariter  et  costulis  spiralibus  dis- 
tantibus  undulatiin  et  acervatiminterruptis  lamellata, 
albida,  anfractus  6  (superstites  3^-4)  convexi,  lente 
acrescentes  ad  suturam  canaliculatam  (ob  plicarum 
extremitatem)  denticulati,  ultimus  aufractui  coutigui 
callo  adnatus  ;  apertura  eircularis,  peritrema  dupli- 
catum,  interniim  rectum,  externum  patens,  concentrice  striatum 
et  ob  costulas  spirales  testae  undulatum,  ad  anfractum  contiguum 
Galium  tbrmans,  turn  umbilicum  lamina  lata  fornicata  tegens. 
Long.  8^-9^ ;  diam.  4^5  mill. 

Differt  ab  Choan.  Tryoni  Arango  primo  visu  costulis  spiralibus, 
ab  sordido  imprimis  plicis  testas  undulata  interrupta. 

Habitat. — Las  Lagunitas  prope  Pinar  del  Rio  partis  occidentalis 
in  plantatione  dicta  "  Yega  de  D.  Manuel  de  Jesus  Hernandez." 
Cylindrella  paradoza  Arango. 

Testa  sine  umbilico,  fusiformi-turrita,  solidula,  albida,  costis 
subrectis  confertis  munita,  Integra,  apice  obtusiuscula, 
anfractus  12-13  convexi,  penultimus  longitudinaliter  in 
medio  canaliculatus,  ejusdem  pars  superior  reliquis  an- 
fractibus  igualis  quoad  sculpturam,  inferior  angustior, 
reducta,  costulis  magis  aproximatis,  dein  dilatata  et 
umbilicum  tegens.  Apertura  piriformis,  obliqua,  superne 
angustior  ob  carinam  salientem  partis  superioris  anfrac- 
tus. Peritrema  continuum,  undique  ffiqualiter  expansum.  Col- 
umna  interna  simplex.     Long.  12^  ;  diam.  2^  mill. 

Habitat. — Guane  in  loco  "  Puerta  de  la  Muralla  "  dicto. 

Cylindrella  incerta  Arango. 

Testa  quoad  sculpturam  et  columnam  internam 
simillima  Cylindrellse  cserulans  Poey,  sed  forma  ven- 
troso-cylindracea  et  anfr.  superst.  8  (in  testa  Integra 
14). 

Long.  18    ;  diam.  4^,  testa  Integra. 

Long.  14i  ;  diam.  4^,  testa  fracta. 

Habitat. — Guane  in  loco  "  Puerta  de  la  Muralla  " 
dicto 


16  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

Ctenopoma  nodiferum  Arango  n.  sp. 

Testa  clauso-perforata,  cylinclraceo-turrita,  decollata,  tenuis, 
plicis  aequaliter  distantibus  et  liris  debilibus  decussata,  cineracenti- 
albida,  anfr.  3^-4  superstites  convexi,  lente  accrescentes,  ad 
suturam  canaliculatam  subdenticulati ;  ultimus  subdisjunctis  pone 
aperturam  callo  lato  cum  penultimo  anfractu  junctus  ;  apertura 
verticalis,  obliqua,  ovalis ;  peritrema  duplicatum,  internum  rectum, 
externum  subaequaliter  patens,  sed  superne  dilatatum,  anfractum 
contiguum  attingens  et  umbilicum  claudens.  Operculum  typicum 
generis.     Long,  testse  truncatae  8  ;  diam.  3  ;  apert.  2  mill. 

Simile  Ctenopomati  nodulato ;  sed  differt  testa  plicis  aequaliter 
distantibus  (nee  acervatim  approximatis  et  liras  decussata). 

Habitat. — Sub  lapidibus  circa  oppitum  Santo  Gristo  de  la  Salud 
prope  Bejucal. 

Ctenopoma  Wrightianam  Gundl.  n.  sp. 

Testa  subperforata,  cylindraceo-turrita,  decollata,  costis  sequali- 
ter  distantibus  obtusis  et  liris  subtilissimis  decussata,  cineracenti- 
albida,  anfr.  de  superstites,  convexi,  lente  accrescentes,  ad  suturam 
canaliculatam  denticulati ;  ultimus  subdisjunctus  pone  aperturam 
callo  lato  cum  penultimo  anfractu  junctus ;  apertura  verticalis, 
oblique  ovali-rotundato  ;  peritrema  duplicatum  internum  rectum, 
externum  subaequaliter  patens,  sed  superne  non  dilatatum  itaque 
anfractum  penultimum  non  attingens.  Operculum  typicum  generis. 
Long,  testae  truncatte  11 ;  diam.  5  ;  apert.  2^  mill. 

Proximum  Ctenopomati  ruguloso  sed  distinctum  costis  testse 
obtusis  (nee  acutis)  et  liris  decussata. 

Habitat. — Sub  lapidibus  loci  Punta  de  la  Jaula  dicti  in  Proviucia 
Pinar  del  Rio,  partis  occidentalis. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  IT 

THE    HONEY    ANTS    OF    THE    GARDEN    OF    THE    GODS. 

By  Rev.  Henry  C.  McCook,  D.  D. 

I. — Geographical    Distribution, 

The  peculiarity  in  the  Honey  Ants  (Myrmecocystus  melliger) 
which  has  attracted  the  especial  attention  of  naturalists  is  that 
one  of  the  castes  or  worker  forms  has  the  abdomen  distended  to  the 
size  and  form  of  a  currant  or  small  grape,  and  entirely  filled  with 
grape-sugar  or  "  honey." 

Yery  little  of  their  habits  has  heretofore  been  known,  and  onl^^ 
the  forms  of  the  hone3-bearer  and  worker-major.  In  order,  if 
possible,  to  remove  this  reproach  from  Entomology,  I  started  in 
the  early  part  of  July,  A,  D.  18T9,  for  New  Mexico,  as  the  honey- 
ants  have  been  found  in  the  neighborliood  of  Santa  Fe,  and  even 
as  far  north  as  Abiquiu,  on  the  Big  Chama  River.^ 

During  a  brief  visit  at  the  cottage  of  Gen.  Charles  Adams, ^  of 
Manitou,  Colorado,  which  is  located  in  the  mouth  of  the  Garden 
of  the  gods,  in  the  course  of  some  observations  made  upon  the 
ants  of  the  vicinit}'^,  a  nest  was  discovered  whose  external  archi- 
tecture was  new  to  me.  The  sentinels  were  called  out  hy  the 
application  of  a  straw,  and  their  general  appearance  raised  the 
suspicion  that  they  might  be  Honey  Ants,  which,  as  I  had  never 
seen  specimens,  were  known  to  me  only  b}^  description.  The  nest 
was  opened,  and  the  delightful  fact  revealed  that  the  objects  of 
my  search  were  before  me.  I  thereupon  made  an  exploration  of 
the  vicinity,  and  found  that  the  nests  were  present  in  sufficient 
numbers  for  purposes  of  study ;  whereupon  I  abandoned  m}'  New 
Mexico  outfit,  encamped  in  the  Garden  of  the  gods,  and  began 
the  observations  of  which  the  following  paper  is  the  record. 

Up  to  the  time  of  my  discovery,  it  had  not  been  known  that 
the  Honey  Ants  were  distributed  as  far  north  as  Colorado.  I 
found  no  formicaries  at  any  other  point  in  the  State,  although  the 
opportunity  to  search  for  them  was  limited.    There  is  little  doubt, 

^  At  the  latter  point  Prof.  Edward  D.  Cope  informed  me  that  he  had 
seen  them.     Dr.  Loew  and  ^Ir.  Krummeck  saw  them  near  Santa  Fe. 

^  Gen.  Adams  has  recently  been  widely  known  by  his  intrepid  venture 
among  the  hostile  White  River  Ute  Indians,  and  rescue  of  their  unhappy 
prisoners,  Mrs.  Meeker  and  others,  at  the  risk  of  his  own  life.  As  a  recog- 
nition of  this  service  he  has  been  appointed  Minister  Plenipotentiary  for 
the  United  States  to  the  Republic  of  Bolivia, 


2  Matamoras,  Mex., 

50     "        Lano-stroth 


18  PROCEEDINGS  OP  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881' 

however,  that  they  ma}^  be  found  in  favorable  locations  in  the 
entire  soutliern  portion  of  the  state,  and  perhaps  also  north  of  the 
latitude  of  Pike's  Peak.^  Mexico,  New  Mexico  and  southern 
Colorado,  may  certainly  be  designated  as  the  natural  habitat  of 
the  Honey  Ants.  It  is  probable,  however,  that  they  may  be  found 
throughout  the  entire  south-western  portions  of  North  America, 
especiall^^  the  uplands.  They  will  doubtless  be  found  west  of  the 
Rockj'  Mountains,  as  I  have  recently  found  one  female  of  this 
species  among  a  collection  of  Hymenoptera  sent  to  Mr.  Cresson 
from  southern  California. 

The  following  facts  can  be  presented  concerning  the  vertical 
distribution : — 

LiOOAi/iTY.  Elevation.  Observer. 

City  of  Mexico,     .     .     .     T482  feet,      Llave. 

Brownsville,  U.  S.,)  *     ' 

Santa  Fe, 7047  "  Loew,  Kummeck. 

Abiquiu,       5930  "  Cope. 

Garden  of  the  gods,  .     .  6181  "  McCook. 

It  will  thus  be  seen  that  the  points  at  which  these  insects  have 
heretofore  been  found,  lie  for  the  most  part  upon  uplands,  ranging 
from  6000  to  7500  feet  in  height  above  sea  level.  Mr.  Langstroth's 
find  is  recorded  as  "in  the  vicinity  of  Matamoras."^  If  this 
means  the  near  vicinity,  the  fact  prevents  the  generalization  which 
one  might  otherwise  have  been  tempted  to  form,  limiting  the  ants 
to  the  upland,  for  Matamoras  has  but  a  slight  elevation. 

II. — Nest  Sites  and  Exterior  Architecture. 

The  Honey  Ants  are  domiciled  in  large  numbers  throughout 
the  section  of  country  known  as  the  Garden  of  the  gods. 

The  conformation  of  the  surface  here  appears  to  be  an  im- 
portant element  in  determining  the  habitat  of  the  insects,  and 
deserves  a  brief  notice.     The  Garden  of  the  gods  embraces   a 

1  The  matter  of  their  distribution  is  a  point  to  which  the  attention  of 
entomologists  and  other  naturalists  is  called,  and  any  information  bearing 
thereupon  will  be  of  value. 

^  I  could  not  lay  hands  upon  the  elevations  of  Matamoras,  which  cannot 
vary  much  from  that  of  Brownsville,  Texas,  on  the  opposite  side  of  the 
river. 

3  "Proceed.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,"  vol.  vi,  1852,  p.  71. 


1881.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHTLADELPHTA. 


19 


space  of  about  two  miles  in  length  by  one  in  -width,  the  surface  of 
which  is  broken  into  ridges  crossing  each  other  at  various  angles, 
and  crowned  or  bordered  at  the  top  by  the  red  sandstone  and 
conglomerate  rocks,  whose  peculiar  shapes  and  likenesses  to 
heathen  deities  have  probablj-  suggested  the  name  given  to  this 
bit  of  landscape.  A  rude  idea  of  the  topography  may  be  had  by 
drawing  a  horse-shoe,  the  toe  toward  the  north  ;  within  the  mouth 
of  this  let  a  second  horse-shoe  be  described,  occupying  about  one- 
half  the  space  in  width  and  one-third  in  length.    Unite  the  toes  of 


•HV"/'/ 


:'i:h^r^i>^ 


^'^^v-        fff.-'w^^**' 


Fis.  1.— Sketch-map  of  the  Garden  of  the  gods. 

the  two  shoes  by  a  zig-zag  line,  and  draw  lines  east  and  west,  on 
either  side  from  the  interior  figure.  The  western  line  of  the  out- 
side shoe  will  represent  the  Manitou  ridge,  which  starts  at  the 
base  of  Pike's  Peak.  The  eastern  line  will  indicate  the  cretaceous 
wall  of  the  table-land  known  as  the  Mesa,  and  the  two  walls  of 
the  Red  Canyon.  The  inner  shoe  has  for  its  western  line  the  Von 
Hagen  ridge,  for  its  eastern  the  Adams  ridge  ;  the  east  and  west 
lines  will  represent  the  general  course  of  the-  ridges  which  drop 
down  from  these  two,  from  the  broken  central  ridge,  Prospect 
ridge,  represented  hy  the  zig-zag  line,  and  from  the  eastern  face 
of  Manitou  ridge.  These  ridges  are  composed  of  red  sandstone, 
which  crops  out  freely,  forming  vast  ledges  and  cliffs.  The  top 
soil,  where  the  rock  is  not  exposed,  is  a  heavy  gravel,  upon  which 
grow  tufts  of  gramma  grass,  straggling  bunches  of  grease  wood, 


20  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

Spanish  bayonet,  low  cedars  and  pine,  and  in  the  little  vales  or 
nooks  wild  sunflowers,  wild  roses,  and  numerous  small  thickets 
and  clusters  ol' a  scrub  oak  (Quercus  undulata).  These  localities 
are  indicated  diagramatically  in  the  sketch-map  at  Fig.  1. 

All  along  the  tops  of  these  ridges,  and  on  the  eastern  and 
south-eastern  slopes,  the  nests  of  the  Honey  Ants  arc  located 
(PL  I,  fig.  2  ^).  About  ninety  per  cent,  of  those  found  were  on 
the  tops  of  the  ridges,  and  every  one  on  or  near  the  summit  or 
central  line  of  the  top.  The  choosing  of  such  a  site  may,  there- 
fore, be  inferred  to  be  a  fixed  habit  of  the  ant. 

The  advantage  of  this  location  is  apparent,  at  least  in  the 
points  of  dryness  and  warmth.  I  made  several  observations  of 
the  effects  of  the  heavy  July  and  August  rain  storms  upon  the 
exterior  architecture,  which  is  a  low,  gravel-covered  moundlet, 
penetrated  at  the  centre  by  a  tubular  gallery  or  gate  three-fourths 
of  an  inch  in  diameter  (PI.  II,  figs,  3,  4).  The  large  gravel-covered 
mounds  of  the  Occidental  Ant  {Pogonomyrmex  occidentalism  Cres- 
son),  numbers  of  which  were  built  in  the  vallej^  of  the  Boiling 
Fountain  Creek,  and  in  the  nooks  between  the  ridges,  were  more 
or  less  damaged  by  the  wash  of  the  water.  Some  were  seriously 
injured,  one  wholly  swept  away.  The  only  damage  wrought  upon 
the  Honey  Ant  nests  was  a  little  beating  down  of  the  pellets  of 
gravel  within  the  gate.  There  was  no  injury  from  the  wash  of  the 
water,  and  apparently  no  likelihood  of  any  beyond  that  which  the 
momentum  of  the  rain-drops  could  inflict  as  they  dashed  upon  the 
nest  and  within  the  gate.  Throughout  one  storm,  during  the 
entii'c  progress  of  which  a  nest  was  watched,  several  ants  were 
stationed  like  sentinels  within  the  gate  around  the  upper  margin 
(PI.  Y,  fig.  25).  They  were  evidently  on  the  look  out  for  any 
damages  to  their  home.  The  disarrangement  of  a  few  pellets 
moved  two  of  these  sentinels  to  bring  up  bits  of  gravel  and 
attempt  repairs.  But  there  was  little  occasion  for  this,  although 
the  force  of  the  rain  was  great  enough  to  cause  a  good  deal  of 
discomfort  to  the  observer.  In  half  an  hour  the  rain  ceased,  the 
sun  came  out  over  Pike's  Peak,  and  a  rainbow  girdled  the  Mesa. 
One  worker-major  crawled  upon  the  crest  of  the  nest,  stretched 
herself,  reared  her  head  as  though  to  snuff  the  fresh  air,  then 

1  This  is  a  sketch  of  my  camp,  from  the  point  at  which  the  Adams  and 
Von  Hagen  ridges  meet.  One  of  the  ant-nests  is  seen  in  the  foreground  ; 
others  are  indicated  by  the  white  circles  on  the  crests  of  the  ridges. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  21 

hurried  down  the  gravel  side  and  started  at  a  swinging  pace  along 
the  trail  to  a  neighboring  oak  copse.  An  hour  afterward  she  had 
not  returned,  and  not  another  ant  had  left  the  ne^t.  Several, 
howcA^er,  came  out,  hut  apparently  were  disturbed  by  a  gale  which 
followed  the  rain,  and  returned. 

On  another  occasion,  the  slight  disarrangement  of  the  nest 
made  bj'^  the  rain  was  repaired  immediately  after  the  storm.  It 
amounted  to  a  closing  up  of  the  greater  part  of  the  entrance  by 
some  of  the  displaced  gravel-stones  along  the  crater. 

The  exterior  architecture  has  been  referred  to  as  a  small 
mouudlet  of  gravel.^  The  largest  seen  was  one  on  one  of  the 
ridges  quite  within  the  Garden ;  it  measured  arouhd  the  base 
thirty-two  inches,  in  height  three  and  one-half  inches,  length  of 
northern  slope  four  and  one-half  inches  (PI.  II,  fig.  3).  The 
average  dimension  of  the  nests  is  something  less  than  this.  The 
base  diameter  varies  from  ten  to  three  and  one-third  inches, 
the  greatest  number  of  nests  measuring  six  and  seven  inches.^ 
The  ordinar}-  height  is  from  two  to  three  inches.  The  shape  of 
the  nests  is  a  truncated  cone.  The  section  across  the  top  is  about 
two  inches  in  diameter.  In  the  centre  is  a  tubular  opening  or 
gate,  fiom  three-fourths  to  seven-eighths  inch  in  diameter .^ 

III — Position  or  Honey-Bearers  in  the  JsTest. 

Leaving  the  details  of  the  architecture  to  a  later  period,  that  habit 
which  attaches  the  greatest  interest  to  this  insect,  viz. ,  the  storing  of 
honey,  may  be  considered.  The  first  nest  that  was  opened,  and 
called  the  "  Bessie  "  nest,^  for  convenience  of  notation,  is  on  the 
terminal  slope  of  Adams'  ridge,  looking  due  south,  and  quite  near 
to  the  valley  of  the  creek  Fontaine  qui  Bouille.     The  gravel  had 

^  Dr.  Oscar  Loew,  "American  Naturalist,"  1874,  says  of  Melligera  col- 
lected near  Santa  Fe,  that  "they  make  no  hills,  like  other  ants."  "A 
structure  like  a  crater  indicates  where  they  live  underground."  Every 
formicary  seen  by  me  had  a  decided  elevation. 

^  I  succeeded  in  bringing  one  of  these  mounds  home  nearly  entire,  having 
fixed  the  gravel  contents  by  liquid  cement. 

*  Dr.  Loew  says  of  the  nests  near  Santa  Fe,  that  the  openings  were  the 
size  of  a  quill.  It  seems  strange  that  such  a  difference  should  exist  within 
localities  so  near  each  other. 

*  A  little  girl,  Bessie  Root,  a  guest  in  Gen.  Adams'  cottage,  whom  I  had 
enlisted  in  the  search  for  ant-hills,  first  reported  to  me  the  nest  in  which  I 
found  the  ^lelligers. 


22  PEOOEEDINGS   OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

not  been  penetrated  to  a  depth  oi  more  than  six  inches  before 
a  honoj^-chamber  was  uncovered,  and  the  presence  of  the  honey- 
bearers  indicated  that  a  home  of  the  true  Hone}'  Ant  had  been 
found  (PL  III,  fig.  5).  Within  a  dome-roofed  vault,  about  three 
inches  in  width  and  three-quarters  to  one  inch  in  height,  hung  the 
hone^^-bearers,  clinging  by  their  feet  to  the  roof.  Their  yellow 
bodies  stretched  along  the  ceiling,  but  the  rotund  abdomens  hung 
down,  almost  perfect  globules  of  transpalrent  tissue,  through  which 
the  amber-colored  honey  showed.  They  looked  like  a  cluster  of 
small  Delaware  grapes  or  large  currants.  Most  of  the  abdomens 
were  quite  round,  but  they  were  in  various  stages  of  fullness. 
Upon  some  the  external  membrane  of  the  abdomen  was  gathered 
in  folds.  A  few  of  the  abdomens,  and  especially  those  but  little 
distended,  were  of  a  white  instead  of  amber  color. 

I  have  observed  that  the  honey-bearers  in  my  artificial  nests 
show  the  honey,  which  has  been  gathered  from  white  sugar,  quite 
white  and  translucent.  It  is  probable  that  the  color  becomes 
amber,  and  even  a  wine  color,  with  age.  When  the  abdomen  is 
full  it  fairly  shines,  reflecting  the  light  that  falls  upon  it  from  the 
lamp.  With  most  of  the  honey-bearers  the  abdomens  hang 
downward  without  touching  the  ceiling,  except  at  the  rotundity 
near  the  base,  and  often  not  even  at  that  point.  With  some, 
however,  the  whole  lower  part  of  the  abdomen  rests  against  the 
roof  (PI.  IV,  fig.  13).  This  appears  to  depend  chiefly  upon  the 
contour  of  the  perch,  and  not  upon  the  relative  degree  of  comfort 
to  the  ant  in  the  two  positions. 

The  roof  of  the  honey-chamber  is  different  in  structure  from  the 
floor,  the  latter  being  comparatively  smooth,  while  the  former  is 
rough,  being  the  natural  granulated  surface  left  after  the  picking 
away  of  the  sandy  soil.  This  character,  of  course,  enables  the 
honey-bearer  to  cling  more  easily  and  securely  to  her  perch.  This 
position  is  not  held  by  the  mandibles  clasping  the  rugose  dome 
with  their  sharp  teeth,  but  almost  exclusively^  by  the  feet,  whose 
claws,  hairs  and  pulvuli  all  doubtless  contribute  to  the  effect. 

Judging  from  observations  upon  artificial  nests  and  from  the 
utter  unwieldiness  and  helplessness  of  the  fully  charged  bearers, 
they  are  not  much  disposed  to  change  their  roost  after  once  taking 
it,  at  least  after  they  have  reached  a  considerable  degree  of 
rotundity.  But  the  statements  generally  made  by  writers,  that 
they  are  wholly  unable  to  move,  and  never  change  position,  are 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  23 

inferences  without  the  facts.  They  are  not  unable  to  move,  and 
in  point  of  fact  do  occasionally  move  their  positions.  Those 
-whose  abdomens  are  but  half  or  even  two-thirds  the  full  globose, 
I  have  frequently  seen  coming  out  of  their  chambers,  ascending 
the  galleries  and  moving  freely  about  the  surface.  Those  with 
full  globes  can  move  about  with  no  little  agility  when  placed  upon 
a  table,  or  when  exposed  in  their  nests  to  some  unusual  danger  or 
alarm.  In  the  nests  they  slide  along  from  point  to  point,  moving 
their  feet  sidewise,  and  so  make  changes  of  position. 

Fallen  Honey-bearers  Helpless. — If  once  they  loosen  their 
hold,  however,  and  fall  to  the  floor,  they  seem  ordinarily  helpless  to 
recover.  Numbers  of  my  full  honey-bearers  dropping  from  various 
causes,  or  shaken  down  by  thoughtless  visitors,  laid  upon  the 
floor  helpless,  resting  upon  the  rotund  abdomen,  bodies  up, 
antennae  and  feet  in  motion,  and  seeming  exceedingly  uncomfort- 
able. Those  who  so  fell  as  to  have  some  object  upon  which  to 
lay  their  feet,  as  a  clod  or  the  surface  of  the  jar,  fared  better.  In 
very  favorable  positions  a  few  recovered  their  roost.  But  as  a 
rule  they  were  helpless,  remained  stationary,  and  so  passed  their 
lives,  which  were  evidently  shortened  by  their  position,  although 
some  of  them  lived  thus  several  months  (see  PI.  YI,  fig.  32). 

lY. — Source  of  Honey-Supply. 

The  rotunds  do  not  elaborate  the  honey,  as  has  frequently  been 
asserted.  I  was  not  for  a  moment  misled  by  this  fancy,  being 
satisfied  that,  in  the  nature  of  things  they  were  sedentary,  and  that 
their  immense  abdomens  were  charged  by  regurgitation  from 
the  workers  who  were  the  honey  gatherers.  But  whence  do  they 
obtain  their  supplies  ? 

Not  from  Aphides,  at  this  season  of  the  year  at  least.  I 
searched  every  bush  and  shrub  in  the  vicinity,  including  large 
numbers  of  wild  rose  bushes,  but  failed  to  find  any  of  these  familiar 
and  useful  Emmet  "  herds."  Certainly,  at  least,  the  honey  ants 
were  not  there  drawing  supplies  from  them.  It  was  not  possible 
to  trace  the  ants  to  these  or  other  sources  of  food  supply  during 
the  day,  for  I  found  very  soon  that  they  were  nocturnal  insects. 
Their  nests  were  as  silent,  and  to  all  appearance  empty,  as  an 
abandoned  habitation,  during  the  daytime.  I  accordingly  stationed 
myself  beside  a  nest  to  await  the  nightfall.  This  nest  was  located 
upon  the  summit  of  a  ridge  which  from  a  peculiar  formation  of  a 


24  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OE*  [1881. 

rock  upon  it  I  named  Eagle-head  ridge,  and  the  nest  Eagle-head 
nest.  At  T.30  P.  M.,  the  sun  was  set,  and  darkness  had  begun  to 
gather.  A  few  ants  appeared  within  the  gate.  They  advanced 
to  the  top,  followed  by  others  ;  they  puslied  out  upon  the  gravelled 
sides  of  the  mound,  over  which  a  goodly  swarm  of  yellow  insects 
was  soon  gathered.  There  were  no  rotunds  or  semi-rotunds  among 
these  mustering  squadrons ;  all  were  workers,  with  normal  abdo- 
mens. 

Presently  an  ant  left  the  mound  and  started  over  the  ridge 
northward.  Another — several — a  score  followed,  until  within  a 
brief  time  a  vast  column  was  seen  trailed  along  the  ridge,  all 
moving  in  the  same  direction.  The  evening  had  now  become  so 
far  advanced  that  it  was  ditBcult  to  trace  the  column,  but  b}'^ 
stooping  down  close  to  the  earth  and  using  care  not  to  alarm  the 
ants,  I  was  able  to  do  so.  The  trail  was  somewhat  winding,  but 
on  the  whole  seemed  to  be  chosen  with  some  regard  to  avoiding 
the  inequalities  of  the  ridge.  I  was  not  impressed,  however, 
with  the  engineering  skill  of  the  insects  in  this  matter. 

At  the  distance  of  about  fifty  feet  from  the  nest,  the  column 
turned  down  the  slope  and  entered  a  copse  of  scrub  oak  ( Quercus 
undidata,  var.),  I  traced  a  number  of  ants  to  a  bush  several  feet 
within  the  thicket,  but  failed  to  unravel  the  secret  that  night. 
The  next  night  a  similar  experience  awaited  me.  After  a  long 
careful,  but  vain  search,  I  retired  to  my  tent  baffled.  The  third 
night  (July  29),  the  ants  of  Eagle  head  next  came  out  at  7.23 
P.  M.  Those  on  Toad-stone  ridge,  to  which  I  had  assigned  my 
assistant,  Johnson,  came  out  at  1.25  P.  M.,  but  did  not  begin  to 
move  until  7.44.  Johnson  followed  them,  but  failed  to  find  their 
feeding  ground.  They  moved  north  and  eastward,  as  did  those 
of  the  Eagle  head.  These  latter  began  to  move  almost  as  soon 
as  they  came  out.  Thej^  followed  the  same  trail  as  on  the  previous 
evening,  the  track  having  beem  marked  by  me.  The  movement 
was  somewhat  slower  than  before,  perhaps  because  the  trail  had 
been  washed  by  a  heavy  rain  during  the  afternoon.  There  was  no 
leader.  A  dwarf  worker  kept  in  advance  over  the  greater  part  of 
the  track,  then  a  worker  minor  took  the  head  of  the  column. 
The  two  were  separated  from  each  other,  and  the  van  of  the 
column  about  eight  to  ten  inches.  There  was,  however,  not  the 
slightest  evidence  of  any  leadership  at  any  time,  in  any  part  of 
the  moving  line,  although  I  carefully  looked  for  such. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  25 

The  ants  directed  tlieir  movements  to  the  same  tree  as  on  for- 
mer forays,  reaching  it  in  seventeen  minutes,,  at  7.40  P,  M.  They 
distributed  themselves  along  the  tree,  hunting  trunk,  branches, 
leaves.  I  could  trace  their  forms,  but  when  it  is  remembered  that 
I  was  wedged  in  among  the  thick,  low  branches  of  this  dwarf 
oak,  holding  up  a  lantern  with  one  hand,  and  using  the  other  to 
clear  space  for  it ;  that  the  necessity'  to  avoid  alarming  the  timid 
insects  compelled  me  to  retain  ver}''  inconvenient  positions  for  a 
long  time,  it  will  riot  seem  strange  that  I  could  find  nothing  satis- 
factory until  between  nine  and  ten  o'clock.  At  last,  in  course  of  the 
slow  investigations,  I  reached  the  extreme  end  of  a  branch  on 
the  south  side  of  the  tree,  and  found  a  number  of  ants  engaged 
upon  clusters  of  brownish-red  galls.  The  ants  were  moving  from 
gall  to  gall,  not  tarrying  for  any  length  of  time  upon  any.  They 
applied  their  mouth  organs  to  the  galls  frequently.  The  dimness 
of  the  light,  and  the  distance  which  I  was  compelled  to  keep,  pre- 
vented me  from  seeing  anything  more  than  this.  But  it  was  plain 
that  the}^  were  obtaining  honey  stores,  for  in  the  lantern  light  it 
could  be  seen  that  their  abdomens  were  alreadj^  much  distended 
by  the  sweets  which  they  had  lapped. 

The  branch  was  carefully  cut  off  without  disturbing  the  ants, 
taken  to  my  tent,  and  the  movements  of  the  insects  observed 
during  the  remainder  of  the  night,  the  branch  having  been  so 
placed  as  to  prevent  the  escape  of  the  ants,  who  were  3'et  easily 
under  view.  They,  however,  were  so  preoccupied  with  their 
honey  gathering,  that  they  made  little  effort  to  escape. 

Directing  attention  to  the  galls,  it  was  seen  that  some  of  them 
were  gradually  exuding  minute  globules  of  a  white  transparent 
liquid,  which  the  ants  greedily  licked.  I  tasted  the  liquor,  and 
found  that  it  was  verj'  sweet  and  pleasant.  The  object  of  the 
nocturn'al  expedition  of  the  ants,  and  the  source  of  their  hone}'- 
supply,  were  thus  revealed.  These  galls  are  of  various  sizes,  from 
that  of  a  currant  downward.  Most  of  them  were  of  a  Turk's-head 
shape,  some  flattened  spheres.  They  are  placed  in  groups  of  two 
and  more  along  the  stems  of  the  branches  ;  they  are  commonly  of 
reddish-brown  color,  marked  with  black  patches,  but  some  of  them 
are  of  a  brighter  tint,  almost  rose-color,  some  of  a  livid  yellow 
marked  with  black,  some  almost  green.  By  cutting  off  a  few  of 
the  clusters  and  removing  them  from  the  ants,  I  saw  that  the 
sugar}'  sap  issued  from  several  points  upon  the  gall,  which  in  some 


26  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

cases  became  beaded  with  six  or  more  globules,  several  times 
larger  than  a  pin-head.  By  removing  these  beads  successively,  I 
found  that  during  the  night  one  gall  gave  out  at  least  three  series. 
The  continual  flitting  of  the  ants  from  branch  to  branch  and  gall 
to  gall,  was  thus  explained :  the  successive  exudations  invited 
their  frequent  return  to  the  galls  from  which  they  had  formerly 
fed.  When  the  branch  had  first  been  brought  to  the  tent,  some 
of  the  gall-bearing  twigs  had  been  clipped  off  and  placed  within 
the  artificial  nests,  but  received  no  attention  from  the  ants.  Some 
of  the  bleeding  galls  were  now  introduced,  which  were  instantly 
covered  by  the  ants,  and  soon  cleaned  of  their  beaded  sweets. 
An  examination  of  the  first  galls  explained  the  reason  for  their 
neglect — they  were  sapless. 

Nectar-producing  Galls. — A  number  of  galls  of  various  sorts 
and  sizes,  was  collected  for  dissection.  They  were  readily  divided 
into  two  classes  (1),  the  livid  and  greenish  galls  which  were  soft 
and  entire  ;  (2)  the  darker  colored  ones  which  were  hard,  unjneld- 
ing  to  the  touch,  and  pierced  at  one  side  by  a  small,  smooth,  reg- 
ular, cylindrical  cavity.  It  soon  appeared  that  the  bleeding  of 
honey -sap  was  confined  to  the  first  class.  Upon  cutting  away  the 
soft  pulpy  fruit  (if  it  may  be  so  termed),  a  hard  whitish-green 
ovoid  cell,  not  unlike  a  cherry  seed,  was  found  at  the  centre.  It 
was  about  one-eighth  inch  in  diameter.  Lying  outside  of  and 
against  this,  in  a  little  cavity,  I  found  in  one  gall  a  minute,  living- 
grub  (PI.  Ill,  fig.  12).  The  body  was  white,  of  eleven  segments, 
the  head  tipped  with  a  brownish  hue.  The  inner  cell  when  opened, 
showed  a  spherical  cavity  in  which  was  a  very  minute  gelatinous 
pyriform  object,  which  adhered  to  the  side  of  the  cavity.  I  had 
no  microscope  with  me,  and  in  lieu  of  facts,  can  only  conjecture 
that  this  may  have  been  an  embryonic  form  of  an  insect,  which 
matures  later  in  the  season.  * 

The  hard  galls  were  next  dissected.  They  are  all  pierced  on 
one  side,  invariably  near  the  base  (figs.  10,  11),  by  a  circular  open- 
ing made  by  the  matured  gall-insect  in  its  escape.  Fig.  11  repre- 
sents one  of  these,  a  turban-shaped  gall,  magnified  about  three 
times  the  natural  size.  A  section  view  of  the  gall  (fig.  10)  shows 
that  the  exit  hole  (eh)  penetrates  the  interior  cell-ease,  which 
must  therefore  serve  as  the  cocoon  in  which  the  pupa  transforms. 
Inside  of  some  of  these  cells  I  found  traces  of  a  flossy  texture. 
The  cells  are  commonly  spherical,  but  (as  in  fig.  10)  sometimes 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  2t 

egg-shaped.  They  are  separate  from  the  rest  of  the  gall,  from 
which  they  quite  differ  in  appearance,  and  are  of  a  firmer  sub- 
stance. In  fig,  10,  the  gall  is  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch  in 
length,  of  which  the  cell  occupies  two-thirds,  that  is,  one-eighth 
of  an  inch.  The  largest  gall  observed  had  an  outside  measure- 
ment of  three-eights  inch  long  and  the  same  across  the  top.  In 
one  of  the  galls  opened,  I  found  an  imperfect  insect  (imago), 
which  is  identified  b}'  Mr.  E.  T.  Cresson  as  of  the  genus  Cynips, 
a  true  gall-fl3^  The  specimen  would  not  permit  further  identifi- 
tification. 

At  the  meeting  of  the  American  Association  for  the  Advance- 
ment of  Science,  held  in  1880,  at  Boston,  I  had  the  pleasure  of 
presenting  the  substance  of  this  paper  to  the  Entomological 
Section.  My  account  of  the  extravasation  of  the  galls,  as  above, 
caused  much  comment,  the  result  of  which  was  to  confirm  the 
accurac}'  of  the  observation  which  had  been  challenged.  Prof. 
C.  V.  Riley,  well  known  as  an  entomologist,  declared  upon  his 
own  observations,  that  many  galls  exude  saccharine  matter,  citing 
among  others,  those  of  certain  Phylloxerae  on  Hickory,  one  of 
which  he  had  named  caryae-gummosa  on  account  of  the  abundance 
and  stickiness  of  the  exudation.  Mr.  H.  F.  Bassett,  who  has  made 
extensive  and  careful  studies  of  galls,  said  that  he  had  found 
many  species  of  galls  visited  by  ants  ^ 

Specimens  of  the  oak-gall  visited  b}'  Melliger  were  sent  to  Mr. 
Riley,  concerning  which  he  sa.js  :  The  gall  is  one  that  is  found 
quite  commonly  in  the  Rocky  Mountain  region  on  Quercus  undu- 

^  American  Entomologist,  Dec,  1880.  The  following  additional  remarks 
will  be  interesting  in  this  connection  :  Mr.  E.  P.  Austin  remarked  that 
the  chemical  composition  of  sugar  and  woody  fibre  are  the  same,  and  that 
sugar  could  be  produced  by  conversion  from  woody  fibre  in  the  plant.  Dr. 
J.  Li  Le  Conte  said  that  he  understood  tannin  to  be  a  conjugation  of  gallic 
acid  and  sugar.  Mr.  B.  P.  Mann  suggested  that  some  light  might  be 
thrown  upon  this  food-supply  of  the  ants,  by  the  nature  of  much  of  the 
moisture  which  appears  occasionally  at  night  in  great  abundance  on  the 
leaves  and  other  portions  of  plants,  and  which  is  usually  mistaken  for 
dew.  This  moisture,  it  is  said,  diflers  from  dew  in  being  produced  under 
circumstances  which  would  not  account  for  the  formation  of  dew,  and  in 
containing  a  perceptible  quantity  of  sugar.  It  is  the  ordinary  watery  ex- 
cretion from  the  surface  of  the  plant,  which,  under  favorable  conditions 
of  the  atmosphere,  collects  in  beads  or  in  drops,  instead  of  evaporating  as 
rapidly  as  it  is  formed. 


28  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

lata,  as  determined  by  Dr.  Engelmann,  ■who  sent  me  the  same  gall 
in  18*74,  though  I  had  previonsl}'  collected  it  myself.  It  is,  un- 
doubtedl}-,  an  undescribed  gall,  and  a  A^ery  similar  one  occurs  on 
the  Quercus  macrocarpa  in  the  Mississippi  vallej'.  It  has  the 
ordinary  woody  texture  that  belongs  to  so  many  Cynipidous  oak- 
stem  galls,  and  the  architect  develops  in  a  paler  cell  that  occupies 
a  large  part  of  the  interior  of  the  gall.  When  fresh,  the  gall  is 
quite  bright-colored,  inclining  to  crimson  or  scarlet.  It  seldom 
attains  a  larger  size  than  an  ordinary  pea,  and  differs  from  similar 
galls  in  my  cabinet  by  having  frequently  a  rather  broad,  flattened 
crown,  though  this  character  is  b}'  no  means  constant.^ 

NocTUENAL  Habits. — It  has  already  been  said  that  the  ants 
collect  the  oak-gall  nectar  by  night.  Observations  daily  re- 
peated upon  a  number  of  nests,  determined  that  they  leave  their 
nests  for  the  oak  thickets  at  or  near  V.30  o'clock  P.  M.,  and 
between  that  hour  and  8  o'clock,  which  is  about  the  time  of  sun- 
set in  July  and  August.  PreAious  to  the  departure,  the  crater, 
gate  and  exterior  of  the  mound  become  graduall}^  covered  with 
swarms  of  insects  whose  yellow  bodies  quite  hide  the  red  gravel 
surface  of  the  nest.  The  marching  of  the  honey-gatherers  has 
already  been  described,  but  always  there  remained  a  very  numer- 
ous force  at  home,  who  were  seen  at  all  hours  of  the  night  on 
guard  within  and  around  the  gate.  (PI.  V,  fig.  25.)  The  return 
home  began  about  or  a  little  before  midnight,  and  continued  until 
between  four  and  five,  which  was  near  da^'light  at  that  season. 
One  or  two  extracts  from  my  field  notes  will  indicate  the  facts  on 
this  point.  "  11.30  P.  M.  Some  ants  returning  home ;  the  move- 
ment ver}'  slow  and  deliberate.  .  .  .  12.30.  Quite  a  number 
are  now  returning.  Some  are  also  still  going  outward.  Numbers 
of  workers  patrol  the  moimd  and  vicinity  challenging  nearl}'  all  in- 
comers, who  have  to  stand  the  test  and  give  the  required  satisfac- 
tion. What  is  the  antennal  password  ?  None  of  the  returning 
repletes  are  tolled  bj^  the  home  sentries.  .  .  .  This  morning 
at  4,10  A.  M.  the  ants  were  seen  coming  in  from  the  oak  bushes, 
most  of  them  well  laden,  but  others  not  so  full.  There  are 
evidentl}^  degrees  of  success  in  honey-gathering  among  them. 
Some  of  the  dwarfs  had  very  full  abdomens.     .     .     .     4.30  A.  M. 

^  He  suggests  for  the  gall  the  name  Cynips  quercuB-mellarm.  Am, 
Ento,  Dec.  1880. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  29 

The  ants  are  returning  in  numbers  and  rapidly  moving  from  tlie 
brush  to  the  nest.     It  is  about  da3'light." 

In  these  night  observations  the  light  of  the  lantern  seemed  to 
cause  the  ants  in  column  no  little  disturbance.  They  would  go 
toward  the  lantern  as  it  sat  on  the  ground  near  the  trail,  appear 
to  examine  it,  then  move  away.  It  really  seemed  to  confuse  their 
ideas  of  locality,  and  shake  their  confidence  as  to  the  site  of  the 
trail,  although  no  one  was  finally  thrown  off  the  track  therebj'. 
The  sentries  at  home  were  alwaj's  more  or  less  excited  by  the 
light,  and  delicate  manipulation  was  everywhere  required  in  order 
to  preserve  the  natural  conditions  and  get  the  natural  behavior. 

At  no  time  were  the  ants  seen  during  the  day  except  when  it 
rained,  and  then  onl}'  a  few  sentinels  appeared  at  the  gate.  Ordi- 
narily the  entrance,  as  far  as  the  eye  could  see,  was  entireh' 
abandoned.  It  is  doubtful  if  Melliger  can  endure  a  great  amount 
of  sunlight  and  heat.  While  excavating  a  nest,  a  number  of 
specimens  were  collected  in  a  large  empty  glass  bottle,  which  was 
set  aside  fv)r  further  use.  Not  more  than  three  minutes  afterward 
when  I  took  up  the  vessel  to  insert  more  specimens,  those  already 
collected  were  dead.  The  sun  had  killed  them.  I  was  surprised 
at  this  ((uick  fatal  issue,  and  tried  to  revive  the  insects  ;  but  no, 
they  Avere  quite  dead.  The  sun  was  of  the  usual  August  tempera- 
ture, but  the  bottle  was  large,  and  such  a  result  in  so  brief  a  time 
argues  extreme  sensitiveness  to  the  heat.  I  have  observed  that 
the  agricultural  ants^  always  avoided  the  noonda}'  heats  of  Texas, 
which  are  certainl}-  intense ;  and  indeed  all  ants  appear  to  me  to 
shun,  more  or  less,  the  midday  fervor  of  the  sun.  But  Melliger 
doubtless  is  more  susceptible  to  solar  influences  than  most  of  her 
felloAvs.  It  cannot  therefore  be  wondered  at  that  she  seeks  her 
food  under  the  shelter  of  night. 

Y.  Quality  op  the  Ant  Honey. 

A  number  of  the  honey-bearers  were  unavoidabl}'  injured  and 
their  abdomens  broken  during  the  excavations  of  the  nests,  and  I 
observed  from  these  the  qualitj'  of  the  hone3\  It  is  ver}-  pleasant, 
with  a  peculiar  aromatic  flavor,  suggestive  of  bee-hone}',  and  quite 
agreeable  to  me.  Dr.  Loew  describes  it  as  having  "  an  agreeable 
taste,  slightly  acid  in  summer  from  a  trace  of  formic  acid,  but 
perfectly  neutral  in  autumn  and  winter.''     It  contains,  according 

1  Op.  cit.,  p.  18. 


30  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

to  this  writer,  a,  little  more  water  than  the  honey  of  bees,  and  has 
therefore  somewhat  greater  limpidity. 

Fortunately,  the  com])osition  of  this  ant-honey  has  been  sub- 
jected to  a  thorough  chemical  anal^'sis  by  a  competent  authority,  Dr. 
Chas.  M.  Wetherill.^  The  experiments  were  made  at  the  request 
of  Dr.  liCid}'^,  from  specimens  of  31.  melliger-mexicanus  collected 
hy  Mr.  Langstroth  at  Matamoras,  Mexico.^  These  ants  showed 
the  variations  observed  b}^  me  in  the  distension  of  the  abdomen, 
and  the  amount  and  color  of  the  honey.  Six  of  the  average-sized 
honey-bearers  were  weighed,  and  showed  the  average  weight  of  the 
honey-bearer's  bod}^  alone  (without  honey)  to  be  0*048  grammes, 
and  the  average  of  hone}''  in  a  single  ant  0'3942  grammes.  The 
amount  of  honej"  was  therefore  8*2  times  greater  in  weight  than 
the  bod}^  without  tlie  hone3^  The  density  calculated  for  the  ants 
filled  with  honey  was  1*28,  and  for  the  bodies  alone  r05.  Dr. 
WetherilFs  calculations  expressed  in  English  Troy  weight  would 
allow  about  six  grains  for  the  weight  of  each  honey-bearer.  It 
would  thus  require  about  one  thousand  (960)  honey-bearers  to 
3'ield  one  pound  of  honey  (Troy  weight),  or  about  twelve  hundred 
(1166)  to  yield  a  market  or  avoirdupois  pound. 

The  sj'rup  extracted  from  the  ants  had  an  agreeable  sweet  taste, 
and  an  odor  like  that  of  the  syrup  of  squills.  When  set  aside  as 
removed  it  showed  no  trace  of  crystallization  to  the  naked  e^^e  or 
under  the  microscope.  Under  high  powers  fragments  of  organic 
tissue  were  seen.  When  evaporated  by  the  heat  of  steam,  it  dried 
to  a  gumni}^  mass,  which  did  not  exhibit  traces  of  crystallization 
after  standing  for  a  couple  of  weeks. 

This  mass  was  yery  hydroscopic,  becoming  quickly  soft  from 
the  absorption  of  water  from  the  atmosphere.  It  dissolved  with- 
out residue  in  ordinary  alcohol,  leaving  a  residue  in  nearly  absolute 
alcohol.  These  solutions  did  not  crystallize  when  set  aside. 
They  had  exactly  the  smell  of  perfumed  bay  rum.  After  various 
tests,  which  are  described.  Dr.  Wetherill  analyzed  by  combustion 
with  oxide  of  copper  and  chlorate  of  potassa  a  portion  of  the  gum- 
.ke  substance  which  resulted  after  the  ant-honej^  had  been  left  in 
v^acuo  for  two  weeks.  As  this  was  not  perfectly  hard,  but  of  a 
sticky  nature,  it  was  necessary  to  introduce  it  into  the  combustion 

1  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Philad.,  Vol.  VI,  pp.  Ill,  112,  1852. 
'^  I  have  some  of  these  still  in  good  condition  after  twenty-nine  years' 
preservation  in  alcohol. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  31 

tube  upon  a  piece  of  glass.  0"49T  of  honey  gave  0.306  of  water, 
and  0.684  of  carbonic  acid,  corresponding  to  a  percentage  of 
C  =  87-535,  H  =  6.841,  O  by  loss  =55-634.  This  corresponds, 
as  nearly  as  could  be  expected  under  the  circumstances  of  the 
analysis,  with  the  formula  of  crystallized  grape  sugar,  C^  Hj^  Ou- 

Dr.  Wetherill,  who  in  this  analysis  was  especially  seeking  light 
upon  the  origin  of  the  ant-honey,  thus  announces  his  conclusion  : 
"  It  results,  I  think,  from  these  experiments,  that  the  honej'  con- 
tained in  the  Mexican  ant  is  a  nearly  pure  solution  of  the  sugar, 
so  called,  of  fruits,  which  is  in  a  state  of  hydration,  isomeric  with 
grape-sugar,  C12  Hu  Ou,  and  differing  from  grape-sugar  in  not 
crystallizing."  It  is  certainly  an  interesting  confirmation  of  the 
value  of  this  reasoning  from  analj^sis,  that  the  ants  have  been 
proved  by  field  observations  to  have  collected  their  honey-dew  as 
Dr.  Wetherill  concluded,  from  the  nectar  of  plants.  Thus  the 
methods  of  cabinet  and  laboratorj^,  and  the  objective  studies  of 
the  field,  confirm  and  complete  each  other. 

With  regard  to  the  acidity  of  the  ant-honey,  which  has  been 
referred  to,  Dr.  Wetherill  found  that  it  reacted  slightly  acid  to 
blue  litmus  paper,  but  want  of  material  prevented  satisfactory 
experiments.  He  was  in  doubt  as  to  whether  it  was  formic  acid, 
or  acetic  from  the  oxidation  of  the  alcohol  in  which  the  ants 
were  preserved.  A  portion  of  the  alcohol  (reacting  acid  like  the 
honey)  neutralized  hj  caustic  potassa,  when  distilled  with  sulphuric 
acid,  gave  an  aqueous  acid  liquid,  which,  on  addition  of  nitrate  of 
silver,  gave  a  whitish  precipitate,  becoming  black  on  boiling,  ren- 
dering the  supposition  of  formic  acid  probable. 

The  uses  to  which  the  Mexicans  and  Indians  put  this  ant-honej' 
are  various.  That  they  eat  it  freely,  and  regard  it  as  a  delicate 
morsel  is  beyond  doubt.  Prof.  Cope,  when  in  New  Mexico,  had 
the  ants  offered  to  him  upon  a  dish  as  a  dainty  relish.  The  Mexi- 
cans (Loew)  press  the  insects,  and  use  the  gathered  honey  at 
their  meals.  They  also  are  said  to  prepare  from  it  by  fermenta- 
tion an  alcoholic  liquor.  Again,  they  are  said  (Eclwards)  to  apply 
the  honey  to  bruised  and  swollen  limbs,  ascribing  to  it  great 
healing  properties.  Dr.  Loew's  suggestion  to  bee-keepers  to  test 
the  commercial  value  of  these  ants  as  honey  producers  is  wholly 
impracticable.  The  difficulties  of  farming  the  colonies,  gathering 
the  supplj',  and  the  limited  quantity  of  the  product,  would  prevent 
a  profitable  industiy.     The  greatest  number  of  honey-bearers  in  a 


32  PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

large  colony,  taking  ni}'  observations  as  a  standard,  will  not  exceed 
six  hundred,  which,  counting  six  grains  of  honej^  to  the  ant,  would 
be  little  more  than  one-half  pound  avoirdupois.  Besides,  the  senti- 
ment against  the  use  of  honey  thus  taken  from  living  insects, 
which  is  worthy  of  all  respect,  would  not  be  overcome.  The 
Mexicans  and  Indians  will  therefore  probably  not  be  disturbed  in 
their  monopoly  of  the  honey-product  of  the  nests  of  Melliger. 

YI.  Interior  Architecture. 

Gate  Architecture. — In  order  to  determine  the  gate  archi- 
tecture— a  term  by  which  I  characterize  the  structure  of  the  nest 
nearest  to  the  entrance — several  formicaries  were  carefully  opened 
and  studied.  Four  of  these  are  here  given  as  fair  types  of  all.  It 
will  be  seen  from  these  that  a  general  similarit}-  of  plan  prevails. 
The  gate  itself  is  a  single  tubular  opening  in  the  centre  of  the 
mound,  from  three-fourths  to  seven-eighths  of  an  inch  in  diameter. 
It  is  smooth  within,  and  penetrates  the  mound  and  the  earth  perpen- 
dicularly to  a  depth  varying  from  three  and  one-half  to  six  inches. 
This  gate  is  funnel-shaped  at  the  top,  and  the  funnel  (PI.  lY ,  fig,  14, 
F)  is  gravel-lined,  differing  therein  from  the  lower  part  or  nozzle  of 
the  gate  (fig.  18,  !N").  The  nozgle  descends  perpendicularlj^,  or  with 
a  slight  slope,  for  three  inches,  more  or  less,  and  then  deflects  at 
an  angle  more  or  less  abrupt,  forming  an  arm  (A)  usually  shorter 
than  the  nozzle.  This  leads  into  a  series  of  radiating  galleries 
and  rooms,  and  the  point  of  deflection  may  be  called  the  vestibule, 
Y.  These  galleries  and  rooms  appear  to  extend  quite  habituallj^ 
beneath  and  chiefl}'^  in  'one  direction  from  the  gate.  There  are 
indeed  galleries  immediately  surrounding  the  gate  on  every  side  ; 
but  these  appear  to  be  limited  except  in  the  one  direction,  within  a 
radius  of  about  eight  to  ten  inches,  and  to  the  same  distance  in 
depth. 

These  general  statements  may  be  illustrated  and  expanded  by 
the  following  details  of  particular  nests. 

1.  Nest  No.  7,  fig.  19,  was  a  small  nest  three  and  one-third 
inches  in  diameter.  The  gate  had  a  perpendicular  depth  from  the 
surface  of  three  inches.  Thence  at  nearly  a  right  angle  it  bent 
south-east  for  two  and  one-half  inches,  forming  the  arm,  A,  and 
meeting  at  Y  a  series  of  branching  galleries,  a,  6,  e,  d.  Galler}^  a, 
bore  westward,  terminating  under  the  gate  ;  6,  bore  southwest, 
appearing  to  run  upward  toward  the  surface ;  c,  extended  down- 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA.  33 

ward  and  southward  at  a  sharp  inclination,  entering  a  long  roobo, 
E,  was  a  small  circular  chamber,  at  one  end  of  which  was  a  beau- 
tiful gallery,/,  running  deep  downward  and  inclining  slightly  west. 
It  was  entered  near  by  and  above  by  another  gallery,  d,  running 
toward  the  surface. 

2.  Nest  jSTo.  6,  fig.  18.  The  depth  of  the  gate,  G,  was  three 
inches  ;  the  length  of  the  arm,  A,  two  inches.  The  gallery  into 
which  A  opened  toward  b,  divided  at  one  end  with  two  branches 
separated  at  their  mouths  by  a  little  column  of  two  stones  resting 
one  upon  the  other.  The  gallery,  c,  could  be  traced  at  least  six 
inches   downward,  and  a  gallery  opened  directly  downward  at  a. 

3.  Nest  on  Eaglehead  Ridge,  PI.  V,  fig.  20.  This  nest,  from 
Avhich  many  of  my  night  studies  were  made,  was  finally  opened, 
and  the  section  view,  fig.  20,  taken.  The  vestibule,  as  in  the  above 
examples,  also  opened  into  a  main  gallery,  &,  which  led  to  the 
northeast,  and  joined  a  circular  gallery  which  passed  around  the 
vestibule  and  terminated  in  an  oval  room,  A.  At  the  other  end  it 
entered  a  circle,  which  widened  upon  one  side  into  a  bay-room, 
and  sent  off  a  couple  of  branches,  one  of  which,  c,  was  a  chamber. 
Two  galleries,  g  g,  opened  downward.  Beyond  this,  southward, 
was  a  long  waved  gallery,  D  D,  which  ended  at  e  e,  and  branched 
at  h.     Galleries,  g  g,  in  this  series,  also  led  downward. 

No.  4.  Fig.  23,  Nest  No.  4,  on  Adams  Ridge.  The  diameter  of 
this  mound  was  three  and  one-half  inches  at  the  top  and  seven 
inches  at  the  bottom.  The  vestibule  sloped  eastward  from  the 
summit,  downward  three  inches  to  the  main  gallery,  which  had 
three  branches,  x,  y  and  z ;  x  was  followed  six  inches  northeast 
and  upward  ;  y,  extended  sovithwest  and  downward  ;  2,  southeast 
and  downward.  A  gallery,  1,  ran  upward  from  z,  and  connected 
with  X.  Another,  2,  opened  on  the  southwest  into  a  room.  A, 
six  inches  long  and  three  inches  wide,  at  the  west  end  of  which 
were  galleries  dividing  north  and  south.  A  third  gallery  separated 
from  z  at  3,  and  bent  northward,  apparently  uniting  with  a  room, 
A,  five  inches  long.  This  room  was  entered  again  by  a  widened 
mouth.  Be,  about  one-half  inch  above  z.  At  the  vestibule  and 
upper  part  of  z  were  a  number  of  cocoons.  The  room.  A,  was  five 
inches  below  the  surface  of  the  ground  at  G. 

Galleries  and  Honey-Rooms. — The  last  figure  gives  an  idea 
of  the  relation  of  some  of  the  honey-rooms  to  the  gate  and  the 
upper  series  of  galleries.     These  rooms  lie  at  least  as  near  to  the 


34  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

surface  as  six  and  eight  inclies.  Tliey  vary  in  size,  but  for  the 
most  part,  are  about  five  or  six  inches  in  length  and  three  or 
four  in  width.  They  are  irregular  in  their  outlines,  but  have  a 
general  tendency  toward  the  oval.  One  of  tiie  most  irregular  is 
figured  at  PI.  Y,  fig. '21,  HR,  a  large  chamber  which  lay  nearly 
underneath  the  gate.  The  gallery,  g  g,  into  which  the  vestibule 
opened,  debouched  into  tliis  room,  and  a  portion  of  the  gallery 
roof  unbroken  is  shown  at  ug.  At  B,  appeared  a  bay-room,  or 
enlargement  of  a  gallery,  which  penetrated  the  earth  horizontally 
at  one  end  and  at  the  other  seemed  to  wind  into  the  vestibule. 
The  height  of  the  rooms  at  the  w^alls  or  sides  is  from  one-half  to 
three-fourths  of  an  inch.  The  roof  is  vaulted,  thus  causing  the 
height  to  increase  gradually  until  at  the  centre  it  is  one  and  one- 
half  inches,  which  is  the  greatest  distance  that  I  measured. 

Floors  and  Roof. — The  floors  and  walls  are  well  nigli  invari- 
ably smooth,  quite  smooth  some  of  them.  The  roof,  on  the  con- 
trary, is  rough,  presenting  the  natural  condition  after  the  sandy 
pellets  of  earth  and  the  little  pebbles  had  been  picked  out  by  the 
workers.  This  can  hardly  be  otherwise  than  b}'  purpose,  precisely 
as  with  the  smoothness  of  the  floors.  The  roughness  of  the  roof 
evidently  greatly  favors  the  use  to  which  the  honey-bearers  put  it 
as  a  perch.  So  the  smoothness  of  the  floor  and  walls  much  better 
adapts  them  for  the  use  of  gangways.  The  amount  of  travel  to 
and  fro  must  be  enormous,  it  is  true,  in  a  large  formicary ;  but  I 
cannot  think  that  the  resulting  friction  will  account  for  the  smooth- 
ness, independently  of  the  purposed  masonry  of  the  ants.  In  the 
galleries  the  entire  surface,  above  and  below,  is  smooth,  a  condi- 
tion which  might  be  anticipated  on  the  ground  of  adaptation. 

Galleries  and  Rooms. — The  galleries  are  tubular  openings, 
varying  somewhat  in  size,  from  one-half  to  three-fourths  of  an 
inch,  and  even  more,  in  diameter.  A  vertical  section,  however, 
uniformly  shows  a  quite  perfect  circle.  The  underground  formi- 
cary ma}^  be  described  in  general  terms  as  a  system  of  galleries 
and  rooms,  arranged  in  several  horizontal  series,  one  above  another, 
approximating  the  order  of  "  stories  "  in  a  house,  and  intercom- 
municating at  many  points  by  vertical  galleries.  The  chai'acter 
of  the  interior  architecture  can,  perhaps,  be  best  shown  further  by 
giving  somewhat  in  detail  my  studies  of  one  nest. 

The  nest  selected  for  exhaustive  exploration  w^as  situated  upon 
the  summit  of  Adams  Ridge,  just  above  the  nook  within  which  my 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  35 

camp  was  located.  Three  entire  days,  besides  other  portions  of 
time,  were  spent  in  this  work  by  myself  and  assistant.  The  nest 
interior  sloped  eastward,  and  toward  the  base  of  the  hill,  and 
occupied  a  space  (in  round  numbers)  eight  feet  long,  three  feet 
high  and  one  and  one-half  feet  wide,  the  whole  tunneled  through 
the  soft  red  sandstone  rock  of  which  the  ridge  consists.  This 
rock  is  much  of  it  quite  friable,  crumbling  readily  under  the  pres- 
sure of  the  hand,  but  packs  tightly  under  the  stroke  of  mallet  and 
chisel,  thus  making  difficult  mining  for  men  if  not  for  ants.  Most 
of  our  work  was  done  with  the  chisel,  and  the  galleries  and  rooms 
had  to  be  worked  out  with  knives. ^  These  thirty-six  cubic  feet  of 
rock  were  fairly  honeycombed  by  the  series  of  galleries  and  cham- 
bers above  referred  to. 

The  dimensions  of  the  exterior  nest  are  as  follows  (see  PI.  IV, 
fig.  15):  Height,  north  side,  2i  inches;  west  side.  If  inches; 
east  side.  If  inches;  south  side,  1|  inches;  distance  across  the 
top,  a  e  =  10  inches;  distance  around  the  base,  a  ^■  e  c  =  29 
inches  ;  distance  around  the  crater,  m  o  n  r  =  S  inches  ;  eastern 
ridge  of  the  crater,  v  n  =  1|-  inches  ;  western  ridge  of  crater, 
m  s  =:  ^  inch  ;  distance  across  the  gate  at  a;  2  =  1  inch,  at  s  v  =  f 
inch  ;  depth  of  the  gate  before  bending,  4  inches.  The  mouth,  as 
appears  from  measurement,  was  ovate  (PI.  IV,  fig.  14),  but  the 
entrance  beyond  was  a  circular  tube. 

The  mound  was  removed  and  the  soil  carefully  scraped  away. 
Close  to  the  surface,  at  the  distance  of  one-half  to  three-fourths 
of  an  inch,  openings  were  found  of  various  sizes,  from  one-fourth 
to  one  inch  in  diameter.  These  openings  occurred  at  various  dis- 
tances from  the  gate,  on  all  sides,  four  and  one-half,  five,  five  and 
one-half,  eight,  eight  and  one-half  inches  and  upwards  to  ten  inches 
on  the  northwest  side,  eighteen  inches  on  the  south  side,  and 
eighty-two  inches  on  the  southeast,  in  which  direction  the  formi- 
cary extended.  Toward  the  termination  of  the  nest,  however, 
thej'  did  not  appear  so  near  to  the  surface. 

Section  views  were  next  had  by  cutting  across  the  nest.  On 
the  north  side  I  found  no  galleries  at  a  greater  depth  than  eight 
inches.     On  the  south  side,  the  first  cutting  was  made  east  and 

^  While  engaged  upon  this  part  of  my  work,  I  was  pleasantly  surprised 
by  a  brief  visit  of  Prof.  A.  ?,  Packard.  I  am  glad  to  be  able  thus  to  refer 
to  his  valuable  testimony  in  confirmation  of  some  of  the  statements  of  this 
paper. 


36  PEOCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

west,  and  thereafter  the  rock  cleared  away  outwardly ,  until  the 
end  of  the  nest,  when  the  cutting  was  made  inwardly  from  the 
starting  point  toward  the  gate.  The  character  of  the  architecture 
is  the  same  throughout  the  entire  nest,  so  that  the  following  views 
will  suffice  to  typify  all  the  interior.  The  figures  PI.  YI,  fig.  35, 
and  PL  Y,  figs.  16,  17,  give  views  of  vertical  and  horizontal  sec- 
tions made  from  the  gate  (southeast),  the  l)ottom  of  the  section 
being  twenty-one  inches  below  the  surface  and  the  distance  of  the 
furthest  point  from  the  gate  twenty-three  and  one-half  inches. 
Fig.  .3.5,  PL  YI,  is  a  front  view  of  galleries  looking  south,  and 
exhibits  a  surface  about  seventeen  inches  in  length  by  seven  in 
height.^  The  main  series  of  galleries  within  this  area  are  accu- 
rately shown,  but  the  connecting  vertical  galleries  were  broken 
away  in  the  excavation,  and  are  not  figured. 

Fig.  16  is  a  vertical  section  showing  the  southwest  and  south- 
east sides  of  the  excavation  at  the  same  point  as  the  preceding 
figure,  part  of  which  is  included  in  this  view.^  There  are  here 
shown  the  general  tendency  of  the  galleries  (^,  ^,  g)  toward  stories, 
arranged  one  above  another ;  the  relative  position  of  the  honey- 
rooms  (R,  R),  and  the  relation  of  the  series  to  the  large  honey- 
rooms,  C,  D,  E,  shown  fully  at  fig.  17. 

The  broken  lines,  c  I  d,  and  e  h  k,  show  a  series  of  rooms, 
some  of  which  were  occupied  by  larvae  and  some  by  honej-bearers. 
The  large  rooms,  C  D  E,  Fig.  17,  belong  to  the  lowest  series,  and 
are  figured  and  described  as  fairly  typical  of  all  the  honey-rooms 
and  other  chambers.  They  were  carefully  uncovered  by  chisel 
and  knife,  and  after  being  sketched,  a  plaster  cast  was  taken  of 
them,  which  is  preserved  in  my  collection.''     These  rooms  were  of 

'  Detailed  measurements. — a  to  G  =-  oj^  inches  ;  G  to  d  =  11  inches  ; 
e  to  /  =-  10  inches  ;  hto  i  =  11  inches  ;  k  to  1  =  11  inches  ;  m  to  »  :=  3 
inches  ;  b  to  e  =  2%  inches  ;  o  to  /=-  Z)4  inches  ;  p  to  q  =  1)4  inches ; 
g  to  A;  =  2X  inches  ;  t  to  Z  —  2%  inches  ;  o  to  r  =  3X  inches :  Ito  »  =  &% 
inches. 

^  Fig.  16  measurements.— «  to  J  =  4>^  inches  ;  c  to  d  =  10  inches ;  e  to/ 
_  4  inches  ;  h  to  i  =  4X  inches ;  i  to  k  —  A%  inches/  c  to  j  =  10  inches. 
The  gallery,  j,  appeared  to  connect  upward  with  the  lowest  series  of 
rooms,  efhk. 

'  I  succeeded  by  vast  painstaking  and  labor  in  securing  a  number  of  fine 
specimens  of  the  architecture,  which  were  carefully  packed  in  Vjoxes  and 
committed  to  the  Express  Company  at  Colorado  Springs.  The  company 
received  a  heavy  bill  for  transfjortation,  and  delivered  my  beautiful  and 


1881.]  NATrSAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA-  37 

an  irregular  oval  shape ;  in  length  five,  three  and  one-half,  and 
six  inches  successively  (C,  D.  E),  and  were  of  an  average  width 
of  about  four  inches,  Thev  were  not  boilt  upon  a  level,  the 
origin  of  C,  at  h,  being  three  and  one-half  inches  above  the 
middle  point  of  D,  and  six  inches  above  the  termination  of  E. 
A  side  gallery,  g  g,  skirted  two  of  the  rooms,  and  appeared  to 
open  upon  a  fourth  chamber  at  F,  which,  however,  was  too 
much  broken  in  the  digging  to  be  identified.  Of  course,  only 
the  floor  and  part  of  the  side  walls  of  the  rooms  are  shown, 
but  the  roofs  were  vaulted  and  rough,  as  already  described, 
and  rose  to  the  height  of  three-fourths  to  one  and  one-fourth 
inches.  Within  them,  clinging  to  the  roofs,  were  packed  the 
rotunds.  The  number  in  each  room  averaged  about  thirty ;  and 
as  there  were  at  least  ten  chambers  thus  occupied,  the  number  of 
rotunds  in  the  nest  was  certainly  not  less  than  three  hundred.  Of 
far  the  greater  proportion  of  these  the  abdomens  were  distended 
to  a  perfect  sphere. 

The  Queen  Room. — I  had  the  good  fortune  to  capture  the 
fertile  queen  of  this  colony.  She  was  found  quite  near  the 
extreme  end  of  the  formicary,  in  a  nearly  circular  room  four 
inches  in  diameter.  The  series  of  galleries  and  honey-rooms 
which  composed  the  formicary  terminated  in  a  single  gallery 
(fig.  22,  g  g  g).  about  eighteen  inches  long,  three-fourths  inch 
wide  and  one-fourth  inch  deep.  The  gallery  sloped  sharply  with 
the  slope  of  the  hill-side  on  which  the  nest  was  made.  Xear  the 
middle  part  thereof  was  the  queen-room  (C),  being  seventy-two 
inches  from  the  central  gate  and  twenty-eight  and  one-half  inches 
below  the  surface  of  the  hiU.  Besides  the  queen  the  room  con- 
tained a  large  number  of  naked  grubs,  callows,  honey-bearers  and 
workers.  It  is  not  improbable  that  the  queen  habitually  dwelt  in 
or  near  this  room;  but  it  may  be  that  during  the  successive 
attacks  upon  the  nest,  the  workers  bore  their  queen  still  further 
and  further  from  the  point  of  danger  until  the  limit  was  reached. 

Ten  inches  below  the  queen-room,  the  gallery,  g  g  g,  was  con- 
tinued until  it  finally  terminated  in  a  small  circular  chamber  (E) 
or  bay  on  the  one  side,  and  on  the  opposite  side  a  narrow  gallery- 
{t  g).  which  curved  upward.     This  was  the  end  of  the  formicary. 

costly  specimens  at  the  Academy  broken  in  pieces  !  It  was  an  act  of  gross 
carelessness,  which  merits  this  notice,  as  some  specimens  brooght  home  in 
my  trunk  survived  even  the  "baggage  smashers." 


38  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY    OP  [1881. 

It  was  eighty-two  inches  from  the  central  gate,  forty  and  one-half 
inches  below  the  level  of  the  main  nest  gate,  and  twenty-nine  and 
one-half  inches  below  the  level  of  the  hill-side.  The  entire  length 
of  the  formicary  from  northwest  to  southeast  was  thus  seven  feet 
eight  inches.^ 

VII.  QuEEisr  Life. 

The  captured  queen  of  the  large  excavated  nest  was  transported 
to  Philadelphia,  placed  in  one  of  my  artificial  nests,  a  large  glass 
globe,  and  afforded  several  interesting  observations  npon  her 
habits. 

Her  Body-Guard. — After  the  usual  custom  of  ants,  she  was 
continually  surrounded  by  a  guard  of  workers  (PI.  VI,  fig.  29) 
var^'iug  in  number,  but  usually  as  many  as  twelve  or  twenty. 
These  attendants  quite  enclosed  her,  and  restricted  her  move- 
ments, apparently  watching  and  guarding  her  with  great  careful- 
ness. On  one  occasion  when  she  escaped  to  the  upper  surface  of 
the  nest,  she  was  followed  and  seized  by  a  worker-m:ijor,  who 
interlocked  her  mandibles  with  the  queen's  (PI.  VI,  fig.  26)  and 
dragged  her  down  the  gateway  into  the  interior.  The  royal  lad}"^ 
gave  only  a  passive  resistance,  holding  back  somewhat  heavily. 

Depositing  Eggs. — I  quote  from  my  notes  the  description  of 
this  process,  the  various  stages  of  which  I  was  also  able  to  sketch. 
"  The  queen  has  been  laying  a  small  heap  of  eggs.  She  is  now  on 
a  little  elevation  of  earth,  surrounded  by  a  number  of  workers  of 
all  castes,  some  of  whom  lick  her  abdomen,  especially  beneath  and 
at  the  apex.  One,  meanwhile,  gives  her  food  in  the  usual  wa}-,  by 
regurgitation.     I  see  the  tongues  of  the  two  insects  overlap  in  the 

1  While  preparing  clay  models  of  some  of  the  above  examples  of  ant 
architecture  for  my  cabinet  of  Insect  Architecture  in  the  Academy  of 
Natural  Sciences,  it  was  suggested  that  moulds  be  made,  from  which 
plaster  casts  could  be  taken,  for  the  benefit  of  such  other  scientific  collec- 
tions and  public  museums  as  they  might  be  wished  for.  This  I  had  done, 
and  the  moulds  are  now  in  the  hands  of  the  Curator  in  charge  of  the 
Academy,  by  whom  they  will  be  furnished,  ujion  proper  order,  at  the  cost 
of  reproduction  and  packing,  as  nearly  as  may  be.  Five  sjjecimeus  are 
cast^viz.,  those  figured  at  PL  II,  fig.  4,  and  PL  V,  figs.  IG,  17,  22  and  23. 
They  are  cast  natural  size,  except  fig.  16,  which  is  half  size.  The  cost, 
painted  natural  coloi',  will  be  SIO  fm-  the  set,  unpainted  $6.  Orders  should 
be  sent  to  Charles  F.  Parker,  Curator  in  charge  Academy  of  Natural 
Sciences,  Philadelphia,  Pa.,  U.  S.  A. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  39 

act.  The  queen's  abdomen  is  raised  high,  her  head  is  stooped, 
she  lifts  the  abdomen  up  and  down.  The  workers  have  clustered 
under  her  body,  giving  her  somewhat  the  appearance  of  a  success- 
ful candidate  undergoing  '  a  chairing.'  She  has  changed  her 
position  ;  tlie  workers  follow,  quite  surrounding  her.  Two  are 
beneath  the  abdomen,  which  is  depressed  now,  the  head  being 
elevated.  The  attendants  sit  down  patiently  to  watch.  The}^ 
keep  their  antennie  moving  continually,  while  they  amuse  them- 
selves by  cleansing  their  persons.  The  queen  moves  ;  a  dwarf 
seizes  a  fore-foot  and  attempts  to  control  her  course.  This  and 
"nipping  "  with  the  mandibles,  is  the  common  mode  by  which  the 
guard  directs  the  queen's  motions.  The  eggs  laid  are  in  an 
irregular  mass  about  one-eighth  of  an  inch  thick.  There  are 
twenty  to  thirty  minute  yellowish,  ovoid  objects,  which  adhere-to 
each,  other.  The  workers  surround  the  mass,  some  appeared  to 
lick  it.  The  queen  straggles  over  the  eggs,  places  a  foot  upon 
the  mass.  A  dwarf  seizes  the  foot  hastily  and  draws  it  back, 
while  another  worker  catches  up  the  egg-mass  and  draws  it  aside." 
The  observation  was  made  at  11.20  P.M.;  at  1  A.  M.,  when  I 
retired,  no  change  had  occurred.  This  is  as  much  of  this  interest- 
ing behavior  as  I  was  able  to  observe  in  this  female.  I  have, 
however,  seen  the  actual  deposition  of  the  eggs  bj'  a  queen  of 
Camponotus  pennsylvanicus. ^ 

VIII.  Acts  of  Beneficence. 

In  the  natural  sites  the  workers  showed  great  interest  in  the 
preservation  and  removal  of  the  rotunds,  dealing  with  them  very 
much  as  with  the  larvae.  As  the  honey-rooms  were  opened  and 
the  rotunds  disturbed  from  their  roosts,  the  workers  of  all  castes 
rushed  eagerl^^  to  them,  and  dragged  them  into  the  unbroken 
interiors.  Sometimes  several  ants  would  join  in  removing  one 
rotund,  pushing  and  pulling  her  along.  One  sketch  (PI.  YI,  fig. 
27)  made  in  my  notes,  represents  a  major  pulling  a  rotund,  whom 
she  has  seized  with  her  mandibles  by  the  outer  abdominal  wall, 
wliile  a  dwarf-worker  is  mounted  upon  the  globe,  standing  upon 
her  hind  legs  "  a-tip-toe,"  as  it  were,  pushing  lustily.  Another 
sketch  (PL  YI,  fig.  36),  caught  on  the  spot,  represents  a  worker- 
major  dragging  a  rotund  honey-bearer  up  the  perpendicular  face 

1  See  a  note  in  "Proceed.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  of  Pliila.,"  1879,  p.  140. 


40  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OP  "  [1881. 

of  a  cutting  made  in  the  excavation  of  the  nest.  The  mandibles 
of  the  two  insects  were  interlocked,  and  the  worker  backed  up  the 
steep,  successfully  drawing  her  protege. 

This  interest  is  maintained  in  the  daily  life  of  the  formicar3^ 
The  workers  were  continually  seen  hovering  about  the  rotunds  as 
they  hung  from  the  roof  of  my  nests,  or  as  they  lay  upon  the  floor 
cleansing  their  bodies.  It  is  evident  that  these  creatures  are 
regarded  as  dependents,  and,  as  with  the  queen,  virgin  females, 
males  and  larvte,  are  fed  and  tended  by  the  active  members  of  the 
community.  In  all  these  cases  the  same  communal  instinct 
"would  of  course  control  action,  giving  at  least  the  semblance  of 
beneficence. 

Lack  of  Individual  Beneficence, — But  a  great  number  of  ex- 
amples fell  under  notice  which  go  to  throw  doubt  upon  the  pos- 
session of  any  personal  or  individual  sentiment  as  towards  special 
cases  of  need,  outside  of  the  above  limit.  Some  of  these  may 
deserve  permanent  record. 

1.  In  making  up  my  artificial  nests,  I  placed  in  the  natural  soil, 
which  was  closely  packed  down,  and  then  introduced  the  ants, 
knowing  that  they  would  work  out  their  own  habitations.  The 
hone3'-bearers  were  thus  mingled  upon  the  surface  with  the 
workers,  upon  whom  fell  the  entire  task  of  digging  galleries.  In 
this  work,  and  in  the  distribution  of  the  excavated  pellets,  there 
was  much  room  for  the  exhibition  of  individual  carefulness  and 
tenderness  toward  the  honey-bearers.  Not  a  single  such  instance 
was  noted,  although  I  watched  closely  and  with  some  anxiety  to 
discover  such  excellencies  in  my  little  friends.  On  the  contrary, 
the  exhibitions  of  an  apparent  cruel  neglect  and  positive  cruelty 
were  many.  The  grains  of  sand  and  soil  were  heaped  around  the 
rotunds  (PI.  YI,  fig.  31)  until  the  poor  creatures  were  literally 
buried  alive.  It  would  have  been  easy  for  the  busy  masons  to 
draw  their  fellows  aside  and  thus  carry  on  their  work.  But  it 
either  never  occurred  to  them  to  do  so,  or  the  disposition  was 
wanting. 

2.  Again,  as  the  openings  were  made  into  the  earth,  most  of  the 
rotunds,  not  prevented  as  above,  managed  to  roll  down  the 
galleries  and  secure  a  place  in  the  honey-rooms.  They  were  not 
observed  to  be  aided  in  this  by  the  workers,  and  I  believe  that 
they  attained  their  perches  unaided.  Some  of  them,  on  the  route, 
became  fastened  in  the  gang-way  in  most  uncomfortable  positions. 


1881. J  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  41 

heads  downwards,  bodies  awiy,  etc.  The  workers  passed  by  and 
over  them  continually,  for  many  days,  witliout  the  slightest 
apparent  concern,  and  certainly  without  a  single  observed  effort 
to  relieve  their  comrades,  who  could  readily  have  been  extricated 
and  drawn  into  the  chambers. 

3 .  1 1  frequently  happened  that  the  rotunds  dropped  or  were  shaken 
down  from  their  perch  against  tlie  roof  to  the  floor.  These  creatures 
remained  in  the  positions  in  wliich  they  fell,  except  when  they 
chanced  to  so  fall  as  to  be  able  to  clasp  with  their  claws  some 
clod  of  earth,  or  bit  of  gravel,  or  the  rough  surface  of  the  project- 
ing walls  or  roof.  In  such  case,  they  either  recovered  their  perch, 
or  placed  themselves  in  comparatively  comfortable  postures.  The 
gi-eater  number,  however,  fell  upon  the  round  abdomen  in  such 
wise  tliat  tlie  body  stood  up  quite  erect  (PI.  YI,  fig.  32),  leaving 
the  legs  thrust  out  unsuppoi'ted.  These  unfortunates  were  faitli- 
fully  attended,  often  cleansed  and  caressed,  but  in  no  single 
instance  did  the  workers  attempt  to  right  them  and  restore  them 
to  the  roof.  Yet  they  were  abundantly  able  to  do  so,  with  little 
effort,  and  the  fallen  rotunds  were  in  sore  need  of  help.  Some  of 
these  lived  for  two  months  and  longer  in  this  awkward  position, 
but  it  was  ver}"^  CAndent  that  they  were  extremely  uncomfortable. 
When  it  was  practicable  to  extend  m^'  help  to  those  near  the 
surface  it  was  eagerlj'^  accepted,  the  offered  stick  or  quill  clasped 
by  the  mandibles,  sometimes  assisted  b}^  the  feet,  so  firmh-  as  to 
enable  me  to  transfer  the  heav}'  creatures  to  any  point,  even  to 
lift  them  out  of  the  nest.  Here  again  the  idea  or  at  least  the  act 
of  helpfulness  was  lacking.  If  we  are  to  suppose  the  power  of 
communicating  their  distress  and  desires  to  have  been  possessed 
by  the  bearers,  we  must  think  the  workers  even  yet  more  lacking 
in  feeling  and  intelligence. 

4.  One  honej'-bearer  was  partly  buried  under  her  perch,  that 
portion  of  the  roof  having  fallen.  Her  abdomen  was  quite  covered 
by  the  fine  sand}'  particles  at  the  margin  of  the  little  landslide. 
The  task  of  rescuing  her  would  have  been  easy  to  the  workers, 
but  it  was  never  undertaken,  A  sketch  (PI.  YI,  fig.  28)  was 
made,  shortly  after  the  occurrence,  which  shows  one  worker- 
minor  standing  before  the  rotund  with  head  and  bod}'  erect, 
antennae  atent,  with  ever}-  mark  of  curious  interest  in  her  deport- 
ment. She  watched  the  struggles  and  mute  appeals  (as  it  seemed 
to  me)  of  her  unhappy  comrade,  who  by  great  exertion  had  suc- 
4 


42  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

ceeded  in  heaving  up  the  clod,  and  then  "  passed  by  on  the  other 
side.''  Meanwhile  a  second  worker  Avas  perched  atop  of  the  clod, 
coolly  and  cosily  comhing  her  back-hair  and  antennae  !  This 
tableau  is  simply  characteristic  of  the  ordinary  behavior  of  the 
workers. 

An  a[)parent  exception  was  noted  in  the  case  of  a  semi-rotund 
who  was  overtaken  in  a  gangway  by  water  with  which  I  was  sup- 
plying the  community,  and  stuck  fast  in  a  bed  of  mud.  For  a 
long  time  the  ivorkers,  who  were  incited  to  masonry,  as  usual,  by 
the  water  suppl}^,  dug  and  traveled  around  and  over  the  imbedded 
ant  without  notice  of  any  sort.  Finally  one  stopped  and  licked 
the  antennae  and  head  of  the  prisoner,  who  began  to  struggle,  and 
so  dropped  down  a  little  into  the  gangway.  Meanwhile  the  first- 
comer  had  left.  A  second  ant  stopped,  applied  the  tongue  a 
moment,  gave  a  little  tug  at  the  unfortunate,  and  w^as  off.  Still 
the  stream  of  workers  passed  on.  Finally,  an  additional  pull  from 
below  was  given  by  a  concealed  worker,  but  when  I  closed  the 
observation  the  ant  was  still  imbedded  in  the  mud  within  the 
gangway.  It  was  impossible  to  decide  in  this  case  whether  the 
helpers  noted  were  moved  b}'  personal  kindness,  or  rather  (as  is 
most  likely),  by  the  same  impulse  which  directs  them  in  ordinary 
mason  operations  and  toward  supposed  dead  comrades. 

Sir  John  Lubbock,  who  has  made  interesting  experiments  and 
observations  with  a  view  to  testing  the  presence  of  benevolent 
feeling  in  ants,^  does  not  have  a  very  high  opinion  of  emmet 
charity,  but  concludes  that  there  are  "  individual  differences,"  and 
that  among  ants,  as  with  men,  there  are  Priests  and  Levites,  as 
w^ell  as  Good  Samaritans.  I  am  much  inclined  to  the  view  that 
anything  like  individual  benevolence,  as  distinguished  from  tribal 
or  communal  benevolence,  does  not  exist.  The  apparent  special 
cases  of  beneficence,  outside  the  instinctive  actions  which  lie  within 
the  line  of  formicary  routine,  are  so  rare  and  so  doubtful  as  to 
their  cause,  that  (however  loth),  I  must  decide  against  anything 
like  a  personal  benevolent  character  on  the  part  of  my  honey-ants. 

Such  an  example,  indeed,  as  one  of  those  cited  by  Lubbock,^ 
viz.,  the  neglect  on  the  part  of  co-formicarians  to  remove  the 
decapitated  heads  of  enemies  from  the  limbs  to  which  they  are 
firmlj'  clasped,  does  not  seem  to  me  as  remarkable  as  it  does  to 

1  Journal  of  the  Linnsean  Society,  Zoology,  Vol.  XII,  p.  497. 

2  Op.  cit.  p.  492. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  43 

Sir  John.  I  have  often  observed  the  same  fact  among  various 
species,  and,  knowing  by  experience,  the  difficulty  of  imloosing 
those  formidable  jaws,  clasped  by  their  immense  muscles  in  the 
rigor  of  death,  would  charge  it  to  inability  rather  than  indisposi- 
tion, that  these  adhering  death's-heads  are  not  removed  bj^  kindly 
offices  of  comrades.  But  such  examples  as  are  here  recorded, 
together  with  kindred  ones  given  by  Lubbock,  may  fairly  be 
quoted  against  the  existence  of  a  personal  benevolent  character  in 
ants.  However,  the  question  can  by  no  means  be  regarded  as 
settled. 

Cleansing  and  Feeding  Larv^. — One  or  two  miscellaneous 
observations  may,  perhaps,  be  allowed  a  place  in  this  connection. 
The  solicitude  of  the  workers  for  the  helpless  larvje  was  a  matter 
for  continual  admiration.  The  offices  of  nurse  do  not  seem  to  be 
confined  to  any  one  caste,  but  the  burden  of  dut}^  appeared  to  be 
assumed  bj'  the  dwarfs,  and  next  to  them  the  minors. 

When  the  grub  is  to  be  cleansed  it  is  taken  in  the  mouth,  turned 
by  the  fore  pair  of  legs,  the  antennae  meanwhile  touching  and 
apparently  aiding,  while  the  mandibles  are  applied  over  the  grub 
their  teeth  apparentl}"  working  chieflj"  within  the  annular  divisions 
of  the  several  joints.  Doubtless  this  motion  is  accompanied  by  a 
free  use  of  the  tongue,  but  this  I  did  not  observe. 

When  the  grubs  are  to  be  fed^  the  workers  pass  from  one  to 
another,  striding  over  them,  and  standing  among  them  (PL  YI 
fig.  34)  as  the}^  lie  in  little  groups.  The  wee  white  things  perk  up 
their  brownish  yellow  heads,  which  thej'  stretch  out  and  move 
around,  evidently  soliciting  food.  Their  nurses  move  from  one  to 
another,  apply  the  mouth  for  a  moment,  and  pass  on. 

At  the  slightest  alarm  the  grubs  are  seized  and  hurried  into  the 
recesses  of  the  nest.  Their  position  is  frequently  changed,  from 
higher  to  lower,  from  outer  to  inner  rooms,  and  the  reverse,  with- 
out any  purpose  which  I  could  discover  or  imagine.  When  this 
sort  of  transfer  was  not  going  on,  the  nurses  would  often  be 
engaged  in  shifting  the  position  of  their  charges,  flitting  restlessly 
among  them,  picking  them  up,  turning  them  around,  putting  them 
down  again,  with  an  aimless  uneasiness  that  bore  an  amusing  like- 
ness to  the  dandling  which  human  infants  undergo  at  the  hands 
of  certain  j^oung  mothers. 

Toilet  Habits. — It  has  been  said  that  the  hone}- -bearers  are 
cleansed  by  the  workers.     This  is  the  rule  ;  bxit  the  rotunds  are 


44  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

not  wlioll}^  dependent  for  this  n]ion  their  fellows.  In  one  of  m^' 
formicaries,  the  rotunds  when  placed  within  the  light,  began  to 
cleanse  themselves,  without  leaving  their  perch.  They  held  en 
to  the  roof  by  the  two  hind  legs  and  one  of  the  middle  pair,  and 
used  the  other  middle  and  the  two  fore  legs  in  the  usual  manner 
of  ants.i  They  "were  quite  able  thus  to  draw  a  leg  through  the 
spui'-comb  of  one  of  the  fore-feet ;  to  brush  the  head,  etc. 

In  one  case  I  even  saw  a  honey-bearer  performing  the  offices  of 
the  toilet  upon  a  worker.  The  latter  held  her  mandibles  apart, 
while  the  rotund  licked  the  mouth  parts  ;  and  from  thence  pro- 
ceeded to  the  vertex  of  the  head.  Both  insects  were  in  a  semi- 
rampant  posture  the  meanwhile. 

Fraternal  Relations  with  Sister  Colonies. — A  few  experi- 
ments upon  several  nests  quite  widely  separated,  showed  that  as 
in  the  case  of  some  other  ants,^  the  inmates  (of  the  same  species) 
fraternized  completely,  and  engaged  within  the  artificial  nests,  in 
the  care  of  the  larvae,  cocoons,  honey-bearers,  and  in  all  other 
formicary  duties. 

IX.  Economy  of  the  Honey-Bearers. 

What  is  the  economy  of  the  remarkable  structure  and  habit 
presented  in  the  honey-bearer  ?  The  naturalist  is  shut  out  from 
all  observations  in  natural  site  that  might  give  answer  to  this 
question.  But  from  studies  thus  far  made  upon  my  artificial 
formicaries,  from  structure,  and  from  reasonable  analogy,  I  ha^e 
little  hesitation  in  saying  that  the  economy  is  precisel}^  that  of 
the  bee  in  storing  honey  within  the  comb.  The  difference  lies  in 
the  fact  that  the  bee  puts  her  store  within  inorganic,  the  ant 
within  organic  matter ;  the  bee  within  the  waxen  cell  which  her 
industry  constructs,  the  ant  within  the  living  tissue  of  her  sister 
formicarian,  provided  to  her  hands  by  the  Creator.  The  honey 
is  held  in  reserve  within  its  globular  store-room  of  animal  tissue 
for  times  when  the  workers  fail  to  gather  food,  or  the  supply  fails 
in  Nature.  The  queen,  the  virgin  females,  the  males,  the  teem- 
ing nursery  of  white  grubs,  are  all  and  always  altogether 
dependent  upon  others  for  nurture.  During  the  winter  months 
and  in  seasons  when  the  honey  supply  is  scant  or  wholly  fails, 

1  See  Toilet  Habits  of  Ants,  in  Agricultural  Ants  of  Texas,  Ch.  VIII, 
p.  135. 

2  Mound-Making  Ants  of  the  Alleghenies,  p.  281. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHTLADELPinA.  45 

perhaps  during  the  long  rain}^  seasons,  the  entire  famih*  must 
have  food.  Precisely  as  the  bee  goes  to  the  honey-comb  in  such 
emergencies,  the  hone3-ant  goes  to  the  hone^^-bearer. 

There  is,  to  be  sure,  a  corresponding  difference  in  the  mode  of 
eliciting  the  stored  sweets.  The  bee  brealcs  the  cell  and  laps 
the  honey.  The  hungry  ant  places  her  mouth  to  that  of  the 
bearer,  from  whose  mouth  it  is  received  as  it  is  regurgitated  from 
the  hone}'  crop.  The  muscles  of  the  abdomen  act  upon  that 
organ  as  does  the  pressure  of  a  lady's  hand  upon  the  eau-de- 
cologne  within  the  elastic  bulb  of  a  toilet  jet  or  spraying  bottle. 
It  is  forced  up,  gathers  in  a  little  globule,  a  honey-dewdrop,  upon 
the  filament-like  maxillse  under  the  jaw,  whence  it  is  lapped  off 
by  the  waiting  pensioners.  The  admirable  adaptation  by  which 
the  ant's  structure  is  fitted  for  this  function,  will  be  noted  further 
on.  It  may  be  well  to  state  such  facts  as  appeared  in  various 
efforts  to  arrive  at  the  truth  of  the  above  opinion,  viz.,  that  the 
honej'-bearers  serve  as  store-houses  of  food  for  the  inmates  of  the 
nest.  If  these  facts  fall  short  of  a  complete  deraonsti-ation,  they 
at  least  form  a  chain  of  evidence  which  creates  a  verv  strono- 
probability. 

1.  Regurgitation  of  Honey. — On  the  occasion  of  the  dis- 
covery that  the  ants  collected  nectar  from  the  oak-galls,  a  branch 
upon  wliich  the  foragers  were  at  work  was  removed  to  my  tent 
for  stud}'.  First,  however,  it  was  taken  to  the  home  site,  and  a 
dwarf  worker  coaxed  upon  a  leaf  and  laid  on  the  nest.  She 
seemed  much  confused,  and  evidently  did  not  at  first  recoo-nize 
the  fact  that  she  was  at  home.  The  workers  around  the  gall,  who 
.were  quite  easily  distinguished  b}'  the  smaller  size  of  their 
abdomens,  also  showed  marks  of  surprise  -at  this  im expected 
arrival.  However,  two  dwarfs  and  a  minor  soon  sufficiently 
recovered  their  equanimity  to  arrest  their  fellow  and  "  take  toll  " 
from  her  mouth  of  the  syrup  with  which  her  crop  was  well 
charged.  (PI.  Y,  fig.  24.)  The  mode  was  that  which  is  common 
among  ants,  and  has  been  fulty  described.^  A  worker  major  was 
next  transferred  from  the  bush  to  the  nest,  and  showed  the  same 
confusion  at  this  unexpected  "  railroading  "  home.  She  also  was 
tolled  b}^  the  ants  clustering  upon  the  mound.  In  both  cases  I 
saw  the  drop  of  liquid  honey  sparlding  as  it  passed,  a  lantern 
having  been  placed  on  each  side,  thus  throwing  light  full}-  upon 

^  See  Mound-Making  Ants,  p.  275. 


40  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

the  o:roup.  The  major,  after  her  first  confuseTl  hesitation,  seeiued 
inclined  to  start  again  on  the  trail,  but  after  being  tolled  entered 
the  gate.  It  thus  appeared  at  the  outset,  that  the  honey  collected 
by  the  foraging  parties  is  served  out  to  the  sentinels,  working 
parties  and  others  at  the  nest,  precisely  as  has  been  fully  shown 
in  the  case  of  the  mound-making  ants  of  the  Alleghenies.  ^ 

2.  The  act  of  receiving  supplies  from  the  hone^'-bearer  was 
observed  by  me  soon  after  the  transfer  of  the  ants  to  an  artificial 
nest.  The  rotund  threw  her  head  up,  raised  her  thorax,  and 
regurgitated  a  large  drop  of  amber  liquid,  which  hung  upon  the 
mouth  and  palps.  At  first  two  ants  were  feeding — a  major,  who 
was  in  a  position  similar  to  that  of  the  rotund,  and  a  dwarf  who 
stood  upon  her  hind  legs  and  reached  up  from  below.  During 
the  feeding  another  major  was  attracted  to  the  banquet,  and 
obtained  her  share  by  reaching  over  the  back  of  the  first  worker, 
indeed,  partly  standing  upon  her,  and  thrusting  her  mouth  into 
the  common  "  dish."  (PI.  Y,  fig.  24.)  The  mandibles  and  maxillge 
of  the  pensioners  serve  as  a  sort  of  dish,  upon  which  a  particle  of 
honey  is  taken  and  afterward  is  licked  oft"  more  at  leisure. 

3.  Workers  fond  of  the  stored  Honey — The  fondness  of 
the  workers  for  the  store  within  the  rotunds  was  strikingly  shown 
during  the  excavation  of  a  nest.  Necessaril}",  in  breaking  down 
the  rooms,  the  distended  abdomens  of  some  of  the  honey -bearers 
were  ruptured.  The  high  state  of  excitement  which  pervaded  the 
colony,  the  ordinary  instinct  to  defend  the  nest  and  preserve  the 
larvae,  cocoons  and  other  dependents,  were  at  once  suspended  in 
the  presence  of  this  delicious  temptation,  and  amid  the  ruins  of 
their  home  the  workers  paused,  clustered  in  large  groups  around 
the  unfortunate  comrade,  and  greedily  lapped  the  sweets  from  the 
honey-moistened  spot.  It  was  a  pitiful  sight  to  see,  and  was 
noted  with  a  mild  sort  of  indignation,  and  to  the  disparagement 
of  the  ants,  until  I  remembered  that  history  has  often  recorded,' 
and,  indeed,  I  myself  have  seen,  the  humiliating  fact  that  human 
beings  have  exhibited  a  like  greed  and  ignoble  self-gratification 
amid  the  perils  and  threatened  wreck  of  their  country  and  homes. 

Treatment  of  Dead  Rotunds. — Over  against  this  fact  may  be 
placed  one  seemingly  more  to  the  credit  of  our  Melligera.  From 
time  to  time  the  honej^-beai'ers  died.  The  bodies  of  those  who 
perished  upon  their  perch  would  hang  to  the  roof  for  daj^s  before 

1  Op.  cit.,  p.  377. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  4^ 

the  death-grip  finally  relaxed  and  they  fell.  It  happened  more 
than  once  that  the  workers  failed  to  perceive  the  change,  and  for 
some  time,  a  day  or  more,  after  death,  continued  to  cleanse  and 
tend  them  with  the  accustomed  solicitude.  When  the  fact  was  at 
last  perceived,  and  the  dead  removed,  the  round  abdomen  was 
first  severed  from  the  thorax  by  clipping  the  petiole,  then  the 
parts  were  separately  removed  to  the  "  cemetery,"  that  common 
dumping-ground  for  the  dead,  which  these  ants,  like  all  others 
whom  I  have  observed,  invariably  maintained.  In  view  of  the 
fact  last  recorded,  it  seemed  curious  that  the  stored  treasures  of 
these  "  honey-pots  "  were  not  secured  by  cutting  the  sealing  tissue. 
In  point  of  fact,  this  was  never  seen  to  be  done,  and  the  amber 
globes  were  pulled  up  galleries,  rolled  along  rooms,  and  bowled 
into  the  graveyard  along  with  the  juiceless  legs,  heads  and  other 
members.  I  verily  believe  that  they  were  never  once  deliberately 
opened,  in  spite  of  their  tempting  contents.  If  this  act  were  the 
result  of  an  instinctive  sentiment  by  which  Nature  guarantees 
protection  to  the  living  honey-bearer  (and  this,  indeed,  is  likely), 
it  must  soem  to  us  very  beautiful  and  praiseworthy-.  But  what  if 
it  were  only  the  consequence  of  a  mentalism  so  low  and  fixed 
within  its  instinctive  ruts  as  to  hinder  even  a  suggestion  of 
utilizing  the  wasting  store  by  opening  the  abdomen  ? 

4.  Effects  of  Withholding  Food — In  order  to  determine 
be3'-ond  doubt  the  relations  of  the  honey -bearers  to  the  other  ants, 
I  made  a  number  of  experiments,  which,  I  regret  to  say,  led  to  no 
decided  conclusion. ^  One  or  two  of  them,  however,  gave  results 
of  some  value.  A  number  of  rotunds  and  workers  were  placed 
in  a  nest,'  and  denied  all  food.  A  little  water  was  allowed  them, 
but  for  more  than  four  months  their  fast  was  not  otherwise  broken. 

^  Au  unusual  press  of  professional  and  domestic  duties  during  the  winter 
of  '79-80  absorbed  even  my  eveniugs  and  those  leisure  hours  which  I  feel 
at  liberty  to  devote  to  natural  history.  I  was  thus  unable  to  give  to  my 
little  friends  that  attention  which  might  have  assured  a  complete  success. 
On  one  occasion,  just  as  a  long  series  of  preparations  promised  satisfactory 
results,  a  family  bereavement  intervened,  and  when  it  was  possible  to 
resume  observations,  the  hour  of  advantage  had  passed.  Then  followed 
the  untimely  destruction  of  my  captives,  as  will  be  related  hereafter,  and 
the  estopment  of  all  study.  Naturalists,  at  least,  will  know  how  to  esti- 
mate the  various  ordinary  as  well  as  extraordinary  interruptions  and  hin- 
drances with  which  the  observer  has  to  contend,  and  which  often  prevent 
the  most  satisfactory  results. 


48  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

It  was  1113-  hope  that  this  prolonged  separation  from  external  food 
supplies  would  compel  the  workers  to  resort  to  the  hone^'-bearers 
for  food,  and  thus  afford  the  positive  proof  that  the  latter  were 
the  natural  storehouses  of  the  colonj'.  Most  provokin;^!}-.  the 
perverse  Melligei'S  made  the  room  of  the  hone^'-bearers  within  the 
very  heart  of  the  nest,  and  no  strategy  of  mine  could  tempt  more 
than  one  or  two  of  the  rotunds  into  a  position  under  m\'  e3'es.  I 
was  therefore  limited  to  such  inferences  as  might  be  drawn  fi'om 
the  general  condition  of  the  inmates  during  and  at  the  close  of 
the  fast. 

During  the  entire  four  months,  the  workers,  whose  movements 
were  of  course  observable,  were  in  perfect  health  and  good  condi- 
tion. Indeed,  it  was  very  evident  that  they  were  in  a  more 
healthy  state,  more  vigorous  and  active  than  the  inmates  of  the 
other  nests.  When  the  nest  was  finally  opened  the  remaining 
workers  had  well-filled  abdomens,  all  of  them  looking  more  like 
foragers  freshly  returned  from  a  banquet  of  nectar  among  the  oak 
galls,  than  like  the  victims  of  a  four-months'  seige.  The  abdo- 
mens of  the  honey-bearers  were  undoubtedh'  diminished,  but 
presented  little  appearance  of  having  been  largely  drawn  upon  by 
hungry  workers. 

The  complement  of  this  experiment  over  a  nest  of  workers  who 
were  wholly  separated  from  honey-bearers,  and  denied  food,  came 
to  an  untimely  end.  The  purpose  had  been  to  make  such  a  com- 
parison between  the  two  sets  of  workers  as  would  have  shown 
what  effect  the  presence  of  houej^-beaArs  had  upon  the  abdomens. 

5.  Covering  obnoxious  matter. — Two  other  formicaries  were 
established  with  the  special  purpose  of  determining  whether  the 
workers  habitually  transferred  food  to  the  sedentary  insects  upon 
the  roof.  One  colony  was  fed  syrup  mixed  with  carmine,  the 
expectation  being  that  if  the  ants  ate  this  and  fed  it  to  the  honey- 
bearers,  the  color  would  show  through  their  abdomens,  or  be 
discovered  by  dissection.  The  experiment  failed,  as  to  its  main 
^  lurpose,  but  was  the  occasion  of  uncovering  an  interesting  trait. 
Che  carmiue-sj'rup  was  obnoxious  to  the  ants.  Some  tasted  it, 
turned  awa^'^,  and  rubbed  their  mouth  parts  upon  the  earth,  with 
evident  tokens  of  dislike.  Others  tested  it  with  their  antennje, 
and  although  they  had  been  prepared  for  a  banquet  by  previous 
fasting,  refused  to  eat.  Moreover,  they  instantly,  deliberateh',  and 
with  one  accord  set  to  work  to  cover  up  the  offensive  material. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  49 

The  syrup  had  been  placed  upon  large  corks,  hollowed  out  atop 
into  little  dishes,  and  set  in  the  soil.  One  cork  projected  an  inch 
above  the  surface,  and  up  this  the  workers  climbed,  carrj'iug 
pellets  of  earth  and  gravel,  from  the  A-ery  bottom  of  the  nest,  four 
inches  below  the  surface.  These  pellets  they  dropped  into  the 
syrup,  until  the  dish  was  filled  and  heaped  up  high.  Some  of  the 
bits  of  gravel  were  quite  large,  of  greater  bulk,  and  several  times 
heavier  than  the  ants.  As  the  nests  were  made  of  their  native 
soil,  I  thus  saw  the  ease  with  which  the  workers  carr}-  up  the 
gravel  stones,  that  cover  their  mounds  (PI.  YI,  fig,  30). 

A  broad  trail  of  s^-rup  was  forced  down  one  side  of  the  cork, 
and  it  also  was  covered.  This  required  more  delicate  manage- 
ment, as  the  ants  wei*e  forced  to  support  themselves  upon  the 
perpendicular  surface  of  the  cork,  and,  working  side-wise,  daub 
the  dirt  into  the  syrup,  and  fix  it  there  !  The  whole  trail  was  thus 
covered  from  top  to  bottom.  The  sjrup  was  fed  to  another  for- 
micary with  precisely  the  same  results. 

This  was  not  the  only  occasion  on  which  food  given  the  ants 
was  thus  served.  A  crushed  grape,  and  a  juicj'  bit  of  a  pear  were 
covered  in  the  sajne  way  in  four  of  the  nests.  The  fruit  did  not 
seem  to  be  relished  hy  the  ants,  yet  I  am  not  sure  that  the  juice 
may  not  afterwards  have  been  lapped  from  the  soil  which  ab- 
sorbed it.  White  sugar  the  ants  took  freely  ;  bees'  honey  was  not 
so  much  relished. 

In  the  meanwhile,  during  the  progress  of  these  observations,  I 
found  that  the  semi-rotunds,  at  least  were  not  wholly  dependent 
for  food  upon  the  workers,  as  they  partook  freely  of  the  sugar. 
But  I  never  saw  a  honev-bearer,  one  of  full  rotundity,  taking  food 
or  drink. ^  One  might  imagine  that  they  are  quite  independent 
of  outside  supplies  after  the}-  have  once  reached  that  state,  and 
could  spend  the  remainder  of  their  lives,  unless  greatly  prolonged, 
without  eating.  The  question  of  chief  interest  here  is  :  are  thej' 
brought  to  that  state  b}'  the  deliberate  action  of  workers  in  feed- 
ing them  ■?  I  believe  that  after  a  certain  point  of  distension  this 
is  the  case.  But  the  belief  does  not  yet  rest  upon  positive 
demonstration.  We  now  proceed  to  the  anatomy  of  the  creature, 
which  may  aflford  some  additional  light  upon  this  question. 

^  I  substituted  for  carmine  Pmssian  blue,  which  Dr.  Forel  had  used  for 
staining  living  ants  (Fouvmis  de  la  Suisse,  p.  110),  but  had  no  better  suc- 
cess, although  some  of  the  ants  fed  upon  the  colored  sweets. 


50  PRO0EEDINO8   OP   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

X.  Anatomy  op  the  Alimentary  Canal  in  the  Honey-Ant. 

These  questions,  closely  related,  required  answer  : 

I.  Are  the  honej-bearers  a  distinct  caste  ? 

II.  How  is  the  peculiar  dilated  condition  of  the  abdomen  to  be 
accounted  for  ? 

III.  What  is  the  condition  of  the  digestive  organs  in  the  ab- 
domen of  the  hone3^-bearer  ? 

There  are  some  field  observations  that  have  a  bearing  upon 
these  questions  : 

1.  The  workers  observed  returning  from  foraging  excursions 
had  largely  inflated  abdomens.  This  is  an  ordinary  experience 
with  ants ;  the  workers  of  Foi'mica  exsectoides,  our  movintain 
mound-builders,  for  example,  returning  from  attendance  upon  the 
Aphides  with  their  props  very  much  swollen.  The  workers  of 
Melliger,  however,  seem  to  have  an  especial  elasticity  of  the  crop, 
which  gave  the  abdomens  of  some  of  the  returning  repletes  a 
nearly  semi-rotundity. 

2.  These  repletes  and  semi-rotunds  in  my  artificial  nests  adopted 
in  a  measure  the  sedentary  habits  of  the  honey -bearers,  and  perched 
upon  the  roofs,  where  they  hung  quite  persistently.  They  were 
often  very  sluggish,  but  more  ready  to  move  than  the  rotunds, 
and  at  times  showed  much  activit}',  though  not  greatl}'^  disposed 
to  work.     (See  PI.  Ill,  fig.  6.) 

3.  In  the  formicaries  opened  in  natural  site,  I  observed,  what 
Llave  had  seen  from  his  specimens,  that  there  were  several  degrees 
in  the  sizes  of  the  honey-bearers  in  the  honej^-rooms. 

4.  There  was  an  apparent  growth  in  the  abdomens  of  the  seden- 
tary' workers  in  the  artificial  nests.  As  early  as  September  7th, 
18T9, 1  made  this  record  in  m}^  note-book:  "It  begins  to  dawn 
upon  me  that  the  worker  majors  become  honey-bearers.  Many  of 
them  hang  in  the  nests  to  the  honey-rooms.  In  'B  '  nest  the  en- 
tire line  along  the  upper  margin  of  the  large  room  is  composed  of 
this  rank."  Honey -bearers  with  abdomens  distended  from  one-half 
to  two-thirds  the  full  size  were  continually  noted,  and  I  could  onlj- 
infer  that  they  were  recruited  from  the  number  of  the  sedentary 
majors.  In  fact  it  became  difficult  to  mark  the  individuals  in 
whom  the  sedentary  major  ceased  and  the  honey-bearer  began. 

5.  A  series  of  experiments  was  attempted  to  solve  this  point. 
Semi-rotunds  or  sedentary  majors  were  separated,  freely  fed,  and 
their  growth  noted.     They  never  exceeded  the  condition  of  about 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  51 

two-thirds  the  usual  spherical  abdomen.  What  the  result  would 
have  been  had  the}''  lived  the  entire  year,  and  how  long  it  would 
have  taken  them  to  attain  the  rotund  condition  can  only  be 
guessed.^ 

6.  Among  the  callows,  or  young  ants,  collected,  I  could  find  no 
evidence  at  all  of  a  separate  honey-bearer  caste.  Among  the 
larvae  there  were  some  large,  broad  grubs,  that  differed  much  from 
the  others,  which  I  supposed  to  be  queen-grubs.  I  was  not  able 
to  hatch  these  and  the  cocoons,  and  observe  results,  a  process 
which  would  probably  determine  the  whole  inquiry.  The  cocoons 
collected  were  all  of  three  sizes,  corresponding  in  length  to  the 
workers,  major,  minor  and  dwarf  or  minim  as  this  smallest  caste 
might  perhaps  be  called. 

Y.  A  comparison  of  the  workers*  with  the  honey  ^bearer  shows 
that  there  is  absolutel}'  no  difference  between  them  except  in  the 
distended  condition  of  the  abdomen.  The  measurements  as  to 
length  and  size  of  head,  length  of  legs  and  thorax  are  precisely  the 
same.  This  appears  to  be  true  also,  of  some  of  the  smaller  rotunds 
and  the  minors. 

My  conclusion  from  the  above  facts  is  that  the  worker  majors, 
for  the  most  part,  and  sometimes  the  minors,  are  transformed  by 
the  gradual  distention  of  the  crop,  and  expansion  of  the  abdomen, 
into  the  honey-bearers,  and  that  the  latter  do  not  compose  a  dis- 
tinct caste. ^  It  is  probable,  however,  that  some  of  the  majors 
have  a  special  tendency  to  this  change  by  reason  of  some  peculiar 
structure  or  form  of  the  intestine  and  abdominal  walls. 

8.  Finally  I  undertook  an  anatomical  comparison  of  the  honey- 
bearers  and  workers.  I  made  a  large  number  of  dissections,  which 
were   carefully   studied    and   compared,  and  these  observations 

^  Some  observer  upon  the  field  might  readily  take  up  these  and  other  ex- 
periments and  carry  them  to  a  satisfactory  conclusion.  There  are  invalids 
at  Colorado  Springs  and  Manitou,  who  might  follow  the  admirable  example 
of  the  late  Mr.  Moggridge  at  Mentone,  and  find  both  enjoyment  and  pro- 
longed life  in  some  such  studies. 

'  I  am  glad  to  be  confirmed  in  this  opinion  by  Dr.  Aug.  Forel,  to  whom 
I  early  sent  specimens  and  notes,  and  who  has  shown  a  gratifying  interest 
in  these  studies,  and  has  cordially  aided  them  by  valuable  suggestions. 
See  a  communication  to  the  Morphologico-Physiological  Society  of  Munich, 
in  Aerztlichen  Intelligenz-Blatte,  Jan'y,  1880. 


52  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

strengthened,  I  niiobt  almost  say  entirel_y  confirmed  my  opinion.' 
Some  of  the  results  thus  obtained  will  have  value  to  many  stu- 
dents, and  they  are  therefore  briefly  presented  here.  Without 
entering  fully  into  anatomical  and  histological  details,  enough  will 
be  given  to  confirm  and  explain  the  facts  related  and  opinions 
stated  above. 

The  Alimentary  or  Intestinal  Canal. — The  whole  eoui'se  of 
the  alimentary  tract  from  the  mouth  to  the  anus  was  carefully 
worked  out  in  many  dissections.  Less  attention  was  given  to  the 
head  ;  the  pharynx  and  mouth  parts  were,  however,  worked  out. 
Attention  Avas,  of  course,  chiefly  directed  to  the  abdomen  and  con- 
tents. 

The  intestinal  canal  is  composed  of  the  following  parts  : 

I.  Within  the  head  there  are  : 

§  1.  The  mouth  and  the  mouth-parts,  viz. :  the  mandibles  (Plate 
VII,  figs.  37,  38)  w6.,-  which  are  armed  with  teeth  of  irregular  size  ; 
the  maxillse,  mx,  and  maxillary  palps,  mx.  p  ;  the  labium,  Ib.^  and 
lower  lip,  the  labial  palps,  lb.  p.,  and  the  tongue,  to. 

§  2.  The  buccal  sac  (fig.  51,  6c.s),  a  spherical  expansion  at  the 
anterior  part  of  the  pharynx,  in  the  middle  of  the  front  part  of 
the  head.  Its  function  is  not  determined.^  It  is  frequently  found 
filled  or  partly  filled  with  various,  amorphous  particles,  the  debris 
of  food,  etc.  Brants,  who  first  discovered  it  in  the  wasps,  supposes 
that  it  may  serve  those  insects  in  the  preparation  of  their  paper- 
nests.  Forel  conjectures  that  it  may  serve  the  purpose  of  a  special 
digestion  for  the  anterior  part  of  the  body.  Lubbock  once  found 
in  it  an  entire  worm.  It  would  appear  to  be  a  sort  of  anatomical 
"  Botany  bay"  for  the  temporary  seclusion  of  such  food  material 
as  may  not  be  prepared  to  yield  the  juices  which  alone  pass  into 
the  crop. 

'  I  mounted  many  of  my  preparations  for  more  leisui'ely  study  under  the 
microscope,  and  they  have  been  submitted  to  the  Academy  of  Natural 
Sciences  of  Philadelphia.  I  acknowledge  here  the  assistance  and  advice 
of  Prof.  J.  Gibbons  Hunt,  M.  D,,  in  these  studies,  whose  unrivaled  skill 
as  a  microscopist  was  cordially  placed  at  my  disposal. 

^  The  reference-symbols  are  uniform  in  all  the  figures,  and  are  for  the 
most  part   such   abbreviations   of  the  names  of  the  parts  as  may  aid  the 
memory  in  studying  the  plates.     See  the  key  to  reference  symbols. 
•    2  See  Forel  Swiss  Ants,   p.   109  ;  Lubbock,  Microscop.  Jour.,  London, 
1877,  p.  139  ;  Agricultural  Ants  of  Texas,  p.  119. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  53 

§  .3.  The  phan-nx  (fig.  51,  px.)  a  strongly  miisculav  vrall  situ- 
ated within  tlie  head  in  front  of  the  neck,  nk. 

II.  Within  the  body  there  is  the  oesophagus  (ce.  fig  52),  a  mus- 
cular tube^  or  canal  which  passes  through  the  neck  and  petiole, 
and  connects  the  head  with  the  abdomen. 

III.  The  parts  within  the  abdomen,  which  most  concern  us  are 
§  1.  Segmental  Plates  of  Abdomen. — It  is  first  necessary  to 

understand  the  structure  of  the  wall  of  the  abdomen.  This  consists 
of  ten  strongly  chitinous  segmental  plates,  five  dorsal  and  five 
ventral  (PI.  Til,  figs.  53, 54).  These  overlap  one  another,  like  scales, 
from  the  base  toward  the  apex,  and  the  dorsal  plates  overlap  the 
ventral.  The  last  plates  which  guard  the  cloacal  cavit}',  are 
known  as  the  pA'gidium  (py,)  and  the  h3'pop3'gium  (hy.)  The 
anus,  in  Melliger  is  surrounded  by  a  circle  of  strong  bristle-like 
hairs. 

These  plates,  in  the  normal  condition  of  the  abdomen,  are  set 
upon  (if  I  may  so  say)  a  strongl}-  muscular  inner  wall,  which  is 
highlj^  elastic  in  all  ants,  particularly  of  the  Formicida?.  This 
elasticity'  appears  to  reach  its  extreme  point  in  Melliger.  In 
ordinary  excessive  feeding,  the  distension  of  the  crop  causes  the 
expansion  of  the  muscular  coat  between  the  plates  which  are  thus 
forced  apart,  at  various  degrees  of  separation,  according  to  the 
amount  of  food  taken,  until  in  the  case  of  the  honey-bearer  of 
Melliger  the  three  middle  plates  (Nos.  2,  3,  4)  are  wholl}^  isolated, 
appearing,  as  Forel  has  well  said,  like  little  islands  on  the  tersel}- 
stretched,  light  colored  abdominal  membrane.  (Plate  YII,  fio-. 
54,  D2,  3,  V2,  3),  (Plate  X,  figs.  72,  73).  Plates  Dl,  Yl,  retain 
their  normal  position,  and  plates  D4,  Y4,  are  not  so  wideh'  sepa- 
rated from  D5,  Y5,  as  from  their  next  anterior  plates. 

We  may  now  view  the  abdominal  portion  of  the  intestinal  tract, 
in  order  to  understand  what  happens  in  the  growth  of  the  honev- 
bearer. 

§  2.  The  Crop  or  Ingluvies. — The  crop  is  the  anterior  and 
superior  sub^division  of  the  abdominal  portion  of  the  alimentar}- 
canal.  It  is  simply  an  expansion  of  the  (jesophagus  within  the  ab- 
domen. The  normal  condition  of  the  crop  was  determined  bv 
examination  of  the  workers  with  undistended  abdomens,  and  more 
readil}'  from  the  stud}'  of  a  virgin  queen  (PL  YIII,  fig.  59;, 

'Forel,  quoting  Meinert,  speaks  of  the  muscularization  as  feeble  •  but  in 
Melliger,  at  least,  the  muscles  appear  to  be  sufficiently  strono-. 


54  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

The  ocspliagiis  ce,  is  there  seen  passing  through  and  bent  over 
the  hard  ring  (J71)  which  forms  the  junction  of  the  petiole  and 
abdomen.  The  oesophagus  is  seen  as  continued  (ce  c)  within  the 
abdomen,  where  it  has  precisely  the  same  structure  as  within  the 
thorax.  The  crop  or  ingluvies  contains  a  moderate  amount  of 
food  and  is  fairl}^  distended.  The  exterior  coat  of  the  crop  is  a 
net-work  of  muscles  which  present  the  branched  character  some- 
times found  in  insects  (PI.  VII,  fig.  45).  Another  section  of  the  crop 
showing  tlie  character  of  this  muscularization  is  given  at 
Fig.  46.  This  enlarged  view  is  taken  from  the  object  shown  at 
PI.  YIII,  fig.  55,  and  is  made  at  the  margin.  The  spherical  crop 
is  thus  seen  to  be  hung  within  the  muscular  netting,  something 
like  an  inflated  balloon  within  its  net  bag. 

Forel  thinks^  that  the  muscles  of  the  segmental  walls  of  the 
abdomen  alone  are  concerned  in  the  act  of  regurgitation;  but  I 
see  no  ground  for  this  opinion,  except  possibly  with  the  honey- 
bearers,  whose  abdominal  muscles  alone  might  suffice  to  expel  the 
contents  of  the  crop.  Such  a  remarkably  efficient  structure  as  is 
here  demonstrated  and  illustrated,  can  hardly  be  without  its  proper 
function. 

Before  proceeding  to  demonstrate  the  main  point  in  hand,  it 
will  be  well  to  follow  the  alimentary  canal  to  its  termination. 

§  3.  The  Gizzard  or  Pboventriculus. — The  crop  is  continued 
posteriorly  by  the  gizzard,  gz  (PI.  VIII,  figs.  55,  56,  57,  59),  a 
singular  and  complicated  organ  in  ants  which  has  given  rise  to 
conjectures  the  most  diverse.  Meinert  regards  it  as  serving  to 
regulate  the  movement  of  the  aliments.  Forel  thinks  it  certain 
that  it  serves  above  all  to  close,  and  for  the  most  part  hermeti- 
cally, the  digestive  canal  between  the  crop  and  the  stomach.-  The 
gizzard  properly  belongs  to  the  anterior  part  of  the  intestinal 
canal  its  internal  cuticle  (tunica  intima)  being  a  direct  continua- 
tion of  the  crop,  oesophagus,  pharynx  and  mouth.  It  consists  in 
Myrmecocystus  (and  the  entire  sub-family  Camponotidse)  of  three 
parts. 

^  Swiss  Ants,  p.  111. 

^  The  gizzard  varies  largely  among  ants,  and  the  variations  form  generic 
characters  of  great  value,  which  Dr.  Forel  has  shown,  first  in  his  ' '  Four- 
mis  de  la  Suisse,"  p.  112,  seq.,  and  afterward,  more  fully  and  clearly,  in  his 
"Etudes  Myrmecologiques,"  Bulletin  de  la  Soc.  Vaudois  d.  Sci.  Nat.,  Vol. 
XV,  1878,pp.  337,  392.  This  last  study  of  this  organ  is  one  of  the  most 
admirable  contributions  yet  made  to  niyrmecological  histology. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  55 

1.  The  anterior  part,  or  gizzard  proper,  a  lily-shaped  organ 
composed  of  a  spherical  bowl  (b.gz)  and  four  blades  or  sepals,  s.gz. 
It  is  strongly  chitinous,  appears  intact  in  all  dissections,  and  is 
easily  seen.  The  crop  contracts  at  the  posterior  end  within  the 
four  sepals  of  the  gizzard,  which  thus  appear  to  act  as  valves  to 
regulate  or  moderate  the  flow  of  aliment  from  the  crop  to  the 
stomach.  What,  if  any,  action  it  may  have  upon  the  food  is  not 
known ;  it  can  hardh'  have  the  usual  function  of  trituration,  as 
ants  do  not  receive  solid  food  into  the  crop.^ 

2.  The  middle  part  of  the  gizzard,  or  cylinder,  cy.gz,  is  a 
straight  cylinder,  with  a  fine,  transparent  internal  cuticle  whose 
matrix  is  surrounded  by  a  compact  coat  of  transverse  striated 
muscles.  Exteriorly  the  cylinder  appears  to  merge  directly  into 
the  stomach.  Only  the  muscular  coat,  however,  is  thus  directly 
continued  and  expanded  into  the  fine  muscular  bag-net  of  the 
stomach  (PI.  VIII,  fig.  b1). 

3.  The  internal  cuticle  of  the  gizzard  traverses  the  walls  of  the 
stomach  accompanied  b}-  its  matrix,  and  projects  within  the  cavity 
of  the  stomach,  terminating  in  an  elongated  bulb,  which  is  the 
button,  bn.gz.  (fig.  51),  bn.  (fig.  59  >,  or  posterior  part  of  the  gizzard. 
The  anterior  and  posterior  parts  of  the  gizzard  are  always  found  in 
ants,  the  first  varying  greath^,  the  latter  scarcely  at  all.  The  cyl- 
inder, on  the  contrary,  is  wholly  wanting  in  many  genera,  and  in 
others  undergoes  great  variations  of  length.  The  entire  organ  is 
united  to  the  crop  externally  by  a  strong  muscular  netting,  so  that 
the  two  might  be  compared  to  a  balloon  (crop)  and  the  car  (gizzard) 
and  the  enfolding  muscles  to  the  network  swinging  between  the 
two. 

§  4.  The  Stomach. — The  stomach,  stm  (PI.  YIII,figs.  55,  56), 
like  the  gizzard  is  alwaj'S  easily  discernible,  inasmuch  as  a  quan- 
tit}^  of  solid  amorphous  matter  within  it,  of  a  dark  brown  or 
blackish  color,  betraj^s  its  presence  even  through  the  segmental 
plates.     It  is  commonly  spherical  or  ovate  in  shape. 

§  5.  Malpighian  Tubes. — Around  the  posterior  pole  of  the 
stomach  are  grouped  the  Malpighian  vessels,  mpg  (figs.  56,  60), 
twelve  in  number. 

1  The  various  sections  of  the  bowl  appeared  to  me  to  have  upon  their 
interior  edges  certain  tooth-like  inequalities,  which  suggested  at  least  the 
office  of  triturating  or  agitating  the  passing  food.  These  may  be,  however, 
nothing  more  than  longitudinal  flutiugs  upon  the  external  surface. 


56  TROCEEDINOS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

§  6.  The  Intestine, — The  location  and  appearance  of  the  intes- 
tine, is  seen  in  fig.  ST),  more  clearly  in  fig.  .60.  The  ileum  (il) 
passes  from  the  posterioi-  pole  of  the  abdomen,  and  appears  to  be 
united  to  the  colon  (col)  by  a  fold  which  I  have  ventured  to  refer 
to  as  the  ileo-secal  valve  {il.v).  The  rectal  glands  (re.gl) 
appear  upon  the  colon,  and  the  rectum  (?'e),  a  strongly  chitinous 
and  muscuhir  structure,  terminates  in  tlie  ciHated  anus  (an). 

Finally,  PI.  YIII,  fig.  58  ^  will  show  the  relative  positions  of 
all  the  organs  opening  into  the  cloaca.  See  Explanation  of  Plates, 
fig.  58. 

We  may  now  construct  for  further  illustration  the  synthetic 
figure,  PI.  IX,  fig.  61,  giving  a  side  view  of  the  entire  intestinal 
canal  in  situ.  This  will  indicate  the  normal  position  of  the  crop 
relative  to  the  abdomen  and  the  other  alimentary"  organs.  It  will 
be  seen  that  it  occupies  a  position  anterior  and  superior  to  these. 
The  natural  tendency  of  the  pressure  caused  b}^  the  expansion  of 
the  crop,  as  it  fills  the  abdominal  cavit}',  would  be  to  force  the 
remainder  of  the  tract  backward  and  downward.  In  point  of  fact 
it  is  so  fourfd.  A  number  of  workers,  with  abdomens  in  various 
degrees  of  distension  wei'e  examined,  and  the  condition  and  site 
of  the  digestive  organs  noted.  A  few  outlines  of  these  abdomens 
are  given : 

The  series  begins  with  Fig.  63  (PI.  IX),  where  the  crop  is  shown 
in  nearly  normal  site,  and  well  filled. 

The  same  condition  is  indicated  at  Fig.  66,  except  that  the  crop 
shows  marks  of  having  once  been  quite  distended  and  afterward 
emptied. 

Fig.  64  shows  a  worker,  whose  crop  about  half  fills  the  abdomen. 
The  gizzard,  gfz,  is  forced  downward  (ventral  J  and  has  the  anterior 
poles  of  the  sepals  turned  upward  (dorsad;.  The  effect  of  sub- 
sequent pressure  (should  the  crop  have  expanded),  in  forcing  the 
stomach,  etc.,  backward  and  downward  into  the  cloacal  cavity, 
can  readily  be  predicted  from  the  figure. 

In  Figs.  62  and  65,  the  abdomens  of  workers  in  the  semi-rotund 
state,  the  distension  has  advanced  a  little  further  so  as  to  push 
the  stomacli  in  one  case  (62)  as  far  ns,  in  the  other  (65)  partly 
beyond,  the  fourth  segmental  plates,  compressing  the  intestine 
proportionatel3\ 

1  Adapted  from  Forel,  "Der  Giftapparat  und  die  Aurddriisen  der  Amei- 
sen,"  Zeitschrlftf.  wiss.  Zool.,  Bd.  XXX. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  5T 

That  the  same  results  follow  in  all  the  worker  castes  may  be 
seen  in  Fig.  6*7,  the  abfloraen  of  a  minim  or  dwarf  worker. 

Turning  to  tlie  honej'-bearers,  we  find  precisely  the  same  con- 
dition of  the  abdomen,  except  that  the  distention  of  the  crop  has 
greatly  increased,  pushing  its  walls  in  all  directions  quite  up 
against  the  inner  walls  of  the  abdomen,  forcing  the  latter  into 
rotundity,  and  compressing  the  other  organs  into  the  smaller 
space. 

Fig.  69  is  the  abdomen  of  a  honej^-bearer,  which  appeared  to  be 
a  little  short  of  the  full  rotundity.  The  crop  filled  the  entire 
cavity,  but  the  gizzard,  stomach  and  intestine,  instead  of  being- 
crowded  together  upon  each  other,  were  in  their  normal  relations, 
and  appeared  to  be  in  an  entirely  healthy  state.  The  aspect  of 
man}^  of  the  bearers  raised  the  query,  whether  the  anus  might  not 
be  sealed  by  the  organs  forced  against  it,  thus  stopping  all  excre- 
tion, and  making  the  animal  simply  a  vital  honey-pot.  The  above 
individual,  at  least,  had  every  appearance  of  normal  condition  and 
action  of  all  the  organs. 

In  the  next  example  (fig.  70),  the  gizzard,  stomach,  malpighi- 
an  vessels  and  intestine  are  forced  down  quite  within  the  compass 
of  the  fourth  pairs  of  segmental  plates,  and  directly  over  the  cloacal 
vent.  For  the  most  part  these  organs  are  situated  ventral,  but 
here  they  are  partly  dorsal  of  this  cleft.  The  most  usual  position 
of  the  stomach  in  the  honey-bearers  is  between  and  quite  close  to 
the  fifth  and  fourth  ventral  plates.  The  gizzard  is  a  little  anterior 
of  this,  the  sepals,  which  mark  the  posterior  pole,  or  entrance  of 
the  crop  within  the  gizzard,  being  directed  downward,  upward, 
downward  and  backward,  upward  and  backward,  or  forward,  at 
hap-hazard. 

Another  illustration  is  given  (fig.  68),  in  which  the  crop  of  a 
honey-bearer  is  seen  in  the  act  of  contraction,  after  having  been 
punctured  through  a  slit  (s)  in  the  abdomen.  When  one  holds  a 
rotund  up  to  the  light,  and  looks  into  the  semi-transparent  abdo- 
men, it  is  not  possible  to  distinguish  the  crop  from  the  abdominal 
membrane.  But  in  the  example  here  figured,  as  the  honey  flowed 
out  from  the  pierced  crop,  the  slowly  contracting  and  thickenino- 
folds  of  the  partly  emptied  organ  were  thus  revealed.  Nothino- 
could  demonstrate  more  clearly  than  this  experiment  and  figure 
that  it  is  the  crojj  alone  which  fills  the  distended  abdomen. 

I  venture  to  add  a  final  illustratioji  to  tliis  series.     I  was  en- 


58  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

abled  to  separate  a  crop  entire  from  the  abdomen,  and  mount  it 
for  microscopic  examination.  In  this  delicate  woi'k,  which  could 
not  otherwise  have  been  done,  I  was  aided  by  some  morbid  con- 
dition of  the  abdomen.  I  occasionally  noticed,  both  in  the  natural 
and  artificial  nests,  honej^-bearers  whose  abdomens  had  the  ap- 
pearance of  cones  (PI.  VI,  fig.  3.3)  and  the  outer  membrane  hung 
in  folds. ^  The}^  seemed  to  have  suflTered  some  injury,  which  ap- 
parently had  affected  the  crop.  It  was  from  one  of  these  that  the 
crop  (PI.  VIII,  fig.  55)  was  taken. 

These  studies  point  to  the  following  conclusions  : 

I.  First ^  and  absolutely,  that  it  is  the  crop  alone  which  contains 
the  nectar  received  at  the  mouth,  which,  immensely  distended 
thereby,  fills  the  rounded  abdomen  of  the  honey-bearer. 

II.  Second^  and  absolutel}^,  the  organs  of  the  abdominal  portion 
of  the  alimentary  canal  in  the  honey-brearers  are  ordinarilj^  in  a 
natural  state,  except  in  so  far  as  their  position  has  been  changed 
by  the  downward  and  backward  pressure  of  the  expanding  crop. 
This  condition  of  the  abdomen  is  fi-equent,  in  a  greater  or  less 
degree,  among  ants. 

There  has  been  much  error  and  loose  statement  on  this  point 
among  authors.  So  eminent  an  anatomist  as  Dr.  Joseph  Leidy 
supposed  that  the  honey  was  contained  within  the  stomach  ;  that 
all  the  other  viscera  of  the  stomach  were  obliterated,  and  that 
even  the  tracheal  A^essels  had  entirely  disappeared.^  Dr.  Oscar 
Loew^  makes  some  correct  notices  of  the  honey -ant,  as  seen  at  Santa 
Fe,  New  Mexico,  but  permits  himself  to  recognize  "  the  intestine  .  . 
as  a  narrow  canal  winding  through  the  rounded  and  puffed  up  ab- 
domen." This  could  only,  in  any  sense,  be  affirmed  of  a  small 
part  of  the  abdomen,  the  posterior  portion  into  which,  as  we  have 
seen,  the  intestine  is  crowded.     It  is  possible  that  the  dorsal  ves- 

1  I  do  not  credit  the  statement  (Loew)  that  many  of  the  rotunds  burst 
by  force  of  the  pressure  upon  the  crop.  Probably  this  never  occurs  in  na- 
ture. The  spots  of  moistened  clay  seen  by  observers  rather  mark  the 
wreck  of  ants  crushed  by  pressure  upon  the  chambers  and  galleries  during 
excavation,  or  ruptured  by  falling  from  the  roosts. 

2  Proceedings  Academy  Natural  Science,  Vol.  VI,  1853,  p.  72.  This, 
however,  was  twenty- nine  years  ago. 

^  Chemist  and  mineralogist  to  Lieut.  "Wheeler's  Exploring  Expedition, 
American  Naturalist,  Vol.  VIII,  1874,  p.  365-6. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  59 

sel  may  have  been  mistaken  for  the  intestine,  as  this  may  be  seen 
in  some  specimens  very  plainly. 

Dr.  James  Blake  ^  has  published  a  brief  report  in  which  he 
falls  upon  an  error  quite  the  reverse  of  Dr  Loew.^  "  The  intes- 
tine of  the  insect,"  he  says, "  is  not  continued  beyond  the  thorax,  so 
that  there  is  no  way  in  which  the  remains  of  the  food  can  be  ex- 
pelled from  the  body,  except  by  the  mouth."  It  follows,  of  course, 
that  with  this  view,  he  should  further  err  in  supposing  the  honey- 
bag  to  be  formed  simply  by  the  expansion  of  the  abdominal  seg- 
ments. 

The  illustrations  above  figured,  on  the  contrary,  show  that  the 
intestinal  canal  has  neither  been  ruptured,  nor  resorbed,  nor  other- 
wise disposed  of  than  is  quite  natural.^ 

III.  Third,  it  is  seen  that  the  process  by  which  the  rotundity 
of  the  honey-bearers  has  probably  been  produced,  has  its  exact 
counterpart  in  the  ordinary  distension  of  the  crop  in  over-fed 
ants  ;  that,  at  least,  the  condition  of  the  alimentar}-  canal,  in  all 
the  castes  is  the  same,  differing  only  in  degree,  and  therefore,  the 
probability  is  very  great  that  the  honey-hearer  is  simply  a  worker 
with  an  overgroivn  abdomen. 

If  this  last  conclusion  has  not  been  fully  demonstrated,  it  has 
at  least  been  shown  that  there  is  no  anatomical  or  physiological 
obstacle  thereto,  but  very  much  confirmatory  thereof. 

The  Australian  Honey-Ant. — An  exceedingly  interesting 
discovery  of  a  new  species  of  honey-ant,  adds  to  the  probability 
of  this  last  conclusion.  Sir  John  Lubbock  has  described  this 
species  as  Gamponotus  ijijlatus,*  from  specimens  collected  at 
Adelaide,  Australia.  I  received  examples  through  the  courtesy 
of  Mr.  Gerald  Waller,  last  summer,  which  enabled  me  even  in 
advance  of  Lubbock's  admirable  description,  to  note  that  a  con- 

^  Proceedings  California  Academy  Science,  1873,  part  II,  page  98. 

2  Dr.  Forel,  in  the  communication  to  the  Morphologic©  physiological  So- 
ciety of  Munich,  already  alluded  to,  appears  to  me  to  have  misunderstood 
Dr.  Loew's  published  statement.  Dr.  L.  erred  in  seeing  too  much  intestine, 
instead  of  none  at  all. 

^  It  is  not  worth  while  to  more  than  mention  here  the  opinion  which  has 
leen  largely  circulated,  that  the  workers  bite  and  wound  the  ends  of  the 
ahdomens,  producing  thereby  an  inflammation  which  seals  up  the  anus, 
stops  all  excretion,  and  so  causes  the  rei^letion  of  the  abdomen. 

*  Journal  Linn.  Soc.  Zoology,  1880^  Vol..  XV,  p.  185,  seq. 


60  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

dition  supposed  to  be  peculiar  to  our  American  Melliger,  obtained 
in  an  Australian  species  belonging  to  a  genus  quite  removed  from 
Myrmecocystus.  Mr.  Waller  could  tell  me  nothing  of  the  habits 
or  luibitat  of  C.  inflatus,  and  Lubbock  has  no  account  of  an}'. 
But  tlie  congeners  of  the  Australian  insect  are  "  Carpenter  ants," 
quite  generally  making  tlieir  formicaries  in  the  roots  and  trunks 
of  trees,  and  thus  in  economy  as  well  as  structure  differ  from  M. 
hortus-deorum.  This  widening  of  the  range  within  which  this 
hitherto  phenomenonal  condition  of  the  abdomen  is  found,  not 
only  raises  the  suggestion  which  Sir  John  makes  of  an  independent 
origin  of  the  modification  in  the  two  species,  but  also  adds  to 
the  probability  that  the  modification  may  have  qriginated  in  the 
natural  mode  which  I  have  described. 

It  is  to  be  regretted  that  Lubbock  did  not  make  an  examination 
of  the  alimentary  canal  of  his  species,  which,  with  tlie  material 
and  resources  at  his  command,  would  doubtless  have  been  highly 
satisfactory.  However,  I  undertook  from  my  limited  material,  to 
make  at  least  so  mucli  of  a  stud}^  of  the  digestive  organs  as  would 
permit  some  comparison  with  results  obtained  from  Hortus- 
deorum.  I  had  but  one  perfect  specimen,  which  is  figured  Plate 
•X,  fig.  74.  The  abdomen  of  this  example  was  removed  and  care- 
fully mounted  without  rupturing  the  abdominal  walls.  The 
result  is  shown  at  Plate  IX,  fig.  71,  and  as  will  at  once  be  seen, 
corresponds  with  those  obtained  fully  from  Hortus-deorum,  and 
as  far  as  pursued,  from  Mexicanus  also.  The  crop  (fig.  71)  fills 
the  cavity  of  the  abdomen,  and  the  rest  of  the  digestive  organs 
are  seen  crowded  into  the  anal  region.  The  gizzard  has  the 
general  features  of  that  of  Hortus-deorum,  but  has  marked  charac- 
teristics, quite  identical  with  those  of  the  genus  Camponotus  as 
pointed  out  by  Forel.'  The  sepals  are  not  deflected  at  the  anterior 
pole,  as  in  the  lily-shaped  sepals  of  Hortus-deorum,  but  are  clavate 
and  straight. 

This  fact  certainly  strengthens  the  conclusion  arrived  at  con- 
cerning the  American  species  of  honey-bearer,  viz.,  that  the  rotund 
has  been  developed  by  natural  habit  from  the  ordinary  worker, 
and  that  the  possibilities  of  such  a  condition  exist  in  the  structure 
and  functions  of  all  nectar-feeding  ants.  Why  the  extraordinarily 
distended  crop  seen  in  the  honey-ant  should  be  limited  to  two 

'  Etudes  Myrmecologiques,  Bull.  Soc.  Vaud.  de  Sci.  Nat.  1878.  PI 
XXIII,  fig.  1. 


1881].  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  61 

species  (so  far  as  known),  and  why  so  limited  a  number  of  workers 
in  the  formicaries  of  these  two  species  should  develop  the  round 
abdomen,  are  questions  that  provoke  sufficient  wonder,  but  j-ield 
scant  satisfaction. 

XI.  Possible  Organs  of  Stridl'lation  in  Ants. 

The  segmental  plates  of  the  abdomen  are  composed  of  numer- 
ous hexagonal  epithelial  scales,  PI.  YII,  fig.  48,  which  present  a 
very  beautiful  appearance,  as  of  delicate  mosaics,  when  viewed 
througli  a  microscope.  When  a  profile  view  of  one  of  these  plates 
is  exposed  to  the  lens,  as  at  fig.  49,  the  scales  are  seen  to  be 
imbricated,  that  is,  to  overlap  each  other  like  tiles  on  a  house 
roof,  and  show  the  serrate  edge  figured  in  the  cuts,  figs.  49  and 
50.  The  former  (49)  is  drawn  from  a  section  of  Gamponotus 
inflatus,  and  the  latter  (50)  from  Hortus-deorum.  This  serrate 
edge  not  only  shows  upon  the  external  part  of  the  plate  e.  ab.  pL, 
but  upon  the  imbricated  portion,  i.  ab.  pi.  By  referring  to  the 
manner  in  which  the  one  part  overlaps  the  other  shown  at  figs. 
53,  54,  it  may  be  seen  that  a  backward  and  forward  motion  of 
the  plates  iipon  each  other  might  produce  a  faint  rasping  sound. 
That  this  motion  is  entirely  possible  can  hardly  be  doubted.  The 
abdominal  plates  are  continually,  though  gradually,  sliding  out 
and  in,  like  the  parts  of  a  telescope,  under  the  expansion  and 
contraction  of  the  crop,  as  the  ant  feeds  or  regurgitates  the  con- 
tained nectar.  All  that  is  required  to  have  the  complete  condi- 
tions for  stridulation  seems,  therefore,  to  be  the  muscular  ability 
to  perform  this  action  rapidly;  which,  it  appears  to  me,  ants  cer- 
tainly possess. 

I  have  often  noticed  the  peculiar  hiss-z-z-z !  which  arises  from 
an  excited  colonj^  or  column  of  ants,  a  sound  which  grows  in 
intensity  according  to  the  degree  of  excitement.  I  have  also  met 
an  opinion  prevalent  among  ordinary  observers,  that  the  ants 
produce  this  sound  by  some  organ  analogous  to  some  one  of  those 
by  which  other  insects  produce  musical  notes  or  noises — in  short 
(to  use  the  popular  phrase),  that  "ants  sing."  But  I  have  here- 
tofore been  disposed  to  consider  the  noise  referred  to  simply  as 
the  result  of  friction  of  a  great  multitude  of  insects  moving  rapidly 
over  the  surface  of  the  earth,  the  litter  of  leaves,  twigs,  etc.,  and 
against  the  hard,  shell-like  bodies  of  their  fellows,  or  possibly  (also) 
b}'  the  gratings  of  the  hard  tooth-like  mandibles  upon  each  other. 


62  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

I  am  not  yet  prepared  to  abandon  this  opinion,  nor  to  affirm  that 
ants  do  produce  audible  sounds  by  proper  stridulating  organs ; 
but  simply  record  the  structural  possibility  of  such  behavior. 

Since  making  the  above  note,  Mr.  Swinton's  work  on  "Insect 
Variety  "  ^  has  reached  me.  The  author  records  an  example  of 
what  seemed  to  be  an  act  of  stridulation  by  a  small  yellow  ant, 
Myrmica  ruginodis. 

This  insect  was  observed  stationed  near  the  edge  of  an  inverted 
wine  glass,  underneath  which  it  had  been  confined,  its  head  down- 
ward, rapidly  vibrating  its  abdomen  vertically  from  the  pedicle, 
and  simultaneously  giving  out  a  continuous  singing  sound,  in 
color  and  intensity  resembling  the  sharp  whining  of  the  little 
dipteron  Syrilla  pipens. 

Concluding  that  the  rhythmical  motion  accompanying  the 
music  indicated  this  ant  as  a  stridulator,  the  author  undertook  a 
microscopic  stud^^  of  its  anatomy,  from  which  the  following  facts 
appear :  ^  The  ant  belongs  to  the  family  Myrmicid^,  which  are 
distinguished  from  the  Formicid^,  to  which  our  honey  ant 
belongs,  by  having  two  knots  or  nodes  to  the  petiole.  The  second 
or  posterior  knot  is  commonly  the  larger,  and  is  placed  quite  near 
to  the  anterior  pole  of  the  abdomen.  Upon  the  insertion  of  the 
abdomen  into  this  node,  were  observed  twelve  minute  yet  regular 
annular  striae.  (PI.  X,  fig.  81.)  This  stria'ion  was  produced,  but 
less  distinctly,  upon  the  articulation  of  this  (the  second)  node 
with  the  first  (anterior)  node.  It  was  conjectured  that  the  rapid 
movement  of  these  joints  of  the  petiole,  back  and  forward  upon 
each  other  and  upon  the  abdomen  (like  the  jointed  tubes  of  a 
telescope),  produced  the  sound  above  described.  As  the  nodes 
are  to  be  regarded  as  abbreviated  segments  of  the  abdomen,  and 
as  the  abdominal  segments  have  already  been  shown  to  be  capable 
of  movement  one  upon  another,  Mr.  Swinton's  interesting  obser- 
vation gives  new  value  to  the  suggestion  above  made  concerning 
the  structural  possibility  of  stridulation  in  the  honey  ant  and 
others  of  like  organism. 

1  "Insect  Variety,  its  Propagation  and  Distribution,"  by  A.  H.  Swin- 
ton,  member  of  the  Entomological  Society  of  London,  p.  106,  and  PI.  VI, 
fig.  7. 

2  The  writer's  account  is  somewhat  confused  by  false  punctuation,  and 
he  falls  into  the  error  of  conjecturing  that  the  small  worker  may  have  been 
a  male.  I  have  given  my  understanding  of  the  structure  as  derived  chiefly 
from  the  figure,  which  I  reproduce  with  some  alteration. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  63 


XII.  Destruction  of  the  Ants  by  Mites. 

The  untimely  end  of  my  artificial  colonies  is  worthy  of  a  passing 
note.  The  ants  were  brought  from  Colorado  in  large  jars,  domi- 
ciled in  their  native  soil.  Every  precaution  which  circumstances 
would  allow  was  taken  to  preserve  their  health,  but  after  a  con- 
finement of  over  seven  months,  during  which  mau}^  of  the  obser- 
vations noted  above  were  made,  they  became  infested  with  mites. 
These  parasites,  or  their  germs,  were  probably  brought  from 
Colorado  with  the  insects,  although  I  did  not  observe  them  until 
late  in  their  imprisoment.  However,  I  have  seen  the  same  or 
similar  parasites  upon  other  ants  while  in  their  home-nest,  and 
more  than  once  have  suffered  the  loss  of  colonized  formicaries 
from  their  inroads. 

In  the  case  of  the  hone^-  ants  I  was  powerless  to  give  relief  of 
any  kind,  and  witnessed  with  real  grief  the  helpless  little  sufferei's 
in  their  struggles  to  free  themselves  from  their  destroyers.  I  have 
figured  the  head  of  an  ant  thus  infested,  at  PI.  VII,  fig.  39,  where 
the  mites  ma}"  be  seen  clinging  to  the  cheek,  mandibles  and 
antennae.  I  have  spared  the  feelings  of  my  readers  so  far  as  to 
figure  but  a  few  of  the  pests.  In  point  of  fact  they  literally 
covered  the  moiith  parts,  where  they  were  chiefly  congregated, 
although  the}'  were  attached  to  other  parts  of  the  bod}-.  The 
poor  "  host,"  although  so  admirably  provided  with  implements 
for  cleansing  her  person — such  as  the  mandibles,  mouth  and  tarsal 
comb— found  all  efforts  to  rid  herself  of  her  "  guests  "  futil^. 
Even  that  friendly  aid  in  toilet  service  which  one  emmet  is  wont 
to  extend  to  another,  was  vain.  Graduall}^  the  poor  victim 
yielded  life  to  the  parasitic  swarm  that  sucked  at  her  vital  juices. 
The  charnel-house — the  little  cemetery  centre  at  one  side  of  the 
formicar}' — gained  many  inmates  daily ;  the  galleries  and  cham- 
bers thinned  of  their  busy  populace  and  grew  lonely ;  at  last,  as 
in  some  plague-stricken  human  commonwealth,  the  dead  were 
suffered  to  lie  where  they  fell,  for  the  living  were  themselves 
sealed  to  death,  and  unable  to  give  their  comrades  sepulture.  So 
my  nests  faded  away,  until,  unwilling  longer  to  witness  their  suf- 
ferings, I  gave  them  all  a  painless  death. 

My  studies  were  seriously  interfered  with  by  this  calamit}-,  as 
many  of  my  well-nigh  ripened  experiments  thus  came  to  nought. 
But  one  cannot  complain,  for  Nature  and  Destiny  pursue  ants 


64  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

also,  and  that  this  i)articular  form  of  insect  doom  is  unhappily 
not  rare  has  long  ago  been  voiced  in  tlie  familiar  couplet : — 

"  Great  fleas  have  little  fleas,  they  smaller  fleas  to  bite  'em  ; 
Smaller  fleas  have  lesser  fleas,  and  so  ad  infinitum,^'' 

One  might  pass  to  the  opposite  pole  of  the  zoological  series — 
TVIan — and  add  the  I'eflection  of  Quintus  Serenus  upon  the  death 
of  the  Dictator  Sylla : — 

'*  Great  Sylla,  too,  the  fatal  scourge  hath  known, 
*  Slain  by  a  host  far  mightier  than  his  own," 

It  might  be  supposed,  at  least  I  had  so  thought,  that  the 
presence  of  these  parasites  would  greatly  irritate  the  ants,  and 
produce  an  excited  behavior,  and  animated  struggles  to  be  rid  of 
their  guests.  On  the  contrary,  they  endured  the  affliction  with 
wonderful  patience.  It  seemed  to  me,  although  one  must  allow 
in  such  cases  for  the  anthropomorphic  color  upon  his  observa- 
tions, that  the  unfortunate  creatures  were  quite  conscious  of  their 
doom,  of  the  hopelessness  of  contending  against  it,  and  had 
yielded  tliemselves  in  a  philosophic  resignation. 

The  mites  are,  in  color,  white,  almost  transparent,  and  are 
about  one  millimetre  in  length.  I  am  not  certain  as  to  the  species, 
but  present  correct  drawings  of  the  animals,  from  wdiich  they 
ma}'  be  determined  by  a  competent  authority.  (See  PI.  VII, 
figs.  40,  41).  Greatly  magnified  views,  in  several  degrees  of  ex- 
pansion, of  the  sucking  organs,  by  which  the  mites  cling  to  their 
host,  are  shown  at  figs.  42,  43,  44. 

XIII.  Previous  Accounts  of  the  Honey-Ant. 

The  first  account  of  the  Honey-ant  was  given  to  the  world  by  Dr. 
Pablo  de  Llave,  in  the  year  A.  D.  1832,  in  a  Mexican  journal.' 
A  translation  into  French  of  the  substance  of  this  paper  was  given 
by  Monsieur  H.  Lucas  in  the  French  Review  and  Magazine  of 
Zoology,  June,  1860.^  Meanwhile  (1838),  M.  Wesmael  had  pub- 
lished a  description  of  the  ant,  with  figures,  without  knowledge  of 
the  above  paper  of  Llave,  establishing  for  it  the  Genus  Myrmeco- 
CYSTUS.     Wesmael 's  generic  name  remains,  but  his  specific  name 

^  Registro  trimestre  o  collecion  de  Memorias  de  Historia  literatura  cien- 
cias  y  Artes,  1832. 
2  Revue  et  Magazin  de  Zoologie,  Tome  XII,  18G0,  p.  271. 


1881.J  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  65 

{Mexicanus)  has  of  course  yielded  to  that  of  Llave,  modified, 
liowever,  from  MeUigera  to  MelUger.  The  Colorado  insects,  upon 
"which  the  studies  of  this  paper  are  based,  I  have  ventured  to 
regard  as  a  new  variety,  and  have  named  Myrmecocystus  liortus- 
deorum,  and  thus  have  retained  Wesmael's  name  as  a  variety  name. 

It  will  be  well  to  state  briefly  the  facts  in  the  economy  of  these 
insects  indicated  in  the  foregoing  and  other  papers,  in  order  to 
mark  precisely  the  new  facts  which  have  now  been  communicated 
here. 

Llave 's  information  was  all  at  second  hand,  he  having  made  no 
personal  observations  of  the  habits  of  Melliger.  From  a  person 
living  at  Dolores,  a  village  in  the  vicinitj^  of  the  cit}^  of  Mexico, 
he  learned  : 

1.  That  the  ants  were  popularly  known  under  the  name  of 
Busileras; 

2.  That  they  do  not  erect  heaps  of  earth  at  the  entrance  to  their 
nests ; 

3.  That  on  opening  the  nest,  a  species  of  gallerj'  is  reached,  to 
the  roof  of  which  certain  ants  are  suspended,  packed  one  against 
the  other ; 

4.  That  these  ants  cover  the  roof  as  well  as  the  wall  of  the 
gallery. 

5.  The  women  and  children  of  the  valley  know  these  nests  per- 
fectly well,  and  frequently  open  them  for  the  sake  of  the  honey- 
bearers,  or  rotunds.  The  honej'  is  sucked  from  the  abdomen  of  the 
rotunds,  with  great  relish,  at  the  nests  ;  or,  if  it  is  wished  to  pre- 
serve them,  they  are  lifted  by  the  head  and  thorax  and  placed 
upon  plates,  in  which  they  grace  the  village  feasts,  and  are  eaten 
as  delicacies. 

6.  The  rotunds  when  thus  placed  together,  stir  around,  lay  hold 
of  and  tear  one  another,  and  finally  end  life  by  bursting. 

7.  The  skin  of  the  abdomen,  which  binds  the  segments  together, 
is  so  thin,  and  the  upper  coat  so  distended,  on  account  of  the 
quantity  of  honey  which  it  encloses,  that  the  least  pressure  suf- 
fices to  cause  the  ants  to  disgorge. 

8.  When  they  do  not  so  disgorge,  that  is,  by  elevating  the  head 
and  thorax,  the  honey  diminishes,  and  the  ants  eat  it. 

9.  Dr.  Llave  observed,  moreover,  from  specimens  of  the  ants 
sent  to  him,  that  there  were  difterent  castes  of  workers  and  degrees 
of  distension  in  the  abdomens,  and 


66  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

10.  That  the  honey  in  the  rotunds  varied  in  color  from  a  crystal 
"whiteness  to  a  wine-color. 

Several  of  the  above  statements,  as  has  been  seen,  are  without 
foundation,  but  the  majority  of  them  are  confirmed  in  whole  or 
part  b}"^  my  observations. 

Wesmael,^  who  made  his  study  from  specimens  sent  him  from 
Mexico  bj^  the  Belgian  Envoy,  Baron  Normann,  records  his 
credence  of  the  theory  announced  by  that  gentleman,  viz.,  that 
the  honey-bearer  elaborates  the  honey  and  deposits  it  in  certain 
reservoirs,  analogous  to  the  cells  of  bees,  for  the  nurture  of  the 
formicary.  Baron  Normann  was  unable  to  obtain  examples  of 
these  reservoirs  to  send  to  Europe,  or  rather  failed  to  do  so  under 
the  conviction  that  they  would  be  destroyed  during  shipment.  In 
point  of  fact,  such  reservoirs  exist  only  in  imagination. 

One  of  the  most  perplexing  accounts  of  the  honey-ant  is  that  of 
Mr.  Henry  Edwards.^  The  statements  recorded  are  made  at 
second  hand  from  the  verbal  narrative  of  a  Capt.  W.  B.  Fleeson, 
whose  observations  were  made  at  or  near  Santa  Fe.  They 
are  so  extraordinary  and  contradictor}'  of  my  own  experiences, 
that  I  am  compelled  to  withhold  credence,  until  some  experienced 
observer  shall  have  corroborated  them,  a  result  of  which  I  have 
little  expectation.  According  to  this  account,  no  exterior  mound- 
let  surmounts  the  formicary,  but  simply  two  openings  into  the 
earth.  Within  the  nest,  at  a  depth  of  about  three  feet,  "a  small 
excavation  is  reached,  across  which  is  spread,  in  the  form  of  a 
spider's  web,  a  network  of  squares  spread  by  the  insects,  the 
squares  being  about  one-quarter  inch  across,  and  the  ends  of  the 
web^  fastened  firmly  to  the  earth  at  the  sides  of  the  hollowed 
space  which  forms  the  bottom  of  the  excavation.  In  each  one  of 
the  sqiiares,  supported  by  the  web,  sits  one  of  the  honey-making 
workers,  apparently  in  the  condition  of  a  prisoner,  as  it  does  not 
appear  that  these  creatures  ever  quit  the  nest." 

But  the  marvels  of  this  strange  story  are  not  exhausted.     "  The 

1  Bulletin  de  1'  Acad.  Roy.  des  Sci.  et  Belles  lettre  de  Bruxelles,  Tome 
V  p.  770.     PI.  XIX,  figs.  1-4. 

2  Proceed.  California  Acad,  of  Sciences,  Vol.  V.  1873,  p.  72  ;  "  Notes  on 
the  Honey-making  Ants  of  Texas  and  New  Mexico." 

^  Of  course,  this  is  pure  fiction,  as  no  ant  makes  a  web,  or  anything  that 
could  well  suggest  one.  The  cutting  ant  does  make  out  of  fragments  of 
leaves  a  "comb"  of  more  or  less  regular  cells,  resembling  the  nests  of  the 
paper-making  wasps. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  67 

inmates  of  the  formicaiy  are  composed  of  two  distinct  species, 
apparently  even  of  different  genera,  of  ants.  There  are  the  ordi- 
nary yellow  workers  and  houey-bearers  of  Melliger,  and  besides, 
black  workers,  who  act  as  guards  and  purveyors.  One  column  of 
the  blacks  surrounds  the  openings  on  three  sides,  attacking, 
driving  off  or  destroj'ing  all  intruding  insects.  Another  column 
bears,  through  the  unguarded  side  of  the  hollow  square,  fragments 
of  flowers,  aromatic  leaves  and  pollen,  which  (adds  our  author), 
by  a  process  analogous  to  that  of  the  bee,  the  honej'-makers  con- 
vert into  honej'." 

One  can  hardly  refrain  from  the  thought  that  Capt.  Fleeson 
was  testing  the  credulity  of  the  writer  by  one  of  those  jokes  of 
which  naturalists  are  occasionally  the  victims.  But,  if  the  narra- 
tive is  to  be  taken  in  good  faith,  I  can  onl}^  explain  the  facts  by 
supposing,  first,  that  the  observer  happened  upon  a  nest  of  cutting- 
ants  (Atta  fervens),  within  whose  boundaries  a  nest  of  Melliger 
had  chanced  to  be  established,  and  had  confounded  the  habits  of 
the  two  as  those  of  one  formicary;  or,  second,  that  the  cutting- 
ant,  or  some  other  species  of  similar  economy,  has  really  acquired 
the  habit  of  kidnapping  and  domesticating  the  honej'-ant  for  the 
sake  of  its  treasured  sweets,  precisely  as  man}^  ants  domesticate 
aphides ;  or,  as  the  slave-making  ants,  Formica  sanguinea  and 
Folyergus  lucidus,  domesticate  Formica  fusca  and  F.  Schauffusxi.^ 

One  of  the  latest  accounts  of  the  honey-ant,  and  so  far  as  it 
goes,  one  of  the  best,  is  that  of  Mr,  Saunders,  the  editor  of  the 
Canadian  Entomologist,^  who  communicates  to  his  journal  some 
observations  made  by  Mr.  Kummeck,  at  Santa  Fe.^  According 
to  this  observer,  considerable  numbers  of  these  insects  are  found 
in  the  mountains  of  that  vicinity.     He  sat  by  a  nest  six  or  seven 

1  One  may  not  be  over  rash  in  refusing  belief  even  to  facts  that  go  counter 
to  all  past  experiences,  for  the  marvels  of  Nature  are  ever  widening  within 
our  view.  While,  therefore,  I  am  inclined  to  reject  the  whole  story,  I  await 
the  observation  of  some  trained  naturalist,  giving  the  account  the  benefit 
of  the  above  possible  explanations. 

2  Can.  Entom.,  1875,  Vol.  VII,  pp.  12-13. 

*  I  may  be  permitted  to  explain  why  I  did  not  go  to  New  Mexico,  to 
attempt  on  the  spot  a  solution  of  some  of  the  questions  raised  by  these 
accounts.  I  had  made  every  arrangement  to  do  so,  after  my  studies  in  the 
Garden-of-the-gods  were  completed,  but  on  the  morning  that  I  was  to  break 
camp,  was  taken  with  a  sudden  and  violent  illness  which  compelled  me  to 
abandon  my  journey. 


68  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

hours  and  noticed  the  workers  carry  home  leaves  of  different  plants 
to  feed,  as  he  supposed,  "the  others  that  produce  the  honey," 
This  would  seem  to  conhrm  the  leaf-bearing  habit  quoted  by  Mr. 
Edwards  from  Capt.  Fleeson.  The  inference  as  to  the  use  of 
these  leaves  is,  however,  quite  unwarranted,  as  the  portage  of 
leaves,  etc.,  into  nests  is  not  an  uncommon  habit  among  ants 
of  divers  species.  Without  stopping  to  discuss  the  question 
whether  such  material  may  contribute  to  the  food  suppl}'  of  the 
formicary,  it  may  be  remarked  that  its  most  probable  and  ordinary 
use  is  for  purposes  of  architecture  or  nest-building, 

Mr.  Kurameck  also  makes  the  remark,  which  I  had  not  seen 
at  the  time  my  own  conclusions  had  been  reached,  that  "  in  early 
life  none  of  these  insects  present  any  unusual  distension  of  the 
body,  but  when  arrived  at  a  certain  period  of  maturity  some 
individuals  begin  to  show  a  distended  abdomen." 

The  ant  honey  has  no  commercial  value  among  the  New  Mexi- 
cans. It  has  a  place,  however,  as  a  remedy  in  the  domestic  thera- 
peutics of  the  native  Indians,  who  compound  a  drink  by  mixing 
three  to  four  drachms  of  the  honey  with  six  ounces  of  water.  The 
drink  is  used  in  cases  of  fever.  The  honey  is  also  applied  as  an 
unguent  in  eye  diseases,  especially  cataract. 

To  the  above  may  properly  be  added  two  accounts  of  my  own 
studies  published  in  the  London  Jow^-nal  of  Science}  These  are 
reports  made  hy  Mr.  Morris,  of  the  verbal  communications  in 
which  my  observations  were  originally  announced  to  the  Academy 
of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia.  They  were  made  and  printed 
without  any  oversight  or  responsibility  on  my  part,  but  are 
admirably,  and  in  the  main,  accurately  done.  They  have  been 
reproduced  with  various  degrees  of  fulness  in  other  journals. 

Such  other  notices  of  this  ant  as  I  have  been  able  to  find,  and 
have  had  occasion  to  use,  will  be  found  properly  referred  to  in  the 
text  of  this  paper,  where  those  who  are  interested  in  the  literature 
can  readil}^  find  them. 

1  .Tour.  Sci.,  February,  1880,  ''  Living  Honey  Comb  ;  a  novel  phase  of 
Ant  Life."  By  Mr,  C,  Morris.  Ibid.  July,  1880,  "Habits  and  Anatomy 
of  the  Honey-bearing  Ant."     By  Charles  Morris. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  69 

XIV.   Description  of  Species. 

FORMICARI.E. 

Family  FORMICIDJE. 

Subfamily  CAMPOXOTID^  (Forel). 

Genus  MYRMECOCYSTUS,  Wesmael, 

CataglypMs,  Foerster,  Vevli.  d,  Nat.  Ver.  d.  Rheinl.,  1850  ,  Mayr,  Europ. 

Formic,  1861;  Norton,  Wheeler's  Report,  Vol.  V,  Zool.,  p.  734. 
Monocumbus,  Mayr,  Verb.  d.  Zool.-bot.  Ver.  in  Wien,  1855. 
Myrmecocystus,  Forel,  Etudes  Myrmecologiques,  Bull.  Soc.  Vaud.  de  Sci. 

Nat. 

M.  melliger,  Llave. 

1.  Var.  mexicanus,  Wesm. 

2.  Var.  hortus-deorum,  McCook. 

Workers. — Three  castes,  major,  minor  and  minim  or  dwarf. 
Color,  a  uniform  light  yellow ;  the  body  is  covered  quite  tliickly, 
the  legs  more  thickl}',  with  short  yellow  hairs.  The  maxillary 
palps  are  very  long,  six-jointed,  third  joint  longest ;  they  are 
covered,  especially  beneath,  with  long  hairs,  curved  backward. 
Lf\,bial  palps  four  joints  ;  mandibles  with  nine  teeth.  The  head  is 
quadrate,  in  the  worker-major  more  rounded  at  the  sides  than 
with  the  minor  and  dwarf;  wider  than  the  thorax.  Clypeus 
smooth,  rounded,  slightly  flattened  in  front  of  the  frontal  area. 
Frontal  area  smooth,  shining,  triangular,  somewliat  truncated 
posteriorly.  Ocelli  sufficiently  prominent ;  a  tuft  of  hairs  on  the 
face  beneath,  directed  forward.  The  body  is  of  good  length, 
narrow  and  compressed  beneath  at  the  mesothorax ;  metanotum 
as  high  as,  or  slightly  higher  than  the  pronotum.  The  node 
cordate,  cleft  at  the  tip,  thickened  at  the  base,  set  perpendicularly 
upon  the  petiole.  Anns  strong!}'  ciliated.  Length,  worker-major, 
8^  mm. ;  worker-minor,  7  mm, ;  worker-minim,  5^  mm. 

Honey-bearers  —A  sedentary  class  or  caste  distinguished  by 
alxloraens  distended  into  spherical  form  by  expansion  of  the  crop 
filled  with  grape-sugar.  The  length  (including  abdomen)  is  13 
mm.  (one-half  inch) ;  the  proportions  and  description  of  the  head 
and  body  are  those  of  the  worker-major,  of  which  it  may  be  a 
developed  form. 

Female Virgin  queen,  total  length,  13  mm.,  as  follows  :  Man- 
dibles, 1  m. ;  head,  2  mm. ;  body,  5  mm. ;  abdomen,  5  mm.     Width 


70 


PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF 


[1881. 


of  abdomen,  3  mm. ;  of  prothorax,  2  mm.  Color,  livid  yellow. 
Fore-wing,  14  mm.  long;  venation  as  in  PI.  X,  fig.  17. 

Male. — Length,  5  mm. ;  length  of  fore-wing,  5^  mm.  Color, 
livid  yellow  ;  the  head,  upper  part  of  thorax  and  dorsum  of  abdo- 
men blackish.  The  mandible  has  one  feeble  tooth  at  the  tip,  and 
two  others  shorter  and  feebler. 

Habitat. — Southern  Colorado,  occupying  subterranean  formica- 
ries with  small  gravel-covered  exterior  moundlet,  pierced  by  one 
central  gallery. 

ALPHABETICAL  KEY  TO  REFERENCES  IN  THE 
PLATES. 

The  references  are  uniform  in  application  throughout  all  the 
figures.  References  which  occur  only  once,  and  are  explained  in 
the  "  Explanation  of  Plates,"  are  not  placed  in  the  Key. 


«6.,  abdomen. 
ab.  pi.,  abdominal  plate. 
ah.  pi.  (Z,  abdominal  plate  dorsal. 
ah.  p>l.  I',  abdominal  plate  ven- 
tral, 
a??,  anus. 

an.  sp,  scape  of  antenna. 
ant^  antennse. 

he.  s,  buccal  or  mouth  sac. 
h.  gz^  bowl  of  gizzard. 
hn.  gz,  button  of  gizzard. 
h.  ms,  branched  muscles. 

CL,  Clypeus. 

G.  ms,  crop  muscles. 

Col,  colon. 

Cy.  gz,  cylinder  of  gizzard. 

D,  dorsal. 

E,  epithelium. 

E.  I.  s,  epithelium   imbricated, 
serrate  edge.] 


E.  ab.  pi,   exterior  abdominal 

plate. 
Epc,  epicranium. 

f.  ar,  frontal  area. 
fe77i,  femora. 
Jig,  flagellum  of  antenna. 
fm,  foramen. 

yz,  gizzard. 

hy,  hypopygium. 

i.  ah.  pZ,  interior  abdominal  plate. 

il,  ileum. 

il.  V,  ileo-secal  valve. 

in,  intestine. 

lb,  labium. 

lb.  p,  labial  paljjs. 

Ibm,  labrum. 

vih,  mandibles, 
mo,  mouth. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA  71 

mpg,  malpighian  tubes.  pr.  th,  prothorax. 

VIS,  muscles.  py,  pygidium. 

m.  th,  mesothorax.  px,  pharynx 

met.  th,  metathorax. 

m.  tr,  metatarsus.  ^^'  ^^«^"°^- 

mx,  maxilla.  ^^-  ^h  rectal  glands. 

mx.  p,  maxillary  palpi.  g_  ^^^  g^p^lg  ^f;  gizzard. 

stm,  stomach. 


nd,  node  of  petiole 
7ik,  neck. 


str,  striae. 
su,  sucker. 


00^9,  occiput.  tib,  tibia. 

^^'  ocelli.  i^^  tongue, 

ffi,  esophagus.  t,.^  tarsus. 

2).  ms,  pharj-ngeal  muscle.  V,  ventral. 


EXPLANATIOX  OF  PLATES.^ 

Plate  I. 

Fig.  2.  Yiew  of  my  camp  in  the  Garden  of  the  gods,  showing 
the  site  of  some  of  the  nests  of  the  honey  ants  studied.  The 
view  is  taken  from  the  rocks  at  the  junction  of  Adams  and  Yon 
Hagen  ridges  (see  Fig.  1,  p.  19),  and  looks  towards  the  south,  and 
the  eastern  face  of  Pike's  Peak.  One  of  the  nests  is  shown  in 
the  foreground,  and  the  sites  of  others  are  indicated  by  the  white 
circles  on  the  tops  of  the  ridges.  My  tent  and  booth  are  seen 
near  the  centre  of  the  sketch,  and  just  opposite,  on  the  right,  is 
the  oak  copse  in  which  the  ants  were  discovered  feeding  on  the 
exudations  of  galls.     Page  19. 

Plate  II. 

Fig.  3.  Elevated  gravel  cone  of  a  honey-ant  nest ;  the  gravel  is 
of  red  sandstone,  and  the  rocks  around  are  bits  of  quartz  of  several 
colors,  giving  a  prett}^  effect.  This  nest  is  the  largest  seen, 
and  measures  three  and  one-half  inches  high  and  thirty-two  inches 
around  the  base.     Page  21 

^  Mr.  Joseph  Jeanes,  a  member  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences 
of  Philadelphia,  contributed  the  money  required  for  the  illustration  of 
this  paper,  and  thus  has  greatly  added  to  whatever  value  it  may  possess. 


73  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

Fig.  4.  A  nest  built  partly  around  a  tuft  of  gramma  grass,  and 
less  conical  in  shape  than  the  above, 

Plate  III. 

Fig.  5.  View  of  honey-bearers  as  seen  in  natural  site,  clinging 
to  the  roof  of  a  honey-room.     About  natural  size.     Page  22. 

Fig.  6.  View  of  honey -bearers  in  same  position,  drawn  from 
one  of  m}'  artificial  nests.  Mingled  with  them  are  seen  ordinary 
workers,  and  semi-rotunds,  or  workers  apparently  in  process  of 
transformation  into  honey-bearers.     About  natural  size. 

Plate  IV. 

Fig.  7.  Sprig  of  dwarf  oak,  Quercus  undulata,  with  galls  of 
Cynips  quercus-mellaria,  showing  the  beads  of  sweet  sap.  Page  25. 

Fig.    8.  The  same  galls  enlarged. 

Fig.    9.  Another  cluster  of  the  same  galls. 

Fig,  10.  Section  of  gall  showing  the  inside  cell,  c,  and  the  exit 
hole  of  .the  gall-fly,  eh.     Page  26. 

Fig.  11.  Turk's-head'gall,  showing  exit-hole,  eh. 

Fig.  12.  View  of  inside  of  a  gall,  showing  a  globular  cell,  and 
a  small  grub  domiciled  against  it.     Page  27. 

Fig.  13.  A  honey-bearer  clinging  by  her  feet  to  the  wall  of  a 
honey-room.     Page  22. 

Fig.  14.  The  crater  of  a  gate  to  an  ant's  nest,  showing  the  grav- 
eled funnel,  F,  and  the  smooth  nozzle,  N.     Page  32. 

Fig.  15.  Outline  of  the  elevation  of  a  formicary.     Page  35. 

Plate  V. 

Fig.  16.  Double  section  view  of  the  interior  of  a  nest,  drawn 
from  a  point  in  the  excavaticm  twenty-one  inches  below  the  sur- 
face. Nest  made  in  soft,  red  sandstone,  g,  y,  g,  galleries  arranged 
in  stories.  R,  R,  R,  vertical  sections  through  hone3^-rooms  and 
chambers  for  nursery  purposes.  C,  D,  E,  the  floors  of  a  suite  of 
honey-rooms,  showing  their  connection  with  the  general  S3'stem. 
Page  86. 

Fig.  17.  The  three  honey-rooms  C,  D,  E,  above  referred  to,  and 
the  indication  of  a  fourth,  F.  Length  of  C  from  a  to  6  =  5  inches  ; 
D,  from  c  to  d  =  3|  inches  ;  E,  from  e  to  /i  =  4  inches.  Eleva- 
tion of  h  above  x  =  B^  inches  ;  of  b  above  e  =  6  inches.  A  little 
stairway  united  D  with  C  and  F  ;  g,g,  a,  gallery.     Page  36. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  Y3 

Fig.  18.  Section  through  middle  of  nest,  showing  the  gate 
architecture.  G,  gate;  X,  nozzle;  A,  arm  of  the  gate  gallery 
terminating  in  the  vestibule  V.  a,  6,  c,  branching  galleries. 
Page  32. 

Fig.  10.  A  similar  section  of  another  nest.  Letters  as  above; 
E,  a  small  room,  with  gallery/!,  leading  downward. 

Fig.  20.  Similar  section  of  another  nest.  The  main  gallerj^ 
branches  to  the  right,  and  passes  behind  the  gate,  b,  &,  6,  into  room 
A.  E,  C,  small  bays  or  rooms;  D,  D,  ee,  curved  and  branched 
gallery  on  the  same  plane,  with  openings  downward  g,  gr,  g. 
Page  33. 

Fig.  21.  A  honey-room,  HR ;  g;  gallery  leading  into  the  gate 
gallery,  G ;  ug,  unbroken  part  of  same ;  B,  small  bay -room. 
Page  34. 

Fig.  22.  Termination  of  excavated  nest,  6  feet  10  inches  from 
gate.  2  feet  5  inches  below  surface.  ^  y,  galler}^  entrance;  C, 
•Queen-room,  4  inches  diameter.  E,  Small  bay-room,  apparently 
beginning  of  a  chamber ;  t  (/,  terminal  gallerj-,  running  upwards 
as  though  the  ants  were  in  process  of  excavating  a  room  resem- 
bling C.     Page  36. 

Fig.  23.  Sloping  section  through  middle  of  nest,  showing  rela- 
tion of  gate  to  the  upper  series  of  galleries  and  rooms.  A,  B, 
hone3M'Ooms ;  ar,  y,  z,  main  galleries;  1,  2,  3,  side  openings. 
Page  33. 

Fig.  24.  A  honey-bearer  regurgitating  hone}'  from  her  crop  at 
the  solicitation  of  hungry  workers.     Page  46. 

Fig.  25.  Sentinels  on  guai'd  at  the  gate.     Page  20. 

Plate  YI. 

Fig.  26.  A  queen  dragged  home  b}^  a  worker.     Page  38. 

Fig.  27.  A  honej^-bearer  dragged  and  pushed  by  a  worker-major 
and  dwarf  from  a  broken  room  into  a  galler}^     Page  39. 

Fig.  28.  A  honey -bearer  under  a  "  land.slide,"  one  worker  look- 
ing on,  curious  but  inactiA'e,  another  on  the  clod  at  her  toilet. 
Page  41. 

Fig.  29.  Queen  surrounded  b}'  her  "court  "  or  body-gunvd  of 
attendant  workers.     Page  38. 

Fig.  30.  Workers  carrying  a  pebble  up  the  mound. 

Fig.  31.  Honey-bearer  parti}' buried  alive  under  pellets  brought 
up  by  mining  workers.     Page  40. 
6 


74  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

Fig.  32.  Honey-bearer  fallen  from  her  perch,  being  cleansed  by 
a  worker,  who  reaches  down  from  the  wall.     Page  40, 

Fig.  33.  Ilonej'-bearer  with  (apparently)  morbid  abdomen. 
Page  58. 

Fig.  34.  Worker  nurses  feeding  and  cleansing  larvfe.     Page  43. 

Fig.  35.  Yiew  of  vertical  section  of  a  nest,  showing  galleries 
arranged  in  stories.  See  PI.  V,  fig.  16.  G,  location  of  gate  ;  a — ^, 
e — z,  k — Z,  galleries ;  R,  R,  sections  of  honey-rooms.  Page  36,  and 
foot-note. 

Fig.  36.  A  worker  dragging  a  honey-bearer  up  a  perpendicular 
surface  into  a  galler}^     Page  39. 

Plate  YII. 

Fig.  37.  Yiew  of  the  under  side  of  the  head  of  Myrmecocystus 
hortus-deorum,  showing  the  mouth  organs.     X  20,  Page  20. 

The  letter-references  in  this  and  subsequent  anatomical  figures 
are  imiform  throughout.  The  Key  to  References,  therefore  (p. 
70),  will  apply  to  all  figures. 

Fig.  38.  Face  sculpture  of  same.     X  20,  Page  20. 

Fig.  39,  Side  view  of  head  of  worker  to  show  parasitic  mites 
clinging  thereto.     The  mites  are  about  natural  size.     Page  63. 

Fig.  40    Dorsal  view  of  mites  greatly  enlarged. 

Fig.  41.  Yentral  view  of  same. 

Fig.  42.  One  of  the  suckers,  su,  contracted. 

Figs.  43  and  44,  the  same  further  drawn  out. 

Fig.  45.  Muscles  of  the  honey  crop,  showing  their  netted  and 
branched  character.     X  30,  Page  54. 

Fig.  46.  The  same,  from  margin  of  the  crop.  G.  ws,  crop 
muscles  ;  b.  ms,  branched  muscles. 

Fig.  47.  Third  leg  of  31.  7ior^us-(?eorwm,  worker-minor.   X  10. 

Fig.  48.  Section  of  segmental  plate  of  abdomen  of  honey  ant, 
showing  hexagonal  cells  of  epithelium,  and  a  bristle-like  hair,  or 
seta,  arising  therefrom. 

Fig.  49.  Profile  view  of  segmental  plates  of  Camponotus  vijlatus, 
showing  the  overlapping  of  the  same,  and  the  imbricated  epithelial 
cells,  forming  a  rachet-like  structure  which  suggests  the  possibility 
of  a  sound-producing  organism,  e.  ab.  pl^  exterior  abdominal  plate ; 
i,  ab.  pi,  interior  ditto.     Page  61. 

Fig.  50.  Profile  view  of  abdominal  plate  of  M.  hortus-deorum^ 
to  show,  the  same. 


1881.]  NATLTIAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  t5 

« 

Fig.  51.  After  Lubbock.  Section  through  the  head  of  Lasius 
niger^  to  show  site  of  buccal  sac,  he.  s,  the  pharynx,  j9^,  and  its 
muscles,  p.  ms.     X  36,  Page  52. 

Fig.  52.  View  of  the  cesophagus  of  a  worker  of  M.  hortus- 
deorum.  One  side  of  the  thorax  and  petiole  are  cut  awaj'  in  order 
to  show  the   oesophagus  in  site.     X  18,  Page  53. 

Fig.  53.  Abdomem  of  hone}^  ant,  showing  the  segmental  plates 
both  dorsal  (D)  and  ventral  (V)  in  normal  conditi(m  of  the  crop. 
X  16,  Page  53. 

Fig.  54.  Same,  when  separated  by  partly  expanded  crop. 
Page  53. 

Plate  YIII. 

Fig.  55.  Entire  crop  with  gizzard  and  stomach.  Dissected 
from  a  honey -bearer  with  morbid  abdomen.     X  14,  Page  53. 

Fig.  56.  Crop,  gizzard,  stomach,  malpighian  tubes  and  intestine. 
From  honey-bearer.     X  14,  Page  54. 

Fig.  51.  Enlarged  view  of  gizzard.     X  50,  Page  55. 

Fig.  58.  After  Forel.  Topographic,  somewhat  diagrammatic 
representation  of  the  organs  opening  into  the  cloaca  of  Botlirio- 
myrmex  meridionalis  g,  enlarged  18  times. 

4,  5  and  6,  optical  section  of  the  tergal  chitinous  pieces  of  what 
are  reallj?^  the  4th,  5th  and  6th  abdominal  segments  (nodes  of  the 
petiolus  reckoned  as  one  segment).  Opposite  and  beneath  there 
are  shown  the  sterna  of  the  corresponding  segments.  <Zo,  dorsal 
vessel;  an.  u,  right  anal  vesicle;  an.  gl,  right  anal  gland;  Can, 
intestinal  canal  (intestine  and  rectum) ;  po.  v,  poison  vesicle  with 
gland  ;  ac.  gl,  accessory  gland  of  the  poison  apparatus  ;  Ou,  rudi- 
mentary ovaries  with  vagina ;  ab.  g,  the  last  three  abdominal 
ganglia  of  the  ventral  cord  with  their  commissures. 

Between  6  and  the  corresponding  sternal  plate  (6'),  lies  a  cleft 
(shown  wide  open  in  the  figure)  which  leads  into  the  cavity  of  the 
cloaca.  In  this  cavity  one  finds,  reckoning  downwards  from  6 
to  6': 

1.  0,  the  common  openiiig  of  the  anal  vesicles.  2.  an,  anus 
(opening  of  rectum).  3.  r.  st,  rudimentar}^  sting,  into  which  the 
poison  vesicle  opens,  and  then  lower  down,  the  accessory  gland  of 
the  poison  apparatus.  4.  o.  sa,  opening  of  the  rudimentary  fgmale 
sexual  apparatus. 

Fig.  59.  Crop  in  normal  condition,  from  a  virgin  queen.  The 
junction,  j»,  of  the  abdomen  with  the  petiole  is  bent  over,  showing 


T6  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

a  part  of  the  a^sophagus  as  drawn  from  the  petiole.  The  contin- 
uation of  the  same,  ce.  c,  within  tlie  abdomen  is  shown :  also  the 
relation  of  gizzard  to  both  crop  and  stomach.     X  14,  Page  53. 

Fig.  60.  View  of  the  intestine  from  the  posterior  pole  of  the 
abdomen  to  the  anus.     X  35,  Page  56. 

Plate   IX. 

Fig.  61.  S^'nthetic  figure  exhibiting  the  entire  course  of  the ' 
alimentary  canal,  from  mouth  to  anus.     Page  56. 

Figs.  62-^0  compose  a  series  illustrating  the  progressive  disten- 
sion of  the  crop  from  the  normal  condition  to  that  of  the  honey- 
bearer.     Page  56. 

The  series  begins  Avith  Figs.  63  and  66,  where  the  crop  is  normal ; 
in  fig.  66  the  crop  has  shrunken  after  distension. 

Fig.  64.  Worker  crop,  half  filling  abdomen. 

Figs.  62,  65.  Workers-major,  or  semi-rotunds,  with  distension 
of  crop  still  further  adA'anced. 

Fig.  67.  Abdomen  of  a  worker-minor,  showing  same  process  ot 
distension. 

Fig.  68.  Abdomen  of  a  honej'-bearer,  opened  at.  the  slit,  s,  to 
puncture  the  crop  and  exhibit  by  its  shrinking  away  the  fact  that 
the  crop  fills  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen.     Page  57, 

Fig.  69.  Full  crop  of  honey-bearer,  with  the  lower  part  of  the 
alimentary  canal  shown  through  the  abdominal  wall  against  which 
it  is  pressed,  and  evidently  in  healthy  condition.     Page  57. 

Fig.  70,  Abdomen  of  honey-bearer,  the  full  crop  pressing  the 
gizzard,  stomach,  etc.,  into  the  cloacal  cavity-.     Page  57-8. 

Fig,  71,  Abdomen  of  the  Australian  carpenter-ant,  Camponotus 
inflatus,  exhibiting  the  characteristic  distension  of  M.  hortus- 
deorum.  Drawn  from  an  alcoholic  spe(!imen.  The  figure  is 
somewhat  flattened  by  pressure  ;  other  abdomens  in  my  possession 
are  quite  spherical.  The  gizzard,  stomach  (ruptured  and  stretched) 
and  intestine  are  shown  in  the  same  relative  position  as  in  the 
honey  ant.     Page  58. 

Plate  X. 

Fig.  72.  Side  view  of  honej^-bearer,  M.  hortus-deorum.     X  3. 
Fig;  73.  Dorsal  view  of  same.     X  3,  Page  69. 
Fig.  74.   Honey-bearer   of   Camponotus   injiatus,   dorsal   view 
X  3,  Page  59. 

Figs.  75,  76.  Male  of  M.  hortus-deorum.     X  5. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA,  17 

Figs.  71,  78.  Winged  female,  or  virgin  qneen  of  tlie  same.    X  3. 

Fig.  79.  Worker-minor  of  If. /lor^MS-tZeorwrn.  X  5.  The  workers- 
major  and  minor  or  dwarf  are  exactly  similar  in  form,  only  longer 
in  the  proportions  given  in  the  description.     Page  69. 

Figs.  80,  81.  Node  or  scale  of  the  petiole  queen  of  hone}^  ant, 
side  and  front  views.     X  10. 

Fig.  82.  In  part,  after  Swinton  ;  to  show  the  stria?,  s^?',  supposed 
stidulating  organs,  upon  the  junction  of  the  abdomen  and  second 
node,  2.  nd,  and  also  on  junction  of  second  node  with  the  first 
(1.  ml,)  of  Myrmica  ruginodis. 


IS  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

MA'kCH  1. 

The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Eighteen  persons  present. 


March  8. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Fifty-eight  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  On  the  Structure,  Affinities  and  Species  of 
Scolopendrella,"  by  J.  A.  Ryder,  was  presented  for  publication. 

Prof.  Angelo  Heilprin  delivered  the  introductory  to  his  course 
of  lectures  on  Invertebrate  Paleontology. 


March  15. 

The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 

Prof.  Henry  Carvill  Lewis  delivered   the  introductor3-  to  his 
course  of  lectures  on  Mineralogy. 

The  following  was  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


1881. J  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  79 

THE  STRTJCTURE,  AFFINITIES  AND  SPECIES  OF  SCOLOPENDRELLA. 
BY   JOHN   A.    RYDER, 

Inasmuch  as  a  notice,^  published  by  nie  in  the  American  Natu- 
ralist for  May,  1880,  has  awakened  renewed  interest  in  relation  to 
these  singular  types,  and  because  the  ordinal  division  proposed 
by  me  for  their  reception  has  apparently''  been  accepted  by  Dr. 
LatzeP  in  his  revision  of  the  Austro-Hungarian  species  of  Myria- 
2)oda,  I  venture  to  offer  the  results  of  m}'  studies  for  the  use  of 
those  interested.  Since  the  publication  of  m}^  notice  above  referred 
to,  I  have  met  with  a  paper  unknown  to  me  at  the  time  mine  was 
written,  which  in  many  respects  anticipates  the  observations  made 
by  the  writer,  and  relied  upon  as  characters  of  ordinal  value.  The 
publication  here  alluded  to  is  entitled  "  Myriapodender  Umgegend 
von  Danzig  "^  by  Menge,  in  which  the  author  discusses  at  length 
the  anatomy  of  the  Scolopendrella  immaculata  Newp.  From  his 
plates  and  text  I  find  that,  while  he  confirms  m}-  observations 
in  man}'  respects,  in  others  his  interpretations  conflict  with 
mine.  Not  only  is  this  the  fact  with  regard  to  my  observations, 
but  also  with  those  of  others  who  have  studied  the  genus.  Taken 
as  a  whole,  the  monograph  of  Menge  is,  however,  by  far  the  most 
valuable  which  has  yet  appeared. 

The  following  synopsis  of  Menge's  observations  will,  I  think, 
be  found  useful.  I  will  preserve  as  nearly  as  possible  the  phrase- 
olog3'  of  the  German  text,  which  has  reference  to  S.  immaculata. 

"  Head  compressed,  ovoid,  little  longer  than  wide  ; 

antenua3  40-42,  articulate,  inserted  immediately  behind  the  la- 
brum,  the  joints  compressed  fusiform,  urn-shaped,  the  basal  ones 
thicker  than  long,  becoming  gradually  longer  towards  the  tip,  so 
that  the  apical  joints  are  more  than  twice  as  long  as  thick ;  ter- 
minal joint  acorn-shaped.     Each  joint  is  encircled  at  its  middle 

by  a  circlet  of  outwardly  divergent  hairs Behind*  the 

insertion  of  the  antennae,  at  the  sides,  are  two  little  prominences 
on  the  epicranium  and  alongside  and  above  them  on  each  side 
is  placed  a  round  black  ej^e,  visible  onlj'-  under  the  microscope. 

^  "  Scolopendrella  as  the  type  of  a  new  order  of  Articulates  (Symphyla)." 
^  R.  Latzel,  "  Die  Myriapoden  der  oesterreichisch-ungariscli  Mouarchie. 

Erste  Halfte.     Die  Chilopoden,"  pp.  228,  Pis.  10,  8vo.     Vienna,  1880. 
*  Neuste  Schriften  der  naturforscheuden  Gesellschaft  in  Danzig,  IV,  4tes 

Heft,  4to.     1851. 


80  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE    ACADEMY    Of  [1881. 

"  Mo  nth  parts  arranged  for  biting,  Lalirum  forming  the  ante- 
rior portion  of  the  epioranium,  and  divided  into  two  rounded 
extremities  anteriorly  by  a  mesial  emargination,  both  liah^es  ter- 
minated by  three  pairs  of  teeth  directed  towards  each  other. 
Mandibles  beneath  labrum,  somewhat  exserted,  one  jointed,  elon- 
gate, curved  inwards,  the  outer  side  finely  pubescent,  the  apex 
armed  with  four  large  and  five  small,  hard,  brown  teeth.  Maxillse 
two-jointed,  basal  joint  C3-lindrical,  curving  slightly  inwards,  sur- 
mounted by  two  apical  pieces,  the  outer,  longest  and  most  slender 
piece  may  be  regarded  as  repi-esenting  a  palpus,  w^hile  the  inner 
one,  which  is  shorter,  terminating  in  a  series  of  bristles,  may  be 
regarded  as  the  second  joint  of  the  maxilla;.  The  labium  is  an 
oblong  plate  divided  in  the  middle  b}-  a  suture.  The  anterior 
margin  of  each  half  bears  three  conical  teeth. 

"  The  bod}"  consists  of  twent^'-three  somites;  twelve  principal 
ones,  to  which  the  legs  are  attached,  and  ten  smaller  intermediate 
and  a  caudal  somite.  Each  principal  or  leg-bearing  somite  has  a 
quadrate  sternum  which  is  divided  in  the  middle  into  two  halves 
by  a  median  furrow ;  the  narrower  intermediate  somites  have  an 
elongate,  undivided  sternum,  while  the  sides  are  covered  by  a 
triangular  chitinous  piece Attached  to  everj^  leg- 
bearing  somite  except  the  first,  behind  and  alongside  of  the  inser- 
tion of  the  legs  are  a  pair  of  simple,  hairj^  appendages.  The  anal 
opening  is  on  the  ventral  side  of  the  bod}-  covered  hy  a  rhomboidal 
almost  semicircular  plate,  the  lateral  extremities  of  which  extend 
somewhat  beyond  the  edges  of  the  last  dorsal  scute.  The  dorsal 
surface  is  covered  b}'^  fifteen  scutes  which  are  slightly  imbricated. 
The  hind  margins  of  the  scutes  are  but  slightly  emarginated.    .    . 

"  Legs  in  twelve  pairs,  or  three  less  than  the  number  of  dorsal 
scutes :  no  pairs  of  legs  corresponding  to  the  fifth  and  eighth 
dorsal  and  the  caudal  scutes.  The  first  pair  of  legs  are  the 
smallest,  and  including  the  tarsal  joint,  are  four-jointed.  The 
fourth  joint  is  the  longest,  the  tarsal  the  shortest.  The  latter  is 
simply  a  little  conical  prominence  on  the  outer  face  of  which  there 
are  attached  two  hooked  claws 

"  The  conical  caudal  appendages  are  simply  an  eflerent  appa- 
ratus connected  with  two  long  caecal  pouches  which  are  filled 
with  a  viscous  spinning  material.  The  eflerent  duct  ends  between 
two  terminal  bristles. 

"  Besides  the  dorsal  and  sternal  scutes  there  are  pairs  of  liga- 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  81 

mentous  bauds  which  join  the  terga  and  sterna ;  in  the  hinder 
somites  these  bands  are  joined  together  dorsally  and  form  an 
arch.  The  anterior  ones  are  joined  medially  below  l)}-  hiteral 
processes.     They  also  exist  in  the  head. 

"  Tlie  digestive  apparatus  consists  of  a  straight  canal  which 
extends  from  the  mouth  to  the  anus.  The  phaiynx  passes  between 
the  ligamentous  bands  of  the  upper  cephalic  plates.  The  aisopha- 
gus  is  provided  with  annular  folds  and  longitudinal  and  annular 
muscles  The  stomach  is  decidedl}-  widened  and  consists  of  an 
elongated  cylindrical  sac  and  is  covered  with  brownish  hepatic 
cells  ;  these  cells  have  finely  granular  contents.  There  are  no  cilia 
on  the  inner  surface  of  the  stomach  or  alimentar}^  canal.  The 
stomach  is  usually  of  a  3'ellowish  brown  color  because  of  the 
contained  food,  which  consists  of  particles  of  brown  mould  or 
humus,  which  could  not  be  taken  in  by  a  sucking  apparatus. 
The  cavit}'  of  the  small  intestine  is  ver}-  much  more  contracted 
than  tliat  of  the  stomach,  and  at  its  commencement  four  vermi- 
cularly  coiled  malpighian  tubules  open  into  it. 

"  Immediately  above  the  anus  lies  the  opening  of  the  oviduct 
and  ovary,  the  latter  consisting  of  a  simple  c^dindrical  canal  with 
thin  transparent  walls.  Eggs  in  different  stages  of  development 
may  usually  be  found  therein. 

"  I  did  not  see  the  male  sexual  organs,  as  all  of  the  specimens 
dissected  were  females. 

"  I  was  not  able  to  study  the  nervous  sj'stem  satisfactorily. 
From  the  head  a  simple  cord  passes  backwards,  which  has  scarcely 
noticeable  ganglionic  swellings  at  every  somite,  from  which  simple 
pairs  of  nerves  pass  to  the  legs. 

"The  vascular  sj^stem  consists  of  a  simple  straight  canal  just 
below  the  dorsal  scutes  beginning  just  behind  the  head  and  passing 
backwards  to  the  caudal  appendages  where  it  divides,  each  branch 
ending  blindl}^  in  the  latter.  The  presence  of  valves  in  the  dorsal 
vessel,  trachea  or  tracheal  openings  was  not  revealed  by  an  amplifi- 
cation of  4.50  diameters  with  a  Nobert  microscope  of  fine  qualitv. 

''  The  function  of  the  ventral  and  caudal  appendages  is  not  cer- 
tainly known.  I  have  on  several  occasions  found  specimens  of 
Machilis  which  had  eggs  attached  to  the  caudal  styles,  and  I  have 
supposed  that  these  appendages  in  Scolopendrella  have  the  same 
use.  If  a  needle  is  brought  into  contact  with  the  tips  of  either 
of  these  appendages  at  the  opening  of  the  spinning  organ  a  long 


82  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

thrond  nia}^  bo  drawn  out.  It  is  believed  that  this  spinning  appa- 
ratus is  used  in  fixing  or  attaching  the  eggs  of  the  animal. 

"  The  pairs  of  legs  and  the  number  of  joints  in  the  antenute  are 
variable.  I  found  but  eleven  pairs  of  legs  and  seventeen  joints 
in  a  young  animal.  Tlie  first  pair  of  legs  was  wanting.  In  other 
specimens  with  twelve  pairs  of  feet  I  found  twenty-five,  in  others 
tliirt3'-two,  and  in  others  still,  forty-two  joints  in  the  antennae, 
the  last  seems  to  be  the  number  in  full-grown  specimens."     .     .     . 

In  conclusion  our  author  observes  that,  "  It  Avill  have  been  con- 
cluded from  what  has  been  said,  that  Scolopendrella  is  distin- 
guished from  Lithobius  as  well  as  from  Geophilus  b}'  the  very 
different  manducatory  apparatus,  the  double  tarsal  claws,  the 
ventral  and  the  caudal  appendages  with  the  spinning  apparatus, 
and  that  it  does  not  naturally  fall  into  the  same  family  with  either 
of  those  genera.  On  the  contrary  the  animal  agrees  in  its  princi- 
pal characters  (excepting  the  spinning  organs)  and  especially  in 
its  habits  with  Gampodea ;  is  distinguished  from  it,  however,  by 
the  greater  niimber  of  pairs  of  legs  and  the  dorsal  scutes.  I 
believe,  accordingly,  that  Scolopendrella  may  be  regarded  as  the 
type  of  a  genus  or  family  intermediate  between  the  six-footed 
Lepmnidse  and  the  Scolopendriddey 

The  foregoing  paragraph  shows  how  very  nearly  Menge  had 
concluded  thirty  years  ago  that  these  singular  animals  should  be 
separated  from  the  Myriapods  proper.  The  parallel  between  his 
conclusions  and  my  own  are  very  striking,  as  will  be  seen  from 
the  following  w^ords  from  my  notice  already  alluded  to.  "  This 
form,  as  interpreted  above,  becomes  of  the  highest  interest  to  the 
zoologist,  and  if  the  writer  is  not  mistaken,  the  biunguiculate  legs 
and  their  nearly  complete  correspondence  in  number  with  rudi- 
mentary abdominal  and  functional  thoracic  limbs  of  the  Thysa- 
nura,  especially  3Iachilis  and  Lepisma,  which  also  have  basal 
appendages  to  the  legs,  indicate  as  much  affinity  with  insects  as 
with  myriapods,  and  may  indeed  be  looked  upon,  perhaps,  as 
representing  the  last  survival  of  the  form  from  which  insects  may 
be  supposed  to  have  descended.  I  name  the  new  group  Symphyla, 
in  reference  to  the  singular  combination  of  myriapodous,  insectean 
and  thj'sanurous  characters  wliicli  it  presents." 

Our  conclusions  as  to  its  zoological  position  being  nearly  the 
same,  upon  the  details  of  the  anatomy  w^e  disagree.  I  stated  in 
my  note  my  interpretation  of  the  ventral  openings  on  the  third  or 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES    OP   PHILADELPHIA.  83 

fourth  Ijody  segment.  (The  first  condition  occurs  in  immature 
specimens  with  less  than  twelve  pairs  of  legs,  the  last  in  adults). 
'•  Genital  orifice  orf  the  ventral  side  of  the  body  opening  on  the 
third  or  fourth  body-segment  in  both  sexes.  In  one  sex  the  open- 
ing is  a  simple  pore,  in  the  other  a  longitudinal  cleft,  closed  b}^ 
means  of  an  oblong  chitinous  piece  on  either  side,  the  two  together 
occupying  a  sub-quadrate  space.  Heart  dorsal ;  traclieal  sj'stem 
lepresented  by  a  series  of  simple  tubular  arches,  without  a  spiral 
filament,  wliich  arise  from  openings  on  tlie  ventral  surface  of  the 
animal,  inside  the  bases  of  the  legs,  widening  and  passing  upwards 
to  and  apparently  in  close  relation  with  the  dorsal  vessel.  Intes- 
tine straight,  with  two  ver}^  long,  tortuous  Malpighian  tubules 
opening  into  it  at  the  posterior  third  (S.  notacantha).^^ 

The  main  points  of  disagreement  are  in  regard  to  the  position 
of  the  genital  organs  and  the  supposed  tracheal  arches.  Menge 
states  that  the  oviduct  opens  posteriorly  and  above- the  anus,  and 
claims  to  have  seen  the  eggs  in  the  latter  and  the  ovary.  As  to 
this  point,  I  did  not  confirm  his  observations,  although  I  do  not 
deny  that  he  may  have  seen  real  ova.  Nor  do  I  now  affirm  posi- 
tively that  the  ventral  opening  seen  b}'  me  is  genital ;  the  only 
evidence  being  the  circumstance  that  I  found  two  kinds  in  different 
individuals.  Its  function  maj'  be  that  of  the  ventral  sucker  of 
CoUemhola.  Menge  also  sa3"s  he  saw  no  males,  which  is  a  curious 
fact.  His  statement  that  the  caudal  stylets  will  adhere  to  a  sharp 
point  brought  into  contact  with  their  tips,  I  can  confirm,  and  I 
have  also  seen  a  thread  drawn  from  them  in  *S'.  notacantlia.  He  is 
confident  that  what  I  took  for  tracheal  arches  are  simph"  chitinous 
rods  or  ligaments  which  serve  to  join  the  sterna  and  the  scutes. 
He  is  mistaken,  however,  when  he  affirms  that  the  posterior  ones 
form  a  continuous  arch,  since  in  all  the  specimens  examined  by 
me  the  arch  was  broken  at  the  dorsal  vessel,  the  widened  ends  of 
the  opposite  halves  of  the  arches  seeming  to  lie  against  its  sides. 
The  walls  of  these  arched  tubes  showed  double  contours  under  the 
microscope,  which  proves  them  to  be  hollow. 

He  also  finds  four  Malpighian  tubules  in  S.  immaculata,  whereas 

I  find  but  two  in  S.  notacantlia.     He  finds  as  few  as   seventeen 

joints  in  the  antennas  to  as  manj'  as  fortj^-two.     I  find  from  four- 

. teen  to  twentj'-eight  in  two  species.     Newport,^  speaking  of  the 

species  studied  by  Menge,  finds  the  joints  of  the  antenme  to  vary 

1  ^[onograijli  of  the  Class  Myriapoda,  Order  Chilopoda.     Trans.  Liuu. 
Soc.  XIX,  pp.  349-439,  1  PI.     1845. 


84  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

from  twelve  to  twent3'-eiglit,  and  finds  specimens  of  different  ages 
■with  nine,  ten,  eleven  and  twelve  pairs  of  legs.  This  variability 
in  the  number  of  pairs  of  legs  I  have  noticed  m  both  the  American 
forms  studied  by  m^'self.  Newport  also  at  first  thought  the 
creature  was  nearly  related  to  Geophilus,  but  afterwards  placed  it 
between  Lithobius  and  Scolopendra^  but  he  at  last  considered  it 
the  type  of  a  family,  a  conclusion  which  Gervais^  did  not  accept. 
Wood^  says  he  never  saAV  any  specimens  of  the  famih^,  and  gives 
the  characters  assigned  by  Newport. 

The  first  species  described  was  by  Gervais  in  1839,  from  speci- 
mens found  in  the  environs  of  Paris.  This  species  was  made  the 
type  of  the  genus.  In  his  description  he  disagrees  with  Menge  in 
the  distribution  of  the  legs.  This  ma}'  however  be  on  account  of 
the  difference  of  the  species. 

Order  SYMPHYLA. 
Amer.  Nat.  XIV,  p.  375-6. 
Head,  antennre  and  mouth  parts  thysanuriform.  Trachea  as 
tubular  arches  without  spiral  filament.  Spiracles  within  the  bases 
of  the  legs.  An  orifice  on  the  ventral  side  of  the  bod}'  opening  on 
the  third  (young)  or  fourth  (adult)  body -segment ;  present  in  some 
individuals  as  a  pore,  in  others  as  a  longitudinal  cleft,  closed  by 
means  of  an  oblong  chitinous  piece  on  either  side,  the  two  together 
occupying  a  subquadrate  space.  Two  Malpighian  tubules  (four 
Menge).  Legs  five-jointed,  terminated  by  a  pair  of  claws.  Ven- 
tral appendages  at  the  bases  of  each  pair  of  legs  except  the  first. 
Caudal  stylets  containing  spinning  glands  which  open  at  their 
tips.     Ovary  lying  dorsad  of  the  rectum  (Menge). 

Family  SCOLOPENDRELLIDJE. 

Newp.  Transac    Linn.    Society,  XIX,  p.    374. 
SCOLOPENDRELLA  Gerv. 
Comptes  Eendns,  1839. 

S.  notacantha  Gerv.     Apteres,  IV,  301,  PI.  39,  fig.-  7 ;  Ann.  Sei.  Nat.,  Zool.  II,  1844, 

p.  70,  PI.  5,  figs.  15-17;  Ryder,  Am.  Nat.,  p.  375,  1880.     Hab.  France  and  ?  Pa. 

and  Md. 
S.  immaculata  Newport.     Trans.  Linn.  Soe.  XIX,  pp.  373-374,  PI.  XL,  figs'.  4,  4a, 

b,  c;    Menge,  Neuste  Schr.  d.  naturf.   Gesell.  Danzig,  IV,  1861,  Pis.  2,     Hab. 

England  and  Germany. 


^  Apteres.  Suite  a  Buflfon,  Walckenaer  et  Gervais,  t.  IV,  p.  301-308. 
Paris,  1847. 

-  Monogr.  North  American  Myriap.,  Trans.  Am.  Philos.  Soc,  XIII.  New 
Series,  1869. 


1881.] 


NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA. 


85 


S.  americana  Packard. 
Hab.  Salem,  Mass. 
S.  gratiae  Ryder.    Am.  Nat..  XIV,  p. 


Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  XVI,  p.  Ill,  1873.     Name  only. 


Fia 


-S.  gratia. 


75,  1880.     Name  only. 

This  species  (Figure  1.),  may  be  distin- 
guished from  S.  immnculata  by  the  presence 
of  a  pair  of  stout  hairs  which  diverge  outwards 
from  the  sides  of  the  body  at  each  segment. 
Head  wider  than  bod}^,  not  cordate  but  sub- 
pentagonal  from  above.  A  single  pair  of  eyes 
on  the  sides  of  the  head  behind  the  antennae, 
not  visible  from  above.  AntenniB  twent^^-one- 
articulate.  Length  2  to  2-5  mm.  Habitats: 
Fairmonnt  Park,  Philada ;  Havre  de  Grace, 
Md. ;  Washington,  D.  C;  Franklin  Co.,  Pa. 
Under  stones,  sticks  and  in  damp  mould. 

I   dedicate  this  handsome  species  to  my 

sister. 

S.  microcolpa  Muhr.  Zoolog.  An- 
zeiger,  IV,  1881,  pp.  59-61, 
figs.  1,  2  and  4. 


Enlarged  25  times. 


Is  near  S.  notacantha, 
but  is  said  to  have  no  ventral  appendages  at 
the  bases  of  the  legs.  I  would  remark,  how- 
ever, that  in  the  specimens  thought  to  be  nota- 
cantha,  I  find  these  appendages  present,  but 
they  are  extremely  small  and  maj'  easily  be 
overlooked.  Muhr's  paper  is  a  valuable  con- 
tribution however  to  the  anatomy  of  the  mouth 
parts  of  a  form  near  the  species  first  described. 
Habitat,  Prague,  Bohemia. 

Figure  2,  representing  an  American,  speci- 
men of  the  same,  or  nearly  the  same,  as  S. 
notacamha,  has  a  veiy  suggestive  resemblance 
to  Japijx  in  the  shape  of  the  body;  whether 
this  is  more  than  a  resemblance  I  forbear 
to  suggest.  Xo  doubt  now  remains  in  my 
mind  that  dissimilar  as  LejAsma,  Machilis, 
Lepismina,  Nicoletia,  Gampodea  and  Japyx 
at  first  appear  upon  comparison  with  each 
other,   their  principal    characters    suggest   in 


Fig.  2. — S.  notacantlia. 
Enlarged  25  times. 


80  PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE   ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

the  most  forcible  manner,  an  affiliation  with  Scolopendrella. 
This  is  most  strongly  indicated  in  the  mouth  parts,  legs,  varia- 
bility in  the  nuHiber  of  antcnnal  joints  and  habits  of  life  in  all  of 
which  Scolopendrella  exhibits  the  strongest  resemblances  to  the 
Thysanura^  with  very  marked  affinities  to  the  Myriapods  as  well. 
The  position  of  the  ovary  is  that  in  Geophilus,  hut  spinning  organs 
are  also  characteristic  of  the  male  Geophilus  and  Polydesmus  ;  a 
female  specimen  of  the  latter,  while  being  kept  in  confinement, 
spun  a  web  about  its  eggs  in  a  jar  in  which  I  had  confined  it.  I 
never  noticed  that  any  American  female  Geojjhilas  spun  webs 
about  their  nests,  though  I  have  frequently  encountered  masses 
of  their  beautiful  amethystine-colored  eggs,  over  which  they  kept 
faithful  watch. 

Whether  the  proposed  order  Symphyla  is  sufficiently  well 
characterized  may  be  a  matter  of  doubt ;  this  can  only  be  decided 
by  a  more  elaborate  investigation  of  its  anatomy,  which  the  writer 
hopes  to  be  able  to  carry  out  at  no  distant  day. 


1881.]  natural  sciences  of  philadelphia,  8y 

March  22. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-six  persons  present. 
The  death  of  Jos.  A.  Cla}-,  a  member,  was  announced. 


March  29. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty  persons  present. 


April  5. 

The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 

Thirteen  persons  present. 

The  deaths  of  John  Gould,  of  London,  a  correspondent,  and  of 
Thos.  W.  Starr,  a  member,  were  announced. 


April  12. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Twent^'-four  persons  present. 

The  death  of  Col.  T.  M.  Br3'an,  of  Yincenttown,  X.  J.,  a  cor- 
respondent, was  announced. 


April  19. 

The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  Observations  on  Planorbis,"  by  R.  E.  C. 
Stearns,  was  presented  for  publication. 

On  the  Variations  of  Acmsea  j^elfd^  Escholtz. — Mr.  Tryon  read 
a  portion  of  a  letter  from  Mr.  Henry  Hemphill,  of  Oakland,  Cali- 
fornia, referring  to  certain  specimens  of  Acmaea,  collected  b}'  him. 
and  presented  to  the  Academy  this  evening. 

"  I  will  now  call  your  attention  to  Xos.  457,  458,  459  and  460.  I 
have  made  two  trips  to  Monterey,  Cal.,  this  winter.     During  mv 


88  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

first  visit  I  collected  a  few  specimens  of  Acmvea  pelta  and  its  vars., 
and  when  I  returned  home  and  began  to  clean  the  specimens  I  was 
ver^'  much  puzzled  over  some  specimens  of  No.  458.  SeA'eral 
years  ago  I  had  collected  shells  of  No.  459  at  Monterey-,  which  at 
that  time  I  called  Nacelki  im^tabilis^  but  these  half  and  half  varie- 
ties did  not  appear  at  that  time.  After  a  little  reflection  on  the 
matter,  I  began  to  suspect  the  true  condition  of  the  subject  and 
became  so  much  interested  in  it,  that  I  concluded  to  go  to  Mon- 
terey again  and  try  to  work  it  up,  and  I  think  I  have  done  so.  It 
is  simply  a  question  of  station. 

"  When  the  3'Oung  of  A.  pel  I  a  stations  itself  on  the  kelp  {Fhyl- 
lospora  3Ienziesii^  ^g-\  it  assumes  the  aspect  of  Nacella,  and  as 
long  as  it  remains  on  the  kelp  it  does  not  change  its  color  in  the 
least,  and  only  varies  its  form  to  suit  the  shape  of  the  stems  of 
the  kelp  to  which  it  attaches  itself.  But  when  from  an}^  cause  it 
leaves  the  kelp  and  takes  to  the  rocks,  it  seems  to  begin  imme- 
diately to  -paint  np  and  ornament  itself  after  tlie  fashion  of  the 
specimens  I  have  sent  yon. 

"  When  it  remains  on  the  kelp  a  long  time  and  completes  its 
growth,  we  then  have  Nacella  instabilis,  and  if  living  in  an  exposed 
position  its  apex  becomes  worn,  the  sculpture  faint,  etc.  When 
the  3'oung  station  themselves  on  the  rocks  they  do  not  assume  the 
Nacella  aspect  at  all,  but  commence  immediately  to  adorn  them- 
selves in  gay  and  beautiful  eoloi'S  as  you  will  see  by  the  fine  series 
of  No.  457.  Now  for  the  facts  and  reasons  why  1  came  to  this 
conclusion.  I  collected  about  200  living  specimens  on  the  kelp 
in  all  stages  of  growth,  and  out  of  the  200  I  found  but  two  speci- 
mens that  varied  their  color  at  all ;  one  was  a  very  young  and 
small  s[)ecimen,  with  a  few  light  dots  on  or  near  the  apex,  and  the 
other  was  a  large  specimen  with  a  tesselateil  border  on  the  inside, 
I  also  collected  about  200  on  the  rocks,  and  ever}^  one  was  more 
or  less  variegated  with  eitlier  the  square  dots  or  alternate  rays  of 
white  and  black,  while  those  that  had  evidently  been  on  the  kelp 
had  their  tesselated  borders  well  advanced.  We  must  also  take 
into  consideration  the  fact  that  Monterey  is  the  most  southern 
point  at  wliich  Nacella  instabilis  has  been  found,  and  it  is  quoted 
by  Dnll  as  rare  there.  The  water  of  the  bay  where  these  half  and 
half  No.  458  are  found,  and  also  others,  is  comparatively  smooth 
to  Avhat  it  is  on  the  outside  where  the  typical  Nacella  is  found, 
which  will  account  for  the  preservation  of  the  apex  and  sculpture 
and  may  have  something  to  do  with  the  form,  and  undoubtedly  is 
the  cause  why  it  is  rare  at  Monterey. 

"To  show  the  effe.ct  of  station,  with  probably  other  causes,  I 
send  you  a  full  series  of  a  very  pretty  var.  of  A.  pelta  from  Olym- 
pia,  Puget  Sound,  W.  T.,  461  to  46'(i  inclusive,  that  I  collected 
last  summer.     Station,  on  Mytilus  edulis. 

"  This  very  pretty  var  has  almost  the  exact  form  and  looks  like 
a  hnge  Nacella  p)eltoideii^  Dall,  and  is  a  very  interesting  addition 
to  our  lim[>ets." 


1881.]  natural  sciences  of  philadelphia.  89 

April  26. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  tlie  chair. 
Twenty-six  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  List  of  Fishes  collected  by  Mr.  W.  J. 
Fisher,  npon  the  coasts  of  Lower  California,  1816-77,  with 
descriptions  of  new  species,"  hy  W.  X.  Lockington,  was  presented 
for  publication. 

The  death  of  Dr.  J.  Dickinson  Logan,  a  member,  was  announced. 

Motility  in  Plants. — Mr.  Thomas  Meehan  remarked  that  com- 
paratively little  knowledge  of  motion  had  been  gained  since  the 
time  of  Linnteus.  The  recent  work  of  Mr.  Darwin  on  the  motions 
of  plants,  was  a  A'aluable  contribution  to  the  subject,  though  con- 
fined to  motion  in  roots  and  leaves.  He  thought  it  would  serve 
the  cause  of  science  to  note  that  the  presence  or  absence  of  light 
in  itself  could  not,  as  so  often  assumed,  account  for  all  the  phe- 
nomena of  motion.  He  had  made  numerous  and  careful  observa- 
tions, this  season,  on  motility  in  Draha  verna^  which  plant,  so  far 
as  he  knew,  had  not  been  observed  to  have  an}'  peculiarities.  The 
petals  are  usually  closed  during  the  early  season,  though  the  pedi- 
cels are  erect  in  the  daytime,  di'ooping  so  as  to  form  almost  a 
perfect  circle  at  night.  These  pedicels  become  erect  about  three 
hours  after  sunrise  when  there  is  about  twelve  hours  of  sun  in  the 
day,  commencing  to  droop  at  about  two  o'clock  in  the  afternoon.' 
This  diurnal  motion  in  the  pedicels  continues  some  da^'s  after  the 
petals  have  fallen,  and  apparentl}^  as  long  as  the  silicic  continues 
to  grow.  Later  in  the  season,  on  clear  days,  the  petals  com- 
mence to  open  early  in  the  morning,  contemporaneoush'  with  the 
rising  of  the  pedicel ;  by  the  time  this  was  erect,  the  petals  Avould 
be  nearlj'  expanded.  The  expansion,  when  the  sun  rose  at  half- 
past  five  or  six,  would  be  complete  by  nine  A.  M.  Strange  to  say, 
no  matter  how  clearlj^  the  sun  might  continue  to  shine,  the  petals 
commence  to  close  about  noon,  and  b}'  about  two  P.  M,,  are  com- 
pleteh'  closed. 

During  the  course  of  his  observations,  there  was  a  period  of 
four  da3's  cloudy,  and  no  attempt  at  expansion  was  made.  The 
fourth  day,  however,  was  so  slightly  cloud^^,  that  the  eye  could 
scarcely  look  at  the  sun  through  the  thin  cloudj^  veil,  The  amount 
of  absolute  light  could  be  little  less  than  on  some  days  earlier  in 
the  season,  when  the  sun  was  wholly  unclouded,  but  still  there 
was  no  attempt  at  expansion  of  the  petals.  Continued  observa- 
tions seemed  to  show  that  not  mere  light,  but  clear  sunlight,  was 
necessarj'  to  the  opening  of  the  flower. 

One   evening  there  was  a  heavy  thunder  shower ;  the  next  da}- 
7 


i 


90  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

was  densely  cloudy,  warm  and  moist,  but  the  flowers  of  the  Draha 
expanded  just  as  well  as  under  the  bright  sun  of  previous  days ! 
These  facts  show  that  we  cannot  refer  the  opening  of  the  flowers 
either  to  light  or  sunlight  alone.  Mr.  Meehan  believed  that  plants 
not  onl^^  behaved  differently  at  different  times,  but  in  different 
countries;  and  as  no  one,  not  even  Mr.  Darwin,  seems  to  have 
noted  the  expansion  of  the  petals  of  the  Draba  in  England,  it  is 
possible  that  under  those  cloudy  skies,  they  do  not  expand  at  all. 
So  far  as  he  had  noted  here,  the  self-fertilized  flowers  of  the 
closed  Drabas  produced  seed  just  as  well  as  the  expanded  ones, 
which  might  possibly  be  occasionally  cross-fertilized  by  the  small 
sand  wasps,  which  visited  the  open  flowers  freely  for  pollen. 

How  habits  change  at  times,  Mr.  Meehan  illustrated  \)\  speci- 
mens of  Lamium  aviplexicanle^  a  common  introduced  weed  in 
gardens.  Dr.  Bromfleld,  in  his  Flora  of  the  Isle  of  Wight, 
notices  that  the  flowers  vary  in  size  during  the  season,  but  that 
the  earliest  ones  are  the  largest.  Here  it  is  reversed.  The  speci- 
mens exhibited  had  already  flowered  from  six  verticels,  and  had 
mature  seeds  in  many,  but  the  flowers  had  never  expanded  in  any 
case.  Indeed,  very  rarely  had  the  closed  corollas  been  produced 
beyond  the  calyx.  They  were  essentially  cleistogene.  As  showing 
how  unceriain  were  the  laws  influencing  this  condition,  when  usu- 
ally about  the  end  of  April,  the  perfect  flowers  appeared,  some 
plants  would  have  them  a  week  or  more  before  others  alongside 
produced  any.  To  all  appearances,  external  influences  were  the 
same. 

As  somewhat  bearing  on  the  laws  of  motion,  the  angle  of  diver- 
gence,in  branches  was  referred  to.  Mr.  M.  exhibited  branches  of 
tSaJix  capi^ea.  Normally  the  branches  separated  from  each  other 
at  a  very  acute  angle,  but  the  fertile  anient  on  these  branches  was 
pendulous.  Under  no  external  influence,  so  far  as  we  could  tell, 
an  individual  appears  with  pendulous  branches.  This  has  been 
increased  by  grafting,  and  is  known  in  nurseries  as  the  Kilmarnock 
weeping  willow.  But  the  aments  have  retained  their  normal  con- 
dition as  regards  the  bi'anch.  The  catkins  are  erect  on  the  pen- 
dulous branches,  while  pendulous  on  the  erect  ones.  Morpho- 
logically a  catkin  is  but  a  modifled — an  arrested — branch,  but  we 
see  by  this  that  whatever  cause  induced  the  change  from  the 
normal  condition  of  divergence,  it  v/as  purely  local,  and  ceased  to 
exist  before  it  reached  the  arrested  branch  or  ament. 

These  facts  were  offered  to  show  that  in  studj^ing  motility  in 
the  vai-ious  parts  of  plants,  it  would  be  well  to  remember  that  ex- 
ternal causes  had  but  a  limited  influence,  and  that  in  these  cases 
a  combination  of  circumstances  often  controlled  the  influences  at- 
tributed to  one.  As,  therefore,  the  f;icts  would  vary  with  various 
observations, —those  of  one  observer  sometimes  seeming  rather  to 
conflict  with  than  to  confirm  another, — it  was  too  soon  to  form 
any  just  conclusion  as  to  the  motive  cause.     What  was  desired 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  91 

was  not  so  much  these  speculations,  but  an  increase  in  the  number 
of  observers,  and  a  correct  record  of  well  authenticated  facts. 

The  resignation  of  Dr.  Henry  C.  Chapman,  as  a  member  of  the 
Council  was  read  and  accepted. 

Jesse  S.  Walton  and  Harrj^  Skinner  were  elected  members. 
The  following  Avas  ordered  to  be  published : 


92  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 


OBSERVATIONS    ON    PLANORBIS. 
BY  ROBERT  E.  C.  STEARNS. 

I.  Are  the  Shells  of  Planorbis  Dextral  or  Sinistral  ? 

Incidental  to  an  investigation  into  the  relations  of  certain  fresh- 
water snails,  upon  looking  through  the  books,  I  find  that  authori- 
ties differ  on  the  point,  whether  the  shells  of  Planorbis  are  dextral 
or  sinistral. 

While  Say,^  Swainsou,^  G.  B.  Sowerby,  Jr.^  and  Reeve  ^  regard 
them  as  sinistral,  or  reversed,  and  properly  figure  the  shells,  in 
their  works,  in  a  sinistral  position,  and  not  "  upside  down,"  as  in 
many  of  the  books,  Macgillivray^  says  ''the  shell  is  dextral,  as 
several  observers  have  proved;  not  sinistral,  as  many  have 
alleged;"  and  Woodward,"  H.  and  A.  Adams,''  W.  G.  Binney'^  and 
others  also  describe  it  or  refer  to  it  as  being  dextral. 

Dall  remarks  in  a  foot-note  to  his  paper  "  On  the  Genus  Pom- 
pholyx  and  its  Allies,"^  "  if  we  consider  the  shells  of  this  group 
as  dextral,  they  oflfer  the  peculiarity  of  having  the  genitalia  as  in 
most  sinistral  shells ;  Pompholyx  presents  the  same  conditions 
and  is  certainly  dextral."  Dr.  Philip  P.  Carpenter,  referring  to 
Planorbis^  says,  "  it  lives  in  a  reversed  position."^'' 

It  will  be  observed  from  the  above  that  eminent  writers  are 
divided,  and  that  we  have  substantial  authority  on  both  sides  of 
the  question. 

My  own  observations  thus  far  prove  the  shells  to  be  generally 
sinistral,^^  but  as  I  have  examined  but  comparativel}'  few  of  the 
whole  number  of  species,  it  may  be  that  the  shells  in  some  species 
are  dextral,  and  in  other  species  sinistral. 

1  Say  ex  Binney,  L.  and  F.  W.  Shells  of  N.  A,,  Part  II,  p.  103. 

-  Treatise  on  Malacology,  p.  337. 

^  Conchological  Manual,  p.  245. 

*  Conchologia  Systematica,  PI.  CXC. 

^  Molluscous  Animals  of  Scotland,  p.  114. 

"  Manual  of  MoUusca,  second  ed.,  p.  302. 

^  Genera  of  Recent  Mollusca,  Vol.  II,  p.  260. 

'^  Smithsonian  Miss.  Pub.  No.  143,  p.  103. 

a  Annals  of  Lyceum  of  Nat.  History  of  N.  Y.,  Vol.  IX,  March,  1870. 
'0  Lectures  on  Mollusca,  S.  I.  Report,  1860. 

"  The  figures  of  Say's  larger  species  in  Gould's  luvertebrata  of  Mass., 
first  ed.,  are  most  excellent. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  D3 

G.  B.  Sowerbj' ,  Jr.,  in  comparing  Planorbis  with  certain  Am- 
pullariffi  {Marisa)^  says:  "  It  is  further  to  be  remarked  that  the 
discoidal  Ampulhirife  are  dextral  shells,  and  the  Planorbes  are 
sinistral  or  reversed  ;  and  although  the  latter  are  sometimes  so  flat 
and  orbicular  that  it  is  difficult  to  know  which  is  the  spiral  side, 
it  may  nevertheless  always  be  ascertained  b}'  a  careful  examina- 
tion."i 

"While  the  anatomy  of  Planorhiii  in  its  principal  characters,  is 
presumed  to  be  sinistral,  and  indicates,  with  the  sum  of  other 
characters  (including  habitat),  a  most  intimate  relationship  to 
P/njsa,  which  has,  as  is  well  known,  a  sinistral  shell,  yet  some  of 
the  authors  who  affirm  the  sinistral  character  of  the  soft  parts  or 
body,  say  also,  that  the  species  of  this  genus  {Planorbis)^  have  a 
dextral  sliell,  an  inclusive  and  broad  statement  which  applies  to 
all  of  the  species,  and  apparently  repeat  this  tradition,  or  else 
assume  that  it  is  so,  because  the  great  majorit}'  of  gasteropodous 
moUusks  which  have  shells  at  all,  have  dextral  shells,  the  excep- 
tions being  comparativeh'  few. 

If  we  consider  what  are  regarded  as  apical  characters  in  forms 
about  which  there  is  no  question,  and  it  is  permitted  to  reason, 
from  analogy  in  this  connection,  it  will  be  seen  that  some  species 
of  Planorbis  have  sinistral  shells,  and  I  submit  as  examples 
sustaining  this  position,  the  larger  West  American  forms  known  as 
P.  amnion,  (fig.  1)  Gould  (+  P.  Traskii,  Lea,),  P.  trivolvis,  (fig.  2) 
Say  2  ( 4- P.  var.  occidentalism  Cp.  MSS.),  P.  lumens^  Cpr.,  P. 
subcrenafus,  (figs.  3-3a)  Cpr.^,  P.corpulentus^  (figs.  4-4a)  Say,  and 
P.  tumidus,  Pfr.,  from  Nicaragua,  also  P.  corneas.  L.,  Britain,  as 
shown  in  authentic  specimens  received  from  an  experienced  and 

^  Concliological  Manual,  p.  345. 

-  Pacific  Coast  specimens. 

^  This  species  more  nearly  resembles  P.  corneus,  than  does  any  other 
American  form.  Many  of  the  smaller  so-called  species  (A.mevican)  are 
exceedingly  close  to  the  smaller  forms  of  Europe,  and  it  is  not  unlikely  a 
careful  investigation  would  place  some  of  them  under  the  names  previously 
made  by  the  earlier  authors.  Mr.  W.  G.  Binney  writes  of  Physa  hypnorum, 
"it  is  one  of  the  species  common  to  the  three  continents  ;"  and  of  Limmca, 
he  says,  "  It  seems  certain  that  the  boreal  regions  are  inhabited  by  several 
species  common  to  similar  latitudes  in  A.sia  and  Europe,  such  as  L.  stag- 
nalis  and  L.  palmtris.^^  This  remark  will  ultimately  be  found  to  apply 
with  equal  truth  to  species  of  Planorbis. 


I 


94 


PROCEEDINGS    OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF 


[1881. 


trustworthy  correspondent  near  London.  This  latter  is  the  only 
large  European  species,  I  am  familiar  with. 

While  it  is  neither  proven  nor  asserted  herein,  that  all  species 
of  Planorbis  liave  sinistral  shells,  neither  is  it  known  that  the 
anatomy  of  all  the  species  is  sinistral. 

The  relations  of  Planorbis  to  Limnsea  are  not  so  remote  as  to 
make  it  altogether  unwarrantable  to  look  for  a  divergence  in  that 
direction. 

The  extreme  variableness  of  Planorbis  has  undoubtedly  led  to 
the  making  of  too  many  species ;  specimens  which  are  conceded 


Fig.  1 


Fig.  3(7. 


P.  trivolvis.  Say. 


P.  suhcrenatus,  Cpr. 


Fig.  4. 


Fig.  4a. 


P.  ammon,  Gld. 


P.  subcrenatus,  Cpr. 


P.  corpulentus,  Say. 


to  be  of  the  same  species,  from  difierent  though  adjacent  ponds, 
etc.,  vary  more  or  less,  and  this  is  particularly  the  case  with  "West 
American  forms  which  are  in  various  degrees  affected  by  the 
character  of  the  water,  temperature,  etc.  While  it  is  quite  certain 
that  the  specific  names  herein  given  would  be  reduced  b}'  a  careful 
and  philosophical  comparison,  at  this  time  I  can  onl^^  refer  to 
them  as  they  now  stand  in  the  books  ;  I  may  mention  P.  tumens 
from  near  Petaluma  as  a  dwarfed  variety  of  P.  corpulentus ;  varie- 
ties of  the  latter  are  frequently  confused  with  P.  ammon. 


1881.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


95 


It  may  here  be  remarked  that  Macgillivra}^,  an  enthusiastic 
observer,  Avho  has  described  some  of  the.  British  species  with 
great  fidelity,  lays  much  stress  on  the  shape  of  the  mouth,  com- 
paring it  with  those  of  Helix  and  Zonites,  as  conclusive  of  the 
dexti-al  character  of  the  shells  in  Planorhis} 

If  analogies  in  form  of  mouth  are  worthy  of  consideration, 
though  this  point  may  not  have  much  weight  without  otlier  and 
corroborative  evidence,  we  have  in  this  character  a  stronger  argu- 
ment the  other  way,  b}-,  more  propeiiy  a  comparison  between 
nearer  related  forms  like  Physa  (that  is  the  more  globose  species), 
and  most  of  the  forms  of  Planorhia  I  have  given,  holding  the  latter 
in  a  normal  sinistral  position,  when  the  tendency  to  the  ph^^soid 
moutli,  tlie  ovate  shape  and  sag  of  the  aperture  will  be  readily 
noticed. 

Frequently,  immature,  half-grown,  and  less  than  half-grown 
shells  of  Planorhis  have  been  brought  to  me  by  collectors  who 
were  quite  confident  they  had  made  new  discoveries,  and  it  is  not 
improbable  that  j'oung  shells  as  above  have  been  described  and 
published  as  new  species  of  Physa. 
Fig.  6. 


Fig.  5. 


Fig.  7. 


Ameria  scalaris,  Jay.    Physa  globosa,     Physa  hiimerosa,  Gld. 
Hald. 


Fig.  8, 


Fig.  9. 


Physa  ancillaria,  Say. 


Physa  ampullacca,  Gld. 


I  would  further 
suggest  a  compari- 
son of  the  apertures 
of  our  larger  Cali- 
fornian  (adult) 
shells  of  Planorhis^ 
held  in  a  sinistral 
position  with  Ame- 
ria scalaris  (fig.  5)^ 
(=  Paludina  sca- 
laris, Jay),  a  curious 
Florida  form ;  Phy- 
sella  globosa  (fig.  6), 
Hald.,  a  Tennessee 


^  It  is  presumable  that  the  shells  of  Planorhis,  by  which  Macgillivray 
was  impressed  and  which  were  the  most  familiar  to  him,  were  the  small 
species  of  his  own  country,  which  are  flat,  symmetrically  coiled,  regular  in 
form,  and  gradual  in  growth,  being  in  striking  contrast  with  the  sturdier, 
ventricose  West  American  forms  I  have  cited— which  also  more  conspic- 
uously exhibit  sinistral  characters. 

-  Dall  says  :  "A  careful  examination  of  a  number  of  specimens  of  this 
singular  form,  shows  that  it  is  distinct,  and  not  a  young  Planorhis,  as  has 


96  PROCEEDINOS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

species;  also  with  other  species  of  PJiysa,  like  P.  hvmerom 
(fig.  7),  P.  ancillaria  (fig.  8),  P.  ampullacea  (fig.  9',  etc.,  ct  sic  de 
similihus. 

We  shall,  however,  find  more  satisfactory  testimony  on  the 
sinistral  point  by  analyzing  the  apical  characters. 

If,  as  in  other  shells,  we  consider  that  to  be  the  upper  end  or 
spire  in  which  we  can  follow  tlie  volutions  through  the  entire  shell 
from  tip  or  nucleus  to  the  ultimate  or  basal  whorl  and  mouth — 
then  it  is  impossible  to  avoid  the  conclusion  that  some  species  of 
Planorbis  have  sinistral  shells.  In  some  of  the  smaller  forms, 
like  P.  vortex^  P.  conforfus^  P.  glaber,  P.  carinatus^  and  P.  spir- 
orbis,  all  of  which  are  British  species,  and  in  which  the  whorls 
are  (in  comparison  with  larger  American  forms)  quite  evenly 
coiled  and  in  which  also,  the  increase  in  size  of  whorl  is  quite 
gradual,  the  difference  between  the  two  sides  of  the  shell,  apical 
and  umbilical,  is  not  as  readily  perceived.  The  largest  British 
species,  P.  corneus,  confirms  my  view,  being  sinistral.  The  rapid 
enlargement  of  the  whorls  in  some  of  the  West  American  species 
is  in  marked  contrast  with  even  the  shells  of  P.  corneus  of  the 
same  diameter ;  the  height  of  the  latter  as  compared  to  P.  corjni- 
lentus  being  as  -31  to  "54,  while  the  length  of  the  aperture  is  in 
still  greater  contrast,  being  as  -42  to  -YG.  These  measurements 
were  made  from  average-sized  perfect  specimens  of  both  species 
placed  apex  up,  with  the  mouth  to  the  left, 

It  is  easy  to  perceive  that  in  those  forms  where  the  ratio  of 
increase  is  great  as  between  the  last  whorl  and  the  preceding  Arolu- 
tion  and  so  on,  whorl  compared  with  whorl,  through  the  whole,  as 
for  instance  in  P.  ammon^  that  the  depression  of  both  spire  and 
umbilicus  is  most  marked ;  but  nevertheless  the  umbilicus  is  the 
more  profound  as  may  easily  be  proved  by  counting  the  volutions 
first  on  one  side,  and  then  on  the  other. 

Again,  if  additional  proof  is  wanted,  take  any  one  of  the  larger 
forms^  of  the  species  herein  named,  and  carefully,  by  degrees,  burn 
off  the  under  side  (which  can  easily  be  done,  by  pouring  a  little 

been  suspected.— ^rt«-rt7s  N.  T.  Lyceum  Nat.  Hist.,  Vol.  IX,  p.  35G ;  foot- 
note. 

1  As  distorted  individuals,  with  the  volutions  exceedingly  irregular,  are 
of  frequent  occurrence,  in  making  the  test  suggested,  such  monstrosities 
should  be  rejected,  as  they  would  as  often  unduly  favor  one  side  of  the 
question  as  the  other. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  97 

acid  in  a  saucer  or  watch-glass),  until  the  shell  is  eaten  off  to  a 
line  which  obliterates  the  umbilicus,  when  the  nucleus  of  the  spire, 
the  tip,  and  half  a  whorl  to  a  whorl  and  a-half  will  be  found  re- 
maining. 

Those  who  insist  on  the  dextral  character  of  the  shells  in 
Planorhis,  unless  the}'  except  the  species  I  have  named,  are  thus 
compelled  to  demonstrate  how  in  the  sequence  of  growth  the 
umbilicus  can  precede  the  nucleus. 

Though  specimens  of  the  forms  under  discussion,  in  various 
embryonic  stages,  have  frequently  excited  my  attention,  j-et  the 
material,  so  far  as  adolescence  is  connected  with  the  present  line 
of  inquiiy,  was  at  the  moment,  unfortvinatel}^,  inaccessible.  I 
have  therefore  been  compelled,  in  order  to  present  such  structural 
features  of  the  shells  as  are  related  to  the  direction  (right  or  left) 
of  the  volutions,  the  form  of  the  aperture,  etc.,  to  use  adult  speci- 
mens, and  by  breaking  back,  piece  by  piece,  and  whorl  after 
whorl,  towards  the  nucleus,  until  the  larger  whorls  are  sufflcientl}^ 
removed,  so  that  the  apex  or  spire  ceases  to  be  either  concave  or 
depressed,  and  is  simply  flat.  It  would  be  almost,  if  not  quite 
impossible  to  do  this  with  the  smaller  species,  owing  to  their 
diminutive  size  and  exceeding  fragility,  and  difficult  to  obtain  the 
necessar}^  sections  for  illustration  herein,  by  the  use  of  acid. 

The  figures  (10)  are  drawn  from  specimens  of  Planorhis  coiyu- 
lentus  collected  in  Oregon,  also  in  Clear  Lake, 
Fig.  10.  California,  by  that  indefatigable  collector,  Mr. 

C.  D.  Yoy.     Before  manipulation  they  measured 
as  follows : 
Plan,  corpuientus-  Largest  diameter,         .         .     -94  inch. 

nuclear  whorls.  Height.  .  .  .      •      .      "38   inch. 

Number  of  whorls,  four  and  a-half, 

which  were  broken  back  to  one  and  a-half  whorls,  with  a  diameter 
of  "10  inch. ;  height  -15  inch.  The  umbilicus  in  one  instance  was 
still  discernible — in  the  others,  destroj^ed.  This  species  is  widely 
distributed  and  occupies  an  extensive  geographical  area,  on  the 
western  side  of  the  continent,  from  the  Columbia  River  in  the 
north ;  easterly  to  Lake  Winnipeg  ;  and  southerly  to  Cape  St. 
Lucas. ^  Binney  says,  "  F.  corpulentus  is  catalogued  from  Guate- 
mala b}^  Mr.  Tristram," 

^  Prof.  Geo.  Davidson  collected  specimens  at  this  place. 


98 


PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF 


[1881. 


Fig.  11. 


Plan,  tumidus—nnoleixr  whorls. 


P.  Traskii,  Lea,  whicli  Mr.  Binney  makes  a  synonym  of  P. 
ammon,  belongs  to  the  western  corpulentus  form. 

While  the  forcooing  figures  (10)  show  the  shells  of  one  species 
reduced  to  one  and  a-half  whorls,  the  following  figures  exhibit  the 
form  of  Planorhis  tumidus,  Pfr.,  which  measured  in 

Largest  diameter,         .         .         .         .     '68  inch, 
with  five  whorls,  reduced  by  breaking  down  to  two  and  a-half 
whorls  and  a  diameter  of  '16  inch. 

This  last  is  a  more  southern 
species ;.  numerous  specimens  were 
collected  by  the  late  Thos.  Bridges, 
who  found  them  abundant  in  ele- 
vated pools,  small  lakes,  etc.,  amid 
the  forest  slopes  of  Mombacho,  in 
Nicaragua.  It  closely  resembles 
more  northern  forms  and  should 
hardly  be  called  a  species. 

It  will  be  observed  in  the  figures 
(10)  that  we  have  in  the  embryonic  shells  of  Planorhis  corpulentus 
a  near  approach  to  Physa,  a,  close  resemblance  to  a  Physa  with  a 
flattened  spire ;  suggesting  such  physoid  forms  as  P.  humerosa, 
while  the  adolescent  stage  of  Planorhis  tumidus  (at  half  its  adult 
size)  also  suggests  an  umbilicated  Physa  with  a  flattened  spire, 
somewhat  like  (N.  W.  American)  Physa  Lordi  (fig.  12),  with  the 

spire    cut    off,   and  an  umbilicus 
punched  in,  back  of  the  mouth. 

The  first  figures  (10)  explain 
De  Kay's  "  Physa  jAanorbula  " 
(fig.  13),  and  also  suggestively 
point  towards  Ameria  scalaris. 
These  figures  also  exhibit  the  phj'soid  mouth,  and 
show  that  there  is  neither  necessity  nor  propriety 
ysa  or  i.  .^  leaving  closely  related  forms  for  more  distant, 
analogies.  In  this  connection  it  should  also  be  kept  in  mind  that 
certain  species  of  Physa,  included  in  Ehrenberg's  subgenus 
Isido7'a,  are  more  or  less  umbilicated.  Of  the  smaller  species  of 
Planorhis  which  have  passed  under  ray  examination,  I  have  seldom 
found  it  difficult  to  determine  the  sinistral  characters  b}^  a  com- 
parison of  the  two  sides  of  the  shell. 

If  we  could  unroll  a  specimen  of,  say,  Planorhis  sjnrorhis,  and 


Fig.  13. 


Physa  2)lanorbula. 


1881.J 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


99 


then  straighten  it  out,  it  woukl  resemble,  in  minatiire,  an  acutely 
elongated  conical  tube,  in  a  general  way  like  the  following 
figure : 

Fig.  14. 

X 

-^^ &s^    '  — -    — N 


Fig. 


of  which  N  represents  the  nucleus,  A  the  aperture  or  mouth,  and 
ML  a  median  line.  Xow  it  will  readil}^  be  seen  that  such  a  tube, 
if  simply  wound  up,  or  made  into  a  flat  coil,  and  during  the  pro- 
cess of  winding,  kept  horizontalh^  and  laterally  in 
plane  with  the  central  or  median  line  which  divides 
the  tube  into  equal  parts,  would,  in  an  exceedingly 
small  shell,  make  it  somewhat  difficult  to  determine 
which  was  the  apical  or  the  umbilical  (that  is  the 
upper  or  under)  side  of  the  shell,  as  the  nucleus 
and  nuclear  whorls  in  such  a  case  would  be  equall}' 
as  perceptible  on  one  side  of  the  shell  as  on  the 
other,  and  the  concavit}^  or  depression  of  both 
sides  would  be  the  same,  bejng  equal  to  one-half 
of  the  diameter  of  the  tube  as  seen  at  X. 

The  Californiau  species  to  which  I  have  re- 
ferred, instead  o,f  being  represented  b}^  an  attenu- 
ated tube  like  the  preceding  figure,  which  very 
slowly  increases  in  circumference  from  nucleus  to 
aperture,  would  if  unwound,  give  us  a  more  robust 
form,  a  more  rapidly  enlarging,  conical  tube,  like 
this  (fig.  15) : 

X  being  the  nucleus,  A  the  aperture,  and  ML 
the  median  line. 

It  will  be  seen  that  if  this  tube,  commencing  at 
X  the  nucleus,  was  evenly  coiled  upon  the  median 
line,  the  nucleus  as  in  the  first  instance,  though 
very  much  more  depressed,  owing  to  the  greater 
diameter  of  the  tube  as  seen  at  X,  could  be  equally- 
well  seen  on  the  two  sides,  the  umbilical  and  apical 
depressions  being  the  same. 

When  the  line  of  coil  is  other  than  median,  and 
the  greater  portion  of  the  tube  or  shell  is  below  the 
line  of  coil,  as  is  the  case  with  the  species  I  find  to 
be  sinistral,  then  of  course  the  umbilicus  is  the  more  and  the 


100  PROCEEDINOS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

apex  the  less  depressed,  and  therefore  the  latter  is  more  easily 
discerned.  Another  point  too  important  to  be  overlooked,  is  the 
form  of  the  tube  as  exliibited  in  a  transverse  or  cross  section ; 
whether  circular,  semilunar,  or  horizontally  or  perpendicularly 
ovate. 

Some  of  the  larger  species  have  tubes,  which,  in  cross  section, 
are  of  the  latter  shape,  hence  the  physoid  aspect  of  the  aper- 
ture both  in  adult  and  embryonic  specimens. 

Since  the  foregoing  was  written,  the  shells  which  appear  in  the 
list  appended  hereto  as  from  Lake  Simcoe,  came  to  hand.  The 
lot  embraced  three  species  of  Planorhis.  Several  specimens  (of 
rather  small  size)  of  P.  trivolvis,  are  of  the  western  P.  corpu- 
lentus  character,  and  sinistral.  Twenty-five  specimens  of  P. 
campanulatus,  Say,  are  also  sinistral  as  described  by  that  author, 
and  three  specimens  of  P.  bicarinatus  are  dextral,  though  des- 
cribed as  sinistral  b}'  Say.  Of  the  smaller  American  species 
glanced  at  by  me  in  the  course  of  investigation,  I  find  P.  vermic- 
ularis^  from  Utah  Lake,  U.  T.,  is  sometimes  dextral. 

From  what  is  presented  above  it  will,  I  think,  be  admitted  that 
some  species  of  Planorbes  have  shells  whose  structure  is  in  har- 
mony with  the  sinistral  characters  of  the  anatomy,  as  might 
reasonably  be  presumed,  and  it  is  not  unlikely  that  such  will 
prove  to  be  the  rule  and  not  the  exception,  when  an  extended  and 
critical  examination  of  the  whole  group  has  been  made. 

I  do  not  propose,  at  this  time,  to  inquire  into  the  origin  of  the 
related  forms  referred  to  in  this  paper  ;  but  the  suggestions,  which 
have  incidentally  occurred  in,  or  grown  out  of  the  consideration  of 
the  simpler  points  discussed,  impress  me  as  inviting  investigation. 

The  following  species  of  Planorhis  from  the  localities  stated, 
have  been  especially  examined  in  connection  herewith. 

*  P.  trivolois,  Erie  Canal,  N.  Y. 

*  "  Tinker's  Creek,  Lake  Co.,  Willoughby,  O 

*  _  "  Foot's  Pond,  Woodburn,  near  Cincinnati 

Ohio, 

*  "  Lake  Winnebago,  Wisconsin. 

*  "  Wabash  River,  Posey  Co.,  Indiana. 

*  ''  Covington,  Kentucky, 
f              "                                      Washoe  Lake,  Nevada. 


Note. — I  am  indebted  to  the  courtesy  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution 
for  all  of  the  figures  herein,  except  10,  11,  14  and  15,  which  are  original. 


1881.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


101 


Near  Salt  Lake,  Utah  T. 
Utah  Lake,  U.  T. 

Carthage,  Ohio. 
Cumbeiland  Co.,  Tennessee. 

Cumberland  Co.,  Tennessee. 

Tuolumne  Meadows,  Tuolumne  Co.,  Cal. 

Indian  River,  Texas. 

Bexar  County,  Texas. 

Miami,  Florida. 

Lake  Simcoe,  Canada. 

Near  Portland,  Oregon. 

Lake  Simcoe,  Canada. 
Traskii,  Clear  Lake,  Lake  Co.  Cal. 

"        Oregon,  Mus.  Stearns. 
Cp.  Russian  River,  near  Ukiah,  Cal. 

King's  River,  Cal. 

Mountain  Lake,  near  San  Francisco,  Cal. 

Santa  Cruz,  Cal. 

Los  Angeles,  Cal, 

Nicaragua. 

East  Tennessee. 

Erie  Canal,  N.  Y. 

McHenry  County,  Ills, 

Portland,  Oregon. 

Lake  Simcoe,  Canada. 

Clear  Lakes  of  Indian  River,  Florida. 

Orono,  Maine. 

Henry  County,  Ills. 

Salinas  River,  Cal. 

Great  Britain,  many  localities. 

The  note  marks  above  refer  to  the  following  parties  from  whom 
the  material  examined  was  received  :  *  Prof.  A.  G.  Wetherbj' ; 
t  C.  D.  Voj ;  t  Henry  Hemphill ;  ft  -^-  ^'-  Crawford  ;  §  Dr. 
Edward  Palmer;  %%  the  late  Thomas  Bridges;  ||  0.  Button  ;  ^  the 
late  W.  W.  Walpole,  Esq.,  from  all  of  whom  I  have  received  most 
generous  assistance. 

As  to  the  validity  of  the  species,  or  determinations  as  above,  it 
is  not  necessarj'  to  discuss  the  matter  in  this  paper,  as  it  is  not 
pertinent  to  the  objective  point,  but  as  may  naturally  be  supposed 
b}'  any  one  who  has  had  occasion  to  examine  into  the  literature 
relating  to  the  group,  and  to  make  a  critical  comparison  of  mate- 


X 

P. 

ti'ivolvis, 

% 

(( 

« 

P. 

between  Icntus 
and  glabratus. 

* 

P. 

approaching 

glabratus. 

* 

P. 

approaching 

lentus. 

X 

P. 

near  ttimens, 

* 

P. 

near  corpulentus, 

* 

(<            .( 

* 

('            <( 

tt 

K                        (( 

X 

P. 

corpulentus, 

tt 

n 

t 

"            var. 

X 

P. 

var.  occidentalis, 

tt 

.  '<                (( 

tt 

(<                .  < 

t 

((                           u 

X 

P. 

tumens, 

XX 

P. 

tumidus, 

* 

P. 

glabratus, 

* 

P. 

bicarinata, 

* 

n 

X 

u 

tt 

u 

* 

P. 

lentus. 

* 

P. 

campamdatus. 

* 

n 

II 

P. 

ammon, 

IT  p. 

corneus, 

102  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

rial,  I  have  found  much  that  is  unsatisfactory,  and  it  is  not 
asserting  too  much  to  say,  that  too  many  species  have  been  made, 
and  that  a  careful  revision  is  required  ;  and  in  this  connection, 
which  shows  the  well-known  variability  of  the  group,  I  may  men- 
tion the  examination  of  a  parcel  of  specimens  from  a  single  "  pond 
back  of  Covington,  Kentucky,"  kindly  furnished  by  Professor 
Wetherby,  which  admits  of  a  separation  resulting  in  three  species 
and  a  remainder  which  readily  connects  all  three  ;  for  this  reason 
I  do  not  claim  that  the  determinations  as  given  are  always  con- 
sistent, though  carefully  considered ;  as  before  remarked,  how- 
ever, the  point  I  have  endeavored  to  present  is  not  affected 
thereby. 

II.   On  certain  Aspects  of  Variation  in  American  Planorbes. 

In  the  course  of  the  preceding  inquiry  various  aspects  of  varia- 
tion, as  exhibited  in  the  material  under  examination  were  con- 
stantly recurring. 

Without  presuming  to  explain  such  phenomena,  which  would 
quite  likely  be  a  difficult  matter,  even  if  all  the  peculiarities  of 
environment  in  each  case,  or  of  each  lot  of  shells  examined,  were 
known,  and  without  such  data,  quite  hypothetical,  yet  a  few  notes 
and  comments  suggested  by  the  forms  referred  to,  may  be  worth 
a  passing  notice. 

The  larger  so-called  species  of  Planorbis  may  for  convenience 
in  discussion  be  grouped  as  follows  : 

First.    Those  in  which  the  whorls  are  rounded  ;  that  is  to  say 
Figs.  16  and  17.  if  the  tube  or  cone,  as  represented  in  the  pre- 

ceding paper,  was  cut  trans versel}^,  the  section 
would  show  a  rounded  (not  round)  outline. 
Examples— The  typical  P.  corneus,  L.,^  of 
Europe;  P.  Guadaloupensis,  Shj.f  P.  suh- 
crenatus  (figs.  16,  It),  Cpr.,^  and  P.  tumidus, 
Pfr.,'*  of  Nicaragua,  a  quite  persistent  form, 
not,  however,  quite  as  rounded  as  the  others. 
Second.  Those  in  which  the  whorls  are 
either  planulate,  angulated,  carinated  or  sub- 
^pTsubaenatus  Cpr!       carinatcd,  which  includes  most  of  the  larger 

1  Woodward's  Manual,  PI.  XII,  fig.  34  ;   Sby.'s  Manual,  PI.  XIV,  fig. 
311 ;  Keeve,  Conch.  System.,  PI.  CXC,  fig.  1. 
■'  Ibid,  fig.  2. 
■'  Binney,  L.  and  F.  W.  Shells,  N.  A.,  Part  II,  figs.  176,  178. 


1881.] 


NATURAL   SCIENCES    OF    PHILADELPHIA. 


103 


Xorth  American  species 


riGS.  18  and  V.>. 


Examples — P.  corpidentus  (figs.  18, 19), 
Saj^,'  P.Traskii^  Lea.,  P,  occiden- 
talism   Cp.,    and    P.    hicarinatus 
(fig.  20),  Sa3\     In  these  the  tube, 
if  cut  transversely,  would  present 
an  outline  more  or  less  angulated. 
Forms  like  P.  trivolvis  (fig.  21), 
Say,  connect  the  two  groups  ;  for 
while    in     some    inst'^nees    this 
species     exhibits     the     rounded 
whorls  of  the  first,  it  imperceptibh"  differenti- 
ates from  the  above  to  obtuse  angulation,  and 
p.  corpuientus,  Say.        ^^^^^^q  to  the  subcarinate  forms  of  the  second 


bicarinatiLS, 
Say. 


jronp, 
P.  amnion  (fig 


Fig.  21. 


Fig.  22. 


P.  irivolvis.  Say. 


22),  Gould,  must  be  mentioned  here,  as  it  illus- 
trates   another    aspect    of 

variation,   that   of  a  more 

rapid    enlargement   of  the 

whorls,  the  result  of  a  more 

obtuse   cone   than   in    tri- 

volvis;  this,  when  flattened 

above  or  angulated,  gives 

us  the  form  P,  Traskii,  the 

most    striking  of    all    the 

American  Planorbes  ;  it  is 

the  extreme  or  culmination 

of  the  flattened  or  planu- 
lated  aspect  in  the  second  group  of  species, 
of  which  P.  corpidentus  is  a  well  known  form 
and  more  widelj-  distributed  than  the  other ; 
Dr.  Cooper's  P.  occidentalis  being  an  inter- 
mediate link  between  t^'pical  P.  tricoluis  and 
ordinary  average  specimens  of  P.  corpidentus. 
Southern  specimens  of/*,  trivolvis  seem  to 
be  nearer  the  southern  form  of  P.  lentus  than 
do  average  specimens  of  these  alleged  species  from  northern 
stations  ;  and  both  of  the  above  from  soutlierl}-  stations  approach 
more  closel}-  to  the  European  corneus  than  do  northern  specimens 
of  the  same  ;  the  same  mav  be  said  of  the  Xicarasfuan  P.  tumidus. 


p.  ammon,  G-IJ. 


^  Biiiney"s  figures,  ibid. 


104  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

P.  hicarinatus,  the  cone  of  which  is  less  robust  than  that  of  P. 
amnion  oi'  P.  Traskii,  being  in  that  respect  nearer  to  the  typical 
trivolvis,  exhibits  the  culmination  of  the  carinated  or  keeled 
character  of  the  second  group,  and  appears  to  mark  tlie  limit  in 
this  direction,  having  reached  what  may  be  termed  a  permanent 
point.  This  species  is  usually  quite  persistent  as  to  plane  of 
coil ;  though  in  Binney  it  is  reported  from  a  single  station  as  far 
south  as  "Northern  Georgia" — it  seems  to  prefer  northerly 
regions. 

It  is  apparently  of  rare  occurrence  west  of  the  Rocky  Moun- 
tains. Mr.  Hemphill  informed  me  that  he  detected  two  or  three 
individuals  at  Antioch,  California,  a  station  peculiar  in  its  enviro- 
mental  characters,  being  at  a  point  where  the  Sacramento  and 
San  Joaquin  Rivers  meet  and  unite  the  drainage  waters  of  the 
two  great  valleys  of  the  same  names;  mingling  in  combined 
volume  their  fresh  water  with  the  salt  tidal-water  from  San  Fran- 
cisco Bay.  Other  forms  are  sometimes  found  at  this  point ;  they 
seem  unable  to  obtain  a  foothold  or  to  establish  a  permanent 
colony  or  settlement.  The  region  is  one  of  marshes,  which  sus- 
tain a  rank  growth  of  coarse  vegetation,  especially  what  is  known 
as  tales,  whicli  sift,  as  it  were,  the  waters,  and  hold  for  a  time 
forms  which,  during  the  great  floods  of  excessively  wet  winters, 
are  swept  from  their  native  haunts  through  the  submersion  or 
overflow  of  the  ponds,  lakes  and  streams  of  a  vast  interior 
region. 

Thus  Mr.  Carlton^  found  a  few  juvenile  specimens  of  Carinifex 
here  in  May,  1869,  which,  like  Mr.  Hemphill's  specimens  of 
P.  bicarinatus,  had  never  before  nor,  so  far  as  I  can  learn,  have 
never  since  been  reported  from  this  place  nor  any  point  in  the  ad- 
joining region.  In  fact,  the  only  habitat  west  of  the  Rocky  Moun- 
tains, I  believe,  from  which  this  Planorbis  is  reported  on  good 
authority,  is  Oregon  ;  I  have  specimens  from  Portland,  collected 
by  Mr.  Hemphill. 

A  frequent  aspect  of  variation  in  the  forms  falling  within  the 
first  gi'oup,  is  that  of  occasional  bulgings  or  swellings,  as  seen  in 
P.  glabratus,  Say,  and  P.  tuinens,  Cpr.,  suggesting  periodicity  in 
growth,  or  rather  periods  of  hibernation  or  rest,  and  periods  of 
activit}',  at  the  termination  of  which  a  mouth  or  expansion  of  the 

1  Proc.  Cal.  Acad.,  Vol.  IV,  p.  50, 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES    OF    PHILADELPHIA.  105 

aperture,  analagous  to  a  varix,  is  formed — and  this  repeated  as 
the  animal  advances  towards  maturity,  imparts  to  the  shell  its 
special  feature.  It  will  be  readily  seen  by  this,  that  any  of  these 
forms,  scattered  or  distributed  over  a  wide  region  in  northerly  or 
extremely  elevated  stations,  where  the  season  of  cold  reaches  a 
maximum,  against  which  protection  must  be  sought  by  hiberna- 
tion, might  in  some  of  their  colonies  be  subjected  to  such  condi- 
tions, and  hibernation  be  the  only  protection,  as  in  the  land  snails 
of  arid  regions,  against  seasons  of  excessive  drought,  and  in  other 
regions  against  the  cold  of  winter ;  and  bulged  or  varicose  varia- 
tion be  produced  in  a  perfectly  simple  way,  that  is,  in  harmony 
with  or  through  the  operation  of  a  general  law  ;  and  this  variation 
be  perpetuated  for  some  time  in  colonies  migrating  from  such 
stations  to  a  more  genial  habitat ;  until  after  awhile,  some  of  the 
descendants  of  these  varicose  ancestors  reach  places  where  hiber- 
nation is  unnecessary  by  reason  of  a  permanency  or  mean  of  con- 
ditions— temperature,  suppl}'  and  quality  of  water  being  in 
equilibrium  with  the  usual  requirements  of  these  animals — and  the 
ordinary  smooth,  evenly-grown  shells  again  prevail  through  re- 
version to  the  original  form. 

To  return  to  the  groups,  as  above,  the  Covington  Pond  speci- 
mens referred  to  in  part  first,  connect  said  groups,  being  what 
may  be  called  "  trivolvis^  with  variations " — that  species  or 
general  form  being,  through  its  plasticit}',  the  connecting  link. 

Still  another  aspect  of  variation  is  shown  in  Ingersoll's  ^  P. 
plexata,  from  St.  Maiy's  Lake,  Antelope  Park,  Colorado.  Here 
we  have  a  variation  not  unusual  in  the  various  Planorbes,  and 
not  confined  to  any  of  the  larger  species,  that  of  irregularity  in 
winding,  as  if  through  extreme  torsion  the  coil  cockled ;  the 
whorls  twisting  off  the  line  or  plane  of  volution.  P.  plexata  is 
an  eccentrically  coiled  trivolvis,  the  deviation  from  plane  of  volu- 
tion having  somewhat  of  regularity  of  occurrence,  and  not  im- 
probably owing  to  the  same  cause  as  that  to  which  I  attribute  the 
bulging  in  the  glabratus  form,  namel}^ — to  recurring  seasons  of 
hibernation  and  activity,  when  the  new  growth  hardly  makes  a 
"  good  joint "  as  a  mechanic  might  say,  with  the  edges  of  the 
previous  mouth ;  the  heavy  water  plants  at  the  bottom  of  the 
lake  described  by  Mr.  Ingersoll,  quite  likely  perform  a  part,  in 
causing  or  contributing  to  the  irregular  winding  of  the  shell  at 

*  See  Hayden's  Reports  Teri-itorial  Surveys,  1874,  p.  402. 


loo  PROOKKDINGS    OP    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

the  time  when  a  new  growth  comniences — when  tlie  shell  which 
is  to  be  is  liardly  more  tiian  plastic  membrane,  not  backed  up 
with  a  still'ening  ol'  lime,  as  it  is  after  the  fabric  is  perfected. 

In  Mountain  Lake,  near  San  Francisco,  a  few  miles  west  of 
said  city,  curionsly  distorted  pond  snails  of  the  genus  Physa 
occur,  which  at  one  time,  some  years  ago,  excited  attention.  The 
season  of  their  growth  is  the  summer,  and  its  generative  warmth 
is  accompanied  with  the  trade  winds,  which  blow  across  the  lake 
with  considerable  violence  ;  the  plastic  shells  of  the  Ph3'^sa;  are 
forced  against  plants,  chips  and  various  fragments,  odds  and  ends 
atloat  in  or  around  the  lake  ;  and  the  outer  lip  thus  gets  dented 
and  bent,  giving  a  curious  twist  to  many  of  the  individuals.  A 
figure  (128)  illustrating  a  distorted  specimen  from  the  foregoing 
locality  is  given  by  Mr.  Binney  in  his  L.  and  F.  W.  Shells  of 
North  America.  However,  I  have  no  reason  to  believe  that  this 
deformit}^  is  transmitted,  as  only  a  small  proportion  of  the  multi- 
tude are  affected. 

The  specimens  on  which  Mr.  Ingersoll's  species  is  based,  were 
found  by  him,  as  stated,  in  a  snow-fed  pond  of  small  size,  between 
or  among  high  cliffs.  As  before  implied,  the  vacillations  in  plane 
of  coil  may  be  owing  to  interruption  of  growth  by  recurring- 
periods  of  hibernation,  the  characters  in  the  environment,  men- 
tioned by  Mr.  Ingersoll,  affording  a  reasonable  solution  of  the  phe- 
nomena. Such  ponds  are  subject  to  marked  climatic  contingen- 
cies ;  and  sometimes,  or  rather  in  some  years,  their  basins  are 
nearly  pr  quite  dry — and  again,  fluctuations  of  temperature, 
according  to  the  volume  of  water,  which  is  an  important  factor, 
are  far  more  critical  in  small  ponds  than  in  lakes  or  large  bodies 
of  water,  where  the  extremes  of  temperature,  as  well  as  other 
conditions,  as  quality  of  water,  are  less  variable  or  extreme. 

These  two  aspects  of  variation,  bulging  and  irregularity  in 
coiling  are  exhibited  with  more  or  less  frequency  in  all  of  the 
larger  American  species,  and  in  a  greater  or  less  degree,  through- 
out the  entire  area  inhabited  by  Planorbis ;  occurring  oftener, 
perhaps,  among  colonies  which  inhabit  elevated  stations,  than 
with  those  living  at  altitudes  nearer  the  level  of  the  sea.  I  am 
of  the  belief,  too,  that  these  aspects  of  variation  are  less  frequent 
among  colonies  inhabiting  southerly  and  semi-tropical  regions. 

All  of  the  variations  referred  to  are,  when  present,  more  con- 
spicuous in  the  larger  forms  west  of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  for 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  lOY 

the  reason  that  some  of  them  reach  a  size  very  much  in  excess  of 
the  largest  individuals  of  the  same  species,  from  points  east  of 
said  range. 

The  carinated  and  planulate  forms  seem  to  be  freer  from  the 
bulging  or  variceal  peculiarity  than  the  others. 

As  to  the  relations  of  the  various  species  to  each  other,  or  their 
interrelations,,  it  is  quite  evident  that  many  of  them  have  an 
immediate  common  ancestry.  P.  trivolvis  (+  P-  trivolvis  var. 
fallax  +  P.  lentus)  of  the  American  species  appears  to  be  the 
dominant  stock-form,  and  maj'  be  regarded  as  Americanized 
Cornells,  if  a  serai-political  term  may  be  used  in  a  physico- 
geographical  sense ;  its  presence  in  the  company  of  such  forms  as 
Limneea  stagnalis,  L.  palustris  and  others,  of  circumpolar  dis- 
tribution, indicates  a  geographical  identity  with  the  European 
species. 

While  the  Planor.bes  attain  their  maximum  of  size  in  that  part 
of  North  America  west  of  the  Rocky  Mountains  and  north  of 
latitude  30°  N.,  the  number  of  supposed  species,  or  of  forms 
which  present  characters  more  or  less  distinct,  are  more  numerous 
east  of  said  range. 

There  is  apparently  no  relation  between  altitude  of  habitat  and 
size  of  shell.  The  quantity  of  West-coast  material  accessible  at 
this  moment  is  too  small  to  enable  me  to  give  a  satisfactory 
exhibit  of  measurements.  The  following  will,  however,  convey  a 
fair  idea  of  the  robust  proportions  of  the  more  conspicuous  West- 
American  forms,  the  first  and  second  being  P.  trivolvis  and  the 
third  P.  amnion. 

1.  Utah  Lake,  U.  T.,  elevation  4498'.5  feet.  Greater  diameter 
1*41  ;  lesser,  1"04  inches.  Long,  of  aperture  "71  ;  longitudinal 
diameter  of  whorl  at  juncture  of  parietal  callus  -45  inch. 

2.  Washoe  Lake,  Nevada,  elevation  5006  feet.  Greater  diameter 
1-30  ;  lesser,  1"01  inches.  Long,  of  aperture  '60;  long,  of  whorl  at 
junction  of  parietal  callus  •47  inch. 

3.  Salinas  Yalley,  Cal.,  elevation  100 —  feet.  Greater  diameter 
1*24;  lesser,  '98  inch.  Long,  of  aperture  "90;  long,  diameter  of 
whorl  at  junction  of  parietal  callus  '55  inch. 

4.  Clear  Lake,  Cal.,  elevation  1323  feet.  Greater  diameter  1-05  ; 
lesser,  -74  inch.  Long,  of  aperture  "77  ;  long,  diameter  at  junction 
of  parietal  callus  "76  inch. 

This  last  (4)  is  a  typical  Traskii.     A  comparison  of  the  meas- 


108 


PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF 


[1881. 


FlQ.  23. 


P.  trivolvis.  Original. 
Fig    24. 


urements  of  the  aperture  and  of  the  whorl  at  the  junction  of  the 
parietal  callus  in  this  and  3  (P.  amnion),  with  similar  measure- 
ments in  1  and  2  (P.  trivolvis),  wiW  give  a  good  idea  of  the  relative 
obtuseness  of  their  cones  or  tubes,  as  well  as  of  the  inflation  or 
patulous  aspect  of  the  aperture,  and  of  its  effect  on  the  physiog- 
nomy of  the  shell.  A  typical  P.  corneus  (Britisli  specimens)  of 
1"10  inches  greater  diameter  measures  -87  inch  lesser  diameter, 
while  the  longitude  of  aperture  is  '42,  and  longitudinal  diameter 
at  junction  of  parietal  callus  is  -30  inch. 

The  following  original  figures  from  nature,  show  the  Washoe  Lake 
form  as  above  (fig.  23);  while  fig.  24,  from 
the  same  locality,  also  illustrates  the 
distortion  resulting  by  deviation  from  or 
eccentricity  in  plane  of  coil. 

The  sinistral  or  dextral  inquiry  led  to 
the  discovery  that  P.  bicarinatus  is  some- 
times right  and  sometimes  left ;  this  is  an 
interesting  fact,  because  said  species  ex- 
hibits certain  analogies  with  other  peculiar 
and  characteristic  forms. 

The  i-elations  of  the  dextral  Carinifex, 
whose  planorboid  character  led  Dr.  Lea^ 
p.MuotoM.  Original  (distorted),  ^o  describe  it  as  a  Planorhis^  are  appar- 
ently closer  to  P.  bicarinatus  than  to  any  other  species.  The 
exceeding  variability  of  Carinifex  is  seen  by  the  figures  here  given, 

which,  however,  do  not  fully  represent 
the  range  of  variation.  (Figs.  25,  26, 27). 
In  the  light  of  our  present  knowledge 
it  should  perhaps  be  regarded  only  as  a 
coincidence  that  the  very  territory  from 
which  P.  bicarinatus  is  with  the  two 
exceptions  of  Hemphill's  Antioch,  and 
Portland  (Oregon)  localities,  entirely 
absent,  is  the  territory  inhabited  by 
Carinifex,  and  in  which  it  has  been 
found,  either  recent  or  fossil.  When  the 
immense  area  of  this  territory  is  con- 
sidered, the  number  of  localities  in 
which  it  has  been  detected,  are  few  ;  still 


Fig.  -26. 


From 

Lea's    types. 

Klamath  and 

Canoe  Ureek 

specimens. 

Fig.  27. 


From 

Lea's    types. 

Klamath  and 

Canoe  Creek 

Specimens. 

Carin^/'eaii^ewfierryt,  and  varieties,  these   fcW  are  SO  related   the   One   tO  the 


Variety  from 
Pitt  River,  Cal. 


1  Binney's  L.  and  F.  W.  Shells  of  N.  A.,  Part  II,  p..74. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  109 

other  as  to  indicate  a  wide  and  general  disti'ibution  within  its 
boundaries.  These  localities  are  as  follows,  commencing  at  the 
easternmost  station : 

1.  Utah  Territor}" ;  near  Utah  Lake,  in  Wahsatch  Mountains, 
collected  hy  Dr.  Edward  Palmer.  Museum  Stearns.  (Semi- 
fossil.  ) 

2.  Nevada  (Tertiaries)  ;  as  Vorticifex  Tryoni,  Meek,  in  King's 
Survey. 

3.  California ;  Owen's  Yalley,  collected  living  by  Hemphill ; 
"  The  most  southern  locality.  The  animal  undistinguishable 
externally  from  that  of  PJanorhia  ammoiV     Cooper. 

4.  California ;  Klamath  Lake  and  Canoe  Creek,  living ;  Dr.  J. 
S.  Newberry.     S.  I.  Collection. 

5.  California;  Pitt  River,  Dr.  Cooper ;  living.     S.  I.  Collection. 

6.  California;  Clear  Lake,  living;  Dr.  Yeatch.  S.  I.  Collec- 
tion. Cooper  makes  a  var.  ?  ''minor''  of  specimens  from  this 
place. 

7.  California;  Antioch  ;  living.  Carlton.  '*  A  few  A^ery  young 
ones,  perhaps  a  dwarfed  southern  variety  like  those  from  Clear 
Lake." 

8.  California;  Livermore  Valley,  Alameda  County;  "in  the 
hills  north  of  Martin's,  near  Tassajara,"  Cooper,  fossil ;  label 
marked  "  Planorbis,  etc.,  Tertiary?  "  in  State  Geol.  Survey  Coll., 
Univ.  of  Cal. 

The  Utah  specimens,  though  small,  are  mature,  and  include  the 
form  rounded  above  like  Meek's  Nevada  species,  as  well  as  the 
more  flattened  and  grooved  features  of  the  Tassajara  ^  specimens, 
which  approach  in  size  and  general  characters  more  closely  to 
Lea's  type,  fig.  25.  Some  of  Palmer's  Utah  specimens  are  elevated, 
and  vary  in  the  direction  of  fig.  27,  though  not  terraced  or  keeled 
as  much ;  the  lot  of  only  a  dozen  specimens,  exhibits  a  remarka- 
ble range  of  variation. 

There  are  striking  analogies  between  the  shells  of  Garinifex 
in  its  varieties,  and  the  Australasian  brackish  water  Amphibolse. 

A  new  species  has  been  made  on  one  of  the  varieties  by  Mr. 
Smith,  of  the  British  Museum,  which  he  named  C.  Ponsonbii;'^ 

^  Tassajara  is  the  name  of  a  stream  which  is  frequently  dry  in  the  latter 
part  of  summer. 
'^  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.,  1875,  p.  536.     Also  Quar.  .Tour.  Conch.,  Vol.  I,  p.  150. 


no  PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

the  specimens  T\^ere  collected  by  Lord  Walsingham,  in  Cnlifornia. 
There  are  several  varieties  still  nndescribed,  which  challenge  the 
attention  of  those  who  are  ambitious  in  this  direction. 

Garinifex  exhibits  manj^  of  the  variations  in  form  of  tube  or 
cone,  in  cross-section,  which  are  seen  in  Planorbis,  without  the 
bulgings  of  the  varicose  forms,  and  plus  the  elevation  of  spire 
which  is  seen  especiall}^  in  extreme  individuals  like  the  figure ; 
the  outline  of  the  mouth  is  very  much  like  that  of  P.  hicarinatus^ 
and  in  some  of  its  varieties  suggests  a  P.  hicarinatui<,  with  the 
umbilicus  deepened  by  pushing  up  the  spire  from  below.  With 
the  discovery  of  new  localities,  and  ample  material  both  recent 
and  fossil,  without  doubt  the  sequence  of  variation  wall  be  traced, 
and  its  relation  to  meteorological,  geological  and  chemical  changes, 
within  the  area  of  its  distribution  partially  indicated. 

In  this  connection  I  would  direct  attention  to  Prof.  Hyatt's 
interesting  letter  to  Mr.  Ingersoll,  referring  to  Steinheim  fossils, 
and  to  the  Valvatse  of  Lawlor's  Lake,  Nova  Scotia,  in  Prof. 
F.  V.  Hayden's  Report,  1874. 


1881.]  natural  sciences  of  philadelphia.  ill 

May  3. 

The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Thirty-four  persons  present. 

Dr.  Geo.  A.  Koenig  was  elected  a  member  of  the  Council  to 
fill  the  vacanity  caused  by  the  resignation  of  Dr.  Chapman. 


May  10. 

The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-eight  persons  present. 

The  deaths  of  Jos.  S.  Lovering,  a  member,  and  of  Dr.  James 
Lewis,  of  Mohawk,  N.  Y.,  a  correspondent,  were  annovmced. 


May  n. 
Mr.  Thos.  Meehan,  Yice-President,  in  the  chair. 
Twentj'-nine  persons  present. 

The  following  papers  were  presented  for  publication : 
"  Quercus  rubra  L.  var,  Texana,"  by  S.  B.  Buckley. 
"  Quercus  Durandii,"  by  S.  B.  Buckley. 
"  Rhus  cotinoides,"  by  S.  B.  Buckley. 


May  24. 

The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-nine  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  *'  Revision  of  the  Palaeocrinoidea,  Part  II, 
Family  Spha?roidocrinidifi,  including  the  subfamilies  Platycrin- 
idae,  Rhodocrinidae  and  Actinocrinidge,"  by  Charles  Wachsmuth 
and  Frank  Springer,  was  presented  for  publication. 

The  death  of  Thos.  A.  Scott,  a  member,  was  announced. 

Sexual  Characters  in  FrUillaria  atropur^j^urea,  Nuttall. — Mr. 
Thomas  Meehan  noticed  the  occurrence  of  separate  male  and 
hermaphrodite  flowers  in  Fritillaria  atropurpurea,  cases  of  bi- 


112  I'KOCEEDINGS  OK  THE  ACADEMY  OK  NATURAL  SCIENCES.      [1881. 

sexuality  being  rare  in  truly  liliaceous  plants.  His  specimens  were 
from  western  Nevada,  and  the  characters  now  noted  were  exhibited 
in  1880  ;  but  as  the  plant  had  only  been  received  a  short  time 
before,  the  absence  of  female  organs  might  be  attributed  to  weak- 
ness, but  observation  this  season  shows  it  to  be  a  normal  condition. 

The  jjlant  produced  four  spikes,  flowering  on  the  15th  of  May. 
The  spikes  were  15,  14,  13,  and  11  inches  high,  respectively,  and 
had  from  twelve  to  fourteen  narrow  glaucous  leaves  each,  and  all 
of  apparently  equal  strength.  The  tallest  spike  had  but  one  per- 
fect floAver;  another  had  the  lowermost  perfect,  but  with  four 
others  aboA^e,  all  purelj'  staminate.  The  other  two  had  three 
flowers  each,  all  staminate.  These  staminate  flowers  had  antlers 
as  large  and  as  polleniferous  as  the  hermaphrodite  ones,  and  the 
perianth  seemed  in  every  respect  as  perfect,  the  only  difference 
being  in  the  total  absence  of  all  traces  of  a  gynoecium.  It  was 
evidently  the  normal  condition  of  the  species,  which,  by  the  way, 
seems  to  run  closely  into  Fritillaria  pariiifiora. 

Mr.  Meehan  said  the  facts  were  intei-esting,  as  drawing  still 
closer  the  well-known  relationship  of  Melanthiace'se  and  Liliacese. 
A  tendency  to  diclinism  had  hitherto  been  supposed  to  be  the 
special  characteristic  of  the  former  order,  although  occasionally, 
as  in  Asparagus,  there  were  indications  of  the  same  characteristics 
in  Liliaceae  also. 


May  31. 
Ther  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-five  members  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  Observations  on  the  Hippopotamus,"  by 
Henry  C.  Chapman,  M.  D.,  was  presented  for  publication. 

Alexander  Biddle,  M.  D.,  W.  Norton  Whitney,  M.  D.,  and  John 
G.  Lea,  M.  D.,  were  elected  members. 

Thomas  T.  Bouve,  of  Boston,  was  elected  a  correspondent. 

The  following  were  ordered  to  be  published  : 


PROC.  A.  N.  S,  PHILA,,  1881 


PL, 


-  ^^>^ 


^  '^^'^^m^^^ 


^^Ayvr4/<^^j,  if,  '?:^f 


PROC.  A,  N.  S.  PHILA., 


PL  II. 


T-rr^ 


PROC,  A,  N.  S,  PHILA.,  I88i. 


PL  111, 


PROC,  A,  N.  S.  PHILA,,  I88i . 


PL  IV. 


PROG.  A.  N.  S.  PHILA.,  1881. 


PL  V. 


24 


PROC.  A.  N.  S.  PHILA,,  1881. 


PLVI. 


PROC.  A,  N.  S,  PHILA.,  1881 


PL  VII, 


].  A.  N.  S,  PHILA,, 


PL  Vlli 


PROC.  A.  N.  S.  PHILA,,  1881. 


PL.  IX 


CE        ^  ^ 

px  pr.th    ;      ^'  *■ 


ab.pl. v 


g^         an 


70 


ab.pl.v' 


71 


PROC.  A.  N.  S.  PHILA..  1881. 


PL  X 


1881. j  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  113 


LIST    OF    THE    FISHES    COLLECTED    BY    MB.  W.    J.    FISHER,  UPON  THE 

COASTS   OF   LOWER    CALIFORNIA,    1876-77,  WITH 

DESCRIPTIONS  OF  NEW  SPECIES. 

BY  W.  N.  LOCKINGTON. 

In  x\.pril,  1876,  the  schooner  Harvest  Queen,  W.  J.  Fisher  in 
command,  left  San  Francisco  on  a  collecting  expedition  to  Lower 
California.  The  intention  was  to  work  down  the  western  coast, 
and  then  along  the  eastern  to  the  head  of  the  Gulf  of  California ; 
and  the  object  was  to  collect  seals,  birds,  fishes,  mollusks,  Crus- 
tacea, radiates,  etc.,  for  sale  or  exchange. 

Financially  the  expedition  proA^ed  a  signal  failure  ;  few  skins  or 
shells  of  value  were  procured,  and  most  of  the  former  were  spoiled 
before  reaching  San  Francisco ;  but  the  scientific  results  were  far 
from  insignificant.  Chieflj'  in  consequence  of  the  free  use  of  the 
dredge  in  depths  under  fifteen  fathoms,  large  numbers  of  small 
Crustacea,  many  of  them  new  or  little  known,  were  procured,  also 
a  few  rare  and  three*  or  four  new  mollusks,  and  some  interesting 
fishes  from  the  Gulf,  the  latter  mingled  with  the  Crustacea  and 
other  objects  di'edged  at  moderate  depths. 

Besides  these  fishes,  which  will  be  described  in  the  following 
pages,  several  better  known  species  were  taken  in  considerable 
quantity  at  Magdalena  Bay,  upon  the  Pacific  coast  of  the  peninsula. 

As  these  fishes  have  already  formed  the  subject  of  two  short 
papers  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  California  Academj^  of  Sciences, 
and  one  or  two  were  by  error  described  as  new,  they  will  be  in- 
cluded in  the^list  herein  given,  with  references  to  my  previous  papers. 

The  reptiles  obtained  were  catalogued  in  the  American  Natu?'- 
alist,  April,  1880,  p.  295.  Nothing  new  was  found  among  birds, 
and  the  only  mammals  taken  were  a  fine  female  Elephant  seal 
{Morunga  proboscidea) ,  killed  at  Ascencion  Island,  on  the  western 
coast  of  the  peninsula  ;  several  sea-lions  (Eunietopias  stelleri)  ; 
and  the  skull  of  a  species  of  Orca. 

Diodon  maculatus  Lac.  Gulf  of  Cal. 

Tetrodon  politus  Gill.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Tetrodon  punctatissimus  ?  Gunther.  Gulf  of  Cal. 

Antennarius  leopardinns  Gnthr.  Gulf  of  Cal. 
Hypleurochilus  gentilis  (Grd.)  Gill.    La  Paz,  Las  Animas  Bay,  Gulf  of  Cal. 

PhoUdichthys  anguilliformis  Locktn.  Gulf  of  Cal. 

Cremnobates  altivelis  Locktn.  Gulf  of  Cal. 


114  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

CUnus  pJiillippi  Steind.  Gulf  of  Cal. 

Apodichthys  vnivittatus  Locktn.  Gulf  of  Cal. 

Microdesmiis  dipus  Gnthr.  La  Paz. 

Gobiesox  r/iessodon  Rosa  Smith.  Gulf  of  Cal. 

OilUchthys  mirahilis  Cpr.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Pimelomdopon  pulclier  (Ayres)  Gill.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Semicosxyphu^  pulcherljoc^tn.    Proc.  Cal,  Ac.  Sci.,  1876.  p.  87. 
Cynoscion  parvipinnis  (Ayres)  .T.  &  G.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Menticirrus  undulahis  (Grd.)  Gil).  Magdalena  Bay. 

Oirella  nigricans  (Ayres)  Gill.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Spams  brachysomus  Locktn.     Proc.  U.  S.  National  Museum,  1880,  283. 

Magdalena  Bay. 
Pristipoma  melanopterum  Cuv.  .  Gulf  of  Cal. 

Serranus  nebtilifer  (Grd.)  Steind.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Paralabrax  nebuUfer  Locktn.    Proc.  Cal.  Ac.  Sci.,  1876,  86. 
Serranus  clathratus  (Grd.)  Steind.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Serramis  maculofaseiatus  Steind.  Angeles  Bay,  Gulf  of  Cal. 

Serranus  gigas  (Ayres)  J.  «&  G.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Centropomus  undecimalis  Bloch.  Ascencion  Island,  I.  C. 

Centropomus  viridis  Locktn.     Proc.  Cal.  Ac.  Sci.,  1876,  109. 
Selene  vomer  (L.)  Liitken.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Argyreiosus pacificus  Locktn.     Proc.  Cal.  Ac.  Sci.',  1876,  84. 
Trachynotus  carolinus  (L.)  Gtlir.,  Cuv.  and  Val.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Trachynotus  ovatus  L.  Lae.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Trachynotus  ovatus  Locktn.     Proc.  Cal.  Ac.  Sci.,  1876,  86. 
TracJiurus  saurtis  Raf.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Sphyrcena  argentea  Grd.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Sphyrosna  argentea  Locktn.     Proc.  Cal.  Ac.  Sci.,  1876,  88. 
Atherinopsis  californiensis  (Grd.)  Gill.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Myxus  harengus  Giinther.  Las  Animas  Bay,  Gulf  of  Cal. 

Albula  vulpes  (L.)  Goode. 
Albula  conorhyncJius  Locktn.,  loc.  cit.  83. 

Heterodontus  francisi  (Grd.)  J.  &  G.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Cestracio7ifrancisi  hocktn.,  loc.  cit.  85. 

Mustelus  Jdnnulus  (Blainville)  J.  &  G.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Mustelus  californicus  Locktn.,  1   c.  87. 

Triads  semifaseiatus  Grd.  Magdalena  Bay. 

Triads  semifasciata  Locktn.,  1.  c.  87. 

SpTiyrna  zygmia  (L.)  Raf.  South  of  Cape  St.  Lucas. 

BrancMostoma  lanceolatum  (Pallas)  Gray.  Angeles  Bay,  Gulf  of  Cal. 

Tetrodon  punctatissimus  T  Giinther. 

Cat.  Fish.  Brit.  Mus.,  VIII,  p.  302,  1870. 
D.  9,  A.  8,  P.  11,  G.  2-7,  2. 
Bod}^  compressed,  short ;  the  dorsal  profile  from  tip  of  snout  to 
eye  slightly  concave,  thence  to  origin  of  dorsal  gently  convex, 


1881].  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  115 

thence  descending  nioderatel}',  somewhat  concave  from  posterior 
margin  of  dorsal  to  caudal.  Abdominal  outline  slightly  concave 
in  front  of  eye,  thence  boldly  convex  to  origin  of  anal,  thence  cor- 
responding to  dorsal  outline. 

Head  3^  times,  greatest  depth  2yV  in  total  length,  the  greatest 
depth  above  the  centre  of  the  pectoral  base ;  greatest  breadth  (at 
gill-openings)  less  than  the  length  of  the  head,  and  3j%  in  total 
length.  Snout  H,  eye  4  times  in  length  of  head,  width  of  inter- 
orbital  area  about  1^  times  the  diameter  of  the  eye.  Depth  of 
caudal  peduncle  nearly  2|  times  in  greatest  depth. 

The  back  behind  the  head  forms  a  keel. 

Snout  truncate  at  the  tip,  concave  above  and  below,  higher  than 
wide ;  nostrils  inconspicuous,  a  single  opening  on  each  side  on  a 
minute  papilla;  mouth  small;  eyes  round,  lateral,  entirely  in  the 
posterior  half  of  the  head,  the  upper  orbital  margins  slightly 
raised,  so  that  the  interorbital  area  is  somewhat  concave. 

Teeth  smooth,  sharp-edged,  line  of  junction  distinct. 

Gill-opening  small,  almost  perpendicular,  distant  from  the  e3-e 
about  an  ej'e-diameter. 

Dorsal  fin  arising  at  a  distance  from  the  gill-opening  equal  to 
the  length  of  the  head,  with  nine  articulated  rays,  the  first  simple, 
the  others  once  or  twice  divided.  Base  of  dorsal  less  than  one- 
third  of  the  length  of  the  snout,  height  rather  more  than  one- 
third  of  length  of  head. 

Anal  slightlj'  posterior  to  dorsal,  with  eight  rays,  the  first  ver- 
tical with  the  posterior  margin  of  the  dorsal ;  height  and  length  of 
base  equal  to  dorsal. 

Caudal  very  slightly  convex  on  posterior  margin  when  opened 
out,  all  the  principal  rays  divided,  some  of  the  central  ones  four 
times ;  length  of  fin  about  5^  times  in  total  length. 

'  Pectoral  base  oblique,  its  upper  axil  near  the  upjDcr  end  of  the 
gill-slit,  thence  backwards  and  downwards  at  an  angle  of  about 
4.5°.  Pectoral  fin  fan-shaped,  rather  short  (the  tips  of  the  rays  in 
the  specimen  are  slightly  injured),  the  uppermost  ra^^  short, 
simple ;  the  next  (longest)  simple ;  the  others  once  or  twice 
divided,  slightlj^  diminishing  in  length  downwards. 

Top  and  sides  of  head,  breast,  and  abdomen  to  anal  fin  with 
prickly  papillte,  most  numerous  upon  the  breast  and  under  side  of 
the  snout.     Rest  of  body  naked. 

Color    purple,   thickly    sown   with    subcircular    or   subelliptic 


116  PROCEEDINGS  OP  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

lighter  spots ;  these  become  larger  upon  the  flanks,  until  the 
ground  color  fades  out,  leaving  the  abdomen,  breast,  and  under 
side  of  snout  dirty  yellow.  Spots  of  sides  and  upper  portion 
light  purplish.  Behind  the  anal  fin  the  spots  can  be  traced  all 
round  the  body.  No  color  bands  or  spots  are  now  evident  upon 
the  fins.     Specimen  in  alcohol  since  1816. 

Angeles  Ba}' ;  Gulf  of  California. 

From  T.  furthii,  Steind.  (Sitz.  Akad.  Wiss.  Wien,  1876.  Icthyol. 
Beitrage,  V,  p.  22)  this  species  may  readily  be  distinguished  by  • 
the  great  length  of  the  snout,  two-thirds  of  that  of  the  head,  while 
in  the  T.  furthii  it  is  only  f-x\  of  the  head.  Other  difterences  are 
the  absence  of  a  skin-fold  on  the  tail,  the  inconspicuous  nasal 
papilla,  and  the  smaller  development  of  the  spinules  upon  the 
back.  The  coloration  is  also  different.  T.  furthii  has  indistinct 
transverse  bands,  and  a  dark  band  on  the  pectoral  base 

The  short  description  given  by  Dr.  Giinther  of  T .  punctatissi- 
mus  agrees,  so  far  as  it  goes,  with  the  present  species.  His 
specimens  were  from  Panama.  Should  the  present  species  prove 
distinct,  I  propose  for  it  the  name  of  oxyrhynchus.  Length  of 
specimen,  3*06  inches. 

Antennarius  leopardinus,  Gnthr.? 

Trans.  Zool.  Soc,  1864,  15  *. 

Fishes  Cent.  Amer.  in  Trans.  Zool.  Soc,  Vol.  VI,  434,  PI.  VII. 

This  species  was  originally  described  from  Panama. 

Two  examples  were  obtained  by  Mr.  Fisher  by  dredging  at  a 
depth  of  22  fathoms,  among  beds  of  pearl  oyster  (Mar gar itophor a) 
off  San  Jos^  Island,  Amortiguado  Bay,  Gulf  of  California.  The 
spots  have  in  most  cases  faded  into  light  yellow,  leaving  the 
bright  vermilion  of  all  the  rest  of  the  body  and  fins  unchanged. 
A  black  spot  persists  upon  the  ninth  ray  of  the  dorsal,  and  there 
are  traces  of  black  upon  the  sides  and  head.  The  under  side  of 
the  abdomen,  in  advance  of  the  anal,  is  light  yellowish  with  dark 
spots.  Total  length  1*95  inches ;  width  from  tip  to  tip  of  pec- 
torals riO  in. 

Cremnobates  altivelis,  nov.  sp. 

D.  4-25,  A.  21,  P.  13,  C.  13,  V.  2,  L.  lat.  37. 

Body  compressed,  greatest  depth  a  little  behind  pectoral  axil, 
greatest  thickness  at  gill-covers,  dorsal  and  abdominal  profiles  of 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  Tit 

similar  curvature,  decreasing  regularly  to  the  caudal  fin.  Profile 
of  occiput  and  superorbital  regions  convex ;  snout  somewhat 
produced,  its  upper  outline  slightly  concave. 

Head  one-fourth  of  total  length,  greatest  depth  a  little  less  than 
length  of  head,  caudal  peduncle  about  one-fourth  of  the  greatest 
depth. 

Eye  round,  lateral,  with  a  slight  direction  upwards,  its  diameter 
less  than  the  length  of  the  snout.  Interorbital  area  nearly  equal 
in  width  to  the  diameter  of  the  eye,  concave  transversel}',  upper 
orbital  borders  slightl}^  raised. 

A  short  nasal  tentacle  slightly  anterior  to  the  front  margin  of 
the  eye.  A  large  fimbriated  tentacle  on  each  side  of  the  first 
dorsal  ray. 

Cleft  of  mouth  oblique,  the  lower  jaw  the  longer  ;  the  posterior 
convex  extremity  of  the  club-shaped  maxillary  about  vertical 
with  the  centre  of  the  pupil. 

Teeth  of  the  outer  row  regular,  sharp,  incurved,  the  largest  in 
front,  graduallv  decreasing  along  the  lateral  portions  of  the  jaws, 
and  not  extending  much  past  the  middle  of  their  length.  A 
narrow  band  of  small  teeth  in  the  rear  of  the  outer  row.  Vomer- 
ine teeth. 

Branchiostegals  six.  Gill-openings  continuous,  membranes  not 
attached  to  the  isthmus. 

Distance  from  the  first  ray  of  the  dorsal  to  the  posterior  margin 
of  the  eye  equal  to  the  length  of  the  snout.  First  two  rays  of  the 
dorsal  much  developed,  the  first  slightly  the  longer,  and  nearly 
equal  in  height  to  the  distance  of  its  base  from  the  tip  of  the 
upper  jaw ;  third  ray  about  half  the  length  of  the  first ;  fourth 
very  shoi't ;  succeeding  rays  to  the  twentj^-sixth  longer  than  the 
third,  the  three  last  somewhat  decreasing. 

Anal  commencing  under  the  eleventh  dorsal  raj^ ;  coterminous 
with,  and  equal  in  height  to  the  dorsal. 

Caudal  with  thirteen  simple  jointed  rays,  the  longest  in  the 
centre,  posterior  margin  convex. 

Pectorals  narrow,  lanceolate,  the  fifth  and  sixth  rays  longest, 
and  four-fifths  the  length  of  the  head. 

Ventrals  inserted  in  advance  of  the  pectorals. 

Lateral  line  with  thirty-seven  simple  pores,  parallel  with  dorsal 
outline  to  opposite  the  origin  of  the  anal,  where  it  is  deflected 


118  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

almost  perpeiuliculjvrly  downward  to  the  middle  of  the  side  of  the 
bod3-,  along  which  it  continues  to  its  termination. 

Scales  rather  lai'ge,  about  ten  in  a  transverse  row  in  the  central 
part  of  the  body,  their  posterior  margin  membranous.  No  scales 
on  fins. 

A  line  of  pores  around  the  margin  of  the  orbit,  another  along 
the  posterior  margin  of  the  pre-operculum,  connected  to  each 
other  and  to  the  lateral  line  by  a  line  from  tlie  centre  of  the  hinder 
border  of  the  eye. 

Color  (in  alcohol)  bright  pink  above,  becoming  dusky  below, 
under  side  of  head  light  olivaceous,  lower  lip  blackish.  Dorsal 
pink,  dusky  on  its  margin,  a  black  spot  on  the  fourth  ray,  and 
another  on  its  hinder  part  upon  the  24-25th  rays,  the  latter  spot 
extending  on  to  the  body.  Membrane  of  anal  black.  Occipital 
tentacles  black. 

Total  length  1-9  inch.  A  single  specimen  from  La  Paz,  dredged 
at  a  depth  of  22  fathoms. 

This  species  maj^  be  distinguished  from  G.  monophthalmus, 
Gnthr.,  by  the  much  greater  development  of  the  first  two  dorsal 
rays  ;  by  the  longer  and  concave  snout,  and  by  the  coloration  ;  and 
from  C.  marmoraius^  Steind.  (Sitz.  Akad.  Wiss.,  Wien,  18T6,  174), 
by  its  more  elongate  form,  shorter  cleft  of  month,  and  longer  first 
dorsal  ra^'.     In  C.  marmoratus  the  second  dorsal  ray  is  longest. 

Pholidichthys  anguilliformis  nov.  sp. 

Body  exceedingly  elongate,  much  compressed,  naked,  upper 
profile  of  head  forming  a  continuous  convex  curve  to  the  tip  of 
the  snout,  which  is  about  equal  in  length  to  the  eye, 

Head  six  and  two-fifths,  greatest  depth  sixteen  times  in  total 
length. 

Eye  lateral,  round  ;  interorbital  space  about  two-thirds  of  the 
diameter  of  the  eye,  convex  transversely. 

Posterior  extremit}'  of  maxillary  vertical  with  the  hinder  margin 
of  the  eye.  Tip  of  snout  a  little  below  the  level  from  the  centre 
of  the  eye ;  mouth  moderately  oblique,  lower  jaw  slightly  the 
longer.  Teeth  of  lower  jaw  in  a  close-set  row,  the  largest  in  front, 
diminishing  along  the  sides.  Teeth  of  upper  jaw  similar  but 
smaller.     Palate  smooth. 

Vertical  fins  continuous  but  distinct,  dorsal  entirely  spinous, 
anal  commencing  a  little  behind  the  middle  of  the  entire  length  of 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  119 

the  fish.  Ventrals  two-rayed,  very  slightly  in  advance  of  the 
jsectorals,  which  are  about  equal  in  length  to  the  distance  of  their 
base  from  the  eye. 

Color  (in  spirits)  dark  bla.-kish  brown,  mingled  with  white 
upon  top,  sides  and  lower  parts  of  head.  Interorbital  area  and 
top  of  snout  white. 

A  single  specimen  dredged  off  San  Jose  Island,  Amortiguado 
Bay,  Gulf  of  California.     Total  length  1-60  in.     Head  0-25  in. 

The  example  is  broken  across,  the  branchiostegals  are  defec- 
tive, the  caudal  fin  broken,  and  some  fin- rays  missing,  so  that  the 
fin  formula  cannot  be  accurately  given.  The  dorsal  fin  has  above 
sixty  raj^s.  The  bod}'  is  much  moi-e  slender  than  that  of  P. 
leucotsenia  Bleeker,  and  there  is  no  trace  of  the  longitudinal  bluish 
white  band  of  that  species. 

Apodichthys  univittatus,  nov.  sp. 
D.  circa  95.     A.  ca.  1-40. 

Body  elongate,  much  compressed,  band-like,  presei-ving  almost 
the  same  depth  to  about  the  posterior  fifth  of  the  body,  thence 
tapering  more  rapidly  to  the  caudal  fin. 

Head  seven,  depth  nearh^  ten  times  in  the  total  length  ;  depth 
of  caudal  peduncle  about  one-half  of  that  of  body. 

Snout  obtuse,  about  two-thirds  as  long  as  the  diameter  of  the  eye, 
the  upper  profile  of  the  head  a  continuous  curve  from  snout  to  occi- 
put. Interorbital  area  highly  convex  transversely,  about  equal  in 
width  to  half  the  diameter  of  the  eye.  Ej^e  entirely  lateral,  round, 
contained  entirely  in  the  anterior  half  of  the  head ;  iris  golden. 

Mouth  small,  the  posterior  extremity  of  the  maxillary  reaching 
to  the  anterior  margin  of  the  eye.     Teeth  small. 

Branchiostegals  five. 

Dorsal  fin  continuous  with  but  distinct  from  the  anal,  arising 
A' ertically  above  the  tip  of  the  operculum,  and  composed  of  spines 
only.  Anal  preceded  by  a  long,  sharp,  slender  spine  of  V-shaped 
transverse  section,  the  hollow  side  anterior,  the  length  of  the 
spine  equal  to  about  half  the  depth  of  the  fish.  Distance  from 
anal  spine  to  tip  of  operculum  a  little  more  than  to  tip  of  caudal. 
Caudal  with  numerous  accessory  rays,  so  that  its  sides  are  almost 
straight,  posterior  margin  broken  in  specimen,  all  the  rays  simple. 

General  color  (in  spirits)  light  reddish,  the  vertical  fins  rather 
bright,  and  the  top  of  the  head  reddish  brown.  Tip  of  snout 
brown,     A  silvery  band  (possibly  bluish  in  life)  from  the  tip  of 


120  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

the  snoTit,  across  the  lower  pai't  of  the  eye,  cheeks  and  opercles, 
terminating  at  about  the  middle  of  the  length  of  the  operculum ; 
this  band  bordered  above  by  a  narrower  brown  band. 

A  single  specimen.     Lower  California,  probably  from  the  Gulf. 

Length  1-88  in.  Length  of  head  0-27  in.  Greatest  depth 
0'19  in.     Snout  to  anal  spine  TIO  in. 

The  peculiar  vitta  upon  each  side  of  the  head  at  once  dis- 
tinguishes this  species  from  tiie  two  other  described  forms. 

Microdesmus  dipus,  Giinther. 

Trans.  Zool.  Soc,  1864,  p.  26. 
A  single  specimen  of  this  rare  species  was  obtained  at  La  Paz, 
near  low-tide  level. 

Hemiramphus  uaifasciatus,  Ranzani. 
D.  14.     A.  16. 

With  some  hesitation  I  refer  two  specimens  taken  in  Las 
Animas  Bay,  Gulf  of  California,  to  this  species  rather  than  to 
H.  rosse  J.  &  G.  The  proportion  of  the  jaw  to  the  length  of 
the  body,  as  well  as  the  number  of  dorsal  rays,  agree  with 
unifasciatus. 

On  each  side  of  the  median  line  of  the  back  a  row  of  elongated 
spots  of  dark  greenish  tint,  one  on  each  scale,  forms  a  narrow 
band,  and  between  these  bands  is  a  median  series  of  dark  spots 
formed  by  thickly  aggregated  black  dots.  Between  the  narrow 
dark-green  band  and  the  lateral  band  similar  close  aggregations  of 
dark  spots  form  a  series  of  spots,  elongated  transversely.  The 
silvery  lateral  band  is  bordered  above  by  a  narrower  greenish 
stripe. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  121 


QUEKCUS  DURANDII,   Buckley. 
BY  S.  B.  BUCKLEY,  PH.  D. 

I  bad  spent  several  years  in  studying  the  trees  of  the  United 
States  in  their  native  places,  when,  in  the  month  of  September, 
1859,  as  I  was  walking  from  Camden  to  Allenton,  in  Wilcox 
County,  Alabama,  I  saw  an  oak,  different  from  any  I  had  ever 
seen.  It  was  in  a  dark,  rich,  limestone  soil,  on  the  right  hand 
side  of  the  road,  about  three  miles  from  Allenton.  The  bark  of 
its  trunk  and  limbs  was  scaly ;  leaves  lanceolate,  entire  or  slightly 
lobed  or  repand ;  acorns  small,  ovate,  obtuse  ;  cup  ver^^  shallow, 
about  one-eighth  as  long  as  the  acorn.  The  tree  Avas  1  foot  in 
diameter  and  about  25  feet  high,  and  the  only  one  there.  I  showed 
specimens  of  it  to  the  gentleman  with  whom  I  staid  all  night. 
He  told  me  it  was  a  rare  oak  in  that  country,  growing  near  the 
banks  of  streams  and  swamps,  that  its  wood  was  close  grained 
and  xery  tough,  making  excellent  screws  for  cotton-gins, firm  and 
durable  wagon-hubs,  etc.,  also  splints  for  making  baskets  for  the 
cotton-fi^ld,  when  the  cotton  is  being  gathered;  that  it  was  seldom 
more  than  3  feet  in  diameter  and  60  feet  high. 

This  oak  was  the  Quercus  Durandii,  a  new  species  which  I  de- 
scribed in  the  Proceedings  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  in 
1861.  It  is  named  after  the  late  Elias  Durand,  who  was  for  many 
years  chairman  of  the  Committee  on  Botany  of  the  Academy. 

In  October,  1859,  I  saw  it  again  at  Shreveport,  in  Louisiana,  on 
the  bluffs  of  the  Red  River,  in  the  upper  part  of  the  town.  There 
its  acorns  were  larger  and  longer  than  in  Alabama.  Here  there 
were  several  trees  of  it,  one  of  which  was  4  feet  2  inches  in  dia- 
meter at  3  feet  from  the  ground.  These  were  low,  spreading  trees, 
growing  in  an  open  space. 

In  Southern  Texas,  on  the  Colorado  River,  in  Fort  Bend  and 
other  counties,  it  is  a  large  tree,  often  2  to  3  feet  in  diameter  and 
60  to  YO  feet  high. 

In  1814,  in  Milam  County,  Texas,  I  saw  many  large,  tall  trees 
of  this  oak  in  the  bottom  lands  of  Little  River,  a  tributary  of 
the  Brazos.  There  it  is  sometimes  called  the  "  bastard  white  oak  " 
because  the  bark  of  its  trunk  resembles  that  of  the  scaly  forms 
of  white  oak. 

Durand's  oak  grows  on  the  bauks  of  Shoal  Creek,  one-half  to 


122  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

two  miles  above  Austin,  also  near  Mount  Bond,  about  three  miles 
from  the  eit^-. 

In  1872,  Mr.  Elihu  Hall,  of  Athens,  Illinois,  was  at  Austin  col- 
lecting plants.  I  showed  him  Durand's  oalc,  which  is  referred  to 
as  a  good  species  in  his  "  Plants  TexanjE,"  published  in  1873. 

Mr.  Charles  Mohr,  Botanist  for  the  Tenth  Census  Department  of 
Forestry  in  tlie  Gulf  States,  was  here,  last  November,  and  obtained 
sections  of  the  wood,  and  specimens  of  the  leaves  and  acorns  of 
Q.  Durandii  for  the  Department  of  Forestry  under  the  direction 
of  Prof.  Chas.  S.  Sargent,  for  the  United  States  Government. 

Lastly,  Prof.  Sargent  came  here  tliree  weeks  ago,  and  together 
we  visited  the  banks  of  Shoal  Creek,  where  there  were  several  small 
trees  of  this  oak,  the  largest  being  nearly  two  feet  in  diameter. 
He  was  satisfied  it  was  a  good  species. 

I  have  been  thus  particular  in  giving  the  history  of  this  oak  to 
the  present  time,  because  all  who  have  seen  the  living  trees  regard 
it  as  a  good  species,  which  is  not  the  case  with  some  who  have  not. 
In  Dr.  Engelmann's  "  Oaks  of  the  United  States,"  published  at 
p.  392,  "  Transactions  of  St.  Louis  Academy,"  speaking  of  the 
forms  of  Quercus  undulata,  he  says:  •' The  var.  Gamhelii  runs 
into  variety  Gunnisonii  on  one  side,  and  on  the  other  into  variety 
breviloba  {Q,  ohtusiloha  var.  hrevifolia^  Torrey,  Bot.  Bound,  and 
probably  Q.  Durandii  and  San  sabea,  Buckley)."  Dr.  E.  thus 
regards  it  as  probably  identical  with  a  marked  variety  of  Quercus 
undulata^  an  opinion  which  a  better  acquaintance  with  living  trees 
would  surely  lead  him  to  revise.  Without  extensive  field  expe- 
rience it  is  almost  impossible  to  decide  on  the  limits  of  species  in 
oaks,  as  well  as  in  grapes  and  other  difficult  genera. 


1881.J  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  123 


QTJERCUS   RUBRA,  L.,  var.  TEXANA. 
BY    S.    B.    BUCKLEY,   PH.  D. 

Quercus  rubra  is  distributed  over  a  larger  area  than  any  other 
oak  in  North  America.  According  to  Dr.  Richardson,  it  is  the 
most  northern  of  oaks  ;  he  found  it  on  the  Saskatchewan  and  the 
rocks  of  Lake  Xamakeen,  in  British  America.  It  is  in  Nova 
Scotia,  and  southward  through  the  United  States  to  El  Paso 
County,  in  the  northwest  part  of  Texas.  The  writer  saw  it  in 
the  coves  of  the  mountains  near  Fort  Davis,  in  the  summer  of 
1875,  at  elevations  of  fi-om  5000  to  6000  feet  above  the  sea.  The 
differences  of  soil  and  climate  in  which  it  grows  cause  it  to  vary 
so  much  in  size,  wood,  leaves  and  acorns  that  the  two  extremes  of 
difference  considered  apart  from  intermediate  forms,  would  make 
two  ver}^  good  species.  The  Texas  form,  growing  on  limestone 
hills  and  coves  and  little  valley's  in  the  vicinitj'  of  Austin  and 
westward,  has  been  called  Q.  ijalustris  hy  Torrey  and  Gra}', 
in  the  Report  of  the  Botany  of  the  Pacific  Railroad.  Report  of 
Capt.  John  Pope,  p.  173;  also  in  other  reports  of  theirs  on  the 
Botany  of  Texas.  It  has  also  been  called  Q.  palustris  by  Dr. 
Engelmann,  when  he  named  the  plants  collected  by  Elihu  Hall  in 
Texas  in  1872.  (See  Hall's  Plantee  Texana?,  p.  21,  Nos.  604  and 
605.)  Hall  obtained  specimens  of  it  here  in  June,  and  I  sent 
him  acorns  of  it  in  the  fall,  and  he  informed  me  that  Dr.  Engel- 
mann regarded  it  as  Q.  palustris.  I  have  never  seen  the  true  Q. 
palustris  farther  south  than  the  vicinity  of  Washington.  Prof  Sar- 
gent and  Mr.  Mohr  both  inform  me  that  they  do  not  know  of  its 
being  in  the  Southern  States,  and  so  says  Michaux,  in  his  "  North 
American  Sjdva."  It  is  not  in  Chapman's  "  Flora  of  the  Southern 
States."  These  things  in  part,  joined  with  the  characteristics  of 
the  oak  as  growing  here,  caused  me  to  describe  it  as  a  new  species. 
(See  Q.  Texana,  in  Young's  "  Flora  of  Texas,"  p.  507.)  If  not  a 
good  species,  it  is  a  well-marked  variety  of  Q.  rubra.  Let  it  then 
be  called  Q.  rubra  var.  Texana. 

Last  December,  Mr.  Charles  Mohr  and  myself  got  sections  of  its 
wood,  etc.,  which  he  sent  North  for  the  Department  of  Forestry 
of  the  Government  Census  Bureau.  We  then  thought  it  to  be  a 
good  species.  A  few  daA^s  after,  on  the  bottom  lands  of  Walnut 
Creek,  about  six  miles  below  Austin,  we  found  the  acorns  and 


124  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

leaves  of  Q.  rubra  and  also  those  of  Q.  2'exana  on  and  beneath 
the  same  tree ;  and  also  many  intermediate  forms.  It  was  not 
onl_y  one  tree,  hut  man}',  which  showed  these  differences. 

Quercus  rubra  attains  a  large  size  in  Eastern  Texas  ;  but  west 
of  the  Trinity  River  it  is  seldom  more  than  two  feet  in  diameter. 
Its  wood  here  is  harder,  firmer  and  better  than  that  of  the 
Northern  red  oak. 

About  two  miles  from  Raleigh,  North  Carolina,  on  the  F'ayette- 
ville  road,  in  1858,  I  measured  a  Quercus  rubra  which  was  20  feet 
8  inches  in  circumference  at  three  feet  from  the  ground.  It  was  a 
low  tree,  with  a  remarkable  spread  of  very  large  limbs,  whose 
length  on  the  south  side  was  72  feet  and  71  feet.  The  longest  on 
the  north  side  was  66  feet.  Near  the  base  of  its  limbs  at  ten  feet 
from  the  ground  it  was  27  feet  in  circumference.  The  circum- 
ference of  the  largest  limb,  at  two  feet  from  the  trunk,  was  9  feet 
7  inches.     Another  limb  was  7  feet  7  inches  in  circumference. 

In  September,  1859,  I  measured  a  Q.  rubra  in  Wilcox  County, 
Alabama,  which  was  24  feet  7  inches  in  circurnference  at  three 
feet  from  the  ground.  It  was  a  tall,  well-developed,  healthy  tree. 
Another  one  not  far  distant  was  18  feet  2  inches  in  circumference 
at  three  feet.  In  the  town  of  Romulus,  Seneca  County,  N.  Y., 
I  measured  another,  in  1865,  which  was  17  feet  2  inches  in  in  cir- 
cumfererence  at  three  feet  high.  Most  of  the  large  red  oaks  of 
the  Northern  States  have  been  cut  down  to  make  staves  for  flour 
barrels,  etc. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  125 

KHUS  COTINOIDES,  Nutt. 
BY    S.    B.    BUCKLEY,    PH.  D. 

This  sumac  was  discovered  by  Nuttall,  in  the  autumn  of  1819, 
on  the  Grand,  a  large  tributary  of  the  Arkansas  River,  and  within 
the  limits  of  the  present  Indian  Territory.  It  was  on  high  broken 
rocky  banks  at  a  place  tlien  known  as  tlie  "Eagle's  Nest.''  It 
grew  there  only  as  a  shrub,  and  was  not  again  found  by  Nuttall. 
He  gives  a  description  of  it,  with  a  plate,  at  p.  71,  vol.  ii,  of  his 
addition  to  Michaux's  "  North  American  Sylva."  He  there  calls 
it  Cohnus  Americana.     Nuttall's  specimens  were  in  fruit  only. 

I  found  this  same  Ehus  on  the  6th  of  April,  1842,  in  descending 
from  the  table  lands  of  North  Alabama  to  the  Tennessee  River, 
on  the  Huntsville  road.  Here  were  large  shrubs  of  it  growing 
in  clumps  from  8  to  10  feet  high.  They  were  in  fruit  and 
strikingly  beautiful.     I  collected  many  specimens  of  them 

Soon  after,  I  came  to  the  river  and  staid  all  night  at  a  Mr. 
Chun's.  Next  morning,  I  crossed  at  "  Ditto's  Landing,"  and 
went  on  the  Madison  turnpike  to  Huntsville,  nine  miles  distant. 
After  dinner,  I  went  twelve  miles  from  Huntsville  to  a  Mr. 
Bailee's,  in  Madison  County,  Alabama,  on  the  road  to  Winchester, 
Tennessee,  via  Salem.  From  Mr.  Bailee's  house  I  walked  up  to 
the  top  of  a  low  mountain  to  get  specimens.  Near  its  base  and 
on  its  sides,  in  wooded  ravines,  I  saw  several  trees  of  R.  cotinoides 
in  flower,  and  with  larger  leaves  than  those  seen  before  south  of 
the  Tennessee  River.  These  trees  were  about  38  feet  high  and 
from  8  to  12  inches  in  diameter,  with  trunks  and  larger  limbs 
coated  with  light  gray  and  deeply-furrowed  bark  resembling  the 
bark  of  the  larger  trees  of  the  common  sassafras  {S.  officinale). 

I  climbed  a  tree  to  obtain  specimens.  The  branches  were 
brittle,  and  when  broken  emitted  a  yellowish  sap,  the  odor  of 
which  was  highly  aromatic ;  to  me  very  unpleasant. 
.  This  sumac,  when  in  fruit,  resembles  the  common  Venetian  sumac 
{Rhus  cotinus),  as  is  indicated  by  its  specific  name.  It  must  be 
very  local  in  its  habitats,  and  also  very  rare.  I  think  it  has  not 
been  found  elsewhere  than  in  the  Indian  Territory  and  North 
Alabama. 

In  Chapman's  "  Flora  of  the  Southern  States,"  p.  10,  it  is  stated 
that  I  found  it  in  the  interior  of  Alabama.  Dr.  Chapman  was  led 
into  this  error  from  our  correspondence  and  exchange  of  plants 
when  I  was  living  in  Wilcox  County,  Alabama. 


126  proceedings  of  the  academy  of  [1881. 

June  7. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Eighteen  persons  pi-esent. 

The  following  was  ordered  to  be  printed  : 

OBSERVATIONS  UPON  THE  HIPPOPOTAMUS. 
BY  HENRY  C.  CHAPMAN,  M.  D. 

On  several  different  occasions,  before  and  daring  the  reign  of 
Augustus  and  of  his  successors,  Antoninus,  Commodus,  Heleoga- 
balus,  etc.,  the  Hippopotamus  was  exhibited  at  Rome.  Xaturally 
one  would  suppose,  therefore,  that  among  the  writers  of  those 
times  a  truthful  description  of  this  interesting  animal  would  be 
found.  Pliny's  ^  account,  however,  is  only  a  restatement  of  tlie 
imperfect  and  erroneous  descriptions  of  Herodotus  and  Aristotle, 
with  some  mistalies  of  his  own  added,  while  tliose  of  later  Latin 
writers  like  Tatius,  though  better  than  Pliny's,  are  still  obscure 
and  contain  errors.  Indeed,  the  Hippopotamus,  as  described  by 
Herodotus  ^  and  Aristotle,^  is  so  unlike  the  animal  known  at  the 
present  day,  that  either  these  usually  most  accurate  and  trust- 
worthy observers  could  never  have  seen  the  Hippopotamus  or 
else  they  must  have  desciibed  s6me  other  animal  under  that  name. 
About  the  middle  of  the  sixteenth  century  it  is  said  that  Belon 
saw  the  living  Hippopotamus  at  Constantinople,  but  even  so  late 
as  the  time  of  Cuvier^  the  living  animal  had  not  been  seen  in 
Western  Europe.  The  London  Zoological  Garden,  I  believe,  has 
the  credit  of  iiaving  been  the  first  in  modern  times  (during  1850) 
to  exhibit  the  living  Hippopotamus. 

So  far  as  I  know,  the  first  dissection  of  this  animal  was  mad.e 
in  1764,  by  Daubenton.-^     The  specimen,  however,  being  a  female 

1  De  animalibus,  Lib.  viii,  cap.  xxxix ;  Lib.  ix,  cap.  xiv. 
-  Historia,  Lib.  ii,  cap.  Ixxi. 

*  Historia  Animalium,  Lib.  ii,  cap.  iv. 

*  Ossemens  Fossiles,  Tome  deuxieme,  p.  383. 

5  Histoire  naturelle,  &c.,  avec  la  description  du  Cabinet  du  Roi.  Tome 
douzieme,  1764,  p.  50.    Supplement  to  Buffon. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  127 

foetus,  it  was  questionable  liow  far  the  description  wonld  apply  to 
the  adult  animal.  Nothing  further  was  added  to  the  above  account 
until,  in  1844,  Vrolik^  described  the  stomach  of  a  half-grown  indi- 
vidual from  drawings  sent  from  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope.  A  few 
years  afterwards  Peters,^  in  his  Travels,  gives  a  short  but  valuable 
account  of  the  appearance  that  the  viscera  presented  in  the  adult 
animal.  It  will  be  seen,  therefore,  that  the  knowledge  of  the  soft 
parts  of  the  Hippopotamus  was  very  limited  up  to  quite  a  recent 
period.  During  1867  there  appeared  the  elaborate  monograph  of 
Gratiolet^  on  the  anatom}^  of  this  animal,  and  the  important 
observations  of  Crisp. ^  Gratiolet's  description  was  derived  from 
his  dissection  of  the  two  A'oung  animals,  male  and  female,  that 
were  born  and  had  died  in  the  Jardin  des  Plantes.  Science 
is  indebted  to  Dr.  Alix  for  the  publication  of  this  important 
work,  Gratiolet  dying  before  its  completion.  This  distinguished 
anatomist  had,  however,  before  his  death,  communicated  to  the 
Academic  des  Sciences,^  an  abstract  of  his  researches.  A  third 
young  Hippopotamus  having  died  in  Paris  during  the  preparation 
of  the  work  just  referred  to,  Dr.  Alix  had  a  further  opportunity 
of  supplementing  and  confirming  Gratiolet's  A'iews.  Dr.  Crisp's 
specimen  was  a  male  and  about  fourteen  months  old  ;  it  was  burnt 
to  death  in  the  fire  that  destroyed  the  Crystal  Palace  in  London, 
and  was  the  first  Hippopotamus  dissected  in  England.  Dr.  Crisp ^ 
refers  to  Gratiolet's  abstract  in  Annales  des  Sciences  Naturelles 
for  1860,  but  does  not  mention  that  in  Comptes  Rendus  for  1860. 
His  observations  were,  therefore,  uninfluenced  by  those  of  Gratiolet. 
In  1872,  Mr.  J.  W.  Clark ^  published  the  "  Notes  on  the  Visceral 
Anatom}"  of  the  Hippopotamus  "  that  died  in  the  London  Garden. 
This  animal  was  a  female,  and  only  a  few  days  old. 

It  is  well  known  that  in  addition  to  the  ordinary  Hippopotamus, 
there  is  a  rarer  species  from  the  Western  Coast  of  Africa,  first 

'  Amsterdam  Verhandelingen,  x,  1844,  p.  240  ;  Recherches  sur  la  Baby- 
russa. 

■^  Reise  nach  Mosambique,  1852,  i,  p.  180, 

^  Recherches  sur  I'anatomie  de  I'Hlppopotame.    Paris,  1867. 

*  On  some  points  connected  with  the  anatomy  of  the  Hippopotamus. 
Proc.  of  Lond.  Zool.  Soc,  1867,  p.  601  and  689. 

5  Comptes  Rendus,  1860,  pp.  524,  593. 

«  Op.  cit.,  p.  601. 

'  Proc.  Zool.  Soc,  London,  1872,  p.  185. 


128  PEOCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

made  known  by  Morton,'  and  called  by  him  Hippopotamus 
Liberiensis.  Its  osteology  was  afterwards  fully  described  by 
Prof.  Leidy,^  who  showed  that  this  species  differed  so  much  from 
the  ordinary  one  that  a  distinct  name,  Chceropsis,  was  given  to 
it,  as  indicating  that  the  supposed  new  species  was  really  a  new 
genus.  Prof.  Leidy's  views  have  since  been  thoroughly'  corrobo- 
rated by  other  anatomists,  particularly  by  Milne  Edwards,^  in  his 
recent  beautiful  monograph  on  this  animal.  The  only  living 
example  of  the  Choeropsis  Liberiensis  ever  seen  outside  of  Africa 
was  the  female  specimen  only  three  or  four  months  old  that  died 
a  few  minutes  after  arriving  at  the  Zoological  Gardens  in  Dublin 
in  18*74,  and  that  formed  the  subject  of  a  paper  by  Mr.  Alex, 
Macalester.^  Since  then,  within  a  year,  the  late  lamented  Dr.  A. 
H.  Garrod  ^  communicated  to  the  Zoological  Society  of  London 
the  results  of  his  dissection  of  the  adult  male  Hippopotamus  that 
had  lived  twentj^-eight  years  in  their  admirably  conducted  Garden. 
It  will  be  observed  from  this  resume  of  the  literature  of  the 
subject  that,  with  one  or  two  exceptions,  the  Hippopotami  tlmt 
have  been  dissected  were  young  animals ;  some  not  more  than  a 
few  days  or  weeks,  others  about  a  year  old,  and  that  with  the 
exception  of  the  Choeropsis  examined  at  Dublin,  they  were  of  the 
ordinary  kind,  or  the  Hippopotamus  amphibius. 

While  the  general  results  of  these  various  observations  are  con- 
firmator}'  of  each  other,  nevertheless,  on  account  of  the  ditference 
in  the  age  and  sex  of  the  individuals  dissected,  it  is  still  important 
that  whenever  the  opportunity  presents  itself  of  examining  a  full 
or  half-grown  Hippopotamus  the  results  of  such  dissection  should 
be  compared  with  those  already  made  for  the  sake  of  confirming, 
supplementing,  or  farther  illustrating  them.  It  is  with  this  object 
that  I  bring  before  the  Academy  the  results  of  my  examinations 
of  the  female  Hippopotamus  which  recently  died  in  the  menagerie 
of  Mr.  Adam  Forepaugh,  to  whom  I  am  indebted  for  the  oppor- 
tunity of  dissecting  it ;  and  of  the  male  specimen  that  died  in  New 

^  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sciences,  vol.  ii,  p.  14  ;  Journal,  vol.  i,  1849,  p.  231. 

2  Journal  Acad.  Nat.  Sci,  vol.  ii,  1852. 

^  Recherches  sur  les  mammiferes. 

*  Proc.  of  Royal  Irish  Academy,  1874.  The  anatomy  of  Choeropsis  Libe- 
riensis. 

"•>  Trans,  of  Zoo.  Soc.  of  London,  1880.  On  the  Brain  and  other  parts  of 
the  Hippopotamus. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  129 

York  on  its  way  to  the  Zoological  Garden  of  Philadelphia.  I  take 
the  occasion  also  of  thanking  Mr.  Arthur  E,  Brown,  Superintend- 
ent of  the  Zoological  Garden  where  the  dissections  were  made,  for 
materially  assisting  me  in  the  investigation. 

Both  the  animals  were  examples  of  the  ordinary  species,  the 
Hippopotamus  amphibius,  and  measured  about  5  feet  6  inches  in 
length.  The  female  was  both  the  taller  and  heavier  of  the  two. 
Her  height  at  the  shoulder  being  28  inches  and  weight  550  pounds. 
She  was  probably  older  than  the  male.  The  condition  of  the  skin 
in  the  female  suggested  the  idea  that  it  had  not  been  sufficiently 
bathed  during  the  past  winter.  It  is  well  known  that  the  health 
of  the  skin,  and  of  the  animal  generally,  depends  upon  the  free  use 
of  water,  either  in  the  form  of  a  bath,  or  where  that  is  not  practi- 
cable, by  constant  sponging,  etc.  With  the  exception  of  some 
slight  inflammation  of  the  fourth  stomach  and  an  apparent  hyper- 
trophy of  the  left  ventricle  of  the  heart,  the  organs  were  healthy. 
The  male  animal  died  from  an  inflammation  of  the  stomach  and 
intestines,  the  epithelium  and  submucous  tissue  in  parts  of  the 
stomach  being  stripped  off,  while  portions  of  the  intestine  were 
gangi'enous.  The  immediate  cause  of  death  was  a  large  well- 
organized  clot  in  the  heart.  As  the  myology  of  Hippopotamus 
and  of  Choeropsis  have  been  described  and  figured  by  Gratiolet  ^ 
and  Macalester  ^  respectively,  I  will  not  dwell  upon  this  part  of 
the  subject,  but  pass  to  the  consideration  of  the  internal  organs. 

Alimentary  System,  etc. — The  tongue  of  the  Hippopotamus 
(PI.  XI,  fig.  1)  is  a  long,  flattened  organ  expanded  and  rounded  off 
at  the  top  rather  than  tapered.  It  measured  1 4  inches  in  length,  in 
breadth  3^  inches  at  the  middle  and  5  inches  at  the  top.  A  t  the 
back  of  the  tongue  where  one  finds  the  circumvallate  papillae  in 
man,  in  place  of  these  are  seen  what  might  be  called  elongated, 
thorn}'^  papillae.  They  do  not  correspond  to  either  the  human 
filiform  or  fungiform  papillae.  The  latter  were  well  developed.  I 
did  not  notice  anything  peculiar  about  the  submaxillary  gland, 
the  sublingual  however  was  absent;^  the  parotids  were  present, 
but  not  very  well  developed,  as  Gratiolet  states  was  the  case  in 
the  animals  examined  by  him.  The  small  size  of  the  parotids  in 
the  Hippopotamus  may  be  due  to  the  habit  of  passing  so  much 
time  in  the  water  ;  the  necessity  of  the  secretion  not  being  felt, 

1  Op.  cit.,  Planches  IV  to  VIIL  ^  Op.  cit.,  pages  496,  500. 

3  Op.  cit.,  p.  384. 
10 


130  PROCEEDINGS  OP   THE   ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

as  is  the  case  in  fishes.  According  to  Gratiolet,^  it  is  doubtful 
if  they  were  present  in  the  very  young  animal. 

What  at  once  struck  me,  on  exposing  the  larynx,  etc.,  was  the 
space  (PI.  XI,  fig.  1)  intervening  between  it  and  the  tongue,  and 
the  large  size  of  the  back  of  the  tongue  as  compared  with  the 
epiglottis.  Through  the  flexibility  of  this  space  the  larynx  when 
elevated  can  be  thrust  up  into  the  posterior  nares ;  this  space, 
together  with  the  tongue,  effectually  cutting  off  the  cavity  of  the 
mouth.  This  can  be  well  seen  in  the  living  animal.  It  is  possible 
that  tliis  disposition  of  the  parts  may  be  of  advantage  to  tlie  Hippo- 
potamus when  sunk  in  the  water.  Under  such  circumstances,  the 
nose  only  appearing,  the  air  can  pass  into  the  external  nares  and 
so  back  directly  into  the  larynx.  Further,  as  the  external  nares 
are  extremely  flexible  and  close  very  tightly,  it  may  be  that  the 
animal  before  sinking  under  the  water  can  take  in  a  considerable 
quantity  of  air  into  the  nose  and  retain  it  there  until  needed, 
when  it  is  then  drawn  into  the  lar3nix.  On  looking  over  the 
literature  of  the  anatomy  of  the  Hippopotamus,  I  find  that 
Gratiolet^  and  Clark »  are  the  only  ones  who  dwell  particularly 
upon  this  part  of  its  economy.     Clark  gives  figures  of  tlie  spaces 

1  have  referred  to,  and  points  out  what  appears  to  be  the  probable 
function  of  the  parts.  The  lar3nix  and  its  muscles  have  been 
well  described  hy  Gratiolet,*  Crisp ^  and  Clark."  It  would  be 
superfluous  therefore  for  me  to  dwell  upon  them.  I  will,  however, 
call  attention  in  this  connection  to  the  fact  of  the  epiglottis 
(Plate  XI,  figs.  1  and  2  e)  being  small  as  compared  with  the  larynx 
(Plate  XI,  fig.  2),  the  former  measuring  2|-  inches  in  length,  and 

2  inches  wide,  the  latter  being  6i  inches  long  and  6^  in  circum- 
ference, and  that  the  nares,  epiglottis,  etc.,  of  the  Hippopotamus 
I'eminded  me  rather  of  those  of  the  Manatee  than  of  those  of  the 
Cetacea.  The  vocal  cords  were  situated  obliquely,  the  anterior 
ends  being  lowermost;  they  measure  2  inches  in  length  and  ^  inch 
in  depth.  There  was  nothing  peculiar  about  the  lungs ;  they  were 
not  divided  into  lobes  or  subdivided  into  lobviles  recognizable  by 
the  naked  eye,  as  described  by  Gratiolet.^ 

The  stomach  in  the  Hippopotamus  is  subdivided  into  four  distinct 

1  Op.  cit.,  p.  384.  2  Op.  cit.,  p.  375. 

3  Op.  cit.,  p.  188.  *  Op.  cit.,  p.  305. 

Op.  cit.,  p.  608.  •*  Compare  Gratiolet,  op.  cit.,  p.  368. 

On    oM.      n    S74. 


'  Op,  cit.,  p.  374 


1881.J  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  131 

compartments,  &,  c,  d  and  e  (Plate  XII) ;  the  first,  h,  however, 
not  being  so  apparent  externall}'  as  the  other  three  (shown  in 
Plate  XI,  fig.  3).  The  oesophagus,  a  (Plate  XII),  opens  freely 
into  the  compartment  6,  which  is  situated  posteriorly,  and  which 
might  be  easily  overlooked  unless  opened.  I  propose  calling  this 
compartment  the  first  stomach,  as  the  food  can  pass  from  the 
oesophagus  into  it  without  necessarily  passing  into  either  of  the 
other  two  stomachs,  c  and  d,  whereas  the  food  must  pass  through 
a  small  part  at  least  of  b  in  order  to  get  into  c  or  d.  This  is 
due  to  a  peculiar  disposition  at  the  entrance  of  the  stomachs  c 
and  d  (Plate  XIII).  At  this  point  the  lining  membrane  is 
raised  up  into  two  valvular  folds,  g  and  h  (PI.  XIII),  of  which  the 
former  is  the  best  developed.  The  fold  g  almost  divides  the 
second  stomach  into  two  parts.  These  folds  are  10  and  4  inches 
in  length  respectively,  and  abovit  the  ^  of  an  inch  in  breadth,  and 
contain  muscular  fibres.  When  these  folds  are  approximated  the 
oesophagus,  a,  and  first  stomach,  &,  are  completely  shut  off  from  c 
and  d.  When,  however,  the  valvular  folds  are  separated,  then 
the  food  can  pass  from  the  oesophagus,  a,  or  from  stomach,  6, 
over  the  edges  of  the  folds,  g  and  h,  into  either  the  stomachs,  c 
or  d.  As  the  compartment  d  passes  into  e,  which  is  continuous 
with  the  intestine,  /",  it  appears  to  me  that  the  two  compartments 
may  be  appropriately  called  the  third  and  fourth  stomachs,  in 
which  case  c  would  be  the  second  one. 

From  a  simple  inspection  of  the  stomachs  of  the  Hippopotamus, 
one  would  be  disposed  to  conclude  that  the  animal  was  a  rumi- 
nant. As  the  act  of  rumination,  however,  has  never  been  observed 
in  the  Hippopotamus,  either  in  captivity  or  in  the  wild  state,  so 
far  as  is  known,  the  inference  must  be  that  the  food  passes  either 
directl}^  from  the  oesophagus  into  the  second  or  third  stomachs,  as 
is  probably  the  case  with  liquids,  or  into  the  first  stomach,  and 
then  indirectly  into  the  second  or  third,  when  more  solid  articles 
are  introduced. 

The  four  stomachs  differ  considerably  in  size,  the  third,  d^  being 
by  far  the  largest ;  it  measured  from  right  to  left  27  inches,  as  seen 
in  situ  in  PI.  XII ;  it  overlaps,  when  viewed  from  the  anterior  sur- 
face, the  second  and  fourth  stomachs,  c  and  e,  and,  to  a  great 
extent  conceals  the  first  stomach,  &,  especially  when  the  latter  is 
empty.  The  first  stomach,  b,  measured  15  inches  from  right  to 
left,  and  is  so  closel}^  united  to  the  third  one,  d,  that  externall}^ 


132  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

the  two  look  like  one  when  empty,  and  their  distinctness  does  not 
become  evident  until  they  are  forcibly  separated  and  opened. 
The  first  stomacli  is  also  connected  laterally  with  the  third  and 
fourth  ones.  These  are  about  the  same  length,  7  inches,  measured 
from  right  to  left.  The  third  stomach  communicated  with  the 
fourth  by  a  narrow  aperture,  which  measured  3  inches  in  diameter. 
In  situ  the  second  stomach  was  situated  in  the  left  hypochondriac 
region  ;  the  fourth  stomach  on  the  right ;  the  third  stomach  lying 
between  the  third  and  fourth  and  in  the  same  plane,  and  in  front 
and  partially  concealing  the  first  stomach. 

The  difierence  in  the  four  stomachs  of  the  Hippopotamus  viewed 
internally  are  even  more  marked  than  those  observed  externally. 
The  smooth  mucous  membrane  of  the  oesophagus  contrasts  strongly 
with  that  of  the  first  stomach,  in  which  the  mucous  membrane 
exhibits  parallel  folds  or  ridges.  In  the  second  stomach  the  ridges 
are  seen,  but  here  they  consist  of  rows  of  villi,  averaging  the  ^  of 
an  inch  in  height ;  the  villi  are  not  so  closely  set  on  the  rows  but 
that  they  can  be  readil}'  distinguished.  The  villi  in  the  third  stom- 
ach, however,  are  densely  packed  and  smaller  than  those  of  the 
second  stomach.  In  addition  the  mucous  membrane  is  thrown  into 
eight  large  (the  seventh  divided  into  two)  folds  that  run  at  right 
angles  to  the  long  axis  of  the  stomach.  The  mucous  membrane  of 
the  fourth  stomach  differed  from  that  of  the  others  in  being  the 
only  one  containing  the  gastric  glands ;  according  to  Dr.  Hunt, 
these  measure  in  length  -^^^  of  an  inch,  in  breadth  yi^  of  an  inch. 
The  food  did  not  seem  to  be  digested  to  any  extent  in  the  first  three 
stomachs,  but  lay  as  a  sodden  mass.  In  the  fourth  stomach,  how- 
ever, the  food  was  softened,  and  its  general  appearance  differed 
from  that  of  the  other  stomachs.  As  the  animal  died  shortly  after 
eating,  digestion  had  not  been  going  on  any  length  of  time,  so 
that  any  great  change  in  the  food  could  not  have  taken  place.  In 
the  case  of  the  male,  the  fourth  stomach  had  been  affected  by  dis- 
ease and  the  food  appeared  almost  unchanged.  The  small  intestine 
in  the  female  measured  TO  feet,  the  large  intestine  11  feet.  There 
were  no  valvulse  conniventes  in  the  small  intestine  but  the  mucous 
membrane  was  villous  and  exhibited  the  Lieberkiihnian  follicle  and 
the  Peyer's  patches  in  the  lower  two-thirds.  There  was  no  very 
sharp  line  of  demarkation  between  the  small  and  large  intestines, 
the  beginning  of  the  latter  being  indicated  by  a  slight  enlarge- 
ment.    A  small  transverse  fold  was  the  only  indication  of  an  ileo- 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA.  133 

csecal  valve.  As  might  have  been  expected  on  account  of  the  large 
and  complex  stomach,  there  was  no  well  defined  cfecum.  It  is  an 
interesting  fact,  however,  that  the  peculiar  glandular-like  structure 
in  the  cfBcal  end  of  the  colon  of  the  Giraffe  first  described  by  Cob- 
bold,  should  be  present  in  the  Hippopotamus.  There  was  nothing 
very  peculiar  about  the  pancreas  or  the  spleen.  The  duct  of  the 
former  pierced  the  duodenum  separately  from  the  ductus  choledo- 
chus.  The  latter  was  closely  bound  to  the  greater  curvature  of 
the  stomach  by  a  fold  of  peritoneum.  The  liver  was  a  quadri- 
lateral mass  not  subdivided  to  any  extent  into  lobes.  The  gall 
bladder  was  absent  in  the  female ;  in  the  male,  however,  it  was 
present  and  measured  6  inches  long. 

On  comparing  m}^  observations  with  those  of  the  anatomists 
already  referred  to,  I  find,  that  while  some  of  the  descriptions 
accord  very  well  with  mine,  others  diflTer  considerably.  Thus 
Daubenton's  description  is  very  good,  especially  when  it  is  remem- 
bered that  it  is  based  upon  the  examination  of  a  fcetus.  His^ 
figures  give  a  very  good  idea  of  the  relations  of  the  four  stomachs 
when  they  are  separated  from  each  other  by  division  of  their  con- 
necting bands.  Peters' ^  and  Vrolik's^  accounts  are  very  fair. 
Unfortunatel}^,  however,  no  figures  are  given.  On  the  other  hand, 
I  cannot  say  that  the  figure  given  hy  Crisp  ^  of  the  stomachs 
illustrate  the  specimens  examined  by  me.  His  descriptions,  how- 
ever, of  the  colic  gland,  spleen,  liver  and  pancreas  accord  very 
well  with  my  observations.  Clark  ^  gives  four  figures,  illustrating 
the  stomach  described  by  him,  that  by  Gratiolet,  and  of  one  pi'e- 
served  in  the  Museum  of  the  Royal  College  of  Surgeons.  The 
figure  of  the  latter  gives  a  much  better  idea  of  the  stomach 
examined  by  me  than  either  that  of  Clark's  or  Gratiolet's.  Garrod  ® 
states  that  "  he  could  find  no  confirmation  of  the  peculiar  position 
of  the  diflferent  parts  described  by  Mr.  J.  W.  Clark  in  his  speci- 
men." Possibly  these  differences  observed  in  the  stomach  may 
be  due  to  age,  sex,  to  the  extent  to  which  the  different  stomachs 
had  been  separated,  or  to  the  amount  of  food  that  thej^  contained, 
etc.  As  all  of  these  conditions  will  influence  greatly  the  form  of 
the  organ,  it  need  not  occasion  surprise  that  I  find  the  accounts 

1  Op.  cit.,  figs.  1  and  2,  PI.  IV.  ^  Op.  cit.,  p.  180. 

3  Op.  cit.,  p.  240.  *  Op.  cit.,  fig.  3,  *p.  604. 

^  Op.  cit.,  figs.  4,  5,  6,  7,  p.  190.  «  Op.  cit.,  p.  16. 


134  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [l^^l. 

somewhat  discordant,  without,  however,  intending  to  throw  dis- 
credit upon  any  of  them. 

A  Peccary  having  died  at  the  Zoological  Garden  the  same  day 
that  the  Hippopotamus  arrived  there,  a  favorable  opportunity 
presented  itself  of  comparing  the  stomachs  of  the  two  animals. 
While  externally  the  stomach  of  the  Peccary  is  not  subdivided  to 
any  great  extent,  internally  through  the  elevation  of  the  mucous 
membrane  into  two  ridges,  three  compartments,  cardiac,  middle 
and  p3'loric,  may  be  distinguished.  The  cardiac  portion  further 
subdivided  at  its  termination  into  two  blind  pouches,  opens  into  the 
middle  division  of  the  stomach  ;  the  latter  receives  the  oesophagus 
and  communicates  with  the  pyloric  part.  Conceive  the  ridges 
and  the  cardiac  pouches  in  the  stomach  of  the  Peccary  greatly 
enlarged  and  we  would  have  the  stomach  of  a  small  Hippopotamus. 
On  the  other  hand,  diminish  the  first  two  stomachs  of  the  Hippo- 
potamus to  mere  blind  pouches,  at  the  same  time  increasing  the 
constriction  between  the  third  and  fourth  ones  and  we  have,  with- 
out any  stretching  of  the  imagination,  the  stomach  of  the  Manatee. 
Beginning  with  the  Pig  the  transition  from  that  form  of  the 
stomach  through  the  Babyrussa '  to  that  of  the  Peccary  is  an  easy 
one.  The  latter  again,  leads  to  the  Hippopotamus,  which  in  turn 
anticipates  on  the  one  hand  the  Manatee  and  on  the  other  the 
Ruminant  type. 

Vascular  System. — The  circulation  of  the  blood  in  the  Hippo- 
potamus was  first  studied  by  Gratiolet.  The  result  of  his  careful 
investigation  was  the  subject  of  a  special  communication  to  the 
Academy  of  Sciences,  which  appeared  in  the  Comptes  Rendus^^ 
several  years  before  the  publication  of  his  more  general  work  by 
Dr.  Alix,  A  good  account  of  the  heart  is  also  given  by  Crisp.^ 
With  the  exception  of  the  above  accounts,  little  or  no  attention 
seems  to  have  been  given  to  the  study  of  the  circulation  by  those 
anatomists  who  have  dissected  the  common  variety  of  Hippopota- 
mus, DaiibentoH  ^  devoting  merely  a  few  lines  to  the  heart,  while 
the  later  writers  do  not  mention  the  circulation  at  all.  Macalester  ^ 
mentions  one  or  two  peculiarities  about  the  blood-vessels  in  the 
Ch(]eropsis.  Although  I  have  nothing  particularly  to  add  to 
•Gratiolet's  excellent  description,  inasmuch  as  the  subject  of  his 

1  Vrolik,  op.  cit.,  p.  240.  ^  Tome  11,  p.  524, 1860,  1867. 

3  Op.  cit.,  p.  609.  *  Op.  cit.,  p.  57.  ^  Op.  cit.,  p.  495. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OE  PHILADELPHIA.  135 

dissection  was  onh^  a  day  old,  it  was  important  that  the  heart  and 
blood-vessels  in  a  more  fully  developed  animal  should  be  examined 
with  reference  to  determining  whether  the  circulation  was  in  any 
way  modified  by  age. 

On  opening  the  thorax  of  the  animal  it  appeared  to  me  that  in 
both  sexes  the  heart  was  large  in  proportion  to  the  size  of  the 
animals.  This  is  in  a  great  measure  due  to  the  thickness  of  the 
walls  of  the  left  ventricle.  In  the  female  Hippopotamus,  which 
was  the  first  examined,  I  suspected  this  might  be  due  to  hj'per- 
trophy,  but  finding  it  to  be  the  case  in  the  male  also,  perhaps 
this  is  normal.  The  heart,  in  an  empty  condition,  measured, 
from  base  to  apex,  9  Inches,  and  in  circumference  14  inches.  The 
wall  of  the  left  ventricle  measured  1  inch  in  thickness,  that  of  the 
right  ^  of  an  inch.  According  to  Gratiolet,^  the  heart  in  the 
young  Hippopotamus  terminates  in  two  points,  the  ventricles 
being  separated  by  a  little  groove,  reminding  one  of  the  form  of 
the  heart  in  the  Manatee  and  the  Dugong.  There  was  no  indica- 
tion of  this  groove  in  either  of  the  Hippopotami  examined  by  me. 
With  the  exception  of  the  absence  of  the  corpora  arantii  on  the 
semilunar  valves  of  the  pulmonary  artery  and  their  very  slight 
development  in  those  of  the  aorta  I  did  not  notice  anj^thing 
peculiar  about  the  interior  of  the  heart.  The  aorta  gave  off  the 
coronary  arteries  first,  which  were  very  large  and  then  an  innomi- 
nate and  the  left  subclavian.  The  innominate  divided  into  the 
right  subclavian  and  a  trunk  which  bifurcated  into  the  two  com- 
mon carotids.  The  external  carotid  as  well  as  the  ascending 
cervical  and  occipital  arteries  were  all  rather  slender  vessels  in 
proportion  to  the  size  of  the  head  and  neck.  The  external 
carotid  artery  was  very  much  larger  than  the  internal.  A  pecu- 
liarity about  the  external  carotid  artery  of  the  Hippopotamus  first 
described  by  Gratiolet,^  I  noticed  m  both  the  male  and  the  female 
animals,  the  fact  of  the  vessel  in  its  course  towards  the  head 
passing  between  the  hyoid  bone  and  the  digastric  and  stylo-hyoid 
muscles  in  such  a  manner  that  when  the  hyoid  is  elevated  the 
vessel  is  compressed  against  the  bone  by  these  muscles.  The 
effect  of  this  disposition  is  that  the  blood  is  cut  off"  to  a 
great  extent  from  the  brain  and  head  when  the  animal  sinks 
under  water,  the  hyoid  being  elevated  at  such  times.     Gratiolet 

^  Recherches,  p.  358,  and  Planche  III. 
2  Op.  cit.,  p.  354. 


136  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

having  shown  that  the  external  carotid  through  the  sphenoidal 
branch  of  its  internal  maxillary  communicates  with  the  carotid 
rete  mirabile,  this  sphenoidal  branch  in  the  Hippopotamus  is  as 
large  as  the  internal  carotid  and  plays  the  part  of  an  "  anterior 
internal  carotid."  In  this  connection  I  may  say  that  it  appeared 
to  me  that  the  elevation  of  the  hyoid  bone  would  compress  the 
internal  carotid  arterj'  as  well  as  the  external,  the  common  carotid 
bifurcating  between  the  digastric  muscle  and  the  hyoid  bone  in  my 
specimens.  The  return  of  the  venous  blood  to  the  heart  from 
the  head,  however,  was  not  impeded  in  any  way,  the  jugular  veins 
lying  to  the  outside  of  the  muscles  which  compressed  the  carotid 
arteries.  The  superior  mesenteric  artery  came  off  the  aorta  in 
common  with  the  coeliac,  the  inferior  mesenteric  separately.  The 
common  trunk  of  the  external  and  internal  iliacs  was  short.  I  did 
not  notice  any  rete  mirabile  in  the  arteries  of  the  body  or  extremi- 
ties. In  this  respect  the  venous  system,  however,  differed  very 
considerably  from  the  arterial.  I  was  struck  with  the  large  size 
of  the  cutaneous  and  subcutaneous  veins  and  of  the  many  anasto- 
moses between  them,  especially  in  the  extremities,  where  numei'ous 
rete  exist.  Another  peculiarity  about  the  venous  system  in  the 
Hippopotamus  is  the  difference  between  the  superior  and  inferior 
vena  cavae.  The  superior  being  very  lai'ge  and  readily  transmit- 
ting the  blood  to  the  heart,  whereas  the  inferior  cava,  at  least  that 
part  of  it  above  the  diaphragm,  is  rather  small.  According  to 
Macalester,^  in  Choeropsis  a  left  superior  vena  cava  is  partly 
represented  by  a  small  vein.  As  Gratiolet  first  showed,  there 
is  found  in  the  walls  of  the  vena  cava  above  the  diaphragm  a  cir- 
cular band  of  muscular  fibres  which  in  contracting  will  entirely 
or  partially  constrict  the  vessel.  The  effect  of  such  action  is  that 
the  blood  in  the  inferior  cava  is  prevented  returning  to  the  heart. 
The  circular  muscular  band  in  the  Hippopotami  examined  by  me 
was  ^  an  inch  broad.  Such  a  disposition  of  the  vena  cava  is  also 
seen  in  the  SeaP  and  in  some  other  mammals  which  habitually 
remain  under  water  for  a  certain  length  of  time.^  Below  the 
diaphragm  the  vena  cava  was  very  much  dilated,  while  the  open- 
ings into  it  of  the  hepatic  veins  were  enormous.  It  will  be  seen 
from  the  above  that  while  the  venous  blood  readily  returns  from 

1  Op.  cit.,  p.  495. 

2  Burrow,  MuUer's  Archiv,  1838. 

^  Mihie  Edwards'  Physiologie,  Tome  lit,  p.  594. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA,  137 

the  biain  and  cord  and  upper  extremities  to  the  heart,  that  from 
the  viscera  and  lower  extremities  can  be  entii'ely  cut  off  from  it, 
welling  back  into  the  dilated  cava  and  cutaneous  veins,  while 
congestion  of  the  brain  can  be  prevented  when  the  animal  sinks 
under  water  by  the  obliteration  of  the  carotid  arteries.  In  this 
way  paralysis  of  the  respiratory  centres  of  the  brain  and  cord 
through  congestion  is  prevented,  while  the  demand  for  fresh  air 
is  diminished,  so  much  blood  being  retained  in  the  viscera  and 
lower  extremities  and  so  diverted  from  the  lungs.  Tliese  pecu- 
liarities in  the  vascular  system  of  the  Hippopotamus — taken 
together  with  the  disposition  of  the  nares,  larynx,  etc.,  already 
referred  to,  through  which  the  air  can  be  retained — accounts, 
according  to  Gratiolet,'  for  the  Hippopotamus  being  able  to 
remain  under  water  for  so  long  a  time,  from  fifteen  to  even  forty 
minutes. 

Bert,-  while  admitting  the  force  of  Gratiolet's  reasoning,  attrib- 
utes the  power  that  many  animals  have  of  resisting  for  a  long  time 
asphyxia,  however  produced,  rather  to  the  relative  richness  of  blood 
that  is  contained  in  their  bodies  ;  the  blood  serving  as  a  storehouse 
or  magazine  for  oxygen  which  cS,n  be  drawn  upon  when  needed. 
For  example,  Bert  has  shown  that  the  blood  of  the  duck  is  richer 
than  that  of  the  chicken,  and  explains  in  this  way  that  the  duck 
will  live  longer  than  the  chicken,  when  both  are  asphj^xiated  either 
by  submersion  in  water  or  by  ligation  of  the  trachea.  It  seems  to 
me,  however,  that  the  great  quantity  of  blood  present  in  those 
mammals  that  are  in  the  habit  of  remaining  under  the  water  any 
length  of  time  is  an  important  element  in  the  question.  In  open- 
ing several  sea-lions,  Zalophus  Gillespii,  that  have  died  at  the 
Zoological  Garden,  and  different  Cetacea,  I  have  been  alwa3^s  im- 
pressed with  the  enormous  quantity  of  blood  that  literally  ran  out 
of  their  bodies.  In  presenting  a  specimen  of  a  Dolphin,  Ddphi- 
nus^  to  the  Academy,  I  called  attention^  to  the  vast  rete  mirabile 
formed  by  the  intercostal  arteries  constituting  the  intercostal 
gland  of  the  older  anatomists,  and  which  is  usually  regarded  as  a 
reservoir  of  arterialized  oxygenated  blood,  to  be  drawn  upon  ac- 
cording to  the  needs  of  the  animal.  If  the  blood  of  the  seals  and 
cetaceans  proves  to  be  relatively  richer  than  that  of  othei"  mammals, 

1  Recherches,  p.  363. 

-  Physiologie  comparie  de  la  Respiration,  p.  543. 

'  Proceediugs  of  Academy,  1873,  p.  279. 


138  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

it  would  show  that  both  the  quality  of  the  blood,  as  well  as  the 
quantity,  is  important  in  enabling  the  animal  to  resist  asphyxia. 
Not  only  was  the  quantity  of  blood  in  the  Hippopotamus  very 
great  but  the  color  in  the  arteries  was  very  bright,  more  so  than 
is  usual  in  mammalian  blood.  Further  I  found  the  blood  cor- 
puscles measured  only  the  yg^oo  of  ^'^  ^^^ch  in  diameter,  or  more 
strictl}^  the  ^^^  of  a  millimetre — a  Nachet  eye-piece  micrometer 
being  used.  The  blood  of  the  Iliiipopotamus  should  be  therefore 
very  rich  in  oxygen,  as  a  corpuscle  subdivided  into  a  number  of 
small  ones  would  expose  a  larger  absorbing  surface  to  the  oxygen 
respired  than  if  undivided.  This  view  is  confirmatory  of  that  of 
Bert,  just  referred  to.  It  must  be  admitted,  however,  that  accord- 
ing to  the  high  authority  of  Gulliver,  the  blood  corpuscle  measures 
the  34^2^  of  an  inch  in  the  Hippopotamus.  The  fact  of  the  Hip- 
popotamus being  able  to  remain  under  water  would  seem,  therefore, 
to  depend  upon  the  peculiarities  of  its  vascular  and  respiratory 
systems,  and  the  great  quantity  and  rich  quality  of  its  blood,  the 
structural  relations  being  as  important  as  the  chemical. 

Genito-Urinari/  Apparatus. — In  the  different  accounts  of  the 
Hippopotamus  that  I  have  referred  to,  with  the  exception  of  that 
of  Gratiolet  and  of  Clark,  little  or  nothing  is  said  of  the  genito- 
urinary organs.  Daubenton^  devotes  a  few  lines  to  the  descrip- 
tion of  the  uterus  and  vagina,  but  his  specimen,  it  will  be  remem- 
bered, was  only  a  foetus.  Peters  ^  merely  alludes  to  the  mammae, 
the  penis,  etc.  In  Crisp's^  specimen,  which  was  a  male,  the  parts 
were  destroyed  to  such  an  extent  as  rendered  detailed  dissection 
impossible.  The  account  in  Gratiolet's  ^  work  is  really,  I  presume, 
due  to  Dr.  Alix,  as  that  anatomist  tells  us  in  the  preface,''  the 
death  of  a  young  Hippopotamus  born  at  the  Jardin  des  Plantes  a 
few  days  previously,  gave  him  the  opportunity  of  adding  some 
details  to  the  dissections  left  by  Gratiolet.  Alix's  description 
of  the  parts,  which  is  an  account  of  both  sexes,  is  excellent,  but 
unfortunately  is  unaccompanied  by  any  illustrations.  Clark's^ 
figure  of  the  uterus  and  vagina  is  imperfect,  but  his  description  is 
very  clear.  It  is  to  be  regretted  that  Garrod  ^  says  nothing  of  the 
genito-urinary  organs  of  the  male  animal  examined  by  him.     It 

1  Op.  cit ,  p.  58.  2  Op.  cit.,  p.  181.  ^  Op.  cit.,  608. 

*  Op.  cit.,  p.  396.  5  Op.  cit.,  p.  vi.  «  Op.  cit.,  p.  195. 

'  Op.  cit. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  139 

will  be  seen  from  the  aboA^e  that  the  genito-urinaiy  apparatus  in 
the  male  Hippopotamus  have  not  been  figured,  and  that  of  the 
female  onl}^  imperfectl}'  so,  while  the  description  of  Alix  is  based 
on  very  young  animals,  and  that  of  Clark  is  limited  to  the  female 
sex.  I  trust  that  the  following  brief  description  of  the  parts  as 
I  found  them  in  the  male  and  female,  with  the  accompanying 
figures  will  sufficiently  illustrate  what  is  wanting  in  the  accounts 
hitherto  given  of  the  animal. 

Genito-  TJjnnary  Organs  in  Male. — The  kidneys,  k  (Plate  XIV), 
measured  five  inches  in  length  and  were  distinctly  lobulated. 
About  ten  of  these  lobules  could  be  counted  on  each  face.  The 
ureters  were  7  inches  in  length,  and  opened  into  the  bladder  at 
the  angles  of  the  trigonum  vesicfe.  The  bladder,  6,  from  the 
highest  point  to  the  verumontanum  in  the  middle  line  measured 
9  inches.  There  was  no  sign  of  a  prostate  gland  or  utriculus. 
On  each  side,  however,  of  the  middle  line  below  the  verumontanum 
a  number  of  little  follicles  could  be  observed.  The  Cowperian 
glands,  c,  on  the  other  hand,  are  xevy  large,  being  almost  an  inch 
in  diameter ;  the  main  duct  was  well  developed  and  opened  into 
the  urethra  an  inch  below  the  gland.  A  considerable  amount  of  a 
viscous  humor  could  be  squeezed  out  of  the  gland  and  duct.  The 
muscular  fibres  covering  the  gland  no  doubt  produce  this  effect  in 
contracting.  The  distance  from  the  verumontanum  to  the  orifices 
of  the  Cowper's  ducts  measured  four  inches.  The  orifices  of  the 
ducts  were  concealed  by  a  little  fold  of  mucous  membrane.  Under 
this  fold  the  membrane  was  thrown  into  delicate  transverse  ridges. 
The  mucous  membrane  of  the  membranous  portion  of  the  urethra 
was  thrown  into  longitudinal  folds.  The  urethra  from  the  open- 
ings of  Cowper's  ducts  to  its  termination  in  the  glans  measured 
12  inches.  There  was  nothing  exceptional  in  reference  to  the 
corpus  spongiosum  or  the  corpora  cavernosa.  The  penis  meas- 
ured in  circumference  2  inches.  The  ischio  cavernous  and  bulbo 
urethral  muscles  were  well  developed.  The  sj-mmetricall}'  disposed 
retractor  muscles,  etc.,  of  the  penis  arising  from  the  posterior 
surface  of  the  rectum  pass  to  the  bulbous  portion  of  the  urethra, 
where,  becoming  tendinous,  they  are  continued  side  b}'  side  to  the 
base  of  the  glans  into  which  they  are  inserted.  The  glans  itself 
measured  in  circumference  b\  inches,  and  when  eA'erted  presents 
a  veiy  peculiar  appearance,  it  being  then  thrown  into  a  rosette 
which  consists  of  folds  arranged  somewhat  like  the  leaves  of  a 


140  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

book.     The  testicles,  t,  were  found  in  the  inguinal  canal,  midway 

between  the  internal  and  external  abdominal  rings.     There  was  a 

free  communication  between  the  cavity  of  the  peritoneum  and 

that  of  the  tunica  vaginalis  testis.     The  cremaster  muscle  was 

well  developed,  and  arose,  as  usual,  from  the  internal  oblique  and 

transversalis  muscles.     The   testicle   itself  measured  2^  inches. 

The  vas  deferens,  v,  measured  18  inches  from  the  epididymis  to 

the  point  where  it  is  joined  by  the  duct  of  the  seminal  vesicle. 

The  latter  was  about  an  inch  in  length,  but  not  much  developed. 

The  ejaculatory  ducts  open  into  the  urethra  at  the  verumontanum. 

Genito- Urinary  Organs  in  Female. — The  ovai-y,  o  (Plate  XV), 

in  the  Hippopotamus  is  elongated  and  flattened,  measuring  an 

inch  in  length  and  f  of  an  inch  in  breadth.     The  Fallopian  tube,/, 

8  inches  long  and  ^  of  an  inch  wide,  pursues  quite  a  flexuous 

course  towards  the  cornua  of  the  uterus,  cu,  into  which  it  opens 

by  a  very  small  aperture.     The  pavilion,  p,  while  not  fringed, 

consists  of  a  series  of  folds   radiating  from  the  central  opening. 

The  latter  readily  admitted  a  bristle.     The  cornua  of  the  uterus,  cu, 

measured  6^  inches  in  length  and  |  of  an  inch  in  breadth.     For  the 

last  two  inches  of  their  course  the  cornua  run  alongside  of  each 

other,  and  are  apparently  fused  together,  though  internall}^  they 

are  seen  to  be  still  quite  distinct.     Finally,  each  cornu  opens  by  a 

wide  mouth  into  a  common  cavity,  which  probably  represents  the 

body  of  the  uterus.     While  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  cornua 

is  thrown  into  longitudinal  folds,  that  of  the  body  of  the  uterus  is 

smooth.     What   is   usually   regarded   as   uterus   is   very   small, 

measuring  only  ^  an  inch  in  length  and  1;^  inches  in  width.     It 

appears  to  me,  however,  that  this  space  represents  only  a  part  of 

the  uterus ;  the  bod}'^  and  that  which  has  been  heretofore  described 

as  vagina,  is  really  an  elongated  cervix  uteri ;  this  measures  6 

inches  in  length  and  1  inch  in  width.     Its  mucous  membrane  was 

elevated  into  seventeen  folds,  c,  which  are  situated  transversely 

to  the  long  axis  of  the  vagina,  and  which  resemble  valvulfe  conni- 

ventes.     These  folds,  on  an  average,  were  |  of  an  inch  in  breadth 

and  I  inch  in  height,  and  are  subdivided  by  indentations.     Every 

other  fold,  however,  alternates  in  reference  to  the  part  where  it 

was  most  developed.     Thus,  the  first,  third,  fifth  folds,  etc.,  were 

thickest  in  the  middle,  fading  away  at  the  sides  into  the  walls  of 

the  vagina,  whereas  the  second,  fourth  and  sixth  folds,  etc.,  were 

thickest  at  the  sides  of  the  vagina,  fading  away  towards  the  middle. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  141 

These  folds  are  disposed  in  rather  a  spiral  manner,  and  are  so 
Olosely  set  together  and  developed  that  the  cavit};'  of  the  tube  is 
almost  obliterated.  It  is  difficult,  indeed,  to  conceive  how  the 
penis  can  introduce  itself  if  this  is  the  vagina,  the  rugosities  being 
capable  of  otfering  great  resistance.  The  folds,  however,  gradu- 
all}^  fade  away,  and  in  the  lower  four  inches  of  the  genital  tube 
the  mucous  membrane  is  smooth  or  slightly  folded  longitudinally. 
It  is  this  part  of  the  tube  which  appears  to  me  is  the  vagina.  It 
opens  into  the  genito-urinary  vestibule  by  a  distinct  aperture, 
through  which  a  probe  was  passed  without  difficulty.  According 
to  Gratiolet,^  thie  vagina  was  imperforate.  The  female  urethra,  6, 
is  about  an  inch  long,  and  is  closely  connected  with  the  lower 
part  of  the  vagina,  the  openings  of  the  two  tubes  into  the  genito- 
urinary vestibule  being  situated  almost  next  to  each  other.  Just 
in  front  of  the  opening  of  the  vagina  a  ridge  is  seen,  and  on  either 
side  of  this  ridge  there  ai'e  two  small  sinuses  in  which  the  orifices 
of  the  vulvar  vaginal  glands  open.  Externally,  the  vulva  appears  as 
a  circular  fleshj^mass,  14  inches  in  circumference,  surrounding  and 
leading  into  the  genito-urinary  vestibule.  There  is  no  appearance 
of  external  or  internal  labia,  and  a  perinseum  can  hardly  be  said  to 
exist,  the  rectum  lying  directly  against  the  vulva.  Within  the 
vestibule  there  is  quite  a  large  sinus,  s  (next  to  the  rectum). 
There  was  nothing  particularly  noticeable  about  the  clitoris,  cl, 
except  that  the  prepuce  was  very  well  developed. 

The  female  generative  apparatus  of  the  Hippopotamus  is  in 
every  respect  essentially  like  that  of  the  Peccary,  the  only  differ- 
ence being  in  the  relative  size  of  what  I  have  described  as  the 
body  and  neck  of  the  uterus.  The  bod}'-  of  the  uterus  in  the 
Peccary  being  relatively  larger  than  the  cervix.  The  peculiar 
disposition  of  the  mucous  membrane  in  folds  is  seen  in  the  cervix 
of  both  animals.  It  is  with  some  diffidence  that  I  have  ventured 
to  consider  as  cervix  the  part  of  the  genital  tube  usually  described 
as  vagina,  for  anatomists,  even  in  the  Peccary,  consider  the  rugose 
portion  of  the  tube  to  be  the  vagina.  Clark  ^  seems,  however,  to  have 
the  same  opinion  as  expressed  by  me,  as  to  the  homology  of  the 
parts.  The  two  teats  were  situated  in  the  inguinal  region,  and 
although  the  mammary  gland  was  but  little  developed  externally, 
on  section  the  milk-ducts  could  be  easilj^  recognized. 

'  Op.  cit.,  p.  401. 

^  Compare  op.  cit.,  p.  195. 


142 


PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF 


[1881. 


Brain. — When  the  study  of  the  structure  of  an  animal  is  limited 
to  the  investigation  of  its  adult  condition,  without  any  reference 
to  its  mode  of  development  or  regard  to  its  natural  affinities  with 
closely  allied  or  even  remote  species,  much  will  be  found  obscure, 
or  even  entirely  unintelligible  in  its  organization.  The  study 
of  the  brain  is  no  exception  to  this  general  rule.  Comparative 
anatomy  and  embryology  are,  indeed,  the  lamps  which  throw  light 
upon  the  darkness  of  cerebral  structure.  Taking  advantage  of 
the  methods  cultivated  with  such  success  bv  Owen,^  Leuret-  and 
Gratiolet,  Kreug,^  etc.,  let  us  begin  our  study  of  the  brain  of  the 
Hippopotamus  by  first  considering,  as  suggested  by  Garrod,*  so 
far  as  is  known,  the  general  type  of  the  artiodactyle  brain,  and 
then  ascertaining  the  amount  of  deviation  from  the  type  exhibited 
in  the  brain  of  the  different  genera.  Studied  in  this  wa}',  the  brain 
of  the  Hippopotamus  will  prove  far  more  interesting  and  instruc- 
tive than  if  merely  described  topographically. 

According  to  Kreug  the  simplest  kind  of  ungulate  brain  is  to 


be  seen  in  the  embryo  of  the  Sheep,  Ovis  aries.  Figs.  1,  2,  3,  give 
diagrammatically  surface,  side  and  mesial  views  of  the  hemisphere 
of  the  same.  On  looking  at  the  surface  view  (fig.  1),  there  will 
be  observed  to  the  right  of  the  great  longitudinal  fissure  the 
coronal  fissure,  co,  anteriorly,  and  the  lateral,  I,  posteriori}^,  and 
towards  the  side  the  supra-sylvian,  ss,  fissure  with  its  anterior, 
ascending,  descending,  and  posterior  branches.  In  addition  to 
these  fissures  may  be  seen  upon  the  side  view  (fig.  2),  the  sylvian 
fissure,  sac,  running  transversely  into  the  rhinal  fissures,  rh, 
the  diagonal,  d,  and   the  postica,  p.     The  calloso  marginal,  sp, 

1  Com.  Anati  of  Vertebrates,  vol.  iii,  p.  115. 
^  Anatomie  Comparee  du  Systeme  Nerveux. 
^  Zeit.  fiir  wiss.  Zoologie,  Leipzig,  1878.    Band  31. 
*  Op.  cit.,  p.  12. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  143 

genial,  g,  and  liippocampal,  h,  are  seen  on  the  mesial  surface 
(fig.  .3).  Let  us  suppose,  now,  that  that  the  calloso  marginal  from 
the  mesial  surface  and  the  ascending  branch  of  the  supra-sylvian 
blend  with  the  coronal  and  that  at  the  same  time,  while  the  des- 
cending branch  of  the  supra-sylvian  lengthens,  the  posterior  limit 
shortens,  we  shall  transform  the  typical  ungulate  brain  into  that 
of  the  Pig,  Sus  scrofa.  On  the  other  hand,  should  the  posterior 
branch  of  the  supra-sylvian  lengthen  while  the  descending  branch 
shortens,  the  result  will  be  the  brain  of  the  Cotylophora.  The 
Peccary,  Dicotyles,  dilfers  from  the  Pig  in  that  the  calloso  mar- 
ginal only  joins  the  coronal,  and  that  often  at  least,  the  des- 
cending branch  of  the  supra-sylvian  is  wanting.  In  most  of  the 
Cervidffi  the  ascending  limit  of  the  supra-s^dvian  runs  into  coronal. 
From  this  brief  resume  it  will  be  seen  that  fundamentall}^  the 
brain  is  constructed  on  the  same  pattern  in  the  Pig,  Peccary,  Sheep, 
Camel,  Giraffe,  Deer,  etc. 

Let  us  now  try  to  show  that  the  brain  of  the  Hippopotamus 
does  not  essentially  differ  from  the  tj^picai  ungulate  brain  to  a 
greater  extent  than  that  of  the  animals  just  referred  to.  The 
most  striking  feature  of  the  brain  of  the  Hippopotamus,  viewed 
from  its  upper  surface,  is  the  deep  fissure,  I  co  (PL  XVI),  that 
runs  from  the  posterior  to  the  anterior  part  of  the  brain,  and 
rather  in  an  oblique  direction,  being  situated  nearer  the  great 
longitudinal  fissure  anteriorly  than  posteriorly.  This  fissure 
serves  to  divide  the  upper  surface  of  the  hemisphere  into  two 
parts,  very  much  as  the  interparietal  fissure  does  in  man ;  compared 
with  the  type  of  the  ungulate  brain,  this  fissure  is  evidently  due, 
as  suggested  by  Garrod,^  to  the  lateral  and  coronal  fissures  running 
into  eacli  other,  wliich  I  find  they  almost  do  in  the  Camel,  Giraffe, 
Deer  and  Ox.  On  the  right  side  of  the  Hippopotamus'  brain 
examined  by  me,  this  fissure  runs  farther  forward  than  on  the 
left.  In  the  ungulate  brain  there  are  usually  found  between  the 
lateral  fissure,  that  is,  the  posterior  part  of  the  fissure  just  de- 
scribed, and  the  great  longitudinal  fissure,  one  or  two  secondary 
longitudinal  fissures.  On  the  left  side  of  the  brain  in  the  Hippo- 
potamus a  secondary  longitudinal  fissure  may  be  seen,  extending 
forward  to  about  the  usual  extent,  but  on  the  right  side  this,  m  I 
(PL  XY I),  runs  forward  anteriorly  until  it  passes  between  the  coro- 
nal and  the  great  longitudinal  fissures.    In  this  respect  my  specimen 

^  Op.  cit.,  p.  15. 


144  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

differs  from  that  figured  by  Garrod.'  In  the  brains  of  the  Llama 
and  Giraffe  these  secondary  longitudinal  fissures  are  often  found 
both  anteriorly'  and  posteriorly,  and  are  almost  continuous  with 
each  other ;  on  the  other  hand,  in  the  brain  of  the  Peccary  used 
by  me  for  comparison,  the  secondar}-  longitudinal  fissure,  usually 
found  posteriorly,  is  absent.  The  sylvian  fissure  in  my  Hippo- 
potamus is  quite  evident,  and  within  it  I  noticed  a  rudimentary 
island  of  Reil.  This  fissure  on  the  right  side  differs  from  that  de- 
scribed by  Garrod,  in  that  it  is  quite  distinct  from  the  Rhinal 
fissure,  there  is,  however,  posteriorly  a  little  connecting  branch 
between  the  two.  I  identified,  as  Garrod,^  on  the  left  side  of  the 
brain  the  supra-sylvian  fissure  with  its  branches,  but  these  were 
not  well  matched  on  the  right  side.  On  the  mesial  surface  the 
calloso  marginal  sent  up  a  fissure  which  nearly  reached  the  latiro 
coronal  and  terminated  in  the  genial. 

As  is  usuall}'  the  case  in  the  artiodactyle,  there  was  a  secondary 
fissure  between  the  corpus  callosum  and  the  calloso  marginal. 
The  minor  convolutions  of  the  brain  of  the  Hippopotamus  are  not 
very  numerous.  Indeed,  the  brain  is  much  less  convulated  than 
those  of  the  Giraffe,  Llama,  or  even  the  Peccary,  used  by  me  for 
comparison ;  in  the  general  form  of  its  hemispheres  the  brain  of 
the  Hippopotamus  resembled  that  of  the  Giraffe ;  the  cerebellum, 
however,  differed  from  that  of  the  Giraffe,  Peccary,  and  other 
artiodactyles  in  that  its  largest  diameter  was  transverse,  whereas, 
in  the  animals  just  mentioned,  the  largest  diameter  of  the  cere- 
bellum was  antero  posterior ;  the  latter,  however,  seems  to  be  the 
case  in  the  young  Hippopotamus,  at  least  judging  from  Gratio- 
let's  3  figure.  In  the  adult  the  cerebellum  resembled  more  that  of 
the  Manatee  than  that  of  the  Artiodactyle.  As  the  desoiption 
and  figures  of  the  brain  of  the  Hippopotamus  given  by  Gratiolet  ^ 
and  Garrod  *  are  limited  to  the  surface,  it  appeared  to  me  ver}' 
desirable  that  the  interior  of  the  ventricle  should  be  exposed  and 
figured.  On  making  the  section,  I  found  a  septum  lucidum.  The 
lateral  ventricle  was  very  large,  recalling  to  my  mind  that  of  the 
Manatee,  dissected  by  me  some  years  since.  According  to  Macal- 
ester's  figure  the  ventricle  is  also  large  in  Choeropsis.     The  general 

1  Op.  cit.,  Plate  III,  fig.  1.  ^  Qp.  cit.,  Plate  IV,  fig.  3. 

3  Op.  cit.,  fig.  2,  PI.  XII.  *  Op.  cit.,.  p,  317,  PI.  XII. 

5  Op.  cit.,  p.  U,  figs.  1,  2,  PI.  3;  figs.  1,  2,  3,  PI.  4. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  145 

appearance  and  size  of  the  corpus  striatum,  .s,  taenia,  thalamus 
opticus,  0,  and  hippocampus  major,  when  compared  side  b}^  side 
with  the  corresponding  parts  of  the  Manatee,  resembled  these 
more  than  the}'  did  those  of  the  Giraffe,  Llama,  Peccar3\  etc.  Of 
the  corpora  quadrigemina  in  the  Hippopotamus,  the  testes,  ^, 
were  broader  than  the  nates,  n,  and  less  rounded  in  shape.  ^ 

If  the  above  description  of  the  brain  of  the  Hippopotamus  be 
correct,  it  follows  that  the  general  form  of  its  hemispheres,  the 
arrangement  of  its  fissures,  etc.,  deviate  but  little  from  the  t3'pical 
ungulate  brain,  while  the  capaciousness  of  its  ventricles,  the  form 
of  its  basal  ganglia,  and  the  cerebellum,  resemble  rather  those  of 
the  brain  of  the  Manatee. 

Sweat  Glands. — As  is  well  known,  when  the  Hippopotamus 
comes  out  of  the  water  there  exudes  from  tlie  slcin  a  pinkish, 
reddish  secretion,  which  quicldy  dries  up  and  does  not  reappear 
until  the  animal  comes  out  of  the  water  again.  This  secretion 
has  probably  given  rise  to  the  name  blood-sweating  Behemoth, 
bj'^  wliich  the  Hippopotamus  is  often  known  among  showmen. 
This  secretion  was  first  examined  by  Tomes, ^  who  stated  that  it 
consisted  of  a  transparent  fluid  containing  colorless  and  red- 
colored  corpuscles,  the  color  of  the  secretion  being  due  to  the 
solution  of  the  latter.  Crisp ^  examined  and  figured  the  glands 
supposed  to  produce  this  secretion.  It  will  be  remembered  that 
his  specimen  was  burnt  to  death,  and  it  was  to  be  expected,  there- 
fore, that  the  skin  was  affected.  For  this  reason  I  requested  that 
admirable  microscopist,  Dr.  J.  Gibbons  Hunt,  to  examine  the  skin 
of  my  Hippopotamus,  and  I  give  his  result  in  his  own  words  : 

"  I  put  in  a  camera  lucida  slietch  of  the  blood-gland  (fig.  4) 
of  the  Hippopotamus  magnified  25  diameters.  It  has  no  limiting 
membrane,  but  bioplasts  or  nuclei  of  the  usual  apparent  form 
make  up  the  entire  gland.  In  the  centre  these  gland-cells  are  loosely 
arranged,  thus  allowing  the  contents  to  escape,  perhaps,  like  com- 
mon sweat  glands  do,  in  which,  similarly,  there  is  no  external  or 
internal  membrane." 

The  contents  of  the  gland-cells  loosel}'  arranged  in  tiie  centre 
are  probabl}"  the  corpuscle,  the  solution  of  which,  according  to 

^  Peters  gives  in  Moiiatsberichte  of  Berlin  Acad.,  1854,  a  brief  description 
of  the  brain  of  the  Hippopotamus,  but  unfortunately  not  ilhistrated. 
2  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  of  London,  1850. 
■^  Op.  cit.,  p.  603. 
11 


14G 


PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF 


[1881. 


Tomes,  gives  rise  to  the  color.     The  length  of  the  blood  gland 
measured  -^^  of  an  inch,  in  width  the  :^^  of  an  inch,  the  length'of 

the  duct  -^Q  of  an  inch. 
In  many  parts  of  the  skin 
these  glands  are  absent, 
and  when  present  are  situ- 
ated about  the  ^^  of  an 
inch  below  the  surface, 

A  most  striking  feature 
in  the  skin  of  the  Hippo- 
potamus is  the  great  de- 
velopment of  the  fibrous 
tissue  of  the  corium.  This 
is  disposed  in  great  bands, 
which  are  so  interwoven 
with  each  other  as  to  give 
the  appearance  of  a  fabric. 
Rejections. — In  conclu- 
ding these  observations, 
it  may  not  appear  super- 
fluous to  briefly  consider 
what  appears  to  me  to  be 
the  natural  affinities  of  the  Hippopotamus  with  the  Ungulata  or 
other  mammalia.  In  observing  the  Manatee  that  lived  for  several 
months  in  the  Philadelphia  Zoological  Garden,  the  manner  in 
which  it  rose  to  the  surface  of  the  water  to  breathe  reminded  me 
often  of  the  Hippopotami  that  I  watched  in  the  Zoological 
Garden  of  London  and  the  Jardin  des  Plantes  in  Paris.  The 
slow  way  in  which  the  animals  rise  to  the  surface,  the  motionless 
pose  of  the  almost  sunken  body,  the  nostrils  often  just  appearing 
at  the  surface,  etc.,  are  very  much  alike  in  both  animals.  In 
speaking  of  the  alimentary  canal,  I  called  attention  to  the  stomach 
of  the  Manatee  representing  the  stomach  of  the  Hippopotamus  in 
an  atrophied  condition,  while,  on  the  other  hand,  the  stomach  of 
the  Hippopotamus  is  intermediate  between  the  Peccary  and  the 
Ruminants.  As  regards  the  heart,  it  will  be  remembered,  that  in 
the  3"oung  Hippopotamus,  at  least,  it  is  bifid,  resembling  in  tliis 
respect  that  of  the  Manatee.  The  female  generative  apparatus  of 
the  Peccary  and  Hippopotamus  are  almost  identical.  Again,  the 
sexual  vesicles  are  found  iai  both  Hippopotamus  and  Manatee. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  141 

While  the  placenta  does  not  appear  to  me  to  have  the  importance 
attached  to  it  by  some  authors  as  a  guide  in  determining  the 
affinities  of  animals,  it  is  proper  to  mention  in  this  connection  that 
according  to  Milne  Edwards^  and  Garrod^  the  placenta  of  the 
Hippopotamus  is  diffuse  and  appears  to  be  non-deciduous,  and  such 
is  the  case,  according  to  Harting,^  in  the  Dugong,*  and  therefore 
in  the  Manatee,  probably,  for  as  a  matter  of  fact  the  placentation 
of  the  Manatee  is  unknown. 

While  the  brain  of  the  Hippopotamus  appears  to  be  a  modifi- 
cation of  a  type  common  to  the  Pig,  Peccary,  Sheep,  Ox,  Giraffe, 
etc.,  it  has  also,  it  seems  to  me,  affinities  with  that  of  the  Manatee. 
In  a  word,  then,  beginning  with  the  Pig,  we  pass  by  an  easy  transi- 
tion to  the  Peccar}^,  which  leads  to  the  Hippopotamus,  and  thence, 
in  diverging  lines,  to  the  Ruminautia  on  the  one  hand,  and  the 
Manatee  on  the  other.  Paleontologists  have  not  discovered  a 
form  which  bridges  over  the  gap  between  the  Hippopotamus  and 
the  Manatee,  but  it  will  be  remembered  that  certain  fossil  bones, 
considei'ed  by  Cuvier^  to  have  belonged  to  an  extinct  species  of 
Hippopotamus,  H.  medius,  are  regarded  by  Gei'V'ais"  as  the  remains 
of  the  Halitherium  fossile,  a.n  extinct  Sirenean,  of  which  order  the 
Manatee  is  a  living  representative.  According  to  Prof.  Owen,^ 
the  molar  teeth  also,  both  in  the  Halitherium,  and  the  Felsino- 
therium,^  another  Sirenean,  are  constructed  on  the  same  pattern 

1  Physiologie,  Tome  9,  p.  56. 

2  Proceed.  Zool.  Soc,  1873,  p.  821. 

■■'  Tijdschrift  der  Nederlandsche  Dlerkundige  Vereenigung,  Deel  iv,  1879, 
p.  1. 

*  Dr.  Hartung,  in  his  very  valuable  paper  on  the  placenta  of  the  Dugong, 
just  refeiTed  to,  describes  and  figures  bodies  attached  to  the  blood-vessels 
resernbling.  apparently,  very  much  those  of  the  placenta  of  the  Elephant. 
His  figure  (7)  shows  that  the  cavity  of  the  vessel  communicates  with  that 
of  the  body  attached  to  it.  Dr.  Harting  inquires  whether  such  is  the  case 
in  the  Elephant.  I  will  state  in  reply,  that  neither  Dr.  J.  Gibbons  Hunt 
nor  myself  found  any  such  continuity  between  the  vessel  and  body  in  the 
placenta  of  the  Elephant,  These  oval  bodies  in  the  Elephant  are  not  sacs 
or  cavities,  the  little  branches  from  the  main  vessel  only  ramify  through 
their  substance.  There  seem?,  then,  to  be  an  essential  difference  between 
the  oval  bodies  in  the  placenta  of  the  Elephant  and  in  that  of  the  Dugong. 

^  Ossemens  Fossiles,  II,  p.  492. 
^  Paleontologie  Francaise,  p.  143. 
"  Geological  Magazine,  1875,  p.  423. 

*  De  Zigno,  Sopra  un  nuovo  suienio  fossile.  Reale  Acad,  dei  Lincei, 
1877-78. 


148  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

as  those  of  the  Hippopotamus.  It  is  proper  to  mention,  however, 
that  the  same  distinguished  observer  considers  the  teeth  of  the 
Manatee  and  the  Prorastomus^  another  extinct  Sirenean,  to  be 
rather  allied  to  those  of  the  Tapir  and  Lophiodon,  but  this  quali- 
fication does  not  really  invalidate  the  supposed  affinities  between 
the  Sirenea  and  the  Hippopotamus.  For  the  Artiodactyla  and 
Perisodactyla  are  probably  offshoots  of  a  common  stock,  and 
hence  we  may  expect  to  find  in  these  two  groups  certain  characters 
common  to  both,  inherited  from  their  Lophiodon  and  Ooryphiodon- 
like  ancestors.  The  affinities  of  the  teeth  of  the  Manatee  with 
those  of  the  Tapir — the  first  an  embryonic  Artiodactyle,  the 
second  a  generalized  Perisodactyle — would  be  examples  of  the 
above  view.  I  do  not  mean  to  imply  that  the  Manatee  has  neces- 
sarily descended  directly  from  the  Hippopotamus,  though  extinct 
intermediate  forms  may  in  the  future  show  this  to  be  so,  for 
possibly  they  may  be  the  descendants  of  a  common  ancestor.  To 
many  such  speculations  may  appear  mere  waste  of  time,  we  being 
unable,  from  the  nature  of  the  case,  to  experimentally  prove  or 
disprove  the  truth  of  the  hypothesis  advanced.  It  seems  to  me, 
however,  that  the  only  explanation  of  the  structure  of  the  living 
forms  and  of  the  petrified  remains  of  the  animals  referred  to  in 
these  observations  is  the  hypothesis  of  there  being  some  generic 
connection  between  them. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP  PHILADELPHIA.  149 


June  14. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-one  persons  present. 

A  paper  entited  "  Notes  on  the  Tertiary  Geology  of  the  South- 
ern United  States,"  by  Angelo  Heilprin,  was  presented  for  pub- 
lication. 

The  death  of  Baron  Maximilien  de  Chaudoir,  a  correspondent, 
was  announced. 

Some  new  Genera  of  Fresh  Water  Sponges — Mr.  E.  Potts  re- 
ferred to  a  recent  paper  by  H.  J.  Carter,  F.  R.  S.,  (Ann.  Mag. 
Nat.  Hist.,  Feb.  1881,)  entitled,  "  The  History  and  Classification 
of  the  Known  Species  of  SjMngilla,^^  in  which  the  writer  has  dis- 
tributed the  species,  heretofore  grouped  under  one  generic  title, 
among  five  genera,  founded  upon  the  differences  in  form  and  ar- 
rangement of  the  spiculse  surrounding  the  statospheres.  He 
spoke  of  the  arrangement  as  a  timely  step  well  taken  in  ad- 
vance, in  the  history  of  this  branch  of  the  animal  kingdom. 

He  believed  that  the  characteristics  of  the  statospheres  and 
their  spiculaB  were  those  which  furnished  the  only  reliable  dis- 
tinctions among  fresli  water  sponges  ;  but  the  recent  discovery  of 
novel  forms  in  American  waters  had  already  required  an  increase 
in  the  number  of  genera  and  seemed  to  make  it  desirable  to 
modif}^  the  terms  of  some  of  those  already  established. 

In  illustration  he  referred  to  several  forms  observed  in  this 
neighborhood,  resembling  in  many  points  the  English  Spongilla 
lacustris,  (taken  as  a  type  of  the  genus  Spongilla  in  the  new  ar- 
rangement), in  which,  however,  the  spiculae  were  not  acerate,  but 
irregular  in  shape  ;  were  not  placed  "  tangentially "  upon  the 
surface ;  or  were  altogether  wanting.  Specific  names  were  suggested 
for  these,  but  were  held  under  ad\'isenient,  awaiting  a  decision  as 
to  whether  it  would  be  better  to  create  new  genera  for  them  or  to 
enlarge  the  scope  of  those  alread}^  defined  b^^  Dr.  Carter. 

The  two  new  genera  already  decided  upon  were  then  described. 
Under  the  generic  head  Ileyenia,  Dr.  Carter  has  grouped  those 
species,  in  which  the  statosphere  is  surrounded  b}^  birotulate 
spiculae,  radiateh'  arranged  ;  one  disk  resting  upon  the  surface. 
Throughout  the  genus  as  alread^y  constituted,  the  shafts  of  these 
spicules  are  of  a  nearly  uniform  length  ;  and  the  outer  disks  nearly 
or  quite  touching  at  their  edges  give  the  appearance  of  a  second 
coat  to  the  statosphere.  In  two  species,  however,  observed 
by  Mr.  Potts  last  summer,  this  uniform  series  was  broken  by 
another,  of  about  double  their  length,  much  fewer  in  number, 
somewhat   regularly   arranged,   interspersed   among  them.      He 


150  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

proposed  to  group  these  under  the  genus  Heteromeyeina,  as  H. 
argyroypertna  and  H.  7-tpens:  suggesting  that  the  latter  may  pos- 
sibly be  the  same  as  Bowerbank's  Sf^wgiUa.  now  Jfeyejiia  Bailei/i. 

Another  nevr  genus  had  been  formed  and  dedicated  to  Dr. 
Carter  under  the"  name  Carterella.  to  include  the  singular  form 
described  by  the  sjvaker  last  \-ear  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  Acad- 
emy, and  then  called  Spongilla  tentoifperma  :  changed  later  to 
S.  tenosperma.  The  distinguishing  peculiarity  of  this  genus  is 
that  the  tube  surrovmding  the  foramen  of  the  statosphere  is 
elonirated  and  diyides  into  :2-5  long,  curling  or  t\nsted  tendrils  by 
means  of  which  during  the  winter  the  statosphere  remains  attached 
to  the  stems  or  rootS  upon  which  the  sponge  had  grown.  This 
will  now  be  Carterella  tenosperma. 

A.  second  species  has  been  added  to  this  genus,  the  discoyery 
of  Professor  Kellicott  and  Mr.  Henry  MUls.  of  Buffalo,  under  the 
n.ame  of  Carterella  tubisp>erma.  In  this,  the  tube  is  much  longer 
than  in  any  sponge  heretofore  described,  terminating  in  seyeral 
strag:gling^  rather  weak  tentacles  much  shorter  than  in  the  former 
species.  The  birotulate  spicul*  in  the  two  forms  are  quite  differ- 
ent, and  the  species  are  unquestionably  distinct. 


JuN-B  -21. 
The  President.  Dr.  Ruschexbergee.  in  the  chair. 
Nineteen  persons  present. 


JrxE  28. 

The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberges,  in  the  chair. 

Fifteen  persons  present. 

Jerome  Gray  was  elected  a  member. 

M.  S.  Bebb,  of  Rockport,  111.,  and  Chas.  S.  Sargent,  of  Brook- 
line.  Mass..  were  elected  correspondents. 
The  following  was  ordered  to  be  printed  : 


1881.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA, 


151 


N0TE3  ON  THE  TERTIARY  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  SOUTHERN  UNITED  STATES. 
BY    ANOELO   HEILPRIN. 

In  the  following  notes  the  author  makes  no  pretense  at  unravel- 
ling the  many  knotty  points  connected  with  the  Tertiary  geology 
of  the  southern  United  States;  he  has  merely  brought  together 
such  facts,  old  and  new,  and  certain  conclusions  drawn  from  these 
facts,  as  may  possibly  serve  to  facilitate  the  inquiry  into  this  as 
yet  imperfectly  known  branch  of  American  geological  history.  It 
is  with  this  view  of  rendering  the  material  treating  of  the  subject 
more  accessible  to  the  working  geologist  that  some  of  the  pub- 
lished sections  are  here  reproduced. 

A  convenient  starting-point  in  Eocene  stratigraphy  is  afforded 
by  the  famous  bluff  exposed  on  the  Alabama  River  near  Claiborne, 
Ala.,  and  which  has  yielded  the  fossils  known  to  geologists  and 
paleontologists  as  those  characteristic  of  the  "  Claiborne  Group." 

Section  of  Claiborne  Bluff. — Probably  the  most  trustworthy 
section  of  this  bluff  is  that  afforded  by  Tuomey  ("  First  Biennial 
Report  of  the  Geology  of  Alabama,"  1850,  p.  152),  as  follows  : 


9 

Red  sand,  loam,  and  pebbles. 

Feet. 
30 

f 

Mottled  clay. 

8 

e 

Limestone,  with  grains  of  green  sand. 

54 

d 

Ferruginous  sand  ;  numerous  fossils. 

c 

Whitisli  limestone. 

62 

b 

Bed  of  clay  15  feet  thick,  with  seam  of  limestone  on  top. 

15 

Note.  —Tuomey  does  not  give  the  thickness  of  bed  "(Z,"  but  it  appears 
from  the  concurrent  statements  of  different  observers  to  be  about  17  feet. 
The  total  height  of  the  bluff  above  the  Alabama  River  would  therefore 
appear  to  be  in  the  neighborhood  of  190  feet. 


152  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

The  measurements  and  descriptions  of  Conrad  ("  Fossil  Shells 
of  the  Tertiary-  Formations,"  1833,  p    32  ;    Proceedings  of  the 
National  Institution,  1841.  p.   It4),  Hale    ("Geology  of  South 
Alabama,"  American  Journal  of  Science,  new  ser.,  YI,  p.  354), 
and  Lyell  (Journal  of  the   Geological  Society,  lY,  p.  10,  et  seq.) 
do  not  differ  very  essentially  from  the  data  given  by  Tuomey. 
The  arenaceous  bed  "  rf,"  about  80  feet  above  water  level,  has 
^aelded  the  vast  majority  of  the  fossils  for  which  the  locality  is 
famous,  and  is  that  which  has  been  identified  as  the  equivalent  of 
the  "  Calcaire  Grossier  "  (Upper  Eocene)  of  France  (et  conseq., 
Bruxellian  of  Belgium,  and   Bartonian  of  England).     To   what 
extent  the  deposits  either  below  or  above  this  bed  can  be  cor- 
related with  the  remaining  deposits  of  the  Paris  or  London  series 
has  not  yet  been  determined  ;  nor  has  it  yet  been  conclusively 
shown  what  exact  portion  of  the  American  Eocene  formation  is 
represented  in  this  Claiborne  exposure.     Although  formerly  con- 
sidered to  be  near  the  base  of  the  system,  there  are  now  verj^ 
strong  grounds  for  concluding  that  these  beds  are  underlaid  bj' 
older  Eocene  strata  having  a  thickness  of  at  least  200  feet,  and 
possibly  even  much  more.     The  age  of  the  limestone  bed  "  e," 
although  perhaps  the  character  of  its  contained  fossils  does  not 
permit  absolute  determination,  is  in  all  probabilit^y  Jacksonian — 
at  least  in  part — and  will  doubtless  be  found  to  correspond  with  a 
portion  of  tlie  bluff  exposed  at  St.  Stephen's  on  the  Tombigbee 
River,  about  thirty  miles  almost  due  west  of  Claiborne.     At  any 
rate,  a  portion  of  the  white,  or  so-called  "rotten"  limestone  im- 
mediately west  of  Claiborne  has  been  found  to  contain  several  of 
the  characteristic  fossils  of  the  Jackson  group,  and  these  asso- 
ciated with  the  remains  of  Zeuglodon ;   there  is,  therefore,  no 
doubt  as  to  the  age  of  at  least  this  portion  of  the  white  limestone, 
nor  can  there  be  any  reasonable  doubt  as  to  the  continuity  existing 
between  these  deposits  and  the  similar  ones  exposed  on  Claiborne 
bluff. 

Section  on  Bashia  Creek,  Clarke  Co.,  Ala. — Probably  the  section 
representing  the  oldest  Eocene  deposits  of  the  State  of  Alabama 
is  that  exposed  on  Bashia  Creek,  Clarke  Co.,  and  detailed  by 
Toumey  in  his  report  on  the  geology  of  the  State  (First  Biennial 
report,  p.  145) : 


1881.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


153 


1 

2 
3 
4 
5 
6 

Hard  Limestone. 

4  feet. 

Marl,  highly  fossiliferous. 

25  feet. 

Blue  sand. 

Variable. 

Lignite  and  clay. 

6  feet. 

Laminated  clay,  sand,  and  mud. 

Thickness  undetermined. 

Lignite, 

do.                do. 

Note. — Beds  5  and  6  do  not  properly  belong  to  the  section,  but  "repre- 
sent beds  seen  on  another  part  of  the  stream  below  the  preceding  ' '  (Tuo- 
mey,  loc.  cit,,  p.  146). 

Beds  corresponding  to  J^o.  "  2  "  of  the  above  section  are  like- 
wise exposed  on  Cave  and  Knight's  branches,  tributaries  of 
Bashia  Creek,  and  have  been  shown  b^'  Dr.  Eugene  A.  Smith  to 
underly  the  base  of  the  "  Buhrstone  "  proper  by  nearly  (if  not 
more  than)  200  feet  (Heilprin,  "  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sciences  of 
Philadelphia,"  1881,  p.  369).  The  relations  of  these  various  beds 
will  be  best  understood  by  a  reference  to  the  sections  exposed  on 
the  Tombigbee  River. 

Sections  on  the  Tombigbee  Biver. — At  Wood's  Bluflf,  near  the 
mouth  of  Bashia  Creek,  we  have  the  following  exposure  :  ^ 


No. 

7 

Orange  sand,  or  stratified  drift. 

Feet. 
10-20 

6 

Grayish  or  greenish  laminated  clays,  colored  brown  by 
iron. 

10 

5 

Ledge  of  bluish  or  greenish  sand,  fossiliferous— capped 
by  a  ledge  of  hard  nodules. 

3 

4 

Bluish  laminated  clay,  with  few  fossils. 

5 

3 

,  Indurated  greenish   sand,  full  of  the  same  shells  as 
marl  bed  No.  2. 

3 

2 

1 

Greensand  marl,  quite  soft,  and  full  of  shells. 

3 

Indurated   greensand  with   shells,  and   a  stratum  of 
oyster  shells  at  watei"'s  edge— said  to  extend  10  feet 
further  down. 

10-15 

^  I  am  indebted  to  the  kindness  of  Dr.  Eugene  A.  Smith,  State  Geologist 
of  Alabama,  for  the  use  of  this  heretofore  unpublished  section. 


lo4  VHOOKKlMNiiS   OF    TllK    AOAPKMY    OP  [ISSl. 

IhhI  No.  i  of  the  invcoiiing-  sootiou  is  oonsidercil  by  Pr.  Smith 
to  bo  most  closely  rehited  in  the  ohnriieter  of  its  fossil  remains  to 
the  fossiliferons  strata  exi^osed  on  Cave  and  Knight's  branches, 
and  it  is  therotiMv  not  unlikely  that  the  series  l-o  corresponds  in 
the  main  \Yith  No.  -  of  Tuomey 's  Bashia  section.  The  basal  lignite 
would  then  probably  be  found  to  underly  the  lowest  stratum 
exhibited  at  the  Bluti*  (Heilpriii,  loc.  cit.,  p.  3ti7-S\  Bed  No.  6 
(Wood's  Blutf  section "i  can  be  traced  down  the  river  for  a  distance 
of  two  to  three  miles,  when  it  dips  beneath  the  water's  level. 
Somewhat  below  this  point,  and  beyond  the  mouth  of  Witch 
Creek,  the  stratigraphieal  relation  of  the  dili'erent  beds  is  beauti- 
fully exhibited  in  a  prominent  clitl  i^"  White  Blutf  "^,  rising  from 
250  to  275  feet  above  the  river.  The  upper  portion  of  this  blutl" 
is  constituted  by  the  characteristic  siliceous  clay-stones  and  silici- 
fied  shell  deposits  of  the  southern  '' Buhrstone  "  formation,  which 
make  up  fully  100  feet  of  the  vertical  height.  Laminated  lignitic 
clays  (bearing  numerous  leaf  impressions),  with  occasional  inter- 
calated beds  of  pure  lignite,  enter  mairly  into  the  composition  of 
the  intermediate  portion,  /.  e.,  from  the  water's  level  to  the  base 
of  the  buhrstone  above  mentioned.  Allowing  a  uniform  southerly 
dip  of  10  feet  to  the  mile,  which  appears  to  be  consistent  with 
obtained  data,  it  is  manifest  that  at  this  point  the  lower  fossiliferons 
strata  exposed  at  Wood's  Blutf  (and  consequently,  the  equivalent 
deposits  on  Bashia  Creek  and  its  tributaries.  Cave  and  Knight's 
branches)  must  lie  from  175  to  200  feet  below  the  base  of  the 
siliceous  mass  constituting  the  true  buhrstone  ;  or,  in  other  words. 
we  have  here  a  series  of  deposits  aggregating  about  300  feet  in 
thickness,  which  can  be  shown  to  be  of  an  age  anterior  to  the  deposi- 
tions of  the  Claiborne  fossiliferons  sands.  At  Baker's  Blutf,  a  fcAv 
miles  above  St.  Stephen's  (which  is  situated  about  twenty-eight 
miles  south  of  Wood's  Bluif ).  the  buhrstone,  according  to  Tuomej', 
appears  in  a  vertical  escarpment  rising  only  50  feet  above  the 
water,  a  low  height  perfectly  in  accordance  with  the  loss  occa- 
sioned by  the  general  dip  extending  over  nearly  twenty  miles. 
At  this  point,  moreover,  and  occupying  a  position  above  the 
buhrstone.  Tuomey  yloc.  ej7.,p.  14S)  identities  a  bed  of  green  sand 
(8  feet  in  thickness)  as  the  equivalent  of  the  Claiborne  fossilifer- 
ons sands  "  d  "  of  his  section),  and  containing  numerous  fossils 
identical  with  those  foimd  at  Claiborne.  Still  further  south,  and 
occupying  a  considerably  lower  level,  the  same  bed  is  described 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  1.55 

as  having  an  extent  of  12  feet,  and  immediately  above  St.  Ste- 
phen's, was  seen  to  dip  beneath  the  water's  edge.  At  this  last 
locality  we  have  a  beautiful  exhibit  of  what  has  generally  been 
designated  by  the  name  of"  White  Limestone."' 

There  can  be  not  the  least  doubt,  however,  that  this  "  White 
Limestone,"  which  has  most  frequently  been  taken  to  represent 
strata  of  Yicksburg  age,  is  in  reality,  as  has  been  insisted  upon  by 
Winchell  (Proceedings  of  the  American  Association,  1850,  Part  11, 
p.  85),  a  combination  of  strata  belonging  to  two  distinct  (at  least, 
as  now  recognized)  groups  of  deposits.  The  lower  moiety, 
dipping  into  the  river,  and  resting  upon  the  subjacent  Claiborne 
sands  '  Tuorne}',  loc.  cit.,  p.  157  ;  Lyell,  Journal  Cieol.  Soc,  Lon- 
don, IV,  p.  15  ;  Hale,  A.  J.  Science,  new  ser.,  VI,  p.  359;  is  the 
true  "  White  Limestone,"  an  exponent  of  the  Jacksonian  group 
of  deposits,  as  may  be  inferred  from  its  position,  and  the  charac- 
ter of  its  contained  fossils,^  Moreover,  were  it  otherwise  the 
case,  it  would  have  been  very  dilficult  to  explain  the  total  disap- 
pearance over  a  distance  of  only  thirty  miles  (and  with  but  ex- 
ceedingly moderate  dip)  of  the  equivalent  beds  exposed  on  the 
Alabama  River  at  Claiborne.  The  upper  moiety,  on  the  other 
hand,  is  a  portion  of  the  well  known  Orbitoide  (Vicksburg  or 
Oligocene)  rock,  and  is  that  which  alone  contains  specimens  of 
Orhitoides  Mantelli  (Winchell,  loc.  cit.,  p.  85). 

From  the  data  herewith  presented,  a  section  of  tiie  Tertiary 
strata  traced  along  the  Tombighee  River  from  Wood's  Bluff  to 
St.  Stephen's,  may  probably,  with  considerable  approach  to  truth, 
be  constructed  as  follows : 

'  I  have  been  unable  to  discover  the  exact  height  of  this  bluff.  Neither 
Lyell  nor  Toumey  mentions  it ;  Conrad,  in  the  appendix  to  Morton's  "  .'Sy- 
nopsis" (p.  23),  states  it  is  about  100  feet, 

■•'  Spondylus  dumosus  and  Oitrea  panda,  originally  described  aB  charac- 
teristic fossils  of  the  Newer  Cretaceous  (upper  Eocene)  deposits  of  the 
southern  United  States,  have  been  found  abundantly  near  the  base  of  the 
bluff. 


156 


PROCEEDINGS  OP  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1881. 


1^ 

I 


^ 


ca 


8  , 


^ 
^ 

^ 
^ 

^ 


*--• 


w 


M 


A 
^ 


K«*9><9«(N 


m  if* 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  157 

An  examination  of  the  foregoing  section  shows  almost  conclu- 
siveh'  that  the  Eocene  deposits  of  Alabama  have  a  thickness  of 
very  nearly  400  feet;  and,  indeed,  I  am  informed  by  Dr.  Smith 
that  there  are  good  grounds  for  supposing  that  Tertiar}^  beds 
exist  in  the  northern  part  of  the  State,  wliose  position  would  be 
still  150-180  feet  below  the  Wood's  Bluff  marl  bed.  It  will  fur- 
ther be  seen  that  the  Claibomian  (or  Claiborne  proper,  as  chai'ac- 
terized  by  the  fossiliferous  greensands)  holds  a  position  decidedly 
near  the  top  of  the  series,  a  position  almost  preciscl}'  similar  to 
that  occupied  by  the  "  Calcaire  Grossier  "  (Parisian)  of  France, 
and  more  properly  Upper  than  Middle  Eocene,  which  last  it  has 
verj''  generallj^  been  considered.  What  relation  beds  ••  b  "  and» 
"  c  "  of  the  Claiborne  Bluff  holds  to  the  sub-Claibornian  (•'  Buhr- 
stone  "  in  part)  deposits  of  the  Tombigbee  River  has  not  yet  been 
absolutely  determined ;  but  there  can  probably  be  no  legitimate 
doubts  that  they  represent,  in  a  modified  form,  the  upper 
moiety  of  those  deposits.  Although  the  marked  difference  in 
the  lithological  character  of  the  strata  of  the  two  localities  as 
compared  with  each  other  (and  indeed  it  must  be  confessed,  this 
is  much  greater  than  could  have  been  reasonably  inferred  from 
the  genera]  constancy  of  the  deposits  in  this  region)  would  seem 
to  militate  against  such  a  view,  there  is,  nevertheless,  sufficient 
evidence,  both  stratigraphical  and  paleontological,  to  support  this 
conclusion.  In  the  first  place,  by  determining  the  position  of  the 
buhrstone  rock  near  St.  Stephen's  as  immediatel}''  underl3'ing 
the  highly  fossiliferous  greensand  laj-er,  Tuomej^  has  proved  that 
the  two  series  of  deposits  (the  Buhrstone  on  the  Tombigbee,  and 
bed  "  c  "  on  the  Alabama)  hold  relatively  the  same  position  to 
the  true  Claibomian,  lying  immediately  below  it.  In  the  second 
place,  the  argillaceous  sti'ata  at  the  base  of  Claiborne  Bluff  (bed 
"  4  "  of  Hale's  series)  have  been  identified  by  Hale,  both  on  litho- 
logical and  paleontological  evidence  (A.  J.  Science,  new  ser.,  YI, 
p.  356),  as  occurring  at  Coffeeville  Landing  on  the  Tombigbee 
River,  about  14  miles  north  of  St.  Stephen's,  what  miglit  very 
readil}'  have  been  expected  from  an  inspection  of  the  general  la}' 
of  the   different   formations.^      Xo   data   are   given   relative   to 

^  A  line  uniting  Claiborne  and  Coffeeville  Landing  would  mn  almost 
precisely  parallel  with  the  line  marking  the  junction  of  the  Cretaceous 
and  Tertiary  deposits  lying  hence  due  north.  The  contour  lines  traced  by 
Tuomey  would  indicate  a  true  dip  west  of  the  southerly  line,  and  that  this 


158  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

the  position  of  the  Buhrstone  at  this  last  locality,  but  hypotheti- 
cally  considered  (as  deduced  from  its  position  at  White  Bluff, 
and  its  general  dip),  its  summit  must  still  occupy  a  position  fully 
100  feet  above  the  level  of  the  river  ;  and  this  thickness  (100  feet) 
coincides  very  closely  with  the  thickness  (80  to  90  feet)  of  the 
deposits  below  the  true  Claibornian  (bed  "  d  ")  as  exposed  at  the 
bluff  on  Alabama  River.  And  finally,  that  at  least  a  very  con- 
siderable portion  of  the  inferior  beds  at  this  last  named  locality 
represent  strata  of  a  different  lithological  character  in  other  por- 
tions of  the  state— and  consequently,  that  they  are  local  deposits — 
is  proved  by  the  concurrent  statements  of  Hale  (loc.  cit.,  p.  356) 
and  Wincliell  {loc.  cit.^  p.  86),  both  of  whom  assert  that  the  cal- 
careous deposit  below  the  arenaceous  bed  (not  the  "  White  Lime- 
stone ")  is  not  known  to  occur  at  any  other  locality.^ 

Admitting  the  conclusions  reached  in  this  paper,  it  will  be  seen 
that  the  Alabama  Eocene  deposits  comprise  : — 

4.  "  White  Limestone  "  (Jacksonian),  best  exhibited  at  Claiborne 
(upper  portion  of  bluff)  and  St.  Stephen's  (lower  moiety  of 
bluff),  not  ver}-  abundant  in  fossils — Pecten  membranosus,  P. 

Poulsoni^    Ostrea  panda.^    Spondylus   dumosus,   "  Scutella  " 
Lyelli,  etc 50  —  ?  feet. 

3.  The  fossiliferous  arenaceous  deposit  (Claibornian),  best  shown 
at  Claiborne — subaqueous  at  St.  Stephen's — very  rich  in 
fossils,  and  of  the  age  of  the  "  Calcaire  Grossier  "  of  France 
— n  feet. 

2.  "  Buhrstone "  (Siliceous  Claiborne  of  Hilgard),  comprising 
siliceous  clay-stones  (buhrstone  proper)  densely  charged 
with  fossils  or  their  impressions,  laminated  clays,  sands  and 
calcareous  deposits — beds  "  h  "  and  "  c  "  of  the  Claiborne 
section,  the  cliff  at  White  Bluff,  and  the  so-called  "  Chalk 

is  actually  the  case  is  proved  by  the  difference  (80-90  feet)  betweeu  the 
actual  heights  at  which  the  equivalent  beds  at  St.  Stephen's  and  Claiborne 
are  placed.  This  also  accords  with  Hilgard' s  observations  in  Mississippi, 
where  the  dip  of  the  Jackson  and  Vicksburg  strata  was  found  to  be  about 
10  to  12  feet  per  mile  S.  by  W.  (A,  J.  Science,  new  ser.,  XLIII,  p.  36). 

^  It  is  greatly  to  be  hoped  that  under  the  present  able  management  of 
Dr.  Smith,  the  survey  will  be  able  to  yield  much  more  satisfactory  data 
connected  with  the  geology  of  the  State  than  have  heretofore  been 
rendered. 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  159 

Hills  "  of  the  southern  part  of  the  State.  At  Claiborne  the 
representative  beds  consist  of  aluminous  and  calcareous 
deposits,  poor  in  fossils,  but  containing  occasional  layers  of 
Ostrea  sellseformis — about  250  feet? 

1.  The  Wood's  Bluff  and  Bashia  (with  Cave  and  Knight's 
Branches)  deposits  (Eo-lignitic),  consisting  of  alternating 
dark  claj'S,  greenish  and  buff  sands,  and  numerous  seams  of 
lignite,  partlj^  very  rich  in  fossils,  and  as  far  as  is  yet  poni- 
tively  known,  the  oldest  Tertiary-  deposits  of  the  State — 50 
—  ?  feet.i 

It  is  the  intention  of  the  writer  to  discuss  in  a  future  paper  the 
relations  of  these  various  Alabama  deposits  to  those  of  other 
sections  of  the  United  States,  and  to  correlate  them,  as  far  as 
possible,  with  the  Eocene  deposits  of  the  typical  European  basins. 

^  It  appears  to  the  author  that  it  would  be  convenient  to  designate  these 
lower  deposits,  which  hold  a  rather  constant  position  at  the  base  of  the 
Eocene  series  in  different  parts  of  the  eastern  and  southern  United  States, 
by  a  tenn  which  could  be  readily  applied  in  adjective  form,  and  which 
would  at  the  same  time  in  some  manner  express  the  relation  of  the  beds 
referred  to.  He  therefore  proposes  the  term  "Eo-lignitic,''  which,  while 
it  to  some  extent  indicates  the  general  character  of  the  beds  so  designated, 
is  not  restricted  in  its  definition  to  the  character  of  the  deposits  of  any  one 
single  locality.  The  "  Buff  Sand"  of  Wincbell  {loc.  cit.,  p.  89),  probably 
falls  into  this  group,  but  its  exact  position,  or  its  correspondent,  does  not 
appear  to  be  as  yet  definitely  determined.  It  is  seen  to  underly  the 
"Buhrstone,"  and  is  considered  by  Winchell  to  represent  the  absolute 
base  of  the  Tertiary  system  of  the  State.  At  Black's  Bluff,  Wilcox  Co., 
it  is  stated  to  repose  directly  on  the  subjacent  Cretaceous  limestone,  but  in 
a  foot-note  (p.  90),  we  are  informed  that,  according  to  Tuomey,  the 
characteristic  fossil  of  this  limestone,  an  Ostreeiy  is  probably  Tertiary. 


160  proceedings  of  the  academy  of  [1881. 

July  5. 

The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberoer,  in  the  chair. 

Seventeen  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled,  "  The  Snare  of  the  Ray  Spider,  Epeira  radi- 
osa,  a  new  form  of  Orb-weh,"  by  Rev.  H.  C  McCook,  D.  D.,  was 
presented  for  publication. 

Sarcodes  sanguinea. — Mr.  Thomas  Meehan  referred  to  discus- 
sion among  members  at  former  meetings,  as  to  the  true  character 
of  parasitic  plants.  They  were  believed  to  be  in  the  main  of  two 
classes,— one  which  might  be  represented  by  the  common  mistle- 
toe, with  woody  stems  continuing  from  year  to  j^ear, — the  other 
like  the  Arceuthobium,  or  pine  parasite,  which  died  to  the  surface 
of  the  wood,  but  continued  to  grow  up  from  the  same  spot  every 
year — a  sort  of  parasitic  herbaceous  plant.  It  was  a  question 
how  far  root  parasites  partook  of  these  several  characters.  There 
were  some  plants,  as  Caslilleia  and  Gomandra^  which  might  be 
said  to  be  in  a  transition  state  between  an  ordinar}'  terrestrial 
plant  and  a  parasite.  Usually  they  were  as  other  plants,  but  some 
of  the  roots  would  attach  themselves  to  other  roots,  and  form  as 
perfect  a  union  as  genuine  parasites,  and,  by  the  decline  in  vigor 
of  the  victim  root  beyond  the  point  of  union,  evidently  showed 
they  were  really  parasitic,  deriving  nourishment  from  the  attach- 
ment. Aphyllon  unijiorum,  germinated  on  the  annual  fibrous 
roots  of  Asters  and  Solidagoes,  as  had  been  clearly  traced,  and 
perhaps  on  other  plants  ;  and  after  germination  formed  a  mass  of 
innumerable  coral-like  spougelets,  drawing  moisture  and  perhaps 
some  other  elements  of  nutrition  from  the  surrounding  medium. 
Epiphegus  Virgi7iiana  behaved  precisely  in  the  same  way.  Mono- 
tropaa\\d  others  had  also  this  mass  of  pseudo-roots,  or  spongelets, 
and  had  been  supposed  to  germinate  and  live  wholly  on  half  de- 
cayed vegetation,  but  he  believed  from  analogy  they  would  be 
found,  as  in  Epiphegus  and  others,  to  germinate  at  first  on  living 
roots.  Conopholis  was  the  only  root  parasite  he  had  found  any 
reason  for  believing  to  be  a  perennial.  This  had  been  found  at- 
tached to  quite  large  roots,  evidently  coming  up  from  the  same 
spot  from  year  to  year  as  Arceuthobium  does. 

Having  correspondents  in  regions  where  grows  the  beautiful 
Snow-plant  of  the  Sierras — Sarcodes  sanguinea. — about  which 
nothing  but  its  aerial  character  has  been  so  far  known,  he  had  set 
them  to  watching  for  him,  their  appearance  and  final  end.  The 
places  wliere  they  grew  were  carefully  marked,  and  with  the  fol- 
lowing results  : — Mr.  John  M.  Hutchings,  of  Yosemite,  found  the 
bottom  of  the  old  plants  10  to  14  inches  below  the  surface,  with 
not  the  slightest  signs  of  attachment  an}  where.     To  him  it  ap- 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  161 

peared  no  more  than  an  "ordinary  annual  plant  of  great  beauty." 
Of  course  an  ordinary  annual  growing  from  seed,  could  not  push 
through  the  ground  at  so  great  a  depth.  The  vital  power  spent 
in  overcoming  so  heavy  an  obstruction,  would  lie  exhausted  long 
before  the  growing  point  pushed  through  a  foot  of  soil  to  the  sur- 
face, as  observing  seed  growers  of  experience  would  testify.  Only 
a  parasite,  or  bud,  having  an  unlimited  supply  of  food  to  di'aw  on 
could  accomplish  this  feat.  But  the  matter  was  settled  by  an- 
other observer,  Mrs.  Ross  Lewers,  of  Washoe  Valley,  Nevada, 
who,  together  with  her  observations,  had  sent  the  dead  spongy 
mass  from  the  last  3'ear's  plants,  which  Mr.  M.  exhibited,  and  these 
were  found  to  have  a  slender  pine  root  through  the  mass  around 
which  the  spongy  mass  had  grown,  and  as  it  was  dead,  there  was 
little  doubt  that  it  had  been  the  matrix  from  which  the  seed  had 
made  its  original  start,  and  which  the  plant  killed  in  the  end.  The 
dead,  spongy  mass  of  pseudo-roots  was  larger  than  he  had  seen  in 
any  other  species  of  root  parasite.  Altogether  it  might  be  said 
that  Sarcodes  sanguinea  was  an  annual,  germinating  on  small  pine 
roots,  and  subsequently  obtaining  subsistence  from  the  earth  as 
Aphyllon.  Epiphegus,  &c. 

Talinum  teretifolium. — Mr.  Thomas  Meehan  remarked  that 
the  point  he  made  recentl}'  in  regard  to  Draba  ve7'na,  that  mere 
light  alone  evidentl}'  failed  to  account  for  the  special  opening-time 
of  flowers,  was  confirmed  by  recent  observations  on  Talinum 
teretifolium.  When  preparing  the  chapter  on  tliis  plant  for  his 
"Native  Flowers  and  Ferns  of  the  United  States,"  a  few  years 
ago,  he  had  watched  plants  almost  daily  through  the  whole  season 
and  found  that  without  any  exception  they  opened  at  1  P.  M.  and 
closed  at  2.  This  season  he  had  watched  them  again  and  found 
that  though  the  time  of  opening  was  the  same,  1  p.  m.,  they  never 
on  any  occasion  noted,  closed  at  2,  but  continued  open  sometimes 
to  half-past  three  or  half-past  four,  and  on  one  occasion  were  found 
closing  at  half-past  five.  Mr.  Meehan  said  he  had  endeavored  to 
associate  these  variations  with  some  atmospheric  changes,  such  as 
heat,  light,  or  moisture,  but  in  no  case  did  these  endeavors  prove 
satisfactory.  In  the  "  Proceedings  of  the  Kansas  Academy  of 
Science,"  Professor  Smyth  had  contributed  materials  for  a  "floral 
clock"  for  Kansas,  and  Talinum  teretifolium  was  set  down  in 
the  list  as  opening  at  11  a.  m.  in  that  State. 

Mr.  Meehan  believed  that  the  laws  influencing  this  peculiar 
class  of  motion  in  flowers,  were  completely  hidden  from  us,  and 
that  the  subject  ofl^ered  an  inviting  field  to  the  biologist. 

Mr.  Redfield  suggested  that  perhaps  the  age  of  the  plants  made 
some  difference  in  their  habits. 

Mr.  Meehan  replied  that  the  patch  in  his  garden  was  much 
larger  now  than  at  first,  from  addition  through  self  sown  seeds  ; 
but  all  the  plants  behaved  precisely  alike.     He  did  not  suppose 

12 


162  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

that  external  circumstances  had  no  influence  ;  but  that  the  con- 
dition of  the  living  material  on  which  they  acted,  decided  the  final 
character,  and  that  Mr.  Redfield's  question  was  in  the  right  line. 


July  12. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Ten  persons  present. 

The  death  of  John  P.  Brock  and  of  Alfred  D.  Jessup,  members, 
was  announced. 

The  following  was  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


1881.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


163 


THE  SNARE  OF  THE  RAY  SPIDER  (EPEIRA  RADIOSA),  A  NEW  FORM  OF 

ORB- WEB. 

By  Henry  C.  McCook,  D.  D. 

In  the  vicinity  of  Philadelphia,  June  14,  1881, 1  found  a  number 
■of  spiders  grouped  not  far  from  each  other  on  Epeiroid  webs,  which 
proved  to  be  of  a  type  hitherto  unknown,  and  which  I  designate 
as  the  Actinic  or  Raj'-formed  Orb-web.  The  spider  appears  also 
to  be  new  to  science,  and  is  named  Ej^eira  radiosa.^ 

I.  Character  of  the  Web. 

The  first  example  or  two  of  the  spiders  collected  seemed  to  be 
upon  nests  that  had  been  broken  by  ordinarj^  wear  and  tear  in 


FiQ.  1.— The  Ray  Spider  seated  in  her  snare,  just  before  drawing  the  trap-line. 

capturing  insects ;  bat  the  repetition  of  the  form  in  a  third  snare, 
particularly  of  the  peculiar  open  central,  caused  more  careful 
examination.     The  result  was  the  discovery  of  the  remarkable 

^  Radiosa,  full  of  rays.    A  closer  study  of  the  spider  may  compel  the 
change  of  its  generic  position. 


164 


PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF 


[1881. 


form  of  web  hci-e  described.  On  account  of  the  continually 
changing  form  of  the  snare,  it  will  be  necessary  to  present  it  from 
various  points  of  view,  and  as  seen  in  different  stages  of  its  diurnal 
changes. 

Fig.  1  presents  a  view  of  the  snare  in  a  partially  relaxed  con- 
dition. The  spider  is  seen  seated  in  the  centre  of  a  series  of  rays, 
i,  ii,  iii,  iv,  v,  which  are  grasped  by  the  third  and  fourth  pairs  of 
legs.  There  is  no  hub,  properly  speaking,  but  the  axes  of  the 
rays  may  be  seen  at  times  united  upon  a  central  point,  as  at  H, 
fig.  2.     The  general  tendency  is  to  four  or  five  main  divisions  or 


Fro.  2. 


rays,  as  ma}'  be  seen  by  studying  the  figures  presented.  But 
there  is  more  or  less  variation,  and  in  the  course  of  the  day's 
usage  in  capturing  prey  two  sections  will  become  interblended 
upon  one  axis,  as  appears  to  be  the  case  in  fig.  2,  and  also  in  fig.  4. 
The  central  space  is  a  lai'ge  irregular  opening,  constituting 
about  one-third  of  the  entire  snare,  whose  diameter  is  usually  from 
three  to  five  inches  (see  fig.  3).  The  central  circle,  meshes,  and 
notched  spirals  which  so  generally  characterize  the  Orb-webs  are 
thus  wholly  wanting  here. 


1881.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


165 


The  orb  ma}'  be  said  to  be  composed  of  a  series  of  independent 
rays  or  sectors,  each  ray  composed  of  several  spirall}'  crossed 
radii,  and  the  whole  series  united  into  an  orl)  by  cross-lines  or 
spirals  like  those  which  unite  the  radii.  In  the  shifting  of  the 
section-lines  above  referred  to,  this  separation  of  the  orb  into  in- 
dependent rays,  is  always  quite  evident.  The  spirals  are  covered 
with  viscid  beads,  as  in  most  orb-webs  The  radii  do  not  all 
pass  to  the  Hub  or  Centre,  as  do  those  of  orb-webs  generally,  but 
converge  for  the  most  part  upon  the  axes  of  the  rays  as  repre- 
sented at  figs.  1,  2,  3.     These  axes  themselves  converge  upon  a 


Fig.  5.— View  from  front.    "Web  taut.    Perspective  not  t^liown .    Central  opening  exact. 

single  strong  thread,  a  trap-line,  T  (  figs.  1  and  2,  and  succeeding 
cuts),  which  is  attached  to  some  part  of  the  surrounding  surface, 
of  rock,  earth  or  plant.  When  the  snare  is  flat  or  relaxed,  as  was 
the  case  with  the  one  drawn  at  fig.  2,  and  as  appears  in  fig.  1,  the 
trap-line  is  often  about  perpendicular  to  the  plane  of  the  orb,  as  is 
the  handle  to  the  Ta.ys  of  an  open  Japanese  umbrella.  This,  how- 
ever, depends  somewhat  upon  the  environment ;  a  convenient 
point  for  the  attachment  of  the  trap-line  will  cause  the  animal  to 
divert  the  thread  more  or  less  from  the  perpendicular. 


166 


PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF 


[1881. 


We  may  now  suppose  the  spider  placed  as  in  figs.  1  and  3,  at 
the  point  where  the  rays  converge,  grasping  the  axes  with  the  four 
hind  feet.  The  two  front  feet  seize  the  trap-line  and  draw  it  taut. 
Then,  precisely  as  a  sailor  pulls  upon  a  rope,  "  hand  over  hand," 
the  little  arachnid's  feet  move  along  the  trap-line,  one  over  another. 
The  axes  of  the  ra^- s,  held  firmly  in  the  hind  feet,  follow  her ;  the 
centre  of  the  snare  bears  inward,  the  other  parts  are  stretched  taut, 
and  the  web  at  last  has  taken  the  form  of  a  cone  or  funnel  (figs.  4,  5). 
In  this  position  the  snares  continually  suggested  to  me  the  figure 
of  an  umbrella  with  ribs  reversed  by  the  wind  and  the  covering 


Fig.  4.— Side  view  of  Kay  Spider's  snare,  when  drawn  taut  or  bowed.    Seen  within 

a  cavity. 

stripped  loose  from  the  top  of  the  handle.  Fig.  4  gives  a  side 
view  of  the  web  when  thus  bowed  or  drawn  taut ;  another  snare 
is  shown  at  fig.  5,  as  seen  from  behind. 

In  this  example  (fig.  5),  the  spider  has  moved  quite  down  the 
trap-line  to  the  surface  of  the  little  twig  (projecting  into  the 
cavity)  to  which  it  is  attached.  It  will  thus  be  seen  that  the 
snare  is  more  or  less  a  plane  surface,  or  more  or  less  conical, 
according  to  the  position  of  the  animal  upon  the  trap-line  and  the 
degree  of  tension  thereof. 


1881.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


16T 


II.  Mode  of  Operating  the  Snare. 

When  an  insect  strikes  the  snare,  the  spider  has  two  modes  of 
operating.  The  first  somewhat  resembles  that  of  the  ordinary 
orb-weaver  in  that  the  insect  is  simply  permitted  to  entangle  itself 
and  is  then  taken,  swathed,  returned  to  the  centre  and  eaten. 
There  is,  however,  this  difference  :  before  going  to  the  insect,  the 
axes  of  the  snare  are  twisted  or  knotted,  by  a  rotary  action  of  the 
body  and  movement  of  the  legs,  so  that  the  untouched  parts  of 
the  orb  remains  taut.     Fig.  2  represents  a  snare  thus  "  locked,"' 


Fig.  5. 
or,  perhaps  I  might  more  properly  say,  "  keyed."  The  trap-line 
is  now  relaxed,  although  its  elasticity  is  such  that  the  change  can 
scarcely  be  noticed.  The  spider  then  moves  upon  her  victim, 
quite  habitually  cutting  out  the  spirals  with  her  mandibles  as  she 
goes.  When  the  insect  is  ensnared  well  towards  the  circumference 
of  the  web,  and  indeed,  for  the  most  part,  in  other  cases  also,  it 
results  that  the  ray  or  sector  upon  which  the  entanglement  had 
occurred,  is  quite  cut  awaJ^  The  spider  thereupon  proceeds  to 
operate  the  remaining  parts  of  her  snare,  which,  in  time,  is  thus 
destroyed  by  sections,  as  will  be  fully  illustrated  hereafter. 


168 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1881. 


The  second  mode  of  operation  resembles  that  of  the  Triangle 
spider,  Ilyptiotes  cavata^  Ilentz,  which  has  been  so  admirably 
described  by  Wilder,  and  which  I  have  very  frequently  and  fully 
observed  in  the  suburbs  of  Philadelphia  and  throughout  Pennsyl- 
vania. It  is  at  this  point  that  the  habit  of  our  Ra}^  spider  becomes 
particularly  interesting.  The  Triangle  spider  makes  a  triangular 
web,  which  is  in  fact  an  orb  sector,  composed  with  unvarying 
regularit}'  of  four  spirally  crossed  radii  converging  upon  a  single 
line  T  (fig.  6,  a).  Upon  this  line  the  spider  hangs  back  downward, 
grasping  it  with  all  her  feet,  and  having  a  portion  of  the  line,  SI 
(fig.  6,  b),  rolled  up  slack,  between  her  two  hind,  or  sometimes, 


Fig.  6.— Triangle  spider  hanging  upon  taut  snare,    a,  Spider  in  position.    SI,  Ball  ol 
slack-line,    b,  Enlarged  figure  of  spider,  showing  the  mode  of  grasping  the  line. 

apparently,  her  fore  and  hind  feet.  Thus  the  forward  and  back 
parts  of  the  trap-line  are  taut,  while  the  intermediate  part  is  slack. 
The  spiral  parts  of  the  snare  are  also  taut.  When  the  web  is 
struck  by  an  insect,  the  spider  suddenly  releases  her  hind  feet, 
the  slack  line  sharply  uncoils,  the  spider  shoots  forward,  the  whole 
web  relaxes,  as  at  fig.  T,  and  the  spiral  lines  are  thrown  around 
the  insect.  This  is  repeated  several  times  before  the  prey  is 
seized. 


1881.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


169 


Precisely  the  same  action  characterizes  the  Ra}^  spider.  Her 
ordinary  position,  or  at  least  the  one  in  which  I  most  frequently 
observed  her,  is  a  sitting  posture,  back  upward,  as  shown  at  fig.  1. 
The  axes  of  the  rays  are  held  in  the  third  and  fourth  pairs  of  legs, 
the  fourth  commanding  the  upper,  the  third  the  lower  series, 
quite  habituall^^,  as  it  appeared  to  me.  A  sort  of  "  basket,"  or 
sj'stem  of  connecting  lines,  shown  at  figs.  1,  9,  unites  all  the  feet, 
seeming  to  converge  toward  the  fore-feet  (perhaps,  upon  the  second 
pair),  where  they  grasp  the  trap-line.  It  is  upon  this  foot- 
basket  that  the  spider  sits  when  her  net  is  bowed. 

This,  however,  is  not  the  invariable  posture ;  in  the  reconstruc- 
tion of  the  raj^s  and  shifting  of  the  axes,  as  the  day's  work  tells 


Fig.  7,— Triangle  spider,  Hyptiotes  cavaia,  with  slacli-line  uncoiled  and  snare  relaxed. 

upon  the  snare,  the  spider  will  A^ary  her  posture  to  that  of  fig.  5. 
The  trap-line  generall}-  has  a  direction  downward  rather  than 
upward,  so  that  the  head  and  fore-feet  tend  to  be  depressed  below 
the  abdomen,  and  this  depression  may  gradually  result  in  the 
complete  inversion  of  the  animal,  fig,  5,  so  that  she  assumes  the 
natural  position  of  orb-weavers.  I  have  even  seen  individuals 
with  the  back  turned  downward,  fig.  8,  as  is  the  habit  with  the 
Triangle  spider  and  with  all  those  species  who  make  a  dome  or 
horizontal  orb-web,  as  the  Basilica  spider,  E.  basilica  McCook, 
and  the  Orchard  spider,  E.  hortorum  Hentz. 

If  now  the  feet  of  the  spider  be  careful  I3'  examined  with  a  good 
glass,  a  coil  of  slack-line  will  be  seen,  precisely  as  in  the  case  of 
the  Triangle-si^ider.  This  is  illustrated  at  fig.  8,  where  a,  b,  c,  are 
the  axes  of  several  rays,  grasped  in  the  third  (3)  and  fourth  (4) 


i 


170  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [188L 

pairs  of  legs,  and  SI  is  the  coil  or  slack-line  between  these  and  the 
fore  pairs  (1  and  2),  or  simply  between  the  pair  of  fore-legs,  1  and 
2.  As  the  spider  does  not  exceed  one-eighth  of  an  inch  in  body 
length,  and  the  position  of  the  snare  is  within  cavities  and  inter- 
stices of  rocks,  where  the  light  does  not  bring  out  the  delicate 
tracery  of  the  fine  webs,  the  observation  of  these  and  other  points 
of  like  character,  is  a  matter  of  some  difficulty.  But,  although 
the  exact  relations  of  the  coil  to  the  feet  were  sometimes  in  doubt, 

and  indeed  seemed  to  vary  somewhat, 
the  existence  of  the  coil  and  its  general 
relations  were  determined  beyond  doubt. 
It  is  also  certain  that  the  slack-line 
sharply  uncoils  and  straightens  when 
the  spider  releases  her  grasp  upon  the 
trap-line,  and  that  the  web  unbends  and 
shoots  quickly  forward.  It  is  instantly 
changed  from  the  bowed  or  conical  form 

of  figs.  4  and  5  to  the  circular  plane  of 
FIG  8 -Ray  spider  (greatly  ea-    ^         ^  ^^^  ^ 
larged)  in  position  on  taut  snare.      ° 
To  show  the  slack-line  coil,  SI.  The  following  points,  howcvcr,  long 

evaded  my  observation,  before  webs 
were  found  which  presented  the  conditions  for  successful  study. 
But  at  last  I  was  well  satisfied,  although  I  hope  for  further  and 
fuller  verification  during,  the  present  summer.  The  "  springing  " 
of  the  snare  is  caused  by  the  sudden  releasing  of  the  trap-line 
from  the  fore-feet^  instead  of  the  hind-feet,  as  with  the  Triangle 
spider.  The  polarity  of  the  two  arachnids  relative  to  their  webs 
is  reversed,  Hyptiotes  having  her  fore-feet,  but  Radiosa  her  hind- 
feet  towards  the  web.  The  slack-line  is  therefore  coiled  between 
the  two  fore-feet  or  between  the  fore  and  hind-feet  of  Radiosa, 
but  between  the  two  hind  pairs  (as  a  rule)  of  Hyptiotes. 

A  glance  at  fig.  6,  b,  will  suggest  the  manner  in  which  Hj'ptiotes 
is  affected  when  her  two  hind  feet  are  released  from  the  trap-line. 
The  coil,  SI,  straightens,  and  the  whole  body  of  the  spider  shoots 
forward.  If  now  we  turn  to  Radiosa,  as  represented  at  fig.  8,  or 
again,  as  shown  somewhat  better  at  fig.  9,  we  observe  that  if  the 
fore-feet  ,1,2,  fig.  9,  are  released  suddenly  from  the  trap-line,  T, 
the  whole  body  shoots  backward,  although  still  toward  the  snare, 
as  with  Hyptiotes.     This  was  the  action  which  I  observed. 

The  determination  was  finally  accomplished  by  first  carefully 


1881.] 


xVATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA. 


171 


sketching  the  arrangement  of  the  basket  stretched  between  the 
feet  (2,  3,  3,  4,  4,  fig.  9).  With  this  chart  in  one  hand,  and  in  the 
other  hand  a  magnifying  glass  focused  upon  the  feet,  I  watched 
until  favored  with  several  successive  and  unsuccessful  springings 
of  the  net.  As  the  spider  only  leaves  her  seat  when  she  thinks 
that  an  insect  is  well  entangled,  and  again  bows  her  net  by  pulling 
on  the  trap-line  if  no  prey  be  ensnared,  the  above  conditions  en- 
abled me  to  compare  my  chart  of  the  basket,  with  the  basket  itself 
as  seen  under  the  glass.  I  found  that  the  outlines  on  the  paper 
and  the  lines  under  the  animal's  feet  exactly  corresponded.  There 
had  therefore  been  no  change  in  the  relative  positions  of  the  hind- 
feet,  mandibles  and  palps,  perhaps  also  of  the  second  pair  (2)  of 

feet.  There  had  been  an  ac- 
tual (not  seeming)  motion  of 
the  body  with  and  in  the  di- 
rection of  the  web,  and  this 
had  been  caused  by  releasing 
the  first  pair  of  legs  (1)  from 
the  trap-line. 

The  importance  of  this 
determination  seems  greater 
from  the  fact  that  I  had  at  first 
concluded  that  the  Radiosa 
actually  operated  her  snare 
by  sections.  That  is,  instead 
of  springing  the  whole  orb  at 
once,  as  above  described,  she 
simply  sprung  the  ray  struck  by  an  insect,  by  unclasping  the  foot 
holding  the  axis  of  that  ra3^  Thus,  ray  ii,  fig.  9,  would  be  sprung 
by  releasing  the  axis  of  ii,  from  No.  3,  the  third  foot.  This 
is  probabl}''  not  done  when  the  snare  is  in  complete  form  (as 
at  figs.  1,  3,  4),  but  I  now  believe  that  it  is  done  when  the  web 
has  been  partially  destroyed,  and  is  reduced  to  two  rays  or  sectors 
as  at  fig.  11.  This  I  hope  to  determine  accurately  during  the 
current  summer.  If  it  should  be  verified  we  shall  have  another 
resemblance  between  the  habits  of  Hyptiotes  and  Radiosa. 


Fig.  9. — Kay  spider  in  position  showing  slack 
coll  SI,  and  fout-basket,  2,  3, 4. 


III.  Gradual  Obliteration  of  the  Web. 

The  fragmentary  condition  of  Radiosa's  web  after  contact  with 
insects  has  already  been  referred  to.     The  snare  is  gradually 


172 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1881. 


obliterated,  a  conclusion  to  which  the  spider  herself  very  curiously 
contributes.  When  an  insect  strikes  the  snare,  as  at  fig.  10,  ray 
I  (broken  ray),  Radiosa  first  "  keys "  the  snare  by  twisting 
together  the  foot-basket  and  the  parts  adjoining  (C),  including 
the  end  of  the  trap-line.  This  maintains  the  compact  condition 
of  the  snare  after  the  spider  has  left  the  central  point  at  which 
she  has  held  all  parts  together  in  the  manner  heretofore  described. 
Then  the  insect  is  sought.  Creeping  along  the  axis  of  the  ray 
upon  which  is  the  entanglement,  she  cuts  away  the  cross-lines  as 
she  goes,  leaving  the  bare  skeleton  of  radii,  as  shown,  fig.  10,  I, 
broken  ray.  The  insect  is  then  brought  back  to  a  point  (D)  near 
the  centre,  but  (in  this  case  at  least,)  above  it,  where  it  is  eaten. 

While  the  feast  goes  on,  not 
unmindful  of  future  supplies, 
the  spider  (S)  clasps  the  ad- 
joining axis  and  (C  D)  the 
connecting  lines,  which  appear 
to  be  in  condition  for  operating 
somewhat  in  the  usual  way. 
When  the  insect  is  eaten,  the 
former  position  is  resumed, 
the  trap-line  clasped,  and  the 
net  bowed  and  tightened. 

After  a  morning's  trapping, 
if  the  game  has  been  plenty, 
and    generally    towards    the 

Fig,  10.— Kay  spider.    Action  when  an  insect  middle    of  the    aftemOOn,  Ra- 
is  taken.    S,  Spider;  In,  insect.  t-         i  ■^^     -i       x>         ^ 

diosa's  snare  will  be  found 
reduced  to  one  or  two  rays  or  fragments  of  rays.  I  have  seen  it 
reduced  to  a  bare  skeleton.  In  fig.  11,  there  are  one  ray  (I),  and 
two  fragments  of  two  others  united  into  a  new  ray,  and  these  are 
placed  in  opposite  parts  of  the  orb.  Again,  one-half  of  the  orb 
maybe  eliminated  (fig.  12),  leaving  two  radii  (i,  ii)  to  operate  with. 
Radiosa  was  also  observed  to  construct  or  adopt  a  new  trap- 
line,  thus  changing,  so  to  speak,  her  base  of  operations.  This 
action  is  illustrated  at  fig.  12,  where  Ta  is  the  original,  and  T6 
the  new  trap-line.  This  is  not  a  frequent  occurrence,  as  the 
necessity'  for  changing  the  original  line  does  not  appear  to  arise 
frequently. 


1881.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


175 


lY.  The  Affinities  of  the  Actinic  Orb  with  other  Orb  Webs. 

Not  the  least  interesting  and  valuable  feature  of  the  Ray- 
spider's  industry,  is  that  it  discovers  a  connecting  link  between 
two  forms  of  snare  which  stand  at  the  very  opposite  poles  of  the 
spinning-work  of  the  (Orbitelarise)  orb-weavers.  At  the  one  ex- 
treme is  the  familiar  circular  snare  or  full  orb  of  the  ordinary 
garden  spider,  as,  for  example,  that  of  Epeira  domiciliorum, 
Hentz,  fig.  13.  At  the  other  is  the  orb-sector  of  the  Triangle 
spider,  figs.  6,  1.  A  glance  at  these  will  show  how  far  they  are 
apart  in  structure.  The  same  separation  appears  in  the  habits  of 
the  two  araneads.^  As  opposed  to  the  Hyptiotes,  the  spiders  of 
which  E.  domiciliorum  is  a  type  hang  head  downward  in  the 


Fig.  11. — Ray  spider's  snare 
after  usage  in  taking  prey. 


Fig.  12.— Ray  spider.  Half  of 
orb  eliminated  and  a  new  trap- 
line,  Tb,  formed. 


centre  of  the  orb,  with  their  feet  grasping  small  groups  of  the 
radii ;  or  sit  in  a  silken  den,  or  crevice,  holding  to  a  taut  trap-line 
which  is  connected  with  the  centre.  There  is  no  slack  coil,  and 
no  springing  of  the  net  as  with  the  Triangle  spider. 

The  industry  of  Radiosa,  it  is  now  seen,  is  united  to  that  of  the 
Full  Orb  makers  (E .  domiciliorum,  et  al.),  on  the  one  extreme,  by 
the  completeness  of  the  circle;  but  with  that  of  Hyptiotes,  on  the 
other  extreme,  by  the  independent  character  of  the  rays,  the 
nature  of  the  trap-line,  and  the  entire  mode  of  operating  the  snare. 
The  facts  necessary  to  trace  their  affinities  I  have  already  given. 

^  I  hope  that  I  shall  be  tolerated  in  the  invention  of  this  general  word 
for  members  of  the  Order  Aranese ;  "Arachnid,"  the  class  term,  is  too 
general ;  "aranead"  is  needed  for  the  true  spiders. 


n4 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1881. 


Some  of  the  striking  differences  I  have  also  recorded,  and  they  may 
thus  be  summarized.  The  web  of  Hyptiotes  is  a  single  sector ;  that 
of  Radiosa  has  four  or  more,  united.  Hyptiotes  commands  one 
line  with  her  feet,  the  trap-line  and  its  continuation ;  Radiosa 
commands  several  axes,  which  are  connected  with,  but  not  con- 
tinuous of,  the  trap-line.  Hyptiotes  has  her  head,  Radiosa  her 
abdomen  towards  her  snare.  Hyptiotes  habitually  hangs  to  the 
trap-line,  back  downward ;  Radiosa  generally  sits  upon  a  foot- 
basket  of  lines,  back  upward.  Hyptiotes  shoots  forward  when 
her  net  is  sprung ;  Radiosa  shoots  backward — but  both  spiders 
move  toward  their  webs.  Hyptiotes  holds  her  slack  coil  between 
the  two  hind-feet  (apparently) ;  Radiosa  between  the  fore-feet. 
In  these   differences,  the  points  wherein   Radiosa   varies   from 


Fig.  1j.— Full-Orb  snare  of  Epeira  domiciilorum. 


Hyptiotes  show  a  quite  apparent  approach  to  the  behavior  of  E. 
domiciilorum  and  the  Full-Orb  makers.  Thus  the  distance  which 
heretofore  had  separated  between  the  far-away  extremes  of  the 
spinning-work  of  the  Orbitelarise,  has  been  completely  bridged 
over  by  the  industry  of  our  little  indigenous  aranead — the  Ra}' 
spider.     It  is  to  be  remarked  that  while  structurally^  the  Triangle 


1881.J  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  115 

spider  is  as  widely  removed  from  the  Domicile  spider,  as  economi- 
cally, the  Ray  spider  is  more  closely  allied  structurally  to  the 
latter  than  the  former. 

V.  Natural  Habitat  and  Environment. 

The  first  specimens  of  Radiosa  taken  were  hung  in  large  open- 
ings left  between  the  breastwork  stones  of  a  very  old  mill-dam. 
The  wall  had  crumbled  and  quite  fallen  away  in  places,  leaving 
large  cavities,  within  whose  moist,  cool  shelter,  among  ferns  and 
mosses,  this,  with  several  species  of  spiders,  had  domiciled.  The 
brook  poured  over  the  middle  part  of  the  wall,  making  a  pretty 
waterfall ;  briers,  bushes,  ferns  and  various  wood  plants  grew  out 
of  the  wall  and  stretched  over  a  deep  pool  12  or  15  feet  in  diame- 
ter, into  which  the  fall  dropped.  On  the  lower  bushes  and 
branches  above  the  stream,  and  continually  agitated  bj^  the 
splashing  of  the  water,  was  a  colony  of  Stilt  spiders,  Tefragnatha 
grallator^  stretching  their  long  legs  along  their  round  webs,  and 
dancing  with  the  motion  of  the  waves ;  the  beautiful  nests  of 
Phillyra  riparia^  Hentz,  nests  of  Tegenaria  persica^  Lyniphia 
communis,  L.  neophyta,  Epeira  hortorum,  and  one  or  two  species 
of  Theridiords,  were  in  close  neighborhood.  The  whole  pretty 
scene  was  embowered  in  a  grove  of  young  trees.  A  more  charm- 
ing habitat  could  not  well  have  been  found. 

Another  colony,  not  far  awaj',  was  established  within  the  cavi- 
ties formed  underneath  the  roots  of  a  large  fallen  tree,  and 
beneath  the  ledges  of  some  rocks  over  which  the  roots  turned. 
In  several  similar  positions  were  found  the  same  nests,  and  also 
among  the  rocks  in  a  wild  ravine  through  which  ran  the  stream 
Lownes'  Run.^ 

Further  explorations  of  the  surrounding  country  showed  that 
the  spider  was  largel^^  distributed,  and  in  similar  conditions.  I 
found  numbers  in  ravines,  on  the  broad  leaves  of  the  skunk  cab- 
bage, Symplocarpus  (or  Ichtodes)  fcetidus,  the  snares  stretched 
over  the  brooklet,  and  beneath  the  shelving  banks.  They  were 
also  found  among  the  rocks  of  Crum  Creek  over  the  beautiful 
drive  to  Howard  Lewis'  mill.  The  habitat  of  the  Ray  spider  may 
therefore  be  described  as  moist,  cool,  shaded  cavities  and  recesses 
among  rocks,  roots,  beneath  banks  and  foliage,  over  or  near  run- 
ning water. 

^  Since  writing  the  above  I  have  found  Radiosa  in  similar  environment 
at  Mineral-spring  Glen,  New  Lisbon,  Ohio. 


176  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 


July  19. 

The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 

Twelve  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  A  Revision  of  the  Cis-Mississippi  Tertiary 
Pectens  of  the  United  States,"  by  Angelo  Heilprin,  was  pre- 
sented for  publication. 


July  26. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Twelve  persons  present. 

A  New  Form  of  Fresh-ivater  Sponge. — A  note  was  read  from 
Mr.  Edw.  Potts,  reporting  the  discovery  in  Chester  Creek  of 
another  curious  form  of  fresh-water  sponge,  a  third  species  of 
Carterella,  resembling  C.  titbisperma  in  the  character  of  its 
birotulates  and  the  length  of  its  foraminal  tubes,  but  much  more 
robust  than  that  species.  The  tendrils  are  nearly  as  long  as  those 
of  C.  tenosperyna,  but  broad,  flat  and  ribband-like. 

Thus  far  it  is  the  most  conspicuous  and  peculiar  of  our  Ameri- 
can forms.     He  proposed  for  it  the  name  Carte7'ella  latitenta. 

John  Gr.  Graham  was  elected  a  member. 
The  following  was  ordered  to  be  printed : 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  H*? 


REVISION  OF  THE  PALJSOCRINOIDEA. 
BY   CHARLES   WACHSMUTH    AND    FRANK    SPRINGER. 

Part  II. 
Family  SPH^ROIDOCRINID^, 

INCLUDING    THE    SUB-FAMILIES 

PLATYCRINID^,  RHODOCRINID^,  and  ACTINO- 
CRINID^. 

The  first  part  of  this  work  was  published  contemporaneously 
with  the  "  3d  Lieferimg  "  of  Professor  Zittel's  "  Handbuch  der 
Palaeontologie,"  which  embraces  the  Crinoidea. 

In  his  classification,  this  distinguished  author  follows  Johannes 
Miiller,  and  divides  the  Crinoidea  into  three  orders  :  Eucrinoidea 
{Brachiata^W\\\\Q\-)^  Gyst'oidea,  and  Blastoidea ;  subdiA'iding  the 
first  into  the  Tesselata,  Articulata,  and  Costata.  The  "  Tesselata  " 
agree  in  general  features  with  our  PalseocrinoideajeLnd  the  Articu- 
lata with  the  mesozoic  and  recent  Crinoids,  for  which  we  have 
proposed  the  name  Stomatocrinoidea ;  but  while  we  treat  these 
groups  as  of  the  same  rank  with  the  Blastoidea  and  Cystoidea, 
they  are,  according  to  Miiller  and  Zittel,  mere  subdivisions  of  the 
''  Brachiata:'^ 

Zittel  divides  the  Tesselata  into    twentj'-six   families,   among 

1  While  this  was  in  press,  we  received  from  Dr.  Etheridge,  Jr.,  and 
P.  Herb.  Carpenter,  an  intei-esting  paper  upon  the  genus  AUagccrmus,  a 
new  form  from  the  Carboniferous  of  Scotland,  which  they  consider  to  be 
"tesselate"  in  the  younger,  "articulate"  in  the  adult  state.  In  a  dis- 
cussion upon  Miiller's  terms,  Tesselata  and  Artieulata,  they  arrive  at  the 
conclusion,  that  at  the  present  state  of  our  knowledge  of  these  Crinoids 
those  names  are  inappropriate  and  should  be  abandoned.  They  adopt  our 
name  Palceocrinoidea,  but  object  to  Stomatocrinoidea,  as  they  think  it 
possible,  that  also  Crinoids  of  the  other  group  might  have  possessed  an 
external  mouth.  They  consider  the  irregular  an-angement  of  the  plates  in 
the  calyx,  against  the  almost  perfect  symmetry  which  is  found  throughout 
the  other  group,  and  the  vault  structure,  to  be  better  and  more  persistent 
characters  for  distinction  than  the  condition  of  the  mouth.  We  can  only 
notice  here  this  important  paper,  but  shall  take  pleasure  to  refer  to  it  at 
some  future  time. 
13 


178  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

which  his  Ichthyocrinidae  and  Taxocrinidse  substantially  agree 
with  our  Ichthyocrinidae,  except  that  he  included  among  the  Taxo- 
crinidii^  the  genera  Lecythocrinus  and  Gissocrinus^  wliicli  we 
refer  to  the  Cyathocrinidai.  Our  Cyathocrinidae  include  his 
Poteriocrinidae,  Heterocrinida?,  Cyathocrinidae  and  Hybocrinidae, 
except  that  he  places  among  the  first  of  these  families,  Agassizo- 
crinus  and  Belemnocrinus^vf\\\c\i  we  think  belong  to  other  families. 

Zittel's  classification,  in  its  general  results  and  conclusions, 
does  not  differ  materially  from  our  own ;  but  instead  of  subdividing 
the  Palaeocrinoidea  at  once  into  a  number  of  small  groups  which 
he  calls  families,  we  separate  them  at  first  into  comparatively  few 
well-marked  groups,  which  we  subdivide  when  necessar3^  Our 
families  are  not  based  upon  mere  differences  in  the  arrangement 
of  the  plates,  but  are  expressions  of  important  modifications  in 
the  structure  of  the  animal,  which  must  have  affected  the  whole 
organism,  and  consequently  form  the  basis  of  well  defined  natural 
divisions. 

The  groups  which  we  recognize  as  Ichthyocrinidae,  Cyatho- 
crinidae  and  Sphaeroidocrinidae  existed  at  the  beginning  of  the 
geological  record,  and  flourished  side  by  side  until  they  became 
extinct.  They  are  so  well  defined  by  nature,  that  once  under- 
stood there  is  no  difficulty  in  identifjang  them.  The  smaller 
groups  into  which  we  have  divided  the  Sphaeroidocrinidae,  are 
likewise  of  early  origin,  but  they  follow  more  or  less  the  same 
general  plan  in  the  arrangement  of  their  plates,  as  well  as  in  their 
mode  of  development,  individually  and  paleontologically. 

There  haA^e  been  several  interesting  publications  on  Crinoids 
during  the  past  3'ear,  containing,  among  others,  descriptions  of 
new  species  of  both  Ichthyocrinidae  and  Cj^athoerinidae.  These 
species  will  be  noticed  and  systematically  arranged  in  an  appendix 
at  the  end  of  this  work. 

We  are  under  special  obligations  to  Prof.  Spencer  F.  Baird  for 
access  to  a  number  of  rare  and  valuable  books  in  the  Smithsonian 
Library;  to  Dr.  C.  A.  White,  of  the  National  Museum,  for 
numerous  favors  received  during  the  preparation  of  this  work  ;  to 
Prof.  A.  H.  Worthen,  of  Springfield,  111.,  and  to  a  number  of  other 
gentlemen  for  the  liberal  loan  of  books  and  specimens,  and  for 
other  valuable  information. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  179 

III.-SPHiEROIDOCRINID^. 

The  above  name  is  proposed  as  a  family  designation,  to  include 
such  forms  of  the  Palaeocrinoidea,  in  which  both  calyx  and  vault 
are  constructed  of  a  large  number  of  immovable  plates  and  these 
forming  inflexible  walls  ;  with  several  orders  of  radials,  and  one  or 
more  of  interradials  on  both  the  oral  and  aboral  sides.  The 
SphferoidocrinidiB  differ  thus  conspicuously  from  the  Ichthyo- 
crinidte  with  their  flexible  walls  and  squamous  vault,  and  from  the 
Cyathocrinidffi  with  their  uniform  elements  of  three  rings  of 
plates  in  the  calj^x,  without  interradials,  and  with  simple  oral 
plates  in  the  vault. 

The  family,  as  thus  defined,  will  include  genera  with  underbasals, 
and  genera  without  them.  In  this  we  differ  from  most  authors, 
who  make  the  presence  or  absence  of  these  plates  a  marked  family 
distinction,  and  who  place  together  within  the  same  family  Cj'a- 
thocrinidte,  Ichthyocrinidse  and  Rhodocrinida?. 

Pictet,  Traite  de  Paleontologie,  vol.  iv,  included  in  his  "  Cya 
thocriniens  "  our  Cyathocrinidee,  RhodocrinidiB  and  parti}'  our 
Ichthyocrinidae  ;  from  the  former,  however,  he  excluded  Graphio- 
crinus,  which  had  been  described  by  De  Koninck  and  Lehon  with 
a  single  circle  of  plates  beneath  the  radials,  and  from  the  latter 
Fo7'beswcrinus  and  Taxocri7ius,  in  which  underbasals  had  not  been 
discovered  ;  while  he  admitted  the  allied  genera  Ichthyocrinus, 
Lecanocrinus  and  Mespilocrinus  in  which  they  had  been  observed. 
Similar  opinions  were  held  by  d'Orbigny,  Hall,  Miller,  Austin 
and  others,  not  including,  however,  Roemer  and  Schultze,  who 
made  the  Rhodocrinidte  a  distinct  family. 

In  the  first  part  of  this  work  we  have  discussed  somewhat  fully 
the  relations  of  the  underbasals,  which  we  took  to  be  the  product 
of  growth  in  geological  times,  introduced  gradually  by  interpola- 
tion between  the  basals.  It  is  very  remarkable  that,  although  the 
introduction  of  underbasals  dates  back  to  the  Lower  Silurian,  as 
a  rule,  the  genera  in  which  those  plates  are  found  differ  at  no  time 
materially  from  those  in  which  they  are  wanting.  Even  as  late 
as  the  Subcarboniferous,  we  find  such  species  as  Adinocrinus 
Whitei,  and  Bhodocrinus  Wachsmuthi,  both  from  the  Burling- 
ton limestone,  so  strikingly  similar  in  every  respect,  both  in  the 
structure    of  the    bodj^  and    arms,  that    the  species  cannot  be 


180  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

separated  except  by  means  of  the  basal  portions.  There  are  sim- 
ilar examples  in  the  Silurian  and  Devonian,  which  will  be  noticed 
later. 

If^  therefore,  it  be  true  that  the  underbasals  had  no  important 
bearing  or  influence  upon  the  general  structure  of  the  Crinoids, 
there  is  no  good  reason  for  making  their  presence  or  absence  a 
family  character,  and  basing  thereon  a  division  to  rank  with  the 
Cyathocrinidic  and  Ichthyocrinidae,  whose  fundamental  structural 
plans  offer  broad  and  unmistakable  distinctions.  Nevertheless, 
they  are  not  without  importance  in  classification,  and  certainly 
characterize  a  group  of  more  than  generic  value.  We  have  accord- 
ingly brought  together  the  genera  of  this  family  in  which  these 
plates  exist  under  the  name  '■'' Rhodocriniclse.'''' 

The  great  family  SphajroidocrinidiB  includes  a  vast  variety  of 
forms,  and  a  mere  separation  of  these  into  genera  does  not  meet 
the  requirements  of  a  systematic  classification.  We  find  that  the 
genera  fall  naturally  into  groups  which  are  well  defined.  These 
subordinate  groups,  which  are  three  in  number,  we  consider  to  be 
sub-families,  and  have  arranged  them  in  the  following  manner  : 

1.  Platycrinid^. — Underbasals  wanting  ;  basals  and  first  radials 

forming  the  greater  part  of  the  calyx  ;  succeeding  primary 
radials  very  small  or  rudimentary ;  all  higher  orders  of 
radials  embraced  within  free  rays ;  interradial  system  but 
little  developed. 

2.  AcTiNOCRiNiD^.  —  Underbasal   wanting ;    calyx   composed   of 

basals ;  two  or  more  ordei'^  of  radials :  well  developed 
interradial,  and  often  interaxillary  series. 

3.  RnoDOCRiNiDiE.  —  Underbasals   present ;     calyx  composed   of 

basals  and  several  orders  of  radials ;  interradial  system 
well  developed. 

Before  proceeding  to  the  more  detailed  consideration  of  these 
groups,  we  will  consider  the  difl!erent  parts  of  which  the  body  in 
the  Sphreroidocrinida3  is  constructed,  and  this  will  throw 
additional  light  upon  the  relations  of  the  subdivisions. 


1881.]  natural  sciences  of  philadelphia.  181 

1.  Underbasals  and  Basals. 

The  genus  Glyptocrinus  Hall,  from  the  Lower  Silurian  is  one 
of  the  earliest,  most  beautiful,  and  most  instructive  types  of  the 
Pala?ocrinoidea,  and  fortunately^  is  often  found  in  excellent  preser- 
vation. Looking  at  the  great  number  of  plates  which  compose 
its  body,  at  its  elaborate  ornamentation,  one  is  naturally  inclined 
to  consider  this  as  one  of  the  most  maturely  developed  forms  in 
the  whole  family,  but  in  other  respects,  it  possesses  in  a  marked 
degree  the  characters  of  the  young  crinoid  of  later  geologic 
times. 

Glyptocririus  was  originally  described  with  five  basals  and  no 
underbasals.  Hall  afterwards  discovered  in  Gl.  decadactylus 
small  pieces  concealed  within  the  basal  cavity,  so  rudimentar}-, 
however,  that  both  he  and  Meek  hesitated  to  call  them  basals, 
although  both  authors  apply  that  term  to  the  proximal  plates  in 
all  other  cases.  Meek  distinguished  them  as  "  subbasals."  We 
have  examined  the  plates  in  question  very  carefnll}"  in  the  species 
named,  and  find  them,  although  very  rudimentary,  placed  within 
the  basal  ring,  hence  they  are,  according  to  our  terminology,  true 
underbasals,  and  not  as  Hall  describes  them  a  "  quinquepartite  " 
upper  joint  of  the  column.^ 

In  some  other  species  of  this  genus  the  underbasals  seem  to  be 
altogether  wanting,  at  least  are  not  developed  externalh'.  In 
Glyptocrinus  Dyeri  no  trace  of  them  can  be  discovered,  thovigh 
we  have  examined  with  reference  to  this  point,  some  most  perfect 
specimens.  If  the  underbasals  were  elements  of  famil}^  import- 
ance, Gl.  decadactylus  and  Gl.  Dyeri  would  be  representatives 
of  distinct  families. 

Glyptocrinus  is  exclusively  a  Lower  Silurian  genus.  The  two 
species  from  the  Upper  Silurian,  referred  to  it  by  Hall,  have  been 
transferred  by  us  to  other  genera.  One  of  these,  3Iariacrinus 
Carleyi,  is  another  interesting  case  illustrating  our  view  that  the 
underbasals  have  no  important  effect  upon  the  general  structure 
of  the  body.  M.  Carleyi  would  be  an  excellent  Glyptocrinus 
were  it  not  that  the  cal^'x  below  the  radials  is  composed  of  a  single 

^  The  underbasals  cannot  be  developed  from  a  columnar  joint,  or  their 
sutures  would  correspond  with  the  sutures  of  the  column  ;  whenever  this 
is  divided,  the  division  occurs  alternately  with  that  of  the  underbasals,  and 
as  a  rule  alternately  with  the  proximal  ring  of  plates. 


182  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

ring,  and  this  of  only  four  pieces.  Periechocrinus,  like  Mari- 
acrinus  an  Upper  Silurian  genus  and  like  it  without  underbasals, 
has  instead  of  four  or  five  basals,  only  three.  In  all  other 
respects  tliese  genera  agree  so  perfectly  with  Glyptocrinus  that 
they  cannot  be  distinguished,  proving  again  liow  closely  llhodo- 
crinidne  and  Actinocrinidse  are  linked  together,  and  that  they 
are  in  fact  variations  of  one  great  group. 

Where  underbasals  are  unrepresented,  families  have  frequently 
been  created  upon  the  number  of  the  basals,  and  Angelin  based 
his  entire  classification  upon  the  number  of  proximal  plates, 
whether  basals  or  underbasals.  Convenient  as  this  scheme  of 
classification  may  seem,  it  is  altogether  artificial,  and  combines 
forms  which  are  widely  different,  while  it  separates  others  which 
are  clearly  allied. 

We  have  in  the  introduction  to  this  work,  page  11,  dwelt  at  some 
length  upon  the  basals  or  first  ring  of  plates  below  the  radials ; 
and  believe  we  have  shown  that  the  basal  disk,  whether  composed 
of  one,  two,  three,  four  or  five  pieces,  can  almost  invariably  be 
reduced  to  five  elementary  pieces,  and  that  all  deviations  from 
this  number  have  been  produced  by  anchylosis  of  two  or  more  of 
the  original  segments.  This,  of  itself,  is  a  strong  argument 
against  a  classification  based  upon  the  number  of  these  plates. 

Among  the  Actinocrinidas,  only  a  few  genera  with  the  original 
five  basal  plates  are  known,  and  these  are  confined  to  the  Silurian  ; 
indeed  we  have  good  reason  to  believe  that  only  the  very  earliest 
representatives  of  this  group  possess  a  base  divided  into  five 
pieces.  Genera  with  four  basals  commence  in  the  Silurian  and 
terminate  in  the  Devonian ;  while  genera  with  three  basals  are 
found  from  the  Upper  Silurian  to  the  close  of  the  Warsaw  lime- 
stone where  the  family  becomes  extinct.  The  genera,  with  four 
basals  have  been  referred  by  us  partly  to  the  Actinocrinidte,  and 
partly  to  the  Calyptocrinidffi.  The  latter  family  has  four  basals 
throughout,  but  even  here  this  number  cannot  be  considered  a 
family  character,  since  Melocrinus  and  Mariacrinus^  which  have 
four  basals,  belong  nndoubtedly  to  the  Actinocrinida?.  Species 
with  three  basals  are  found  among  both  Actinocrinid*  and 
Platycrinidae,  and  the  latter  are  by  no  means  restricted  to  this 
number,  as  Dichocrinus,  which  has  been  by  most  systematists 
placed  in  the  same  group  with  Plati/crinus  and  Rexacrinus,  has 
but  two  basals. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  183 

It  is  apparent  from  these  facts  that  neither  the  existence  of 
underbasals,  nor  the  modifications  which  took  place  in  the  basal 
disk,  had  any  such  corresponding  effect  upon  tlie  general  structure 
of  the  crinoids  as  to  entitle  them  to  be  considered  characters  of 
family  importance,  though  in  distinguishing  subordinate  groups 
they  may  possess  some  value.  The  radial  and  interradial  plates 
are  elements  of  far  greater  value. 

2.  Radial  Plates. 

In  our  nomenclature  we  have  proposed  different  terms  for 
special  parts  of  the  ra}^,  discriminating  between  radials,  brachials 
and  arm  plates.  We  designate  as  "  radials  "  the  whole  succes- 
sion of  plates  above  the  basals  radially  situated  and  enclosed 
within  the  body  walls.  The  "arm  plates"  form  the  movable 
portion  of  the  ra^- ;  the  "brachials,"  while  radials  in  position, 
are  ai'm  plates  in  construction,  being  free  and  distinctly  articu- 
lated. The  term  "  brachials  "  is  therefore  purely  a  conventional 
one,  employed  for  greater  convenience  in  description.  We  desig- 
nate as  "primary  radials"  those  below  the  first  bifurcation, 
while  the  "  secondary  radials  "  compose  the  first  branches  of  each 
ra3%  the  so-called  "  Distichalia"  of  Miiller  and  other  writers  ;  and 
those  of  succeeding  bifurcations  are  distinguished  by  referring 
them  to  the  order  in  which  they  stand  in  succession.  Miiller,  in 
applying  the  term  "  distichalia,"  was  evidently  not  aware,  that 
there  are  many  fossil  Crinoids  in  which  these  plates  give  oflT 
branches  which  likewise  form  a  part  of  the  test,  otherwise  he 
would  not  have  regarded  the  arms  as  commencing  at  the  "axil- 
lary  distichals,"  4 

Schultze,  in  his  Monograph  Echinod.  Eifl.  Kalk,  p.  5,  improved 
upon  Miiller's  views,  and  asserted  that  "the  commencement  of  the 
arms  begins  invariably  with  the  first  distinct  articulation  of  the 
ra3^"  Like  Miiller,  he  uses  the  term  "  distichalia  "  for  the 
secondary  radials,  and  proposes  no  name  to  designate  the  plates 
of  the  higher  branches  within  the  body.  Schultze  difllers  from 
Miiller  in  designating  the  free  radials  as  arm  plates,  and  in  this 
he  agrees  with  us ;  except  that  we  distinguish  those  arm  plates 
which  are  in  direct  vertical  line  with  the  radials  as  "  brachials." 

De  Koninck  and  Lehon  regarded  the  arms  as  beginning  from 
the  first  bifurcation  in  the  ray,  no  matter  whether  they  became 


184  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

free  at  this  point,  oi'  remained  included  within  the  body  walls  for 
some  distance.  Thej',  however,  characterized  those  plates  which 
arc  immovably  united  with  the  calyx — the  "  distichalia "  of 
Mliller — as  "  pieces  brachiales,"  and  the  movable  joints  as 
"  articles  brachiaux." 

P.  Herbert  Carpenter,  in  his  late  work  on  the  Actinometra,  p. 
22,  states  that  the  views  of  De  Koninck  upon  the  relation  of  these 
plates  were  unquestionably  correct  in  the  case  of  the  "Articulate 
Crinoids,"  but  that  their  application  to  the  "  fossil  Tesselata  " 
was  beset  with  some  difficulties. 

We  do  not  exactly  coincide  with  any  of  these  views.  It  seems 
to  us  that  either  the  entire  radial  series  of  plates  within  the  calyx, 
eventually  up  to  the  sixth  division,  or  even  higher,  must  be  called 
radials,  or  this  term  must  be  restricted  to  the  first  radial  plate. 
The  first  primary  radials  are  the  only  plates,  besides  the  basals, 
which  form  a  part  of  the  calyx  iri  all  Crinoids^  and  which  can  be 
homologized  with  the  apical  plates  of  other  Echinoderms.  All 
succeeding  plates  in  the  series  are,  in  our  own  opinion,  originally 
arm  plates,  wdiich  by  growth  during  the  life  of  the  individual — 
chiefly,  no  doubt,  in  the  embrj^o — and  by  development  in  geologi- 
cal time,  were  enclosed  within  the  walls,  and  became  thus  modified 
into  radials,  the  change  being  produced  by  growth  and  the  devel- 
opment of  additional  interradials  and  interaxillary  pieces.  That 
this  was  the  case  in  the  higher  orders  of  radials  can  be  clearly 
demonstrated,  and  we  feel  confident,  from  analogy,  that  the  same 
rule  extends  to  the  plates  throughout  the  ray,  which  in  turn 
suggests  the  idea  that  the  arms  fundamentally  commence  with 
the  second  radials,  and  not  with  the  axillary  plate"  as  intimated  by 
Carpenter,  nor  with  the  distichalia  of  Mliller.  In  practice,  how- 
ever, and  in  this  we  agree  with  Carpenter,  it  is  more  convenient 
to  regard  the  arms  as  commencing  with  the  first  free  plate  beyond 
the  calyx. 

The  radials,  as  we  designate  them,  consist  throughout  the  Sphai- 
roidocrinidffi,  of  five  rows  of  plates,  of  two  to  three  each,  longi- 
tudinally arranged.  The  upper  one  bifurcates  and  supports  upon 
its  upper  sloping  sides  two  rows  of  one  or  more  smaller  plates — 
the  secondary  radials — which  in  turn,  either  support  the  arms 
directl}^,  or  divide  again,  and  are  followed  by  radials  of  the  third 
order.  In  species  of  the  latter  kind,  the  upper  plate  in  one  or  both 
divisions  is  axillary  and  supports  on  each  sloping  side  another 


1881. J  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  185 

row  of  raclials.  The  formation  of  higher  orders  of  radials  takes 
place  in  a  similar  manner,  only  one  branch  generally  bifurcating, 
and  one  remaining  single.  In  species  with  but  two  orders  of 
I'adials  the  number  of  primary  arms  is  limited  to  two  in  each 
ray,  which,  however,  sometimes  branch  after  they  become  free. 
Species  with  tertiary  radials  may  have  either  three  or  four  arms  to 
the  ray,  depending  upon  whether  one  or  both  divisions  bifurcate. 
Upon  the  same  principle  species  with  four  orders  of  radials  may 
have  five  to  eight  arms,  and  those  with  a  fifth  order  may  have 
from  eight  to  twelve  and  even  sixteen.  The  first  number  can  onl}- 
occur  when  all  the  branches  remain  simx^le ;  the  latter  when  thej- 
all  divide.  Hence  the  number  of  primar}-  arms  is  dependent  upon 
the  number  of  orders  of  radials  represented  in  the  species,  and 
whether  part  of  them  bifurcate  again  or  remain  simple.  It  is 
important  to  note  that  simple  arms  are  always  given  off  from 
opposite  sides  alternately. 

The  number  of  arms  is  most  frequently  only  of  specific  import- 
ance, but  in  cases  where  certain  rays  throughout  a  number  of 
species  are  distinguished  bj^  a  smaller  or  greater  number,  the  arm 
formula  may  become  almost  a  generic  character,  as  for  instance 
in  Batocrinus^  where  the  posterior  rays  are  generally  more 
developed.  In  Eretmocrinus  the  anterior  and  two  posterior  rays 
are  less  developed  than  the  antero-lateral  rays.  In  some  genera 
the  arms  appear  to  be  limited  to  a  certain  number,  in  others 
the}^  vary.  In  the  typical  Actinocrinus  there  are  species  with 
four,  five,  six,  seven  and  eight  arms  to  the  ray,  but  the  normal 
number  is  uniform  in  the  different  rays.  In  all  these  cases,  how- 
ever, as  well  as  not  unfrequently  within  the  limits  of  species, 
there  are  exceptions. 

3.  Interradials  and  Anals. 

The  interradial  and  anal  plates  occupy  the  intermediate  spaces 
between  the  five  radial  divisions  or  raj'S  in  the  bod}',  and  their 
number  and  shape  depends  altogether  upon  the  number,  position 
and.  proportions  of  the  radial  plates.  They  vary  from  a  single 
plate  to  twent}'  or  more,  but  are  represented  even  in  the  young 
crinoid  by  at  least  one  plate.  In  species  in  which  the  secondary 
radials  of  adjacent  rays  abut  laterally,  the  number  of  interradials 
is  naturally  small,  but  when  higher  orders  of  radials  are  present, 
and  especially  when  the  raj'S  are  widel}-  separated,  the  number  is 


186  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

comparatively  much  larger.  When  the  second  and  third  radials 
are  short,  the  number  of  interradials  decreases,  and  it  increases 
when  they  are  long  and  narrow.  This  increase  in  number  takes 
place  by  interpolation,  contrary  to  the  radials  in  which  the  increase 
is  from  the  distal  ends  of  the  rays.  The  interradials  are  designed 
to  fill  up  vacant  spaces  in  the  test,  and  this  accounts  to  some 
extent  for  the  great  diversity  which  is  found  in  their  number 
within  the  limits  of  a  genus,  and  within  species  at  different  stages 
of  maturity.  The  first  interradial  is  always  larger  than  any  of  the 
rest,  and  is  situated  between  the  upper  sloping  margins  of  the 
adjoining  first  radials,  except  in  some  species  of  the  Rhodocrinidse 
in  which  it  rests  directly  upon  the  basals,  separating  the  ring 
completely.  There  are  generally  two  plates  in  the  second  series, 
and  two  or  three  in  each  succeeding  one,  but  in  forms  where  the 
secondary  or  tertiary  radials  form  an  arch  over  tlie  interradial 
spaces,  as  in  Batocrinus,  there  is  often  only  a  single  plate  in  the 
second  or  third  series.  The  plates  decrease  in  size  upwards, 
those  of  the  uppermost  row  being  sometimes  barely  visible  to  the 
eye. 

The  posterior  or  anal  area  is  readily  recognized  in  most  of  the 
Sph.Troidocrinidse  by  its  greater  width,  and  by  having  a  larger 
number,  and  a  somewhat  diflerent  arrangement  of  plates.  In 
most  of  the  genera  the  first  anal  plate  is  in  line  with  the  first 
radials,  resting  upon  the  basals.  In  our  remarks  upon  the 
Cyathocrinidfe  we  noted  the  fact  that  in  that  family  the  anal  plates, 
with  a  few  exceptions,  are  directed  toward  the  right  side.  In  the 
Sphffiroidocrinidse,  on  the  contrary,  the  symmetry  is  always  bi- 
lateral, in  some  cases  almost  perfectly  pentahedral,  and  a  vertical 
section  through  the  median  line  of  the  anal  area,  the  anal  aper- 
ture, the  central  dome  plate,  and  along  the  anterior  ray,  divides 
the  body  invariably  into  two  equal  parts,  and  this  symmetry,  which 
extends  to  the  arrangement  of  the  arms,  is  one  of  the  most  char- 
acteristic features  of  the  fiunily. 

The  term  "anal  plates,"  as  now  used,  designates  the  entire 
series  of  plates  which  compose  the  posterior  interradius.  Properly 
speaking,  however,  this  is  not  quite  correct.  Careful  examina- 
tion shows  clearly  that  the  majority  of  these  plates  are  in  the 
true  sense  of  the  word  "  interradials,"  while  only  a  few  of  them 
are  actuall}'  "  anals,"  by  which  we  understand  plates  supporting 
the  anus,  or  that  can  be  accounted  for  as  being  in  any  way,  directly 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  18t 

or  indirectly,  connected  with  that  organ.  In  the  earlier  genera, 
Glyptocriniis,  Beteocrinus,  Glyptaster,  Archaeocrinus,  Eucrinus, 
and  in  all  genera  up  to  the  Subcarboniferous  in  which  the  anal 
opening  is  lateral,  the  posterior  area  is  distinctly'  divided  into  two 
equal  parts  by  a  single  median  row  of  plates.  This  row,  which 
often  extends  to  the  anal  opening,  is  composed  of  the  true  anal 
plates,  but  the  plates  on  either  side  of  it  are  interradials.  By 
considering  the  latter,  without  regard  to  the  median  row,  it  will 
be  found,  that  the  two  sections  taken  together  correspond  exactly 
in  number  and  general  arrangement  with  the  interradials  of  the 
other  areas,  or  at  least  differ  not  more  than  the  other  four  differ 
among  themselves.  But  it  must  be  observed  that  in  genera  in 
which  the  first  anal  plate  rests  directly  upon  the  basals  {Glyptaster, 
Eucrinus,  Dorycrmus,  etc.),  the  first  true  interradial  in  the  pos- 
terior area  is  divided,  and  is  represented  by  two  smaller  plates, 
separated  by  a  special  anal  plate  (PI.  XIX,  fig.  2).  In  these  genera 
the  anals  proper  extend  from  the  basals  to  the  anal  aperture. 
Glyptocrinus  and  its  congeners,  in  which  there  is  no  anal  piece 
represented  between  the  first  radials  and  in  which  the  first  interra- 
dial range,  consists  of  a  single  plate  in  all  five  spaces,  the  special 
anal  plates  begin  with  the  second  range  in  which  there  are  three 
plates.  In  later  geological  times,  when  the  anal  opening  became 
more  central,  the  special  anal  plates  decreased  to  two  or  three, 
and  in  the  t3'pical  Actinocrinidie  in  which  we  include  the  genera 
Actinocrinus,  Amphoracrinus,  Strotocrinus,  Physetocrinus  and 
Steganocrinus,  they  are  reduced  to  a  single  plate. 

Some  of  the  Platj^crinidas  have  no  special  anal  piece,  and  the 
posterior  side  differs  merely  b}^  having  a  somewhat  larger  inter- 
radial, others  however,  as  Dichocrinus  and  Hexacrinus,  have  a 
very  large  special  plate.  In  some  of  the  Rhodocrinidfe,  like  the 
Calyptocrinidfe,  the  symmetry  of  the  cal3'x  is  almost  regularly 
pentahedral,  and  none  of  the  plates  of  the  posterior  side  are 
actually  anals. 

4.  Interaxillary  Plates. 

The  space  within  the  axil  of  the  secondar}^  radials  is  frequently 
filled  by  plates,  for  which  we  proposed  in  the  first  part  of  this 
work  the  name  "  axillarj^  plates."  This  designation  is  undoutedly 
appropriate,  but  finding  that  it  had  been  previousl}-  used  b}'  several 
authors  for  the  bifurcating  plates,  we  have  thought  best,  in  order 


188  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

to  avoid  confusion,  to  nse  the  term  "  interaxillary  "  for  these 
plates. 

In  the  Platyeriniclffi,  which  have  rare]}'  more  than  a  single  order 
of  radials  within  the  calyx,  interaxillary  plates  are  not  represented. 
In  the  ActinocrinidjB  and  Rhodocrinidfe  the}^  may  be  present  or 
absent  in  the  same  species,  and  sometimes  in  different  rays  of  the 
same  specimen,  their  number,  like  that  of  the  interradials,  increas- 
ing with  age. 

Roemer  and  Joh.  Miiller  considered  the  presence  of  interaxll- 
lai'ies  as  of  generic  value,  and  the  latter  proposed  a  division  of 
the  genus  Actinoci'iniis,  placing  all  species  having  those  plates 
under  Pyxidocrinus;  but  it  is  evident  that  such  a  division  is  alto- 
gether artificial  and  not  warranted  by  the  facts,  and  if  carried  out 
would  produce  confusion. 

5.  Yault. 

One  of  the  writers,  in  a  paper  upon  "  the  internal  and  external 
structure  of  Paleozoic  Crinoids  "  (Am.  Jour.  Sci.,  Sept.  187*7), 
discussed  the  importance  of  the  vault  with  reference  to  classifica- 
tion. It  was  noted  that  in  a  large  number  of  genera,  among  them 
Actinocrimis,  Rhodocrinus  and  Platycrinus,  and  their  allies,  the 
ventral  coA'cring  is  composed  of  strong  plates  closely  cemented 
together,  and  that  these  form  a  free  arch  which  braces  the  entire 
oral  side  of  the  body  without  the  aid  of  oral  plates.  This  is  the 
general  character  of  the  vault  in  the  family  under  consideration. 

The  vault  in  the  Sphseroidocrinidae  is  usually  well  preserved, 
owing  to  its  solid  structure,  and  is  capable  of  accurate  definition. 
Its  plates  var}'  from  a  few  to  many  hundred ;  but,  notwith- 
standing this  diversity-  in  number,  their  arrangement  is  governed 
by  definite  rules.  Certain  of  these  plates,  which  we  have  termed 
the  "  apical  dome  plates,"  are  represented  in  every  species  of  this 
group.  They  consist  of  a  central  piece,  occupying  a  position 
directl}''  above  the  oral  centre,  which  in  this  family  is  quite 
uniformly  the  centre  of  the  disk.  It  is  surrounded  by  six  prox- 
imal plates,  interradial  in  position,  of  which  four  are  large,  and 
equal,  and  two  smaller.  The  four  large  plates  are  placed  above 
the  four  regular  interradial  spaces  respectivel}^ ;  the  two  smaller 
plates  which  are  equivalent  to  and  take  the  place  of  one  large  plate, 
are  directed  posteriori}-,  being  separated  from  each  other  by  anal 
plates  or  the  proboscis.  These  seven  plates  are  easily  recognized 
in  species  with  comparatively  few  summit  pieces  and  a  lateral 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  189 

anal  aperture  (PL  XYIIT,  figs.  1  and  9),  but  their  identification  is 
often  difficult  in  forms  in  which  a  large  subcentral  anal  tube  is 
interposed  between  the  two  small  plates,  pushing  them  toward 
the  anterior  side,  while  the  central  piece  rests  against  the  side  of 
the  anal  tube.    (PI.  XYIII,  fig.  8). 

There  are  other  vault  pieces  occupying  a  radial  position  which  are 
sither  in  contact  with  those  just  described,  or,  as  is  more  frequently 
the  case,  separated  from  them  by  a  belt  of  small  pieces.  Their 
number  varies  considerably  among  species,  and  depends  upon  the 
number  of  primary  arms,  without  reference  to  the  number  of  bifur- 
cations after  they  become  free.  They  increase  in  proportion  to 
the  number  of  pi'imarj'  arms,  in  the  same  manner  and  on  the  same 
principle  as  the  plates  of  the  calj^x,  each  order  of  radials  has  its 
corresponding  plates  in  the  vault.  Therefore,  in  adult  specimens, 
with  some  practice  the  number  of  arms  can  be  ascertained  as  well 
from  the  dome  as  from  the  calyx.  In  species  with  two  arms  to 
the  ray,  there  are  two  ranges  of  corresponding  radial  plates  in  the 
dome  ;  the  first  or  upper  being  a  large  bifurcating  plate,  equiva- 
lent to  the  primary  radials  of  the  caljx.  This  is  followed  by  two 
other  plates,  which  take  the  place  of  the  secondary  radials,  one 
over  each  arm  base,  with  a  third  plate — an  interbrachial — between 
them. 

When  there  are  three  arms  to  the  ray,  there  are  three  ranges 
of  radial  dome  plates,  two  plates  in  direct  succession  from  the 
large  bifurcating  plate  toward  the  single  arm,  and  a  second  bifur- 
cation, with  one  plate  in  each  branch,  toward  the  division  with  two 
arms.  In  species  with  four  arms  to  the  ray,  there  are  two  secoudarj^ 
bifurcations,  producing  radial  dome  plates  of  a  tMrd  order,  leading 
to  each  arm  base,  and  so  on.  There  are  also  interradial  plates 
represented  in  the  summit,  occupying  intermediate  spaces  between 
the  radials,  but  their  arrangement  is  very  irregular  and  their 
number  variable.  In  some  genera  the  number  of  vault  pieces  is 
enormous,  notably  in  Strotocrinus,  which  has  a  large  number  of 
arms.  Looking  at  such  a  specimen  with  its  vast  number  of 
apparentl}"  irregular  vault  pieces,  one  would  scarcely  expect  to 
find  this  multitude  of  plates  arranged  upon  a  definite  plan  ;  and 
this  the  same  that  prevails  in  the  calj'x. 

We  have  called  the  principal  plates  in  the  vault  apical  dome 
plates,  because  thej^  correspond  to  the  apical  plates  of  the  aboral 
side.     The  six  proximal  plates  surrounding  the  central  piece  repre- 


190  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

sent  the  basals  or  genitals,  and  the  radial  dome  plates,  the  radials 
or  oculars.  The  centre  piece  may  perhaps  be  compared  with  the 
underbasals,  or  the  subanal  plate  of  the  Echini. 

The  apical  dome  plates,  as  the  apical  plates  of  the  cal^-x,  are 
fundamental  elements,  and  are  represented  in  the  vault  of  all 
Sphffiroidocrinidse  both  in  the  3^oung  and  the  adult,  from  the 
Lower  Silurian  to  the  Subcarboniferous.  They  are  generallj' 
larger  than  the  other  dome  plates,  and  more  prominent,  frequently 
nodose  or  spiniferous,  though  in  some  species  they  cannot,  at 
least  in  mature  specimens,  be  readily  distinguished  from  the  other 
dome-plates  which  have  attained  equal  size.  In  some  genera, 
for  instance,  CuUcocrinus,  Miiller,  they  occupy  almost  the  entire 
ventral  disk ;  in  Glyptocrinus  and  Bhodocrinus^  on  the  contrary, 
they  fill  only  the  median  part.  In  some  species  of  Dorycrinus 
the  central  piece  is  spiniferous  and  the  radials  nodose  ;  in  others, 
all  these  plates  are  spiniferous.  In  Amphoracrinus  only  the  four 
larger  proximal  dome  plates  are  nodose  or  spiniferous  ;  in  Agari- 
cocrinus allapical  plates  are  tuberculose ;  in Batocrinus  the  entire 
dome  is  composed  of  nodose  plates.  The  proximal  plates  in  some 
species  are  attached  to  the  centre  plate,  in  others  separated  from 
it  by  a  ring  of  small  accessory  pieces,  and  in  still  others  the  centre 
piece  is  entirely  isolated  by  the  wide  belt  of  minute  pieces.  The 
latter  is  frequently  the  case  in  large  specimens,  and  in  genera  with 
but  few  primary  arms,  like  3Iegistocrinus.  In  this  genus  it  is  inter- 
esting to  find  in  very  young  specimens  and  in  the  smaller  species 
the  central  and  proximal  plates  in  contact,  while  in  the  larger  and 
adult  specimens  all  are  isolated,  even  the  proximal  plates  being 
separated  from  each  other.  The  radial  dome  plates  are  sometimes 
attached  to  the  other  apical  plates,  frequently  so  in  young  speci- 
mens, and  generally  in  the  Platycrinidaj. 

In  Platycrinus  the  radial  series  of  the  dome  is  composed  of 
two  rows  of  pieces  alternately  arranged,  which  decrease  in  size 
toward  the  arm  bases,  and  of  which  the  fii-st  and  larger  plate  fits 
in  the  angle  of  two  adjacent  proximal  plates. 

The  vault  of  the  Platycrinidtie  differs  in  several  particulars 
from  that  of  the  other  Sphseroidocrinidoe,  and  in  these  same  char- 
acters it  approaches  the  Cyathocrinidte.  We  elsewhere  suggest 
that  the  Platycrinoid  is  the  simplest  form  of  the  Sphiieroido- 
crinidse,  and  that  it  represents  the  j-ounger  stage  of  the  famil}'. 
This  is  indicated  by  the  construction  of  the  calyx,  but  not  less  b}^ 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  191 

the  structure  of  the  vault.  In  the  genus  Coccocrinus  Miiller, 
one  of  its  earliest  forms,  the  vault  is  composed  of  five  large  oral 
plates,  resting  upon  the  upper  truncate  side  of  a  single  interradial, 
and,  as  found  in  the  fossil,  it  has  a  central  oral  opening  and 
lateral  grooves  for  the  ambulacral  furrows.  Zittel  has  already- 
noted  the  close  resemblance  of  the  above  structure  with  the  recent 
genus  Hyocrinns  Wj'ville  Thomson,  and  the  larval  state  of 
Coma;!M?a,  calling  it  very  appropriately  "  ein  embryonales  Stadium 
von  Comatula  in  persistenter  Form."  The  similiarity  to  Hyo- 
crinus  is  probably  merel}"  superficial,  as  the  lateral  grooves  in 
Coccocrinus  were  evidentlj^  closed  by  additional  plates  as  in  other 
Platycrinidae,  while  they  are  open  in  Hyocrinus.  The  oi'al  plates 
of  Coccocrinus  have  been,b3'  several  authors,  confounded  with  an 
apparently  similar  superstructure  in  Symbathocrinus,  Tnacrinus 
and  other  forms,  but  there  is  really  no  analogy  between  the  two 
structures.  The  parts  which  enclose  the  opening  at  the  oral 
centre  in  the  latter  forms  are  radial  in  position,  and  therefore 
not  oral  plates,  but  merely  extended  articulating  facets  of  the 
radials.  In  those  genera,  the  central  space,  like  the  opening  at 
the  centre  of  the  oral  plates,  is  also  closed  in  perfect  specimens 
by  apical  dome  plates,  which  rest  directly  upon  the  extended  pro- 
cesses. This  group  will  be  introduced  hereafter  as  a  separate 
family  under  the  name  SymbathocrinidtB. 

The  ventral  disk  in  Coccocrinus  bears  a  close  resemblance  to 
that  of  Cyathocrinus,  but  while  the  former  has  an  additional  inter- 
radial  interposed  between  its  radial  and  oral  plates,  in  Cyatho- 
crinus  the  intermediate  plate  is  absent,  and  the  oral  plate  rests 
against  the  incurved  upper  margins  of  the  radials.  In  Platycrinus 
and  similar  genera,  the  two  series  of  alternate  plates  which,  as 
mentioned  before,  cover  the  radial  regions  of  the  dome,  are  inter- 
posed between  three  and  sometimes  five  interradial  plates,  which 
in  Coccocrinus  as  oral  and  interradial  plates  occupy  the  same 
position.  This  suggests  the  question  whether  these  plates  in  the 
Platycrinidae,  and  the  interradial  dome  plates  in  the  Sphteroido- 
crinidoe  generally,  are  not  the  homologues  of  the  oral  plates,  which 
are  here  broken  up,  and  represented  by  several  plates  instead  of 
one.  This  interpretation  seems  to  us  the  more  probable  because 
Coccocrinus  is  one  of  the  earliest  known  forms  of  the  Platycrinidae, 
and  may  be  considered  an  embryonic  type  of  the  family. 
The   homology:    in   Platycrinus^   however,   extends   only  to   the 


192  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

second  or  upper  row  of  interradials,  the  first  interradial,  -which 
exceptionally  in  this  group  is  placed  almost  within  the  dome 
regions,  is  identical  with  the  outer  interradial  plate  of  Coccocrinus, 
and  as  such  forms  part  of  the  apical  and  not  of  the  oral  system. 

This  Adew  differs  somewhat  from  that  expressed  by  us  in  Part 
I,  p.  13,  where  we  stated  that  the  oral  plate  of  the  Cyathocrinidse 
had  "  no  representative  in  the  vault  of  the  Actinocrinidse.atleast  not 
externally ; "  we  were  not  at  tliat  time  acquainted,  with  the  genus 
Coccocrinus^  which  has  given  us  new  light  upon  the  subject.  We 
have  thought  heretofore  that  perhaps  the  triangular  porous 
structures  arranged  around  the  inner  test  of  many  Actinocri- 
nidae,  might  be  the  homologues  of  the  oral  plates. 

The  vault  throughout  the  Sphjeroidocrinidfe  is  perforated  with 
a  single  opening,  which  in  all  of  them  is  more  or  less  exeentric  ; 
in  some  lateral  and  placed  toward  the  periphery  of  the  disk ;  in 
others  sub-central  leaning  toward  the  posterior  side  of  the  body. 
The  construction  of  the  parts  at  the  inner  surface  of  the  dome 
proves  that  the  opening  communicated  with  the  posterior  side  of 
the  visceral  cavity,  not  with  the  digestive  organs.  It  is  sejDarated 
from  the  ambulacral  and  oral  systems  by  a  strong  partition 
attached  to  the  inner  surface  of  the  vault,  and  hence  the  opening 
represents  the  anus,  and  is  not  the  oral  aperture,  as  has  been 
supi^osed  by  the  earlier  writers. 

The  anus  is  either  in  the  form  of  a  simple  opening  through  the 
vault,  or  is  prolonged  into  a  tube,  which  in  Batocrinus  sometimes 
attains  a  length  of  three  times  the  height  of  the  body  including 
the  arms.  The  tube  is  in  all  cases  composed  of  heavy,  generally 
nodose,  wedge-form  pieces,  which  are  firmly  put  together,  giving 
but  little  flexibility  to  the  structure.  It  has  no  openings  or  pores 
through  its  plates  or  at  the  sutures,  but  has  in  the  centre  a 
comparatively  small  passage,  with  a  minute  outlet  at  the  extremit3^ 
In  cases  where  the  anus  is  not  extended  into  a  tube,  the  aperture 
is  generally  situated  within  the  centre  of  a  wart-like  inflation  com- 
posed of  very  small  pieces.  It  is  possible  that  in  such  cases  the 
small  inner  plates  formed  a  little  pliable  tube,  which  could  be 
drawn  in  by  the  animal  like  the  anus  in  recents  Ci'inoids,^  but  a 

^  In  the  genus  Codonites  of  the  Blastoidea,  we  find  in  connection  with 
the  anal  opening  a  similar  little  tube,  which  we  found  in  one  specimen 
extended  outward,  while  in  another,  traces  of  its  little  plates  are  left 
within  the  opening. 


1881.]    ■  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  193 

contraction  of  the  long  solid  tube  of  Acfinoo'inus,  as  has  been 
suggested  by  Austin,  is  wholl3'  impossible. 

There  has  been  considerable  difference  of  opinion  as  to  whether 
species  with  a  solid  anal  tube  should  be  separated  from  those  with 
a  simple  opening.  Cousidering  the  slight  distinctious  upon  which 
many  of  the  genera  have  been  founded,  it  would  seem  that  the 
tubular  structure  ought  to  be  of  sufficient  importance  to  justify  a 
generic  separation ;  but  when  we  consider  that  various  generic 
groups,  after  being  carefully  restricted  with  reference  to  all  other 
characters,  include  both  forms,  its  value  as  a  full  generic  character 
must  be  somewhat  doubtful.  We  once  supposed  that  it  might  be 
a  sexual  difference,  but  the  specific  relations  of  the  forms  thus 
distinguished  do  not  sustain  that  supposition.  Both  forms  are 
not  found  in  all  the  groups,  though  they  exist  in  many,  and 
throughout  all  divisions  of  this  famil}'.  In  some  cases  generic 
separations  have  been  made  upon  this  character,  as  for  instance 
Physetocrinus  has  been  divided  from  Actinocrinus,  Alloprosallo- 
crinus  from  Agaricocrinus^  etc.,  while  in  other  cases  as  Platy- 
criniis^  GJy2:)tocrinus  and  Strotocinnus  both  forms  have  been 
retained  in  the  same  genus.  It  must  also  be  observed,  in  this 
connection,  that  in  some  cases,  especially  species  with  a  very 
slender  proboscis  like  Batocrinus  rotundus^  we  find  occasionally 
specimens  in  which  the  tube  seems  to  have  been  accidentally 
broken  awaj^  during  the  life  of  the  animal,  and  in  which  the 
fractured  edges  of  its  base  had  become  absorbed  and  rounded, 
giving  it  the  appearance  of  a  naturalh^  simple  oj>ening.  That  the 
simple  opening  could  have  been  produced  in  a  like  manner  in 
Strotocrinus  and  other  genera,  no  one  would  for  a  moment  suppose 
after  examining  good  specimens. 

The  fact  that  the  crinoid  lived  on  without  the  tube,  at  least 
proves  that  this  structure  had  no  important  influence  upon  the 
general  organization  of  these  animals. 

A  tube  is  more  freqiiently  found  in  genera  in  which  the  arms 
are  arranged  in  a  continuous  series  around  the  body,  while  in 
species  with  a  simple  lateral  opening  the  arms  are  arranged  more 
or  less  in  clusters,  leaving  wide  spaces  between  the  ra3's.  In  the 
former  case,  the  long  tube  could  discharge  the  excrements  free 
from  the  arms,  and  in  the  latter  it  was  not  needed  as  the  refuse 
matter  could  be  easily  discharged  between  the  bases  of  the  arm 
clusters.     In  view  of  these  facts,  we  think  a  subgeneric  division 

14 


194  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE    ACADEMY   OF  *       [1881. 

sufficient  to  mark  the  two  structures,  but  this  should  be  done 
uniformly  and  we  shall  accordingly  propose  subgenera  where 
necessary  for  this  purpose. 

The  vault  does  not  completely  cover  the  calyx,  but  leaves  along 
the  line  of  junction  a  row  of  oval  or  circular  passages  which  have 
been  called  arms  or  "  ambulacral  openings."  The  belt  in  which 
they  occur  is  known  as  the  "  arm  regions,"  and  their  distribution 
in  the  different  rays  is  expressed  by  the  "  arm  formula."  Thi'ough 
the  arm  openings  which  are  veiy  conspicuous  in  the  Sphaeroido- 
cnnidii:',  food  entered  the  body,  and  the}^  served  as  passages  for 
the  ambulacral  vessels.  In  a  mature  specimen  the  number  of 
primar}^  arms  can  be  ascertained  by  counting  the  arm  openings  ; 
but  not  always  in  young  specimens,  or  in  species  in  which  the 
radial  portions  are  extended  into  free  ra^'s. 

By  "  free  rays  "  we  mean  lateral  extensions  of  the  body,  com- 
posed of  a  succession  of  radials,  unconnected  by  interradials,  and 
covered  with  similar  plates,  as  solidly  and  in  the  same  manner  as 
the  radial  portions  of  the  dome  proper.  These  free  rays,  whether 
composed  of  only  a  few  plates  as  in  Plafycrinus,  or  extended 
almost  to  the  full  length  of  the  arms  as  in  Eucladocrinus  and 
Steganocrinus,  are  actually  portions  of  the  body,  and  the  arms  are 
given  off  from  them  in  the  same  manner  as  from  the  body  in  other 
cases. 

In  the  PlatyCrinid^  generally ,  there  are  within  the  calyx  primary 
radials  onlj^,  all  the  higher  orders  of  radials  being  included  within 
the  free  ra3^s.  In  the  body  of  a  Platycrinus  in  its  ordinary  preser- 
vation, we  find  but  five  arm  openings,  but  whenever  the  bifurcating 
plate  is  well  preserved  at  its  distal  end,  ten  openings  are  Ausible,^ 
and  these  form  passages  for  the  free  rays  which  here  divide,  each 
branch  giving  off  arms  laterally  and  from  opposite  sides.  The 
free  rays  are  rarely  preserved  in  the  fossil  unless  the  arms  are 
attached,  when  they  really  appear  like  arms  and  have  been 
described  as  such.  That  they  are  not  arms  is  proved  by  the  fact 
that  their  ventral  side  is  not  provided  with  a  furrow,  but  is 
covered  in  the  same  way  as  the  vault  proper.  In  these  forms,  as 
might  be  expected,  the  number  of  arms  cannot  be  determined  from 

^  This  proves  that  P.  Herbert  Carpenter  is  correct  in  saying  that  the 
division  of  the  arms  actually  begins  at  the  middle  of  the  bifurcating  plates, 
(pn  Actinometra,  p.  22). 


1881.]     ■  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  195 

the  arm  openings,  unless  the  full  length  of  the  ra}'  is  preserved  ; 
any  fracture  of  the  ray,  whether  cutting  off  one  arm  or  a  dozen, 
shows  in  the  specimen  onl}'  a  single  opening. 

The  Platycrinoid  with  its  simple  form,  is  similar  in  structure 
to  the  young  Actinocrinoid,in  which  some  portions  of  the  ray  are 
yet  in  the  condition  of  free  appendages.  The  young  Actinocrinoid, 
at  this  stage,  has  the  same  number  of  arms  as  the  adult ;  but  in 
species  with  numerous  arms,  the  upper  divisions  of  the  ray,  which 
in  the  mature  animal  are  incorporated  in  the  body  walls  by  means 
of  interradial  and  interaxillary  plates,  form  free  appendages  in 
the  younger  stage,  and  consequently  the  number  of  arms  is 
comparatively  less  than  in  full  grown  individuals.  In  Slroto- 
crini's,  which  has  the  greatest  number  of  arms,  we  find  in  very 
3'oung  specimens  only  four  arm  openings  to  the  raj' ;  approaching 
maturity  there  are  eight,  afterwards  twelve,  and  in  fully  matured 
individuals  there  are  perhaps  sixteen  or  more.  Specimens  in 
different  stages  of  growth,  have  frequently  been  described  as 
distinct  species  on  account  of  variation  in  the  number  of  arm 
openings  ;  and  this  has  even  been  extended  to  genera.  As  growth 
progressed,  the  upper  branches  gradually  lost  their  free  character 
by  being  absorbed  into  the  body  walls  through  the  interpolation 
of  interradials  and  interaxillaries,  both  in  the  calj^x  and  in  the 
vault.  The  plates  which  covered  the  ventral  side  of  the  free 
appendages  were  thus  drawn  into  the  vault,  and  became  at  length 
a  part  of  the  main  bodj^ ;  but  the  Platj'crinidfe,  which  have  no 
interaxillaries  nor  increase  of  interradials,  retain  the  free  append- 
ages during  life. 

As  a  general  rule  it  may  be  asserted,  that  in  the  Sphreroido- 
crinidffi  the  plates  of  the  vault  increase  in  number  outward  in  a 
similar  manner  to  the  plates  of  the  calyx.  The  various  plates  of 
which  the  body  is  composed  might  be  separated  into  two  classes : 

1.  Plates  which  either  do  not  increase  in  number,  or  do  so  only 
at  the  distal  ends,  and  not  by  interpolation,  including  the  basals, 
radials  and  arm  plates. 

2.  Plates  which  increase  by  interpolation  only,  including  the 
underbasals,  interradials,  anals  and  interaxillaries,  to  which  we 
might  add  the  joints  of  the  column. 


19g  proceedings  of  the  academy  of  [1881. 

6,  Arms  and  1'innules. 
The  arms  in  the  Sphseroidocrinidae  are  either  simple  or  branch- 
ing, and  are  constructed  either  of  a  single  or  double  series  of 
joints.      Single   arm  joints   are   restricted   to   the   Silurian,    all 
Devonian  and  Subcarboniferous  genera  have  two  rows  of  alter- 
nately arranged  joints  in  the  arms.    In  the  Cyathocrinidfe,  almost 
to  the  close  of  the  Subcarboniferous,  the  arms  are  composed  of 
single  joints,  but  in  the  Kaskaskia  Limestone  and  Coal  Measures 
a  few  species  occur  with  double-jointed  arms,  intermingled,  how- 
ever, Avith  species  apparentl}'  of  the  same  genus,  in  which  the  arms 
are  constructed  of  single  wedge-form  joints  alternately  arranged. 
These   two   structures   run  so  closely  into  each   other  through 
transition  forms,  that  we  have  been  compelled  to  arrange  them 
in    some    cases    under    the    same   genus,   although  we   have   in. 
other  cases  considered  the  arm  structure  to  be  of  generic  import- 
ance.    For  tliis  we  have  been  criticised  by  Prof.  Wetherby,  of 
Cincinnati,  who  thinks  it  "  a  singular  statement,  that  a  character 
in  forms  of  the  same  geological  age  may  be  generic  in  one  case, 
and  only  specific  in  another."     He  evidently  overlooks  the  fact 
that  all  Crinoids  in  their  young  stage  have  single-jointed  arms, 
and  that  the  double-jointed  feature  is  a  product  of  growth  which 
primarilj-  was  only  an  individual  variation,  but  which,  by  becom- 
ing fixed  and  constant  in  certain  forms,  attained  generic  value, 
especially  when  taken  in  connection  with  other  characters.     The 
best  specific  and  generic  and  even  famil}'  characters,  originated  in 
individual  A^ariation,  and  at  some  period  in  the  paleontological 
history  of  the  organism  were  without  value  as  a  means  of  classi- 
fication.    Near  the  close  of  the  existence  of  the  family  Cyatho- 
crinida?,  the  double-jointed  arm  structure  began  to  be  developed, 
in  some  forms  irregularly,  in  others  to  such  a  degree  as  to  be 
constant,  and  to  form  a  distinguishing  characteristic  of  many 
species,  which  thus  fell  naturally  into  a   generic  group.     This 
process  is  illustrated    in  Eupachycrinus,  Hydreionocrinus  and 
Erisocrinus^  and  there  are  similar  examples  among  the  Sphseroido- 
crinidae.     The  young  Platycrinus  and  Actinocrinus  have  a  single 
series  of  cuneiform  arm  joints,  which  are  constructed  exactly  like 
those  of  the  adult  Poteriocrinus^  and  the  pinnules  are  given  off  in 
a  like  manner.     At  a  more  advanced  stage  the  joints  begin  to 
enlarge  laterally  in  such  a  manner  that  the  sharp  inner  angles 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  197 

interlock.  This  process  commences  at  the  extremities  of  the 
arras,  and  gradually  involves  the  lower  portions  down  to  the  bases. 
During  this  stage  we  often  find  the  lower  arm  joints  quadrangular, 
with  parallel  sutures,  followed  by  wedge-form  and  cuneiform  pieces, 
and  finall\-  the  tips  constructed  of  a  double  series  of  plates. 

The  same  development,  which  thus  took  place  during  the  life  of 
the  individual,  is  observed  to  go  on  in  geological  times,  but  not 
contemporaneously  in  different  families.  In  the  Actinocrinidffi 
and  Platycrinida?  it  became  complete  in  the  Silurian,  and  is  found 
invariably  in  all  succeedyig  forms.  In  the  Cyathocrinidie,  that 
structure  appeared  only  at  the  close  of  the  Subcarboniferous 
shortly  before  the  famih'  became  extinct.  In  this  group,  the  arm 
pieces  attained  that  marked  wedge-form  which  everywhere  ])re- 
ceded  the  double  joints  in  the  Burlington  limestone,  and  here  in 
some  species  of  Poteriocrinus  and  Cceliocrinus  the  plates  beo-an 
to  interlock  already  at  the  tips  of  the  arms.  This  became  more 
frequent  and  more  conspicuous  in  the  Kaskaskia  group,  where  in 
some  few  cases,  it  extended  to  the  entire  arm. 

The  ditierent  stages  of  individual  growth,  as  the3'  became  gradu- 
ally introduced  paleontologically  and  fixed,  undoubtedly  form 
excellent  generic  characters,  but  we  must  not  forget  that  there 
was  a  time  in  the  life  of  the  crinoid  at  which  the  arms  were 
neither  single-  nor  double-jointed,  but  at  which  the  joints  began 
to  interlock,  and  when  probably  a  very  few  daj^s  brought  about 
important  changes  in  the  arms  of  the  growing  animal.  This 
stage  is  represented  paleontologicallj^  among  the  C3^athocrinid£e 
b}'  Eupachycrinus,  Erisocrinus  and  Hydreionocrinus,  and  jn  this 
view  of  the  ease  it  is  not  difficult  to  understand  how  this  arm 
structure  may  be  of  generic  importance  as  a  rule,  but  scarcely  of 
specific  value  in  exceptional  cases. 

It  has  been  stated  that  the  double-joint  structure  was  introduced 
in  the  Spha^roidocrinidaj  in  the  Silurian,  and  this  occurred  under 
exactly  the  same  conditions  as  it  did  later  on  in  the  Cvathocri- 
nidse.  By  far  the  greater  number  of  species  in  the  Lower  Silurian 
have  single  arm  joints,  and  these,  with  a  few  exceptions,  consist  of 
quadrangular  pieces  with  parallel  sutures.  In  the  Upper  Silurian 
we  find  a  few  forms  with  single  joints,  and  along  with  them  arms 
with  cuneiform  joints — either  interlocking  or  not — associated  in 
the  same  strata  with  species  having  double  series  of  arm  plates 
and  we  find  all  intermediate  gradations  between  the  two  extremes. 


198  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

In  some  of  these  species  the  two  structures  are  found  combined, 
in  others  so  closely  associated  that  it  is  next  to  impossible  to 
separate  them ;  and  in  still  others  the  extremes  are  separately 
represented.  Generic  divisions  based  upon  these  variations,  unless 
accompanied  by  other  distinctive  characters,  seem  to  be  unneces- 
sary and  inexpedient.  It  would  require  the  creation  of  a  large 
number  of  new  genera,  which  would  probably  have  to  be  sub- 
divided to  accommodate  other  transitional  forms,  and  so  on  with- 
out end. 

The  double  series  of  joints  resulted  from  the  increasing  width 
and  outward  growth  of  the  arm  ;  hence  arm  joints  which  originally 
Avere  simple  and  cuneate  did  not  in  the  mature  animal  extend 
througli  the  full  width  of  the  arm,  but  gradually  interlocked  by 
their  shai'p  angles,  so  that  joints  on  each  side,  which  at  first  were 
separated  b}^  another  joint,  came  by  degrees  to  be  partly  in  con- 
tact and  to  rest  upon  each  other.  Therefore,  in  double-jointed 
arms  every  joint  at  each  side  bears  a  pinnule,  while  in  those  with 
single  joints  the  pinnules  are  found  only  on  alternate  sides. 

The  arms  in  the  Actinocrinidaj  and  Plat^crinidte  divide  rarely 
af:er  they  become  free,  the  branching  as  a  rule  taking  place  in  the 
body  or  in  the  free  rays,  MegUtocrinus^  Amphorac7-inus,  and 
Periechocrinus  form  the  only  exceptions.  In  the  Rhodocrinidte, 
on  the  contrary',  the  arms  branch  as  a  rule  beyond  the  calyx. 

The  ventral  grooves  in  the  arms  of  this  family  are  less  deep, 
but  comparatively  wider  than  those  of  the  Cyathocrinidae.  They 
are  bordered  on  each  side  by  a  row  of  long  pinnules,  which  cover 
them  perfectly.  Whether  the  grooves  were  closed  b}"  marginal 
plates  seems  to  us  doubtful,  although  Prof.  Wetherby  states  that 
he  has  observed  such  plates  in  Glyptocrinus.  they  probabl}^  occur 
below  the  bifurcation  where  the  arms  should  be  regarded  as  free 
ra^^s,  or  perhaps  they  are  restricted  to  oral  arms,  such  as  P.  Herbert 
Carpenter  describes  in  Actinometra 

The  pinnules  throughout  this  family  are  long,  closely  crowded 
together  laterally,  and  the  two  rows  with  which  each  arm  is  pro- 
vided fit  together  so  neatl}'^,  and  cover  the  arm  furrow  so  perfectly, 
that  additional  plates  were  scarcel}^  needed.  Each  pinnule  is  com- 
posed of  a  number  of  joints,  which  differ  in  form  in  different  genera. 
In  some  they  are  of  equal  width  .and  height,  outwardly  convex ; 
in  others  higher  than  wide,  with  the  outer  surface  flat ;  in  some 
they  are  entirely  smooth,  and  in  others  provided  with  a  peculiar 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  199 

hook ;  but  in  all  cases  they  lie  so  close  together  side  by  side,  that 
it  appears  as  if  the  pinnules  were  laterally-  attached.  In  Activo- 
crinus  and  Strotocrinus  each  pinnule  is  furnislied  near  the  middle 
of  its  outer  surface  with  a  tooth-like  spine  Avhich  curves  abruptly 
upwards  ;  these  spines  are  short  and  obtuse  near  the  arms,  but 
gradually  increase  in  length  toward  the  tips  of  the  pinnules.  As 
a  rule  the  pinnules  are  deeply  grooved  on  their  inner  surface,  and 
in  perfect  specimens  the  grooves  are  covered  by  a  double  series  of 
very  minute  pieces,  though  owing  to  defective  preservation  this 
covering  is  rarely  observed.  In  young  specimens,  while  the  arms 
are  composed  of  a  single  series  of  joints,  the  pinnules  are  not  in 
contact,  and  are  onl}^  given  off  from  the  alternate  joints,  but  when 
the  alternate  arm  joints  meet  b}^  lateral  growth,  and  the  pinnules 
attain  their  full  size  they  become  gradually  connected.  D'Orbigny's 
genus  EdwardaociHnus  was  founded  upon  a  young  Flatycrinus, 
whose  arms  and  pinnules  were  in  their  transition  state. 

T.  Internal  Cavity. 

The  construction  of  the  interior  of  the  bod}'  of  all  Paleozoic 
Crinoids  is  best  known  in  the  Sphctroidocrinidte,  among  which, 
specimens  preserving  some  parts  of  the  delicate  organs  have  occa- 
sionally been  found. 

The  inner  surface  of  the  vault  is  ofcen  deeply  grooved  toward 
the  brachial  zone,  producing  corresponding  elevations  outwardly 
on  the  test.  There  are  generally  five  large  grooves,  each  branching 
into  two  smaller  ones,  the  former  corresponding  to  the  five  rays, 
the  latter  to  their  main  divisions.  This  kind  of  vault  is  found 
most  frequently  among  the  Rhodocrinida?.  Among  the  Actino- 
crinidae  external  ridges  are  rarely  observed,  but  in  their  place 
the  vault  within  is  strengthened  with  bars  or  braces  radiating 
from  near,  but  not  joining  at  the  centre.  The  braces  widen 
toward  the  arm  bases,  where  they  fold  over  to  form  regular  tubes, 
corresponding  with  the  natural  grooves  in  the  vault  just 
described,  and  they  branch  as  those  do.  In  genera  in  which  the 
rays  are  extended  into  free  appendages,  and  in  which  but  five 
ambulacral  canals  pass  out  from  the  vault  proper  (Flatycrinus, 
Steganocrinus,  etc.),  the  grooves  are  deep  and  in  some  cases  were 
evidently  closed  and  formed  into  tunnels,  leaving,  however,  in 
either  case  beneath  the  median  portion  of  the  dome  and  in  front 
of  the  anus,  a  space  which  is  occupied  by  narrow  grooves,  meeting 


200  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

in  the  centre,  and  following  the  median  line  of  the  radial  depres- 
sions and  galleries  below  the  vault  to  the  arm  openings. 

In  some  specimens  of  ActinoorinidjB,  almost  the  entire  test  is 
lined  with  a  delicate  calcareous  i)lexus  or  network.  This  lining 
is  not  in  contact  with  the  test  directly,  but  connected  with  it  by 
small  partitions,  producing  innumerable  little  chambers,  which 
eommunicate  with  each  other  and  with  the  visceral  cavity. 
Thi're  is,  at  least,  one  such  partition  or  support  from  each  plate 
of  the  test,  generally  arising  from  the  median  portion  of  the  plate. 
(PI.  XIX,  fig.  16).  The  plexus  is  very  delicate  in  some  specimens, 
in  others — mostly  in  large  specimens — rather  dense  and  rigid, 
but  in  all  of  them  perforated  with  conspicuous  pores  or  passages, 
whose  arrangement  corresponds  with  the  direction  of  the 
sutures  between  the  plates  of  the  test.  There  is  one  pore  at 
least  to  each  angle  of  the  plate,  but  sometimes  additional  ones 
in  large  individuals.  The  structure  extends  but  little  below 
the  regions  of  the  second  radials,  leaves  passages  at  the  arm 
openings,  and  tow^ard  the  vault  reaches  to  a  place  near  the 
median  portion  of  the  ray,  leaving  at  the  centre  an  open  space  in 
the  test  which  is  occupied  by  the  central  vault  piece.  From  this 
space  five  wide  avenues,  corresponding  with  the  grooves  on 
the  inner  surface  of  the  vault,  pass  out  toward  the  arm  bases. 
The  avenues  produce  five  subtriangular  interradial  or  interpalmar 
fields,  which  are  raised  conspicuously  above  the  floor  of  the  vault. 
They  are  of  rather  dense  texture  at  the  borders,  the  inner  side 
somewhat  thickened,  while  the  surface  of  the  median  portions  is 
rough  and  uneven,  perforated  with  large  and  small  passages  which 
communicate  with  the  avenues. 

Four  of  the  interpalmar  fields  are  equal,  the  posterior  one  fre- 
quently larger  and  penetrated  by  the  anal  aperture.  In  species 
with  a  lateral  opening  all  five  fields  have  about  the  same  form, 
and  the  central  space  between  them  is  of  pentangular  outline.  The 
case  is  different  in  species  with  a  subcentral  anus,  when  frequently 
the  posterior  field  is  larger  and  encroaches  deepl}^  upon  the  middle 
space,  giving  to  it  a  lunate  instead  of  a  subcircular  or  pentangular 
outline.  In  species  of  this  kind,  the  anus  is  placed  near  the  edge 
of  the  interpnlmar  field,  but  separated  from  the  central  space 
by  a  partition  which  forms  the  border  of  the  field.  In  species 
with  secondary  radials,  the  avenues  divide,  sending  a  branch  to 


1881.  J  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  201 

each  arm,  and  forming  thereby,  between  the  interpalmar  fields,  a 
smaller  intrapalmar'  one  similarly  constructed. 

A  calcareous  lining,  such  as  described,  has  been  observed  by  us 
with  slight  variations  in  Batocrinus,  Dorycrinus,  Teleiocrinus, 
(Meek  and  Worthen's  Strotocrinus  B),  Agaricocrinus  and  Eretmo- 
crinus^  and  probably  existed  in  many  other  genera.  In  the 
Actinocriniles,  or  tj'pical  Actinocrinidre,  the  inner  framework 
was  either  less  developed,  or  was  of  a  more  perishable  nature.  In 
the  genus  Actinoci'inus  it  is  indicated  on  the  inner  floor  of  the 
test  by  little  roughened  places,  which  we  take  to  be  traces  of  the 
pillars  which  supported  it.  In  Physelocriniis  even  these  have  not 
been  observed,  but  it  is  a  characteristic  feature  of  that  genus, 
that  the  plates  of  the  calj^x  have  along  the  sutures  at  each  angle 
verv  distinct  indentations  resembling  pores,  which  give  to  the 
outer  surface  of  the  test  almost  the  appearance  of  the  inner  plexus 
in  species  of  Batocrinus  or  Dorycrinus.  Whether  there  was  any 
communication  with  the  visceral  cavity'  through  these  indenta- 
tions cannot  be  ascertained  from  the  fossil.  The  test  at  these 
points  is  exceedingly'  thin  and  transparent,  but  we  have  never 
detected  an  actual  passage.  It  must  also  be  noted  that  the  vault 
in  that  genus  has  similar  indentations,  but  these,  contrary  to  the 
others,  open  out  from  the  inner  floor  of  the  test,  being  arranged 
along  the  radial  grooves,  not  interradiall^''  as  those  along  the 
calyx  (PI.  XIX,  figs.  5  and  16).  In  Strotocrinus^  an  internal 
framework  has  been  observed  in  connection  with  the  cal^-x,  but 
none  with  the  vault,  and  its  typical  form  had  apparently,  like 
Physetocrinus,  slight  indentations  along  the  inner  floor  of  the 
vault. 

The  general  internal  structure  indicates  a  concentration  of 
organs  toward  a  point  beneath  the  centre  of  the  vault,  in  front  of 
the  anus,  but  not  to  the  anus  itself.  The  latter  is  situated  distinctly 
outside  the  radiation,  i.  e.,  interradially.  The  grooves  which  we 
have  noticed  in  the  vault  were  figured  by  De  Koninck  and  Lelion  in 
their  Recherches  Crin.  Carb.  Belg.,  but  they  seem  to  have  regarded 
them  as  muscular  impressions.  Billings,  in  the  third  and  fourth 
Decades  of  the  Canada  Geological  Report,  was  the  first  to  treat 

'  The  term  "  i/ii<;rpalmar  Felder  "  was  used  by  Joh.  Mtiller  for  the  "  in- 
terradialen  Felder  zwischen  den  Tentakelvinnen  im  Perisom  des  Penta- 
crir.us,  ' /«^?'rtpalmar  Felder '  for  the  interdistichal  Felder"  (jMonatsber. 
Berl.  Acad.  1841,  p.  218;. 


202  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

of  them  in  connection  witli  the  ambulacral  system.  He  showed 
how  impossible  it  was  that  the  ambulacral  canals  in  some  Paleo- 
zoic Crinoids  coukl  be  continued  along  the  outer  surface  of  the 
vault,  and  he  reached  the  conclusion  that  they  passed  into  the 
body  at  the  arm  bases.  It  is  remarkable  that  Billings,  after  mak- 
ing this  important  discovery,  in  connection  with  which  analogy 
suggested  that  the  food  entered  the  bod}'  in  the  same  manner, 
clung  as  late  as  1810  to  the  old  theory  that  the  subcentral  passage 
in  these  crinoids — interradiately  situated  as  we  have  shown — 
served  both  as  mouth  and  vent.  This  view  was  advocated  b3'him 
in  a  series  of  interesting  articles,  published  1869-tO  in  tlie  Am. 
Jour.  Science  and  Arts,  Nos.  142,  145,  149,  as  '' Notes  on  the 
Structure  of  Crinoidea,  Cystidea  and  Blastoidea."  Since  that 
time,  it  has  been  most  generally  conceded  that  the  interradial 
opening  was  the  anus  onl}',  and  that  the  oral  centre  or  mouth  in 
the  earlier  crinoids  was  hidden  from  view  by  external  structures.^ 
Billings'  views  with  regard  to  the  ambulacral  passages  were  con- 
firmed by  Wachsmuth's  discovery  of  radiating  tubes  beneath  the 
vault,^  which,  as  he  ascertained,  connect  with  the  ambulacral 
furrows  in  the  arms.  We  have  since  examined  these  tubes  in 
several  other  specimens,  both  of  Actinocrinus  and  Strotocrinus, 
and  are  enabled  to  give  additional  information  regarding  them. 

The  radiating  tubes  are  attached  to  the  vault,  running  parallel 
to  its  inner  surface.  They  consist  of  five  main  trunks,  which 
follow  the  direction  of  the  five  main  avenues  which  separate  the 
interpalmar  fields.  They  bifurcate  in  the  same  waj^  and  until  a 
branch  connects  with  every  arm.  They  are  composed  of  four 
rows  of  plates,  two  below  and  two  above.  The  two  latter  touch 
with  their  edges  the  inner  surface  of  the  vault,  are  alternately 
arranged,  and  grooved  along  their  median  line,  leaving  a  tun- 
neled passage  between  the  walls  of  the  tube  and  the  vault.  The 
trunks  of  the  two  lateral  sets  of  tubes  on  the  same  side  not  un- 

1  The  following  writers  have  expressed  this  opinion  :  Schultze,  1866, 
Monog-.  Echin.  Eifl.  Kalk,  p.  7  ;  Meek  and  Wortlien,  1869,  Proc.  Acad. 
Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.,  p.  323  ;  Loven,  on  Hypomene  Sarsi,  reprinted  Ann.  and 
Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  Sept.,  1869  ;  Wachsmuth,  "On  the  Internal  and  External 
Stnicture  of  Paleozoic  Crinoids,"  Am.  Jour.  Sci.  and  Arts,  Aug.  1877,  p. 
115;  Zittel,  1879,  Handb.  d.  Palseontologie. 

^  Described  by  Meek  and  Wortben,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  vol.  v,  p.  329,  and 
Wachsmuth,  Am.  Jour.  Sci.,  Aug.,  1877,  p.  119. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  203 

frequently  meet  before  reaching  the  peristome,  but  the  anterior 
ray  is  always  distinctl}^  separated. 

Whenever  tubular  canals  have  been  observed,  they  are  pre- 
served only  to  the  border  of  the  central  space,  but  none  of 
them  have  been  found  to  join  in  the  centre.  In  a  specimen  of 
Actinocr.  glans,  however,  the  tubes  before  terminating  bend  down- 
ward toward  the  visceral  cavity,  give  forth  lateral  processes,  as  if 
disposed  to  branch,  and  expose  two  openings  at  the  extremities 
directed  to  opposite  sides.  The  openings  indicate  that  the  tubes 
ma}^  have  been  connected  with  each  other  by  lateral  passages,  and 
formed  a  ring  around  the  centre.  This  is  evidentl}^  the  structure 
of  Actinocr.  Verneuilianus^  in  which  a  circular  vessel  is  observed 
beneath  the  centre  at  a  short  distance  from  the  vault ;  no  ambu- 
lacral  tubes  are  attached  to  it,  but  there  are  small  radial  openings 
with  which  they  might  have  been  connected.  The  lower  portion 
of  the  ring  is  composed  of  minute  interlocking  pieces,  with  five 
additional  openings  interradially  situated.  This  ring  is  com- 
paratively large,  enclosing  within  its  circumference  the  contracted 
upper  part  of  the  convoluted  digestive  organ,  which  is  well 
preserved  in  the  specimen  from  which  these  facts  were  obtained. 

A  tubular  skeleton,  as  above  described,  has  thus  far  been 
observed  only  in  the  Actinocrinidae,  but  a  tubular  passage  beneath 
the  vault,  in  connection  with  the  arm  grooves  and  oral  centre,  has 
been  traced  in  most  groups  of  the  Palffiocrinoids,  and  no  doubt 
existed  also  in  the  Blastoids.  In  Cyathocri7ius,  and  probabl}'  in 
the  Cyathocrinidse  generall}^  the  tube  is  constructed  of  two  series 
of  pieces  overlying  the  oral  plates,  and  these  again  are  covered  by 
two  similar  series  of  plates,  which  form  a  part  of  the  vault.  In 
Granatocrinus  the  tubes  follow  the  pseudambulacra,  being 
covered  by  three  series  of  small  plates  which  must  be  considered 
extensions  of  the  vault  (PI.  XIX,  fig.  3). 

It  is  now  generally  conceded  that  the  tubular  canals  beneath 
the  vault  contain  the  same  organs  which  in  modern  crinoids  are 
exposed  on  the  ventral  disk,  and  like  them  embrace  the  food 
passages,  and  certain  other  vessels  in  connection  with  the  ambu- 
lacral  system.  In  this  view  of  the  case,  it  is  reasonable  to  further 
consider  tliat  the  annular  vessel,  above  described,  served  as  a 
water-vascular  ring. 

The  relations  between  the  vault  and  the  ventral  covering  of 
recent  Crinoids  are  not  so  close  as  has  been  sometimes  supposed, 


204  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

the3^  are  indeed  diflerent  things,  although  there  are  certain  analo- 
gies between  some  of  their  parts.  Among  these  are  the  oral  plates, 
which  are  represented  in  some  of  the  later  Crinoids,  but  absent 
again  in  the  fully  grown  PentacrinuH  and  in  the  Comatitlidse. 
They  are  also  absent  in  the  Spluvroidocrinidte,  unless  we  consider 
the  interradial  vault  pieces  to  be  their  representatives.  We  have 
alread}'  suggested  that  all  intenadial  plates  in  the  dome — exclu- 
siA'C  of  the  proximal  pieces — may  perhaps  have  been  modified 
oral  plates  which,  either  by  division  or  interpolation,  gradually 
increased  in  number.  The  dome  of  Coccocrinus  has  a  single 
oral  plate  to  each  interradial  field,  while  the  corresponding  spaces 
in  most  species  of  Plafyannuti  are  occupied  by  three  and  occa- 
sionally five  pieces  each.  It  is  as  easy  to  consider  the  single 
plate  of  the  former  to  be  represented  by  three  in  Platycrinus,  as 
that  the  three  are  sometimes  replaced  by  five  within  the  limits 
of  the  same  genus,  the  plates  occup}^  the  same  jwsition  in  both 
cases,  but  in  some  groups  the  true  orals  meet  laterally  which  is  not 
the  case  with  the  interradial  dome  pieces  of  Platycrinus  or  Acti- 
nocrinus,  nor  with  the  undivided  plates  of  Coccocrinus.  In 
Cyathocrinus  where  the  orals  are  very  conspicuous,  they  join 
beneath  the  radial  groove,  and  form  the  floor  upon  which  the  am- 
bulacral  tube  i-ests.  The  bottom  of  the  tube  is  composed  of  two 
series  of  pieces,  which  are  covered  directl}^  b}^  vault  pieces  in  two 
alternate  rows,  whose  lateral  margins  rest  upon  the  upper  edges 
of  the  two  orals ;  while  in  Platycrinus  the  corresponding  vault 
pieces  abut  laterally  against  the  sides  of  the  interradial — oral — 
plates  in  an  unbroken  succession.  In  Platycrinus  the  interradial 
plates  thus  take  exactly  the  same  position  as  the  exposed  part  of 
the  oral  plates  in  Cyathocrinus,  while  the  covered  parts  are 
unrepresented.  In  Coccocrinus^  a  covering  of  the  ambulacral 
groove  has  not  yet  been  observed,  but  judging  from  the  fissure 
between  the  oral  plates,  it  probably  rested  just  upon  their  edges, 
and  formed  an  intermediate  link  between  the  vault  structure  of 
the  Cyathocrinidse  and  Platycrinidfe. 

In  the  Actinocrinidfe  and  Rhodocrinidoe,  the  alternate  dome 
plates  are  not  so  readily  distinguished,  as  in  the  Platycrinidfe 
and  forms  with  free  rays,  in  which  they  are  well  marked  in  the 
extended  parts.  In  the  recent  Crinoids  the  alternate  plates  are 
represented  by  the  "  Saumpliittchen,"  which,  however,  instead  of 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  205 

forming  a  part  of  a  solid  vault,  are  movable,  and  line  the  lateral 
margins  of  the  tentacle  furrows. 

The  proximal  and  central  dome  plates  are  altogether  unrepre- 
sented in  recent  Crinoids.  This  is  best  perceived  by  comparing 
CoccocrnnuH  as  usually  preserved,  with  Hyocrinus  or  other  recent 
genera  in  which  the  oral  plates  are  developed.  In  both  cases, 
there  is  at  the  oral  centre  an  opening  at  which  the  grooves  con- 
vei-ge,  surrounded  by  the  oral  plates  ;  but,  while  in  Hyocrinus  and. 
all  recent  genei-a  this  opening  is  unobstructed  b}"  solid  parts,  in 
Coccocrinus,  Gyathocrinus^  and  the  Palaeocrinoids  geuerall}',  it  is 
covered  by  the  apical  dome  plates.  The  central  piece  generally 
occupies  the  median  portion  of  the  vault,  and  always  indicates 
the  centre  of  the  oral  system. 

We  have  already  noted  narrow  grooves  upon  the  inner  surface 
of  the  vault,  which  meet  on  the  central  piece,  and  follow  the 
median  line  of  the  radial  depressions  and  galleries  to  the  arm 
openings.  Only  three  main  grooves  meet  at  the  centre,  those  of  the 
two  lateral  rays  are  uniting  before  reaching  that  point  (PI.  XVIII, 
fig.  1).  The  grooves  are  best  observed  in  natural  casts  of  the 
interior,  in  which  they  appear  on  the  surface  in  the  form  of  narrow 
bands  or  ridges  (PI.  XIX,  figs.  5  and  9).  The  position  of  the 
grooves  indicates  that  they  may  have  contained  axial  cords  in 
connection  with  a  nervous  system  located  beneath  the  central 
plate.  The  location  of  the  nervous  system  within  the  regions  of 
the  ambulacral  centre  is  in  analogy  to  the  structure  of  other  Echi- 
noderms,  except  the  Comatulidffi,  in  which,  according  to  P. 
Herbert  Carpenter,  the  principal  nervous  systems  are  located  at 
the  apical  side,  and  in  connection  with  the  quinquelocular  organ 
which  occupies  the  cavit}-  of  the  centrodorsal  plate. ^ 

The  interpalmar  fields  are  composed  of  a  soft  skin,  but  although 
this  is  more  or  less  incrusted  with  limestone  particles,  which 
sometimes  almost  look  like  vault  pieces,  they  have  no  affinities 
with  the  plates  of  the  vault.  The  plates  of  all  recent  Crinoids 
are  perforated  with  numerous  pores  for  the  introduction  of  water 
into  the  body,  a  function  which  could  not  well  be  pei'formed  by 
the  interradial  pieces,  but  much  less  by  the  solid  undivided  oral 
plates  of  Gyathocrinus  and  Goccocrinus.  In  the  Cyathocrinidse, 
these  functions  may  have  been   performed   by  the   ventral  sac 

1  On  some  points  in  the  anatomy  of  Pentacrinus  and  lihizocrinus.  Jour. 
Anat.  and  Phys.,  vol.  xii   p.  35. 


20r>  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

■which  is  profusely  punctured,  but  evidentl}^  not  by  the  simpler 
ventral  tube  of  the  Sphyeroidocrinidse  which  is  destitute  of  such 
openings.  Nor  can  we  imagine  that  there  was  any  such  communi- 
cation through  the  dome  proper,  its  plates  are  perfectly  con- 
nected at  their  sutures,  and  the  interradial  series  especially  are 
strengthened  by  strong  braces  within. 

There  are  evidently  closer  relations  between  Cyathocrinus  and 
Hyocrinus  or  genera  with  oral  plates,  than  between  the  Penta- 
crinidffi  and  Sphaeroidocrinida?,  in  which  those  plates  are  either 
unrepresented  or  greatly  modified.  The  latter  two  types  form 
the  extremes,  and  are  probably  more  distant  in  their  relations 
with  each  other,  than  most  Blastoids  and  Cystideans  from  the 
Palaeocrinoids. 

The  affinities  of  the  Palaeocrinoids  with  the  Blastoids,  become 
more  apparent  by  our  recent  discover}^  of  hydrospires  in  a  speci- 
men of  TeJeiocrinus.  Their  exact  construction  has  not  j^et  been 
fully  ascertained,  but  that  such  organs  existed  in  some  of  the 
Actinocrinidoe  is  now  demonstrated  beyond  a  donbt.  The  speci- 
men is  fragmentary,  it  was  obtained  from  a  narrow  cherty  band  of 
the  Upper  Burlington  Limestone,  and  is  itself  silicious.  The 
interior  is  solid,  with  the  exception  of  a  natural  concavit}'  beneath 
the  vault,  at  which  point  it  was  broken  in  quarrying,  exposing  a 
part -of  the  upper  face  of  the  tubular  skeleton.  Portions  of  two 
tubes  only  are  visible,  and  these  are  broken  transversely  after 
their  second  branching,  the  fracture  giving  a  cross-section  of  the 
tubes  and  surrounding  parts.  In  Teleiocrinus  as  in  Strotocrinus 
proper,  the  lateral  rim  contains  radiating  tunnels  formed  by  par- 
titions between  the  divisions  of  the  raj^s.  The  tunnels,  as  observed 
by  us  in  several  specimens,  are  divided  transversely  into  two  com- 
partments, of  which  the  upper  one  is  occupied  by  the  ambulacral 
tubes  (PI.  XIX,  figs.  16  and  8).  In  the  specimen  under  considera- 
tion the  lower  or  dorsal  compartment  has  a  semicircular  outline, 
and  witliin  this, below  one  of  the  branches  of  the  ambulacral  tubes, 
there  are  visible  two  distinct  folds,  closely  resembling  the  folds 
in  the  hydrospires  of  Granatocrinus  (PI.  XIX,  fig.  3).  Beneath 
the  adjoining  branch,  the  folds  cannot  be  so  well  distinguished, 
but  the  outlines  of  the  h3'drospifes  are  also  there  faintly  indicated. 
Considering  that  the  arms  in  the  Blastoids  are  inverted  and 
recumbent,  and  that  their  calcareous  portions  represent  not  onl}' 
he  solid  parts  of  the  arms,  but  also  a  part  of  the  test,  it  M'ill  be 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  207 

seen  that  the  hydrospires  above  noted,  and  those  of  the  Blastoids, 
have  not  only  a  similar  form,  but  also  a  very  similar  position.^ 

The  hydrospires  of  the  Crinoids,  like  those  of  the  Blastoids,  are 
placed  in  close  proximity  to  the  arms  with  which  they  were 
probably  in  communication,  close  to  the  test  and  within  the  general 
cavity  of  the  body. 

The  above  is,  to  our  knowledge,  the  only  case  in  which  hydro- 
spires have  been  observed  among  the  Sphaeroidocrinidae,  but  thej^ 
were  probably  present  in  other  genera,  and  perhaps  in  the  Palseo- 
crinoids  generally- ;  while  these  organs  are  unknown  in  all  later 
and  recent  Crinoids,  and  in  other  groups  of  Echinoderms. 

It  is  a  fact  worthy  of  note  that  all  Cystideans  and  Blastoids, 
and  so   far  as  known,  all  Palaeocrinoids   which  possess  hydro- 

'  The  vault  in  the  Blastoids,  as  we  understand  it,  consists  not  merely  of 
the  plates  which  cover  the  oral  opening,  but  extends  all  along  the  median 
portions  of  the  pseudambulacra  (PI.  XIX,  fig.  3),  "forming  underneath  a 
good-sized  tunnel,  which  we  take  to  be  the  bomologue  of  the  ambulacra! 
tube  of  the  Crinoids.  If  this  interpretation  is  correct  the  structure  bears 
the  closest  similarity  to  that  found  in  those  Crinoids  in  which  the  vault  is 
extended  into  free  rays,  and  in  which  these  extensions  combine  to  some 
degree  the  characters  of. the  arms  and  body.  The  recumbent  arms  of  the 
Blastoids  are,  according  to  this,  lateral  extensions  of  the  body  which 
take  the  place  of  true  arms  ;  but  while  in  the  Crinoids  the  radial  exten- 
sions give  off  regular  arms,  in  which  the  ambulacral  tubes  are  converted 
into  grooves,  the  corresponding  parts  in  Blastoids  remain  attached  to  the 
body,  and  the  pinnules  form  the  only  free  appendages.  It  is  possible,  how- 
ever, that  in  the  Blastoids  the  lateral  furrowswhich  traverse  the  ambulacral 
fields  were  not  covered  by  plates,  and  that  these  correspond  to  the  open 
arm  grooves — respectively  arms— in  Crinoids. 

Dr.  Hambach  (Contributions  on  the  Anatomy  of  the  genus  Pentremites, 
p.  7)  is  probably  correct  in  supposing  that  the  pinnules  of  the  Blastoids 
were  not  connected  with  the  pores,  as  hitherto  believed.  We  think  it 
probable  that  they  rested  in  the  funnel-shaped  pits  which  alternate  with 
the  pores,  and  which  communicate  with  the  lateral  grooves  of  the  pseud- 
ambulacra, while  the  pores  probably  communicated  with  the  hydrospires. 
This  view  coincides  with  what  we  have  heretofore  suggested,  that  the  upper 
face  of  the  pseudambulacra  corresponds  to  the  grooves  within  the  arms  of 
the  Crinoids.  and  indicates  that  there  are  close  affinities  between  the 
ambulacral  field  itself  and  the  solid  portion  of  the  arms.  The  passage 
directly  beneath  the  field  is  probably  the  dorsal  or  axial  canal,  which  by 
the  inverted  position  of  the  arms  became  the  inner  instead  of  the  outer 
passage.  The  hydrospires  in  the  Blastoids  are  placed  beneath  the  canal, 
and  extend  along  the  perivisceral  cavity  of  the  body,  like  in  the  case  ot 
Teleiocrinus. 


208  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

spires  had  a  subtegminal  mouth,  and  a  solid  test  built  up 
of  plates  so  closel}^  fitted  togetlier  that  expansion  or  contraction 
was  impossible.  Expansion  in  some  parts,  however,  was  neces- 
sary to  produce  circulatory  currents  for  the  introduction  of  food. 
In  most  Echinoderms,  including  all  recent  Crinoids,  this  is  accom- 
plislied  by  means  of  the  pliant  test  and  soft  appendages  which 
surrounded  it.  The  Echini  alone,  like  the  Paleozoic  Crinoids,  have 
a  rigid  test,  but  the}'^  possess  an  external  mouth,  and  in  addition 
to  their  numerous  soft  appendages  a  movable  actinal  membrane, 
capable  of  considerable  expansion,  even  in  some  cases  beyond  the 
line  of  the  actinostome.  It  seems  to  us  not  unlikely  that  the 
h3'drospires  served  the  purpose  of  gills,  producing  by  their  con- 
tractions and  dilatations  the  requisite  circulation  to  introduce 
food  and  expel  the  refuse  matter.  This  would  account  for  their 
absence  in  the  recent  Crinoids  and  other  Echinoderms,  and  would 
suggest  that  they  were  probably  connected  with  numerous  soft 
appendages  along  the  arms,  arranged  perhaps  in  like  manner  as 
the  pores  along  the  ambulacra  of  the  Blastoids,  but  not  as  in  the 
Cystideans,  in  which  the  pores  which  connect  with  the  hydrospires 
are  distributed  over  different  parts  of  the  body.  A  better  knowl- 
edge of  these  organs,  as  they  exist  among  the  three  great  divisions 
of  the  Paleozoic  Crinoids,  would  doubtless  afford  far  more  satis- 
factory characters  for  separation  than  we  now  possess. 

In  the  abdominal  cavity  of  the  Paheocrinoidea,  the  only  structure 
which  has  been  observed  consists  of  a  peculiar  skeleton  located 
beneath  the  tubular  canals,  which  from  its  position,  in  analogy  to 
other  Ecliinoderms,  has  been  referred  to  the  digestive  apparatus.^ 
In  its  usual  preservation,  it  is  a  large  convoluted  body  resem- 
bling the  shell  of  a  Bulla,  open  at  both  ends.  The  upper  end  is 
placed  beneath  the  centre  of  the  vault,  and  the  lower  directed 
toward  the  base.  It  is  dilated  above ;  contracted  below ;  its 
surface  about  parallel  with  the  walls  of  the  visceral  cavity.  In 
some  species  it  is  subcylindrical,  with  the  vertical  axis  the  longer  ; 
in  others  globular  or  even  depressed  globose  ;  but  it  is  always 
truncate  below,  and  never  extends  to  the  inner  floor  of  the  basal 
plates.     The  walls  are  coiled  without  touching  at  any  point,  and 

>  Meek  and  Wortlien,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v.,  p.  328,  call  it  a  convoluted  sup- 
port of  the  digestive  sac.  Wachsmuth,  Am.  Jour.  Sci.  Aug.,  1878,  p.  135, 
terms  it  the  "  alimentary  canal.  ' 


1881,]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  i^09 

the  convolutions  are  directed  outward  from  left  to  right,  varying 
in  number  from  two  to  four  in  different  species. 

In  the  usual  state  of  preservation  the  walls  are  perfectly  solid, 
almost  like  a  "  convoluted  plate  "  as  which  it  was  described  by 
Hall.  In  transverse  sections,  they  are  seen  to  be  strong,  and 
appear  to  be  constructed  of  two  partitions  closely  fitted  together 
and  united  at  the  edges.  The  unusual  thickness  and  apparent 
double  natui'e  of  the  walls  in  these  specimens  misled  Wachsmuth 
in  1877,  who  considered  the  walls  to  be  the  body  of  the  alimentary 
canal.  This  is  evidentl}-  a  mistake.  We  now  know,  from  a  num- 
ber of  other  specimens,  that  the  wall  was  simple  in  all  cases,  very 
delicate,  and  constructed  of  an  extremely  fine  filigree  work,  which 
generally  in  the  fossil  became  thickly  incrusted  with  silicious 
matter  on  both  sides,  thus  producing  the  apparent  duplication  of 
the  wall.  In  good  specimens,  a  magnifier  fWiows  the  wall  to  be 
composed  of  an  extremely  fine  network  of  minute  pieces  or  bars, 
with  intervening  meshes.  These  bars,  according  to  Meek  and 
Worthen,  "  do  not  intersect  each  other  at  anj-  uniform  angle',  but 
anastomose  so  as  to  impart  a  kind  of  irregular  regularity  to  the 
form  and  size  of  the  meshes." 

That  this  network  was  in  some  wa}'  connected  with  the  diges- 
tive organs,  is  no  doubt  true,  but  whether  it  formed  a  mere  sup- 
port for  the  digestiA^e  sac,  as  Meek  and  Worthen  suggested,  or 
was  an  extensive  plexus  of  blood  vessels  surrounding  the  ambu- 
lacral  canal,  is  a  question  we  are  as  yet  unable  to  solve.  It  should, 
however,  receive  a  more  appropriate  name  than  any  yet  given,  and 
we  propose  to  call  it  the  "  oesophageal  network,"  which  may  be 
changed  when  its  special  functions  and  aflftnities  are  discovered. 

One  of  the  writers  found  a  specimen  of  Actinocrinus,  in  which 
the  convolutions  were  nearly  intact,  and  b}'^  removing  the  outer 
fold,  the  inner  or  upper  end,  as  distinguished  from  the  outer  or 
terminal  part,  could  be  examined  (PI.  XIX,  fig.  12).  The  organ 
has  the  usual  dense  structure,  and  where  it  comes  into  view,  is  an 
elongate  tube,  which  passing  downward  widens  at  first  gradually 
to  near  the  middle  of  the  visceral  cavity,  then  rapidlj^  until  it 
attains  a  width  equal  to  two-thirds  the  entire  length  of  the  cavity. 
The  upper  part  descending  spirally  turns  from  right  to  left,  but 
on  becoming  wider  the  whorls  are  abruptly  reversed ,  and  there- 
after the  convolutions  are  from  left  to  right.  The  outer  end  also 
tapers  rapidly,  assuming  the  form  of  a  flattened  tube,  and  ascends 

15 


210  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

spirally  on  tlio  outside,  while  the  other  end  is  directed  toward  the 
oral  centre,  but  a  connection  with  the  food  grooves  has  not  yet 
been  observed. 

In  all  cases  where  the  oesophageal  network  has  been  examined, 
among  the  Actinocrinidai  and  Platycrinidse,  it  varies  only  in  out- 
line and  in  the  number  of  whorls  ;  while  in  Ollacrinus  the  entire 
skeleton  resembles  a  large  spiral.  In  the  only  specimen  observed, 
it  apparently  consisted  of  a  large  round  canal,  which  turned 
spirally  on  its  axis,  and  which  near  the  basal  plates  turned 
upward,  but  the  organ  is  in  a  fragmentary  condition,  and  it  is 
((uite  possible  that  this  part  was  surrounded  by  other  convolu- 
tions. Until  recently  this  organ  had  been  observed  only  in 
crinoids  from  the  Burlington  group.  Angelin,  however,  in  the 
Icononographia  Crinoideorum  Suecise,  figures  several  examples 
from  the  Upper  Silurian  of  Sweden  ^Pl.  26,  figs.  12,  12  a,  6,  ).  It 
is  well  preserved  in  these  specimens,  and  resembles  that  of  later 
Actinocrinida\  It  differs,  however,  in  being  closed  at  the  outer 
side,  while  the  inner  parts,  as  in  Burlington  specimens,  are 
distinctly  coiled.  The  outer  wall  is  pentangular  in  outline,  open 
toward  the  basal  disk,  and  consists  of  a  very  delicate  porous 
texture,  appearing  like  an  envelope  for  the  inner  or  coiled  parts, 
and  as  such  possibly  represents  the  perivisceral  plexus,  which  in 
some  cases  almost  equals  the  oesophageal  network  in  delicacy  of 
structure. 

8.  Column. 

The  column  in  the  SphseroidocrinidiB  is  generally  circular 
transversely,  though  sometimes  elliptical  or  pentagonal  and  even 
quadrangular.  It  is  elliptical  only  in  Platycrinua^  and  the 
pentagonal  form  occurs  only  in  Befeocrinus  and  some  few 
species  of  the  Glyptocrinites.  The  central  canal  varies  from  large 
to  extremely  small,  and  is  round  or  pentagonal.  In  Platycrimis 
it  is  so  minute  that  in  columns  of  an  inch  or  more  in  thickness 
on  their  long  diameters,  the  opening  will  scarcely  admit  the  point 
of  a  needle.  In  the  Rhodocrinidse  it  is  irregularly^  pentagonal, 
and  as  a  rule  small.  Among  the  Actinocrinidte  also,  the  passage 
is  generally  not  aboA'e  medium  size,  but  in  Megistocrinus  it  is 
remarkably  large  throughout  the  column  and  all  its  branches. 

B}'  the  earlier  writers,  new  species  were  often  based  upon  frag- 
mentary columns,  a  practice  which  ha^  fortunately  been  aban- 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  211 

doner! ,  since  it  became  known  that  the  different  parts  of  tlie  column 
in  the  same  specimens  are  often  widely  dissimilar. 

In  the  growing  animal,  new  columnar  joints  were  continuallj- 
introduced  b}^  interpolation  between  the  older  segments,  and  these 
younger  joints,  which  are  found  throughout  the  column  in  all  stages 
of  development,  produce  striking  changes  in  the  general  aspect. 
The  column  matured  from  the  root  upward,  and  the  upper  part 
remained  throughout  the  life  of  the  crinoid  in  a  kind  of  immature 
state,  wherein  the  intercalated  joints  did  not  attain  the  width  of 
the  others.  The  uppermost  joints,  however,  although  they  were 
probabl}'  among  some  of  the  earliest  developed  parts  of  the  col-  - 
umn,  are  not  separated  b}"  smaller  joints.  Gradually,  sometimes 
between  the  third  and  fourth  joints,  new  plates  make  their  appear- 
ance ;  the  first  one  so  thin  as  to  be  scarcely  visible,  the  next  which 
lies  between  the  succeeding  joints  much  larger,  the  third  probaltl}'. 
reaching  full  size.  Secondary  intercalations  follow  between  the 
new  pieces,  the  intervening  spaces  between  the  larger  joints 
increasing  gradually  to  a  maximum,  from  which  point  down  tliQ 
column  seems  to  be  mature,  for  all  succeeding  spaces  have  a  like 
number  of  intercalated  joints.  As  a  general  rule,  the  column 
decreases  somewhat  in  thickness  from  the  calyx  for  a  certain  dis- 
tance down,  after  which  it  increases  again  towai'ds  the  root.  In 
some  species  the  primary  joints  are  only  longer,  but  not  of  greater 
diameter  than  the  others.  This  is  the  case  inPlatycrinus  where 
the  new  joints  seem  to  have  been  formed  directl}-  beneath  the 
calyx,  their  number  increasing  in  length  gradually  along  the 
stem,  and  not  in  sections  as  in  the  Actinocrinid*  and  the 
Rhodocrinidte. 

Lateral  cirrhi  along  the  column  have  been  rarely  observed,  and 
in  this  famil}^  probablj'  existed  only  toward  the  root.  The  form  . 
of  the  root  is  exceedingly  variable,  and  depended  evidently  upon 
the  conditions  of  its  place  of  attachment.  When  living  in  a  soft 
or  sandy  soil,  it  seems  to  have  been  provided  with  a  great  number 
of  small  rootlets  which  are  given  off  both  vertically  and  horizon- 
tally ;  but  when  it  was  attached  to  a  rock  or  other  hard  substance, 
the  lower  surface  grew  entirel}-  flat  and  was  often  deeplj-  grooved. 
The  grooves  pass  out  from  the  root,  and  apparently  took  the 
place  of  the  vertical  rootlets.  The  central  passage  extends  to  the 
smallest  rootlets  and  is  often  of  considerable  size.  "We  have 
already  noted  this  fact  in  Part  I,  and  suggested  that  probably  the 


:il2  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

rootlets  may  have  had  respiratory  functions  by  introducing  water 
into  the  bod}'. 

In  adult  specimens  of  ActinocrinidiB  and  Rhodocrinidaj  the 
column  was  long.  We  have  never  seen  its  full  length,  but  have 
in  several  instances  traced  it  three  to  four  feet  without  seeing 
either  root  or  body,  and  we  suppose  that  it  was  in  some  genera 
very  much  longer. 

Of  Plati/cri7ius,  however,  we  have  examined  five  complete  speci- 
mens measuring  from  the  tips  of  the  arms  to  the  extreme  ends  of 
the  fine  rootlets  from  t  to  27  inches — the  latter  in  a  large  species. 
In  all  these  specimens,  the  column  gives  off  for  some  distance 
large  lateral  branches,  which  decrease  in  size  toward  the  end  of 
the  root,  each  one  with  irregular  branches  which  divide  again  and 
terminate  in  hair-lilie  tubes.  We  never  saw  a  Platycrinus  in 
which  the  root  was  flattened,  as  in  some  of  the  Actinocrinidae, 
and  it  seems  possible  that  the  crinoids  of  this  genus  only  grew 
on  a  soft  bottom,  or  possibly  floated  about  with  their  column  like 
an  anchor.  The  same  was  evidently  the  case  in  the  genus  Glyp- 
tocrinus,  in  which  the  column  was  short,  tapering  to  almost  a 
needle's  point,  without  lateral  branches. 

9.  Mode  of  Growth  and  Pal^ontological  Development. 

In  the  Pentacrinoid  larva  of  Antedonj  the  calyx  is  composed 
chiefly  of  very  distinct,  rather  large  basals,  alternating  with  which 
are  five  dots,  which  represent  minute  radials.  The  crinoid  at  this 
stage  consists  only  of  five,  columnar  joints,  the  large  basals,  the 
rudimentary  radials,  and  of  five  large  oral  plates  which  cover  the 
entire  peristome.  The  succeeding  radials,  at  first  unrepresented, 
develop  afterwards,  and  the  arms  make  their  appearance  at  a 
much  later  period. 

Of  the  Palaeocrinoids,  the  first  stages  are,  of  course,  unknown, 
all  the  specimens  we  have  discovered— even  the  very  youngest — 
being  already  provided  with  arms,  and  hence  were  considerably 
advanced  in  the  scale  of  growth.  It  can  be  ascertained,  however, 
by  a  comparison  of  larger  and  smaller  specimens,  that  their  mode 
of  growth  must  have  been  similar  to  that  of  Antedon.  In  the 
smaller,  and  as  we  consider  them,  younger  specimens,  the  basals, 
compared  with  the  other  ])lates,  are  much  larger,  being  almost  the 
same  size  as  in  mature  individuals.  Next  in  size  are  the  first 
radials,  which  are  larger  than  the  second  and  third.     In  the  inter- 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  213 

radial  series  the  first  plate  is  iiiueh  the  largest,  and  the  number  of 
interradial  and  anal  plates  is  considerably  less  in  }■  onng  specimens 
than  in  the  adult,  thus  indicating  that  the  calyx  in  these  crinoids 
was  developed  from  the  basals  up,  as  in  their  living  representa- 
tives. 

With  the  development  of  the  first  interradial,  apparentl}^  simul- 
taneous with  the  second  and  third  radials,  the  Platj'crinoid  form, 
the  simplest  of  the  Sphaeroidocrinidoe  was  complete.  The  earliest 
tj'pes  of  the  Platycrinidje  known  to  us,  but  evidently  not  the 
earliest  representatives  of  that  group,  are  from  the  Upper  Silurian. 
In  Coccocrinus  the  body  is  composed  of  three  basals,  two  by  five 
radials — the  first  very  much  the  larger — a  single  interradial,  and 
five  large  oral  plates,  exactly  as  we  must  expect  from  analogy  to 
find  the  Actinocrinoid  in  its  earlier  phases.  The  ra3's  in  the 
Platycrinoid  are  free  from  the  primary  radials  up,  but  the  first 
joints  of  the  two  main  divisions  are  simple  and  constructed  similar 
to  the  radials  in  the  hodj  of  the  Actinocrinidae.  To  transform 
the  Platycrinoid  into  an  Actinocrinoid,  it  only  requires  the  inter- 
polation of  one  or  more  interradial  pieces  between  the  proximal 
plates  of  the  first  division  of  the  ray.  By  this  simple  process,  the 
plates  which  were  before  free  in  the  Platycrinoid,  were  incorpo- 
rated into  the  body,  and  raised  to  the  dignity  of  secondarj^  radials. 

Many  of  the  earlier  Rhodocrinidse  and  Actinocrinidse  are  char- 
acterized by  highly  elevated  ridges,  which  extend  all  along  the 
radial  series  of  the  body.  They  run  verticall}^  along  the  middle 
of  the  primary  radials,  divide  upon  the  third  plate,  and  branch  to 
the  secondary  and  tertiar}^  radials,  whence  they  pass  very  gradu- 
ally into  the  arms.  The  ridges  are  very  prominent,  rounded 
exteriorly,  and  as  they  approach  the  arm  bases,  assume  nearl}^  the 
shape  and  size  of  the  arms.  The  plates  upon  which  they  are 
extended,  in  their  upper  series,  scarcely  difier  in  length  from  the 
first  free  arm  plates,  and  all  graduall}^  diminish  upward.  The 
longitudinal  ridges  are  evidently  not  accidental,  nor  a  mere  orna- 
mentation, but  represent  the  arm  joints  as  they  were  when  first 
developed  in  the  young  animal.  In  this  early  stage  they  were 
round  joints,  the  lateral  wing-like  extensions  being  developed 
afterward,  when  by  reason  of  the  upward  growth  of  interradial 
and  interaxillar}^  pieces,  the  plates  became  parts  of  the  body.  We 
find  on  the  surface  of  many  internal  casts  of  forms  belonging  to  this 
group  similar  but  narrow  ridges,  which  follow  the  same  direction 


214  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

as  those  upon  the  test.  The  ridges  in  these  cases  are  evidently 
the  impressions  of  rudimentar}*  grooves,  indicating  that  the  plates 
at  that  stage  were  provided  with  ambulacral  furrows  like  regular 
arm  plates.  The}'  also  had  pinnules  attached,  which  like  the  arm 
plates  were  by  the  growth  of  the  animal  absorbed  into  the  calj'x. 
The  fixed  pinnules,  which  Wetherb}-  describes  in  Glyptocrinus 
Piichardsoni,  Cincinnati  Soc.  Xat.  Hist.,  1880,  and  which  we  found 
also  in  Gl.  decadactylus  and  Reteocrinus  O^Xealli,  confirms  our 
views  as  to  the  mode  of  growth  of  the  Palffiocrinoid,  and  throws 
light  upon  the  palasoutological  development  of  Crinoids  generally. 
The  number  of  secondary  radials  varies  considerabl}'  with  age. 
In  Reteocrinus  O'Nealli  we  have  observed  as  many  as  seven,  but 
the  number  may  be  even  more  in  some  cases ;  and  on  the  other 
hand  we  found  in  some  younger  specimens  onl}'  three  or  four. 
The  first  and  second  of  these  plates,  and  the  third  and  fourth 
seem  to  have  been  united  b}'  syzygies,  at  least  the  first  and  third 
bear  no  piijuules,  while  beyond  the  fourth  pinnules  are  given  off 
regularl}'  from  alternate  sides  as  in  the  free  arms.  The  proximal 
pinnule  is  given  off  toward  the  outer  side  of  the  ra^y,  or,  which  is 
the  same  thing,  toward  the  iuterradial  area,  the  next  one  toward 
the  interaxillary  space.  The  plate  which  gives  rise  to  the  first 
pinnule  has  almost  the  form  of  a  bifurcating  plate,  but  instead  of 
supporting  radials  of  a  higher  order,  it  bears  on  its  inner  sloping 
side  a  tliird  secondary  radial,  and  on  the  outer  a  stout  pinnule. 
The  first  fixed  pinnule  is  highl}'  elevated  above  all  other  plates  of 
the  interradial  space,  is  rounded  like  the  radials,  and  almost  as 
conspicuous.  In  one  of  our  specimens  it  consists  of  five  plates, 
three  of  which  are  soldered  into  the  bod}^,  and  the  fourth  appar- 
ently free.  The  fixed  plates  are  nearly  as  strong  as  the  radials 
and  may  be  easily  taken  for  them,  having  lik6  them  winged  exten- 
sions by  which  the}'  are  laterally  connected  with  the  interradial 
plates.  The  upper  joint  is  much  smaller  and  constructed  like  the 
joints  of  the  free  pinnules.  The  second  pinnule  has  only  two 
joints  in  the  body,  the  third  but  one,  which  in  either  case  are 
larger  than  any  of  the  free  joints,  but  which  already  attain  some- 
what more  the  aspect  of  regular  pinnules,  and  are  gi^-en  off  in  a 
similar  manner.  In  a  specimen  of  Glyptocrinus  Richardsoni, 
kindl}'  loaned  to  us  b}'  Prof.  Wetherby,  the  first  fixed  pinnule  is 
given  off  from  the  second  plate  above  the  first  bifurcation,  and 
consists  of  seven  plates  within  the  body,  the  third  and  fourth 


J881.J  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  215 

plates  were  joined  by  sj^zj'gies.  The  second  pinnule,  with  but 
four  joints  within  the  body,  springs  from  the  opposite  side  of  the 
fourth  plate.  The  fifth  plate,  instead  of  a  pinnule,  supports  a 
regular  arm,  and  the  sixth  again  a  pinnule,  but  from  the  same 
side  as  the  preceding  pinnule.  This  is  important  as  it  suggests 
the  idea  that  the  pinnule  may  have  here  developed  into  an  arm. 
That  a  transformation  of  this  kind  took  place  in  some  groups,  is 
more  than  probable,  as  will  be  shown  presently.  In  Glyptocrinus 
decadactylus  only  the  second  and  third  secondary  radials  are 
joined  b}^  s^'zygies,  all  succeeding  pinnules  being  given  off  regularly. 

The  number  of  arms  has  been  considered  of  specific  importance 
among  the  Pal£eocrinid?e,  and  even  genera  have  been  based  upon 
this  character.  The  greatest  variation  in  the  arm  formula  is  found 
among  species  of  the  tjpical  Actinocrinidae,  in  which  we  include, 
besides  the  genus  Actijiocrinus,  also  Strotocrinus^  Teleiocrinus, 
Physetocrinus  and  Steganocrinus.  These  genera  agree  in  the 
style  of  their  ornamentation,  and  in  the  construction  of  the  anal 
area,  which  differs  somewhat  from  that  of  all  other  Actinociinida?. 
It  is  to  be  noted  that  in  this  group  the  specimens  have,  as  a  rule, 
the  same  number  of  arms  in  the  different  rays,  the  few  exceptions 
being  due  to  deficient  or  abnormal  development  of  these  parts. 

The  genus  Actinocrinus  has  been  ver}-  appropriately  separated 
by  Meek  and  Worthen  into  two  sections.  The  one,  with  Actino- 
C7-inus  prohoscidialis  Hall,  as  a  type,  has  the  arm-bases  arranged 
in  a  continuous  series  all  round  ;  the  other,  with  Actinocr.  midti- 
radiaius  as  tj^pe,  has  the  ra3S  formed  into  more  or  less  protuberant 
lobes. 

A.  proboscidialis  of  the  first  section,  which  represents  the 
simplest  form  of  this  interesting  group,  has  only  four  arms  to  the 
ray.  The  first  departure  is  A.  reticulatuii  with  four  arms  in  all 
but  the  two  posterior  rays,  which  have  five ;  the  fifth  arm  where 
it  exists,  being  placed  below  the  line  of  the  others  and  appearing 
somewhat  crowded.  Next  in  order  are  A.  limahrachiatus  and  A. 
clarus  with  five  arms,  in  which  one  of  the  divisions  in  each  ray 
divides  again.  A.  sexoTinatus  and  A.  ojjusc^dus  have  six  arms  or 
three  to  each  division  of  the  ray.  A.  muUihrachiatus  and  A. 
penicillus  have  probably  six,  seven  or  eight  arms,  without  regu- 
larit}^  as  to  arrangement  or  distribution.  A.  ccelatus  and  A.  spino- 
(entaculus  have  a  greater  number  than  anj'  other  species  of  this 
section,  having  normally  eight  arms  to  each  ray. 


216  PROCEEDINGS    OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

On  examining  a  large  collection  of  the  different  species,  it  will 
be  found  that  a  separation  according  to  the  number  of  arms  is 
not  so  satisfactory  as  might  be  expected,  for  only  a  few  specimens 
will  be  found — except  the  four-armed  ones — which  agree  with  the 
given  arm  formula  of  the  species.  The  majority  will  be  found  to 
have  in  one  or  more  rays  very  irregularly,  either  a  surplus  or  a 
deficiency  of  arms,  and  the  greater  the  number  of  arms  a  species 
possesses,  the  oftener  such  irregularities  occur.  The  difficulty  of 
identifjdng  these  species  is  further  increased  by  the  similarity — 
we  might  almost  call  it  identity — of  general  form  and  ornamenta- 
tion, which  prevails  throughout  the  group. 

The  gradual  increase  of  arms  would  naturally  lead  us  to  inquire 
whether  it  might  be  connected  with  the  growth  of  these  crinoids — 
an  idea  which  seemed  at  first  plausible,  inasmuch  as  the  above 
species  are  found  exclusively  in  the  Lower  Burlington  beds  ;  but 
an  examination  of  specimens,  with  the  arms  in  place,  shows  that 
such  is  not  the  case.  Specimens  with  four  arm  openings  in  the 
body  to  each  ray,  have  also  four  simple  arms,  while  they 
should  have,  if  representing  a  younger  stage  of  the  six-  or  eight- 
armed  species,  the  same  number  of  arms  as  the  adult,  with  the 
bifurcations  taking  place  beyond  the  body  as  in  Platijcrinua. 
The  fact  is,  however,  that  the  arms  of  A.  proboscidialis  are  not 
only  simple,  but  from  the  base  up,  are  composed  of  a  double 
series  of  pieces,  while  the  plates  which  should  form  the  higher 
orders  of  radials  in  the  adult  are  entirely  absent. 

In  Strotocrinus^  which  is  closely  related  to  Actinocrinus,  the 
variations  in  the  number  of  arms  are  still  greater,  being  among  the 
different  species  from  eight  to  twentj^-four  to  the  ray.  Strofocri- 
nus  has  also  been  divided  b}^  Meek  and  Worthen  into  two  sections ; 
the  first  including  species  with  a  simple  anal  opening  directly 
through  the  vault,  which  they  call  the  typical  form,  and  the  second, 
those  with  a  large  sub-central  anal  tube,  for  which  we  have  pro- 
posed the  sub-genus  Teleiocrinus.  The  ornamentation  among  the 
different  species  of  the  two  sections  is  remarkably  similar,  only 
that  in  some  species  the  striations  are  more  prominent,  in  others 
the  nodes.  The  most  important  feature  of  the  genus  is  the  pecu- 
liar rim,  which  extends  out  horizontally  from  the  body,  formed  of 
the  higher  orders  of  radials,  which  are  connected  by  interradial, 
interaxillar}^,  and  some  other  apparently  accessory  pieces.  In  the 
allied  Actinocrinus  spinotentactdiis  with  eight  arms  to  the  ray, 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  217 

the  Slrotocrinus  rim  is  alreadj'  indicated,  and  in  specimens  in 
which  the  arms  are  preserved,  their  lower  portions  stand  out  hori- 
zontall}^  as  in  that  genus;  but  the  plates  of  these  parts  are  not 
connected  laterall}^  which  feature,  aside  from  the  difference  in  the 
number  of  arms,  constitutes  the  principal  distinction  between 
Actinoci'inus  and  Teleiocrinus. 

Throughout  tliis  group,  all  bifurcations  of  the  ray — after  the 
first — take  place  on  the  first  plate  in  each  order,  only  one  of  the 
branches  dividing  again,  and  this  alternately  from  opposite  sides, 
the  other  branch  remaining  simple.  The  arrangement  is  such 
that  the  bifurcating  plates  of  each  primary  division  of  the  ray 
follow  each  other  in  direct  succession,  forming  two  main  trunks, 
while  the  plates  which  remain  simple,  and  are  succeeded  by  others 
to  the  edge  of  the  rim,  are  given  off  alternately  like  pinnules. 
These  lateral  branches  are  separated  from  the  main  rays  by  small 
pieces,  and  each  branch  supports  a  free  arm  at  the  edge  of  the 
rim.  Within  the  rim,  the  radial  series  are  conspicuousl}^  marked 
by  sharp  carinae  or  ridges,  which  pass  from  plate  to  plate,  and 
follow  both  main  and  lateral  divisions,  while  the  small  accessor^^ 
pieces,  which  connect  them,  are  formed  into  deep  depressions. 
Comparing  the  ridges  with  the  elevations  we  have  described  in 
Glyptocrinus^  and  which  are  found  in  other  Silurian  genera,  the 
resemblance  is  indeed  very  striking.  The  ridges  in  the  latter 
extend  over  the  primary-,  secondar}',  and  sometimes  over  the  ter- 
tiary radials,  and  pass  gradually  into  arms  ;  but  while  we  find  in 
Glyptocrinus  very  strong  arm-like  pinnules,  there  are  in  Slroto- 
crinus and  Teleiocrinus  pinnule-like  arms,  both  included  within 
the  body  walls,  and  both  springing  off  laterally  like  ordinarj'^  pin- 
nules. The  lateral  branches  in  the  rim  of  Slrotocrinus  were 
evidently  pinnules  in  the  young  animal,  and  free  as  in  the  younger 
stage  of  Glyptocrinus^  but  with  growth  gradually  developed  into 
regular  arms;  while  those  of  the  latter  remained  as  pinnules 
during  lifetime.  This  explanation  accords  with  the  construction 
of  pinnules,  which  is  so  similar  to  that  of  arms,  that  it  is  in 
many  cases  exceedingly^  dilficult  to  draw  a  line  between  them.  In 
Melocrinus  the  alternate  pinnule-bearing  appendages  were  called 
by  some  authors  arms,  by  others  pinnules.  The  branches  in 
Cyathocrinus  were  called  pinnules  by  Wyville  Thomson,  and  arms 
by  most  other  authors. 

Following  out  the  observations,  it  seems  probable  that  all  arms 


218  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

above  the  first  bifurcation  are  metamorphosed  pinnules,  given  oft' 
from  the  primary  radials.  Applying  this  rule  to  the  case  of 
Actinocrinus  and  Teleiocrinus,  the  idea  is  suggested  that  A.  pro- 
boscidialis,  which  is  the  most  common  species  of  the  group,  and 
has  only  four  arms  to  the  ray,  is  in  all  probability  the  progenitor 
of  all  similar  Burlington  species,  evidently  of  both  genera.  In 
A.  recticulalus  only  the  proximal  pinnule  toward  the  posterior 
side  was  transformed ;  in  A.  clarus  one  pinnule  in  each  ray ;  in 
species  with  six  arms  the  first  pinnule  on  the  opposite  side  was 
added  ;  in  species  with  seven  arms  the  first  and  second  pinnules 
of  one  side,  and  the  first  of  the  other,  and  so  on  alternately  on 
opposite  sides.  Although  the  increase  of  arms  is  frequently 
attended  with  some  irregularity,  the  number  of  arms  should  here 
be  considered  of  specific  importance,  and  deviations  from  the 
normal  number  as  intermediate  steps  between  the  species. 

During  the  Lower  Burlington  Limestone  epoch,  the  number  of 
arms  never  exceeded  eight  to  the  ray,  but  in  species  even  of  that 
number  the  arms  are  so  crowded  together,  that  they  could  not 
have  been  arranged  side  by  side,  were  not  their  lower  portions 
bent  outward,  in  the  same  direction  as  we  find  the  rim  in  Stroto- 
crinus.  In  s[)ecies  of  Actinocrinus  with  only  a  few  arms,  the 
arms  are  movable  from  the  base  up ;  movement  is  less  free  in 
species  with  six  arms  to  the  ra}^,  and  the  facilit}^  of  motion  is 
lessened  with  every  increase  of  arms.  This  lack  of  mobility,  of 
course,  onl}^  extended  to  the  lower  arm  joints,  which  for  some  dis- 
tance were  so  closely  crowded  together  that  they  could  not  have 
moved  in  any  direction,  and  it  was  probably  in  consequence  of  this 
inactivity  that  the  proximal  arm  pieces,  which  in  the  simpler  forms 
were  free,  became  gradually  connected  by  growth.  This  was 
evidently  the  first  step  in  the  direction  of  Teleiocrinus.  After- 
wards, by  still  further  increase  of  arms,  additional  plates  became 
laterally  attached,  and  in  this  way  the  rim  was  gradually  developed. 
In  Actinocrinus  the  rim  was  mereh^  indicated  by  the  adhesions  of 
a  few  plates  to  the  calyx,  the  primary  rays,  and  their  main  divisions 
being  still  distinctly  separate.  In  Actinocrinus  (Strofocrimis) 
serratus^  Meek  and  Worthen,  which  forms  a  kind  of  connecting 
link  between  Actinocrinus  and  Teleiocrinus^  only  the  two  main 

'  This  is  the  only  species  from  the  Lower  Burlington  beds  which  might 
be  referred  to  Teleiocrinus. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  219 

divisions  of  the  ra3'S  were  laterally  connected,  but  the  rim  is  not 
continuous  above  the  five  primar}^  divisions  of  the  ray. 

We  have  already  noticed  the  presence  of  small  plates  inter- 
polated between  the  radial  portions  of  the  rim,  forming  sunken 
areas,  and  having  altogether  the  appearance  of  accessory  pieces 
(PL  XVIII,  fig.  I,/)).).  A  closer  examination,  however,  shows  a 
marked  regularity  in  their  arrangement,  and  there  can  be  little 
doubt  that  they  represent  pinnules,  given  off  alternatelj^  from 
opposite  sides,  and  soldered  into  the  body  walls  together  with 
arm  joints.  This  interpretation  is  confirmed  b}'  the  allied  genus 
Steganocrinus,  in  which  tlie  corresponding  parts,  under  more 
favorable  conditions,  instead  of  forming  a  rim,  remained  free 
(PI.  XYIII,  fig.  3). 

Steganocrinus  Meek  and  Worthen  is  connected  with  the  other 
section  of  Actinocrinus — tj'pe  of  A.  multiradiatus — in  the  same 
manner  as  the  A  proboscidialis  group  with  Teleiocrinus.  In 
A.  multiradiatus  and  allied  species,  the  third  primary  radial  is  bent 
abrupt!}^  outward,  its  upper  articulating  faces  which  support  the 
higher  radials  being  directed  almost  horizontally,  thereby  forming 
the  raj^sinto  protuberant  lobes,  separated  by  wide  and  deep  inter- 
radial  depressions  ;  contrary  to  A.  proboscidialis,  in  which  the 
arms  are  more  or  less  continuous,  and  the  sides  of  the  calyx 
nearly  straight  up  to  the  tertiary  radials.  We  should  have  sepa- 
rated the  two  sections  upon  these  characters,  at  least  subgeneri- 
cally,  if  Miller,  in  establishing  the  genus  Actinocrinus,  had  not 
unfortunately  chosen  for  the  t3^pe  a  species  which  is  intermediate 
between  the  two,  thus  rendering  it  difficult  to  determine  the 
typical  form.  It  is  veiy  evident  that  the  structure  of  the  rays  of 
A.  multiradiatus  did  not  admit  the  development  of  a  rim  like  that 
of  Strotocrinus  and  Teleiocrinus,  as  even  the  most  profuse  growth 
could  not  well  have  filled  the  break  between  the  rays,  and  the 
spaces  between  the  arms  within  the  ra}^  were  amply  sufficient  to 
afford  them  free  motion.  This  we  think  furnishes  a  reason  wh}^, 
under  similar  conditi(ms,  the  arms  and  pinnules  of  this  genus, 
contvar}"  to  those  of  Teleiocrinus,  remained  free  during  life. 
Steganocrinus  and  Teleiocrinus  have  very  close  affinities  in  their 
structure.  In  both  of  them  there  are  five  main  raj^s — a  succession 
of  radials  longitudinally  arranged — which  give  ofl"  arms  alternately 
and  from  opposite  sides;  but,  while  in  Steganocrinus  the  plates  of 
the  difi'erent  order  of  radials  are  extended  into  free  appendages, 


220  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

with  free  arms  and  free  pinnules,  the  radials  in  Teleiocrinus  and 
their  branches  and  i)innnles,  to  a  certain  height,  are  laterally  con- 
nected and  included  within  the  body  walls. 

Strotocrinus  bears  the  same  relation  to  Physetocrinus  as  Actino- 
crinus  to  Teleioc7-inus,  Physetocriniis  differs  from  the  A.  prohos- 
cidialis  form,  mainly  in  having  a  simple  anal  opening  through 
the  vault,  instead  of  a  tube,  and  the  same  character  separates 
Strotocrinus  from  Teleiocrinus. 

In  E ucladocriniis  of  the  Platycrinidje,  the  case  is  the  same  as 
in  Steganocrinus.  In  that  genus  an  indefinite  number  of  radials, 
apparently  intersected  by  syzygies,  are  formed  into  long  radial 
appendages,  which  give  off  pinnule-bearing  arms  from  opposite 
sides.  It  agrees  exactly  with  Platycrinus  in  the  construction  of 
the  body,  and  both  have  free  lateral  appendages,  in  which  the  arms 
originate  alternately  on  opposite  sides.  The  arms  of  Platycrinus., 
however,  are  only  given  off"  close  to  the  body,  while  those  of 
Eucladocrinus,  as  in  Steganocrinus,  are  given  off  continuously 
and  the  free  rays  extend  almost  to  the  height  of  the  arms 
(PI.  XYIII,  fig.  7). 

Not  less  interesting  is  the  case  of  Melocrinus,  which  we  take  to 
be  a  successor  of  Mariaci'inus  (as  amended  by  us).  Both  genera 
make  their  appearance  in  the  Upper  Silurian,  but,  while  the  former 
does  not  survive  later  than  the  Silurian,  the  latter  flourishes  in 
greatest  profusion  in  the  Devonian.  Mariacrinus,  in  its  simplest 
form,  has  but  four  arms  to  the  ra}^,  two  of  which  are  given  off  like 
pinnules  from  the  body  toward  the  interradial  spaces,  while  the 
two  inner  ones  stand  erect,  are  parallel  and  lie  close  together.  In 
other  species  of  the  genus,  the  inner  arms  give  off  from  one  to 
three  additional  arms,  always  directed  to  the  outer  side  of  the  ray. 
The  arms  are  composed  of  single  joints,  which  bear  pinnules  in 
the  usual  way.  The  two  median  arms  of  the  ray,  which  in  Maria- 
crinus  are  placed  side  b}^  side,  are  connected  in  Melocrinus  by  a 
suture,  and  appear  as  a  single  arm  composed  of  two  series  of 
plates,  but  the  suture  between  them  is  straight,  and  the  opposite  . 
plates  are  scarcely  ever  alternately  arranged.  That  a  coalescence 
of  two  arms  actually  took  place  here,  is  best  demonstrated  by  the 
fact,  that  in  the  calyx  the  two  parts  are  not  only  separate,  but 
often  have  interaxillary  pieces  between  them,  and  that  each  one 
has  a  distinct  passage.  The  compound  arms  of  Melocrinus  give 
off  at  regular  intervals,  instead  of  pinnules,  lateral  arms,  which 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  221 

are  composed  of  a  double  instead  of  single  series  of  joints,  and 
bear  pinnules.  The  difference  from  Mariacrinus  thus  actually 
consists  only  in  the  much  greater  number  of  lateral  arms,  and 
their  being  composed  of  a  double  series  of  plates.  The  increase 
of  arms  evidently  took  place  under  the  same  conditions  as  in 
Steganocrinus  and  Uiicladocrinus,  the  modifications  in  the  arm 
structure,  due  originally  to  individual  growth,  becoming  fixed  as 
generic  characters,  and  following  a  general  rule,  by  which  it  seems 
that  the  arms  in  all  genera  of  the  Sphieroidocrinida?,  on  passing 
into  the  Devonian,  change  from  single  to  double  joints. 

Let  us  now  consider  some  cases  of  Balocrinus  in  which  an 
increase  of  arms  took  place  in  the  species  under  somewhat  different 
conditions.  It  has  been  shown  b}-  us  (Proc.  Acad.  Xat.  Sci.  Phila., 
18*78,  p.  230)  that  Batocrinus  Chnjsti,  as  a  rule,  has  two  arms 
from  each  arm  opening,  differing  thus  from  other  species  of  that 
genus.  In  the  Acfinocrinites,  and  many  other  of  the  Spha.'roido- 
crinidse,  the  arm  openings  are  mere  breaks  in  the  bod}',  and  the 
proximal  arm  joints  consist  of  single  plates,  while  in  Batocrinus 
they  appear  more  like  passages  penetrating  the  test,  and  the  arms 
from  their  very  base  up  are  constructed  of  two  series  of  pieces. 
We  have  in  our  collections  several  specimens,  which  in  ever}'-  other 
respect  resemble  B.  Chrysti  except  that  the}'  have  single  arms. 
They  were  obtained  exclusively  from  the  lower  strata  of  the  Upper 
Burlington  Limestone,  the  typical  form  of  the  species  occurring 
in  greatest  abundance  in  the  upper  la^'ers.  The  specimens  with 
double  arms  are  generall}^  larger  than  the  others,  but  we  find  them 
also  very  small,  thereby  indicating  that  the  modified  arm  structure 
had  passed  beyond  the  stage  of  mere  individual  variation  due  to 
growth,  and  became  a  permanent  character  of  specific  value 
perhaps.  B.  Chrysti  and  its  variety  with  single  arms — for  which 
we  propose  the  name  B.  Lovei — have  twent}'  arm  openings,  but 
at  the  same  time  only  twenty  so  called  respiratory  pores,  which 
are  located,  as  usually  in  species  with  twent}'  arms,  above  the 
interradial  and  interaxillary  areas.  In  both  species  the  pores  are 
placed  at  like  distances  from  the  arm  openings,  wliich  seems  to 
prove  that  the  additional  arm  was  given  off  from  the  opposite 
side  alternately  from  the  pores.  The  arm  starts  from  the  first 
free  arm  piece,  which  is  changed  into  a  bifurcating  plate,  but 
without  materially  increasing  its  size.  Toward  the  close  of  the 
Burlington  Limestone  B.  Chrysti  underwent  some  changes,  and 


'222  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

the  variety  thus  produced  has  ])een  described  by  Meek  and 
Worthen  as  B.  trochiscus.  It  has  a  more  spreading  disk,  a  more 
concave  dome,  a  comparatively  lower  body,  is  of  larger  size,  and 
consequently  has  more  interradials,  but  otherwise  is  not  different 
from  B.  Chrysti.  B.  planodiscus  Hall,  which  occurs  still  higher 
in  the  Burlington  and  Keokuk  transition  beds,  and  in  the  lower 
part  of  the  Keokuk  Limestone,  is  evidently  a  more  mature  form 
of  B.  Chrysti  and  B.  trochiscus,  which  by  enormous  development 
in  the  radial  regions,  and  a  great  increase  of  interradial  and  inter- 
axillary  plates,  attained  a  still  greater  expansion  of  the  disk.  In 
B.  Chrysti  and  B.  iyouez,  interaxillary  plates  are  wanting;  they 
are  occasionally  represented  b}'  one  or  two  plates  in  B.  trochiscus, 
while  B.  planodiscus  has  from  nine  to  eleven,  with  a  similar 
increase  of  interradials.  In  the  latter  species,  the  small  bifur- 
cating arm  pieces,  from  which  in  B.  Chrysti  the  second  arms  are 
given  off,  and  also  the  two  succeeding  rows  of  pieces,  in  both 
arms,  are  enclosed  within  the  body  walls,  the  inner  row  as  radials, 
the  other  as  interradial  or  interaxillary  pieces,  which  all  attain 
the  form  and  size  of  the  associated  plates  in  the  lower  orders. 
B.  planodiscus  has  forty  arms  like  B.  Chrysti  and  B.  trochiscus, 
but  they  are  simple,  branching  in  the  body;  while  the  other  two 
species  have  twenty  arms  which  branch  in  their  free  state.  The 
increase  of  arms  no  doubt  takes  place  in  this  group  in  a  similar 
manner  as  in  Actinocrinus  and  Strotocrinus,  but  while  in  the  two 
latter,  the  alternate  pinnules  of  onl^-  the  two  main  divisions  of 
the  ray  became  arms,  in  B.  planodiscus  the  proximal  pinnule  of 
each  arm  was  thus  transformed. 

In  B.  Chrysti  and  its  allied  forms,  we  find  an  illustration  of  the 
difficulty  we  often  encounter  in  discriminating  between  species 
and  varieties.  There  are  apparently  four  forms  represented  in 
that  t_ype,  of  which  the  two  extremes,  viewed  separately,  are  well 
defined  specifically  as  well  as  geologically,  but  placed  in  connection 
with  the  two  others,  they  form  a  series  which  might  well  be  taken 
for  variations  of  one  species. 

A  similar  case  is  presented  by  a  series  of  specimens  obtained 
from  the  Keokuk  Limestone  of  Indiana.  The  collection  com- 
prises nearly  two  hundred  specimens  of  Batocrinus.  but  contains 
comparatively  few  species.  By  far  the  greater  number  came  from 
Bono,  Lawrence  Count}^,  others  from  Edwardsville,  Floyd  Count}', 
a  few  from  Canton,  and  the  rest  from  Crawfordsville.     The  Bono 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  223 

and  Edwardsville  crinoids,  in  their  general  habitus,  resemble 
Burlington  fossils,  but  we  have  so  far  not  been  able  to  identify  a 
single  Burlington  species  among  them,  while  we  found  several 
identical  with  species  from  Crawfordsville,  though  generally 
smaller.  The  crinoidal  fauna  of  Canton  includes  both  Bono  and 
Crawfordsville  forms,  but  embraces  also  some  of  the  huge  forms 
so  characteristic  of  the  Upper  Keokuk  beds  of  Keokuk,  Iowa,  and 
Nashville,  Tenn.,  and  which  are  entirely  wanting  at  Crawfords- 
ville and  Bono.  We  have  not  been  able  to  ascertain  the  exact 
reUitive  age  of  each  stratum,  but  are  inclined  to  believe  that  the 
Crawfordsville  bed  occupies  an  intermediate  position  between 
those  of  Bono  and  Canton  on  one  side,  and  Keokuk  on  the  other. 

The  crinoids  to  which  we  allude  are  easily  separated  into  two 
groups.  Those  of  the  first  have  flat,  somewhat  spatulate  arms,  a 
subeonical  or  subturbinate  calyx,  and  a  variable  arm  formula,  and 
are  appropriately  referred  to  the  genus  E retmocrinus,  vrhile  those 
of  the  second,  which  we  refer  to  Batocrinus,  have  a  globose  body, 
round  arms,  with  arm  formula:  II,  rarely  I4. 

Among  thirty-two  specimens  of  the  first  group,  all  from  Bono 
tliere  are  twelve  which  have  sixteen  simple  arms :  44,  two  others 
have  at  one  side  of  the  right  posterior  ray  a  pair  of  arms  instead 
of  a  single  arm — the  formula  may  be  graphically  represented  thus  : 

1 1 1  111  11-^,  and  in  one  specimen  we  find  one  of  the  anterior  arms 

1 1 
represented  by  a  pair,  while  all  the  others  are  simple.     The  last 

three  specimens  no  doubt  are  abnormal  cases,  but  they  are  inter- 
esting as  showing  a  tendency  of  the  species  to  an  increase  of  arms 
in  the  postero-lateral  and  anterior  ra3's.  All  the  above  specimens 
can  be  safely  referred  to  a  new  species  which  we  call  Eretmocrinus 
originarius. 

There  are  thirteen  other  specimens,  for  which  we  propose  the 
name  Eretraocrinus  iTj.termedius,  which  agree  with  the  former 
in  all  essential  points,  having  the  same  peculiar  ornamentation, 
the  same  form  and  size,  and  being  derived  from  the  same  layers ; 
but  they  differ  in  having,  as  a  rule,  in  the  anterior  ray  two,  and  in 
both  postero-lateral  rays  three  additional  arms,  while  the  antero- 
lateral rays  are  unchanged.  The  additional  arms  are  given  oflT 
alternately  from  the  two  main  divisions  of  the  rays  as  in  Actino- 
crinus.  They  are  simple  and  in  most  cases  included  within  the 
body  walls,  except  in  the  two  posterior  raj's,  in  which  the  arras 
arising  from  the  last  bifurcation  are  arranged  in  pairs. 


224  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY    OP  [1881. 

In  this  lot  of  crinoids  there  are  two  more  specimens,  one  having 

112   111 

twenty -one  arms  distribnted  thus :  11111122,  and  the  other  twenty- 

221,222  22 

seven,   thus:    22121112.     Both   agree   with   the   two   preceding 

species  except  in  the  arm  formula,  but  even  this  is  fundamentallj^ 
identical  with  E.  originarius,  the  simple  arms  of  the  latter  being 
in  part  replaced  by  pairs.  None  of  our  Bono  specimens  have  the 
doubh;  arm  structure  throughout  all  the  rays,  but  we  obtained 
from  Edwardsville  and  Canton  several  specimens  in  which  that 
feature  prevails,  and  for  which  we  propose  the  name  Eretmocrinun 
adultus.  The  two  irregular  Bono  specimens  may  not  be  the 
intermediate  forms  between  that  species  and  JiJ.  originarius^  but 
this  is  probable,  and  they  show  how  the  double  arm  structure 
became  introduced. 

Scarcely  less  interesting  are  some  specimens  of  Batocrinus. 
Among  sixteen  examples  of  a  form  which  we  call  B.  Whitei — eleven 
from  Bono,  two  from  Canton,  and  three  from  Edwardsville — there 
are  fourteen  with  the  arm  formula:  II,  while  two  of  them  have 
four  arms  to  the  posterior  ray.  No  double  arm  structure  has  been 
observed  in  this  species  at  Bono,  but  its  apparent  representative 
at  Crawford sville  has  always  two  arms  from  each  opening.  B. 
Indianensis  has  the  same  form  and  ornamentation  as  B.  Wliilei, 
and  the  same  arm  formula — with  substitution  of  double  for  single 
arms — and  it  evidently  bears  the  same  relation  to  that  species  as 
B.  ChrysH  to  B.  Lovei,  and  E.  adultus  to  E.  originariui-. 

It  would  be  interesting  to  pursue  this  line  of  examination  further, 
and  trace  the  relations  subsisting  among  other  groups  similarly 
connected.  But  we  have  perhaps  gone  far  enough  to  serve  our 
present  purpose.  It  is  to  be  observed,  however,  that  the  import- 
ance of  this  kind  of  investigation,  in  its  bearing  upon  sj- stematic 
classification,  can  scarcely  be  overestimated.  It  has  to  do  with 
the  principles  which  lie  at  the  very  bottom,  and  it  is  only  by  the 
study  of  these  relations,  of  the  exact  anatomical  changes  which 
produced  individual  variation,  and  in  time  permanent  modification 
of  forms,  that  we  can  hope  to  arrive  at  a  correct  understanding  of 
the  groups  in  nature,  or  be  able  to  make  scientific  discrimination 
of  families,  genera,  species  and  varieties. 

Many  species  have  been  made,  upon  mere  differences  of  growth; 
some  upon  unimportant  variations  in  the  arm  formula;  some  upon 
abnormal  development  in  certain  parts  of  the  bod}' ;  others  upon 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  225 

slight  modifications  in  ornamentation;  while  still  others  were 
founded  upon  material  so  imperfect  that  neither  figure  nor  de- 
scription suflflciently  defines  the  form.  Our  literature  is  so  over- 
burdened with  S3'non3'ms  that  we  fear  a  veiy  large  percentage  of 
so-called  species  ought  to  be  eliminated.  We  have  undertaken  to 
point  out  such  cases  among  the  Burlington  and  Keokuk  Crinoids, 
and  although  we  have  been  obliged  to  throw  out  a  considerable 
number  of  species,  we  have  only  done  so  where  necessity  seemed 
to  require  it,  and  we  suspect  we  should  not  have  gone  amiss  by 
reducing  the  list  still  more.  Schultze  undertook  the  same  task 
for  the  Crinoids  of  the  Eifel,  and,  although  we  cannot  agree  with 
him  in  retiring  certain  genera,  we  concur  in  his  determination  of 
synonymic  species.  There  are  no  doubt,  also  many  synonyms 
among  the  Subcarboniferous  Crinoids  of  Belgium  and  England. 
One  of  us  had  an  opportunity,  several  years  ago,  of  studying  the 
original  collection  of  De  Koninck  in  the  Museum  of  Cambridge, 
and  became  convinced  that  the  eleven  Belgian  species  of  Actino- 
crinus.  described  in  the  Recherches  Crin.  Carb.  Belg.,  might  be 
safely  reduced  to  four  or  five. 

10.  The  SO-CALLED  "Respiratory  Pores." 

In  the  first  part  of  this  work,  on  page  11,  we  called  attention 
to  certain  pores,  located  in  the  body  at  the  arm  regions,  on  either 
side  of  the  ambulacral  openings,  and  we  endeavored  to  show  that 
they  correspond  in  position  with  the  so-called  ovarian  openings 
of  the  Blastoids.  At  that  time  we  asserted  that  the  pores  were 
in  some  genera  fixed  at  a  definite  number,  independent  of  the 
number  of  arms  in  the  species;  that  Batocrinus,  for  instance,  had 
alwaj'S  twenty  pores,  whether  the  species  had  twenty  arms  or 
more,  and  that  one-half  the  pores  were  located  radially  and  the 
rest  interradially.  In  this  we  were  evidently  in  error ;  the  pores 
probably  alwaj's  agree  in  number  with  the  arms,  and  are  really 
neither  radial  nor  interradial,  but  are  placed  at  the  base  of  the 
arras.  A  specimen  of  Batocrinus  subaequalis,  now  before  us,  with 
twenty -two  arm  openings,  has  twenty-two  pores,  and  a  specimen 
with  twenty -four  arms  has  twentj-four  pores.  In  the  former  the 
vault  became  accidentally  detached  from  the  calyx,  in  such  a 
manner,  that  we  were  enabled  to  follow  up  in  both  parts  the  direc- 
tion of  the  pores  as  they  pass  into  the  body  (PI.  XIX,  fig.  4). 
Neither  the  pores  nor  the  arm  openings  penetrate  the  plates,  but 

16 


226  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

both  are  placed  between  the  sutures  and  appear  as  grooves  situated 
witliiu  the  upper  series  of  radials.  The  grooves  in  the  calyx  are 
opposed  by  similar  grooves  in  the  corresponding  parts  of  the  dome, 
and  pores  as  well  as  arm  openings  enter  the  body  horizontally. 
The  grooves  which  constitute  the  arm  openings  follow  the  median 
course,  while  the  smaller  grooves,  forming  the  pores,  enter  ob- 
liquely from  the  sides,  and  join  the  others  at — or  just  before — the 
point  where  they  enter  the  general  cavity  of  the  body.  The 
pores  which  are  given  off  toward  the  outer  arms  of  the  ray  are 
deeper  than  the  rest,  and  connect  with  the  arm  openings  at  the 
moment  these  enter  the  general  cavit3\  Those  of  the  inner  arms 
meet  midway  in  the  test,  and  in  case  there  is  another  arm  between 
the  two  divisions  of  the  ray,  its  pores  join  the  arm  passages  close 
to  the  outer  surface  of  the  test.  This  explains  the  fact  that  the 
partition  between  the  two  last-mentioned  openings  is  so  rarely 
preserved,  and  that  these  openings  are  generally  found  united  in 
the  fossil.  The  arrangement  of  the  pores  is  similar  in  other  genera 
of  the  Actinocrinidae,  the  pores  between  the  main  divisions  of  the 
ray  being  universally  more  conspicuous  than  the  inner  ones.  In 
the  Plat3'crinid£e  and  other  genera  in  which  the  upper  radials  are 
extended  into  free  rays,  the  pores  are  located  at  the  base  of  the 
arms,  not  at  the  base  of  the  free  ray,  and  hence  are  rarely 
observed.  OUacrinus,  so  fer,  is  the  only  genus  in, which,  in  con- 
nection with  the  pores,  appendages  have  been  observed.  They 
there  form  heavy,  arm-like  extensions,  often  surpassing  the  arms 
in  length,  with  a  channel  through  their  centre.  The  channels 
unite  with  the  arm  passages  within  the  test  in  a  similar  manner  as 
the  pores  in  Batocrinus. 

The  affinities  which  are  apparent  between  the  pores  of  the 
Actinocriuidaj  and  the  ovarian  openings  of  the  Blastoids  with 
regard  to  their  position,  suggests  a  probable  analogy  in  their 
functions,  and  if  the  latter  served  as  a  madreporic  apparatus  it 
would  seem  reasonable  to  suppose  that  tlie  pores  in  the  Actino- 
crinidae  did  the  same.  But  there  are  objections  to  this,  and 
another  interpretation  is  at  least  possible.  From  what  is  now 
known  of  the  ontogeny  of  the  Palteozoic  crinoids,  we  are  inclined 
to  think  that  the  pores  maj^  have  been  originallj^  pinnules,  wliich 
with  progressing  growth  were  soldered  into  the  body.  This  would 
explain  the  fj^ct  that  all  pores  located  beside  tlie  inner  arms  are 
located   closer  to  the  arm  openings  than  those  of  the  outer  arms, 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  227 

for  tliey  are  pinnules  of  higher  branches  in  the  body,  and  hence 
were  less  deeply  enclosed  in  the  test. 

It  would  be  interesting  to  trace  the  pores  in  genera  like  Glypto- 
crinus,  in  which  the  fixed  pinnules  retain  their  forms  after  they 
became  fixed ;  but  in  those  genera  the  arms  are  unfortunately 
located  at  the  edge  of  the  ventral  disk,  and  an  examination  is  diflR- 
cult.  In  all  carboniferous  Crinoids  in  which  the  pores  are  clearly 
seen,  no  fixed  pinnules  can  be  traced  externally  in  the  test,  and 
apparently  no  free  pinnules  were  attached  to  the  pores,  or  they 
should  have  been  found  preserved  in  some  of  our   specimens. 

The  proximal  pinnules  in  the  recent  Crinoids  contain  the  genital 
glands,  and  it  is  at  least  not  impossible  that  the  pores  as  rudi- 
mentary pinnules,  served  as  genital  organs.  Tliis  supposition  is 
strengthened  by  a  comparison  with  the  ovarian  openings  of  the 
Ophiiiridffi  and  Astrophytidse,  which  apparently  occupy'  a  very 
similar  position  to  the  pores  of  the  Actinocrinidae.  Those,  we 
believe,  are  said  to  be  in  part  respiratory  and  so  it  is  possible  that 
the  pores  of  these  Crinoids  had  both  functions. 

As  a  convenient  summing  up  of  our  discussion  of  the  Sphaeroido- 
crinidaj,  we  give  the  following 

Condensed  Family  Diagnosis. 

Body  comparatively  lar'ge,  globular,  conical  or  hiturhinate;  plates 
solidly  cemented  together,  immovable,  separated  only  by  sutures  ; 
symmetry  bilateral,  sometimes  almost  pe?'fectly  pentahedral. 

Calyx  composed  of  basals,  radials,  inferradials  and  sometimes 
interaxillary  plates.  Underbasals  present  or  absent.  Radials  in 
at  least  two  orders,  the  upper  one  frequently  extended  into  free 
rays.  Posterior  or  anal  area  loider  than  the  four  interradial 
areas,  and  the  arrangement  of  its  plates  generally  distinct. 
Ventral  disk  more  or  less  elevated,  constructed  of  numerous  plates 
forming  a  free  arch,  unsupported  by  oral  plates.  The  plates  of 
the  vault  are  arranged  substantially  upon  the  same  plan  as  those 
of  the  calyx,  and  consist  of  the  same  elements.  Apical  dome  plates 
%i'ell  defined.  Anus  inform  of  a  simple  opening  directly  through 
the  vault,  or  prolonged  into  a  solid  tube,  perforated  at  the  distal 
end,  but  loithout  respiratory  pores. 

Arms  composed  of  one  or  two  series  of  2'>i€ces.  Pinnules  long, 
slender,  generally  in  contact  laterally.     Food  grooves  and  ambu- 


228  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

lacral  vessels  entering  the  body  through  openings  in  the  test,  whence 
they  are  continued  beneath  the  vault  by  means  of  tubes. 

Digestive  apparatus  composed  of  a  convoluted  sac,  surrounded 
by  a  delicate  calcareous  network. 

Column  long;  its  cross-section  circular,  elliptical,  sometimes 
ptentagonal  or  quadrangular;  central  perforation  small  to  medium, 
rarely  large. 


A.  Sub-family  PLATYCRINIDJE  Roemer. 
(Amend.  Wachs.  &  Spr.) 

The  name  Platycrinidiae  has  been  used  by  most  writers  in  a  full 
family  sense,  and  in  this  they  seemed  to  be  justified,  as  most  of 
the  genera  are  by  their  general  aspect  readily  distinguished  from 
those  of  the  Actinocrinidie  and  Rhodocrinidae.  The  differences, 
however,  which  produce  that  particular  habitus,  are  evidently  not 
tlie  result  of  marked  anatomical  modifications. 

The  body  of  the  Platycrinidaj,  according  to  the  views  of  other 
writers,  is  composed  only  of  basals,  primary  radials,  and  vault 
pieces,  all  succeeding  plates  in  a  radial  direction  are  considered 
by  them  to  be  arm  plates.  The  rays  in  this  group  generally 
become  free  from  the  first  axillary,  but  the  extended  parts  are 
true  extensions  of  the  body,  covered  like  this  by  regular  vault 
pieces,  and  these  arranged  in  the  same  manner,  they  are  not  arms 
in  our  sense,  as  they  possessed  no  true  articulation.  If  the 
respective  parts  in  the  Actinocrinidse  are  to  be  regarded  as 
radials,  then  also  are  those  of  the  Platycrinidse,  they  compose  in 
the  former  the  sides  of  the  body  walls  only  in  adult  specimens, 
in  the  younger  state  they  form  free  appendages  as  in  the  mature 
Platycrinidffi.  The  plates  of  the  extended  parts  are  joined  by 
suture,  there  is  no  hinge  line,  and  the  articulation  was  by  ligament 
only,  probably  similar  to  that  of  the  anal  tube,  which  certainly 
was  flexible  to  some  extent. 

The  distinctions  between  Platycrinidse  and  Actinocrinidffi  are 
more  readily  perceived  than  described,  and  seem  to  be  fairly  ex- 
'^ressed  by  saying  that  the  former  represent  a  younger  stage  of 
=  the  latter,  and  remained  as  a  persistent  type  of  that  stage  of 
growth.  The  interradial  regions  are  represented  by  a  single 
plate,  leaving  the  upper  radials  unconnected  laterally  as  in  the 
j'oung  Actinocrinoid. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA,  229 

A  close  comparison  of  the  three  sub-divisions  of  the  Palaeocri- 
noidea  shows  that  the  modifications  which  each  undergoes,  some- 
times in  the  same  geological  epoch,  are  moi-e  or  less  repeated  in 
all  of  them.  This  is  particularlj^  the  case  as  to  the  construction 
of  the  arms.  The  same  development  from  single  to  double  arm 
joints  occurs  in  all  of  them,  and  simultaneously  in  the  Upper 
Silurian.  A  similar  analog}'  is  found  in  the  arrangement  of  the 
arms.  In  each  group  there  are  simple  and  branching  arms,  arms 
which  are  given  off  directly  from  the  bod}',  or  laterally  from  free 
rays,  and  even  the  pinnules  are  arranged  in  a  like  manner.  The 
plates  of  the  bod}^  are  composed  essentially  of  the  same  elements, 
but  in  the  Platj^crinidse  comparatiA'ely  few  plates  are  enclosed 
within  the  cal3'x,  many  of  them,  which  in  the  Actinocrinidse  form 
a  conspicuous  part  of  the  body,  being  here  found  in  the  lateral 
appendages.  In  the  Platj'crinidse,  the  calyx  proper  is  constructed 
almost  exclusively  of  basals  and  first  radials,  all  higher  orders  of 
radials  either  forming  a  part  of  the  brachial  appendages,  or,  when 
partiall}'^  incorporated  with  the  calyx,  being  insignificant  com- 
pared with  the  other  parts.  In  this  respect  thej'  exhibit  a  marked 
difference  from  the  Actinocrinidse  and  Rhodocrinidte,  in  which  the 
higher  radials  are  prominent  elements  in  the  calyx.  In  the  Plat}'- 
crinidse,  the  interradial  plate  is  pushed  into  a  line  between  calyx 
and  dome,  and  appears  like  a  dome  plate,  though  being  in  fact  a 
part  of  the  aboral  side,  and  analogous  with  the  first  interradial 
in  the  Actinocrinidi:e,  like  this  it  rests  upon  the  upper  edges  of 
the  two  adjoining  first  radials,  which  are  generally  notched  for  its 
reception,  a  position  very  different  from  that  of  the  interradial 
dome  plates.  In  Dichocrinus  the  radials  are  not  notched,  and 
the  plate  in  question  is  actually  pushed  into  the  dome,  but  here 
also,  as  in  all  similar  cases,  a  more  profuse  development  of  second 
and  third  radials  within  the  calyx,  would  place  this  plate  in  posi- 
tion with  the  interradials  in  the  Actinocrinidee. 

We  have  stated  in  our  family  diagnosis  that  the  Sphseroidocrinidae 
have  at  least  one  ijiterradial  plate;  Pterotocrinus  seems  to  be  an 
exception  to  this  rule,  but  in  that  genus  the  family  relations  are 
otherwise  so  clearly  expressed,  that  it  seems  to  us  unnecessary  to 
separate  it  on  account  of  the  absence  of  that  plate.  Pteroto- 
crinus is  the  last  survivor,  and  probabl}^  the  most  mature  and  ex- 
travagant form  of  the  family  In  its  typical  species  there  are 
not   onl}^  secondary,   but   also   tertiary  radials  enclosed  in  the 


230  PROCEEDINGS    OP   THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

calyx,  and  the  plates  of  the  different  rays  meet  laterally  in  the 
body.  The  case  is  simihir  to  that  of  Slrotocrinus ;  the  arms,  as 
in  that  genus,  are  crowded  together,  naturally  producing  at  first 
a  lack  of  mobility  in  the  proximal  parts  of  the  rays,  until  eventu- 
ally the  sides  became  attached.  In  P.  crassus  and  P.  Chester- 
ensis  Meek  and  Worthen,  in  whicli  the  lower  arm  portions  are 
comparativel}"^  narrower,  the  connection  between  the  ra^^s  is  not 
perfect,  especially  at  tlie  posterior  side  ;  while  in  P.  depreasus 
Lyon,  and  in  all  of  Wetherby's  species,  the  connection  between 
the  upper  radial  is  uninterrupted,  and  the  arms  are  given  off 
directly  from  the  body,  and  not  from  brachial  appendages  or  free 
rays.  In  Meek  and  Worthen's  species,  in  which  the  first  radial 
plate  extends  to  the  top  of  the  calyx,  it  is  apparent  that  the  first 
plate  above,  thougli  pushed  into  the  dome,  is  the  analogue  of  the 
regular  interradial  plate  of  the  group,  but  in  P.  depressus^  in 
which  that  plate  rests  above  the  tertiary  radials,  it  is  probable  that 
the  interradial  plate  proper  was  pushed  inwards,  and  either 
became  obsolete,  or  is  perhaps  visible  only  at  the  inner  side  of 
the  test. 

The  construction  of  the  dome  has  been  already  so  fully  dis- 
cussed that  a  few  general  remarks  here  will  suffice.  The  vault 
resembles  fundamentally  that  of  the  Actinocrinidse  and  Rhodo- 
crinidoe.  The  plates  are  comparatively  large,  and  the  apical  dome 
plates  very  conspicuous.  The  radial  regions  are  each  composed 
of  two  rows  of  plates  alternately  arranged,  which  commence 
either  close  to  the  centre  plate,  or  near  the  edge  of  the  disk,  and 
branch  toward  the  free  rays,  following  their  direction,  and  paving 
their  ventral  surface.  The  interradial  regions  of  the  dome  are 
comparativel}'^  large,  composed  of  one,  two  or  more  plates. 
Anus  in  form  of  a  small  tube,  <w  simple  vault  opening.  Column 
round  or  elliptic,  never  pentagonal ;  perforation  very  small. 

For  greater  convenience  we  have  divided  the  Platycrinida^  into 
two  sections  : 

A.  Platycrinites,  including  genera  with  a  marked   pentahedral  sym- 

metry, and  without  special  anal  plates  in  the  calyx. 

B.  Hexackinites,  with  a  decided  bilateral  symmetry,  and  a  large  anal 

plate  enclosed  within  the  calyx. 

The  presence  of  a  special  anal  plate,  upon  which  this  division 
has  been  based,  is  somewhat  remarkable,  on  account  of  the  great 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  231 

size  of  the  plate,  and  the  comparatively  large  space  which  it  occu- 
pies in  the  body;  but  too  much  importance  should  not  be  attached 
to  it,  as  we  find  in  the  Actinocrinidaa  and  Rhodocrinidse  the  same 
variation,  and  apparently  without  anj^  disturbance  of  the  relations 
between  the  genera.  The  presence  of  this  plate  in  the  Platy- 
crinidjB  is  entirely  in  harmony  with  our  idea  that  this  group 
represents  a  younger  stage  of  the  Actinocrinidoe,  for  this  anal 
plate  was  early  developed  in  the  animal,  and  is  found  in  the 
youngest  individuals  in  both  groups  of  equal  size  with  the  first 
radial. 

In  1843,  the  two  Austins  proposed  (Monogr.  Rec.  and  Foss. 
Crinoids)  the  name  Platj'crinidae  as  a  family  designation,  embra- 
cing the  genera  Platycrinus,  Gyathocrinus  and  Caryocrinus, 
without  special  diagnosis,  merely  mentioning  that  those  genera 
"  had  but  few  plates  below  the  ray,  and  thus  might  conveniently 
be  arranged  into  a  natural  group."  They  placed  Marsupiocrinus 
along  with  Crotalocrinus  under  the  "  Marsupiocrinoidea." 

Not  any  better  is  the  arrangement  of  D'Orbigny,  who  placed 
Platycrinus  under  "  Melocrinidffi,"  and  Edwardsocrinus  and 
Dichocrinus  under  the  Cyathocrinidse. 

F,  Roemer's  "  Platycrinidffi  "  (1855.  Leth.  Geognostica,  Ausg, 
III,  p.  228),  agree  substantially  with  ours.  He  brought  into  the 
family:  Platycrinus,  Dichocrinui^,  Hexacrinus,  CuUcocrinus  and 
llarsupiocrinus,  but  unfortunately  added  Atoc7^inus^  and  Sym- 
bathocrinus,  the  first  of  which  we  place  under  the  Cyathocrinidae, 
and  the  latter  we  consider  the  type  of  a  new  famil}-.  Pictet 
(Traite  de  Paleont.,  1857)  made  his  Platycriniens  a  sub-division 
of  the  Cyathocrinidae  and  enumerates  under  it  the  genera  Platy- 
crinus, Edwardsocrinus^^  Amblacrinus,^  Ilarsupiocrinus,  Ato- 
crinus,  Symbathocrinus  and  Adelocrinus*  but  placed  Coccocrinus 
and  Haplocrinus  under  the  Haplocrinidse,  following  Roemer. 

The  arrangement  of  Zittel  (Handb.  der  Palaeontologie)  agrees 

^  Atocrinus  McCoy,  is  evidently  a  Gyathocrinus  in  which  the  sutures 
between  the  plates  are  invisible,  owing  to  the  condition  of  the  fossil,  and 
not  a  Platycrinus  as  supposed  by  some  authors.  The  plates  of  the  body 
and  the  arras  agree  exactly  with  Gyathocrinus,  while  no  Platycrinus  of  the 
Subcarbouiferous  has  single  arm  joints. 

^  Syn.  of  Platycrinus. 

^  D'Orbigny,  insufficiently  defined,  probably  syn.  of  Goccocrinus. 

*  Phill.,  insufficiently  defined. 


232  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

with  that  of  Rocmer,  except  that  he  separates  Symbathocrinus  and 
adds  Corthjlocrinus  and  Pterotocrinus  which  had  been  established 
later.  He  also  placed  here  Storthingocrinus  which  we  propose  to 
transfer  to  the  Sj-nibathocrinidaj. 

The  Platycrinidse  are  first  met  with  in  the  Upper  Silurian, 
whence  they  range  to  the  close  of  the  Subcarboniferous. 

We  arrange  the  two  sections  as  follows  : — 

a.  Platycrinites. 

1.  Coccocrinus.  5.  Platycrinua. 

2.  Cordylocrinus.  Subgenus  Eucladocrinus. 

3.  Culicocrinus.  6.   Gotyledonocrinus. 

4.  3Iai'supiocrinus. 

b.  Hexacrinites. 

7.  Hixacrinus.  9.  Talarocrinus. 

8.  Dkliocrinus.  10.  Pterotocrinus. 

a.  Platycrinites. 

1.  COCCOCRINUS  Job.  Muller. 

1855.  Muller.  Verh.  Natuih.  Verein  Rheinl.,  xii,  p.  20. 
1860.  F.  Roemer.  Foss.  Fauna.  Westlich.  Tenn.,  p.  51. 
1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  d.  Palaeont.,  i,  p.  347. 

Syn.  Platycrinus  Roemer,  1844  (not  Miller),  Rhein.  Uebergangsgeb., 
p.  63. 

Muller  proposed  the  genus  Coccocrinus  for  a  species  which  had 
previousl}^  been  referred  by  Roemer  to  Platycrinus.  The  two 
genera  are  identical  in  the  construction  of  the  calyx,  and  the 
summit  really  forms  the  onl}^  distinction  between  them.  In  well- 
preserved  specimens  of  Coccocrinus^  the  vault  is  constructed  of 
five  large  oral  plates,  which  rest  upon  five  interradial  pieces.  The 
oral  plates  are  not  in  contact  laterally,  but  leave  five  slits,  which 
in  the  fossil  have  no  floor  nor  covering,  and  leave  an  open  space 
in  the  centre.  It  is  evident  that  the  central  space  and  open  farrows 
were  covered  in  the  animal  as  in  similar  genera,  and  this  suggests 
a  closer  analogy  with  Platycrinus  than  had  been  suspected  by 
Muller,  Schultze,  Zittel  or  Carpenter,  who  suggested  an  unob- 
structed mouth.  The  interradial  plate  which  rests  upon  the  edge 
of  the  first  radials  is  characteristic  of  both  genera,  and  the  two 
or  more  succeeding  interradial  dome  pieces  of  Platycrinus  are 
possibly  analogous  with  the  single  so-called  oral  plates  of  Cocco- 
crinus.    This,  if  correct,  would  reduce  the  generic  diflference  to 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  233 

that  of  a  compound  oral  plate  in  Platycrinus,  as  against  a  simple 
one  in  Coccocrinus. 

Zittel  has  arranged  this  genus  with  Haplocrinus  under  a  separate 
family. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Body  small,  globose;  calyx  constructed 
like  that  of  Platycrinus  ;  vault  composed  of  five  oral  plates,  resting 
upon  five  smaller  interradial  pieces. 

Basals  three  ;  two  of  them  equal,  the  third  smaller  by  half,  the 
suture  between  the  two  equal  plates  directed  toward  the  right 
posterior  ray ;  the  two  sutures  in  connection  with  the  smaller  one 
directed  to  the  anterior  and  left  lateral  rays,  thereby  disturbing 
the  general  sj-mmetr^'^  of  the  calyx,  which  otherwise  would  be  perfect. 

Radials  2X5;  the  first  large,  quadrangular,  its  upper  corners 
slightly  truncate  for  the  reception  of  the  interradial,  and  its 
upper  side  slightly  convex.  Second  radials  narrower  by  half 
than  the  first,  and  very  short ;  they  are  almost  quadrangular — 
although  bifurcating  plates — on  account  of  the  very  obtuse  angle 
upon  which  they  support  the  arms. 

Arms  unknown,  only  a  single  joint  having  been  discovered, 
which  is  small  and  round. 

Interradials,  one  to  each  area  resting  upon  the  corners  of  the 
first,  and  between  the  second  radials ;  its  upper  part  truncate, 
deflected  towards  the  summit,  and  supporting  another  somewhat 
larger  plate,  giving  five  in  the  vault,  which  form  a  low  pyramid. 
The  latter,  which  are  oral  plates,  do  not  join  laterally,  nor  in  the 
centre,  but  leave  a  median  space  and  lateral  slits,  which,  in  perfect 
specimens,  were  doubtless  closed,  the  one  b}^  the  apical  dome 
plates  and  the  slits  by  small  marginal  pieces.  Posterior  side  only 
distinguished  by  the  anal  opening,  which  is  placed  within  the 
suture  of  the  interradial  and  oral  plate. 

Column  small,  cylindrical ;  central  canal  round  and  narrow. 

Coccocrinus  differs  from  HajDlocrinus  in  having  the  first  radials 
simple  instead  of  compound,  and  in  the  oral  plates,  which  in  the 
latter  are  formed  into  compartments  for  the  reception  of  the  arms. 
It  differs  from  Platycrinus  and  Gordylocrinus  in  the  summit 
structure,  and  from  the  former  also  in  having  the  column  round 
instead  of  elliptical  and  twisted. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — Of  the  two  species  referred  to  this 
genus,  one  is  from  the  Lower  Silurian  of  Tennessee,  the  other 
from  the  Devonian  of  the  Eifel,  Germany. 


234  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

1S44.  Coccocr.  rosaceus  F.  Rocmer.     fPlatycr.  rosaceus)  Rhein.    Uebergangsgeb., 

p.  03,  PI.  3,  fig.  3 ;  Miiller,  1855.    Cocooor.  rosaceus,  type  of  the  genus.  Verb. 

Naturh.    Verein    Rhcinl.,    xii,    p.    21,  PI.  7,  figs.  5  a,  b,  c      Bronn,  1860. 

Klasscn  des  Thierreiohs,  ii,  PI.  28,  figs.  8  a,  b,  c ;  Schultze,  1867.  Echinod. 

Eifi.  Kalk.,  p.  89,  PI.  12,  fig.  13.     Devonian,  Eifel.,  Germany. 
1860.  Coccocrinus  bacca  F.  Roomer.     Silur.  Faun.  West.  Tenn.,  p.  51,  PI.  4,  figs.  5  a, 

b,  c.     Niagara  Gr.,  Tennessee. 


2.  CORDYLOCRINUS  Angelin. 

1878.  Angelin.     Icon.  Crin,  Suec,  p.  3. 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Palaeoutologie,  i,  p.  365. 

Syn.  Plntycrinus  Hall  (not  Miller),  Pal.  N.  Y.,  iii,  p.  113. 

Hall  (Pal.  New  York,  iii)  describes  three  species  under  Platy- 
vrinus  which  evidently  belong  to  Cordylocrinus.  TUey  have  the 
same  number  of  radials,  and  the  arms  are  similarly  composed  of 
a  single  row  of  joints.  The  genus  should,  however,  be  amended 
so  as  to  admit  species  with  branching  arms.  We  propose  the  fol- 
lowing : 

Genei'ic  Diagnosis. — Body  small,  closely  resembling  a  young 
Platycrinus. 

Basals  three ;  unequal,  closely  anchylosed.  Radials  3X5: 
the  first  very  large ;  the  second  quadrangular,  much  wider  than 
high,  resting  within  the  concave  upper  margin  of  the  first; 
the  third,  which  has  the  proportions  of  the  second,  but  bifurcating, 
supports  the  two  primary  arms  of  which  each  ray  is  composed. 

Arms  simple  or  branching,  composed  of  single  joints.  Pinnules 
long. 

Interradials,  one  between  the  upper  edges  of  the  first  radials, 
and  followed  by  three  or  more  similar  plates  in  the  dome,  the 
number  of  the  latter  being  greater  on  the  posterior  side. 

Form  of  dome  and  anus,  and  condition  of  the  apical  dome 
plates  unknown. 

Column  cylindrical,  joints  alternating  in  size,  the  larger  giving 
off  sometimes  at  intervals  long  lateral  cirrhi. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Restricted  to  the  Upper  Silurian,  both 
in  Europe  and  America. 

We  place  here  the  following  species  : — 

1878.  Cordylocrinus  comtus,  Angelin.  Type  of  the  genus.  Iconog.  Crin.  Suec, 
p.  3,  PI.  23,  fig.  3.     Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

*1S61.  Cordylocrinus  parvus,  Hall.  (Platycr.  parvus).  Pal.  New  York,  iii,  p.  114, 
PI.  4,  figs.  6,  7,  8,  9.     Lower  Helderberg.     Herkimer  Co.,  New  York. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  235 

■  1861.  Cordylocr.  plumosus,    Hall.     (Platycr.  plumosus.)  Pal.  New  York,  iii,  p. 

113,  PI.  4,  figs  1-5.     Lower  Helflerberg.     Herkimer  Co.,  New  York. 
*1861.  Cordylocr.  ramulosus,  Hall.     (Platycr.  ramulosus.  Pal.  New  York,  iii,  p. 

115,  PI.  4,  figs.  10-13.     Lower  Helderberg.     Herkimer  Co.,  New  York. 

3.  CULICOCRINUS  Job.  Miiller. 

1855.  Joh.  Miiller.     Verb.  Naturh.  Verein  Rheinl.  xii,  p.  23. 
1855.  F.  Roemer.    Lethsea  Geogn.  Ausgabe  iii,  p.  243. 
1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Palseont.,  i,  p.  367. 

Syn.  Platycrinus  Wirtgeu  and  Zeiler,  1855.     Verb.  Naturb.  Verein, 
p.  15. 

Miiller  proposed  Culicocrinus  merely  as  a  subgenus  of  Platy- 
crinus^ a  distinction  which  seems  to  us  scarcel}^  in  proportion  to 
the  differences  apparent  between  the  two  forms,  and  we  therefore 
propose  it  as  a  genus.  Zittel  even  places  it  with  Briarocr'inus 
under  a  separate  family.  Protoeryale  confluentina,  Roemer  (Yerh. 
Naturh.  Yereins,  xii,  p.  29,  PI.  9,  figs.  2, 3),  is  according  to  Miiller 
probably  identical  with  Gulicocr.  nodosus. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Body  elongate  ;  calyx  higher  than  wide  ; 
basals  and  first  radials  heavy  and  nodose  ;  symmetry  almost  per- 
fectly pentahedral. 

Basals  three,  large ;  two  of  them  equal,  pentagonal,  the  third 
smaller  by  half  and  quadrangular  ;  sutui-es  very  distinct.  They 
form  a  pentagon,  the  central  part  excavated  for  the  reception 
of  the  column;  separated  from  the  radials  by  a  deep  groove. 
Primary  radials  3X5;  the  first  large,  tuberculous,  quadrangular 
in  outline  but  in  fact  hexagonal,  owing  to  the  slight  truncation 
of  the  upper  corners  adjoining  the  interradials  ;  the  second  about 
quadrangular,  narrower  than  the  first,  veiy  short,  and  three  or  four 
times  wider  than  high ;  the  third  vaiying  in  form  and  size,  but 
generally  triangular.  The  latter  plates  mostly  occupy  only  the 
median  portion  of  the  margin  of  the  second  radials,  in  which  case 
the  outer  ends  of  those  plates  aid  in  supporting  the  secondary 
radials ;  sometimes,  however,  they  fill  the  entire  width  of  the 
second  primaries,  and  the  secondary  plates  rest  wholly  upon  the 
sloping  sides  of  the  triangular  pieces.  Secondary  radials  1  X  10, 
generally  wider  than  high,  supporting  two  arms  to  the  ray. 

Arms  stout,  attached  laterall}'  up  to  the  second  or  third  joints, 
above  which  at  some  distance  they  branch.  They  are  from  the 
base  up  composed  of  two  rows  of  joints,  alternately  arranged,  and 
meeting  by  zigzag  sutures. 


236  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

Interradials :  one,  placed  between  the  upper  corners  of  the  first 
raclials,  higher  than  wide,  narrowing  toward  the  summit,  extend- 
ing to  the  top  of  the  secondary  radials,  and  abutting  against  the 
proximal  dome  plates.  The  phite  at  the  posterior  area  is  some- 
what wider,  and  supports  the  anal  aperture  which  is  almost  lateral. 

The  dome,  according  to  MUller,  is  composed  of  only  five  plates, 
but  we  suggest  that  probabl}^  his  largest  plate  includes  four  plates, 
the  spiniferous  central  vault  piece,  the  two  proximal  vault  pieces, 
and  a  small  anal  plate  between  them.  The  four  large  pi'oximal 
vault  pieces,  each  crowned  with  a  spine,  are  no  doubt,  correctly 
represented.  Those  few  plates  occupy  the  greater  part  of  the 
summit,  leaving  but  little  space  for  the  radial  dome  plates,  which 
as  yet  are  unknown. 

Column  round, 

Culicoc?-inus,  in  its  form  and  general  habitus,  has  the  closest 
resemblance  to  our  genus  Talarocrinus,  which  bears  the  same 
relation  to  Dichocrinus  as  Culicocrinus  to  Flatycrinus.  In 
Platycrinus  and  Dichocrinus,  all  radials  above  the  first  plate  form 
a  part  of  the  free  rays,  while  in  the  two  other  genera  all  the 
primary  and  even  the  secondary  radials  are  included  in  the  calyx. 
This  genus  further  differs  from  Flatycrinus  in  having  three 
primary  radials,  a  character  which  distinguishes  it  also  from 
Marsupiocrinus,  the  construction  of  the  vault  being  likewise  very 
distinct.     It  differs  from  Gordylocrinus  in  the  arm  structure. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — The  only  known  species  is  from  the 
Lower  Devonian  of  Germany. 

1855,  Culicocrinus  nodosus  Wirtgen  and  Zeiler.  (Platycr.  nodosus.)  Verb.  Naturh. 
Verein,  xii,  p.  15,  PI.  6,  figs.  2,  3.  Miiller,  1855.  Culicoor.  nodoEUS.  Ibid., 
p.  24,  PI..  8,  figs.  1-4.     Grauwacke.     Near  Coblentz,  Germany.  ► 

This  species  is  known  onl}^  by  impressions  left  in  the  rock,  and 
casts  taken  therefrom. 

4.  MARSUPIOCRINUS  Pbillips. 

(Not  Marsupicrinites  Blainville    =  Marsupites  Mant., 
nor  Marsupiocrinites  Hall.  =  Lyriocrinus). 

1839.  Phillips  apud  Murchison,     Silur.  System.,  p.  672. 

1842.  Austin.     Ann,  Mag,  Nat.  Hist,,  x,  p,  109, 

1843,  Austin,     Ibid.,  xi,  p.  198. 

1857.  Pictet.     Traite  de  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  332. 
1878.  Augelin.     Icon,  Crin,  Suec,  p,  2. 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  237 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Paljeont.,  p.  365. 

Syn.  Platycrinus  F.  Roemer,  1860.     Silur.  Faun.  W.  Tenn.,  p.  35. 
"     Cupellmcrinus   Troost,    1850.    List.    Crin.    Tenn..    p.   61  ;    also 
Shumard,  1866.     Catal.  Pal.  Foss.  North  Amer.,  p.  361. 

Marsupiocrinus  has  undoubtedly  close  affinities  with  Platy- 
crinus^ with  which  it  has  been  identified  by  Joh.  Miiller  and  Hall, 
but  it  diftei's  in  the  higlier  orders  of  radials,  which,  instead  of 
being  extended  into  free  rays,  form  a  part  of  the  calyx ;  and  also 
in  having  the  column  round  instead  of  elliptic,  and  the  canal 
larger. 

Troost 's  genus  CupeUsecrinus,  which  was  defined  as  late  as  1866 
by  Shumard,  must  be  considered  a  synonym  of  this  genus,  unless 
it  should  hereafter  be  found  that  the  anus  in  the  former  consists 
of  a  simple  opening  through  the  vault,  and  not  a  tube  as  in  the 
latter,  in  which  case  a  subgeneric  division  might  be  justified. 
Troost,  in  his  List.  Crin.  Tenn.,  mentions  several  species  imder 
Cupelldecrinus,  one  of  which  is  probably  identical  with  Roemer's 
PL  Tennesseensis,  but  none  of  them  have  ever  been  described  or 
figured. 

Angelin's  Marsiqnocrinus  dubiiis  is  quite  a  difierent  thing, 
probably  an  Actinocrinoid,  as  is  indicated  by  the  basal  disk, 
which,  instead  of  being  pentagonal,  is  hexagonal  and  divided  into 
three  equal  pieces. 

Joh.  Miiller  considered  M.  coelatus  a  Platycrinus  (Monatsb. 
Berl.  Acad.,  1841,  p.  201),  differing  from  the  Austins,  who  made  it 
the  type  of  a  separate  family  in  which  they  included  the  genus 
Grotalocrinus.  Pictet,  Angelin,  and  Zittel  view  the  matter  as  we 
do,  and  place  it  as  a  distinct  genus. under  the  Platj'crinidse. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Bod}'  globular;  calyx  low,  basin-shaped, 
the  lower  portions  flat  or  slightly  convex  ;  sides  more  or  less 
straight,  surface  corrugated  or  ornamented  by  fine  striations ; 
symmetry  perfectly  pentahedral ;  secondary  and  tertiary  radials 
forming  part  of  the  calyx ;  connected  laterally  by  a  single  inter- 
radial  plate. 

Basals  three,  large,  unequal,  arranged  as  in  Platycrinus. 
Radials  2X5;  those  of  the  first  row  large,  meeting  laterally,  bent 
abruptly  from  their  connection  with  the  basals,  and  forming  with 
them  a  shallow  cup,  the  middle  of  their  upper  margins  excavated 
for  the  reception  of  a  small  triangular  second  radial,  which  is  at 
least  as  high  as  wide,  but  often  higher,  and  which  has  convex 


238  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881, 

sides.  This  plate  occupies  not  more  than  one-fourth  to  one-third 
the  width  of  the  first  radials,  and  supports  on  its  upper  ^sloping 
margins  the  secondary  radials.  Secondary  radials  2  X  5,  enveloj)- 
ing  the  little  bifurcating  plate  entirely  except  below.  The^'^  are 
comi)aratively  large,  pentagonal  to  heptagonal,  meeting  by  their 
short  inner  sides  above  the  apex  of  the  small  bifurcating  plate, 
and  resting  with  their  lower  sides  upon  the  upper  margin  of  the 
first  radial,  filling  the  gi'eater  part  of  it.  In  some  cases  they 
touch  with  their  outer  edges  the  interradials,  and  support  upon 
their  long  upper  sides  several  small  plates  which  pass  gradually 
into  the  arms.  In  other  cases  there  is  on  either  side  of  these 
plates,  and  between  them  and  the  interradial,  another  plate  of 
about  the  same  size,  which  sometimes  rests  also  partly  on  the  first 
radial,  and  forms  the  first  of  a  series  of  three  tertiary  radials. 
which  support  the  outer  arm  on  each  side  of  the  ray.  One,  and 
sometimes  two  similar  tertiary  radials  support  each  of  the  inner 
arms  of  the  ray.  In  forms  like  the  last,  the  secondary  radials 
seem  to  be  bifurcating  plates,  supporting  on  each  upper  sloping 
face  a  series  of  tertiary  radials  leading  to  an  arm. 

Arms  twenty,  sometimes  perhaps  only  ten ;  composed  of  a  double 
series  of  interlocking  joints,  either  throughout  their  entire  length, 
or  all  except  near  the  base,  where  there  are  sometimes  single 
cuneiform  joints  passing  gradually  into  a  double  series.  Arm 
furrow  deep  and  wide  ;  pinnules  long,  composed  of  round  joints, 
somewhat  contracted  in  the  middle  and  widening  toward  the 
articulations. 

Interradial  plate  large,  higher  than  wide,  sxipported  upon  the 
upper  sloping  corner  of  the  first  radials,  and  connecting  the 
secondary  and  frequently  the  tertiary  radials  with  the  body. 
Posterior  side  of  calyx  in  no  way  distinct  from  the  other  sides. 

Vault  low,  hemispherical,  composed  of  a  larger  number  of 
plates  than  usually  found  in  this  family ;  plates  small,  particu- 
larly the  radial  dome  plates.  These  are  generally  formed  into 
narrow  ridges,  which  bifurcate  twice  within  the  bod}-.  Inter- 
radial dome  plates  larger  than  the  radial ;  apical  plates  not 
prominent  and  identified  with  difficulty ;  interpalmar  spaces 
paved  with  small  pieces.  Anus  subcentral,  tubular,  or  perhaps 
in  form  of  a  simple  opening  (?), 

Column  round,  composed  of  rather   large  joints   alternating 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  23i) 

with  small  ones ;  central  perforation  obtusely  pentagonal,  con- 
siderably- larger  than  in  Platycrinus. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Marsupiocrinus  is  strictly  an  Upper 
Silurian  genus,  and  is  found  both  in  Europe  and  America. 

We  recognize  the  following  species  : — 

1839.  Marsupiocrinus  coelatus  Phillips.     Type  of  the   genus.     Murehison's  Silur. 

Syst.,  p.  672,  PI.   18,   fig.  1;  Austin,  1842.  Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  s, 

p.  109.     Upper  Silurian.     Dudley,  Eng. 
1878.  Marsupiocr.  depressus  Angelin.     Icon.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  3,  PI.  10,  figs.  15-17. 

Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
1878.  Marsupiocr.  pulcher  Angelin.     Icon.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  3,  PI.  22,  figs.  27,  28 : 

and  PI.  27,  figs.  4,  4  a.     Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
1878.  M.  radiatus  Ang.     Icon.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  2,  PI.  10,  figs.  18-21.     Upper  Silurian. 

Gothland,   Sweden.     This  species  was  erroneously  referred  by  Hisipger  to 

Eucalyptocrinus  rosaceus  Goldf. 
1878.  M.  rugulosus  Ang.     Icon.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  2,  PI.  22,  fig.  1.     Upper  Silurian. 

Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1860,  M.  Tennesseensis  F.  Roemer.    (Platycr.  Tennesseensis)  Sil.  Fauna.  West 

Tenn.,  p.  35,  PI.  3,  figs.  4,  a-e;   Shumard,  1866.     Cupellaecrinus  Tennes- 
seensis,   Cat.    Pal.    Foss.,   pt.    i,    p.    362.      Niagara    Gr.,    Upper  Silurian. 

Decatur  Co.,  Tenn. 
*1861.  M.  tentaculatus  Hall.    (Platycr.  tentaculatus)  Pal.  New  York,  iii,  p  116, 

PI.  5,  figs.  1-4.     Lower  Ilelderberg  Gr.,  Upper  Sil.     Schoharie,  New  York. 

5.  PLATYCRINUS  Miller. 

1821.  Miller.     Hist,  of  the  Crinoidea,  p.  73. 

1833.  Goldfuss,  in  part.     Petrefact.  Germ.,  i. 

1835.  Agassiz,  in  part.     Mem.  Soc.  Neucliat.,  i,  p.  197, 

1836.  Phillips.     Geol.of  Yorkshire,  ii,  p.  204. 

1839.  Goldfuss,  in  part.     Nov.  Acta.  Ac.  Leop.,  xix,  p.  343. 

1841.  Joh.  Miiller.     Monatsb.  Berl.  Akad.,  i,  p.  207. 

1842.  T.  Austin.     Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  x,  p.  109. 

1843.  T.  Austin,     Ibid.,  xi,  p.  199. 

1843.  T.  Austin.     Men.  Pec.  Foss.  Crin.,  p.  6. 

1849.  McCoy.     Ann.  and  Mag,  Nat.  Hist.  (ser.  2),  iii,  p.  146. 

1850.  D'Orbigny.     Prodr.  de  Paleont.,  i,  p.  156. 

1852.  D'Orbigny.     Cours.  Elem,  de  Paleont,,  ii,  p,  242. 

1852.  Quenstedt,  in  part,     Handb.  d.  Petrefakt.,  p.  619. 

1853.  De  Koninck  and  Lehon.     Recherch.  Crin.  Belg. ,  p.  155, 
1855,  F.  Roemei-.     Lethsea  Geogn.  (Ausg.  iii),  p.  242, 

1857.  Pictet.     Traite  de  Paleont.,  iv.  p.  330. 

1858.  Hall.     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  Pt.  ii,  p.  525. 

1866.  Meek  and  Worthen,     Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  170. 

1878.  Wachsm.  and  Spr,     Proc,  Acad,  Nat,  Sci,  Phila.,  p.  243. 


240  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

1870.  Zittel.     Handb.  d,  Palseontologie,  p.  364. 

Not  Phill.,  1841.     Pal.  Foss.  Cornwall,  p.  28.  =  Hexacrinus. 

Not  F.  Roemer,  1844.     Rliein.  Ueberg.  Geb.,  p.  63.  =  Coccocrinus. 

Not  D'Orbigny,  1850.     Prodr.  d.  Pal.,  i,  p.  103.  =  Hexacrinus. 

Not  F.  Roemer,    1851.      Foss.  West  Tenn.,  p.  35.  =  Marsupio- 
crinus. 

Not  Hall,  1861.     Pal.  N.  York,  iii,  p.  113.  =  Cordylocrinus  and 
Marsiqnocrin  us. 

Not  Schultze,  1866.     Ecliin,  Eifl.,  p.  68.  =  Storthingocrinus. 

Not  Lyon,  1869.     Am.  Phil.  Soc,  xiii,  p.  459.  =  Hexacrinus. 
Syn.  Astropodia  Ure.,  1797.     Hist,  of  Rutherglen. 
Syn.  Nave  Encrinite  Parkinson,  1811.     Org.  Rem.,  vol.  ii. 
Syn.  Encrinites  Schlottheim,  1823.     Nachtr.  Petrefaktenk. 
Syn.  Gentrocrinns  Austin,  1843.     Rec.  and  Foss.  Crin.,  p.  6 
Syn.  Pleurocrinus  Austin,  1843.     Rec.  and  Foss.  Crin.,  p.  6. 
Syn.  Edzoardsocrimts  D'Orbigny,  1850.     Prodr.  d.  Paleont,  i,  p.  156. 
Syn.  Edwardsocrinvs  D'Orbigny,  1852.     Cours.  Elem.,  ii,  p.  145. 
Syn.  Edwardsocrinus  Pictet,  1857.     Traite  de  Pal.,  iv,  p.  331. 

Platycrinus  was  correctly  defined  b}'  Miller,  and  his  original 
species  with  the  single  exception  of  PI.  pentangularis,  have  been 
retained  in  the  genus  ever  since.  This  species,  described  from  an 
imperfect  specimen,  was  made  b}'  D'Orbigny  the  type  of  his 
genus  Dimorphocrinus  (Prodr.,  i,  p.  155),  but  is  evidently  a 
Pentremites. 

Austin  supposed  the  basal  disk  to  be  undivided  in  Platycrinus^ 
and  admitted  into  it  species  whicli  have  a  large  anal  plate  in  line 
with  the  first  radials,  but  such  only  in  which  he  thouglit  the  base 
to  be  composed  of  a  single  piece  ;  he  refers  all  species,  in  which 
he  had  "  observed  a  tripartite  base,"  to  his  genus  Hexacrinus, 
whether  they  have  an  anal  plate  or  not. 

The  several  species  which  Gold  fuss  placed  under  Platycrinus 
embrace  very  diflferent  forms,  only  comparatively  few  of  which 
can  be  retained,  and  some  of  them  must  be  arranged  under  dis- 
tinct families. 

Phillips'  two  species,  from  the  Devonian  of  Cornwall,  have  been 
placed  with  Devonian  species  from  other  localities  under  Hexa- 
crinus. 

Roemer's  Platycrinus  rosaceus  is  a  Coccocrinus,  his  P.  Tennes- 
seensis,  and  Hall's  P.  tentaculatus,  both  from  the  Upper  Silurian, 
have  been  referred  by  us  to  Marsupiocrinus ;  Hall's  P.  parvus, 
P.  plumosus  and  P.  ramulosus  to  Cordylocrinus. 

Schultze,  in  1866,  described  under  Platycrimis  several  species 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PinLADELPHIA.  241 

from  the  Eifel,  which  he  found  to  differ  from  that  genus  in  having 
no  interradials,  and,  as  he  supposed,  no  solid  ventral  covering- 
He  proposed,  in  case  a  separation  should  be  found  advisable,  to 
call  this  form  Storthingocrinus.  We  have  no  specimens  for  com- 
parison, but  if  the  figures  are  correct,  we  cannot  doubt  that  these 
species  are  not  only  generically  distinct,  but  belong  to  a  different 
famil}'.  In  the  entire  absence  of  interradial  plates  thej'  resemble 
Symbathocrinus,  and  they  seem  to  have  been,  like  otlier  genera  of 
that  group,  covered  exclusively  by  apical  dome  plates  resting 
directly  upon  the  external  articulating  facets  of  the  first  radials. 
We  accordingly  recognize  the  genus,  but  remove  it  to  the  Sym- 
bathocrinidae. 

Edicardsocrinus  D'Orbigny,  as  previously  stated,  is  nothing 
but  a  young  Platycrinus.  Eucladocrinus  Meek,  is  a  more  mature 
form  in  a  phylogenetic  sense,  and  is  therefore  properly  separated 
as  a  subgenus. 

Platycrinus^  as  now  restricted,  includes  species  with  an  anal 
tube,  and  those  in  which  the  opening  is  directly  through  the  vault. 
The  tube  has  been  represented  by  the  two  Austins  and  by  De 
Koninck  and  Lehon  as  extending  almost  to  the  height  of  the 
arms,  heavy  and  rounded  at  the  distal  end.  We  fear  that  some  of 
their  figures  are  more  ideal  than  real ;  at  least  we  never  saw  an , 
American  species  with  so  long  a  tube.  Where  we  have  observed 
it,  the  tube  is  heav}',  but  short,  and  we  doubt  whether  in  any 
species  it  extended  to  more  than  two-thirds  the  height  of  the 
arms,  if  indeed  as  high.  Nor  is  the  upper  end  closed,  as  the 
Austins  supposed,  nor  valvate ;  it  has  a  small  opening,  and  this, 
without  being  lateral,  is  somewhat  excentric.  The  opening  through 
the  vault,  where  thei'e  is  no  tube,  is  located  more  or  less  laterally, 
never  centrallj',  and  usuallj^  at  the  top  of  a  wart-like  process, 
which  may  perhaps  be  considered  a  rudimentary  tube. 

The  two  Austins  attempted  a  division  of  the  genus,  based  upon 
the  form  of  the  anus.  They  proposed  to  place  under  Platycrinus 
only  species  with  a  "central  'oral  tube  ;  "  those  with  a  "  valvate, 
unobtrusive  mouth,  or  mouth  capable  of  being  withdrawn  into  the 
visceral  cup,"  they  called  Gentrocrinus ;  and  those  with  a  "  mouth 
placed  laterally,  or  not  central,"  Pleurocrinus.  Some  of  these 
characters  are  not  in  accordance  with  the  facts.  The  so-called 
mouth,  by  which  they  meant  the  anus,  is  always  excentric,  and  a 
withdrawal  of  the  tube  into  the  body,  as  suggested,  is  an  entire 

17 


242  PROCEEDTNGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

Impossibility.  The  species  of  this  genus  are  so  numerous  that  a 
sub-division  would  be  ver}'  desirable,  but  even  a  subgeneric  sepa- 
ration, based  upon  the  presence  or  absence  of  an  anal  tube,  upon 
which  other  genera  of  this  family  have  been  successfully  divided, 
cannot  be  practically  carried  out  at  present,  for  the  reason  that 
these  parts  are  known  only  in  comparatively  few  species,  and  we 
have  been  unable  to  discover  an}'  additional  characters  by  which 
to  separate  the  two  forms.  We  have,  however,  added  Pleurocrinus 
in  brackets,  wherever  the  species  is  known  to  possess  a  simple 
opening,  and  it  may  be  said  that,  as  a  pretty  general  rule,  species 
of  their  kind  have  a  more  discoid  form,  while  those  with  a  tube 
have  a  more  elongate  body  ;  but  there  are  exceptions  in  both  cases, 
and  often  the  facts  are  exactly  the  reverse. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Body  spheroidal;  low  discoid  to  elongate. 
Calyx  composed  of  basals  and  first  radials,  without  anal  plates 
intervening ;  all  succeeding  radials  embraced  in  the  free  rays  ; 
surface  of  plates  variously  ornamented  ;  symmetry  almost  equi- 
lateral. 

Basals  three,  unequal ;  one  quadrangular,  the  other  two  pentan- 
gular and  twice  as  large.  The}"^  are  cemented  together  b}^  their 
sides  and  form  a  flat  disk,  or  a  more  or  less  shallow  cup,  the 
smaller  basal  being  located  below  the  suture  between  the  anterior 
and  left  lateral  radials.  Primary  radials  2X5;  the  first  very 
large,  about  quadrangular  in  outline,  the  second  small,  triangular 
or  pentagonal,  resembling  an  arm  plate  in  form.  Second  radial 
inserted  upon  the  excavated  upper  margin  of  the  first,  or  upon 
this  and  a  projecting  callosity  or  thickening  of  the  margin.  The 
plate  is  sometimes  so  small  that  even  both  radials  of  the  second 
order  rest  within  the  excavation  of  the  first  plate.  The  orders  of 
radials  vary  in  number,  corresponding  to  the  number  of  arms  in 
the  species  ;  each  order  consisting  of  two  plates,  both  wider  than 
high,  the  second  bifurcating.  All  the  radials  from  the  second 
-  primar}'  up,  are  placed  into  free  rays,  from  which  the  arms  are 
given  off  alternately  from  opposite  sides,  with  two  arms  to  the  last 
bifurcation. 

Arms  long,  rather  heavy,  composed  of  a  double  series  of  plates, 
which  have  the  same  style  of  ornamentation  as  the  plates  of 
the  calyx.  In  the  younger  stage,  the  arms  are  composed  of 
single  wedge-form  joints,  giving  off  pinnules  in  a  zigzag  form. 
Pinnules  long,  slender,  composed  of  rounded  joints,  closely  packed 


1  881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  243 

together ;  their  ventral  furrows  covered  by  two  rows  of  alternate 
pieces. 

Interradials,  one  to  each  space,  placed  between  the  free  rays ; 
supported  by  the  first  radials,  but  not  touching  the  second 
primary  or  any  other  radial  plate. 

Dome  elevated,  composed  of  comparatively  few  and  large 
plates;  apical  dome  plates  prominent;  the  central  and  the  four 
large  proximal  pieces  nodose  or  even  spiniferous.  Radial  regions 
somewhat  elevated,  constructed  of  a  double  row  of  larger  or 
smaller  pieces,  alternatelj'  arranged,  which,  decreasing  in  size,  ex- 
tend to  the  extremities  of  the  free  rays.  Interradial  spaces 
occupied  by  three — rarely  five — plates,  smaller  than  the  central 
dome  plates  and  less  nodose,  but  j^et  comparatively  large,  and 
resting  upon  the  interradial  of  the  calj^x.  On  the  postero-lateral 
sides,  there  are  several  additional  plates,  supporting  the  arms.  In 
rare  cases,  the  interradial  dome  plates  of  different  zones  are  later- 
ally connected,  and  the  radial  pieces  are  thereby  pushed  to  near 
the  edge  of  the  disk. 

Anus  in  form  of  a  short,  heavy  tube,  composed  of  smooth 
plates  ;  abruptly  rounded  at  its  upper  end ;  with  opening  nearly 
central  (Platycrinus)^  or  in  form  of  a  simple  lateral  opening 
through  the  vault  {Pleurocrinus) , 

Column  large  and  twisted  ;  composed  of  rather  large  joints, 
which  increase  in  length  as  they  recede  from  the  body :  central 
perforation  minute.  The  column  is  comparatively  short,  and 
toward  the  base  provided  with  numerous  lateral  branches,  which 
like  the  main  stem,  terminate  in  thin,  almost  hair-like  tubes. 
The  joints  are  transversely  elliptic,  each  one  being  twisted  so  that 
the  long  diameters  of  opposite  faces  make  an  angle  with  each 
other;  and,  the  articulation  being  in  the  long  diameters,  a  rapid 
twist  is  imparted  to  the  whole  stem,  permitting  motion  in  all 
directions.  The  stem  seems  to  be  regularly  articulated,  which  is 
not  the  case  in  crinoids  with  a  round  or  pentagonal  stem  ;  the 
articulating  lines  run  lengthwise  of  the  faces  of  the  joints  and 
consist  of  a  long  ridge  along  the  middle,  with  deep  depressions 
on  either  side,  which  latter  were  evidently  filled  by  ligament. 
The  column  forms  one  of  the  most  characteristic  features  of  the 
genus. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Plat y annus,  as  here  defined,  is  almost 
exclusively  a  Subcarboniferous  genus,  only  two  small  species  (one 


24*  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

of  them  doubtful)  being  known  from  the  upper  part  of  the  Devo- 
nian. It  is  found  most  abundantly  in  rocks  of  the  Burlington 
epoch,  which  embraces  the  lower  portions  of  the  Subcarboniferous, 
it  ceases  to  exist  at  the  close  of  the  St.  Louis  limestone.  No 
other  genus  of  the  Palaeocrinoidea  has  so  great  a  number  of 
species,  is  so  abundantly  represented,  and  has  so  wide  a  geogra- 
phical distribution. 

We  recognize  the  following  species  : — 

1861.  Platyorinus  aeqaalis  Hall.  Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  117;  also  Geol.  Rep.  III., 
V,  p.  456,  PI.  3,  fig.  8.     Upper  Burlington  limestone.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1850.  PI.  americanus  Owen  and  Shumard.  Journ.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.  (ser.  ii),  ii;  also 
1852.  U.  S.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  Wis.  and  Minn.,  p.  594,  PI.  5  b,  figa.  1  a,  b. 
Lower  Burlington  limestone.  Burlington,  Iowa. 
Si/n.  PL  trunoatus  Hall.  1858,  Geol.  Rep.,  Iowa,  i,  pt.ii,  p.  537.  Hall  in  this 
ease  described  a  young  specimen  of  PL  amerioanas.  The  lower  part  of  the 
arms  are  composed  of  s-ingle,  wedge-form  joints,  giving  off  the  pinnules  in  a 
zigzag  arrangement. 

1861.  PL  asper  Meek  and  Worthen.  (Pleurocrinus)  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 
p.  129;  also  1868,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  iii,  p.  468,  PI,  18,  fig.  9.  Upper  Burling- 
ton limestone.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1853.  PL  arenosus  DeKoninck  and  Lehon.  Recherch.  Crin.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  182,  PI. 
5,  fig.  7.     Upper  part  of  Mountain  limestone.     Tournay,  Belgium, 

(?)  1838.  PL  armatus  Miinster.  Beitr.  zur  Petref,,  vol.  i.  Mountain  limestone  (?). 
Tournay,  Belgium  (?). 

1853.  PL  Austinianus  De  Koninck  and  Lehon.fi     Recherch.  Crin.  Carb.  Belg,,  p. 
169,  PL  5,  figs.  3  a,  b.     Mountain  limestone.     Tournay,  Belgium. 
Syn.  PL  trigintidactylus  Aust.  (in  part).     Mon.  Rec,  and  Foss,  Crin.,  PI.  3, 
fig.  1  a  (not  fig.  1  b-g). 

1875.  PL  bedfordensis  Hall.  Geol.  Surv.  Ohio,  Pal.  ii,  p.  161,  PI.  13,  fig,  4,  Erie 
Shale,  Waverly  Gr.     Bedford,  Ohio. 

1879.  PL  bonoensis  White.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat,  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  30;  also  1880,  Hay- 
den's  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  Invert.  Pal.,  No.  8,  p.  160,  PI.  40,  fig.  5  a.  Lower 
part  of  Keokuk  limestone.     Lawrence  and  Floyd  Co,,  Ind. 

1861.  PL  brevinodus  Hall,  Desc,  New  Sp,  Crin,,  p,  4;  also  Bost.  Jour,  Nat.  Hist 
p,  286  ;  separate  photog,  plate  2,  fig,  5,     Keokuk  limestone.     Keokuk,  Iowa. 

1860.  PL  burlingtonensis  Ow,  and  Sh,f      Jour,  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.  (new  ser.), 

ii,  pt.  1;  also  1852,  U.  S.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  Wis,  and  Minn,,  p,  589,  PI,  5  a, 

fig.  5.      Meek  and  Worthen,  1873,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  452,  PI.  3,  figs.  6  a. 

b,c.     Lower  Burlington  limestone.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
St/n.  PL  ezsertas   Hall.     1858,  Geol,  Rep,  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p,  539.     Described 

from  a  young  specimen, 
.S^yn.  PL  inornatUS  McChesney.     1860,  Desc,  New  Pal.  Foss.,  p.  6;  also  PL 

barlingtonensis,  Chicago  Acad.  Sci,,  i,  p.  9,  PI,  4,  fig.  3. 

1861,  PL  calycnlus  Hall.     Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  16.     Burlington  limestone.     Bur- 

lington, Iowa.     Hall's  description  is  too  imperfect  for  identification. 


In  species  marked  f ,  an  anal  tube  has  been  observed. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  245 

1861.  PI.  canaliculatus  Ilall.f     Geo).  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  539.      Upper  Burling- 

ton limestone.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1858.  PI  cavttS  Hall.     (Pleurocrinus)  Geol.  Rep.,  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  527,  PI.  8,  figp.  1 

a,  b.     Upper  Burlington  limestone.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1836.  PI.  contractus  Phillips  (Gilbertson).     Geol.  Yorkshire,  p.  204,  PI.  3,  fig.  25. 

McCoy,  1844,  Carb.  Foss.  Ireland,  p.   175;  D'Orbigny,   1849,   Prodr.,  i,  p. 

156.     Mountain  limestone.     Ireland  and  England. 
1863.  PL  contritus  Hall.      17th  Rep.  N.  Y.  St.  Cab.,  p.  54;  also  Geol.  Rep.  Ohio, 

Pal.  ii,  p.  166,  PI.  11,  fig.  4.     Waverly  Gr.     Richfield,  Ohio. 
1850.  PI.  corragatas   Ow.  and  Sh.  (Pleurocrinus).      Jour.    Acad.   Nat.  Sci.  Phila. 

(new  ser.),  ii,  pt.  i ;  also  1852,  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  Iowa,  Wis.  and  Minn.,  p.  589, 

PI.  5  a,  figs.  2  a-e.     Lower  Burlington  limestone.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  PI.  striobraohiatus  Hall.     1861,  Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  4;  also  Bost. 

Jour.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  287,  separate  photogr.  plate  2,  figs.  2,  3. 

1849.  PI.  diadema  McCoy.     Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (ser.  2),  iii,  p.  246.     Mount 

limest.     North  Ireland. 

1850.  PI.  discoidens  Ow.  and  Sh.       (Pleurocrinus)  Jour.  Acad.    Nat   Sci.  Phila. 

(new  ser.),  vol.  ii,  pt.  i;  also  1852,  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  Iowa,  Wise,  and  Minn., 
p.  688,  PI.  5  a,  figs.  1  a,  b  (not  PI.  disroideus  Hall,  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt. 
ii,  PI.  8,  figs.  8  a,  b  =  Eucladocr.  pleurovimenus  White).  Lower  Burling- 
ton limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

Syn.  PI.  multibrachiatus  Meek  and  Worthen.  1861,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci. 
Phila.,  p.  134. 

Syn.  PI.  excavatns  Hall.  1861,  Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  7;  also  Bost.  Jour. 
Nat.  Hist.,  p.  286. 

1862.  PI.  eboraceus  Hall.     15th  Rep.  N.  Y.  St.  Cab.,  p.  119,  separate  photog.  PI.   1, 

figs.  16,  17 ;  Bigsby,  1878,  Hezaor.  eboraceus.     Thesaurus  Devon.,  p.  18. 

Hamilton  Gr.     Livingstone  Co.,  N.  York. 
1861.  PI.  elegans  Hall.f     Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  4;  also  Bost.  Jour.  Nat.  Hist.,  p. 

285.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1836.  PI.   ellipticus  Phillips.     Geol.   Yorkshire,  p.  204,  PI.  3,  fig.  19  (not  fig.  21). 

D'Orbigny,  1849,  Prodr.  i,  p.  156.     Mount,  limest.     Bolland,  England. 
Probably  synonym  of  PI.  granulatus  Miller. 

1861.  PI.  eminulus  Hall.     Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  17.     Lower  Burlington  limest. 

Burlington,  Iowa. 

1862.  PI.  eriensis  Hall.     15th  Rep.  N.  Y.  St.  Cab.,  p.  119.     Hamilton  Gr.     Erie  Co., 

New  York. 
This  is  the  only  species  in  which  three  radials  have  been  observed,  the  upper 
evidently  forming  a  syzygi'im.     It  may  possibly  belong  to  Cordylocrinus. 
1844.  PI.   expansus    McCoy.     Carb.    Foss.    Ireland,    p.    175,    PI.    25,    figs.    18,   19; 
D'Orbigny,  1849,  Prodr,  i,  p.  156;  Roemer,  1855,  Lethata  Geogn.  (Ausg.  3), 
1st  Periode,  p.  245,  PI.  4^,  figs.  14  a,  b.     Mount,  limest.     Ireland. 

1860.  PL  Georgii  Hall.     Sup.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  82,  PI.  1,  fig.  7.      Warsaw  limest. 

Warsaw,  111. 
1836.  PL  gigas  Gilbertson  (Phillips).     Geol.  of  Yorkshire,  p.  204,  PI.  3,  figs.  22,  23; 
Austin,  1842,   Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  x,  p.  108;  also  1843,  Mon.  Rce. 
and  Foss.  Crin.,  p.  39,  PI.  4,  figs.  1  a-c.     Mount,  limej-t.     Bollard,  England. 

1861.  PL  glyptus  Hall  (Pleurocrinus).     Desc.  New  Sps.  Crin.,  p.  16.     Upper  Bur- 

lington limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
A  mere  variety  of  PL  sculptus  Hall. 


246  PROCEEDINGS  OF    THK    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

1853.  PI.  granosus   De  Koninck  and  Lehon  (Pleurocrinus).     Rccher.    Crin.   Carb. 

Bulg.,  p.  183,  PI.  t),  figs.  6  a-i.     Mount,  liinest.     Tournay,  Belgium. 
1821.  PI.  granulatas  Miller.     Hist.  Crinoidea,  p.  81,  PI.  4,   fig.«.  1-3;  .Scblotheim, 

1822,  Nacbtr.  zur  Petref.,  i,  p.  86;  Ibid,  ii,  p.  97,  PI.  26,  figs.  3  a,  b,  c; 
Blainville,  1830,  Diet,  des  Sci.  Nat.,  Ix,  p  243;  Agassiz,  1835,  Mem.  de  la 
Soc.  des  Sci.  de  Neuchatel,  i,  p.  197;  De  Koninck,  1842,  Desc.  Anim.  Foss. 
Carb.  de  Belg.,  p.  43,  PI.  F,  figs.  2  a,  b;  Portlock,  1843,  Geol.  of  London- 
derry, p.  350,  PI.  16,  fig.  4;  Austin,  1843,  Mon.  Rec.  and  Foss.  Crin.,  p.  33, 
PI.  3,  figs.  2  i-o;  McCoy,  1844,  Carb.  Foss.  Ireland,  p.  176;  De  Koninck  and 
Lehon,  1853,  Rccherch.  Crin.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  179,  PI.  6,  figs.  5  a-b.  Mount, 
limest.     England,  Ireland  and  Belgium. 

1863.  PI.  graphicus  Hall.  17ch  Rep.  N.  Y.  St.  Cab.,  p.  55;  also  1875,  Geol.  Surv. 
Ohio,  Pal.  ii,  p.  166,  PI.  11,  fig.  2.     Waverly  Gr.     Richfield,  Ohio. 

1865.  PI.  Halli  Shumard  (PleurocrinusJ.  Catal.  Pal.  Foss.  North  America,  p.  388 
(Trans.  Acad.  Sci.  St.  Louis,  vol.  ii).  Upper  Burlington  limest.  Burling- 
ton, Iowa. 
This  species  was  at  first  described  and  figured  by  Hall  as  PL  planus  Ow.  and 
Sh.,  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  533,  PI.  8,  figs.  6  a,  b.  It  resembles  PL  in- 
COmptUS  White,  in  form  and  lack  of  ornamentation,  but  the  latter  has  six, 
or  exceptionally  seven  to  eight  arms  to  each  ray,  while  PL  Halli  has  twelve 
or  even  sixteen  arms  to  the  ray. 
Syn.  PL  olla  Hall  (not  De  Kon.  and  Lehon).     Desc   New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  16. 

1873.  PL  Haydeni  Meek.  Hayden's  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  for  1872,  p.  469;  also  White, 
Ann.  Rep.  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  Terr,  for  1878,  p.  122,  PI.  33,  fig.  7  a.  Sub- 
carboniferous. 

1865.  PL  hemisphericus  Meek  and  Worthen  (Pleurocrinus).  Proc.  Acad.  Nat. 
Sci.  Phila.,  p.  162;  also  Geol.  Rep.  III.,  iii,  p.  466,  PI.  16,  fig.  9,  and  vol.  v, 
p.  16,  figs.  6  a,  b,  c.  Keokuk  limest.  Crawfordsville,  Ind. ;  also  Burlington 
and  Keokuk  Transition  beds  at  Burlington  and  Nauvoo. 

1863.  PL  incomptus  White.  Bost.  Jour.  Nat.  Hist.,  vii,  p.  503;  also  Meek  and 
AVorth.,  1873,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  459,  PI.  .3,  fig.  7.  Upper  Burlington 
limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1836.  PL  laciniatus  Gilbertsou  (Phillips).  Geol.  of  Yorkshire,  p.  204,  PI.  3,  fig.  18; 
Austin,  1843,  Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  x,  p.  109,  and  Mon.  Rec.  and  Foss. 
Crin.,  p.  42,  PI.  5,  figs.  1  a-c;  D'Orbigny,  1849,  Prodr  i,  p.  156.  Mount, 
limest.     BoUand,  England. 

1821.  PL  leevis  Miller.f  Hist.  Crinoidea,  p.  74,  PI.  1,  fig.  1-9,  and  13-18,  and  PI.  2, 
figs.  1-4,  and  52-56  (the  other  figures  have  been  referred  by  De  Koninik  to 
several  other  species).     Scblotheim,  1822,  Nachtr.  zur  Petref.,  i,  p.  84;  Ibid., 

1823,  vol.  ii,  p.  94,  PI.  25,  figs.  4  a  and  4  e;  Goldfuss,  1833,  Petref.  Germ.,  i, 
p.  188,  PI.  58,  fig?.  2  a-e;  Blainville,  1834,  Manuel  de  Actinocr.,  p.  262; 
Agassiz,  1835,  Mem.  Soc.  de  Neuchatel,  p.  197  ;  Bronn,  1835,  Leihsea  Geogn., 
i,  p.  60;  Milne-Edwards,  1836,  Anim.  s.  vert,  de  Lamarck,  ii,  p.  665;  De 
Koninck,  1842,  Desc.  Anim.  Carb.  de  Belgique,  p.  41,  PI.  F,  fig.  1  c  and  e 
(the  others  excluded);  Austin,  1843,  Monog.  Rec.  and  Foss.  Crin.,  p.  8,  PI.  1, 
figs,  la-n;  McCoy,  1844,  Syn.  Carb.  Foss.  Ireland,  p.  176;  Pictet,  1846, 
Traite  de  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  200,  PI.  9,  fig.  18.  Mountain  limest.  England, 
Ireland  and  Belgium. 

1875.  PLlodensis  Hall.  Geol.  Surv.  Ohio,  Pal.  ii,  p.  168,  PI.  II,  fig.  3.  Waverly 
Gr.     Medina  Co.,  Ohio. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  247 

1S49.  PI.  megastylus  McCoj'.     Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (ser.  li),  p.  248.     Mount. 

limest.     Bolland,  Eng. 
18.36.  PI.  mycrostylus  Phillips.     Geol.  of  Yorkshire,  p.  204  ;  Austin,  1842,  Ann.  and 

Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  x,  p.  109.     Mount,  limest.     Bolland,  England. 
1842.  PI,  mucronatus  Austin.     (Figured  by  Phillips  as  PI,  laevis,  Geol.  Yorkshire, 

PI.  3,  figs.  14,  15.)     Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  x,  p.  109,  and  xi,  p.  199; 

also  1843,  Mon.  Rec.  and  Foss.  Crin.,  p.  22,  PI.  2,  fig.  1,  and  PI.  5,  fig.  2. 

Subcarboniferous.     England. 
1853.  PI.  MuUerianus  De  Kon.  and  Leh.f     Recher.  Crin.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  171,  PI.  5, 

figs.  4  a,  b,  c,  d.     Mount,  limest.     Tournay,  Belgium. 
1865.  PI.  niotensis  Meek  and  AVorthen.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila ,  p.  162;  also 

Geol.  Rep.  111.,  p.  513,  PI.  20,  fig.  3.     Keokuk  limest.    Niota  and  Nauvoo,  111. 
1858.  PI.  nodulosus  Hall  (not  Goldfuss,  1833  =  Si/mbathocrinus).     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa, 

pt.  ii,  p.  541,     Lower  Burlington  limest,     Burlington,  Iowa, 
1858.  PI.  nodobrachiatus  Hall  (not  Hall,  1861).     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  542. 

Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa, 
Described  from  a  j'oung  specimen,  probably  of  PI.  americantis. 
1858,  PI.  nucleiformis  Hall.    (Pleurocrinus.)     Geol,  Rep,  Iowa,   1,   pt.   ii,  p.  540, 

Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1853.  PL  oUa  De  Kon.   and   Leh.   (not  PL  olla   Hall,    1861  =  PL   Halli   Shum.), 

Recher.  Crin.  Cab,  Belg.,  p.  172,  PI.  5,  fig,  5,     Mount,  limest,     Tournay, 

Belgium. 
1844.  PL  ornatus   McCoy   (not  PL  ornatus   Goldfuss,  1833  =  Hexaenniis).     Carb. 

Fos=.  Ireland,  p.  176,  PI.  25,  fig.  1,     D'Orbigny,  Edwardsocrinas  ornatus, 

1849,  Prodr,  i,  p.  157  ;  also  Course  Elem,  ii,  p,  145  ;  PL  ornatus  De  Kon, 

and  Leh.,   1853,  Recher,   Crin.  Carb,   Belg.,  p.   177,  PI.  6,  figs.  4  a,  b,  c  ; 

Pictet,  Edwardsocr.  ornatus,  1857,  Traite  de  Pal,  iv,  p.  330,  PL  101,  fig. 

15.     Mount,  limest.     Ireland,  and  Tournay,  Belg, 
This  is  evidently  a  young  Platycrinus,  with  the  arms  as  yet  in  an  immature 

or  embryonic  state, 

1860,  PL  ornigranules  McChesney.     Desc.  New  Pal.  Foss.,  p.  5  ;  also  Chicago  Acad. 

Sci.,  i,  p.  3,  PI,  5,  fig.  8,     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa, 

1861,  PL  parvinodus  Hall.     Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  17.     Lower  Burlington  limest. 

Burlington,  Iowa, 
1865,  PL  parvulus  Meek  and  Worthen,     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila,,  p.  163 ;  Geol, 

Rep,  111.,  V,  p   555,  PI.  20,  fig.  7.     Chester  limest.     Pope  Co.,  111. 
1860.  PL  penicillus  Meek  and  Worthen.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  380 ;  also 

Geol,  Rep,  111.,  ii,  p.  266,  PI.  19,  figs.  6  a,  b,      Warsaw   limest.      Hardin 

Co.,  111. 
1865.  PL  perasper  Shumard.     Catal.  PaL  Foss,  N.  A.,  p.  389,     Lower  Burlington 

limest,     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  PL  nodobraohiatus  Hall,  1861  (not  Hall,  1858).     Desc,  New  Sp,  Crin., 

p.  17. 
1839,  PL  pileatus  Goldf.     (Pleurocrinus.)  Acta  Nov.  ac.  Leop.,  xir,  p.  343,  PI.  31, 

fig.  7,  a,  b,  c;  Geinitz,  Grundr.  der  Versteiner.,  PI.  23,  fig.  7;  McCoy,  1851, 

Brit.  Pal,  Foss,,  Pt.  ii,  p,  119;  De  Kon,  and  Leh,,  1853,  Rech.  Crin,  Carb, 

Belg.,  p,  175,  PI,  6,  figs,  3  a-e.     Mount  limest.     England  and  Belg. 
Syn.  PL  anthleontes  Austin,  1842,     Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  x,  p.  69,  and 

?i,  p.  199;  Mon.  Rec.  and  Foss,  Crin,,  p.  27,  PL  2,  figs,  3  k-r. 


248  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

1858.  PI.  pileiformis  Hall.  (Pleuroorinus.)  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  Pt.  ii,  p.  629,  PI.  8, 
figs.  ;?  a,  b,  c.  Lower  Burlington  limest.  Burlington,  Iowa.  This  species 
is  easily  distinguished  from  the  other  species  with  smooth  plates,  by  having 
only  four  arms  to  the  ray. 

1850.  PI.  planus  Ow.  and  Sh.  Jour.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.  (Ser.  ii),  vol.  ii,  p.  57 ; 
also,  1852,  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  Iowa,  Wis.  and  Minn.,  p.  687,  PI.  5  A,  fig.s.  4  a, 
c  (not  b,  nor  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  iii,  PI.  16,  fig.  6,  which  are  both  PI.  Pratteni 
Worthen;  nor  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  Pt.  ii,  PI.  8,  figs.  6  a,  b,  which  are  PI. 
Halli  Shum.);  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  PI.  3,  fig.  5.  Lower  Burlington  limest. 
Burlington,  Iowa. 

1860.  PI.  plenus  Meek  and  Worthen.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  380  ;  also 
Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  267,  PI.  20,  fig.  3.     Warsaw  limest.     Hardin  Co.,  111. 

1858.  PI.  pocilliformis  Hall.     (Pleuroorinus.)    Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  Pt.  ii,  p.  528, 
PI.  8,  figs.  2  a,  b.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  PL  verruoosus  White,  1863.     Bost.  Jour.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  602. 

1878.  PI  praenuntius  Wachsm.  and  Spr.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  249,  PI. 
2,  figs.  1,  2.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1860.  PI.  Prattenanus  Meek  and  Worthen.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  379 ; 
also  Geol.  Rep.  Ill,  ii,  p.  264,  PI.  20,  fig.  2.  St.  Louis  limest.  Randolph 
Co.,  111. 

1860.  PI.  Pratteni  Worthen.  Trans.  Acad.  Sci.  St.  Louis,  p.  569 ;  Meek  and 
Worthen,  PL  planus.  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  iii,  p.  469,  PI.  16,  fig.  6.  Lower  Bur- 
lington limest.  Burlington,  Iowa. 
Meek  did  not  consider  PL  Pratteni  distinct  from  PL  planus,  and  Owen  and 
Shumard  seem  to  have  been  of  the  same  opinion,  for  they  figure  in  the  U.  S. 
Rt-p.  Iowa,  Wis.  and  Minn.,  PI.  5  A,  fig.  46  (not  4  a,  e)  a  specimen,  evidently 
of  the  former  type,  under  the  latter  name. 

1860.  PL   pumilus    Hall.      Supp.    Geol.    Rep.    Iowa,   p.  82,   PI.  1,  fig.  6.     Warsaw 

limest.     Warsaw,  111. 
1844.  PL  punctatus    McCoy.        Carb.   Foss.    Ireland,   p.  177,   PL  25,   figs.  15,  17. 

Mount,  limest.     Ireland. 
1862.  PI,  quinquenodus  White.     (Pleuroorinus.)  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  ix,  p. 

18.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1861.  PL  regalis  Hall.      Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  16,  Separate  Photog.  Plate  2,  fig. 

6.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  PL  Oweni  Meek  and  Worthen,  1861.     Proc.  Philad.  Acad.,  p.  129. 
1875.    PL  richfieldensis   Hall.      Geol.   Rep.   Ohio,   Pal.  ii,   p.  167,  PI.  11,  fig.  4. 

Waverly  gr.     Ptichfield,  0. 
1821.  PL  rugOSUS    Miller    (not    Qoldf.  =  StorthingocrinvB    Schultze).       Hist.    Cri- 

noidea,  p.  79,  with  plate.     Figured  by  Cumberland  in  Trans.  Geol.  Soc,  vol. 

V,  PL  5,  fig.  10;    Phillips,  1836,  Geol.  of   Yorkshire,  p.  204,   PI.  2,  fig.  20; 

Austin,  1842,  Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  x,  p.  109;  Blainville,  1843,  Man. 

d'Actin.,  PL  29,  fig.  4;  Austin,  1843,  Mon.  Rec.  and  Foss.  Crin.,  p.  40,  PI. 

4,  figs.  2d-k;  McCoy,  1844,  Carb.   Foss.  Ireland,  p.  177.      Mount,  limest. 

Caldy  Island,  Wales,  also  Mendip  Hills,  England. 
1858.  PL  SaflEbrdi  Hall.     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  Pt.  ii,  p.  634,  PI.  18,  figs.  5,  6.     Lower 

part  Keokuk  limest.     Nauvoo  and  Hamilton,  111.,  and  Keokuk,  Iowa.     Prob- 
ably Syn.  of  PL  sonlptus. 
1858.  PL  Sarae   Hall.     Geol.   Rep.  Iowa,  i,   Pt.  ii,  p.  673,  PL  17,  fig.  4.     St.  Louis 

limest.     St.  Louis,  Mo. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  249 

1861.  PI,  scobina  Meek  and   Worthen.     Proc    Acad    Xat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  129 ;    also 
Geo).  Rep.  111.,  iii,  p.  466,   PI.  16,  fig.  9.     Lower  Burlington  limegt.     Bur- 
lington, Iowa. 
Stfn.  PI.  clytis  Hall,  1861.     Bost.  Jour.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  285,  Separate  photogr. 
plates,  i,  fig.  4. 
1858.  PI.  BCulptus  Hall.     aeol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  Pt.  ii,  p.  536,  PI.  8,  fig.   11.     LoWer 

Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1858.  PI.  Shutnardianus   Hall.     Geol.   Rep.   Iowa,   i,   Pt.  ii,    p.  532,   PI.  8,   fig.  5. 

Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1844.  PI.  similis  McCoy.     Carb.   Foss.  Ireland,  p.  177,  PI.  26,  fig.  6;  D'Orbigny, 

Prodr.  i,  p.  156.     Mount,  limest.     Ireland. 
1842.  PI.  spinosus  Aust.  f     Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  x,  p.  109,  and  xi,    p.  199; 
also  Mon.  Rec.  and  Foss.  Grin.,  p.  19,  PI.  i,  figs.  2  k,  o,  p,  q,  r,  s ;  De  Kon. 
and  Leh.,   1853,  Rech.  Grin.  Garb.  Belg.,  p.  I6f>,  PI.  6,  fig.  2  a,  b.     Mount 
limest.     Mendip  Hills,  Eng.,  and  Tournay,  Belg. 
Syn.  Engeniaorinites  (?)  hezagonus  Miinster,  1839.      Beitr.  z.  Petref.  i,  p.  4, 
PI.  1,  figs.  6  a,  b:  De  Kon.  1842,  Desc.  Anim.  Foss.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  39,  PI. 
E,  figs.  5  a,  b,  c. 
Syn.  PI.  laevis  (in  part)  Miller.  1821,  Hist.  Grin.,  p.  74,  PI.  1,  fig.  4   (not  the 
other  figures). 
1821.  PI.  striatus  Miller.     Hist.  Grin.,  p.  82;    Agassiz,  1835.     Mem.  Soc.  des  Sci, 
Nat.,   Neuchat.  i,  p.  196  ;    Austin,   1842,  Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  x,  p. 
109;    Blainville,  1834,  Man.  d'Act.,  p.  262;    De  Kon.,    1842,  Desc.  Anim. 
Foss.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  44;  Milne-Edwards  apud  Lamarck,  ii,  p.  666;  Austi^, 
1843,  Mon.   Rec.  and  Foss.  Grin.,  p.  37,  PI.  3,  figs.  3  p-u.     Mount,  limest. 
Bristol,  Engl. 
1858.  PI.  subspinosus    Hall.     Geol.  Rep.  luwa,  i,  Pt.  ii,  p.  536,  PI.  8,  figs.  9.  10; 
Meek  and  Worthen,    1866.     PI,   (Pleurocrinus)   subspinosus,   Geol.  Rep. 
111.,  ii,  p.  173,  PI.  15,  fig.  6,  and  vol.  v,  PI.  11,  fig.  2.     Lower  Burlington 
limest,     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1860.  PI,   subspinulosus   Hall.     Supp.   Geol,  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  81.     Upper  Burlino'ton 
limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  Dichocrinus  lachrymosus  Hall,  1860.     Supl.  Iowa  Rep.,  p.  84. 
1865.  PI,  tenuibracMatUS  Meek  and  Worth.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  168; 
also  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  450,  PI.  3,  fig.  4.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Bur- 
lington, Iowa. 
1842.  PI,  trigintidactylus  Austin  (Pleurocrinus).    Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  x, 
p.  69;  also  1844,  Mon.  Rec.  and  Foss.  Grin.,  p.  30,  PI.  3,  figs.  1  b-h  (not  a 
=  PL  auslinianua).     Mount,  limest.     Bristol,  Eng.  and  Tournay,  Belo-. 
Syn.  PI.  triacontadactylus  McCoy,     1844,  Garb.  Foss.  Ireland,  p.  177,  PI.  25, 
figs.  2-7. 
1858.  PI.  truncatulus  Hall.     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  538.     Lower  Burlington 

limest.  Burlington,  Iowa. 
1821,  PI,  tuberculatus  Miller.— Pleurocrinus— (not  P.  tuberculatus  Phillips  = 
Hexaoiniis).  Hist.  Crin.,  p.  81,  figs.  1,  2;  Schlotheim,  1822,  Nachtr.  z. 
Petref.  i,  p.  85,  and  182.3,  lb.  ii,  p.  97,  PI.  26,  figs.  2  a-b ;  Agassiz,  1835, 
Mem.  de  la  Soc.  Nat.  Sci.  Neuchat.,  i,  p.  197.  Mount,  limest.  Mendip 
Hills,  Eng.,  and  Tournay,  Belg. 
Syn.  PI,  ellipticus  (in  part)  Phillips.  Geol.  Yorkshire,  ii,  PI.  3,  fig.  19  (not 
21);  also  Austin,  Mon.  Rec.  and  Foss.  Grin,  PI.  4,  figs.  3,  p  to  u ;  McCoy, 
Carb.  Foss.  Ireland,  p.  177. 


250  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

1858.  PI.  tuberosus  Hall.  (^col.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  534,  PI.  8,  figs.  7  a,  b  ;  Meek 
and  Worth.,  1806,  Pleuroor.  tuberosus,  Ueol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  172.  Upper 
liiirlini;toii  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1849.  PI.  vesiculus  McCoy.     Ann,  and    Mag.   Nat.    Hist.,    p.  246.     Mount,  limest. 

Derbyshire,  Eng. 
1875  (?).  PI.  vexabilis  White.     Wheeler's  U.  S.  Survey,  West  of  LOOth  merid.,   iv, 

Pal.  p.  81,  PL  V,  fig.  2.     We  doubt  if  this  is  a  Platycrinus. 
1858.  PI.  Wortbeni  Hall.     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  530,  PL  8,  fig.  4.     Burlington 

limest.     ]>urlington,  Iowa. 

1850.  PI.  Yandelli  Ow.  and  Sh.     Jour.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.  (new  ser.),  ii,  pt.  i; 

also  U.  S.  Geo*.  Surv.  Iowa,  Wise,  and  Minn.,  p.  537,  PL  5  A,  figs.  6  a,  b. 
Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

Subgenus  EUCLADOCRINUS  Meek. 

1871.  Meek.     Hayden's  Rep.  U.  S.  Surv.  of  Terr.,  p.  373. 
1878.   Wachsm.  and  Spr.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  243. 

Syn.  Platycrinus  White,  in  part.     Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  17. 

The  name  Eucladocrinus  was  proposed  by  Meek  in  1871 
(Hayden's  Rep.  U.  S.  Survey  of  the  Territories,  p.  373)  to  desig- 
nate a  subgeneric  group  under  Platycrinus^  of  which  PL  pleuro- 
viviinus  White  is  the  t3^pe. 

In  the  structure  of  the  calyx,  this  form  presents  no  apparent 
difference  from  Platycrinus^  and  it  embraces  species  with  a  low, 
broad  cup  shaped,  and  with  an  elongate  body.  It  is  characterized, 
however,  by  having  the  radial  series  of  the  body,  both  dorsal  and 
ventral,  greatly  extended  in  the  form  of  tubular  free  rays,  which 
bear  the  arms  alternately  on  either  side  throughout  their  entire 
length.  These  rays,  in  all  the  known  species,  divide  on  the  second 
radial  into  two  branches,  which  remain  joined  by  their  inner  sides 
for  the  length  of  three  or  four  plates,  after  which  they  beoorne 
free,  giving  two  free  branches  to  each  ray,  or  ten  in  all.  A  tubular 
passage,  arched  over  by  the  extensions  of  the  vault,  runs  the  whole 
length  of  the  rays,  and  these  tubes,  after  uniting  on  the  inside  of 
the  second  radial,  connect  with  the  visceral  cavity. 

The  arms  are  composed  of  a  double  series  of  interlocking 
joints,  and  bear  slender,  single-jointed  pinnules. 

This  type  bears  the  same  relation  to  Platycrinus  that  Stegano- 
crinus  does  to  Actinocrinus^  and  Melocrinus  to  Mariacrinus  ; 
and  the  two  are  ver^"  closely  connected  by  transition  forms  such 
as  PL  prsenuntius,  in  which  the  free  ray  structure  is  clearly  begun, 
the  radial  areas  being  produced  to  the  extent  of  ten  or  twelve 
plates. 


]881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  251 

The  subgenus  evidenth^  represents  the  mature  and  extreme 
form  of  the  Platycrinoid  tj'pe. 

Geogi-aphical  Position,  etc. — Found  as  yet  only  in  the  Subcar- 
boniferous  of  America,  where  the  following  species  are  known  : — 

1878.  Eucladoorinus  millebracliiatus   Wachsni.  and  Spr.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.   Sci. 

Phila.,  p.  245.     Upper  Burlington  and  Keokuk  Transition   bed,   ani  lower 

part  of  the  Keokuk  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa,  Nauvoo  and  Niota,  111. 
1871.  Eucladoor.  inontanaeii<'is  Meek.     Ilayden's  Geol.  Rep.  U.  S.  Surv.  Terr.,  p. 

373.     Subciirb.     Montana. 
1862.  Eucladocr.  pleuroviminus  AVhite  (Platycr.  pleuroviminus).     Type  of  the 

subgenus.     Proc.  Bost.  See.  Nat.  Hist.,  ix,  p.  17;  Meek,   1870,  Am.  Jour. 

Sci.  and  Arts;  AYachsm.  and  Spr.,  1878,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  249. 

Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

6.  (?)  COTYLEDONOCRINTIS  Casseday  and  Lyou. 

1860.  Casseday  and  Lyon.     Proc.  Acad.  Arts  and  Sci.,  v,  p.  26. 

1865.  Shumard.     Catal.  Pal.  Foss.  N.  A.  Trans.  St.  Louis  Acad.,  ii,  p.  360, 

1877.  S.  A.  Miller.     Catal.  Am.  Pal.  Foss.,  p.  74. 

1879.  Zittel.     (DicJiocrinus.)     Handb.  d.  Pal.,  i,  p  365. 

Casseday  and  Lyon  proposed  the  above  name  for  a  crinoid 
which  agrees  in  every  respect  with  Dichocrinus,  except  that  it 
has  no  anal  plate  in  line  with  the  first  radials.  According  to 
the  description,  however,  there  is  a  deeper  notch  between  the 
radials  on  the  posterior  side,  and  the  question  arises  whether  the 
type  specimen  was  not  an  abnormal  Dichocrinus  in  which  the  anal 
plate  was  wanting  or  imperfectl}^  developed.  The  notch  lies 
directly  in  line  with  one  end  of  the  suture  which  divides  the  basal 
disk,  and  hence  the  position  corresponds  to  that  of  the  anal  in 
Dichocrinus.  The  bipartite  base  itself  seems  to  indicate  that 
there  was  normally  a  sixth  plate  above,  for  otherwise,  according 
to  the  rule  we  have  found  to  prevail  among  these  Crinoids,  one 
plate  of  the  basal  disk  should  be  larger — while  they  are  said  to  be 
equal  in  this  form. 

As  described,  Gotyledonocrinus  agrees  essentially  in  the  form 
of  the  body  with  typical  species  of  Dichocrinus,  and  like  them 
has  three  primary'  radials,  the  first  large  and  long,  the  two  others 
small  and  supporting  2  X  10  secondary  radials,  succeeding  radials 
forming  parts  of  the  free  rays.  There  is  a  single  interradial  in 
connection  with  the  first  radials,  two  interradial  plates  above  con- 
stitute a  part  of  the  vault. 

The  specimen  has  long  delicate  arms,  which  do  not  bifurcate, 


252  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

and  wliieh  give  off  long  pinnules,  composed  of  a  large  number  of 
short  joints. 

Column  cylindrical. 

Until  other  specimens  are  discovered,  we  must  consider  Cotyle- 
donocrinus  an  abnormal  form  of  Dichocrinus. 

Casseday  and  Lyons'  only  species  is  : — 

1860.  Cotyledonocrinus  pentalobus.     Proc.  Amer.  Acad.  Arts,  and  Sci.,  vol.  v,  p.  26. 
Warsaw  limest.     Grayson  Co.,  Kentucky. 

h.  Hexackinites. 

7.  HEXACRINUS    Austin. 

1843,  Austin.     Mon.  Rec.  and  Foss.  Crin.,  p.  48. 

1853.  De  Kon.  and  Leh.     Rech.  Crin.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  160. 

1855.  F.  Roemer.     Letbaea  Geogn.  (Ausg.  3,  Per.  1),  p.  244. 

1857.  Job.  Miiller.     Neue  Ecbin.  Eifl.  Kalk,  p.  85. 

1857.  Pictet.     Traite  de  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  831. 

1867.  Scbultze.     Mon.  Ecbinod.  Eifl.  Kalk,  p.  71. 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Palajontologie,  p.  365. 

Syn.  Platycr.  Phil.,  1841  (not  1836).     Pal.  Foss.  Cornw.,  p.  28. 

Syn.  Platycr.  Goldf.  (in  part),  1838.     Nova  Acta.  Ac.  Leop.,  xix, 
p.  343. 

Syn.  Platycr.  Agas.  (in  part),  1835.     Mem.  Soc.  Neucb.,  i,  p.  197. 

Syn.  Platycr.  Aust.  (in  part),  1842.     Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  x, 
p. 109. 

Syn.  Platycr.  F.  A.  Roemer,  1843.     Verstein.  d.  Harzes. 

Syn.  Platycr.  F.  Roemer,  1851.     Vei-h.  naturb.  Verein  Rbeinl.,  p. 
362. 

Syn.  Platycr.  D'Orbigny  (in  part),  1850.     Prodr.  Pal.,  i,  p.  103. 

Syn.  Platycr.  Lyon,  1860.     Trans.  Am  Pbilos.  Soc,  p.  459. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Body  obconical,  pear-shaped  orsubglobose ; 
surface  generally  elaborately  sculptured  or  nodose;  symmetry 
decided  1^^  bilateral. 

Basal  disk  large,  in  form  of  a  shallow  cup ;  hexagonal ;  composed 
of  three  equal  plates.  Five  of  its  sides  support  a  first  radial 
each,  the  sixth  a  large  anal  plate,  which  extends  to  the  full  height 
of  the  first  radials.  Primary  radials  2  X  5,  the  first  very  large, 
apparentlj'  quadrangular  but  actuall}'^  hexagonal;  increasing  in 
width  from  the  base  up;  upper  margin  excavated.  Second  radials 
minute,  triangular,  rarely  filling  the  whole  excavation,  which 
generally  encloses  a  part  of  the  first  secondary  radials,  the  latter 
forming  the  base  of  two  free  appendages  to  each  ray.     The  free 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  253 

rays  and  the  arms  proper  have  been  rarely  observed,  but  were 
apparent!}^  constructed  like  those  of  Eucladocrinus.  In  Hexacr. 
limbatus,  the  free  rays  attain  three  or  four  times  the  length  of 
the  bod}^,  and  each  one  consists  of  a  row  of  short  cylindrical 
joints,  which  give  off  laterally  pinnule  bearing  arms.  These 
arms  originate  on  every  fourth,  fifth  or  sixth  joint,  according  to 
position,  and  alternately  from  opposite  sides.  The  free  parts  of 
the  ray  in  Hexacr.  brevis,^  are  apparently  more  like  those  of 
Plati/crinus. 

Anal  plates  generally  narrower,  but  often  higher  than  the  first 
radials;  wider  towards  the  top  than  at  its  junction  with  the 
basals,  the  upper  side  supporting  two  or  thi:ee  plates.  Inter- 
radial  series  composed  of  a  single  large  plate,,  which  rests  within 
a  notch  between  two  radials. 

Yault  low,  hemispherical,  more  or  less  flattened,  composed  of 
comparatively  few  and  large  pieces,  which  are  nodose,  or  covered 
with  a  number  of  small  tubercles.  Apical  dome  plates  large. 
Anus  subcentral  or  lateral ;  in  form  of  a  simple  opening  through 
the  vault,  or  supported  bj"-  a  small  tubercular  process  composed 
of  small  polygonal  pieces. 

Column  cj^lindrical,  the  larger  joints  nodose  or  sculptured  after 
the  style  of  the  plates  of  the  calyx;  articulating  face  radicularly 
striated  ;  central  canal  small,  round. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — Hexacrinus  is  strictly  a  Devonian 
genus,  and  almost  exclusively  European,  only  fragments  of  a 
single  species  having  been  discovered  in  America. 

The  following  species  have  been  described  : — 

1838.  Hezaorinas  anaglypticos  Goldf.    (Platycr.  anaglypticus.)      Nova  Acta  ac. 
Leop.,  xix,  p.  348,  PI.  32,  fig.  4;  Schultze,  1867,  Hexacr.  anaglypticus, 
Mon.  Echin.  Eifl.  Kalk,  p.  72,  PI.  8,  fig.  1.     Devonian.     Eifel,  Germany. 
Syn.  Platycr.  frondosus  Goldf.     Bonn  Museum,  undefined. 
Syn.  Platycr.  annulatus  Goldf.     Bonn  Museum,  undefined. 
Syn.  Platycr.  muricatus  Goldf.     Bonn  Museum,  undefined. 
1867.  Hexacr.  bacca  SchuUze.     Men.  Echin.  Eifl.  Kalk,  p.  83,  PI.  10,  fig.  5.     Devo- 
nian.    Eifel,  Germany. 
1838.  Hexacr.  brevis  Goldf.     (Platycr.  brevis.)      Nova  Acta  ac.  Leop.,  xix,  i,  p. 
346,  PI.  32,  fig.  2;  Schultze,  1867,  Hexacr.  brevis,  Men.  Echin.  Eifl.  Kalk, 
p.  79,  PI.  10,  fig.  7.     Devonian.     Eifel,  Germany. 


1  We  believe  that  Hexacr.  brevis  Goldf.  (Mon.  Echin.  Eifl.  Kalk,  PI.  10, 
fi^.  7)  is  a  young  specimen  of  some  other  species.  This  is  indicated  not 
only  by  its  small  size,  but  also  the  immature  character  of  the  anns  and 
column  ;  it  may  even  represent  an  entirely  different  genus. 


254  PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

1843.  Hexacr.  Buchii  F.  A.  Roomer.     (Platycr.  Buohii.)     Hartzgcbirsc,  p.  9,  P). 

12,  fii;:.  LS.     Devonian.     Ilartz,  Germany. 
1867.  Hexacr.    callosus  Schultze.      Men.  Echin.  Eifel  Kalk,  p.   8.^,   PI.  9,  fig.  3. 

Devonian.     Eifel,  Germany. 
Syn.  Platycr.  rosaceus  Goldf.  (not  Roemer  =  Coccocrimis).      Bonn  Museum, 

undefined. 
1858.  Hexacr.  costatus  Miiller.     Monatsb.  Berl.  Akad.  Wissensch.,  p.  354;  Schultze, 

1867,  Mon.  Echin.  Eifel,  Kalk,  p.  74.    Devonian.    Eifel,  Grrmany.    Probably  a 

variety  of  Hexacr.  anaglypticus. 
1838.  Hexacr.  elongatus  Goldf.     (Platycr.  elongatus  Goldf.  not  Phillips.)     Nova 

Acta  ac.  Loop.,  xix,  i,  p.  345,  PI.  32,  fig.  1;  Schultze,  1867,  Hexacr.  elon- 
gatus,  Mon.   Echin.   Eifel  Kalk,  p.   74,   PI.  9,  fig.   4.      Devonian.      Eifel, 

Germany. 
Sijn.    Platycr.  Goldfussi    MUnster.     Beitr.    z.    Petrefactenk,  i,   p.  32,  PI.  1, 

figs.  2  a,  b. 
1838.  Hexacr,   exsculptus  Goldf.     (Platycr.  exsculptus.)     Nova  Acta   ac.    Leop., 

xi.\,  i,  p.  347,  PI.  32,  fig.  3 ;  Schultze,  1867,  Hexacr.  exsculptus,  Mon.  Echin. 

Eifel  Kalk,  p.  77,  PI.  9,  fig.  2.     Devonian.     Eifel,  Germany. 
1843.  Hexacr.  granuliferus  F.  A.  Roemer.    (Platycr.  granuliferus.)    Versteiner 

Nas.sau's,  p.  397.     Devonian.     Lahnstein,  Germany. 
■'■■•I860  (?).  PI.  insularis  Eichwald.  Lethaea  Rossica,  i,  p.  612,  PI.  31,  fig.  58.  Devonian. 

Isle  of  Oesel. 
There  is  some  doubt,  whether  this  is  a  Hexacrimis.     Eichwald  describes  it  with 

five  radials,  one  of  them  much  larger  and  apparently  composed  of  two  pieces, 

which  are  said  to  be  soldered  together.     One  of  the  other  plates  is  represented 

as  being  much  smaller. 
1841.  Hexacr.  interscapularis   Phillips.    (Platycr.  interscapularis  not  Miller.) 

Pal.  Foss.  Cornwall,  p.  28,  PI.  14,  fig.  39;  D'Orbigny,  1849,  Prodr.  d.  Pale- 

ont,  p.  103;  Austin,  1843,  Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  x,  p.  109;  Schultze, 

1867,  Hexacr.  interscapularis,  Mon.  Echin.  Eifel  Kalk,  p.  79,  PI.  8,  fig.  5. 

Devonian.     Near  Plymouth,  Eng.,  and  Eifel,  Germany. 
Syn.  Platycr.  granifer  Roemer.     1852,  Verb.  Naturh.  Verein  Rheinl.,  ix,  p. 

281,  PI.  2,  fig.  1 ;  Schultze,  Hexacr.  interscapularis,  Mon.  Echin.  Eifel 

Kalk,  p.  79. 
Syn.  Platycr.  melo  Austin.     1843,  Mon.  Rec.  and  Foss.  Crin..  p.  48,  PI.  6,  fig. 

1;  Schultze,  Hexacr.  interscapularis,  Mon.  Echin.  Eifel  Kalk,  p.  79. 
Syn.  Hexacr.  depressus  Austin.     1843,  Mon.  Rec.  and  Foss.  Crin.,  p.  49,  PI. 

6,  figs,  2  a-e;  Schultze,  Hexacr.  interscapularis,  Mon.  Echin.  Eifel  Kalk, 

p.  79. 
*1860.  Hexacr,  Leai  Lyon.    (Platycr,  Leai.)     Trans.  Am.  Philos.  Soc,  p.  259,  PI, 

26,  figs,  g  g'.     Upper  Helderberg,  Dev.     Louisville,  Ky. 
1857.  Hexacr.  limbatus  Miiller.     Neue  Echin.  Eifel,  p.  248,  PI.  2,  fig.  1;  Schultze, 

1867,  Mon.  Ecbin.  Eifel  Kalk,  p.  78,  PI.  9,  fig.  1.     Devonian.     Eifel,  Germany. 
1857.  Hexacr.  lobatus  Miiller.    Neue  Echin.  Eifel,  p.  248,  PI.  1,  figs.  10-12;  Schultze, 

1867,   Mon.   Echin.  Eifel  Kalk,  p.  84,  PI.    10,   fig.    6.      Devonian.      Eifel, 

Germany. 
1843.  Hexacr.  macrotatus  Austin.     Mon.  Rec.  and  Foss.  Crin.,  p.  50,  PI.  6,  figs.  3 

a-d.     Devonian.     South  Devon,  England. 
Syn.  Platycr.  Phillipsii  D'Orbigny.     1850.  Prodr.  de  Paleont.,  i,  p.  103. 
Syn.   Platycr.    tuberculatus    Phillips,  1839  (not   Miller,  1821).     Pal.   Foss. 

Cornwall,  PI.  60,  fig.  39. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  255 

1867.  Hexacr.  nodifer  Schultze.      Mon.  Ecbin.  Eifel  Kalk,  p.  84,   PI.  10,  fig.  3. 

I)evonian.     Eifel,  Germany. 
1838.  Hexacr.   ornatus   Goldf.     (Platycr.  ornatus   not  McCoy.)     Nova  Acta  Ac. 

Leop.,  xix,  i,  p.  347;  Schultze,  1867,  Hexacr.  ornatus,  Mon.  Echin.  Eifel 

Kalk,  p.  82,  PL  8,  fig.  4,  and  PI.  10,  fig.  9.     Devonian.     Eifel,  Germany. 
Si/n.  Hexacr.  echinatus  Sandberger,  1856.     Verstein.  Nassau's,  p.  398,  PI.  35, 

fig.  10. 
1867.  Hexacr.  paterseformis  Schultze.      Mon.  Echin.  Eifel  Kalk,  p.  87,  PL  10,  fig. 

4.     Devonian.     Eifel,  Germany. 
1867.  Hexacr.  pyriformis  Schultze.      Mon.  Echin.  Eifel  Kalk,  p.  76,  PL  10,  fig.  1. 

Devonian.     Eifel,  Germany. 
1857.  Hexacr.    spinosus    MuUer.      Neue  Echin.  Eifel,  p.    248,   PI.  i,  figs.  13,    14; 

Schultze,  1867,    Mon.  Echin.  Eifel  Kalk,  p.  75,  PL  8,  fig.   2.      Devonian. 

Eifel,  Germany. 
1851.  Hexacr.  stellaris  F.  Roemer.    (Platycr.  stellaris.)     Yerh.  Naturh.  Verein  f. 

FiheinL,  viii,  p.  362,  PL  7,  figs.  2  a,  b,  c ;  Schultze,  1867,  Hexacr.  Stellaris, 

Mon.  Echin.  Eifel  Kalk,  p.  81,  PL  8,  fig.  3.     Devonian.     Eifel,  Germany. 
1867.  Hexacr.  triradiatus  Schultze.      Mon.  Echin.  Eifel  Kalk,  p.  86,  PL  9,  fig.  5. 

Devonian.     Eifel,  Germany. 
1826.  Hexacr.  ventricosus  Goldf.    (Platycr.  ventricosus.)    Petref.  Germ.,  i,  p.  189, 

PL  58,  fig.  4;   Miiller,  1856,  Monatsb.  Berl.  Akad.,  p.  354,  and  1857,  Xeue 

Echin.  Eifl.,  p.  247,  PL  1,  figs.  3,  4;  Schultze,  1867,  Hexacr.  ventricosus, 

Mon.  Echin.  Eifel  Kalk,  p.  85,  PL  10,  fig.  2.     Devonian.    Eifel,  Germany. 

8.  DICHOCRINUS  Munster. 

1838.  Munster.     Beitr.  zur  Petrefactenk, ,  i,  p.  2. 

1843.  Austin.     Mon.  Rec.  and  Foss.  Crin.,  p.  45. 

1850.  D  Orbigny.     Prodr.  de  Paleont.,  i,  p.  156. 

1853.  Owen  and  Shuniard.     U.  S.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  Wis.  and  Minn.,  p.  589. 

1853.  De  Koninck  and  Lebon.     Rech.  Crin.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  146. 

1857.  Pictet.     Traite  de  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  333. 

1858.  Hall.     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  654  (not  689). 

1860.  Meek  and  Worthen.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  381. 
1860.  Hall.     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  83. 

1860.  Casseday  and  Lyon  (in  part).     Proc.  Acad.  Arts  and  Sci.,  v,  p.  16. 
1866.  Meek  and  Wortben.     Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  pp.  167  and  263. 
1879.  Zittel.     Haudb.  der  Palaeont.,  p.  365  (not  Sbumard,  1857,  Trans. 
St.  Louis  Acad.,  i,  p.  5). 
Syn.  (?)  Cofyledonocrinus  Cass,  and  Lyon.     1860,  Proc.  Am.  Acad. 

Arts  and  Sci.,  v,  p.  16. 
Syn.  Platycrinus  Phillips  (in  part).     Geol.  of  Yorkshire,  ii. 

There  has  been  some  difference  of  opinion  as  to  the  number  of 
primar}^  raclials  in  Dichocrinus.  Austin  represents  his  Dichocr. 
fusiformis,  Rec.  and  Foss.  Crin.,  PI.  5,  fig.  6",  with  three  small 
plates  above  the  first  radials ;  De  Koninck  and  Lehon,  in  their 
generic  formula,  fix  the  number  of  primary  radials  at  4  X  5,  on 


256  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

the  strength  of  Austin's  figure.  On  the  other  hand,  Shumard 
described  his  two  species,  D.  cornigerus  and  D.  sexlohalus,  with  a 
single  large  radial,  and  none  above  it.  Casseda}'  and  Lyon  state 
the  number  of  radials  as  1  to  3  X  5,  in  which  opinion  Meek  and 
Worthen  coincide. 

We  have  no  doubt  that  the  latter  statement  is  correct,  and  that 
Austin's  species  is  incorrectly  figured,  and  had  actually  but  three 
radials  ;  but  we  have  ascertained  from  several  excellent  specimens 
loaned  to  us  by  Prof.  Worthen,  that  the  so-called  D.  cornigerus 
and  D.  sexlohatus  of  Shumard  both  have  a  very  minute  second 
radial,  which  is  sometimes  not  visible  externally.  These  two 
species,  however,  like  some  others  described  by  Casseday  and 
Lyon,  differ  from  the  typical  Dichocrinus  in  several  other  import- 
ant points,  and  this  has  led  us  to  arrange  them  in  a  new  generic 
group  under  Talarocrinus^  which  includes  every  species  of  this 
form  with  only  two  primary  radials.  We  have  examined  all 
known  American  species  of  Dichocrinus  proper,  and  find  they  all 
have  three  primary  radials. 

Revised  Generic  Diagnosis. — Cal^'X  deeply  cup-shaped  ;  plates 
delicate,  rarely  ornamented  ;  S3mmetry  distinctly  bilateral. 

Basals  two,  hexagonal,  forming  together  an  obconical  or  rounded 
cup.  Radials  3X5.  The  five  plates  of  the  first  series  very 
large,  their  sides  straight  and  nearly  parallel  ;  two  rest  on  each 
basal  piece,  the  anterior  plate  in  a  notch  at  one  end  of  the  basal 
suture ;  against  the  opposite  end  there  rests  a  large  anal  plate, 
which  is  placed  in  line  with  the  first  radials.  Succeeding  radials 
very  small,  occupying  scarcelj^  more  than  one-fourth  the  width  of 
the  first.  The  third  radials  are  bifui'cating  plates  which  support 
either  the  arms,  or  in  species  with  more  than  ten  arms,  the  higher 
orders  of  radials.  Secondary,  tertiary,  or  even  quarternar}' 
radials  occur  according  to  the  number  of  arms.  These  higher 
orders  are  generally  in  series  of  two  plates  each,  exceptionally 
three  ;  they  are  similar  in  appearance  to  ordinary  arm  plates,  but 
are  easily  distinguished  by  being  single-jointed  ;  while  the  arm 
plates,  from  the  base  up,  are  composed  of  a  double  series  of 
pieces. 

Arms  rather  delicate,  but  they  give  off"  very  long  and  stout  pin- 
nules composed  of  large  joints.  The  pinnules  form  a  very  char- 
acteristic feature  of  the  genus. 

Anal  plate  almost  as  large  as  the  first  radials,  often  narrower 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA.  257 

above  than  below;  quadrangular.  Interradial  plate  pushed  up- 
ward to  the  ventral  side  of  the  body,  resting  upon  two  upper 
margins  of  the  first  radials,  which  are  not  indented  ;  several  inter- 
radial dome  plates  follow  in  succession. 

Dome  depressed,  and  so  far  as  known,  constructed,  as  in  some 
species  of  Platycrinus,  with  a  short  excentric  anal  tube. 

Column  cylindrical,  with  a  small  round  canal. 

The  genus  is  most  closely  related  to  Talarocrinus. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — Dichocrinus  is  a  Subcarboniferous 
genus,  and  is  found  in  America  from  the  Lower  Burlington  lime- 
stone up  to  the  Warsaw,  where  it  is  succeeded  by  Talarocrinus. 
It  is  also  rejjresented  by  a  number  of  species  in  the  Mountain 
limestone  of  Belgium  and  Great  Britain. 

We  recognize  the  following  species  : — 

1862.  Dichocrinus  angustus  White.     Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  ix,  p.  19.     Upper 

Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1860.  Dichocr.  constrictus  Meek  and  Worthen.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.   Sci.   Phila.,  p. 

381;  also  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  263,  PI.  19,  figs.  2  a,  b,  c.     Warsaw  limest. 

Bloomington,  Ind. 
1860.  Oichocr.  conus  Meek  and  Worthen.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  381  ; 

also  Geol   Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  169,  PI.  16,  figs.  5  a,  b.     Lower  Burlington  limest. 

Burlington,  Iowa. 
1862.  Dichoor.  crassitestus  White.     Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  ix,  p.  19.     Upper 

Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1860.  Dichocr.  dichotomus  Hall.     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  85,  PI.  1,  fig.  5.     War- 
saw limest.     AVarsaw,  111. 
1853.  Dichocr.  elegans  De  Kon.  and  Leh.  (not  Casseday  and  Lyon  =  Talaro'-rinus 

elegans  Wachsm.  and  Spr.).     Rech.  Crin.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  153,  PI.  4,  figs.  13 

a,  b.     Mountain  limest.     Tournay,  Belg. 
1836.  Dichocr.  elongatus  (Platycr.   elongatus)  Phill.  (not  Goldf.,  1838  =  Heoca- 

crinns).     Geol.  of  Yorkshire,  p.  204,  PI.  3,  figs.  24,  26;  Austin,  1843,  Mon. 

Ree.  and  Foss.  Crin.     Mount.  limest.     Tournay,  Belg. 
1853.  Dichocr.  expansus  De  Kon.  and  Leh.  (not  Meek  and  Worthen  =  Dichocr. 

polydactylus  Cass,  and  Lyon).     Rech.  Crin.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  161,  PI.  4,  fig.  10. 

Mount,  limest.     Belgium  and  England. 
This  species  had  been  figured  by  Miller,  1821,  among  his  PI.  laevis  (figs.  4,  5), 

and  by  Austin  as  D.  radiatus. 
1860.  Dichocr.  ficus  Casseday  and  Lyon.     Proc.  Am.  Acad.  Arts  and  So-.,  v,  p.  24  ; 

Meek  and  Worthen,  1873,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  500,  PI.  14,  fig.  1.     Keokuk 

limest.     Crawfordsville,  Ind. 
In  their  description,  the  above  authors  state  that  all  of  the  six  perisomic  plates 

are  arm  bearing.     This   is   a  mistake,  as  the  anal  plate  supports  a  narrow 

cylindrical  tube  somewhat  resembling  an  arm. 
1843.  Dichocr.  fusiformis  Austin.     Mon.  Rec.  and  Fofs.  Crin.,  p.  47,  IM.  5,  figs.  6 

a-d;  De  Kon.  and  Leh.,  1853,  Rech.  Crin.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  148,  PI.  4,  fig.  7. 

Mount,  limest.     Mendip  Hills,  Eng.,  and  Tournay,  Belg. 

18 


258  PROCEEDINGS  OP   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

1863.  Dichocr.  granalosas  Dc  Kon.  and  Leh.     Rech.  Grin.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  152,  PI.  4, 

fig.  12.     Mount,  liinest.     Tournay,  Belg. 
1853.  Dichocr.  intermediuB  Be  Kon.  and  Leh.     Rech.  Crin.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  150,  PI. 

4,  fig.  9.     Mount,  limest.     Tournay,  Belg. 
1853.  Dichocr.  irregularis  De  Kon.  and  Leh.     Rech.  Crin.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  152,  PI. 

4,  figs.  11  a,  b.     Mount,  limest.     Tournay,  Belg. 

1860.  Dichocr.    Isevis    Hall.     Supp.   Geol.    Rep.    Iowa,   p.    S3.     Lower   Burlington 

limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1869.  Dichocr.  lineatns  Meek,  and  Worth.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  69;  also 
Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  440,  PI.  3,  fig.  1.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burling- 
ton, Iowa. 

1861.  Dichocr.  liratus  Hall.     Desc.  New  Sp.  Pal.  Crin.,  p.  5;  also  Boat.  Jour.  Nat. 

Hist.,  p.  290,  Photog.  PI.  2,  figs.  7,  8.  Upper  Burlington  limest.  Burling- 
ton, Iowa. 

*1881.  Dichocr.  ornatus  Wachsm.  and  Spr.  (Dichocr.  sculptus  Lyon  and  Cass.,  not 
De  Kon.  and  Leh.,  1853).  Proc.  Am.  Acad.  Arts  and  Sci.,  v,  p.  25.  Keokuk 
limest.  Hardin  Co.,  Ky.  We  propose  the  above  name,  D.  sculptus  being 
preoccupied. 

1850.  Dichocr.  ovatus  Ow.  and  Sh.  Jour.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.  (new  sr.)  ii,  Pt.  i; 
also  U.  S.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  Wis.  and  Minn.,  p.  590,  PI.  5  A,  figs.  9  a-b. 
Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1869.  Dichocr.  pisum  Meek  and  Worth.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  69;  also 
Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  440,  PI.  3,  fig.  2.  Lower  Burlington  limest.  Burling- 
ton, Iowa. 

1861.  Dichocr.  plicatus  Hall.  Desc.  New  Pal.  Crin.,  p.  4  ;  also  Bost.  Jour.  Nat.  Hist, 
p.  288,  Phot.  PI.  2,  figs.  9,10.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1861.  Dichocr.  pocillum  Hall.  Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  5;  also  Bost.  Jour.  Nat.  Hist., 
p.  291,  Phot.  PI.  2,  figs.  15,  16  (Fig.  14  is  evidently  Meek  and  Worthen's 
D.  laevis,  which  occurs  in  the  Upper  Burlington  beds).  Lower  Burlington 
limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1860.  Dichocr.  polydactylus  Casseday  and  Lyon.     Proc.  Am.  Acad.  Arts  and  Sci.,  v, 

p.  20.     Keokuk  limest.     Crawfordsville,  Ind. 

Syn.  D.  expansus    Meek  and  Worth  (not  De  Kon.  and  Leh.,  1853).     Proc. 
Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  344;  also  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  500,  PI.  14,  fig.  1. 

The  original  description  by  Cass,  and  Lyon  is  somewhat  erroneous  as  to  the 
arrangement  of  the  arms,  and  this  probably  led  Meek  and  Worthen  to  pro- 
pose a  new  species.  There  is  no  doubt  of  the  identity  of  the  two. 
1838.  Dichocr.  radiatus  Miinster.  Type  of  the  genus.  Beitr.  z.  Petref.,  i,  p.  2,  PI. 
1,  figs.  3  a-d  ;  De  Koninck,  1842,  Desc.  Anim.  Foss.,  p.  40,  PI.  i,  figs.  6  a-d  ; 
Austin,  1843,  Mon.  Rec.  and  Foss.  Crin.,  p.  45,  PI.  5,  figs.  5  a-d;  D'Orbigny, 
1850,  Prodr.  de  Paleont.  i,  p.  166;  De  Kon.  and  Leh.,  1853,  Rech.  Crin. 
Carb.  Belg.  p.  149,  PI.  4,  figs.  8  a-d  ;  Pictet,  1857,  Traite  de  Paleont.  iv,  p. 
333,  PI.  101,  fig.  18;  Bronn,  1860,  Klassen  d.  Thierreichs,  ii,  PI.  28,  figs.  9 
a-b.     Mount,  limest.     Mendip  Hills,  Eng.,  and  Tournay,  Belg. 

1861.  Dichocr.  scitulus  Hall.    Desc.   New  Pal.  Crin.  p.  4;    also  Bost.  Jour.  Nat. 

Hist.,  p.  289.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1853.  Dichocr.  sculptus  De  Kon.  and  Leh.  (not  Cass,  and  Lyon,  1860).     Rech.  Crin. 

Carb.  Belg.,  p.  154,  PI.  4,  figs.  14  a,  b,  c.     Mount,  limest.     Tournay,  Belg. 
1857.  Dichocr.  simplex  Shmmard.     Trans.  Acad.  Sci.  St.  Louis,  p.  74,  PI.  1,  fig.  2; 

Hall,  1858,   Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  Pt.  ii,  p.  654,  PI.  23,  figs.  12  a,  b.     Warsaw 

limest.     Spurgeon  Hill,  Ind.;  also  St.  Mary's  Landing,  Mo.,  and  Sparta,  Tenn. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  259 

1850.  Dichocr.  Striatus  Ow.  and  Sh.  Jour.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.  vol.  ii,  Pt.  i,  j 
also  U.  S.  Geol.  Kep.  Iowa,  Wis.  and  Minn.  p.  590,  PI.  5  A,  figs.  10  a,  b. 
Upper  Burlington  limest,     Burlington,  Iowa. 


9.  TALAROCRINTJS,  nov.  gen.  , 

{ralapog  a  small  basket,  Kplvov  a  lily.) 

Syn.  DicTiocrinus  Shumard  (in  part)  1860  (not  Miinster).     Trans. 

Acad.  Sci.  St.  Louis. 
Syn.  Dichocrinus  Cass,  and  Lyon  (in  part)  1860.     Proc.  Am.  Acad, 

Arts  and  Sci.,  v,  p.  16. 

Among  the  species  described  by  Shumard  imder  Dichocrinus 
there  are  two,  which  differ  materially  from  that  genus  and  from 
Pterotocrinus,  with  which  they  are  nearest  related.  Meek  and 
Worthen,  in  their  generic  description  of  Pterotocrinus  (Geol.  Rep. 
111.,  ii,  p.  290),  recognized  more  than  specific  differences  between 
the  form  represented  by  Shumard's  Dichocrinus  cornigerus  and 
D.  sexlobatus,  and  the  genus  Pterotocrinus  with  which  these  two 
species  had  been  identified,  and  thej'  proposed  either  to  divide  the 
genus  into  two  sections,  or  to  separate  the  above  species  from  it 
sub-generically.  Shumard  afterwards  and  also  S.  A.  Miller,  in 
their  catalogues  placed  both  species  under  Pterotocrinus. 

Wetherby  (Cin.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  18t9,  Apr.  number)  on  the 
other  hand,  refers  the  above  species  to  Dichocrinus  and  considers 
them  altogether  di!i*"nct  from  Pterotocrinus.  In  the  latter  con- 
clusion he  is  undoubtedly  correct,  but  we  cannot  see  that  their 
relations  to  Dichocrinus  are  any  closer.  They  evidently  form  a 
little  group  by  themselves,  which  in  nature  occiapies  a  place 
between  the  two  genera,  forming  a  connecting  link  between  them. 
We  propose  for  this  group  the  generic  name  Talarocrinus  with 
D.  cornigerus  Shum.  as  the  type. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — General  form  of  body  ovoid ;  composed 
of  heavy  plates.  Calyx  subconical ;  plates  convex,  deeply  im- 
pressed at  the  suture  lines,  and  hence  more  or  less  protuberant ; 
surface  smooth. 

Basals  two,  pentagonal,  precisely  alike,  the  suture  running  from 
the  posterior  to  the  anterior  side.  First  radials  large,  quadran- 
gular, nearly  as  wide  as  high,  aranged  in  line  with  the  first  anal 
plate,  which  is  as  large  or  larger  than  the  radials,  and  of  similar 
form.     The  upper  edge  is  excavated,  but  not  semicircular,  there 


260  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

being  an  angular  process  in  the  middle.  Second  radials^  very 
minute,  often  not  visible  externall}^  and  resting  from  within 
against  the  median  angular  process  within  the  articulating  depres- 
sion of  the  large  radial.  Their  inner  face  is  much  larger,  trian- 
gular in  form,  with  concave  sides.  The  arrangement  is  such  that 
these  sides,  together  with  the  outer  portions  of  the  articulating 
scar  of  the  first  plates,  form  two  semicircular  sockets,  supporting 
each  a  small  pentagonal  bifurcating  secondary  radial,  which  here, 
as  in  Pterotocrinus  and  Ilan^upiocrinus,  constitutes  a  part  of  the 
bod}-,  and  in  turn  supports  two  arms,  or  twenty  arms  in  all. 
Form  of  the  arms  unknown. 

Vault  generally  of  equal  height  with  the  calyx,  decidedly  lobed 
when  viewed  from  above ;  composed  of  numerous  small  pieces, 
some  of  them  spiniferous  ;  toward  the  posterior  side  obliquely 
flattened,  with  a  lateral  anal  aperture  towards  the  upper  end. 
Radial  area  elevated,  and  extending  outward  ;  interradial  portions 
depressed,  posterior  side  much  wider.  Central  vault  piece  large, 
nodose  or  spiniferous.  The  four  large  proximal  plates  occupy  in 
four  of  the  interradial  spaces  the  upper  portion  of  the  depression, 
while  the  two  smaller  ones  rest  partly  against  the  radial  portions 
of  the  dome,  with  several  small  anal  plates  and  the  anal  aperture 
between  them.  Interradial  vault  pieces  three,  rather  large,  and 
much  higher  than  wide.  The  first  radial  vault  piece  is  spiniferous 
in  most  species,  the  succeeding  plates  small  and  nodose,  arranged 
longitudinally  in  rows,  forming  together  regular  arches  over  the 
ambulacral  passages  within  the  body.  There  is  a  large  elongate 
brachial  piece  between  the  two  divisions  of  each  ray,  which  at  its 
lower  end  connects  with  the  upper  point  of  the  second  radial, 
thus  giving  origin  to  two  arm  openings  in  each  ray.  The  anal 
area  has  three  large  pieces  in  the  first  series,  which  rest  upon  the 
anal  plate  of  the  calyx,  the  median  one  has  form  and  size  of  the 
interradial  plates,  the  two  others  are  smaller.  In  the  second 
series  there  are  two  plates,  followed  by  a  number  of  minute  pieces 
surrounding  the  anal  aperture,  which  is  protuberant. 

Column  probably  cylindrical  and  small,  with  a  minute  central 
canal. 

Talarocrinus  differs  from  Dichocrinus  in  the  greater  promi- 
nence of  the  plates  in  the  calyx  ;  its  higher  vault ;  in  having  the 

'  Shumard  described  Dichoer.  cornigerus  with  a  single  radial,  but  the 
second  is  present  in  the  species  though  hidden  from  view  exteriorly. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  261 

secondary  radials  forming  part  of  the  calj^x,  and  in  having  the 
anal  opening  through  the  vault,  and  not  at  the  end  of  a  tube.  It 
differs  from  Pterotocrinus  in  the  very  different  form  of  the  calyx  ; 
in  having  no  teiliary  radials  in  the  calyx  ;  in  the  form  of  the 
dome,  and  the  absence  of  lobed  processes. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — The  genus  is  known  onlj^  from  the 
St.  Louis  and  Kaskaskia  groups  of  the  United  States. 

We  recognize  the  following  species : — 

*t857.  Talarocrinus  cornigerus  .^humard.  (Dichocr.  cornigerus.1  Type  of  the 
genus.  Trans.  Acad.  Sci.  St.  Louis,  i,  p.  72,  PI.  1,  figs.  1  a,  b ;  Pterotocr. 
cornigerus  Shumard,  1866,  Cat.  Pal.  Foss.  N.  Amer.,  i,  p.  393 ;  S.  A.  Miller, 
Pterotocr.  cornigerus,  Catal.  Pal.  Foss.,  p.  89.  Kaskaskia  limest.  Frank- 
lin Co.,  Ala. 

*1860.  Talarocr.  elegans  Cass,  and  Ljon.  (Dichocr.  elegans.)  Proc.  Am.  Acad. 
Arts  and  Sci.,  v,  p.  22.     St.  Louis  limest.     Edmonson  Co.,  Ky. 

*1857.  Talarocr.  sexlobatus  Shumard.  (Dichocr.  sexlobatus).  Trans.  Acad.  Sci. 
St.  Louis,  vol.  i,  p.  6,  PI.  i,  figs.  3  a,  b,  c ;  S.  A.  Miller  (Pterotocr  sexloba- 
tus),  Catal.  Pal.  Foss.,  p.  89.     Kaskaskia  limest.     Russelville,  Ky. 

*1860.  Talarocr.  symmetricus  Cass,  and  Lyon.  (Dichocr.  symmetricus.)  Proc. 
Am.  Acad.  Arts  and  Sci.,  vol.  v,  p.  22.  Ka.^kaskia  limest.  Edmonson 
Co.,  Ky. 

10.  PTEEOTOCEINTJS  Lyon  and  Casseday. 

1859.  Lyon  and  Casseday.     Am.  Journ.  Sci.  and  Arts,  xxix,  p.  68. 
1866.  Meek  and  Worthen.    Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  288. 
1879.  Wetherby.     Journ.  Cin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  (April). 
1879.  Wetherby.     Ibid.  ( October  No, ) . 
1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  d.  Palaeont.,  i,  p.  365. 

Syn.  Asterocrinus  Lyon,  1857  (not  Miinster).     Geol.  Rep.  Ky.,  iii, 
p.  472. 

Pterotocrinus  was  first  described  in  185T  by  Lyon  under  the 
name  of  Asterocrinus.,  which,  being  previously  occupied  by  Miin- 
ster, was  changed  to  the  former  in  1859  by  Lyon  and  Casseday. 

Meek  and  Worthen,  in  revising  the  genus  in  1866,  indicated  in 
their  generic  formula  four  series  of  interradial  plates,  which  is 
evidently  a  mistake,  as  that  order  of  plates  is  entirel}^  absent  in 
the  calyx.  They  further  changed  the  term  "  wings  or  lobed 
pieces  "  of  Lyon  into  "  interbrachial  appendages," 

In  1879,  Prof.  Wetherb}^,  who  had  obtained  very  perfect  speci- 
mens from  Kentucky,  published  some  new  and  interesting  obser- 
vations on  the  genus,  and  described  in  the  April  and  October 
numbers  of  the  Journ.  of  the  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  three  new 
species.     He  considered  the  small  plates  which  had  been  recog- 


262  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

nized  by  Meek  and  Worthen  as  second  radials,  to  be  mere  acces- 
sory pieces.  These  plates  are  exceedingly  small  and  rudimentary 
in  this  genus,  sometimes  almost  obsolete  ;  but  in  their  minuteness 
they  are  clearly  the  analogues  of  the  second  primary  radials  in 
other  genera,  and  should  be  so  described. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Calyx  depressed,  saucer-shaped,  much 
wider  than  high  ;  symmetry  bilateral.  Vault  high,  pyramidal, 
pentagonal  in  outline,  crowned  by  five  wing-like  lateral  extensions 
or  processes,  which  form  one  of  the  most  characteristic  features 
of  this  remarkable  genus.     Plates  without  surface  ornamentation, 

Basals  two,  large,  of  similar  form,  pentagonal,  the  suture  run- 
ning from  the  anterior  to  the  posterior  side  ;  they  form  a  shallow 
cup,  with  a  central  depression  for  the  attachment  of  the  column. 
Posterior  side  of  the  cup  angularly  excavated  for  the  reception  of 
a  rather  large,  lance-shaped,  subtriangular  anal  plate,  the  opposite 
side  of  which  is  similarly  excavated,  supporting  the  anterior 
radial.  First  radials  almost  twice  as  wide  as  high,  increasing 
rppidly  in  width  from  their  lower  suture  upward.  The  anterior 
radial  is  heptagonal,  the  two  adjoining  radials  hexagonal.  The 
two  posterior  first  radials  are  of  somewhat  difierent  form  on 
account  of  the  triangular  or  quadrangular  anal  piece  which  is  inter- 
calated between  them,  and  they  are  either  heptagonal  or  hexagonal 
according  as  this  plate  is  of  equal  height  with  them  or  shorter. 
The  upper  side  of  the  first  radials  is  excavated  and  more  or  less 
concave,  it  supports  not  only  the  second  primar}^  radials,  but  also 
the  two  secondary  ones,  and,  what  is  most  remarkable,  one  of  the 
first  series  of  tertiary  radials;  all  of  which  plates,  with  1  X  2  X  20 
additional  tertiary  radials,  form  part  of  the  calyx.  The  second 
primary  radial  is  placed  within  the  concavity  of  the  first  plate ; 
it  is  very  minute,  sometimes  invisible  externally,  of  triangular 
form,  and  supporting  on  each  sloping  face  a  single  series  of  bifur- 
cating plates,  which  rank  as  secondary  radials.  These  latter  meet 
above  the  apex  of  the  small  second  radial,  and  rest  by  one  side 
upon  the  large  first  radials,  while  their  two  upper  faces  support 
from  2  to  3  X  20  tertiary  radials,  or  2  X  4  to  each  ray.  Of  these 
plates,  the  two  outer  ones  of  each  ray  rest  with  one  side  upon  the 
outer  extremity  of  the  margin  of  the  first  radials,  with  the  outer 
side  against  one  of  the  upper  sloping  faces  of  the  secondary 
radials,  the  inner  sides  meet  each  other,  while  their  upper  faces 
support  a  second  tertiary   radial.     The   two   plates  toward  the 


1881. J  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  263 

inner  ray  are  narrower,  truncate  below,  resting  upon  the  longer 
upper  face  of  the  secondary  radials,  and  support  like  the  outer 
plates  one  or  two  plates  in  succession,  which  in  turn  support  the 
arms.  The  radials  of  the  higher  orders  are  almost  of  equal  size, 
and  at  least  twice  as  wide  as  high.  There  is  no  interradial  within 
the  calyx,  and  no  other  anal  plate  but  the  one  described.^ 

Dome  highly  elevated,  pyramidal,  pentagonal  in  outline.  The 
angles  which  are  radial,  are  excavated  for  the  attachment  of  the 
large  radial  processes.  The  sides  of  the  pentagon  are  the  inter- 
radial spaces,  which  seem  to  have  faint  grooves,  running  longi- 
tudinally, wherein  the  arms  rest.  Four  of  the  interradial  spaces 
are  of  equal  size,  the  fifth  somewhat  larger.  All  five  are  similarl}^ 
constructed,  and  contain  three  plates  in  the  lower  series.  The 
middle  or  first  interradial  plate  is  the  larger,  its  two  upper  sides 
forming  an  angle.  The  two  adjacent  plates,  as  will  be  explained 
presently,  are  representations  of  radials  of  a  second  order. 
Above  these  and  alternating  with  them,  rests  a  second  series  of 
interradials,  composed  of  two  plates,  larger  than  the  first,  and 
these  meet  laterally  with  corresponding  plates  of  adjacent  rays. 
The  upper  series,  representing  the  proximal  vault  pieces,  consists 
of  a  single  plate  in  four  of  the  spaces,  and  two  slightly  smaller 
ones  in  that  of  the  posterior  side,  which  all  join  laterally  and 
form  a  continuous  ring.  In  a  few  instances  only,  there  appears 
to  be  a  small  anal  plate  located  between  the  two  smaller  proximal 
plates. 

The  first  radial  dome  plates  are  enormously  developed  in  the 
form  of  wing-like  processes  which  form  the  most  characteristic 
feature  of  the  genus.  Succeeding  these  outward,  toward  the  rim, 
are  two  small  secondary  radial  dome-plates,  one  on  each  side  of 
the  lower  interradial,  and  two  still  smaller  plates  bifurcating  from 
the  last,  which  are  tertiary  radial  dome  plates,  but  which  are  rarely 
observed.  Besides  these  there  is  a  rather  large,  very  peculiar 
interbrachial  plate,  beneath  the  winged  first  radial.  The  winged 
extensions  of  the  first  radial  dome  plate  are  very  variable  in  form. 
They  are,  according  to  Wetherby,  either  spatulate,  claviform,  or 
cuneiform ;  in  some  species  thin  and  knife-like  throughout  their 

*  In  one  of  Wetherby"  s  specimens  which  he  kindly  loaned  us,  we  found 
a  little  triangular  piece  resting  upon  the  anal  plate.  Whether  this  is  ab- 
normal, or  a  deviation  from  the  general  rule  and  of  specific  importance, 
we  are  as  yet  unable  to  say. 


264  PROCEEDINGS    OF   THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

length ;  in  others  thickened  and  rounded  above,  and  slightly 
thinner  below ;  in  some  terminating  in  thin  round  edges,  in  others 
tapering  almost  to  a  point ;  while  still  others  are  bifurcate  at  the 
extremities.  The  monstrous  plates,  which  rise  to  the  full  height 
of  the  summit,  and  laterally  extending  far  beyond  it,  rest  chiefly 
upon  the  surface  of  the  vault,  within  grooves,  bordered  by  elevated 
ridges  along  the  interradial  and  proximal  dome  plates,  and  only  a 
small  portion  at  the  lower  end  is  wedged  in  between  other  plates. 
The  ridges  continue  along  the  interbrachial  plate,  which  for  a 
plate  of  that  order  is  unusually  large.  The  interbrachial  plates, 
together  with  the  secondary  radials  and  lower  interradials,  form 
the  base  of  the  dome. 

The  summit  leans  somewhat  to  the  posterior  side,  more  espe- 
cially the  upper  portion,  which  in  the  best  specimens  consists  of  a 
small  cone,  composed  of  a  number  of  small  plates,  which  decrease 
in  size  ui)ward,  leaving  a  minute  anal  opening  at  the  upper  end 
of  the.  cone.' 

In  front  of  the  anal  opening,  and  in  the  radial  centre,  there  is  a 
pentagonal  plate  which  is  at  once  recognized  as  the  central  dome 
plate.  To  this  plate  converge  not  only  the  radial  grooves  in 
which  the  winged  processes  rest,  but  also  the  smaller  grooves 
within  the  interradial  spaces  which  receive  the  arms.  These 
latter  pass  into  the  ambulacral  or  arm  openings,  which  are  rather 
large,  and  have  an  upward  direction. 

The  arms  are  short,  simple,  gradually  diminishing  in  size  up- 
ward, extending  to  the  top  of  the  vault,  but  not  beyond  it.  They 
are  twenty  in  number,  divided  by  the  winged  processes  into  groups 
of  four,  each  containing  two  arms  of  two  different  rays.  They 
are  constructed  of  two  rows  of  short  interlocking  joints,  moder- 
ately convex  on  the  dorsal  side.  Ambulacral  furrows,  wide  and 
deep.     Pinnules  short,  stout,  composed  of  five  or  six  joints. 

The  visceral  cavity,  as  seen  from  one  of  Wetherby's  specimens, 
(vertical  section)  is  deeper  than  would  be  expected  from  the  form 
of  the  body.  The  basal  plates  are  very  thin,  while  the  radials,  to 
the  top  of  the  third  order,  increase  rapidl3^  in  thickness. 

Column  slender,  round  ;  central  perforation  small. 

'  It  is  very  possible  that  in  some  of  the  species  the  anus  is  not  thus  ex- 
tended into  a  tube-like  cone,  but  this  is  the  case  in  Pterotocrinus  depressus 
Lyon  and  Cass.  The  anal  aperture  is  but  rarely  observed,  being  generally 
covered  by  the  shell  of  a  Gasteropod. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  265 

Geological  Position^  etc. — Pterotocrinus  is  the  last  survivor  of 
the  PIat3^erinidse,  and  occurs  only  in  the  Kaskaskia  limestone  of 
America. 

The  following  species  are  known  : — 

1879.  Pterotocrinus  acatas  Wetherby.    Joum.  Cin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  (Oct.  No.),  p.  1, 

PI.  11,  figs.  2  a,  b,  c.     Kaskaskia  limest.     Pulaski  Co.,  Ky. 
1879.  Pterotocr.  Mfurcatus  Wetherby.     Journ.  Cin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  (Oct.  No.),  p.  3, 

PI.  11,  figs.  1  a,  b,  c.     Kaskaskia  limest.     Pulaski  Co.,  Ky. 
1857.  Pterotocr.  oapitalis  Lyon.  (Asterocr,  capitalis).  Type  of  the  genus.  Ky.  Geol. 

Surv.,  iii,  p.  472,  PI.  3,  figs.  1  a-k ;  Lyon  and  Cass.,  1859,  Pterotocr.  capitalis, 

Am.  Journ.  Sci.  and  Arts,  vol.  x.xix,  p.  68.     Kaskaskia  limest.     Crittenden 

Co.,  Ky. 
1860.  Pterotocr.  Chestereiisis  Meek  and  Worth.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  383; 

and  1866,  Geol.  Rep.  111.  ii,  p.  292,  PI.  23,  figs.  1  a,  b,  c.     Kaskaskia  limest. 

Hardin  Co.,  111. 
1857.  Pterotocr.  coronatus  Lyon  (Asterocr.  coronatus).    Ky.  Geol.  Surv  ,  iii,  p. 

476,  PI.  1,  figs.  1,  1  a.     Kaskaskia  limest.     Crittenden  Co.,  Ky. 
1860.  Pterotocr.  crassus  Meek  and  Worth.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.  p.  382,  and 

1866,  Geol.  Rep.  Ill ,  ii,  p.  240,  PI.  23,  figs.  2  a,  b.     Kaskaskia  limest.     Har- 
din Co.,  111. 
1859.  Pterotocr.  depressus  Lyon  and  Cass.     Am.  Journ.  Sci.  and  Arts,  vol.  xxix. 

p.  68.     Kaskaskia  limest.     Grayson  Springs,  Ky. 
*1858.  Pterotocr.  protaberans  Hall.  (Dichoor.  protuberans).     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i, 

Pt.  2,  p   689,  PI.  25,  fig.  7.     Kaskaskia  limest.     Chester,  111. 
1859.  Pterotocr.  pyramidalis  Lyon  and  Cass.     Am.  Joum.  Sci.  and  Arts,  xxix,  p. 

69.     Kaskaskia  limest.     Grayson  and  Edmonson  Cos.,  Ky. 
This  species  is  evidently  identical  with  P.  depressus,  and  was  described  from 

a  specimen  showing  the  vault  in  place  of  the  arms. 
1879.  Pterotocr.  spatulatus  Wetherby.     Journ.  Cin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  (Oct.  No.),  p.  4, 

PI.  11,  figs.  3  a,  b,  c.     Kaskaskia  limest.     Pulaski  Co.,  Ky. 

B.  ACTINOCEINIDJE  Roemer  and  Zittel. 

(Amend.  Wachsm.  and  Spr.) 

The  name  Actinocrinidsfi  was  first  employed  b}-  Roemer  in  1855, 
who  arranged  under  it  Actinocrinus,  Amphoracrinus,  Dorycrinus 
and  Batocrinus,  genera  without  underbasals,  with  three  basal 
plates,  and  in  which  the  first  anal  piece  extends  to  the  line  of  the 
first  radials.  He  placed  Melocrinus  and  all  genera  with  four 
basals  and  no  anal  plate  within  the  first  radial  ring  under  his 
Melocrinidjfi,  not  including,  however,  Eucalyjjtocrinus  nor  Cteno- 
crinus,  which  latter,  as  he  supposed,  had  only  three  basals. 
Periechocrinus  ( Pradocrinus  and  Saccocrinus),  which  he  thought 
differed  in  the  anal  area,  and  Ctenocrinus,  he  placed  with  Glypto- 
crinus — of  which  the  underbasals  had  not  been  discovered — under 


266  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

the  CtenocrinidiTe ;  while  Carpocrinus  and  Macrostylocrinus  were 
referred  to  the  Cyathocrinidae. 

Zittel  amended  Actinocrinidse  by  admitting  Periechocrinus^ 
Erelmocrinus^  AUoprosallocrinus,  StrotocriniiSj  Sleganocrinus. 
Agaricocrinus  and  Megistocrinus,  partly,  however,  as  subgenera 
of  Actinocrinus.  He,  like  Roemer  and  Angelin,  separated  the 
genera  with  four  basals,  and  ranged  Stelidiocrinus  and  Harmo- 
crinus,  which  have  five  basal  pieces,  under  a  distinct  family. 
Zittel  further  excluded  Carpocrinus,  Hahrocrinus  and  Desmido- 
crinus,  species  with  single  arm  joints,  for  which  he  proposed  the 
name  Carpocrinidse,  and  he  placed  under  the  Dimerocrinidaa 
Marcostylocrinus  and  Dolatocrinus^  genera  with  three  basals  and  no 
anal  plate  in  line  with  the  first  radials,  and  among  these  he  admitted 
Gytocrinus,  which  we  have  ascertained  has  four  and  not  three 
basals,  and  Dirtier ocrinus,  which  has  underbasals. 

The  fact  that  in  those  classifications  the  least  mistake  or  mis- 
conception as  to  the  number  of  the  basals,  a  diversity  in  the 
position  or  distribution  of  the  anal  plates,  or  a  slight  variation  in 
the  form  of  the  arm  joints,  throws  the  genus  from  one  family  into 
another,  is  in  itself  sufficient  proof,  that  the  divisions  are  arbitrary 
and  artificial.  A  classification  based  upon  fossils  should  be  as 
simple  as  possible,  resting  upon  a  broad  basis,  and  the  family  di- 
visions should  express  important  and  evident  structural  features, 
and  be  not  dependent  upon  such  trifling  variations  as  the  number 
of  basal  plates,  etc. 

We  place  among  the  Actinocrinidte  all  genera  of  the  Sphan-oido- 
crinidfB,  which  are  constructed  of  basals  (without  underbasals) ; 
3  X  5 — rarely  2  X  5 — primary  radials,  all  forming  a  part  of  the 
calyx;  one  or  more  higher  orders  of  radials,  with  at  least  one, 
but  generally  several  additional  interradial  pieces  beneath  the  arm 
regions  ;  a  vault  composed  of  a  large  number  of  heavy  plates  in 
contact  with  each  other ;  and  we  include  species  both  with  single 
and  double  jointed  arms. 

For  greater  convenience  of  study  we  arrange  the  genera  under 
six  sections. 

a.  Stelidiocrinites:  The  simplest  form  of  the  sub-family.  General 
symmetry  more  or  less  perfectly  pentahedral ;  calyx  low  ;  basals 
five  or  three ;  second  radials  short ;  anal  and  interradial  area 
scarcely  distinct ;  arms  single  or  double  jointed. 

h.  Agaricocrinites :  Symmetry  decidedly  bilateral ;  calyx  low  ; 


1881.]  NATtJRAL   SCIENCES   OP  PHILADELPHIA.  267 

basals  three ;  second  primary  radials  quadrangular  and  short ; 
the  first  anal  plate  in  line  with  the  first  radials ;  arms  heavy, 
simple,  composed  of  single  or  double  joints. 

c.  llelocrimtes :  S3mmetry  more  or  less  uniformly  pentahedral ; 
calyx  large ;  basals  four  or  three ;  second  radials  comparatively 
high  and  generally  hexagonal ;  interradials  numerous ;  anal  side 
but  little  distinct  and  its  plates  not  extending  to  the  line  of  the 
first  radials ;  interaxillaries  sometimes  present ;  arms  given  off 
laterally  ;  columnar  canal  pentalobate  and  rather  large. 

d.  Periechocrinites :  General  symmetry  bilateral;  calyx  very 
large ;  basals  four  or  three ;  second  radials  large,  frequently  higher 
than  wide ;  interradials  and  interaxillaries  numerous ;  first  anal 
plate  in  line  with  the  first  radials,  succeeded  by  three  plates  in  the 
second  series;  arms  branching;  column  large,  and  with  a  wide 
pentalobate  canal. 

e.  Actinocrinites :  Symmetry  slightly  bilateral ;  calyx  large ; 
basals  three  ;  second  primary  radials  nearly  as  high  as  wide,  hex- 
agonal ;  higher  orders  of  radials  numerous,  composed  of  one  series 
of  plates  each,  which  give  off  the  arms  alternately  from  opposite 
sides ;  interradials  in  two  rows ;  the  first  anal  plate  enclosed  be- 
tween the  first  radials,  supporting  only  two  plates  in  the  second 
series;  interaxillaries  generall}'  present;  arms  long,  double  jointed. 

/.  Batocrinites ;  symmetry  more  or  less  bilateral ;  calyx  large  ; 
basals  three ;  second  radials  short,  linear ;  higher  orders  of  radials 
rarely  exceeding  three,  the  plates  of  the  last  order  touching  later- 
ally all  around  the  body,  except  sometimes  over  the  anal  area. 
Interradials  few ;  interaxillaries  absent ;  first  anal  plate  in  line 
with  the  first  radials,  second  series  composed  of  three  plates  ; 
arms  short,  double  jointed. 

These  groups  are  founded  upon  the  construction  of  the  anal 
area,  in  connection  with  the  form  and  arrangement  of  the  radial 
plates  and  the  arms.  A  division  merely  based  upon  the  construc- 
tion of  the  anal  area,  as  we  have  adopted  among  Platycrinidae, 
would  bring  together  the  Stelidiocrinites  and  Melocrinites  as  op- 
posed to  the  Agaricocrinites,  Periechocrinites  and  Batocrinites, 
while  the  Actinocrinites  would  occupy  a  place  somewhat  between 
the  two.  A  separation  by  means  of  the  second  primary  radials 
brings  into  closer  proximity  Stelidiocrinites  and  Agaricocrinites, 
in  which  those  plates  are  short,  linear  and  quadrangular,  against 
the  three  other  sections  in  which  the}^  are  comparatively  high  and 


268  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

hexagonal.  An  exception  is  here  found  in  Dolatocrinus  and 
Stereocrinus^  in  which  the  second  radials  are  quadrangular  or  even 
absent,  and  which  should  perhaps  be  placed  more  properly  in  a 
group  by  themselves. 

The  form  of  the  second  radials  is  no  doubt  of  some  importance 
in  the  structure  of  these  crinoids.  In  species  in  which  they  are 
quadrangular  and  linear,  the  second  and  third  radials  together 
very  often  fail  to  attain  the  size  of  the  first  radial  plate.  In 
various  cases  of  Dolatocrinus^  Alloprosallocrinus  and  Batocrinus, 
the  second  radials  are  so  small  that  they  are  discovered  with  diffi- 
cult^' ,  and  are  not  un frequently  in  single  rays  entirely  absent.  In 
species  in  which  the  plates  of  the  calyx  are  tuberculous,  they  are 
often  the  only  plates  which  bear  no  tubercle.  All  this  hints  at 
the  conclusion  that  the  second  and  third  radials,  which  combined 
take  the  form  of  a  single  bifurcating  plate,  here  take  the  place  of 
a  single  plate  joined  by  syzygy,  with  the  epizygial  part  bearing  an 
arm  instead  of  a  pinnule,  and  that  in  species  which  as  a  rule  have 
only  two  primary  radials,  but  otherwise  agree  with  some  other 
genus,  the  joints  became  perfectly  anchylosed.  Such  was  evi- 
dently the  case  with  Dolatoci'inus  and  Stereocrinus,  Eucrinus 
and  Anthevwcrinus,  Lecanocrivus  and  Pycnosaccus.  In  Platy- 
crinus,  which  also  has  only  two  primary  radials,  the  division 
appears  yet  frequently  in  form  of  a  shallow  groove  at  the  surface 
of  the  plate,  where  the  earlier  Platycrinidse  have  a  regular 
suture. 

In  species  with  more  than  ten  arms,  the  rays  are  generally  com- 
posed of  two  main  divisions,  of  which  each  side  gives  off  arms  in 
opposite  directions.  The  onl}'  exception  is  Steganocrinus  sculjytus 
Hall,  in  which  the  ray  is  undivided  (PI.  18,  fig.  3).  In  this 
species,  the  third  primary  radials,  like  all  succeeding  plates 
(radials  of  superior  orders),  take  the  form  of  pinnule-bearing 
plates,  which,  instead  of  bifurcating,  give  off"  laterally  arms  in 
the  same  manner  as  the  others  do  pinnules. 

This  is  of  interest,  as  it  leads  to  the  conclusion  that  probably 
the  secondary  radials — the  distichalia  of  Miiller — made  their 
appearance  in  the  young  crinoid  in  form  of  a  pinnule  given  off 
from  the  radials  which  at  first  formed  the  only  arms  of  the  ray. 

We  have  already  shown  in  our  general  remarks  on  the  family 
that  the  higher  orders  of  radials  were  in  the  young  animal  free 
arm  plates,  and  we  have  proved  by  many  examples  that  the  arms 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  269 

spring  off  in  exactly  the  same  manner  as  the  pinnules,  and  they 
evidently  were  pinnule-like  in  their  earlier  form. 

The  earliest  Actinocrinidae  known  to  us  are  found  in  the  Upper 
Silurian,  but  the  species  and  even  genera  which  already  occur 
there  are  so  numerous,  and  show  such  variety  of  form,  and  some 
of  them  appear  to  be  so  highly  developed,  that  evidently  the  family 
had  been  represented  at  a  much  earlier  epoch.     It  is  possible  that 
Schizocrinus  Hall  of  the  Lower  Silurian,  which  is  imperfectly 
known,  should  be  referred  to  the  Actinocrinida,  but  it  may  have 
underbasals.     In  the  earlier  representatives  of  this  family,  the 
underbasals  form  the  criterion  by  which  alone  the  Actinocrinidfe 
and  Rhodocrinidfe  can  be  distinguished,  and  as  these  plates  in  the 
earlier  types  are  very  minute,  it  is  often  exceedingly  difficult  to 
make  the  separation.     In  Glyptocrinus  the  underbasals  may  per- 
haps be  absent  in  some  species,  but  when  visible  they  are  exceed- 
ingly rudimentary.      Species  without  them  might   be  referred, 
almost  with  the  same  proprietj'  to  the  ActinocrinidjB,  and  indeed, 
they  have  a  remarkably  close  resemblance  to  species  of  IMocrinus 
and  Mariacrinus  yvith.  four  basal  plates.     A  similar  relation  exists 
between  Dimerocrinus  and  Stelidiocriniis,  Glyptaster'  and  Perie- 
chocrinus,  which  can  be  distinguished  only  by  the  underbasals. 

In  Stelidwcrinus  and  Melocrinus,  we  recognize  representatives 
of  two  of  the  four  divisions  of  the  Actinocrinidse  which  occur  in 
the  Upper  Silurian.  The  two  differ  essentially  in  the  relative 
size  of  their  body,  and  in  the  number  and  distribution  of  the 
plates  in  the  calj'x,  but  agree  in  the  arrangement  of  their  anal 
area.  Carpocrinus  and  Periechocrinus,  which  belong  to  the  same 
geological  age,  are  separated  by  the  very  same  characters,  the 
former  agreeing  closely  with  Stelidiocriniis,  the  latter  with 
Melocrinus^  but  both  are  readily  distinguished  by  having  a  special 
anal  plate  in  line  with  the  first  radials. 

The  Stelidiocriniles  disappear  in  the  Upper  Silurian,  where 
they  are  first  known.  The  Periechocrimtes  and  Agaricocrinites 
survived  to  the  Subcarboniferous,  the  former  to  the  Burlington, 
the  latter  to  the  Keokuk  epoch.  The  Melocrinites  became  extinct 
in  the  Devonian.  The  Actinocrinites  and  Batocrinites  are 
restricted  almost  exclusively  to  the  Subcarboniferous  ;  a  few 
aberrant  forms  are  known  from  the  Hamilton  group.  The 
Actinocrinidse  became  altogether  extinct  after  the  age  of  the 
Warsaw  limestone. 


270  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

We  arrange  the  six  sections  as  follows  : — 

a,  Stelidiocrinites. 

1.  Briarocriiius  Angelin.  4.  Macrostylocrinus  Hall. 

2.  Stelidiocrinus  Angelin.  Subgenus  Centrocrinus 

3.  Patelliocrinus  Angelin.  Wachsmuth  &  Springer. 

b.  Agaricocrinites. 

5.  Carpocrim/s  Miiller.  6.  Agnricocrinus  Troost. 

Subgenus  Desmidocrinus  Subgenus  Alloprosallocrinus 

Angelin.  Lyon  &  Casseday. 

c.  Melocrikites. 

7.  Mariacrinus  Wachsm.  &  Spr.        10.  Scypliocrimis  Zenker. 

8.  Teehnocrinus  Hall.  11.  Dolatocrinus  Lyon. 

9.  Melocrinus  Goldfuss.  Subgenus  Stereocrinus  Barris. 

d.  Perxechocrinites. 
13.  Periechocrinus  Austin.  14.  Megistocrinus  Owen  &  Shumard. 

13.  Abacoc7'inus  Angelin. 

e.    ACTINOCRINITES. 

15.  Actinocrinus  Miller.  19.  PJiysetocrinus  Meek  &  Worthen. 

16.  Teleiocrimis  Wachsm,  &  Spr.  20.  Strotocrinus  Meek  &  Worthen. 

17.  Steganocrinus  Meek  &  Worthen.  21.   GenncBocrinus  Wachsm.  &  Spr. 

18.  Amphoracrinus  Austin, 

/.  BatocRinites. 

22.  Batocrinus  Casseday.  24.  Dorycrinus  F.  Roemer. 

23.  Eretmocrinus  Lyon  &  Casseday. 

a.   STEMDlOCRliJITES. 
i.  BRIAKOCRINTJS  Angelin. 

1878.  Angelin.     Iconog.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  1. 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Palseont.,  i,  p.  367. 

Briarocrinus  represents  the  simplest  conceivable  form  that  can 
be  admitted  among  the  Actinoerinidoe.  It  has  two  interradial 
plates,  and  these,  in  the  typical  species,  are  situated  above  the 
line  of  the  third  primary  radials.  Its  perfectly  straight  arm 
joints  suggest  an  immature  crinoidal  structure. 

B.  angustus  Angl.  is  too  plainly  distinct  from  B.  injiatus  Angl., 
in  the  construction  of  the  plates  of  the  calyx,  and  particularly  in 
the  interradial  portions,  to  be  admitted  into  the  same  genus,  and 
as  it  agrees  with  no  other,  we  should  propose  it  as  the  type  of  a 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF  PHILADELPHIA.  2^1 

new  genus,  if  we  had  before  us  specimens  instead  of  a  single 
figure.     For  want  of  material,  we  leave  it  here  for  the  present. 

Angelin  and  Zittel  arranged  Briarocrinus  under  a  separate 
famil}',  in  which  the  latter  includes  Gulicocrinus.  It  is  true  that 
B.  injiatus  deviates  from  all  other  Actinocrinidse  in  its  interradial 
parts,  but  it  differs  fully  as  much  from  Gulicocrinus  in  the  same 
characters,  the  latter  being  decidedly  a  Platycrinoid  Briarocrinus, 
in  our  opinion,  leans  rather  toward  the  Ichthyocrinidse,  with 
which  it  agrees  in  the  alternate  arrangement  of  the  radial  plates, 
but  it  has  evidently  not  their  pliant  body. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Calyx  cup-shaped  ;  symmetry  pentahedral, 
with  some  inequality  in  the  sides  due  to  irregularities  in  the  radial 
series. 

Basals  three,  usually  large,  two  of  them  equal  and  larger  than 
the  third.  Primary  radials  3X5,  wider  than  high,  joining 
laterally.  The  third  is  a  bifurcating  plate  with  very  obtuse 
upper  angles,  supporting  in  almost  vertical  succession  3  X  10 
secondary  radials,  which  are  half  the  width  of  the  primary  radials, 
and  interlock  up  to  the  second  plate ;  the  third  pair  being 
separated  by  a  small  axillary  piece.  The  radials  are  generally 
irregular  in  form,  even  those  of  a  like  order  or  series  are  differing 
markedly  among  each  other  in  height  and  width.  In  some  of  the 
ra3'S,  the  first  radials  are  larger  by  half  than  in  others,  and  in 
these  the  second  radials  are  much  higher  and  generall}'  wider ;  in 
others  only  one  side  of  the  plate  is  lower,  a  construction  pro- 
ducing a  sort  of  alternate  arrangement  of  the  plates,  which 
extends  up  to  the  secondary  radials.  The  plates  of  this  second 
order  are  separated  from  each  other,  laterally,  by  a  line  of  two 
small  interradial  pieces,  which  in  alternate  rays,  respectively,  rest 
upon  the  upper  corners  of  two  of  the  third  primaries,  or  upon  the 
upper  sloping  side  of  the  first  secondary  radial. 

Arms  ten,  supported  directly  upon  the  secondary  radials ; 
heav}^  simple,  composed  of  single  transverse  round  joints,  with 
parallel  sutures  and  long  pinnules. 

Posterior  or  anal  side,  so  far  as  known,  not  distinct. 

Column  round. 

In  the  absence  of  interradial  plates  between  the  primary  radials, 
and  in  the  alternate  arrangement  of  the  latter,  this  genus  differs 
from  all  others  of  the  family. 


212  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — Found  thus  far  only  in  the  Upper 
Silurian  of  Sweden. 

1878.  Briarocrinas   inflatus   Angelin.     Iconogr.   Grin.  Suec,  p.  1,  PI.  10,  fig.  23. 

Upper  Silur.     (rothland,  Sweden. 
(?]  1878.  Briarocr.   angustus  Angelin.     Iconogr.   Grin.  Suec.,  p.  1,  PI.   10,  fig.  22. 

Upper  Silur.    Gothland,  Swei'en. 

2.  STELIDIOCRINTJS  Angelin. 
(Amend.  Wachsmuth  and  Springer.) 

1878.  Angelin,     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  21. 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Palajont. ,  i,  p.  345. 

Syn.  Harmocrinus  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  23. 

We  are  obliged  to  include  Angelin's  genus  Harmocrinus  in 
Stelidiocrinus.  A  few  additional  interradial  or  interaxillary 
plates  do  not  alone  warrant  a  generic  or  even  subgeneric  separa- 
tion. According  to  Angelin  and  Zittel,  StelidiocrinuH  and 
Harmocrinus,  with  Hall's  Schizocrinus,  form  a  distinct  famil}'. 

The  genus  now  under  consideration  is  in  more  than  one  respect 
an  interesting  form  with  reference  to  the  Palaeontologic  history  of 
the  Crinoids.  It  is  the  only  genus  of  the  Actinocrinidae  which 
has  five  basal  plates,  none  of  them  being  anchylosed,  and  as  this 
is  one  of  their  earliest  representatives,  there  can  be  little  doubt 
that  the  basals  in  this  family,  whether  composed  of  a  single  piece 
or  of  three  or  four,  were  derived  originally  from  five.  The  rela- 
tions also  between  this  genus  and  Divierocrinus  of  the  Rhodo- 
crinidse  are  so  close,  that  it  may  be  asked  whether  the  presence  of 
underbasals,  which  form  the  only  distinction,  should  be  considered 
of  more  than  generic  importance.  It  shows,  at  all  events,  the 
very  close  relations  that  exist  between  the  two  sub-families.  There 
is  also  to  be  seen  within  the  limits  of  this  genus,  a  modification 
of  the  arms  from  interlocking  single  joints  to  a  double  series  of 
plates. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Body  small.  Calyx  subturbinate  or  sub- 
ovate,  without  surface  ornamentation ;  radial  plates  prominently 
elevated  above  the  interradial  areas,  but  not  producing  sharp 
carinae. 

Basals  five,  equal,  quadrangular,  upper  angles  acute.  Primary 
radials  3X5;  the  first  large,  wider  than  high,  lunate,  hexagonal ; 
the  second  quadrangular,  shorter  and  much  narrower ;  the  third 
pentagonal,  almost  as  wide  but  not  as  high  as  the  first.     Second- 


1881. J  NATURAL    SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA.  2t3 

ary  radials  2  to  4  x  1^?  wider  than  high,  supporting  in  direct 
line  a  single  rather  stout  arm  or  ten  in  all.  It  is  possible  that  the 
number  of  secondary  radials  varies  with  age,  and  that  there  are 
four  in  the  adult. 

Arms  composed  either  of  a  single  row  of  cuneiform  plates 
slightly  interlocking,  or  of  two  rows  of  short  plates  alternately 
arranged. 

Interradials  four  to  eight ;  the  first  large,  resting  upon  the 
sloping  sides  of  the  first  radials  and  between  the  second  and  third 
of  adjacent  ra3's,  the  succeeding  plates  much  smaller  and  connect- 
ing with  the  vault  pieces.  Posterior  area  wider ;  the  first  anal 
piece  in  line  with  the  first  interradials,  the  second  and  third 
ranges  consisting  of  two  instead  of  three  pieces.  Anus  in  form 
of  a  simple  lateral  opening  similar  to  Dorycrinus. 

Vault  compressed,  conij)osed  almost  exclusively  of  the  apical 
dome  plates,  which  are  unusually  large.  In  Stelidiocr.  capitulum, 
the  vault  is  constructed  of  only  twenty-three  pieces,  the  smallest 
possible  number  of  which  a  species  with  ten  arms  can  be  composed 
in  accordance  with  the  rule  prevailing  among  these  crinoids.  It 
consists  of  the  central  piece,  the  six  proximal  plates,  a  single  anal, , 
and  three  radials  to  each  ray.  The  two  secondary  radials  of  the 
dome  are  exceedingly  small,  while  the  proximal  vault  pieces 
occupy  almost  three-fourths  of  the  entire  summit. 

Column  round,  articulating  faces  crenulated. 

The  genus  resembles  PatelUocriyius ,  but  differs  from  it  and  all 
similar  genera  in  the  number  of  basal  plates. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — Restricted  to  the  Upper  Silurian  of 
Europe. 

We  recognize  the  following  species  . — 


1878,  Stelidiocrinus  capitulum  Angelin.    Type  of  the  genus.    Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec., 
p.  21,  PI.  17,  figs.  5a-g.    Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

*1878.  Stelidiocr.   longimanus  Angel.     (Harmocr.  longimanus).    Iconogr.  Crin, 
Suec,  PI.  21,  figs.  6,  7.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

1878.  Stelidiocr.  Isevis  Angelin.  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  21,  PI.  15,  figs.  20,  20a; 
also  PI.  27,  figs,  3,  3a,  (not  PI.  28,  figs,  7,  a,  b).  Upper  Silur.  Gothland, 
Sweden. 
Angelin's  figures  are  not  so  reliable  as  could  be  wished.  Those  of  S.  Isemg  on 
PI.  15  have  single  jointed  arms,  while  those  on  PI.  27  have  a  double  series  of 
plates.  It  may  be  possible  that  the  former  are  taken  from  a  young  specimen. 
The  figures  7  a  b,  on  PI.  28  are  evidently  referred  to  this  genus  by  oversight,  , 
as  they  are  clearly  of  Desmidocrimis  maerodactyhia, 

19 


274  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

1878.  (?)  Stelidiocr.  ovalis  AnKclin.  Iconogr.  Grin.  Suec,  p.  21,  I'l.  ID,  fig.  6. 
Upper  Silur.  Gothland,  Sweden. 
This  species  differs  from  Stelidiocrinm  in  several  important  points  and  ought 
to  be  separated  from  it.  To  judge  from  the  construction  of  the  anal  plates 
it  should  be  removed  to  the  Agaricocrinites,  but  it  is  possible,  if  the  figure 
is  correct,  and  the  interradial  plates,  as  there  represented,  extend  to  the 
basals  in  all  five  areae,  that  it  possesses  underbasals,  and  properly  belongs 
to  the  RhodocriMidae.  We  refrain  from  proposing  new  generic  names 
for  these  straggling  forms,  as  we  cannot  altogether  depend  upon  the  figures, 
and  we  hope  they  will  be  taken  up  by  investigators  more  familiar  with 
these  types,  and  who  have  access  to  the  specimens. 


3.     PATELLIOGIIINUS  Angelin. 

1878.  Angelin.      Iconogr.  Criu.  Suec,  p.  1. 

1879.  Zittel.      Handb.  der  Palaeont,  p.  368. 

Several  of  these  species  referred  by  Angelin  to  this  genus 
belong,  in  our  opinion,  to  very  distinct  genera.  His  Pat.  duplica- 
tus  has  not  only  four  arms  to  the  ray,  but  as  we  judge  from  the 
shape  and  size  of  the  basals,  evidentlj'  had  underbasals  ;  also  the 
first  anal  plate  is  in  line  with  the  first  radials,  while  in  all  other 
species  of  PatelliocyHnus  those  plates  are  ranged  with  the  second 
radials.  In  Pat.  fulminatus  the  calyx  is  but  imperfectly  pre- 
served, but  we  judge  from  what  is  exposed,  that  this  species  was 
closely  allied  to  another  figured  in  Iconogr.,  PI.  18,  fig.  16,  as  Melocr. 
Volhorth.i.^  Both  species  have  branching  arms,  unlike  Patel- 
lioci'inus,  and  are  probably  generically  identical.  We  should 
propose  for  them  a  new  genus,  if  we  had  more  perfect  figures  for 
description. 

Zittel  made  Patelliocrinus  a  synon3'm  of  Dimerocrinus  Phill., 
wliich,  however,  has  five  basals  instead  of  three,  and  underbasals. 
In  his  classification  he  arranges  Dimerocrinus  with  Dolatocrinus, 
Cytocriniis  with  3Iacrostylocrinus,  and  all  under  the  Patellio- 
crinidae. 

Patelliocrinus  is  one  of  those  genera  in  which  the  arms  as  a 
rule  are  neither  single-  nor  double-jointed,  and  sometimes  scarcely 
interlocking  at  all,  resembling  herein  Eupachycrinus  and  Eriso- 
crinus  of  the  Cyathocrinidse. 

Generic  Diagnosis — General  form  oblong.  Calyx  patellifonn  ; 
symmetrj^  almost  perfectly  equilateral. 

'  We  take  it  that  Melocr.  Yolhortld  is  represented  by  PI.  7,  figs.  7  to  11, 
which  is  an  entirely  different  thing  from  PI.  18,  fig.  16. 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  2^5 

Basals  three,  unequal ;  two  of  them  pentagonal,  the  third 
smaller  bj'  one-half,  and  quadrangular.  Primary  radials  3X5; 
the  first  ones  forming  laterally  a  continuous  ring,  larger  than 
those  succeeding,  heptagon'al,  the  lateral  margins  very  long ;  the 
second  quadrangular,  wider  than  high ;  the  third  axillary  of 
medium  size,  ui)per  angle  obtuse.  Secondary  radials  2  X  10, 
which  directly  support  the  arms,  or  sometimes  the  second  plate 
is  the  bifurcating  piece,  and  supports  upon  the  inner  and  wider 
sloping  side  an  arm  ;  upon  the  smaller  side  an  extraordinary  large 
pinnule,  which  takes  the  direction  of  the  arm,  being  more  erect 
than  the  succeeding  pinnules,  and  twice  as  heavy.  The  arms  are 
large,  heav}'  at  the  base,  and  towards  the  tips  gradually  tapering 
hito  a  sharp  point.  The  proximal  arm  plates  are  large,  resembling 
secondary  radials,  and  like  them  are  decreasing  in  height  up- 
ward ;  succeeding  joints  cuneate,  gradually  passing  into  two 
rows  of  interlocking  pieces.  In  P.  pinnulatus  they  pass  scarcely 
beyond  the  earliest  stage  of  interlocking  arms  ;  in  P.  chiastodac- 
tylus  the  arms  remain  single-jointed  throughout,  but  the  joints 
are  strongly  cuneiform.  Pinnules  long,  rather  strong,  and  com- 
posed of  single  joints. 

Interradials  three,  the  first  very  large,  with  a  small  one  in  the 
second,  and  a  still  smaller  triangular  one  in  the  third  series,  the 
latter  abutting  against  the  large  proximal  arm-like  pinnules. 
There  ai'e  some  species  with  five  interradials,  having  two  plates  in 
the  second,  and  two  in  the  third  range.  Anal  side  not  structurally 
distinct. 

Yault  unknown,  anal  aperture  apparently  lateral. 

Column  cylindrical. 

This  genus,  in  its  general  habitus,  resembles  Agaricocrinus, 
particularly  its  earlier  and  smaller  species  ;  but  the  two  genera  are 
very  distinct  in  the  construction  of  the  anal  area. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Patelliocrinus,  so  far  as  now  known, 
is  confined  to  the  Upper  Silurian  of  Europe. 

We  recognize  the  following  species  : — 


1S7S.  Patelliocrinus  chiastodactylus  Angelin.     Icongr.  Grin.  Suec,  p.  1,  PI.  19, 

fig.  12.     Upper  Silur.     Gvjthland,  Swede n. 
1878.  Patelliocr.  interradius  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Grin.  Suec,  p.  2,  PI.  22,  fig.  10. 

Upper  Sihir.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
1878.  Patelliocr.  leptodactylus  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Grin.  Suec.,  p.  2,  PI.  16,  figs.  26, 

31.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 


2t6  PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

1878.  Patelliocr.  pachydaotylus  Angelin  (type  of  the  genus).    Iconogr.  Grin.  Suec, 

]<.  1,  PI.  16,  figs.  24,  25.      Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
1878.  Patelliocr.  pinnulatus  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  2,  PI.  24,  fig.  5  and 

PI.  26,  fig.  18.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
1878.  Patelliocr.  plumulosus  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  2,  PI.  22,  figs.  8,  9. 

Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
1878.  Patelliocr.  punctuosus  Angelin.    Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  2,  PI.  23,  fig.  26. 

Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
The  two  following  species,  which  were  described  by  Angelin  under  this  genus, 

cannot   be   brought    with    satisfaction    under  this    or  any  other  established 

generic  form. 
(?)  1878.  Patelliocr.  duplicatus  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  1,  PI.  19,  fig.  5. 

Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
(?i  Patelliocr.  fulminatus  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  2,  PI.  26,  figs.  14,  14 

a  b.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 


4.  MACROSTYLOCRINUS  Hall. 

1852.  Hall.    Paleout.,  New  York,  vol.  ii,  p.  203. 

1863.  Hall.     Trans,  Albany  Inst.,  p.  207. 

1879.  Hall.     28tli  Rep.  New  York  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.  (2d  ed.),  p.  129. 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Paleout.,  p.  368. 

This  genus  has  been  frequently  identified  with  Gtenocrinus 
Bronn,^  and  with  Gytocrinus  Roemer.^ 

It  has  been  shown,  however,  by  Schultze  (Mon.  Echin,  Eifel 
Kalk,  p.  62),  that  Gtenocrinus  has  four,  and  not  three  or  five 
basal  plates  as  supposed  by  previous  authors,^  and  we  can  state 
positively,  that  we  have  also  found  four  instead  of  three  in  Cyto- 
crinus  lasvis  Roemer.  This  discovery  leaves  no  doubt  tliat  the 
two  genera  are  identical  with  each  other,  as  well  as  with  Melo- 
c/'irtHs  Goldfuss,  but  distinct  from  Macroatylocrinus. 

In  the  construction  of  the  calyx,  Macrostylocrinus  resembles 
the  preceding  genus,  the  two  varying  only  in  the  proportionate 
size  of  the  different  plates ;  but  this  gives  them  a  totally'  diff'erent 
appearance. 

In  its  general  habitus  3Iac7'ostylocrinus  approaches  the  PeriecJio- 
crinites,  while  Patelliocrinus  is  a  step  in  the  direction  of  the 
Agaricocrinites.  *We  are  sure  that  the  vault  of  Macrostylocrinus 
when  found,  will  prove  to  be  constructed  of  a  great  number  of 
minute  pieces,  while  we  shall  expect  in  Patelliocrinus  a  summit 

^  Broun' s  Jahrbucb,  1840,  p.  253. 
2  Silur.  Fauna,  West  Teun.,  p.  46. 
^  Compare  our  notes  on  Melocrinus. 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  271 

more  like  that  of  Stelhliocrinus,  which  is  composed  of  but  few 
and  large  plates. 

Zittel  places  Ilacrostijlocrinus  with  Dimerocrinus,  Dolatocrinas 
and  Cijtocrinus  under  the   Dimerocrinidfe. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Cal_yx  subglobose  to  urn-shaped,  as  high  or 
liigher  than  wide  ;  surface  granulose-striate,  or  only  granulose ; 
the  five  sides  almost  perfectl}^  equilateral. 

Basals  three,  comparatively  lai'ge,  forming  a  more  or  less  shallow 
cup,  two  of  them  equal  and  pentagonal,  the  third  smaller  by  half 
and  quadrangular.  Primary  radials  3X5;  the  first  series  large  ; 
the  second  hexagonal,  less  than  half,  sometimes  scarcel}^  one-third 
the  size  of  the  first,  wider  than  high  ;  the  thii'd  pentagonal,  smaller 
than  the  second,  supporting  one  or  more  secondary-  radials  in  a 
direct  line,  which  support  the  arms.  Arms  only  known  in  M. 
ornatus,  where  thej^  are  long,  simple,  composed  at  the  base  of  a 
single  row  of  alternately  arranged  wedge-form  pieces,  which,  from 
the  sixtli  or  seventh  plate  up,  interlock  with  each  other,  and  gradu- 
all}'  pass  into  a  double  series. 

Interradial  area  more  or  less  depressed,  deeper  between  the 
arm-bases,  in  consequence  of  which  the  radial  portions  of  the  calyx, 
and  especiallj^  the  secondary  radials,  are  somewhat  lobed,  which 
is  characteristic  of  this  genus,  and  which  distinguishes  it  readily 
from  the  related  form  PateUiocrinus.  First  interradial  large, 
hexagonal,  supporting  two  small  plates  in  thft  second  series. 
Anal  area  slightly  wider,  and  with  three  plates  in  place  of  two  in 
the  second  range. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — 3Iacrostylocrinus  is  confined  to  the 
Niagara  group  of  America. 

The  following  species  are  known  : 

*IS64.  Macrostylocrinus  Meeki  Lyon.  (Actinocr.  Meeki).    Proc.  Acad,  Nat.  Sci. 

Phila.,  p.  411,  PI.  4,  figs.  4  a  b.     Niagara  gr.     Jefferson  Co.,  Ky. 
Syn.  Cyathocr.  fasciatus  Hall.     28th  Rep.  New  York  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.  (1st 

ed.),  PI.  13,  figs.  5  and  6 ;  Wachsm.  and  Spr.     Revision  i,  p.  85.     AValdron, 

Ind. 
Syn.  Macrostylocrinus  fasciatus  Hall.     lb.  (2d  edit.),  p.  130. 
1852.  Macrostylocr.  ornatus  Hall  (Type  of  the  genus).     Paleont.,  New  York,  ii,  p. 

204,  PI.  46,  figs.  4  a-g.     Niagara  gr.     Lockport,  N.  Y. 
1863.  Macrostylocr.  Striatus  Hall.     Trans.  Albany  Inst.,  iv,  p.  207;  also  20th  Rep. 

New   York   St.    Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  1867,  p.  327,  PI.  10,  fig.  7.     Niagara  gr. 

Waldron,  Ind.,  and  Racine,  Wis. 


2'78  PllOCEEDINGS    OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

iiuh<r  mis  CENTROCRINUS  Waclism.  and  Spr. 

This  genus  sliould  not  be  confounded  with  Centrocrinus  Austin,' 
wliich  in  1843,  was  proposed  to  distinguish  a  certain  form  of 
Platijcrinus,  but  based  altogether  upon  conjecture  and  incorrect 
observation. 

The  generic  form  now  suggested  embraces  at  present  only  two 
species,  Lyon's  Actinocrinus  pentaspinus  and  his  A.  muUicoryius, 
of  which  we  propose  the  former  as  the  type.  The  two  differ  from 
Actinocrinus  essentially  in  the  construction  of  the  anal  area, 
having  no  plate  in  line  with  the  first  radials.  The  nearest  allied 
genus,  and  under  wliich  we  place  it  subgenerically,  is  Macrostylo- 
crinus,  but  this  has  three  anal  plates  in  the  second  series,  in  place 
of  two,  while  in  Centrocrinus  the  posterior  side  is  not  in  any  way 
distinct  from  the  other  four.  The  spiniferous  form  of  some  of 
the  body  plates  has  suggested  the  name. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Calyx  subcylindrical ;  s^anmetry  perfect!}' 
pentahedral;  the  principal  plates  produced  into  spines  ;  the  calyx 
in  its  lower  portions  almost  resembling  Platycrinus,  owing  to  the 
form  and  size  of  basals  and  first  radials. 

Basal  disk  large,  pentagonal,  composed  of  three  unequal  pieces, 
two  of  them  pentangular,  and  twice  the  size  of  the  third,  whicli 
is  quadrangular. 

Primary  radials  3X5;  the  first  very  large  and  spiniferous  ; 
second  radials  much  smaller  than  the  first,  short  and  quadrangular 
or  nearly  so ;  third  radials  pentangular,  sometimes  triangular,  as 
short  as — and  occasionally  narrower — than  the  second.  Secondary 
radials  1X10,  bent  abruptly  outwai'd  and  supporting  the  arms. 
There  are,  so  far  as  known,  two  arms  to  each  ray. 

Interradials  four  to  five  ;  the  first  large  and  frequentl}'  spinifer- 
ous, deeply  inserted  between  the  first  radials,  in  which  the  upper 
lateral  margins  are  exceptionally  long ;  second  series  composed 
of  two  plates,  much  smaller  than  the  first ;  third  series  consisting 
of  one  or  two  plates,  located  between  the  arm  bases.  Anal  area 
not  distinct.     Construction  of  vault  and  arms  unknown. 

Column  round,  central  canal  round. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Only  known  from  the  Devonian  of 
America. 

'  Mon.  Rec.  and  Foss.  Crin.  ,p.  6,  proposed  for  species  of  Platycrinus 
"with  central  valvate  unobtrusive  mouths,  or  mouths  capable  of  being 
withdrawn  into  the  visceral  cup." 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  279 

*1S60.  Centrocr.  multicornus  Lyon  (Actinocr.  multicoraus).  Trans.  Amer.  Philos. 
Soc,  vol.  13,  p.  455,  PI.  27,  fig.  e ;  also  Hall,  Paleont.  N.  Y.,  vol.  v,  Pt.  ii, 
p.  6,  (advance  sheets  1878).     Nucleocrinus  bed.     Falls  of  the  Ohio. 

*1860.  Centrocr.  pentaspiaus  Lyon  (Actinocr.  pentaspinus).  Type  of  the  sub- 
genus. Trans.  Amer.  Philos.  Soc.,  vol.  13,  p.  453,  PI.  27,  figs,  d,  d  1 ;  also 
Hall,  Paleont.  N.  Y,,  vol.  v,  Pt.  ii,  p.  6,  (advance  sheet).  Nucleocrinus  bed. 
Falls  of  the  Ohio. 

&.  Agaricocrinites. 

5.  CARPOCRINUS  Miiller. 

(Amend.  Wachsm.  and  Spr.) 

1841.  Miiller.     Monatsb.  Berl.  Akad.  Wissenscli.,  i,  p.  208. 
1855.  Miiller.     Verhandl.  naturh.  Verein,  xii,  p.  19. 
1855.  F.  Roemer.    Lethsea  Geogn.  (Ausg.  3),  p.  237. 
1857.  Pictet.     Traite  de  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  328. 
1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  d.  Palajont,  i,  p.  19. 

Syn.  Plwenicocrimis  Aust.  1843,  Ann.  and  Mag.  ISTat.  Hist.,  xi,  p.  205. 

Syn.  Abracrinus  D'Orb.  1850,  Prodr.  de  Paleont.,  i,  p.  47.  (Not  Ibid, 
p.  156)  ;  also  Course  elem.  de  Paleont.,  ii,  p.  144. 

Syn.  Habrocrinus  Angelin,  1878,  Iconog.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  3. 

Syn.  Piojiocrinus  Angelin.     Ibid.,  p.  4. 

Angelin  and  the  two  Austins,  in  proposing  their  genera  Piono- 
crinus  and  Phoenicocrinus,  were  evidently  not  acquainted  with 
the  genus  Carpocrinus^  which  had  previously  been  described  by 
Miiller.  Under  Carjwcrinus,  Miiller  placed  Actinocr inus  simplex 
and  A.  exjyansus  Phill.,  but  as  the  two  species  represent  different 
generic  forms,  as  a  rule,  the  first  becomes  the  type  of  the 
genus,  and  G.  simj)lex  has  been  recognized  as  such  in  1855  b}' 
Roemer.  Neither  can  we  accept,  not  even  subgenericall}^  Habro- 
crinus, {Abracrinus)  D'Orbigny,  which  differs  from  Pionocrinus 
solel}'  in  having  a  few  more  interradial  plates.  Closely  allied  is 
also  Desmidocrinus  Angelin,  which,  however,  has  an  additional 
arm  to  each  ray,  with  slight  deviations  in  the  arm-structure. 
Whether  this  is  sufficient  for  a  separation  from  Garj^ocrinus,  we 
do  not  wish  to  decide,  but  it  should  clearl}^  be  no  more  than 
subgeneric. 

Pictet  places  Carpocrinus  with  Forbesiocrinus^  Taxocrinus^ 
Graphiocriims,  Lyriocrinus  and  ScypJwcrinus  under  the  Garpo- 
criniens;  while  D'Orbigny  and  Roemer  connect  it  with  the  C^^atho- 
crinidie.  Austin  combines  Phoenicocrinus  with  Divierocrinus 
and  Tetramerocrinus  under  his  Merocrinidje. 


280  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

Zittel  unites  Hahrocrinus,  Carpocrinus,  Besmidocrinus  aiul 
Leptocrinus  under  Carpocrinidoe. 

The  pinnules  in  this  genus  are  exceedingly  interesting.  In 
some  of  the  species  (compare  Angelin's  figures),  we  find  toward 
the  interradial  side  the  proximal  pinnule  much  larger.  It  is  given 
off  from  a  second  secondary  radial,  which  is  converted  into  a  regular 
bifurcating  plate  ;  it  stands  more  erect  than  the  other  pinnules, 
its  lower  portions  embraced  within  the  bod}'  walls,  its  upper  and 
free  parts  following  the  direction  of  the  arms.  The  construction 
is  such  that  we  cannot  doubt  these  large  pinnules  form  a  link 
between  arms  and  pinnules,  which  finally  in  Desmidocrinua  became 
transformed  into  regular  arms. 

Generic  Diagnoais. — General  form  oblong  ;  calyx  short,  cj'athi- 
form  ;  symmetry'-  bilateral 

Basals  three,  short ;  two  of  them  equal,  the  third  smaller  by 
one-balf.  Primary  radials  3X5;  the  first  larger  than  the  other 
two ;  the  second  short,  qiiadrangular  or  hexagonal ;  the  third 
axillary  giving  off  two,  rarely  3  X  10  secondary  radials.  The 
latter  are  rounded  at  the  dorsal  side,  in  form  almost  resembling 
arm-joints,  but  larger,  especially  higher.  The  secondary  radials 
support  directly  the  arms,  of  which  there  are  ten  to  the  entire 
individual,  and  these  remain  simple  throughout. 

The  arms  are  long,  heav}',  cylindrical,  tapering  at  their  tips, 
and  are  composed  of  short  single  joints,  with  parallel  sutures. 
Pinnules  long,  thread-like,  composed  of  a  great  number  of  joints. 

Interradials  from  two  to  three  in  two  series  ;  the  first  plate 
•large,  the  upper  series  generally  very  small  and  indistinct.  Some 
of  the  larger  species  have  a  third  series  with  their  plates  decreas- 
ing in  size  upward. 

Anal  area  considerably  wider,  and  composed  of  many  more 
plates.  The  first  anal  plate  in  line  with  the  first  radials,  and  fully 
as  large  and  even  larger.  There  are  three  plates  in  the  second 
series,  somewhat  smaller  than  those  of  the  first,  and  generally 
three  in  each  succeeding  series,  all  arranged  in  longitudinal  rows. 

Interaxillary  plates  from  none  in  the  very  small  species,  to  one 
or  three  in  larger  ones. 

Vault  only  partly  known.  In  Carpoci'inus  ornatus  (Iconogr. 
Crin.,  PI.  27,  fig  5)  it  seems  to  have  been  composed  of  a  large 
number  of  plates,  among  which  the  apical  dome  plates  are  easily 
distinguished  by  their  larger  size  :    radial  portions  covered  by 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  281 

two  rows  of  low  transversed  pieces  ;  interpalmar  fields  paved  by 
somewhat  larger  and  elongate  plates. 

Column  cylindrical,  strong. 

Caj'pocrinus  differs  from  all  preceding  genera  in  having  a 
spherical  anal  plate  in  line  with  the  first  radials,  and  from  Agari- 
cocrinus  in  having  single  arm  joints. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — From  the  Upper  Silurian  of  England 
and  Sweden. 

We  place  here  the  following  species  : 

*1S78.  Carpocrinus  afi&nis  Angelin  (Pionocr.  affinis.)     leonogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  5, 

PI.  22,  fig.  7.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1878.  Carpocr.  annulatus  Angel.  (Habrocr.  annulatus.)     leonogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  4, 

PI.  22,  fig.  15.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1878.  Carpocr.  cariosolus  Angel.  (Habrocr.  cariosolus.)     leonogr.  Crin.  Suec.,  p. 

3,  PI.  3,  figs.  7,  7  a.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1878.  Carpocr.  comptus  Angel.  (Habrocr.  comptus.)     leonogr.  Crin.  Sixec.,  p.  4, 

PI.  22,  fig.  13.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1878.  Carpocr,   decadactylus   Angel.   (Habrocr.  decadactylus.)      leonogr.   Crin. 

Suec.,  p.  4,  PI.  15,  figs.  18,  19.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1878.  Carpocr.  elongatulus  Angel.  (Pionocr.  elongatulus.)     leonogr.  Crin.  Suec, 

p.  5,  PI.  22,  figs.  16,  17.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
«1878.  Carpocr.  farctus  Angel.  (Pionocr.  farctus.)     leonogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  5,  PI. 

16,  fig.  23,  and  PI.  22,  figs.  5,  6.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1878.  Carpocr,  grandis  Angel.   (Habrocr.  grandis.)    leonogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  4,  PI. 

26,  fig.  10.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1878.  Carpocr.  granulatus  Angel.  (Habrocr.  granulatus.)     leonogr.  Crin.  Suec, 

p.  4,  PI.  19,  figs.  13,  13  a.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1878.  Carpocr.  laevis  Angel.    (Habrocr.  Isevis  )    leonogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  4,  PI.  l9, 

figs.  21,  a,  b.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1878.  Carpocr.  longimanus  Angel.  (Harbrocr.  longimanus.)   leonogr.  Crin.  Suec, 

p.  4,  PI.  22,  figs.  11, 12.     Upper  Silur.    Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1878.  Carpocr.  ornatissimus  Angelin.    (Habrocr.  ornatissimus.)     leonogr.  Crin. 

Suec,  p.  4,  PI.  6,  fig.  9.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*187S.  Carpocr.  ornatus  Angel.    (Habrocr.  ornatus.)   leonogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  4,  PI. 

21,  figs.  19,  20  and  PI.  26,  figs.  11,  12  and  PI.  27,  fig.  5.    Upper  Silur.    Goth- 
land, Sweden. 
Figs.  12  a,  b,  on  PI.  26,  represent  the  convoluted  digestive  organ  of  this  species. 

Its  lateral  sides  are  enclosed  by  a  delicate  intervisceral  network  of  pentan- 
gular outline.       A  similar  plexus   has  been  observed  in  Subcarboniferous 

genera,  but  always  parallel  with  the  walls  of  the  body. 
*1879.  Carpocr.  pinnulatus  Angel.  (Habrocr.  pinnulatus.)     leonogr.  Crin.  Suec, 

p.  4,  PI.  22,  fig.  14.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
This  species  difi"ers  from  the  typical  form  by  having  in  two  rays  an  additional 

arm. 
*1878.  Carpocr.  pulcbellus  Angel.    (Pionocr.  pulcbellus.)    leonogr.  Crin.  Suec, 

p.  5,  pi.  3,  figs.  9,  9  a.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1878.  Carpocr.  robustus  Angel.     (Habrocr.  robustus.)     leonogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  4, 

pi.  22,  fig.  19.     Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 


282  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

1839.  Carpocr.  simplex  Phill.  (Actinocr,  simplex.)  Apud  Murchison,  Silur.  Syst., 
p.  673,  I'l.  18,  fig.  8  ;  Austin,  1843,  Phoenicocrinites  simplex,  Ann.  and 
Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  xi,  p.  2C5;  D'Oriiigny,  IS.")!),  Abracrinus  simplex,  Troclr. 
Paleont.,  i,  p.  47;  Roemer,  1855.  Carpocrinus  simplex,  Letluca  (iuogn  , 
(Ausg.  3),  p.  237;  Salter,  1870,  Taxocr.  simplex,  Cat.  Geol.  Mus.  Canibr., 
p.  125;  Angolin,  1878,  Pionocr.  simplex,  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  5,  pi.  15, 
15  a.  Dudley,  England  and  Gothland,  Sweden. 
Syii.  (?)  Actinocr.  tesseracontadactylus,  Hisinger,  1837,  (not  Goklf.),  Lethaea 
Suecia,  p.  90,  PI.  35,  figs.  4,  a-b;  D'Orbigny,  1850.  Ichthyocr.  tesseracon- 
tadactylus, Prodr.  Paleont.  i,  p.  46;  Salter,  1847,  Cyathocr.  tesseraconta- 
dactylus, Murchison's  Siluria,  (ed.  iv),  PI.  14,  fig.  4.  (We  follow  Angelin  in 
placing  this  species  a  synonym  under  Carpocrinus  simplex.) 

*1878.  Carpocr.  tenuis  Angel.    (Habrocr.  tenuis,)     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  4,  PI. 
26,  figs,  9,  9  a.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

*1878.  Carpocr.  umbonatus  Angel.    (Habrocr.  umbonatus.)     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec, 
p.  4,  PI.  26,  figs  13,  13  a.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

Subgenus  DESMIDOCRINUS  Angelin. 
1878.  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Ci-in.  Suec,  p.  5. 

General  form  oblong  to  subovoid.  Calyx  short,  saucer-  or  cup- 
shaped  ;  sj^mmetry  bilateral. 

Basals  three,  small,  scarcely  projecting  laterall}'.  Radials 
3x5;  the  first  large,  polygonal ;  the  second  short,  linear ;  the 
third  transverse,  pentagonal.  Secondary  radials  2x10,  one  side 
of  each  ray  bifurcating  again  giving  off  two  arms,  the  other  a 
single  one. 

In  D.  jyenfadactylus  both  halves  branch  again,  thus  making 
three  arms  to  one  half,  and  two  arms  to  the  other  half  division,  or 
five  arms  to  the  ray,  and  twent^'-five  to  the  individual. 

Arms  long,  heavy,  cylindrical,  composed  of  verj^  short  joints, 
which  sometimes  become  wedge-form  and  almost  interlocking. 
Pinnules  very  long,  largely  articulated. 

Interradial  and  anal  plates  not  differing  from  Carpocrinus. 

Column  strong,  round,  composed  of  alternate  large  and  smaller 
joints  ;  central  perforation  pentagonal. 

The  subgenus  Desrtiidocrinus  differs  from  the  tj'pical  form  in 
the  greater  number  of  arms,  and  that  these  are  given  off  unequally 
from  the  ray,  also  in  having  somewhat  longer  arms  with  shorter 
joints. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — Only  found  in  the  Upper  Silurian  of 
Europe.     Angelin  refers  to  it  the  following  species  : 

1878.  Desmidocrinus  heterodactylus  Angel.     Iconogr.  Crin  Suec,  p.  5.  PI.  16,  16  a. 
Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES    OF    PHILADELPHIA.  283 

187S.  Desmidocr.  macrodactylus  Angel.     leonogr.  Grin.  Suec,  p.  5,  PI.  16,  figs.  20, 

21.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
1S7S.  Desmidocr.    pentadactylus    Angel.     leonogr.   Crin.  Suec.,  p.  5,  PI.  16,  figs. 

15,  22.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
1S7S.  Desmidocr.  tridactylus  Angel.     leonogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  5,  PI.  16,  figs.  4,  4  a. 

Gothland,  Sweden.     (Probably  identical  with  D.  macrodaetylns.) 


6.  AGAEICOCRINUS  Troost. 

1850.  Troost.     List.  Crin.  Tenn.  (Proc.  Amer.  Association), 

1858.  Hall  (Subgenus  of  Actinocr.).     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  Pt.  ii,  p.  560. 

1866.  Shumard  (Subg.  of  Actinocr.).     Cat.  Pal.  Foss.,  Pt.  i,  p.  350. 

1873.  Meek  and  Worthen.     Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p  397. 

1878.  Wachsm.  and  Spr.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Pbila.,  p.  350. 

Syn.  Amphoracrinus  Roemer  (not  Austin),  1855.      Letb.    Geogn. 
(Ausg.  3),  p.  250. 

Syn.  Amphoraci'inus  Hall   (not  Austin),   1861.     Bost.  Jour.   Nat. 
Hist.,  p.,  280. 

Syn.  Actinocrinua  Hall  (in  part),  1858.     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  Pt.  ii. 

Some  authors  haA'e  confounded  Agaricocrinus  with  Amphora- 
crinus Austin,  with  which  it  agrees  in  the  depressed  form  of  the 
cal3-x  and  in  the  elevated  dome,  but  while  in  Agaricocrinus  the 
calj'x  or  its  equivalent  extends  to  the  secondary  radials,  that  of 
Amphoracrinus  is  properl}'  composed  of  few  plates,  all  the  upper 
radials,  from  the  third  primary  up,  being  parts  of  free  rays. 
Amphoracrinus  differs  also  in  the  form  of  the  dome,  in  the  spini- 
ferous  proximal  vault  pieces,  in  having  an  anal  tube,  in  the  surface 
ornamentation,  and  in  the  arms. 

Hall,  who  first  defined  Troost's  genus  Agaricocrinus.^  placed  it 
subgenerically  under  ActinoaHnus,  and  referred  to  it  exclusively 
species  with  a  broadl}'  truncate  or  concave  dorsal  side,  leaving  all 
similar  t3'pes  with  a  convex  calyx  under  Actinocrinus.  This  can- 
not be  sustained,  as  we  find  among  the  species  of  this  group  all 
intermediate  gradations  in  this  feature,  while  at  the  same  time  they 
agree  most  remarkably  in  all  other  important  characters.  The 
structure  of  Agaricocrinus  is  so  marked  that  we  do  not  hesitate 
to  rank  it  as  a  distinct  genus.  The  differences  in  the  form  of  the 
calyx  are  modifications  in  geological  succession.  Species  with 
convex  sides  are  confined  to  the  Waverl}'  group  and  to  the  Bur- 
lington limestone  ;  species  from  the  Upper  Burlington  are  truncate 
below,  or  slightly  convex,  rarely  concave ;  while  the  Keokuk 
species,  without  exception,  are  deeply  concave  in  the  basal  regions. 

We   place   under   Agaricocrinus^  subgenericall}",  AlloprosaUo- 


284  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

cinnus  Lyon  and  Casseclay,  which  agrees  with  the  latter  in  all 
essential  points,  but  differs  in  having  an  anal  tube  in  place  of  an 
opening  directly  through  the  vault. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — General  form  of  the  body  pyramidal,  wider 
than  high;  symmetry  decidedly  bilateral;  plates  without  surface 
ornamentation.  The  form  of  the  apical  side  varies  from  a  shallow 
basin  to  an  inverted  cup,  and  hence  from  convex  to  deeply  con- 
cave ;  the  concavity  sometimes  involving  the  third  primar}'  and 
even  partly  the  secondar}^  radials.  Dome  surpassing  the  calyx  in 
height,  composed  of  large  nodose  or  tuberculous  plates,  which  are 
surrounded  by  smaller  scarcely  convex  pieces. 

Basal  disk  in  form  of  a  hexagon  with  nearly  straight  sides, 
composed  of  three  equal  plates,  ver^^  small,  frequently  hidden 
from  view  by  the  column,  spread  out  horizontally,  and  forming  a 
small  concavit3^  Primary  radials  3X5;  the  first  comparatively 
small,  hexagonal,  the  upper  lateral  sides  shorter  than  the  other 
sides ;  second  radials  quadrangular  or  nearly  so,  smaller  than  the 
first,  transversely  arranged ;  third  pentagonal,  wider  than  high, 
larger  than  either  of  the  others.  The  latter  support  upon  each  of 
their  upper  sloping  faces  a  wide  but  short  secondary  radial,  which 
is  succeeded  by  still  shorter  plates  which  gradually  interlock  and 
become  regular  arm  plates.  All  plates  above  th3  third  radials 
project  at  nearh''  right  angles  to  the  vertical  axis,  their  faces 
directed  laterally.  This  gives  to  the  a'pical  side,  when  viewed 
from  the  column,  a  pentalobate  outline,  and  the  latter  plates  appear 
as  parts  of  the  free  rays.  The  plates,  however,  are  wedge-shaped, 
knife-like  toward  the  inner  side,  and  the  ambulacral  passages 
within  the  body  communicate  directly  with  the  arm  furrows.  In 
species  with  tertiary  radials,  and  consequently  a  larger  number  of 
arms,  the  last  bifurcation  takes  place  upon  the  first  secondary 
radials,  but  generally  only  upon  one  side  and  in  the  posterior 
rays.  There  seems  to  be  one  or  two  undescribed  species  in  which 
the  postero-lateral  rays  have  normally  four  arms.  We  have  in  our 
possession  a  specimen  from  Canton,  Ind.,  in  which  also  the  antero- 
lateral rays  have  an  additional  arm. 

Arms  robust,  long,  simple,  gradually  tapering  and  terminating 
in  a  sharp  point.  They  are  constructed  of  two  rows  of  pieces,  which 
are  alternatel}^  arranged,  very  wide,  exceedingly  short  and  linear. 
Arm  furrows  wide  but  shallow  ;  pinnules  slender,  thread-like,  com- 
posed of  cylindrical  joints  covering  the  arm  furrows  like  a  roof. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF  PHILADELPHIA.  285 

Interradials  three,  elongate ;  the  first  generallj^  the  largest 
phite  of  the  calyx,  much  narrower  than  wide,  frequently  extend- 
ing in  length  to  the  secondary  radials,  Tlie  two  plates  in  the 
second  series  are  often  as  long  as  the  first,  but  rarely'  of  more  than 
half  the  width,  and  hence  exceedingly  narrow;  they  rest  mainly 
on  the  outer  edges  of  the  secondary'-  radials,  and  curving  upward 
rise  to  the  level  of  the  top  of  the  arm  bases. 

First  anal  plate  higher  than  the  first  radials,  sustaining  upon  its 
upper  truncate  edge  a  large  plate,  and  on  its  lateral  oblique  sides 
l^artially  supporting  two  plates  which  extend  upwards,  adjoining 
the  secondary  radials ;  these  in  turn  are  followed  by  a  large  number 
of  small  plates,  which  are  more  properly  ranked  as  vault  pieces. 

Dome  high,  more  or  less  p3^ramidal,  somewhat  inflated  toward 
the  posterior  side.  Apical  dome  plates  very  large  and  prominent, 
and  with  rare  exceptions  tuberculiform.  The  central  piece  is 
the  largest  plate  of  the  entire  body;  the  six  proximal  plates 
somewhat  smaller,  frequently  separated  from  the  central  piece 
by  a  circlet  of  small  irregular  plates,  and  in  old  specimens  and 
ver}'  large  species,  occasionallj^  isolated  laterally.  First  radial 
dome  plates  very  large,  the  two  of  the  second  order  small.  In 
raj's  with  three  arms,  one  platp  of  the  latter  is  large  and  suc- 
ceeded by  two  small  ones  in  a  third  range.  Posterior  side  of  the 
dome  composed  of  small  plates,  protruding  in  a  rounded  ridge  with 
a  depression  on  either  side ;  anal  aperture  at  the  upper  part  of 
the  vault,  directed  laterall}^ 

Column  round,  consisting  of  joints  with  rounded  margins  and 
intermediate  thinner  joints. 

Geological  Position,  etc — Agaricocrinus  is  a  strictly  Subcar- 
boniferous  genus,  and  is  only  found  in  America.  It  first  appears 
in  the  Waverlj^  group,  attains  its  maximum  in  the  Upper  Bur- 
lington, and  becomes  extinct  at  the  end  of  the  Keokuk  period, 
where  it  attains  enormous  dimensions. 

We  arrange  under  it  the  following  species : — 

1855.  Agaricocrinus  americanus  Roemer  (Amphoracr.  americanus).  Lethaea. 
Geogn.  (Ausg.  3),  p.  250,  PL  4^,  figs.  15,  a,  b;  Shumard,  1866,  Agaricocr. 
americanus,  Cat.  Pal.  Foss.  N.  Amer.,  pt.  i,  p.  351;  Wachsm.  and  Spr., 
1878,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  239. 
This  species  is  very  variable,  and  has  a  great  vertical  range,  as  well  as  a  wide 
geographical  distribution,  being  found  from  the  upper  portion  of  the  Upper 
Burlington  to  the  middle  part  of  the  Keokuk  limestone,  and  it  occurs  in 
rocks  of  that  age  in  Iowa,  Indiana,  Illinois,  Missouri,  Kentucky  and 
Tennessee. 


286  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

%».  Agaricocr.  tuberosus  Troost,  1850  (catalogue  name);  Hall,  1858,  (Jcol. 

Rep.  Iowa,  i,  j)t.  ii,  j).  617. 
S>/ii.  Agaricocr.  bullatus  Hall.     1858,  fieol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  502,  PL  9, 

figs.  11,  a,  b,  e. 
Si/ii.  Agaricocr.  (Amphoracr.)  excavatus  Ilall.    Desc.  New  Spec.  Crin.,  p.  3  ; 

also  Bost.  Joiirn.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  282. 
S^n.  Agaricocr.  nodosus  Meek  and  Worthcn.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 

p.  167  ;  also  Geol.  Rep.  Illinois,  vol.  v,  p.  387,  PI.  10,  fig.  7. 
*1S58.  Agaricocr.  brevis  Hall  (Actinocr.  brevis).    Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  667, 

PI.  10,  figs.  3,  a,  b.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Sijn.  Actinocr.  corniculus  Hall.     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  1,  pt.  ii,  p.  566,  PI.  10,  figs. 

1,  a,  b,  c. 
*1860.  Agaricocr.  convexus  Hall  (Agaricocr.  pentagonus  (var.)  convexus).   Supp. 

Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  58.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
This  form  differs  from  A.  pentagonus  considerably,  and  proves  to  be  a  good 

species. 
*1864.  Agaricocr.  oris   Hall  (Actinocr.  eris).     17th  Rep.  N.  York  St.  Cab.  Nat. 

Hist.,  p.  53;  also  Geol.  Rep.  Ohio  Paleont.,  ii,  p.  164,  PI.  11,  figs.  9,  10. 

Waverly  gr.     Richfield,  Ohio.     A  variety  of  Agaricocr.  helice. 
*1861.  Agaricocr.  fiscellus  Hall.     (Actinocr.  fiscellus).     Desc.  New  Pal.  Crin.,  p. 

2  ;    also  Bost.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  272.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Bur- 
lington, Iowa. 
Possibly  a  mere  variety  of  A.  brevis,  having  an  additional  arm  in  the  postero- 
lateral rays. 

1860.  Agaricocr.  geometricus  Hall.     Suppl.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  56.     Upper  Bur- 

lington limest.     Quincy,   111. 

1861.  Agaricocr.  gracilis  Meek  and  Worthen.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  135. 

Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
*1S64.  Agaricocr.  helice  Hall  (Actinocr.  helice).     17th  Rep.  N.  York  St.  Cab.  Nat. 

Hist.,  p.  53;  also  Geol.  Rep.    Ohio,  Paleont.,  ii,  p.  163,  PI.  11,  figs.  5-8. 

Waverly  gr.     Richfield,  Ohio. 
1861.  Agaricocr.  inflatus  Hall  (Agaricocr. — Amphoracr. — inflatus,  not  Amphoracr. 

inflatus  Hall).     Descr.  New  Pal.  Crin.,  p.  4;  also  Bost.  Journ.  Nat  Hist., 

p.  284.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1861.  Agaricocr.  ornotrema  Hall  (Agaricocr. — Amphoracr. — ornotrema).     Desc. 

New  Spec.  Crin.,  p.  3.      Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Si/n.  Agaricocr. — Amphoracr. — bellatrema  Hall.    Bost.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist., 

1861,  p.  281. 

1860.  Agaricocr.  pentagonus  Hall.     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  57.     Upper  Burling- 

ton limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1861.  Agaricocr.  planoconvexus  Hall  (Agaricocr. — Amphoracr. — planoconvexus). 

Desc.  New  Spec.  Pal.  Crin.,  p.  3;  also  Bost.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  280.     Lower 

Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
■•■■1858.  Agaricocr.  pyramidatus  Hall  (Actinocr.  pyramidatus).     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i, 

pt.  ii,  p.  665.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  Agaricocr,  (Amphoracr.)  corrugatus  Hall.    1861,  Desc.  New  Spec.  Pal. 

Crin.,  p.  4;  also  Bost.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  283.     (Hall  described  here  a  more 

mature  specimen). 
1881.  Agaricocr.  Springeri  White.    Indiana  Rep.  for  1881  (now  in  press).     Keokuk 

limestone.     Crawfordsville,  Ind. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  287 

185S.  Agaricocr.  stellatus  Hall.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  oB-t.  Upper  Burling- 
ton limest. — Burlington,  Iowa. 

1850.  Agaricocr.  Whitfieldi  Troost.  List.  Crin.  Tenn. ;  Hall,  1858,  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i, 
pt.  ii,  p.  621;  Supp.  Iowa,  Rep.  I860,  PL  .3,  fig.  5 ;  Meek  and  AVorthen,  Geol. 
Rep.  111.,  vol.  V,  p.  499,  PI.  12,  fig.  1,  and  PI.  15,  fig.  8.  Keokuk  limest. 
Green  Co.,  111. 

1858.  Agaricocr.  Wortheni  Hall.  Gtol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  619,  PJ.  14,  fig.  1; 
Wachsm.  and  Spr.,  1878,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  240.  Upper  por- 
tions of  Keokuk  limest.     Iowa,  Illinois  and  Missouri. 


Subgenus  ALLOPROSALLOCRINUS  Lyon  and  Cass. 

1860.  Lyon  and  Casseday.     Am.  Acad.  Arts  and  Sci.,  vol.  v,  p.  29. 
1866.  Shumard.     Cat.  Pal.  Foss,  N.  Amer.,  pt.  i.  p.  353. 
1873,  Meek  and  Worth,  (in  part).     Geol.  Rep.  111.,  vol.  v,  p.  368, 
1879.  Zittel.     Handbuch  der  Palaiontologie,  i,  p.  370.      (Not  Meek  and 
Worth.,  1865,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  164). 
Syn.  Conocrinus  Troost,  1850.     List  of  Crin.  Tenn.  (not  defined), 

L^^on  and  Casseda}"  in  defining  the  genus  Alloprosallocrinus 
placed  under  it  two  species :  their  type  A.  conicus  and  A.  dejjressus^ 
the  latter  probably  an  Agaricocrinus.  With  this  genus  Allopro- 
sallocrinus has  close  affinities  ;  it  differs,  however,  in  having  an 
almost  central  anal  tube  and  not  a  lateral  opening  through  the 
vault.  The  tube  which  extends  from  an  elevated  tuberculous  dome, 
gives  to  A.  conicus  a  superficial  resemblance  to  some  of  the  later 
forms  of  Batocrinus,  and  this  induced  Meek  and  Worthen  to  place 
Lj^on's  genus  a  mere  subgenus  under  the  other. 

Meek  and  Worthen  added  a  new  species,  but  we  doubt  from 
their  description  of  A.  euconus,  if  they  correctl}'  identified  Lj'on's 
typical  form,  or  the}-  would  have  found  the  two  species  to  be,  super- 
ficiall}'  at  least,  veiy  distinct.  The  foi'm  of  the  plates  in  the  calyx, 
and  particularly-  of  those  near  the  arm  regions,  is  in  Meek  and 
Worthen's  species  like  in  Batocrinus,  hut  in  A.  conicus  almost 
identical  with  Agaricocrinus.  We  refer  the  former  to  Batocrinus, 
and  place  Alloprosallocrinus  subgenericallj'  under  Agaricocrinus. 
Lyon  and  Cassedaj'  describe  the  primarj'  radials  as  being  com- 
posed of  only  2X5  pieces.  This  is  sometimes  abnormall}-  the 
case,  but  there  are  always  as  a  rule  three  plates  in  each  ray,  of 
which  the  second  are  exceedingly  short,  linear  and  easil}-  over- 
looked. 

Amended  Diagnosis. — General  form  turbinate  ;  calj'^x  truncate, 
slightl}'  convex.  Basals  and  primarj^  radials  like  those  of 
Agaricocrinus .^^  with  2  X  10  narrow  secondary  radials  succeeding 


288  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

them ;  the  iiitermdial  and  anal  plates  also  similar  in  their  form 
and  arrangement ;  bnt  the  first  interradial  and  the  second  series 
of  anal  plates  extend  to  the  top  of  the  tertiary  radials,  and  support 
directly  the  vault  pieces. 

Dome  elevated,  conical,  extended  into  a  large,  almost  central 
anal  tube  ;  vault  pieces  more  or  less  nodose,  the  apical  plates 
somewhat  larger,  hut  not  so  distinct  as  in  Agaricocrinus^  and 
pushed  more  towards  the  anterior  side.  Length  of  anal  tube 
unknown. 

Arms  large,  simple  so  far  as  known  ;  two  arms  from  each  ray, 
with  sometimes  three  on  one  or  both  posterior  raj^s. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — The  only  known  species  occurs  in  the 
Warsaw  limestone. 

I860.  Alloprosallocrinus  conicus  Lyon  and  Cass.  (type).  Proc.  Am.  Acad.  Arts 
and  Sci.,  vol.  v,  p.  29.  Shumard,  1866,  AUoprosallocr.  (subg.  of  Actinocr.) 
conicus,  Cat.  Pal.  Foss.,  pt.  1,  p.  352.  Warsaw  limest.  Hardin  and  Allen 
Cos.,  Ky. 

c.  Melocrinites. 
7.  MARIACRINUS  Hall. 
(Revised  Iby  Wachsm.  and  Spr.) 
1859.  Hall.     Paleont.  New  York,  vol.  iii,  p.  104. 

Mariac7nnus  in  its  original  form,  with  M.  nobilissimus,  M.  pauci- 
dactylus  and  M.  p/achidactylus  Hall  as  types,  were  shown  by 
Schultze,  Mon.  Echin.  Eifel.  Kalk.,  p.  61,  to  be  identical  with 
Melocrinus  Goldfuss.  This  is  undoubtedly  correct  with  regard 
to  those  species,  but  Hall  described  two  other  species,  M.  plumosus 
and  M.  ramosus,  which  in  their  arm-structure  differ  so  essentially 
from  the  former,  that  we  think  it  proper  to  separate  them  and 
reconstruct  the  genus  Mariacrinus  with  M.  plumosus  as  the  type. 
To  these  two  species  we  add  Melocrinus  angustatus  Angl.,  and 
Glyptocrinus  Carleyi  Hall,  which  latter  we  find  to  have  four 
basal  plates  instead  of  five,  and  no  underbasals. 

The  genus  Mariacrinus^  as  we  propose  to  define  it,  includes 
only  species  in  which  the  two  main  divisions  of  the  ray  are  longi- 
tudinally separated,  forming  two  free  and  equal  parts,  contrary  to 
Melocrinus^  in  which  the  main  branches  are  laterally  connected. 
Hall  already  noticed  this  peculiarity  in  the  arm-structure  or 
Melocrinus  plumosus,  and  he  very  correctly  homologized  the  two 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PinLADELPHIA.  289 

inner  divisions  of  the  ray,  which  give  off  exclusively  the  branches, 
with  the  double-jointed  brachial  extensions  in  the  ray  of  M.  pachi- 
dactyhis,  and  the  outer  arms  of  the  former  with  the  branchlets  of 
the  latter. 

Zittel  takes  Mariacrinus  Hall  to  be  a  synonym  of  Ctenocrinus 
Bronn,  which  we  refer  to  Melocrinus,  following  Schultze.  Hall's 
M.  mac7^opetaIus  will  be  arranged  under  Gorymbocrinus  Augelin, 
and  among  the  Calyptocrinidte.  Its  arms  are  yet  unknown,  but 
the  arrangement  of  its  plates  agrees  perfectl}'  with  that  genus. 
Mariacrinus  stoloniferus  Hall  is  described  only  from  fragmentary 
columns. 

Amended  Diagnosis.— Yorm  of  calyx  obconical ;  general  aspect 
and  surface  ornamentation  similar  to  Glyptocrinus ;  radiating 
strife  passing  from  plate  to  plate  ;  radials  all  along  their  median 
line  elevated  into  high  rounded  ridges,  somewhat  resembling 
recumbent  arms ;  interradial  and  interaxillar3"  arese  large  and 
depressed. 

Basals  four,  small,  almost  of  equal  size,  the  one  facing  the  anal 
area  largest.  Primary"  radials  3  X  5,  nearl}-  as  wide  as  high, 
decreasing  in  size  upwards ;  the  first  set  joining  laterally  ;  the 
second  enclosing  the  first  anal  and  first  interradial  plates ;  the 
third  supporting  3X10  seeondar}'  radials,  which  are  generally  of 
uniform  size  and  vertically  separated  by  six  or  more  interaxillary 
plates.  The  secondarj^  radials  are  followed  hy  several  tertiary 
radials,  which  vary  in  number  with  the  age  of  the  individual — 
mature  specimens  having  five  and  even  more— all  placed  in  a 
direct  line  with  the  arras  and  somewhat  resembling  arm  plates. 

Arras  four  to  each  ray,  the  inner  ones  branching,  but  rarely 
more  than  once  or  twice,  the  outer  arms  remaining  simple  through- 
out, and  taking  a  somewhat  lateral  course.  The  inner  arms  are 
placed  close  together,  almost  parallel  with  each  other,  their 
branches  given  off  to  the  outer  sides  of  the  ra\'.  Both  inner  and 
outer  arms  are  composed  of  quadrangular  single  joints,  with 
straight,  sometimes  slightl}^  oblique  sutures  ;  the  arm-bearing 
joints  subpentagonal ;  main  arms  and  branches  fringed  with 
pinnules. 

Interradial  areae  large,  composed  of  a  great  number  of  plates ; 
the  first  wedged  in  between  the  upper  sloping  sides  of  two  first 
radials  and  two  second  radials  ;  second  interradial  series  con- 
sisting of  two  plates  ;  each  succeeding  series  of  two  or  three. 

20 


290  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

Anal  area  wider ;  the  first  plate  in  line  with  the  first  interra- 
dials,  perhaps  a  little  larger,  succeeded  by  three  plates  in  the 
second,  and  a  like  number  in  all  superior  series. 

Yault  only  known  in  M.  Garleyi,  where  it  is  low,  scarcel}' 
rising  beyond  tlie  horizon  of  the  calyx, 

Interradial  regions  depressed  and  excavated  between  the  raj'S, 
thereb}'  giving  to  the  form  a  pentalobate  outline. 

Radial  portions  prominent,  toward  the  margin  of  each  arm  dis- 
tinctly elcA'ated  and  formed  into  a  rounded  ridge. 

Arm  openings  arranged  along  the  margin  of  the  vault,  directed 
upwards.  The  vault  is  composed  of  very  minute,  irregular  pieces 
without  definite  arrangement,  even  the  apical  dome  plates  are 
obscure. 

Anal  aperture  excentric,  opening  directly  through  the  vault. 

Form  of  column  unknown ;  central  canal  subpentagonal  and 
of  more  than  medium  size. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Mariacrinus  is  confined  to  the  Upper 
Silurian,  and  occurs  in  Europe  and  America. 

We  recognize  the  following  species  . — 

*1S7S.  Mariacrinus  angustatus   Angclln.     (Melocr,  angustatus.)     Iconogr.  Crin. 

Suec,  p.  20,  P).  2fi,  fig.  22.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*18G3.  Mariacr.   Carleyi   Hall.     (Glyptocr.    Carleyi.)     Trans.  Albany  Inst.,  iv,  p. 

203,-    also  28th   Rep.   N.   Y.   St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  1875,  PI.  14,  figs.   7-10. 

Niagara  gr.     Waldron,  Ind. 
*1863.  Hariacr.   ob.COnicus   Hall.     (Melocr.   obconicus.)     Trans.  Albany  Inst.,  p. 

206.;  also  28th  Rep.  N.  York  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  1875,  PI.  14,  figs.  11-14. 

Niagara  gr.     Waldron,  Ind. 
1859.  Mariacr.  plumosus  Hall.     (Type  of  the  genu!=.)     Paleont.  N.  York,  iii,  p.  110 

PI.  3,  figs.  6-11.     Lower  Helderberg  gr.     Herkimer  Co.,  N.  Y. 
1859.  Mariacr,  ramosus  Hall.     Paleont.  N.  York,  iii,  p.  147,  PI.  2,  figs.  2,  3.    Lower 

Helderberg  gr.     Herkimer  Co.,  N.  Y. 

8.  TECHNOCRINUS  Hall. 

1859.  Hall.     Paleont.  New  York,  iii,  p.  139. 
1879.  Zittel.     Uandb.  der.  Palaeontologie,  i,.  p.  372. 

According  to  Hall,  Technocrinus  differs  from  3Iariacrinus 
only  in  the  arm  structure,  he  therefore  at  first  arranged  it  sub- 
generically  under  that  genus.  A  careful  comparison  of  Techno- 
crinus, not  only  with  that  section  of  Hall's  J/armcWnMs  which  we 
have  referred  to  Melocrimis,  but  also  with  Mai^iaciHuus  plumosus 
the  present  type,  has  convinced  us  that  Technocrinus  difters  in 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHrLADELPHIA.  291 

several  additional  points,  and  suftlciently,  so  to  make  it  an  inde- 
pendent genus. 

Technocrinus  differs  from  Mariacrinus,  as  now  amended,  in 
having  1  X  10  secondary  radials,  instead  of  3-4  X  10,  and  these 
connected  laterally  without  the,  interposition  of  interaxillaries ; 
in  having  the  arms  given  off  in  an  almost  continuous  ring  around 
the  body,  and  not  in  clusters  ;  in  the  straight  upward  direction  of 
all  the  arms,  contrary  to  3Iariacrinus  in  which  the  outer  arms  are 
given  off  obliquely,  and  only  the  inner  ones  run  parallel  with  each 
other  ;  in  that  its  arms  are  strong,  simple,  composed  of  single 
joints,  instead  of  being  slender,  branching  and  double  jointed.  It 
further  differs  from  Melocrinus  in  giving  off  the  arms  straight 
and  directly  from  the  body,  instead  of  obliquely  from  the  free  rays  ; 
in  the  absence  of  interaxillaries,  and  in  other  minor  characters. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Form  of  calyx  similar  to  Melocrinus. 
Symmetry,  except  in  the  basal  portions,  perfectly  pentahedral. 

Basals  four,  one  of  them  larger  and  placed  longitudinally  in 
line  with  the  primary  radials  of  one  of  the  lateral  rays.  Primary 
radials  3X5;  the  first  two  hexagonal ;  the  third  pentagonal  and 
supporting  1X10  large  secondary  radials,  which  are  all  axillarj^, 
each  supporting  2X2  tertiary  radials,  of  which  the  upper  part 
of  the  second  row  is  laterally  disconnected  and  free.  They  are 
succeeded  by  several  wedge-form  plates,  which  gradually  interlock, 
and  which  are  followed,  rather  abruptly,  by  two  series  of  narrow, . 
alternately  arranged  arm  plates.  The  arms  are  long,  simple, 
straight,  placed  around  the  body  in  a  continuous  ring,  and  at 
almost  equal  distances  from  each  other.  Pinnules  apparently 
thin,  thread-like,  their  sides  abutting. 

Interradials  three  to  four ;  the  first  resting  against  the  oblique 
upper  sides  of  the  first  radials,  and  between  the  second.  Anal 
area,  so  far  as  known,  not  distinct  from  the  other  interradial 
ones.     Construction  of  the  vault  unknown.     Column  round. 

Geological  Position^  etc — Technocrinus  has  been  found  only  in, 
the  Oriskany  Sandstone  of  Maryland. 

*1859.  Technocrinus  Andrews!  Hall.    (Type  of  the  genus.)     (Mariacr. — Technocr 

—Andrews!.)     Paleont.  N.   York,  iii,  p.  141,  PI.  86,  figs.  1-4.     Oriskany 

Sandstone.     Cumberland,  Md. 
*1859.  Technocr.  spinulosus  Hall.     (Mar!aor. — Technocr. — spinulosus.)     Paleont.. 

N.  York,  iii,  p.  140,  PI.  85,  figs.  1-18.    Oriskany  Sandstone.    Cumberland,  Md.  . 

(Mariacr. — Technocr.  sculptus  and  T.  striatus  Hall,  are  known  from  the 

basals  only). 


292  PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881, 

9.  MELOCRINUS  Goldfuss. 

182G.  Goldfuss.     Petrefacta  GermanijB,  i,  p.  197. 

1835,  Agassiz.     Mem.  d.  1.  Soc.  des  Sci.  Natur,  de  Neuchatel,  1,  p.  196. 

1841.  Miiller,     Monatsb,  Berl.  Akademie,  1,  p.  209. 

1850,  D'Orbigny.    Prodr,  de  Paleont.,  i,  p.  103, 

1852.  D'Orbigny.     Course  Element.,  ii,  p,  140. 

1855.  Roeraer.     Lethsea  Geogn.  (Aiisg,  8),  p.  250. 

1857,  Pictet.     Traite  de  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  325, 

1867.  Schultze.     Mon.  Echin.  Eifel  Kalk,,  p.  61. 

1875,  Hall,     Geol.  Rep.  Ohio,  Paleont.,  ii,  p.  158. 

1878.  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Crin,  Suae,  p.  19. 

1879,  Zittel.     Handbuch  d.  Palaeontologie,  i,  p.  371, 
Syn.  Otenocrintis  Bronn,  1840,     Jabrbuch,  p.  54. 

Syn.  Ctenocrinus  Miiller,  1855.  Verhandl,  Naturli,  Verein,  xii, 
p.  16, 

Syn.  Castanocrimcs  Roemer,  1855,     Lethsea  Geogn.,  ii,  p.  252, 

Syn,  Mariacrinus  Hall  (in  part),  1857,     Paleont.  N.  York,  iii,  p.  104, 

Syn.  Cytocrinus  Roeraer,  1860.     Silur.  Fauna  West.  Tenn.,  p.  46. 

Syn.  Clonocrinus  Oehlert,  1879  (not  Quenstedt),  Bull,  Soc.  Geol. 
de  France  (ser.  3),  vol.  vii. 

Syn.  Tuvbinocrinites  Troost.     List.  Crin.  Tenn,,  1850  (not  defined). 

Syn.  Astrocrinites  Conrad.  Cat.  Geol.  Rep,  of  1840  41  (not  Cum- 
berland, 1S26  ;  nor  Austin,  1843 ;  nor  Asterocrimis  Lyon,  18o'7  ; 
nor  Mlinster,  1839). 

The  genus  Melocrinus  holds  the  same  relation  to  Ilariacrinus 
as  Steganocrinus  to  Actinocrinus^  and  as  Eucladocrinus  to  Platy- 
crinus.  In  all  of  them  the  construction  of  the  body  remains 
almost  unchanged,  while  a  remarkable  modification  takes  place  in 
the  brachial  appendages,  which  are  extended  into  free  rays  with 
an  indefinite  number  of  radials,  which  give  off  the  arms  laterall3% 

This  character  separates  the  genera  of  the  three  groups  A'ery 
distinctly  and  uniforml3^ 

Several  attempts  have  been  made  to  establish  sub-divisions  for 
Melocrinus.  Roemer,  in  1865,  proposed  the  name  Castanocrinus 
for  species  with  a  central  or  subcentral  anal  opening,  retaining 
Melocrinus  with  M.  hieroglyphicus  Goldf.  for  species  with  a 
lateral  opening.  A  critical  comparison  of  all  the  species  leads  us 
to  doubt  whether  that  division  can  be  cari'ied  out  practicall}'. 
We  agree  with  Shultze,  Mon,,  p.  63,  that  the  proboscis — anal  tube 
— is  never  central,  and  in  this  genus  in  no  case  actuall}'^  lateral ; 
but  that  its  direction  is  more  or  less  excentric  in  all  species. 
Neitl)er  can  the  presence  or  absence  of  interaxillary  plates,  unless 
accompanied  by  other  distinctive  characters,  be  considered  for  a 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  293 

moment  as  sufficient  for  generic  separation,  as  liad  been  proposed 
in  the  case  of  Ctenocrinus  Bronn,'  those  plates  are  mere  acces- 
sory pieces,  and  may  be  present  or  absent  in  the  same  species. 

Turhinocrinites  Troost  was  proposed  in  MS.  (according  to 
Hall)  for  a  species  which  was  said  to  have  the  first  anal  plate  in 
line  with  the  first  radials,  but  Troost's  typical  species  Melocr. 
Verneuili,  which  was  subsequently  defined  by  Hall,  seems  not  to 
have  possessed  such  a  plate,  as  Hall  himself  mentions  expressly 
that  the  anal  area  is  but  slightl}'  distinct  from  the  regular  inter- 
radial  ones. 

Cytocrinus  Roemer  was  described  b^  its  author  with  probably 
three  (?)  basal  plates — the  exact  number  had  not  been  ascertained. 
A  good  specimen  in  our  collection  from  Louisville,  Kj'.,  which  in 
every  respect  agrees  with  G.  Isevis  Roemer,  shows  that  it  has  four 
basals,  and  that  the  genus  is  identical  with  Melocrirma.  Roemer 
himself  gave  for  locality  both  Western  Tennessee  and  Louisville. 

Phillipsocrinus  McCoy,  which  was  described  with  four  basals, 
has  been  frequently  connected  with  Melocrinus.  The  generic 
description  was  made  from  a  single  specimen,  and  this  was  evi- 
dently abnormal,  as  indicated  by  having  two  additional  plates  in 
line  with  the  first  radials  (seven  in  all),  and  we  think  it  probable 
that  the  abnormal  seventh  plate  in  this  case  rendered  the  presence 
of  the  fourth  basal  plate  necessary.  We  take  it  to  be  an  abnormal 
specimen  of  Actinocrinus,  and  this  is  far  more  consistent  with  the 
given  geological  position. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Body  obconical,  subglobose  or  pear- 
shaped,  with  five  free  rays  extended  upward  and  giving  oflT  arms 
laterally.     Cah'^x  highly  ornamented  with  radiating  ridges,  some- 

^  The  genus  Ctenocrinus  was  at  first  incorrectly  defined.  It  was  des- 
cribed by  Bronn  iJalirbuch,  1840,  p.  542)  witli  three  basal  plates,  which 
was  confirmed  by  Roemer  ( Leth.  Geogn.,  1855,  p.  251 ),  and  subsequently 
de  Koninck  considered  the  genus  identical  with  Pradocrinus  de  Verneuil 
(Criu.  du  terr.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  147).  Job.  Midler  (Verhandl.  naturh. 
Verein,  1855),  admits  more  than  three  basals,  i^robably  five,  and  in  1857 
(Neue  Echin.  Eifel  Kalk,  p.  255),  he  mentions  positively  five  basals,  and 
compares  Ctenocrinus  with  Glyptocrinus  Hall,  asserting  that  it  had  also 
parabasalia.  Schultze  afterwards  in  his  Monograph,  p.  63,  proved  fi-om 
more  perfect  specimens  that  Ctenocrinus  typus  has  only  four  basals  and  no 
underbasals,  which  is  evidently  correct.  One  of  us  had  an  opportunity 
several  years  ago  to  study  the  Schultze  collection  in  the  Museum  of  Com- 
parative Zoology  of  Cambridge,  which  contains  specimens  showing  only 
four  basals  like  Melocrinus. 


'20i  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE    ACADE>rY   OF  [1881. 

times  with  little  nodules,  in  some  species  with  all  the  plates 
strongly  nodose  or  almost  spiniferous ;  symmetry  slightly  bi- 
lateral. 

Basals  four,  three  of  them  equal  and  pentagonal,  the  fourth 
larger  and  hexagonal,  the  latter  directed  to  the  left  antero-lateral 
ray,  not  posteriorly. 

Radials  3X5;  the  five  first  hexagonal  and  joining  laterally; 
the  plates  of  the  second  seiies  hexagonal,  the  first  interradial  and 
anal  plate  interposed  between  them ;  the  third  pentagonal  and 
bifurcating.  They  support  on  their  upper  sloping  sides  two  to 
three  secondary  radials  (2-3  X  10),  with  one  or  more — though 
sometimes  none — in  the  axil.  The  secondary  radials  are  suc- 
ceeded in  a  direct  line  bj'  two  rows  of  plates,  which  sometimes 
interlock,  but  which  more  frequently  are  placed  side  by  side. 
The  plates  which  represent  higher  orders  of  radials,  are  separated 
by  a  deep  vertical  suture,  and  formed  into  a  long  brachial  appen- 
dage or  free  ray,  which  terminates  in  an  arm. 

The  free  rays  give  off  laterally,  throughout  their  length  at 
certain  intervals,  from  each  third  or  fourth  joint,  or  less  often, 
and  from  opposite  plates  (not  alternately),  small  armlets,  com- 
posed of  two  rows  of  interlocking  plates,  with  short  pinnules  on 
alternate  sides.  The  plates  which  compose  the  appendages  are 
wider  than  high,  their  upper  and  lower  sides  parallel,  except  the 
arm-bearing  pieces  which  are  depressed  pentagonal.  The  length 
of  the  armlets  difiers  according  to  their  position  ;  aU  extend  to 
the  same  general  height,  and  hence  those  nearer  the  body  are 
longer,  the  length  decreasing  proportionately  upward. 

In  young  specimens,  all  arms  are  given  oflf  from  the  free  raj^s  ; 
while  in  the  adult,  the  lower  portion  of  the  proximal  arm  is 
often  enclosed  within  the  calyx,  and  sometimes  even  separated  from 
the  main  trunk  by  small  plates. 

There  is  onl}-  one  brachial  appendage  to  each  ray,  and  this,  as 
stated  before,  is  composed  of  two  rows  of  plates  which  rest  upon 
a  bifurcating  plate.  This  construction  leaves  no  doubt  that  the 
two  rows,  which  are  separated  hya  deep  longitudinal  suture,  often 
by  interaxillary  pjlates  and  small  intermediate  pieces  scattered 
between  them,  represent  two  distinct  brachial  appendages,  wliich 
became  anchylosed  throughout  their  length,  contrary  to  Maria- 
crinus,  in  which  under  similar  conditions,  the  equivalent  parts 
remained  detached. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHLLADELPHIA.  295 

Aual  plates  numerous.  The  first  intei'radial  placed  upon  the 
upper  sloping  sides  of  the  first  radials  and  between  the  second  ; 
the  second  series  composed  of  two  plates,  and  there  are  three  in 
each  succeeding  series. 

The  posterior  or  anal  side  is  but  slightl}'  distinct  from  the  other 
four,  but  it  has  generally'  three  plates  in  the  second,  and  three  or 
four  in  each  succeeding  series. 

Vault  very  variable,  highly  elevated  to  low  hemispherical ;  the 
plates  comparativelv  large  and  more  or  less  nodose,  but  sometimes 
small  and  scarcely  convex ;  the  interradial  regions  depressed. 
Anal  aperture  subcentral  or  almost  lateral,  and  extended  generally 
— if  not  always — into  a  tube,  whose  length  is  unknown. 

Apical  dome-plates  conspicuous,  particularly  in  species  with  an 
excentric  amis. 

Column  round,  composed  alternately  of  longer  and  shorter 
joints  ;  central  canal  small,  round,  or  obtusely  pentagonal. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Melocrinus  ranges  from  the  Upper 
Silurian  to  near  the  close  of  the  Devonian,  and  is  represented 
both  in  America  and  Europe. 

We  place  here  the  following  species  : — 

^1875.  Melocrinus   Bainbridgensis   Hall    (Melocr. — Centrocr. — Bainbridgensis.) 

Gt'i)l.  Reji.  Ohio  Puleon.  ii,  p.  15S,  PI.   13,  tigs.  2,  3,  above  Hurou  Shales, 

Devonian.     Ross  Co.,  Ohio. 
*1879.  Melocr.  Bigsbyi  Oehlert.     (Clonocr.  Bigsbyi.)  Bull.      Soe.  de  France  (Ser. 

3)  vol.  vii,  p.  4,  PI.  2,  figs.  2-4.     Devonian.     St.  Germain,  France. 
I?)  1372.  Helocr.  breviradiatus  Hall  and  Whitfield.     Hamilton  gr.     (We  have  not 

seen  the  description.) 
1S38.  Melocr.   decadactylus    Goldfuss.    (Actinocr.  decadactylus.      Xova  Act.  Ac. 

Leop.    xis,    p.    343,    PI.  31,  fig.    5 ;    F.   Roemer,  Ctenocr.    decadactylus, 

Rhein.  Uebergangsgeb.  p.  61.     Grauwacke,  near  Coblentz,  Germ. 
(Ctenocr.  decadactylus  Ad.  Roemer  1850,   Hartzgebirge,  p.   2,  PI.  1,  fig.  1. 

From   the   Devonian  of    the  Hartz.      This  is   probably  different  from   the 

Coblentz  specimens. 
1S33.  Melocr.  gibbosus  Goldf.  Petref.  German,  i.  p.  211,  PI.  64,  figs.  2:  Austin,  1842, 

Ann.  and  Mag.  Xat.  Hist,  s,   p.  109;   Schultze,  1867,  Mon.     Eehin.  Kifel 

Kalk,  p.  64,     Devonian.     Eifel,  Germ. 
.%'!.  Melocr.  Isevis Goldf.  (not  F.  Roemerj.  Petref.  German.,!,  p.  197,  PI.  60, fig. 2. 
(?)  1878.  Melocr.  grannula*^us  Angelin.     Icon.  Grin.  Suec,  p.  20,  PI.  26,  figs.  21  and 

21  a.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden.     (This  is  certainly  not  Melocrinvt 

and  we  doubt  that  it  is  has  four  basals  ;  it  differs  materially  in  the  arrange- 
ment of  the  anal  plates.) 
1826.  Melocr.  hieroglyphicus   Goldf.     Type  of  the  genus.     Petref.   German,  i,  p. 

197,  PI.  60,  figs.  1  A-E :  also  Xova  Act.  Ac  Leop.,  xix,  p.339  ;  also  Lethaea. 

Geogn.,  i  and  ii,  p.  63  :    Roemer,  1855,  Lettaea  Geogn.,  PI.  4,  figs.  10  a,  b,  c. 

Rhein,  Uebergangsgebirge.     Devon.     Belgium  and  Germany. 


296  PROCEEDINGS  OP   THE   ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

*1860,  Melocr.  laevis  Roemer  (not  (}<)ldf.) — Cytocrinua  laevis.  Silur.  Fauna,  West 
Teun.,  i>.  5fi,  PI.  iv,  figs.  2  a,  b.     Ni;ii^ari\  gr.     We.<t.  Tennessee. 

*1859.  Melocr.  nobilissimus  Uall.  (Mariacr.  nobilissimus)  Paloont.  N.  York,  iii, 
p.  105,  PI  2,  ligs.  1-4,  and  PI.  2  A,  fig.  1.  Pentamerus  limcst.  Litchfield, 
Herkimer  Co.,  N.  Y. 

1861.  Melocr.  nodosus  Hall.     Geol.  Surv.  Wis.  (Rep.  of  Progress),  p.  19.    Tevonian. 

Iowa  City. 
1865.  Melocr.   obpyramidalis  Winchell   and    Marcy.    (Actinocr.    obpyramidalis) 

Mem.   Bost.  Soc.   Nat.   Hist.,  vol.  i,  p.  87,  PI.  2,  fig.  4.     Niagara  gr.     Near 

Chicago,  111.     Miller,  1881,  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  (July  No.). 
This   species  was    described   from    an    imperfect  cast.     Hall  takes   it  to  be  a 

synonym  of  Meloor.  Verneuili  Troost. 
*1841.  Melocr.  pachydactylus  Conrad.     (Astrocrinites  pachydactylus)  Ann.  Rep. 

Paleont.   N.  York,  p.  34  ;  Mather,   1843,  Geol.  Rep.  N.York,  p.  246;    Hall, 

1859,    Mariacr.  pachydactylus,   Paleont.  N.  York,  iii,  p.  107,  PI.  3,  figs. 

1-4  A.     Lower  Ilelderberg  gr.     Schoharie,  N.  Y. 
Si/)i.    Actinocr.     polydactylus    (1837)    Bonny    (not    Miller).     (Schenectady 

Reflector.) 
*1859.  Melocr.   paucidactylus    Hall.     Paleont.    N.  York,    iii,  p.   109,  PI.  3,  fig.  5. 

Lower  Ilelderberg  gr.     Herkimer  Co.,  N.  York. 
1860.  (?)  Melocr.  Pratteni  McChesney.     (Forbesiocr.  Pratteni)   Desc.  New.  Pal. 

Foss.,  p.  29  ;  1867,  Melocr.  Pratteni  Chicago,  Acad.  Sci.,  p.  22,  PI.  5,  fig.  4. 

(Geological  position   and   locality   unknown,  and  described    from  imperfect 

specimen?.) 
1838.  Melocr.  pyramidalis  Goldfuss.     Nova  Acta  Ac  Leop.,  xix,  i,  p.  339,  PI.  31,  fig. 

1 ;  D'Orbigny,   1850,    Prodr.,  i,  p.  103 ;    Schultze,    1867,   Mon.   Echin.   Eifel 

Kalk,  p.  66,  PI.  4,  fig.  5.     Devonian.     Eifel,  Germ. 
S)jn.  Melocr.  fornicatus  Goldfuss.     Ibid.,  p.  340,  PI.  31,  fig.  2. 
(?)  1878.  Melocr.  rigidus  Angelin.    Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  20,  PI.  21,  fig.  3.    Upper 

Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
(This  is  an  entirely  diflferent  form,  and  probably  belongs  to  a  dift'erent  family.) 
1878.  Melocr.  spectabilis   Angelin.     Iconogr.    Crin.   Suec,  p.  20,  PI.  21,  figs.  1-2. 

Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

1862.  Melocr.  stellaris  Roemer.     (Ctenocr.  stellaris)  Yerhandl.  Naturh.  Verein.  f. 

Rheinl.,  ix,  p.  283,  PI.  2,  figs.  2  a,  b,  c ;  also  Schultze,  1867,  Mon.  Echin. 

Eifel  Kalk,  p.  65,  PI.  4,  fig.  3.     Devonian.     Eifel,  Germ. 
1840.  Melocr.  typus  Bronn.     (Ctenocr.  typus)  Jahrb.  f.  Mineralogie,  p.  542,  PI.  8  B  ; 

also  D'Orbigny,  1860,   Prodr.,  i,  p.  103,  and  F.  Roemer,  1844,  Rhein.  Ueber- 

gangsgeb.,  p.  60,  PI.  1,  fig.  1.     Grauwacke,  near  Coblentz,  Germ.     Probably 

identical  with  Melocr.  decadactylus  Goldf. 
1864.  (?)  Melocr.  Verneuili  Troost.    (Actinocr.  Verneuili)   List  of  Crin.   Tenn., 

I860;  1868,  Hall,  20th  Rep.  N.  York  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  327,  PI.  10,  fig. 

5  (Advance  Sheets,  1864).     Niagara  gr.     Decatur  Co.,  Tenn.,  and  Racine, 

Wis. 
This  species  is  only  known  from  natural  casts,  hence  an  accurate  comparison  is 

impossible,  but  from  all  appearances  it  is  identical  with  Melocr.  (Cytocr.) 

laevis  Roemer. 
1838.  Melocr.  verrucosus  Goldf.     Nova  Acta  Ac   Leop.  xix,  i,  PI.  31,  fig.  3 ;  also 

Schultze,  1867,  Mon.  Echin.  Eifel  Kalk,  p.  65,  PI.  4,  fig.  4.  Devonian.   Eifel, 

Geim. 


]881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  297 

1878.  Melocr.  Volborthi  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  20,  PI.  7,  figs.  8-11,  and 
PI.  23,  figs.  30-32.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
(Angelin  figures  under  this  name  at  least  two  difierent  species,  his  PI.  18,  fig. 
16,  represents  even  another  genus ;  the  latter  possibly  goes  together  with  the 
specimen  on  PI.  26,  fig.  26,  referred  to  Patelliocr.  fulminatns.) 

10.  SCYPHOCKINUS  Zenker. 

1833.  Zenker.     Beitr.  Naturgesch .  d.  Urwald.,  p.  36. 

1839.  Miinster.     Beitr.  z.  Petrefactenk .,  iii,  p.  112. 

1850.  Quenstedt.     Handbuch  der  Petrefactenk,,  p.  621. 

1855.  F.  Roemer.     Letbaea  Geogn.  (Ausg.  3),  p.  255. 

1878.  Zittel.     Haudbucb  der  Palaeontologie,  i,  p.  372. 

(Not  ScypTiocrinus  Hall,  1847.     Paleont.  N.  York,  i,  p.  85.) 
(Not  Scyphocrinus  Pictet,  1857.     Traite  de  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  320.) 

The  genus  under  consideration  is  not  to  be  confounded  with 
Scyphocrinus  Hall,  1847,  which  is  an  entirely  different  thing,  and 
as  we  believe,  a  synon^-ni  of  Schizocrinus  Hall.  Scyp/iocrinus 
Zenker,  is  imperfectly  known,  but  Zittel  is  probably  correct  in 
grouping  it  with  Melocrinus,  although  it  has  in  the  form  of  its 
radials,  and  in  the  large  number  of  interiadial  plates,  close 
affinities  with  Feriechocrinus ,  from  which  it  differs  in  the 
construction  of  the  anal  area.  Pictet's  identification  of  Scypho- 
crinus is  evidently  not  correct ;  he  describes  it  with  four  under 
basals  and  five  basals,  arranged  like  in  Cyathocrinus^  and 
otherwise  resembling  Actinocrinus. 

Generic  Diagnosis. —  Calyx  very  large,  composed  of  numerous 
thin  plates,  which  are  beautifullj^  sculptured  ;  posterior  side  some- 
what wider,  and  hence  the  general  symmetry  slightly  bilateral. 

Basals,  according  to  Roemer  and  others-,  five.  Zittel  gives  their 
number  at  four.  Primary  radials  3X5,  nearly  of  equal  size  and 
varying  but  little  in  form,  all  higher  than  wide ;  the  two  lower 
hexagonal ;  the  third  heptagonal  and  supporting  two  rows  of 
secondary  radials,  each  consisting  of  from  four  to  five  plates, 
longitudinall}'  arranged  and  separated  by  interaxillary  pieces. 
The  radials  support  ten  arm-trunks,  which  give  off'  numerous' 
branches,  the  latter  closely  placed  together,  the  lower  ones  crossing 
each  other  and  forming  in  the  interradial  and  interaxillary  spaces 
an  unbroken  pavement ;  higher  up,  however,  the  arms  become  free 
and  diverge,  giving  off  long  slender  branches,  which  ixi  turn 
throw  off  pinnule-like  armlets  (Zittel),  but  probably  true  pin- 
nules. The  main  trunks  and  branches  consist  of  short  single 
joints  with  deep  ventral  furrows,  their  articulating  faces  provided 
with  radiating  strife. 


298  PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

Interradial  series  constructed  of  numerous  plates,  the  first 
resting  upon  the  posterior  lateral  sides  of  the  first  radials,  and 
between  the  second  radials.  There  are  two  interradials  in  the 
second  series, three  in  the  third,  and  others  above.  The  posterior 
side  differs  in  having  three  plates  in  the  second,  and  four  to  five 
in  the  succeeding  series.  Construction  of  vault,  and  form  and 
position  of  the  anus,  unknown. 

Column  long,  round,  slender,  composed  of  short  joints;  central 
perforation  round  and  unusually  large. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — The  only  known  species  occurs  in  the 
Upper  Silurian  of  Bohemia. 

1833.  Scyphocrinus  elegans  Zenker.  Beitr.  Naturgoscb.  Urw.,  p.  26,  PI.  4,  figs. 
A-F;  Munster,  1839,  Beitr.  zur  Petrefactenk.,  p.  112,  PI.  9,  fig.  8;  Quen- 
stedt,  1850,  Handli.  d.  Petref.  p.  621,  PI.  f5,  figs.  1-3;  F.  Roemer,  1S55, 
Lethaea  Geogn.  (Ausg.  3).  p.  255,  PI.  4,  figs.  6  a.  b:  Zitfel,  1879,  Ilandb.  >\. 
Palaeon*'.  i,  p.  372.     Upper  Silur.     Karlstein,  Bohemia. 

11.    DOLATOCRINUS  Lyon. 

1857.  Lyon.     Geol.  Rep.  Kentucky,  iii,  p.  482. 

Syn.  Cacahocrinus  Troost.     List  of  Grin.  Tenn.,  1850. 
Syn.  Cacahocrinus  HaU.     15th.  Rep.  N.  York,  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist., 
p.  137. 

The  name  Cacahocrinus  was  proposed  by  Troost  in  his  cata- 
logue, but  the  genus  was  not  defined  until  1862  by  HalL  Lyon's 
Dolatocrinus,  which  is  identical  with  Cacahocrinus,  was  described 
in  1857  and  hence  has  priority.  Lj^on  described  the  genus  with 
three  basals,  Hall  with  five,  but  we  doubt  if  either  of  them  ever 
found  the  sutures.  The  basal  pieces  are  so  closely  anchylosed, 
that  we  give  them  simply  as  constituting  a  solidly  anchylosed 
disk.  Dolatocrinus  differs  from  most  allied  genera  in  the  anal 
area,  which  in  its  construction  is  not  distinct  from  the  regular 
interradial  fields,  but  in  this  respect  it  resembles  Stereocrinus, 
which  we  place  subgenerically  under  it. 

Generic  Diagonis — Body  spheroidal,  depressed  at  both  poles  ; 
wider  than  high.  Calyx  forming  a  low  spreading  basin,  of  which 
the  basals,  the  first,  and  partly  the  second  radials  form  the  bottom 
part ;  symmetry  regularly  pentahedral,  the  anal  area  not  distinct 
from  the  other  interradial  series. 

Vault  hemispherical,  depressed  in  the  interradial  portions,  the 
radial  zones  elevated,  giving  to  the  summit,  viewed  from  that  side, 
a  pentalobate  aspect. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA.  299 

Basals  united  by  anchylosis,  without  A'isible  suture  lines,  and 
forming  a  pentagon ;  small,  often  barely  extending  beyond  the 
circumference  of  the  column ;  the  median  part  strongly  concave 
or  the  entire  base  funnel-shaped  ;  central  perforation  or  passage 
for  the  columnar  canal  ver}^  large,  pentalobate. 

Radials  3X5;  the  first  large,  hexagonal ;  the  second  quad- 
rangular, generall}^  with  convex  sides,  narrower  than  either  second 
or  third,  but  much  wider  than  high.  The  third  pentagonal,  and 
supporting  at  each  side  two  secondar}'  radials,  which  give  off  two 
arms  to  each  ra^'.  In  the  majority  of  species,  however,  there  are 
two  pairs  of  tertiary  radials  above  the  second  order,  or  four  arms 
to  the  ray.  The  secondarj^  radials,  and  the  tertiar}^  ones  if  these 
are  present,  are  almost  as  large  as  the  second  and  third  primaries. 
The  arms,  on  becoming  free,  bifurcate  two  or  three  times,  and  it 
appears  that  they  were  constructed  sometimes  of  a  single  series  of 
cuneiform  pieces  alternately  arranged,  but  more  gene  rail}'  of  two 
series  of  interlocking  plates.     Pinnules  long,  slender  jointed. 

Interradials  three  or  more — their  number  greater  in  species 
with  four  arms  than  in  those  with  two  arms  to  the  ray — generally 
arranged  in  three  series.  The  first  interradial  plate  very  large,  the 
largest  plate  in  the  calj^x ;  subcircular  to  subovoid ;  resting 
between  the  upper  sides  of  the  first  radials,  against  the  sides  of  the 
second  and  third,  and  between  the  lower  sloping  sides  of  the  first 
secondary  radials.  The  second  interradial  series  is  composed  of 
one  or  two  plates,  smaller  than  the  first.  The  third  series  consists 
of  two  or  three  much  smaller  plates,  sometimes  with  a  fourth  series 
above.  There  are  generally  a  few  interaxillar}"  plates  between  the 
secondary  radials. 

Vault  composed  of  rather  large  plates,  ornamented  with  coarse 
granules  or  small  irregular  nodes.  The  apical  dome  plates  well 
defined,  the  radial  pieces  slightly  tuberculous,  and  the  entire 
radial  portions  elevated ;  the  interradial  regions  depressed.  Anal 
aperture  subcentral,  evidentl}^  extended  into  a  slender  tube. 

Column  unknown,  its  form  however  was  circular,  and  it  had  an 
unusuallj"^  large,  pentalobate  central  canal. 

Geological  Position^  etc — In  the  Upper  Helderberg  and  lower 
beds  of  the  Hamilton  group,  Devon.,  and  only  found  in  America. 

1862.  Dolatocrinus  glyptus  Hall.  (Cacabocr.  glyptus).  15th  Rep.  N.  York  St.  Cab. 
Nat.  Hist.,  p.  140  ;  Dolatocr.  glyptus  S.  A.  Miller,  Cat.  Pal.  Foss.,  p.  72. 
Hamilton  gr.     Genessee  Co.,  N.  Y. 


300  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

1862.  Dolatocr.  glyptus  var.  intermedins  Hall.   (Cacaboorinus).  15th  Rep.  N.York 

8t.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  141.     Hamilton  gr.     Livingston  Co.,  N.  Y. 
1857.  Dolatocr.  lacus  Lyon.  (Type  of  the  genus).     GeoL  Rep.  Ky.,  iii,  p.  482,  PI.  4, 

fi,i;s.  2  a,  b,  c.     Encrinal  limost.     Beargrass  quarries,  Louisville,  Ky. 
1862.  Dolatocr.  lamellosus  Hall.  (Cacabocr.  lamellosus).  15th  Rep.  N.  York  St.  Cat. 

Nat.  Hist.,  p.  141  ;  DolUocr.  lameUosus  S.  A.  Miller,  Cat.  Pal.  Foss,  p.  72. 

Western  N.  Y.     Upper  HeMerbcrg  gr. 
1862.  Dolatocr.  liratus  Hall.   (Cacabocr.  liratus).    15th  Rep.  N.  York  St.  Cab.  Nat. 

llist.,  p.  1.39;  Dolatocr.  liratus  S.  A.  Miller,  Cat.  Pal.  Foss.,  p.  72.    Western 

N.  Y.     Hamilton  gr. 
1862.  Dolatocr.  liratus  var.  multilira  Hall.  (Cacaboorinus).  15th  Rep.  N.  York  St. 

Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  i;'>9.     Hamilton  gr.     Western  N.  Y. 
1869.  Dolatocr.    Marshi   Lyon.      Trans.   Am.  Philos.  Sec,  vol.  13,  p.  461,  PI.  27, 

figs,  n,  1,2.     Upper  HelJerberg  gr.     Falls  of  the  Ohio. 
1862.  Dolatocr.  speoiosus  Hall.     (Cacabocr.  speciosus).  15th  Rep.  N.  Yoik  St.  Cab. 

Nat.  Hist.,  p.  137;  Dolatocr.  speciosus  S.  A.  Miller,  Cat.  Pal.  Foss.,  p.  72. 

Upper  Helderberg.     Schoharie,  N.  Y. 
1862.  Dolatocr.  Troosti  Hall.     (Cacabocr.  Troosti).     15th  Rop.  N.  York  St.  Cab. 

Nat.  Hist.,  p.  138;  Dolatocr.  Troosti  S.  A.  Miller.     Cat.  Pal.  Foss.,  p.  72. 

Hamilton  gr.     Western  N.  Y. 

Subgenus  STEREOCRINITS  Barris. 
1878.  Proceed.  Davenport  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  vol.  11,  p.  282. 

Stei'eocrinus  in  general  form,  mode  of  ornamentation,  and  in  the 
construction  of  tlie  plates,  resembles  the  simpler  form  of  Dolato- 
crinus.  It  differs  from  it  in  having  two,  instead  of  3  X  5,  primary 
radials,  and  the  basal  plates,  although  closely  anchylosed,  dis- 
tinctly divided  into  three  pieces. 

Through  the  kindness  of  Rev.  Dr.  Barris,  we  examined  a  large 
number  of  specimens  from  Davenport,  and  became  satisfied  that 
the  reduction  in  the  number  of  radials  is  not  accidental,  but  a 
constant  character,  which  extends  to  more  than  one  species. 
Other  specimens  have  since  been  found  by  Dr.  Barris  in  the  Lake 
Superior  region,  which  confirm  this  opinion.  The  upper  radials 
in  Stereocrinus  are  of  the  same  size,  and  nearly  of  the  same  form, 
as  the  second  and  third  radials  combined  in  Dolatocrinus,  and 
this  suggests  a  modification  from  the  two  pieces  in  the  one,  to  a 
single  plate  in  the  other.  It  is  very  possible  that  in  Dolatocrinus 
the  two  pieces  were  united  by  syzygie,^  while  in  Stereocrinus 
they  became  perfectly  anchylosed. 

'  In  our  general  remarks  upon  the  Actinocrlnldaj,  we  have  suggested 
that  probably  in  genera,  in  which  the  second  radial  is  qviadrangular  and 
transversely  arranged  like  in  Batocriims  and  Dolatocrimis,  this  plate  i-epre- 
sents  a  mere  hypozygial  joint,  which  with  the  axillary  plate  forms  a  syzygie. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  301 

This  seems  to  us  suflicient  to  separate  the  two  forms,  but  in 
other  respects  the  relations  with  Dolatocrinus  are  so  close,  that 
they  justify  only  a  subgeneric  division,  for  which  we  propose  the 
following : — • 

Diagnosis. — Bod}'  depressed  ;  calyx  truncate  up  to  the  second 
radials,  the  latter  bending  abruptl}^  and  forming  a  low  basin  with 
straight  sides.  Dome  but  sliglitly  elevated,  its  interradial  por- 
tions depressed  and  deeply  grooved  toward  the  arm  bases,  giving 
to  the  radial  regions  a  certain  prominence,  and  to  the  body, 
viewed  from  the  summit,  a  somewliat  lobed  appearance ;  sym- 
metry' strictl}'  pentahedral. 

Basal  disk  small,  scarcel}'  projecting  beyond  the  column,  funnel- 
shaped,  composed  of  three  closely  anchylosed  pieces.  Primary 
radials  2X5;  the  first  hexagonal ;  the  second  pentagonal,  sup- 
porting two  radials  of  the  second  order,  the  latter  supporting  the 
arms.  So  far  as  the  specimens  are  preserved,  there  are  only  two 
arm  openings  to  each  ray,  these,  however,  are  so  large  that  they 
may  form  the  inner  cavit}^  of  free  brachial  appendages  with 
numerous  arms.     Arras  entirely  unknown. 

Interradials  two,  large,  with  several  small  plates  above ;  the 
two  former  in  series  of  one  each  ;  the  first  the  largest  plate  of 
the  body,  heptagonal ;  the  second  hexagonal,  smaller  than  the 
radial  plates ;  succeeding  pieces  placed  within  the  depressions 
between  the  arm  bases ;  anal  side  not  distinct. 

Yault  composed  of  a  moderate  number  of  medium-sized  pieces  ; 
apical  dome-plates  easily  recognized  by  their  larger  size.  Anal 
opening  subcentral,  extended  into  a  tube. 

Column  round  ;  central  canal  large,  pentalobate. 

Geological  Position,  etc Upper  Helderberg  group  of  America. 

1878.  Stereocrinus  triangulatus  Barris.     Davenport  A-.ad.  Nat.  Sei.,  p.  283,  PI.  11, 

figs.  1,  2.     Encrinal  limest.     Near  Diiveiii>ort,  Towa. 
1878.  Stereocr.   triangulatus   var.   liratus    Ban-is.     Ibid.   p.   284,    PI.   11,   firr.   3. 

Encrinal  liu.est.     Near  Davenport,  Iowa. 

cl.  Pekiechocrinites. 

12.  PERIECHOCEINTJS.  Austin. 

1843.  Austin.  Ami.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  x,  p.  109  (no  definition). 

1843.  Austin.  Ibid.,  xi,  p.  203. 

1848.  Morris.  Cat.  Brit.  Foss.  (ed.  lst\  p.  56. 

1857.  Pictet.  Traite  de  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  323. 

1878.  Angel.  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  6. 


302  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

1879.  Zittel.     Ilandb.  der  Palteontologie,  i,  p.  368. 

Syn.  Actinocrinus  Miller,  1821  (in  part).     Hist.  Crinoidea,  p.  116. 
Syn.  Actinocrinus  Phillips,  1839.     Murchis.  Silur.  Syst.,  p.  57. 
Syn.  Trochocrinites  Portlock,  1848.    Geol.  of  Londonderry,  p.  345. 
Syn.  Pradocrimis  De  Verneuil,  1850.     Bull.  Soc.  Geol.  France  (ser. 

ii),  vol.  vii,  p.  184. 
Syn.  Geocrinus  d'Orbigny,  1850.     Prodr.  de  Paleont.,  i,  p.  46. 
Syn.  Saccoci'imis  Troost,  1850.     List.  Grin.  Tenn. 
Syn.  Saccocrinus  Hall,  1852.     Paleont.  New  York,  ii,  p.  205. 
Syn.  Pyxidocrinus  Miiller  (in  part),  1857.     Neue  Eclun,  Eifel  Kalk, 

p.  253. 
Syn.  (?)  Trochocrinites  Pander,  1858.     Helmerson's  Geol.  Bermerk. 

auf  einer  Reisein  Schweden,  etc.,  p.  20. 
Syn.  Saccocrinus  Roenier,  1860.     Silur.  Fauna  West.  Tenn.,  p.  42. 
Syn.  Actinocr.  (Megistocrinus)  Hall,  1861.     Bost.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist., 

p.  271. 
Syn.  Actinocr.  {Pradocrinus)  Meek  and  Worth.,  1861.     Proc.  Acad. 

Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  133. 
Syn.  Actinocrinus  Hall,  1863.     Trans.  Albany  Inst.,  v,  p.  196. 
Syn.  Megistocrinus  Winchell  and  Marcy,  1865  (not  Ow.  and  Shum.). 

Mem.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  1,  p.  87. 
Syn.  Saccocrinus  Meek  and   Worth.,    1869.     Geol.    Rep.  111.,    iii, 

p.  347. 
.Syn.  Actinocr.  {Saccocrinus)  Meek  and  Worth.,   1869.     Geol.  Rep. 
'  111.,  iii,  p.  470. 
Syn.  Megistocr.  {Saccocrinus)  Meek  and  Worth.,  1873.     Geol.  Rep. 

111.,  vol.  V,  p.  397. 
Syn.  Actinocrinus  Angelin,  1878  (in  part).     Iconogr.  Grin.    Suec, 

p.  6. 
Syn,   Saccocrinus   S.  A.  Miller.      Journ.   Cincin.   Soc.   Nat.    Hist. 

(July  No.). 

Austin's  definition  of  Periechocrinus  is  not  so  clear  as  might 
be  wished,  but  sufficiently  distinct  to  imply  that  he  described  a 
group  of  Crinoids  of  which  Miller's  Actinocrinus  moniliformis  is 
the  type.  None  of  Austin's  species  were  figured ;  the  first,  F. 
articulosus^  is  but  little  known,  the  second,  P.  costatus  has  been 
regarded  a  synonym  of  Actinocr.  moniliformis^  while  the  third, 
P.  glohulosus,  has  not  been  defined.  The  species  are  character- 
ized by  their  elongate  sack-like  form,  the  thinness  of  their  body 
plates,  the  exceedingly  high  radials,  the  conspicuous  elevated 
ridges  along  the  radials,  the  large  interradial  and  interaxillary 
spaces,  the  wide  anal  area  with  a  plate  in  line  with  the  first 
radials,  and  the  large,  slender,  more  or  less  branching  arms.  This 
includes  the  American  species  for  which  Troost  and  Hall  proposed 
the  genus  Saccocrinus. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES    OF    PHILADELPHIA.  303 

It  makes  but  little  difference  whether  the  arms  in  Saccocrinus 
speciosus  (Hall's  type)  branch  again  after  they  become  free,  or 
exclusively  within  the  body  as  in  the  case  of  Periechocrinus 
moniliformis,  provided  their  mode  of  branching  and  their  con- 
struction otherwise  is  similar,  and  this  is  evidently  here  the  case. 
There  are  among  the  European  species  several  in  which  the 
arms  branch  in  their  free  state,  and  we  find  among  them  all  pos- 
sible intermediate  gradations,  from  two  simple  arms  in  the  ray 
to  eight,  and  these  either  simple  or  branching.  Angelin  refers 
species  with  only  two  and  four  arms,  if  remaining  simple,  to 
Actinocrinus,  but  it  seems  to  us,  that  a  generic  separation,  based 
upon  the  number  of  arms,  cannot  be  upheld  in  a  group  in  which 
a  branching  of  the  arms  is  not  onl}'  admitted,  but  xevy  charac- 
teristic.^ 

Angelin 's  Actinocr.  medius  and  A.  major  have  underbasals,  and 
are  referred  b}"  us  to  the  KhodocrinidjB. 

We  place  here  with  doubt  Angelin's  Periechocr.  GoMandicus 
and  P.  radiatus,  which  both  differ  in  the  secondary  radials  and  in 
the  style  of  ornamentation  from  all  other  species,  while  they 
agree  on  the  same  points  and  in  their  general  aspect  with  Glypto- 
crinus.  ]S[one  of  the  figured  specimens  show  the  anal  side,  and  it 
seems  quite  possible  that  the  two  species,  like  Glyptoerinus,  had 
no  anal  plates  in  line  with  the  first  radials. 

Periechocrinus  grandiscutatus,  P.  multicostataSy  P.  undulatus, 
P.  annulatus  and  P.  geometricus,  Angelinas  species,. were  described 
from  fragmentary  plates,  and  their  identification  is  doubtful,  the 
latter  even,  if  correctly  figured,  had  underbasals.  In  that  species 
onl}^  the  plates  of  the  two  proximal  rings  are  known,  those  of  the 
second  ring  are  angular  above,  instead  of  truncate,  and  hence  the 
succeeding  ring  must  have  been  alternately  arranged. 

According  to  our  interpretation,  Periechocrinus  includes  also 
several  species  from  the  lower  Subcarboniferous,  which  heretofore 
have  been  variousl}^  referred  to  Actinocrinus,  Megistocrinus,  or 
Pradocrinus,  but  only  species  with  thin  plates  and  elongate  body, 
leaving  those  with  heavy  plates,  depressed  body,  and  short  radials 
under  Megistocrinus. 

We  are  aware  that  we  include  in  this  genus  some  species  which 

^  In  Actinocrinus  the  case  is  similar,  some  species  having  four,  others 
eight  simple  arms,  and  the  last  survivors  of  the  genus  have  their  arms 
branching  in  the  free  state  as  in  species  of  Periechocrinus. 


304  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

possess  a  simple  anal  opening,  others  with  apparently  a  small 
ventral  tube,  but  we  were  obliged  to  do  so,  because  the  construc- 
tion of  the  ventral  disk  is  so  little  known,  that  a  subgeneric 
division  in  this  case  could  not  as  yet  be  carried  out  practically. 

Pradocrinus  de  Yerneuil,  1850,  is  identical  with  Austin's  genus, 
also  Geocrinus  d'Orbigny,  which  was  proposed  the  same  year, 
and  based  upon  Miller's  Actinocr.  moniliformis.  Job.  Miiller 
referred  Pradocrinus  to  his  Pyxidocrinus,  a  genus  in  which  he 
proposed  to  embrace  those  species  of  the  Actinocrinus  group 
which  possess  interaxillary  plates.  Angelin  identifies  Trocho- 
crinus  Pander  with  Periechocrinus,  while  Bigsby  takes  it  to  be 
a  synonym  of  Glyptocrinus.  Trochocrinites  Gothlandicus, 
certainly  differs  in  several  respects  from  typical  species  of 
Periechocrinus. 

The  name  Trochocrinites  was  preoccupied  by  Portlock  in  1848. 
His  only  species  P.  Isevis  was  described  from  a  very  imperfect 
specimen,  and  we  cannot  accurately  determine  its  relations,  though 
it  seems  to  be  allied  to  the  group  of  P.  Gothlandicus.  It  is  cer- 
tainly quite  distinct  from  Angelin 's  P.  Isevis.  We  should  be 
inclined  to  place  this  species  with  P.  Gothlandicus,  P.  radialus, 
and  P.  pulcher  in  a  separate  group  under  Portlock's  name,  but  it 
is  possible  they  all  belong  to  Glyptocrinvs,  and  we  dislike  to 
encumber  the  subject  with  generic  separations  based  upon  such 
imperfect  data. 

Austin  made  Periechocrinus  the  type  of  a  distinct  family,  and 
included  in  it  Sagenocrinus,  while  Pictet  and  Zittel  refer  it  to  the 
Actinocrinidfe. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Body  large,  elongate  and  somewhat  urn- 
shaped  ;  composed  of  thin,  almost  smooth  or  delicately  sculptured 
plates ;  radials  marked  along  their  centres  with  a  conspicuous 
elevated  ridge,  passing  from  plate  to  plate,  which  divides  upon 
each  axillary  piece,  and  which  toward  the  arm-bases  increases  in 
prominence,  until  it  gradually  becomes  identified  with  the  free 
arms.     Symmetry  bilateral. 

Basals  three,  of  equal  size,  united  into  a  spreading  cup ; 
articulating  facets  for  the  reception  of  the  column  wide. 

Primary  radials  3X5,  comparatively  long  and  narrow,  con- 
necting line  unusually  short,  sometimes  joining  only  by  the  point 
of  an  angle.  The  first  radials  large,  alternately  hexagonal  or 
heptagonal ;  the  second  hexagonal  and  smaller ;  the  third  smaller 


PROG.  A.  N.  8,  PHILA,, 


PL  XI 


4.r  so.,. 


't 


\' 


PROC.  A.  N.  S,  PHILA.,  1881 


PL  XII. 


PROC.  A.  N,  S,  PHILA 


PL,  Xlll. 


PROC.  A.  N.  S.  PHILA., 


PL.  XV, 


PROC,  A.  N.  S,  PHILA,, 


PL  XVI, 


a 


1 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  305 

than  the  second,  hexagonal  or  heptagonal,  with  an  obtuse  upper 
angle  supporting  the  secondary  radials.  The  latter  usuall}'^ 
consist  of  2  X  10  plates,  the  upper  row,  in  some  species,  curving 
outward  and  supporting  the  free  arms,  in  others  straight,  axillary, 
and  supporting  the  higher  orders  of  radials,  which  give  off  the 
arms  from  every  second  plate,  and  alternatel}'^  from  opposite 
sides.  The  arms  in  either  case  are  simple  or  branching,  long, 
slender,  rounded,  decreasing  in  width  upward.  They  are  from  the 
body  up  composed  of  two  series  of  small  alternating  pieces,  and 
the  bifurcating  takes  place  after  the  arms  have  passed  into  a 
double  series  of  interlocking  pieces. 

Pinnules  slender,  closely  abutting. 

Interradial  plates  numerous ;  the  first  one  large,  generally 
hexagonal,  supporting  two  plates  in  the  second,  and  two  In  the 
third  range,  with  several  series  aboA'e,  each  containing  from  two 
to  three  plates,  which  gradually  decrease  in  size  toward  the 
summit.  The  posterior  side  much  wider ;  first  anal  plate  hep- 
tagonal, equal  in  form  to  the  first  radials  and  in  line  with  them, 
followed  b}'-  three  plates  in  the  second  series,  and  by  a  large 
number  of  small  plates  above. 

Interaxillaries  numerous.  Vault  depressed,  from  moderatelj^ 
convex  to  almost  flat;  composed  of  small,  irregularly  arranged, 
smooth  pieces,  among  which  the  apical  plates  are  indistinctly 
represented.  Anus  subcentral,  either  in  form  of  an  opening 
through  the  vault,  or  in  some  species  probably  extended  into  a 
small  tube. 

Column  large,  round,  central  canal  moderately  wide  and  round. 

Geological  Position.,  etc. — Periechocrinus  occurs  from  the  Upper 
Silurian  to  the  base  of  the  Subcarboniferous  (Burlington  Limest.), 
and  is  found  both  in  America  and  Europe. 

We  recognize  the  following  species  : — 

*186I.  Periechocrinus  amplus  Meek  and  Worth.    (Actinocr.   Pradocr.  amplusl. 

Proc.  Acad.  Nat.   Sci.    Pbila.,  p.  133;  also  1868,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  iii,  p.  470, 

PI.  16,  fig.  2.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1843.  Periechocr.  articulosus  Austin.    Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  xi,  p.  204.  Upper 

Silur.     Dudley,  Eng. 
«1830.  Periechocr.  Baylii  de  Vemeuil.    fPradocr.  Baylii)  Bull.  Soc.  Geol.  de  France 

(ser.  ii),  vol.  vii,  p.  184,  PI.  4,  figs.  11  a,  b,  c.     Devonian.     District  Sabero, 

Spain. 
*I878.  Periechocr.   brevimanus   Angel.    (Actinocr.  brevimanus)   Iconogr.   Crin. 

8uec.,  p.  6,  PI.  18,  fig.  12.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

21 


306  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

*1863.  Periechoor.  Christyi  Hall.    (Actinoor.  Christyi— not  Shum.,  1855)  Trans. 

Albany  Inst.,   iv,  p.   196;  (Abstr.,  p.  2);  Meek  and  Worth,  1868,  Saocoor. 

Chrystyi,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  iii,  p.  347,  PI.  5,  fig.  1 ;  also  Hall,  1879,28th  Rep.  N. 

Y.  St.   Cab.    Vat,  Hist.   (pd.   ii),  p.   127,  PI.  13,  figs.  12-20.     Niagara  gr. 

Waldron,  Ind.,  near  Chicago,  III.;  and  Racine,  Wis. 
^S"^".  Actinocr.  Whitfieldi  Hall,  1868.    20th  Rep.  N.  York  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist., 

p.  326;  Actinocr.  (Saocoor.)  Whitfieldi  Hall.    Ibid.  (Revised  Ed.),  1870, 

pp.  370  and  430, 
Syn.  Megistoor.  Marcouanus  (1860)  Winchell  and  Marcy.     Mem.  Best.  Soc. 

Nat.  Hist.,  i,  p.  87,  PI.  2,  fig.  5.     S.  A.  Miller,  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist. 

(.July  number),  considers  it  a  good  species. 
Si/n.  Megistocr.  infeliz  Winch,  and  Marcy,  1866,     Ibid.,  p.  7. 
»185S.  Periechocr.  Gothlandicas  Pander.    (Trochocrinites  Gothlandicus)  Helmer- 

son's  Geol.  Bemerk.  auf  einer  Reise  in  Schweden  und  Norwegen,  p.  20,  PI.  3, 

figs,  a,  b,  d,  e  (not  c);   Angelin,  1878,  Periechocr.  gothlandicus,  Iconogr. 

Crin.  Suec,  p.  7,  PI.  x,  figs.  3,  4.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
This  species  and  P.  radiatUS  difier  from  the  typical  form  of  the  genus. 
1878.  Periechocr.   interradiatus    Angl.     Iconogr.    Crin,    Suec.      Figured    without 

description,  PI.  19,  fig.  15.     Upper  Silur.     Dudley,  Eng. 
*184S.  Periechoor.  Isevis  Portlock.    (Trochocrinites  laevis)  Geol.  of  Londonderry, 

p.  346,  PI.  15,  fig.  1.     Silurian.     Tyrone,  Ireland. 
*18S0.  Periechoor.    Lindstromi    Wachsm.    and    Spr.     (Described    by   Angelin    as 

Actinocr.  interradiatus  =  Periechocr.  interradiatus — not  the  previous 

species  from   Dudley).     Iconogr,   Crin,  Suec,  p.  6,  PI,  26,  fig.  15.     Upper 

Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
This  species  was  named  in  honor  of  Prof.  Lindstrom  of  Stockholm. 
*187S.  Periechocr.  longidigitatus  Angel.  (Actinocr.  longidigitatus)  Iconogr.  Crin. 

Suec,  p.  6,  PI.  26,figs.  19,  19  a.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,Sweden. 
*I878.  Perieohoor.  longimanus  Angel.    (Actinocr.  longimanus).    Iconogr.  Crin. 

Suec,  p.  6,  PI.  15,  fig.  17  and  PI.  26,  fig,  16;  PI..28,  figs.  5  and  6.     Upper 

Silur,     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1878.  Perieohoor.  minor  Wachsm,  and  Spr,     (Desc,  by  Angel,  as  P.  Isevis,    not 

P.  laevis  Portlock's  sp.)     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  7,  PI,  18,  fig,  11,     Upper 

vSilur,     Gothland,  Sweden, 
1821.  Periechoor,  moniliformis  Miller,  (Actinoor.  moniliformis).  Type  of  the  genus, 

Nat.   Hist.   Crinoidea,  p.    116;    Phillips,  1839,  Murchison's  Silur.  Syst.,  p, 

673,  PI,  18,  fig,  4;  d'Orhigny,  1850,  Geocr.  moniliformis  Prodr.,  i,  p.  46; 

Angel,,   1878,  Iconogr,   Crin,  Suec,  PI.   19,  figs.  14,  a,  b,  c     Upper  Silur, 

Dudley,  Eng. 
Syn.   Periechocr.   oostatus    Austin,    1843.     Ann.   and   Mag.   Nat,  Hist,,  xi, 

p.  204. 
*1878.  Perieohoor.  nubilus  Angelin.    (Actinocr.  nubilus).    Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p. 

6,  PI.  18,  fig.  14.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1875.  Periechocr.  ornatus  Hall.    (Saccocr.  ornatus).    Geol.  Rep.  Ohio  Paleont., 

ii,  p.  126,  PI.  6,  figs.  7,  9.     Niagara  gr.     Yellow  Springs,  0. 
*1854.  (?)  Periechocr.  pulcher  (Salter  MS.)  McCoy.    (Actinocr.  pulcher).    Synop. 

Brit.  Pal.  Foss.,  p,  55,  PI.  1  d,  fig,  3,     Upper  Silur,     Wales, 
(This  species  is  not  well  known,  and  may  possibly  belong  to  a  separate  group 

with  P.  radiatus,  P.  gothlandicus,  or  may  be  a  Glyptoorinus.) 
*1878.  Periechocr.  quinquangularis  Angel.   (Actinocr.  quinquangularis).  Iconogr. 
Crin.  Suec,  p.  6,  Pi.  16,  figs.  27,  27  a,  28.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF  PHILADELPHIA.  30T 

1878.  (?)Perieohoor.  radiatns  Angel.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  7,  PI.  10,  figs.  1  and 

2,  and  PI.  23,  fig.  3;    and   PI.   27,   figs.   6,   7.      Upper   Silur.     Gothland, 

Sweden. 

This  form  differs  in  the  size,  in  the  style  of  ornamentation,  and  the  greater 

number  of  secondary  radials,  from  the  typical  species. 

1878.  Periechocr.  soanicus  Angel.     loonogr.  Grin.  Suec,  p.  7,  PI.  19,  figs.  16,  16  a. 

Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1878.  Periechocr.  Schultzianas  Angel.    (Actinoor.  Schultzianus).    Iconogr.  Crin. 

Suec,  p.  6,  PI.  18,  fig.  13.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1867.  (?)  Periechocr.  semiradiatus  Hall.    (Saooocr.  semiradiatus).    20th  Rep.  N. 
Y.   St.   Cat.   Nat.    Hist.,  p.   37,   PL  10,  fig.  1.     Niagara  gr.     Racine,  Wis. 
Desc.  from  natural  casts. 
*1862.  Periechocr.  speciosus  Hall.     (Saccocr.  speciosus).     Paleont.  N.  Y.,  ii,  p. 
205,  PI.  44,  figs.  1  and  2;  also  Roemer,   1860,  Silur.  Fauna  West.  Tenn.,  p. 
42,  PI.  3,  fig.  4.     Niagara  gr.     Western  Tennessee. 
*1861.  Periechocr.   tenuidiscus   Hall,     (Actinocr.  (?)  tennidiscus).     Desc.   New 

Spec.  Pal.  Crin.,  p.  14.  Lower  Burlington  limest.  Burlington,  Iowa. 
*1861.  Periechocr.  Whitei  Hall.  (Actinocr. — Megistocr. — Whitei).  Desc.  New 
Spec  Pal.  Crin.,  p.  2 ;  also  Bost.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  271 ;  Meek  and 
Worthen,  1873,  MegistOCr.  Saococr.  Whitei,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  PL  6,  fig.  1. 
Lower  Burlington  limest.  Burlington,  Iowa. 
The  name  of  this  species  was  printed  originally  Actinocr.  Uegistocr.  ollicn- 
lus,  but  Hall  changed  it  before  publication  in  writing  a«  given  above. 
Among  the  Photogr.  Plates  subsequently  published  by  Hall  of  some  of  his 
new  species  (drawn  by  Whitfield  and  photographed  by  Haines),  we  find  that 
,  through  mistake  fig.  6  on  PL  4  has  been  referred  to  Megistocr.  Whitei. 
This  is  beyond  doubt  Hall's  Actinocr.  glans,  an  entirely  different  form, 
which  has  a  long  slender  anal  tube  and  simple  arms,  the  reverse  of  MegistOCr. 
Whitei,  which  has  an  anal  opening  through  the  test  and  branching  arms. 
The  original,  formerly  in  the  collection  of  Rev.  Wm.  H.  Barris,  and  now  in 
the  Museum  of  Comp.  Zoology  at  Cambridge,  was  returned  by  Hall  labeled 
Actinocr.  eryx,  which  is  identical  with  Actinoor.  glans.  The  type  speci- 
men of  Megistocr.  Whitei   is  in  the  Museum  at  Ann  Arbor. 

13.  ABAC0CEI5TJS  Angeliu. 

1878.  Angelin.    Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  19. 

1879.  Zittel.     Handbuch  der  Palseontologie,  i,  p.  373. 

Syn.  Actinocrinus  Goldfuss  (in  part\  1826,     Petref.  Genn.,  i,  p. 
194. 

Ahacocrinus  has  its  closest  affinities  with  Megistocrinus  Owen 
and  Shum.,  from  which  it  differs  in  the  number  of  basals,  and 
perhaps  (?)  in  the  construction  of  the  vault,  which  in  the  former 
is  not  known.  It  differs  from  Periechocrinus  in  being  composed 
of  heavier  plates,  and  in  the  number  of  basals. 

Angelin  places  Ahacocrinus  with  Cor ymbocrinus  into  a.  sepa,ra,te 
famil3\  The  two  agree  remarkably  in  the  arm  structure,  and  both 
have  four  basals ;  but  the  latter  plates  which  in  Ahacocrinus  are 


308  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

large  and  formed  into  a  eup,  in  Corymhocrinus  are  very  small, 
hidden  from  view,  and  located  within  a  deep  funnel  as  in  tlie  case 
of  EucalyptQcrinus.  With  this  genus  and  the  allied  Callicrinus, 
Gorymbocrinus  agrees  in  the  general  construction  of  the  calyx 
so  closely,  that  it  would  be  diflicult  to  distinguish  them  even  gen- 
erically,  unless  the  vault  and  arms  were  preserved.  We  therefore 
arrange  Goi^ymbocrinus  with  the  Calyptocrinidie, 

Zittel  places  Abacocrinus  and  Cromycrinus  both  under  the 
MelocrinidfE. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Body  large,  oblong.  Calyx  ovoid  to  sub- 
globose  ;  composed  of  numerous,  rather  heavy  and  convex  plates  ; 
symmetry  bilateral. 

Basal  disk  convex,  largely  extending  beyond  the  column ;  com- 
posed of  four  unequal  plates,  with  a  shallow  concavity  for  the 
reception  of  the  column.  Primary  radials  3X5,  the  two  proxi- 
mal ones  much  wider  than  high  ;  the  first  pentagonal  or  hex- 
agonal, and  owing  to  the  irregular  number  of  basals,  differing 
somewhat  in  form.  The  second  radials  are  hexagonal,  except  the 
posterior  ones  which  are  pentagonal,  smaller  than  the  first.  The 
third  irregularly  pentagonal  or  hexagonal,  depending  on  the  rela- 
tive size  of  adjoining  interradials,  sometimes  even  heptagonal. . 

Secondary  radials  2  X  10;  comparatively  large,  supporting  two 
rows  of  from  five  to  six  plates  each,  transversely  arranged,  alterna- 
ting with  each  other,  and  laterally'  interlocking.  The  first  series  com- 
paratively higher,  the  succeeding  plates  gradually  decreasing  in 
length  but  increasing  in  width.  The  two  rows  resemble,  and 
evidentl}'  were,  intei'locking  arm  plates,  which  in  geological  times 
and  by  age  became  fixed  and  enclosed  within  the  body ;  they  form 
the  two  main  trunks  of  the  ray,  which  divides  on  becoming  free, 
each  branch  dividing  several  times  again,  but  irregularly  at  uneven 
intervals. 

Arms  branching,  long,  gradually  tapering,  from  the  base  up 
composed  of  two  rows  of  plates,  which  increase  to  four  when  the 
bifurcation  takes  place.     Pinnules  long. 

Interradials  numerous,  with  one  plate  in  the  first,  two  in  the 
second,  and  generally  a  single  one  in  the  third  series,  all  large 
and  nearly  of  equal  size.  The  fourth  series  has  generally  but  one 
plate,  which  is  followed  by  several  other  series  of  smaller  j^lates, 
each  composed  of  from  two  to  three  pieces.  The  first  anal  plate 
is  octangular,  exceedingly  large,  larger  even  than  the  first  radials. 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA.  309 

It  lies  directly  above  one  of  the  basals,  resting  upon  its  truncate 
upper  side.  Second  series  composed  of  three  plates,  the  middle 
one  extending  beyond  the  other  two  ;  the  two  outer  ones  in  line 
with  the  second  series  of  interradials  (not  the  first  as  is  usually 
the  case),  and  rests  against  the  superior  edges  of  the  second  (not 
the  first  radials),  these  again  are  followed  by  five  or  six  rows  of 
plates,  generally  of  three  each,  which  decrease  in  size  upward. 
The  plates  of  the  interaxillary  areae  are  numerous. 

There  is  a  single  large  plate  in  each  of  the  two  first  series,  which, 
together  with  the  upper  interradial  plates,  connect  the  two  main 
arm-trunks  with  the  body  walls.  Construction  of  the  vault 
unknown. 

Column  large,  composed  of  rather  high,  alternately  thicker  and 
thinner  joints. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Abacocrinus,  so  far  as  known,  is  con- 
fined to  the  Upper  Silurian  of  Europe. 

Angelin  places  here  the  following  species : 

1878.  Abacocrinus  Cappelleri  Angelin.  Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  19,  PI.  3,  figs.  S,  8  a. 

Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
1878.  Abacocr.  medius  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  19,  PI.  24,  fig.  1.     Upper 

Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
1878.  Abacocr.  tessellatus  Angl.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  19,  PI.  18,  fig.  6,  and  PI. 

23,  figs.  24,  25.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Swelen. 
1826.  Abacocr.  tesseracontadactylus  G'-ldf.  (Aotinocrinus  tesseracontadactylus), 

Petref.  German,  i,  p.  194,  PI.  59,  fig.  5  ;  Angelin,  1878,  Ababocrinus,  (type 

of  the  genus).    Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p,  19,  PI.  18,  figs.  2,  5,  and  PI.  23,  figs. 

23,  23  a.     Upper  Silur.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

14.  MEGISTOCRINUS  Owen  and  Shumard, 

1852.  Ow.  &  Shum.    U.  S.  Geol.  Rep,  Iowa.  "Wis.  &  Minn,,  p,  594. 

1857,  Lyon,     Proc.  Acad,  Nat.  Set.  Phila.,  p.  412, 

1858,  Hall,     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  1,,  pt.  11,  p.  479, 

1859,  Lyon  «fe  Casseday.     Amer,  Jour  of  Scl,,  vol,  28,  p,  243. 
1862,  White.     Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat,  Hist.,  p.  16, 

1869.  Meek  &  Worth.  (In  part),  Proc.  Acad,  Nat.  Scl.  Phila.,  p,  163. 

1873.  Meek  &  Worth,  (In  part).     Geol.  Rep,  111,  v,  p,  393, 

1876.  White.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat,  Scl.,  Phila.,  p.  29. 

1878.  Barris.     Proc.  Davenport.  Acad.  Nat.  Scl.,  11 ,  p.  285. 

1879.  Zlttel.     Handbuch  der  Palaeontologle,  1,   p.  371    (not  Hall,  1861, 

Bost.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  271  ;  nor  Wlnchell  and  Marcy,  1866, 
Mem.  Bos.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  pp.  87  and  110  =  Periechocrinus), 

Syn,  Aetinocrinus  Hall,  1858,  Geol,  Rep,  Iowa,  1,  pt,  11,  pp,  571  and 
573. 

Syn,  Aetinocrinus  Lyon,  1857.    Geol.  Rep.  Ky.,  ill,  p.  479. 

Syn.  Sagenocrinus  K.ngQ\\n,  1878  (in  part).    Iconogr.  Crin.  p,  8. 


310  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE  ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

This  genus  is  closely  allied  to  Abacocrinus,  but  differs  essen- 
tially in  the  number  of  basals,  and  in  the  disposition  of  the  anal 
plates.  It  differs  from  Periechocrinus  in  the  depressed  form  of 
the  body,  in  the  I'obust  nature  of  its  plates,  and  in  the  construc- 
tion of  the  vault. 

By  former  authors,  and  originally  by  Owen  and  Shnmard,  Megisio- 
crinus  was  referred  subgenerically  to  Actinocrinus.  It  was 
thereby  sufficiently  distinguished  as  long  as  the  majority  of  all 
Actinocrinidffi  were  referred  to  the  genus  Actinocrinus,  but  since 
this  has  been  subdivided  and  restricted  to  a  limited  group,  it  is 
evident  that  Megistocrinus  should  form  a  distinct  genus.  Angelin 
made  it  a  synomym  of  Sagenocrinus  but  this  has  underbasals  and 
single-jointed  branching  arms. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Species  generally  large.  Body  depressed, 
wider  than  high;  calyx  in  form  of  a  cup  or  basin,  of  which  the 
lower  portions,  up  to  the  middle  of  the  first  radials,  form  the 
bottom  part ;  plates  heavy ;  dome  not  much  elevated  ;  symmetry 
bilateral. 

Basals  three,  of  equal  size,  spreading  horizontally  and  producing 
an  equilateral,  hexagonal  disk,  which  is  either  on  the  same  plane 
with  the  surrounding  radials  and  first  anal  plate,  or,  which  forms 
between  those  plates  a  sunken  area  without  any  further  concavity. 
Primary  radials  3X5,  almost  of  like  form,  slightly  decreasing  in 
size  upward  ;  all  wider  than  high,  and  generally  hexagonal.  The 
third  radials  have  an  obtuse  angle,  and  support  from  their  sloping 
sides  a  single  secondary  radial,  which  is  either  axillary  and  suc- 
ceeded by  1  X  2  X  10  tertiar}^  radials,  or  is  followed  by  two  rows 
of  plates  which  are  arranged  transversely,  alternating  with  each 
other  and  interlocking,  and  which,  as  in  Abacocrinus,  form  the 
main  trunks  of  the  arms.  In  species  with  tertiary  radials  these 
support  two  rows  of  plates,  similar  to  those  of  the  preceding 
order,  and  there  are  within  the  body  three  or  four  arm  tranks 
instead  of  two. 

Arms  bifurcating  throughout  their  length,  and  in  a  similar 
manner  as  in  the  preceding  genus.  The  arms,  from  the  body  up, 
are  composed  of  two  rows  of  short  joints,  and  are  fringed  with 
long,  round  pinnules. 

Interradials  numerous ;  one  in  the  first,  two  in  the  second,  and 
three  in  the  third  series,  with  several  more  ranges  of  minute 
pieces  above.     First  anal  plate  in  line  with  the  first  radials,  and 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  311 

of  the  same  form  and  proportions ;  succeeded  by  three  plates  in 
the  second,  three  or  four  in  the  third,  and  a  number  of  irregular 
small  plates  above.  Axillary  pieces  three  or  more,  which,  with 
the  upper  interradial  pieces,  connect  the  lower  portions  of  the  arms 
with  the  body. 

Vault  depressed,  slightl}'^  convex,  composed  of  a  great  number 
of  pieces,  irregularly  arranged,  which  surround  the  considerably 
larger,  and  generally  nodose  or  spiniferous  apical  plates.  The 
central  plate  is  always  very  conspicuous,  and  is  enclosed  either 
directly  by  the  proximal  dome  plates  (but  only  in  very  small 
pieces  and  in  young  specimens),  or  it  is,  more  frequently,  sepa- 
rated from  the  others  by  a  broad  ring  of  small  pieces,  which 
also  separate  the  proximal  plates  from  each  other.  The  first 
radial  dome  plates  are  large,  isolated  and  pushed  near  the  margin 
of  the  ventral  disk.  Anal  opening  on  top  of  a  short  proboscidiform 
protuberance,  which  in  Devonian  species  is  placed  more  or  less 
excentric,  while  in  all  species  from  the  Subcarboniferous  it  is 
strictly  lateral  and  located  within  the  horizon  of  the  arm-bases. 

Column  round,  very  strong,  composed  of  alternately  thicker 
and  thinner  joints,  with  large  lateral  cirrhi  toward  the  lower  end, 
and  an  enormous  root ;  articulating  faces  of  all  columnar  joints 
strongly  marked  with  radiating  lines ;  central  canal  very  large 
and  decidedl}"  pentalobate. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Jfeg'^s/ocr^n^/s  ranges  from  almost  the 
base  of  the  Devonian  to  the  Burlington  limestone,  where  it 
becomes  extinct.     It  is  only  known  from  America. 

We  recognize  the  following  species  : — 

1857.  Megistocrinus  abnormis  Lyon.     (Actinocr.  abnormis).     Geol.  Rep.  Ky.,  Hi, 

p.  479,  PI.  4,  figs.  1  a,  b.     Encrinal  limest.    Devonian.    Louisville,  Ky. 
*1858.  Megistocr.  brevicornis  Hall.    (Actinocr.  brevicomis).     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i, 
pt.  ii,  p.  571,  PI.  10,  figs.  4  a,  b.  Lower  Burlington  limest.  Burlington,  Iowa. 
Sya.  Actinocr.  superlatus  Hall,  1858.     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  ii,  p.  572. 
Syn.  Actinocr.  minor  Hall,  1858.     Ibid.,  p.  573. 
1862.  Megistocr.    crassus  White.     Proc.   Bost.   Soc.   Nat.  Hist.,  ix,  p.  17.     Lower 

Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1862.  Megistocr.  depressus  Hall.     15th  Rep.  N.  York  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  134. 

Hamilton  gr.     Western  N.  York. 
1850.  Megistocr.  Evansii  Owen  and  Shum,  (Type  of  the  genus).  Actinocr.  Evansii. 
Jour.   Acad.   Nat.  Sci.   Phila.   (new   ser.),  vol.  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  68;   Megistocr. 
Evansii,  1852,  U.  S.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  Wise  and  Minn.,  p.  591,  PI.  5  A,  figs. 
3  a,  b.     Lower  and  Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  Megistocr.  plenus  White.     Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  ix,  p.  16. 
Syn.  Megistocr.  parvirostris  Meek  and  AVorth.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 
p.  165;  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  vol.  v,  p.  396,  PI.  6,  fig.  7. 


312  PROCEEDINOS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

Megistocr.  Evansii  was  desnribed  from  the  Lower,  and  M.  plenus,  and  M.  par- 
virostris  from  the  Upper  Burlington  limestone.  The  latter  is  evidently  only 
a  young  specimen  of  M.  plenus,  which  cannot  be  distinguished  sufficiently 
from  the  lower  bed  form.  It  is  highly  probable  that  M.  brevicomis  is  like- 
wise a  young  stage  of  M.  Evansii. 
1876.  Megistocr.  Farnsworthi  White.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  29.  Hamil- 
ton gr.,  Devon.     Solen  and  Iowa  City,  Iowa. 

1857.  Megistocr.  Knappi  Lyon.     Proe.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  412,  PI.  4,  figs.  6 

a,  b.     Upper  Helderberg,  Louisville,  Ky. 

1858.  Megistocr.  latus  Hall.     Ueol.  Rep.  Iowa,  vol.  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  480,  PI.  1,  figs.  1  a,  b. 

Hamiltiin  gr.     New  Bufi'alo,  Iowa. 
1S78.  Megistocr.  nodosus  Barris.     Proc.  Davenport  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  voL  ii,  p.  285, 

PI.  2,  fig.  4.     Encrinal  limest.     Near  Davenport,  Iowa. 
1862.  Megistocr.  Ontario   Hall.     15th   Rep.  N.  York  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  136. 

Hamilton  gr.     Western  New  York. 
1869.  Megistocr.  rugosus  Lyon   and  Cass.     Amer.    Journ.   Sci.,    vol.   28,   p.    243. 

Encrinal  limest.     Louisville,  Ky. 
1361.  Megistocr.  spinosulus  Lyon.     Proc.  Acad.   Nat.   Sci.  Phila.,  p.  413,  PI.  4, 

fig?.  7  a,  b.     Upper  Helderberg  gr.     Louisville,  Ky. 
Either  this  species  is  incorrectly  figured,  or  it  does  not  belong  here.     It  slightly 

re-embles  Hadrocrinus  Lyon. 

e.   ACTINOCRINITES. 

15.  ACTINOCRINUS   Miller.i 

1821.  Miller.     History  of  the  Crinoidea,  p.  90. 

1844.  McCoy.    Synop.  Carb.  Foss.  Ireland. 

1853.  De  Koninck  and  Lehon.     Rec.  Crin.  Belg.,  p.  125. 

1855.  Roemer.     Lethsea  Geogn.  (Ausg.  3),  p.  246. 

1866.  Meek  and  Worthen.     Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  149. 

1869.  Meek  and  Worthen.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  153. 

1878.  Meek  and  Worthen.     Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  340. 

1878.  Wachsm.  and  Spr.    Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  241. 

1878.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Palaeontologie,  i,  p.  369, 

Not  Angelin,  1878.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suae,  p.  6. 

Under  Aclinocrinus  a  very  large  number  of  forms  have  been 
described  from  America  and  Europe,  and  from  the  Upper  Silurian 
to  near  the  close  of  the  Subcarboniferous,  which  were  afterwards 
referred  to  independent  genera.  There  can  be,  however,  no  doubt 
as  to  the  group  which  should  keep  the  name,  as  fortunately  all  of 

'  In  the  list  of  references  we  quote  only  those  publications  which  have  a 
direct  or  indirect  bearing  upon  the  present,  greatly  restricted  form  of  the 
genus.  The  following  writers  embraced  with  it,  more  or  less,  the  entire 
family  :  Agassiz,  1835  ;  Goldfuss,  1826-1831  ;  Phillips,  1886-1839;  McCoy, 
1844 ;  Austin,  1842  ;  D'Orbigny,  1850  ;  Owen  and  Schumird,  1850-1852  ; 
de  Kon.  and  Lehon,  1853 ;  Shumard,  1855  and  1866  ;  Pictet,  1857  ;  Joh. 
Miiller,  1857  ;  Hall,  1858,  1860  and  1861  ;  McChesney,  1860  ;  Schultze,  1867. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  313 

Miller's  tj'pical  species,  with  a  single  exception,  belong  to  the 
same  division,  and  his  A.  triacontadacttjlus  and  A.  j)oly  dactyl  us 
must  form  the  t3pes.'  The  genus  Actinocrinus,  as  amended  by 
Meek  and  Worthen,  and  as  it  is  now  understood,  embraces  almost 
the  majority  of  all  European  Actinocrinidae,  while  it  includes  in 
this  country,  although  represented  by  even  more  species,  only  a 
comparatively  small  portion  of  the  general  representation  of  the 
famil}'. 

Meek  and  Worthen,  after  carefully  restricting  the  genus,  sepa- 
rate it  in  vols,  ii  and  v  of  the  Illinois  Report  into  two  sections : 

A.  The  arms  given  otf  directly  from  the  body  and  forming  a 
continuous  ring  around  it ;  the  divisions  of  the  ray  taking  place 
in  the  calyx  proper,  which  has  a  more  or  less  subconical  form. 

B.  The  radials,  from  the  third  primary  up,  bend  abruptly  out- 
ward, forming  protruding  lobes,  which  at  the  interradial  spaces 
produce  deep  sinuses.  The  divisions  take  place  in  the  lobes, 
which  frequently  are  extended  into  free  rays,  and  these  giving  off 
the  arms. 

Looking  at  the  species  of  the  two  sections,  and  particularl}-  at 
A.  proboscidialis  with  only  twenty  arms  on  the  one  hand,  and  A. 
Loivei  with  fifty  or  sixty  arms  on  the  other ;  these  distinctions 
seem  to  acquire  almost  generic  value  ;  but  comparing  species  with 
a  njore  nearly  equal  number  of  arms,  it  will  be  found  that  the 
division  cannot  be  carried  out  practically,  at  least  not  among 
the  European  species,  which  in  the  majority  of  eases  form  alink 
between  the  two  extremes  of  the  American  species. 

The  genus  Actinocrinus  has  frequently  been  confounded  with 
Batocrinus,  and  neither  Casseday,  the  founder  of  the  latter,  nor 
Meek  and  Worthen,  who  recognize  it,  have  pointed  out  any  dis- 
tinctions which  warrant  their  generic  division.  Such,  however,  do 
exist,  as  we  hope  to  prove. 

In  Actinocrinus  and  other  Actinocrinites,  the  anal  area,  as  a 
rule,  has  but  a  single  special  anal  plate,  and  this  located  between 
the  two  first  primary  radials.  There  are  two  plates  in  the  second 
series  which  are  in  line  with — and  take  the  place  of — the  larger  first 

'  Roemerinl855  restricted  the  genus  Actinocrinus  to  the  Subcarbon- 
iferous,  and  included  in  it  only  such  species  which  at  the  arm  regions  are 
provided  "mit  rundlichen  Falten,"  and  in  which  the  vault  is  elevated 
and  extended  into  a  proboscis.  He  refers  all  Silurian  and  Devonian 
species  previously  described  under  Actinocrinus,  to  distinct  families. 


314  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

interradial  in  other  series,  contrary  to  Batocrinus  and  all  other 
groups  of  the  Actinocrinidae,  which  in  that  series  have  three 
plates,  or,  as  we  express  it,  also  a  special  anal  plate  in  the  second 
series.  In  Batocrinus  the  second  primary  radials  are  linear  and 
quadrangular,  in  Actinocrinus  hexagonal  and  of  a  similar  form  as 
the  first  radials.  The  secondary  radials  in  the  former  contain 
two  or  even  three  pieces,  while  in  the  latter  the  same  order  of 
radials,  and  all  others  above  the  first,  have  but  a  single  series  of 
plates. 

In  Batocrinus  the  arms,  from  the  first  joint  up,  are  composed 
of  a  double  series  of  small  i^ieces,  while  these  plates  in  Actino- 
crinus are  preceded  by  two,  three  or  more  large  cuneate  single 
joints.  In  both  genera  the  species  show  a  great  variability  in  the 
number  of  their  arms,  but  while  in  Actinocrinus  the  whole  number 
of  arms  is  equally  divided  among  the  rays,  in  Batocrinus  the  raj's 
adjoining  the  posterior  side  frequently  have  the  greater  number. 
In  the  former,  all  divisions  of  the  ray  are  given  off  alternately 
from  opposite  sides,  the  branches  remaining  simple ;  in  Bato- 
crinus^ the  divisions  are  equal,  and  each  branch  bifurcates  again ; 
there  are,  however,  rarelj'  more  than  two  divisions  from  each  ray, 
except  toward  the  posterior  side,  where  the  inner  division  of  the 
rays  have  s^saetimes  tw6  additional  bifurcations. 

Closer  than  with  Batocrinus  are  the  relations  with  Gennseo- 
crinus^  which,  as  has  been  stated,  occupies  an  intermediate  position 
between  Actinocrinus  and  Batocrinus,  and  which,  preceding  them 
in  geological  times,  represents  a  link  between  the  two  genera. 

We  place  McCoy's  Fhillijysocrinus  provisionally  under  Actino- 
crinus, which  it  resembles  very  closel}^  in  its  general  habitus.  It 
has  the  same  peculiar  ornamentation,  is  lobed,  has  a  strong  sub- 
central  anal  tube,  nodose  vault-pieces,  but  it  has,  according  to 
description,  four  basals  and  only  2X5  radials.  The  latter  was 
evidently  a  mistake,  most  probably  the  third  radials  were  strongly 
bent  outward  and  not  preserved.  McCoy  had  only  a  single 
specimen  for  description,  and  that  this  was  an  abnormal  one  is 
sulficiently  proved  by  the  presence  of  seven  plates  in  the  second 
range.  It  is  very  possible  that  the  malformation  made  the  addi- 
tional plate  in  the  basal  ring  necessary,  for  there  is  no  other 
specimen  with  four  basals  known  from  the  Subcarboniferous. 
Pictet  refers  Phillipsocrinus  to  llelocrinus,  which  we  cannot 
indorse.  / 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  315 

Generic  Diagnosis Body  turbinate,  more  or  less  lobed  at  the 

arm-regions  ;  calyx  beautifully  ornamented  with  radiating  striae, 
which  concentrate  at  the  middle  of  the  plate,  where  they  form 
into  a  more  or  less  prominent  node  ;  vault  extended  into  a  large 
subcentral  anal  tube. 

Basals  three,  equal,  rather  large,  and  forming  a  shallow  cup,  the 
lower  side  slightly  excavated  for  the  column.  Primarj'^  radials 
3X5,  the  first  larger  than  the  rest,  alternately  hexagonal  and 
heptagonal,  generally  higBer  than  wide ;  the  second  hexagonal, 
smaller  than  the  first,  its  height  almost  as  great  as  its  width  ;  the 
third  pentagonal  and  smaller,  frequently  bent  outward,  sometimes 
abruptl}^  and  forming  the  base  of  a  lateral  extension,  which  gives 
to  the  radial  portions  a  lobed,  and  to  the  general  body  a  stellate 
form.  Secondary  radials  1  X  10,  axillary.  Succeeding  orders  of 
radials  composed  of  a  single  series  of  plates  to  each  division  of 
the  ray,  the  one  axillary,  the  other  simple.  The  simple  plate  is 
succeeded  by  a  number  of  brachials  connected  with  the  body, 
which  jointly  form  a  fixed  branch  in  a  lateral  direction. 

The  axillary  plate  supports  always  toward  the  opposite  side  of 
the  preceding  order  the  next  series  of  radials,  and  so  on  alter- 
nately until  the  full  number  of  arms  of  the  species  is  produced. 
Arms  numerous,  not  bifurcating  in  their  free  state,  or  rarely  so ; 
their  number  very  variable,  ranging  among  the  different  species 
from  not  less  than  twenty  to  fifty  or  more ;  and  these  equally 
divided  among  the  rays.  The  arms  are  long,  rather  heavy,  their 
upper  ends  round  or  somewhat  flattened,  the  tips  infolded.  The}'^ 
are  composed  of  a  double  series  of  narrow  plates,  separated  by  a 
zigzag  suture.  The  pinnules  are  long,  given  off,  like  in  the  case  of 
all  double-jointed  arms,  from  every  joint  and  from  both  rows,  they 
are  laterally  compressed,  with  the  abutting  sides  flat.  The  joints  of 
which  the  pinnules  are  composed  are  long,  and  they  are  provided 
at  their  outer  side,  near  the  middle,  with  a  tooth-like  spine,  some- 
times of  considerable  length,  which  is  curved  upward  in  form  of 
a  hook.  The  inner  side  of  the  joints  is  deeply  grooved,  and 
covered  with  two  rows  of  small  alternate  plates.  The  pinnules 
are  laterally  attached,  and  resemble  a  fine  network  ;  those  of  the 
same  arm  rest  tightly  against  those  of  the  opposite  row,  thus 
closing  the  ventral  furrows  both  of  arm  and  pinnules,  in  case  the 
arms  are  folded. 

The  interradials  generally  consist  of  three  large  plates,  almost 


316  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

of  equal  size.  There  is  one  in  the  first,  and  two  in  the  suc- 
ceeding series,  the  third  series  consisting  either  of  one  large  or  of 
two  comparatively  small  pieces,  a  fourth  series  is  but  rarely  ob- 
served. The  posterior  side  has  a  special  anal  plate  in  line 
with  the  first  primary  radials,  and  is  of  equal  size  with  them.. 
There  are  two  plates  in  the  second,  smaller  than  the  first  inter- 
radial  at  the  other  sides,  and  one,  two  or  three  plates  in  the 
succeeding  series,  Interaxillary  plates  may  be  present  or  absent, 
their  number  never  exceeds  three. 

The  vault  is  composed  of  rather  conspicuous  plates,  all  proxi- 
mal and  radial  dome  plates  nodose  or  tuberculous,  the  others 
merely  convex,  with  the  exception  of  the  centre  plate,  which  is 
prominent,  larger  than  the  rest,  and  which  toward  the  anteiior 
side  forms  the  base  of  the  anal  tube.  The  tube  is  almost  central, 
strong,  composed  of  heavy  pieces,  and  sometimes  extends  bej^ond 
the  limits  of  the  arms. 

Inner  floor  of  the  vault,  along  the  interpalmar  spaces,  strength- 
ened by  braces,  which  increase  in  thickness  outward,  leaving  open 
galleries  which  diverge  to  the  arm  bases.  There  is  a  respiratory  (?) 
pore  apparently  at  the  side  of  each  arm  opening  ;  they  however, 
are  but  rarely  observed,  owing  to  imperfect  preservation  of  the 
arm  bases. 

Column  long,  moderatel}^  heavy,  its  joints  frequently  sharply 
edged ;  central  canal  round  or  pentalobate,  and  of  medium  size. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — The  genus  is  strictly  Subcarbon- 
iferous,  and  has  been  found  only  in  the  lower  and  middle  portions 
of  that  formation.  In  America  it  does  not  extend  vertically 
beyond  the  Keokuk  limestone ;  geographical  distribution  wide. 

We  recognize  the  following  species  : — 

1853.  Actinocrinus  armatus  De  Koninck  and  Lehon.  Rech.  Crin.  Belg.,  p.  138, 
PI.  4,  figs.  4,  a,  b,  c ;  Meek  and  Worthen,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  149.  Mount, 
limest.     Toiirnay,  Belgium. 

1869.  Actinocr.  asperrimus  Meek  and  Worthen.  (Strotocr.  (1)  asperrimus).  Proc. 
Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  160;  also  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  349,  PI.  8,  fig.  3. 
Lower  Burlington  limestone  (not  Upper,  as  stated  by  Meek  and  Worthen). 
This  is  a  regular  transition  form  between  Aotinocrinus  and  Teleioorinus,  but 
as  the  rim  is  interrupted  not  only  at  the  interradial,  but  also  over  the  inter- 
axillary spaces,  we  arrange  it  with  Actinocrinus. 

1860.  Actinocr.  brontes  Hall  (Sect.  A).     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  47;  Meek  and 

Worthen,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  341.     Keokuk  limest.     Keokuk,  Iowa. 

1861.  Actinocr.  clarus  Hall  (Sect.  B).     Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  2;  also  Bost.  Journ. 

Nat.  Hist.,  p.  277,  Photgr.  PI.  2,  figs.  24,  25  ;  Meek  and  Worthen,  Geol.  Rep. 
HI.,  V,  p.  341.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  317 

1858.  Actinocr.  coelatus  Hall  (Sect.  B).     Geo).  Rep    Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  585,  PI.  10, 
figs.  14,  a,  b;  Meek  and   Worthen,   Geol.   Rep.  Illinois,  v,  p.  341.     Lower 
Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1844.  Actinocr.  constrictus  McCoy  (Sect.  A).     Synop.  Carb.  Foss.  Ireland,  p.  181, 

PI.  27,  fig.  3.     Mount,  limest.     Ireland. 
1844.  Actinocr.  costus  McCoy.     Synop.  Carb.  Foss.  Ireland,  p.  181,  PI.  26,  fig.  2  ; 
de  Kon.  and  Lehon,  1853,  Recher.  Crin.  Belg.,  p.  129,  PI.  3,  figs.  2,  a,  b  and 
PI.  4,  figs.  a-d.     Mount,  limest.     Ireland,  and  Tournay,  Belg. 
It  seems  very  probable  that  A.  costus,  A.  Iffivis  and  A.  tennuis  are  synonyms, 
1864.  Actinocr.  Baphne  Hall  (Sect.  B).     17th  Rep.  N.  York  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p. 
52:  also  1873,  Geol.  Rep.  Ohio  Paleont.,  ii,  p.  162,  PI.  11,  fig.  11.     Waverly 
sandstone.     Richfield,  Ohio. 
1843.  Actinocr.  decadactylus  Portlock  (not  Goldf.  =  Melocr.  decadactylus).  Geol. 

Rep.  Londonderry,  p.  349.     Mount,  limest.     Ireland. 
1853.  Actinocr.  deornatus  de  Kon.  and  Lehon.     Recher.  Crin.  Belg.,  p.  142,  PI.  3, 
figs.  5,  a,  b.     Mount,  limest.     Tournay,  Belg.,  and  Wexford,  Engl. 
Probably  A,  df  ornatus,  A.  stellatus,  A.  dorsatus,  and  perhaps  A.  icosidac- 
tylliB  arc  synonyms. 
1853.  Actinocr.  dorsatus  de  Kon.  and  Lehfn.     Recher.  Crin.  Belg.,  p.  139,  PI.  4, 
figs.  5  a,  b;   Meek  and  Worthen  (Sect.  A),  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  149.    Mount, 
limest.     Tournay,  Belgium. 
«1869.  Actinocr.  ectypus  Meek  and  Worthen.  (Strotocr.  ectypus).  Proe.  Acad.  Nat. 
Sci.  Phila.,  p.'  159;  also  1873,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  253,  PI.  7,  fig.  5.     Lo«er 
Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
This  is  a  good  Actinocrinas,  the  type  specimen  was  depressed,  and  thereby 
had  obtained  an  unnatural  expression  somewhat  like  Strotoorinus 
1861.  Actinocr.    exoerptus  Hall  (Sect.   B).    Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  3;  also,  Bost. 
Jour.  Nat.   Hist.,  p.   276;  Meek  and  Worthen,   Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.   341. 
Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
A  very  doubtful  species,  probably  S'l/n.  of  A.  proboscidialis. 
1860.  Actinocr.  Fosteri  McCbesney  (Sect.  B).     Desc.  New  Pal.  Foss.,  p.  19 ;  also, 
1867,  Chicago  Acad.  Sci.,  p.  14,  PI.  5,  fig.  2;  Meek  and  Worthen,  Geol.  Rep. 
111.,  V,  p.  341.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1860.  Actinocr.    glans    Hall.     Supp.    Geol.    Rep.    Iowa,  p.   16.     Upper   Burlington 
limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syit.  Actinocr.  tholus  Hall,  1860.     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  35. 
Syit.  Actinocr.  eryx  Hall,  1861.     Desc.  New  Pal.  Crin.,  p.  12. 
This  is  a  very  variable  species.     The  plates  of  the  body  ic  the  lower  layers  at 
Burlington  are  scarcely  convex,  higher  up,  almost  tuberculous,  specimens  of 
the  former  kind  being  described  as  A.  glans,  those  of  the  latter  as  A.  tholus. 
As  A.  eryx  Halt   redescribed  a  species  of  A.  glans  in  which  arms  and  anal 
tube  were  preserved,  and  in  his  photographic  plates,  which  were  distributed 
several  years  later.  Hall  unfortunately  confounded  his  A.  eryx  (we  examined 
the  type  specimen  now  in  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  at  Cambridge), 
with  Megistoor.  Whitei,  which  has  branching  in  place  of  simple  arms,  and 
no  anal  tube. 
The  species  deviates  somewhat  in  its  general  habitus  from  Actinocrinus,  and 
we  therefore  place  it  here  with  gome  doubt. 
1S60.  Actinocr.  Hurdianus  McChesney  (Sect.  B).     Desc.  New  Pal.  Foss.,  p.  24; 
also   1867,  Chicago  Acad.  Sci.,  p.  17,  PI.  5,  figs.  24:  Meek   and  Worthen, 
Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  341.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa, 


318  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

.1843.  Aotinoor.  ioosidaotylus  Portlock.  R^p.  on  the  County  of  Londonderry,  p.  348, 
Fl.  15,  fig.  7;  de  Ron.  and  Lehon,  1853,  Recher.  Crin.  Belg.,  p.  141,  PI.  2, 
fig.  4  and  PI.  4,  fig.  6.     Mount,  liuiest.     Engl,  and  Belg. 

1861.  Aotinoor.  infrequens  Hall  (Sect.  B).  Deso.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  14;  Meek  and 
Worthen,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  341.  Lower  Burlington  limest.  Burlington, 
Iowa. 

1860.  Aotinoor.  jagosna  Hall   (Sect.   A).     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  49.     Lower 

portion  of  the  Keokuk  limest.  Keokuk,  Iowa,  and  Warsaw  and  Hamil- 
ton, 111. 
1821.  Aotinoor.  laevis  Miller  (not  Goldfuss  nor  Kloeden).  Hist,  of  Crinoidea, 
p.  105,  and  plates;  Agassiz,  1835,  Mem.  Soo.  Neuchat.,  i,  p.  196  ;  Milne- 
Edwards,  Anira.  s.  vert,  de  Lamk.  (2™"=  ed.),  vol.  ii,  p.  670;  de  Koninck, 
1842,  Anim.  Foss.  du  Terr.  Carb.,  p.  62,  PI.  G,  figs.  4  a,  b,  c  ;  McCoy,  1844 
(with  doubt),  Syn.  Carb.  Foss.  Ireland,  p.  182;  de  Kon.  and  Lebon,  1853, 
Recher.  Crin.  Belg.,  p  152,  PI.  3,  fig.  6.  Mount,  limest.  Tournay,  Belg. 
Syn.  Enorinus  dubius  Schlottheim.  Nachtr.  Petref.,  ii,  p.  100,  PI.  28, 
figs.  2  a,  b. 

1861.  Aotinoor.  Hmabracliiatus  Hall  (Sect,  B).     Do.=c.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  2;  also, 

Bost.  Jour.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  268;  Meek  and  Worthen,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  341. 
Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1860.  Aotinoor.  lobatus  Hall  (Sect.  A).     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  51 ;  Meek  and 

Worthen,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  341.     Keokuk  limest.     Warsaw,  111. 
1869.  Aotinoor.  longus  Meek  and  AVorthen  (Sect.  B).     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 

p.    156;  also,  Geol.   Rep.   111.,  v,   p.  345,  PI.  8,  fig.  1.     Lower  Burlington 

limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1858.  Aotinoor.  Lowei  Hall  (Sect.  A).     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i.  pt.  ii,  p.  611,  PI.  15,  figs. 

5  a,  b;  Meek  and  Worthen,  G'eol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  341.    Keokuk  limest.    Iowa 

and  Illinois. 

1861.  Aotinoor.  laoina  Hall  (Sect.  B).     Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  11.     Lower  Burling- 

ton limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1858.  Aotinoor.  multibraohiatus  Hall  (Sect.  B).     Geol.  Rop.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  580, 

PI.  10,  fig.  10;  Meek  and  Worthen,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  341.     Lower  Bur- 
lington limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  A.  multibraohiatus  var.  eohinatus  Hall,  1861.     Desc.  New  Pal.  Crin., 

p.  10. 
J 857.  Aotinoor.  multiradiatus  Shumard  (Sect.  A).     Trans,  Acad.  Sci.  St.  Louis,  i, 

p.  7,  PI.  1,  fig.  5 ;  Hall,  1858,  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  579,  PI.  10,  fig.  9 ; 

Meek  and  Worthen,   Geol.  Rep.   111.,  v,  p.  341.     Upper  Burlington  limest. 

Burlington,  Iowa. 
1861.  Aotinoor.  opusoulus  Hall  (Sect.  B).     Bost.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  261 ;  Meek 

and    Worthen,    1873,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  341.     Lower  Burlington  limest. 

Burlington,  Iowa. 
1849.  Aotinoor.   oUa  McCoy    (Sect.  A).     Ann.  and  Mag.,  p.  247.     Mount,    limest. 

Derbyshire,  Eng. 
1861.  Aotinoor.  ovatus    Hall  (Sect.  B).     Desc.  New  Pal.  Crin.,  p.  14;    Meek  and 

Worthen,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  341.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington, 

Iowa. 
1869.  Aotinoor.  penioillus  Meek  and  Worthen   (Sect.  A).     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.    Sci. 

Phila.,  p.  155;  also,   1873,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  342,  PL  8,  fig  2.     Lower 

Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF  PHILADELPHIA.  319 

1858.  Actinocr.  pernodosus  Hall  (Sect.  A).    Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  608,  PI. 
15,  figs.   3,   a,   b;  Meek  and  Worthen,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  t,  p.  341.     Keokuk 
limest.     Iowa  and  Illinois. 
1821.  Actinocr.  polydaotylus  Miller  (not  Bonney  =  Mariarr.  pachydactylua  Hall, 
=  Melocr.  pachydaciylui    Wachsm.    and    Spr.).     Hist.    Crinoidea,   p.    103 
Agassiz,  Mem.  Soo.  de  Neuchat.,  i,  p.  197;   Milne-Edwards,  1836,  Aniin.  s. 
vert,  de  Lamk.  (ed.  ii),  vol.  ii,  p.  670;  Bronn,  1836,  Lethaea  Geogn  ,  i,  p 
61,  PI.  4,  fig.  4,  and  p.  670  ;   Phillips,  1836,  Geol.  Yorkshire,  ii,  p.  206,  PI.  4 
figs.  17,  18 ;   de  Koninck,  Anim.  Foss.  Terr.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  51,  PI.  G,  figs.  3 
a,  b;  McCoy,  1844,  Synop.  Carb.  Foss.  Ireland,  p.  183,  and  British  Pal.  Foss 
Mus.  Cambr.,  ii,  p.  121;   de  Kon.  and  Lehon,  1853,  Recher.  Crin.  Belg.,  p 
154,  PI.  4,  fig.  2  ;  Roemer,  .1855,  Letbaea  Geogn.  (Ausg.  3),  p.  248.     Mount 
limest.     Mendip  Hills,  Caldy,  Ireland,  and  Tournay,  Belg. 
1858.  Actinocr.  proboscidialis  Hall  (Sect.  B).     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  584,  PI. 
10,  fig.  13 ;  Meek  and  Worthen,  1873,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  341.     Lower  Bnr- 
lington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syu.  A.  lagina  Hall,  1861.     Desc.  New  Pal.  Crin.,  p.  13. 
Syn.  A.  quaternarias  Hall,  1860.    Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  22. 
Syn.  A.  qnaternaiius  var.  spiniferas  Hall,  1861.  Desc.  New  Pal.  Crin.,  p.  11. 
Syn.  A.  themis  Hall,  1861.     Ibid.,  p.  11. 
1844.  (?)  Actinocr.  pusillus  McCoy.     Synop.  Carb.  Foss.  Ireland,  p.  182,  PI.  26,  fig. 
4.-    Mount,  limest.     Ireland. 
There  is  SDme  doubt  whether  this  species  belongs  to  Aotinocrinus  ;  the  rays 
are  lobed  but  more  like  in  species  of  Doryorinus.     Figure  and  description 
are  too  indistinct  to  ascertain  therefrom  the  form  of  the  anus. 
1861.  Actinocr.  reticulatus  Hall  (Sect.  B).     Desc.  New  Spec.  Crin.,  p.  2;  also  Bost. 
Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  269;  Meek  and  Worthen,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  341. 
Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  A.  locellus  Hall,  1861.     Desc.  New  Pal.  Crin.,  p.  15. 
Syn.  A.  thoas  Hall,  1861.    Ibid.,  p.  11. 
1860.  Actinocr.  scitulas  Meek  and  Worthen  (Sect.  A).     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 
p.  386;  abo  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  202,  Ibid.,  v,  p.  341.     Upper  Burlington 
limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  A.  rusticus   Hall,  1861.     Desc.   New  Sp.   Crin.  p.  2;  also  Bost.  Journ. 

Nat.  Hist.,  p.  267. 
Syn.  A.  Sillimani  Meek  and  Worthen,  1861.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 

p.  134. 
Syn.  A.  Wachsmutlii  White,  1861   (not  1879).     Proc.  Bost.  Acad.  Nat.  Hist., 
vol.  ix,  p.  17. 
1S60.  Actinocr,  sexarmatus  Hall  (Sect.  B).     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  21 ;  Meek 
and  Worthen,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  341,  Photogr.  PI.  3,  fig.  26.     Lower  Bur- 
lington liraest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  A.  securus  Hall,  1861.     Desc.  New  Pal.  Crin  ,  p.  14. 
Syn  A.  thetis  Hall,  1861.     Ibid.,  p.  11. 
18»3.  Actinocr.   stellaris  de  Kon.  and  Lehon.     Recher.  Crin.  Belg.,  p.  456,  PI.  3, 
figs.  3,  a,  b,  and  figs.  4,  a-g ;  also  PI.  4,  fig.  3 ;  Pictet,  Traite  de  Paleont., 
iv,  p.  323,  PI.  101,  fig.  5.     Mount,  limest.     Tournay,  Belg. 
Syn.  A.  Gilbertsoni  de  Koninck  (not  Miller  nor  Phillips).    Anim.  Foss.  du 
Terr.  Carb.  de  Belg.,  p.  50,  PI.  G,  figs.  2,  a,  b,  c. 
1853.  Actinocr.  tennnis  de  Kon.  and  Lehon.     Recher.  Crin.  Belg.,  p.  128,  PI.  2 
figs.  3,  a,  b.     Mount,  limest.     Tournay,  Belg. 


320  PROCEEDINGS  OP  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

1860.  Actinoor.  tennuiscalptus  McChesney  (Sect.  I?).     Dese.  New  Pal.  Foss.,  p.  15  : 

also  Chicaj;!)  Acad.  Sci.,  1867,  vol.  i,  PI.  5,  fig.  11.     Lower  Burlington  liraest. 

Burlington,  Iowa. 
Si/n.  A.  ohloris  Hall.     Dcsc,  New  Sp.  Pal.  Crin.,  p.  3;  also  Best.  Journ.  Nat. 

Hist.,  p.  275. 
This  species  and  A.  daphne  Hall,  were  placed  by  Meek  and  Worthcn  under 

Sect.  A  ;  but  they  belong  more  properly  to  Sect.  B. 
1836.  Actinocr.  tessellatus   Phill.  (Sect.  B).     Geol.  Yorkshire,  p.  206,  PI.  4,  fig.  21. 

Mount,  limest.     Sommerset,  Engl. 

1861.  Actinoor.  thalia  Hall    (Sect.    B).     Desc.    New    Sp.    Crin.,    p.  13;  Meek  and 

Worthen,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  341.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington, 
Iowa. 

1821.  Actinoor.  triacontadaotylus  Miller.  Type  of  the  genus.  HLst.  of  the  Crin- 
oidea,  p.  95,  with  five  plates  ;  Agas-^iz,  1835,  Mem.  Soc.  de  Neuchat.,  i,  p. 
196;  Phillips,  1836,  Geol.  Yorkshire,  p.  206,  PI.  4,  figs.  12,  13;  1843,  Port- 
lock,  Geol.  Rep.  Londonderry,  p.  348;  McCoy,  1844,  Garb.  Foss.  Ireland,  p. 
182  ;  Brit.  Pal.  Foss.  Mus.  Cambr.,  p.  121 ;  De  Kon.  and  Lehon,  1853,  Recher. 
Crin.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  131,  PI.  3,  fig.  1;  Roemer,  1865,  Lethaea  Geogn. 
(Ausg.  3),  p.  248.  Mount,  limest.  Yorkshire,  Mendip  Hills,  near  Bristol, 
Engl.,  and  Tournay,  Belg. 

1853.  Actinocr.  tricuspidatus  de  Kon.  and  Lehon.  Recber.  Crin.  Carb.  Belg.,  p. 
143,  PI.  2,  figs.  5,  a,  b;  Pictet,  1857,  Traitg  de  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  323,  PI.  101, 
fig.  4.     Mount,  limest.     Vise,  Belg. 

1860.  Actinocr,  unicarinatus  Hall  (Sect  A).  Snpp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  48.  Bur- 
lington and  Keokuk.  Transition  bed  (not  Keokuk  bed  proper  as  given  by  Hall). 

1858.  Actinoor.  verrucosus  Hall  (Sect.  A).     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  578,  PI.  10, 
figs.  7  a,  b  ;  Meek  and  Worthen,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  341.     Upper  Burling- 
ton limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Si/n.  A.  asterias  McChesney,  1860.     New  Pal.  Foss.,  p.  9;  also,  1867,  Chicago 
Acad.  !»ci.,  vol.  i,  p.  9,  PI.  6,  fig.  6. 

1875.  Actinocr.  viaticus  White  (Sect.  B).  U.  S.  Surv.  West  of  the  100th  Meridian, 
under  Wheeler,  iv,  Paleont.,  p.  82,  PI.  v,  fig.  1.  (Preliminary  Rep.,  1874) 
Subcarbon.     Nevada. 

16.  TELEIOCRINirS  nov.  gen. 
(rf/.ttoc,  perfect;  Kphm;  a  lily. ) 

Syn.  Actinoerinus  Hall  (in  part),  1858.     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p. 

590,  and  Ibid.  Suppl  ,  1860, 
Syn.  Calathoc rimi s  HaW,  1861  (not  von  Meyer,  1848).     Subgenus  of 

Actinoerinus.     Desc.  New  Pal.  Crin.,  p.  12. 
Syn.  Strotocrinus  (Sect.  B)  Meek  and  Worthen.     Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii, 

p.  188. 

The  above  name  is  proposed  for  a  series  of  species,  which  were 
arranged  b}'^  Meek  and  Worthen  in  a  section  under  Strotocrinus^ 
but  which  differ  from  the  typical  form  of  that  genus  in  being 
provided  with  a  long  anal  tube,  instead  of  having  a  simple  opening 
through  the  vault,  as  in  their  Sect.  A.    The  form  of  the  anus  alone 


1881.]  NATUEAL   SCIENCES   OF  PHILADELPHIA.  321 

would  warrant  only  a  subgeneric  division  of  the  two  groups,  but 
there  are  other  characters  which  have  induced  us  to  separate 
them  generically. 

In  our  general  remarks  upon  the  family,  we  have  shown  that 
Meek  and  Worthen's  Strotocrinus  B,  for  which  we  propose  the 
genus  Teleiocrinus,  in  all  probability,  sprung  off  from  Actino- 
crinus,  Sect.  B;  while  Meek  and  Worthen's  StrotocrinuH  A — 
their  t^-pical  form — is  similarly  related  to  Phijsetocrinus,  which 
we  separate  generically  from  Actinocrinus.  The  lateral  rim, 
therefore,  which  produces  the  remarkable  resemblance,  according 
to  our  interpretation,  in  the  form  of  Strotocrinus  and  Teleiocrinus., 
results  from  modifications  in  the  one  and  the  same  direction,  but 
which  take  place  in  different  groups.  We  propose  the  following : — 
Generic  Diagnosis. — Bod}''  large  ;  calyx  urn-shaped,  subconical 
below ;  the  upper  part,  including  the  higher  orders  of  radials, 
spread  out  horizontally,  and  formed  into  an  extended,  continuous 
rim  around  the  body ;  vault  moderately  convex,  with  a  strong 
subcentral  anal  tube ;  surface  ornamentation  similar  to  Actino- 
crinus, but,  as  a  rule,  very  much  coai-ser,  the  nodes  more 
prominent  than  the  striations,  and  sometimes  almost  entirely 
obscuring  them. 

Basals  three,  large,  massive,  projecting  beyond  the  point  of 
attachment  for  the  column,  and  frequently  extended  into  a 
bipartite  node ;  sutures  deep. 

Primary  radials  3X5;  the  first  large,  as  high  as  wide  ;  the 
second  generally  hexagonal,  of  the  same  proportions  as  the  first 
but  smaller ;  the  third  like  the  second,  but  angular  above  instead 
of  truncate. 

Secondary  radials  1  X  10,  axillary,  supporting  the  two  main 
divisions  of  the  ray.  The  radials  of  all  succeeding  orders  are 
composed  respectivel}^  of  a  single  series  of  pieces,  of  which  only 
one  plate,  of  each  main  division,  in  each  order,  bifurcates  again, 
and  this  alternately  on  opposite  sides,  the  other — opposite — plate 
which  is  never  axillary,  being  succeeded  in  a  direct  line  by  a  row 
of  a  variable  number  of  fixed  arm  plates,  which  form  branches 
within  the  body,  alternatel}^  given  off  from  the  main  trunks.  All 
plates  of  the  lateral  branches  and  main  divisions  are  closely 
joined  with  each  other,  and  with  those  of  the  adjoining  rays,  and 
these  together  form  the  peculiar  rim  which  surrounds  the  body. 
The  plates  of  the  rim  are  nearly  of  equal  size,  convex,  and  formed 

22 


322  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

longitudinally  into  ridges,  which  give  to  the  alternate  branches 
the  aspect  of  fixed  arms,  which  they  evidently  are.  Arm  openings 
large  and  lateral,  with  a  separate  respiratory  (?)  pore  to  each 
opening. 

Interradial,  anal  and  interaxillary  plates  arranged  as  in  Actino- 
cri7ius,  and  scarcely  more  numerous,  they  decrease  in  size  upward, 
the  upper  ones  are  very  minute. 

Dome  convex,  in  form  of  a  ten-rayed  star,  indistinctly  grooved 
between  the  arm  bases.  Yault  constructed  of  larger  and  smaller 
pieces,  wliich  all  decrease  outward.  The  larger  ones,  wiiich 
include  the  apical  and  all  radial  plates,  are  nodose  or  in  part 
spiniferous  ;  the  smaller  ones,  including  interradial  and  other 
accessory  pieces  are  scarcely  convex.  The  inner  floor  of  the 
vault  is  strengthened  by  braces,  which  increase  in  thickness  as 
they  recede  from  the  centre,  and  which,  on  approaching  the  rim, 
extend  to  the  calyx,  and  from  tunneled  passages,  one  to  each  arm 
opening. 

Column  comparatively  slender,  composed  of  short,  round  joints, 
a  part  of  which,  at  regular  intervals,  project  out  bej^ond  the 
others,  and  send  up  and  down,  all  around,  at  equal  distances,  five 
thickened  processes  or  ribs,  apparently  as  a  natural  provision  to 
give  it  strength  without  destroying  its  flexibility.  These  pro- 
cesses give  to  the  column  a  highly  sculptured  and  somewhat  pen- 
tagonal aspect,  especially  in  its  upper  portions,  where  they  are 
prominent  and  almost  continuous  vertically.  But  as  these  pro- 
cesses are  only  attached  to  the  older  and  larger  joints  of  the 
column,  they  gradually  grow  farther  apart  as  they  recede  from 
the  body,  by  the  interpolation  of  the  later  developed  joints,  which 
increase  in  number  downward.  Some  species,  in  place  of  five, 
have  ten  or  more  rows  of  processes  along  the  column. 

Perforation  of  medium  size  ;  pentalobate. 

Geological  Position,  etc. —  Teleiocrinus  is  limited  to  the  Upper 
Burlington  limestone,  and  is  found  only  in  America. 

We  place  here  the  following  species  : — 

*1859.  Teleiocrinus  aegilops  Hall.     (Actinocr.  aegilops)     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa, 

p.  5;  Meek  and  Worthen,  Strotocr.  (B)  aegilops,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  r,  p.  349. 

Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
This  is  probably  a  younger  stage  of  Teleiocr.  umbrosus. 
*I861.  Teleiocr.  althea  Hall.     (Actinocr. — Calathocr. — althea)      Des\  New  Sp. 

Grin.,  p.  1.%  Photogr.  PI.  4,  fig.  13.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington, 

Iowa. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  323 

*1861.  Teleiocr.  clivosus  Hall.     (Actinocr.  clivostis)     Bost.  Journ    Nat.  Hist.,  p. 

274.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington.  Iowa. 
*1S61.  Teleiocr.  erodus  Hall.    (Actinocr.— Calathocr—erodus)     Desc    New  Sp. 

Crin  ,  p.  12;  Meek  and  Worthen,  Strotocr.  (Dj,  (ieol.  Rrp.  111.,  ii,  p.   190. 

Upper  BurlinfTtnn  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
»1861.  Teleiocr.    insculptus    Hill.      (Actinocr.— Calathocr.—insculptus)      Pes'-. 

New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  12;  Meek  and  Worthen,  Strotocr.  (B),  Geol.  Rep     111.,  v, 

p.  348.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
*1S61.  Teleiocr.  liratas  Hall.     (Actinocr.  liratus)     Supp.  (ieol.  Rep.  Iowa,  PI.  4, 

fig.  3;  Meek  and  AVorthen.  Strotocr.  (B)  liratus,  fteol.  Rrp.  111.,  ii,  p.  190; 

Ibid.,  V,  p.  355,  fig.  2.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  Actinocr.  subumbrosus  Hall.    Suppl.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  3. 
*1860.  Teleiocr.  rudis  Hall.     (Actinocr.  rudis)     Supp.   Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.   33. 

Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington.   Iowa. 
*18fil.  Teleiocr.  tenuiradiatus  Hall.     (Actinocr.  tenuiradiatus,  not  1847=  Pnlmn- 

cystites  tenmradiatus.)     Desc.   New   Sp.    Crin.,  p.   12:  Meek  and  Worthen, 

Strotocr.  (B)  tenuiradiatus,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  349.    Upper  Burlirgton 

limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
*1858.  Teleiocr.   umbrosus   Hall.      (Actinocr.  umbrosus)      Type  of   the  genus. 

Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  590,  PI.  11,  figs.  3  a,  b ;  Meek  and  Worthen, 

Strotocr.  (B)  umbrosus,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  190;  Ibid.,  v,  p.  360,  PI.  8, 

fig.  5.     Upper  Burlinston  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
.Syn.   Actinocr.  delicatus  Meek  and  Worthen,  1869.     Proc  Acad.    Nat.  Sci. 

Phila.,  p.  156 :  also  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  343,  PI.  8,  fig.  2. 
This  is  described  from  a  very  young  specimen  of  this  genus,  and  e.xbibits  most 

remarkably  all  the  characteristics  of  Actinocrinus. 

17.  STEGANOCRINUS  Meek  and  Worthen. 
(PL  18,  figs.  3,  4,  5.) 

1866.  Meek  and  Worthen.     Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  195. 

1868.  Meek  and  Worthen.     Ibid.,  ill,  p.  475. 

1878.  Wachsm.  and  Spr.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci,  Phila.,  p.  243. 

1878.  Zittel.     (Subgenus  of  Actinocrinus.)     Handb.  der  Palaeont.,  p.  370. 

Syn.  Actinocrinus  (in  part)  Sbumard,  1855,    Geol.  Rep.    Missouri 

by  Swallow,  pt.  ii,  p.  189;  Hall,  1858,  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii, 

pp.  577,  582 ;  Meek  and  Worthen,   18G0,  Proc.   Acad,   Nat.  Sci. 

Phila.,  p.  387. 

The  relations  of  this  genus  with  Actinocrinus  and  Teleiocrinus 
have  been  fully  discussed  in  our  general  remarks  upon  the  family. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — General  form  of  the  body  like  Actino- 
crinus. The  rays  extended  into  long  tubular  appendages,  which 
bear  the  arms  on  both  sides ;  dome  with  subcentral  anal  tube  ; 
surface  ornamented  b}"  radiating  ridges  passing  from  plate  to 
plate,  and  meeting  in  a  small  tubercle  at  the  middle  of  each. 

Basals  three,  forming  a  low  cup.  Primary  radials  3  X  5,  large  ; 
the  first  much  larger  than  the  others,  hexagonal  and  heptagonal ; 


324  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

the  second  hexagonal,  almost  as  high  as  wide  ;  the  third  axillary, 
but  smaller  hy  half  or  more  than  the  second,  sometimes  forming 
a  part  of  the  arm-like  appendages,  which  in  other  species  begin 
with  the  secondary  radials.  The  secondary  radials  consist  of 
1X2X5  plates  in  each  ray ;  sometimes  both  are  axillary,  and 
as  such  divide  the  ray  into  two  equal  sections,  of  which  each  one 
forms  a  separate  tube,  and  gives  off  lateral  arms  from  either  side  ; 
in  other  cases  only  one  is  a  bifurcating  plate,  which  is  the  larger 
of  the  two,  resting  upon  the  wider  side  of  the  primary  radials, 
while  the  other,  which  is  smaller  and  obliquely  given  off,  is 
truncate  above,  and  supports  an  arm. 

In  the  same  manner  other  series  of  radials  are  given  off  from 
all  succeeding  radial  plates,  on  one  side  a  bifurcating  plate  bear- 
ing a  higher  order  of  radials,  on  the  other  a  lateral  arm,  and  this 
alternately  from  opposite  sides  (PI.  18,  fig.  3).  The  number  of 
radials  is  to  some  extent  indefinite,  they  extend  to  almost  the 
height  of  the  arras,  which  are  long,  and  the  ray  itself  terminates 
finally  in  a  short  arm.  All  the  radials  are  of  the  same  form,  and 
nearl}'-  the  same  size,  decreasing  very  gradually  in  an  upward 
direction.  They  are  wider  than  high,  cuneate  and  alternately 
arranged,  with  the  shorter  side  abutting  against  the  side  of  the 
preceding  arm,  while  the  next  arm  is  given  off  from  the  upper 
oblique  side. 

Arms  long,  of  moderate  thickness,  constructed  like  those  of 
Actinocrinus,  beginning  with  one  or  two  cuneate  pieces,  which 
soon  turn  into  two  series  of  alternate  plates.  Arm  grooves  deep ; 
pinnules  unknown. 

Interradials  three  or  more,  those  of  the  calyx  forming  a  con- 
nection with  the  interradial  plates  in  the  dome.  The  posterior 
side,  like  that  of  all  other  Actinocrinites,  consisting  of  a  single 
special  anal  plate,  which  is  in  line  with — and  has  the  size  of —the 
first  radials;  it  supports  two  plates  in  the  second,  and  generally 
three  in  the  third  series. 

Yault  highly  elevated  to  moderately  convex,  composed  of  a 
variable  number  of  pieces  ;  centre  and  proximal  dome  plates  not 
distinctly  defined.  The  first  radial  dome  plates,  from  which  the 
brachial  appendages  begin,  are  spiniferous,  and  so  alternately  is 
one-half  of  the  succeeding  plates  which  cover  the  free  rays. 
The  covering  of  these  appendages  consists  of  (two  rows  of  plates, 
side  by  side,  a  larger  and  a  smaller  one,  which  are  so  arranged 


I 


I 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF  PHILADELPHIA.  325 

that  at  each  side  of  the  ray  the  larger  plates  alternate  with  the 
smaller  ones,  and  the  former  abut  laterally  against  an  arm  open- 
ing. The  appendages  are  very  heavy,  composed  of  strong  nodose 
plates ;  their  cross-section,  as  that  of  their  inner  passage,  oval, 
higher  than  wide  (PI.  18,  fig.  5).  At  each  side  of  the  base  of  each 
arm,  there  is  a  respiratory  (?)  pore  ;  that  of  one  side  is  located  at 
some  distance  from  the  arm  openings,  the  other  and  smaller  one 
lies  close  to  it.  The  pores  are  so  arranged  that  the  larger  ones 
stand  a,t  one  side  of  the  appendages  in  front,  at  the  other  behind 
the  arm  with  which  the}'  are  connected.  Similar  pores  are  placed 
beside  the  proximal  arms,  but  these  pass  directly  through  the 
main  body.  Anal  tube  long,  subcentral,  composed  of  nodose 
pieces.  Column  round,  of  moderate  size ;  central  canal  of  medium 
width,  pentalobate. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — Steganocrinus,  so  far  as  known,  is 
restricted  to  the  age  of  the  Burlington  limestone,  and  has  been 
found  onlj^  in  America. 

We  recognize  the  following  species  : — 

I860.  Steganocrinus  araneolus   Meek  and   Worth.     (Actinocr.  araneolns)   Proc. 

Acad.  Xat.  Soi.  Phila.,  p.  387  ;  Steganocr.  araneolus,  186t;,  (jeol.  Rep.  HI., 

ii,  p.  198,  PI.  15,  fig?.  1  a,  b.     Lovrer  Burlington  limest.      Burlington.  Iowa. 
*185d.  Steganocr.  conoinnus   Shumard.     (Actinocr.   concinnus)   Swallow's   Geol. 

Rep.  Missouri,  pt.  ii,  p.  189,  PI.  A,  fig.  5  ;  Meek  and  Worth.,  1866,  Actinocr. 

concinnus,  Geol.   Rep.  111.,  p.  200,  PI.  15,  figs.  9  a,  b.     Upper  Burl  ngton 

limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  Actinocr.  validus   Meek  and  Wortben,  1860,  Proc.  Acad.  Xat  Sci.  Phila. 

p.  384. 
1858.  Steganocr.  pentagonus  Hall.    Type  of  the  genus.    (Actinocr.  pentagonusj 

Geol.   Rep.   Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  577,  PI.  10,  figs.  6  a,  b ;   Meek   and   Wortheo, 

1866,  Steganocr.  pentagonus,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  198;  Ibid.,  1868,  iii,  p. 

47-1,  PI.  16,  fig.  8.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1858.  Steganocr.  sculptus  Hall.     (Actinocr.  sculptus— not  Miller)  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa, 

i,  pt.  ii,  p.  582,  PI.  10,  figs.  11  a,  b;  Meek  and  Worthen,   1866,   Steganocr. 

sculptus,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  198.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington, 

Iowa. 

18.  AMPHOEACRINUS  Austin. 

1848.  Austin.     Quart.  Jouru.  Geol.  Soc.  London,  iv,  p.  292. 
1873.  Meek  and  Worthen.     Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  386. 

Not  Roemer,  1855.     Lethaea  Geogn.  (Ausg.  3),  p.  250  =  Agarico- 

erinus. 
Not  Hall,  1861.     Bost.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  561  =  Agaricocrinus. 
Not  Meek  and  Worthen.     Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  209  =  Dorycrinus. 
Syn.  Amphora.  Cumberland,  1826.     Reliqu.  Confeerv.,  p.  26. 
Syn.  Actinocrinus  Phillips  lin  part),  1886.     Geol.  Yorkshire,  p.  206. 
Syn.  Actinocrinus  Hall  (in  part),  1860.     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa. 


326  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

Cumberland  proposed  in  1826  the  name  Amphora  for  two  very 
distinct  species,  wliicli  were  distinguished  by  him  by  numbers. 
His  species  No.  1,  represents  a  lobed  species  of  Actinocrinus 
Miller,  while  his  No.  2  is  Amphoracr.  Gilbertsoni  Austin.  Cum- 
berland's descriptions  of  the  genus  (?)  Amphora,  were  evidently 
taken  from  his  first  species,  for  he  describes  it  as  resembling  in 
outer  form  "  a  wine  Amphora  with  five  handles  for  suspension 
and  a  central  neck  to  pour  from,"  which  applies  well  only  to  PL 
C,  fi<'-.  5.  This  species  must  therefore  be  considered  the  type  of 
Amphora  if  taken  in  a  generic  sense,  but  being  a  species  of 
Actinocrinus,  the  name  became  a  synonym,  and  Austin  was 
perfectl}'  at  liberty  to  remodel  it  into  Amphoracrinus,  or  even 
propose  an  entirely  new  name.  Austin's  Amphoracr.  crassus  and 
A.  granulosus,  which  were  mentioned  in  connection  with  the 
genus,  have  never  been  defined.  Goldfuss,  in  1848,  used  the 
name  in  a  specific  sense,  not  being  aware  that  Phillips  had  already, 
in  1836,  adopted  for  Cumberland's  "  ^mp/iora  No.  2  "  Miller's 
MS.  name  "  GilbertsonV^ 

Roemer  and  Hall  have  both  confounded  Amphoracrinus  with 
Agaricocrinus,  with  which  the  form  of  the  body  has  a  slight 
resemblance,  but  from  which  it  differs  material!}^  in  the  arrange- 
ment of  plates ;  in  having  the  radials  laterally  extended ;  in  the 
subcentral  anal  tube,  and  also  in  the  arm  structure. 

Meek  and  Worthen  at  first  brought  Amphoracrinus  into  con- 
nection with  Dorycrinus  Roemer,  from  which  it  differs  as  much 
as  from  Agaricocrinus.  Dorycrinus  has  delicate  arms,  ai'ranged 
in  pairs,  a  comparatively  deep  calyx,  and  a  lateral  anal  opening. 

Amphoracrinus  is  a  somewhat  aberrant  form,  but  its  closest 
affinities  are  evidently  with  the  ActinocrHnites,  with  which  it 
agrees  in  the  lobed  form  of  the  body,  in  the  general  structure  of 
the  vault,  in  the  arrangement  of  the  anal  plates,  and  in  the 
position  of  the  anal  tube ;  while  in  the  depressed  form  of  the 
calyx  it  resembles  the  Agaricocrinites,  and  in  the  arms  it  is 
somewhat  like  the  Periechocrinites. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Body  higher  than  wide,  decidedly  lobed  ; 
symmetry  bilateral.  Calyx  short,  composed  of  comparatively  few 
plates,  lower  portions,  up  to  arm  bases,  from  saueer-shaped  to 
slightly  convex,  but  never  concave.  Dome  highly  elevated,  and 
somewhat  inflated,  especially  toward  the  posterior  side,  which  is 
extended  into  a  subcentral  or  excentric  anal  tube.     Surface  of 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  327 

body  plates,  includiug  dome,  covered  with  peculiar  granules  or 
indistinct  wrinkles. 

Basals  three,  moderately  large,  forming  together  a  shallow 
hexagonal  basin,  the  upper  side  without  re-entering  angles  ;  a  low 
rim  borders  the  columnar  facet.  Primary  radials  3X5;  the  first 
wider  than  high,  much  narrower  at  their  junction  with  the  basals, 
superior  lateral  sides  short ;  second  radials  generally  shorter  than 
the  first,  but  wider  ;  third  radials  wide,  as  high  as  the  second  ;  the 
second  are  arranged  horizontall}^  to  the  vertical  axis  of  the  bodj^, 
while  the  third  sometimes  take  even  a  downward  direction.  In 
the  European  species  only  the  secondary  radials  assume  that 
position ;  in  American  species  the  convexity  of  the  calix  does 
not  extend  beyond  the  first  radials.  The  upper  radials  bend  so 
abruptly  outward,  that  only  their  lower  corners  come  in  contact 
with  the  interradials,  the  plates  themselves  form  the  base  of  a 
lobed  lateral  extension  ;  contrary  to  Agaricocrinus,  in  which  they 
are  flattened  out,  and  form  a  disk  in  connection  with  the  adjoining 
pieces. 

Secondarj'  radials  1  X  10,  either  all  bifurcating,  or  one  side  of 
each  ra}^  only.  In  the  former  case,  each  plate  supports  on  each 
of  its  sloping  sides  a  tertiarj'  radial,  which  in  turn  supports  the 
primary  arms  ;  in  the  other,  one  arm  is  given  off  from  a  secondarj- 
radial.  The  rays,  to  the  base  of  the  arms,  are  spread  out  hori- 
zontally, and  the  arms  curve  upward  very  gradually ;  this  gives 
to  the  specimen,  with  the  arms  attached,  an  unusually  broad 
appearance,  its  width  and  length  being  almost  equal.  Arms 
cylindrical,  strong,  of  nearly  equal  size  to  their  full  length, 
divergent,  simple  or  ramifying,  composed  of  two  series  of  very 
narrow  pieces,  alternately  arranged,  rounded  at  the  back,  with 
zigzag  suture  lines.  In  A.  spinohrachialus  Hall,  in  which  the 
arms  on  becoming  free  remain  simple,  some  of  the  joints  at  each 
side  of  the  arm  are  extended  into  long  lateral  spines,  which  stand 
out  conspicuously  from  both  sides  of  the  arm  bases.  The  lower 
ones  are  short,  but  they  increase  in  length  upward  until  they 
attain  a  length  of  one  and  one-half  the  width  of  the  arm.  The 
spines  are  placed  farther  apart  as  they  increase  in  size,  the 
distance  being  lengthened  each  time  by  one  additional  joint.  In 
species  in  which  the  arms  divide,  the  joints  are  smooth,  and  the 
bifurcation  takes  place  from  the  double-jointed  arms,  as  in  the  case 
of  Periechocrinus^  not  from  single  plates  as  in  Platycrinus,  etc. 


328  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

Interradials  three,  of  moderate  size,  the  two  upper  ones  situated 
within  the  sinus  formed  by  the  extended  rays,  Anals  three  to  four 
large  ones,  succeeded  by  additional  smaller  ones ;  the  first  in  line 
with  the  first  radials;  the  second  series  two,  rarely  three.  In  the 
construction  of  the  anal  side,  Amphoracrinus  forms  a  link  between 
the  Actinocrinites  and  Agaricocrinites.  In  this  respect  it  is 
interesting  to  observe  that  the  second  series  of  plates,  within  the 
limits  of  the  same  species,  has  sometimes  two,  and  sometimes 
three  plates,  but  wherever  the  third  plate  is  present,  it  is  narrower 
and  smaller,  and  touches  the  first  anal  but  slightly;  while  when 
absent,  the  plate  above  them  falls  in  deeply  between  the  two  plates. 

Dome  high,  inflated,  the  interradial  spaces  depressed,  the  radial 
portions  formed  into  broad  ridges,  which  increase  in  prominence 
toward  the  arm  bases.  Central  dome,  and  the  four  large  proximal 
pieces  placed  in  contact  with  each  other,  large,  and  strongly 
spiniferous  (the  spines  in  A.  divergens  Hall  sometimes  attain  a 
length  of  an  inch  and  a-half,  and  are  bi-  or  tri-digitate),  the  two 
smaller  proximal  plates  are  separated  by  a  wide,  somewhat  inflated 
area,  which  supports  an  anal  tube.  The  tube  is  located  in  the  rear 
of  the  central  plate  and  is  almost  central,  while  the  central  plate 
is  pushed  somewhat  to  the  anterior  side.  The  tube  is  constructed 
of  plates  similar  to  those  of  the  vault ;  it  is  rather  stout  through- 
out, but  very  short,  its  upper  extremity  rounded,  with  a  small 
subcentral  anal  opening,  which  is  surrounded  by  plates  and  spines, 
similar  to  those  which  surmount  the  vault  at  the  base  of  the  tube, 
but  on  a  smaller  scale.  The  other  plates  of  the  dome  are  of  nearly 
equal  size,  their  sui'face  beautifully  granulated.  Inner  floor  of 
the  vault  as  in  Actinocrinus^  deeply  grooved  along  the  radial 
portions,  and  formed  into  closed  galleries  toward  the  arm  bases. 

Column  round,  constructed  alternately  of  larger  and  smaller 
joints,  whose  lateral  margins  are  sharply  edged ;  central  canal 
small. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — Amphorocrinus  occurs  only  in  the 
lower  strata  of  the  Subcarboniferous — not  beyond  the  age  of  the 
Lower  Burlington  limestone — both  in  America  and  Europe. 

We  recognize  the  following  species  : — 

»1849  (?).  Amphoracrinus  atlas  McCoy.  (Aotinocr  atlas)  Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist. 
(ser.  ii),  vol.  iii,  p.  246;  Roemer,    1865,  Amphoracr.  atlas,  Lethsea  Geogn. 
(Ausg.  3),  p.  250.     Mount,  limest.     Holland,  Engl. 
Perhaps  Syn.  of  Amphoraor.  Gilbertsoni  Austin. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  329 

1860.  Amphoraor.  divergens  Hall.  (Actinoor.  divergens)  Supp.  Geol.  Rep.,  Iowa, 
p.  36.;  Meek  and  Worthen,  1873,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  388,  PI.  6,  fig.  6. 
Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

-%".  Amphoraor .  divergens  var.  multiramosus  Meek  and  Worth.,  1873.  Geol. 
Rep.  111.,  V,  p.  389,  PI.  6,  fig.  6. 

Syn.  Amphoraor.  planobasilis  Hall,  1860.  Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  19, 
PL  4,  figs.  10,  11 ;  Amphoraor.  planobasilis  Meek  and  Worth.,  1873,  Geol. 
Rep.  111.,  V.  p.  388. 

Si/n.  Actinoor.  quadrispinus  White.  Proe.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  ix,  p.  15; 
Amphoraor.  quadrispinus  Meek  and  Worthen.  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  388. 
1821.  Amphoraor.  Gilbertsoni  Miller  (not  de  Koninck).  Type  of  the  genus..  Aoti- 
nocr.  Gilbertsoni  (Philips,  1836,  Geol.  of  Yorkshire,  p.  206,  PI.  4,  fig.  19; 
Austin,  1842,  Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  x,  p.  109 ;  Amphoraor.  Gilbertsoni. 
Quart.  Journ.  Geol.  Soc.  London,  iv,  p.  292  ;  Bronn,  1860,  Klassen  d.  Thier- 
reichs,  ii,  PI.  28,  fig.  2;  Quenstedt,  1862,  Handb.  d.  Petref.,  p.  619,  PI.  54, 
figs.  24  a,  b.     Subcarboniferous.     Florence  Court,  Ireland. 

Syn.  Amphora  No.  2.     Cumberland,  1826,  Reliquiae  Conservata,  p.  36. 

Syn.  Melocr.  amphora  Goldfuss,  1838.     Nova  Acta  Ac.  Leop.,  xix,  p.  341. 

Syn.  Aotinocr.  amphora  Portlock,  1843.  Rep.  Geol.  Londonderry,  PI.  20, 
figs.  4  a,  and  5  a,  b;  McCoy,  1844,  Synops.  Pal.  Fo.ss.  Ireland,  p.  181. 
1860.  Amphoraor.  spinohrachiatus  Hall.  (Aotinoor.  spinobraohiatus)  Supp.  Geol. 
Rep.  Iowa,  p.  6;  Meek  and  Worthen,  1873.  Amphoraor.  spinobraohiatus, 
Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  388,  PI.  6,  fig.  5.  Lower  Burlington  limest.  Burling- 
ton, Iowa. 

St/n.  Aotinocr.  inflatus  Hall,  1860.  Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  20,  (not  Aoti- 
noor. (Amphoraor.)  inflatus  Hall,  1861  =  Agaricoor.  inflatus) ;  Meek  and 
Worthen,  1873,  Amphoraor.  (?)  inflatus,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  388.  Lower 
Burlington  limest.  Burlington,  Iowa 
*1864.  Amphoraor.  viminalis  Hall  (Aotinocr.  viminalis).  17th  Rep.  N.  York  St. 
Cab.  Nat.  Higt.,  p.  64;  Geol.  Rep.  Ohio,  Paleont.,  ii,  p.  165,  PI.  11,  figs.  12-14. 
Waverly  gr.     Richfield,  Ohio. 


19.  PHYSETOCKINUS  Meek  and  Worthen. 

(PI.  19,  fig.  5). 

1869.  Meek  and  Worthen  (subgenus  of  Strotoeriuws) .    Proc.  Acad.  Nat. 

Scl.Phila.,  p.  158. 
1873.  Meek  and  Worthen.     Geol.  Rep.  111.,  V,  p.  349. 
(Described  by  Hall  under  Actinocrinus.) 

Physetocrinus  was  proposed  \)y  Meek  and  "Worthen  as  a  sub- 
genus of  Strotocrinus,  on  account  of  its  close  affinities  with  their 
Strotocrinus  Sect.  A,  both  having  a  simple  anal  opening  through 
the  vault.  They  thus  separate  Physetocrinus  generically  from 
Actinocrinus,  but  they  place  Strotocrinus  and  our  Teleiocrinus, 
although  these  differ  in  the  same  characters,  as  mere  sections  under 
the  same  generic  form.  Meek  and  Worthen  evidently  made  the  rim 
the  criterion  for  the  generic  division.     This  we  acknowledge  to  be 


330  PROOEEDINOS   OF   THE   ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

a  good  character,  but  it  must  not  be  used  to  unite  two  groups, 
otherwise  distinct,  in  which  the  rim  has  been  independently 
developed,  by  modifications  under  similar  conditions. 

Physetocrinus  diflEers  from  Actinocrinus  in  the  form  and  con- 
struction of  the  vault,  in  having  no  anal  tube  ;  in  having  pores 
along  the  radial  portions  of  the  dome,  and  in  possessing  no  hook- 
like projections  along  the  pinnules. 

Generic  Diagnosis, — Body  large,  wider  than  high  ;  calyx  semi- 
ovate,  much  higher  than  the  dome,  which  is  depressed,  convex,  or 
almost  straight ;  plates  ornamented  with  beautiful  striiB  and  with 
a  deep  indentation  at  each  corner  of  the  plates. 

Basals  three,  large,  truncate  below,  projecting  out  from  the 
body,  and  forming  together  a  low  cup.  Primary  radials  3  X  5,  of 
nearly  equal  size,  the  upper  supporting  1X2X5  comparatively 
large  secondary  radials,  which  all  bifurcate  and  support  the  two 
main  divisions  of  the  Yay.  These  extend  out  from  the  body,  and 
throw  off  on  both  sides  lateral  branches  from  each  plate  as  in 
Actinocrinus,  which  on  becoming  free  turn  into  arms.  The  five 
main  rays,  their  divisions,  and  every  branch,  are  separated  by 
small  pieces,  which  toward  the  arm  bases  form  deep  sinuses, 
extending  deeply  into  the  vault,  and  giving  to  the  surface  that 
corrugated  aspect  which  is  so  characteristic  of  this  genus. 

Interradial  plates  more  numerous  than  in  Actinocrinus;  they 
consist  of  one  in  the  first,  and  two  in  each  succeeding  series,  grad- 
ually decreasing  in  size.  The  upper  plates,  which  are  minute,  join 
with  the  plates  of  the  vault,  to  form  the  depi-essions  between  the 
main  rays.  There  are  three,  five,  or  more  interaxillary  pieces, 
which,  connecting  with  the  vault,  form  the  sinuses  between  the 
main  division  of  the  ray,  while  one  or  more  interbrachial  plates, 
in  a  similar  manner,  separate  the  lateral  branches. 

Anal  area  somewhat  wider,  and  the  sinus  between  the  adjoining 
rays  a  little  deeper  than  in  the  other  four  interradial  fields ;  it 
is  composed  of  one  large  special  plate  in  line  with  the  first  radials, 
two  smaller  plates  in  the  second,  and  generally  three  plates  in  the 
succeeding  series. 

Yault  composed  of  rather  delicate,  extremely  small  tuberculous 
pieces,  which  are  disposed  apparently  without  order  or  regu- 
larity ;  only  the  proximal  dome  plates  being  distinguishable. 
There  are  small  braces  on  the  inner  side  of  the  floor,  and  the 
entire  vault  is  bent  so  as  to  form,  in  connection  with  the  braces,  in 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  331 

the  iuterradial  and  interbrachial  spaces,  natural  ridges,  which 
at  the  inner  side  constitute  grooves  or  open  galleries  for  the 
receiDtion  of  the  ambulacral  tubes.  It  is  a  remarkable  feature  of 
this  genus,  that  the  inner  floor  within  the  grooves  is  lined  with 
indentations,  which  evidently  formed  passages  through  the  vault, 
perhaps  in  connection  with  the  hydrospires,  and  either  communi- 
cated with  the  surrounding  element  or  with  soft  appendages. 
These  indentations  have  been  observed  only  in  Physetocrinus  and 
Strotocrinus  (not  Teleiocrinus],  but  in  several  species,  and  hence 
may  be  considered  a  good  generic  distinction.  They  are  located 
between  the  sutures  along  the  middle  series  of  plates,  and  are 
best  observed  in  natural  casts  (PI.  19,  fig.  5),  in  which  they  form 
little  tubercles,  which  extend  to  the  arm  bases. 

Anus  in  form  of  a  circular  opening  through  the  vault,  surrounded 
by  very  minute  plates,  which  were  somewhat  flexible,  for  they  bulge 
out  frequently  into  a  small  protuberance. 

Arms  long,  the  sides  somewhat  angular ;  constructed  of  two 
series  of  pieces;  pinnules  composed  of  slender  joints  (without 
hooks),  closely  arranged. 

Column  like  that  of  Actinocrinus. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — Physetocrinus  has  been  discovered 
only  in  America,  and  in  rocks  of  the  age  of  the  Burlington  lime- 
stone. 

We  recognize  the  following  species : — 

1S69.  Physetocrinus  asper  Meek  and  Worthen.     (Strotocr. — Physetoor. — asper) 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  161 ;  also  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  351,  PI.  7,  fig. 
1.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1869.  Physetoor.  dilatatus  Meek.    (Strotocr. — Physetocr. — dilatatus)  Proc  Acad. 
Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  162;  also  Geal.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  36:!,  PI.  10,  fig.  6.     Upper 
Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1S5S.  Physetocr.  ornatus  Hall.    (Actinocr.  ornatus)     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p. 
583,   PI.   10,  fig.  12;  Meek  and   Worthen,  1873,  Geol.  Rep.  III.,  v,  p.  349, 
Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Io»a. 
Syn.  Actinocr.  senarius  Hall,  1860.     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  25. 
1858.  Physetocr.  ventricosus  Hall.     Type  of  the  genus.     (Actinocr.  ventricosus) 
Geol.    Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  595,  PI.  11,  figs.  6  a,  b  ;  Meek  and  Worthen, 
Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  349.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Si/n.  Actinocr.  ventricosus   var.  internodius   Hall,   1861.    Desc.  New  Sp. 

Crin.,  p.  3;  also  Bost.  Journ.  Na'.  Hist.,  p.  278. 
Syn.  Actinocr,  var.  reticulatus  1861.     Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  3. 
Syn.  Actinocr.  var.  cancellatus.     Bost.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  279. 
S.n.  Actinocr.  subventricosus   McChesney,  1860.      New  Pal.  Foss.,  p.  21; 
also  1S69,  Chicago  Acad.  S;i.,  i,  i)t.  i,  p.  16,  PI.  4,  fig.  6;  Meek  and  Worthen, 
Geol,  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  349, 


332  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

20.  STROTOCRINUS  Meek  and  Worthcn. 

(PI.  18,  figs.  1,  2.) 

1806.  Meek  and  Worthen  (in  part,  Sect.  A).     Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  188. 

1866.  Meek  and  Woithen.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  253. 

1869,  Meek  and  Worthen.     Ibid.,  p.  158. 

1873.  Meek  and  Worthen.     Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  347. 

1878.  Zittel.     (Subgenus  of  Actinocr.)     Handb.  d.  Palaeont.,  p.  370. 

Syn,  Actinocrinus  (in  part)  Hall,  1860  and  61 ;   Meek  and  Worthen, 

1861. 
Syn.  Calathocrinun 'Ksl\.     (Subgenus  of  J.c<i»(?mwM8.)     1861,  Desc. 
New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  13  (not  von  Meyer,  1848). 

The  relations  of  this  genus  with  Teleiocrinus — Meek  and 
Worthen's  Strotocrinus  B — have  been  sufficiently  discussed,  also 
with  Physetocrinns,  and  so  we  offer  without  remarks  our 

Revised  Generic  Diagnosis. — Body  extremely  large,  the  lower 
portions  conical,  the  upper  spread  horizontally,  forming  a  con- 
tinuous rim  surmounting  the  cone  ;  dome  flat  or  slightly  convex, 
without  anal  tube ;  surface  of  plates  beautifully  striated. 

Basals  three,  large,  of  equal  size,  forming  a  cup  which  is 
truncate  below.  Primary  radials  3X5;  the  first  larger,  higher 
than  wide  ;  second  and  third  of  nearly  equal  size.  The  third 
radials  give  off  1X2X5  secondary  radials,  all  bifurcating  plates, 
which  form  the  bases  of  the  two  main  divisions  of  the  ray. 
These  and  all  succeeding  plates  are  spread  out  horizontally,  and 
form  a  part  of  the  rim. 

The  succeeding  orders  of  radials  are  composed  of  1  X  2  plates 
to  each  main  division  of  the  ray,  one  of  them  alwa^^s  axillary,  the 
other  truncate  above.  The  former  gives  off  the  next  number  of 
radials,  while  the  latter  is  succeeded  by  a  number  of  fixed  arm 
plates  which  form  lateral  branches  and  give  off  finally  the  free  arms. 
The  radials  are  so  arranged  that  in  each  succeeding  order,  and 
these  are  numerous,  the  bifurcating  plate  is  placed  always  to  the 
opposite  side,  so  that  the  branches  are  given  off  alternately  from 
opposite  sides  like  pinnules.  The  two  main  trunks  of  each  ray 
extend  in  length  beyond  the  branches,  and  as  both,  the  main  trunks 
and  branches,  are  marked  along  the  median  line  by  a  conspicuous 
ridge  or  elevation,  passing  from  plate  to  plate,  the  branching  of 
the  rays  in  the  rim  is  most  beautifully  indicated.  In  the  forma- 
tion of  the  rim,  the  interradial  and  interaxillary  plates  also  con- 
tribute, and  these  extend  frequently  to  near  the  free  arm  bases. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES    OP   PHILADELPHIA.  333 

The  lateral  branches  either  abut  against  each  other  or  are  partly 
separated  by  small  pieces,  which,  as  we  suggested,  are  rudiments 
of  earl}"^  pinnules. 

Interradials,  anals,  and  interaxillary  plates  arranged  as  in  the 
preceding  genus,  but  they  are  more  numerous,  and,  contrary  to 
Teleiocrinus,  extend  far  into  the  rim. 

Yault  depressed,  convex  or  more  frequently  flat,  and  only  near 
the  arm  bases  somewhat  rounded,  the  spaces  along  the  ten  main 
divisions  somewhat  elevated  above  the  general  plane.  The  disk 
is  paved  by  many  hundreds  of  small  polygonal  pieces,  which  de- 
crease in  size  toward  the  arms,  and  which  at  the  outer  points  of 
the  Ta,ys  become  almost  microscopic.  The  apical  plates  are  larger, 
and  are  separated  from  each  other,  but  not  otherwise  distinguished^ 
from  the  other  plates,  and  hence  are  not  easily  identified. 

Anus  in  form  of  a  simple  opening  through  the  vault.  The 
inner  floor  of  the  vault  is  constructed  similar  to  that  of  Physeto- 
crinus,  and  has  similar  indentations  (pores?)  along  the  grooves; 
but  the  divisions  of  the  ray,  within  the  rim,  are  separated  as  in 
Teleiocrinus  by  partitions,  and  thus  are  formed  into  regular  ducts, 
which  diverge  until  there  is  a  separate  passage  to  each  ray.  Arm 
openings  laterally  arranged  around  the  rim,  each  one  with  a 
respiratory(?)  pore  aside  of  it.  Arms  long,  comparatively  thin, 
not  bifurcating  in  their  free  state ;  pinnules  long,  composed  of 
slender  joints. 

Column  round,  not  large  in  proportion  to  the  size  of  the  speci- 
men, without  external  rips  or  thickened  processes ;  central  canal 
of  medium  size,  pentagonal. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Strotocrinus  seems  to  be  limited  to 
the  Subcarboniferous  of  the  Mississippi  valle}',  and  is  here  found 
onlj^  in  a  small  belt  at  the  middle  portion  of  the  Upper  Burlington 
limestone,  where  it  seems  to  have  floiirished  in  great  pi'ofusion, 
but  none  reached  up  to  the  Keokuk  Transition  bed.^  The  two  or 
three  species  of  this  genus  belong  to  the  largest  and  most  beau- 
tiful forms  of  the  Palseocrinoidea,  the  body  without  arms  attains 
sometimes  a  height  of  five  inches  by  six  inches  width  along  the 

^  The  species  which  S.  A.  Miller  describes  from  Bloomfleld,  Mo.,  under 
Strotocr.  Bloomfieldensis  is  from  cherty  layers  of  the  Upper  Burlington, 
and  not  from  the  Keokuk  limestone  ;  we  take  it  to  be  a  synonym  of  Strotocr. 
regalis  until  specimens  showing  the  test  prove  the  contrary,  a  diagnosis 
based  upon  the  internal  cast  only,  has  in  our  opinion  very  little  value. 


334  PROCEEDINGS  OP   THE   ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

rim,  the  latter  spread  out  an  inch  and  more  all  around,  while  the 
main  branches  reach  a  length  of  two  inches  and  a-half. 
We  place  here  the  following  species : — 

1859.  Strotocrinus  glyptus  Hall.     (Actinocr.  glyptus)  Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  2  ; 

Meek  and  Worthen,  Strotocr.  glyptus  (Sect.  A),  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  190. 

Upper  Burlington  limestone.     Burlington,  Iowa.     This  is  not  a  Syn.  of  Ac- 

tinoor.  erodus  Hall  as  supposed  by  Meek  and  Worthen. 
1869.  Strotocr.  perumbrosus  Hall.     (Actinocr.  perumbrosus).     Supp.  Geol.  Rep. 

Iowa,  p.  7;  Meek  and  Worthen,  Strotocr.  perumbrosus  (Sect.  A),  (4eol.  Rep. 

111.,  ii,  p.  190;  also  Ibid.,  v,  p.  .S67,  PI.  8,  fig.  4.     Upper  Burlington  lime.«t. 

Burlington,  Iowa.     This  is  probably  a  Syn.  of  Strotocr.  regalis. 
1869.     Strotocr.  regalis   Hall.      (Actinocr.  regalis)  Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  S  ; 

Meek  and  Worthen,  1866,  Strotocr.  regalis,  Geol   Rep.  111.  it,  p.  192.     Upper 

Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Si/ii.  Actinocr.  speciosus  Meek  and  Worthen,  1860,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Philn., 

p.  .386.      (Meek  acknowledged  it  to  be  a  Syn.  of  Strotocrinus  regalis  in 

1866). 
Syn.  Strotocr.  Bloomfieldensis  S.   A.  Miller,  1879,  Jour.   Cincin.   Soc.  Nat. 

Hist,  vol.  ii,  PI.  16,  fig.  6. 


21.  GENN.a:OCRINUS.    Nov.  Gen. 
{yevvaJoc,  of  noble  origin,  nplvov,  a  lily). 

We  propose  the  above  name  for  a  little  group  of  Crinoids  from 
the  Upper  Devonian,  which  cannot  be  satisfactorily  referred  to 
an}'^  established  genus.  In  their  general  construction  they  closely 
resemble  Actinocrinus  and  Physetocrinus,  but  differ  from  both, 
and  in  fact  from  all  Actinocrinites,  in  the  arrangement  of  the  anal 
plates.  The  anal  area  has  in  the  second  series,  like  all  other  Ac- 
tinocrinidfB,  previous  to  the  Subcarboniferous,  three  plates  in 
place  of  two,  agreeing  therein  with  the  Batocrinites,  from  which 
they  differ,  however,  in  the  much  greater  number  both  of  anal  and 
interradial  plates,  the  different  arrangement  of  these  plates, 
which  form  an  unbroken  line  with  the  interradial  vault  pieces,  the 
presence  of  interaxillaries,  the  strongly  lobed  form  of  the  body, 
the  mode  of  bifurcation,  and  in  other  characters.  It  is  possible 
when  the  construction  of  the  vault  and  arms  are  better  known, 
that  Gennseocrinus  should  be  placed  subgenerically  either  under 
Actinocrinus  or  Physefocrimis. 

Generic  Diagnosis — General  form  of  body  wider  than  high, 
lobed  at  the  arm  regions ;  calyx  beautifully  striated,  the  higher 
radials  formed  into  ridges  and  resembling  fixed  arms ;  vault  low 
hemispherical,  composed  of  small,  spiniferous  or  nodose  plates. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  335 

Basals  three,  short,  with  a  tripartite  rim  formed  by  the  projec- 
tion of  the  lower  margin  of  the  plates.  Primary  raclials  3x5, 
of  nearl}^  similar  form  but  decreasing  in  size  upward.  The  third 
radial  gives  off  1  X  10  secondary  radials,  and  these  form  the  two 
main  trunks,  of  which  each  one  gives  off,  alternately  throughout 
all  the  bifurcations,  and  from  every  first  joint,  an  axillary,  and 
to  the  opposite  side  a  fixed  arm  plate,  the  one  supporting  the 
next  order  of  radials,  the  other  being  succeeded  by  additional 
arm  plates,  which  on  becoming  free,  pass  into  a  simple  arm. 

Interradials  numerous,  from  five  to  seven  or  more,  the  second 
resting  between  the  second  and  third  primar}^  radials,  the  upper 
ones  being  in  contact  with  the  interradial  plates.  The  space  between 
the  rays  is  wide,  deeply  depressed,  especially  at  the  posterior 
side,  and  this  depression  extends  to  the  vault.  Anal  area  very 
wide,  the  first  plate  in  line  with  the  first  radials,  and  of  their 
size.  There  are  two  plates  in  the  second  range,  three  or  four 
in  the  third,  with  a  large  number  of  small  pieces  above,  which 
imperceptibl}'  connect  with  the  plates  of  the  vault. 

Interaxillary  plates  one  to  three.  Yault  depressed  its  radial 
portions  formed  into  ridges  or  lobes,  which  rapidly  increase  in 
prominence  toward  the  arm  regions.  It  is  composed  of  moder- 
ately small,  apparently  irregularly  arranged  pieces,  which  are 
more  or  less  spiniferous. 

Anus  excentric,  probably  in  form  of  a  simple  opening  through 
the  vault.     Arms  unknown. 

Geological  Position^  etc — Gennseocrinus  is  restricted  to  the 
Hamilton  group  of  America.. 

We  place  here  the  following  species  : — 

*1S62.  Gennaeoorinris  calypso  Hall.    (Actinocr.  calypso)  15th  Rep.  N.  York,  St. 

Cah.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  133.     Hamilton  gr.    Western  N.  Y. 
»1861.  Gennaeoor  Cassedayi  Lyon,    (Actinocr.  Cassedayi)   Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci., 

Phila.,  p.  410,  PI.  4,  figs.  3,  3a.     Encrinal  limesit.     Near  Lousville,  Ky. 
*1862.  Gennseocr.  caulioulus   Hall.     (Actinocr.  cauliculus)    loth  Rep.  N.  York. 

St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  132.     Hamilton  gr.     Western  N.  York. 
*1862.  Gennseocr.  eucharis  Hall.     (Actinocr.  eucharis)  15th  Rep.  N.  York,  St. 

Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  130.     Hamilton  gr.     AVestern  N.  York. 
*I860.  Gennseocr.  Kentuckiensis  Shumard.    Type  of  the  genus.    (Actinocr  Ken- 

tuckiensis)     Am.  Journ.  Sci.  and  Arts.  (ser.  2),  vol.  28,  Septbr.  ISoi),  p.  238, 

Cat.  Pal.  Foss.,  p.  345.     Lower  part  of  Hamilton  gr.     Beargrass  Quarries, 

near  Louisville,  Ky. 
Syn.  Actinocr.  cornigerns  Lyon  &  Cass.,  1859. (not  Hall,  1858). 
*1862.  Gennaeoor.  nyssa  Hall.      (Actinocr.  nyssa).     15th  Rep.  N.  York.  St.  Cab. 

Nat.  Hist.,  p.  129.     Hamilton  gr.     Western  N.  York. 


336  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

*18C2(?)  Gennseoer.  pooillum  Hall.  (Aotinocr.  pocillum).  15th  Rep.  N.York. 
St,  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  134.  Hamilton  gr.  Western  N.  York.  (Thid 
speoiea  probably  belongs  to  some  other  gironp.) 


/.    Batocrinites.. 

22.     BATOCRINUS  Casseday. 

(PI.  18,  fig.  8  and  PI.  19,  fig.  2). 

1854.  Casseday.     Deutsche  Zeitschr.  d.  Greol.  Geaellsch.,  vi,  p.  237. 
1857.  Pictet,     Traite  de  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  324. 

1865.  Meek  and  "Worthen  (Swbgen.  Actinocr).     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci., 

Phila.,  p.  153. 

1866.  Meek  and  Worthen  (Subgenus  of  Actinocr.).     Geol,  Rep.,  111.,  ii,  p. 

150. 
1869.  Meek  and  Worthen.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.,  p.  350. 
1873.  Meek  and  Worthen.     Geol.  Rep.,  111.,  v,  p.  364. 

1878.  Wachsm  and  Spr.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.,  p.  329. 

1879.  Zittel  (Subgenus  of  ^c^i/iocr).  Handb.  Palseont,,,p.  370. 

Syn.  Actinocrinua   (in  part),    Shumard,    Hall,  White,  McChesney, 

Meek  and  Worthen  (prior  to  1865). 
Syn.    Uperoerinus.     Meek  and  Worthen,   1865  (Subgenus  of  Bato- 

crinus.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.,  p.  153. 

The  generic  distinctions  between  Batocrinus  and  Actinocrinus 
have  been  fully  discussed  in  our  remarks  upon  Actinocrinus,  but 
it  remains  yet  to  note  the  somewhat  different  mode  in  which  the 
arms  increase  in  the  two  groups.  We  describe  below  two  new 
species  of  Batocrinus  and  three  of  Eretmocrinus,  from  which  it 
appears  that  in  these  genera,  and  in  the  Batocrinites  generally, 
the  increase  of  arms,  from  one  species  to  another,  is  not  gradually, 
by  the  addition  of  a  single  arm  to  each  ray,  as  in  the  case  of 
Actinocrinus,  but  by  duplicating  the  entire  number  of  arms 
throughout  the  species. 

Meek  and  Worthen  in  1866,  in  adopting  Batocrinus  as  a  genus, 
separated  it  into  subgenera,  and  again  subdivided  the  typical 
form  into  two  sections  :  "  A,  species  in  which  the  arm  openings 
are  directed  outward  ;  B,  in  which  they  are  directed  upwards, 
and  arranged,  more  or  less,  into  groups."  The  position  of  these 
openings  had  evidently  no  important  bearing  upon  the  general 
structure  of  the  crinoid,  only  that  in  the  former  the  ambulacral 
passages  entered  horizontally,  in  the  others  obliquely,  and  this 
difference  is  caused  by  the  greater  or  less  degree  of  prominence 
developed  in  the  uppermost  ring  of  radials. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PniLADELPHIA.  337 

The  name  Uperocrinui^^  in  a  subgeneric  sense,  was  proposed  by 
Meek  and  Worthen  for  species  witli  a  narrow  calyx,  drawn  out  so 
as  to  form  a  kind  of  handle  for  the  upper  portions,  but  was  given 
up  afterwards. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — General  form  of  body  biturbinate,  wheel- 
shaped,  or  globose  ;  calyx  and  vault  of  a  similar  form,  the  former 
composed  of  smooth,  slightl}^  convex  to  strongly  nodose  plates, 
scarcely  ever  striated  ;  the  dome  consisting  of  convex  or  tuber- 
culous pieces,  with  a  strong,  almost  central  anal  tube.  Symmetry 
of  calyx  bilateral. 

Basals  three,  equal,  not  \ery  high,  forming  an  extended  rim 
with  a  concavity  for  the  reception  of  the  column.  Primary  radials 
3X5;  the  first  hexagonal  or  heptagonal,  larger  than  the  second 
and  third  combined ;  the  second  quadrangular,  linear,  always 
narrower  than  the  first,  but  3'et  twice  or  three  times  wider  than 
high,  sometimes  altogether  anchylosed  with  the  third  ;  the  third 
pentangular,  short,  the  lower  lateral  sides  abruptly  spreading  and 
giving  a  greater  width  to  the  median  portions,  the  upper  sides 
supporting  the  higher  radials.  Secondary  radials  2  X  10,  very 
wide,  as  large  as  the  primary  ones ;  those  of  the  second  series 
bifurcating.  The  anterior  ray  has  sometimes  but  two  or  three 
arms,  this  is  frequently  accidental,  but  in  some  species  the  rule. 
Tertiary  radials  2  X  2  X  10,  narrower  than  the  secondary, 
supporting  the  arms. 

In  some  species  the  posterior  rays  support  additional  plates  in 
the  body,  but  only  in  the  division  next  to  the. anal  area,  this  side 
sometimes  having  one,  two  or  three  additional  arms,  while  the 
opposite  division  retains  the  usual  number  of  four.  The  upper 
row  of  plates  is  at  the  outer  face  truncated  for  the  reception  of 
the  arms,  their  upper  sides  being  notched  along  the  median 
portions  for  the  arm  passages.  This  notch  is  joined  by  a  similar 
notch  in  the  corresponding  plates  of  the  dome,  which,  combined 
with  the  other,  forms  an  arm  opening  (PI.  19  ,  fig.  2,  and  PI.  18, 
fig.  8) ;  the  opening  is  oval  in  form,  longer  than  wide,  resting 
within  the  centre  of  a  small  concavity.  The  part  which  extends 
into  the  vault,  follows  the  lateral  edges  of  a  tertiary  radial  dome 
plate.  The  opposite  side  of  the  radial  is  likewise  excavated  to 
receive  a  respiratory  (?)  pore,  which  is  enclosed  on  the  other  side 
by  an  adjoining  interradial  or  interbrachial  piece.  Hence  the 
two  openings  are  separated  by  the  tertiarv  radial  dome  plates, . 

23 


338  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

•whose  width  varies  in  ditferent  si)eeies,  and  according  to  the 
position  which  the  arm  occupies  within  the  ray  (PI.  18,  fig.  8). 
Whenever  the  respiratory  (?)  pore  is  in  connection  with  the  arms 
of  the  inner  part  of  the  ray,  it  is  placed  closer  to  the  arm  opening 
than  pores  whicli  are  placed  toward  the  outer  side.  The  respiratory 
(?)  pores  in  the  Batocrinites  are  exceptionally  large,  sometimes 
attaining  a  width  equal  to  one-third  that  of  the  arm  opening. 
Their  connection  with  the  inner  cavity  has  been  explained 
elsewhere. 

The  interradials  of  the  calyx  are  not  numerous,  varying  from 
one  to  four  or  five,  but  rarely  exceeding  three.  The  first  very  large, 
polj'gonal,  nearly  as  large  as  the  primarj^  radials  ;  it  rests  between 
the  upper  edges  of  the  first  radials,  between  the  second,  and 
against  the  lower  sloping  edges  of  the  third,  and  is  followed  by 
two  or  three  ver^'  much  smaller  pieces.  The  anal  area  has  one 
plate  in  line  with  the  first  radials,  of  about  their  size ;  there  are 
three  plates  in  the  second  series,  and  a  few  more  small  pieces 
above.  None  of  the  plates  of  the  interradial  or  anal  series  connect 
with  the  dome,  from  which  the  interradial  area  of  the  calyx  is 
separated  by  the  tertiary  radials,  which  meet  all  around  laterally. 
There  are  no  interaxillary  plates,  except  in  the  case  of  B.  piano- 
discus  and  occasionally  in  B.  trochiscus,  in  which  the  arm  regions 
are  spread  out  in  width  to  three  times  the  height  of  the  body. 
This  species  has  also  a  greater  number  of  interradials. 

Vault  elevated,  composed  of  comparatively-  large  and  heavy 
pieces,  of  nearly  equal  size,  even  the  apical  plates,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  the  central  plate,  being  but  little  larger  than  the  rest.  The 
centre  piece  and  the  proximal  dome  plates  are  much  crowded 
toward  the  anterior  side,  owing  to  the  nearlj^  central  anal  tube,  of 
which,  on  that  side,  the  large  central  plate  forms  the  base.  The 
tube  is  constructed  of  similar  plates  as  the  vault,  and  very  long, 
sometimes  extending  more  than  twice  the  length  of  the  arms 
beyond  their  tips,  it  is  very  straight  in  all  cases,  and  tapers 
graduall}'  almost  to  a  point,  with  a  narrow  passage  at  the  upper 
end. 

Arms  fi'om  eighteen  to  twenty-six,  or  thirt3'-six  to  fort}',  either 
in  pairs  or  single  from  each  arm  opening,  round,  very  short,  of 
medium  size  and  equal  width  throughout  their  length.  From  the 
body  up,  they  are  composed  of  two  series  of  alternate  pieces,  and 
in  species  which  have  the  double  arm  structui-e,  the  first  of  these 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  3S9 

joints,  without  increasing  in  heiglit,  gives  off,  in  place  of  the  first 
pinnule  in  the  other  species,  a  second  arm,  whicli  passes  into  the 
same  arm  opening  as  its  companion.  Pinnules  composed  of 
slender  joints,  closely  attached  laterall}^  their  sides  flattened, 
their  depth  greater  than  tlieir  width,  with  a  deep  ventral  furrow 
covered  bj-  small  plates. 

Column  round,  composed  of  rather  large  joints  with  more  or 
less  angular  edges ;  perforation  of  moderate  size,  pentangular. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Batocrinus  is  strictly  a  Subcarbon- 
iferous  form.  It  is  exclusively  an  American  genus,  and  embraces 
the  last  survivors  of  the  Actinocrinidse. 

We  place  here  the  following  species  : — 

*1?60.  Batocrinus    aequibrachiatns     McChesney.      (Actinocr.    aequibrachiatus) 

New    Pal.    Foss.,    p.    25:    al?o  Chicago  Acad.  Sci ,  1867,  p.  18;   Meek  and 

Wortbcn,  1873,  Batoor.  aequibrachiatus,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  368.    Upper 

Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  Actinocr.  asteriscas  Meek  and  Worthen,  1860.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci. 

Phila.,  p.   385  ;    also  1866,  Geol.   Rep.   111.,  ii,  p.  207,  PI.  15,  figs.  8  a,  b,  c ; 

also  1873,  Batocr.  asteriscus.  Ibid.,  v,  p.  368. 
.S'yn. .Actinocr.  aequibraobiatus  var.  alatus  Hall.    Desc.   New  Spec.  Crin.. 

1861;  also  Bost.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  263,  Pbotogr.  PI.  3,  figs.  21-23. 
1858.  Batocr.  aequalis  Hall.     (Actinocr.  aeqnalis)    Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p. 

592,  PI.  11,  figs.  4  a,  b:  Meek  and  Worthen,  1873,  Batocr.  aequalis,  Geol. 

Rep.  111.,  V,  p.  367.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  Actinocr.   doris    Hall,   1861.     Desc.   New  Sp.  Crin,,  p.   15;  Meek   and 

Worthen,  1873,  Batocr.  doris,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  367. 
*1860.  Batocr.  andrewsianns   McChesney.     (Actinocr.  andrewsianus)  New  Pal. 

Foss.,  p.  27:  also  1867,  Chicago  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  p.  20,  PI.  6,  fig.  5.     Upper 

Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1S58.  Batocr.  biturbinatus   Hall.    (Actinocr.  bitu^binatus)  Geol.    Rep.  Iowa,    i. 

pt.  ii,  p.  616,  PI.  16,  figs.  5,  6,  a,  b,  c;  Meek  and  Worthen,  Geol.  Rep.  Ill ,  v, 

p.  367.     Keokuk  limest.     Illinois  and  Iowa. 
1860.  Batocr.  calycnlus  Hall.     (Actinocr.  calyculus)  Supp.    Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,   p. 

55,  PI.  1,  figs.  12  a,  h,  c;  Meek  and  Wor'b.,  1873,  Batocr.  calyculus,  Geol. 

Rep.  111.,  V,  p.  367.     Warsaw  limest.    Spurgeon  Hills,  Ind. 
Syn.  Batocr.   calyculus   var.   hardinensis  Meek  and  Worth.,  1866.      Proe. 

Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  253. 
We  doubt  that  the  type  specimen  came  from  the  St.  Louis  limes>t.,  it  would  be 

the   only   example   of    an   Actinocrinoid   being  found   beyond    the   Warsaw 

limest. 
«1860.  Batocr.  Caroli  Hall.    (Actinocr.  Caroli)    Supp.  Gol.  Rep;  Iowa,  p.  54,  PI.  1^ 

fig.  11.     Warsaw  limest.     Warsaw,  111. 
1869.  Batocr.  Cassedayanus   Meek    and   AVorth.     Proc.   Acad.:  Nat.  Sci.   Phila  ,    p. 

353;  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  370,  PL  5,  fig.  1.     Lower  Burlington  limt-st.     Bur- 
lington, Iowa. 


340  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

1855.  Batoor.  Christyi  Shum.  (not  Hall,  1863  =  Periechocr.  Ohrintyi.)  Figurd  in 
Christy's  letters  on  Geol.,  PI.  1,  figs.  1,  2;  Shumard,  Aotinocr.  Christyi, 
Geol.  Rep.  Missouri  by  Swallow,  pt.  ii,  p.  191,  PI.  A,  fig.  3  ;  Meek  and  Worth., 
1873,  Batoor.  Christyi,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  367,  PI.  v,  figs.  4  a,  b  ;  Wachsm. 
and  Spr.,  IS78,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  231.  Upper  Burlington 
limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1860.  Batoor.  clypeatns  Hall.     (Aotinocr.  clypeatus)     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p. 

12,   PI.  .3,  fig.   12;  Meek  and  Worth.,   1867,  Batoor.  olypeaius,  Geol.  Rep. 

111.,  ii,  p.  150.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa 
Syii.  Aotinocr.  inornatus  Hall,  1860.     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  24;  Meek 

and  Worth.,  Batoor.  inornatus,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  367. 
Syn  Aotinocr.  papillatus  Hall,  1860.     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  29,  PI.  3, 

figs.  10,  11  ;  Meek  and  Worth.,  Batocr.  papillatus,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  367. 
1858.  Batocr.  disooideus  Hall.    (Aotinocr.  discoideus)     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii, 

p.  594;  Meek  and  Worth.,  1867,  Aotinocr.  (Batocr.)  discoideus,  Geol.  Rep. 

111.,  ii,  p.  150,  and  1873,  BatOCr.  discoideus,  Ibid.,  v,  p.  367.     Lower  Bur- 
lington liraest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  Aotinocr.  formosus   Hall,   1860.     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  30 ;  Meek 

and  Worth.,  1873,  Batocr.  formosus,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  367. 
Syn.  Actinoor.  subaequalis  McChesney,  1860.    Desc.  Pal.  Foss ,  p.  17;  also 

1867,  Chicago  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  p.  13,  PI   5,  fig.  7;  Meek  and  Worth.,  BatOCr. 

subaequalis,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  367. 

1861.  Batocr.  dodecadactylus  Meek  and  Worth,   (Actinocr.  dodecadaotylus)    Proc. 

Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  131,  and  1866,  Batoor.  dodecadactylus,  Geol. 
Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  205,  PI.  15,  figs.  3  a,  b,  c,  and  Ibid.,  v,  p.  368.  Upper  Bur- 
lington limest.  Burlington,  Iowa. 
This  species  forms  an  exception  to  the  rule  in  having  apparently  only  twelve 
arms.  It  may  possibly  be  a  young  B.  rotundus,  and  that  some  of  the  arms 
branch  off  in  the  free  state. 

*1860.  Batocr.  euconus  Meek  and  Worth.  (Aotinocr. — AUoprosallocr. — euconus) 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  164,  changed  in  1873  to  Batocrinus  (AUo- 
prosaUoorinus  euconus),  Geol.  Rep.  HI.,  v,  p.  368.  Warsaw  limest.  Spur- 
geon  Hills,  Ind. 

1860.  Batocr.  Hageri  McChesney.  (Aotinocr.  Hageri)  New  Pal.  Foss  ,  p.  28;  also 
1867,  Chicago  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  p.  21,  PI.  4,  fig.  1  ;  Meek  and  Worth,  1873, 
Batocr.  Hageri,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  367.  Upper  Burlington  limest.  Bur- 
lington, Iowa. 

1804.  Batocr.  ioosidactylus  Casseday.  (Type  of  the  genus.)  Deutsche  Gtol. 
Gesellsehaft,  vi,  p.  238;  Meek  and  Worth.,  1867,  Aotinocr.  (Batocr.)  ioosi- 
dactylus, Geol.  Rep,  111.,  v,  367.     Warsaw  limest.     Spurgcon  Hills,  Ind. 

*1869.  Batoor.  Indiansenais  Lyon  and  Cass.  (Actinocr,  Indianaensis)  Am.  Journ. 
Sci.  and  Arts,  vol.  29,  p.  75;  Meek  and  Worth  ,  1873,  Actinocr,  Ind^an- 
aensis,  Geol.  Rfp.  111.,  v,  p.  341.     Keokuk  limest.     Crawfordsville,  Ind. 

1854.  Batocr.  irregularis  Casseday.  Deutsche  Geol.  Gesellsehaft,  vi,  p.  238;  Meek 
and  Worthen,  1867,  Geol.  Rep.  III.,  ii,  p.  150;  also  1873.  Ibid.,  v,  p.  367. 
Warsaw  limest.     Spurgeon   Hills,  Ind. 

1860.  Batocr.  lagunculus  Halt.  (Aotinocr.  lagunculu?)  Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa, 
J).  41 ;  Meek  and  Worth.,  Batoor.  lagunculus,  Geol.  Rep.  Ill ,  v,  367.  Keo- 
kuk limest.     Iowa  and  Illinois. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PEnLADELPHTA.  341 

*1S61.  Batoor.  laura  Hall  (Actinoor.  laura).  Dejcr.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  15.  Upper 
Burlington  liinest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1860.  Batocr.  lepidus  Hall  (Actinoor.  lepidus).  Supp.  Geol.  Eep.  Iowa.  p.  32; 
Meek  and  Wor  h.  Batoor.  lepidus,  Geol.  R«p.  111.,  v,  p.  367.  Lower  Bur- 
lington limcst.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1858.  (?).  Batocr.  longirostris  Hall.  (Actinoor.  longirostris)  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i, 
pt.  ii,  p.  589,  PI,  11,  figs.  2,  4  c,  d;  Meek  and  Worth.,  Batocr.  longirostris, 
Geol.  Rep.  111.,  V,  p.  367.  Lower  Burl,  limest.  Burlington,  Iowa.  This  species 
shows  a  marked  departure  from  the  characters  of  the  genus  and  its  reference 
is  not  without  doubt. 

1860.  Batocr.  mundulus  Hall.  (Actinoor  mundulust  Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  39; 
Meek  and  Worth.,  BatOCr.  mundulus,  Ge»\.  Rep.  Ill,,  v,  p.  367.  Keokuk 
limest.     Keokuk,  Iowa. 

1850.  Batocr.  Nashvillae  Troost.  (Actinoor.  Nashvillae)  Cat.  Crin.  Tenn.  (Proc. 
Am.  Assoc,  for  Advanc.  of  Sci.,  p.  60);  Hall,  1858,  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii, 
p.  609,  PI.  15,  fig.  4,  and  PI.  16,  figs.  4  a,  b  ;  Wachsm.  and  Spr.  1878,  Proc. 
Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  234;  Meek  ani  Worth.,  Batocr.  Nashvillae,  Geol. 
Rep.  111.,  V,  p.  368.  Keokuk  limest.  Iowa,  Illinois,  Missouri,  Tennessee  and 
Kentucky. 
Var.  subtractus  White.  (Actinocr.  Nashvillae  var.  subtractus),  Proc.  Bost. 
Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  ix,  p.  16.  Upper  Burlington  limest.  and  Keokuk  Transition 
beds. 

1865.  Batocr.  pistilliformis  Meek  and  Worth.  CBatocr, — Tlperocr. — pistilliformis), 
Proc.  Acal.  Nat.  Sc'.  Phila.,  p.  153;  also  1866,  Actinocr.  (Batocr.  C. 
Tlperocr  )  pistilliformis,  Geol.  Kep.  111.,  ii,  p.  161,  PI.  11,  fig.  8;  Ibid.,  1873, 
V,  p.  367.  The  original  1=  said  to  be  obtained  from  the  Kinderhook  gr.  of 
Marion  Co.,  111.,  but  more  probably  from  the  Burlington  limest.,  and  that  it  is 
a  .S'y-i.  of  B.  pyriformis. 
Syn.  Actinocr.  pyriformis  var.  rudis  Meek  and  Worth.  Proc.  Acad,  Na*.  Sci. 
Phila.  (not  A.  rudis  Hall,  1860). 

1865.  Batocr.  pistillus  Meek  and  Worth.  (Actinocr — Uperoor. — pistillus)  Proc. 
Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  152;  also  1868,  Actinocr. — Batocr, — pistillus, 
Geol.  Rep.  111.,  iii,  p.  472,  PI.  16,  figs.  4  a,  b ;  1873,  BatOCr,  pistillus. 
Ibid.,  V,  p.  367.  Upper  Burl.  lime<t.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

I860.  Batocr.  planodiscus  Hall.  (Actinocr.  planodiscus)  Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  lown, 
p.  45  ;  Meek  »nd  Worth.,  1873,  BatOCr.  planodiscus,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  367; 
Wachsm.  and  Spr.,  1878,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Pbili.,  p.  233.  Keokuk 
and  Burlington  Transition  bed  and  Lower  Keokuk  liu.e-t.  Nauvoo,  111.,  and 
Keokuk  rapids. 

18»5.  Batocr.  pyriformis  Shumard  (Actinocr.  pyriformis.  not  Ad.  Roemer,  1856). 
Geol.  Rep.  Missouri  by  Swallow,  p*.  ii,  p.  192,  PI  A,  figs.  6  a,  b  ;  Meek  and 
Worth.,  1865,  Actinocr. — Tlperocr.— pyriformis.  Proc  Acad.  Nat.  Sci. 
Phila.,  p.  153;  also  1873  (Batocr.  pyriformis).  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  375, 
PI.  5,  fig.  5,  and  Ibid.,  ii,  p.  150  ;  Wachsm.  and  Spr.,  1878,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat. 
Sci.  Phila.,  p.  233.  Upper  Burlington  limest.  Burlington,  Iowa,  and  Illi- 
nois and  Missouri. 

1869.  Batocr.  quasillus  Meek  and  Worthen.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  352  ; 
also  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  369  PI.  5,  fig.  2.  Lower  Burlingon  limest.  Bur- 
lington, Iowa. 


342  PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

1855.  Batoor.  rotundas  Yandell  and  Shutn.  (Figured  in  Christy's  letters  on  Geology, 

184.S,  as  Actinocriiiit'g).     Yand.  and  Shum.,  Geol.  Rep.  Missuuri  by  Swallow, 

pt.  ii,  p.  191,  PI.  A,  figs.  2  a,  b;  Meek  and  Worth.,  1873,  Batocr.  rotundus. 

(iool.  Rep.  111.,  V,  p.  .367.     The  leading  fossil  of  the  Upper  Burlington  liuiest. 

Boone  an  I  Marion  Cos.,   Mo.,  Quincy  and  Oquaka,   III.,  Burlington,  Iowa. 

This  is  a  somewhat  variable  species ;  it  sometimes  has  a  good  sized  anal  'ube, 

while  in  other  cases  this  seems  to  be  modified  into  a  simple  vault  opening; 

the  number  of  arms  var  es  from  eigbtefn  to  twenty-two. 
Sijii.  Actinocr.  oblatus  Hall.     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  38.     (This  species 

((iffers  only  in  having  twenty-two  arms). 
1860.  Batocr.  similis  Hall.     (Actinocr.  similis)  Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  40;  Meek 

and  Worth.,  1873,  Batocr.  similis,  Geol  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  367.    Keokuk  limest. 

Iowa  and  Illinois. 
.'^^li.  Actinocr.  clavigerus   Hall,  1860.     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.   Iowa,  p.  44 ;  Mek 

and  Worth.,  1867,  Batocr.  clavigerus,     Geol.  Rep.  III.,  v,  p.  367. 
1860.  Batocr.  sinuosus  Hall.     (Actinocr.  sinuosus)  Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  27, 

Photogr.  PI.  3,  figs.  8,  9 ;  Meek  and  Worth.,  1873,  Batocr.  sinuosus.     Geol. 

Rep.  111.,  V,  p.  3C8.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  lowii. 
*1860.  Batocr.  steropes  Hall.     (Actinocr.  steropes)  Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  43. 

Keokuk  limest.     Keokuk,  Iowa. 
1869.  Batocr.  trochiscus  Meek  and  Worth.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Philad.,  p.  354; 

Geol.  Rep.  III.,  v,  p.  372,  PI.  5,  fig.  6.     Burlington  and  Keokuk  Transition 

Bed.     Iowa  and  111.     (A  more  mature  stage  of  B.  Christyi). 
1868.  Batocr  turbinatus  Hall.     (Actinocr.  turbinatus)  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii, 

p.  587,  PI.  11,  fig.  1  ;  Meek  and  Worth.,  1873,  Batocr.  turbinatus,  Geol.  Rep. 

111.,  v,  p.  367.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa.     Syn.  Batocr. 

turbinatus,  var.  elegans  Hall.     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  588,   PI.  11, 

fig.  5. 
*1857.  Batocr.  Yandelli  Shumard.    (Actinoc.  Yandelli)  Trans.  St.  Louis,  Acad,  i, 

p.  9,  PI.  1,  figs.  4  a,  b;    Meek  and  Worth.  (Actinocr.  Sect.  A.),  Geol.  Rep. 

111.,  V,  p.  341.     Keokuk  limest.     Bottom  mould  Knob,  Jeflerson  Co.,  Ky. 
*1880.  Batocr.  Wacbsmuthi  White.     (Actinocr.  Wachsmuthi.  not  A.  Wachsmuthi, 

1862  =  Actinocr.  scitulus).     Author's  Edit,  from  the  12th    Annual  Rep.  of 

U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  by  Hayden,  p.  162,  PI.  40,  figs.   1  a,  b  ;  Geol.  Rep.  Ind. 

for  1879-80,  p.  142,  PI.  7,  fig.  6.     Keokuk  limest.     Crawfordsville,  Ind. 

We  add  the  following  new  species  : — 

Batocrinus  Lovei,  Wa,chsm.  and  Spr. 

Form  of  body  wheel-shaped,  as  wide  as  high,  running  nearly  to 
a  point  at  each  pole.  Plates  of  the  calyx  smooth,  without  orna- 
mentation, those  of  the  dome  convex.  Basals  forming  a  conical 
cup,  slightly  truncate  below.  Radials  3X5;  the  first  larger  than 
both  the  others  combined ;  second  twice  as  wide  as  high ;  the 
third  with  obtuse  upper  angles.  There  are  two  rows  of  two  plates 
in  the  two  succeeding  orders,  those  of  the  third  order  larger  than 
those  of  the  second,  and  the  outer  plates  wider  than  the  inner 
ones.     Each  ray  has  four  arm  openings — except  the  anterior  which 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  343 

has  but  two — the  outer  ones  of  the  ray,  and  those  between  the 
main  divisions  are  placed  a  little  farther  apart,  but  are  not 
separated  by  any  sinus.  Each  opening  gives  off  a  single  arm, 
which  is  short,  and  from  the  base  up  composed  of  two  series  of 
plates.  Near  each  arm  opening,  there  is  a  conspicuous  respira- 
tory (?)  pore,  which  like  the  arm  opening  is  directed  laterally. 

Interradials  two  to  three,  the  first  large ;  anals  one,  three  and 
three.  Vault  lower  by  one-third  to  one-half  than  the  calyx ; 
apical  dome  plates  somewhat  prominent ;  interradial  spaces  a  little 
depressed.  Ventral  tube  perfectly  central,  extending  far  beyond 
the  tips  of  the  arms.     Column  comparatively  slender. 

This  species  agrees  in  every  particular  with  B.  Chrisfyi,  except 
it  generall}'  is  smaller,  and  it  has  a  single  arm  in  place  of  two 
from  each  arm  opening.  It  also  differs  in  the  more  depressed 
form  of  the  vault,  and  in  being  found  only  at  the  base  of  the 
Upper  Burlington  limestone  ;  while  B.  Christyi  struggles  through 
to  the  Burlington  and  Keokuk  Transition  beds. 

Locality  and  Position. — Base  of  Upper  Burlington  limest.  Sub- 
carb.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

This  species  is  named  in  honor  of  Mr.  James  Love  of  Burling- 
ton, an  excellent  collector,  and  an  ardent  lover  of  Crinoids. 

-Batocrinus  WMlei  Wachsm.  and  Spr.,  n.  fp. 

Body  small,  globose,  a  little  wider  than  high,  height  of  calyx 
and  dome  equal,  both  with  convex  sides  ;  the  arm  bases  slightly 
projecting.  Surface  of  plates  ornamented,  the  median  line  of  all 
radials  up  to  the  arm  bases  marked  by  a  ridge ;  other  less  dis- 
tinct elevations  diverge  from  the  centre  of  the  first  interradial 
plates,  which  continue  to  the  radials,  but  without  uniting  with  the 
radial  ridges. 

Base  short,  truncate,  forming  an  elevated  ring  around  the 
column.  First  primary  radial  almost  as  large  as  second  and  third 
together  and  considerably  wider,  the  upper  sloping  sides  com- 
parativel}"  long ;  the  second  fully  as  high  as  the  third  and  nearly 
as  wide. 

Secondary  radials  2X10,  the  upper  largest,  with  two  shorter 
pieces  in  the  next  order,  making  four  arm  openings  in  four  of  the 
rays,  the  anterior  ray  has  no  tertiar}^  radials  and  only  two  open- 
ings in  all.  Each  arm  opening  supports  a  single  arm,  which,  from 
the  second  plate  up,  is  constructed  of  two  series  of  pieces  alter- 
nately arranged.     Arms  nearly  round,  of  medium  thickness  and 


344  PROCEEDINGS    OF   THE    ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

length,  oradually  tapering  to  their  tips.  Pinnules  very  long, 
comi)osed  of  joints  three  times  longer  than  wide,  and  perfectly 
smooth.  Interradials  two  to  three,  the  first  much  larger  than  all 
others  combined,  and  fully  as  large  as  the  first  radials.  Anal  area 
composed  of  one,  three  and  two  pieces,  with  a  depression  between 
the  arm  bases.  Vault  constructed  of  tuberculous  pieces  of  nearly 
equal  size.  Anal  tube  long,  extended  beyond  the  arms,  con- 
structed of  convex  plates,  which  are  interspersed  all  the  way  up 
to  the  top,  with  strongly  nodose  or  slightly  spiniferous  pieces. 
Column  slender,  composed  of  alternately  larger  and  smaller  joints, 
the  larger  ones  with  rounded  edges. 

Tliis  species  is  interesting  for  its  close  affinities  with  B.  Indi- 
anaensis  from  Crawfordsville,  with  which  it  agrees  in  all  points 
except  that  B.  Whitei  is  smaller  by  one-half,  and  has  a  single  arm 
proceeding  from  each  arm  opening ;  while  B.  Indiansensis  has 
always  two  as  in  the  case  of  B.  Lovei  and  B.  Christyi. 

We  take  pleasure  in  naming  this  species  in  honor  of  Dr.  C.  A. 
White  of  the  National  Museum,  to  whom  we  are  indebted  for 
many  favors. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — This  species  occurs  in  considerable 
quantities  at  Bono,  Ind.,  but  is  rare  at  Canton  and  Edwardsville, 
Ind. ;  it  is  found  in  shaly  layers,  probably  equivalent  to  the  lower 
l)art  of  the  Keokuk  group. 

2.;.  EEETMOCRINITS  Lyon  and  Casseday. 

1859.  Lyon  and  Cass.  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  and  Arts  (ser,  2),  vol.  28,  p.  241. 
1866.  Shumard.  (Subgen.  ^?)  o{  Actinocr.)  Cat.  Pal.  Foss.,  pt.  1,  p.  369. 
1869.  Meek  and  Wortheu.     (Subgen.  of  Batocr.)  Proc.   Acad.   Nat.  Sci. 

Phila.,  p.  350. 
1873.  Meek  and  Worth.  (Subgen.  oi  Batocr.)  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  368. 

1878.  Wachsm.  and  Spr.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila,,  p.  235. 

1879.  Zittel.     (Subgen.  oi  Actinocr.)  Handb.  d,  Palseont,,  p.  370. 
Syn.  Actinocrinus  (in  part),  Hall,  1861.     Bost,  Jouin.  Nat,  Hist. 

Lyon  and  Casseday's  description  of  this  genus  was  not  very 
satisfactory  and  partly  incorrect,  and  that  is  evidently  the  reason 
why  it  has  never  been  recognized  as  it  should  be.  Hall  ignored 
it  altogether,  Shumard  could  not  distinguish  it  from  Actinocrinus, 
and  Meek  and  Worthen,  who  adopted  tlie  name,  placed  it  sub- 
genericall}'  at  first  under  Actinocrinus,  and  later  under  Batocrinus. 
It  differs  from  the  former  in  almost  the  same  characters  as  Bato- 
crinus, but  as   distinctly  from   the   latter,  in   the   number  and 


1S81.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  345 

arrangement  of  the  arms,  in  their  greater  length,  depressed 
spatulate  form  ;  also  in  the  form  of  the  cal^^x,  the  extended  basal 
ring,  the  preponderance  of  the  dome  portions  over  the  calyx,  the 
excentric  position  of  the  anal  tube,  its  inflated  character,  and  its 
/disposition  to  bend  sideways.  We  consider  these  characters 
sufficient  for  a  full  generic  division,  and  propose  the  following : — 

Revised  Generic  Diagnosis. — Body  small,  biturbinate  or  sub- 
globose  ;  calyx  truncate  at  the  base,  composed  of  smooth,  convex 
or  nodose  plates  with  rarely  striatious.  Vault  more  or  less  inflated, 
and  exceeding  the  calyx  in  its  dimensions. 

Basals  three,  equal,  formed  into  a  wide  rim,  which  extends  far 
bej^ond  the  periphery  of  the  column.  Primary  radials  3X5;  the 
first  large,  equal  in  size  to  the  second  and  third  together,  and 
wider  than  either  of  them  ;  the  second  quadrangular ;  the  third 
regularly  pentagonal,  sometimes  smaller  than  the  second.  Sec- 
ondar}"  radials  composed  of  two  series  of  plates  each,  and  so  are 
the  tertiary  radials  when  present.  The  plates  of  the  marginal 
row,  those  supporting  the  arms,  form  a  projecting  circlet  around 
the  body,  and  are  laterally  extended  ;  they  are  large,  their  outer 
sides  excavated  for  the  reception  of  the  arm  plates,  the  upper  side 
notched  for  the  ambulacral  passages.  At  the  side  of  the  arm 
openings,  which  are  generally  directed  obliquely  toward  the  vault 
and  close  to  the  arm,  there  is  located  a  respiratory  (?)  pore,  which 
is  arranged  like  in  Batocrinus,  and  generally  as  large.  The  arm 
openings  are  arranged  in  groups  of  two,  three,  four,  or  five  each, 
with  great  variability'  in  the  difierent  raj^s.  There  are  from  twelve 
to  twenty-two  arm  openings  in  all,  and  each  one  supports  either  a 
simple  or  a  compound  arm.  The  openings  of  adjacent  raj'S  are 
placed  farther  apart  than  those  of  the  same  ra}^,  and  are  separated 
by  a  small  depression,  which  at  the  posterior  side  of  the  body  is 
considerably  deeper  and  wider. 

Arms  fully  twice  as  long  as  in  Batocrinus,  the  upper  portions 
flattened,  much  wider,  and  folded  inward.  They  are  composed  of 
a  double  series  of  joints,  which  at  the  bottom  rest  upon  one  or 
two  small  cuneate  pieces.  The  succeeding  arm  plates  are  generally 
short,  but  they  become  gradually  longer  as  they  increase  in  width. 
The  lower  portions  of  the  arms  are  round  or  nearly  so,  the 
increase  in  width  beginning  at  one-fourth  to  one-third  their 
height,  vfhen  they  are  gradually  flattened,  spread  out  laterally, 
and  become  broad  and  spatulate,  remaining  thick  and  heavy  along 


340  rROCEEDINQS  OP   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

the  middle  line,  growing  thin  toward  the  edges.  In  some  species 
the  arms  become  full}-  an  inch  wide,  while  in  others  the  increase 
in  width  is  comparatively  insignificant.  In  some  species,  every 
arm  joint  from  both  sides  is  extended,  in  others  only  every 
second,  third  or  fourth  joint,  while  the  intermediate  ones  remain, 
narrow.  In  these  arms  the  wider  joints  appear  in  the  form  of 
lateral  spines,  which  begin  short,  but  gradually  increase  to  a 
considerable  length.  Ambulacral  furrows  deep  ;  pinnules  similar 
to  those  of  Batocrinus. 

Interradial  plates  one  to  three,  the  first  large,  extended  to  the 
middle  portions  of  the  third  primary  radials,  the  upper  ones  very 
small.  Anals,  one  in  the  first,  three  in  the  second  series,  with  a 
few  additional  plates  above.     Interaxillarles  none. 

Dome  elevated,  inflated,  generally  larger  than  the  calyx,  com- 
posed of  nodose  or  spiniferous  plates  ;  the  apical  plates  more 
prominent  and  larger ;  the  large  centre  piece  occupying  the  very 
centre  of  the  vault ;  posterior  side  with  a  shallow  depression  filled 
by  small  anal  pieces. 

Anal  tube  strong,  more  or  less  excentric,  extending  beyond  the 
infolding  arms,  and  frequently  bent  abruptly  to  one  side ;  the 
middle  portions  more  or  less  inflated,  top  and  base  of  almost 
equal  width,  the  upper  end  provided  with  a  small  opening. 

Column  round,  composed  of  very  wide  pieces  alternating  with 
much  smaller  ones,  the  former  frequently  with  sharp  edges ; 
central  canal  small. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Eretmocrinus  occurs  at  the  age  of  the 
Burlington  and  Keokuk  groups,  in  America  only. 

We  recognize  the  following  species : — 

186 1.  Eretmocrinus  attenuatus   Hall.     (Actinocr.  matuta  var.  attenuata)     Desc. 
New.  S|).  Crin.  p,  14.     Upper  Burlington  li  >  est      Burlington,  Iowa. 

1860.  Eretmocr.  calyculoides  Hall.    (Actinocr.  calyouloides)  Supp.  Geol.  lowrt,  p. 

17,  Photogr.  PI.  3,  figs.  2-5;  Meek  and  Worth.,  187H,  Batocr.  (Eretmocr.) 
calyculoides  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  368.  Upper  Burl,  limest.  Burlington, 
Towa. 
1S61.  Eretmocr.  carioa  Hall.  (Actinocr.  carica)  Desc.  New.  Sp.  Crin.  p.  10;  Meek 
iind  Worth,  1873,  Batocr.  (Eretmocr.)  carica,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  368. 
Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1861.  Eretmocr.  clio  Hall.      (Actinocr.  clio)      Desc.    New.    Sp.    Crin.  p.  1;  also 

Bost.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  262,  Photogr.  PI.  3,  fig.  7;  Meek  and  Worth.,  1873, 
Batocr.  (Eretmocr.)  clio,  Geol.  Rep.  II'.,  v,  p.  3fi8.  Lower  Burlington 
limest.     Burlii'gton,  Iowa. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  347 

1861.  Eretmocr.  cloelia  Hall.  (Actinocr.  cloelia)  De«c.  Xew.  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  1  :  also 
Bost.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  266  ;  Meek  and  Worth.,  1873,  Eretmocr.  (Batocr.) 
cloelia,  <ti;o1.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p  368.  Upper  Burlington  limest.  Burlington, 
lea. 

1861.  Eretmocr.  corbulis.  (Actinocr.  cor^ulis)  I5esc.  Xew.  Sp.  Pal.  Crin.  p.  1  ; 
also  Best.  .Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  265 ;  Meek  and  Worth  ,  Batocr. — Eretmocr. f?) 
— corbulis,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,p.  368.  Lower  Burlington  limest.  Burlington, 
Iowa. 

*1860  Eretmocr.  coronatus  Hall.  (Actinocr.  coronatus)  Supp.  tJeol.  Rep.  Iowa, 
p.  28,  Photogr.  PI.  3,  figs.  1-2.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1560.  Eretmocr.  gemmiformis  Hall.    (Actinocr.  gemmiform's)     Supp.  Geol  Rep. 

Iowa,  p.  23,  Photogr.  PI.  3,  fig.  6;  Meek  and  Worth.,  BatOcr.—Eretmocr.(?) 

— gemmiformis,  Geol.  Rep.  III.,  V,  p.  368.     Lower  Burlington  limet.     Bur- 
lington, Iowa. 
*1S55.  Eretmocr.  Eonincki  Shumard.    (Actinocr.  Konincki)     Geol.  Rep.  Mtfsouri; 

by  Swallow,  pt.  ii,  p.  194.  PI.  A,  figs.  8  a,  b,  c  :   M-ek  and  Worth,,  Batocr. 

Konincki,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  367.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     BurLngton, 

Iowa. 
Si/n.  Actinocr.  urnaeformis  McChesney,  1860.     New.  Pal.  Foss.  p.  23  ;    Meek 

and  Worth.,  Batocr. — Eretmocr.(T) — urnaeformis,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  368. 
*1861.  Eretmocr.  leucosia   Hall.    (Actinocr.  leucosia)  Dese.  New.  Pal.  Crin.,  p.  1 ; 

also  Bost.  Journ.  Nat,  Hist.,  p.  261.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington, 

Iowa. 
1S59.  Eretmocr.  magnificus   Lyon  and  Cass.     Type  of  the  genus.     Am.  Journ.  Arts 

and  Sci.  (ser.  2),  vol.  28,  Septbr.,  p.   241;    Meek  and   Worth.,  Batocr.— 

Eretmocr.— magnificus,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  368.     Keokuk  limest.    Hardin 

Co.,  Ky. 
1361.  Eretmocr.  matuta  Hall.     (Actinocr.  matata)   Dese.  New.  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  14; 

Meek   and    Worth.,  G  ol.  Rep.   111.,  v,   p.   368,     Upper    Burlington  limest. 

Burlington,  Iowa. 
1369.  Eretmocr.  neglectus  Meek  and  Worth.     (Batocr. — Eretmocr.— neglectus) 

Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sei.,  Phila.,  p.  355  ;  Geol.  Rep.  Ill,,  v,  p.  377,  PI.  5,  fig.  3. 

Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1S58.  Eretmocr.  ramulosus  Hall.    (Actinocr,  ramulosus)  Geol.  Rep,  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii, 

p.  615,  PI    15,  fig.  7  ;   Wachsm.  and  Spr.,  1878.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila., 

p.  237.     Burlington  and  Keokuk  Transition  bed,  and  Lower  Keokuk  limest. 

Burlington  and  Augusta,  Iowa,  and  Nauvoo,  111. 
It  is  more  than  probable  that  this  species  is  a  Syn.  of  E.  magnificus. 

1561,  Eretmocr.  remibraohiatus  Hall.    (Actinocr.  remibrachiatus)  Dese.  New.  Sp. 

Crin.,  i>,  11,  Photogr.  PI.  3,  fig  \  8-9;  Meek  and  Worth.,  Geol.  Rep.  III., 
V,  p.  368,  Upper  Burlington  limest.  Burlington,  Iowa. 
1355.  Eretmocr.  Verneuilianus  Shumard.  (Actinocr.  Verneuilianus)  Geol.  Rep. 
Missouri,  by  Swallow,  Pt.  ii,  p.  193,  PI.  A,  figs,  la,  b;  Meek  and  Worth. 
Batocr, — Eretmocr. — Verneuilianus  GcjI.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  368,  PI.  4,  figs. 
3  and  4.  Upper  Burlington  limest.  Burlington,  Iowa,  Illinois  and  Missouri. 
Next  to  Batocr.  rotundus  this  is  the  most  characteristic  species  of  the  Bur- 
lington group.  It  does  not  repret-ent  a  typical  form  of  this  genus,  the  arms 
like  those  of  E.  Konincki  being  but  little  flattened,  but  its  structure  other 
wise  leaves  no  doubt  that  it  belongs  to  Eretnibcrinus. 


348  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

We  further  place  here  the  following  new  species,  which  are 
interesting  as  all  three  are  of  a  similar  type,  and  either  descendants 
from  each  other,  or  closely  related  to  each  other : — 

Eretmoorinus  originarius  n.  sp. 

Body  small,  calyx  and  dome  of  equal  height,  the  former  sub- 
turbinate  with  nearl}^  straight  sides,  the  vault  somewhat  inflated, 
with  convex  sides.  Radial  plates  covered  with  an  obscure  ridge, 
passing  longitudinally  from  plate  to  plate,  all  other  plates  of  the 
calyx  nearly  or  quite  smooth. 

Basal  cup  low,  truncate  at  the  bottom,  extending  into  a  ring 
which  projects  beyond  the  rather  large  column.  First  radial  as 
large  as  second  and  third  combined  ;  the  second  much  shorter, 
quadrangular,  twice  as  wide  as  high ;  the  third  as  large  as  the 
second,  and  but  little  wider,  the  lateral  sides  almost  straight. 
Secondary  radials  consisting  of  two  series  of  plates,  which  are  of 
a  similar  form  as  the  two  upper  primary  radials  but  smaller.  They 
are  followed  in  the  anterior  ray  by  the  arms,  in  the  four  other  rays 
by  tertiary  radials.  In  the  lateral  rays  both  upper  and  secondary 
radials  are  axillary,  and  give  off  2  X  2  tertiary  radials  with  four 
arm  openings,  the  two  postero-lateral  rays  have  three,  of  which  one 
side  only  is  bifurcating,  while  the  other  remains  simple.  Arms 
simple  throughout,  of  medium  length,  the  tips  slightly'  spatulate 
and  folded  inward ;  composed  of  rather  high,  somewhat  convex 
joints,  with  comparatively  strong  pinnules. 

Interradials  three,  the  first  very  large,  with  a  faint  node  in  the 
centre ;  anals  one,  three  and  two.  Dome  composed  of  convex 
plates  ;   annal  tube  unknown,  but  evidently  not  very  large. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — From  the  age  of  the  earlier  Keokuk 
limest.,  near  Bono,  Lawrence  Co.,  Ind.,  where  the  species  occurs 
iu  great  quantities.     Collection  of  Chas.  Wachsmuth. 

Eretmoorinus  intermedius  n.  ^p. 

In  form,  size,  and  ornamentation  resembling  E.  originarius, 
perhaps  a  little  more  truncate  at  the  basal  portions,  and  the  arm 
bases  more  spreading,  differing,  however,  in  the  arm  structure. 
It  has  normally  six  arms  from  each  posterior,  and  four  from  the 
rest  of  the  rays,  twenty-four  arms  to  the  individual.  The  radial 
portions  of  the  calyx,  ijj  the  lateral  ra3^s,  are  unchanged,  while 
the  anterior  ray  has  in  addition  2X2  tertiary  radials,  and 
consequently  twice  the  number  of  arms.     In  the  posterior  rays, 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  349 

botli  second  tertian"  radials  are  bifurcating,  and  give  to  the  inner 
side  of  the  ra}'  a  simple  arm,  to  the  outer  2X2  quaternary  radials, 
of  which  each  series  supports  an  arm.  The  plates  of  the  upper 
order  of  radials,  all  around  the  bod}',  and  frequently  the  last 
axillary  plate  of  the  posterior  raj'S,  are  not  enclosed  within  the 
body  or  only  parll}^  so,  thus  remaining  in  a  somewhat  imdeveloped 
state,  while  they  are  in  form  and  size  regular  radials.  Compared 
with  B.  originarius,  the  arms  are  more  crowded,  the  upper 
portions  more  spatulate.  Arm  joints  transversely  angular,  the 
outer  sides  straight  or  very  little  convex.     Vault  unknown. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — From  the  same  layer  as  the  preceding 
species,  and  almost  as  common.    Collection  of  Chas.  Waclismuth. 

Eretmocrinus  adultus  n.  sp. 

Plates  apparently  without  ornamentation.  Calyx  low  basin- 
shaped,  with  a  projecting  rim  along  the  basals.  First  radials  a 
little  shorter  than  second  and  third  together,  but  wider  than  either 
of  them  ;  the  third  wider  than  the  second.  The  higher  orders  of 
radials  comparatively  large,  composed  of  two  plates  each,  which 
increase  in  size  upward,  those  forming  the  arm  bases  very  much 
wider,  as  large  or  larger  than  the  first  primary  raelials.  Articul- 
ating scar  or  facet  for  the  attachment  of  the  arms  occupying  but 
little  more  than  one-half  to  two-thirds  the  width  of  the  plates, 
somewhat  projecting,  thereby  producing  a  shallow  depression 
between  the  arm  bases,  outer  face  truncate  or  concave.  The  con- 
cavity is  filled  by  three  arm  pieces,  a  central  one  which  is  angular 
above,  and  a  shorter  piece  on  each  side  of  it,  the  latter  of  the 
height  of  the  regular  arm  joints  but  narrower.  They  are  followed 
by  a  similar  piece  on  each  side,  and  two  other  pieces  resting 
against  the  sloping  sides  of  the  little  axillary  plate,  alternating 
with  the  former,  and  constituting  the  base  of  two  arms,  which 
from  the  second  or  third  joint  become  free.  The  species  has 
fourteen  pairs  of  arms,  two  in  the  anterior  ray,  and  three  in  each 
of  the  others.  Arms  long  gradually  flattening  at  midway,  upper 
portions  strongly  spatulate  and  folded  inward. 

Interradials  consisting  of  one  large  plate,  succeeded  either  by 
one  or  two  smaller  ones,  or  by  a  single  large,  elongate  piece, 
wedged  in  between  the  plates  of  the  higher  order  of  radials. 
Anals  one,  three,  and  three  plates.  Vault  unknown  ;  anal  tube 
long,  extending  considerably  beyond  the  arms,  of  rather  large  size, 
composed  of  smooth  plates.     E.  adultus  agrees  in  its  double  arm 


350  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

structure  with  Batocr.  Indiansensis  and  B.  Christyi^  but  has 
spatulate  arms  and  a  very  different  arm  formula.  It  is  of  the 
type  of  Eretmocr.  originarius  with  which  it  is  more  closely 
allied  than  would  appear  at  first  sight.  E.  adnltus  is  larger  and 
especially  broader,  but  this  is  evidently  due  to  the  double  arm 
structure  which  required  those  modifications,  the  differences  are 
similar  to  those  between  Batocr.  Lovei  and  B.  trocht^cus. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Keoknk  limest.  Canton,  and  Ed- 
wardsville,  Ind.     Collection  of  Chas.  Wachsmuth. 

24.    DORYCRINUS  Roemer. 

1854.  F.  Roemer.     Archiv  f.  Naturgesch.,  Jahrg.,  xix,  Band  i,  p.  307. 

1855.  F.  Roemer.    Lethaia  Geogn.  (Ausg.  3),  p.  249. 

1869.  Meek  and  Worth.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.,  p.  165. 
1873.  Meek  and  Worth.     Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  379. 

1879.  Zittel.  (Subgenus  of  AmpJwracrinus).  Handb.  d.  Palaeont.,  1,  p.  370. 
Syn.  Amphoracrimis  Meek  and  Worth,    (not  Austin;,  1866,  Geol. 

Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  209. 
Syn,  Actinoerinus    {Amphoracr.)    Meek    and  Worth.,  1861,  Proc. 

Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.,  p   132. 
Syn.  Sphmrocrinus  Meek  and  Worth.,  1865  (not  Roemer,  1851).  Ibid., 

p.  154. 
Syn.   Ccelocrinus    Meek  and  Worth.,  1865  (not  Caliocrimis  White, 
1863).     Ibid.,  p.  273  ;   and  1868,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  215. 

Roemer 's  tj'pical  species  of  Dorycrinus  is  provided  with  six 
large  spines  at  the  vault,  and  upon  this  peculiarity,  principally, 
the  genus  was  founded.  In  regard  to  this  point  the  genus  must 
be  amende'd,  as  there  are  other  species,  evidently  belonging  to  the 
same  group,  which  have  only  a  central  spine,  others  have  three, 
and  still  others  in  place  of  the  spines  a  large  convex  or  nodose 
plate.  There  are,  however,  other  excellent  distinctions  which 
make  Dorycrinus  a  good  genus. 

Neither  Hall,  Shumard,  de  Koninck  and  Lehon,  Pictet,  nor 
Schultze,  have  recognized  Dorycrinus.^  all  referring  the  species  to 
Actinoerinus,  with  which  it  agrees  onlj^  in  the  general  family 
characters,  and  in  having  the  rays  extended  into  lobes.  Dory- 
crinus inclines  far  more  toward  Batocrinus  and  Eretmocrinui<. 
with  which  it  agrees  in  the  general  form  of  its  plates,  and  in  the 
peculiar  double  arm  structure,  which  became  here  a  constant 
character.  It  differs,  however,  ver}^  essentially  in  the  lobed  form 
of  the  body,  its  strongly  expressed  bilateral  symmetry,  in  the 
lateral  position  of  the  anus,  and  in  its  opening  out  directly  through 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES   OF  PHILADELPHIA.  351 

the  bod}^,  as  also  the  shortness  and  delicacy  of  the  arms.  It 
differs  from  Agaricocrinua  and  Amphoracrinus  in  the  form  and 
proportions  of  the  body,  in  the  arrangement  of  the  plates,  and  in 
the  altogether  different  arm  strnctnre. 

We  place  Meek  and  Worthen's  snbgenns  Gcelocinnus, -which,  had 
been  previousl^^  described,  successively,  under  Actinocrinus,  Am- 
phoracrinus  and  Sjjh^rocrinus,  as  a  synonym  under  Dorycrinus^ 
the  only  known  species  being  a  somewhat  aberrant  form,  but  not 
sufficiently  distinct  even  to  make  it  a  subdivision. 

Generic  Diagnosis Calyx  broadh'  turbinate  or  subglobose, 

truncate  at  the  base,  and  deeply  sinuate  at  the  interradial  spaces, 
the  sinus  at  the  posterior  side  much  deeper  and  wider,  and 
extending  up  to  the  vault,  thereby  giving  to  the  body  a  decidedly 
pentalobate  aspect,  with  a  strongly  expressed  bilateral  symmetry. 
Dome  from  one-fourth  to  one-half  the  height  of  the  body,  strongly 
convex,  composed  of  comparatively  few  and  large  plates,  fre- 
quently armed  with  one  to  six  spines.  Plates  sometimes  cor- 
rugated, but  not  striated,  and  all  more  or  less  convex  or  nodose. 

Basals  three,  equal,  short,  in  the  t3q3ical  forms  of  the  genus 
abruptly  spreading,  the  lower  exterior  margins  extending  almost 
at  right  angles  to  the  axis  of  the  fossil ;  deeply  sinuate  at 
the  sutures,  but  sometimes  forming  a  continuous  ring.  Primary 
radials  3X5;  the  first  as  large  or  larger  than  the  second  and 
third  together;  the  second  much  narrower  than  the  first,  but 
wider  than  high,  quadrangular  in  outline,  although  sometimes  (in 
the  same  specimen)  pentagonal  or  hexagonal,  owing  to  the  position 
of  the  second  series  of  interradials,  upper  and  lower  sides  parallel; 
the  third  more  or  less  pentagonal,  wider  than  high,  wider  in  rays 
with  three  or  four  arm  bases  than  with  two.  The  third  radial,  in 
rays  with  only  two  arm  openings,  with  2X2  secondar}^  radials, 
which  support  the  arms,  but  in  rays  with  three  or  four  openings, 
and  consequently  with  tertiary  radials,  the  secondary'  radials 
consist  of  a  single  series  of  plates,  of  which  one  or  both  are  axillarj'. 
In  the  latter  case,  the  plate  gives  off  1  X  2  arm-bearing  plates,  in 
the  former  another  row  of  secondary  radials,  which  support  the 
arms.  The  arm  bearing  plates,  all  around  the  body,  are  project- 
ing, rounded  toward  their  sides,  and  separated  by  a  deep  lateral 
depression  or  sinus,  which  is  deeper  and  wider  between  the  main 
divisions  of  the  ray,  and  which  at  the  space  between  the  rays 
forms   a   wide   and   deep   gap.     Dorycrinus  has  variously  from 


352  PROCEEDTNGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

twelve  to  twenty  arm  openings  to  the  species,  and  twice  that 
number  of  arms,  two  to  each  opening,  given  off  in  a  similar 
manner  as  in  some  species  of  Batocrinus  and  Eretmocrinus.  The 
arm  openings  are  unequally  divided  among  the  rays,  only  species 
with  twenty  openings  having  four  to  each  ray.  In  species  with  a 
less  number,  the  posterior  rays  are  stronger,  and  have  always  four 
openings,  except  when  there  are  only  twelve  openings  in  all.  The 
anterior  ra}'-  is  generally  stronger,  or  has  at  least  as  many  arms  as 
the  antero-lateral  rays,  which,  as  a  rule,  are  the  least  developed, 
and  in  most  species  have  but  two  pairs  of  arms.  Slight  varia- 
tions in  the  arm  formula  of  the  same  species  occur  frequently  in 
this  genus.     Respiratory  (?)  pores  close  to  the  arm  openings. 

Interradials  two  or  three,  rarely  more,  in  two  series ;  the  first 
very  large,  frequently  but  not  always  extending  to  the  third 
primar}'^  radials  ;  the  plates  of  the  upper  series  small,  placed  within 
the  sinus  between  the  rays,  and  hence  are  connecting  with  the 
interradial  dome  plates.  Anal  area  constructed  very  differently 
from  the  interradial,  composed  of  a  large  plate  in  line  with  the 
first  radials,  but  higher  than  those,  with  the  upper  sloping  sides 
longer.  There  are  three  plates  in  the  second  series,  the  middle 
one  larger  with  truncate  upper  side,  succeeded  by  a  row  of  two 
to  four  similar  plates,  which  form  a  longitudinal  line,  often 
elevated  into  a  ridge  up  to  the  anal  aperture.  The  opening  is 
surrounded  by  one  or  two  rows  of  plates,  which  at  the  upper  side 
lean  against  the  central  dome  piece.  It  is  a  simple  aperture 
penetrating  a  somewhat  thickened  protuberance,  and  nearly 
always  situated  and  directed  laterally.     No  interaxillary  plates. 

Dome  elevated,  inflated,  occasionally  a  little  depressed  toward 
the  middle.  Plates  large,  centre  plate  and  the  first  five  radial 
pieces  larger  than  the  proximal  dome  pieces,  and  frequently 
extended  into  spines,  which  in  some  extreme  cases  attain  a  length 
of  three  to  four  inches.  There  are  other  species  with  only  a 
central  spine,  and  still  others  in  which  the  respective  plates 
are  only  larger  or  more  convex.  The  proximal  plates  connect 
with  the  centre  piece,  they  are  verj'  regularly  arranged  and 
readily  recognized,  but  otherwise  not  distinct  from  the  rest  of  the 
vault  pieces. 

Column  round,  not  strong,  and  composed  alternately  of  much 
larger  and  smaller  segments  ;  central  canal  small. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Dorycrinus  is  in  America  a  strictly 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  353 

Lower  Subcarboniferous  genus  ;  the  only  species  so  far  recognized 
in  Europe  has  been  found  in  the  Devonian  of  the  Eifel. 
The  following  is  a  list  of  the  known  species  : — 

1S69.  Dory.rinus   canaliculatus    Meek  and  Worth.     Proc.  Acad.   Nat.  Sei.  Phi!a  , 

p.  16fi;   Geol.  Rep.   111.,  v,   p.  381,  PI.  6,  fig.  4.     Lower  Burlington    limest. 

Burlington,  Iowa. 
*1861.  Dorycr.  concavus  Meek  and  Worth.     (Actinocr.  ooncavus)  Proc.  Acad.  Nat. 

Sci.  Phila.,  p.  131;    Sphaerocr.  Concavus   Meek  and  Worth.,  1865,  Ibid.,  p. 

154;  Coelocr.  concavus  Meek  and  Worth.,  1865  (Dec),  Ibid.,  p.  273;  also 

Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  215,  PI,  15,  figs.  10  a,  b,  c.     Lower  Burling'on  limest. 

Burlington,  Iowa. 
1858.  Dorycr.  cornigerns  Hall.     (Actiaoor.  comigerus,  not  A.  cornigerus  Lyon 

and    Casseday)    Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,    p.  576,  PI.  9,  figs.    12  a,  b,  c  ; 

also  Ibid.,  Supp.,  PI.  3,  fig.  4;  Meek  and  Worth.,  Lorycr,  cornigems,  Geol. 

Rep.  111.,  p.  380.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  Actinocr.  divaricatus  Hall,  1860.     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  11. 
Syn.  Actinocr.  qninquelobus  Hall,  1860.     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  15  ;  Meek 

and  Worth.  Dorycr.  quinquelobus  1873.     Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v',  p.  380. 
*1860.  Dorycr.  deoornis  Hall.    (Actinocr.  decornis)  Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa.,  p.  13. 

Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
(This  is  a  very  doubtful  species.) 
1858.  Dorycr.  Gouldi  Hall.     (Actinocr.  Gouldi)  Geol.  Rep.   Iowa.,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  613, 

PI.  15,  figs.  6  a,  b;    Meek  and  AVorth.  Dorycr.  Gouldi,  lieol.   Rep.  III.,  v,   p. 

380.     Lower  part  of  the  Keokuk  limest.     Keokuk,  Iowa. 
1875.  Dorycr.  Kelloggi  AVorthen,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  vi,  p.  513,  PL  29,  fig.  8.     Keokuk 

limest.     Keokuk,  Iowa. 
1853.  Dorycr.  mississippiensis  Roemer.    Type  of  the  genus.    Archir  f.  Naturgesch., 

Jahrg.  xix.  Band  i,  PI.  10,  figs.  1,  2,  3  :  Meek  and  Worth.,  1S73,  Geol.  Rep.  111., 

V,  p.  380.    Keokuk  limest.    Iowa,  Illinois,  Tennessee,  Kentucky  and  Missouri. 
Syn.  Actinocr.  (Dorycr).  mississippiensis  var.  spiniger  Hall,  1860.     Supp. 

Geol.  Rep.  Iowa.,  p.  54.     (This  is  mertlv  a  young  form.) 
1858.  Dorycr.    missouriensis   Shumard.       (Actinocr.   missouriensis)  Geol.  Rep. 

Missouri,  by  Swallow,  pt.  ii.  p.  190,  PI.  A,   figs.  4  a,  b,  c ;  Meek  and  Worth. 

Dorycr,    missouriensis,    1873.    Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  380.     Upper  Burl. 

limest.     Palmyra,  Mo.  and  Burlington,  Iowa.  (This  species  is  very  variable 

in  the  number  of  arms.) 
Syn.  Actinocr.  desideratus  Hall.     Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.  p,  2;    Host.  Journ. 

Nat.  Hist.,  p.  273;  Meek  and  Worth.  Dorycr.  desideratus,  Geol.  Rep.  111., 

V,  p.  380. 
*1855.  Dorycr.  parvus  Shumard.     (Actinocr.  parvus)  Geol.  Rep.  Mo.,  by  Swallow, 

ii,  p.  193,   PI.  A,  fig.  9;   Upper  Burling'on  limest.  (not  St.   Louis  limest.  as 

quoted  by  Shumard),  Palmyra,  Mo.  and  Burlington,  Iowa. 
Syn.  Actinocr.  trinodus  Hall,  1858.     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  575. 
Syn.  Actinocr.  symmetricus  Hall,  1858.    Geol.  Rep.,  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  574,  PI, 

9,  figs.  8a,  b;  Meek  and  Worth.,  Dorycr.  symmetricus  1873,  (Jeol.  Hep.  111., 

V,  p.  380. 
Syn.  Actincor.   (Amphoracr.)  subturbinatus  Meek  and  Worth.,  I860,  Proc. 

Acad.  Nat.  Set.  Phila.,  p.  388;  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  212,  PI.  15,  figs.  4  a,  b. 

Dorycr.  subturbinatus,  1873,  Ibid.,  v,  p.  380. 

24 


354  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

*18C2  (?)  Doryor.  prseoursor    Hall.    (Aotinocr.  prseoursor)  15th  Rep.  N.  Y.,  St. 

Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  131.     Hamilton  gr.     Western  New  York. 
We  refer  this  species  with  doubt  to  the  genus;  it  is  imperfectly  known. 
*1855.  Doryor.  prumiensis  MUUer.     (Aotinocr  pramiensis)   Verhand.  Naturhist. 

Verein.   f.   Rheinlande,  xii,  p.  81,   PI.  9,  figs.  1,  5;    also  1857.     Pyxidocr. 
'  prumiensis  Neue  Echin.  Eifl.  Kalk,  p,  263,    Schultze,  1867,  Mon.  Echin. 

Eifl.  Kalk,  p.  60,  PI.  6,  fig.  6.     Devon.     Eifel,  Germ. 
1868.  Doryor.  qainqaelobns    (var.)   intermedins    Meek   and   Worth.    Proc.  Acad. 

Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  346;  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  385,  PL  10,  fig.  4.     Transition 

bed  between  Burl,  and  Keck,  limest.     Pleasant  Grove,  Iowa.     This  is  more 

properly  a  variety  of  D.  mississippiensis,  from  which    it  difi"ers  only  in 

having  fewer  arms  and  in  its  smaller  size. 
1868.  Doryor.  Koemeri  Meek  and  Worth.      Proc,  Acad.    Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  346; 

also  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  383,  PI.  10,  fig.  3.     Uppermost  part  of  Upper  Burl. 

limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
*1860.  Doryor.  spinosulus  Hall.    (Aotinocr.  spinosnlos)  Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa., 

p.  52,  Keokuk  limest.    Nauvoo,  111.  (Probably  a  young  D.  mississippiensis. 
*1858.  Doryor.  subaculeatus  Hall.   (Aotinocr.  subftcnleatns)  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt. 

ii,  p.  570,  PI.  10.  figs.  2  a-b  ;  Meek  and  Worth.,  Doryor.  snbaculeatns,  Geol. 

Rep.  111.,  V,  p.  380.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1850.  Doryor.  unicornis  Owen  and  Shumard.    (Aotinocr.  unicornis)  Joam.  Acad. 

Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  ii.  (ser.  ii),  p.  67 ;  also  U.  S.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  Wis.  and  Minn., 

p.  573,  PI.  5  a,  figs.  12  a,  b ;  Hall,  1858,  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,p.  668,  PI. 

10,  figs,  5  a,  b,  c;  Meek  and  Worth.,  1873,  Doryor.  unicornis,  Geol.  Rep 

111.  V,  p.  380,  PI.  6,  fig.  2.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
iSyn.  Actinoor.  tricornis  Hall,  1858,  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  569. 
Si/n.  Actinocr.  pendens  Hall,  1860.    Ibid.,  Supp.,  p.  31. 
*1861.  Doryor.  unispinus  Hall.     (Actinoor.  unispinus)  Desc.  New  Sp.  Grin.  p.  2; 

also  Bost.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  270.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington, 

Iowa. 


C.   EHODOCRINID.!:  Roemer. 
(Amend.  Zittel,  amend.  Wachsm.  and  Spr.) 

The  genera  which  we  include  among  the  Rhodocrinidse  were 
arranged  by  the  earlier  writers,  either  in  connection  with  such 
genera  as  Cyathocrinus,  Poteriocrinus,  or  in  various  ways  with 
Actinocrinus,  Melocrinus,  Dimerocrinus ,  Periechocrinus,  Carpo- 
crinus  and  others. 

Austin  ^  placed  Rhodocrinus  and  Sagenocrinus  under  the 
Actinocrinoidea,  Dimerocrinus  under  the  Merocrinoidea. 

D'Orbigny^  placed  Gilhertsocrinus  and  Dimerocrinus  under 
the  Melocrinidje,  Glyptocrinus  and  Rhodocrinus  under  the 
Cyathocrinidae. 

1  Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  1842-3. 
*  Course  elem.  de  Paleont.,  1852,  vol.  2. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  355 

Pictet^  arranged  Rhodocrinus^  AcanthociHnus^  Dimerocrinus, 
and  Thysanocrinus  under  the  Cyathocriniens,  Lijriocrinus  and 
Scyphocrinus  Hall  (not  Zenker),  under  the  Carpocriniens,  and 
all  under  the  Cj'athocrinidje. 

Roemer,^  who  was  the  first  to  propose  the  name  Rhodocrinidae, 
referred  to  it  only  the  genus  Bhodocrinus,  placing  Sagenocrinus 
with  the  Sagenocrinidse,  Thysanocrinus  with  the  Poteriocrinidse, 
and  Dimerocrinus  which  we  take  to  be  identical  with  Thysano- 
crinus he  referred  to  the  Cyathocrinidae. 

The  great  dissimilarity  which  manifests  itself  in  these  classifi- 
cations, must  be  partly  attributed  to  the  imperfect  knowledge 
which  prevailed  with  regard  to  some  of  those  genera  at  that  time. 
It  was  evidently  the  intention  of  the  writers  to  group  the 
Crinoids  according  to  the  presence  or  absence  of  underbasals,  the 
number  of  basals  and  the  arm  structure,  but  these  parts  had 
been  often  incorrectly  represented,  or  were  as  yet  entirely  unknown. 

A  very  marked  improvement  is  visible  in  the  classification  of 
ZitteP  who  placed  among  the  Rhodocrinidae,  Ollacr-inus,  Bhodo- 
crinus, Acanthocrinus,  Bipidocrinus,  and  Thysanocrinus^  and 
proposed  the  name  Glyptocrinidae  for  Glyptocrinus ,  Glyptaster, 
Thylacocrinus,  Lampterocrinus,  Eucrinus,  and  Sagenocrinus, 
these  genera,  without  exception,  have  underbasals,  and  Zittel 
discriminated  distinctly  between  genera  in  which  the  calyx  is  con- 
structed exclusively  of  three  rings  of  plates,  and  those  in  Avhich 
the  radials  are  separated  by  interradials — our  Sphferoidocrinidae 
— and  he  distinguished  these  from  our  Ichthyocrinidae.  He,  how- 
ever, placed  Dimerocrinus  with  some  of  our  Actinocrinidae,  as 
that  genus  was  thought  to  possess  no  underbasals,  and  he  for  a 
similar  reason  admitted  Lyriocrinus  among  the  Calyptocrinidae. 

The  Glyptocrinidte  and  Rhodocrinidae  of  Zittel,  according  to 
his  own  diagnosis,  differ  only  in  the  form  of  the  body  and  the 
position  of  the  interradial  (not  anal)  plates.  He  describes  the 
form  of  the  Glj^ptocrinidse  as  high  (turbinate),  that  of  the  other- 
bowl-shaped  (more  or  less  depressed),  the  first  interradials  of  the 
former  as  being  placed  between  the  second  and  third  radials,  those  of , 
the  latter  as  forming  together  with  the  first  radials  a  ring  of  ten 
alternating   plates.      We  doubt   very  much  whether   these   dif-- 

'  Traite  de  Paleont.,  1857,  vol.  iv. 
-Lethsea  Geogn.,  1855  (Ausg.  3). 
^  Handbuch  der  Palseontologie,  i. 


356  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

fereiiccs,  even  if  they  were  persistent,  can  be  deemed  sufficient  for 
a  family  distinction.  Thysanocrinus  of  the  Rhodocrinidje  has 
generally  at  four  sides  the  first  interradial  disposed  between  the  first 
and  second  radials  ;  while  in  Thijlacocrinus,  according  to  Oehlert's 
figure,  all  five  first  interradials  rest  directly  upon  the  basals,  or  to 
use  Zittel's  language,  "form  a  ring  of  ten  plates  with  the  first 
radials  as  in  his  Rhodocrinidse.^^ 

In  our  classification,  we  place  under  the  Rhodocrinidje  all  genera 
of  the  Spha^roidocrinidfe  which  have  well-defined  underbasals,  and 
we  admit  also  Glyptoerinus  in  which  these  plates  are  exceedingly 
rudimentary,  or  perhaps  in  some  species  altogether  undeveloped. 
The  Rhodocrinidae  have  five — exceptionally  three — basals  ;  from 
2  to  3X5  primary  radials,  2  to  6  X  10  secondary  and  some- 
times several  tertiary  radials.  The  pjates  of  the  higher  orders,  if 
such  are  present,  being  formed  into  extended  free  ra3^s  with 
lateral  arms.  Arms  rather  delicate,  branching  or  simple,  the  latter 
being  rather  the  exception.  Interradials  numerous,  arranged  with 
two  or  three  plates  in  each  series,  except  in  the  first  which  has 
but  one  plate.  In  most  of  the  genera,  the  first  interradial  rests 
directly  upon  the  truncate  upper  side  of  the  basals,  thereby 
separating  the  first  radials  all  around.  In  others,  however,  only  the 
first  plate  of  the  posterior  or  anal  side  is  supported  by  a  basal, 
that  of  the  other  four  sides  being  placed  against  the  upper  corners 
of  the  first  and  between  the  second  radials,  the  former  producing 
an  almost  perfect  pentrahedral,  the  latter  a  more  or  less  bilateral 
symmetry. 

In  Glyptoerinus,  the  first  interradial  rests  between  the  first  and 
second  radials  at  every  side ;  interaxillaries  generally  present ; 
vault  fiat  or  low  hemispherical,  composed  of  small  and  more  or 
less  irregular  pieces  ;  apical  dome-plates  not  well  defined  ;  inter- 
radial regions  depressed ;  anus  in  form  of  a  simple  opening 
through  the  vault,  rarely  proboscis-like.  Column  round  or  pen- 
tagonal. 

For  greater  convenience  of  study  we  subdivide  the  Rhodo- 
crinidre  into  three  groups. 

a.  Glyptocrinites. — Calyx  turbinate,  symmetry  almost  perfectly 
pentahedral,  radial  plates  with  rounded,  strongly  elevated  ridges 
which  gently  pass  into  the  arms.  Interradial  areas  depressed,  the 
first  plate  resting  either  directly  upon  the  basals,  or  between  the 
second  and  third  radials,  without  special  anal  plate  beneath  their 
line.     Restricted  to  the  Lower  Silurian. 


1881  ]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  35t 

b.  Gh/ptasterites. — Calyx  turbinate,  symmetry  bilateral,  radials 
legs  carinated  than  in  the  preceding  group.  A  special  anal  plate 
supported  upon  the  basals,  with  another  within  the  second  series, 
resting  between  the  two  inten-adials,  and  in  line  with  the  first 
interradial  plate  of  the  four  lateral  areae.     Upper  Silurian. 

c.  Rhodocrinites  — Cal3'^x  subglobose,  somewhat  depressed ;  sym- 
metry nearly  perfectly  pentahedral.  Radials  without  elevated 
ridges.  Interradial  plates  extending  down  to  the  basals,  posterior 
area  but  little  distinct  from  the  others,  sometimes  a  little  wider, 
with  one  or  two  irregular  additional  plates.  Pound  from  the 
Upper  Silurian  to  the  Subcarboniferous. 

These  groups,  as  those  of  the  Actinocrinidae,  are  based  upon 
the  general  form  of  the  body  and  the  arrangement  of  anal  plates. 
In  their  form,  the  Glyjjtocrinites  resemble  the  Glyj^tasterites^  but 
in  the  arrangement  and  position  of  interradial  and  radial  plates 
the  former  agree  with  the  Rhodocrinites.  It  might  have  been 
not  out  of  the  way  if  we  had  placed  the  genus  Glyptocrinus  in  a 
group  by  itself,  as  it  differs  from  Ai-chseocrinus  and  Reteoci-inus^ 
with  which  it  has  been  associated,  and  from  all  other  Rhodocrinidse, 
in  having  the  first  plate  at  each  interradial  side  placed  between 
the  second  radials,  a  combination  which  is  found  not  unfrequently 
in  the  earlier  Actinocrinidie.  This  becomes  more  important  since 
some  species  of  that  genus  apparently  have  no  underbasals,  and 
it  is  a  question  whether  that  genus,  at  least  partly,  should 
not  be  arranged  with  the  other  group  altogether.  The  unmis- 
takable evidence  of  minute  underbasals  in  some  species,  and  the 
close  aflSnities  which  the  genus  has  with  Reteocrinus^  with  which 
it  is  connected  by  most  remarkable  transition  forms,  has  induced 
us  to  place  it  with  the  Rhodocrinidae.  Glyptocrinus  evidently 
forms  a  link  between  those  two  great  divisions,  and  leans  as  much 
to  the  one  as  to  the  other,  but  whether  it  is  the  prototype  of  the 
Actinocrinidai  or  of  the  Rhodocrinidoe  we  are  unable  to  assert, 
there  being  arguments  in  favor  of  both  theories.  It  seems  to  us 
more  probable  that  the  Rhodocrinidse  were  introduced  first,  but 
this  must  remain  a  supposition  so  long  as  we  know  comparatively 
nothing  of  the  crinoidal  forms  which  preceded  Glyptocrinus. 

The  arms  of  the  Rhodocrinidse  in  the  Lower  Silurian,  are  single- 
or  double-jointed ;  the  Upper  Silurian  forms,  almost  without  excep- 
tion, have  two  rows  of  interlocking  plates.  Respiratory  pores,  such 
as  noticed  in  the  Actinocrinidse,  have  never  been  observed  in  this 


358  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

fiimily  ;  Ollacrinus  has  lateral  appendages,  two  to  each  interradial 
area,  with  a  central  canal  passing  through  each,  communicating 
with  the  inner  body.  The  entrances  of  these  canals  into  the  body 
occupy  the  same  relative  position  to  the  ambulacral  or  arm  open- 
ings, as  the  respiratory  pores  to  the  arm  openings  in  Batocrinus, 
and  these  like  those  are  connected  with  the  radial  grooves  beneath 
the  vault.  The  appendages  seem  to  be  in  some  way  connected  with 
the  interradial  depressions  which  are  so  frequently  found  upon  the 
vault  of  this  genus  and  in  Rhodocrinus  (PI.  19,  fig.  1).  The  depres- 
sions are  in  some  specimens  deeper  than  in  others,  and  as  the 
plates  of  which  they  are  composed  are  smaller  and  thinner,  it  is 
very  probable  that  the  test  in  these  parts  was  flexible,  liable  to 
contraction  and  expansion. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — Nine  of  the  thirteen  genera  which  we 
place  among  the  Rhodocrinidae  are  restricted  to  the  Silurian,  two 
are  strictly  Devonian,  and  the  remainder  which  first  appear  in  the 
Devonian, become  extinct  in  the  lower  part  of  the  Subcarboniferous. 
None  of  the  genera  seem  to  have  had  a  great  variety  of  species 
or  to  have  existed  in  great  numbers,  except  some  few  species 
of  the  Lower  Silurian. 

We  arrange  the  three  sections  as  follows  : — 

a.  Gltptocrinites. 

1.  Olyptocrinus  Hall.  3.  Beteocrintis  Billings. 

2.  Arch(Bocrmu8  Wachs.  &  Spr. 

b.  Glyptasterites. 

4  Olyptaster  Hall.  6.  Lampterocrinus  Roemer. 

Buhgen.  Eucrinus  Angelin.  7.  Sagenocrinus  Austin. 

5.  Dimerocrinus  Phillips. 

c.  Rhodocrinites. 

8.  Lyriocrinus  Hall.  11.  Anthemocrinus  Wachs.&  Spr. 

9.  Ripidocrinus  Beyrich.  12.  Bhodocrinus  Miller, 

10.  Thylacocrinus  Oehlert.  13.   Ollacrinus  Cumberland. 

P.  S. — At  the  moment  this  goes  to  press,  we  received  from  S.  A. 
Miller  a  very  interesting  paper  containing  descriptions  of  several 
new  Crinoids  from  the  Hudson  River  group,  published  in  the 
April  number  of  the  Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  Miller  pro- 
poses the  name  Xenocrinus  for  a  form,  which  in  external  appear- 
ance resembles  closely  Reteocrinus  Billings,  but   from  which  it 


1881,]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  359 

differs,  according  to  description,  by  having  a  quadrangular  column, 
four  basals  and  no  underbasals,  thus  bringing  it  in  close  proximity 
to  Mariacrinxis  and  Melocrinus,  and  among  the  Actinocrinidte. 
There  is  something  in  the  habitus  of  the  genus  that  leads  us  to 
think  it  should  be  associated  with  the  Rhodocrinidee,  and  that  it 
had  underbasals  which  were  not  disclosed. 

!No  Actinocrinoid  has  ever  been  discovered  in  which  the  inter- 
radial  field,  except  at  the  "  azj-gous  "  side,  extends  to  the  basal 
disk',  such,  however,  seems  to  be  clearly  the  case  in  Xenocrinus 
penicillus.  We  leave  the  discussion  of  this  genus  to  our  future 
appendix,  as  we  hope  to  have  an  opportunity  to  examine  some  of 
the  specimens. 

Another  of  Miller's  new  species  is  described  with  four  basals 
and  a  quadrangular  stem ;  but,  contrary  to  the  former,  here  only 
the  interradial  area  at  the  posterior  or  anal  side  descends  to  the 
basals.  Miller  refers  the  species  to  Glyptocrinus  with  which  it 
has  no  doubt  close  affinities,  but  it  appears  to  us,  that  if  Xeno- 
crimts  is  a  good  generic  form,  the  other  also  should  be  made  a 
new  genus.  Gl.  Harriai  is  distinguished  from  Glyptocrinus  almost 
by  the  same  characters  as  Xenocrinus  from  Reteocrinus.  We 
further  refer  Glyptocrinus  cognatus  Miller,  to  Reteocrinus. 

a.  Glyptockinites. 
1.  GLYPTOCEINUS  Hall. 

1847.  Hall.     Paleont.  New  York,  i,  p.  281. 
1857.  Billings.     Geol.  Surv,  Canada,  of  1853  to  1856,  p.  256. 
1859.  Billings.     Ibid.,  Decade  iv,  p.  55. 
1863.  Hall.     Trans.  Albany  Inst.,  iv,  p.  202. 
1873.  Meek.     Geol.  Surv.  Ohio  Paleont.,  i,  p.  30. 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  d.  Paleont.,  i,  p.  374  (not  Olyptocrinus  d'Orb.,  1850, 
Prodr.  i,  p.  45,  nor  p.  103). 

Syn.  Apiocrinite  Anthony,  1838  (not  Miller,  1821). 

Syn.  leosidactylocrinus  Owen,  1843,  Cat.  Spec.  Ohio  Valley. 

We  are  compelled  to  exclude  from  the  genus  Glyptocrinus 
several  species  which  were  referred  to  it  by  Hall  and  Billings,  and 
have  arranged  them  with  other  genera.  We  place  Glyptocr. 
Garleyi  Hall — which  has  four  basals  and  not  five — under  Maria- 
crinus  as  reconstructed  and  amended  by  us.  The  generic  differ- 
ences between  Glyptocrinus  and  Glyptaster  have  never  been  satis- 
factorily pointed   out,  and    Hall's   explanatory  remarks  (Trans. 


360  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

Albany  Inst.,  iv,  p.  202)  have  by  no  means  cleared  up  the  difli- 
cnlties  attending  their  separation. 

According  to  Hall,  the  principal  distinction  should  be  found  in 
the  rudimentary  or  imperfect  condition  of  the  underbasals  in 
Glyx)tocrinus^  as  opposed  to  the  moderately  large  size  of  the  same 
pieces  in  Glyptaster,  and  in  that  the  rays  of  the  former  were  twice 
subdivided  in  the  body,  with  simple  undivided  arms,  while  the 
latter  had  but  a  single  division  in  the  bod3^  A  comparison  of  all 
the  species  that  have  been  referred  to  Glyptocrinus,  shows  con- 
clusively that  these  supposed  distinctions  are  not  borne  out  by 
the  facts.  Hall's  so-called  Glyj)tocr.  O^Nealli  has  well  defined 
underlmsals,  and  the  second  branching  of  the  ray  takes  place  in 
the  free  arms,  while  the  rays  in  Glyptocr.  nobilis  divide  at  least 
three  times  in  the  body,  and  on  the  other  hand  in  G.  Dyeri  Meek, 
the  second  bifurcation  takes  place  in  the  arms.  We  have  placed 
G.  O^Nealli  Hall,  G.  Richardsoni  and  G.  gracilis  Wetherby, 
G.  Baeri  Meek,  and  G.  cognatus  Miller,  under  Reteocrinus 
Billings,  and  should  have  proposed  G.  nobilis  the  type  of  a  new 
genus,  if  we  had  before  us  good  specimens  instead  of  figures  of 
casts  in  which  neither  basal  nor  anal  plates  are  shown.  The  high 
dome,  the  anal  tube,  the  large  number  of  arms,  and  its  occurrence 
in  a  different  geological  horizon  suggests  very  strongly  to  our  mind 
its  generic  distinctness. 

Glyptocrinus  is  one  of  the  oldest  forms  of  the  Rhodocrinidse, 
and  is  the  forerunner  and  type  of  a  little  group  of  Silurian  Crinoids, 
which  are  readily  recognized  by  their  obconical  form  ;  the  promi- 
nent rounded  ridges  that  follow  the  radial  series  of  the  calyx, 
'.coking  like  recumbent  arms  ;  the  beautifully  striated  surface,  and 
the  character  of  the  arm  structure.  The  arms  in  all  of  them 
rise  from  the  edge  of  the  vault,  forming  uninterrupted  prolonga- 
tions of  the  elevated  ridges  of  the  calyx,  and  the  radial  plates  pass 
into  arm  plates  so  gradually,  that  it  becomes  almost  impossible  to 
discern  where  the  cal^^x  terminates  and  the  arms  begin.  Zittel 
has  arranged  these  genera  into  a  distinct  family  and  we  should 
follow  his  example  if  we  had  not  discovered  that  the  same  charac- 
ters exist  among  the  Actinocrinidse,  and  indeed — what  is  more 
significant — among  genera  with  five,  four  and  three  basals,  but 
only  in  Silurian  types,  thus  indicating  that  the  characters  above 
noted  represent  probably  a  younger  stage  of  familj^  development. 

Glyptocrinus  differs  from   Glyptaster  in  having   rudimentary 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA,  361 

instead  of  moderately  developed  underbasals,  in  not  having  the 
first  anal  plate  on  a  level  with  the  first  radials,  and  in  the  arms, 
which  in  Glyptocrinus  are  composed  of  single  joints,  instead  of 
two  rows  of  interlocking  pieces  as  in  Ghjptaater.  Reteocrinus 
differs  in  the  size  of  its  underbasals,  the  deeplj^  depressed  inter 
radial  spaces,  the  irregular  arrangement,  and  exceedingly  large 
number  of  interradial  and  interaxillar}-  plates,  and  that  the  raj-s 
are  not  connected  laterally,  but,  all  the  waj'  up  from  the  basals, 
separated  by  small  interradial  pieces. 

We  propose  for  Glyptocrinus  the  following  : 

Revised  Generic  Diagnosis. — Calyx  obconical  to  subglobose, 
its  symmetry  almost  perfectly  pentahedral.  Surface  ornamented 
with  radiating  striae  in  form  of  elevated  ridges,  which  divide  into 
numerous  triangular  impressed  areas.  The  ridges  passing  along 
the  radial  portions  are  rounded,  nearl}'  as  wide  as  the  arm  joints, 
and  appear  like  arms  that  are  soldered  into  the  bod}'.  The  arms 
rise  verticall}'  from  the  edge  of  the  vault,  forming  undisturbed 
continuations  of  the  ridges  of  the  calyx,  and  the  higher  radial 
plates  pass  imperceptibly  into  arm  plates. 

Underbasals  five,  rudimentary — perhaps  sometimes  obsolete — 
entirel}^  hidden  from  view  by  the  column,  and  filling  only  a  small 
portion  of  the  basal  concavity.  Basals  five,  of  uniform  size,  small, 
scarcely  extending  to  the  sides  of  the  bod}',  slightly  concave  for 
the  attachment  of  the  column.  Primary  radials  3X5,  the  lower 
series  somewhat  larger,  nearly  similar  in  form ;  the  second 
hexagonal ;  the  third  pentagonal  in  outline,  and  supporting  on 
its  upper  sloping  sides  the  secondary  radials.  The  number  of 
secondary  radials  varies  with  the  species,  but,  as  a  general  rule,  it 
might  be  asserted,  that  in  species  with  a  third  order  of  radials  or 
a  second  division  within  the  body,  there  are  only  two  secondarj^ 
radials,  while  in  species  in  which  the  second  bifurcation  takes 
place  in  the  free  arms,  their  number  is  much  greater.  Species  of 
the  latter  kind  sometimes  have  six,  eight  or  more,  and  these  are 
succeeded  to  the  last  bifurcation  bj'  three,  four  or  more  free 
plates.  The  tertiary  radials,  where  they  exist,  are  as  variable  in 
number  as  those  of  the  secondar}-  order.  There  ma}-  be  within  the 
same  species  one,  three  or  more  of  these  plates  soldered  into  the 
body,  or  they  all  may  be  free  plates,  depending  on  the  age  of  the 
individual. 

Arms  twenty,  rising  upright,  almost  verticallj'  from  the  last 


362  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

radial,  long,  slender,  simple  from  the  second  division,  rounded  on 
the  outer  side,  and  composed  of  a  single  series  of  short,  some- 
what wedge-shaped  pieces,  of  which  each  one  supports  at  its 
larger  end  a  pinnule.  Pinnules  very  slender,  alternately  and  very 
closely  arranged,  the  proximal  ones  fixed  in  the  body  walls,  the 
first  generally  given  off  from  the  second  secondary  radials. 

Interradial  arese  occupied  by  a  large  number  of  pieces, 
arranged  in  four  or  more  series,  with  one  plate  in  the  first,  two  in 
the  second,  and  generally  three  in  each  succeeding  series.  The 
posterior  or  anal  area  differs  from  the  others  in  being  a  trifle 
wider,  and  having  three  plates  instead  of  two  in  the  second  and 
all  succeeding  series.  The  median  row  generally  consists  of 
larger  plates,  and  these  elevated  above  the  level  of  the  others. 
The  first  anal,  like  the  first  interradial  plate,  rests  upon  the  upper 
sloping  side  of  the  first  and  between  the  second  radials.  Inter- 
axillary  plates  from  one  to  ten,  with  a  less  number  in  species  in 
which  the  last  bifurcation  takes  place  in  the  body. 

Vault  scarcely  elevated  above  the  horizon  of  the  arm  bases ;  the 
interradial  regions  somewhat  depressed ;  composed  of  numerous 
very  small,  convex  plates.  The  apical  dome  plates  not  well 
defined ;  anal  aperture  directlj-  through  the  vault,  excentrie. 

Column  round,  of  medium  size  ;  central  canal  small,  distinctly 
pentagonal. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Glyptocrinus,  as  amended  by  us^ 
occurs  exclusively  in  the  Lower  Silurian  at  the  age  of  the  Trenton 
and  Hudson  River  groups,  and  apparently  only  in  America. 

We  recognize  the  following  species  : — 

1879.  Glyptocrintis  angularis  Miller  and  Dyer.  Jour.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  5, 
PI.  1,  fig.  10.     Hudson  River  gr.     Cincinnati,  Ohio. 

1847.  Glyptocr.  decadactylus  Hall.  Type  of  the  genus.  Paleont.  N.  York,  i,  p. 
281,  PI.  77,  figs.  1  a^f,  and  PI.  78,  figs.  1  a-u;  also  Geol.  Rep.  Ohio, 
Paleont.,  i,  p.  30,  PI.  2,  figs.  5  a,  b;  Zittel,  Handb.  der  Palaeont.,  i,  p.  375, 
figs.  262.     Hudson  River  gr.     Cincinnati,  Ohio. 

1872.  Glyptocr.  Dyeri  Meek.  Proe.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  314  ;  also  Geol.  Rep. 
Ohio,  Paleont.,  i,  p.  32,  PI.  2,  figs.  2  a,  b  (not  2  c).  Hudson  River  gr.  Cin- 
cinnati, 0. 

1855  (?)  Glyptocr.  fimbriatus  Shumard.     Geol.  Rep.  Missouri,  by  Swallow,  pt.  ii,  p. 
194,  PI.  A,  figs.  10  a,  b.     Trenton  gr.     Cape  Girardeau,  Mo. 
This  species  evidently  does  not  belong  to  Glyptocrinus,  description  and  figure 
are  too  imperfect  to  place  it  correctly. 

1874.  Glyptocr.  Fornshelli  S.  A.  Miller.  Cincin.  Quart.  Journ.  Sci.  Hudson  River 
gr.     Cincinnati,  Ohio. 


1881,]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  363 

1861  (?)  Glyptocr.  nobilis  Hall.     Rep.  of  Progress,  Geol.  Rep.  Wis.,  p.  21 ;  also  20th 

Rep.   N.  York  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  1867,  p.  21,  PI.  10,  figs.  9,  10.     Niagara 

gr.     Racine,  Wis. 
(See  our  remarks  under  Glyptocrinas  and  Lampterocrinus.) 
1857.  Glyptocr.   ornatus  Billings.     Geol.  Rep.  Canada  (Rep.  of  Progress),  p.  260 ; 

Ibid.,   1859,   Decade  iv,  p.  60,  PI.  9,  figs.  2  a,  b.     Trenton  limest.     Ottawa, 

Canada. 
1872.  Glyptocr.  parvus  Hall.     Desc.  New  Crin.,  etc.,  pt.  i,  fig.  17,  (without  descrip- 
tion): 24th  Rep.   N.  York  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  207,  PI.   6,  fig.  17;  Meek, 

1873,  Geol.  Rep.  Ohio,  Paleont.,  i,  p.  36,  PI.  2,  figs.  4  a,  b.    Hudson  River  gr. 

Cincinnati,  Ohio.     (Perhaps  a  young  G.  decadactylus.) 
1857.  Glyptocr.  priscus  Billings.     Geol.  Rep.  Canada  (Rep.  of  Progress),  p.  257; 

also,    1859,    Ibid.,   Decade   ir,   p.  56,    PI.  7,  figs.  1  a-f.      Trenton   limest. 

Ottawa,  Canada. 
1857.  Glyptocr.  ramulosus  Billings.     Geol.  Rep.  Canada  (Rep.  of  Progress),  p.  258  ; 

1859,  Ibid.,  Decade  iv,  p.  57,  PI.  7,  figs,  a-f  and  PI.  8,  figs.  1  a-e.     Trenton 

limest.     Ottawa,  Canada. 
1875.  Glyptocr.  Shaffer!  S.  A.  Miller.     Cincin.  Quart.  Journ.  Sci.,  vol.  ii,  p.  277 : 

Journ.  Cincin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  1880,  Oct.,  p.  3,  PI.  7,  fig.  3.     Hudson  River 

gr.     Cincinnati,  Ohio. 
If  this  is  a  Glyptocrinus,  it  evidently  is  a  very  young  specimen. 
Syn    Glyptocr.  Shafferi  var.  Germanus  Miller.     Journ.    Cincin.    Soc.   Nat. 

Hist.,  1880,  Oct.,  p.  3,  PI.  7,  fig.  2. 
*1872.  Glyptocr,  sabglobosas  Meek.    (Glyptocr.  Dyeri  var.  subglobosus)  Proc. 

Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  314;  also  Geol.  Surv.  Ohio,  Paleont.,  i,  p.  34,  PI.  2, 

fig.  2  c.     Hudson  River  gr.     Cincinnati,  Ohio. 
We  take  this  to  be  an  independent  species,  and  not  a  variety  of  G.  Dyeri,  it 

may  possibly  prove  to  be  a  Eeteoorinus. 


2.  ABCH.5:0CRINTJS  Nov.  gen. 
(apxaiog  ancient,  xplvov  a  lily.) 

Among  the  species  described  in  the  Canada  Report  by  Billings 
as  Rhodocrinus  and  Glyptocrinus,  there  are  several  which  cannot 
be  brought  under  either  of  these,  or  any  other  known  genus. 
They  differ  from  Glyptocrinus  in  their  larger  size,  their  surface 
ornamentation,  in  having  the  first  radial  plates  separated  by 
interradials,  in  their  shorter  and  branching  arms,  and  in  having 
them  constructed  of  a  double  series  of  wedge-form  pieces.  They 
differ  from  JReteocrinus  in  having  smaller  underbasals,  in  having 
the  interradial  plates  systematically  arranged,  of  a  less  number,and 
larger  size,  and  also  in  the  arm  structure ;  from  Rhodocrinus  in 
the  general  form  of  the  bod}',  in  the  large  number  of  secondary 
radials,  and  the  elevated  ridges  passing  gradually  and  vertically 
into  arms,  which  do  not  spring  off  laterall}'  from  the  body  as  in 
the  latter  genus. 


364  PROOBEDINGS   OP   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

We  propose  for  this  little  group,  which  is  one  of  the  oldest  of 
the  known  Crinoids,  the  name  '■'■  Archseocrinus  "  and  make  Billings' 
Gli/piocrtjius  lacunosus  the  type  of  the  genus. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Calj^x  large,  pear-shaped,  sometimes 
obcjonical ;  plates  smooth  or  granulated ;  the  radial  plates  with 
keel-like  elevations  along  their  median  line,  but  less  prominently 
than  in  Glyptocrinus,  and  the  earinse  narrower. 

Fnderbasals  five,  pentagonal,  rather  small  and  rarely  extending 
beyond  the  column.  Basals  five,  hexagonal,  with  a  truncate  upper 
side,  supporting  the  first  radial  plates.  Primary  radials  3  X  5,  of 
medium  size,  gradually  decreasing  upward,  width  and  height 
about  equal.  They  support  two  rows  of  secondary  radials  of  three 
to  four  plates  in  each  row,  which  are  followed  in  the  same  line  by 
the  arm  plates,  all  further  divisions  of  the  rays  taking  place  in 
the  arms.  The  ra3'S  are  widely  separated  by  large  interradial 
areae.  Arms  short,  slender,  the  branches  divergent ;  composed 
of  two  rows  of  cuneiform  pieces,  alternately  arranged  and  inter- 
locking. Interradial  areas  large ;  resting  directly  upon  the  upper 
truncate  side  of  the  basals,  and  passing  gradually  into  vault 
pieces.  The  plates  of  the  two  proximal  series  are  generally  of 
equal  size,  all  succeeding  ones  are  much  smaller.  There  are  two 
plates  in  the  second  series  in  all  five  areas,  those  at  the  posterior 
side  are  probably  a  little  wider.  Interaxillaries  represented  by 
one  or  more  plates. 

Vault  and  anus  unknown.     Column  round. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — Archseocrinus  is  onl}-^  known  from 
the  Lower  Silurian  of  America. 

We  place  here  the  following  species  : — 

*1857.  ArohsBocrinus  lacunosus  Billings.  Type  of  the  genus.   (Glyptoor.  lacunosus) 

Geol.  Rep.  Canada  (Rep  of  Progress),  p.  261;  Ibid.,  1859,  Decade  iv,  p.  61, 

PI.  8,  figs.  3  a-e.     Trenton  limest.     Ottawa,  Canada. 
*1857.  Archaeocr.  marginatus  Billings.   (Glyptocr.  marginatus)  Geol.  Rep.  Canada. 

(Rep.  of  Progress),  p.  260;    lb.,  1858,   Decade  iv,  p.  69,  PI.  9,  figs.  1,  1  a. 

Trenton  liraest.     Ottawa,  Canada. 
*1857.  Archaeocr,  miorobasilis  Billings,     (Thysanocr. — Bhodocr. — microbasilis) 

Geol.  Rep.  Canada  (Rep.  of  Progress),  p.  264;  Ibid.,  1859,  Decade  iv,  p.  63, 

PI.  6,  fig.  2.     Trenton  limest.     Ottawa,  Canada. 
•••1857.  Archaeocr,  pyriformis  Billings.   (Thysanocr.— Rhodoor.— pyriformis)  Geol. 

Rep,  Canada  (Rep.  of  Progress),  p.  262  ;  Ibid.,  1869,  Decade  iv,  p,  61,  PI,  6, 

figs,  1  a-d.     Trenton  limest,     Montreal,  Canada. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  365 

3.  RETEOCRINTJS  Billings. 

1859.  Billings.     Geol.  Rep,  Canada,  Decade  iv,  p.  63. 

Syn.  Glyptocrinus  (in  part),  Hall  1866  and  1872  ;  Meek  1873. 

Among  the  species  described  by  Hall  under  Glyptocrinus,  there 
is  one — Gl.  O^Nealli — which  in  several  important  characters  differs 
from  his  typical  form.  It  has  well-developed  uuderbasals,  ver}"^ 
large  basals,  a  pentagonal  stem,  and  exceedingly  depressed  inter- 
radial  and  anal  regions,  peculiar  radial  plates,  etc.,  in  all  of  which 
characters  it  agrees  with  the  genus  Reteocrinus  Billings,  which  was 
described  from  imperfect  material,  and  altogether  misunderstood 
by  its  founder.  According  to  Billings,  the  calyx  consists  of  a 
reticulated  skeleton,  composed  of  incomplete  or  rudimentary  plates, 
each  consisting  of  a  central  nucleus  with  three  to  five  stout  pro- 
cesses radiating  from  it.  Of  such  plates  he  describes  three  rings 
of  five  each,  corresponding  in  their  position  with  the  underbasals, 
basals  and  first  radials  of  other  crinoids,  and  he  compares  the 
genus  with  Cyalhocrinus,  Dendrocrinus  and  similar  forms. 

This  description  at  first  glance  does  not  agree  with  Gl.  0''Nealli, 
but  a  closer  comparison  with  Reteocr.  stellaris  Billings  shows  at 
once  a  remarkable  similarity  in  the  form  and  arrangement  of  these 
rudimentary  plates  with  the  principal  plates  of  the  former  species, 
and  leads  to  the  conclusion  that  the  interradial  plates,  which  are 
said  to  be  wanting  in  Reteocrinus,  really  exist  there,  but  are  so 
deeply  imbedded  within  the  depression  as  to  be  hidden  from  view 
b}^  the  matrix.  Even  in  Glyptocr.  (?)  O^Nealli,  the  construction 
of  the  interradial  spaces  is  but  rarely  observed.  Looking  at  the 
specimens  in  the  condition  in  which  they  are  generally  found,  they 
agree  remarkably  well  with  Billings'  description.  The  second 
and  third  primary  radials  appear  to  be  free  plates,  and  the  calyx 
seems  to  be  composed  of  only  three  rings  of  plates  like  in  the 
Cyathocrinidse. 

The  resemblance  of  Gl.  O^Nealli  with  the  genus  Reteocrinus, 
was  pointed  out  already  by  Meek  (Paleont.  of  Ohio,  i,  p.  34),  but 
he  left  the  species  under  Glyptocrinus ;  also  Wetherby  noticed 
this  similarity  in  the  description  of  his  Glyptocr.  Richardsoni, 
and  he  agrees  with  us,  that  both  his  species  and  Gl.  0''Nealli 
should  be  arranged  under  Reteocrinus. 

A  reconstruction  of  the  genus  with  Gl.  O^Nealli  =  Reteocr. 
iVNeoMi,  as  t^pe,  will,  we  believe,  clear  up  a  number  of  difficulties, 
and  we  accordingly  propose  the  following  : — 


366  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

Revised  Generic  Diagnosis. — Calyx  obconical,  its  symmetry 
somewhat  bilateral ;  interradial  and  interaxillary  spaces  pro- 
foundly depressed ;  radial  plates  highly  elevated  into  sti'ong 
rounded  ridges,  which  in  outer  appearance  resemble  arms  ;  they 
bifurcate  and  follow  the  secondary  radials,  whence  they  pass 
gradually  into  free  arm  joints. 

Underbasals  five,  well  developed,  extending  beyond  the  column. 
Basals  five,  large,  protuberant,  hexagonal,  the  upper  side  slightly 
truncate  and  supporting  the  first  series  of  interradial  plates ;  the 
upper  portions  inflected,  and  involved  in  the  interradial  depres- 
sions. 

Radials  3X5,  those  of  different  rays  separated  by  interradials ; 
the  first  and  third  pentagonal,  the  second  quadrangular,  as  long 
as  the  two  former  ones  but  narrower.  The  radials  are  highl}'- 
elevated,  forming  a  broad  rounded  ridge,  which  from  the  third 
radial  branches  upward,  following  the  secondary  radials,  and 
downward  from  the  first  primar3'^  radials  toward  the  basals.  This 
branching  gives  to  the  first  and  third  radials  a  similar  form,  only 
the  direction  of  the  branches  reversed,  the  truncation  taking 
place  from  reversed  sides  of  the  plates.  Secondary  radials  four 
to  five  in  the  adult,  a  less  number  in  young  specimens;  decreasing 
in  height  upwards,  quadrangular,  shaped  like  arm  joints,  and  like 
them  giving  off  pinnules,  which  in  the  adult  are  incorporated  ^ 
within  the  body. 

Arms  ten,  long,  slender,  rounded,  bifurcating,  composed  of  a 
single  series  of  rectangular  or  slightly  wedge-formed  pieces,  which 
give  off  on  alternate  sides  rather  stout,  closely  arranged  pinnules. 
Interradial  series  resting  directly  upon  the  basals,  consisting  of 
a  very  large  number  of  minute  pieces,  of  irregular  form,  and  with- 
out definite  arrangement ;  the  posterior  area  wider,  with  a  con- 
spicuous row  of  decidedly  larger  and  more  prominent  special  anal 
pieces  along  the  median  part.  Interaxillary  plates  almost  as 
numerous  as  the  interradials,  and  of  a  similar  character.  The 
peculiar  depressed  state  of  the  interradial  and  interaxillary  areae, 
the  irregularity  with  which  their  plates  are  arranged,  suggests  the 
possibility  that  they  were  adapted  to  expansion  by  the  animal. 

Vault  composed  of  numerous,  \&vy  small  and  convex  pieces, 
with  an  elevation  running  to  each  arm  base ;  the  plates  in  the 

^  See  our  remarks  upon  fixed  pinnules  in  our  general  notes  upon  the 
Sphseroidocrini  dae . 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADKLPHIA.  36t 

median  part,  which  probabl}'  include  the  apical  plates,  somewhat 
larger.  Anal  aperture  directly  through  the  vault,  small,  sub- 
central. 

Column  subpentagonal,  its  lateral  faces  but  little  depressed ; 
central  canal  rather  large. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — Eeteocririus  belongs  to  the  age  of  the 
Trenton  and  Hudson  River  groups,  and  is  only  found  in  America. 

We  place  here  the  following  species  : — 

■■■1872.  Beteoorinus  Baeri  Meek.     (Glyptocr.  Baeri)  Amer.  Journ.  Sci.  and  Arts,  iii 

(Ser.  3),  p.  260  ;  also  1873,  Geol.  Rep.  Ohio,  Palaeont.,  p.  37,  PI.  2,  fig.  1  a,  b. 

Upper  part  of  Hudson  Riv.  gr.     Richmond,  Ind. 
*1881.  Eeteocrinus  cognatus  S.  A.  Miller.    (Glyptocr.  cognatus)  Journ.  Cincin. 

See.  Nat.  Hist.  (April  No.),  p.  7,  PI.  1,  fig.  5.     Hudson  River  gr.     Middle- 

toirn,  Ohio. 
*1859.  Beteocr.  fimbriatus  Billings.     Geol.  Rep.  Canada,  Decade  iv,  p.  65,  PI.  9, 

figs.  3  a,  b,  c.     Hudson  River  gr.     Island  of  Anticosti. 
*1881.  Beteocr.  gracilis  Wetherby.     (Glyptocr.  gracilis)  Now  in  press.     Cincin. 

Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  PI.  ii,  figs.  2,  2  a.     Hudson  River  gr. 
«1866.  Beteocr.  O'Nealli  Hall.     Proposed  type  of  the  genus.     (Glyptocr.  O'Nealli) 

Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  2 ;  also  24th  Rep.  N.  Y.  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  206, 

PI.  5,  figs.  18,  19;  Meek,  1873,  Geol.  Rep.  Ohio,  Paleont.,  i,  p.  34,  PI.  2,  figs. 

3  a,  b,  c.     Upper  part  of  the  Hudson  River  gr.     Lebanon,  0. 

*1880.  Beteocr.  Bichardsoni  Wetherby.      (Glptocr.  Bichardsoni)  Journ.  Cincin. 

Soc.  Nat.  Hist;    Desc.  New  Crin.  Cincin.  gr.,  PI.  16,  figs.  1  a-e.     Hudson 

River  gr.     Clinton  Co.,  Ohio. 
*1859.  Beteocr.  stellaris  Billings.     Geol.  Rep.  Canada  Dec,  iv,  p.  64,  PI.  9,  figs. 

4  a-e.     Trenton  limestone.     Ottawa,  Can. 


h.  Glyptasterites. 
4.  GLYPTASTEB  Hall. 

1852.  Hall.     Paleont.  N.  York,  ii,  p.  187. 

1863.  Hall.     Trans.  Albany  Inst.,  iv,  p.  203. 

1879.  Hall.     28th  Rep.  N.  Y.  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.  (ed.  ii),  p.  133. 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Palaeont,,  i,  p.  375. 

The  genus  Glyptaster  is  involved  in  some  confusion.  It  was 
founded  upon  a  specimen  from  the  Niagara  group  of  New  York, 
which  Hall  named  Glyptaster  hrachiatus.  In  the  type  specimen, 
the  plates  of  the  calyx  are  altogether  obscure  except  possibly  the 
basals,  which  were  stated  to  be  five  in  number.  The  specimen 
further  showed  five  highly  elevated  ridges  along  the  radial  por- 
tions of  the  calyx,  and  ten  long,  slender  arms,  which  are  com- 
posed of  a  double  series  of  interlocking  joints,  and  spread  out 


368  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE   ACADEMY    OP  [1881. 

horizontally  at  right  angles  to  the  -walls  of  the  body,  without 
bifurcations,  and,  according  to  figure,  without  pinnules. 

Judging  from  this  description,  the  double-jointed  arms  are  the 
only  characters  which  distinguish  the  genus  from  Glyptocrinus. 
The  next  two  species  referred  to  Glyptaster  were  O.  occidentalis 
and  G.  inornatus^  both  described  by  Hall  from  the  Niagara  gr.  of 
Waldron,  Ind.  In  these  specimens,  which  are  found  rather 
abundantlj'^,  only  the  calyx  was  preserved,  while  the  vault  and 
arms  remained  unknown,  thus  leaving  it  somewhat  doubtful 
whether  the  two  Waldron  species  may  not  be  generically  distinct 
from  the  New  York  form. 

Glyptaster  is  closely  allied  to  Eucrinus  Angelin,  indeed  so 
closely,  that  we  have  some  doubt  whether  the  two  should  not  be 
altogether  united  instead  of  being  separated  subgenerically,  as 
now  pursued  by  us.  So  far  as  known,  the  latter  form  differs  onl^^ 
in  having  tertiary  radials  and  additional  arms.  It  is  possible  that 
Glyptaster  penfangularis  Hall  and  Glyptocr.  armosus  McChesney 
belong  to  the  subdivision,  the  two  species  are  only  known  from 
internal  casts,  which  are  unreliable  for  purposes  of  identification, 
unless  accompanied  by  a  cast  of  the  external  mould. 

In  a  ver}'  interesting  specimen  of  Glyptaster  inornatus,  kindly 
loaned  us  by  Mr.  Wm.  F,  Gurley,  of  Danville,  111.,  and  the  only 
specimen  known  to  us  in  which  the  vault  and  anal  aperture  have 
been  found  preserved,  we  notice  in  two  of  the  rays  on  the  side 
toward  the  interradial  spaces,  and  enclosed  by  them,  a  highly 
elevated  fixed  pinnule.  The  specimen  is  of  comparatively  large 
size,  and  as  the  interradials  in  this  species  have  no  conspicuous 
surface  markings,  these  pinnules  are  readily  recognized.  Both 
are  given  off  from  a  first  secondar}'^  radial,  which  thereby  takes 
the  form  and  aspect  of  a  bifurcating  plate.  The  first  joint  of  the 
pinnule  is  rather  large,  and  the  ridge  or  elevation  upon  the  plate 
is  about  one-half  the  width  of  that  upon  the  radials.  Two  more 
joints  follow,  likewise  enclosed  within  the  body  walls,  and  having 
a  ridge  equally  conspicuous,  though  narrower.  From  the  first 
joint  of  the  pinnule  is  given  off  another  or  secondary  pinnule, 
fixed  like  the  other  but  more  slender,  and  composed  of  at  least . 
two  joints.  The  first  plate  of  the  primary  pinnule  has  altogether 
the  appearance  of  a  tertiary  radial,  and  is  given  off  in  a  like  man- 
ner, but  the  succeeding  plates,  though  somewhat  larger  than 
common,  resemble  more  those  of  ordinary  pinnules,  or  may  be 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  3G9 

described  as  intermediate  between  fixed  pinnule  plates  and  radials. 
This  is  but  an  abnormal  case,  but  it  gives  some  idea  how  in  the 
course  of  time,  among  species,  bifurcating  radials  became  devel- 
oped from  pinnule-bearing  plates,  and  additional  arms  from  the 
proximal  pinnules. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Form  of  calyx  subturbinate  or  obconical ; 
strongly  depressed  between  the  arm  bases  ;  plates  delicate,  beauti- 
fully ornamented  with  granules  and  stride,  the  radial  portions 
with  strong  ridges  or  costae ;  anal  area  very  wide,  and  hence  sym- 
metry distinctly  bilateral. 

Underbasals  five,  small  but  not  rudimentary,  and  generally 
extending  beyond  the  column.  Basals  five,  four  of  them  equal 
with  the  upper  side  angular,  the  fifth  larger  with  a  truncate  upper 
side  for  the  support  of  the  first  anal  plate.  Primary  radials  .3  X  5  % 
width  and  height  nearly  equal,  decreasing  in  size  upward.  The 
third  radials  support  two  rows  of  secondary  radials,  which  are 
separated  bj^  one  to  three  interaxillary  plates,  the  latter  being 
perhaps  absent  in  young  specimens.  The  number  of  secondary 
radials,  like  in  the  Glyptocrinites^  is  variable,  differing  amono- 
species,  and  increasing  with  age  in  the  individual ;  their  exact 
number  is  rarely  ascertained,  as  they  pass  gradually  into  brachials 
and  regular  arm  plates. 

Arms  ten,  simple  ?  and  composed  of  two  rows  of  interlocking 
pieces  with  pinnules. 

Interradial  areae  large,  and,  compared  with  the  preceding  genera 
composed  of  fewer  and  larger  plates.  There  is  one  plate  in  the 
first  series,  which  rests  between  the  two  upper  sides  of  two  first 
and  between  two  second  radials ;  two  in  the  second  series,  on  a 
level  with  the  third  radials,  with  much  smaller  plates  above,  which 
connect  with  the  interradial  portions  of  the  dome. 

Anal  area  distinctly  wider.  The  first  anal  plate  resting  upon  the 
truncate  posterior  basal,  and  between  two  adjoining  first  radials ; 
there  are  three  plates  in  the  second,  and  four  or  five  in  each  suc- 
ceeding series.  Above  the  level  of  the  third  primary  radials  the 
plates  are  bent  somewhat  inward,  the  anal  area  is  in  the  middle 
elevated  into  a  low  ridge,  at  the  sides  depressed. 

The  vault  which  is  only  known  in  Glyptaster  inornatus  is 
decidedly  pentalobate,  and  resembles  DoryciHnus  in  the  anal 
region.  Anal  opening  excentric,  protruding  and  reaching  some- 
what beyond  the  limits  of  the  vault,  not  extended  into  a  tube. 

25 


310  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

Apical  dome  plates  well  defined  but  somewhat  displaced,  owing 
to  the  great  number  of  plates  which  surround  the  anus.  Radial 
regions  of  the  dome  prominent,  in  form  of  five  high  ridges  which 
bifurcate,  sending  a  branch  to  each  arm.  They  are  composed  of 
two  rows  of  rather  large  convex  and  elongate  plates,  transversely 
arranged,  which  in  branching  sepai^ate,  and  pass  on  as  two  single 
rows  of  plates. 

Interradial  dome  regions  depressed,  and  composed  of  small 
irregular  pieces. 

Column  round  ;  central  canal  of  medium  size. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Glyptaster  is  known  onl^-  from  the 
Niagara  group,  Upper  Silurian,  of  America. 

We  recognize  the  following  species  : — 

*1861  (?).  Glyptaster  armosus  McChcsney.  (Eucalyptocr  armosus)  Desc.  New  Pal. 

Crin.,  p.  95  :  also  1867,  Glyptocr.  (1)  armosus,  ChicHgo  Acad.  Sci.,  p.  23,  PI. 

7,  fig.  6;   Hall,  20th  Rep.  N.  Y.  St.  Cab.  Nat,  Hist.,  PI.  10,  fig.  11.     Niagara 

limest.     Racine,  Wis. 
Sj/n.  Glytocr.  siphonatus  Hall.     (Not.)  1861,  Geol.  Rep.  Wis.,  p.  22 ;  20th 

Rep.  N.  Y.  Bt.  Cab.  Nat.  Wst.,  p.  328,  PI.  10.  fig.  11. 
Gl   armosus  was  described  from  internal  casts,  and  there  is  some  doubt  as  to 

its  specific  and  even  generic  character. 
1852.  Glyptaster  brachiatus  Hall.     Type  of  the  genus.     Paleont.  N.  Y.,  ii,  p.  187, 

PI.  41,  fig.  4.     Niagara  gr.     Lockport,  N.  Y. 
1863.  Glyptafter  inornatus  Hnll.     Trans.  Alb.  Inst.,  iv,  p.  205  :  also  28t>i  R.p.  N.  Y. 

St.  Cab.   Nat.  Hist.,   1879  (ed.   ii),  p.   134,  PI.  14,   figs.  1-6.     Niagara  gr. 

Waldron,  Ind. 
1863.  Glyptaster  occidentalis  Hall.     Trans.  Alb.  Inst.,  iv,  p.  204;  al.-'o  20th  Rep. 

N.  Y.  St.   Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  305,  and  28th  Rep.  1879   (ed.  ii),   PI.  18,  figs. 

7,  11.     Niagara  gr.     Waldron,  Ind.,  and  Racine,  Wis. 
1804.  (?)  Glyptaster  pentangularis  Hall.    20th  Rep.  N.  Y.  St.  Cab.  Na^.  Hist.,  p. 

326,  PI.  10,  fig.  3  (advance  sheets  1864).     Niagara  gr.     Rueine,  Wis. 
The  species  was  described  from  casts,  but  probably  belongs  to  this  genus. 

Subgenus  EUCRINTJS  Angelin. 

1878.  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  24. 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Palaeont.,  i,  p.  375. 

Syn.  BJiodocrinus  Schultze  1866  (in  part).     Echin.  Eifl.  Kalk,  p.  57. 
Syn.  Dimerocrinus  (in  part)  Phillips,  1839  ;  d'Orbigny,  1850  and 
1853  ;  Pictet,  1857. 

Eucrinus  agrees  with  Glyptaster  in  the  form  of  the  calj^x,  the 
style  of  ornamentation,  and  size  and  form  of  underbasals.  It 
also  has  3X5  primary  radials,  and  an  elevated  ridge  all  along  the 
radial  regions,  but  diff^^ers  in  having  tertiary  radials — from  one  to 
two  or  more— and  four  arms  to  each  ray.     There  is  no  departure 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA.  3Y1 

in  the  arrangement  of  the  interradial  plates,  the  first  anal  stands 
in  line  with  the  first  radials,  and  is  succeeded  bj''  three  plates  in 
the  second  series,  and  other  plates  above. 

In  all  known  species,  the  median  row  of  anal  plates  is  arranged 
longitudinally,  somewhat  curved  toward  the  margins,  and  slightly 
elevated  in  form  of  a  ridge  above  the  general  level  of  the  other 
plates,  as  in  the  case  of  Ghjptasler  inornatus  and  several  other 
species. 

We  place  here  Schultze's  Rhodocr.  quinquelobus,  it  being  the 
only  species  of  this  group  in  which  the  construction  of  the  vault 
is  known.  The  dome  is  composed  of  small  plates,  central  dome 
plate  crowned  with  a  short  spine,  anus  excentric,  almost  lateral, 
and  not  prolonged  into  a  proboscis. 

Arms  are  rather  strong,  composed  of  two  series  of  interlocking 
pieces. 

Column  round  ;  central  canal  of  medium  size. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Eucrinus  has  been  found  in  Sweden  in 
rocks  of  the  Upper  Silurian,  in  Germany  in  the  Stringocephalen- 
kalk  of  the  Eifel.  Two  of  Angelin's  species  have  been  referred 
to  our  new  genus  Anthemocrinus.  We  recognize  only  the  follow- 
ing species : — 

*I839.  Eucrinus  ioosidactylus  Phillips.     (Dimerocr.  icosidactylus)  Murchison's 

Silur.  Syst.,  p.  673,  PI.  17,  fig.  5;   D'Orbigny,  1850,  Prodr.  de  Paleont.,  i,  p. 

46;   Pietet,  Traite  de  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  142.     Upper  Silurian.     Dudley,  Eng. 
1878.  Eucr.  interradialis  Angelin.     Icouogr,  Crin.  Suec,  p.  25,  PI.  6,  fig.  6,  and  PI. 

19,  fig?.  1,  7,  8.     Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Swe  len. 
1878.  Eucr.  laevis  Angelin.     Type  of  the  genus.     leonogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  25,  PI.  6, 

figs.  8,  8  a.     Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
1878.  Eucr.   quinquangularis   Angelin.     leonogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  25,  PI.  10.  figs.  5, 

14.     Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 
*1867.  Eucr.  quinquelobus  SehuUze.     (Ehodocr.  quinquelobus )  Eohin.  Eifl.  Kalk. 

p.  57,  PI.  7,  tig.  6.     Devonian.     Eifel,  Germ. 
1878.  Eucr.  oruatus  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  25,  PI.  6,  figs.  7  a,  b.     Upper 

Silurian,     (iothland,  Sweden. 
1878.  Eucr.   speciosus  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Su°e..  p.  25,  PI.  19,  figs.  2,  2  a,  and 

PI.   23:  figs.  7  a,  b,   and    PI.  26;  figs,  26,  26  a,  an  i  PI.  27:  fig.  2.      Upper 

Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

5.  DIMEROCRINUS  Phillip?. 

1839.  Phillips.     Murchi«on's  Sihir.  Syst.,  p.  674  (in  part). 
1841.  Miiller.     Monatsber.  Berl.  Akad.,  i,  p.  208  liii  part). 
1850.  D'Orbigny.     Prodr.  de  Paleont.,  1,  p.  46  (in  part). 
1852.  D'Orbigny.     Cours.  elem.  de  Paleont.,  ii,  p.  142  (in  part). 
1857.  Pictet.     Traite  de  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  318  (in  part). 


372  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Palseont.,  i,  p.  368  (in  part). 

(Not  Pacht,  1853.     Verb.  Kaiserl.  Russ.  Gesellscb.,  p.  262.) 
Syn.  Thysanocrinus  Hall,  1852.     Paleont.  N.York,  ii,  p.  188. 

(Not  Thysanocrinus  {Bhodocr.)  Billings.     Geol.  Surv.  Canada  for 
1853  to  1856,  p.  2o2.) 

The  name  Dimerocrinus  was  given  by  Phillips  to  two.species 
from  Dudlej",  England,  which  are  known  as  D.  decadactylus  and 
D.  icosidactylus,  and  which  were  figured  without  specific  or 
generic  definition.  The  genus  has  been  generally  accepted,  but 
is  since  described  as  having  only  one  ring  of  plates  beneath  the 
radials,  and  this  variously  by  different  writers  as  composed  of 
either  three  or  five  plates. 

We  have  carefully  examined  the  two  species,  and  find  that  they 
both  have  underbasals.  Those  of  D.  decadactylus  are  placed 
within  a  rather  deep  concavity,  formed  between  the  basals  and 
hidden  by  the  column,  exactly  as  some  species  described  and 
figured  by  Hall  under  his  genus  Thysanocrinus,  which  we  take  to 
be  a  sj'nonym  of  Dimerocrinus.  Phillips'  D.  icosidactylus  is 
geuericall}'  distinct,  and  has  been  referred  by  us  to  Eucrinus. 
Ver}'  closely  allied  is  Patelliocrinus  Angelin,  which  Zittel  unites 
with  Dimerocrinus;  the  two  genera  resemble  each  other  most 
remarkably,  but  the  former  can  readily  be  separated  by  its  three 
basals  and  the  absence  of  underbasals. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Body  small,  calyx  short,  subglobose  or 
conical ;  plates  not  numerous,  surface  less  ornamented  than  in  the 
preceding  genera,  smooth  or  indistinctly  granulose ;  symmetry 
bilateral. 

Underbasals  five,  small,  arranged  within  a  concavity,  which  is 
nearly  or  entirely  filled  by  the  column.  Basals  five,  four  of  them 
equal,  angular  above  ;i  the  fifth  truncate  and  supporting  the  first 
anal  plate.  Primar}^  radials  3X5;  the  first  almost  as  large  as 
the  second  and  third  together  and  considerably  wider,  the  two 
lower  sides  making  an  angle,  which  rests  deeply  between  the 
basals  ;  lateral  sides  short,  the  first  interradial  is  almost  touching 
the  angle  of  the  basal  plates ;  second  radials  more  or  less  quad- 
rangular, wider  than  high  ;  the  third  radials  giving  off  two  or 
three  secondary  i-adials,  of  the  form  of  arm  plates,  of  which  each 
one  supports  an  arm.  .  Pinnules  strongs  less  closely  arranged  than 
usuallj"  in  this  family,  their  joints  rounded,  two  or  tlai*ee;  times  as 
long;  as  wide. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA.  373 

Interradial  arese  composed  of  but  few  plates,  the  first  one  large, 
placed  between  the  second  radial s,  and  leaning  partl}^  against  the 
third,  with  two  small  plates  above.  Posterior  or  anal  area  wider, 
the  first  plate  in  line  with  the  first  radials  and  of  the  same  size  ; 
it  is  followed  by  three  plates  in  the  second  series  and  several 
smaller  ones  above,  the  upper  ones  connecting  with  the  vault. 
Vault,  and  form  of  the  anus  unknown. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — The  only  three  known  species  are 
Upper  Silurian,  from  the  age  of  the  Niagara  group, 

1839.  Dimerocrinus   decadactylus    Phillips.     Type   of   the    genu?.      Murehison's 

Silur.  S^-st.,  p.  (574,  PI.   17,  fig.  4;  d  Orbigny,  1850,  Prodr.  de  Paleunt..  i,  p. 

46;  Piete',  Traits  dd  Paleont.,  i,  p.  368.      Upper  Silurian.      Dudley,  Eng. 
*1852.  Dimerocr.  liliiformis  Hall.     (Thysanoor.  liliiformis)  Palemt.  N.  Y.,  ii,  p. 

188,  PI.  42,  figs.  1  a-f.     Niagara  gr.     Lockport,  New  York. 
*1852.  Dimerocr.  immaturus  Hall.     (Thysanoor.   immaturus)  Pa'eont.  N.  Y.,  ii, 

p.  191,  I'l.  42,  figs.  4  a-f.     Niagara  gr.     Lockport,  N.  Y. 

6.  LAMPTEKOCEINUS  Roemer. 

1860.  Roemer.     Silur.  Fauna  West.  Tenn.,  p.  37. 

1863.  Hall.     Trans.  Albany  lust.,  iv,  p.  202. 

1868.  Hall.     20th  Rep.,  N.  Y.  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  328. 

Syn.  Balanocrinus  Troost,  1850    (not   Agassiz,   1846),   Cat.   Foss. 
Tenn. 

Hall,  in  comparing  the  genera  Glyptocrinus^  Glyptader^  Balan- 
ocrinus and  Lampterocrinus  (Trans.  Albany  Inst.,  iv,  p.  202), 
considered  the  last  two  identical,  and  that  the}'  differ  from  the 
former  in  having  larger  underbasals.  He  then  discriminated  in 
favor  of  Troost's  Catalogue  name,  but  afterwards  in  the  20th 
Rep.  N.  Y.  St.  Cab.,  p.  820,  he  very  properly,  recognized  the 
priority-  of  Roemer's  name  Lampterocrin  us.  A  difference  as  above 
stated  would  scarcely  be  sufficient  to  warrant  a  generic  separation, 
but  we  think  this  genus  is  separable  from  the  other  two  by  other 
and  more  important  characters  than  those  noted  by  Hall.  Lamp- 
terocrinus differs  from  Glyptocrinus  in  the  arrangement  of  its 
anal  plates,  and  in  having  an  anal  tube  ;  from  Glyptaster  in  the 
anal  and  arm  structure,  and  from  both  of  them  in  the  size  of  the 
basals  and  underbasals,  in  the  form  and  construction  of  the  vault, 
and  in  the  pentagonal  column. 

Roemer  describes  Lampterocrinus  as  having  four  primary 
radials,  the  fourth  bifurcating  and  excavated  for  the  reception  of 
an  arm.     This  is  not  quite  in  accordance  with  our  views,  we 


374  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

think  the  so-called  fourth  radial  is  an  arm-bearing  secondary 
radial,  which  is  given  off  in  a  similar  manner  as  is  the  plate  which 
supports  the  first  arm  in  Steganocrinus  scitlptus  (PI.  18,  fig.  3); 
this  explains  sufficiently  the  form  of  the  third  radials,  which  are 
here  truncate  above  instead  of  axillary  as  usually.  The  arms  are 
unknown,  but  we  judge  from  the  enormous  size  of  the  so-called 
arm  openings,  which  form  large  breaks,  that  the  bodj'  in  this  genus 
was  extended  into  lateral  appendages,  and  gave  off  numerous  arms. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Body  oblong,  contracted  between  the  arm 
bases,  except  the  posterior  side,  which  toward  the  dome  bulges 
considerably,  thereb}-  producing  some  irregularity  in  the  general 
form.  Calyx,  cup-  or  urn-shaped,  beautifully  ornamented  with 
radiating  strife. 

Underbasals  five,  forming  a  pentagon,  the  plates  of  equal  size, 
quadrangular,  the  sides  of  the  outer  angles  shorter.  Basals  five, 
large,  sometimes  fully  as  large  as  the  first  radials,  four  of  them 
equal  and  angular  above,  the  posterior  one  considerably  higher 
and  its  upper  side  truncate.  Primary  radials  3(?)  X  5,  wider 
than  high,  all  three  hexagonal  and  with  truncate  upper  side, 
decreasing  in  size  upward  ;  the  third  not  more  than  one-fourth 
the  size  of  the  first.  Higher  orders  of  radials  unknown,  but 
probabh'  formed  into  free  raj-s  which  give  off  arms  laterally. 

The  interradial  plates  extend  uninterruptedly  into  the  vault, 
those  of  the  calyx  and  vault  being  undistinguishable  ;  indeed,  in 
this  genus  it  almost  appears  as  if  the  interradial  pieces  of  the 
calyx  extend  up  to  the  proximal  vault  pieces.  The  first  inter- 
radial rests  slightly  between  the  upper  sloping  sides  of  the  first 
and  between  the  second  radials,  with  a  number  of  series  above, 
composed  of  two  or  three  plates  each.  The  first  anal  plate  rests 
directly  upon  the  posterior  basal,  which  is  of  such  great  height 
that  the  upper  side  of  the  anal  is  horizontally  in  line  with  the  top 
of  the  first  interradial.  There  are  three  plates  in  the  second  and 
all  succeeding  series,  arranged  longitudinally,  forming  three 
rows,  of  which  the  plates  of  the  median  one  are  wider  and  marked 
by  an  elevated  ridge. 

Form  of  the  vault  unsymmetrical,  bulging  at  the  posterior 
side,  with  a  subcentral  anal  tube  ;  plates  rather  large  and  nodose, 
the  radial  ones  decreasing  in  size  toward  the  arms. 

The  apical  dome  plates,  although  not  distinguished  by  size,  are 
readily  recognized  by  their  position.  Length  of  anal  tube  unknown. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  3*75 

Column  pentagonal,  central  canal  very  small. 
Geological  Foaition,  etc. — L ampler ocrinus  is  only  known  from 
the  Niagara  group  of  America. 

1S61.  lampterocrinus  inflatus  Hall.     (Balancer,  inflatus)  Geol.  Rep.  Wis.  (Rep. 
of  Progress),  p.  22;  Lampterocr.  inflatus,  ISfiS,  20th  Rep.  N.  Y.  St.  Cab. 
Nat.  Hist.,  p.  328,  PI.  10,  fig.  6.     Niagara  gr.     Racine,  Wisconsin. 
This  species  is  described  from  internal  casts,  but  there  can  be  no  doubt  as  to  its 
generic  identity  ;  the  sptcific  characters,  however,  are  undeterminable. 
1360.  Lampterocr.  Tennesseensis    Roemer.      T^vpe   of    the   genus.      Silur.    Fauna 
West.  Tenn.,  p.  3",  PI.  4,  figs.  1  a,  b.     Niagara  gr.     Western  Tennessee. 
Si/n.  Balancer,  sculptus  Troost,  1850.     Catalogue  name. 

7.  SAGENOCEINTIS  Angelin. 

1843.  Austin.     Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (ser.  i),  xi,  p.  205. 
1857.  Pictet.     Traite  de  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  323. 

1878.  Angelin.     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  8. 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  d.  Palaeout.,  i,  p.  375. 

Syn.  Rhodocrinus  (in  part)  Miller,  1821;  Actinoerinus  (in  part) 
Phillips,  1839  ;  Salter,  1859,  Olyptocrinus  d'Orbigny  (not  Hall), 
1850,  Prodr.,  i,  p.  46. 

Syn.  Megistoerinus  Angelin  (not  Owen  and  Sliumard),  1878,  Iconogr. 
Crin.  Suec,  p.  8. 

The  genus  Sagenocrinus  was  based  upon  a  species  from  Dudley, 
England,  which  had  been  referred  by  Miller  to  his  Rhodocr. 
verus.  and  which  he  believed  to  occur  both  in  the  Subcarboniferous 
and  the  Upper  Silurian.  The  Subcarboniferous  specimens  are 
now  conceded  to  be  distinct,  constituting  the  type  of  Rhodocrinus, 
and  the}"  have  in  contrast  to  the  Silurian  forms  the  arms  con- 
structed of  double  joints.  The  Silurian  species,  with  three 
underbasals  and  single  arm  joints,  was  separated  by  Phillips  as 
Acfinocr.  expansus,  and  in  1843  was  made  by  Austin  the  type  of 
Sagenocrinus.  Miller's  figure  -.  p.  106,  is  evidently  ideal,  made 
up  from  the  arms  of  Sagenocr.  expansus,  and  the  body  of 
Rhodocr.  verus.  The  body  in  the  former  has  perfectly  smooth 
plates,  and  the  latter  has  certainly  not  single-jointed  arms,  as 
these  do  not  occur  in  this  family  beyond  the  Silurian.  Sageno- 
C7'ini(s  differs  from  Rhodocrinus  in  having  onlj'  three  underbasals, 
in  the  form  of  the  body,  and  in  the  arm  structure.  It  is  possible 
that  Wirtgen  and  Zeiler's  Rhodocr.  gonatodes  is  a  Sagenocrinus 
if  not  a  Thylacocrinus.     The  species  is  only  known  from  casts. 

Austin  places  Sagenocrinus  with  the  Periechocrinidae,  Pictet 
with  the  Actinocriniens,  Angelin  in  a  family  by  itself,  which  he 


3T6  PROCEEDINGS    OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

arranges  systematically  next  to  the  Taxocrlnidse.  It  cannot  be 
denied  that  Sagenocr.  expanaus,  in  its  general  structure,  and  par- 
ticularly in  the  arms,  resembles  some  species  of  Taxocrinus,  but 
the  body  lacks  entirely  the  articulate  structure.  Zittel  places  it 
in  a  subdivision  of  the  Glyptocrinidae. 

Generic  Diagnosis — General  form  including  arms,  oblong. 
Calyx  cyathiform ;  without  ridges  along  the  radial  regions,  and 
without  marked  surface  ornamentation ;  symmetry  slightly  bi- 
lateral. 

Underbasals  three,  unequal,  anchylosed,  forming  a  pentjtgon. 
Basals  five,^  differing  somewhat  in  form,  generally  four  of  them 
acute  above,  the  fifth  truncate.  Primary  radials  3  X  5,  of  nearly 
equal  size,  the  first  and  third  of  a  like  form,  but  reversed. 
Secondarj'^  radials  4X10,  rather  large,  their  upper  and  lower 
sides  parallel.  The  upper  plate  bifurcating,  giving  off  from  each 
side  a  primary  arm — making  twenty  in  all — which  at  intervals 
divide  again.  The  branches  are  toward  the  inner  side  of  the  ray, 
and  remain  simple  throughout.  The  arms  taper  rapidly  near  the 
ends,  and — if  the  fragment  figured  by  Angelin,  Iconogr.,  PI.  28, 
fig.  8,  belongs  to  this  genus,  of  which  we  entertain  some  doubt — 
the  upper  parts  coil  spirally  inward  once  or  twice.  _  They  are 
composed  of  single  joints,  which  are  wide  and  short,  quadrangu- 
lar, with  sutures  nearly  parallel,  except  the  bifurcating  plates 
which  are  depressed  pentagonal.     Pinnules  short  (Angelin\ 

Interradial  spaces  not  depressed,  plates  numerous,  composed 
of  four  or  more  series  of  two  plates  each,  very  graduall}-  decreas- 
ing in  size.  The  first  plate  rests  deeply  between  the  first  radials, 
almost  touching  the  upper  angle  of  the  basals.  The  first  anal 
plate  rests  upon  the  truncate  side  of  the  posterior  basal,  support- 
ing two  plates  in  the  second,  and  three  in  the  third  series.  Inter- 
axillaries  one  or  more. 

General  form  and  structure  of  the  vault  not  known,  but  it 
evidently  was  elevated  near  the  arm  regions,  and  composed  of  a 
large  number  of  small  plates.     Anus  unknown. 

The  column,  according  to  Angelin  (PI.  21,  fig.  8),  is  tripartite  (?) 
and  perforated  with  a  large  pentalobate  canal. 

*  Angelin  gives  the  number  of  basals  (parabasals)  as  six,  which  is  evi- 
dently a  mistake,  nor  do  we  believe  that  the  sixth  plate  represents  an  anal 
plate,  as  no  plate  of  that  kind  has  ever  been  observed  below  the  line  of 
radials. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  3T^ 

1839.  Sagenocrinus  expansus  Phillips.  (Aotinocr.  expansus)  Murchison's  Silur. 
Syst.,  p.  674,  PI.  17.  fig.  9 ;  Austin,  1843,  Sagenoor.  expansus  Ann.  and  Mag. 
Nat.  Hist.,  xi  (ser.  i),  p.  205  ;  Morris,  1843,  Cat.  Brit.  Foss.  (ed.  i),  p.  58  ; 
d'Orbigny,  1850,  Glyptocr.  expansus,  Prodr.  de  Paleont.,  i,  p.  46;  Pictit, 
1857,  Sagenocr.  expansus,  Traite  le  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  323;  Salter,  1859, 
Glyptocr.  expansus,  Silur.  Syst.  (ed.  ii),  p.  512,  PI.  15,  figs.  1,  2;  Angelin, 
1878,  Icon.  Grin.  Suec,  p.  8,  PI.  15,  figs.  6,  8  and  (?)  PI.  27,  figs.  8  a,  b  and  (?) 
PL  28,  fig.  8.  Upper  Silur.  Dudley,  England. 
Si/n.  Bhodocr,  verus  Miller  (in  part).  Nat.  Hist,  of  Crin.,  p.  106,  PI.  1, 
fig.  1  a.     Dudley,  Engl. 

c.  Rhodocrinites. 
8.  LYRIOCRINUS  Hall. 

1852.  Hall.     Paleont.  New  York,  ii,  p.  197. 
1857.  Pictet.     Traite  de  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  329. 

1866.  Shumard.     Trans.  Acad.  Sci.  St.  Louis,  ii,  p.  379. 

1867.  Hall.     20th  Rep.  N.  Y.  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  325. 

1879.  Hall.     28th  Rep.  N.  Y.  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.  (ed.  ii),  p.  139. 

Syn.  Marsupiocrinites  inofPhiW.),  Hall  1843.     Geol.  4th  Distr.  New 

York,  p.  114. 
Syn.  Rhodocrmus  (not  Miller),  Hall  1863.     Trans.  Albany  Inst., 

p.  198. 

The  genus  Lyriocrinus  was  proposed  for  a  species  which  had 
been  previously  described  by  Hall  under  3Iarsupiocrinites.  It 
was  supposed  to  possess  only  one  ring  of  plates  beneath  the 
radials,  but  when  afterwards  five  small  underbasals  were  dis- 
covered, it  was  referred  by  Shumard  (1866)  subgenerically  under 
Bhodocrinus,  and  this  arrangement  was  adopted  by  Hall.  Lyrio- 
crinus  is  at  least  as  distinct  from  Rhodocrin  us  as  either  Glyptocrinus 
or  Glyptaster,  which  those  authors  acknowledge  as  genera  without 
question. 

In  1863 — Trans.  Albany  Inst.,  p.  198 — Hall  described  as 
Bhodocr .  melissa  a  new  species  from  Waldron,  Ind.,  which  we 
have  always  suspected  to  be  closely  allied  to  Lyriocrinus,  and 
which,  as  we  have  lately  ascertained  to  our  satisfaction,  belongs  to 
that  genus.  We  are  indebted  to  Wm.  F.  Gurle}^,  Esq.,  of  Danville, 
111.,  for  the  loan  of  some  excellent  specimens,  which  enabled  us  to 
examine  not  only  the  construction  of  the  arms,  but  also  of  the 
vault  which  was  heretofore  imperfectly^  known.^ 

Pictet  places  this  genus  under  the  Carpocrinidae,  Zittel  under 

'  In  the  second  edition  of  the  28th  Rep.  New  York  St.  Cab.,  which  came 
to  hand  after  this  was  written ;  also  Hall  refers  that  species  but  paren- 
.  thetically  to  Lyriocrinus. 


378  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881- 

Angelin's  Calyptocrinidae,  with  which  it  has  some  superficial 
resemblance  in  the  form  of  the  calyx,  and  in  the  arrangement  of 
the  radial  and  interradial  plates,  but  from  which  it  is  otherwise 
very  distinct.  Its  closest  affinities  are  with  Ripidocrinus  Bey  rich, 
in  which,  however,  the  arms  are  very  ditferentlj^  constructed. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Form  of  calyx  depressed,  subglobose,  or 
nearly  hemispherical ;  symmetry  more  or  less  perfectly  equilateral. 
Plates  heavy,  their  surface  flat  or  sometimes  a  little  concave, 
smooth,  or  finely  granulose.  Yault  very  low,  scarcely  rising  above 
the  height  of  the  calyx. 

Underbasals  five,  very  small,  abruptly  and  deeply  depressed, 
concealed  by  the  column.  Basals  five,  of  uniform  size,  either 
heptagonal  and  supporting  upon  the  upper  truncate  side  the  first 
interradial,  or  four  of  them  hexagonal,  angular  above,  and  only 
the  posterior  one  truncate  for  the  support  of  the  first  anal  plate. 
Primary  radials  3X5,  of  nearly  equal  size  ;  the  first  pentagonal; 
the  second  and  third  hexagonal.  The  latter  is  truncate  above, 
and  supports  within  the  axil  of  the  secondary  radials  which  are 
given  oflT  from  the  upper  sloping  sides  of  the  primary  radials, 
a  comparatively  large,  elongate,  hexagonal  interaxillary  plate, 
which  extends  to  the  height  of  the  first  arm  joints.  Secondary 
radials  2X10,  the  first  large,  pentagonal,  the  second  shorter,  and 
supporting  the  arms. 

Interradial  plates  four  to  five,  in  three  series ;  the  first  large, 
heptagonal ;  the  two  plates  of  the  second  series  a  little  smaller 
than  the  first,  but  yet  comparatively  large  ;  the  third  series  small, 
composed  of  one  or  two  plates,  which  are  enclosed  by  the  secon- 
dary radials.  The  anal  area  is  frequently  not  distinct  from  the 
four  others,  but  it  has  occasionally  three  plates  in  the  second 
series.  The  plates  of  the  lower  calyx  are  of  about  uniform  size, 
but  the  last  secondary  radials,  the  interaxillary,  and  the  upper 
series  of  interradial  plates  are  considerably  smaller. 

Vault  almost  flat,  composed  of  a  large  number  of  convex  plates, 
which  are  depressed  in  the  interradial  regions.  Anus  subcentral 
or  excentric,  in  form  of  a  strong  tube,  constructed  of  similar 
plates  as  the  vault ;  length  unknown.  Apical  dome  plates  well 
defined,  twice  as  large  as  the  other  vault  pieces.  Ambulacral  or  arm 
passages  directed  upward,  and  passing  at  the  edge  through  the 
vault.  Arms  ten,  which  remain  simple,  placed  wide  apart,  strong, 
gradually  tapering  to  the  tips,  and  constructed,  from  the  radials 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  379 

up,  of  two  series  of  wide  and  short  interlocliing  pieces.  Arm 
furrows  wide  and  deep ;  pinnules  present,  but  their  exact  form 
not  known. 

Column  round  ;  central  canal  small. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — Lyriocrinus  occurs  only  in  rocks  at 
the  age  of  the  Niagara  limestone  of  America. 

We  recognize  only  two  species ;  L.  sculptilis  Hall,  a  third 
species  is  described  from  mere  casts,  and  very  doubtful. 

1343.  Lyriocrinus  dactylus  Hall.    (Marsupiocrinites  dactylus)  Type  of  the  genus. 

Geol.  Rep.  4th  Distr.  N.  York,  p.  114 :  Hnll,  1 852,  Lyriocr.  dactylus,  Paleont. 

N.  Y.,  PI.  44,  figs.  1  a-g :  Pictet,  1857,  Traite  de  Paleont.,  iv,  p.  329,  P).  101, 

fig.  12.     Niagara  gr.     Lockport,  N.  York. 
1S63.  Lyriocr.  melissa  Hall.     (Rhodocr.  melissa)  Trans.  Albany  Inst.,  p.  198;  also 

2Sth   Rep.   N.  Y.   St.   Cab.   Nat.   Hist.   (ed.  ii),  p.  139,  PI.  15,  figs.  18-22. 

Niigaragr.     Waldron,  Ind. 

9.  RIPIDOCRINUS  Beyrich. 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Palaeont.,  i,  p.  377. 

Syn.  Bhodocrinus  Goldfuss.  Petrefact.  Germ.,  1,  p.  211  ;  Agassiz, 
1835,  Mem.  Soc.  Neuchat.,  1,  p.  196 ;  Muller,  1841,  Verhaudl.  d. 
Berl.  Akad.,  i ;  Roemer,  Verb.  Naturh.  Verein  f.  Rheinl.,  viii,  p. 
358 ;  and  1855,  Lethaea  Geogn.,  ii,  p.  241  ;  Pictet,  1857,  Traite  de 
Paleont.,  iv,  p.  314 ;  Schultze,  1867,  Echin.  Eifl.  Kalk,  p.  53. 

Beyrich's  name  Ripidocrinus,  so  far  as  we  now  know,  was  first 
published  by  Zittel  to  include  Rhodocr.  crenatus  Goldf.  This 
species  differs  very  materially  in  the  arm  structure  from  Rhodo- 
crinus  as  established  \>y  Miller.  In  the  general  form  of  the  body 
and  the  arrangement  of  the  plates,  it  resembles  Lyriocrinus  Hall, 
but  the  arm  structure  separates  them  widely. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Calyx  cup-  or  urn-shaped,  sometimes 
subglobose,  lower  portions  more  or  less  truncate,  the  basals 
spread  out  horizontally  from  the  column  ;  plates  heavj",  highly 
ornamented ;  symmetry  equilateral.  Body  extended  into  free 
raj'^s  with  lateral  arms. 

TJnderbasals  five,  closel3"  anchylosed,  small,  forming  a  pentagon, 
deepl}'  depressed,  and  gene  rail}'  hidden  from  view  b}'  the  large 
column  ;  central  perforation  large,  pentalobate. 

Basals  five,  equal,  irregularly  hexagonal,  the  lower  side  in  line 
with  the  sides  of  the  inner  pentagon  ;  the  lower  lateral  sides,  by 
which  the  plates  are  united,  extremely  short ;  upper  lateral 
margins,  which  enclose  the  first  radials,  unusually  long ;    upper 


380  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

side  truncate  supporting  the  first  interradial,  and  parallel  with 
the  lower  one.  Owing  to  this  construction,  the  basals  have  a 
subquadrangular  outline,  and  the  lower  angle  of  the  first  radials 
almost  touches  the  upper  angle  of  the  underbasals. 

Primary  radials  3  X  5,  of  nearly  equal  size,  the  first  pentagonal, 
the  second  hexagonal,  the  third  again  pentagonal,  and  support- 
ing two  secondary  radials  (2X10).  Tlie  first  plate  larger 
than  the  second,  the  latter  axillary,  but  the  sloping  sides  not  of 
equal  width.  The  longer  side,  next  to  the  middle  of  the  ray, 
supports  an  indefinite  number  of  radials,  and  these  extend  into 
free  appendages ;  while  the  other,  shorter  side,  gives  off  laterally 
the  first  arm.  There  are  two  of  these  appendages  to  each  ray, 
which  at  the  base  are  connected  by  one  or  more  interaxillary 
plates,  they  are  thick,  puffy,  cylindrical,  three  or  four  times  as 
long  as  the  body,  decreasing  in  width  upwards.  The  plates  which 
constitute  the  outer  or  dorsal  side  of  the  appendages  are  short, 
very  wide,  with  parallel  sutures,  and  from  them,  at  certain 
intervals — from  every  fourth  or  fifth  plate,  and  from  alternate 
sides — the  true  arras  arise.  The  latter  are  not  given  off  strictly 
laterally,  as  the  separation  from  the  main  trunk  actually  begins 
in  the  median  portion  of  the  two  or  three  preceding  plates  of  each 
order,  which  show  more  or  less  deep  oblique  incisions.  All  arms 
have  nearly  the  same  length,  and  hence  do  not  reach  the  same 
general  height,  those  nearer  the  body  are  comparatively  heavier. 
The  four  or  five  proximal  plates  of  the  first  arm  are  laterally  con- 
nected with  the  main  trunks  of  the  ray,  the  succeeding  arms 
become  detached  sooner,  and  the  upper  ones  are  free  from  their 
base  up.  Each  arm  tapers  to  a  sharp  point,  is  composed  of  two 
series  of  interlocking  plates,  with  closely  arranged,  sword-like 
pinnules. 

Interradial  series  composed  of  six  to  eight  plates ;  the  first 
large,  heptagonal,  supported  upon  the  truncate  upper  side  of  the 
basals,  between  the  first  radials  and  the  lower  sloping  side  of  the 
second,  thus  separating  the  entire  radial  series ;  the  second  range 
is  composed  of  two  somewhat  smaller  plates,  the  third  of  two  or 
three  pieces,  with  one  or  two  plates  above.  The  posterior  side  is 
but  rarely  distinct,  it  has  exceptionally  three  pieces  in  the  second 
series. 

Vault  scarcely  rising  above  the  limits  of  the  calyx,  slightly  ele- 
vated in  the  radial  regions.     It  is  constructed  of  an  immense 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  381 

number  of  small  irregularl}^  arranged  plates,  which  decrease  in 
size  rapidly  toward  the  peripher3\  At  the  edge  of  the  vault  there 
are  twenty  ambulacral  openings,  ten  of  which  are  larger  and  con- 
necting with  the  ten  appendages,  the  ten  smaller  ones  with  their 
first  lateral  arm.  Apical  dome  plates  well  developed,  much  larger 
than  the  rest  of  the  plates,  and  more  convex.  Anus  excentric,  in 
form  of  a  simple  opening. 

Column  heavy,  round,  sometimes  with  lateral  excrescences; 
central  canal  large,  pentalobate. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — The  only  known  species  of  this  genus 
occurs  in  the  Stringocephalenkalk  of  the  Eifel. 

1826.  Bipidocrinus  crenatus  Goldfu^s.  (Ehodocr.  crenatus)  Petref.  Germ.,  i,  p. 
211,  PI.  64,  fig.  3;  also  Agassiz,  1835,  Soc.  Neuchat.,  i,  p.  196;  Roemer, 
Verb.  Naturh.  Verein  f.  Rheinl.,  viii,  p.  358,  PI.  1,  fig.  1,  and  Lethsea  Geogn. 
ii,  p.  241,  PI.  4,  figs.  \1,  a-b;  Pic'et,  185J,  Traite  de  Paleont,  iv,  p.  314,  PI. 
100,  fig.  10:  Schultze,  1867,  Echin.  Eifl.  Kalk,  p.  53,  PI.  7,  figs.  1  a-n ; 
Zittel,  1879,  Handb.  der  Palseont,  p.  377,  fig.  263.  Devonian.  Eifel,  Germ. 
Syn.  Bhodocr.  tessellatus  Steininger.     Geogn.  Beschreibung  der  Eifel,  p.  36. 

10.  THYLACOCEINTJS  Oehlert. 

1878.  Oehlert.     Extract    du  Bull.   Soc.   Geol.   de  France   (ser.  3),    vii, 

(November  No.). 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  d.  Palaeont.,  i,  p.  375. 

This  genus  was  placed  by  Zittel  among  his  Glyptocrinidae,  but 
it  agrees  much  closer  with  some  species  of  Bhodocrinus,  from 
which  it  differs  in  having  very  much  longer,  heavier  and  undi- 
vided arms.  This  difference  would  perhaps  entitle  it  only  to  a 
subgeneric  rank,  if  not  the  arms  in  the  Rhodocrinidse  generally 
were  short,  thin  and  bifurcating. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Body  large,  globular.  Calyx  inflated  at 
the  lower  part,  somewhat  constricted  toward  the  arm  regions; 
plates  thin,  convex,  without  special  ornamentation ;  symmetry 
almost  equilateral. 

Underbasals  five,  small,  forming  a  pentagonal  disk.  Basals 
five,  hexagonal,  upper  and  lower  sides  parallel,  the  lower  resting 
against  the  straight  sides  of  the  inner  pentagon,  the  upper  sup- 
porting the  first  interradials.  Primary  radials  3X5;  the  first 
hexagonal ;  the  second  larger  than  the  first ;  the  third  supporting 
2  X  10  secondar}^  radials,  and  these  in  turn  the  arms. 

Arms  heavy,  extremel}'  long,  five  or  six  times  the  height  of  the 
calyx,  simple  throughout.     The  proximal  joints  are  single,  quad- 


382  PROCEEDINGS    OP    TEIE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

rangulai",  but  they  change  directly  into  wedge-form,  and  grad- 
ually into  a  double  series  of  interlocking  pieces.  Pinnules 
closely  arranged. 

Interradials  numerous,  the  lower  one  resting  upon  the  basals. 
There  are  from  ten  to  twelve  in  the  typical  species,  with  a  few 
additional  plates  at  the  anal  side. 

Dome  elevated,  composed  of  a  large  number  of  small  pieces. 
Anus  and  column  unknown. 

The  only  known  species  is  : — 

Thylacocrinus  Oehlcrt.     Extr.  du  Bull.  Soc.  Geol.  de  France  (ser.  3),  vii,  PI.  1,  fig.  1. 
Devon.     St.  Germain,  France. 

11.  ANTHEMOCRINUS  nov.  gen. 
(^av&eiiov,  a  blossom  ;  Kpivov,  a  lily). 
Syn.  Eucrinus  Angelin.  (in  p&,rt).     Iconogr.  Crin.  Suec. 

Among  the  species  described  by  Angelin  under  Eucrimis, 
there  are  two  which  differ  materially  from  the  rest  in  having  only 
two  primar}^  radials,  a  single  interradial,  and  this  plate  resting 
directly  upon  the  basals ;  also  in  the  arm  structure.  These 
characters,  in  our  opinion,  are  sufficient  to  justify  the  removal  of 
the  species  from  Eucrinus^  and  we  propose  to  establish  for  them 
the  genus  Antheviocrinus,  with  Angelin's  Eucr.  venustus  = 
Anthemocrinus  venustus  as  type. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Calyx  depressed,  subglobose,  composed  of 
comparatively  few  plates,  which  in  both  known  specimens  are 
convex  and  striated. 

Underbasals  five  (Angelin),  small.  Basals  five,  large,  subequal, 
hexagonal,  the  upper  side  truncated  for  the  support  of  an  inter- 
radial plate.  Primary  radials  2  X  5,  both  pentagonal,  wider 
than  high,  of  nearly  equal  size  and  similar  form  ;  the  first  and 
second  meeting  by  straight  margins.  The  second  plate  supports 
upon  each  sloping  side  a  single  secondary  I'adial,  which  in  turn 
supports  a  heavy  arm,  this  soon  divides,  sometimes  a  second 
time,  and  the  branches  after  each  division  are  half  as  large  as  the 
arm  below.  All  the  arms  and  branches,  from  the  base  up,  are 
composed  of  two  rows  of  joints,  alternately  arranged,  very  slightly 
interlocking.  The  first  arm  joints  are  enclosed  within  the  body 
walls  by  one  or  two  interbrachial  plates.  The  branching  of  the 
arms  and  the  whole  arm  structure  is  very  similar  to  that  of 
Periech  ocrin  us. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP  PHILADELPHIA.  383 

There  is  properly  only  a  single  plate  in  each  interradial  area, 
and  this,  as  stated,  rests  upon  the  truncate  upper  side  of  the 
basals  between  both  primary  radials,  and  extends  to  the  arm 
bases.  It  is  the  largest  plate  of  the  entire  calyx,  hexagonal, 
higher  than  wide,  and  supports  upon  its  upper  side — between 
the  arms — the  interbrachial  plates  above  mentioned.  The  anal 
area,  if  we  interpret  Angelin's  figure  correctly,  differs  in  having 
above  its  first  plate  a  row  of  smaller  plates,  longitudinally 
arranged  as  in  Glyptaster  and  Eucrinus,  and  these  support  the 
anus. 

Vault  and  anal  aperture  unknown.     Column  round. 
Geological  Position^  etc. — The  two  known  species  are  from  the 
Upper  Silurian  of  Sweden. 

*  Anthemoorinus  minor  Angelin.     (Eucr,  minor)  Icon.  Crin.  Suec,  p.  25,  PI.  15, 

fig.  5,  Upper  Silurian.     iJothland,  Sweden. 
.  *  Anthemocr.  venustus  Angelin.      Type  of  the  genus  fEucr.  venustus\      Ic^n. 
Crin.  Suec,  p.  25,  PI.  15,  figs.  7,  16.     Upper  Silurian.     Gothland,  Sweden. 

12.     EHODOCRINtrS  Miller. 

1821.  Miller.     Natur.  Hist,  of  the  Crinoidea,  p.  106. 

1835.  Agassiz.     Mem.  Soc.  Sci.,  Neuchat,,  i,  p.  196. 

1841.  Miiller.     Monatsb.  Berl.  Akad.,  i,  p.  209. 

1843.  Austin.     Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  i,  p.  109. 

1850.  D'Orbigny.     Prodr.  de  Paleont,  i,  p.  1C4. 

1853.  De  Koninck  and  Lelion.     Recher.  Crin.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  103, 

1855.  Roemer.     Lethaea  Geogn.  (Avisg.  3),  p.  240. 

1855.  Wirtgen  and  Zeiler.     Verb.  Naturh.  Verein  f.  RheinL,  xii,  p.  11. 

1858.  Hall.     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  556. 

1861.  Hall.     Bost.  .Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  322. 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Palaeont,  i,  p.  376 

{'Sot  Bhodoerinm  Goldf.  1826,  Petref.  Germ,  i,  p.  312  ;  nor  Billings, 
1859,  Geol.  Rep.  Canada,  Decade  iv,  p.  61  ;  nor  Schultze,  1867, 
Echin,  Eifl.  Kalk,  p.  53  ;  nor  Roemer,  1851,  Verb.  Naturh. 
Verein  f.  Rheinl.,  viii,  p.  358), 
Syn.  Acanthocrinus  F.  Roemer.  1850,  Neues  Jahrb.  f.  Mineralogie 
p.  79  ;  Miiller  (Wirtgen  and  Zeiler)  1855,  Verh.  Naturh.  Verein, 
xii,  p.  8 ;  Pictet,  1857,  Traite  de  Paleont,  iv,  p.  100,  Hall,  1862, 
(subgenus  of  Bhodocrinus)  15th  Rep.  N.  T.  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist., 
p.  125. 

Rliodocrinus  verus,  according  to  Miller,  occurs  in  both  the 
Mountain  limestone  and  in  the  Upper  Silurian,  and  it  was  said  to 
have  three  basal  plates.     As  we  have  before  shown,  Miller  con- 


384  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

founded  two  very  different  species,  which  have  since  been 
recognized  as  distinct  genera.  The  Silurian  form,  with  three 
underbasals  and  single  arm  joints,  is  now  known  as  Sagenocr- 
expansus  ;  the  Carboniferous  form,  which  took  Miller's  specific 
name,  is  universally  regarded  as  the  type  of  Ehodocrinns^  having 
five  underbasals  instead  of  three,  and  the  arms  composed  of  two 
rows  of  interlocking  plates. 

Before  the  true  number  of  underbasals  in  Rhodocrinus  was 
ascertained,  Phillips,  in  1836  proposed  for  some  allied  species,  in 
which  he  discovei'ed  five  proximal  plates,  the  genus  Gilhertso- 
crinus,  but  these  species  for  other  reasons  have  since  been 
referred  to  Ollacrinus,  which  was  proposed  by  Cumberland  in 
1826.  Bhodocr.  crenatus  Goldfuss  has  been  referred  to  Eipido- 
crinus^  and  Bhodocr.  quinquelobus  Schultze  to  Eucriniis. 

The  genus  Bhodocrinus,  as  now  restricted,  is  decidedl}'  Sub- 
carboniferous.  The  few  Devonian  species  which  we  are  unable 
to  separate  from  it  bear  more  or  less  resemblance  to  Acantho- 
crinus  Roemer,  and  have  been  partly  referred  to  that  genus  by 
other  writers.  We  have  examined  with  great  care  the  figures  of 
Acanthocr.  longispinus  from  Niederlahnstein  as  given  by  Wirtgen 
and  Zeiler,  and  some  excellent  specimens  of  our  own,  but 
have  failed  to  discover  any  characters  ])y  which  this  form 
may  be  separated  even  subgenerically.  The  spinous  projections 
on  the  apical  plates  (basals  and  first  radials)  are  also  found  in 
some  of  the  Subcarboniferous  species  in  all  degrees  of  variation, 
and  are  more  or  less  the  rule  in  Ollacrinus.  It  is  even  not 
improbable  that  Roemer's  imperfect  type  specimen  A.  longispinus, 
which  was  said  to  be  from  the  Subcarboniferous,  is  really  an 
Ollacrinus,  and  generically  distinct  from  the  Devonian  specimens 
which  Wirtgen  and  Zeiler  identified  with  that  species. 

The  two  Austins  placed  Rhodocrinus  under  the  Actinocrinidae, 
D'Orbigny  and  Pictet  under  the  Cyathocrinidae,  Roemer  and 
Zittel  made  it  the  type  of  a  family. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Body  subglobose  to  semi-ovate,  often 
wider  than  high,  with  a  concavity  at  the  base,  which  frequentl}^ 
includes  not  only  basals  but  partly  the  first  radial  plates.  Calyx 
constricted  toward  the  arm  bases,  its  symmetry  almost  perfectly 
equilateral ;  surface  of  plates  from  entirely  smooth  to  convex 
and  nodose,  or  striated  with  regular  nodes  or  spines  on  basal, 
first  radial,  and  first  interradial  plates. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  385 

Underbasals  five,  small,  spreading  horizontally,  and  hidden 
by  the  column,  though  sometimes  slightly  visible  beyond  its 
periphery,  Basals  five,  equal,  comparatively  large,  heptagonal, 
upper  side  truncate.  Primary  radials  3X4,  generally  as  high 
as  wide,  decreasing  in  size  upward,  the  series  separated  laterally 
by  interradial  plates ;  the  first  heptagonal ;  the  second  from 
quadrangular  to  hexagonal,  according  to  the  size  of  the  first 
radials  ;  the  third  irregular  in  form.  The  latter,  in  the  more 
depressed  Subcarboniferous  forms,  supports  only  from  one  to  two 
secondary  radials  ;  in  Devonian  species,  there  are  sometimes  three. 
None  of  the  plates  project  outward,  the  upper  one,  which  is  also 
the  arm-bearing  plate,  is  excavated  at  its  upper  edge,  and  this, 
together  with  a  similar  excavation  in  the  corresponding  dome 
plates,  forms  an  oblong  ambulacral  passage,  two  to  each  ray, 
which  are  separated  b}-  an  interbrachial  plate.  The  arms  of  the 
difierent  rays  are  widely  separated ;  they  are  long,  delicate, 
cylindrical,  branching,  and  constructed  of  two  rows  of  alternate 
plates,  which  interlock  from  the  base  up.     Pinnules  small. 

Interradial  and  anal  areae  very  wide  and  closely  similar,  the 
latter  having  sometimes  one  or  two  additional  plates  without  dis- 
turbing the  general  symmetry  of  the  body.  The  first  plates, 
which  are  large,  rest  upon  the  truncate  upper  side  of  the  basals, 
and  laterally  between  the  first  radials  ;  the  second  and  third  series 
consists  of  from  two  to  three  plates  each,  and  the  plates  are  of 
comparatively  large  size,  those  of  the  succeeding  series  much 
smaller,  and  passing  gradually  into  vault  pieces. 

Vault  flat,  compressed  and  narrow,  owing  to  the  constriction  at 
the  upper  part  of  the  calyx ;  composed  of  a  large  number  of 
irregular  pieces,  among  which  the  apical  dome  plates  are  not 
easily  distinguished  ;  radial  portions  generally  protuberant.  Anus 
excentric,  protruding  like  a  proboscis,  and  consisting  of  almost 
microscopic  plates,  possibly  capable  of  expansion  or  contraction 
by  the  animal. 

Column  round,  and  composed  near  the  body  of  very  uneven 
plates  ;  perforation  small,  pentagonal. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — The  genus  Rhodocrinus  ranges  from 
the  Devonian  to  the  middle  portion  of  the  Subcarboniferous,  both 
in  America  and  Europe. 

We  recognize  the  following  species : — 


26 


386  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

1844.  Ehodocrinus  abnormis  McCoy.  Carb.  Foss.  Ireland,  p.  180,  PI.  26,  fig.  3. 
Mount,  limest.     Ireland. 

1861.  Bhodoor.  Barrisi  Hall.    Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  9;  also  Boat.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist., 

p.  322,  PI.  6,  figs.  16,  17.     Upper  Burlington  liraest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
St/n.  Bhodoor.  Barrisi  var.  divergens  Hall,  1861.     Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p. 

9;  also  Best.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  324,  PI.  6,  fig.  18. 
A  comparison  witb  the  type  specimen  and  with  others  in  our  cabinet,  proves 

beyond  doubt  that  the  original  B.  Barrisi  was  described  from  a  very  young 

specimen,  and  this  explains  fully  the  additional  bifurcation  in  the  variety  or 

older  specimen. 
1836.  Bhodoor.  globosus  Phillips.     (Actinoor.  globosus)  Geol.  Yorkshire,  p.  206, 

PI.  4,  figs.  26,  29.     Mount,  limest.     Yorkshire,  Engl. 
1855.  (?)  Bhodoor.  gonatodes  Wirtgen  and  Zeiler.      Verb.  Naturh.  Verein  Jahrg., 

xii,  p.  12,  PI.  3,  fig.  3,  and  PI.  4,  figs.  1,  2,  and  PI.  5,  fig.  3 ;  Muller,  Ibid.,  pp. 

22,  23,  25,  PI.  X,  fig.  1.     Grauwacke.     Niederlabnstein,  Germ. 
This  species  is  only  known  from  casts,  and  may  possibly  belong  to  some  other 

allied  genus. 

1862.  Bhodoor.  gracilis  Hall.     (Bhodoor. — Acanthoor. — gracilis)  15th  Rep.  N.  Y. 

Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  127.     Hamilton  gr.     Ontario  Co.,  N.  Y. 

1861.  (?)  Bhodoor.  Halli  Lyon.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  412,  PI.  4,  figs.  6 

a,  b.     Niagara  gr.     Near  Louisville,  Ky. 
This  species  is  certainly  not  Bhodoorinus,  but  the  type  specimen  is  too  imper- 
fect for  accurate  diagnosis. 

1850.  (?)  Bhodocr.  longispina  A.  Roemer.  (Acanthoor.  longispina)  Neues  Jahrb. 
der  Mineral'igie,  p.  679,  PI.  4'';  Wirtgen  and  Zeiler,  1856,  Jahrb.  Naturh. 
Verein.,  xii,  p.  8,  PI.  2,  figs.  1,  2,  and  PI.  3,  fig.  1;  also  Pictet,  1857,  Trait6 
de  Pal6ont.,  iv,  p.  314,  PI.  100,  fig.  11.  Posidomyen  Schiefer,  Harz.  (Roemer). 
Grauwacke,  near  Coblenz  (Wirtgen  and  Zeiler). 

1866.  Bhodocr.  nanus  Meek  and  Worthen.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  254  ; 
also,  1868,  Geol.  Rep.  III.,  iii,  p.  476.  PI.  18,  figs.  2,  a,  b.  Lower  Burlington 
limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 

1862,  Bhodocr.  nodulosus  Hall.     (Acanthoor.  nodulosus)  15th  Rep.  N.  Y.  St.  Cab. 

Nat.  Hist.,  p.  126,  PI.  1,  fig   8.     Hamilton  gr.     Ontario  Co.,  N.  York. 
1862.  Bhodocr.  spinosus  Hall.     l.Hh  Rep.  N.  Y.  St.  Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  127,  Photog. 

Pis.,  1876,  PI.  1,  fig.  in.     Hamilton  gr.     Ontario  Co.,  N.  Y. 
18S3.  Bhodoor.  stellaris  de   Kon.  and  Leh.     Recher.  Crin.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  109,  PI. 

1,  figs.  14  a,  b,  0   (figured  by   Cumberland,   1819,  as   Encrinus).     Mount. 

limest.     Bristol,  Engl.,  and  Tournay,  Belg. 
1853.  Bhodocr.  uniarticulatus  de   Kon.  and  Leh.     Recher.   Crin.   Carb.   Belg.,    p. 

107,  PI   1,  figs.  13  a,  b,  c.     Mount,  limestone.     Vise,  Belg. 
1860.  Bhodocr.  Varsoviensis  Hall.     Supp.  Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  p.  80.     Warsaw  limest. 

Warsaw,  III. 
1821.  Bhodoor.  verus  Miller.     Type  of  the  genus.     Nat.  Hist,  of  Crin..  p.  107,  with 

figures;  Agassiz,  1835,  Mem.  Soc.  Sci.  Neuchat.,  i,  p.   196;  Roemer,  1855, 

Lethaea  Geogn.  (Ausg.  3),  p.  241,   PI.  4,  figs.  2  a-e;    Bronn,  Ibid.  (Ausg. 

I,  2).     Mount,  limest.     Near  Bristol,  Eng. 

1879.  Bhodocr.  vesperalis  White.     Proc.  U.  S.  National  Museum,  p.  252,  PI.  1,  figs. 

II,  12.     Upper  Coal  Measures?    30  mibs  west  of  Humbolt,  Kans. 

We  doubt  if  this  fossil  came  from  the  coal  measures,  neither  Aciinocrinvs  nor 
RhodocrinuH  have  ever  been  found  to  occur  la'er  than  the  age  of  the  Warsaw 
limestone. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  387 

1861.  Rhodoor.  Wachsmuthi  Hall.    Desc.  New  Sp.  Crin.,  p.  18.     Lower  Burlington 

limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1861.  Bhodocr.  Whitei  Hall.     Desc.  New  Sp.  Grin.,  p.  9  ;    Best.  Journ.  Nat.  Hist., 

p.  324,  Phot.  Plates,  1875,  PI.  6,  figs.  19,  20,  21. 
Var.  barlingtonensis    Hall.     Desc.  New  Pal.  Crin.,  1861,   p.  9;    also  Bost. 

Journ.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  .325.     Lower  Burlington  limestone.     Burlington,  lowii. 
1858.  Bhodocr.  Wortheni  Hall.     Geol.  Rep.  Iowa,  i,  pt.  ii,  p.  556,  PI.  9,  figs.  8  a, 

b,  c.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 


13.  OLLACKINUS  Cumberland. 

(PI.  18,  fig.  2,  and  PI.  19,  fig.  1.) 

1836.  Cumberland.     Appendix  to  Reliquiae  Conservata. 

1877.  Wachsmuth.     Amer.  Journ.  Sci.  and  Arts,  xiv,  p.  135. 

1879.  Wachsmuth  and  Springer.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila  ,  p.  261. 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Palaeont,  i,  p.  375. 

Syn.  Gilbertsocrinus  Phill.  Greol.  Yorkshire,  pt.  ii,  p.  207  ; 
d'Orbigny,  1850,  Prodr.  de  Paleont.,  i,  p.  155  ;  Meek  and  Worth., 
1866,  Geol.  Rep.  111.  ii,  p.  217. 
Syn.  Goniasteroidocrinus  Lyon  and  Casseday.  Amer.  Joiirn.  Sci. 
and  Arts,  vol.  28  (ser.  2),  p.  233 ;  Meek  and  Worthen,  1869  (Sub- 
genus of  Gilbertsocrinus),  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  7o  and 
1873,  Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  389. 
Syn.   Trematocrinus  Hall.     Supp.   Geol.    Rep.  Iowa,  p.  70  ;  Meek 

and  Worthen,  1860,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  383. 
Syn.  Rhodocrinus  (in  part)  de  Koninck  and  Lehon.     Recher.  Crin. 
Carb.  Belg.,  p.  104. 

The  form  under  consideration  was  first  made  known  by 
Cumberland  in  the  Appendix  to  his  Reliquiae  Conservata,  1826, 
under  the  name  Ollacrinus.  He  published  no  generic  diagnosis 
nor  specific  name,  but  gave  excellent  figures,  by  which  the  type 
represented  can  be  easily  identified.  It  is  characterized  by  a 
pentamerous  figure, concave  base,  flat  vault, excentric  anal  opening, 
spiniferous  first  radials,  and  by  large  oval-shaped  interradial  and 
anal  spaces, with  numerous  plates.  There  are  two  sets  of  openings 
in  the  brachial  regions,  the  largest  supported  b}'  the  secondary 
radials,  and  the  others  located  nearly  above  thenj,  being  smaller, 
and  perforated  directly  through  the  centre  of  pairs  of  plates  in 
the  margin  of  the  vault. 

In  1836,  Phillips,  in  the  Geology  of  Yorkshire,  proposed  the 
genus  Gilbertsocrinus,  and  included  in  it  Cumberland's  type, 
which  he  described  as  G.  calcaratui>,  and  two  other  species. 
His  figures  are  fairly  good,  but  his  descriptions  are  ver}-  meagre, 
and  show  no  essential  difference  from  Rhodocrinus.    Thev  contain 


388  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

110  allusion  to  the  two  sets  of  openings,'  so  prominent  in  his 
figures,  but  he  apparently  considers  the  upper  openings  as 
belonging  to  "  rounded  arms,  perforated  in  the  centre." 

De  Koninck  and  Lehon,in  1854,  declared  that  both  OUacrinus 
and  Gilbertsocrinus  were  synonyms  of  Bhodocrinus  and  ought  to 
be  suppressed. 

In  1859,  Lyon  and  Casseday  described  a  new  species  of  this 
type  from  the  upper  Subcarboniferous  rocks  of  Kentucky,  and 
proposed  for  its  reception  the  genus  Goniasteroidocrimis,  which 
is  in  every  essential  respect  similar  to  the  forms  figured  by 
Cumberland  and  Phillips,  with  the  exception  perhaps,  that  the 
upper  sets  of  supposed  arm  openings,  instead  of  being  located 
directly  above  the  ray,  as  seems  to  be  the  case  in  some  of  the 
British  specimens,  as  figured,  are  situated  "  midway  between  the 
primary  radials  "  or  interradiall}-.  Their  species — the  well-known 
G.  tuberosus — was  found  in  excellent  preservation,  with  all  the 
appendages  attached,  and  a  good  figure  of  it  may  be  seen  in  the 
Greol.  Rep.  111.,  ii,  p.  220.  Lyon  and  Casseday  took  the  upper  and 
larger  appendages  to  be  arms,  five  in  number,  and  below  and 
between  these,  in  the  "  interradial  fields,"  as  the}^  say,  they  found 
clusters  of  from  five  to  seven  "  long,  pendulous  cilia,"  bearing 
delicate  pinnules.  These  "  cilia  "  they  afterwards  refer  with  a 
query  to  arms. 

A  year  later.  Hall,  without  any  reference  to  the  above  descrip- 
tions, described  under  the  new  generic  name  Trematocrinus  a 
number  of  species  from  the  Subcarboniferous  of  the  West,  of 
undoubted  generic  identity  with  Lyon's  species.  He,  too,  con- 
sidered the  interradial  appendages  to  be  arms,  though  he  doubted 
if  they  could  have  performed  the  functions  of  ordinary  arms, 
and  the  foramina  above  the  secondary  radials  he  supposed  to  be 
openings  for  fleshy  arms  or  tentacles,  not  having  seen  in  his 
specimens  any  indications  of  solid  arms  or  even  articulating 
plates.  Soon  afterwards,  however.  Hall  described  from  the 
Devonian  of  New  York  his  Trematocr.  spinigerus  (15th  Rep. 
N.  Y.  St.  Cab.,  p.  128),  which  has  the  interradial  appendages  from 
the  vault,  and  also  long  arms  like  Bhodocrinus  from  the  radial 
or  arabulacral  openings.  He  called  the  former  "  summit  arms," 
and  the  latter  "  true  arms." 

In  the  second  volume  of  the  111.  Geol.  Rep.,  Meek  and  Worthen 

'  Attention  was  first  called  to  these  by  Billings,  Decade  ill,  Geol.  Surv.  Can. 


1881  ]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP  PHILADELPHIA.  389 

gave  an  excellent  description  of  the  genus,  and  showed  that  the 
arms  in  this  type  proceed  from  the  radial  openings  as  in  other 
crinoids,  and  that  the  interradial  appendages  are  not  arms  at  all. 
They  state  that  the  true  arms  are  always  pendant,  apparently 
overlooking  Hall's  T.  spinigeruSj  but  this  is  not  uniformly  the 
case  even  in  the  Carboniferous  species,  as  we  afterwards  dis- 
covered in  Hall's  T.  tuberculosus,  (see  Proc.  Phila.  Acad.  Nat. 
Sci.,  1878,  p.  262),  whose  arms  stand  erect,  and  fold  over  the 
dome.  We  also  found  the  ventral  furrow  of  the  arms  to  be  always 
on  the  inner  side  of  the  arm,  next  to  the  body,  and  accordingly 
on  reverse  sides  in  the  erect  and  the  pendant  arms.  It  is  pos- 
sible that  this  feature  may  warrant  a  subdivision  of  the  genus, 
but  until  we  are  better  acquainted  with  the  arms  in  the  majority 
of  the  species  we  shall  not  attempt  it. 

Meek  and  Worthen  proposed  to  arrange  the  British  and 
American  species  under  two  sections,  based  upon  the  different 
positions  of  the  so-called  false  arms,  whether  placed  above  the 
interradial  regions  as  in  the  latter,  or  more  radial  as  in  the 
former.  We  do  not  attach  much  importance  to  this  variation, 
especiall}-  in  view  of  our  interpretations  of  the  relations  and 
functions  of  these  appendages,  besides  there  is  considerable 
variation  in  this  respect  among  the  American  species.  The  arm 
openings  are  in  some  cases  located  well  under  the  overhanging 
margins  of  the  bases  of  the  false  arms,  in  others  on  either  side 
of  them.  In  no  case,  however,  among  American  specimens  have 
the  false  arms  been  observed  to  be  directly  over  the  ray,  as 
represented  in  Phillips'  diagram  of  G.  bursa,  and  we  are  by  no 
means  satisfied  that  such  was  actually  the  case  in  the  British 
species,  for  sometimes  the  basals  alone  are  prominent  and  spinif- 
erous,  sometimes  only  the  first  radials,  and  it  is  possible  that  in 
some  cases  they  have  been  confounded. 

Some  authors,  notabl}'  Meek  and  Worthen,  object  to  Cum- 
berland's name  OUacrinus  because  it  w^as  not  accompanied  by 
any  diagnosis  or  specific  name,  and  give  precedence  to  Gilbertso- 
crinus,  the  generic  and  specific  descriptions  of  which  disclose  no 
characters  to  distinguish  the  genus  from  Rhodocrinus,  and  which, 
moreover,  entirel}^  overlooked  the  real  characteristic  features  of 
this  type.  Cumberland's  published  figures  give  a  distinct 
exposition  of  essential  characters,  which  leave  no  room  for 
doubt  as  to  the  type  represented,  and  under  the  rules  adopted  by 


390  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

the  British  Association  relative  to  descriptions  by  the  earlier 
writers,  this  entitles  the  name  0Z^ac7'tnus  to  priority,  which  leaves 
Gilbertsocrinus,  Goniaateroidocrinus  and  Trematocrinus  as 
synonyms. 

The  nearest  affinities  of  this  genus  are  with  Hhodocrinus,  with 
which  it  substantially  agrees  in  the  structure  of  the  body  below 
the  arms,  but  from  which  it  is  conspicuously  distinguished  by 
the  pseudo-brachial  appendages,  as  well  as  the  size  and  disposi- 
tion of  the  true  arms.  The  two  genera  are,  however,  connected 
through  the  transition  form  0.  sjnnigerus  Hall,  which  has  the 
arms  and  body  similar  to  many  species  of  Rhodocrinus^  yet  the 
pseudo-brachial  appendages  of  Ollacrinus. 

These  appendages  are  an  extraordinary  and  most  characteristic 
feature  of  the  genus,  and  no  trace  of  any  similar  structure  has 
been  observed  in  anj^  other  crinoid.  The  precise  office  of  these 
organs  has  puzzled  all  writers  hitherto,  and  must  yet  remain  to 
some  extent  a  matter  of  conjecture.  Each  of  the  five  main 
trunks  contain  two  longitudinal  perforations  running  a  little 
to  either  side  of  the  centre,  and  one  of  these  passes  into  each  of 
the  rounded  branches  into  which  the  trunk  divides,  and  pierces 
its  centre  to  the  extremity.  They  have  no  other  opening,  and  no 
external  furrows  of  any  kind,  but  are  simply  ten  thickened 
cylindrical  tubes,  which  join  in  pairs  by  their  outer  walls  near  the 
body,  where  the  two  together  have  a  transversely  flattened 
elliptic  outline.  The  passages  penetrate  the  body  independently, 
near — and  usually  somewhat  above — the  arm  openings,  though 
sometimes  directly  between  the  openings  of  the  arms  of  two 
different  rays.  Inside  the  walls  they  unite  with  the  arm  furrows, 
in  a  similar  manner  as  the  lateral  pore  passages  in  Batocrinux, 
and  in  view  of  all  the  facts,  we  entertain  no  doubt,  that  these 
openings  are  of  the  same  nature  as  tliose  which  we  have  called 
respiratory  pores  in  the  Actinocrinida?  and  Platyci'inida?,  and 
which  instead  of  being  simple  openings,  Avith  probably  soft  parts 
tittached,  are  here  extended  into  tubes  forming  a  part  of  the 
calcareous  test.  There  are  five  pairs  of  these  elongated  pores, 
and  it  makes  no  material  difference  whether  the}'  enter  the  body 
a  little  more  radially  or  interradially,  they  are  placed  near  the 
arm  bases,  and  soon  connect  with  the  arm  passages  within  the 
body,  as  the  respirator}-  pores  in  Batocrinus.  In  many  species 
there  are  deep  depressions  in  the  vault,  opposite  the  base  of  each 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  391 

appendage,  which  are  paved  with  a  great  number  of  small 
irregular  polygonal  plates.  It  is  not  at  all  improbable  that  these 
areffi  were  susceptible  of  a  certain  amount  of  contraction  and 
expansion,  and  that  the}'  performed  an  important  function  in 
connection  with  the  tubular  extensions,  in  the  introduction  and 
expulsion  of  water. 

Generic  Diagnosis. — Body  generally  large,  subglobose,  about 
equilaterally  pentamerous  ;  plates  of  the  calyx  convex  to  nodose 
or  spiniferous ;  base  concave,  vault  flat,  its  margins  extended 
into  five  free  tubular  appendages,  situated  between,  or  partly 
above  the  rays. 

Underbasals  five,  small,  pentagonal,  forming  a  flat  impressed 
pentagon,  entirely  involved  in  the  basal  concavity,  and  some- 
times hidden  by  the  column.  Basals  five,  hexagonal  or  obtusely 
heptagonal,  truncate  above,  and  like  the  first  radials  often 
produced  into  sharp  spines,  which  extend  obliquelj^  downward 
Primary'  radials  3X5,  the  first  larger  than  the  rest,  heptagonal, 
the  second  hexagonal,  the  third  hexagonal  or  heptagonal  and 
supporting  on  its  upper  sloping  sides  the  secondary  radials,  in 
two  series  of  two  to  three  plates  each,  which'  diverge  rapidly, 
arching  over  the  interradial  spaces,  and  completel}^  separating  them 
from  the  vault.  The  last  secondaiy  radial  supports  the  small 
delicate  arms,  its  inner  sloping  side  being  indented  by  the  arm 
opening,  while  its  outer  side  bears  an  additional  plate,  which 
meets  with  a  similar  plate  of  the  adjoining  ray,  and  the  two 
together  form  the  base  of  a  false  arm. 

Interradial  and  anal  areae  scarcely  distinguishable  from  each 
other;  large,  oval,  sometimes  slightly  depressed.  They  are 
occupied  b}^  from  ten  to  eighteen  pieces,  of  which  there  is  one 
large  hexagonal  plate  in  the  first  range,  resting  on  the  truncate 
upper  side  of  the  basals,  and  between  two  first  radials.  This  is 
succeeded  by  from  three  to  five  ranges,  the  second,  third  and 
fourth  consisting  of  three — rarely  four — plates,  and  those  above 
of  two  and  one  plate.  Interaxillary  plates  two  to  eight  or  ten, 
the  upper  ones  connecting  with  the  vault  and  the  false  arms. 

Arms  four  to  nine  to  the  ray,  according  to  the  species,  the 
number  of  primary  arms  being  perhaps  restricted  to  four, 
the  additional  ones  being  produced  by  branching  very  close  to 
the  body.  They  are  slender  and  delicate,  composed  of  a  double 
series   of  interlocking  plates,  and  they  bear  minute  pinnules 


392  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE  ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

The  arm  openings  are  situated  in  rather  large,  deep  depressions, 
lying  under  the  edges  of  the  pseudo-brachial  appendages,  but  only 
when  the  latter  are  very  large,  on  either  side  of  them  when  they 
are  small.  In  the  latter  case,  so  far  as  observed,  the  arms  are 
erect  and  folded  over  the  dome,  in  the  former  pendant,  but  in 
either  case  the  ambulacral  furrow  lies  to  the  inner  or  under  side 
of  the  arms,  close  to  the  body,  showing  the  pendant  position  to 
be  the  normal  one. 

Vault  depressed,  generally  flat,  composed  of  numerous,  some- 
what convex,  polygonal  plates,  among  which  the  apical  and 
radial  dome  plates  may  be  readily  distinguished  by  their  greater 
size.  The  interradial  regions  are  occupied  by  a  large  number  of 
small  pieces,  which  are  generally  found  more  or  less  depressed 
just  in  front  of  the  base  of  each  false  arm.  The  structure  is 
such  that  these  parts  may  have  been  flexible  and  capable  of  con- 
traction or  expansion.  Anal  opening  directly  through  the  vault, 
not  protruding,  situated  about  midway  between  the  centre  and 
the  margin. 

The  margin  of  the  dome  above,  and  generally  between  the  arm 
bases  of  different  rays,  is  extended  into  five  pseudo-brachial 
appendages,  which  near  the  body  are  comparatively  heavy, 
nearl}^  solid,  transversely  elliptic,  composed  of  two  rows  of 
semi-elliptical  joints,  rounded  on  the  outside,  and  joining  in  the 
middle  by  straight,  vertical  faces.  At  from  four  to  eight  joints 
from  the  body,  each  trunk  divides  into  two  rounded  branches 
tapering  to  a  point,  which  are  perforated  throughout  their  length 
by  a  small  central  passage,  these  passages  enter  the  body  in 
pairs  through  the  main  appendages,  and  thence  diverge  toward 
the  arm  furrows,  with  which  they  unite.  There  are  no  other 
openings,  nor  any  external  furrows,  these  organs  being  simply 
heavy  calcareous  tubes,  with  a  jointed  structure  like  that  of  the 
column. 

Column  round,  composed  of  joints  alternately  larger  and 
smaller ;    central  perforation  of  medium  size,  pentagonal. 

Geological  Position^  etc. — Ollacrinus  is  essentially  a  Subcarbon- 
iferous  genus,  all  the  known  species  being  from  rocks  of  that  age, 
except  a  single  species  which  is  from  the  Hamilton  group  of  New 
York,  and  this  is  a  transition  form.  It  occurs  both  in  Europe 
and  America. 

We  recognize  the  following  species  : — 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  393 

*I836.  Ollacrinus  bursa  Phill.    (Gilbertsocr.  bursa)    Geol.  Yorkshire,  p.  207,  PI. 

4,  figs.  24,  25;  Austin,  1842,  Rhodocr.  bursa,  Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist., 

p.   109:  also  d'Orbigny,  Gilbertsocr.  bursa,  Prodr.  de  Paleont.,  i,  p.  165. 

Mount,  limest,  England. 
«1836.  Ollacr.  calcaratus  Phill.    (Gilbertsocr.  calcaratus)  Geol.  Yorkshire  p.  207, 

PI.  4,  fig.  22  ;    d'Orbigny,  1850,  Prodr.  de  Paleont.,  i,  p.  155  ;  Austin,  1842, 

Shodocr.  calcaratus,   Ann.  and   Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  109.     Mount,  limest. 

England.     (Cumberland's   original  figure  in  the  Reliquiae  Conservata,  1826, 

represents  this  species.) 
*1860.  Ollacr.   fiscellus    Meek  and  Worth.      (Trematocr.   fiscellus)    Proc.    Acad. 

Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  383  ;  also  1865,  Gilbertsocr.  (Goniasteroidocr.)  fiscellus, 

Ibid.,  p.  167;  also  1866,  Gilbertsocr.  fiscellus,  Geol.  Rep.  III.,  ii,  p.  222,  PI. 

15,  fig.  5.     Lower  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
*1836.  Ollacr.  mammilaris  Phill.      (Gilbertsocr.    mammilaris)  Geol.  Yorkshire, 

p.  207,  PI.  4,  fig.  23;    also  d'Orbigny,  1850,  Prodr.  de  Paleont.,  i,  p.  155; 

Austin,  1842,  Bhodocr.  mammilaris,  Ann.  and   Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  109. 

Mount,  limest.     England. 
1869.  Ollacr.    obovatus   Meek  and  Worth.      (Goniasteroidocr.    obovatus)    Proc. 

Acad.    Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  76  ;    Geol.  Rep.  111.,    v,  p.    391,    PI.    4,   fig.  6  ; 

Wachsm.  and  Spr.,  1878,  Ollacr.  obovatus,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 

p.  263.     Uppermost  part  of  Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
»1860.  Ollacr.  reticulatus  Hall.     (Trematocr.  reticulatus)  Desc.  New  Sp.  Grin., 

p.    9;    also    Bost.  Journ.    Nat.   Hist.,   p.    325.     Lower    Burlington   limest. 

Burlington,  Iowa. 
*1860.  Ollacr.    robustus   Hall.    (Trematocr,   robustus)  Supp.  Geol.   Rep.   Iowa., 

p.  77.     Lower  part  of  Keokuk  limest.  Nauvoo,  111.,  and  Keokuk,  Iowa. 
1843.  (?)  0.  simplex  Portloek.     (Gilbertsocr.  simplex)  Geol.  Londonderry,  p.  350, 

PI.    16,    figs.  3  and  13.     Fermanaugh,  Ireland.     Mount,  limestone.     (This 

species  may  possibly  belong  to  Bhodocrinus,  variety  Acantbocrinus ;   the 

upper  portions  of  the  body  are  not  known.) 
«i862.  Ollacr.   spinigerus  Hall.     (Trematocr.   spinigerus)   15th  Rep.   N.  Y.   St. 

Cab.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  128.     Hamilton  gr,  Devonian.     Ontario  Co.,  N.  Y. 
*1869.  Ollacr.  tenuiradiatus  Meek  and  Worth.    (Goniasteroidocr.  tenuiradiatus ) 

Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  75;    Geol.  Rep.  111.,  v,  p.  389,  PI.  11,  fig.  1. 

Lower  Burl,  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
1860.  Ollacr.  tuberculosus   Hall.      (Trematocr.   tuberculosus)  Supp.  Geol.  Rep. 

Iowa,  p.  75;  Wachsm.  and  Spr.,  1878.     Ollacr.  tuberculosus  Proc.  Acad. 

Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  263.     Upper    Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 
Si/n  Trematocr.    papillatus    Hall,  1860.     Supp.   Geol.    Rep.    Iowa,   p.    78. 

Synon.  (Wachsm.  and  Spr.,  1878). 
"1859.  Ollacr.  tuberosus  Lyon  and  Cass.    (Goniasteroidocr.  tuberosus,  and  type 

of  that  genus).      Amer.  Journ.    Sci.    and   Arts,  vol.  28,    (ser.  2)    p.   233; 

Wachsm.  and  Spr.,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  p.  263.     Keokuk  limest. 

Crawfordville,  Ind.,  and  Hardin  Co.,  Ky. 
1860.  Ollacr.  typus  Hall.     (Trematocr.  typus,  type  of  that  genus).    Supp.    Geol. 

Rep.  Iowa.,  p.  73;    Wachsm.    and   Spr.    Ollacr.    typus.    Proc.  Acad.  Nat. 

Sci.  Phila.,  p.  262.     Upper  Burlington  limest.     Burlington,  Iowa. 


394  PROCEEDINOS   OF   THE   ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

Doubtful  Genera. 

The  following  genera,  which  evidently  belong  to  the  Sphreroicl- 
oerinida?,aretoo  imperfectly  defined  to  be  grouped  systematically. 

1.  (?)  CONDYLOCKINTIS  Eichwald. 
1860.  Eichwald.     Letbfea  Rossica,   i,  p.  612. 

From  Eichwald 's  description  ,  it  is  impossible  to  get  a  correct 
understanding  of  this  genus.  He  describes  it  as  having  ten 
basals,  three  radials,  two  rows  of  plates  placed  above  the 
radials,  and  numerous  other  little  plates  irregularly  arranged  ; 
the  plates  tumid,  and  the  calyx  covered  with  a  membranous 
integument  (?). 

From  Eichwald's  figure,  we  are  inclined  to  place  the  genus  with 
tlie  Rhodocrinida?,  perhaps  in  the  neighborhood  of  Thylacocrinus, 
provided  we  are  right  in  supposing  that  it  has  five  small  under- 
basals  within  the  ten  so-called  basals.  We  take  the  ten  latter,  which 
are  said  to  be  tumid,  as  representing  five  basals  alternating  with 
the  five  first  radials.  There  are  3  x  ^  primar}-,  and  evidently 
two  rows  of  secondary  radials,  separated  by  numerous  interradial 
and  perhaps  interaxillary  plates. 

Eichwald  has  referred  to  it  a  single  species  : — 

1860.  Condylocrinus  verrucosus  Eichwald.     Lethaea  Rossica,  p.  612,  PI.  31,  fig.  51. 
Silurian.     Russia. 

2.  (?)  SCHIZOCEIiniS  Hall. 

1847.  Hall.     Palseont.  New  York,  i,  p.  81. 

1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Palseont.,  i,  p.  371  (Stelidiocrinidae). 

The  genus  was  founded  upon  very  imperfect  material,  but 
evidently  occupies  a  position  near  Glyptocrinus,  if  not  identical 
with  it.  It  probabl}'^  had,  like  that  genus,  small  or  rudimentary 
underbasals  hidden  by  the  column. 

Hall  describes  it  with  five  pelvis  plates  (our  basals) ;  2  X  5 
costals  (the  first  and  second  radials)  ;  1  X  5  scapulars  (the  third 
primary  radials  J ;  1  X  5  brachials  or  arm  plates  (according  to  figure 
a  fourth  series  of  primary  radials,  but  probably  longitudinally 
divided,  and  represented  by  two  plates  forming  the  first  series  of 
secondary  radials )  ;  and  above  these  a  double  cuneiform  arm  plate 
supporting  the  hand  and  fingers,  we  should  say  a  second  series  of 
secondary  radials,  which  support  the  primary  arras. 


I 


I  881.  J  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  395 

The  interradial  areas  are  composed  of  several  series  of  two 
plates  each,  except  the  first  series  which  has  but  one  piece, 
lesting  in  the  upper  notch  between  two  adjoining  first  radials.  It 
is  not  known  whether  the  anal  side  is  distinct,  nor  has  the  dome 
I'cen  observed. 

Arms  short,  branching,  single  jointed.     Column  round. 

These  characters,  even  if  correctly  interpreted,  are  not  sufficient 
to  distinguish  Schizoc7v'nvs  from  Glyj)tocrinus.  We  are  inclined 
to  think  that  the  type  specimen  of  Sch.  nodosus  is  a  young  speci- 
men of  some  G'/yj>/oer//H/.s',  unless,  perhaps,  Sc/i/zocrm?/.s  represents 
paheontologically  an  earlier  stage  of  the  former.  The  interradial 
and  interaxillary  plates  seem  to  be  less  developed,  the  arms 
are  short,  simple  jointed,  and  the  second  division  of  the  ray,  which 
in  Glyptocrinus  generally  takes  place  in  the  bod}-,  occurs  in  the 
free  arms.  Hall's  second  species,  still  more  fragmentarv,  is 
l>robabIy  a  very  different  thing. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — Both  species  are  from  the  Trenton 
limestone  of  New  York. 

1S47.  Schizocrinus  nodosus   Hall.     Palaeont.  New  York,  vol.  i,  p.  81,  PI.  27,  figs. 

1  a-p.     Trrnton  limest.     Herkimer  Co.,  New  Yoik. 
1847.  (?)  Sohizocr.   striatus   Hall.      Palaeont.   New  York.  vol.  i,  p.  316,  PI.  28,  figs. 

4  a,  b,  c.     Tren'on  limest.     Middleville,  New  York. 

3.  (?)  SCTPHOCRIiniS  Hall  (not  Zenker,  1833). 

(?)  CTJPULOCRINUS  D'Orbigny.) 

1847.  Scyphocrinus  Hall.     Palaeont.  New  York,  vol.  1,  p.  85. 
1850.    Cupuloerinus  d'Orbigny.     Prodr.  de  Paleont.,  i,  p.  23. 

{ScypJiocrinus  Zenker,  1833.     Beitr.  Naturgesch  d.  Urwald,  p  26, 
PI.  4.  and  Miinster,  Beitr.  iii,  p.  112.) 

The  name  l)eing  preoccupied  by  Zenker,  d'Orbigny  proposed 
lu  its  place  Cupuloerinus  with  Scyphocrinus  heterocostalis  Hall, 
raid  a  species  of  Taxocrinus  as  the  tj'pes. 

The  form  has  been  generally  considered  as  closely  allied  to 
Schizocrinus.  in  which  we  cannot  concur.  We  think  d'Orbigny 
is  correct  in  placing  it  with — or  near — Taxocrinus,  but  to  verify 
this,  better  specimens  are  required,  and  we  will  not  attempt  a 
generic  descrip'tion  from  the  present  material. 

(?    1847.  Scyphoor.  heterocostalis   Hall.     Palaeont.  New  York,  vol.  i,  p.  85,  fig?.  3 
a-f.     Herkimer  Co.,  New  York. 


396  PROCEEDINGS    OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

4.  (?)  HADE0CRINTJ8  Lyon. 

1869.  Lyon.     Trans.  Amer.  Philos.  Soc,  vol.  xiii,  p.  445. 
1879.  Zittel.     Handb.  der  Palaeont.,  i,  p.  377. 

Syn.  (?)  Coronocrinus  Hall.     Palaeont.  New  York,  iii,  p.  124. 

The  name  was  proposed  for  certain  crinoidal  remains,  which  had 
been  obtained  from  the  Devonian,  near  Louisville,  Kentucky. 
The  specimens  were  all  fragmentary,  but  enough  is  preserved  to 
show  a  great  resemblance  to  Dolatocrinus,  and  it  seems  to  us  that 
this  form  should  be,  like  Stereocrinus,  placed  subgenerically  under 
it.  Hadrocrinus  differs  from  Dolatocrinus  in  the  smaller  size  of 
the  basals,  and  in  having  only  two  primarj^  radials  ;  it  differs  from 
this  and  Stereocrinus  in  the  numerous  bifurcations  within  the  rays, 
and  in  having  the  arms  arranged  continuously  around  the  body, and 
not  in  groups.  The  genus  Coronocrinus  proposed  by  Hall,  which 
was  founded  upon  mere  fragments,  is  in  all  probability  identical 
with  Hadrocrinus. 

According  to  Lyon,  the  body  is  very  large  and  broad,  the  calyx 
low  vasiform,  the  dome  hemispherical.  Basals  three,  small,  hidden 
by  the  column,  and  only  seen  when  viewed  from  the  inner  side. 
Primar}^  radials  2X5,  the  second  axillary.  Higher  orders  of 
radials  numerous,  each  one  composed  of  two  series,  and  the  plates 
all  forming  a  part  of  the  calyx.  The  uppermost  plate  excavated, 
and  forming  with  the  dome  plates  a  large  ambulacral  or  arm 
opening.  The  openings  are  numerous,  arranged  continuously 
around  the  body,  and  are  at  no  place  separated  by  interradial  pieces. 
Interradial  arese  composed  of  few,  three  or  four  pieces,  which,  like 
all  the  radial  pieces,  are  comparatively  narrow  and  long,  and  of 
very  uniform  size  throughout,  thereby  producing  the  great  width 
in  the  bod3\  It  is  not  known  whether  the  anal  area  is  distinct  or 
not.  Interaxillaries  two  to  four  or  more.  Arms  unknown. 
Column  round,  rapidly  tapering  downward  ;  perforation  round 
near  the  calyx,  at  a  distance  below  pentalobate. 

Geological  Position,  etc. — From  the  Devonian  of  Kentucky. 
We  only  recognize  two  of  Lyon's  species.  Hadrocrinus  penta- 
gonus  is  very  imperfectly  known,  and  in  all  probability  belongs 
to  a  very  different  group. 

1869.  Hadrocrinus  discus  Lyon.  Trans.  Amer.  Philos.  Soc,  vol.  xiii,  p.  448,  PI.  26, 
fig.  a.     Corniferous  limest.,  Devonian.     Falls  of  the  Ohio. 

1869.  Hadrocr.  plenissimus  Lyon.  Trans.  Amer.  Philos.  Soc,  vol.  xiii,  p.  445,  PI. 
26,  figs.  B  1-3.  Corniferous  limest.,  Devonian.  Falls  of  the  Ohio,  near  Jef- 
fersonville,  Ind. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  39Y 


LIST  OF  SYNONYMS,  CORRECTIONS  AND  IMPERFECTLY 
DEFINED  SPECIES. 

Abracrinus  d'Orbigny. 

A.  simplex  d'Orb.,  see  Carpocrinus  simplex. 

Acasthocrinus  Roemer,  syn  of  Rhodocrinus. 

A.  longispina  Roemer,  see  Rhodocr.  longispina. 
A.  nodulosus  Hall,  see  Rhodoer.  nodulosus. 
A.  gracilis  Hall,  see  Rhodocr.  gracilis. 

Actinocrinus  Miller. 

A.  abnormis  Lyon,  see  Megistocr.  ahnormis. 

A.  aculeatus  Austin,  not  sufficiently  defined.        • 

A.  segilops  Hall,  see  Teleiocr.  xgilops. 

A.  sequalis  Hall,  see  Batocr.  legualis. 

A.  sequibrackiatus  McChesney,  see  Batocr.  sequibrachiatus, 

A. var.  alatus  Hall,  syn.  of  Batocr.  sequibrachiatu9. 

A.  Agassizi  Troost.     Not  defined. 

A.  althea  Hall,  see  Teleiocr.  althea. 

A.  amphora  Portlock,  syn.  of  Amphcvacr.  Gilbertsoni. 

A.  amplus  Meek  and  Worth.,  see  Perieehocr.  amplus. 

A.  Andrewsianus  McChesney,  see  Batocr.  Andrew sianus. 

A.  araneolus  Meek  and  Worth.,  see  Steganocr.  araneolu». 

A.  asterias  McChesney,  syn.  of  Batocr.  verrucosus. 

A.  asteriscus  Hall,  syn.  of  Batocr.  sequihrachiatus. 

A.  arthriticus  Phill.,  see  Gissocr,  arthriticus. 

A.  atlas  McCoy,  see  Amphoracr.  (?)  atlas  Roemer. 

A.  brevicalyx  Rose.     Not  found  the  description. 

A.  brevicornis  Hall,  see  Megistocr.  brevicornis. 

A.  brevimanus  Angelin,  see  Perieehocr.  brevimanus. 

A.  brevis  Hall,  see  Agaricocr.  brevis. 

A.  biturbinatus  Hall,  see  Batocr.  biturbinatus. 

A.  calyculoides  Hall,  see  Ereimocr.  calyculmdes. 

A.  calyculus  Hall,  see  Batocr.  ealyculus. 

A.  calypso  Hall,  see  Gennseocr.  calypso. 

A.  canaliculatus  Hall,  see  Dorycr.  canaliculatus. 

A.  carica  Hall,  see  Eretmocr,  carica. 

A.  caroli  Hall,  syn.  of  Batocr.  calyculus. 

A.  Cassedayi  Lyon,  see  Batocr.  Cassedayi. 

A.  catafractut  Aust.     Not  sufficiently  defined. 

A.  cauliculus  Hall,  see  Gennseocr.  cauliculus. 

A.  chloris  Hall,  syn.  of  Actinocr.  tenuisculptus. 

A.  Christyi  Shumard,  see  Batocr.  Christyi, 

A.  Christyi  Hall,  see  Perieochocr.  Christyi. 


308  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

A.  cingulatus  Goldf.     Described  from  detached  columns. 
A.  clavifferus  Hall,  syn.  of  Batocr.  similis. 
A.  clio  Hall,  see  Eretmocr.  clio. 
A.  clivosus  Hall,  see  Teleiocr,  clivosus. 
A.  cloelia  Hall,  see  Eretmocr.  cloelia. 
A.  clypeatus  Hall,  see  Batocr.  clypeatus. 
A.  concavus  Meek  and  Worth.,  see  Dorycr.  concavus. 
A.  concinnus  Shumard,  see  Steganocr.  concinnus. 
A.  corhulis  Hall,  see  Eretmocr.  corhulis. 
A.  corniculiis  Hall,  syn.  of  Agaricocr.  brevis. 
A.  cornigerus  Hall,  see  Dorycr.  cornigerus. 
A.  cornigerus  Shumard,  syn.  of  Gennxocr.  Kentuckiensis, 
A.  cornutus  Troost.     Not  defined. 
•    A.  coronatus  Hall,  Ere'mocr.  coronatus. 
A.  Correyi  Lyon,  probably  (?)  Agaricocrinus. 
A.  costatus  Eichwald.    'Detached  column. 
A.  costatus  Bigsby,  see  Actinoer.  costus  McCoy. 
A.  crassus  Austin.     Not  defined. 
A.  cyathiformis  Sandberger.     Badly  defined. 
A.  decadactylus  Portlock  (not  Goldf.).     Insufficiently  described. 
A.  decornis  Hall,  see  Dorycr.  decornis. 

A.  delicatus  Meek  and  Worth.,  the  young  Teleiocr.  umhrosus. 
A.  desideratus  Hall,  syn.  of  Dorycr.  Missouriensis. 
A   discoideus  Hall,  see  Batocr.  discoideus. 
A.  divaricatus  Hall,  syn.  of  Dorycr.  cornigerus, 
A.  divergens  Hall,  see  Amphoracr.  divergens. 

A. var.  multiramosus  Meek  and  Worth.,  syn.  of  Amphoracr.  divergens. 

A.  dodecadactylus  Meek  and  Worth.,  see  Batocr.  dodecadactylus. 

A.  doris  Hall,  syn.  of  Batocr.  xqualis. 

A.  dubius  Eichwald.     Detached  columns. 

A.  elephanti?ius  Austin.     Not  sufficiently  defined. 

A.  eris  Hall,  see  Agaricocr.  eris. 

A.  erodus  Hall,  see  Teleiocr.  erodus. 

A.  eryx  Hall,  syn.  of  Actinoer.  glans. 

A.  eucharis  Hall,  see   Gennseocr.  eucharis. 

A.  Evansii  Owen  and  Shum.,  see  Megistocr.  Evansii. 

A.  expansus  Phillips,  see  Sagenocr.  expansus, 

A.  fibula  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 

A.  fiscellus  Hall,  see  Agaricocr.  fiscellus. 

A.  formosus  Hall,  syn.  of  Batocr.  discoideus. 

A.  gemmiformis  Hall,  Eretmocr.  gemmiformis. 

A.  gihbosus  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 

A.  Gilberisoni  Miller,  see  Amphoracr.  Gilbertsoni. 

A.  Gilbertsoni  de  Konink,  syn.  of  Actinoer.  stellaris  de  Kon. 

A.  globosus  Phillips,  see  Rhodocr.  globosus. 

A.  glyptus  Hall,  see  Strotocr.  glyptus. 

A.  Gouldi  Hall,  see  Dorycr.  Gouldi. 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA.  399 

A.  granulatus  Qoldf.     Detached  columns. 

A.  granulatus  A.\xstin.     Not  defined.     Bet  Amphoracrinus. 

A.  Hageri  McChesney,  see  Batocr.  Hageri. 

A.  helice  Hall,  see  Agaricocr.  helice. 

A.  Humboldti  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 

A.  icosidactylus  Casseday,  see  Batoer.  icosidaetylut. 

A.  Indianensis  Lyon  and  Cass.,  see  Batocr.  Indianensis. 

A.  inflatus  Hall,  syn.  of  Amphoracr.  spinobrachiatua. 

A.  inornatus  Hall,  syn,  of  Batocr.  clypeatus. 

A.  insculptus  Hall,  see  Tdeiocr.  insculptus. 

A.  interradiatus  Angelin,  syn.  of  Periechocr.  Lindslromi. 

A.  irregularis  Lyon  and  Cass.,  see  Batocr.  irregularis. 

A.  Kentuckiensis  Shum.,  see  Batocr.  Kentwkiensis. 

A.  Konincki  Shum.,  see  Eretmocr.  Konincki, 

A.  Isevis  Miller.     Detached  columns. 

A.  Isevissimus  Austin.     Not  defined. 

A.  lagina  Hall,  syn.  of  Actinocr.  proboscidialia. 

A.  lagunculus  Hall,  see  Batocr.  lagunculus. 

A.  latus  Hall,  see  Megisiocr.  latus. 

A.  laura  Hall,  see  Batocr.  laura. 

A.  lepidus  Hall,  see  Batocr.  lepidus. 

A.  leucosia  Hall,  see  Eretmocr.  leucosia. 

A,  Uratus  Hall,  see  Teleiocr.  liratus. 

A.  locellus  Hall,  syn.  of  Actinocr.  reticulatus  Hall. 

A.  longidigitatus  Angelin,  see  Periechocr.  longidigitalus. 

A.  longimanus  Angelin,  see  Periechocrinus . 

A.  longirostris  Hall,  see  Batocr.  longirostris. 

A.  longispinus  Austin.     Not  defined. 

A.  major  Angelin.     Rhodocrinidse,  genus  (?). 

A.  mammillatus  de  Koninck  (Bigsby).     Not  seen  description. 

A.  matuta  Hall,  see  Eretmocr.  matuta. 

A. var.  attenuata  Hall,  see  Eretmocr.  attenuata. 

A.  medius  Angelin.     Rhodocrinidae,  genus  (?). 

A.  Meckii  Lyon^  see  Macrostylocr.  Meekii. 

A.  minor  Hall,  syn.  of  Megistocr.  brevicornis. 

A.  Mississippiensis  Roemer,  see  Dorycr.  Mississippiensis. 

A.  var.  spiniger  Meek  and  Worth.,  syn.  of  J).  Mississippiensis. 

A.  Missouriensis  Shumard,  see  Dorycr.  Missouriensis. 

A.  moniliferus  Qoldf.     Detached  columns. 

A.  moniliformis  Miller,  see  Periechocr.  moniliformis. 

A  Mortoni  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 

A.  multicornis  Lyon,  see  Centrocr.  mullicornis. 

A.  mundulus  Hall,  see  Batocr.  mundulus. 

A.  muricatus  Goldf.     Detached  columns. 

A.  multibrachiatus  var.  echinatus,  see  A.  multibrachiatus. 

A.  Nashvillse  Troost,  see  Batocr.  Nashvillse. 

A.  var.  subtractus  White,  see  Batocr.  Nashvillx. 


400  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881 

A   nodulosus  Goldf.     Detached  columns. 

A.  nubilii  Angelin,  Periechocr.  nubilis. 

A.  nyssa  Hall,  see  Gennxocr.  nyssa. 

A.  oblalus  Hall,  syn.  of  Batocr.  rolundus, 

A.  ohpyramidalis  Winchell  and  Marcy.     Internal  cast. 

A.  oUiculus  Hall,  syn.  of  Periechocr.   Whitei. 

A.  ornatus  Hall,  see  Physetocr.  ornatus. 

A.  papillatus  Hall,  syn.  of  Batocr.  clypeatus. 

A.  Parkinsojii  de  Koninck  (?).     Not  seen  the  description. 

A.  parvus  Shumard,  see  Dorycr.  parvus. 

A.  pendens  Hall,  syn.  of  Dorycr.   unicornis. 

A.  pentagomis  Hall,  see  Steganocr.  pentagonus. 

A.  pentaspinus  Lyon,  see  Centrocr.  pentaspinus. 

A.  perumbrosus  Hall,  syn.  of  Strotocr.  regalis. 

A.  pistilliformis  Meek  and  Worth.,  see  Batocr.  pistilliformis. 

A.  pistillus  Meek  and  Worth.,  see  Batocr.  pistillus. 

A.  planobasilis  Hall,  syn.  of  Amphoracr.  divergent. 

A.  planodiscus  Hall,  see  Balocr.  planodiscus. 

A.  plumosus  Hall.     Detached  arms. 

A.  pocillum  Hall,  see  Gennmocr.  pocillum. 

A.  polydactylus  Bonny  (not  Miller),  Melocr.  pachydactylus. 

A.  precursor  Hall,  see  Dorycr.  {?)  precursor. 

A.  prumiensis  Wirtgen  and  Zeiler,  see  Dorycr.  prumiensis. 

A.  pulcher  (Salter  MS.)  McCoy,  see  under  Periechocrinus. 

A.  pyramidatus  Hall,  see  Agaricocr.  pyramidatus. 

A.  pyriformis  Ad.  Roemer.     Not  seen  de<(cription. 

A.  pyriformis  Shumard,  see  Batocr.  pyriformis. 

A.  pyriformis  var.  rudis  M.  and  W.,  syn.  of  Batocr.  pistilliformis. 

A.  quadrispinus  White,  syn.  of  Amphoracr.  divergens. 

A.  quaternarius  Hall,  syn.  of  Actinocr.  jiroboscidialit. 

A.  spiniferus  Hall,  syn.  of  Actinocr.  proboscidialis. 

A.  quinquangularis  Angelin,  see  Periechocr.  quinquangularis. 

A.  qumquelobus  Hall,  syn.  of  Dorycr.  cornigerus. 

A.  radiatus  Angelin,  see  Periechocr.  radiatua. 

A.  ramulosus  Hall,  see  Eretmocr.  ramulosus. 

A.  regalis  Hall,  see  Strotocr.  regalis.  , 

A.  regularis  Hisinger  =  TJypanthocr.  regularis. 

A.  remibrachiatus  Hall,  see  Eretmocr.  remibrachiatus. 

A.  retiarius  Phillips.     Detached  columns. 

A.  rotundas  Yandell  and  Shum.,  see  Batocr.  rotundus. 

A.  rudis  Hall,  see  Teleiocr.  rudis. 

A.  rusticus  Hall,  syn.  of  Actinocr.  scitulus. 

A.  Schultzianus  Angelin,  see  Periechocr.  Schultzianus. 

A.  sculptus  Miller.     Detached  columns. 

A.  sculptus  Hall,  see  Steganocr.  sculptus. 

A.  semiradialus  Hall,  see  Periechocr.  semiradiatus. 

A.  senarius  Hall,  syn.  of  Physetocr.  ornatus. 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA.  401 

A.  securus  Hall,  syn.  of  Actinocr.  sexarmatus. 

A.  Sillimani  Meek  and  Worth.,  syn.  of  Actinocr.  seitulns. 

A.  similis  Hall,  see  Batocrinus  similis. 

A.  simplex  Phillips,  see  Carpocrinus  simjjlex. 

A.  sinuosus  Hall,  see  Batocr.  sinuosus. 

A.  speciosus  Meek  and  Worth.,  syn.  of  Strolocr.  regalis. 

A.  ipinobrachiatus  Hall,  see  Amphoracr.  spinobrachiatus, 

A.  spinulosus  Hall,  see  Dorycr.  spinulosus. 

A.  steropes  Hall,  see  Batocr.  sterope-i. 

A.  striatus  MUnster.     Not  known  to  us. 

A.  suhaculeatus  Hall,  see  Dorycr.  subaculeatus. 

A.  subxqualis  McChesney,  syn.  of  Batocr.  discoideus. 

A.  subturbi7iatus  Meek  and  Worth.,  syn.  of  Dorycr.  parvus. 

A.  subumbrosus  Hall,  syn.  of  Teleiocr.  liratus, 

A.  subventricosus  McChesney,  syn.  of  Physetocr.  ventricosus. 

A.  superlatus  Hall,  syn.  of  Megistocr.  brevicornis. 

A.  symmetricus  Hall,  syn.  of  Dorycr.  parvus. 

A.  tenuidiscus  Hall,  see  Periechocr.  tenuidiscus. 

A.  tenuiradiatus  Hall,  1861,  see  Teleiocr.  ienuiradiatus. 

A.  tenuiradiatus  Hall,  1847,  Palteocrystes. 

A.  tenmstriatus  Phillips.     Detached  columns. 

A.  tesseraius  Goldf.     Detached  plates  and  columns. 

A.  tesseracontadactyJus  Goldf.,  see  Abacocr.  tesseracontadactylus. 

A.  tesseracontadactylus  Hisinger,  syn.  of  Carpocr.  simplex. 

A.  themis  Hall,  syn.  of  Actinocr.  proboscidialis. 

A.  thetis  Hall,  syn.  of  Actinocr.  sexarmatus. 

A.  thoas  Hall,  syn.  of  Actinocr.  reiiculatus. 

A.  tholus  Hall,  syn.  of  Actinocr.  glans. 

A.  tricornis  Hall,  syn.  of  Dorycr.  miicornis. 

A.  trinodus  Hall  syn.  of  Dorycr.  parvus. 

A.  turbinatus  Hall,  see  Batocr.  turbinatus. 

A.  var.  elegans  Hall,  syn.  of  Batocr.  turbinatus. 

A.  umbrosus  Hall,  see  Teleiocr.  umbrosus. 

A.  unicornis  Owen  and  Shum.,  see  Dorycr.  unicornis. 

A.  unispinus  Hall,  see  Dorycr.  unispinus. 

A.  urna  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 

A.  urnxformis  McChesney,  syn.  of  Eretmocr.  KonincH. 

A.  validus  Meek  and  Worth.,  syn.  of  Steganocr.  concinnus. 

A.  ventricosus  Hall,  see  Physetocr.  ventricosus. 

A.  cancellatus  Hall,  syn.  of  Physetocr.  ventricosus. 

A. internodius  Hall,  syn.  of  Physetocr.  ventricosus. 

A.  Verneuili  Troost,  see  3Ielocr,  Verneuili. 

A.  Vernenilianus  Shum.,  see  Eretmocr.  Verneuilianus. 

A.  viminalis  Hall,  see  Amphoracr.  viminalis. 

A.  Wachsmuthi  White  (1862),  syn.  of  Actinocr.  sciiulus. 

A.  TFacA^mi^^Ai  White  (1880),  see  Batocr.   Wachsmuthi. 

A.  Whitei  Hall,  see  Periechocr.   Whitei. 

37 


402  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

A.  Wkitfieldi  Hall,  syn.  of  Periechoer.  Christyi. 
A.  Yandelli  Shumard,  see  Batocr.  Yandelli. 

Agariooorinus  Troost. 

A.  bellatrema  Hall,  syn.  of  Agaricocr.  ornatrema. 

A.  bullatus  Hall,  syn.  of  Agaricocr.  americanus. 

A.  corrugatus  Hall,  syn.  of  Agaricocr.  pyramidatus. 

A.  excavatus  Hall,  syn.  of  Agaricocr.  americanus. 

A.  nodosus  Meek  and  Worth.,  syn.  of  Agaricocr.  americanus, 

A.  pentagonus  var.  convezus,  see  Agaricocr.  convexus. 

A.  iuberosus  Troost.,  syn.  of  Agaricocr.  americanus. 

Alloprosallocrinus  Lyon  and  Casseday. 

A.  depressus  Lyon  and  Cass.     Not  sufficiently  defined. 
A.  euconus  Meek  and  Worth.,  see  Batocr.  euconus. 

Amblacrinus  d'Orbigny.     Not  sufficiently  defined. 

A.  rosaceus  (Roemer)  d'Orbigny,  see  Coccocr.  rosaceus. 

Amphoracrinus  Austin. 

A.  americanus  Roemer,  see  Agaricocr.  americanus. 

A.  bellatrema  Hall,  syn.  of  Agaricocr.  ornotrema. 

A.  concavus  (Actinocr.)  Meek  and  Worth.,  see  Dorycr.  concavus. 

A.  corrugatus  Hall,  syn.  of  Agaricocr.  pyramidatus. 

A.  crassus  Austin.     Insufficiently  defined. 

A.  excavatus  Hall,  syn.  of  Agaricocr.  americanus. 

A.  granulatus  Austin.     Not  sufficiently  defined. 

A.  inflatus  Meek  and   Worth.    (Hall's  Actinocr.   inflatus,    1860),    syn.    of 

Amphoracr.  spinobrachiatus. 
A.  inflatus  (Hall's  Agaricocr, — Amphoracr. — inflatus,  1861),  see  Agaricocr. 

inflatus. 
A.  ornotrema  Hall,  see  Agaricocr.  ornotrema. 

A.  planobasilis  Hall  (Meek  and  Worth.),  syn.  oi  Amphoracr.  divergens. 
A.  planoconvexus  Hall,  Agaricocr,  planoconvexus. 

A.  quadrispinus'White  (Meek  and  Worth.),  syn.  of  Amphoracr.  spinobrachiatus. 
A.  sublurbinatus  Meek  and  Worth.,  syn.  of  Dorycr.  parvus. 

Aspidocrinus  Hall.     The  root  (?)  of  a  crinoid. 
A.  callosus  Hall.     Body  unknown. 
A.  digitatus  Hall.     Body  unknown. 
A.  scutelliformis  Hall.     Body  unknown. 

Asteroorinus  Lyon  (not  Miinster),  syn.  of  Pterotocrinus. 
A.  capitalis  Lyon,  see  Pterotocr.  capitalis. 
A.  coronatus  Lyon,  see  Pterotocr.  coronatus. 

Astrocrinites  Conrad  (not  Cumberland  nor  Austin),  syn.  of  Melocrinus. 
A.  pachydactylus  Hall,  see  Melocr.  pachydactylus. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF  PHILADELPHIA.  403 

Astropodia  Ure,  see  Platycrinus. 

Balanocrinus  Troost  (not  Agassiz),  syn.  of  Lampterocrinus. 
B.  inflalus  Hall,  see  Lampterocr.  injlatut. 
B.  sculptus  Troost,  syn   of  Lampterocr.  tennesseensis  Roemer. 

Batoorinus  Casseday. 

B.  asteriscus  Hall  (Meek  and  Worth.),  syn.  of  Batocr.  lequibrachiatus. 

B.  clavigerus  Hall  (M.  and  W.),  syn.  of  Batocr.  clavigerus. 

B.  doris  Hall  (M.  and  W.),  syn.  of  Batocr.  xqualis. 

B.  formosus  Hall  (M.  and  W.),  syn.  of  Batocr.  clypeatus. 

B.  inornatus  Hall  (M.  and  W.),  syn.  of  Batocr.  clypeatus. 

B.  Konincki  Shum^ir A  (M.  and  W.),  see  Eretmocr.  Konincki. 

B.  subsequalis  McChesney  (M.  and  W.),  syn.  of  Batocr.  clypeatus. 

B.  urnse/ormis  Hall  (M.  and  W.),  see  Eretmoer.  urnseformis. 

Brachiocrinas  Hall.     Based  on  detached  arm  fragments. 

B.  nodosarius  Hall.     Arm  fragments. 

Cacabocrinus  Troost,  syn.  of  Dolatocrinus. 

C.  glyptus  Hall,  see  Dolatocr.  glyptus. 

C.  var.  intermedius  Hall,  see  Dolatocr.  glyptus. 

C.  lamellosus  Hall,  see  Dolatocr.  lamellosut. 
C.  liratv^  Hall,  see  Dolatocr.  liratus. 

C. var.  multilira  Hall,  syn.  of  Dolatocr.  liratus. 

C.  speciosus  Hall,  see  Dolatocr.  speciosus. 
C.  Troosti  Hall,  see  Dolatocr.  Troosti. 

Calathocrinus  Hall  (not  von  Meyer),  syn.  of  Teleiocrinus . 

Castanocrinus  Roemer,  syn.  of  Melocrinus  Goldfuss. 

Centroorinus  Austin  (not  Wachsm.  and  Spr.),  syn.  of  Platycrinus. 

Coelocrinus  Meek  and  Worth,  (not  Coelioer.  White),  syn.  of  Dorycrinus. 
C.  concavus  M.  and  Worth.,  see  Dorycr.  concavus. 

Clonoorinus  Oehlert.  (not  Quenst.),  syn.  of  Melocrinus. 
C.  Bigshyi  Oehlert.,  see  Melocr.  Bigsbyi. 

Condylocrinas  Eichwald,  see  doubtful  genera. 

Conocrinites  Troost.     Not  defined. 

C.  Lese,  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 

C.  tuberculosus  Troost.     Catalogue  ©ame... 

Cophinus  Koenig.     Detached  ccdumns. 

Coroaocrinus  Hall,  see  Hadrocr.     (Doubtful  genera.) 
C.  polydactylus  Hall.     Small  fragmentary  pieces. 


404  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

Crumenaecrinites  Troost.     Not  defined. 
C.  ovaH.i  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 

Ctenoorinus  Bronn,  syn.  of  Melocr.  Goldfuss. 

C.  bainbridgensis  Hall,  see  Melocr.  bainbridgensis. 

C.  decadactylus  Goldf.,  see  Melocr.  decadactylus. 

C.  lamelloms  Eichwald.     Detached  columns. 

C.  notatus  Eichwald.     Detached  columns. 

C.  punctattts  Eichwald.     Columns. 

C.  stellaris  Roemer,  see  Melocr.  stellaris. 

C.  typus  Bronn,  see  Melocr.  typus. 

Cupellaecrinus  Troost.     Not  defined. 

C.  Buchii  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 
C.  corrugatus  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 
C.  inflatus  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 
C.  Isevis  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 
C.  magnificuB  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 
C.  pentagonalis  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 
C.  rosseformis  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 
C.  stellatus  Trosst.     Catalogue  name. 
C.  striatiis  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 

Cyathocrinus  Miller. 

C.  fasciatus  Hall,  syn.  of  Macrostylocr.  Meehii  Lyon. 

C.  tesseracontadactylus  Hisinger  (Salter),  see  Carpocr.  simplex. 

Cystocrinus  Roemer,     Detached  columns. 

C.  Tennesseensis  Roemer.     Detached  columns. 

Cytocrinus  Roemer,  syn.  of  Melocrinus  Goldf. 

C.  Isevis  Roemer,  see  Melocr.  Isevis. 

Daemonocrinites  Troost.     Not  defined.  , 

Decadactylocrinites  Owen.    Not  defined. 

Bichocrinus  Miinster. 

D.  cornige'us  Shum.,  syn.  of  Talarocr.  eornigerus. 

D.  elegans  Cass,  and  Lyon  (not  de  Kon.  and  Leh.),  see  Talarocr.  elegans. 
D.  expansus  Meek  and  Worth,  (not  de  Kon.  and  Leh.),  see  Dichoer.  poly- 

dactylus. 
D.  insularis  Eichw.,  see  Hexacr.  insularis. 
D.  lachrymosus  Hall,  syn.  of  Platyr.  subspinulosus  Hall. 
D.  protuberans  Hall,  Pterotocr.  protuberans. 

D.  sculptus  Cass,  and  Lyon  (not  de  Kon.  and  Leh.),  see  Dichoer.  ornatua. 
D.  septuosus  de  Kon.,  based  upon  detached  plates. 
D.  sexlobatus  Shum.,  see  Talarocr.  sezlobatus. 
D.  symmetricus  Cass,  and  Lyon,  see  Talarocr.  symmetricus. 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES    OF  PHILADELPHIA.  405 

Dimerocrinus  Phillips. 

D.  icosidactylus  Phill.,  see  Eucrinus  icosidactylus . 
D.  oligoptilus  Pacht.  =  Taxocrinus  oligoptilus. 

Dimorpliocrinus  d'Orbiguy,  (Pentremites). 

D.  pentangularis  d'Orb.,  in  part  Platycr.  [?)  pentangular  is  Miller. 

Doliolocrinus  Troost.     Not  defined. 

Donacicrinites  Troost.     Not  defined. 

D.  simplex  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 

Echinus  dubius  Schlotheim,  see  Actinocr.  Isevis,  Miller. 

Edwardsocrinus  d'Orbigny,  syn   of  Platycrinus. 

E.  ornatus  McCoy,  see  Platycr.  ornatus. 

Eucalyptocrinus  rosaceus  Hisinger  (not  Goldf.),  see  Marsupiocr.  rosaceus. 
Eucrinus  Angelin. 

E.  minor  Angelin,  see  Anthemocr.  minor. 

E.  vetiusius  Angelin,  see  Anthemocr.  venustus. 

Eugeniacrinites  hexagonus  Miinster,  see  Platycr.  spinosus  Quenstadt. 
Forbesiocrinus  Pratteni  McChesney,  see  Melocr.  Pratteni  {?). 
Geocrinus  d'Orbigny,  syn.  of  Periechocrinus. 

G.  moniliformis  Miller,  see  Periechocr .  moniliformis. 

Gilbertsocrinus  Phillips,  syn.  of  Ollacrinus  Cumberland. 
G.  bursa  Phill.,  see  Ollacr.  bursa. 
G.  calcaratus  Phill.,  see  Ollacr.  calcaratus. 
G.  fiscellus  Meek  and  AVorth.,  see  Ollacr.  fiscellus 
G.  mammillaris  Phill.,  see  Ollacr.  mamillaris. 
G.  simplex  Portlock,  see  Ollacr.  simplex. 

Glosterocrinus  Hall.     Not  sufficiently  defined. 

G.  elongatus  Hall      A  very  imperfect  specimen. 

Glypytocrinus  Hall. 

G.  armosus  McChesney.     Described  from  casts. 

G.  Baeri  Meek,  see  Reteocr.  Baeri. 

G.  basalis  McCoy.     Insufficiently  described. 

G.  Carleyi  Hall,  see  Mariacr.  Carleyi. 

G.  cognatus  S.  A.  Miller,  see  Reteocr.  cognatus. 

G.  Dyeri  var.  subglobosus  Meek,  see  Glyptocr.  subglobosus. 

G.  ezpansus  Phill.  (d'Orb.),  see  Sagenocr.  expansus. 

G.  gracilis  Wetherby,  see  Reteocr.  gracilis 

G.  lacunosus  Billings,  see  Archseocr.  lacunosus. 


406  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

G.  libanus  SaflFord.     Not  defined. 

(j.  marginatus  Billings,  see  Archxocr.  marginatus. 

G.  0"  N'ealWa&W,  see  Reteocr.  O'Nealli. 

G.  plumoms  Hall.     Detached  columns  and  arms. 

G.  quinquepartitus  Billings.     Detached  columns. 

O.  Richardsoni  Westerby,  see  Reteocr.  Richardsoni. 

G.  siphonatus  McChesney.     Described  from  casts. 

Goniasteroidocrinus  Lyon  and  Cass.,  syn.  of  Ollacrinus. 
G.fiscellus  Meek  and  Worth.,  see  Ollacr.fiscellus. 
G.  obovatus  Meek  and  Worth.,  see  Ollacr.  obovatus. 
G.  teimiradiatus  Meek  and  Worth.,  see  Ollacr.  tenuiradiatus. 
G.  tuberosus  Lyon  and  Cass.,  see  Ollacr.  tuberosus. 

Habrocrinus  Angelin,  syn.  of  Carpocrinus  Miiller. 
//.  anulatus  Angel.,  see  Carpocr.  anulatus. 
H.  cariosolus  Angel.,  see  Carpocr.  cariosolus. 
H.  comtus  Angel.,  see  Carpocr.  comtus. 
H.  decadactylus  Angel.,  see  Carpocr.  decadactylus. 
H.  grandis  Angel.,  see  Carpocr.  grandis. 
H.  granulatus  Angel.,  see  Carpocr.  granulatus. 
H.  Isevis  Angel.,  see  Carpocr.  Isevis. 
H.  longimanus  Angel.,  see  Carpocr.  longimanus. 
H.  ornatissimus  Angel.,  see  Carpocr.  ornatisdmus. 
H.  oriiatus  Angel.,  see  Carpocr.  ornatus. 
H.  pmnulatus  Angel.,  Carpocr.  pinnulatus. 
H.  robustus  Angel.,  see  Carpocr.  robtistus. 
H.  ttnuis  Angel.,  see  Carpocr.  tenuis. 
H.  umbonatus  Angel.,  see  Carpocr.  umbonatus. 

Hadroorinus  Lyon.     See  doubtful  genera. 

//.  pentagomts  Lyon.     Imperfectly  known. 

Harmocrinus  Angelin,  syn.  of  Stelidiocrinus. 

H.  lojigimanus  Angel.,  see  Stelidiocr.  longimanus. 

Hexaorinus  Goldfuss. 

H.  decagonus  Goldf.  (Bigsby),  see  Storthing ocrinus. 

H.  depressus  Austin,  syn.  of  Hexacr.  inter scapularis. 

H.  eboraceus  Hall  (Bigsby),  see  Platycr.  eboraceus. 

H.  Eriensis  Hall  (Bigsby),  see  Platycr.  Eriensis. 

H.  fritillus  Miiller  (Bigsby),  see  Storthing  ocrinus. 

H.  melo  Austin,  syn.  of  Hexacr.  interscapularis. 

IT.  nodiger  Eichwald.     Described  from  detached  columns. 

Icosidactylocriuites  Troost.     Not  defined. 
Lyrioorinus  Hall. 

L.  sculptilis  Hall.     Described  from  an  indistinct  cast. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OP   PHILADELPHIA.  407 

Macrostylocrinus  Hall. 

M.  fasciatus  Hall,  syn.  of  Macrostylocr,  Meekii. 

Mariaorians  Hall  (partly  syn.  of  Melocrinus. 

M.  macropetalus  Hall  (compare  with  Corymbocrinus). 
M.  nobilissimus  Hall,  see  Melocr.  nobilissimus. 
M.  pachydactylus  Hall,  see  Melocr.  pachydactylus. 
M.  paucidactylus  Hall,  see  Melocr.  paucidactylus. 
M.  penniger  Salter  (MS.).     No  description  published. 
M.  stoloniferus  Hall.     Described  from  columns. 

Marsupiocrinus  Phillips. 

M.  dactylus  Hall,  see  Lyriocr.  dactylus. 

M.  dubius  Angelin.     Evidently  an  Actinocrinoid. 

Medusacrinus  Austin.     Not  defined. 
Megistocrinus  Owen  and  Shumard  (not  Angelin). 

M.  infelix  Winchell  and  Marcy,  see  Periechocr.  Christyi  (Hall). 

M.  Marcouanus  Winch,  and  Marcy,  see  Periechocr.  Christyi  (Hall). 

M.  necis  Winch,  and  Marcy.     Described  from  casts. 

M.  parvirostris  Meek  and  Worth.,  see  Megistocr.  Evansii. 

M.  plenus  White,  syn.  of  Megistocr.  Evansii. 

31.  Whitei  Hall,  see  Periechocr.  Whitei. 

Melocrinus  Goldfuss. 

M.  amphora  Goldfuss,  syn.  of  Amphoracr.  Gilbertsoni. 

M.  sculptus  Hall.     Described  from  basal  plates. 

M.  angustus  Angelin,  see  Mariacr.  angustus. 

M.  obconicus  Hall,  see  Mariacr.  obconicus. 

M.  kevis  Goldf.  (not  Roemer),  syn.  of  Melocr.  gibbosus. 

M.fornicatus  Goldf.,  syn.  of  Melocr.  pyramidalis. 

Ophiocrinus  Angelin.    Preoccupied  by  Salter,  1852,  and  Semper,  1868. 
Fentagonites  Rafinesque.     Described  from  detached  plates. 
Feriechocrinus  Austin. 

P.  anulatus  Angelin.     Described  from  detached  plates. 

P.  costatus  Austin,  syn.  of  Periechocr.  moniliformis, 

P.  geometricus  Angelin.     Detached  plates. 

P.  globosus  Austin.     Not  defined. 

P.  grandiscutatus  Angelin.     Detached  plates. 

P.  Ixvis  Angelin  (not  Portlock),  see  Periechocr.  minor  W.  and  Spr. 

P.  multicostatus  Angelin.     Detached  plates. 

P.  undulatus  Angelin.     Detached  plates. 

Fhillipsocrinus  McCoy,  see  Melocrinus  and  Actinocrinus. 

P.  caryocrinoides  McCoy.     Probably  a  malformed  Actinocrinus. 


408  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

Fhoenioocrinus  Austin,  syn.  of  Carpocrinus  Miiller. 
P.  simplex  Phillips  (Austin),  see  Carpocr.  simplex. 

Fionocrinus  Angelin,  syn.  of  Carpocrinus  Miiller. 
/'.  ajjinis  Angelin,  see  Carpocr.  affinis. 
P.  elegantulus  Angelin,  see  Carpocr.  elegantulus. 
P.  farctus  Angelin,  see  Carpocr.  farctus. 
P.  pulchellus  Angelin,  see  Carpocr.  pulchellus. 
P.  simplex  Phillips  (Angel.),  see  Carpocr,  simplex. 

Platycrinus  Miller. 

P.  anaglypticus  Goldfuss,  see  Ilexacr.  anaglypticus. 

P.  alutaceus  Goldf.  syn.  of  Symbathocr.  alutaceus. 

P.  anndixoni  Troost.     Not  defined. 

P.  annulatus  Goldf.,  syn.  of  Ilexacr.  anaglypticus. 

P.  antheliontes  Austin,  syn.  of  Platycr.  pileatus. 

P.  armatus  Miinster.     (We  have  not  seen  the  description.) 

P.  asper  Goldf.  (not  Meek  and  Worth.),  Storthingocr.  fritillits, 

P.  brevis  Goldf.,  see  Hexacr.  brevis. 

P.  Buchii  Roemer,  see  Hexacr.  Buchii  (?). 

P.  clytis  Hall,  syn.  of  Platycr.  scobina  Meek  and  Worth. 

P.  compressus  Eichwald.     Pieces  of  column. 

P.  decagonus  Goldf.,  see  Storthing ocrinus. 

P.  decoratus  F.  A.  Roemer  (?). 

P.  depressus  Aust.  (not  Owen  and  Shum.,  nor  Sandberger),  syn.  of  Ilexacr. 

inter  scapularis. 
P.  depressus  Goldf,  syn.  of  Ilexacr.  interscapularis  Schultze  (?  W.  and  S.). 
P.  depressus  Owen.     Not  defined. 
P.  echinatus  Sandberger,  syn.  of  Ilexacr.  ornatus. 
P.  ellipticus  Austin  (not  Phill.).     Not  defined. 
P.  elongatus  Goldf.,  see  Hexacr  inns  elongatus. 
P.  elongatus  Phillips,  see  Dichocr.  elongatus. 
P.  excavatus  Hall,  syn.  of  Platycr.  discoideus. 
P.  exsculptus  Goldf.,  see  Hexacr.  exsculptus. 
P.  exsertus  Hall,  syn.  of  Platycr.  lurlingtonensis. 
P.  frondosus  Goldf.,  syn.  of  Hexacr.  anaglypticus. 
P.  granifer  Roemer,  syn.  of  Hexacr.  interscapularis. 
P.  granuliferus  A.  Roemer,  see  Hexacr.  granuliferus. 
P.  Goldfussi  Miinster,  syn.  of  Hexacr.  elongatus. 
P.  Huntsvillse  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 
P.  insculptus  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 
P.  insularis  Eichwald,  perhaps  Ilexacr inus  (?), 
P.  inornatus  McChesney,  syn.  of  Platycr.  burlingtonensis. 
P.  interscapularis  Phill.  (not  Miller),  Ilexacr.  interscapularis. 
P.  Isevigatus  Goldfuss,  syn.  of  Ilexacr.  anaglypticus. 
P.  Lese  Lyon,  see  Hexacr.  Lese. 
P.  melo  Austin,  syn.  of  Hexacr.  interscapularis. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  409 

P.  Milleri  McCoy  (Pictet),  Cyathocrinus  {?). 

P.  minutus  Schnurr,  syn.  of  Storthingocr.  fritillus. 

P.  multibrachiatus  Meek  and  Worth.,  syn.  of  Platycr.  discoideus. 

P.  muricatus  Goldf.,  syn.  of  Hexacr.  anaglypticus. 

P.  nodulosus  Qoldf.  (not  Hall),  see  Symbathocr.  nodulosus. 

P.  nodobrachiatus  Hall  (1861,  not  1858),  see  PL  perasper. 

P.  nodosus  Wirtgen  and  Zeiler,  see  Culicocr.  nodosus. 

P.  olla  Hall  (not  de  Kon.),  syn.  of  PL  Halli  Shum. 

P.  ornatus  Goldf.  (not  McCoy),  see  Hexacr.  ornatus. 

P.  Oweni  Meek  and  Worth.,  syn.  of  Platycr.  regalis  Hall. 

P.  parous  Hall,  see  Cordylocr.  parvus. 

P.  pentangularis  Miller.     A  Blastoid. 

P.  Pkillipsii  d'Orbigny,  syn.  of  Hexacr.  macrotaius. 

P.  planus  Owen  (not  Owen  and  Shum).     Not  defined. 

P.  plumosus  Hall,  see  Cordylocr.  plumosus. 

P.  polydactylus  Troost.     Catalogue  name. 

P.  punctobrachiaius  Hall  (probably  not  Platycrinus). 

P.  pusillus  Goldf.,  syn.  of  Storthingocr.  fritillus. 

P.  ramulosus  Hall,  see  Cordylocr.  ramulosus. 

P.  retiarius  Phillips.     (We  found  no  description). 

P.  rosaceus  Roemer,  see  Coccocr.  rosaceus. 

P.  rosaceus  Goldf.,  syn.  of  Hexacr.  callosus. 

P.  rugosus  Goldf.  (not  Miller),  Storthingocr.  fritillus. 

P.  scaber  Goldf.,  Storthingocr.  fritillus. 

P.  scobiculaia-lmediixxs  Goldf.,  Storthingocrinus. 

P.  stellaris  Roemer,  see  Hexacr.  stellaris.  • 

P.  striobrachiatus  Hall,  syn.  of  Platycr.  corrugatus. 

P.  tabulaius  Goldf.,  Symbathocr.  tabulatus. 

P.  Tennesseemis  F.  Roemer,  Marsupiocr.  Tennesseensis. 

P.  tentaculatus  Hall,  see  Marsupiocr,  tentaculatus. 

P.  triacontadactylus,  syn.  of  PL  trigintidactylut. 

P.  truncatus  Hall,  syn.  of  Platycr.  americanus. 

P.  ventricosus  Goldf.,  see  Hexacr.  ventricosus. 

P.  verrucosus  White,  syn.  of  Platycr.  pocilliformis, 

Pleurocrinus  Austin,  see  Platycrinus. 

Pomatocrinus  Koenig,  MS.,  not  published. 

Pradocrinus  de  Verneuil,  syn.  of  Periechocrinus. 
P.  Baylii  de  Verneuil,  see  Periechocr.  Baylii. 

Pterotocrinus  Lyon  and  Casseday. 

P.  rugosus  Lyon  and  Cass.     Not  sufficiently  defined. 

Pyxidocrinus  MUUer  (see  our  remarks  on  Actinocrinidce). 
P.  pruiniensis  Miiller,  see  Dorycr.  prumiensis. 


410  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

Khodocrinus  Miller. 

R.  asperatus  Billings.     Not  suflSciently  known. 

R.  Barrisi  (var.),  divergens  Hall,  syn.  of  Rh.  Barrisi. 

R.  bursa  Phillips  (Austin).     See  Ollacr.  bursa. 

R.  calcaratus  Phillips  (Austin),  see  Ollacr.  calcaratus. 

R.  canaliculatus  Goldf.     Detached  columns. 

R.  costatus  Austin.     Not  sufficiently  defined. 

R.  crenatus  Goldf.,  see  Rhipidocr.  crenatus.  • 

R.  tchinatus  Schlottheim,     Detached  columns. 

R.  gigas  Billings.     Detached  columns. 

R.  granulatus  Austin.     Not  sufficiently  defined, 

R.  gyratus  Goldf.     Detached  columns. 

R.  melissa  Hall,  see  Lyriocr.  melissa. 

R.  mammillaris  Phill.  (Austin),  Ollacr.  mammillaris. 

R.  microbasilis  Billings,  see  Archseocr.  microbasilis. 

R.  mutabilis  Austin.     Not  defined. 

R.  pyriformis  Billings,  see  Archseocr.  pyriformis. 

R.  quinquangularis  Miller.     Detached  columns. 

R.  quinquelobus  Schultze,  see  Eucrinus  quinquelobus. 

R.  quinquepartitus  Goldf.     Detached  columns. 

R.  rectus  Hall,     (Probably  a  Cystidean.) 

R.  simplex  Portlock  (?). 

R.  tessellatus  Steininger,  syn.  of  Rhipidocr.  crenatus. 

R,  iortuosus  Roemer.     Detached  columns. 

Saccoorinas  Hall,  syn.  of  Periechocrinus. 
S.  Christyi  Hall,  see  Periechocr,  Christyi. 
S.  semiradiatus  Hall.     Described  from  a  cast, 
S.  speciosus  Hall,  see  Periechocr.  speciosus. 
S.  tennesseensis  Troost,     Not  defined. 
S.  Whitfieldi  Hall,  syn,  of  Periechocr.  Christyi. 

Sagenocrinus  Austin. 

S.  giganteus  Austin.     Not  sufficiently  defined, 

Schizocrinus  Hall,  see  "  doubtful  genera." 

Scyphocrinus  Hall  (not  Zenker).     Ibid, 

Sphaerocrinus  Meek  and  Worth,  (not  Roemer),  see  Dorycrimis. 
S.  concavus  Meek  and  Worth.,  see  Dorycr.  concavus. 

Sphenocrinus  Eichwald.     Described  from  pieces  of  column. 

Strotocrinus  Meek  and  Worthen. 

(S.  asperrimus  Meek  and  Worth.,  see  Actinocr.  asperrimus. 
S.  segilops  Hall  (M.  and  W.),  see  Teleiocr.  segilops. 
S.  althea  Hall  (M.  and  W.),  see  Teleiocr.  althea. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP  PHILADELPHIA.  411 

S.  bloomfieldensis  S.  A.  Miller,  syn.  of  Strotocr.  regalis. 

S.  ectypus  Meek  and  Worthen,  see  Actinocr.  ectypus. 

S.  erodus  Hall,  see  Teleiocr.  erodus. 

S.  insculptvs  Hall  (M.  VV.),  see  Teleiocr.  insculptus. 

S.  liratus  Hall  (M.  and  W.),  see  Teleiocr,  liratus. 

S.  rudis  Hall  (M.  &  W.),  see  Teleiocr.  rudis, 

S.  S2ibumbrosus  Hall  (M.  and  W.),  syn.  of  Teleiocr.  liratus. 

S.  umbrosus  Hall  (M.  and  W.),  see  Teleiocr.  umbrosus. 

Syringoorinus  Billings.     Imperfectly  known. 

<S'.  paradoxus  Billings.     Parts  of  the  arms  (?), 

Tazocrinus  simplex  PMll.  (Austin),  see  Carpocr.  simplet. 

Technoorinus  Hall. 

T.  sculptus  Hall.     Described  from  basal  plates. 
T.  striatus  Hall.     Described  from  basal  plates. 

Tetramerocrinites  Austin.     Insufficiently  and  evidently  incorrectly  defined. 
T.  formosus  Austin.     Undeterminable. 

Trematoorinns  Hall. 

T.  fiscellus  Meek  and  Worth.,  see  Ollacr.  fiscellui. 

T.  papillatus  Hall,  see  Ollacr.  tuberculosus. 

T.  reticulatus  Hall,  see  Ollacr.  reticulatus. 

T.  robustus  Hall,  see  Ollacr.  robuatus. 

T.  spinigerus  Hall,  see  Ollacr.  spinigerus. 

T.  tuberculosus  Hall,  see  Ollacr.  tuberculosus. 

T.  typus  Hall,  see  Ollacr.  typus. 

Triplaricrinites  Goldf.     A  catalogue  name. 

Trochicrinites  Pander,  syn.  of  Periechocrinus. 

T.  gotlandicus  Pander,  see  Periechocr.  gotlandicut. 

Trybliocrinus  Geinitz  {?). 

Thysanocrinus  Hall,  syn.  of  Dimerocrinus. 

T.  aculeaius  Hall.     Described  from  fragmentary  arms. 

T.  canaliculatus  Hall.     Arm  fragments. 

T.  microbasilis  Billings,  see  Archseocr.  microbasilis. 

T.  immaturus  Hall,  see  Dimerocr.  immaturus. 

T.  Uliiformis  Hall,  see  Dimerocr.  liliiformis. 

T.  microbasilis  Billings,  see  Archseocr.  microbasilis. 

T.  pyriformis  Billings,  see  Archseocr.  pyriformis, 

Turbinocrinus  Troost.     Not  defined. 


412  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

EXPLANATION  OF  THE  PLATES. 

The  folloioing  letters  denote  the  same  parts  throughout  all  the  plates. 

u  =  underbasals. 

b  ^=  basals. 

r  =  radials  (r'  primary  radials,  r'  secondary  radials,  etc.). 

i  ^=  interradials. 

d  =:  interaxillary  plates. 
cd  =  central  dome  plate. 
pd  =  proximal  dome  plates. 

rd  =  radial  dome  plates  [rd-  =  secondary  radial  dome  plates). 
id  =  interradial  dome  plates. 
dd  =  interbracliial  dome  plates. 

a  —  arm  plates. 
fa  =  fixed  arm  plates. 
fp  ^=  fixed  pinnules. 

X  =  anal  plates. 
xd  =  anal  dome  plates. 

A  ^=  arms. 
AO  =:  arm  openings. 
FB  =  free  rays. 
lA  =  interradial  appendages. 
EP  =  respiratory  pores. 

H  =  hydrospires. 
AT  =  ambulacral  tubes  beneath  the  vault. 

G  =  galleries  beneath  the  vault. 

/=  interpalmar  spaces. 

X  —  anus. 

C  —  column. 

EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  17. 

Fig.  1,  Platycrinus  regalis  Hall.     The  plates  in  calyx  and  vault. 
Fig.  2.   Ollacrinus  tuberculosus  Hall.     The  plates  in  the  calyx,  and  those 
of  the  interradial  appendages  and  arms. 

EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  18. 

Fig.  1.  Extended  rim  of  Strotocrinus  regalis  (dorsal  side).  All  plates 
below  the  secondary  radials  broken  away,  exposing  to  view  the  inner 
floor  of  the  vault.  (This  figure  in  connection  with  figs.  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7, 
is  designed  to  illustrate  the  character  of  a  continuous  rim  and  of  free 
rays  as  extensions  of  the  body,  their  relations  to  the  arms,  and  the 
derivation  of  the  arms  fi'om  pinnules.) 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  413 

Fig.  2.  Strotocrimis  subumbrosus  Hall.  Half  of  one  ray,  showing  the 
mode  of  branching.  The  medium  lines  indicate  the  course  of  the 
radial  ridges  at  the  surface  of  the  plates. 

Fig.  3.  Steganocrinus  sculptus  Hall.   Showing  the  free  rays  and  the  lateral 

arms. 
Fig.  4.  Side  view  of    a  portion   of   a  free  ray  in  Steganocr.    sculptus, 

showing  the  ventral  covering,  and  the  position  of  arm  openings  and 

respiratory  pores. 

Fig.  5.  Transverse  section  of  the  same,  showing  the  form  of  the  inner 
passage. 

Fig.  6.  Reteocrinus  Bichardsoni  "Wetherby.  A  part  of  one  of  the  rays 
within  the  calyx,  showing  the  fixation  of  pinnules  by  means  of  inter- 
calated plates. 

Fig.  7.  Eucladocrinus  millebrachiatus  W.  and  Sp.  Ventral  side  of  body, 
with  free  rays  and  lateral  arms. 

Fig.  8.  Showing  the  position  of  the  apical  dome  plates  in  Batocrinus 
pyriformis,  a  species  with  a  large,  almost  central  anal  tube. 

Fig.  9.  Arrangement  of  plates  in  the  dome  of  Agaricocrinui. 

Fig.  10.  Apical  dome  plates  of  Steganocrinus  sculptus. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  19. 

Fig.  1.  Vault  of  Ollacrinus  tuberosus  L.  and  C,  showing  the  five  de- 
pressed, oval-shaped  groups  of  small  plates  opposite  the  interradial 
appendages. 

Fig.  2.  Batocrinus  discoideus,  showing  the  plates  in  the  calyx.  The 
adjoining  plates  of  the  dome  added  to  show  the  exact  position  of  ann 
openings  and  respiratory  pores.  (The  pores  are  not  visible  where  the 
arms  are  attached,  but  here  figured  to  point  out  their  position.) 

Fig.  3.  Ventral  covering  of  Oranatocrinus  Sayi,  showing  the  apical  and 
other  dome  plates,  also  the  extension  of  this  covering  over  the  ambu- 
lacral  furrows.  (O  =  so-called  ovarian  openings,  f  =  forked  plate, 
d  =  deltoid  pieces. ) 

Fig.  4.  Batocrinus  discoideus  Hall.  Horizontal  section  through  the  arm 
openings  and  respiratory  pores,  exposing  their  passages  through  the 
test. 

Fig.  5.  Natural  cast  of  Physetocrinus  ventrieosus,  showing  the  position  of 
certain  poi-es  or  pits  upon  the  inner  floor  of  the  vault,  represented  in 
the  cast  as  small  cones. 

Fig.  6.  Cross-section  at  midway  of  Oranatocrinus  Norwoodi  Shumard. 
Showing  the  hydrospires.  [l  =  lancet  piece  ;  AQ  ^  ambulacral  and 
food  passage.) 


414  PROCEEDINGS  OP   THE   ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

Fig.  7.  Teleiocrinus  with  traces  of  hydrospires,  fig.  a,  portions  of  two 
pairs  of  ambulacral  tubes  within  the  radiating  tunnels  beneath  the 
vault,  exposing  the  upper  or  ventral  side.  Fig.  b,  transverse  section 
of  the  same,  indicating  two  compartments  along  the  tunnels,  separated 
by  partition  (pj,  the  upper  containing  the  ambulacral  tubes,  the 
lower  the  hydrospires.     (Compare  with  fig.  8. ) 

Fig.  8.  A  pair  of  ambulacral  tubes  in  Actinocrinus  glans  Hall,  as  seen 
from  the  inner  side.  Their  exit  into  the  arm  passages  concealed  by  a 
delicate  partition  (p),  partly  surrounding  the  tubes,  and  separating 
them  from  the  hydrospires  ;  the  partition  being  evidently  a  continua- 
tion of  the  delicate  network  which  lines  the  inner  floor  of  the  vault. 
The  hydrospires  are  not  preserved,  but  they  probably  rested,  as  in  fig. 
7,  beneath  the  ambulacral  tubes.  AO  represents  the  arm  openings 
seen  from  the  inner  side  of  the  body. 

Fig.  9.  Internal  cast  of  the  vault  and  free  rays  in  Actinocrinus  muUira- 
diatus.  The  ridges  radiating  to  the  rays  represent  furrows  at  the 
inner  floor  of  the  test. 

Fig.  10.  Oesophageal  network  of  Eretmocrinus  Verneuilianus  Shum. 

Fig.  11.  The  same  organ  in  Teleiocrinus  rudis  Hall. 

Fig,  12.  The  same  in  Batocrinus,  one  convolution  partly  removed. 

Fig.  13.  The  same  in  a  different  species  of  Batocrinus. 

Fig.  14.  A  part  of  the  same  organ  in  OUacrinus  tuberosum. 

Fig.  15.  A  portion  of  the  network  magnified.  (From  a  specimen  of 
Actinocrinus  glans.) 

Fig.  16.  Batocrinus  longirostris  Hall.  The  test  partly  removed,  exposing 
to  view  the  intervisceral  plexus. 

Fig.  17.  The  oesophageal  network  seen  from  the  base. 


1881.]  natural  sciences  op  philadelphia.  415 

August  2. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Eight  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  Remarks  on  the  Mollnscan  Genera  Hippagus, 
Verticordia  and  Pecchiola,"  by  Angelo  Heilprin,  was  presented 
for  publication. 


August  9. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Eleven  persons  present. 


August  16. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Nine  persons  present. 


August  23. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Nine  jDersons  present. 
The  death  of  Mr.  John  Welsh,  Jr.,  a  member,  was  announced. 


August  30. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Eight  persons  present. 
The  death  of  Mr.  Robert  Kilvington,  a  member,  was  announced. 

The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


28 


416  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [18«1. 


A  REVISION  OF  THE  CIS-MISSISSIPPI  TERTIARY   PECTENS   OF  THE 
UNITED  STATES. 

BY   ANGELO   HEILPRIN. 

In  the  accompanying  notes  the  author  has  attempted  to  give  a 
complete  list  of  all  the  Pectens  thus  far  described  from  the  tertiary 
deposits  of  the  United  States  east  of  the  Mississippi  River, 
indicating,  as  far  as  possible,  their  range  in  time  and  their 
geographical  distribution.  The  rather  hap-hazard  method  in  which 
the  tertiary  palaeontology  of  a  great  portion  of  the  United  States 
has  thus  far  been  treated  has  rendered  the  statement  of  this  last 
a  matter  of  great  difficulty,  and  doubtless  the  range,  both  in  time 
and  space,  of  many  of  the  species  herein  enumerated,  will  require 
emendation  when  more  accurate  data  will  have  been  brought 
directly  from  the  field  itself. 

The  titles  of  the  various  works  quoted  are  indicated  by  the 
following  abbreviations : — 

J.  A.  N.  S.  Journal  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Phila. 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.      Proceedings  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences. 

A.  J.  Science.        American  Joui-nal  of  Science  and  Arts. 

A.  J.  Conchol.       American  Journal  of  Conchology. 

Mioc.  Foss.  Conrad's  "Fossils  of  the  Medial  Tertiary  of  the  United 

States." 
Syn.  Org.  Rem.     Morton's    "  Synopsis  of  the  Organic  Remains  of  the 

Cretaceous  Group." 
Plioc.  Foss.  "  Pleiocene  Fossils  of  South  Carolina,"  by  Tuomey  and 

Holmes. 

The  generic  names  placed  in  parentheses  indicate  the  names 

under  which  the  given  species  apper  in  the  "  Smithsonian  Check 

Lists  "  of  1864  and  1866. 

Eocene. 
P.  anisopleura  Conr.  N.  Car. 

Kerr,  "Geol.  Survey  of  North  Carolina,"  1875,  Appendix,  p.  18. 

P.  calvatus  Mort.  (Camptonectes)  S.  Car. 

Syn.  Org.  Remains,  p.  58  (Jacksonian) . 

P.  Carolinensis  Conr.  N.  Car. 

Kerr,  "Geol.  Survey  of  North  Carolina,"  1875,  Appendix,  p.  18. 

T  P.  Claibornensis  Conr.  (Camptonectes).  Ala. 

Smithsonian  Check  List,  1866. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  417 

I  have  been  unable  to  discover  the  description  of  this  species. 
A  specimen  with  this  name  in  the  Academy's  collection,  and 
marked  in  Conrad's  handwriting,  scarcely  admits  of  positive 
specific  determination.  It  has  been  considerably  eroded,  and 
appears  as  though  it  may  have  been  either  closely  related  to,  or 
identical  with  P.  calvatus  (Mort.). 

P.  Deshayesii  Lea.  Ala. 

"  Contributions  to  Geology,"  p.  87. 
P.  Lyelli  Lea.     "Contr.  to  Geol.,"  p.  88     (young). 

Both  of  Lea's  figured  specimens  are  in  the  Academj^'s  collection, 
and  show  beyond  doubt  that  the}'  belong  to  one  and  the  same 
species,  what  there  is  of  P.  Lyelli  corresponding  precisely  to  the 
earlier  formed  portion  of  P.  Deshayesii.  This  last  must  be  care- 
fully distinguished  from  the  P.  Deshayesii  of  Nj'st  ("  Coqu.  eP 
Polyp.  Foss.,^^  p,  288),  which  was  founded  on  the  erroneous; 
supposition  that  Lea's  species  was  only  a  variety  of  P.  opercic- 
laris,  Lam. ;  a  new  specific  name  should  therefore  be  given  to  the 
Belgian  Pecten. 

P.  elixatus  Conr.  ( Janira),  Jacksonian  ?  S.  Car. 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  ii,  p.  174. 

P.  Knieskerni  Conr.  N.  J. 

A.  J.  Conchol.,  V,  p.  40  (described  from  a  cast). 

P.  membranosus  Mort.    Jachsonian.  Ala. ;  S>  Car..;  N.  Car» 

Syn.  Org.  Kem.,  p.  59. 

P.  nuperus  Conr.    Jacksonian.  Miss. 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  vii,  p.  259. 

P.  scintillatiis  Conr.  (Camptonectes).  Miss. 

A.  J.  Conchol.,  1,  p.  140,  as  Eburneopecten , 

Oligocene. 
p.  anatipes  Mort.  Ala. 

Syn.  Org.  Rem.,  p.  58. 

P.  perplai  us  Mort.  Ala. ;  Miss. 

Syn.  Org.  Rem.,  p.  58. 
P.  Spillmani  Gabb.    J.  A.N.  S.,  2d  series,,  iv,  p.  402. 

The  original  specimen  of  P.  Spillmani  in  the  Academy's  collec- 
tion agrees  thoroughly  with  P.  perplanuSy  and  is  marked  as  its 
equivalent  in  Gabb's  handwriting.. 

P.  Poulsoni  Mort.  (Janira).  Ala.;  Miss. 

Syn.  Org.  Rem.,  p.  59. 


418  proceedings  of  the  academy  of  [1881. 

Miocene. 
P.  biformis  Conr.  Va. 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  i,  p.  306.     Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  73. 

This  species  appears  at  first  sight  to  be  closely  related  to  the 
P.  Danicus  of  Chemnitz,  from  which,  however,  it  can  be  readily 
distinguished  by  the  profound  notch  under  the  ear  of  the  right 
valve,  the  greater  concavit}^  of  the  opercular  valve,  and  the  more 
prominent  and  irregular  lines  on  the  inferior  moiety  of  the  ribs  of 
the  convex  valve. 

P,  oerinus  Conr.  Md. 

A.  J.  Conchol.,  V,  p.  39. 
P.  comparilis  Tuomey  and  Holmes.  Va. ;  N.  Car. 

Plioc.  Foss.,  p.  29. 

P.  eboreus  Conr.  (in  part). 

=  Specimen  marked  by  Conrad  as  P.  Yorkensis. 

P.  mkropleura  (young)  H,   C.   Lea.     Ti-ansactions  Am.  Philosoph. 
Society,  ix,  p.  245. 

The  specimens  which  constitute  the  P.  comjmrilis  of  Tuomey 
and  Holmes  were  included  by  Conrad  in  his  P.  eboreus,  but  the 
two  can  be  readily  distinguished  from  each  other  in  the  character 
of  the  ribs,  which  in  P.  comparilis  are  considerably  more  elevated, 
and  much  more  distinctly  marked  off  from  the  general  surface  of 
the  valve.  I  have  retained  as  the  type  of  Conrad's  P.  ehoreus  the 
forms  agreeing  with  the  figure  in  tlie  "  Fossils  of  the  Medial 
Tertiary  of  the  United  States."  The  P.  comjmrilis  bears  in  many 
respects  a  close  resemblance  to  P.  purpuratus  Lam.,  from  the 
coast  of  Peru,  but  it  may  be  easily  distinguished  by  the  ribs  in 
the  interior  faces  of  the  valves  passing  prominently  to  the  umbonal 
region,  wliereas  in  P.  purpuratus  they  become  indistinct  a  short 
distance  from  the  margin,  and  appear,  moreover,  much  broader. 
P.  comparilis  is,  again,  less  ventricose  on  the  umbonal  region,  but 
more  convex  toward  the  basal  margin.  The  intermediate  scaly 
rib  between  the  principal  ones  present  in  P.  purpuratus  is  wanting 
in  P.  comparilis.  The  ears  are  in  P.  comparilis  less  prominently 
marked  by  the  radiating  lines. 

P.  decemnarius  Conr.  Va. 

J.  A.  N.  S.,  vii,  p.  151.     Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  49. 
P.  dispalatus  Conr.  Va. 

Mioc.  Foss.,  74. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA,  419 

P.  eboreus  Conr.  Va. ;  N.  Gar. 

A.  J.  Science,  xxiii,  p,  341.     Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  48. 
P.  EolbrooM  Rav.     Proc.  A.  K  S.,  ii,  p.  96. 

Two.  species  were  included  by  Conrad  under  this  name,  the 
second  being  the  one  subsequently  described  by  Tuomey  and 
Holmes  as  P.  comparilis. 

P.  Edgecombensis  Conr.  N.  Car. 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  1862,  p.  291.     Not  figured. 

The  species  is  described  from  a  specimen  in  the  Smithsonian 
Institution  which  I  have  not  had  an  opportunity  to  examine. 

P.  fraternus  Cunr.  Va. 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  1862,  p.  291. 
f  P.  tricarinatus  Cour.     A.  J.  Conchol.,  ill,  p.  189. 

I  have  not  seen  a  specimen  of  P.  fraternus,  but  its  specific 
description  accords  well  with  the  specimen  marked  in  Conrad's 
handwriting  P.  tricarinatus,  which  I  have  good  reason  to  believe 
is  the  very  specimen  from  which  the  description  of  P.  fraternus 
has  been  taken. 

P.  Humphrpysii  Conr.  [OUgocene  ?).  Md. ;  N.J. 

Proceedings  of  the  National  Institution,  p.  194. 

The  convex  valve  of  the  average  specimens  of  this  species  very 
closely  approximates  the  recent  P.  laqueatus  of  Sowerb}'^ 
("  Thesaurus  Conchyliorum,"  i,  p.  46),  from  the  northwest  coast 
of  America,  both  in  outline  and  ornamentation,  but  differs  in  the 
lesser  number  (only  six  instead  of  eight),  lesser  prominence,  and 
greater  irregularity  of  the  ribs,  which  also  spread  out  broader 
towards  the  basal  margin.  The  valve  is,  moreover,  considerably 
less  ventricose  than  in  P.  laqueatus.  I  have  been  unable  to  make 
an}^  comparisons  between  the  opercular  valves. 

P.  Jeffersonius  Say.  Md. ;  N.  Car. ;  Va. 

J.  A.  N.  S.,  iv,  p.  133.     Conrad,  Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  46. 

P.  Madisonius  Say.  Md. ;  N.  Car. ;  Va. 

J.  A.  N.  S.,  iv,  p.  134.     Conrad,  Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  48. 

P.  Magellanicus  Gmelin.  Md. ;  N.  Car.;  Va. 

Syst.  Nat.,  3817. 

P.   CUntonius  Say.     J.  A.  N.  S.,  iv,  p.  135. 
P.  princepoides  Emmons.     N.  Car.  Geol.  Surv.,  1858,  p.  280. 

I  have  compared  both  young  and  old  specimens  of  the  P.  CUn- 
tonius with  those  of  P.  Magellanicus,  and  have  no  hesitation  in 


420  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

stating  that  they  all  belong  to  but  one  species.  Some  of  the 
fossil  specimens  do  not  differ  nearl}^  as  much  from  tlie  recent  one 
as  the  individual  specimens  of  the  latter  do  among  themselves. 
The  statement  of  Say  that  the  sides  of  the  shell  (/'*.  Glintonius) 
below  the  auricles  slope  much  more  rapidly  downwards  than  in 
G.  Magellanicus  is  erroneous ;  nor  is  there  any  appreciable  differ- 
ence in  the  character  of  the  radiating  striae. 

P.  Peedeensis  Tuomey  and  Holmes.  N.  Car. 

Plioc.  Foss.,  p.  30.     (See  P.  Peedeensis  under  Pliocene). 

The  only  authority  I  have  (in  addition  to  the  statement  of 
Emmons)  for  stating  that  this  species  is  found  in  the  Miocene 
deposits  of  North  Carolina  rests  on  an  examination  of  one  solitary 
valve  of  a  specimen  marked  by  Conrad  P.  (Liropecten)  Garolin- 
fnsis  (described  in  Kerr's  Geol.  Rep.  of  North  Carolina,  Appendix, 
p.  18),  which,  as  far  as  I  have  been  able  to  determine,  does  not 
differ  essentially  from  the  P.  Peedeensis  of  Tuomey  and  Holmes. 
The  specific  name,  Garolinensis,  is  preoccupied  by  an  Eocene 
species. 

P.  Rogers!  Conr.  Va, 

J.  A.N.  S.,  vii,  p.  151.     Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  45. 

P.  septemnarius  Say.  Md. ;  Va. 

J.  A.  N.  S,,  iv,  p.  136.    Conr.,  Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  47. 

I  am  inclined  to  believe  that  this  species  will  be  found  to  be  a 
mere  variety  of  P.  Jeffersonius  Say ;  want  of  a  sufficient  num- 
ber of  specimens  with  which  to  make  the  comparison  has  pre- 
vented me  from  making  a  positive  determination. 

?P.  tricarinatus  Conr.  Va. 

A.  J.  Conchol.,  iii,  p.  189. 
=  P.  fraternus  ?  Conr.     (See  P.  fratei'nus.) 

P.  trioenarius  Conr.  Va. 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  1,  p.  306.     Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  74. 

P.  vicenarius  Conr.  N.  Car. 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  i,  p.  306. 

Closely  related  to  P.  comparilis  T.  &  H. 

P.  Virginianus  Conr.  Va. 

Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  46. 
P.  tenuis  H.C.  Lea.     Trans.  Am.  Philos.  Soc,  ix,  p.  246. 

Mr.  Searles  Wood  ("  British  Crag  Mollusca,''  Bivalves,  p.  25. 
Palseont.  Soc.   Reports,   1856),   states  that   this  shell   somewhat 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA.  421 

resembles  the  P.  Gerardii  of  Nyst,  found  in  the  Coralline  Crag 
of  England,  but  that  it  differs  among  other  characters  in  being 
broader  than  high,  and  in  having  the  auricles  more  developed.  I 
have  compared  Conrad's  specimens  with  Wood's  figure,  and  find 
the  statement  concerning  the  ears  to  be  correct ;  the  relative 
dimensions  of  the  shell  are,  however,  not  constant. 

Pliocene. 

I  have  adopted  Tuomey's  determination  of  the  South  Carolina  post- 
Eocene  deposits,  there  being  as  yet  not  sufficient  evidence  to  prove  that 
they  are  of  Miocene  age,  as  insisted  upon  by  Conrad. 

P.  affinis  Tuomey  and  Holmes.  S.  Car. 

Plioc.  Foss.,  p.  26. 

I  have  seen  no  specimens  of  this  species. 

P.  comparilis  Tuomey  and  Holmes.  S.  Car. 

Plioc.  Foss.,  p.  29. 

P.  eboreus  Conr.  S.  Car. 

Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  48. 
Tuomey  and  Holmes,  Plioc.  Foss.,  p.  28. 

P.  hemicyclus  (Rav.  ?)  Tuomey  and  Holmes.  S.  Car. 

Plioc.  Foss.,  p.  25  (name  quoted  from  Ravenel). 

The  opercular  valve  of  this  species  is  of  the  exact  outline,  and 
very  much  the  appearance  of  the  similar  valve  of  P.  excavafus 
Sowerby  (:=  P.  Sinensis?),  but  is  considerably  less  concave.  It 
is  of  the  shape  and  concavity  of  P.  Jacobaeus,  but  with  more 
numerous  ribs.  The  right  valve  is  less  convex  than  in  P.  excava- 
tus,  and  wanting  on  its  ribs  the  prominent  lines  found  in  P. 
Jacobaeus. 

P.  Marylandicus  Wagner.  N.  Car. 

J.  A.  N.  S.,  viii,  p.  51,  PI.  1,  fig.  2  (very  poorly  figured). 

Described  from  the  Pliocene  of  North  Carolina,  but  more 
probably  Miocene. 

This  species  very  closely  resembles  in  form,  texture  and  orna- 
mentation P.  Islandicus  Miill.,  but  is  less  prominently  ribbed, 
especially  on  the  ears  (where  the  ribs  are  also  more  numerous). 

P.  Mortoni  Ravenel  (Amussium).  S.  Car. 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  ii,  p.  96. 

This  species  differs  from  the  P.  Japonicus  Gmel.,  in  its  larger 
size,  thinner  texture,  and  in  having  the  internal  ribs  arranged  in 


422  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

a  series  of  much  narrower  pairs,  i.  e.,  the  two  ribs  of  each  pair 
arc  set  closer  to  each  other,  and  the  intervening  spaces  between 
the  individual  pairs  is  very  much  greater.  The  supposed  distinc- 
tion pointed  out  by  Tuomey  and  Holmes  that  the  number  of  ribs 
in  P.  llortoni  is  less  than  in  P.  Japonicus — namely,  forty,  whereas 
in  the  latter,  it  is  forty -six — does  not  hold,  since  the  number  in 
P.  Japonicus  is  very  variable  even  in  the  valves  of  the  same  indi- 
vidual, one  specimen  showing  thirty-four  in  one  valv3,  and  forty- 
four  in  the  other. 

P.  Peedeensis  Tuomey  and  Holmes.  S.  Car. 

Plioc.  Foss.,  p.  30. 

P.  (Liropecten)  Carolinensis  Conr.  (Kerr's  Geol.  Report  of 
North  Carolina,  Appendix,  p.  18),  appears  to  be  but  a  variety  of 
this  species,  having  more  ribs  (twelve). 

This  species  is  stated  by  Tuomey  and  Holmes  to  be  "  very 
closely  related  to,  if  not  identical  with  P.  nodosus  of  the  Gulf  of 
Mexico."  It  appears  to  me  that  the  resemblance  exists  only  in 
the  fact  of  the  ribs  in  both  species  being  knobbed,  broken  into 
nodes,  otherwise  the  ornamentation  is  very  distinct,  the  very 
prominent  radiating  ridges  on  and  between  the  ribs  in  P.  7iodosus 
being  wanting  in  P.  Peedeensis,  where  they  are  replaced  b}^  fine 
impressed  lines. 

P.  septemnarius  Say.  S.  Car. 

J.  A.  N.  S,,  iv,  p.  36.     Com-.,  Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  47. 
Tuomey  and  Holmes,  p.  31. 
P.  Jeffersonius  var.  ? 

Pecten  dislocatus  Say,  is  described  from  the  post-Pliocene 
deposits  of  South  Carolina  by  Holmes  ("  Post-Pliocene  Fossils  of 
South  Carolina,"  p.  12),  and  specimens  of  P.  hevnicyclus  from  the 
same  deposits,  are  in  the  collections  of  the  Academy.  Specimens 
of  P.  i7'radia7is  Linn.,  distinctly  showing  the  color  marks,  also 
occur  in  the  newer  formations,  but  I  have  been  unable  to  deter- 
mine the  locality  or  localities  whence  they  have  been  obtained. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OP   PHILADELPHIA.  423 


REMARKS  ON  THE  MOLLUSCAN  GENERA   HIPPAGUS,  VERTICORDIA 
AND  PECCHIOLIA. 

BY   ANGELO    HEILPRIN. 

The  genus  Hippagus  was  founded  by  Dr.  Isaac  Lea,  in  1833 
(Contributions  to  Geology,  p.  72),  for  a  small  cordiform  fossil 
shell  from  the  Eocene  deposits  of  Alabama,  whose  external 
appearance  bore  a  somewhat  general  resemblance  to  Isocardia. 
Its  affinities  with  that  genus  were  at  the  time  pointed  out  by 
that  naturalist,  who  did  not  hesitate  to  class  it  in  its  immediate 
neighborhood,  despite  the  great  diflerences  that  were  presented 
by  the  structure  of  the  hinge  in  the  two  genera.  To  my 
knowledge,  onh'  two  species,  one  other  than  the  American,  are 
as  yet  known  to  belong  to  this  genus,  the  second  one  being  a 
species  from  the  Arrialoor  Cretaceous  group  of  Stripermatiir, 
India,  discovered  by  the  late  C.  Aemilius  Oldham,  and  to  which 
Stoliczka  has  applied  the  specific  name  of  Aemilianus  (Palseonto- 
logia  Indica,  Memoirs  Greol.  Surv.  India,  Cretaceous  Fauna,  iii, 
p.  262).  In  1846  Mr.  Searles  Wood  published  in  the  seventh 
volume  of  Sowerby's  Mineral  Conchology,  p.  6T,  his  diagnosis 
of  a  new  genus  of  fossil  shell,  for  which  he  some  years  previously 
proposed  the  name  Verticordia,  and  which  was  intended  to 
embrace  the  only  species  known  at  the  time,  a  fossil  of  the 
English  crag  (the  Gryptodon  ?  Verticordia  of  the  "  Catalogue  of 
the  Crag  Mollusca,"  Annals  and  Magazine  of  Natural  History, 
1840,  vi,  p.  24*7).  Almost  simultaneously  with  the  discovery  of 
the  Crag  fossil,  Philippi  discovered  in  Calabria,  South  Ital}",  a 
very  closely  allied  form,  which,  on  the  strength  of  the  transcript 
of  the  characters  of  Lea's  genus,  as  given  b}^  Bronn  in  the  Lethsea 
Geognostica,  he  referred  to  Hippagus  (sp.  acatlcoHtatus)  (Enu- 
meratio  Molluscorum  Sicilise,  1844,  ii,  p.  42).  Probably  guided 
by  the  views  of  Philippi,  Sowerby  {loc.  cit.)  considered  the  new 
genus  of  Wood  as  untenable,  and  accordingly  referred  the 
English  fossil  in  question  likewise  (although  with  doubt)  to  the 
genus  Hippagus^  imposing  upon  it  the  new  specific  name  of 
cardiiformis  (Miu.  Conch.,  vii,  p.  68).  Sowerb^^'s  example, 
singularly  enough,  is  followed  by  Wood  in  his  "  Monograph  of 
the  Crag  Mollusca"  (Palaeontographical  Soc.  Reports,  ii,  p.  149, 
1851-3),  who  now  renounces  his  genus,  referring  his  species  to 


424  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

Hippagus,  with  the  original  specific  name  modified  into  Verti- 
cordius.  Both  tlie  English  and  the  Italian  species  have  very 
little  in  common  with  Lea's  Hippagus,  which  is  edentulous,  and 
belong  properly  to  the  genus  Verticordia  (Trigomilina  of 
D'Orbigny),  as  reconstituted  by  conchologists. 

Another  singular  fossil,  long  known  to  pahieontologists  as  the 
Chama  ?  arietina  of  Brocchi  (Conchiologie  Fossile  Subapennina, 
ii,p.  668),  and  which  systematists  generally  referred  to  Isocardia, 
was  thought  by  Sismonda  (S3aiopsis  Method.  Anim.  Invert.  Fed. 
Foss.,  p.  18;  fide  Homes,  Die  fossilen  Mollusken  des  Tertiar- 
Beckens  von  Wien,  ii,  p.  169)  to  be  referable  to  the  genus 
Hippagus  of  Lea,  but  the  dcntiferous  conformation  of  the  hinge 
did  not  escape  the  attention  of  Meneghini,  who,  in  1851  (Con- 
siderazioni  sulla  Geolog.  Stratigr.  della  Toscana,  p.  180),  con- 
stituted it  into  the  genus  Pecchiolia,  restoring  to  it  the  original 
specific  name  of  argentea,  proposed,  in  1*797,  by  Mariti.  Deshayes 
in  (about  ?)  1860  (Animaux  sans  Vertebres,  Bassin  de  Paris,  i, 
p.  809),  described  a  minute  fossil  from  the  Paris  basin  under  the 
name  of  Hippagus  Z^eanMS,  which,  in  the  prominence  and  recurved 
nature  of  its  beaks,  to  some  extent  recalls  the  Hippagua  isocardi- 
oides  of  Lea,  but  which  differs  in  the  presence,  in  each  valve,  of  a 
cardinal  tooth. 

Deshaj'es  was  apparently  doubtful  as  to  the  true  generic 
position  assigned  to  his  species,  inasmuch  as  he  states  that  a 
more  complete  study  of  the  American  shell  may  lead  to  the 
separation  of  the  two  species  into  distinct  genera.  Having 
shown  the  correctness  of  Lea's  figure  and  description,  by  the 
discovery  of  the  allied  Indian  form,  Stoliczka  proposes  (Palseon- 
tologia  Indica,  Cretaceous  Fauna,  iii,  p.  225)  the  generic  name 
of  AUojjagus,  for  the  species  from  the  Paris  basin,  which  name  it 
ought  to  retain.  It  will  tlius  be  seen  that  fossil  shells  belonging 
to  no  less  than  four  distinct  genera  have  been  alternately  referred 
to  the  American  genus  Hippagus. 

All  these  agree,  more  or  less,  with  each  other  in  the  closed  and 
nacreous  or  semi-nacreous  shell,  recurved  umbones,  simple  pallial 
impression,  and  the  internal  or  subinternal  arrangements  of  the 
ligaments.  The^^  differ  in  the  dentiferous  character  of  the  hinge. 
The  opinions  of  naturalists  have  been  greatl}'  at  variance  as  to 
the  position  to  be  assigned  to  these  genera  in  a  natural  classifica- 
tion,  and,   indeed,   there   appears   to   be   no  small   difficuly  in 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  425 

arriving  at  a  satisfactory  conclusion  as  to  tlieir  proper  generic 
affinities.  Philippi  (loc.  cit.,  p.  41)  classed  his  species  under  the 
Cardiacea^  immediately  after  tlie  genus  Isocardia,  a  somewhat 
similar  view  being  entertained  by  Oronzio  Costa  as  to  the  position 
of  his  genus  Iphigenia  (=  Verticordia  ?  Wood,'  Seguenza,  Jour, 
de  Conchyliologie,  2d  ser.,  iv,  1860,  p.  290),  which  he  placed  in 
the  proximity  of  the  Carditee.  Seguenza  states  {loc.  cit.)  that 
the  same  views  were  entertained  by  Woodward  in  his  "  Manual  of 
Mollusca,"  but  that  author  seems  to  have  overlooked  the  remark 
in  the  supplement  to  the  work  just  mentioned  (p.  471 ;  and 
second  edition,  1868,  p.  472),  whereby  the  genus  is  referred 
"  undoubtedly "  to  the  Trigoniadse.  The  relationship  with 
Trigonia  is  maintained  b}'  H.  and  A.  Adams  in  their  "  Genera  of 
Recent  Mollusca,"  1858,  ii,  p.  531),  and  by  Deshayes  in  his 
valuable  remarks  on  the  family  Trigonea  Lamarck,  and  the 
genera  Verticordia  and  Hijyjjagus  (Animaux  sans  Yertebres, 
Bassin  de  Paris,  i,  pp.  805-10),  although  the  last  named  naturalist 
in  his  review  of  the  Cardiaceea  (loc.  cit.,  p.  529),  distinctly  states 
that,  for  the  time  being,  the  genus  Pecchiolia  (misprinted  Fet- 
chiola),  which,  on  pages  806  and  810,  he  points  out  to  be  indis- 
putably linked  to  Verticordia  and  Hippagus,  will  probably-  have 
to  be  referred  to  that  family.  According  to  Pecchioli  (Revue  et 
Magasin  de  Zoologie,  1852,  p.  577)  Meneghini,  on  establishing 
this  genus,  considered  it  as  allied  to  Diceras  of  Lamarck,  a  view 
to  some  extent  shared  hy  Stoliczka,  who,on  proposing  the  family 
Verticordiidae  for  the  genera  Pecchiolia,  Verticordia  and  Allo- 
pagus  (loc.  cit.,  p.  224),  places  the  same  in  his  order  Chamacea. 
Lea's  Hippagus  is  found  a  refuge  among  the  UnguUnidae,  near 
Scacchia,  the  affinity  with  which,  it  must  be  confessed,  appears 
to  us  as  rather  remote.  Mr.  Arthur  Adams  states  in  his 
observations  on  Verticordia  Japonica  (Annals  and  Magazine  of 
Natural  Histor}^,  .3d  series,  ix,  1862,  p.  224),  that  the  animal  has 
no  relation  to  Trigonia,  but,  on  the  contrary,  that  "  its  position, 
judging  both  from  the  nature  of  the  animal  and  the  form  of  the 

^  I  have  been  unable  to  gain  access  to  Costa's  woi'k,  and  therefore  can- 
not, from  personal  observation,  pronounce  upon  the  value  of  the  genus 
Iphigenia;  its  identity  with  Verticordia  is  given  upon  the  authority  of 
Seguenza,  but  judging  from  tliis  author's  descriptions  and  figures  of  his  two 
species  of  Verticordia,  it  would  appear  that  he  had  confounded  with  that 
genus  the  genus  Pecchiolia. 


42G  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

shell,  would  seem  to  be  in  the  family  Bucardiidae,  the  animal 
differing  from  Bucardia  {Isocardia)  cor  in  the  posterior  [mantle] 
opening  being  fringed."  The  shell  of  this  species,  Mr.  Adams 
further  adds,  is  very  different  from  that  of  V.  novemcostnta 
Adams  and  Reeve,  from  the  China  Sea,  and  very  similar  to  the 
V.  gramdata  of  Segnenza,  a  Tertiary  Sicilian  fossil.  Whether 
this  last  is  a  true  Verticordia  I  am  not  in  a  position  to  judge, 
not  having  seen  anj^  specimens,  but  if  the  figures  illustrating 
Seguenza's  descriptions  be  correctly^  executed,  they  appear  to 
represent  a  species  of  fossil  very  different  from  the  Vei^iicordia 
cardiiformis  of  Wood,  the  typical  species  of  the  genus  Verti- 
cordia. The  same  may  be  said  of  Seguenza's  figure  of  V.  acuti- 
costata^  the  species  described  by  Philippi  from  the  newer  Ter- 
tiaries  of  Calabria,  and  which  was  considered  by  Wood,  as 
identical  with  the  species  from  the  English  Crag ;  the  absence  of 
a  lunule  (very  prominent  in  Verticordia),  the  prominently 
recurved  spiral  umbones,  and  the  great  ventricosity  of  the  shell, 
would  seem  to  indicate  a  form  much  more  nearly  allied  to 
Pecchiolia.  If,  however,  as  Segnenza  states  {loc.  cit.,  p.  293), 
"  les  valves  des  individus  jeunes  de  cette  espece  (d'un  diametre  de 
4  a  8  millimetres)  sont  minces,  phis  circulaires,  moins  renflees,et 
s'accordent  parfaitement  avec  la  figure  de  M.  Philippi  ..."  the 
question  is  settled  as  far  as  the  identity  of  the  Sicilian  and 
Calabrian  fossils  is  concerned,  and  a  strong  relationship  between 
the  genera  Verticordia  and  Pecchiolia  would  be  indicated  ;  but  it 
is  at  the  same  time  very  singular,  and  what  makes  it  appear 
somewhat  suspicious,  that  in  the  second  species  stated  by 
Segnenza  to  belong  to  the  genus  Verticordia — V.  gramdata — 
there  should  be  considerable  differences  in  the  character  of  the 
hinge,  and,  moreover,  a  deep  lunule  ("  lunula  profunda,  cordata, 
ecostata,  granulis  carens  ")  should  be  present.  An  indubitable 
species  of  Verticordia,  the  V.  JEmmonsii  Com:,  has  been  described 
from  the  Miocene  deposits  of  North  Carolina ;  the  V.  Parisiensis 
Deshayes,  from  the  Paris  basin,  is  at  best  but  very  doubtful. 
Although  Verticordia.  and  Pecchiolia  may  be  very  closely  related 
forms  (and  their  positions,  everything  considered,  if  the  observa- 
tions of  Mr.  Adams  on  V.  Japonica  be  correct,  would  be  about 
as  near  to  Isocardia  as  to  any  other  recent  genus),  there  does  not 
appear  to  be  as  yet  sufficient  evidence  for  uniting  the  two  genera, 
as  has  been  done  by  some  conchologists.      V.  gramdata  and  V. 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  42T 

acuticostata  {et  conseq.,  V.  cardiiformis  for  Gwyn  Jeffreys)  are 
stated  to  be  also  living  forms,  both  inhabiting  the  Japanese  seas, 
and  the  former  also  the  Mediterranean  (Gwjai  Jeffrys,  "  Mediter- 
ranean Mollusca,"  Annals  and  Mag.  of  Nat.  Hist.,  4th  ser.,  vi, 
18T0,  p.  73 ;  "  Japanese  Marine  Shells  and  Fishes,"  Journal 
Linnean  Society,  Zoology,  xii,  1874,  p.  101  ;  Jour.  Linn.  Soc, 
xiv,  18T9,  p.  420)  ;  these  species  are  all  classed  by  Mr.  Jeffreys 
as  PecchioHa,  and  placed  among  the  Gorhulidse^  and  if  the  deter- 
minations have  been  correctly  made,  they  go  far  to  confirm  the 
observations  of  Seguenza  as  to  the  variability  of  the  genus 
Verticordia  (and  of  its  passage  into  Pecchiolia).  But  in  addition 
to  these  forms  of  so-called  Pecchiolia^  we  have  the  P.  [^LyonHiella] 
abyssicola  of  M.  Sars  (Selsk.  Forh.,  1868,  p.  257 ;  G.  0. 
Sars,  "  On  some  remarkable  Forms  of  Animal  Life,"  1872,  i,  p. 
25;  Zoological  Record,  1872,  p.  166;  G.  0.  Sars,  Bidrag  til 
Kundskaben  om  Norges  Arktiske  Fauna,  1878,  p.  108,  PI.  20, 
fig.  5),  an  Arctic  form  certainly  verj'^  distinct  in  tlie  totality  of 
its  characters  from  at  least  some,  if  not  all,  of  the  preceding,  but 
which  is  nevertheless  admitted  by  Mr.  Jeffrej's  into  the  genus 
Pecchiolia,  and  placed  alongside  two  new  species  of  his  own 
description,  P.  gibbosa  and  P.  tornata  (Annals  and  Mag.  Nat. 
Hist.,  4th  ser.,  xviii,  1876,  p.  494).  It  certainly  scarcely  appears 
possible  that  three  such  very  distinct  forms  (at  least  as  they  appear 
to  me)  as  are  represented  b}^  the  Ghama  arietina  of  Brocchi 
{Pecchiolia  argentea  Meneg.),  Verticordia  cardiiformis  ofWood, 
and  Lyonsiella  abyssicola  of  Sars,  can  belong  to  the  same  genus. 
The  shell  of  this  last  is  said  to  be  thin,  pellucid,  inequivalve,  and 
gaping  posteriori}^,  whereas  in  G.  arietina  it  is  comparatively 
thiciv,  equivalve,  and  completely  closed.  Nor  does  Sars'  descrip- 
tion of  the  animal  of  his  species  at  all  accord  with  Adams' 
observations  on  Verticordia  Japonica.  In  the  former  the  foot  is 
said  to  be  long,  subcj'lindrical,  and  provided  with  a  bj'ssus, 
whereas  in  the  latter  it  was  found  to  be  "  small,  triangular,  and 
compressed."  Again,  in  the  former,  the  siphons  are  separate, 
subsessile,  with  the  brancliial  not  prominent  (anal  prominent), 
whereas  in  V.  Japonica  the  "  sessile  siphoual  orifices  "  are  "  close 
together,  the  branchial  larger  than  the  anal."  The  supposed 
pallia!  sinus  stated  to  exist  in  Ghama  arietina  by  Pecchioli,  was 
probably  founded  on  an  imperfection  in  the  shell,  since  the 
pallial   impression   is   stated    to   be   simple   by    Homes,  whose 


428  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881, 

description  and  figures  are  drawn  from  Italian  specimens.  The 
form  of  the  Arctic  shell  recalls  the  Verticordia  Farisiensis  of 
Deshayes,  which,  however,  differs  in  the  presence  of  a  cardinal 
hinge  tooth ;  the  pallial  sinus  represented  in  the  figure  (vol.  i, 
PI.  X,  fig.  12)  is  stated  by  the  French  conchologist  to  have  been 
erroneously  placed  there  by  the  artist,  and,  therefore,  cannot  be 
taken  as  a  character  separating  it  from  L.  abijssicola,  in  which 
the  pallial  impression  is  also  non-sinuate  ("  hele,  ikke  bagtil 
indbugtede  Kappe  linie  ").  Finally,  in  the  list  of  deep-sea 
mollusca  dredged  in  the  Bay  of  Biscay  (Annals  and  Mag.  Nat. 
Hist.,  October,  1880,  p.  316),  Mr.  Gwyn  Jeffreys  revives  the 
generic  term  Verticor'dia  for  a  newly-discovered  species,  V. 
insculpta  ;  is  this  species  likewise  to  fall  under  Pecchiolia  ? 

The  similarity  existing  between  Lea's  genus  Hijopagus  and 
Crenella^  as  exemplified  by  C.  glandula  Totten,  a  relation  first 
pointed  out  by  Jeffreys  (Annals  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  4th  ser.,  vi, 
1870,  p.  '73),  is  certainly  very  great,  but  yet  there  appear  to  be 
suflBcient  differences  to  warrant  a  generic  separation.  The 
umbones  in  Hippagus  are  much  more  prominently  developed 
and  spirally  twisted,  and,  as  far  as  I  have  been  enabled  to  deter- 
mine, there  are  no  crenulations  on  the  hinge-line ;  these,  how- 
ever, may  have  been  eroded  in  the  specimens  (Lea's  types  in  the 
collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences)  examined.  The 
structure  of  the  shell  appears  to  have  been  also  considerably 
heavier  than  in  Crenella.  The  H.  Aemilianits  of  Stoliczka 
scarcely  appears  to  differ  from  the  H.  isocardidides. 

Note. — While  preparing  the  preceding  remarks  on  the  genus  Verticordia 
the  author  inadvertently  overlooked  the  notice  of  that  genus  by  Seailes 
Wood,  as  contained  in  his  "  Monograph  of  the  Eocene  Mollusca  "  (Falteont. 
Soc.  Reports,  1871).  Reference  is  there  made  to  the  existence  of  an  ossicle 
in  the  hinge,  which  led  Mr.  A.  Adams  to  consider  the  genus  as  belonging 
to  the  AnatinidcB,  and,  therefore,  as  distantly  removed  from  the  Bucardiidm, 
with  which  it  had  been  previously  placed  by  that  author.  This  view  is  not 
concurred  in  by  Mr.  Wood,  who,  while  in  doubt  as  to  its  true  relationship, 
places  the  genus  in  a  family  apart  by  itself — the  VerticordidoB  (a  family 
name  first  proposed  by  Stoliczka).  The  genus  Pe^cMolia  is  stated  to  be 
synonymous  with  Verticordia,  but  no  grounds  are  given  for  so  considering  it. 


1881.]  natural  sciences  of  philadelphia.  429 

September  6. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Seven  persons  present. 


September  13. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Seventeen  members  present. 

On  Hieracium  aurantiacum. — Mr.  John  H.  Red  field  stated  at 
the  meeting  of  the  Botanical  Section  that  he  had  recently  found 
about  two  miles  north  of  Tannersville,  in  the  Catskill  Mts.,  N.  Y., 
Hieracium  aurantiacum  L.,  growing  abundantly  over  a  stony 
hill-side  pasture,  at  an  elevation  of  about  2500  feet  above  tide. 
This  plant  is  a  native  of  elevated  regions  in  central  Europe,  and 
is  a  recent  introduction  to  our  Flora.  Its  prolific  runners  favor  a 
rapid  spread,  and  the  farmers  near  the  Tannersville  locality 
already  complain  of  it  as  a  troublesome  weed,  so  that  there  is 
reason  to  fear  it  may  become  an  unwelcome  permanent  resident. 

Mr.  Meehan  stated  that  he  had  received  the  same  plant  from 
correspondents  in  New  England,  who  had  supposed  it  indigenous, 
but  that  he  had  no  doubt  it  was  in  all  cases  introduced.  It  had 
also  been  collected  in  the  Catskills  this  season  by  Miss  Cope  of 
Germantown. 

Note  upon  Plantago  elongata,  Pursh — Mr.  John  H.  Redfield 
remarked  that  Dr.  Gray,  in  the  new  Synoptical  Flora  of  N.  Am., 
ii,  392,  says,  that  this  plant  "  of  Bradbury's  collection  on  the 
Missouri,  is  unknown,  probably  a  glabrate  form  of  P.  Patago- 
nica.-''  Pursh's  specimen  ticketed  (probably  b}"  Lambert)  P. 
elongata^  and  noted  as  from  Bradbury,  has  recently  been  found  in 
the  Academy's  Herbarium  and  proves  to  be  unmistakabl}'^  P.pusilla 
Nutt. 


September  20. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  Note  on  the  approximate  position  of  the 
Eocene  deposits  of  Maryland,"  by  Angelo  Heilprin,  was  pre- 
sented for  publication. 


430  proceedings  of  the  academy  op  [1881. 

September  27. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Eighteen  persons  present. 
Dr.  E.  C.  Hine  was  elected  a  membei". 


October  4. 
Mr.  J.  H.  Redfield,  in  the  chair. 
I^ineteen  persons  present. 

How  Orh-Weaving  Spiders  make  the  Framework  or  Foxinda- 
tions  of  Webs. — Rev.  Dr.  H.  G.  McCook  said  that  he  had  given 
attention  during  the  past  summer  to  tlie  mode  of  constructing 
webs  prevailing  among  orb-weaving  spiders.  He  had  been  led  to 
malie  some  special  studies  of  the  extent  to  wliicli  air  currents  are 
utilized  in  laying  the  foundation  lines  upon  Avhich  the  orbs  are 
hung,  by  a  remark  of  Rev.  0.  Pickard-Cambridge  in  his  work  on 
the  Spiders  of  Dorset.^  "  Spider  lines,"  he  says,  "  may  frequently 
be  observed  strained  across  open  spaces  of  many  feet  and  even 
yards  in  extent.  This  has  been  explained  by  some  naturalists  to 
have  been  done  by  the  help  of  a  current  of  air  carrying  the  thread 
across.  I  cannot,  of  course,  say  that  it  has  never  been  thus 
effected;  though  I  have  certainly  never  myself  witnessed  it.  I 
have,  however,  on  several  occasions  seen  a  spider  fix  its  line,  then 
run  down  to  the  ground,  across  the  intervening  space,  and  so  up 
the  opposite  side,  trailing  its  line  as  it  went ;  and  then  having 
hauled  in  the  slack,  it  fixed  the  line  to  the  desired  spot.  This,  I 
believe,  to  be  the  usual  mode  of  proceeding  in  such  cases." 

Dr.  McCoolc  was  satisfied  that  on  both  the  above  points  this 
distinguished  araneologist  had  failed  to  possess  himself  of  all  the 
facts  ;  but  he  took  up  the  points  in  question  anew  during  the 
summer,  and  made  notes  of  his  studies.  His  previous  opinion 
was  fully  confirmed.  He  had  in  a  great  number  of  cases 
observed  orb-weavers  passing  from  point  to  point  by  means  of 
lines  emitted  from  their  spinnerets  and  entangled  upon  adjacent 
foliage  or  other  objects.  These  mimic  "  wire-bridges  "  were  of 
various  lengths  owing  to  the  direction  of  the  wind,  and  the  rela- 
tive positions  of  the  spider  and  the  standing  objects  ai'ound  it. 
Lines  of  two,  three  and  four  feet  were  frequent ;  lines  of  from 
seven  to  ten  occurred  pretty  often  ;  he  had  measured  one  twenty- 
six  feet  long,  and  in  several  cases  had  seen  them  strung  entirely 

'  Vol.  i,  Introduction,  p.  xxi. 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  431 

across  country  roads  of  from  thirty  to  forty  feet.  Many  of  these 
lines  he  Iiacl  seen  carried  by  the  wind  directly  from  the  spiders' 
spinnerets,  had  observed  the  entanglement,  had  seen  the  animal 
draw  the  threads  taut  and  then  cross  upon  them.  That  all  the 
lines  were  similarly  formed  and  used  he  had  no  doubt. 

It  was  more  difficult  to  detei'mine  the  other  question,  viz.: 
Whether  the  lines  used  for  the  foundations  of  orb-webs  were 
formed  in  the  same  way.  Undoubtedly,  such  lines  are  often  made 
precisely  as  asserted  by  M\-.  Cambridge.  Dr.  McCook  had  many 
times  observed  this  ;  he  had  seen  an  orb-weaver  after  traversing  a 
considerable  space  by  a  series  of  successive  bridge-lines  settle 
upon  a  site  between  the  forked  twigs  of  a  bush  and  carry  her 
foundation  lines  around  in  the  manner  described  But,  on  the 
other  hand,  he  was  prepared  to  say  that  the  air-laid  bridge-lines 
were  also  used  for  the  foundations  or  frames  of  orbs. 

1.  First,  he  had  observed  that  the  hours  in  the  evening  at 
which  the  greatest  activit}'  in  web-weaving  began,  were  those  in 
which  also  began  the  formation  of  the  bridge-lines.  The  latter 
action  quite  invariably  preceded  the  former. 

2.  Again,  a  study  of  the  foundation  lines  of  many  webs  gave 
more  or  less  conclusive  evidence  that  they  were  laid  by  the  aid  of 
air  currents.  For  example,  the  webs  of  some  species,  as  Acrosoma 
miitra.ta^  A.  spiyiea  and  A.  rugosa,,  Avere  frequently  found  strung 
between  young  trees  separated  by  two  or  three  3'ards.  That  these 
builders  might  have  dropped  to  the  ground,  crept  over  wood,  grass- 
and  drj'  leaves  carrying  the  thread  in  the  free  outstretched  claw,, 
is,  perhaps,  not  impossible,  but  did  not  seem  at  all  probable  to  the 
speaker,  although  short  spaces  over  smooth  surfaces  might  well 
be  cleared  in  this  way.  One  web  he  found  spun  upon  lines 
stretched  from  the  balustrade  of  a  bridge  that  spans  a  deep  glen 
in  Fairmount  Park,  to  the  foliage  of  a  tree  that  springs  out  of 
the  glen  at  least  twenty-five  feet  below.  Unless  foundations  were 
formed  by  line-bridging  the  interspace  of  a  3'ard  or  more^it  must 
be  inferred  that  the  spider  had  dropped  from  the  balustrade  to  the 
glen,  crossed  the  interval  to  the  trunk  of  the  tree,  ascended  it, 
and  having  made  the  detour  ol  nearly  sixt}^  feet  to  the  point 
direetl}^  opposite  that  from  which  she  started,  drawn  her  long  line 
taut,  and  so  completed  her  foundation.  Dr.  McCook  thought  that 
such  a  supposition  could  not  be  entertained,  and  it  was  clear  that 
a  breeze  carried  the  line  across  from  the  spider's  spinnerets. 

Even  stronger  examples  of  circumstantial  evidence  were  noted. 
Very  many  webs  of  Tetragnatha  extensa  and  T.  grallator  were 
seen  spread  upon  bushes  overhanging  pools  and  streams  of 
water ;  others  were  seen  stretched  between  separated  water-plants, 
or  from  such  plants  to  the  shore.  Either  the  foundation  lines 
were  borne  by  air  currents,  or  the  spiders  must  have  crossed  upon 
the  water,  carrying  their  lines.  The  latter  supposition  is  not 
wholly  untenable,  the  speaker  thought,  but  would  hardly  be  raised 
by  any  one  who  had  studied  the  spinning  habits  of  the  creature. 
29 


432  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

Ono  other  example  ma_y  be  cited.  At  Cape  May,  by  the  Land- 
ing, where  pleasure  boats  used  for  sailing  upon  the  inlet  are 
stored,  there  is  an  immense  colony  of  Epiiiroids,  chiefly  Ej^eira 
strix,  E.  vulgaris  and  E.  domiciliorum  (Hentz).  Great  numbers 
of  tiiese  spiders  had  their  lines  strung  between  the  opposite, 
exterior  walls  of  the  boat-houses,  which  are  built  upon  piles 
driven  into  the  water.  These  lines  were  about  nine  feet  long, 
stretched  over  the  water  at  heights  varying  from  one  to  ten  feet. 
Most  of  them  passed  from  w^all  to  wall ;  many  were  fastened  at 
one  end  upon  piles  and  sticks  driven  here  and  there  between  the 
houses.  Even  if  one  were  to  admit  that  Tetragnatha  could  carry 
a  free  line  over  the  smooth  surface  of  an  inland  pool,  it  is  past 
belief  that  the  above  named  Epeiras  performed  the  same  act  x;pon 
the  rough  w^aters  of  an  inlet  of  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  The  only 
reasonable  conclusion  is  that  bridge-lines  were  formed  by  air 
currents, 

3'  It  was  greatly  desired  that  to  the  above  cases  of  circum- 
stantial proof,  might  be  added  actual  observations  of  the  use 
for  foundations  of  those  lines  stretched  by  air  currents.  Three 
summer  evenings  were  devoted  to  obtaining  this  result,  without 
complete  success.  On  one  evening  the  observer  was  interrupted 
and  c;dled  off  at  the  very  critical  loeriod  of  his  observation;  on 
the  other  two  evenings  the  wind  was  unfavorable.  But  some 
valuable  results  were  obtained,  and  the  webs  of  three  adult  indi- 
viduals of  Epeira  strix^  one  male  and  two  females,  were  selected, 
the  den  or  nest  of  each  spider  located,  and  the  web  entirely 
destroyed,  including  the  foundation  lines.  The  latter  precaution 
was  made  necessary  by  the  fact  that  orb-weavers  had  been  noticed 
to  use  the  same  foundation  lines,  for  manj-  days,  for  the  erection 
of  their  new  webs.  Young  spiders  had  been  seen  on  several  occa- 
sions to  utilize  the  radii  and  foundations  of  abandoned  webs  of 
adults,  as  the  frame-lines  of  their  small  orbs.  The  great  value 
which  maj^  attach  to  these  old  foundations  appeared  strikingly  in 
subsequent  studies,  and  also  the  difficulty  if  not  impossibility  of 
procuring  suitable  foundations  for  the  webs  of  large  spiders, 
without  the  aid  of  the  wind. 

Two  of  the  webs  (one  of  the  females)  were  so  situated  that  the 
prevailing  air  currents  so  carried  the  lines  that  they  could  not 
possibly  find  an  entanglement.  In  consequence,  neither  of  these 
spiders  succeeded,  during  two  entire  evenings,  up  to  half-past 
ten  o'clock,  in  making  a  web.  They  frequently  attempted  it  in 
vain.  One,  which  was  more  closely  watched,  was  in  motion 
during  the  whole  period,  passing  up  and  down,  from  limb  to  limb, 
apparently  desirous  of  fixing  her  orb  in  the  former  site,  but  com- 
pletely confused  and  foiled.  The  site  was  one,  moreover,  which 
would  have  allowed  her  to  carry  ai'ound  a  thread  with  compara- 
tive ease,  being  a  dead  sapling  that  forked  near  the  ground.  The 
spider'  domiciled  during  the  day  on  the  ground,  but  had  her  orb 
at  the  top  of  the  forks,  a  height  of  six  feet.     Thus  the  space  to 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA,  433 

traverse  in  passing  from  the  top  of  one  of  the  forks  to  a  simihir 
point  on  the  opposite  one.  presented  comparativeh'  few  difli- 
culties.  But  no  attempt  was  made  to  carry  the  line  around,  and 
as  the  wind  had  evidently  not  chansed  during  the  night,  no  web 
appeared  upon  the  ti'ee  in  the  morning.  During  the  next  evening 
the  same  restless  movement  along  the  bare  limbs  of  the  sapling 
was  repeated,  and  was  terminated  at  a  late  hour  by  a  rare 
accident.  A  large  moth,  attracteil  by  the  lantern,  became  entau 
gled  upon  a  single  short  thread  stiung  between  two  small  twigs, 
Avhereupon  Strix  pounced  upon  it.  swathed  and  fell  to  feeding  on 
it.  Next  morning  a  tim^  orlj-web  had  been  built  around  the  shell 
of  the  moth  at  the  point  of  capture. 

During  both  evenings  this  spider  at  frequent  intervals  poised 
herself  at  the  extremity  of  twigs,  and  emitted  threads  from  her 
spinnerets  which  entangled  upon  some  of  the  short  twigs,  but 
never  upon  the  opposite  fork,  as  the  wind  was  steadily  contrary. 
No  other  entanglement  was  secured,  as  there  was  no  object  in  the 
direction  of  the  wind  for  a  great  distance.  However,  Dr. 
McCook  could,  at  any  time,  obtain  an  entanglement  upon  his 
hand  b}'^  arresting  the  thread.  By  imitating  the  motion  of  a 
swaying  leaf  or  limb,  the  spider  was  caused  to  perceive  the 
attachment,  and  immediately  ventured  upon  the  line.  Once  the 
thread  fastened  upon  the  observer's  face,  and  the  animal  was 
allowed  to  cross  the  line  (four  or  five  feet)  until  within  a  few 
inches  of  the  face,  when  she  took  in  the  situation,  instantly  cut 
the  line  and  swung  downward  and  backward  over  the  long  arc, 
and,  after  a  few  oscillations,  climbed  up  the  line  to  the  point  of 
departure.  Her  willingness  to  use  the  air-currents  for  making 
transit  lines  was  thus  quite  as  manifest  as  her  inability.  The 
third  spider  exhibited  a  like  behavior. 

4.  The  third  individual,  a  male,  did  not  attempt  to  spin  an 
orb  in  the  former  site  ;  the  wind  was  unfavorable,  but  there  would 
not  have  been  much  difficulty  in  carrying  a  cord  around.  He  came 
out  of  his  rolled-leaf  den  at  7.20  P.  M.,  and  for  more  than  an  hour 
labored  to  secure  a  web  foundation.  He  was  located  upon  a  dead 
v'^nd  of  a  bough  of  a  tree,  with  man}'  branching  twigs.  As  with 
the  former  individual,  so  with  this  ;  many  efforts  were  made  to 
obtain  foundations  by  sending  out  threads  fi'om  the  spinnerets, 
and  to  this  end  he  tried  most  of  the  numerous  i)oints  of  the 
twigs  covei'ing  the  territory  which  he  seemed  to  have  chosen  as 
his  general  range.  One  of  these,  a  little  pendant  which  hung  in 
the  centre  of  the  group,  was  taken  as  the  basis  of  a  most  intei-- 
e'sting  operation.  The  spider  dropped  from  the  pendant  by  a 
line  three  or  four  inches  long,  grasped  the  line  by  one  of  tlie 
second  pair  of  feet,  and  rapidly  formed  a  triangular  basket  of 
threads  by  connecting  the  point  of  seizure  with  lines  reaching  to 
the  feet  of  the  remaining  second  and  the  third  and  fourth  jxairs. 
Ill  this  basket  he  hung  head  upwards,  the  bodj^  held  at  an  angle 


434  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

of  about  45°,  the  two  fore-feet  meanwhile  stretched  out,  and  groping 
in  the  air,  as  though  feeling  for  the  presence  of  obstructions,  of 
enemies  or  of  floating  threads.  At  the  same  time  he  elevated  his 
spinnerets  and  emitted  a  line  which  was  drawn  out  at  great  length 
b}'  the  air,  but  secured  no  entanglement.  The  body  of  the  spider 
had  a  gentle  lateral  oscillation,  which  appeared  to  the  observer  to 
result  from  a  voluntary  twisting  of  the  central  rope  by  the 
animal,  but  ma}'  have  been  caused  by  the  air ;  the  effect,  in  either 
case,  was  to  give  the  line  a  wider  swing,  and  much  increase  the 
chances  of  entanglement. 

However,  there  was  no  entanglement,  and  the  spider  dropped 
several  inches  farther  down,  and  repeated  exactlj"  the  process  as 
described  above.  This  was  repeated  again  and  again,  and  when 
the  observer  allowed  the  line  to  attach  to  his  person  the  spider  at 
once  proceeded  to  satisfy  himself  of  the  fact,  and  then  to  venture  a 
crossing.  In  all  these  actions  there  was  evidences  of  a  habitual 
mode  of  securing  transit  by  bridge-lines. 

During  the  intervals  of  these  attempts,  and  indeed  preceding 
them,  the  spider  passed  back  and  forth  along  all  the  branching 
twigs,  leaving  behind  him  trailed  threads  or  lines  connecting  the 
ends,  many  of  which  seemed  to  be  purely  tentative.  At  last  a 
central  point  was  taken,  a  short  thread  dropped  therefrom  and 
attached  to  one  of  these  tentative  lines.  The  confused  network 
of  circumjacent  lines  was  gathered  together  in  a  little  flossy  ball 
at  the  point  of  union,  which  was  now  made  the  centre  of  the  orb, 
the  first  drop  line  and  the  two  divisions  of  the  cross  line  consti- 
tuting the  three  original  radii.  From  there  the  spider  proceeded 
to  lay  in  the  radii  and  complete  the  orb.  The  speaker  described 
this  process  in  full,  as  illustrated  by  the  industry  of  this  and  other 
individuals.  The  time  occupied  in  constructing  the  orb  proper 
was  half  an  hour,  while  the  work  of  prospecting  for,  and  obtaining 
a  foundation  consumed  more  than  an  hour.  Even  then  the  orb  was 
very  irregular,  and  showed  decided  traces  of  the  want  of  the  usual 
well  and  orderly  laid  foundations.  An  examination  of  a  number 
of  web-sites  which  had  been  marked  upon  the  same  grounds, 
showed  that  in  every  case  where  the  surroundings  had  allowed  an 
easy  and  good  entanglement  by  the  wind,  the  spiders  had  made 
webs  at  an  early  hour,  and  with  straight  and  regular  foundations. 

Dr.  McCook  concluded  that  the  above  observations,  although 
not  wholly  conclusive  in  themselves,  were  suflicient  warrant  for 
the  belief  that  air  currents  have  a  large  part  in  placing  the  origi- 
nal framework  or  foundation  lines  of  orb-webs,  and  that  spiders 
habitually  make  use  of  them  for  that  purpose.  He  doubted,  how- 
ever, whether  there  was  anything  like  a  deliberate  purpose  to 
connect  the  point  of  occupancy  with  any  special  opposite  point. 
It  seemed  to  him  that  the  spider  acted  in  the  matter  very  much  at 
hap-hazard,  but  with  a  general  instinct  of  the  fact  that  such 
behavior  would  somewdiere  secure  available  attachments.  Many 
of  her  bridge  lines  were  evidently  tentative  and  were  chiefly  at 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPniA.  435 

the  mercy  of  the  breeze,  although  some  observations  seemed  to 
indicate  a  limited  control  of  the  thread  by  manipulation. 

He  added  that  on  previous  occasions  he  had  actually  observed 
the  laying  in,  by  air  currents,  of  lines  which  were  immediately  used 
for  foundations.  The  above  studies  had  been  undertaken  simpl}^ 
to  verify  such  studies,  and  because  he  had  retained  but  the  briefest 
notes  of  former  observations.  While  this  use  of  air  currents  is 
certainly  placed  beyond  doubt,  it  is  as  certainly  not  the  only 
mode  of  laying  foundation  lines,  and  is  dependent  very  much  upon 
the  site  chosen,  the  condition  of  the  wind,  the  abundance  of  ])rey, 
etc.  Webs  built  in  large  open  spaces  are  perhaps  always  laid  out 
by  bridge-lines.  In  more  contracted  sites,  the  frame-lines  are 
generally  carried  around,  and  often  a  foundation  is  the  result  of 
both  methods.^ 


October  11. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Three  hundred  and  sixty-four  persons  present. 

On  the  Nature  of  the  Diplifheritic  Gontagium. — Dr.  H.  C.  Wood 
stated  that  the  researches  which  formed  the  basis  of  his  remarks 
had  been  made  under  the  auspices,  and.  indeed,  at  the  suggestion  of 
the  National  Board  of  Healtli,  by  Dr.  Henry  F.  Formad  and 
himself,  who  were  jointly  responsible  for  the  facts  and  inductions 
and  jointly  desei'ving  of  whatever  reprobation  or  approbation 
might  be  due.  The  full  text  of  the  work  is  now  in  the  hands  of 
the  National  Board,  and  will  be  shortly  published  by  them. 

In  the  spring  of  1880  work  was  begun  by  inoculating  rabbits 
with  diptheritic  membrane  taken  from  the  throats  of  patients  at 
Philadelphia.  It  was  found  that  only  in  a  very  few  cases  was  anj^- 
thing  like  diphtheria  produced  m  the  rabbit  by  inoculating  with 
the  membrane.  The  inoculations  were  practiced  by  putting 
pieces  of  the  material  sometimes  under  the  skin,  sometimes  deep 
in  the  muscles.  Man}'  rabbits  died  after  some  weeks,  not  of 
diphtheria,  but  of  tuberculosis.  In  a  series  of  experiments  it  was 
shown  that  this  tuberculosis  was  an  indirect  and  not  a  direct 
result  of  the  inoculation,  and  that  any  apparent  I'elati on  between 
the  two  diseases  is  only  apparent,  not  real.  Next,  the  tracheas  of 
a  series  of  rabbits  were  opened  and  false  membrane  inserted.     It 

1  Since  these  notes  were  communicated,  a  copy  of  Nature  (Sept.  23,  1881 ) 
lias  been  received,  in  which  it  is  said  that  Mr.  Cambridge  in  the  second 
volume  of  his  Spiders  of  Dorset  modifies  the  opinion  above  quoted  con- 
cerning the  influence  of  air  currents.  I  have  not  yet  received  that  volume 
but  make  this  statement  on  the  authority  of  the  journal  referred  to. — 
H.  C.  McC. 


436  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

was  found  that  under  these  circumstances  a  severe  trachitis  was 
frequt'ntly  i)roduced,  and  was  attended  by  an  abundant  formation 
of  pseudo-membrane.  Careful  studies  made  of  the  false  mem- 
brane of  diphtheria  and  of  this  false  membrane  showed  that  the 
two  were  identical,  both  containing  in  abundance  fibrin  fibres, 
corpuscular  elements,  and  various  foi-ms  of  micrococci.  To  deter- 
mine wliether  other  inflammations  of  the  trachea  than  that  caused 
by  diplitheria  or  its  membrane  are  accompanied  by  the  formation 
of  false  membrane,  a  number  of  experiments  were  made,  and  it 
w^as  demonstrated  that  the  production  of  false  membrane  has 
nothing  specific  in  it,  but  that  any  trachitis  of  sufficient  severity 
is  accompanied  by  this  product.  Careful  studies  also  showed 
that  this  false  membrane  does  not  differ  in  its  constitution  from 
that  of  trne  diphtheria,  except  it  be  that  the  micrococci  are  not  so 
abundant  in  it.  They  always  found  some  micrococci,  and  in 
some  of  these  traumatic  pseudo-membranes  they  were  almost  as 
numerous  as  in  the  diphtheritic  exudation. 

Last  spring  the}'  resumed  tlieir  investigations.  Having  heard 
that  there  was  a  very  severe  epidemic  in  Ludington,  Michigan, 
Dr.  Form.ad  was  despatched  to  examine  cases  and  collect  material. 
He  found  a  small  town  situated  npon  the  shore  of  Lake  Michigan, 
in  the  centre  of  the  lumber  region,  with  inhabitants  mostly 
engaged  in  the  lumber  trade  and  in  managing  very  numerous 
large  saw-mills.  The  town  was  all  built  upon  high  ground 
except  the  Third  Ward.  This  occupied  a  low  swamp  which  had 
been  filled  in  largely  with  sawdust.  The  soil  was  so  moist  that  a 
hole  dug  in  it  would  fill  at  once  with  water,  and  but  few  houses 
had  any  attempts  at  cellars.  It  was  in  this  district  that  the 
disease  had  prevailed.  Almost  all  the  children  had  had  it,  and 
one-third  of  them  were  said  to  have  died.  Dr.  FoTmad  examined 
a  large  number  of  cases,  obtained  a  supply  of  diphtlieritic  mem- 
brane and  brought  home  pieces  of  the  internal  organ  of  a  child 
upon  whom  he  had  made  an  autopsy.  La  ever}^  case  the  blood 
was  found  more  or  less  full  of  micrococci,  some  free,  others  in 
zoogloa?  masses,  others  in  the  white  blood-corpuscles.  The 
organs  brought  home  also  all  contained  micrococci,  which  were' 
especially  abundant  in  the  kidneys,  where  they  formed  numerous 
thrombi,  choking  np  and  distending  the  blood  vessels.  In  the 
summer  of  1880  they  examined  the  blood  of  several  cases  of 
endemic  Philadelphia  diphtheria,  and  in  no  case  found  au}^  new 
elements  in  it.  I3ut  during  the  present  summer  the}-  had  found 
micrococci  in  the  blood  of  Philadelphia  diphtheritic  patients, 
showing  that  the  differences  in  the  diseases  are  simph'  in  degree, 
not  in  kind. 

Experiments  were  now  made  with  the  Ludington  material  upon 
animals.  Inoculations  were  practiced  under  the  skin,  deep  in 
the  muscles,  and  in  the  trachea.  In  all  cases  the  result  was 
similar.  A  grayish  exudation  ai)peared  at  the  seat  of  inoculation, 
along  with  much  local  inflammation,  the  animal  sickened,  and  in 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  437 

the  coiu'se  of  a  few  days  death  occurred.  The  local  symptoms 
increased  and  widened.  In  some  cases  the  false  membrane 
spread  from  where  the  poison  had  been  put  in  the  trachea  up  to 
the  mouth.  The  blood  examined  during  life  or  after  death  was 
found  to  contain  micrococci  precisely  similar  to  those  found  in 
the  Ludinoton  cases,  and  in  a  few  instances  micrococci  were 
found  in  abundance  in  the  internal  organs.  Studies  made  upon 
the  blood  of  these  animals,  as  well  as  upon  the  Ludington  cases, 
show  that  the  micrococci  first  attack  the  white  blood-corpuscles, 
in  Avhich  they  move  with  a  vibratile  motion.  Under  their  influ- 
ence the  corpuscles  alter  their  appearances,  losing  their  granula- 
tions. The}-  finall}'^  become  full  of  the  micrococci,  which  now  are 
quiescent  and  increase  until  the  corpuscle  bursts  and  the  contents 
escape  as  an  irregular,  transparent  mass  full  of  micrococci,  and 
form  the  so-called  zoogloae  masses.  In  the  diphtheiitic  membrane 
the  micrococci  exists  frequently  in  balls,  and  it  is  plain  that  these 
collections  are  merely  leucocytes  full  of  the  plant.  The  bone- 
marrow  of  the  animal  was  found  full  of  leucocytes  and  cells  con- 
taining micrococci. 

The  question  now  arose,  is  the  disease  produced  by  diphtheritic 
inoculation  in  the  rabbit  diphtheria  ?  They  concluded  that  it  is, 
because  the  poison  producing  it  is  the  same,  the  symptoms  mani- 
fested during  life  are  the  same,  and  the  post-mortem  lesions  are 
identical.  The  contagious  character  of  the  disease  is  retained,  as 
they  succeeded  in  passing  it  from  rabbit  to  rabbit. 

Their  next  series  of  experiments  were  directed  to  determine 
whether  the  micrococci  are  or  are  not  the  cause  of  the  att'ection. 
The  experiments  of  Curtis  and  Satterthwaite,  of  New  York,  have 
shown  that  the  infectious  character  of  diphtheria  depends  upon 
its  solid  particles ;  for  when  an  infusion  of  the  membrane  was 
filtered,  it  became  less  and  less  toxic  in  proportion  as  the  filtra- 
tion was  more  and  more  perfect ;  and  when  the  infusion  was 
filtered,  through  clay,  the  filtrate  was  harmless. 

The  urine  of  patients  suffering  from  malignant  diphtheria  is 
full  of  micrococci,  and  may  contain  no  other  solid  material.  Fol- 
lowing the  experiments  of  Letzerich,  the}^  filtered  this  urine  and 
then  dried  the  filter-paper.  Upon  experimenting  they  found  this 
even  more  deadU'^  in  its  ett'ects  than  is  the  membrane.  The 
symptoms  and  lesions  following  in  the  rabbit  inoculation  with 
such  paper  are  precisely  those  which  would  have  ensued  had  a 
piece  of  diphtheritic  kidne}'  or  membrane  been  employed.  This 
experiment  shows  that  the  solid  particles  of  the  membrane, 
which  are  the  essential  poison  of  malignant  diphtheria,  are  the 
micrococci,  which  must  be  either  the  poison  itself  or  the  carriers 
or  producers  of  the  poison. 

Culture. — Experiments  were  performed  in  the  manner  com- 
mended b}^  Klein  and  that  recommended  by  Sternberg.  The  first 
method  seemed  the  best  for  the  purpose  of  studying  the  develop- 


438  PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

niont  of  the  micrococcus  itself;  the  second,  the  best  for  the 
obtaining  of  it  in  quantity  for  experimentation. 

Micrococci  were  cultivated  from  the  surface  of  ordinary  sore 
thruats,  from  furred  tongue,  from  cases  of  mild  diphtheria  as 
commonly  seen  in  Philadelphia,  and  from  Ludingtou  cases. 
There  were  no  diflerences  to  be  detected  in  the  general  or  special 
appearance  of  the  various  micrococci,  and  no  constant  differences 
in  size.  They  all  formed  similar  shapes  in  the  culture-apparatus ; 
they  had  this  difference,  however, — whilst  the  Ludington  micro- 
cocci grew  most  rapidly  and  eagerly,  generation  after  generation 
up  to  the  tenth,  those  from  Philadelphia  diphtheria  ceased  their 
growth  in  the  fourth  or  fifth  generation,  whilst  those  taken  from 
furred  tongue,  never  got  beyond  the  third  transplantation. 
Various  culture-fluids  were  used,  but  the  results  were  identical. 
They  concluded,  therefore,  that  as  no  difference  is  detectable 
between  the  micrococci  found  in  ordinary  sore  throat  and  those 
of  diphtheria,  save  only  in  their  reproductive  activity,  they  are 
the  same  organisms  in  different  states.  As  the  result  of  some 
hundreds  of  cultures,  they  believe  that  the  vitality  under  artificial 
culture  is  in  direct  proportion  to  the  malignancy  of  the  case 
from  which  the  plant  has  been  taken. 

They  next  made  a  series  of  experiments  of  inoculating  rab- 
bits with  cultivated  micrococci,  and  succeeded  in  producing 
diphtheria  with  the  second  generation,  but  never  with  an}-  later 
product.  This  success,  taken  in  conjunction  with  the  urine 
experiments  already  spoken  of,  seemed  sufficient  to  establish  the 
fact  that  the  micrococci  are  theyb??.s  et  origo  mali  of  diphtlieria. 
The  experiments  of  Pasteur  and  others  have  proven  that  it  is 
possible  for  an  inert  organism  to  be  changed  into  one  possessed 
of  most  virulent  activity,  or  vice  versa,  and  it  was  believed  that 
direct  proof  could  be  offered  that  the  micrococci  of  the  mouth 
are  really  identical  in  species  with  the  micrococci  of  diphtheria, 
and  do  not  merely  seem  to  be  so.  The  Ludington  membrane 
was  exposed  for  some  weeks  to  the  air  in  a  dried  condition. 
There  was  no  putridity  or  other  change  detectable  in  it ;  but, 
whereas  formerly  it  had  been  most  virulent,  now  it  was  inert, 
and  its  micrococci  not  only  looked  like  those  taken  from  an 
ordinary  angina,  but  acted  like  them.  They  were  not  dead,  they 
had  still  power  of  multiplication,  but  they  no  longer  grew  in  the 
culture-fluid  beyond  the  third  or  fourth  generation.  Certainly 
they  were  specifically  the  same  as  they  had  been,  and  certainly, 
therefore,  the  power  of  rapid  growth  in  culture-fluids  and  in  the 
body  of  the  rabbit  is  not  a  specific  character  of  the  diphtheria 
Micrococcns. 

As  is  well  known,  Pasteur  attributes  the  change  from  an  active 
to  an  inert  organism  to  the  influence  of  the  oxygen  of  the  air 
upon  the  organism.  Whether  this  be  true  of  the  diphtheria 
Micrococcus  is  uncertain,  but  the  effects  of  exposure  of  the  dried 
membrane  seem  to  point  in  such  direction. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  439 

With  the  facts  that  are  known  in  regard  to  the  clinical  history 
oC  diphtheria  and  those  Avhich  they  had  determined  in  their 
research,  it  is  easy  to  make  out  a  theory  of  the  disease  which 
reconciles  all  existing  differences  of  opinion  and  seems  to  be  trne. 

A  child  gets  a  catarrhal  anaina  or  trachitis.  Under  the  stimu- 
lation of  tlie  inflammation  products  the  inert  micrococci  in  the 
mouth  begin  to  grow ;  and,  if  the  conditions  be  favoiable,  the 
sluggisli  plant  may  be  finally  transformed  into  an  active  organism, 
and  a  self-generated  diphtheria  results.  It  is  plain  that  if  this  be 
correct  there  must  be  every  grade  of  case  between  one  which  is 
fatal  and  one  w4iich  is  checked  before  it  fairly  passes  the  bounds 
of  an  ordinary  sore  throat.  Every  practitioner  knows  that  such 
diversity  does  exist.  Again,  conditions  outside  of  the  body 
favoring  the  passage  of  inert  into  active  micrococci  may  exist, 
and  the  air  at  last  become  well  loaded  with  organisms,  which, 
alighting  upon  the  tender  throats  of  children,  may  begin  to  grow 
and  themselves  produce  violent  angina,  trachitis,  and  finally  fatal 
diphtheria. 

In  the  first  instance  we  have  endemic  diphtheria  as  we  see  it  in 
Philadelphia;  in  the  second,  the  malignant  epidemic  form  of  the 
disease  as  it  existed  in  Lndington.  It  is  also  apparent  that  in  the 
endemic  cases  the  plant  whose  activity  hf>s  been  developed  within 
the  patient  may  escape  "with  the  breath,  and  a  second  case  of 
diphtheria  be  produced  hy  contagion.  It  is  also  plain  that  as  the 
plant  gradually  in  such  a  case  passes  from  the  inert  to  the  active 
state,  there  must  be  degrees  of  activity  in  the  contagium,  one  case 
beino-  more  apt  to  give  the  disease  than  is  another ;  also  that  the 
malignant  diphtheria  must  be  more  contagious  than  the  mild 
endemic  cases. 


October  18. 

The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 

Twenty-seven  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  Revision  of  the  Tertiary  Species  of  Area  of 
the  Eastern  and  Southern  United  States,"  by  Angelo  Heilprin, 
was  presented  for  publication. 

The  death  of  Dr.  Benj.  H.  Coates,  a  member,  was  announced. 

Note.-;  on  Mistletoes. — Mr.  Thomas  Meehan  called  attention  to 
some  fine  specimens  on  the  table  of  Phoradendi'on  juniperum., 
var.  Lihocedri  Engelraann,  and  Arceuthobium  occidentale  var. 
abielinum  Engelmann,  from  Washoe  Vallej',  Nevada,  contributed 
by  Mrs.  Ross  Lew-ers  of  J^ranktown  and  said  it  might  be  worth 
noting  a  few  facts  in  relation  to  Mistletoes,  which,  though  perhaps 


440  PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

not  ■wholly   new  to  specialists,   did    not   seem   to   be   generally 
known. 

The  Mistletoe  of  the  Eastern  States  had  a  general  resemblance 
to  that  of  Enrope,  Viscum  album;  but  the  old  genus  Vincum  liad 
been  divided  by  modern  botanists,  altliongh  the  lines  of  distinc- 
tion were  somewhat  artificial.  We  had  two  genera,  F/ioradendron 
and  Arceiil/iobium.  Among  the  leading  distinctions  might  be 
mentioned  that  the  European  branch  of  the  family,  Vificam,  as 
now  restricted,  had  the  anther  open  by  three  pores  on  slits,  our 
Phoradendron  by  two.  while  the  Arceuthobium  had  but  one. 
There  were  other  slight  difterences  in  pollen  grains,  cotyledons, 
and  form  of  the  fruits.  The  Euroi)ean  Mistletoe  is  usually 
founded  on  deciduous  trees  only,  an  instance  being  recorded 
where  it  had  been  found  on  the  Scotch  pine  in  Germany,  and  its 
American  repvesentat'ive,  Phoradendron  flavescens  Nuttall,  seemed 
also  confined  to  deciduous  trees  and  shrubs.^  This  extends  across 
the  continent,  a  form  being  found  on  the  Pacific  coast  still  con- 
fined to  deciduous  plants ;  while  another  genus,  Arceuthobium, 
seems  wholly  confined  to  the  coniferous  trees  which  are  mixed 
with  the  deciduous  ones.  The  name  Arceuthobium  is  suggestive  of 
this  fact,  it  being  derived  from  two  Greek  words  signifying  "  living 
on  the  juniper."  Phoradendron,  on  the  other  hand,  meaning  simply 
"living  on,  or  stealing  from  trees."  Arceuthobium,  however,  did 
not  live  wholly  on  junipers.  In  the  herbarium  of  the  Academy  was 
a  specimen  of  A.  occidentale,  growing  on  Janiperus  occidentalis — 
these  Nevada  specimens  were  on  Pin  usponderosa.  The  specimens 
of  Phorade ndron  j uniper inum  -were  growing  on  Libocedrusdecur- 
rens,  which,  by  the  way,  was,  he  believed,  the  first  time  this  pretty 
cupressineous  tree  had  been  reported  from  the  State  of  Nevada. 
Among  the  difiierences  noted  by  Engelmann  in  the  botany  of 
California,  between  Phoradendron  and  Arceuthobium,  was  that 
while  the  former  flowered  in  February  and  March,  and  matured 
its  fruit  "  next  winter,"  the  fruit  of  the  Californian  species 
opened  in  the  summer,  and  did  not  mature  till  the  "  second 
autumn."  The  European  Mistletoe  was  stated  by  Bentham  to 
open  in  spring,  and  perhaps  this  was  so;  it  was  formerly  supposed 
to  be  the  case  with  the  American  Phoradendron  flavescens,  but 
Mr.  Wm.  Canby  had  shown  to  the  Academy  recently,  that  in 
Delaware  the  fiowers  opened  in  the  fall,  and  the  fruit  matured  in 
the  autumn  of  the  following  year,  or  just  one  year  afterward. 
The  flowers  and  fruit  were  on  tlie  trees  at  the  same  time  together*. 
If  this  were  general  with  Phoradendron,  it  still  lessened  the  dis- 
tinctions between  the  genera.  Usually  Phoradendron  bore  leaves, 
while  Arceuthobium  was  leafless — but  the  Libocedrus  parasite 
was  as  destitute  of  leaves  as  an  Arceuthobium,  and  the  common 
observer  would  see  little  in  their  general  aspects  to  distinguis'h 

'  Mr.  Jos.  .Jeanes  believes  he  saw  a  specimen  some  years  ago  on  Jbies 
Canadensis. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  441 

them.  But  there  Avas  one  great  difference  in  the  genus,  at  least 
as  represented  by  these  two  species.  In  opening  tlie  box  which 
contained  the  specimens,  the  whole  mass  was  covered  with  a 
dense  viscid  secretion,  which  rendered  it  very  difficult  to  separate 
one  branch  from  another.  On  leaving  the  lid  open  a  little  while, 
the  watery  particles  soon  evaporated,  leaving  a  dry  gummy 
deposit  over  the  whole  surface.  While  this  was  going  on,  the 
seeds  were  ejected  with  great  force  from  their  endocarps.  being- 
projected  against  the  face  with  such  force  as  to  leave  a  stinging- 
sensation.  Dr.  Engelmann  has  noted  this  power  of  ejection  in 
the  berries  of  this  plant.  The  Phoradendron  exhibited  no  trace 
of  any  such  power,  though  there  seemed  to  be  little  difference  in 
the  structure  of  the  berries.  The  facts  raised  a  nice  teleological 
question.  Birds  did  not  seem  to  use  the  berries.  As  they  were 
so  viscid  that  the  famous  bird-lime  is  made  from  some  species, 
it  is  |irobable  the  very  visciditv  would  prevent  the  free  use  of  the 
beak  in  any  attempt  to  use  the  seeds.  But  it  was  believed  that 
by  becoming  attached  to  the  feet  or  feathers  of  birds,  the  seeds 
were  widely  distributed,  and  that  in  this  w^ay  the  plant  had  all  the 
advantage  necessary  for  distribution  in  the  "  struggle  for  life." 
But  Arceuthohiuni^  besides  all  the  advantages  to  be  derived  from 
this  mode  of  distribution,  had  an  additional  aid  from  a  projecting 
force. 

Did  Ai'ceuthobium  at  one  time  exist  when  or  where  tliere  were 
no  birds,  and  hnd  it  to  depend  on  projection  alone  for  its  dis- 
tributing power,  and  is  the  viscidity  a  later  development  ?  Did 
Phoradendron  once  possess  the  power,  and  has  it  abandoned  it 
from  having  through  the  ages  found  out  that  it  travels  well 
enough  without  its  exercise  ?  Or  is  it  rather,  as  the  speaker  him- 
self inclined  to  believe,  that  nature  loved  to  aim  expressly  at 
variety,  and  was  continually  exhibiting  her  power  to  accomplish 
the  same  end  by  a  wonderful  variety  of  means  ?  But  whatever 
might  be  thought  of  the  various  theories  of  development,  and 
the  laws  of  final  causes  which  may  have  operated  to  produce 
changes,  there  could  be  but  little  doubt  but  parasitism  was  an 
acquired  habit,  and  the  endeavor  to  find  out  what  these  plants 
w^ere,  and  how  they  behaved  before  they  were  parasites,  was  fast 
becoming  one  of  the  most  interesting  of  biological  studies. 

The  seeds  ejected  from  the  endoearp  in  Arceidhobium  fastened 
themselves  to  the  branches  of  trees  b}^  a  glutinous  mass  at  one 
end.  This  end  was  opposite  to  the  radicle,  which,  in  germinating, 
w'ould  have  to  push  out  from  above,  and  curve  downwards  towards 
the  branch  in  order  to  attach  itself.  He  had  not  seen  them  during 
the  process  of  germination,  but  as  the  testaceous  covering  was 
held  fast  by  the  glutinous  secretion,  it  is  probable  the  cotyledons 
would  be  drawn  out  as  the  plumule  took  its  upright  position, 
leaving  the  testa  as  an  empt}^  case  fastened  to  the  branch.  Pre- 
suming that  this  must  be  the  case  with  other  Loranthaceous 
plants,  it  was  difficult  to  imderstand  the  process  by  which  the 


442  PROCEEDINaS  OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

East  Indian  species  performed  the  locomotive  feat  recently  noted 
by  Dr.  Watt,  and  which  from  its  remarkable  nature  has  hnd  a  Avide 
publicaHon.  It  was  leported  as  the  ob'^ervation  of  Dr.  Watt  that 
a  seed  fallino-  on  and  beconrino;  attached  to  the  coriaceous  leaf 
of  a  Memecylon,  would  send  out  its  radicle,  which,  curving  down, 
formed  a  flattened  disk  by  which  it  attached  itself  to  the  leaf. 
But,  as  if  it  knew  that  a  leaf  could  not  permanently  supi»ort  a 
perennial  plant,  the  cotyledons  were  lifted  and  turned  to  the  other 
side,  when  the  end  with  tlie  disk  moved  to  another  place,  and  in  this 
way,  the  seed  traveled  to  a  more  favorable  spot.  Without  reflecting 
on  the  observation,  Mr.  Meelian  believed  it  should  be  repeated  in 
order  to  be  sure  of  no  mistake.  In  all  plants  in  our  country 
which  fastened  to  an  object  through  a  disk  at  the  end  of  a  rootlet 
or  tendril,  as  in  Ampelopsix  and  Bignonia  capreolata,  the  attach- 
ment was  made  while  the  disk  w-as  forming.  A  disk  once  formed, 
did  not  reattach  itself  to  an  object  when  removed  from  the  original 
spot.  In  like  manner  the  cotyledons,  once  removed  from  the 
endocarps,  would  have  no  viscidity  with  wdiich  to  form  a  resisting 
power  while  the  disk  was  unfastening  itself  from  its  undesirable 
location.  There  was,  however,  so  much  of  singular  behavior  in 
the  Mistletoe  family  that  further  observations  were  very  desirable. 

Dr.  Geo  H.  Horn  observed  that  the  Mistletoe  which  was  para- 
sitic on  the  "Mesquite"  in  Arizona  {Phoradendron  Calif orni- 
cumf)^  had  flowers  and  fruit  together  in  the  autumn. 

Mr.  Geo.  W.  Holstein  observed  that  this  was  also  the  case  with 
the  species  {Phoradendron  Jiavescens?)  which  grew  on  the  elms 
in  Texas. 

DimorphUm  in  a  Willoiv. — Mr.  Thomas  Meehan  called  atten- 
tion to  branches  of  a  willow  on  the  table,  presented  by  a  member, 
Mr.  Edward  Potts,  which  were  gathered  by  his  brother  from  one 
plant  in  the  Adirondacks.  Besides  the  certaint}'  tliat  they  were 
from  one  plant,  for  which  Mr.  Potts  was  willing  to  vouch,  he 
observed  tliat  the  buds  and  other  points  indicated  a  community 
of  origin.  But  while  the  normal  leaves  were  broadly  ovate — 
about  two  inches  long  by  over  one  broad — the  leaves  on  the  other 
branch,  though  quite  as  long,  were  not  over  a  line  wide.  The 
species  so  far  as  one  could  judge  of  a  willow  having  mere  leaves, 
appeared  to  be  Salix  reticulata.  Dimorphism  in  foliage,  is  not 
uncommon  in  many  trees,  but  it  was  worth  noting  that  change  by 
gradual  modification  was  not  the  law  in  these  variations.  The 
change  of  one  form  to  another  quite  dissimilar,  was  usually  made 
b}'  a  wide  leap,  without  any  intemiediale  changes,  and  he  believed 
this  to  be  the  rule  in  specific  as  well  as  individual  dcA^elopment. 
It  was  nothing  against  the  doctrine  of  evolution  that  there  were 
"  missing  links." 

Occurrence  of  the  same  species  of  Protozoa  on  both  sides  of  the 
Atlantic. — Mr.  Ryder  remarked  that  during  his  sojourn  at  Cherry- 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF  PHILADELPHIA.  443 

stone,  Virginia,  he  bad  met  with  another  ciliated  protozoan,  Licno- 
phora  cohnii.  in  the  waters  of  the  Chesapeake,  also  found  in  the 
Mediterranean  and  North  Sea,  and  now  for  the  first  time  recorded 
as  occurring  in  the  American  fauna.  The  existence  of  congeneric 
and  conspecitic  protozoan  forms  on  both  sides  of  the  Atlantic 
had  been  alluded  to  before  by  the  speaker  ;  of  these  he  had  noticed 
Gothurnise,  VorticeMse^  Zoothamnia,  Freia  producta,  Tintinnus, 
Bfiipiododendron,  and  several  Gastrotricha  which  appear  con- 
specific  with  old  world  types. 


October  25. 

The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 

Thirt3Miine  persons  present. 

Art.  3,  Chap.  XV,  of  the  By-Laws  was  amended  by  adding 
after  the  word  "election"  in  the  second  line,  the  words  "and 
resignation." 

Mr.  W.  N.  Lockington  was  elected  a  member. 
The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed : — 


444  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 


NOTE   ON  THE  APPROXIMATE  POSITION  OF  THE   EOCEIJE    DEPOSITS  OF 

MARYLAND. 

BY   ANGELO    IIEILPRIN. 

The  positive  determination  of  the  relation  which  the  older 
Tertiary  deposits  of  Maryland — those  of  Ft.  Washington,  near 
the  City  of  Washington,  and  Piscatawa}^  and  Upper  Marlborough 
in  Prince  George's  County — hold. to  the  typical  American  Eocene 
series  as  exhibited  in  Alabama,  can  only  be  arrived  at  when  a 
direct  stratigraphical  continuity  can  be  traced  between  the 
deposits  of  the  two  states,  or  between  their  previously  recognized 
representatives  in  the  intervening  states.  This  is  due  to  the  fact 
that  several  members  of  the  Eocene  series  appear  to  be  absent 
from  this  portion  of  the  Atlantic  border,  but  exactly  which  it  has 
as  yet  been  impossible  to  determine.  The  presence  of  strata  of 
Jacksonian  age  has  never  been  detected,  nor  have  we  an}' positive 
knowledge  concerning  the  existence  in  the  State  of  any  beds  which 
maybe  looked  upon  as  the  equivalents  of  the  Orbitoide  limestone, 
although  Oligocene  (Vicksburgian)  strata  may  exist  along  the 
Chesapeake.  But  whether  the  deposits  in  question — Ft.  Wash- 
ington, Piscataway,  and  Upper  Marlborough — represent  the 
Cl:iibornian,Buhrstone,or  Eo-Lignitic  is  a  matter  of  considerable 
uncertainty,  perhaps  largely  due  to  their  comparatively  feeble 
development.  Almost  the  onl^'  evidence  we  have  bearing  upon 
this  point  is  derived  from  the  character  of  the  contained  fossils, 
but  even  here  the  results  obtained  are  far  from  satisf^ictor}^,  and 
for  two  reasons:  in  the  first  place,  the  charpcter  of  the  Eocene 
fossils  is  largely  uniform  throughout  the  greater  portion  of  the 
entire  series,  as  is  shown  by  nearly  the  lowest  and  highest 
exposures  in  the  State  of  Alabama  ;  and  in  the  second  place,  the 
great  distance  intervening  between  the  two  localities — Alabama 
and  Maryland — may  readily  account  for  certain  differences  in  the 
general  aspect  of  the  two  fossil  faunas,  which  otherwise  would 
probably  be  attributable  to  a  non-contemporaneity  in  the  periods 
of  their  introduction.  The  evidence  afforded  by  lithological  char- 
acters is  almost  equall}'^  unsatisfactory,  since  there  is  a  frequent 
repetition  of  the  general  rock  aspect — green  sands,  clays,  and 
siliceous  marls — observable  at  different  stages  of  the  series. 
Conrad,  the  only  investigator  whose  observations  on  this  subject 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES   OF  PHILADELPHIA.  445 

are  of  scientific  value,  affirms  tliat  the  majorit}'  of  the  fossil  mol- 
Insca  are  of  the  Claiborne  type,  and  he  conseqnenth^  correlates 
the  beds  containing  them  in  a  general  way  with  those  exposed  on 
the  Alabama  River,  although  without  specially  indicating  with 
what  portion  of  the  Claiborne  section  they  were  supposed  to  cor- 
respond. Indeed,  about  the  onl}^  fossils  obtained  from  tlie  Mary- 
land localities  which  can  in  an}'  way  be  said  to  be  either  charac- 
teristic of  or  peculiar  to  them  are  Fanopea  elongata,  Pholadomya 
Mai-ylandica^  Pholas  ^le/z'osa,  Cucullsea  {Latiarca)  gigantea, 
Osfrea  comprensirostra,  and  one  or  two  doubtful  species  of  Cras- 
satella.  All  the  species  here  named,  if  we  except  the  doubtful 
Grafisatellas  and  Ostrea  compressirostra  are  good  species,  and  if 
we  further  deduct  Cucullsea  gigantea^  the  onl}^  Eocene  species  of 
the  genera  to  which  they  belong  thus  far  discovered  in  the  eastern 
or  southern  United  States.  On  the  whole,  therefore,  the^^  afford 
little  or  no  clue  to  the  exact  determination  of  the  age  of  the 
deposits  in  which  they  occur.  It  is  true  that  an  examination  of 
the  homotaxial  deposits  of  Europe  shows  the  genera  Pholadomya 
and  Panopea  to  be  more  especially  characteristic  of  the  lower  or 
even  lowermost  horizons  of  the  Eocene  series,  as  in  the  English 
and  French  basins,  but  no  special  inference  can  be  drawn  from 
this  circumstance,  since  the  species  are  not  the  same,  and  the 
genera  survived  through  tlie  succeeding  periods  to  the  present 
day.  In  the  case  of  Osti^ea  compressirostra,  however,  we  have  a 
much  more  tangible  point.  The  species,  first  described  and 
figured  b}^  Sa}^  (Journal  of  the  Academ}'  of  Natural  Sciences,  iv, 
p.  133),  is  certainl}"^  very  intimately  related  to  the  Ostrea  Bellova- 
cina  of  Lamarck,  and  apparentl}^  undistinguishable  from  certain 
varieties  of  that  species.^  Now  this  species,  although  not  exclu- 
sivel}'  restricted  to  the  lowest  Eocene  beds,  is  nevertheless  highly 
characteristic  of  the  Thanet  sands,  below  the  London  Clay  proper 
and  also  below  what  was  formerl}^  designated  as  the  "  Plastic 
Clay  "  series,  where  it  constitutes  a  true  basement  accumulation  ; 
and  it  holds  almost  precisely  the  same  relation  to  the  beds  of  the 
Paris  basin,  where,  according  to  Deshayes  {Animaux  s.  Vertebres^ 

^  The  distinguishing  characters  of  the  beaks  pointed  out  by  Say  do  not 
seem  to  hold  in  many  instances,  as  is  proved  by  specimens  of  the  G.  Bello- 
vacina  from  the  "  London  Clay"  of  Bognor,  England,  in  the  collections  of 
the  Academy,  which  do  not  dift'er  as  much  from  certain  American  speci- 
mens as  these  last  do  among  themselves. 


44G  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

Bassin  de  Paris,  li,  p.  117)  it  occupies  tlie  boiizon  of  the  Bracheux 
sands.  The  species  wherever  found  appears  to  be  considerably 
restricted  in  its  vertical  range,  and  its  occurrence,  therefore,  in 
some  of  the  American  deposits  would  seem  to  afford  some  more 
decided  indication  of  the  true  age  of  tliose  deposits  than  could  be 
obtained  from  the  character  of  the  limited  number  of  its  con- 
tained fossils  taken  as  a  whole.  Associated  with  Ostrea  compres- 
sirostra  were  found  casts  of  the  large  Cucullsea  gigantea  (Conrad, 
Journ.  Ac.  Nat.  Sciences,  vi,  p.  215, 1830;,  a  species  which  appears 
not  to  be  represented  in  any  of  the  equivalent  European  forma- 
tions. But  in  Virginia,  in  beds  which  can  be  shown  to  be  tlie 
direct  equivalents  of  those  of  Maryland,  there  occurs  in  addition 
to  the  G.  gigantea  of  Conrad,  a  second  species  of  Cuculleta^  the 
C,  onochela  of  Rogers  (Trans.  Am.  Philos.  Soc,  new  ser.,  vi,  p. 
373  ;  Latiarca  idonea  Conr.,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sciences,  1872,  p. 
53 — no  locality  stated),  which,  if  not  identical  with  tlie  C.  craa- 
satina  of  Lamarck,  from  the  Bracheux  sands  of  the  Paris  basin, 
is  certainly  most  intimately  related  to  it,  and  can  be  considered  in 
every  wa}-  as  its  immediate  representative,^  It  should  also  be 
stated  that  the  only  other  species  of  Cucullsea  described  by  Des- 
hayes  {Animaux  s.  Vertehr.^  Bassin  de  Fai-is,  i,  p.  i09)  from  the 
Paris  basin  (  G.  incerta  Desh.)  is  found  in  the  same  horizon  with 
the  6'.  crassa^ina,  and,  likewise,  the  single  species  described  by 
Searles  Wood  from  the  older  Tertiaiies  of  England  is  a  /oicer 
Eocene  form 

If  such  comparisons  are  of  any  value  stratigraphically  we  may 
fairly  look  upon  the  Mar3dand  Eocene  deposits — the  Piscataway 
sands  below,  and  the  Marlborough  rock  above — as  representing  a 
horizon  nearly  equal  to  that  of  the  Thanet  sands  of  p]ngland  and 
the  Bracheux  sands  of  the  Paris  basin,  or  of  the  British  Bognor 

'  I  have  had  no  specimens  of  tha  European  species  with  which  to  insti- 
tute direct  comparisons,  but  as  tlie  species  is  a  large  one,  and  with  well- 
defined  characters,  I  have  relied  upon  the  figures  and  characters  as  fur- 
nished by  Daalvc^ye^ {Coquilles  Fossile»,  Enmrons  de  Paris,  i,  p.  198  ;  Atlas, 
PL  xxxi,  tigs.  8  and  9),  which  are  well  known  for  their  accuracy.  The  C. 
crassatina  is  catalogued  by  Prestwich  (Quart.  Journ.  Geol.  Soc,  1834,  p. 
109)  and  Morris  ("Cat.  Brit.  Foss.,"  p.  197)  as  being  also  an  English 
form,  and  as  belonging  to  the  Thanet  series,  but  by  Searles  Wood  ('•  Mon- 
ograph of  the  Eocene  Mollusca  "  Bivalves,  in  Pakeont.  Soc.  Reports,  1861, 
p.  94),  the  species  occurring  at  Ilerne  Bay,  Faversliani,  etc.,  is  oousideied 
to  be  distinct  (  C.  decussata  Park). 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA.  447 

rock  (=  London  Clay).^     In  either  case  they  would  be  near  the 
base  of  the  Eocene  series. 

In  the  scale  of  the  American  series  as  exhibited  in  Alabama, 
they  would  occupy  a  position  probably  near  the  base  of  the 
"  Buhrstone,"  or  possibl}^  even  lower,  as  the  equivalents  of  the 
beds  exposed  <m  Bashia  Creek,  and  Cave  and  Knight's  Branches 
("  Eo-lignitic  "). 

^  The  similarity  existing  between  the  Marlborough  and  Bognor  rocks 
has  been  pointed  out  by  Conrad  (Proc.  National  Institution,  p.  172,  1841). 


3) 


448  PROCEEDINGS   OF  THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 


A  REVISION  OF  THE    TERTIARY    SPECIES  OF    ARCA  OF   THE   EASTERN 
AND  SOUTHERN  UNITED  STATES. 

BY  ANGELO  HEILPRIN. 

In  the  following  enumeration  I  have  reduced  all  the  species  to 
the  single  genus  Area,  the  various  modifications  of  form  and 
ornamentation  not  appearing  to  me  to  be  either  sufficiently  well 
marked,  or  of  suflflcient  importance,  to  constitute  points  for  generic 
subdivision.  The  Area  gigantea  Sind  A.  onochela  are  forms  which 
would  fall  in  the  subgenus  Cucullaea. 

The  names  in  parentheses  are  those  under  which  the  species  are 
indicated  in  the  "Smithsonian  Check  Lists  "  of  1864  and  1866; 
they  are  repeated  here  merely  to  facilitate  comparisons  with  those 
lists,  and  in  no  way  represent  the  views  of  the  author  on  the  sub- 
ject of  generic  relationship. 

Eocene. 

A.  aspera  Conr.  (Barbatia;  Calliarca)  Jacksonian.  Miss. 

Proc.  A.  N,  S.,  vii,  p.  258,  as  Navicula. 

A.  cucuUoides  Conr.  (Cucullaroa).  Ala. 

Tert.  Foss,,  1st  ed,,  p.  37. 

A.  gigantea  Conr.  (Latiarca).  •  Md. 

J.  A.  N.  S.,  vi,  p.  227. 

?  A.  lima  Conr.   Jacksonian.  Tex. 

J.  A,  N.  S.,  2d  ser.,  p.  125,  as  Byssoarca. 
A.  (Byssoarca)   Misaissippiensis   Conr,      J.  A.  N.  S.,  2d  ser.,  p.  125 

(young). 
Cibota  Missiasippiensis  Gabb.     J.  A.  N.  S.,  iv,  2d  ser.,  p.  387. 

I  am  somewhat  doubtful  as  to  the  correct  determination  of  his 
species  by  Gabb. 

A.  onochela  Rogers  (Latiarca),  Va. 

Trans,  Am,  Phil,  Soc,  1839,  p,  372,  as  CumlloBa. 
Latiarca  idonea  Conr.    Proc.  A,  N.  S,,  1872,  p,  53  (no  locality). 

This  species  appears  to  be  very  closely  related  to,  if  not  identical 
with  the  Cueullsea  crassatina  of  Lamarck,  from  the  lower 
Soissonnais  sands  of  the  Paris  basin,  and  possibly  also  from  the 
British  Bognor  rock, 

A  protraota  Rogers  (Ana''ara).  Va. 

Trans.  Am,  Phil.  Soc,  new  ser,,  v,  p.  332. 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  449 

I  have  seen  no  specimen  of  this  species,  and  therefore  rely 
solely  upon  the  description  and  figure  as  given  by  Rogers ;  I  am 
inclined  to  doubt  its  validity. 

A.  rhomboidella  Lea.  (Anomalocardia).  Ala' 

"Contributions  to  Geology,"  p.  74. 

A.  Bogersi  Heilpr.  V;i . 

Area    (Cucullcea)  transversa  Rogers.      Trans.  Am.  Phil.  Soc,  1839, 
p.  373.     Specific  name  transversa,  preoccupied  by  Say. 

I  have  seen  no  specimen  of  this  species,  and  judging  from  the 
figures  illustrative  of  Rogers'  description  it  appears  as  though  it 
may  prove  to  be  only  a  variety  of  A.  onochela. 

Oligocene. 
A.  lima  Conr.  Miss. 

J.  A.  N.  S.,  i,  2d  ser.,  p.  125,  as  Byssoarea. 

A.  {Byssoarea)  Mississippiensis  Conr.  (young).     J.  A.  N.  S.,  i,  2d  ser., 

p.  125. 

This  species  is  most  closely  related  to  the  A.  rudis  Desh.,  an 
Eocene,  Oligocene  and  Miocene  (?)  fossil  of  western  and  southern 
Europe ;  it  differs  from  the  recent  A.  Helhingii  Brug.  (=  A. 
harhata  L.  ?),  of  which  the  A.  rudis  is  stated  by  Deshayes  to  be 
possibly  only  a  variety,  in  the  strong  carination  of  the  posterior 
slope. 

A.  Mississippiensis  Conr.  Miss. 

J.  A.  N.  S.,  i,  2d  ser.,  p.  125. 

A.  sabprotracta  Heilpr.  Mis?. 

Conrad,  J.  A.  N.  S.,  i,  2d  ser.,  p.  126,  as  Byssoarea  protracta ;  specific 
name  preoccupied  by  Rogers,  Trans.  Am.  Phil.  Soc,  new  ser.,  v, 
p.  332. 

Miocene. 

A.  arata  Say  (Scapharca).  Md. 

J.  A.  N.  8.,  iv,  p.  137.     Conr.,  Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  58. 

This  species  is  enumerated  on  the  authority  of  Sa}^  and  Conrad  ; 
I  have  seen  no  specimens  of  it,  and  am  doubtful  whether  it  is  not 
a  form  subsequently  described  under  a  new  name  by  Conrad.  It 
seems  to  have  been  closely  related  either  to  A.  limula  or  A.  Car- 
olinensis. 

A.  brevidesma  Conr.  N.  Car. 

Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  62, 

(Not  enumerated  in  the  "  Smithsonian  Check  List  "  of  1864.) 


450  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

A.  buccula  Conr.  N.  Car. 

Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  60, 

(Not  enumerated  in  the  "  Smithsonian  Check  List  "  of  1864.) 

A.  caelata  Conr.  (IJarbatin).  N.  Car. 

Mioc.  Foss  ,  p.  61. 

A.  callipleura  Conr.  (Scapha'ca).  Md. 

Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  54. 

A.  Carolinensis  Conr.  (Noetia).  N.  Car. 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  1863,  p.  290,  as  A.  ponderosa  var.  Carolinensis. 

This  species  differs  from  the  recent  A.  jDonderoaa  (Say)  of  the 
Atlantic  coast  in  having  a  comparatively  longer  hinge  margin,  a 
much  more  elongated  posterior  slope,  and  the  umbones  less  promi- 
nently incurved. 

A.  oentenaria  Say  (Striarca).  Va. ;  Md. ;  N.  Car. 

J.  A.  N.  S.,  iv,  p.  138.     Conrad,  Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  55. 
Emmons,  Geol.  N.  Car.,  1858,  p.  284. 

This  species  \Qvy  closely  resembles  both  in  outline  and  general 
ornamentation  the  recent  A.  solida  (Brod.  and  Swby.),  but  it 
lacks  the  posterior  carination  of  that  species,  and  the  ribs  are 
much  less  distinctly  beaded. 

A  idonea  Conr.  (Scapharca).  Md. ;  N.  Car. 

Tert.  Fossils,  2d  ed.,  p.  16.     Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  55. 
Emmons,  Geol.  N.  Car.,  p.  285. 
A,  stilicidium? *  Conr.     Tert.  Foss.,  2d  ed.,  p.  15. 

*  This  species  is  stated  by  Conrad  (Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  55)  to  be  the  young 
of  A.  idonea  ;  I  have  not  seen  sufficient  specimens  of  the  former  to  deter- 
mine this  point  with  positiveness,  but  the  variation  scarcely  appears  to  be 
of  specific  value.  Both  species  are  recorded  in  the  "Smithsonian  Check 
List"  for  1864. 

The  A.  idonea  greatl}^  resembles  the  A.  incongrua  of  Say,  a 
recent  species  from  the  southern  Atlantic  coasts  of  the  United 
States,  from  which,  however,  it  can  be  readily  distinguished  by 
several  well-defined  characters.  In  A.  idonea  the  anterior  ribs 
are  narrower  than  the  interspaces,  whereas,  in  A.  incongrua 
(where  the  ribs  are  much  more  prominently  transversely  barred) 
the  reverse  is  very  decidedly  the  case.  Again,  in  A.  idonea  the 
hinge  area  is  marked  with  several  "  diamond-shaped  "  longi- 
tudinal impressions,  while  in  A.  incongrua  it  is  transversely 
striated.  The  shell  in  the  recent  species  is  also  much  more 
prominently  inequivalve. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  451 

A.  incile  Say  (Anadara).  Va. ;  N.  Car. 

J.  A.  N.  S.,  iv,  p.  139.     Conrad,  Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  56. 
Emmons,  Geol.  N.  Car.,  1858,  p.  284. 

A.  lienosa  Say  (Scnpharca).  N.  Car. 

American  Conchology,  PI.  36,  fig.  1. 
Emmons,  Geol.  N.  Car.,  p,  384. 

This  species  appears  to  be  undistiuguishable  from  tlie  recent 
A.  Floridana  Conr.,  the  specific  name  of  wliich  will  consequently 
have  to  be  replaced  b}^  that  of  Say's  species,  which  has  priorit}'. 

A.  limula  Conr.  (Noetia).  Va. :  X.  Car. 

Tert.  Foss.,  2d  ed.,  p.  15  ;  Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  60. 

A.  Marylandicus  Conr.  (Barbatia).  Md. 

Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  54,  as  Byssoarca. 

A.  plioatura  Conr.  (Scapharca).  N.  Car. 

Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  61. 

A.  improcera  Conr.     Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  60  (young). 
A.  lirieolata  Conr.     Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  61. 
A.  (equicostat.a  *  Conr.     Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  60. 

*  I  have  seen  no  authenticated  specimens  of  this  last,  but  feel  satis- 
fied that  it  is  no  other  than  tlie  A.  lineolata,  with  the  description  of  which 
it  thoroughly  agrees.  A  specimen  of  A.  lineolata,  so  marked  by  Conrad, 
is  the  one  from  which  the  figure  of  A.  mquicostata  in  Mioc.  Foss.  ^Pl.  31, 
fig.  6)  has  been  taken. 

The  A.  plicatura  (I  have  retained  the  name  as  best  illustrative 
of  the  specific  character  of  the  fossil)  differs  principally  from  the 
recent  A.  transversa  of  Say  in  being  a  less  capacious  shell,  and 
in  having  the  posterior  slope  much  less  distinctly  angulated  or 
carinated.  The  young  shells  of  both  species  appear  to  be  undis- 
tiuguishable from  each  other,  and  although  there  are  sufficiently 
well-marked  characters  separating  the  full  grown,  I  have  but  little 
hesitation  in  believing  that  the  coast  shell  of  the  present  day 
(which  appears  also  as  a  post-Pliocene  fossil)  is  only  a  derivative 
from  the  fossil  form.  The  A.  plicatura  recalls  the  A.  diluvii, 
from  the  European  Miocene  deposits. 

A.  propatula  Conr.  (Barbatia).  Va, 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  i,  p.  323  ;  Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  61. 
?  Area  hians  Tuomey  and  Holmes.     Plioc.  Foss.,  p.  34. 

The  figure  of  this  species  in  the  "  Pleiocene  Fossils,"  very 
closel}'  resembles  the  type  specimen  of  Conrad's  A.  propatula^ 
and   I  have  but  very  little  doubt  (although  I  have  not  seen  an 


452  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

authenticated  specimen  of  A.  hians)  tliat  the  two  species  are  in 
fact  identical,  despite  the  supposed  distinctions  pointed  out  by 
Tuouiey  and  Holmes. 

A.  soalaris  Conr.  (Scapharca)  N.  Car. ;  Va. 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  i,  p.  324  ;  Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  59. 

A.  subrostata  Cinr.  (Scapharcn),  Md. 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  i,  p.  30.     Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  58. 
A.  tenuicardo  Conr.     Am.  Journ.  of  Conchology,  v,  p.  39. 

A.  subsinuata  Conr.  (Scapbarca).  N.  Car. 

Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  62. 

A.  transversa  Say  (Scapbarca).  Va.;  N.  Car 

J.  A,  N.  S.,  ii,   p.   269.       Conrad,   Foss.  Shells  Tert.  Form.,  p.  15; 
Emmons,  Geol.  of  North  Carolina,  1858,  p.  285. 

I  have  but  little  doubt  that  the  species  here  described  is  one  of 
tlic  various  forms  of  A.  plicatura. 

A   iriquetra  Conr.  (Scapbarca),  Md. 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  i,  p.  305.     Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  59. 
=  A.  staminea?  Say,  "American  Conchology,"  p.  36,  fig.  2.   (In  Say's 

description  the  anterior  extremity  of  the  shell  is  described  as  the 

posterior,  and  vice  versa). 

Somewhat  resembles  the  recent  A.  rhombea  (Born). 

Pliocene. 

A.  caelata  Conr.  (Barbatia).  S.  Car. 

Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  61.     Tuomey  and  Holmes,  Plioc.  Foss.,  p.  36. 

A.  centenaria  Say  (Striarca).  S.  Car. 

J.  A.  N.  S.,  iv,  p.  138.     Tuomey  and  Holmes,  Plioc.  Foss.,  p.  37. 

.A.  incile  Say  (Anadara).  S.  Car. 

J.  A.N.  S.,  iv,  p.  139.     Tuomey  and  Holmes,  Plioc.  Foss.,  p.  35. 

A.  incongrua  Say  (Scapbarca).  S.  Car. 

J.  A.N.  S.,  ii,  p.  268.     Tuomey  and  Holmes,  Plioc.  Foss.,  p.  45. 

A.  pexata  S  'y  ( Argina).  S.  Car. 

J.  A.  N.  S.,  ii,  p.  268.     Tuomey  and  Holmes,  Plioc.  Foss.,  p.  46. 

A.  soalaris  Conr.  (Scapharca).  S.  Car. 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  i,  p.  324.     Tuomey  and  Holmes,  Plioc.  Foss.,  p.  43. 

A.  lienosa  Say  (Scapbarca).  S.  Car. 

American  Conchology,   PI.  36,  fig.  1.     Tuomey  and  Holmes,    Plioc. 
Foss.,  p.  40. 

A.  plicatura  Conr.  (Scapharca).  S.  Car. 

Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  61. 
A.  improcera  (young)  Conr.  ;  Tuomey  and  Holmes,  Plioc.  Foss.,  p.  41. 


► 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES    OF    PHILADELPHIA.  453 

1  A.  propatula  Conr.  (Barbatia).  S.  Car. 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  i,  p.  323.     Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  61. 

Area  hians,  Tuomey  and  Holmes,  Plioc.  Foss.,  p.  34,     See  note  under 
A.  propatula  (Miocene). 

A.  rustica  Tuomey  and  Holmes  (Scapharca).  S.  Car. 

Mioc.  Foss.,  p.  39. 

I  have  seen  no  specimen  of  this  species,  and  can  therefore  not 
pronounce  upon  its  validity.  The  fragment  illustrated  in  the 
"  Pleiocene  Fossils  "  scarcely  admits  of  recognition. 

A.  trigintinaria  Conr.  (Anadara).  S.  Car. 

Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  1862,  p.  289,  as  Anomalocardia. 

Area  Americana^  A.  Garolinensis,  A.  incongrua,  A.  lienosa 
A.  pexata,  A.  ponderosa,  and  A.  transversa  occur  in  the  post- 
Pliocene  deposits ;  A.  ccdata  is  also  reported  from  the  South 
Carolina  deposits  of  that  age  by  F.  S.  Holmes, 


454  proceedings  of  the  academy  of  [1881. 

November  1,  1881. 
The  President,  Dr.  Rusciienberger,  in  tlie  chair. 
Thirty-four  persons  present. 

Color  in  Autumn  Leaves. — Mr.  Thomas  Meehan  referred  to  an 
excursion  to  the  Salt  Marshes  of  New  Jersey,  organized  by  a 
member  of  the  Academ}'^,  Mr.  Isaac  C.  Martindale,  and  generously 
seconded  by  the  Camden  and  Atlantic  Railroad  Company,  which 
furnished  a  special  train  of  twelve  cars  for  the  company,  with  the 
privilege  of  stopping  along  the  road  at  interesting  botanical  points. 
This  gave  unusual  opportunity  to  examine  the  vegetation  of  the 
Salt  Marshes,  which,  at  this  season  of  the  jghy  presented  a  scene 
of  colored  beaut}^  unequaled  perhaps  in  the  whole  world. 

Mr.  Meehan  remarked  that  the  vegetation  which  for  the  most 
part  made  up  this  flora,  was  either  precisely  the  same  as  those 
which  entered  into  the  flora  of  similar  localities  in  western  Europe, 
or  else  of  species  so  closely  allied  that  onl}'^  critical  examination 
would  show  the  distinction.  The  plant  which  gave  the  greatest 
brilliancy,  chiefly  on  account  of  its  numerical  proportions,  was 
Salicornia  herbacea,  the  same  plant  which  abounds  along  European 
shores.  To  the  rich  ros}^  red  of  this  species  Salicornia  mucronata 
(of  Bigelow,  S.  Virginica  of  most  authors)  added  a  rosy  brown. 
Although  this  species  is  American  there  are  forms  of  S.  herbacea 
on  the  English  coast,  which  approach  it.  The  third  species  is  S. 
amhigua  of  Michaux,  a  perennial  species,  and  the  analogue  of  the 
British  S.  radicans.  This  one  never  changes  its  bright  green 
color  till  severe  frost  destroys  it.  The  lively  green  very  much 
enlivens  the  brilliancy  of  the  orange,  red  and  brown  in  the  other 
marsh  plants.  The  species  precisely  the  same  with  those  of  En- 
gland which  gave  color  to  the  marshes  besides  these  Salicornias 
were  Salsola  Kali^  Suseda  maritima,  Atrijylex 2)atula,  Polygonum 
maritinum,  Spartina  stricta^  Spartina  juncea,  and  Ammophila 
arenaria — the  three  last  grasses  which  add  much  by  their  light 
browns  to  the  richness  of  the  whole.  Statice  Limoniuni,  by  its 
faded  blue-gray  tint,  gave  a  peculiar  element  to  the  color.  Aster 
fiexuosus.^  closely  related  to  Aster  Tripolium  of  European  marshes 
furnished  a  tint  of  purple-green.  So  far  as  could  be  observed  of 
the  many  other  species  of  plants  which  might  be  collected,  these 
were  the  only  ones  giving  character  to  the  beautifully  colored 
picture  the  marshes  presented  at  this  time. 

The  most  interesting  inquiiy  here  presents  itself — Why  should 
plants  common  in  the  main  to  both  continents,  color  so  much 
more  brightly  in  America  than  in  Europe?  We  are  reminded 
that  what  we  see  here  in  these  marsh  plants,  does  not  hold  good 
with  close  allies  in  other  sj^ecies.  Among  trees  and  shrubs  there 
are  some  peculiar  to  each  country,  but  closely  allied,  in  which  all 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  455 

the  American  allies  color,  while  the  European  rarely  do.  He 
named  on  the  American  side,  Betula  populifolia^  Fraxinus  sambuci- 
folia,  Quercus  alba^  Crataegus  cordata^  Ulmus  Americana,  Alnus 
serridata,  Castanea  Americana^  as  against  Betula  alba,  Fraxinus 
excelsior,  Quercus  Robur,  Crataegus  oxyacantha,  Ulmus  cam- 
pestris,  Alnus  glutinosa  and  Castanea  vesca.  The  whole  Ameri- 
can line  had  autumn  coloring,  of  which  the  parallel  European 
line  was  wholl}^  destitute.  These  trees  did  not  lose  this  character- 
istic by  removal  to  the  other  continent.  In  America  there  were 
many  of  the  European  species  five  or  ten  generations  from  seed, 
and  yet  these  last  genei'ations  showed  no  more  disposition  to 
embrace  the  color  characteristics  of  their  American  cousins, 
than  did  the  first  progenitor  brought  from  abroad.  We  were 
so  accustomed  to  associate  our  bright  clear  autumn  skies  with 
the  color  of  our  autumn  foliage,  that  facts  like  these  stagger  us. 
Wh}'  should  several  generations  of  these  European  trees  resist 
our  climatal  influences  ?  But  we  have  to  remember  that  the  coloi*- 
ing  of  fruits  and  foliage  is  not  wholl}-  the  result  of  chemical  power ; 
what  for  want  of  a  better  name  we  know  as  vital  power,  claims 
a  share. 

Some  apples  have  color  on  the  sunny  side,  while  the  I'osy  cheek 
never  appears  on  those  of  the  same  variet}'  hidden  b^^  the  foliage, 
and  in  these  cases  ib  is  self-evident  sunlight  is  a  cause  of  color. 
Yet  if  we  pluck  such  a  variety  from  the  tree,  and  place  it  in  the 
sunlight,  it  will  not  color,  so  that  we  see  here  that  there  must  be 
a  connection  with  the  living  principle  in  the  tree  to  enable  the 
solar  ra3^s  to  act.  Yet  it  requires  a  relaxation  of  the  leaf's  hold 
on  life  to  bring  out  these  colors.  At  any  time  during  the  summer, 
a  maturing  leaf  on  an  American  tree  exhibits  bright  color — yet  it 
a  djnug  leaf  half-colored,  be  plucked  from  the  parent  stem,  there 
is  no  further  change  in  the  tint.  Mau}^  leaves  pass  through  grades, 
as  green,  light  yellow,  orange,  brown,  to  scarlet.  If  they  are 
gathered  at  yellow  or  brown,  the3-  remain  3^ellow  or  brown,  and 
so  on  all  through  these  stages.  Coloring  therefore,  could  not 
whollj'^  be  considered  chemically,  for  though  deca}^,  Avhieh  we  take 
to  be  a  chemical  action,  is  going  on  during  the  coloring  stage, 
complete  separation  from  the  living  tree  at  once  stops  the  process. 

If  we  consider  these  two  facts  together,  and  then  some  other 
known  natural  laws,  we  may  form  some  reasonable  hypothesis. 
There  is,  for  instance,  the  principle  of  heredity,  so  ably  insisted 
on  b}^  Mr.  Darwin,  in  connection  with  all  living  things.  A  force 
once  applied  to  an  object,  exerts  an  influence  after  the  power  has 
been  removed.  A  Avheel  runs  round,  after  the  hand  which  turns 
it  is  taken  away,  and  a  change  in  a  plant  brought  about  by  any 
circumstance  will  continue  in  connection  with  that  plant  some 
generations  after  the  circumstances  have  ceased  to  exist.  That 
this  is  so  has  been  proved  by  Naudin  with  hybrid,  or  perhaps  we 
should  say  crossed,  lettuces,  and  in  other  ways.     Supposing  then 


456  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

these  closely  allied  species  to  have  been  originally  of  one  parent- 
age, how  did  the  power  in  one  case  to  change  to  bright  color,  or 
in  the  other  to  resist  the  tendency  to  color,  originate  ?  If  by 
chemical  power  alone,  it  would  occur  at  once,  as  a  piece  of  white 
wood  is  at  once  browned  by  fire,  but  with  the  vital  principle 
opposed  to  this  chemically  destructive  principle,  it  would  take 
more  time  to  accomplish  this  change;  and  the  change, once  made, 
would  again  require  more  time  to  again  alter  the  fixed  condition. 
This  is  essentiall}^  the  foundation  of  the  law  of  heredit}^,  and  under 
its  operation  we  could  not  reasonably  look  for  a  change  in  the  color- 
ing power  of  these  European  trees  although  light  were  an  active 
agent,  under  even  more  than  five  or  ten  inherited  generations. 

At  any  rate  we  have  in  these  salt-marsh  plants  the  evidence  that 
the  plants  of  one  country,  in  that  country  colorless,  can  be  made 
to  take  the  most  brilliant  colors  when  growing  in  ours.  That 
these  plants  had  one  primarj^  origin  is  certain,  though  the  ancestry 
ma}'  have  been  separated  b}^  thousands  of  years.  We  know  that 
plants  introduced  at  once  do  not  change  at  once — hei-edity  forbids 
it.  We  may  assume  therefore  that  it  was  only  after  some  genera- 
tions on  the  American  coast,  under  the  influence  perhaps  of 
American  light,  that  these  European  plants  showed  their  Ameri- 
can colors.  We  can  see  in  these  annual  plants,  with  a  new  gener- 
ation every  year,  the  results  in  numerous  generations,  as  we 
cannot  see  in  the  slower  reproducing  tree. 

Mr.  Meehan  thought  that  though  we  could  not  say  we  had  yet 
reached  an  unchallengeable  solution  of  the  cause  of  autumn  color 
in  American  foliage,  considerations  like  these  brought  us  nearer 
to  the  end. 


November  8. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-six  persons  present. 

On  Movements  and  Paralysis  in  the  Leaves  of  Rohinia. — Mr, 
Thomas  Meehan  said  that  an  inquiry  of  Prof.  Sargent  for  a  trunk 
of  Rohinia  viscosa  for  the  National  Forestry  Census,  had  led  him 
to  look  closely  into  the  history  of  Rohinia  in  general,  with  some 
interesting  results. 

Though  our  text-books  gave  "  Virginia  and  Southwards  "  as 
the  native  location  of  the  tree,  no  one  seems  to  have  collected  it 
of  late  years.  Indeed  herbarium  specimens  generally  seemed  to 
be  from  cultivated  plants,  and  he  could  find  nowhere  direct 
evidence  that  it  had  ever  been  found  wild  by  any  botanist  since 
its  original  discovery  by  Wm.  Bartram,  as  we  learn  from  his 
"  Travels,"  and  Michaux,  as  recorded  by  Ventenat  in  his  "  Plants 
of  the  Garden  of  Cels,"  towards  the  end  of  the  last  century.     In 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  451 

northeastern  Pennsylvania  and  contiguous  parts  of  New  Jersey 
he  had  seen  it  the  past  season,  in  a  number  of  places  in  gardens, 
and  in  most  cases  it  was  stated  that  the  plants  had  originally  been 
obtained  from  almost  inaccessible  places  on  the  high  hills  of  that 
part  of  the  country.  The  fact  that  in  these  remote  places  trees 
from  the  distant  nurseries  are  seldom  obtained,  together  with  the 
fact  that  the  plant  is  not  now  nor  probably  has  been  for  many 
years  cultivated  in  American  nurseries,  makes  it  possible  that  the 
reports  are  true,  and  the  plant  may  be  found  in  the  spurs  of  the" 
higher  Allegheny  range.  The  highly  viscose  character  of  this 
species  is  interesting.  The  excretory  glands  are  low  and  broad, 
with  a  crater-like  mouth,  from  which  the  sticky  matter  flows,  and 
soon  covers  the  stem  as  with  a  thick  coat  of  varnish.  The  viscid 
strength  was  such  that  in  some  instances  the  mere  contact  with  a 
lead-pencil  was  sufficient  to  draw  a  branch  towards  the  person 
pulling  it.  So  man}^  plants  with  viscid  secretions  have  insects 
found  adhering  to  the  sticky  matter,  that  it  has  been  shrewdly 
suspected  the  secretion  in  such  cases  is  a  design  for  entrapping 
insects,  from  which  the  plant  perhaps  obtains  a  better  supply  of 
nitrogen  than  in  the  ordinary  manner  through  the  atmosphere. 
In  the  case  of  this  clamm}^  locust  no  insect  was  found  adhering, 
though  it  would  seem  probable  that  some  few,  b}'  blind  accident, 
at  least,  ought  to  have  been  found  there.  For  what  purpose  in 
the  economy  of  the  plant  this  secretion  is  formed,  cannot  be 
conjectured.  From  this  view  of  individual  benefit  alone  to  the 
plant,  or  to  the  race,  the  secretion  seemed  an  enormous  waste  of 
nutritive  power.  This  waste  seemed  even  more  conspicuous  in 
the  inflorescence.  It  was  too  early  to  judge  of  the  amount  of 
seed  the  plants  would  produce ;  but  many  flowers  had  fallen, 
leaving  no  ovarium  behind  in  a  single  instance.  There  were  no 
indications  that  a  solitary  seed-vessel  would  result  from  all  the 
flowers  which  had  expanded  np  to  that  time ;  and  if  any  seed 
perfected,  they  would  have  to  be  from  a  few  of  the  later  flowers. 
In  any  event,  the  amount  of  waste  material  in  the  barren  flowers 
was  enormous. 

Here  it  was  remembered  that  a  belief  widely  prevails  which 
regards  flowers  and  insects  as  having  been  interadapted  to  each 
other.  It  is  believed  not  only  that  flowers  are  often  to  be  cross- 
fertilized  by  insects  before  they  can  perfect  seed,  but  that  special 
insects  are  adapted  to  certain  plants,  which  in  the  absence  of 
these  special  insects  remained  barren.  An  ally  of  this  clammy 
Robinia,  Robinia  hispida,  has  been  under  culture  in  America  and 
Europe  for  a  great  many  years ;  but  the  speaker  said  he  had 
never  seen  nor  knew  of  any  one  who  had  seen  a  single  seed-vessel 
from  any  garden  plant.  He  had  come  to  believe  it  probable  that 
some  special  insect,  adapted  to  the  pollinization  of  this  plant, 
existed  in  the  native  place  of  growth  of  this  species,  but  which 
insect  had  not  followed  the  plant  in  its  artificial  distribution  over 
the  earth.     This  season  he  had  found  the  plant,  for  the  first  time 


458  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

in  his  botanical  explorations,  on  the  top  of  Lookout  Mountain  in 
Tennessee;  but  there,  as  under  cultivation,  he  failed  to  see  a 
single  seed-vessel.  He  had  been  asked  since,  by  a  distinguished 
Belgian  scientific  gentleman,  whether  he  noted  any  plants  among 
the  others  which  indicated  a  possibility  of  being  recent  seedlings. 
It  had  not  occurred  to  him  to  look  especially  for  these ;  but  they 
w^ould  in  all  probability  have  been  noticed  if  they  had  been 
present.  He  said  it  was  not  to  be  inferred  that  because  neither 
lie  nor  others  had  found  seed,  the  plant  never  produced  them. 
Experience  with  many  other  plants  showed  that  they  might  be 
barren  for  years,  and  then  become  suddenly  fertile.  It  was  more 
than  probable  that  long  in  the  past  these  species  were  seminally 
fertile,  perhaps  capable  of  self-fertilization,  and  that  the  infertility 
of  the  flowers  is  a  modern  imbecility,  which,  as  indicated  in  his 
Detroit  paper  before  the  American  Association  for  the  Ad  vancement 
of  Science,  is  the  general  concomitant  of  a  species  which  has  almost 
run  its  race.  That  these  two  species  rarely  produced  seeds  in 
modern  times  might  be  inferred  from  the  fact,  that  though  both 
were  very  fertile  in  suckers,  they  were  certainly  limited  to  very 
few  locations.  If  with  the  power  of  producing  seed  to  any 
considerable  extent,  they  would  soon  spread  over  wide  areas.  If 
they  had  been  deprived  of  the  power  of  producing  seed  in  very 
far  away  ages,  by  the  power  of  suckering  alone  they  would 
have  been  more  widespread  than  they  are.  There  seems  to  be  no 
other  logical  conclusion  than  that  the  plants  once  seeded  freely ; 
but  that  this  power  must  have  been  long  lost,  to  account  for  the 
comparative  limited  areas  to  which  the  species  are  now  confined. 

Perhaps  the  most  interesting  new  facts  noted  are  those  connected 
with  the  motion  of  the  leaves  in  the  two  species  named,  as  well 
as  in  Rohinia  jjseudacacia,  though  the  most  strongly  marked  in 
Rohinia  hispida.  There  is  a  diurnal  as  well  as  a  nocturnal  motion, 
each  in  a  separate  direction.  At  a  few  hours  before  sundown, 
each  pair  of  pinna?  are  perfectly  horizontal.  The  entire  leaf  is 
perfectly  flat.  With  sundown  the  leaflets  begin  to  droop,  till,  by 
dark,  tliey  are  perfectly  ])endent,  the  under  surface  of  each  leaflet 
almost  touching  the  under  surface  of  the  leaflet  opposite  to  it. 
With  the  advent  of  morning,  the  leaflets  arise  ;  and  soon  after  sun- 
rise, the  whole  leaf  is  flat,  as  just  before  sundown,  but  they  continue 
to  rise,  till,  by  noon,  the  opposite  leaflets  have  met  above  the 
common  petiole,  almost  touching  each  other  by  their  upper 
surfaces  at  midda}-,  as  they  nearl}^  touch  by  their  lower  surfaces 
\>y  night.  In  other  words,  instead  of  traveling  ninety  degrees,  as 
do  other  plants  the  leaves  of  which  "sleep  "at  night,  these  leaflets 
make  a  daily  circuit  of  one  hundred  and  eighty  degrees. 

Besides  these  novel  facts,  Mr.  Meehan  noticed  what  he  could 
not  but  regard  as  a  case  of  paralysis.  About  the  middle  of 
September,  he  noticed  a  sucker  from  one  of  his  plants,  which  had 
finished  its  growth  for  tlie  season  after  having  made  about  a  dozen 
nodes.     While  at  midday  the  leaflets  were  erect,  three  leaves  had 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  459 

all  their  leaflets  drooping  as  at  night.  How  long  they  may  have 
been  in  this  condition  before  being  noticed  is  not  known,  but  they 
continued  in  that  "  sleeping  "  condition  till  this  date  (November  7), 
the  others  having  gone  through  their  motions  dail}^  till  now. 
During  the  last  few  days,  however,  tlie  thermometer  having  once 
been  nearl}^  down  to  freezing  point,  only  the  two  or  three  upper 
pinnules  on  the  leaves  have  retained  the  power  to  move.  The 
paralyzed  leaves  were  in  every  respect  as  health}^  looking  as  the 
others,  but  they  were,  all  three,  somewhat  smaller.  If  these  had 
been  all  together  at  the  lower  or  upper  end  of  the  branch,  the 
peculiarity  might  have  been  referred  to  some  cause  connected 
with  maturity  ;  but  the  first  paralyzed  leaf  was  the  third  from  the 
top,  the  next  the  fifth,  and  the  other  the  sixth  ;  that  is  to  say, 
there  were  leaves  with  perfect  motile  functions  above  and  below 
these,  as  well  as  one  among  the  three.  Though  for  the  six  weeks, 
at  least,  they  had  lost  the  power  of  motion,  the  color  and  general 
healthy  appearance  of  the  leaves  were  precisely  the  same  as  the 
others.  There  was  no  difference  whatever  except  in  the  length 
of  the  common  petiole  and  size  of  the  leaves.  They  were  about 
three-fourths  the  ordinary  size.  The  upward  movement  of  the 
pinnules  in  this  species  is  confined  to  those  exposed  to  the  sun- 
light ;  those  shaded  by  even  their  own  foliage  have  not  the  power. 
Mr.  Meehan  had  previoush'  called  the  attention  of  the  Academy 
to  the  fact  that  a  large  number  of  plants  draw  the  upper  surface 
of  the  leaf  together  in  bright  light,  as  illustrations  of  which  he 
mentioned  now :  Halesia  tetraptera^  Cornus  JiojHda,  Co7'nus  mas 
and  Magnolia  acuminata. 


November  15. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Thirty-one  persons  present. 


November  22. 

The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 

Twenty-nine  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  On  a  foetal  Kangaroo  and  its  Membranes," 
by  Henry  C.  Chapman,  M.  D.,  was  presented  for  publication. 

The  death  of  the  Rev.  Z.  M.  Humphrey,  a  correspondent,  was 
announced. 


460  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 


November  29. 

Dr.  R.  S.  Kenderdine  in  the  chair. 

Thirty-one  persons  present. 

The  special  business  of  the  meeting  being  the  nomination  of 
officers,  councillors  and  members  of  the  Finance  Committee,  a 
letter  from  Dr.  W.  S.  W.  Ruschenberger  was  read,  declining  to 
be  a  candidate  for  re-election  to  the  office  of  President,  whereupon 
a  committee,  consisting  of  Messrs.  Isaac  C.  Martindale,  S.  R. 
Roberts  and  J.  H.  Redfield,  was  appointed  to  prepare  a  suitable 
expression  of  the  Academy's  appreciation  of  Dr.  Ruschenberger's 
services  to  the  society. 


December  6. 
Mr.  Thos.  Meehan,  Yiee-President,  in  the  chair. 
Thirty-six  persons  present. 

The  genus  Carterella  vs.  Spongiophaga  Pottsi. — Mr.  Edward 
PoTTS  referred  to  a  paper  (On  Spongiophaga  Pottsi  n.  sp.,  Ann. 
and  Mag.  of  Nat.  Hist.,  Nov.,  1881)  by  H.  J.  Carter,  F.  R.  S.,  etc., 
in  which  that  eminent  scientist  gives  an  interpretation,  differing 
from  his  own,  of  the  statosphere  tendrils  which  form  the  char- 
acteristic feature  of  the  new  genus  of  fresh-water  sponges  to 
which  Mr.  Carter's  name  had  been  attached  in  recognition  of  his 
very  distinguished  services.  He  wished  to  consider  the  subject 
entirely  apart  from  its  personal  relation  to  themselves;  and  only 
as  it  concerned  the  stability  of  a  genus,  in  which,  as  he  claimed, 
for  the  first  time  in  the  history  of  fresh-water  sponges,  these 
tendrils  had  been  noticed  as  distinctive  features. 

He  then,  at  some  length,  gave  his  reasons  why  we  should  not 
accept  Mr.  Carter's  theory  of  the  parasitic  nature  of  these  tendrils 
or  filaments ;  saying,  that  of  the  two  points  in  the  paper  most 
likely  to  impress  a  student  who  had  not  seen  specimens  of  the 
genus  referred  to,  or  one  unfamiliar  with  the  general  subject,  the 
first  was  founded  upon  certain  appearances  represented  in  figure 
2  of  Mr.  Carter's  plate.  This  figure  shows  an  "  axial  canal  " 
tlu'ough  the  centre  of  the  filament,  widening  into  the  "  tubular 
prolongation  from  the  process  of  the  chitinous  coat  "  of  the  stato- 
sphere and  representing  the  supposable  digestive  tract  of  the 
animal  parasite. 

As  after  repeated  and  very  careful  examination  of  numerous 
specimens,  both  in  a  fresh  condition  and  after  being  subjected  to 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF  PHILADELPHIA.  461 

different  methods  of  preparation,  he  had  failed  entirely  to  meet 
■with  an  instance  showing  similar  appearances,  he  referred  speci- 
mens of  all  three  species  of  the  genus  to  Prof.  Jos.  Leid}^,  whose 
fame  as  an  accurate  observer  is  world-wide  ;  to  Mr.  Jno.  A.  Ryder, 
and  to   Prof.   Kellicott   and   Mr.  Henry   Mills   of  Buffalo,   the 
discoverers  of  one  of  the  above  species.     The  efforts  of  these 
gentlemen  were  equally  unsuccessful,  their   opinion   being   well 
expressed  in  Prof.  Leidy's  words,  "  In  my  mind  there  can  be  no 
question  as  to   the  tendrils  being  part  of   the  structure  of  the 
statoblast,  and  their  parasitic  nature  would  never  have  occurred 
to  me."     "  The  tendrils  are  homogeneous  extensions  of  the  inner 
capsule  of  the  statoblast  and  I  see  no  trace  of  the  appearance  to 
which  you  refer  in   Carter's  figure  2."     A  paragraph  from  the 
letter  of  Prof.  Kellicott  makes  a  further  point.     These  processes 
"  are  not  found  on  the  statoblasts  of  any  other  species  in  the 
Niagara  River ;  I  have  examined  hundreds  of  the  statoblasts  of 
Carterella  tubisperma,  and  have  not  found  one  without  said  tube. 
I  brought  some  of  these,  having  wintered  in  the  river,  to  my 
room  last  May  ;  after  a  few  days,  there  was  sponge  growth  ;  so 
this  form  if  a  parasite  did  not  destroy  the  life,  etc." 

The  second  point  made  by  Mr.  Carter  was  that  the  species 
marked  G.  tuhisj^erma  from  Buffalo,  was  identical,  as  shown  by  its 
spiculation,  with  one  marked  Heteroraeyenia  repens  from  Lehigh 
Gap,  Pa.  That  one  of  these  identical  species  should  exhibit  the 
tubular  prolongation  and  accompanying  tendrils,  while  the  other 
did  not,  was  considered  presumptive  evidence  that  the  former  was 
affected  in  some  abnormal  way.  To  this  Mr.  Potts  answered,  that 
while  there  was  unquestionably  much  similarity  in  shape  of  the 
birotulate  spicules  of  the  two  sponges,  covering  the  "  seed  bodies  " 
in  the  ordinary  fashion  as  a  second  or  outer  coat,  the  Lehigh  Gap 
species  alone  exhibited  the  second  class  of  long  birotulates,  inter- 
spersed with  the  others,  which  had  induced  him  to  place  it  in  the 
genus  Heteromeyenia.  For  this  reason  he  believed  the  species 
were  not  identical,  and  this  argument  fails. 

In  continuation  he  reasoned  that  it  should  not  be  considered  a 
matter  of  surprise  that  the  statospheres  of  some  genei-a  pertaining 
to  the  family  of  fresh-water  sponges,  should  present  tentative 
features  of  this  character.  In  a  paper  published  so  long  ago  as 
1859,  Mr.  Carter  called  attention  to  the  resemblance  in  appearance 
and  function  between  the  statoblasts  of  the  Polyzoa  and  the 
so-called  "  seed  bodies  "  of  Spongilla.  The  parallelism  is  rendered 
more  complete  when  we  observe  that  in  those  forms  of  Polyzoa 
possessing  a  comparatively  rigid  octocyst,  the  statoblasts  are 
circular  or  lenticular  with  smooth  margins.  Some  of  these  are 
no  doubt  washed  out  from  the  tubular  body  from  time  to  time 
during  the  winter,  to  extend  the  species  to  other  places  ;  while 
enough  are  retained  b}^  it  to  renew  the  growth  in  the  original 
locality.  On  the  other  hand,  where  the  body  mass  is  simply 
gelatinous,  as  in  Pectinatella,  Cristatella,  etc.,  decaying  away  and 


462  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

releasing  the  statoblasts  on  the  first  approach  of  winter,  these  are 
provided  Avith  either  a  single  row  or  a  more  complicated  series  of 
marginal  tentacular  hooks,  by  wliich  they  become  matted  together, 
entangled  with  roots,  stems,  etc.,  or  held  to  rough  places  on  planks 
or  stones. 

The  same  relation  to  the  pei-manency  of  their  skeleton  structure 
we  find  existing  amongst  these  genera  and  species  of  fresh-water 
sponges.  The  statosplieres  of  nearly  all  species  are  provided 
with  some  arrangement  for  protection  and  retention.  These  vary 
greatly  in  kind  and  degree,  inversely  according  to  the  protection 
afforded  them  by  the  surrounding  skeleton.  Perhaps  the  lowest 
in  the  series  in  this  regard  is  Meyenia  Leidyi.  This  is  a  thin 
encrusting  sponge  ;  the  skeleton  spiculje  stout  and  firmly  matted 
together ;  maintaining  the  position  and  form  of  the  mass  through- 
out the  year.  The  statosplieres  are  formed  in  the  autumn  in  the 
lowest  parts  of  the  sponge,  within  special  capsules  formed  by 
interlacing  spiculai.  It  is  hardly  possible  these  should  wash  away, 
and  accordingly  we  find  no  means  provided  peculiar  to  themselves 
for  detaining  them.  Their  armor  consists  of  a  closely  laid  series 
of  birotulate  spiculse  with  entire  margins,  excellent  as  a  shield 
but  hopelessl}^  useless  as  a  means  of  retention.  On  the  other 
hand  no  apparent  means  of  diffusion  are  provided,  and  as  a  con- 
sequence the  species  seems  to  be  extremely  local ;  none  having 
been  noticed  except  in  the  stream  where  the  first  specimen  was 
gathered,  and  within  a  few  yards  of  the  probable  spot. 

Spongilla  fragiliH  of  Leidy,when  seen  during  the  summer-time, 
nearly  resembles  in  form  the  above-mentioned  species ;  its  skeleton 
structure,  however,  is  much  more  fragile  and  is  frequently  detached 
and  washed  awa}',  leaving  a  uniform  series  of  statoblasts  standing 
side  by  side,  with  no  special  coating  of  spicules  for  each,  as  in 
most  other  species,  but  grouped  and  held  together  by  a  common 
coating  of  cellular  or  granular  matter,  covered  by  and  imbedding 
a  great  number  of  cylindrical  spined  spicules.  A  variety  of  this 
is  often  observed  (whether  it  differs  specifically  in  other  respects 
he  could  not  be  certain)  in  which  the  statospheres  are  segregated 
into  groups  of  four  or  more,  spherically  enclosed  in  a  similar 
coating,  thus  appearing  like  one  large  seed.  While  the  statoblasts 
of  the  former  arrangement  retain  their  positions  during  the  winter 
and  germinate  there  in  the  spring,  it  may  be  that  this  is  a  character 
assumed  for  diftusive  propagation. 

In  Spongilla  lacustris  and  similar  branching  sponges,  the  appar- 
ently conflicting  ends  of  retention  and  diffusion  are  attained  in  a 
different  way.  The  "  seed  "  are  formed  in  the  interstices  of  both 
the  sessile  and  the  branching  portions.  In  the  former  they  are 
retained  during  the  winter,  partially  by  the  agency  of  recurved 
spines  upon  the  acerates  projecting  from  the  seed  coat;  while  the 
fragile  branches  soon  break  off  and  float  their  contained  stato- 
spheres to  distant  parts. 

The  massive  sessile  character  of  many  sponges,  repeated  through 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA.  463 

various  forms  of  Spongilla  and  Meyenia^  partially'  protects  their 
statospheres  from  the  accidents  of  the  winter  season,  and  when  that 
protection  fails  them,  the  raj'S  of  the  hirotnlate  spicules  of  the 
latter  and  the  curved  acerates  of  the  former,  come  in  play  to 
retain  a  sufficient  number  until  the  time  of  germination  in  the 
spring. 

Three  species  of  American  sponges  have  been  grouped  under 
the  generic  name  Heterovieyenia^  characterized  by  the  presence 
of  a  second  form  of  birotulate  spicules  interspersed  amongst  the 
more  familiar  series.  These  are  about  double  the  length  of  the 
former  and  are  terminated  by  long  recurved  hooks.  The  frame- 
work of  two  of  these  species  is  altogether  filmy  and  fugitive ;  the 
statospheres  are  not  held  within  the  interspaces  of  the  skeleton 
or  retained  in  an}-  other  waj',  and  are  therefore  dependent  upon 
the  above  hooks  for  their  attachment  to  proper  bases  for  future 
growth. 

Completing  the  series  of  retentive  agencies  we  find  the  stato- 
spheres of  the  three  species  of  the  disputed  genus  Carterella 
provided,  in  addition  to  their  birotulate  spicules,  with  long  curling 
or  twisting  tendrils,  extensions,  as  we  have  heard,  of  the  tough 
chitinous  coat.  These  are  required  to  meet  the  emergency  occa- 
sioned by  the  looseness  of  their  skeleton  texture,  from  which  the 
sarcode  flesh  dying  early  washes  awa}',  most  of  the  spicules  soon 
following  in  the  winter  floods.  The  eggs  are  thus  left  to  the  pro- 
tection of  the  above  tendrils  which  lap  them  together,  bind  them 
to  the  remaining  spicules  or  the  roots  of  water  weeds  or  shore 
plants ;  or,  assuming  the  role  of  the  hair  the  plasterer  uses,  bind 
the  deposited  silt  about  them  and  both  to  the  stones,  where  they 
await  the^ppointed  time  for  a  new  growth.  This  function  is  very 
clearly  shown  in  the  collection  in  Mr.  Potts'  possession,  and 
the  resemblance  in  material  structure  of  these  tendrils  to  that  of 
the  specialized  hooks  of  the  forms  of  Polyzoa  referred  to,  is  very 
striking.  He  hopes  therefore,  that  as  both  analogy  and  observed 
facts  seem  to  indicate  the  correctness  of  his  position,  Mr.  Carter 
will  be  willing  to  accept  the  compliment  intended  and  which  is  so 
well  deserved. 


December  1.3. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberqer,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty -three  persons  present. 
The  death  of  Ami  Boue,  a  correspondent,  was  announced. 

Piloholns  crystallinns. — Mr.  Thomas  Meehan  remarked  that 
this  small  fungus  had  proved  this  season  to  be  an  expensive 
annoyance  to  florists  engaged  in  winter  forcing  flowers.     Rose- 

31 


464  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE    ACADEMY    OP  [1881. 

growers  especiall}'  had  found  it  to  interfere  seriously  with  their 
profits.  The  injury  was  caused  b}^  the  projection  of  the  sporangia 
which  covered  the  flowers  and  leaves  of  the  roses  as  if  profusely 
dusted  with  black  pepper.  Tlie  flowex's  were  almost  unsaleable  as 
the  first  impression  was  that  the  black  dots  were  Aphides. 

Mr,  J.  B.  Ellis,  of  Newfield,  N.  J.,  to  whom  he  was  indebted  for 
the  identification  of  the  species,  had  informed  him  that  it  was 
somewhat  rare  in  that  vicinity.  In  the  greenhouses  referred  to 
they  were  in  immense  profusion,  the  conditions  of  growth  being 
probably  more  favorable.  Mr.  Meehan  described  the  growth  of 
the  plant  and  the  behavior  of  the  asci  in  the  generation  and  expul- 
sion of  the  sporangia,  which  corroborated  the  facts  detailed  in 
the  memoir  of  Eugene  Coemans,  published  in  18.59  in  the  Bulletin 
of  the  Royal  Academy  of  Sciences  of  Brussels.  M.  Coemans 
found  the  plant  on  half-dried  cow-droppings,  in  August,  and  in 
these  greenhouse  cases  it  was  also  growing  in  half-i'otten  cow- 
manure  used  for  enriching  the  soil.  Mr.  Ellis  reports  that  it  is 
sometimes  found  on  other  manures,  and  so  may  be  less  rare  than 
supposed.  The  projection  of  the  sporangia  has  been  noted  by 
European  observers,  and  originated  Fore's  name  Pilobolus,  literally 
the  hat-  or  cap-thrower.  The  sporangia  appear  as  small  black 
caps  on  the  top  of  the  cr3^stal-like  asci,  and  are  expelled  with  great 
force.  By  careful  measurements  they  were  found  to  be  thrown 
when  the  direction  was  perpendicular,  to  a  height  of  four  feet. 
Coemans  does  not  seem  satisfied  that  the  exact  process  has  been 
made  clear  by  which  this  remarkable  projection  is  eflfected.  It 
has  been  supposed  that  carbonic  acid  gas  is  generated,  which, 
distending  the  cysts,  causes  them  at  length  to  burst  at  the  thinnest 
part,  which  is  the  apex,  and  the  sporangia  are  then  blown  out  by 
the  gas,  as  would  be  a  cork  from  a  bottle  of  champagne.  Again 
Coemans  finds  a  double  membrane  to  the  asci,  and  believes  that 
by  the  agency  of  light  the  inner  membrane  contracts  in  a  different 
manner  to  the  outer,  and  that  the  projection  is  the  result  of  this 
peculiar  contraction.  Mr.  Meehan  observed  that  the  sporangia 
were  expelled  from  the  interior  of  the  asci  before  they  were  finally 
discharged,  and  that  they  were  always  projected  in  a  direct  line 
from  the  centre,  which  would  hardly  be  the  case  if  a  mere  explo- 
sion of  gas  directed  the  movement.  One  large  rose-grower  had 
found,  that  sprinkling  the  surface  of  the  earth  under  the  rose 
plants  with  about  the  eighth  of  an  inch  of  dry  earth,  effectually 
allayed  the  projectile  annoyance. 


December  20. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Twenty-five  persons  present. 

The  deaths  of  Edw.  Taylor  and  Dr.  Isaac  I.  Haj^es,  members, 
were  announced. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  465 

The  Committee,  appointed  Nov.  29tb,  to  prepare  an  expression 
of  the  Academy's  appreciation  of  Dr.  Ruschenberger's  services 
to  the  society,  presented  the  following  report  which,  together  with 
the  resolutions  proposed,  was  unanimously  adopted : — 

To  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia  : 

Tour  Committee,  appointed  November  29th,  1881,  to  prepare 
and  report  at  a  future  meeting,  an  expression  of  the  Academj^'s 
appreciation  of  the  services  of  Dr.  W.  S.  W.  Ruschenberger,  who 
declines  a  re-election  to  the  office  of  President,  respectfully 
reports : 

Dr.  W.  S,  W.  Ruschenberger  was  elected  a  member  of  the 
Academy  of  I^atural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  May,  1832,  and 
became  its  President,  December,  1869,  succeeding  Dr.  Isaac  Hays. 
He  has  been  re-elected  at  each  succeeding  annual  election,  hence 
he  has  occupied  this  position  for  an  unbroken  period  of  twelve 
years,  which,  with  one  exception,  is  the  longest  term  of  service  of 
any  President  of  the  Academy. 

When  the  project  for  the  erection  of  a  new  building  was  first 
proposed,  Dr.  Ruschenberger  manifested  so  much  interest  therein, 
that  when  on  the  14th  of  November,  1865,  a  committee  was 
appointed,  "  to  devise  methods  for  advancing  the  prosperity  and. 
efficiency  of  the  Academy  hy  the  erection  of  a  building  of  a  size 
suitable  to  contain  the  collections,"  he  was  by  unanimous  consent 
chosen  its  Chairman.  He  was  likewise  Chairman  of  the  Committee 
of  Fortv,  appointed  December  26th,  1865,  for  the  purpose  of 
obtaining  the  funds  necessary  for  the  erection  of  a  new  building, . 
and  also  was,  and  still  is.  Chairman  of  the  Board  of  Trustees  of 
the  Building  Fund,  organized  January  11th,  1867. 

From  the  inception  of  the  enterprise  to  its  consummation  in  the 
occupancy  of  the  new  building  by  the  Academy  in   18*76,  Dr. 
Ruschenberger  constantly  gave  to  it  his  best  energies,  and  to  him. 
more  than  to  any  other  man  the  Academy  owes  the  commodious 
building  which  it  now  occupies. 

There  were  times  when  many  members  of  the  Committee 
doubted  and  even  despaired  of  the  completion  of  their  service, 
but  in  the  darkest  hours  Dr.  Ruschenberger  never  faltered  either 
in  faith  or  works,  but  with  his  quiet  persistent  force,  pushed  for- 
ward the  enterprise,  and  sustained  the  courage  of  his  associates. 
His  untiring  interest  in  the  welfare  of  the  Academy,  led  him 


466  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

personally  to  supervise  the  contracts  for  building,  and  to  inspect 
the  progress  of  the  work  almost  daily.  He  was  thus  able  to  save 
thousands  of  dollars  to  the  Trustees,  and  to  see  the  present  build- 
ing completed  at  a  cost  greatly  within  the  original  estimate. 
Those  onl}-  who  were  associated  with  him  in  this  the  great  achieve- 
ment of  his  life,  can  rightly  value  the  courage,  patience,  devotion, 
indomitable  perseverance  and  ceaseless  activity  displayed  by  him 
throughout  the  entire  period. 

As  a  presiding  officer,  both  at  the  meetings  of  the  Academy 
and  in  the  Council,  his  extreme  punctuality,  dignity  of  manner, 
unfailing  courtesy  and  accurate  acquaintance  with  parliamentary 
usage  leading  to  prompt  decisions,  which  seldom  or  never  failed 
to  command  support,  have  increased  in  no  small  degree  the  debt 
of  gratitude  due  him  by  the  institution  which  he  has  served  so 
faithfully  and  well. 

Of  his  services  to  the  scientific  world  this  is  not  the  time  nor 
the  occasion  to  speak  in  detail,  but  suffice  it  to  say,  they  are  such 
as  have  been  long  and  widely  recognized. 

In  view  of  the  foregoing  recital  of  facts,  we  deem  it  everj^  way 
fitting  that  the  Academy  should  suitably  express  and  place  upon 
record,  its  grateful  sense  of  the  long  and  faithful  services  of  its 
retiring  President,  and  we  accordingly  propose  the  following 
resolutions  for  its  adoption : 

Resolved.,  That  the  thanks  of  this  Academy  be,  and  they  are 
hereby  tendered  to  Dr.  W.  S.  W.  Ruschenberger  for  the  eminent 
services  he  has  rendered  both  before  and  since  he  has  held  its 
honored  position  of  President. 

Resolved^  That  this  report,  and  these  resolutions  be  entered  in 
full  upon  the  minutes,  and  published  in  the  Proceedings,  and  that 
a  copy  thereof  suitably  engrossed,  attested  by  the  Vice-Presidents 
and  Secretaries  of  the  Academy  be  presented  to  him. 

Isaac  C.  Martindale, 
John  H.  Redfield, 
S.  Raymond  Roberts, 
Philadelphia,  Dec.  20th,  1881.  Committee. 

Varying  Influence  of  Heat  on  Flotver-buds  and  Leaf-buds. — 
Mr.  Thomas  Meehan  referred  to  specimens  of  Cratsegus^  sent  by 
Mr.  Case,  of  Indiana,  on  which  the  sender  remarked  that  the  buds 
were  larger  through  the  winter  on  alternate  years — and  that  the 
plants  flowered  freely  in  the  seasons  corresponding  with  those 
following  the  large  buds.     Mr.  Meehan  said,  that  though  it  must 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  467 

be  within  the  knowledge  of  most  observers  that  on  the  recur- 
rence of  spring,  flower-buds  were  much  larger  than  leaf-buds  in 
the  same  species,  no  use  had  been  made  of  this  fact  in  physiolog- 
ical teaching  so  far  as  he  knew.  At  the  fall  of  the  leaf,  as  any 
one  might  see  in  the  peach,  cherry,  apple,  pear,  maple,  willows, 
poplars,  alders  and  numerous  others,  the  flower-buds  could  scarcely, 
if  at  all,  be  discerned  from  leaf-buds ;  but  b}-  spring  the  flower- 
buds  had  increased  to  double  their  autumn  size,  while  the  leaf-buds 
remained  exactl}^  the  same.  Whenever  the  thermometer  was  in 
ever  so  slight  a  degree  above  the  freezing  point,  the  flower-bud 
increased  in  size  during  the  winter.  The  leaf-bud  required  a 
higher  temperature  to  excite  it.  This  difference  in  excitability 
ought  to  be  of  value  in  explaining  some  biological  points. 


December  2t. 
The  President,  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  in  the  chair. 
Thirty-six  persons  present. 

The  death  of  Henry  Morris,  a  member,  was  announced. 
The  following  was  ordered  to  be  published  : — 


468  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 

ON  A  F(ETAL  KANGAROO  AND  ITS  MEMBRANES. 
BY   HENRY   C.    CHAPMAN,   M.D. 

Since  the  publication,  nearly  fifty  years  ago,  of  Prof.  Owen's 
invaluable  paper  ^  "  On  the  Generation  of  the  Marsupial  Animals," 
in  which  the  fcetal  Kangaroo  and  membranes  were  first  described, 
no  further  contribution  has  been  made  to  our  knowledge  of  this 
very  important  subject.  Indeed  some  naturalists  at  the  present 
day  seem  indisposed  to  accept  Prof.  Owen's  statement  that  there 
is  no  connection  in  the  Kangaroo  between  the  foetal  membrane 
and  the  uterus,  or,  in  other  words,  that  no  placenta  is  developed  ; 
and  that,  therefore,  the  division  of  the  mammalia  into  non-placental 
and  placental  is  not  a  valid  one.  Even  though  the  present 
communication  should  not  contain  anything  particularl}^  new,  I 
trust,  however,  that  it  will  not  be  received  without  interest,  if  for 
no  other  reason  than  that  it  comfirms  essentially  Prof.  Owen's 
descriptions. 

One  would  have  naturally  supposed  that,  during  the  past  half 
century,  among  all  the  Kangaroos  killed  in  Australia  and  opened 
in  various  zoological  gardens,  at  least  one  fatal  Kangaroo 
would  have  been  found.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  however,  this  does 
not  appear  to  have  been  the  case,  or,  at  least,  if  such  was  found, 
no  record  was  made  of  it.  Impressed  with  this  fact,  I  never 
failed  to  examine  the  generative  apparatus  in  the  female  Kangaroos 
wbich  died  from  time  to  time  in  the  Philadelphia  Zoological 
Garden,  with  the  hope  that  I  might  obtain  an  embryo.  In 
September,  1879,  I  was  successful,  finding  the  specimen  which 
forms  the  subject  of  the  present  communication,  and  to  which  I 
incidentally  alluded  in  a  previous  communication  to  the  Academy.^ 

The  female  Kangaroo,  in  which  I  found  the  embr^^o,  was  a  fine 
example  of  the  Maci^opus  giganteus,  and  had  taken  the  male  about 
fourteen  days  before  its  death,  which  was  caused  by  injuries 
inflicted  upon  itself, due  to  a  fright  incident  to  the  boxing  the  animal 
for  shipment.  The  embryo,  PL  XX,  was,  therefore,  not  more  than 
fourteen  days  old.  On  opening  the  uterus  of  the  left  side,  which  was 
considerably  swollen,  the  embryo  Kangaroo  was  seen  through  the 

1  Philos.  Transact.,  1834. 

'^  Placenta  of  the  Elephant,  Journal  of  Acad.,  vol.  viii,  p.  5. 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  469 

transparent  cliorion.  The  chorion,  which  was  thickened  in  places, 
insinuated  itself  between  folds,  into  which  the  lining  membrane 
of  the  uterus  was  thrown.  The  chorion  was,  however,  entirely  free 
from  villi  or  villous  processes  of  any  kind,  and  was  perfectly 
separable  in  its  entire  extent  from  the  uterine  surface.  Indeed 
it  was  readily  turned  out  of  the  uterus  intact.  On  opening  the 
chorion,  the  embr3'0  Kangaroo  was  seen  inclosed  in  a  very  delicate 
amnion,  which  was  easily  lacerated.  What  at  once  struck  me,  on 
opening  the  chorion,  was  the  large  size  of  the  umbilical  vesicle 
and  the  undeveloped  condition  of  the  allantois,  which,  though 
small,  was  undoubtedly  present,  consisting  of  a  pear-shaped 
vesicle  or  diverticulum  from  the  posterior  part  of  the  intestine. 
The  umbilical  vesicle  adhered  to  the  chorion  by  that  part  of  its 
surface  most  remote  from  the  umbilicus.  The  line  of  demarkation 
between  chorion  and  umbilical  vesicle  being  indicated  by  a  circular 
blood-vessel.  When  in  the  fresh  condition,  the  umbilical  vesicle 
was  seen  to  be  highly  vascular.  The  blood-vessels  that  ramified 
over  its  surface  consisted  of  two  veins  and  an  artery.  The  veins 
began  as  one  vessel  from  the  under  surface  of  the  liver,  which 
diverged  at  the  umbilicus  and  united  again  on  the  vimbilical 
vesicle  as  a  terminal  or  marginal  vein,  i.  e.,  the  circular  vein  just 
referred  to,  and  which  indicated  the  line  of  contact  of  the  umbilical 
vesicle  with  the  chorion.  The  third  vessel  was  an  artery,  and 
through  the  mesenteric  could  be  traced  to  the  aorta.  These 
vessels  evidently  correspond  to  the  omphalo-mesenteric  or  vitelHiie 
veins  and  arteries  of  other  vertebrate  embr^^os  as  seen,  for 
example,  in  the  embryo  chick.  The  disposition  of  the  umbilical 
vesicle,  with  reference  to  the  chorion  (its  large  size  and  vascularity), 
reminded  me  also  very  much  of  the  rabbit  or  rodent  type  of 
development.  While,  as  we  have  just  seen,  the  umbilical  vesicle 
was  in  contact  with  the  chorion,  the  rudimentary  allantois,  on  the 
contrar}^  hung  freely  by  its  pedicle  or  urachus  in  the  space 
between  the  amnion,  the  stem  of  the  umbilical  vesicle,  and  the 
chorion. 

When  the  allantois  was  first  examined,  there  could  be 
distinctly  seen  three  very  fine  vessels,  two  of  which  appeared  to 
come  from  the  aorta  and  corresponded  therefore  to  the  umbilical 
or  hypogastric  arteries  of  the  placental  mammals,  while  the 
remaining  vessel  I  considered  to  represent  the  umbilical  vein  of 
the  same.     The  small  size  of  the  allantois  and  the  rudimentary 


470  PROCEEDINGS    OF    TUE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

condition  of  its  blood-vessels  taken  in  connection  with  the  length 
of  the  embryo  and  the  short  time  that  the  latter  remains  in  tlie 
uterus,  makes  it  impossible  for  me  to  think  that  in  the  Kangaroo 
a  placenta  is  ever  developed.  I  vise  the  word  placenta  in  the 
sense  ordinarily  accepted,  meaning  a  structure  which  consists  of 
the  interlacing  of  the  allantoic  blood  vessels  with  those  of  the 
decidua  serotina  of  the  uterus,  that  is,  of  that  part  of  the  hyper- 
trophied  mucous  membrane  of  the  uterus  in  contact  with  the 
ovum.  Further,  that  while  the  umbilical  vessel  is  fused  through 
part  of  this  surface  with  the  chorion,  the  chorion  is  only  in  con- 
tact with  the  inner  surface  of  the  uterus,  not  adhering  to  it  in 
an}'  way.  The  disposition  of  these  membranes  in  the  Kangaroo 
embryo  is  therefore  difterent  from  the  so-called  placenta  of 
certain  Sharks,  which  consists  in  the  interlacing  of  the  omphalo- 
mesenteric blood-vessels  with  those  of  the  uterus.  This  structure 
in  the  Sharks,  though  called  a  placenta,  is  not  homologous  with 
the  mammalian  placenta,  this  consisting,  as  we  have  seen,  of  the 
allantoic  vessels  and  those  of  the  uterus.  The  Kangaroo  cannot 
be  said,  therefore,  to  have  a  placenta  in  either  sense  in  which  that 
word  is  used.  The  small  size  of  the  embryo  Kangaroo  at  birth, 
would  lead  me  to  suppose  that  it  drew  its  nourishment  from  the 
umbilical  vesicle  like  the  reptile  or  bird,  rather  than  from  the 
uterine  walls,  as  in  the  mammal.  If  the  uterus  does  contribute 
to  the  nourishment  of  the  foital  Kangaroo,  such  nutriment  must 
osmose  through  the  omphalo-mesenteric  vessels.  The  contact  of 
the  chorion  with  the  uterus,  however,  is  of  a  very  adventitous 
character.  The  embryo  Kangaroo  itself  measured  six-eighths 
of  an  inch  in  length  from  the  mouth  to  the  root  of  the  tail. 
The  latter  was  one-eighth  of  an  inch  long.  The  mouth  was 
open,  and  the  tongue,  though  large,  was  not  protruded.  The 
palpebral  folds  were  not  developed.  There  was  no  sign  of  an 
auricle.  Four  branchial  clefts  could  be  distinguished.  The 
anterior  extremities  were  well  developed,  but  the  digits  had  not 
appeared.  The  posterior  extremities,  were  represented  onlj' 
by  small  buds,  not  very  apparent  except  with  a  lens.  In- 
dications of  the  ribs  were  distinctly  visible.  The  membranous 
spinal  cord  could  be  seen ;  the  elements  of  the  vertebrae  being  as 
yet  ununited.  A  penis  was  visible  just  in  front  of  the  anus.  On 
the  supposition  that  the  theory  of  evolution  is  true,  one  would 
naturally  expect  to  find  forms  intermediate  in  their  structure  and 


\ 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  4tl 

development  between  the  reptiles  and  birds  on  the  one  hand  and 
the  placental  mammalia  on  the  other.  As  is  well  known,  in  the 
structure  of  its  skeleton  and  generative  apparatus,  the  Ornitho- 
rynchus  resembles  ver}'  closel}^  the  reptile  and  bird,  while,  as  we 
have  just  seen,  the  foetal  membranes  of  the  Kangaroo  recall  the 
corresponding  parts  in  the  reptilian-bird  type  and  foreshadow 
those  of  the  placental  mammal.  If  the  parts  in  question  have 
been  truthfully  described  and  correctly  interpreted  as  partly 
bridging  over  the  gap  between  the  non-placental  and  placental 
vertebrates,  the}'  supply  exactl}'^  what  the  theory  of  evolution 
demands,  and  fui-nish,  therefore,  one  more  proof  of  the  truth  of 
that  doctrine. 


472  PROCEEDINCS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

The  following  reports  were  read  and  referred  to  the  Publication 
Committee  : 

REPORT  OF  THE  PRESIDENT 

For  the  Year  ending   November  30,  1881. 

It  is  a  pleasure  to  be  able  to  repeat  a  statement  made  last  year, 
that  the  Academy-  "  remains  free  from  debt,"  a  very  important 
statement,  because  the  progress  of  the  societ^'^  is  largely  contin- 
gent on  the  condition  of  its  financial  affairs  and  the  stability  of  its 
pecuniary  resources. 

The  report  of  the  Treasurer,  William  C.  Henszey,  whose  prudent 
zeal  in  the  discharge  of  the  duties  of  his  office  entitles  him  to  the 
full  measure  of  our  thanks,  shows  that  the  finances  of  the  society 
are  in  a  sound  condition,  and  that  the  current  receipts  for  the  year 
somewhat  exceed  the  expenditures. 

The  receipts  from  all  sources  amount  to  $6959.20 

And  the  total  disbursements  to  6952.16 


Leaving  a  balance  of  7.04 

Even  under  this  unusually  favorable  condition,  observance  of 
close  economy  in  expenditures  is  still  essential,  as  it  ever  should 
be  under  all  circumstances,  to  keep  the  treasury  always  in  a  state 
to  moet  the  current  demands  against  it.  They  may  possibly  be 
greater  on  account  of  necessary  repairs  in  the  coming  than  in  the 
past  year.  The  exterior  wood-work  of  the  building  may  require 
painting  in  the  course  of  the  summer. 

The  treasurer's  statements  show  that  the  Publication  Fund,  the 
Thomas  B.  Wilson  Fund,  the  Elizabeth  Phyle  Stott  Fund,  the 
Isaac  Barton  Fund,  the  Charlotte  M.  Eckfeldt  Fund,  the  Joshua 
T.  Jeanes  Fund,  the  Jessup  Fund,  the  Life  Membership  Fund  and 
the  Maintenance  Fund  are  in  a  satisfactory  condition. 

More  than  a  thousand  dollars  of  the  income  of  the  I.  Y. 
Williamson  Library  Fund  have  been  necessarily  diverted  from 
library  purposes  to  the  payment  of  expenses  to  secure  part  of  the 
property  from  which  the  income  is  derived.  Now  it  is  confidently 
believed  that  the  whole  of  the  receipts  of  the  fund,  which  have 
been  somewhat  increased,  may  be  appropriated  to  the  purchase 
of  books  in  accordance  with  the  intention  of  its  liberal  and 
benevolent  founder. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES    OF  PHILADELPHIA.  413 

The  luanufactnre  of  the  Proceedings  and  Journal  of  the  Aead- 
emj;  has  cost  $1307.92.  The  return  to  the  treasury  on  account 
of  their  sale  is  $1124.09.  The  works  received  into  the  library  for 
them,  in  exchange,  from  29T  societies  and  42  periodicals,  at  home 
and  abroad,  far  exceed  in  value  the  difference  between  the  cost  of 
manufacture  and  the  amount  of  money  received  on  account  of 
the  sale  of  the  Academy's  publications. 

The  hope,  entertained  at  the  close  of  the  last  year,  that  the 
Maintenance  Fund  might  be  considerably  increased  by  this  time, 
has  been  disappointed.  Tlie  circumstances  which  led  to  the  effort 
to  raise  this  fund  have  not  changed.  The  enterprise  has  not  yet 
been  demonstrated  to  be  hopeless,  and  until  it  is,  should  not  be 
abandoned. 

The  aggregate  of  semi-annual  contributions  for  the  year  reported 
by  the  treasurer,  $1936,  suggests  that  it  is  desirable  to  augment 
the  number  of  members. 

Fees  for  admission  to  the  museum  amount  to  $421.30,  which  is 
less  than  a  janitor's  salar^^ 

Five  students  have  been  aided  from  the  Jessup  Fund  in  the 
course  of  the  year.  At  this  time  two  3'oung  men  are  its  benefici- 
aries. The  advantages  of  this  fund  are  in  demand.  Many  are 
indebted  to  it  for  a  start  on  the  course  which  led  them  to  become 
naturalists  and  efficient  investigators.  An  increase  in  the  number 
of  such  scholarships  is  desirable.  Every  one  who  ma}^  give  a 
sufficient  sum  to  yield  $250  annually,  to  aid  in  the  support  of  one 
student,  will  contribute  substantially  to  the  advancement  of 
knowledge,  and  at  the  same  time  erect  for  himself  a  continuously 
speaking  memorial,  more  enduring,  and  conspicuous  than  can  be 
formed  of  monumental  marble. 

To  encourage  the  study  of  natural  histoiy  among  young  persons, 
the  Agassiz  Association  of  Natural  History",  a  juvenile  socisty, 
was  granted,  Dec.  14,  1880,  the  use  of  the  library  room  on  alter- 
nate Wednesday  afternoons,  for  its  stated  meetings. 

The  use  of  the  library  room  was  given  to  a  board  of  examiners 
of  Harvard  Universit}',  from  June  30  to  July  2,  inclusive,  for  the 
examination  of  candidates  for  admission  into  that  institution. 

Permission  to  visit  the  museum,  given  to  the  teachers  and  a 
limited  number  of  pupils  of  the  public  schools  in  1819,  has  been 
extended  to  them  through  the  year  1882. 

The  Legislature  of  the  State  did  not  accept  the  proposition  of 


474  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1881. 

the  Academy  to  assume  the  custody  of  the  collections  of  the 
Second  Geological  Survey  of  Pennsylvania  and  display  them 
freely  to  the  public,  without  an}^  cost  whatever  to  the  treasury 
of  the  State.  The  proposition  was  approved  in  the  Senate  but 
not  in  the  House.  The  result  is  not  fortunate.  It  is  believed 
that  those  collections  cannot  be  held  anywhere  in  the  State 
more  profitably  to  the  public  generally  than  in  the  Academy; 
because,  located  under  the  same  roof  with  the  collections  of  the 
First  Geological  Survey,  with  other  extensive  American  and 
European  collections,  and  also  with  a  full  and  appropriate  library 
of  reference,  they  could  be  readily  consulted  and  studied  apart, 
or  in  connection  comparatively  with  those  of  the  First  Geological 
Survey,  as  well  as  with  other  collections.  No  other  place  of 
deposit  promises  superior  or  equal  facilities  for  their  study. 

The  Curators  report  that  the  contents  of  the  museum  have  been 
carefully  inspected  and  that  they  are  in  good  condition.  Additions 
to  the  museum  during  the  year  not  recorded  in  other  reports  are 
mentioned. 

As  long  as  the  increase  of  the  museum  depends  upon  volun- 
tary gifts  alone,  there  is  no  reason  to  expect  that  it  will  ever  be 
complete  in  any  department,  or  as  a  whole  represent  the  natural 
history  of  the  day.  Explorations  of  new  regions  and  localities 
are  continuously  revealing  objects,  previously  unknown,  very  few 
of  which  find  their  way  into  our  cabinets. 

To  fill  gaps  which  exist  in  many  if  not  all  the  departments  and 
make  the  museum  perfect,  money  to  purchase  desiderata,  when 
opportunity  occurs,  is  necessary.  A  museum  fund,  yielding  from 
twelve  to  fifteen  hundred  dollars  a  year,  would  enable  the  curators, 
in  the  course  of  a  reasonably  short  time,  to  fill  gaps  in  various 
departments  and  procure  specimens  of  new  objects  whenever  they 
may  be  discovered,  and  to  furnish  new  materials  for  study  and 
investigation.  An  endowment  of  this  kind  would  do  for  the 
museum  what  the  I.  V.  Williamson  Library  Fund  has  done  for  the 
library,  which  is  regarded  to  be  now  the  best  and  most  extensive, 
though  not  yet  complete,  library  of  natural  history  of  the  United 
States. 

The  rate  of  growth  of  the  library  during  the  past  j'^ear  has  been 
somewhat  lessened,  owing  to  a  temporary  diminution  of  the  income 
ai^plicable  to  it,  as  already  mentioned.  According  to  the  report 
of  the  Librarian,  2719  additions  to  it  from  all  sources  have  been 


1881.J  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  475 

made.  Reckoning  ten  pamphlets  to  the  volume,  he  estimates  that 
the  librar\'  now  contains  29,485  volumes,  exclusive  of  duplicates. 

Many  of  the  works  consist  almost  entirel}^  of  dry  technical 
descriptions  of  objects,  and  are,  in  one  respect  at  least,  analogous 
to  dictionaries  or  encyclopaedias,  which  are  referred  to,  but  not 
read  from  beginning  to  end.  As  a  rule,  circulating  libraries  do 
not  lend  their  dictionaries,  nor  recent  numbers  of  periodicals  and 
serials. 

After  ample  experience  and  mature  consideration  of  the  subject 
in  all  its  relations,  the  Academj^  determined  that  its  library,  like 
that  of  the  British  Museum,  should  be  maintained  as  a  library  of 
reference  only,  under  a  conviction  that  the  interests  of  students 
and  of  the  members  far  and  near  would  be,  on  the  whole,  promoted 
by  this  policy.  A  large  proportion  of  the  books  have  been  con- 
tributed on  condition  that  they  shall  not  be  loaned  for  use  outside 
of  the  building  on  any  pretense  whatever.  Even  if  the  Academy 
were  now  disposed  to  change  it  to  a  circulating  library,  it  cannot 
annul  the  conditions  upon  which  most  of  the  books  were  given 
and  accepted,  without  breach  of  trust.  It  is  not  likely  that  a 
majoi'ity  of  those  entitled  to  A'ote  here  will  ever  consent  that  the 
Academy  shall  merit  the  just  odium  of  such  action  merely  for  the 
sake  of  loaning  its  books. 

The  Recording  Secretary  reports  that  twenty  papers  from 
twelve  authors  have  been  accepted  for  publication  in  the  Pro- 
ceedings ;  and  that  the  fourth  or  concluding  part  of  the  eighth 
quarto  volume  of  the  Journal  has  been  printed,  and  distributed  to 
subscribers  and  to  those  on  the  exchange  list. 

The  volume  of  Proceedings  of  1881  contains  about  500  pages. 
The  third  volume  of  a  "  Manual  of  Conchology,"  b}^  George  W. 
Try  on,  Jr.,  illustrated  by  628  figures  given  in  87  plates,  with  310 
octavo  pages  of  text,  has  been  issued  from  the  Academy  by  the 
author ;  and  the  Rev.  Dr.  Henry  C.  McCook  has  had  published 
by  J.  B.  Lippincott  Sc  Co.,  an  octavo  volume,  fully  illustrated,  on 
"  The  Honey  Ants  of  the  Garden  of  the  gods,  and  the  Occident 
Ants  of  the  American  Plains,"  much  of  which  he  had  presented 
at  stated  meetings  of  the  Academ}-  in  the  course  of  the  yeav. 

Several  papers  from  the  Conchological,  Botanical,  Mineral- 
ogical  and  Geological  Sections  have  been  accepted  for  publication 
in  the  Proceedings  of  the  Academy.     The  Entomological  Section 


476  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY  OP  [1881. 

has  printed  on  the  i^remises  and  issued  about  230  octavo  pages  of 
its  Proceedings  and  Transactions. 

These  publications  constitute  reliable  evidence  of  the  activity 
of  tlie  Society,  as  well  as  a  measure  of  the  extent  of  work  done  in 
connection  with  it  b}^  its  members. 

The  average  number  of  persons  present  at  the  stated  meetings 
of  the  year  is  30.44  ;  the  least  number  present  at  any  meeting  was 
7,  and  the  greatest,  363. 

The  scientific  activit}^  of  the  society  may  be  estimated  more 
accurately  by  what  it  publishes  than  by  the  numbers  present  at 
its  stated  meetings  alone  ;  provided  its  publication  fund  be  equal 
to  the  demands  made  upon  it.  Original  investigations  are  always 
pursued  in  the  privacy  of  the  stud^'  or  laboratory.  Discoveries, 
when  made,  are  announced  at  a  stated  meeting,  which  is  the  avenue 
to  publication,  either  in  form  of  verbal  communication  or  written 
statement  carefully  prepared  for  the  Journal  or  the  Proceedings. 
Such  papers  are  read  by  title  only:  if  read  in  full,  technical  or 
precise  systematic  descriptions  of  new  species  or  genera  would 
allure  few  not  specially  interested  in  their  subjects,  and  a  majority 
would  find  little  or  no  pleasure  in  listening  to  them. 

The  progress  of  the  society  cannot  be  fairl}^  inferred  by  com- 
paring the  average  number  present  at  stated  meetings  through  a 
series  of  years.  Careful  examination  of  the  minutes  from  1850  to 
1881,  including  both  years,  shows  that  the  average  number 
present  at  tlie  stated  meetings  of  eacli  year  does  not  increase 
regularly  from  year  to  jear,  but  varies.  The  average  attendance 
in  1850  was  12.28 — little  more  than  the  average  number  present 
at  the  stated  meetings  of  the  Mineralogical  and  Geological 
Sections  for  1881,  namely,  11 ;  for  1855,19.26;  for  1860,35.55; 
for  1865, 18.28  ;  for  1870, 22.34,  Nor  is  there  a  uniform  correspond- 
ence between  the  number  of  pages  of  Proceedings  issued  and  the 
average  number  present  at  the  stated  meetings.  A  tabular  state- 
ment of  the  average  numbers  in  attendance  at  the  stated  meetings, 
the  greatest  and  least  number  present  at  meetings  in  the  3'ear, 
the  number  of  members  and  correspondents  elected,  and  the 
number  of  pages  of  Proceedings  published  in  the  year,  is  herowith 
presented : 


1881.] 


NATURAL   SCIENCES  OF   PHILADELPHIA. 


477 


Average   No. 

No.  present  at  any 

Elected. 

Year. 

present     at 
stated  meet- 
ings. 

12.28 

meeting. 

published. 

Highest. 

Liowest. 

Members. 

Corresp. 

I'ages. 

1850 

24 

7 

9 

8 

138 

1855 

19.26 

33 

6 

21 

13 

200 

1860 

35.55 

57 

5 

41 

6 

577 

1865 

18.26 

34 

6 

25 

11 

310 

1870 

22.34 

35 

7 

39 

7 

180 

1871 

20.15 

36 

8 

35 

6 

370 

1872 

20.63 

86 

7 

44 

5 

322 

1873 

24.73 

41 

6 

48 

9 

470 

1874 

21.32 

33 

7 

53 

8 

266 

1875 

25.94 

50 

11 

52 

10 

552 

1876 

39.53 

75 

7 

47 

15 

440 

1877 

31.55 

78 

9 

43 

66 

403 

1878 

31.51 

107 

9 

28 

32 

475 

1879 

36.71 

190 

13 

33 

8 

490 

1880 

27.26 

113 

5 

26 

30 

457 

1881 

29.80 

363 

7 

15 

6 

An  estimate  of  the  activity  of  the  Academy  from  the  numbers 
in  attendance  at  its  meetings  alone,  should  include  tliose  in 
attendance  at  the  meetings  of  the  several  sections.  To  specialize 
is  the  order  of  the  da}'.  All  the  great  meetings  of  men  interested 
in  the  advancement  of  the  different  departments  of  knowledge  are 
splitting  into  sections  and  special  societies.  Many  who  habitually 
attend  the  meetings  of  the  sections  are  seldom  present  at  the 
stated  meetings  of  the  Academy,  but  their  presence  and  work  in 
tlie  sections  make  part  of  the  common  or  general  activity  of  the 
society. 

The  Department  of  Recent  Conchology  now  contains  139,592 
specimens,  mounted  and  ai'ranged  in  39,501  traj^s.  The  species 
are  named  throughout,  and  all,  with  rare  exceptions,  are  accessible 
to  students.  The  space  allotted  to  this  branch  of  natural  histor}' 
in  the  museum  is  insufficient.  Lack  of  room  for  the  Mineral- 
ogical  and  Geological  Cabinets  is  also  manifest. 

Extension  and  completion  of  the  building  is  very  desirable.  At 
this  time,  the  building  fund  amounts  to  $3689.20.  Attention  of 
members  and  friends  of  the  Academy  is  respectfully  invited  to 
this  important  matter.  The  finished  part  of  the  building  is  not 
now  large  enough  to  properly  arrange  all  the  materials  in  it  in  the 
most  convenient  manner  for  their  study,  and  is  certainly  not 
sufficiently  extensive  to  display  them  to  the  public  in  a  way  to 


478  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

render  them  attractive  and  instructive  to  visitors  in  general.  The 
present  rate  of  growth  of  the  museum  and  librar}^  and  the 
already  crowded  condition  of  the  cases,  suggest  that  ways  and 
means  should  be  devised  without  delay  to  augment  the  building 
fund.  It  is  obvious  that  a  vast  museum  and  a  great  library 
connected  with  it  demand  space  for  their  accommodation  commen- 
surate with  their  extent ;  and  that  a  structure  to  embrace  such 
space  cannot  be  erected  in  a  day,  at  any  time,  nor  without  a  large 
sum.  To  raise  sufficient  money  to  complete  the  edifice  designed 
for  the  purposes  of  the  Academy  will  be  found  an  arduous  and 
slowly  progressive  enterprise.  Therefore  no  date  will  be  too  early 
for  its  commencement;  its  success  will  not  be  too  soon.  And  for 
this  the  Academy  must,  as  heretofore,  rely  upon  -the  generosity 
of  the  intelligent  and  public-spirited  who  believe  with  us  that  the 
cultivation  of  the  natural  sciences  is  in  many  ways  advantageous 
to  the  public  ;  and  that  the  project  of  completing  the  building  and 
expanding  the  museum  of  the  Academy,  till  it  shall  be  in  every 
sense  a  perfect  museum  of  natural  history,  is  worthy  of  favorable 
consideration  and  prompt  encouragement. 

Such  an  establishment  would  be  an  addition  to  the  positive 
attractions  of  Philadelphia,  and  thus  become  indirectly  of  com- 
mercial value  to  the  city ;  especially  if  admission  to  it  during  a 
part  of  every  secular  day  were  without  fee,  and  monitors  were 
always  at  hand  ready  to  explain  to  visitors  the  nature  of  the 
objects  displayed.  It  would  be  among  the  best  of  charities,  for  it 
would  help  all  to  knowledge  who  are  disposed  to  help  themselves. 
A  leisurely  promenade  through  a  complete  and  well-arranged 
museum  of  natural  history,  where  questions  of  curious  and 
inquisitive  visitors  might  be  answered  on  the  spot,  would  be  almost 
in  itself  an  education  in  this  connection. 

To  hope  for  such  a  museum  here  is  extravagant  only  in  view  of 
the  gi'eat  expense.  The  chief  obstacle  in  the  wav  of  its  realization 
is  the  cost,  which  would  possibly  far  exceed  that  of  a  free  public 
library  of  general  literature,  or  a  free  public  gallery  of  fine  paint- 
ings. A  museum  of  natural  objects  might  not  be  as  alluring  to 
the  masses  as  fictions  told  in  prose  or  verse,  or  in  different- 
colored  pigments  deftly  mingled  and  displayed,  all  exciting 
admiration,  and  more  likely  to  arouse  romantic,  even  sensuous 
notions  than  to  convey  a  ray  of  truth  of  any  sort  to  the  mind  of 
the  uncultured  observer.     But  the  influence  of  the  museum  in 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES    OF    PHILADELPHIA.  479 

teaching  untrained  minds  to  think  rightly  and  appreciate  the 
beauties  of  truth,  everywhere  manifest  in  the  works  of  the  Creator, 
is  likely  to  be  as  great,  if  not  greater,  and  cei'tainly  not  less 
salutary. 

A  complete  standard  museum,  free  to  the  public,  is  surely 
desirable  in  a  locality  which  contains  more  than  a  million  of 
inhabitants  within  a  radius  of  ten  or  fifteen  miles  from  this  centre. 
The  city  contains  man}'  private  special  collections,  and  several 
small,  good  museums  connected  with  colleges  and  schools,  which 
are  accessible  to  the  few,  but  there  is  no  great  museum  of  natural 
history  absolutely  free  to  all.  Without  lessening  the  importance 
and  value  of  private  or  collegiate  collections,  and  without  inter- 
fering with  students  in  their  use  of  it,  the  museum  of  the  Academy, 
which  has  been  formed  at  the  cost  of  many  3'ears'  labor  and  much 
mone}',  can  be  made  in  a  short  time  complete  and  entirel}'^  free  to 
the  public,  provided  that  sufficient  means  for  the  purpose  are 
supplied.  Herein  lies  the  difficulty  of  the  problem  to  be  solved 
.before  starting  the  enterprise  suggested. 

A  newspaper  has  recently  said  that  among  our  opulent  citizens 
are  those  who  might,  without  inconvenience,  give  a  million  to 
found  a  free  public  library.  Assuming  the  conjecture  to  be  true 
in  part,  at  least,  it  might  not  be  entirely  in  vain  perhaps,  to  invite 
those  ver}^  wealthy  and  intelligent  persons  to  consider  the  claims 
of  the  Academy  on  their  bounty. 

The  annual  reports  of  the  several  sections  or  departments  of  the 
Academy  show  that  their  condition  is  satisfactory.     The}^  are: 

1.  The  Biological  and  Microscopical  Section,  founded  in  1858  bj^ 
the  absorption  or  junction  of  the  Biological  Societj',  then  recently 
organized,  and  by  adding  to  it,  in  July,  1868,  the  then  newly 
formed  Microscopical  Societ3^ 

2.  The  Conchological  Section,  founded  December  26,  1866. 

3.  The  Entomological  Section,  founded  November  1875,  chiefly 
by  annexation  of  the  American  Entomological  Society. 

4.  The  Botanical  Section,  founded  in  June,  1876. 

5.  The  Mineralogical  and  Geological  Section,  founded  April  24, 
1877,  under  the  title  of  Mineralogical  Section.  Its  present  title 
was  authorized  November,  1879. 

The  Biological  and  Microscopical  Section  reports  that  Professor 
J.  Gibbons  Hunt  delivered  seven  lectures  on  histological  subjects 
before  the  Section  during  the  year,  and  that  its  annual  exhibition 

32 


480  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

was  held  on  the  evenings  of  November  16  and  17.  It  was  largely 
attended  by  members  of  the  Academy  and  their  friends,  and  was 
satisfactory  to  all  those  who  took  part  in  it. 

The  sections  afford  greater  facilities  to  specialists  in  their  pur- 
suits than  they  could  obtain  in  newly  organized  and  independent 
societies.  They  are  in  no  sense  detrimental  to  the  interests  of  the 
Academ}'.  They  have  the  immediate  care  of  those  departments 
of  the  museum  which  are  appropriate  to  them ;  and  in  this  connec- 
tion their  conservators  relieve  the  Curators  of  considerable  labor. 
There  is  no  apparent  reason  why  the  formation  of  sections  should 
not  be  encouraged.  They  tend  to  unite  those  engaged  in  separate 
but  closely  allied  studies,  advantageously  to  them  as  well  as  to 
scientific  progress,  and  to  centralize  their  interest  in  the  general 
welfare  of  the  society.  A  desire  of  membership  in  a  section  is 
often  the  only  inducement  to  seek  membership  in  the  Academy. 

The  by-law,  enacted  May,  1876,  which  provides  for  the  estab- 
lishment of  Professorships,  had  remained  almost  inoperative  until 
December,  1880.  In  its  partial  observance  it  promises  to  be  satis- 
factorily efficient,  at  least  for  the  present. 

The  enactment  was  founded  on  an  idea  that "  there  are  many  men 
eminently  qualified  in  all  respects  to  engage  in  original  research 
whose  scientific  work  is  greatly  restricted  because  almost  all  their 
time  is  necessarily  spent  in  gaining  a  livelihood,  who,  like  the 
Davys,  Faradays,  Huxleys,  and  Tyndalls  of  the  Roj^al  Institution, 
would  gladly  accept  a  moderate  support  of  assured  continuance, 
and  in  return  for  it  devote  all  their  energies  to  scientific  investi- 
gations and  teaching." 

Objection  to  the  scheme,  though  commendable  in  itself,  was  that 
"to  appoint  professors  before  providing  a  laboratory  in  which  they 
may  pursue  their  investigations,  or  a  lecture-room  for  the  accom- 
modation of  those  who  would  listen  to  their  teachings ;  or  means 
for  their  permanent  and  entire  support,  would  be  merely  to  bestow 
complimentary  titles,  without  advancing  the  interests  of  original 
research  in  any  manner  or  degree.  Gentlemen  elected  to  profes- 
sorships without  income  would  not  find  in  the  title  of  professor 
alone  the  means  of  living.  Such  title  would  not  relieve  them  from 
the  necessity  of  giving  their  time  and  labor  to  some  exacting  voca- 
tion for  daily  bread,  nor  afford  them  more  leisure  than  they  may 
possess  without  it.  Those  devoted  to  original  investigation  who 
are  pecuniarily  independent  of  secular  employment  do  not  need 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  481 

the  assistance  which  hoped-for  endowments  are  designed  to  give. 
As  the  library  and  museum  are  accessible  to  all  for  the  purpose 
of  study,  the}"  are  in  condition  to  pursue  their  scientific  labors 
without  acquiring  the  title  of  professor  from  the  Academj^" 

If  the  enactment  be  founded  as  stated,  the  objection  to  the 
appointment  of  professors  before  making  provision  of  facilities 
suitable  to  the  work  imposed  upon  them,  and  of  sufficient  means 
for  their  permanent  support,  has  no  less  force  now  than  when  first 
made  five  years  ago. 

It  has  been  considered  expedient  to  inaugurate  the  scheme  of 
professorships  before  providing  the  wa3'S  and  means  for  their 
permanent  support,  in  the  hope  that  the  effort  may  meet  with  sub- 
stantantial  encouragement. 

Dr.  J.  Gribbons  Hunt  was  duly  elected  Professor  of  Histol- 
ogy and  Microscopic  Technology,  April  17, 187Y,  without  compen- 
sation or  authority  to  incur  expense. 

At  a  stated  meeting  of  the  Council,  December  2Y,  1880,  Mr. 
Angelo  Heilprin  was  duly  elected  Professor  of  Invertebrate 
Paleontology ;  and  January  24,  1881,  Mr.  Henry  Carvill  Lewis 
was  appointed  Professor  of  Mineralogy. 

Knowing  that  the  society  has  no  means  to  defray  any  expense 
incidental  to  the  professorships,  and  that  the  long  wished-for 
endowments  to  support  them  have  not  yet  been  made,  these  gentle- 
men have  generouslj'^  volunteered  to  contribute  their  time  and 
valuable  services  towards  promoting  the  interests  of  the  Academy 
and  scientific  advancement  without  pecuniary  compensation. 

The  Committee  on  Instruction  and  Lectures  made  arrange- 
ments necessary  to  enable  the  professors  to  inaugurate  the  work  of 
instruction.  Professor  Heilprin  delivered  a  lecture  introductory 
to  his  course  on  Invertebrate  Palaeontology  before  the  Academy, 
March  6  ;  and  at  the  stated  meeting  of  the  15th,  Professor  Lewis 
delivered  an  introductory  lecture  to  his  course  on  Mineralogy. 

The  average  attendance  at  Professor  Heilprin's  course  of  twenty- 
six  lectures  was  twenty-five,  and  at  Professor  Lewis'  course  of 
fourteen  lectures,  thirty-five. 

The  Rev.  Dr.  Henry  C.  McCook,  Chairman  of  the  Committee 
on  Instruction  and  Lectures,  said,  in  his  report.  May  31,  1881: 
"  The  committee  feels  pleasure  in  recognizing  the  valuable  services 
rendered  by  the  professors  to  the  classes  of  last  winter — service 
that  has  been  none  the  less  valuable  and  is  all  the  more  entitled 


482  PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

to  hearty  acknowledgment  because  Aolimtarily  given.  It  has 
not  been  possible  to  give  them  a  pecuniary  acknowledgment  of 
their  services  worthy  of  any  notice  in  a  report.  The  hope  is 
expressed,  that  the  liberality  and  justice  of  those  interested  in  thi& 
department  of  the  Academy's  work,  will  enable  the  committee  to 
make  a  more  favorable  report  in  this  respect  upon  the  operations 
of  next  winter.'" 

The  committee  has  announced  that  early  in  January,  1882, 
Professor  Lewis  will  begin  a  course  of  25  lectures  on  Mineralogy, 
and  Professor  Heilprin  a  course  of  from  25  to  30  lectures  on 
Invertebrate  PalaBontology. 

The  institution  of  these  lectures  is  based  on  a  suiDposition,  a 
conjecture  that  there  are  many  persons  in  the  community  who 
desire  to  be  systematically  taught  such  branches  as  are  not  included 
in  academic  or  college  courses,  or  if  included,  not  generally 
accessible  to  those  who  are  interested  only  in  subjects  proposed 
to  be  taught  here,  and  that  those  persons  are  in  number  sufficient 
to  warrant  and  sustain  the  enterprise.  Experience  will  be  required 
to  determine  whether  or  not  the  conjecture  is  well-founded, 
because  the  nature  and  character  of  the  instruction  given  here  is 
not  likely  to  be  generally  known  or  appreciated  in  the  community 
in  a  trial  of  less  than  two  or  three  years.  If,  at  the  end  of  a  third 
course,  it  should  be  found  that  the  number  attracted  to  these 
courses  is  not  large  enough  to  compensate  the  professors,  it  is 
not  reasonable  to  suppose  that  they  will  be  willing  to  continue 
their  labors,  which  are  certainly  very  considei'able,  without  ade- 
quate substantial  remuneration.  When  it  becomes  manifest  that 
the  demand  for  systematic  and  practical  instruction  is  not  suffi- 
cient to  warrant  or  encourage  work  of  this  kind, it  will  be  suspended. 
Then  the  professors  will  be  free  to  devote  their  time  to  original 
investigations  exclusively,  provided  that  means  of  livelihood  are 
supplied  by  endowment  or  otherwise. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  the  admission  fees  are  sufficient  to  main- 
tain the  lectures  and  lecturers,  other  S3^stematic  courses  of  instruc- 
tion will  pi'obably  be  undertaken  and  continued  as  long  as  they 
are  supported,  and  thus  the  Academy,  which  has  been  heretofore 
mainly  a  repertory  of  means  and  resources  for  the  use  of  those 
who  seek  to  instruct  themselves,  may  also  become  efficient  in 

'  The  total  amount  of  fees  for  admission  <o  the  lectures  was  $151,  and 
of  thjB  incidental  expenses,  $52.27 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA.  483 

teaching  all  branches  of  natural  history,  both  b}'  lectures,  appro- 
priatel3'  illustrated  by  diagrams  and  by  specimens  from  the  museum 
as  well  as  by  personal,  individuallaboratory  work  under  the  super- 
vision of  the  professors. 

Whatever  the  result  of  the  experiment  in  teaching  may  be,  the 
appliances  necessary  to  study  possessed  by  the  Academy,  will  be 
always  accessible  to  those  who  may  be  gratified  to  have  an 
opportunity  to  teach  themselves — to  be  self-taught. 

Although  defective  and  deficient  in  some  respects,  there  is  no 
conclusive  reason  to  suppose  that  the  Academy  is  not  now 
realizing  the  hope  of  its  founders,  as  well  and  as  surely  as  in  any 
previous  year  of  its  history.  That  defects  will  be  corrected  and 
deficiencies  supplied  in  the  course  of  time  may  be  confidently 
conjectured,  because  the  needs  of  students  of  natural  science, 
which  is  daily  becoming  moi-e  fully  appreciated  than  ever  before 
in  the  world,  are  better  understood.  A  great  library  and  extensive 
collections  of  natural  objects,  appropriately  classified  and  labeled, 
are  necessary  to  enable  the  student  to  become  a  master  of  natural 
history,  and  qualify  him  to  be  a  successful  investigator.  The  cost 
of  such  necessary  appliances  and  facilities  of  study  is  so  great 
that  no  one  student  is  able  to  purchase  them  for  himself  alone. 
He  can  enjoy  their  use,  therefore,  only  in  common  with  others,  in 
a  society  like  the  Academy,  which  has  acquired  them  through  the 
generosity  of  many  individuals  in  the  course  of  years.  Every 
specimen,  every  book,ever3-  dollar  given  here  is  a  contribution  to 
the  repertory  of  means  to  facilitate  the  labors  of  present  and 
future  students  of  natural  science.  And  every  contributor  is 
regarded  as  a  benefactor  to  them  directly,  and  indirectly  as  a 
patron  of  scientific  progress,  in  greater  or  less  degree. 

Since  the  Academy  was  in  its  embryo  state,  seventy  years  ago, 
public  opinion  of  the  character  and  influence  of  its  pursuits  has 
greatl}^  changed.  Then  they  interested  comparatively  few,  and 
those  few  were  supposed  to  be  almost,  if  not  entirely,  free  from  the 
influence  of  belief  in  religious  principles  of  any  kind.  Many  pious 
but  prejudiced  persons  imagined  that  a  naturalist  is  necessarily 
an  infldel.  Those  very  good,  ignorant  people  then,  like  multitudes 
of  the  same  class  of  the  present  day,  limited  their  study  of  animal 
creation  almost  exclusively  to  man  and  his  actions,  depicted  in 
endless  variety  by  prose-writers  and  poets.  Assurance  that  there 
is  equal  pleasure  and  greater  mental  satisfaction  in  the  study  of 


484  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

organisms  inferior  to  man,  fell  then  as  now,  generally  speaking, 
upon  incredulous  ears.  They  do  not  believe  them  worthy  of 
serious  attention. 

The  nameless  author  of  "  La  Spectacle  de  la  Nature,"  a  work 
which  has  the  censor's  approval,  dated  Paris,  March  20,  lt32, 
speaking  of  insects,  says  :  "  If  the  Deity  did  not  think  it  unworthy 
of  Himself  to  create  them,  is  it  beneath  us  to  consider  them  ? 
*  *  *  the  minutest  things  in  nature  were  api)ointed  to  some 
peculiar  end  and  purpose,  and  the  Deit}'  is  as  conspicuous  in  the 
structure  of  the  fly's  paw  as  He  is  in  the  bright  globe  of  the  sun 
himself" 

No  one  pretends  now  to  impugn  the  truth  of  this  ancient  state- 
ment ! 

But  the  study  of  the  natural  sciences  is  no  longer  regarded 
among  Christian  theologians  and  laymen  of  intelligence  to  be 
antagonistic  to  the  existence  and  growth  of  religious  sentiment. 
Statesmen  recognize  in  it  economic  value.  Governments  re- 
quire naturalists  to  accompan}^  all  geographical  explorations. 
United  States  and  State  Geologist,  Botanist,  Entomologist,  etc., 
are  familiar  titles.  Periodical  publications  devoted  to  the  natural 
sciences  are  numerous.  To  this  kind  of  evidence  of  the  increasing 
popularity  of  scientific  pursuits  may  be  added  the  mulitiplication 
of  societies  for  their  promotion  in  different  parts  of  the  country. 
All  of  them  have  been  formed  since  the  Academy  was  founded. 
They  are  all  welcome  co-laborers  in  the  vast  field  of  work,  and  are 
not  regarded  in  an}^  sense  as  rivals  or  competitors.  They  serve 
to  create  a  spirit  of  wholesome  emulation. 

It  is  pleasant  to  suppose  that  the  Academy  has  had  a  salutary 
influence  on  the  progress  of  the  natural  sciences  to  the  degree  of 
popular  favor  they  now  possess,  and  that  its  general  conduct 
heretofore  is  approved.  Its  ways  have  been  and  are  unpretentious, 
unobtrusive.  Membership  in  itself  is  not  significant  of  any  degree 
of  scientific  acquirement,  but  only  of  friendliness  to  scientific 
pursuits.  Candidates  to  be  inscribed  on  the  list  of  its  members 
are  not  required  to  possess  special  qualifications.  Those  members 
who  avail  themselves  of  the  opportunity  and  appliances  aflbrded 
to  study,  gain  knowledge  and  receive  due  credit  for  any  good 
work  they  may  do.  The  reputation  they  may  thus  acquire  is 
reflected  upon  the  Academy. 

On   its  list  of  members   are  very  many  who   manifest  their 


1881.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES   OP    PHILADELPHIA.  485 

interest  in  the  society's  welfare  only  by  contributing  to  its  funds 
or  collections  ;  man}^  who  are  active  and  successful  workers  ;  many 
who  are  distinguished  by  their  attainments,  and  some  who  have 
reached  great  eminence ;  and  it  is  reasonably  supposable  that 
recruits  are  coming  forward  to  fill  vacancies  as  they  occur  in  each 
of  these  different  kinds  or  classes  of  members.  It  has  many 
numerous  and  valuable  collections  in  eveiy  department,  some  of 
them  unsurpassed,  which  are  continuously  increasing ;  and  an 
appropriate  library,  the  best  of  the  kind  in  the  country,  for  the 
steady  growth  of  which  permanent  provision  has  been  made.  It 
owns  the  building  it  occupies,  with  land  enough  on  which  to 
expand  it  to  twice  its  present  dimensions.  It  is  free  from  debt, 
and  its  current  income  has  been  in  the  past  year  equal  to  its 
economical  expenditure. 

The  condition  of  the  society,  attained  at  the  end  of  seventy 
years'  existence,  without  any  pecuniary  aid  whatever  from  the 
government  of  the  State,  justifies  the  policy  which  has  guided  the 
management  of  its  afiairs.  There  is  nothing  in  its  past  history  to 
suggest  that  it  should  depart  now  from  the  general  conservative 
policy  which  has  characterized  almost  every  step  of  its  progress 
since  1812.  Observance  of  this  policy  has  brought  it  to  its  present 
condition,  in  which  there  is  nothing  to  warrant  foreboding  of 
decadence,  but  much  on  which  to  found  hope  of  continuous 
progress.  This  condition  is  satisfactory,  because  at  this  time  the 
income  is  enough  to  meet  all  unavoidable  expenses.  Suggested 
improvements  in  several  directions  are  very  desirable  and 
earnestly  hoped  for ;  but  they  are  of  such  a  character  that  they 
can  wait  until  money  is  supplied  for  their  realization  without 
absolutely  arresting  the  progress  of  the  institution. 
Respectfully  submitted. 

W.  S.  W.  RUSCHENBERGER. 


REPORT  OF  THE  RECORDING  SECRETARY. 

The  Recording  Secretary  respectfully'  reports  that  during  the 
3^ear  ending  Nov.  30, 1881,  fifteen  members  and  six  correspondents 
have  been  elected. 

Resignations  of  membership  have  been  received  from  Messrs. 
J.  Ward  Atwood,  H.  Dumont  Wagner,  E.  Egglesfield  Griffith, 
Henry  Pemberton,  Jr.,  and  Wm.  F.  Sellers. 


486  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

The  records  of  the  death  of  eleven  members  and  six  correspon- 
dents have  been  published  in  the  Proceedings  under  dates  of 
announcement,  so  that  it  is  unnecessar}'  to  repeat  the  names  here. 

Twenty  papers  have  been  accepted  for  publication.  Eighteen 
of  these  have  been  printed,  and  the  remaining  two  will  be  included 
in  the  current  volume  of  Proceedings.  The  communications  have 
been  received  from  the  following :  Angelo  Heilprin,  (>  ;  Rev.  Dr. 
Henry  C.  McCook,  3  ;  S.  B.  Buckley,  3  ;  Henry  C.  Chapman,  2  ; 
Harrison  Allen,  Rafael  Arango,  John  H.  Ryder,  R.  E.  C.  Stearns. 
W.  X.  Lockington,  and  Messrs.  Wachsmuth  and  Springer,  each 
one. 

Sixty -four  pages  of  the  volume  of  Proceedings  for  1880,  and 
four  hundred  and  thirty  of  the  volume  for  1881,  have  been 
printed  during  the  year.  The  fourth  or  concluding  number  of 
Vol.  VIII  of  the  Journal  was  issued  and  distributed  to  subscribers 
and  correspondents  in  March. 

The  iuterest  of  the  weekly  meetings  has  depended  mainh'  on 
the  verbal  communications  made  from  time  to  time  by  Messrs. 
McCook,  Wood,  Leidy,  Ryder,  Meehan,  Chapman,  Potts,  Allen, 
Horn,  Foote,  Bassett,  Kite,  Heilprin,  Lewis,  Rand,  Haines, 
Koenig,  Anders  and  Pike.  The  greater  number  of  these  have 
been  reported  by  the  authors,  and  duly  published  in  the  Pro- 
ceedings. 

Mr.  Edw.  S.  Whelen  having  resigned  from  the  Council  and  the 
Finance  Committee,  the  vacancies  were  filled  by  the  electiori.  on 
the  22d  of  January,  of  Chas.  P.  Perot  to  the  former  and  Isaac  C. 
Martindale  to  the  latter  position. 

A  vacancy  in  the  Council,  caused  by  the  resignation  of  Dr.  H. 
C.  Chapman,  was  filled,  June  5,  by  the  election  of  Dr.  Geo.  A. 
Koenig. 

Article  3,  Chap.  XV,  of  the  By-Laws  was  amended  October  25 
by  adding  after  the  word  "election"  the  words  "and  resignation." 

All  of  which  is  respectfully  submitted. 

Edw.  J.  XoLAN, 

Recording  Secretary. 

REPORT  OF  THE  CORRESPONDIXG  SECRETARY. 

The  Corresponding  Secretary  reports  that  the  business  of  his 
office  has  not  diftered  materially  from  that  of  preceding  j-ears,  the 
correspondence  having  been  of  the  usual  routine  character. 


1881.]  NATURAL    SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  481 

During  the  past  year  our  membership  has  been  increased  by  the 
addition  of  six  Correspondents,  who  have  been  promptly  notified 
of  their  election,  and  from  nearly  all  of  whom  acceptances  have 
been  received. 

To  those  who  have  favored  the  Academy  with  donations  to  the 
Museum,  prompt  acknowledgments  have  been  sent ;  these,  to  the 
number  of  one  hundred  and  sixty-one,  represent  for  the  most  part 
not  single  specimens,  but  masses  of  valuable  material,  a  record  of 
which  will  appear  in  the  Curators'  report. 

The  letters  received  are  in  great  part  either  notices  of  the 
transmission  of  the  publications  of  Corresponding  Societies,  or 
acknowledgments  of  the  reception  of  our  own  by  them. 

The  summary  is  as  follows  : 

Letters  of  transmission,  49 

Letters  of  acknowledgment,  58 

Responses  from  Correspondents,  6 

•             Miscellaneous,  13 

representing  eight}'  Scientific  Societies,  Public  Libraries,  Insti- 
tutions of  original  research,  and  other  bodies  organized  for  the 
increase  and  diffusion  of  knowledge.  The  number  of  Corres- 
ponding Societies  shows  an  annual  increase. 

During  the  year  notices  of  the  death  of  several  Correspondents 
have  been  received,  and  published  in  the  current  Proceedings. 
Respectfullj'  submitted. 

George  H.  Horn,  M.  D., 

Corresponding  Secretary. 


REPORT  OF  THE  LIBRARIAN. 

The  Librarian  respectfully  reports  that  during  the  year  ending 
November  30,  1881,  there  have  been  2119  additions  made  to  the 
library  of  the  Academy.  As  heretofore,  the  greater  part  of  these 
have  been  the  publications  of  scientific  societies,  received  in  ex- 
change for  those  of  the  Academy.  The  increase  has  been  composed 
of  396  volumes,  2273  pamphlets  and  separate  parts  of  periodicals 
and  50  maps  and  plates. 


488 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP 


[1881. 


The  sources  from  which  these  were  derived  are  as  follows 


Societies, 1075 

Editors, 697 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund,     .     .     .278 

Authors, 252 

Jos.  Jeanes, 94 

F.  V.  Hayden, 33 

Wilson  Fund, 29 

Department  of  the  Interior,       .  22 

Geological  Survey  of  Sweden,   .  22 

Geological  Survey  of  Bohemia,  16 

Robert  Bridges, 14 

Geol.  Survey  of  Pennsylvania,  .  12 

Fish  Com'rs  of  Massachusetts,  12 

Geological  Survey  of  India,       .  9 

Department  of  Agriculture,       .  9 

Smithsonian  Institution,        .     .  9 

Isaac  Lea, 9 

War  Department, 7 

Fish  Commissioners  of  Maine,  7 

Treasury  Department,      ...  6 

Geological  Survey  of  Belgium,  5 

Minister  of  Works,  Mexico,  .  5 
Minister  of  Public  Works,  France,  5 
Dept.  of  Mines,  New  South  Wales,  5 

East  Indian  Government,      .     .  5 

Fish  Commission  of  Michigan,  4 

Geol.  Survey  of  New  Zealand.  4 

Engineer  Department,  U.  S.  A.,  4 

Major  Huguet  Latour,       ...  4 

University  of  New  York,      .     .  4 

Fish  Commission  of  Iowa,   .     .  3 


Norwegian  Government, 

Wm.  S.  Vaux 

Rev.  Dr.  Syle, 

Trustees  of  British  Museum, 
Geological  Survey  of  Canada, 

H.  C.  Lewis, 

C.  F.  Parker 

Geol.  Survey  of  New  Jersey, 
Mrs.  S.  S.  Haldeman,     .     .     . 

B.  L.  Hewit,        

H.  C.  Chapman,      .... 


3 
3 
3 
3 
2 
2 
2 
2 
1 
1 
1 
G.  W.  Tryon,  Jr., 1 

1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 


University  of  Minnesota, 

Yale  College, 

U.  S.  Commissioner  of  Fislieries, 
Fish  Com'r  of  Maryland,      .     . 
Wesleyan  University,      .     .     . 
Philadelphia  Library  Co.,     .     . 
University  of  California,       .     . 
Dept.  Mines.  Nova  Scotia,    .     . 
Geological  Survey  of  Italy, 
Mercantile  Library,  St.  Louis, 
Mercantile  Library.  San  Francisco 
N.  J.  State  Agricultural  Station, 
Pennsylvania  Museum,     .     •     . 
Rutger's  Scientific  School,    .     . 
Library  Com'rs,  Nova  Scotia, 

Astor  Library, 1 

American  Museum  of  Nat.  Hist. ,     1 
Second  Presbyterian  Church,    .       1 


In  addition,  8  volumes  were  procured  by  exchange  of  dupli- 
cates. The  additions  were  distributed  to  the  vai-ious  departments 
of  the  library  as  follows  : — 

Journals, 2021 

Geology 236 


General  Natural  History, 

Botany,        

Conchology, 

Anatomy  and  Physiology, 

Ichthyology, 

Bibliography,       .     .     .     . 

Entomology, 

Mineralogy, 

Anthropology,      .     .     .     . 
Physical  Science,      .     .     . 


64 

64 

47 

40 

4 

21 

21 

20 

18 

11 


Education, 

Voyages  and  Travels,  .     .     . 

Agriculture, 

Helminthology,  .     •    .     .    • 

Ornithology, 

Chemistry, 

Medicine, 

Biography, 

Mammalogy, 

Miscellaneous,      (War,     Fi- 
nance, Literature,  etc.,)     . 


11 
11 
10 
9 
9 
9 
6 
5 
2 

45 


Estimating  that  it  requires  an  average  of  10  pamphlets  or  parts 
of  periodicals  to  make  a  volume,  the  number  of  volumes  now  in 
the  library  is  about  29,485.  The  failure  of  some  of  the  ground- 
rents  constituting  the  I.  Y.  Williamson  Fund  and  the  consequent 
necessity  of  obtaining  possession  of  the  property  involved,  has 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  489 

decreased  the  number  of  works  obtained  from  that  source,  those 
received  having  been  mainly  continuations  of  periodicals  and 
serial  works  previously  subscribed  for.  It  is  hoped,  however, 
that  the  embarrassment  is  merely  temporarj^,  as  the  income  from 
the  Fund  will  be  hereafter  materially  increased  by  the  rents  of 
the  properties  thus  acquired. 

The  Academy  is  indebted  to  Mr.  Jos,  Jeanes  for  a  gift  of 
$500.00  for  the  purchase  of  botanical,  and  $239.80  for  geological 
works  actually  required  by  the  workers  in  these  departments. 
The  books  most  urgently  asked  for,  have  been  ordered,  and  those 
which  have  been  received  are  noted  in  the  accompanying  list  of 
additions  to  the  library. 

The  revision  of  the  catalogue  of  American  journals  has  been 
completed.  Applications  have  been  made  for  deficiencies  in  every 
case  where  it  was  at  all  probable  that  the  publishers  could  be 
reached,  and  proposals  to  exchange  have  been  made  to  a  few 
societies  not  yet  in  correspondence  with  us.  The  latter  are  mainly 
in  South  America,  and  judging  by  the  experience  of  the  past,  the 
answers,  which  we  have  not  yet  had  time  to  receive,  will  be  favor- 
able. 

Edw.  J.  Nolan, 

Librarian. 


REPORT  OF  THE  CURATORS. 

The  Curators  present  the  following  report  of  the  Museum  pre- 
pared by  Mr.  Chas.  F.  Parker,  in  special  charge  of  the  same. 

I  would  respectfully  report,  that  during  the  year  all  the  collec- 
tions of  the  Museum  have  been  carefully  inspected  and  cared  for, 
and  that  they  are  in  good  condition. 

The  specimens  received  during  the  year  have  been  labeled  and 
placed  in  their  proper  positions. 

The  contributions  in  the  various  departments  during  the  year, 
excepting  those  reported  on  by  some  of  the  special  sections, 
follows,  and  will  be  found  included  in  the  "  List  of  additions  to  the 
Museum." 

The  Haldeman  collection,  noted  in  the  list,  has  been  partially 
arranged  in  forty  drawers  and  nirje  horizontal  cases.     A,  large 


490  PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

number  of  specimens  had  to  be  packed  away  for  want  of  room, 
which,  it  is  hoped,  will  soon  be  provided  for  their  display. 

Joseph  Leidy,  M.  D., 

Chairman  of  Curators. 


REPORT  OF  THE  BIOLOGICAL  AND  MICROSCOPICAL 

SECTION. 

Fifteen  stated  meetings  were  held  during  the  j^ear. 

The  following  new  members  and  associates  were  elected : 

Members.— Kohevt  S.  Davis,  E.  P.  Borden,  J.  E.  Mitchell,  Dr. 
Crozier  Griffiths,  Dr.  George  A.  Rex,  Edward  P.  Starr,  D.  S. 
Newhall. 

Associates.— \N .  T.  Seal,  Dr.  J.  R.  McClurg,  J.  H.  Fenton. 

The  death  of  but  one  member  was  noticed  upon  the  minutes  of 
the  section,  that  of  Thomas  W.  Starr. 

Besides  the  usual  material  presented  at  the  meetings,  the 
following  special  subjects  were  of  more  than  ordinary  interest: — 

Dec.  6,  1880. — The  anatomy  of  the  Sponges,  by  Mr.  Ryder. 

Dec.  20,1880. — An  exhibition  with  a  new  Projecting  Lantern, 
by  Queen  &  Co. 

Jan.  3,  1881. — Lecture  upon  Living  Units  and  the  Growth  of 
Vegetable  and  Animal  Matter,  from  the  Original  Cells  or 
Bioplasts,  by  Dr.  J.  G.  Hunt. 

Jan.  It,  1881. — Lecture  upon  Mosses,  by  Dr.  Hunt. 

Feb.  T,  1881. — Lecture  upon  the  subject,  "  Some  Problems 
Within  and  Some  that  are  Beyond  Microscopical  Observation,"  by 
Dr.  Hunt. 

Feb.  21,  1881. — Extended  remarks  upon  the  Anatomy  of  the 
Mosses  and  the  best  methods  of  Mounting,  by  Mr.  Jacob  Binder. 

March  1,1881. — The  Microscopical  Mechanism  of  some  parts 
of  the  Digestive  Organs,  by  Dr.  Hunt. 

March  21,  1881. — Extended  remarks  by  Mr.  George  Binder 
upon  the  Fungi  and  the  best  method  of  mounting  them. 

March  21,  1881. — Observations  by  Mr.  J.  0.  Schimmell  upon 
the  common  Red  Spider  or  Mite. 

March  21,  1881. — A  new  method  of  bleaching  vegetable  tissues, 
by  Mr,  Jacob  Binder. 

April  4,1881. — Lecture  by  Dr.  Hunt  upon  the  Significance  of 
some  Customs  in  Living  Things. 


1881.] 


NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA. 


491 


May  2,  1881. — Lecture  by  Dr.  Hunt  upon  Some  Comparative 
Illustrations  of  Breathing  Orgaus. 

May  17,  1881. — Observations  upon  the  best  methods  of  pre- 
paring Crystals  of  Hippuric  Acid. 

June  6,  1881. — Lecture  by  Dr.  Hunt  upon  Growth  in  the  Skin 
and  in  some  Trees  alike. 

Nov.  16  and  17. — The  Annual  Exhibition  was  held,  and  was 
attended  by  a  large  and  interested  assembly. 

Dec.  5,  1881. — At  the  annual  election  the  following  gentlemen 
were  elected  officers  for  the  ensuing  year : 


Director, 

Vice-Director^ 

Corresponding  Secretary, 

Conservator^ 

Treasurer,    . 

Recorder, 

Committee  of  Auditors, 


Committee  of  Curators, 
Committee  on  Business, 


Dr.  R.  S.  Kenderdine. 
Dr.  Charles  Schaetfer. 
Dr.  L,  Ashley  Faught. 
Mr,  Charles  P.  Perot. 
Dr.  Isaac  Norris. 
Dr.  Robert  J.  Hess. 
Mr.  J.  C.  Wilson, 
Mr.  S.  L.  Fox, 
Dr.  A.  G.  Reed. 
Mr.  C.  P.  Perot, 
Mr.  E.  Pennock. 
Dr.  C.  Schaeffer, 
Dr.  R.  J.  Hess, 
Mr.  C.  P.  Perot, 
Dr.  A.  G.  Reed, 
Mr.  S.  L.  Fox. 


Respectfully  submitted, 

Robert  J.  Hess,  M.  D. 

Becorder. 


REPORT  OF  THE  CONCHOLOGICAL  ^CTION. 

The  Recorder  of  the  Conchological  Section  respectfully  reports 
that  during  1881,  Mr.  Rafael  Arango,  Prof.  Angelo  Heilprin,  Dr. 
R.  E.  C.  Stearns  and  Mr.  Henry  Hemphill  have  prepared  papers, 
which  have  been  accepted  and  published  in  the  Proceedings  of  the 
Academy.     Besides  these,  verbal  communications  have  been  made 


492  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 

at  various  times  upon  conchologieal  subjects,  at  meetings  of  the 
Academy,  by  Dr.  Leidy  and  Messrs.  Heilprin,  Ryder  and  Ford. 

Our  Conservator,  Mr.  Tryon,  reports  that 

"  During  the  year  ending  December  1,  1881,  forty-four  distinct 
donations  of  recent  shells  and  mollusks  have  been  received, 
aggregating  877  species,  represented  by  3205  specimens.  With 
the  assistance  of  Mr.  Charles  F.  Parker  these  have  all  been  labeled, 
mounted  and  displayed  in  the  Museum.  In  addition  to  this  work, 
the  rearrangement  of  the  entire  collection,  in  accordance  with  the 
latest  and  best  views  of  classification,  which  was  commenced  two 
years  ago,  is  constantly  progressing — the  Turbinellida?,  Nassidae 
and  MitridsB  having  been  completely  re-studied  and  partly 
re-labeled. 

'  The  collection  of  Unionidae  having  outgrown  the  limits  orig- 
inally assigned  to  it,  a  new  arrangement  thereof  became  necessary, 
and  for  this  purpose  ninety-six  drawers  were  appropriated,  at  the 
west  end  of  the  Conchologieal  gallery.  The  specimens  are  now 
uniforml}-  mounted,  with  new  labels,  and  classified  in  accordance 
with  the  latest  edition  of  Dr.  Lea's  Synopsis  of  Naiades.  Two 
reference-catalogues  of  the  family  have  been  prepared,  one  of 
which  is  for  the  use  of  strangers  desirous  of  consulting  the  col- 
lection. The  cabinet  of  Unionidae  contains  over  six  hundred 
species,  represented  by  several  thousand  selected  specimens,  and 
occupies  two  hundred  and  forty  feet  of  surface  space.  To  the 
above  work  Mr.  Parker  has,  as  usual,  devoted  much  of  his  time, 
and  with  great  advantage  to  the  appearance  of  the  specimens. 

"  Early  in  the  year  an  opportunity  occurred  to  secure  a  fine 
suite  of  fossil  shells  from  the  older  formations  of  the  West — 
hitherto  very  imperfectly  represented  in  the  Academy's  Museum ; 
the  Section  obtained  these  by  purchase. 

"  Prof.  Angelo  Heilprin  having  assumed  official  charge  of  the 
cabinet  of  invertebrate  palaeontology,  his  annual  report  will  con- 
tain the  summary  of  donations  of  fossil  shells,  heretofore  included 
in  this  report. 

"  Recently,  a  large  and  valuable  selection  of  recent  shells,  all  new 
to  the  Academy's  collection,  has  been  offered  to  us  at  a  reason- 
able price,  and  by  the  kindness  of  several  friends,  a  portion  of  it  has 
already  been  secured.  In  this  connection  we  would  call  attention 
to  the  manifest  impossibility  of  maintaining  unimpaired  the  use- 
fulness to  students  of  our  Conchologieal  collection  by  continuing 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  493 

to  rel}^  upon  occasional  donations  and  exchanges  for  the  supply 
of  newly-discovered  species.  A  museum  which  does  not  ever 
reflect  the  current  state  of  knowledge  misses  its  highest  aim,  and 
may  become  as  valueless  for  progress  as  a  library  composed  of 
books  written  several  generations  ago. 

"Authentic  or  carefully  identified  specimens  of  known  species 
are  much  more  necessary  to  the  student  than  books.  Figures  and 
descriptions,  however  carefully  drawn,  can  only  convey  to  him  a 
portion  of  the  significance  of  the  specimens.  Books  are,  of  course, 
necessary  implements  of  study,  but  to  derive  our  knowledge  of 
zoological  characters  from  them  exclusively  is  to  receive  at  second 
hand  the  impression  which  natural  objects  have  made  upon  other 
minds,  a  condition  which  almost  precludes  safe  progress  in 
zoological  discovery.  Through  several  wise  benefactions,  the 
library  of  the  Academy  has  become  the  most  important  librar3^  of 
natural  science  in  America,  and  means  have  been  provided  for  its 
continuous  growth;  but  the  Museum  has  always  depended  upon 
fitful  generosity  exclusively ;  no  intelligent  direction  has  been 
given  to  its  increase,  simply  for  want  of  money.  In  no  other 
department  of  the  Museum  do  we  suffer  more  for  the  want  of 
purchasing  power  than  in  that  of  Conchology.  Ten  j^ears  ago  our 
collection  had  become,  by  a  succession  of  favorable  circumstances, 
so  complete  that  it  was  consulted  by  students  as  a  standard 
authority.  Its  reputation  still  exists,  but  with  each  succeeding 
year  it  is  less  deserved,  for  few  of  the  rich  collections  constantly 
being  made  in  regions  new  to  zoological  research  find  their  way 
into  our  cases.  A  fund  yielding  a  few  hundred  dollars  per  annum 
would  suffice  to  maintain,  perhaps  to  increase,  the  value  of  our 
Conchological  Museum,  A  gift  for  this  purpose  would,  it  is 
believed,  be  a  good  investment,  productive  in  the  best  sense. 

The  Museum  of  Recent  Conchology  now  contains  139,592 
specimens,  mounted  in  39,501  trays.  The  species  are  named 
throughout,  with  rare  exceptions,  and  are  all  accessible  to 
students." 

There  have  been  no  changes  made  in  the  By-Laws  of  the  Section, 
and  the  officers  of  last  year  have  been  re-elected. 
Respectfully  submitted  by 

S.  Raymond  Roberts, 

Iieco7'der. 


494  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY   OF  [18»1. 

REPORT  OF  THE  BOTANICAL  SECTION. 

The  Yiee-Director  has  much  pleasure  in  reporting  the  continued 
progress  of  the  Section  during  the  past  year. 
The  offlcers-elect  for  1882  are  : 

Director^    .         .         .         Dr.  W.  S.  W.  Ruschenberger. 
Vice-Director^    .         .         Thomas  Meehan. 
Recorder^    .         .         ,         F.  Lainson  Scribner. 
Corresponding  Secretary 

and  Treasurer,  .  Isaac  C.  Martindale. 
Conservator^  .  .  John  H.  Redfield. 
Meetings  have  been  held  every  second  Monday  in  the  month, 
except  in  July  and  August,  with  a  slightly  increased  attendance 
over  the  previous  3'ear.  Manj'  valuable  verbal  and  written  com- 
munications have  been  made  to  the  meetings ;  some  of  the  more 
important  have  been  afterwards  published  in  the  Proceedings  of 
the  Academy. 

All  the  valuable  work  done  by  the  Section  this  year  has  been 
without  drawing,  except  to  a  trifling  extent,  on  the  funds  of  the 
Academy. 

The  membership  has  increased  slightly,  and  the  Treasurer 
reports  a  balance  on  hand  of  $34.92. 

It  is  but  right  that  the  Academy  should  bear  in  mind  that  its 
Botanical  collection  is  one  of  the  finest  in  the  United  States. 
Numbers  of  excellent  botanists  stand  ready  to  suppl}"^  deficiencies, 
if  they  can  only  be  furnished  with  lists  of  what  are  needed.  A 
very  little  financial  aid,  to  supply  what  the  voluntary  labor  of  the 
zealous  members  of  the  Section  would  be  overtasked  to  do,  would 
place  it  in  a  condition  to  do  great  honor  to  the  Academy.  Though 
in  the  continued  absence  of  this  financial  aid,  the  progress  is  much 
slower  than  is  desirable,  the  marked  advance,  as  evidenced  by  the 
Conservator's  report,  is  so  very  gratifying  that  the  Section  has 
adopted  it  as  part  of  its  report  to  the  Academy. 
Respectfully  submitted. 

Thomas  Meehan, 

Vice-Director. 

The  Conservator  reports  a  constant  and  encouraging  growth  of 
the  botanical  collections  of  the  Academy  during  the  past  year. 
The  usual  detailed  list  of  the  accessions  is  appended.     Among  the 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA.  495 

most  important  of  these,  we  may  refer  to  the  large  and  nearlj'^ 
complete  series  of  sections  of  North  American  woods,  collected 
imder  the  direction  of  Prof.  Chas.  S.  Sargent,  Commissioner  of 
the  Forestry  Department  of  the  U.  S.  Census  of  1880,  and  by  him 
presented  to  the  AcademJ^  Mr.  Canby  has  contributed  during 
the  3'ear  52Y  species  of  plants,  mostl}^  European,  but  with  many 
rare  species  from  South  Africa  and  Australia.  To  Mr.  Martindale 
we  are  indebted  for  the  5th,  6th  and  Tth  Centuries  of  Ellis'  N. 
American  Fungi,  containing  a  series  of  carefully  determined 
specimens  illustrating  that  most  difficult  department  of  Crypto- 
gams. From  the  Cambridge  Herbarium  we  have  received  a  small 
but  interesting  collection  of  plants  from  Afghanistan,  collected 
by  Dr.  J.  E.  T.  Aitcheson  during  the  advance  of  the  British  army 
into  that  country  in  1879. 

The  Conservator  has  continued  to  direct  his  main  attention  to 
the  work  of  bringing  into  more  orderl}^  arrangement  the  somewhat 
chaotic  mass  of  material  in  the  Herbarium,  believing  that  in  this 
way  he  can  best  facilitate  the  labors  of  those  who  may  come  after 
him.  During  the  year  provisional  alphabetical  lists  of  species 
have  been  prepared  for  a  considerable  portion  of  the  general 
Herbarium,  to  which  the  arrangement  of  the  species  in  the  genus 
covers  has  been  made  to  conform.  Those  who  have  occasion  to 
consult  the  Herbarium  will  appreciate  the  great  saving  of  time 
which  this  arrangement  will  eftect.  It  would  be  gratifying  if  this 
labor  could  be  accompanied  by  a  thorough  study  and  working 
over  of  the  material  represented,  but  with  the  limited  time  at  the 
Conservator's  disposal,  this  is  absolutely  impossible,  and  will  be 
better  performed  hereafter  when  the  Academy  shall  be  able  to 
secure  the  constant  services  of  an  experienced  botanist.  Yet  this 
end  has  not  been  altogether  neglected,  and  in  the  mounting  of  the 
N.  American  Herbarium,  which  work  is  still  continued,  careful 
revision  of  names  has  been  kept  in  view,  and  if  error  has  not 
been  altogether  avoided,  it  has  at  least  been  greatly  lessened. 
The  mounting  of  that  portion  of  the  collection  covered  b}'  the 
issued  part  of  Gray's  Synoptical  Flora,  is  now  complete,  and 
some  little  progress  has  been  made  in  other  portions. 

During  the  year  Dr.  Eckfeldt  has  carefully  examined  and 
catalogued  the  lichens  of  the  collection,  contributing  also   100 


33 


490  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE   ACADEMY    OP  [1881. 

species  which  were  wantinc;,  and  Mr.  Scribner  has  continued  his 
labors  upon  our  grasses,  which  he  is  critically  studying  and 
mounting. 

Mr.  Chas.  F.  Parker,  the  Academy's  Curator-in-charge,  has 
been  of  the  most  essential  service  to  the  Conservator  in  carrying 
out  the  work  of  poisoning  all  new  additions,  a  large  proportion  of 
which  he  has  also  mounted  ;  and  his  contributions  to  the  N. 
American  Herbarium  have  tilled  many  gaps,  and  added  choicer 
specimens  of  species  already  represented. 

Respectfully  submitted. 

John  H.  Redpield, 

Cons.ervatoi\ 


REPORT  OF  THE  ENTOMOLOGICAL  SECTION. 

The  Entomological  Section  during  the  j^ear  has  been  enabled 
to  perform  an  amount  of  work  that  is  quite  gratifying  to  its 
members.  In  this  work  it  has  been  generously  aided  by  the  Amer- 
ican Entomological  Society,  which  has  allowed  it  a  fair  share  of 
its  own  limited  income.  The  cabinets  have  been  remodeled,  and 
several  new  cases  added  thereto.  Tliese  have  been  paid  for  by 
the  Society. 

By  the  increase  in  cabinet  room  thus  obtained  the  Section  has 
found  space  to  add  to  the  collection,  175  species,  comprising  300 
specimens  or  more,  of  which  60  species  entirely  new  to  the  collec- 
tion have  already  been  arranged.  A  complete  rearrangement  of  all 
the  species  is  now  being  made  by  Mr.  Howard  Parker.  The 
aforementioned  new  specimens  ai'e  such  as  have  been  added  so  far 
as  this  rearrangement  has  progressed,  viz.,  from  the  Cicindellidje 
to  Anisodactylus  of  the  Carabidse,  inclusive. 

During  the  year  the  Section  held  its  regular  monthly  meetings, 
excepting  in  August  and  September,  tiie  usual  vacation  period. 
At  these  meetings  communications,  both  written  and  verbal  were 
made.  These  have  been  published  in  the  Proceedings  of  the 
Section,  of  which  28  pages  have  thus  far  appeared.  In  addition 
to  these  pages  of  entomological  matter  the  American  Entomolog- 
ical'Society  has  published  212  pages  of  its  Transactions;  these 
make  a  total  of  240  pages  of  printed  matter  during  the  year. 


1881.] 


NATURAL   SCIENCES    OF   PHILADELPHIA, 


49^ 


At  the  meeting  of  the  Section  held  December  12,  the  following 
officers  were  elected  for  the  year  1882  : 

Director^        .         .         .         .     J.  L.  Le  Conte,  M.  D. 
Vice-Director,        .         ...     George  H.  Horn,  M.  D. 
Treasurer,     .         .         .         .     E.  T.  Cresson,  M.  D. 
Recorder,        .         .         .         .     J.  H.  Ridings. 
Conservator,  ....     Charles  "Wilt. 
Respectfull}'  submitted. 

J.  H.  Ridings, 
Recorder. 

REPORT  OF  THE  MIXERALOGICAL  SECTION. 

The  Director  of  the  Mineralogical  and  Geological  Section  would 
respectfull}^  report  that  regular  meetings  have  been  held  monthly 
during  the  year,  except  in  July  and  August.  At  these  meetings 
the  attendance  of  members  and  visitors  has  been  larger  than  in 
any  former  3  ear,  averaging  eleven.  Xew  discoveries  have  been 
from  time  to  time  announced,  and  many  items  of  interest  discussed. 
For  the  details  of  this  work  he  would  refer  to  the  appended  reports 
of  the  Professors  of  Invertebrate  Palaeontology  and  of  Mineralogv, 
and  to  the  papers  herewith  transmitted,  and  which  will  be  pub- 
lished in  the  Proceedings  for  1882.  Specimens  received  through 
the  section  during  the  3'ear,  though  not  as  large  in  number  as  in 
some  prior  3'ears,  have  made  a  valuable  addition  to  the  cabinet. 
A  special  meeting  was  held  in  March,  in  conjunction  with  the 
meeting  of  the  Academy',  at  which  the  Professor  of  Mineralogy 
delivered  his  inaugural  address.  Two  hundred  members  and 
visitors  were  present, 

The  success  of  this  insured  the  unanimous  approval  b}'  the 
Section  of  the  proposition  to  combine  the  meetings  of  the  Sections 
with  those  of  the  Academ}'. 

The  following  officers  have  been  elected  for  the  ensuing  year: 
Director,         ....         Theo.  D.  Rand. 
Vice-Director,         .         .         .         W.  W.  Jefferis. 
Secretary,       ....         Chas.  Schaeffer,  M.  D. 
Treasurer,      ....         John  Ford. 
Conservator,  .         .         .         .         H.  Carvill  Lewis. 
Respectfully  submitted. 

Theo.  D.  Rand, 

Director. 


498  PROCEEDINGS   OP   THE   ACADEMY   OP  [1881. 


REPORT    OF    THE    PROFESSOR   OF   INVERTEBRATE 
PALEONTOLOGY. 

The  Professor  of  Invertebrate  Palaeontology  respectfully  reports, 
that  during  the  year  1881,  a  course  of  26  lectures  on  Invertebx'ate 
Palaeontology  was  delivered  in  the  class  room  of  the  Academy 
(commencing  on  March  8,  and  terminating  June  4),  which  course 
was  attended  by  an  average  of  about  25  listeners,  largely  made  up 
of  teachers  from  some  of  the  more  prominent  institutions  of 
learning  in  the  city. 

The  work  of  classifying  and  arranging  the  old  collections  in  the 
Palajontological  Department  of  the  Academy  has  made  some  pro- 
gress during  the  year.    The  determination  of  specimens  embraces : 

123  trays  of  (so-called)  Cretaceous  fossUs  from  the  Tejon 
group  of  California,  originally  described  by  W.  M. 
Gabb  for  the  Whitney  Survey,  and  largely  composed 
of  type  specimens;  these  last  have  been  specially 
indicated. 

312  trays  of  Tertiar}^  (Miocene  and  Pliocene)  fossils, 
largely  composed  of  T.  A.  Conrad's  t^^pes. 


435 


The  specimens  contained  in  263  of  these  trays  have  been  care- 
fully mounted  and  labeled  by  Mr.  Chas.  F.  Parker,  Curator-in- 
charge;  to  the  remaining  172  trays,  only  provisional  labels  have 
been  attached. 

The  Pala^ontological  collections  of  the  Academy  have  thus  far 
suffered  greatly  from  want  of  room  for  their  proper  exposition ; 
something  toward  remedying  the  evil,  by  the  construction  of 
additional  drawers,  has  been  done  in  the  course  of  the  year,  but 
much  more  still  remains  to  be  accomplished.  It  is  especially 
desirable  that  a  suitable  cabinet,  or  other  fixture,  be  obtained  for 
the  exhibition  of  specimens  typically  representing  the  various 
geological  formations,  which  would  not  only  greatly  facilitate  the 
work  of  the  Professor  in  teaching,  but  would  very  materially  aid 
the  students,  special  as  well  as  general,  in  their  studies. 

All  the  additions  to  the  Pateontological  collection,  made  in  the 
course  of  the  year,  have  been  labeled  and  mounted  by  Mr.  Chas. 
F.  Parker,  Curator. 


1881. J  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF   PHILADELPHIA.  499 

The  Department  of  the  Library  pertaining  to  Geology  and 
Palaeontology  has  received  many  valuable  accessions  during  the 
3'ear,  for  a  considerable  portion  of  which  the  Academy  is  indebted 
to  the  liberality  of  Mr.  Joseph  Jeanes. 

Angelo  Heilprin, 
Professo7'  of  Invertebrate  Palaeontology. 


REPORT  OF  THE   PROFESSOR  OP  MINERALOGY  FOR 

1881. 

In  submitting  to  j'ou  this,  m}'  first  annual  report  upon  the 
condition  and  needs  of  the  department  under  my  charge,  allow  me 
to  express  my  appreciation  of  the  assistance  which  has  been 
rendered  through  the  active  co-operation  of  your  committee 
on  instruction,  in  the  discharge  of  mj^  duties  as  Professor  of 
Mineralog3". 

Under  their  auspices  a  course  of  practical  instruction  in  Miner- 
alogy- was  given  during  the  months  of  March  and  April.  It 
consisted  of  thirteen  lectures,  and  was  attended  by  a  class  of  about 
35,  being  as  large  in  number  as  could  convenientl}"^  be  accommo- 
dated in  the  room  set  apart  for  the  purpose.  The  course  opened 
with  a  review  of  the  history  of  Mineralogy  and  of  mineralogical 
classification.  Succeeding  lectures  consisted  of  a  detailed  descrip- 
tion of  the  characters  of  minerals  and  an  exposition  of  the  methods 
used  in  mineralogical  determination,  with  experiments.  Speci- 
mens from  the  valuable  collection  of  the  Academy  were  used  in 
illustration.  Practical  work  was  successfully  carried  on  by  nearly 
all  the  class.  It  consisted  of  the  determination  of  the  characters 
of  minerals,  the  application  of  chemical  tests  to  detect  their 
constituents,  and  the  performance  of  the  various  operations  of 
blowpipe  analysis.  This  was  supplemented  by  a  day  of  practical 
work  in  the  field. 

The  summer  months  were  emplo3^ed  in  discovering  and  tracing 
the  line  across  Pennsylvania  of  the  great  terminal  moraine  of  the 
North  American  glacier;  the  work  having  been  accomplished 
with  the  assistance  of  the  Second  Geological  Survey  of  Pennsyl- 
vania, and  of  which  a  report  will  shortly  be  published. 

The  mineral  collection  of  the  Academy  has  been  increased 
during  the  past  year  by  valuable  additions.     The  donations  made 


500  PROCEEDINGS    OF    THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

by  Mr.  Jkment  and  Mr.  Vaux  are  especially  worthy  of  note.  A 
number  of  undetermined  specimens  and  specimens  wrongly  labeled 
have  been  examined  and  properl}'  placed  in  the  collection.  The 
labels  have  been  written  and  the  specimens  arranged  as  heretofore 
by  Mr.  Chas.  F.  Parker,  in  his  usual  careful  manner.  It  is  hoped 
in  time  to  form  special  collections,  illustrating  the  various  external 
characters  of  the  minerals. 

A  very  valuable  acquisition  has  been  the  manuscript  catalogue 
of  the  rock  collection  made  by  the  First  Geological  Survey  of 
Penns3'lvania.  This  catalogue,  consisting  of  300  pages,  is  an  exact 
copy  of  the  original  catalogue  made  by  Prof.  H.  D.  Rogers, 
which  is  now  in  the  possession  of  the  State  Agricultural  College 
at  Bellefonte.  It  was  copied  under  the  direction  of  Prof.  J.  P. 
Lesley,  who,  at  mj'  request,  has  now  deposited  it  with  the 
Academy.  This  catalogue  transforms  a  worthless  collection  of 
rocks  into  a  most  valuable  one.  The  collection,  which  was  given 
by  Prof.  Rogers  to  the  Franklin  Institute,  and  which  is  now 
boxed  in  the  cellar  of  the  Academj-,  awaiting  arrangement,  con- 
sists of  5725  specimens,  illustrating  the  lithology  of  the  greater 
portion  of  the  State.  The  specimens  are  all  numbered,  and  can 
be  so  arranged  as  to  correspond  with  the  pages  in  Prof.  Rogers 
Final  Geological  Report,  and  thus  to  prove  of  great  service  to 
students.  It  is  to  be  regretted  that  the  limited  space  now  at  the 
command  of  the  Academy  precludes  any  satisfactory  display  of 
this  collection. 

In  accordance  with  the  by-law  requesting  the  Professor  to  state 
the  needs  of  tlie  depaitment  under  his  charge,  the  following 
suggestions  are  here  offered : 

It  is  very  desirable  that  a  single  row  of  drawers  should  be 
placed  beneath  the  mineral  cases.  Specimens  of  less  value  than 
those  in  the  cases,  those  valuable  only  for  locality,  and  minerals 
for  the  use  of  students  would  properly  be  placed  in  such  drawers. 
The  systematic  arrangement  and  good  appearance  of  the  collec- 
tion would  thus  be  permanently  established.  It  is  also  recom- 
mended that  some  provision  be  made  for  the  storage  of  duplicates. 
A  series  of  wooden  trays  sliding  in  a  rough  frame  would  be  the 
most  compact  and  suitable  arrangement,  and  could  conveniently 
accommodate  not  only  the  duplicate  specimens  now  scattered,  but 
also  others  that  may  hereafter  be  received. 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  501' 

In  the  department  of  instruction  much  is  needed.  Before  any- 
systematic  instruction  in  crystallography  can  be  given,  the 
Academ}^  should  have  a  set  of  the  Siegen  glase  crystal  models  for 
instruction,  and  a  collection  of  wooden  models  for  practice.  For 
advanced  mineralogical  instruction  it  is  also  necessary  to  have 
certain  instruments,  among  which  a  reflecting  goniometer,  a 
polariscope,  and  a  lithological  microscope  are  the  most  important. 
A  good  balance  is  also  desirable  tor  accurate  specific  gravity  deter- 
minations. These  instruments  would  be  used  both  for  instruction 
to  advanced  students,  and,  under  proper  restrictions,  for  original 
investigations. 

Henry  Carvill  Lewis, 

Pj'ofessor  of  Mineralogy. 


5 

00 

421 

30 

25 

00 

5 

00 

75 

00 

25 

CO 

1 

00 

124 

09 

800 

54 

70  00 

81 

00 

502  PROCEEDINGS   OF    THE    ACADEMY   OF  [1881. 


SUMMARY   OF   THE   REPORT   OF   WM.   C.    HENSZEY, 

Treasurer,  for  the  year  ending  Nov.  30,  1881. 

Dr. 

To  Balance  from  last  account f  911  21 

"  Initiation  fees 120  00 

"  Contributions  (semi-annual  contributions) 1936  45 

"  Life  Memberships 100  00 

"  Voluntary  Contributions  from  Life  Members 

"  Admissions  to  Museum 

"  Sale  of  Guide  to  Museum 

"         *'      Duplicate  Books 

"  Donation  from  Entomological  Society 

"  W.  L.  Mactier,  for  lectures,  1881  and  1882 

"  Freight  returned 

"  Tublication  Committee 1124  09 

"  "  "        Balance  of  Publication  amount 

in  their  hands 

"   Fees,  Lectures  on  Palaeontology 

"       "  "         "  Mineralogy 

"  Interest  from  Mortgage  Investment,  Joshua  T.  Jeanes' 

Legacy 1000  00 

"  Wilson  Fund.     Toward  Salary  Librarian^..  300  00 

"  Publication  Fund.     Interest  on  Investments 320  00 

"  Barton  Fund.  "         "  "  240  00 

"  Life  Member.  Fund.       "         "  "  60  00 

"  Maintenance  Fund.        "         "  "  30  00 

"  Interest  on  Deposits 220  28 

$7870  87 

Cr. 

Salaries,  Janitors,  etc ^3394  97 

Freight 65  94 

Repairs 338  93 

Insurance 30  00 

Coal 615  45 

Gas 91   72 

Mounting  Parrot 1  50 

Stationery  and  Postage  Stamps 121   14 

Alcohol 42  75 

Newspaper  Reports 60  00 

Water-rents. « 26  15 

Trays 50  50 

Binding 50  00 

Printing  and  Paper 1291  68 

Plates  and  Engravings 

Lecture  Expenses 

Miscellaneous 

A.  Heilprin.    One-half  Receipts,  Committee  of  Instruction. 

H.  C.  Lewis.         "  "  "  "  " 

Life  Membership,  transferred  to  Life  Membership  Fund. 

—       6952  16 

Balance,  General  Account $918  71 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES    OF    PHILADELPHIA.  503 

LIFE  MEMBERSHIP  FUND.     (For  Maintenance.) 

Balance  per  last  Statement $1000  00 

Life  Membership  transferred  to  this  account 100  00 

Interest  on  Investments 60  00 

Phila.  and  Erie  Railroad   Bonds  paid  ott 2000  00 

^3160  GO 

Transferred  to  General  Account $60  00 

Investment  in  Bond  and  Mortsrage,  at  five  per  cent,  int 2000  00 

2060  00 

To  Balance  for  Investment $1100  00 

BARTON  FUND.     (For  Printing  and  Illustrating  Publications.) 

Balance  per  last  Statement $240  00 

Interest 240  00 

$480  ( 0 
Transferred  to  General  Account 240  00 

Balance $240  00 

JESSUP  FUND.     (For  Support  of  Students.) 

Balance,  last  Statement $521  67 

Interest  on  Investments 560  00 

$1081   67 
Disbursed 500  00 

Balance $581  67 

MAINTENANCE  FUND. 

Balance  per  last  Statement $526  35 

Interest  on  Investments 30  00 

Phila.  and  Erie  Railroad  Bond  paid  off 1000  00 

Stuart  Wood.     Subscription 100  00 

$1656  35 

Transferred  to  General  Account $30  00 

Investment  in  Bond  and  Mortgage,  at  five  per  cent.  int....     1000  00 

1030  00 

To  Balance  for  Investment $626  35 

PUBLICATION  FUND. 

Balance,  last  Statement • $40C  25 

Income  from  Investments 320  00 

Phila.  and  Erie  Railroad  Bond  paid  off 1000  00 

$1728  25 
Transferred  to  General  Account 320  00 

Balance $1408  25 

Of  this  Balance,  $1300.00  is  for  Investment. 


504  PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE    ACADEMY    OF  [1881. 

MRS.   STOTT  FUND.     (For  Publications.) 

Spring  Garden  Railroad  Bonds  paid  oif. $2000  00 

This  amount,  is  for  Investment. 

I.  V.  WILLIAMSON  LIBRARY  FUND. 

Balance,  last  Statement $209  55 

Rents  Collected 444  75 

Ground-rents  Collected 1179  86 

$1834  16 

For  Books $753  00 

Expenses,    Sale   of    Four    Properties    for    Arrearages  of 

Ground-rents 331  00 

Taxes  on  Four  Properties  sold 341  31 

Repairs  to  Properties 191  10 

Taxes 22  40 

McFadden's  Interest  iti  1451  Mt.  Holly  St 50  00 

Collecting 103  89 

1792  70 

Balance $41  46 

THOMAS  B.  WILSON  LIBRARY  FUND. 

For  Books $456  90 

Transferred  to  General  Account  toward  Salary  of  Librarian 300  00 

Barker  Bros.  &  Co.     Collecting  U.  S.  Bonds 4  50 

Investment  in  Bond  and  Mortgage,  at  five  per  cent,  interest 4500  00 

$5261  40 

Balance  per  last  Statement $108  02 

Income  from   Investments 540  00 

U.  S.  Bonds  paid  off. 4500  00 

5148  02 

Balance  Overdrawn $113  38 

ECKFELDT  FUND. 

Amount  for  Investment  as  per  last  Statement $2466  86 

Investment  in  Bond  and  Mortgage,  at  five  per  cent,  interest 1500  00 

Balance  for  Investment $966  86 

BOOK  ACCOUNT.     (Donations  from  Jos.  Jeanes,  Esq.) 

Jos.  Jeanes.     Donations $739  80 

Less  Cash  paid  for  Books 214  00 

Balance |525  80 

INSTRUCTION  FUND. 

Chas.  Schaffer.     Donation $25  00 

Thos.  Meehan.  "         10  00 

$35  00 


1881.]  NATURAL   SCIENCES   OF    PHILADELPHIA.  505 

The  election  of  Officers  for  1882  was  held,  with  the  following 
result : — 

President,       .         .         .     Joseph  Leidy,  M.  D. 

Vice-Presidents,      .         .     Wm.  S.  Vaux, 

Thomas  Meehan. 

Recording  Secretary,      .     Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.  D. 

Correspoy\ding  Secretary ,   George  H.  Horn,  M.  D. 

Treasurer,      .         .         .     Wm.  C.  Hensze_y. 

Librarian,       .         .         .     Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.  D. 

Curators,         .         .         .     Joseph  Leidy,  M.  D., 

Wm.  S.  Yaux, 
Chas.  F.  Parker, 
R.  S.  Kenderdine,  M.  D. 

Councillors,  to  serve  three  Charles  P.  Perot, 
years,  J.  H.  Redfield, 

S.  Fisher  Corlies, 

W.  S.  W,  Ruschenberger,  M.D. 

Finance  Committee,        .     Isaac  C.  Martindale, 

Clarence  S.  Bement, 
Aubrey  H.  Smith, 
S.  Fisher  Corlies, 
George  Y.  Shoemaker. 


ELECTIONS  DURING  1881. 

MEMBERS. 

January  35. — Joseph  J.  Knox,  Geo.  A.  Rex,  M.  D. 
February  ^:2.— Robt.  P.  Field. 
April  26. — Henry  Skinner,  Jesse  S.  Walton. 
May  5i.— John  G.  Lee,  M.  D.,  Alexander  Biddle,  M.  D.,  W. 
Norton  Whitney,  M.  D. 
Ju7ie  28. — Jerome  Gray. 

July  ^5.— John  C.  Graham,  E.  C.  Hine,  M.D. 
October  25. — W.  N.  Lockington. 
November  29.— D.  S.  Newhall,  Edwin  P.  Starr,  W.  H.  Hamed. 

CORRESPONDENTS. 

February  22. — John  Brazier,  of  Sydney,  N.  S.  W. ;  Rafael 
Arango,  of  Havana,  Cuba  ;  Chas.  Mohr,  of  Mobile,  Ala. 

3Iay  5i.— Thomas  T.  Bouve,  of  Boston. 

June  28. — Chas.  S.  Sargent,  of  Brookline,  Mass. ;  M.  S.  Bebb, 
of  Rockford,  111, 


606  ADDITIONS   TO   THE    MUSEUM,  [1881. 

ADDITIONS  TO  THE  MUSEUM. 

December  1^  1880  to  December  -?,  1881. 

i/awiffirt^.  — Zoological  Society  of  Philadelphia.  Hystrix  crislala,  two  Myopo- 
tamus  cot/pus,  portion  of  skin,  eyes,  tongue  and  viscera  of  young  Hippopo- 
tamus; Didelphys  derbiana. 

Dr.  H.  C.  Chapman.  Stomach  of  Hippopotamus,  stomach  and  generative  organs 
of  Dicotyles. 

Dr.  Jos.  Leidy.      Skeleton  o^  Hippopotamus  amphihius  (young). 

Birds. — Zoological  Society  of  Philadelphia.  Rhamphastos  toco,  Jirotogerys  vires- 
cens,  Astiir  Novse- Hollandiie,  Melopsittacus  undulatus,  Aix  galericulata.  Scops 
asio,  Chrysotis  coccineifrons,  Haliaster  Indus,  Numida  vuUurina. 

J.  KiefiF.     DendrKca  maculosa  and  D.  cserulescens,  Montgomery  County,  Pa. 

Theo.  D.  Rand.     One  egg  each  of  swan  and  ostrich. 

Colin  F.  Stam.     Nest  of  Trochilus  colubris,  Chestertown,  Md. 

Chas.  H.  Townsend.     Mounted  specimen  of  Numida  vulturina. 

Crocodilia,  Ophidians  and  Fishes. — J.  C.  Martindale.  Alligator  mississippiensis 
(young). 

Zoological  Society  of  Philadelphia.     Epicrates  angulifer. 

U.  S.  JNational  Museum.  One  hundred  and  sixteen  species  of  fishes  from  the 
Pacific  Coast  of  N.  A. 

R.  M.  Holbrook.      Coryphxna  punrtulata. 

Articulates. — Mr.  Booth.     Streptocephalus  (sp.)  Nevada. 

T.  R.  Peale.     Bopyrus  Manhattensis,  Red  Bank,  Monmouth  Co.,  N.  J. 

Carlos  J.  Marsillan.  Two  species  fire-flies,  Fyrophorus  noclilucus  and  P.rusticus. 

J.  A.  Warder.      Cnmponotus  Pennsylvanicus,   Ohio. 

Dr.  Edward  Palmer.     Thirty-two  species  of  diurnal  Lepidoptera,  Mexico. 

Dr.  Jos.  Wilson.  Cocoons  of  ^Etias  luna,  Telea  polyphemus,  Platysamia  cecropia, 
etc. 

H.  F.  Bassett.     Sixty-two  species  of  Galls. 

G.  Howard  Parker.     Four  species  of  Galls,  Phila; 

MoUusks. — Rafael  Arango.  One  species  of  marine,  and  sixteen  of  terrestrial 
shells  of  Cuba;  four  of  the  latter  being  types  of  new  species  described  in 
the  Academy's  Proceedings.     Ctenopoma  nodiferum,  Arango  (type),  Cuba 

Thomas  Bland  Sixteen  species  of  terrestrial  shells  from  the  West  Indies; 
forty-one  species  of  land  shells,  of  which  ten  are  author's  types. 

John  Brazier.  Forty-three  specimens  of  shells,  mostly  marine,  from  Australia, 
New  Caledonia,  etc. ;  twenty-one  species  of  Aus-tralian  marine  and  ter- 
restrial shells;  twenty-two  species  of  Cyprsea  and  twelve  speces  of  Trivia, 
mostly  Australian;  sixty-eight  species  of  Australian  marine  shells. 

J.  J.  Brown.  Cylindrella  mabuja  and  C.  Gruneri,  from  Gonave,  I.  Haiti ;  Cor- 
bula  Caribxa,  d'Orb.,  from  Port-au-Prince,  Haiti;  Columbella  mutabile,  from 
Salt  Lake,  Matlin's  Isl.,  Bahamas.  Unio  Canadensis  Lea,  Lake  Ellen,  She- 
boygan Co.,  Wis. 

Mrs.  A.  E.  Bush.  Helix  Diabloensis,  Cooper,  and  H.  aspersa,  MUll.,  from  San 
Jos6,   Cal. 

W.  W.  Calkins.     Conulus  JJpsonii,  Calkins,  Winnebago  Co.,  111. 

Dr.  J.  C.  Cox.  Thirty-eight  species  of  Marine  shells,  from  Port  Stephens, 
New  South  Wales. 

Dr.  W.  H.  De  Camp.     Bythinella  attenuata.  Grand  Rapids,  Mich. 

John  Ford.  Twenty-one  sections  of  shells,  prepared  by  him.  Very  fine  suite 
of  Asaphis  coccinea.  from  Elbow  Key,  Fla  ;  four  species  of  MoUusca,  and  a 
fine  section  of  Turbinella  scolymus,  remarkable  series  of  Cyprsea  annulus. 

The  late  W.  M.  Gabb.  Seventeen  species  of  land  and  marine  shells  collected 
by  him  in  San  Domingo. 


188L]  ADDITIONS    TO   THE   MUSEUM.  501 

Dr.  W.  D.  Hartman.     Sixteen  species  of  Partula,  new  to  our  collection. 

P.  R.  Hoy.     Amnicola  lustrica   and  A.  Cincinnatiensis,  from  deep  water,  Lake 

Michigan. 
Mrs.  M.  A.  Haldeman.     A  collection  of  fresli-water  shells,  part  of  the  cabinet 

of  the  late  Prof.   Haldeman. 
A.  A.  Hinkley.     Ten  species  of  marine  shells.  Cedar  Keys,  Fla. 
Joseph  .Jeanes.     Sixty-four  species  and  varieties  of  marine  shells,  collected 

by   Henry   Hemphill  on    the    coast  of  California ;   eighty-six   species    and 

varieties  of  marine,  land  and  fresh-water  shells  from  the    West  Coast   of 

America. 
F.  R.  Latchford.     Sixty-two  species  terrestial  and  fluviatile  moUusks,  from 

Ontario,  Canada;  seven  species  of  fresh-water  shells  from  Canada. 
Isaac    Lea.     Twenty-five  species  of  marine  and  terrestrial  shells,  new   to  the 

collection. 
Dr.  E.  Palmer.      Uhio  fuscatus,  Lea.    U.  Jayanus,  Lea,    U.  nigrinus.   Lea,    U. 

Blandingianiis,  U.  amygdalum  and  W.  Buckleyi,  from  near  Cassina  River,  Fla. 
C.  F.  Parker.     Twenty-eight  species  of  marine  shells,  new  to  the  collection. 
John    A.    Ryder.     Area   pexata.  Say,  Wood's    Holl,  Mass.  and  Cherry  Stone 

Inlet,  E.  Shore  of  Virginia;  Xylotrya  fimbriata,  Jeffreys,  from  St.  Jerome's 

Creek,  St.  Mary  Co  ,    Md. 
John  H.  Redfield.     Thirty-one  species  of  marine  bivalve  and  land  shells,  new 

to  the  collection. 
S.  R.  Roberts.     Four  specimens  of  Cypraea,  and  three  other  marine  species. 
R.  E.  C.  Stearns.     Helix  circumcarinata  Sterns,  Stanislaus  Co.,  Cal. 
John  Jay  Smith.     Abalone,   the  animal  of  Haliotis,  eaten  by  the  Californian 

Chinese. 
Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Eighty-two  species  of  shells,  new  to  the  collection. 
Dr.  J.  W.  Velie.      Veronicella  Floridana,  Bulimits  muUiradiatus,  from  Florida. 
W.  S.  Vaux.     Fifty  species  of  shells,  new  to  the  collection;  three  species  of 

land  shells  from  Tunis,  and  one  from  Peru. 
Joseph  Willcox.      Unio  luteolus,  Lam.,  Rideau  Lake,  Ontario. 
F.    M.    Witter.       Amnicola     Cincinnatiensis,    Anth. ;     Unio    3Iississippiensis,    U. 

Anodontoides,  U.  lachrymosus,    from  Muscatine,  Iowa. 
Fossil  Invertebrata. — J.  W.  Vogdes,  U.  S.  A.     Sixteen  specimens  of  Miocene 

fossils  from  Virginia  (Yorktown). 
Angelo  Heilprin.     Thirty  species  from  the  Eocene  of  Claris e  Co.,  Ala.,  eleven 

of  which  are  types;  nine  species  from  the  Eocene  of  Alabama  and  Florida, 

two  of  which  are  types. 
Conchological  Section  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences.  Eighty-six  species 

from  the  Carboniferous  of  Illinois,  etc.;  two  hundred  and  twelve  species, 

mainly  from  the  Palaeozoic  of  Illinf^is  and  Indiana. 
F.  W.  Payne.     Annelid  tracks  in  Hudson  River  Slate. 

A.    W.    Bailey.     Specimen  of  Fulgur  adversarius  washed  ashore  from  a  sub- 
marine (?)  Miocene  bed,  Atlantic  City,  N.  J. 
J.  W.  Pike.     Thirty-five  species  of  Carboniferous  fossils  from  Mazon  Creek, 

Grundy  Co.,  111. 
Dr.  J.  W.  Hess.     Fossil  (?)  from  the  Carboniferous  of  Vermilion,  111. 
F.  R.  Latchford.     Leda  glacialis,  Champlain   clays,  Ottawa    River,    Eardley, 

Quebec. 
F.  L.  Hess.     Eurypterus,  from  the  Carboniferous  of  Streator,  111. 
Dr.  Jos.  Wilson.     Eighteen  species  of  Crinoids,  and  two  species  of  MoUusca 

from  the  Lower  Carboniferous  of  Burlington,  Iowa. 
Ethnological  and  3Iiscella7ieous. — Mrs.  M.  A.  Haldeman.     The  Haldeman  collec- 
tion, consisting  of  many  thousand  specimens,  ancient  and  modern,  of  spears 

and  arrow-heads,  axes,  hammers,  pounders,  chisels,  gauges,  scrapers,  knives, 

awls,  borers,  morters  and  pestles,  mullers,  net-sinkers,  plummets,  discoidal 

stones,  sharpeners,  pierced  tablets,  ceremonial  weapons,  pendants,  sculpture, 

pipes,  pottery,  beads  and  other  ornaments,  shell-money,  basket-work,  bows 

and  arrows,  etc. 


508  ADDITIONS    TO   THE    MUSEUM.  [1881. 

Dr.  J.  H.  Brinton.     Pestle,  Cooper's  Creek.  Camden,  N.  J. 

Harriet  M.    Harned.      Indian  relic,  Oxford,  Adams  Co.,  I'a. 

Otto  W.  Lowe.     Stone  axe  (serpentine),  Uock  Is-land,  111. 

riants. — Win.  M  Canby.  Five  hundred  and  tiftytwo  species  of  plants  from 
Europe,  S    Africa,  Australia,  Madeira  and  N.  America. 

Isaac  C.  Martiudale.  Turnera  aphrodisiaca  Ward.  Mexico.  Mentzdia  crocea 
Kell.,  Calif.  Trunk  of  Quercus  heterophyUa  Mx.,  from  Mt.  Holly,  N.  J.  Ellis' 
N.  American  Fungi,  centuries  V,  VI  and  VIII. 

Hugh    D.  Vail,   Los   Angeles,   Calif.,  through    Benj.   N.   Marsh.     Echinocaclus 

Wislizeni  Enzelm.,    Arizona.       Twigs   and   acorns   of   Quercus    Widizeni  var. 

frutescens  Engelm.,  Cal.     Twigs  and  acorns  of  Q.  dumosa  Nutt,  Cal.     Twigs 

and  acorns  of  Q.  ohlongifolia   Torr.,  Cal.     Twigs  and    acorns   of  Q.  agrifolia 

Nees,  Cal.     Flowering  specimens  of  Eucalyplus  obliqua  (.?),  cult,  in  Cal. 

Dr.  J  H.  Eckfeldt.  One  hundred  species  of  Lichens  from  Northern  U.  States, 
mostly  new  to  the  collection,  with  catalogue  ;  pod  of  Ilymenira  Courharil, 
from  West  Indies. 

Thos.  Meehan.  Corallorhiza  Mertensiana  Bong.,  AVashington  Terr. ;  Pachystima 
Canbyi  Gr.,  cult,  from  plants  found  at  Wytheville,  Va.  ;  Salisburia  adiantifolia, 
in  fruit,  from  Wisiar's  garden,  Germantown  ;  Arceuthobium  ocadentale  var. 
abietinum  Engelm.,  Washoe  Valley,  Nevada.;  Phoradendron  Junip erinum  \a,r. 
Libocedri  Engelm.,  Washoe  Valley,  Nevada. 

Isaac  Burk.  Fruit  of  Ckrysobalaniis  oblonyifolius,  raised  from  seed  by  Mrs. 
Caroline  Pennock,  Delaware  Co.,  Pa. ;  stem  and  root  of  Aristolochia  tomentosa 
Sims,  cultivated. 

R.  P.  Smith  and  .J.  Jay  Smith,  of  Germantown.  Phila.  ;  specimens  of  Euca- 
lyptus globulus  Lab.,  cult,  in  Cal.  ;  E.  amygda/iiia,  cult,  in  Cal.  ;  E.  rostrata, 
cult,  in  Cal. 

Chas.  F.  Parker.  One  hundred  and  seventy-five  species  of  N.  American  plants 
from  his  herbarium,  maoy  of  them  new  to  the  collection. 

Two  ladies,  unknown.  Collection  of  Marine  Algag,  mostly  from  N.  York 
Harbor,  beautifully  mounted  and  superbly  bound  ;  prepared  for  Charles  M. 
Wheatley.  by  Saml.  Lounsbury,  of  N.  Y. 

M  S.  Bebb,  Rockt'ord,  III.  Herbarium  Sah'cum,  Fascicuhis  primus,  being  the 
first  instalment  of  what  is  intended  to  be  a  full  suite  of  the  North  Am'  rican 
Willows,  with  such  European  forms  as  m:iy  aid  in  the  understanding  of  their 
afiinities  With  full  printed  tickets  and  manuscript  notes,  accompanied 
often  with  magnified  drawings  of  tlie  floral  organs. 

Dr.  S.  B.  Buckley,  Austin,  Tex;is.  Clemafis  coccinea,  Englm.  ;  Berbiris  Swayzei 
Buckl. ;  Ampelopsis  quinquefolia  Mx.,  var.  heptaphylla  Buckl. ;  Siyrax  platini- 
folia  Engelm.  ;  Quercus  Dwrandi  Buckl.,  series  of  specimens  showing  varia- 
tions of  foliage ;    Quercus  rubra  L  ,  var.  Texensis  Buckl. ;   all  from  Texas. 

Prof.  C.  S.  Sargent,  Commis-ioner  of  Forestry  Department  of  Tenth  Census  of 
U.  S.  Series  of  specimens  of  N.  American  woods,  showing  transverse  and 
longitudinal  sections  and  bark,  all  named  at  the  Arnold  Arboretum,  Cam- 
bridge, and  numbered  to  correspond  with  Prof.  Sargent's  Catalogue  of  Trees 
and  Shrubs  of  N.  America. 
M.  Carey  Lea.  A  large  collection  of  plants,  consisting,  first,  of  species  col- 
locted  by  him  in  vicinity  of  Philadelphia  ;  second,  of  species  collected  by  Dr. 
Engelmann,  Prof.  Tuomey,  and  others,  in  Western  and  Southern  States  ; 
third,  of  species  of  European  plants,  collected  by  Prof,  Balfour,  of  Edin- 
burgh. 
Harriet  M.  Harned.     Fungus  (?). 

J.  P.  H.      FTuit  of  the  great  flowering  Mimosa,  Bombay. 

Dr.  Geo.  Vasey,  Agricultural  Department,  Washington,  D.  C.     Twenty  species 

of  grasses,  collected  by  the  Wilke.s  Exploring  Expedition,  years  1838  to  1842. 

C.  Mohr,  Mobile,  Ala.     Specimen  of  the  rare  Darbya  umbellata  Gray,  staminate 

plant,  near  CuUmann,  Ala. 
Geo.  E.  Davenport,  Boston,  Mass.     Tsenitis  lanceolata  R.  Br.,  a  fern  new  to  the 
U.  S.,  from  Old  Rhodes  Key,  Florida. 


1881.]  ADDITIONS    TO    THE   MUSEUM.  -509 

Wm.  P.  Fodell.  Double  pear,  preserved  in  alcohol,  from  garden  in  Kensing- 
ton, Phila. 

T.  R.  Peale,  Broussonetia papyrifera  Vant.,  in  fruit,  cultivated  at  Ked  Bank,  N. 
J. ;  leaves  of  Quercm  heterophi/Ua  Mx.,  different  forms,  Swedesboro,  N.  J. 

F.  W.  Price.  Linaria  vulgaris  Moench.,  peloric  form  and  form  without  spur. 
West  Chester,  Pa. 

F.  L.  Scribner.  Calamagrostis  Ilowellii  Vasey,  new  species  from  Oregon ; 
Panicum  capiUare  L.,  variety  from  Phila.  ;  Eulalia  Japonica  Trin.,  cultivated, 
native  of  Jamaica. 

Prof.  Asa  Gray,  Cambridge,  Mass.  A  collection  of  one  hundred  and  two 
species  of  plants,  collected  by  Dr.  J.  E.  T.  Aitcheson,  in  the  Kurum  Valley, 
Afghanistan,  in  1879. 

J.  M.  Hutchings,  Yosemite,  Cal.  Cone  of  Pinus  Lamberiiana,  framed  in  wood 
of  the  Sequoia  gigantea. 

John  H.  Redfield.  Forty-six  species  of  plants  from  N.  Mexico,  Colorado  and 
California,  many  of  them  new  to  the  collection.  Eleven  species  of  ferns 
from  Cilifornia,  Arizona  and  N.  Mexico,  new  to  tlie  collection.  Seventeen 
species  of  ferns  and  lycopods,  collected  in  New  Zealand  by  A.  Craig. 

Minerals. — C.  S.  Bement  Corundum,  Mineral  Hill,  Del.  Co.,  Pa.;  Hydro- 
hematite,  Chestnut  Hill,  Lane.  Co.,  Pa  ;  Rutile  and  quartz,  Graubiinden ; 
Pyrolusite,  Ilmen,  Thuringia;  Pyrolusite  (polianite),  Bohemia:  Ouvarovite, 
Wakefield,  Can.,  Oxford,  Can. ;  Pyrosmalite,  Nordmarken,  Sweden;  Stilbite 
and  apophyllite,  Cape  d'or,  N.  S. ;  Samarskite,  Mitchell  Co..  N.  C, ;  Apatite, 
Renfrew,  Can.;  Autunite,  Cornwall,  Eng. ;  Ankerite,  Erzberg,  Styria; 
Aragonite,  colored  by  cobalt,  Schwartz,  Tyrol ;  Meteoric  iron,  Aug.  Co., 
Va. ;  Blende,  Ulster  Co.,  N.  Y. ;  Greenockite,  Friedenville,  Pa.;  Arseno- 
pyrite,  Cornwall,  Eng  ;  Magnetite,  Binnenthal ;  Rutile  in  pericline,  Pfilsch, 
Tyrol :  Limonite  on  quartz,  Schneeberg,  Sax. :  Wollastonite,  Lewis  Co.,  N.  Y. ; 
Garnets,  Phila.,  Jefferson  Co..  N.  Y.,  and  Kremnitz.  Hungary  ;  Axinite,  near 
Bethlehem,  Pa.;  Felspar,  Silesia,  Austria;  Datholite,  Isle  Royal,  L.  S. ; 
Serpentine,  Grand  Cal.  Is.,  Can.;  Serpentine  pseud.,  after  Monticellite, 
Monzoni,  Tyrol ;  Titanite,  Renfrew,  Can.  ;  Wolframite  pseud.,  after  Scheelite, 
Trumbull,  Conn.;  Barite  (cawk),  Derbyshire,  Eng.;  Blue  Calcite,  Rossie, 
N.  Y. ;  Azurite,  Moldaira;  Orpiment,  Felsiib^nya,  Hungary;  Petzite,  Col.; 
Spinel  and  Idocrase,  Vesuvius ;  Manganite,  Sweden ;  Limonite,  Chestnut 
Hill,  Lane.  Co.,  Pa.,  and  Superior  ^Mine,  Mich. ;  Cookeite,  Mt.  Mica,  Me.  ; 
Wollastonite,  Vesuvius  ;  Pyroxene,  Renfrew,  Can. ;  Tourmaline  (nine  crys- 
tals), Pierpont,  St.  Lawrence  Co.,  N.  Y. ;  Titanite,  Medels,  Surry  and  Ontario, 
Can.;  Finite,  Schwartzenbach,  Bavaria;  Pyromorphite,  Cumberlaud,  Eng.; 
Brochantite,  Sonnenberg ;  Calcite,  St.  Louis,  Mo.;  Concretions  of  Siliceous 
carb.  of  lime,  Easton,  Pa.;  Concretions  (very  beautiful),  head  of  Conn. 
River,  N.  Y. ;  Thenardite,  Tarapaca,  S.  A.;  Zircon  (twin  crystal),  Renfrew, 
Can. ;  Apatite,  Renfrew,  Can. ;  Scapolite,  St.  Lawrence  Co.,  N.  Y.  ;  Sphene 
and  wollastonite,  Lewis  Co  ,  N.  Y. ;  Millerite,  Antwerp,  N.  Y. ;  Pyroxene, 
Can.  ;  Zircon,  Grenoble,  Can. ;  Muscovite,  Portland,  Conn. ;  Zircon  with 
apatite,  Renfrew,  Can  ;  Colurabite,  Middletown,  Conn.,  and  Portlajid,  Conn.; 
Campylite,  Cumberland,  Eng. ;  Specific  gravity  apparatus  of  Jolly. 
Wm.  S.  Vaux.  Fine  specimens  of  Danburiie,  Russell.  St.  Lawrence  Co.,  N.  Y. ; 
Fine  specimen  of  apatite  in  calcite,  Canada;  Twin  Zircon,  Renfrew,  Canada; 
Native  gold  in  quartz.  Gaston  (]o.,  N.  C. ;  Native  copper.  Australia;  Native 
sulphur,  Napa  Co.,  Cal.  ;  Byssolite,  Chester  Co  ;  ChrysocoUa,  Berks  Co. 
Pa.;  Prehinite,  Charleston,  Mass. ;  Haiiynite,  Laacher  See,  Prussia ;  Anda- 
lusite,  Tyrol ;  Stilbite,  Reading,  Pa. ;  Dolomite  (gurhofite).  Sussex  Co.,  N.  J. ; 
Siderite,  Scranton,  Pa. ;  Aragonite  with  Chalcopyrite  and  magnetite,  Berks 
Co.,  Pa,;  Cerussite,  Chester  Co.,  Pa.;  Malachite,  Berks  Co.,  I'a. ;  Azurite 
and  ChrysocoUa,  Lebanon  Co.,  Pa.;  Galenite,  coated  with  Pyromorphite, 
•  Stolzite  with  Wulfenite,  Pyromorphite  and  galenite,  all  from  Wheatley  Mine, 
Chester  Co.,  Pa, ;  Pebble  of  anthracite,  Tamaqua,  Pa. 


510  ADDITIONS   TO   THE   MUSEUM.  [1881. 

Mrs.  Hugh  Davids  Octahedrite  (Wiserine),  Binnenthal,  Switzerland;  Wol- 
framite, Germany. 

J.  B.  Gicker.  Actinolite,  washed  from  decomposed  rock,  Chestnut  Hill,  Del- 
aware. 

Jos.  P.  Hazard.  Anthracite,  Wales ;  Metallic  tin,  Cornwall ;  Limestone,  Hima- 
laya Mts. 

A.  Meyer.  Twenty-nine  specimens  of  fossil  iron  ores  and  associated  rocks, 
Lycoming  Co.,  Pa 

Mr.  Fiss.     Beryl  (very  large  crystal),  Amelia  Co.,  Va. 

S.  Tyson.     Basmiisite  and  Tysonite,  Colorado. 

Jos.  Willcox.  Corundum;  ditto,  coated  with  damourite;  ditto,  coated  with 
margarite,  Iredell  Co.,  N.  C. 

Geo.  VVoener.     Impure  limoniie  ;  bituminous  shale,  Pa. 

E.  S.  Reinhold.     Alunogen,  Mahanoy  City,  Pa. 

A.  H.  Smith.  Flattened  garnet  in  muscovite,  Del,  Co.,  Pa. ;  Boulders  dredged 
from  bed  of  Del.  River,  below  Chester,  Pa. ;  Gneiss,  Schooner  Ledge,  Del. 
River. 

Peter  Walker.  Dendritic  manganese  in  sandstone,  conglomerate,  etc.,  Wayne 
Co.,  Pa. 

J.  W.  Pike.     Liraonite  nodule,  Newfield,  N.  J. 

S.  Ball.  Hematite  in  gieen  quartz  ;  siderite  ;  rhodonite  ;  all  from  near  Wind- 
sor, Me. 

G.  Howard  Parker.  Aquacreptite  ;  autunite;  menaccanite ;  apatite;  all  from 
vicinity  of  Phila. ;  Native  tellurium,  Boulder  Co.,  Col. 

Theo.  D.  Rand.  Nine  specimens  of  rocks,  vicinity  of  Phila. ;  Gypsum  (arti- 
ficial), from  a  salt-pan;  Quartz  in  mica,  Amelia  Co.,  Va.  ;  Stalactite,  moun- 
tain cork,  and  nine  specimens  of  rocks,  Del.  Co.,  Pa. 

W.  P.  Adams.     Dolomite,  Harford  Co.,  Md. 

E.  M.  Bye.  Magnetite,  enstatite,  talc  with  altered  actinolite,  serpentine, 
picrolite  ;  all  from  Harford  Co.,  Md. 

H.  C.  Lewis.  Halotrichite,  East  Park,  Phila. ;  Halotrichite,  melanterite  and 
sulphatite  (efflorescence  on  marl).  West  Jersey  marl  pits;  Fahlunite,  Ger- 
mantown,  Phila. ;   Recent  rain  prints,  marl  pits,  Pemberton,  N.  J, 

W.  AV.  JeflFeris.  Aragonite,  pyrite,  Chester  Co.,  Pa.;  Garnet,  Del.  Co.,  Pa. ; 
Epidote,  Baltimore,  Md. ;  Calcite,  Wisconsin  ;  Quartz.  Mill  Creek  Hundred, 
Del. 

C.  M.  Wheatley.  Chalcocite,  pseudomorph  after  wood.  Little  Whitia  River, 
Archer  Co.,  Tex. 

W.  H.  H.  Bates.     Pyrrhotite,  China,  Me. 

J.  M.  Hartmann.     "  Salamander,"  or  slag,  from  blast  furnace,  Oxford,  N.  J. 

Mrs.  M.  A.  Haldeman.     Spinel  ruby,  Ceylon. 

Dr.  Kreizer.     Black  marble,  Myerstown,  Lebanon  Co.,  Pa. 

In  exchange.  Vesuvianite,  Templeton,  Can. ;  White  Garnet,  Hull,  Can. ; 
Apatite  (twin  crystal),  Renfrew,  Can. ;  Smilhsonite,  Sultanella,  Spain ; 
Aragonite,  Fort  (Collins,  Col. 

Carpenter,  Henzey  &  Co.     Chemicals  for  use  of  Professor  of  Mineralogy. 


1881.]  ADDITIONS   TO   THE   LIBRARY.  ,       511 

ADDITIONS  TO  THE  LIBRARY. 

1881. 

Agardh,  J.  G.     Species  genera  et  ordines  Algarum.  Ill,  2.     I.  V,  Williamson 

Fund. 
Alumni  Association  of  the  Philladelphia  College  of  Pharmacy,  17th  annual 

report.     The  Association. 
American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  12th  annual  report.     The  Trustees. 
Angelin,  N.  P.    ,,  Fragmenta  Silurica  e  dono  Caroli  Henrici  Wegelin. 

Geologisk   Ofversigts-Karta   ofver   Skane,    etc.       Swedish    Academy    of 

Sciences. 
Palieontologica  Scandinavica.     P.  I,  Fasc.  1  and  2.     The  Author. 
Arango,  R.     Moluscos  univalves  marinos.     Pp.  145  et  seq.     The  Author. 
Archiac,  A.  d",  P.  Fischer  and  E.   de  Verneuil.      Asie  Mineure  description 

phys.;   Paleontologie.     Text  and  atlas.     Joseph  Jeanes. 
Archiv  der  Naturw.  Landesdurchforschuug  von  Bohmen.     IV,  3  and  5.     I. 

V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Astor  Library,  32d  annual  report.     The  Trustees. 

Baillon,  M.  H.     Dictionnaire  de  Botanique.     13me  Fasc.     I.  V.  Williamson 

Fund. 
Baird,  S.  F.     Report  of,  as  secretary  of  Smithsonian  Institution.     1880.     The 

Author. 
Baker,  J.  G.     Flora  of  Mauritius  and  the  Seychelles.     Joseph  Jeanes. 
Barber,  E.  A.     Pueblo  pottery. 

Antiquity  of  the  tobacco-pipe  in  Europe.     The  Author. 
Barcena,  M      Ciudad  de  Guadalajara. 

Fenomena  periodicos  de  la  Vegetacion.     The  Author. 
Batsch,  J.     Ueber  Cysticerken  im  menschlichen  Koerper.     University  of  Wiirz- 

burg. 
Baumiiller,  B.     Ueber  die  letzten  Veranderungen  des  Meckel' schen  Knorpels. 

University  of  Wiirzburg. 
Beadle,  Rev.  E.  R.,  memorials  of.     2d  Presbyterian  Church. 
Bentham,  G.  and  F.  Mueller.     Flora  Austraiiensis.    Vols.  1-7.    Joseph  Jeanes. 
Berg,  Carlos.     Apuntes  lepidopterologicos.     The  Author. 
Bland,  Thos.     New  species  of  Triodopsis.     The  Author. 
Bodley,  R.  L.     The  college  story.     The  Author. 
Bohnensieg,  G.  C.   VV.     Repertorium  annuum  literaturiB  botanicse  periodicae. 

VI.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Bornet.  E.  and  G.  Thuret.     Notes  Algologiques.     2me  Fasc.     I.  V.  Williamson 

Fund. 
Borre,  A.  Preudhomme  de.     Especes  de  la  tribu  des  Feronides  qui  se  rencon- 
trent  en  Belgique.     2me  partie 
Vingt-Ciuq  premieres  ann^es  de  la  Soci^te  entomologique  de  Belgique. 
Note  sur  la  femelle  du  Rhagiosoma  Madagascariense. 
Espece   nouvelle  du   genre  Trichillum.     Note    sur  le  genre    Macroderes 

Wstw. 
Organisation  et  I'histoire  naturelle  des  animaux  articul(5s      The  Author. 
Boucard,  A.     Coleoptera  of  the  genus  Plusiotis.     The  Author. 
Bouve,  T.  T.     Historical  Sketch  of  the  Boston  Society  of  Natural  History.    The 

Author. 
Bowditch,  H.  I.,  M.  D.     Public  hygiene  in  America.     The  Author. 
Brady,  G.  S.      Monograph    of   the  free    and   semi-parasitic    Copepoda    of   the 
British  Islands.     Vols.  2  and  3.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

34 


512  ADDITIONS  TO   THE   LIBRARY.  [1881. 

Brefeld,   0.     Botanisclie   Untersuchungen  liber   Schimmelpilze.     4   H.     I.  V. 

Williamson  Fund. 
British  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science,  report  of  the  50th  meeting, 

1880.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
British  Museum.     Catalogue  of  birds.     Vol.  V. 

Lepidoptera  heterocera.     Pt.  V.     The  Trustees. 
Britton,  N.  L.     Preliminary  catalogue  of  the  flora  of  New  Jersey.     Geological 

Survey  of  N.  J. 
Bronn,  H.  G.     Klassen  und  Ordnungen  des  Thier-Reichs.     6er  Bd.  II  Abtb. 

1-3  Lief. ;  6er  Bd.  Ill  Abth,  13-21  Lief.     Wilson  Fund. 
Brvihl,  B.     Zootomie  aller  Thierklassen ;  Atlas,  Lief.  lC-20     I.  V.Williamson 

Fund. 
Brunner,  D.  B.     The  Indians  of  Berks  County,  Pa.     The  Author. 
Buckton.  Geo.  B.     Monograph  of  the  British  Aphides.     III.     Wilson  Fund. 
Calkins,  W.  W.     New  species  of  Zonites  from  Illinois.     The  Author. 
Capellini,  G.     Balenoterra  fossile  delle  Colonbaie  presso  Volterra. 

Gli  strati  a  congerie  e  le  marme  compatie  mioceniche  dei  dintorni  di 

Ancona. 
Breccia  ossifera  della  caverna  di  Santa  Teresa.     The  Author. 
Carr,  Lucian.     Notes  on  the  crania  of  New  England  Indians. 

Observations  on  the  crania  from  the  Santa  Barbara  Islands,  Cal.     The 
Author. 
Catalogue  of  the  birds  of  the  British  Museum.     Vol.  V.     I.  V.  Williamson 

Fund. 
Catalogus  des  Bibliothek  van  het  K.  Z.  Genootschap  Natura  Artis  Magistra  te 

Amsterdam.     The  Society. 
Certes,  M.  A.     Coloration  des  infusoires  et  des  elements  anatomiques,  pendant 

la  vie.     The  author. 
Challenger,  report  on  scientific  results.     Zoology,  Vols.  1  and  2.     I.  V.  Wil- 
liamson Fund. 
Chambers,  V.  T.     New  species  of  Tineina.     The  Author. 
Chief  of  the  Bureau  of  Statistics,  annual  statement,  June  30,  1880. 

Quarterly  reports,  Sept.  30,  1880-June  30,  1881.     Treasury  Department. 
Chief  of  Engineers,  U.  S.  A,,    annual  report,  1880.      Pts.  1,  2  and  8.      War 

Department. 
Chief  of  Ordnance,  annual  report,  June  30,  1880.     War  Department. 
Chile.     Estadistica  comercial,  1879. 

La  question  de  limites  entre  Chile  i  la  Republica  Argentina.     T.  II,  1880. 

Anuario  de  la  Oficina  Central  Meteorologica,  1873-74, 

Relaciones  esteriores,  1880. 

Memoria  de  justicia,  culto  e  instruccion  publica,  1880. 

Memoria  del  Ministerio  del  Interior,  1880. 

Anuario  hidrografico.     Ano  VI. 

Memoria  del  Ministerio  de  Hacienda,  1880. 

Memoria  de  guerra  i  marina,  1 880. 

El  arbitraje  internacional  en  el  pasado  en  el  presente  i  en  el  porvenir, 

1877. 
Cuenta  jeneral  de  las  entrados  i  Gastos  fiscales,  1879. 
Anuario  estadistico,  1877-78.     T.  XX. 
Immigracion  Asiatica,  1880. 

Sesiones  ordinarias  de  la  Camara  de  Diputados.     Nos.  1  and  2. 
Sesiones  ordinarias  de  la  Camara  de  Senadores,  en   1879.     Nos.  1  and  2. 
University  of  Chile. 
Cohn,  F.      Beitr'age   zur  Biologic  der  Pflanzen.      Ill,  2.      I.  V.    Williamson 

Fund. 
Colonial  Museum  and  Geological  Survey  of  New  Zealand,  15th  annual  report. 

Meteorological  report,  1880      The  Author. 
Comes,  0.     Funghi  del  Napoletano  e  descrizione  di  due  nuove  specie.     The 
Author. 


1881.]  ADDITIONS    TO   THE   LIBRARY.  513 

Commission  de  la  Carte  Geologique  de  la  Belgique.     Texte  explieatif  du  Lev6 
g^ologique  des  Plancliettes  d'Aerschot,  Lubeck,  Boisschot,  Kermpt  (Bol- 
derberg).     The  Survey. 
Commissioner  of  Education,  reports,  1878-1879. 
Circulars  of  information,  3-8. 

Statistics  of  elementary  education.     Department  of  Interior. 
Commissioners  of  Fisheries  of  the  State  of  Maine,  reports,  1872,.  1874-1880. 

The  Commissioners. 
Commissioner  of  Fisheries  of  Maryland,  report  of  the,   1876-77,  1879,  1880. 

The  Author. 
Commissioners  of  Fisheries,  Massachusetts,  reports  of,  1869,  1870.     5th,  7th- 

15th.     The  Commissioners. 
Commissioner  of  Fisheries.  New  York,  reports  7th-llth.     The  author. 
Cope,  E.  D.     On  the  Canida;  of  the  Loup  Fork  Epoch. 

Review  of  the  Rodentia  of  the  miocene  period  of  North  America. 

PalEeontological  bulletin.  No.  33. 

On  the  effect  of  impacts  and  strains  on  the  feet  of  mammalia. 

The   Rodentia  of  the  American   miocene.      A  new  Clidastes  from   New 

Jersey. 
The  temporary  dentition  of  a  new  Creodont. 
On  the  extinct  cats  of  America. 
Mammalia  of  the  lower  eocene  beds. 

Second  contribution  to  the  history  of  the  vertebrata  of  the  Permian  forma- 
tion of  Texas. 
On  some  new  batrachia  and  reptilia  from  the  Permian  beds  of  Texas,  etc. 
Systematic  arrangement  of  the  order  Perissodactyla. 

New  batrachia  and  reptilia  from  the  Permian  beds  of  Texas,  etc.     The 
Author. 
Cross,  J.  K      Imports,  exports  and  the  French  treaty.     Cobden  Club. 
Daily  bulletin  of  weather  reports,  June  and  July,  1877.     Dr.  F.  V.  Hayden. 
Daniels,  C,  E.     Het  leven  en  de  Verdiensten  van  Petrus  Camper.     Provincial 

Utrechtsch  Genootschap. 
Danielssen,  D.  C.  and  J.  Koren.     Norwegian  North-Atlantic  expedition,  1876- 

1878.     Ill,  Zoology,  Gephyrea.     Norwegian  Government. 
Danzig  in  naturwissenschaftlicher  und  medizinischer  Beziehung.     Association 

of  German  Naturalists. 
Darwin,  Chas.     The  power  of  movement  in  plants.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Dawkins,  W.  Boyd      Classification  of  the  tertiary  period  by  means  of  the  mam- 
malia.    The  Author. 
De  Camp.  W.  H.     List  of  shell-bearing  mollusca  of  Michigan.     The  Author. 
De  Candolle,  A  &  C.     Monographiaj  phanerogamarum  prodromi.    III.    Wilson 

Fund. 
Department  of    Agrriculture.      Special  report,    Nos.  84,  37-39.       Contagious 
diseases  of  domesticated  animals. 
Preliminary  report,  1880. 
Report,  1879. 

Report  on  the  condition  of  the  crops,  Nov.  1,  1880.     Department  of  Agri- 
culture. 
Department  of  Mines.  New  South  Wales,  annual  report,  1878-1879,  with  atlas. 

The  Department. 
Departmeut  of  Mines,  Nova  Scotia,  report,  1880.     The  Commissioners. 
Dictionary  of  the  English  and  Danish  languages.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Doherty.  Dr.  Hugh.     Philosophie  Organique.     The  Author. 
Dokoupil,  Wm.      I'ie  Lehrmittel  und  Scbiilerarbeiten  auf  der  1878er  bestritzer 

Landwirtschaftlichen  und  geweblichen  Au-istellung.    The  Author. 
DoUinger,  J.  V.    Das  Haus  Wittelsbach.    Royal  Bavarian  Academy  of  Sciences. 
Druifel,   A.    V.       Ignatius   von    Loyola   und    der    Romaischen    Curie.     Royal 
Bavarian  Academy  of  Sciences. 


514  ADDITIONS   TO   THE   LIBRARY.  [1881. 

Duncan,  P.  M.     Scientific  results  of  the  2d  Yarkand  Mission.     Syringosphae- 

ridiB.     The  Author. 
Dunnington,  F.  P.,  W.  M.  Thornton  and  J.  R.  Page.  Lectures  delivered  before 

the  Albemarle  Agricultural  Society.     The  Authors. 
Button,  C.  E.     Report  on  the  geology  of  the  high  plateaus  of  Utah,  with  altas. 

C.  F.  Parker. 
Dwight,  S.  '  Statistical  account  of  the  City  of  New  Haven.     Connecticut  Acad- 
emy of  Sciences. 
Eichwald,  E.    d'.     Letha3a  Rossica.     o  vols,  text  and  S  vols,  atlas.     Joseph 

.Jeanes. 
Elderhorst's  qualitative  blow-pipe  analysis.     6th  Ed.     In  exchange. 
Elliot,  D.  G.     Monograph  of  the  Felidie,  VII.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Encyclopedia  Britannica      9th  Ed.     XII.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Encyklopsedie  der  Naturwissenschaften,  I,  14-24.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Engelskt  och  Svenskt  Handlexikon.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Ernst,  A.     Memoria  botanica  sobre  el  Embarbascar.     Las  familias  mas  im- 

portantes  del  Reina  vegetal.     The  Author. 
Farey,  J.,  Sen.     Agriculture  and  mineral  lands  of  Derbyshire.     Vols.  1,  2  and 

3.     In  exchange. 
Farlow,  W.  J.     Marine  algag  of  New  England. 

The  Gymnosporangia  or  cedar-apples  of  the  United  States.  The  Author.    • 
Faught,  L.  A.     Index  to  physiology.     The  Author. 
Field,  D.  D.     Statistical  account  of  the  County  of  Middlesex  in  Connecticut. 

Connecticut  Academy  of  Sciences. 
Fleming,  S.     The  adoption  of  a  prime  meridian  to  be  common  to  all  nations. 

The  Author. 
Florence,  A.     Ueber  die  Bacterien  des  blauen  Eiters.     University  of  Wurz- 

burg. 
Financial  reform  almanack,  1881.     Financial  Reform  Association. 
Fischer,  P.     Manuel  de  conchyliologie.     Pt.  1.     The  Author. 
Fischer,  M.  and  H.  Crosse.  Mis.  scient.  au  Mex.  Recherches  zool.  7me  partie, 

Mollusques,  T.  II,  pp.  1-80,  pi's  32-36.     The  Authors. 
Freytag,  Bergrath.     Bad  Oeynhaitsen  (Rehme)  in  Westfalen.     The  Author. 
Fritsch,    Ant.     Fauna  der  Gaskohle  und  der   Kalksteine  der  Permformation 

Bohmens.     I,  3.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Fuchs,  C.  W.  C.  and  T.  AV.  Danby.     Practical  guide  to  the  determination  of 

minerals  by  the  blowpipe.     In  exchange. 
Gabb,  W.  M.     Caribbean  miocene  fossils. 
Gassies,  M.  J.  B.    Supplement  au  catalogue  des  mollusques  terrestres  et  d'  eau 

douce  du  Departument  de  Lot-et-Garonne. 
Note  sur  des  Metis  de  Rumina  decollata. 

Note  sur  la  faune  conchyliologique  ter.  et  fluv.  de  la  Nouvelle  CaMdonie. 
Des  causes  de  disparition  de  certaines  especes  de  mollusques  terrestres 

dans  la  Guyenne  et  de  I'acclimatation  de  certaines  autres. 
Faune  conchyliologique  de  la  Nouvelle  Caledonie,  3me.     Partie.     I.  V. 

Williamson  Fund. 
Genth,  F.  A.  and  W.  C.  Kerr.     The  minerals  an  1  mineral  localities  of  North 

Carolina.     The  Authors. 
Geographical  Surveys  of  the  100th  Mer.     1874.    Appendix  F^ ;   1877,  Ap.N^; 

1879,  Ap.  6^,  and   topographical   and   land  classification,  atlas  sheet. 

Engineer  Dep.  U.  S.  A. 
Geological  Exploration  of  the  40th  Par.  Report,  Vol.  VJI.     Engineer  Depart- 
ment, U.  S.  A. 
Geological  and  Geographical  Survey  of  the  Territories.  Bulletin,  VI.  1.  Depart- 
ment of  Interior. 
Geological  and  Natural  History  Survey  of  Minnesota.     8th  annual  report.     N. 

H.  Mitchell. 
Geological  Survey  of  Canada.     Report  of  progress  for  1878-79,   with  maps. 
List  of  publications,  1879.     Geological  Survey  of  Canada. 


1881.]  ADDITIONS   TO   THE   LIBRARY.  515 

Geological  Survey  of  India.  Records,  XII.  4:  XIII.  1,  2,  3,4;  XVI.  1. 
Memoirs,  8vo.  XV.  2 ;  XVI.  2,  3  ;  XVII.  1  and  3.  Memoirs,  4to.  Pal. 
Ind.  Ser.  II.  1-4.  Vol.  1 ;  Ser.  II ;  Ser.  X,  Vol.  1  ;  XI,  XII,  Vol.  Ill ; 
Ser.  XI.  Pts.  1,  2,  Vol.  II ;  Ser.  XII.  Vol.  3 ;  Ser.  XIII,  Vols.  1  and  2. 
The  Survey. 
Geological  Survey  of  New  .Jersey.     Annual  report  of  the  State  Geologist  for  the 

year  1880      The  Author. 
Geyler,  H.  Th.  Botanische  Mittheilungen.     The  Author. 
Grote,  A.  R.     Genesis,  I  and  II.     2d  Ed.     The  Author. 
Gill,  Theo.     Glinther's  literature  and  morphology  of  fishes.     The  Author. 
Gosselet,  M.  J.     Les  roches  cristallines  des  Ardennes. 
Les  sables  tertiaires  du  Plateau  de  1'  Ardenne. 
Documents  nouveaux  pour  1'  etude  du  Famennien. 
L'Argile  a  silex  de  Vervins. 
La  roche  a  Fepin. 

Terrain  diluvien  de  la  Vallee  de  la  Somme. 
De  r  usage  du  Droit  de  priorite  d'Halloy. 
Notice  n^crologique  sur  Jean-Baptiste-Julien  D'Omalius. 
Esquisse  geologique  du  Nord  de  la  France,     ler.  Fasc.     The  Author. 
Grassi,  E.    II  primo  anno  della  clinica  ostetrica  diretta  dal  Prof.  Cav.   Vincenzo. 

R.  1st.  di.  Perfez.  in  Firenze. 
Gratiolet,  L.  P.     Recherches  sur  I'anatomie  de  I'Hippopotame,  1867.     Dr.  H. 

C.  Chapman. 
Green,  S.     Trout  culture.     The  Author. 
Green,  S.  S.     Library  aids.     Department  of  the  Interior. 
Grote,  A.  R.     Preliminary  list  of  North  American  species  of  Agrostis.     The 

Author. 
Haeckel,  E.      Das  system  der  Medusen,  2e  Hlilfte  des  ersten  Theils,  text  and 

atlas.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Hall,   J.     Natural  History   of  New   York.     Palfeontology.      V.    2,    text  and 

plates.     The  Author. 
Hart,  C.  H.     Memoir  of  Samuel  Stehman  Haldeman.     Mrs.  Haldeman. 
Hartman,  Dr.  W.  D.     Catalogue  of  the  genus  Partula  Fer.     The  Author. 
Harvard  University.     Library  bulletin.  No.  17.     The  University. 
Hawes,  G.  W.     Liquid  carbon  dioxide  in  smoky  quartz. 

The  Albany  granite.  New   Hampshire,  and  its  contact  phenomena.     The 
Author. 
Hebert,  Edm.     Craie  supcrieure  du  versant  septentrional  des  Pyrenees.     The 

Author. 
Hector,  J.     Report  of  geological  explorations  (New  Zealand),  during  1879-80. 

The  Author. 
Heer,  0.     Flora  fossilis  arctica.     6er  Bd.  1  Abth.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Hemphill,  H.     Description  of  a  new  California  moUusk.     The  Author. 
Henry,  James.     Aeneidea.     Vol.  2,  pp.  629  et  seq.     The  Author. 
Henry,  Jos.,  a  memorial  of.     1880.     The  Smithsonian  Institution. 
Hermann,  L.     Handbuch  der  Physiologie.    V,  2erTh.  1  Lief  ;  VI,  1  and  2  Th. 

I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Hewitson.  W.  C.    Specimen  of  a  catalogue  of  Lycaenidfe  in  the  British  Museum. 

1862.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Hinde,  G.  J.     Fossil  sponge  spicules  from  the  Upper  Chalk.     The  Author. 
Hoffman,  AV.  J.,  M.  D.     Annotated  list  of  birds  of  Nevada.     The  Author. 
Hooker,  Sir  J.  D.     Flora  of  British  India.     Part  VIII.     East  Indian  Govern- 
ment. 
Hoppe-Seyler,  F.     Physiologische  Chemie.     IV  Th      I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Hough,  F.  B.     Report  upon  forestry.     Vol.  II.     Department  of  Agriculture. 
Hull,  Edw.     Coal-fields  of  Great  Britain.     4th  Ed.     The  Author, 
Hunfalvy,  P.     Literarische   Berichte  aus  Ungarn.     IV  Bd.   1-4.     Hungarian 
Academy  of  Sciences. 


^IQ  ADDITIONS   TO   THE   LIBRARY.  [1881. 

Hyatt,  A.     Genesis  of  the  tertiary  species  of  Planorbis  at  Steinheim.     Geo.  W. 

Tryon,  Jr. 
Ilarione,  S.  Giovanni.     Uno  squardo  sulla  fauna  eocenica.     The  Author. 
Index-catalogue  of  the  library  of  the  Surgeon-General's  office,  U.  S.  A.     Vol. 

II.     War  Department. 
Instructions  governing  the  establishment  and  management  of  the  Polar  expe- 
dition to  Lady  Franklin  Bay  and  Point  Barrow.      War  Department. 
Issel,  A.     Crociera  del  Violante.     Mulluschi  terrestri  e  d'acqua  dolce  viventi 

e  fossili  della  Tunisia.     The  Author. 
Jack,  R.  L.     Geological  features  of  part  of  the  coast  range  between  the  Dal- 

rymple  and  Charter  Towers  Road. 
Queensland,  1879.     Report  on  the  geology  and  mineralogical  resources  of 

the  district  between  Charter  Towers  gold-fields  and  the  coast. 
Report  on  the  Bowen  River  coal-fields.     Dr.  F.  V.  Hayden. 
Jackson,  B.  D.     Guide  to  the  literature  of  botany.     Joseph  Jeanes. 
Jaenicke,    A.      Photometrische   Untersuchungen  des   Blutes.      University   of 

Wurzburg. 
Jameson,    Robt.     Outline  of   the  mineralogy   of  the  Scottish  Isles.     2  vols. 

1800.     In  exchange. 
Jordan,  D.  S.  and  P.   L.  Jouy.     Check-list  of  duplicates   of  fishes  from   the 

Pacific  coast  of  North  America.     The  Authors. 
Julien,  A.  A.     Carbon  dioxide  in  the  fluid  cavities  of  topaz.     The  Author. 
Just,   Leopold.     Botanischer  Jahresbericht.     6er  Jahrg.  1878,  2er  Abth.  1  H. 

I.  V.  AVilliamson  Fund. 
Keep.  Josiah.     Common  sea-shells  of  California.     The  author. 
Kendall,  Mr.     Catalogue  of  mineral  and  fossil  remains  of  Scarborough.     In 

exchange. 
King,  Wm.     Preliminary  notice  of  a  memoir  on  rock-jointing. 

List  of  published  scientific  writings  of.     The  Author. 
K.  K.  Quecksilberwerk  zu  Idria  in  Krain.     The  Royal  Direction  of  Mines  in 

Idria. 
Kobelt,  W.     Illustrirfes  Conchylienbuch.     lOe  and  lie  Lief.    I.  V.  Williamson 

Fund. 
Koenig,  G.  A.     On  Jarosile  from  a  new  locality. 

On  Alaskaite.     The  Author. 
Klein,  E.  and  E.  Noble  Smith.     Atlas  of  histology.     XIII.     I.  V.  Williamson 

Fund. 
Kiichenmeister,  F.  and  F.  A.  Ziirn.     Die  Parasiten  des  Menschen.     2e  Aufi. 

3  Lief.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Lawes,  J.  B.     Memoranda  of  experiments. 

Fertility.     The  Author. 
Leidy,  Jos.     Parasites  of  the  Termites. 

Bathygnathiis  borealis.     The  Author. 
Langdon,  F.  W.     The  Madisonville  pre-historic  cemetery.     The  Author. 
Les  oiseaux  dans  la  Nature.     Livr.  11-20.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Leuckart,  R.     Die  Parasiten  des  Menschen  I,  2.     2e  Aufi.     I.  V.  Williamson 

Fund. 
Levittoux,  H.     Philosophic  de  la  nature.     3me  Ed.     The  Author. 
Lewis,  Henry  C.     Note  on  the  zodiacal  light.     The  Author. 
Library  Commissioners,  Halifax,  annual  report,  1880.     The  Authors. 
Library  Compmy  of  Philada.     Bulletin  No.  6,  July,  1881.     The  Company. 
Light-house  Board,  annual  report,  June  30,  1880.     Treasury  Department. 
McCook,  Rev.  II.  C.     The  Honey  Ants  of  the  garden  of  the  gods,  and  the  Occi- 
dent Ant  of  the  American  plains. 
Ants  associated  with  the  cotton-worm. 
New  northern  cutting  ant,  Atta  Septentrionalis,  etc. 
The  snare  of  the  Ray  spider  (Epeira  radiosa).     The  Author. 
Marrht,  F.  P.     Shells  belonging  to  the  genus  Nassa.     The  Author. 
Marsh,  0.  C.     Odontornithes,  1880.     The  Author. 


1881.]  ADDITIONS   TO   THE   LIBRARY.  nlT 

Martens,  E.  von.     Conchologische  Mittheilungen.     I,  5  and  6.     I.  V.  William- 
son Fund. 
Martini  and  Chemnitz.     Systematisches  Conchylien-Cabinet.      297-307   Lief. 

Wilson  Fund. 
Mason,  John  J.    Thirty  photographs  of  microscopic  preparations  of  the  nervous 

system,  and  one  photograph  of  the  tongue  of  the  fly.     The  Author. 
Mason,  Otis^     Notes  on  anthropology.     The  Editor. 

Mayer,  K.     Die  Tertiar-Fauna  der  Azoren  und  Madeiren.     Joseph  Jeanes. 
Medley,  Geo.  W.     The  reciprocity  craze.     The  Author. 
Meehan,  Thos.     Objects  of  sex  and  odor  in  flowers. 

Forests  and  forestry.     The  Author. 
Mercantile  Library  Association  of  the  City  of  New  York,  60th  annual  report. 

The  Trustees. 
Mercantile  Library  Association  of  San  Francisco,  28th  annual  report,  1881. 

The  Trustees. 
Meteorological  Service  of  the  Dominion  of  Canada,  report,  Dec.  31,  1879.    The 

Superintendent. 
Meyer,  A.  B.     Index  zu   L    Reichenbach's  ornithologischen  Werken.      The 

Author. 
Michigan  State  Fisheries,  Ist-lth  reports.     The  Superintendent. 
Milne-Edwards,  H,     Le9ons  sur  la  physiologie  et  I'anatomie  compar(5e.     XIV, 

2.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Mission  scientifique  au   Mexique.      Recherches   zoologiques.     Ill  partie  pp. 

441-488,  pi.  22e-22j.     2d   section,  pp.  1-56,  pi's  1-10.     V  partie,  pp. 

265-368,  pi's  31a-61.     VII  partie,  T.   II,  pp.  1-80,  pi's   31-36.     I.  V. 

Williamson  Fund. 
Moleschott,  J.    Untersuchungen  zur  Naturlehre  des  Menschen  und  der  Thiere. 

XII,  5,  6.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Mongredien,   Aug.      History  of  the  free-trade  movement   in   England.     The 

«'       Cobden  Club. 
Morris,  J.     Statistical  account  of  several  towns  in  the  county  of  Litchfield. 

Connecticut  Academy  of  Sciences. 
Mueller,  F.     Fragmenta  phytographise  Australioe.     Vols.  2  and  10. 
Descriptive  notes  on  Papuan  plants.     I. 
Index  perfectus  ad  Caroli  Linnasi  Speciei  Plantarum. 
Select  extra-tropical  plants.     New  South  Wales  edition. 
Plants  of  northwestern  Australia.     The  Author. 
Mueller,  N.  J.  C.     Handbuch  der  Botanik.     II,  2.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Museum  Godeft'roy,  catalogue.     VIII. 
Naturw.  Landesdurch.  von  Bohmen,  Archiv.  IV,  2.     Texte  und  Atlas.     I.  V. 

Williamson  Fund. 
Newberry,  J.  S.     The  genesis  of  the  ores  of  iron.     The  Author. 
New  Jersey  State  Agricultural    Experiment  Station,  1st  annual  report.     The 

Directors. 
New  South  Wales,  geological  sketch  map.     Department  of  Min<<s,  N.  S.  W. 
New  York  State   Museum  of  Natural  History,  28th-31st  annual  reports.     The 

Trustees. 
Newton,  A.  and  E.     List  of  birds  of  Jamaica.     The  Authors. 
Newton,  H.  and  W.  P.  Jenney.     Geology  and  resources  of  the  Black  Hills  of 

Dakota.  Department  of  Interior. 

Nomenclature  des  Etres  organises.     Zoolojrical  Society  of  France. 
Norwegian  North-Atlantic  Expedition.     Chemistry  and  zoology.     Norwegian 

Government. 
Pacini,   F.     Del  processo   morboso   del  Colera  Asiatica.     R.  1st.  di  Perfez.  in 

Firenze. 
Palaeontological  Society,  Vol.  35.     Wilson  Fund. 
Pal^ontologie  Francaise.     2e  Ser.     Vegetaux.     Terrain  Jurassique.   Livr.  30; 

Ire  Ser.,  An.  Invert.,  Ter.  Juras.     Livr.  44-46.     Wilson  Fund. 


518  ADDITIONS   TO    THE   LIBRARY.  [1881. 

Palaeontographica.     2Ger  Bd.     2-6  L.     2er  Bd.     1  und  2  L.    Wilson  Fund.      __ 
Parlatore,  F.     Tavole  per  una  Anatomia  delle  piante  aquatiche.     R.  1st.  di 

Perfez.  in  Firenze. 
Pebal,  L.  v.     Das  chemische  Institut  der  K.  K.  Universitiit  Graz.    1880.     The 

Author. 
Pennsylvania  Museum  and  School  of  Industrial  Art.     5th   annual  report   of 

Board  of  Trustees.     The  Authors. 
Pfeiifer,  L.     Nomenclator  Heliceorum  viventium.     7-10  L,     I.  V.  Williamson 

Fund. 
Plateau,  F.     Recherches  physiologiques  sur  le   coeur  des  crustaccs  d^capodes. 
Observations    sur    I'anatomie    de  I'elephant    d'Afrique  (Loxodon    Afri- 

canus)  adulte.     The  Author. 
Plattner's  Analysis  with  the  blowpipe.     4th  Ed.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Powell,  J.  W.    Introduction  to  the  study  of  Indian  languages.    2d  Ed.     Smith- 
sonian Institution. 
Putnam,  F.  W.     Contribution  to  the  archaeology  of  Missouri.     Part  I,  Pottery. 
The  Indians  of  California. 
Archpeological  Notes. 
Pueblo  Pottery      The  Author. 
Quenstedt,  F.   A.     Handbuch  der  Petrefiktenkunde.     2  Vols,  text  and  atlas. 

Joseph  Jeanes. 
Raulin,  V.     Description  phys.  et  nat.  de  Pile   de  Crete.     2  vols,   and   atlas. 

The  Author. 
R.  Comitato  Geologica  d'ltalia.     Bollettina,  X,  1-12.     The  Survey. 
Redfifcld,  .J.  H.     Catalogue  of  the  known  species  recent  and  fossil  of  the  family 

Marginellidae.     The  Author. 
Reyer,  E,     Allgemeine  Geschichte  des  Zuines.     The  Author. 
Reynaud,  J.     Histoire  elementaire  des  Mineraux  usuels.     H.  C.  Lewis. 
Rhees,    Wm.  J.     James  Smithson  and  his  bequest,   1880.     The  Smithsonian 

Institution. 
Riley,  Chas.  V.      The  Rocky  Mountain  locust.     The  Author. 
Rockinger,    L.     Die  Ptlege  der  Geschichte  durch  die    Wittelsbacher.     Royal 

Bavarian  Academy  of  Sciences. 
Roesler,  Aug.     Die  patentirte  Zeichentisch.     The  Author. 
Rolland,  M.  G.     Les  gisements  de  Mercure  de  Californie. 

Mission  Trans-Saharienne  de  Laghouat  el  Goleah-Ouargla-Biskra. 
La  metallurgie  du  Mercure  en  Californie. 
Sur  le  gisements  de  silex  tallies    d'El  Hassi. 
Sur  le  terrain  cretace  du  Sahara  septentrionale.     The  Author. 
Rossmassler's  Iconographie  der  europiiischen  Land  und  Susswasser-MoUusken. 

VII  Bd.  4-6  Lief.     Wilson  Fund. 
Russ,  K.     Die  fremdlilndischen  Stubenvogel.     Ill;  10  ;  IV.     I.   V.  Williamson 

Fund. 
Rutger's  Scientific  School.      16th  annual  report.     The  Directors. 
Ryder,    J.    A.       Structure     and    ovarian     incubation     of    the    top-minnow 

(Zygonectes).     The  Author. 
Saint-Lager,  Dr.     Nouvelles  remarques  sur  la  nomenclature  botanique.     The 

Author 
Saint  Louis  Mercantile  Library  Association,  35th  annual  report.    The  Trustees. 
Saussure,  H.  de.     Voyage  au  Turkestan.     Hymenoptferes,  Famille  des  Scolides. 

The  Author. 
Schefifer,  U.     Die  Naturgesetze  und  ihr  zusammenhang  mit  den  Prinzipien  der 

abstrakten  Wissenschaften.     4er  Th.,  9e  und  letzte  Lief.     The  Author. 
Schlegel,    M.     Museum   d"histoire   naturelle  des    Pays-Bas.     T.  IX.     Wilson 

Fund. 
Schlesischen  botanische  Tausch-Verein,  General-Doubletten-Verzeichniss.  The 

Society. 
Schmidt,  A,     Atlas  der  Diatomaceen-Kunde.     17  and  18  Heft.     I.  V.  William- 
sou  Fund. 


i 


1881.]  ADDITIONS   TO    THE   LIBRARY.  519 

Schoneburgh,  R.     Report  on  the  progress  and  condition  of  the  Botanic  Garden 
and   Government   Plantation,  Adelaide,  during    the  year    1880.      The 
Author. 
Schufeldt,  R.  W.     Osteology  of   Speotyto    cunicularia,   var.  hypogsea  and  of 

Eremophila  alpestris.     The  Author. 
Scudder,  S.  H.     Structure  and  affinities  of  Euphorbia  Meek  and  Worthen. 
Problems  in  entomology. 

The  tertiary  lake  basin  of  Florissant,  Colorado.    ' 

List  of  orthoptera   collected  by  Dr.  A.    S.  Packard,  Jr.,  in  the  western 
United  States  in  the  summer  of  1877.     The  Author. 
Second  Geological  Survey  of  Pennsylvania,  reports.  A',  G,*  G^,  H^,  H^,  I^,  M^, 

P,  Q*,  R  and  T.     Appendiz  A  to  report  R.     The  Survey. 
Second  Yarkand  Mission,  scientific  results  of.     Rhynchota,  by  W.  L.  Distant; 
SyringosphseridiE,  by  Prof.  P.  Martin  Duncan  ;  Lepidoptera,  by  Fred- 
eric Moore  ;   Mammalia,  by  W.  T.  Blanford.     East  India  Government. 
Sequin,  Aine,  M.     Causes  et  effets  de  la  chaleur  de  la  lumiere  et  de  I'^lectricite. 
Les   lois   qui    president  a   I'accomplissement    des    phenomfenes   naturels 

rapport6s  a  I'attraction  Newtonienne. 
L'origine  et  la  propagation  de  la  force.  Considerations  sur  les  causes  de  la 

cohesion. 
Reflexions  sur  I'hypothese  de  Laplace.     Dr.  F.  V.  Hayden. 
Semper  C.     Reisen  im  Archipel  der  Philippinen.     2er  Th.     2er  Bd.     Supple- 
ment-Heft I.     Wilson  Fund. 
Sheafer,  P.  W.     Geology  of  Schuylkill  County.     The  Author. 
Shepard,  C.  U.     Treatise  on  Mineralogy.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Silliman,  B.     Mineralogical  Notes.     1.    Vanadinite,  etc.,  from  Arizona.     The 

Author. 
Slagg,  J.     French  trade  and  tarifs.     Cobden  Club. 
Smith,  E.  A.     Geological  Survey  of  Alabama,  reports  1875,  1877  and  1878, 

1879  and  1880.    -The  Author. 
Smith,  Greene.     Catalogue  of  birds,  eggs  and  nests,  1880.     The  Author. 
Smith,  J.  A.     Biennial  report  of  the  State  Geologist  of  the  State  of   Colorado, 

for  the  term  ending  Dec.  3,  1880.     The  Author. 
Smithsonian  Institution.     Contributions  to  Knowledge.     Vol.  23. 
Miscellaneous  collections.     Vols.  18,  19,  20,  21. 
Annual  report,  1879.     The  Institution. 
Smucker,  I.     Mound-builders'  works  near  Newark,  Ohio.     The  Author. 
Sowerby,  G.  B.     Thesaurus  Conchyliorum.  Pts.  35  and  36.     Wilson  Fund. 
Speyer,  0.     Die  Conchylien  der  Casseler  Tertiiirbildungen.     1-6  Lief.     Joseph 

Jeanes. 
State  Commissioners  of   Fisheries,  Pennsylvania,  reports  1879  and  1880.     B. 

L.  Hewit. 
State  Fish  Commission  of  Iowa.  lst-3d  biennial  reports.     The  Commissioners. 
State  Geologist  of  Colorado.     Biennial  report,  Dec.  31,  1880.     The  Author. 
Stearns,  R.  E.  C,     Observations  on  Planorbis. 
On  Helix  aspersa  in  California. 
Mya  arenaria  in  San  Francisco  Bay. 

New  species  of  marine  mollusks  from  the  coast  of  Florida.     The  Author. 
Steenstrup,  J.     Prof.  A.  E.  Verrila  to  nye  Cephalopodslaegter,  Sthenoteuthis 
og  Lestoteuthis. 
Sepiadarium    og  Idiosepius  to  nye  Slsegter  af  Sepiernes  Familie.     The 
Author. 
Stoppani,  A.  e  G.  Negri.     Carattere  marine  dei   grande  amfiteatri  Morenici 

deir  alta  Italia.     A.  Stoppani. 
Struckmann,  C,     Geognostische  Studien  am  Deister.     II.   1880.     The  Author. 
Sveriges  Geologiska  Undersokning.     8vo,   Ser.  Aa  Nos.   73-79  ;  Ser.  Ab,  No. 
6.    Ser.  C,  Nos.  36-41  (42,  4to),  43  and  44.    4to.  Ser.  C,  42.     Six  maps. 
The  Survey. 


520  ADDITIONS   TO   THE   LIBRARY.  [1881. 

Taramelli,  M    E.  T.     Sulla  poslzione  stratigrafica  della  zona  fiUitica  de  Rotzo 

e  dei  calcari  tnariui  che  la  comprendono. 
Della  Salsa  di  Querzola. 

Di  alcune  scoscendimenti  posglaciale  sulle  Alpi  meridionale.     The  Author. 
Tenison-Woods,  Rev.  J.  E.     Palfeontology  of  New  Zealand.     Part  IV.     Corals 

and  Bryozoa  of  the  Neozoic  period  of  New  Zealand.     The  Geological 

Survey. 
Thomas,  W.  T.   H.     Lithograph   of  foot-prints  of  Brontozoum  Thomasi.     The 

Author. 
Trafford,  F.  W.  C.     Souvenir   de  ramphiorama.     The  Author. 
Trinius,  D.  C.  B.     Species  Graminum.     Fasc.  1-30.     Joseph  Jeanes. 
Tryon,  Geo.  W.  Jr.     Manual  of  conchology.     IV-XII.     The  Author. 
University  of  Califorcia.     College  of  Agriculture,  report,  1880.     The  Author. 
University  of  Minnesota.     Calendar  for  1880-'81.     The  University. 
University  of  Wurzburg.     Eleven  chemical  theses.     The  University. 
United  States  Commissioner  of  Fish  and  Fisheries.     Part  VI. 

Report  of  the  Commissioners  for  1878.     The  Commission. 
United  States   Entomological  Commission.     2d  report.     Bulletin  No.  6.     De- 
partment of  Interior. 
United  States  Geographical  Survey  west  of  the  100th  mer.     Report,  Vol.  VII. 

Archfeology.     Engineer  Department,  U.  S.  A. 
United  States  Geological  and  Geographical  Survey  of  the  Territories.     V.  4, 

VI.  2.     Department  of  the  Interior. 
Victoria.     Mineral  statistics  for  1879,  1880. 

Report  of  Chief  Inspector  of  Mines,  1879,   1880. 

Reports  of  Mining  Surveyors  and  Registrars,  31st  Dec,  1879;   March  31, 

1881  ;  June  30,  1880.     Dr.  F.  V.  Hayden. 
Villa,    A.  and  G.  B.     Cenni   geologici    sul  territori  dell'    Antico  distretto  di 

Oggiono. 
Elenco  cronologica  di  lavori  scientifici.     The  Authors. 
Vogdes,  A.  W.     Anthropological  contributions,  1  and  2.     Paleontological  con- 
tributions, 1  and  2.     The  Author. 
Vogt,  C.     Lehrbuch  der  Geologic  und  Petrefactenkunde.     4e  Aufl.     2  Vols. 

Joseph  Jeanes. 
Walsingham,  Lord.     Lepidoptera  heterocera  in  the  British  Museum.    Part  IV. 

Trustees  of  the  Museum. 
Watson,  Rev.  R.  B.       Molluscaof  H.  M.  S.  "Challenger"  Expedition.      Parts 

VI  and  VII.     The  Author. 
Wesleyan    Universiiy,    Middletown,    Conn.,  9th  annual    report  of   curators. 

The  Authors. 
Westhof,  Fr.     Die  Kiifer  AVestfalens.     I.  Abth.  Supplement.     The  Author. 
Wheeler,  C.  F.  and  E.  F.  Smith.      Phoenogamous  and  vascular  cryptogamous 

plants  of  Michigan.     The  Authors. 
Wex,  Gustave.     A  lecture  on  the  progress  of  the  work  of  completion  of  the 

new  and  improved  bed  of  the  Danube  at  Vienna.     Engineer  Depart- 
ment, U.  S.  A. 
Wheeler,  Geo.  M.     Annual   report  upon   the  geographical  and  topographical 

surveys  of  the  tertitory  of  the  U.  S.  west  of  the  100th  mer.  Appendix 

P^.''  Engineer  Department,  U.  S.  A. 
Wolf,  H.     Regleitworte   zur  geologischen   Gruben-Revier-Karte  des  Kohlen- 

beckens  von  Teplitz-aux-Brux.,  with  15  maps.      Geological  Survey  of 

Bohemia. 
Wortmann,    J.     Ueber  die    Beziehungen  der   intramolecularen  zur  normalen 

Athmung  der  Pflanzen.     University  of  Wurzburg. 
Wright,  A.  W.    Gaseous  substances  contained  in  the  smoky  quartz  of  Branch- 

ville.     G.  W.  Hawes. 
Yale  College.     Catalogue,  1880-'81.     The  College. 
Yarrel,  Wm.     A  history  of  British  birds.     4th  Ed.     Pt.  13.     I.V.Williamson 

Fund. 


1881.]  ADDITIONS   TO   THE    LIBRARY.  521 

Yarrow,  H.  C.      Introduction  to  the  study  of  mortuary  customs  among   the 

North  American  Indians.     The  Author. 
Zigno,  Achille  de.     Cataloga  ragionata  dei  Pesci  fossile. 

Sireni  fossili  trovati  nel  Veneto. 

Uno  Squalodonte  scoperti  nell  arenaria  miocena  del  Bellunese. 

Aggiunte  alia  Ittiologia  dell'  Epoca  eocena. 

Pesci  fossili  nuovi  del  calcare  eoceno  dei  Monti  Bolca  e  postale. 

Sopra  un  nuovo  Sirenio  fossile  scoperto  nelle  Colline  di  Bra  in  Piemonte. 

Flora  fossilis  formationis  oolithicaj.     Vols.  1  and  2.     The  Author. 
Zittel,  K.  A.  Geologischen  Bau  der  libyschen  Waste.  Royal  Bavarian  Academy 

of  Sciences. 
Zoological  Record  for  1879.     Wilson  Fund. 

Journals  and  Periodicals. 

Adelaide.     Royal  Society.     Transactions,  1879,  1880.     The  Society. 
Altenburg.     Mittheilungen  aus  dem  Osterlande,  n.  f.  ler  Bd.     The  Editor. 
American  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science.    Programme  of  the  30th 

meeting.     Proceedings,  XXVIII,  XXIX,  1  and  2.     The  Society. 
American  Medical  Association.     Transactions,  I-XIII.     Dr.  Robert  Bridges. 
American   Institute   of  Mining  Engineers.      Transac'ions,   VII,   VIII.      The 

Society. 
Amsterdam.    K.  Akademie  van  Wetenschappen.    Verslagen  en  Mededeelingen, 
Afd.  Letterk.  2e  R.  VI  D.  9.     Afd.  Natuurk.  2e  R.  XI  D.  15.     Jaarboek, 
1879.     Processen-Verbaal,  1880.     Verhandlingen,  Afd.  Nat.  XX;    Afd. 
Let.  XIII.     The  Society. 
Angers.     Soci^te  Academique  de  Maine  et  Loire.     INI^moires,  XXIII-XXVIII, 
XXXV,  1-4.     The  Society. 
Soci^te  Nationale  d'Agriculture,  Sciences  et  Arts.     Memoires,  XXI.     The 
Society. 
Auxerre.     Soci^te  des  Sciences  historiques  et  naturelles  de  I'Yonne.     Bulletin 

XXXIV.     The  Society. 
Baltimore.     American  Journal  of  IMathematics.     II,  l-III,  4.     The  Editor. 
Johns   Hopkins  University.     Studies   from  the  Biological  Laboratory,  II, 
1.     Report,  4th.     University   circulars,   9   and   10.     Register,  1880-81. 
The  Trustees. 
Peabody  Institute,  14th  annual  report.     The  Trustees. 
Batavia.     Genootschap  van   Kunsten   en   Wetenschappen.      Aanteekeningen, 
June,  1879.     Verslag,  June,  1880.     Naamlijst,   1880.     Registers,  1845- 
1878.     The  Society. 
Natuurkundig  Vereen  in  Nederlandsch  Indie.     Tijdschrift,  Svende  Serie, 
IX.     The  Society. 
Belfast.     Natural  History  and  Philosophical  Society.     Proceedings,  1878-1880. 

The  Society. 
Berlin.     Archiv  fiir  Naturgescbichte,  47er  Jahrg.  1,  2,  4  and  5.     The  Editor. 
Entomologische  Verein.     Zeitscbrift,  24  Jahrg.,  2es  a,nd  25er  Jahrg.,  les 

H.     The  Society. 
Deutsche  geologische  Gesellschaft.    Zeitscbrift,  XXXII,  2-XXXIII,  1.    The 

Society. 
Gesellschaft  Naturforscbender  Freunde.      Sitzungs-Berichte,  1880.     The 

Society. 
K.    Preussische    Akademie    der   Wissenschaften.       Monatsbericht,    Aug., 

1880-Juni,  1881.     Physikalische  Abhandlungen,  1879.     The  Society. 
Linnaea.     ler  Bd.  1826.— XLIII,  1-4,  1881.     Joseph  Jeanes. 
Der  Naturforscher.  XIII,  14-XlV.  26.     The  Editor. 
Naturae  Novitates,  1880,  9-1881,  20.     The  Editor. 
Verein   zur   Beforderung  des   Gartenbaues.     Monatsscbrift,  23er  Jahrg. 

Jan.-Dec.     The  Society. 
Zeitscbrift  fiir  die  gesammtea  Naturwissenscbaften,   n.  f.   Ill,  5.     The 
Editor. 


522  ADDITIONS   TO    THE   LIBRARY.  [1881. 

Bern.     Natuvforschende  Gesellschaft.     Mittheilungen,  979.     The  Society. 
Beziers.     Soci6t6  d'(;tude  des  Sciences  Naturelles.     Bulletin,  4e  Annde.     The 

Society. 
Bistritz.     Gewerbeschule.     Jahresbericht  4  and  6.     The  Director. 
Bloomington.     Illinois  Museum   of  Natural   History.      Bulletin  No.    1.      See 

Normal.     The  Director. 
Bologna.     Accademia  delle  Scjenze.     Memorie,   Ser.  3,  T.  IX,  8,4;   X,  1-4. 

Kendiconti.  1878-79.     The  Society. 
Bonn.     Archiv  fiir  mikroskopische  Anaiomie.     XIX,  1-XX,  2.     I.  V.  William- 
son Fund. 
Naturhistorische  Verein.     Verhandlungen,  37er  .Jahrg.  l-38er  Jahrg.  1. 
The  Society. 
Bordeaux.     Academic  nationale  des  Sciences,  etc.     Actes,  XXVIII,  2  ;  XX,  3  ; 
XXIII,  1  ;  XXIV,  2;  XXXI,  2;  XLI.     The  Society. 
Soci^t6  des  Sciences  physiques  et  naturelles.     M^moires,  2e  S^r.  IV,  2. 
The  Society. 
Boston.     American  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences.     Proceedings,  XVI,  1  and 
•      2.     The  Society. 
Progress  of  Science.  I,  1.     The  Editor. 
Science  Observer,  II,  7.     The  Editor. 

Society    of  Natural    History.      Proceedings,   XX,    p.    385-XXI,    p.    128. 
Anniversary  Memoirs.     Occasional  Papers,  III.     The  Society. 
Braunschweig.     Archiv  fiir  Anthropology,  XIII,  1-3.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Bremen.     Naturwissenschaftliche  Verein.     Abhandlungen,  VII,  1  and  2.     The 

Society. 
Bristol.     Naturalists'   Society.     Proceedings,  n.  s.  Ill,  1  and  2.     Catalogue  of 

Library,  May,  1881.     The  Society. 
Briinn.      K.    K.    Mahrisch-Schlesische    Gesellschaft    zur    Beforderung    des 
Ackerbaues   der  Natur-  und   Landeskunde.     Mittheilungen,  59er  and 
60er  Jahrg.     The  Society. 
Naturforschende  Verein.     Verhandlungen,  XVIII.     The  Society. 
Bruxelles.     Acad^mie  Royale   des  Sciences,  etc.     Annuaire,  1879  and   1880. 
Bulletin,  2me  S6r.    T.  45-49.     Memoires,  T.  42.     Memoires  couronnds, 
8vo  T.   28,   29  and  30;   4to   T.  42  and  43.     Tables,  1816-1878.     The 
Society. 
Soci6t(5   Beige   de  Microscopic.       Bulletin,   30  Oct.  1880-30  Juil.   1881. 

Annales,  V.     The  Society. 
Soci^t^   Malacologique.     Annales,   XII.     Proces-Verbaux,  8  Jan. -2  Oct. 

1881.     The  Society. 
Soci^t^  Entomologique.     Comptes-Rendu,  1880.     Annales,  T.  23  and   24. 
The  Society. 
Buda-Pest.     M.  Tudom.  Acad^mia.  Ertekez(^sek  a  Math.  Tudomiinyok  Korebol, 
VII  Kot^t,  3,  6-18  Szam ;   IX,  20  Szam-X,  18  Szam.  Math,  es  Termeszet. 
Kcizlemenyek,  XVI.    Ungarische  Revue,  1  and  2  H.,  1881.    The  Society. 
Ungarische   National-Museum.     Term6szetrajzi  Fiizetek,  IV,  3,  4;   V,  1. 
The  Society. 
Buffalo.     Society  of  Natural  Sciences.     Bulletin,  IV,  1.     The  Society. 
Caen.     Academic  nationale  des  Sciences,  etc.     Memoires,  Vol.   suppl.,  1879, 

1880.     The  Society. 
Calcutta.     Asiatic  Society   of  Bengal.     Journal,  XLIX,  Pt.  1,  No.  3-L,  Pt.  2, 
No.  3.     Proceedings,  1880,  1-1881,  8.     The  Society. 
Same.     Isaac  Lea. 

Stray  Feathers,  IX,  1-4.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Cambridge.     Museum  of  Comparative   Zoology.     Memoirs,  VIII,  1.     Report, 
1880-81.     Bulletin  V,  8,  9,  11,  12  and  14;   VI,  12;    VIII,    1-3  and  pp. 
95-284.     The  Director. 
Nuttall  Ornithological  Club.     Bulletin  VI,  1-4.     The  Society. 
Peabody  Museum   of  American  Archaeology  and   Ethnology,  14th  annual 

report.     The  Director. 
Psyche,  Nos.  77-86.     The  Editor. 


1881.]  ADDITIONS   TO    THE   LIBRARY,  523 

Cap  Rouge.     Le  Naturaliste  Canadien.     Nov.  1880-Oct.  1881.     The  Editor. 
Cassel.     Mal;ikozoologisclie  Bllitter,  IV.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Verein  fiir  Naturkunde.     Bericht  XXVIII.     The  Society. 
Catania.     Accademia  Gioenia  di  Scienze  Naturali.     Atti,  3a  Ser.,  T.  11  and 

12.     The  Society. 
Cherbourg.     Societe   Nationale   des  Sciences   Naturelles.      Memoires,   XXII. 

The  Society. 
Chicago.     American  Antiquarian,  I,  3  ;  II,  2 :  III,  2-4.     The  Editor. 

National  Scientific  Journal,  I.  3.     The  Editor. 
Christiania.     Archiv  for  Mathematik  og  Naturvidenskab,  V,  4-VI,    2.     I.  V. 

Williamson  Fund. 
Chur.    Naturforschende  Gesellschaft  Graubiindens,  n.  f.  XXII  and  XXIV.    The 

Society. 
Cincinnati.     Paleontologist,  No.  5.     The  Editor. 

Society  of  Natural  History.     Journal,  I,  3;  111,4;  IV,  1-3.     The  Society. 
Copenhagen.     Videnskabelige  Meddelelser,  1879-80,  III.     The  Editor. 

Naturhistorisk  Tidsskrift.  Schiodte.    Be  Raekke,  XII,  3.    I.  V.  Williamson 

Fund. 
K.  D.  Videnskabernes  Selskab.  Oversigt,  1880,  2-1881,  1.     Skrifter,  XII, 
6;  6me  Ser.,  I,  1  and  2.     The  Society. 
Cordoba.     Academia  nacional  de  Ciencias  esactas.      Boletin  II,  4;   III,  1-3. 

The  Society. 
Crawfordsville.     Botanical  Gazette,  IV,  11— VI,  1.     The  Editor. 
Danzig.      Naturforschende  Gesellschaft.   Schriften,   n.   f.  V,   1  and  2.      The 

Society. 

Dijon.     Academie  des  Sciences,  etc.    Memoirps,  3me  Ser.,  1880.    The  Society. 

Dorpat.     Naturforscher  Gesellschaft.     Sitzungsberichte,  V,  3.     Archiv  fiir  die 

Naturkunde  Liv-Ehst-  und  Kurlands,  le  Ser.  IX,  1  and  2.    The  Society. 

Dresden.     K.  Mineralogisch-Geologische  und  Praehistorische   Museum.     Mit- 

theilungen,  3es  H.     The  Director. 

K.    Sammlung   fiir    Kunst   und    Wissenschaft.      Bericht,    1878-79.      The 

Director. 
Naturwissenschaftliche  Gesellschaft  Isis,  Jan. -Dec.  1880.     The  Society. 
Verein  fiir  Erdkunde.     Jahresbericht  XVII  und  Nacbtrag.     The  Society. 
Dublin.     Royal  Geological  Society  of  Ireland.     Journal,  XV,  3.     The  Society. 
Royal  Irish  Academy.     Proceedings,  Science,  III,  Ser.  2,  Nos.  4-6  ;  Polite 
Literature   and  Antiquities,   II,   Ser.   2,  Nos.  1   and   2.     Transactions, 
Science,  XXVI,  22,  XXVIII,  1-5 ;  Irish  Mss.  Series,  I.  1  ;  Cunningham 
Memoirs,   No.  1 ;    Polite  Literature  and  Antiquities,   XXVII,  4.     The 
Society. 
Edinburgh.     Botanical  Society.     Transactions  and  Proceedings,  XVI,  1.     The 
Society. 
Geological  Society.     Transactions,  IV,  1.     The  Society. 
Royal  Physical  Society.     Proceedings,  1879-80.     The  Society. 
Royal  Society.      Proceedings,   X,   105.      Transactions,   XXIX,   2.      The 

Society. 
Scottish  Naturalist,  Nos.  41-44.     The  Editor. 
Erfurt.     K.  Akademie  gemeinutziger  Wissenschaften.     Jahrbuch,  n.  f. ,  H.  10. 

The  Society. 
Erlangen.     Biologische  Centralblatt,  I,  1.     The  Editor. 
Florence.     Nuovo  Giornale  Botanico  Italiano,  XII,  4-XIII,  4.     The  Editor. 
Frankfurt  a.  M.     Aerztliche  Verein.     Jahresbericht  XXIII.     The  Society. 

Deutsche  Malakozoologische  Gesellschaft.     Jahrbucher,  II,  VII,  VIII,  1- 

3.     Nachrichtsblatt,  1881,  No.  9,  V,  VI,  XI-XIII.     The  Society. 
Senckenbergische  Naturforschende  Gesellschaft.     Abhandlungen,  XII,  1 

and  2.     Bericht,  1879-80.     The  Society. 
Der  Zoologische  Garten,  XXI,  1-12      Zoological  Society  of  Frankfurt. 
Gand.     Archives  de  Biologic,  I,  4.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 


524  ADDITIONS   TO   THE   LIBRARY.  [1881. 

Geneva.     Scbvveizerisclie  Palaeontologische  Gesellschaf't.     Abliandlungen,  VII. 
I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Society   de   Physique   et  d'Histoire  Naturelle.     Momoires,  XXVII.     The 
Society. 
Genoa.     Museo  civico  de  Storia  Naturale.     Annili  XV.     The  Society. 

Societa  di  Leiture  e  Conversazioni  Scientifiche.     Giornale,  IV,  5-12.    The 
Society. 
Germany.     Gesellschaft  Deutscher  Naturforscher  und  Arzte.     Tageblatt,  53 

Versamm.     The  Society. 
Giessen.     Jahresbericht  iiber  die  Fortschritte  der  Chemie.     1879,  2es  11-1880, 
les  H.     The  Editor. 
Oberhessische  Gesellschaft  fiir  Natur-  und  Heilkunde,  19er  Bericht.     The 
Society. 
Glasgow.     Natural  History  Society.     Proceedings,  IV,  2.     The  Society. 

Philosophical  Society.     Proceedings,  XII,  1.     The  Society. 
Gorlitz.     Naturforschende  Gesellschaft.     Abhandlungen  XVI.  The    Society. 
Gottingen,  K.     Gesellschaft  der  VVissenschaften.     Nachrichten,  1880.    The  So- 
ciety. 
Qrand  Rapids.     Kent  Scientific  Institute.      Miscellaneous  publications,  No.  2, 

3,  and  5.     The  Society. 
Graz.     Naturwissenschaftliche  Verein  fiir  Steiermark. 
Mittheilungen.  ..  Jahrg,  1879  and  1880.     The  Society. 
Verein      der     Arzte    in  Steiermark.     Mittheilungen  1880.     The  Society. 
Guadalajara.      Sociedad    de    Ingenieros   de  Jalisco.      Boletin   I.    2-10.     The 

Society. 
Halifax.     Nova  Scotian  Institute  of  Natural  Science.      Proceedings  and  Trans- 
actions, V.  2.     The  Society. 
Halle.     Naturforschende  Gesellschaft.     Abhandlungen  XV.  1.     Bericht,  1879. 
The  Society. 
Verein  fiir  Erdkunde.     Mittheilungen  1877-1880.     The  Society, 
Naturwissenschaftliche  Verein.     Verhandlungen,  n.  f.  V.     The  Society. 
Hannover.      Gesellschaft   fiir   die    Mikroskopie.      Jahresbericht,    ler.       The- 
Society. 
Naturhistorische  Gesellschaft.      20er  and  oOer  Jahresb.     The  Society. 
Haarlem.     Mus^e  Teyler.     Archives,  2e.  Ser.,  Ire.  Partie.     The  Director. 

Soci6t^  Hollandaise  des  Sciences.  Archives  XV.  3-XVI.  2.  The  Society. 
Hobart  Town.  Royal  Society  of  Tasmania.  Proceedings,  1879.  The  Society. 
Innsbruck.       Ferdinandlum.      Zeitschrift.     3e  Folge,  24es  and  25es  H.     The 

Director. 
Jena.     Medicinisch-Naturwissenschaftliche  Gesellschaft.    Zeitschrift,  XIV.  3- 

XV.  2.     The  Society. 
Kansas  City  Review  of  Science   and    Industry,    Dec.   1880-Nov.   1881.     The 

Editor. 
Klagenfurt.     Landesmuseum  von  Kilrnten.     Jahrbuch  XIV.     The  Director. 
Konigsberg.     Physikalisch-okonomische    Gesellschaft.     Schriften    XVIII.    2; 

XIX.  1  aid  2;  XX.  1,  2;  XXI.  1.     The  Society. 
Lausanne.     Societe  Ilelvetique  des  Sciences  Naturelles,     Actes,  63e  Ses.    The 
Society. 
Societe  Vaudoise  des  Sciences  Naturelles.     Bulletin  Nos.  83  and  84.     The 
Society. 
Leeds,     Philosophical  and  Literary  Society.     Reports  1879-'80,  1880-'81.    The 

Society.  < 

Leipzig.     Archiv   fiir    Anatomie  und  Physiologie.     Anatomische  Abth.   1880, 
1   H-1881,  5  H.    Physiologische  Abth.  1880,  6  H.-1881,  5  H.;    Suppl. 
Bd.  1880.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Botanische  Centralblatt.     Register  1880.     The  Editor. 
Botanische  Institut  zii  Tubingen,     Untersuchungen  I,  1.     I.  V.  William- 
son Fund. 


J 


1881.] 


ADDITIONS   TO   THE   LIBRARY.  525 


Botanische  Jahrbiicher,  I.  4-II.  3.     I.  V.  AVilliamson  Fund. 

Flirstlich    Jablonowski'sche    Gesellschaft.      Jahresbericht,    1881.       The 
Society. 

Jahrbucher  fiir  Wissenschaftlische  Botaaik.    XII.  3  and  4.    I.  V.  William- 
son Fund. 

Journal  fiir  Ornithologie.     XXVIII.  2;  XXIX.   3.  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

K.  Siichsische  Gesellschaft  der  Wissenschaften.   Abhandlungen.  XII.  2a,  5 
and  6.     Berichte.  1880.  1  and  2.     The  Society. 

Mnrphologisches  .Jahrbuch.     VI.  4-VlI.  2.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Naturforschende    Gesellschaft.     Sitzungsberichte,   1879 ;  1880,    1    and  2. 
The  Society. 

Zeitschrift  fiir  Krystallograpie  und  Mineralogie.  V.  2-VI.  2.     I.  V.  Wil- 
liamson Fund. 

Zeitschrift  fur  Wissenschaftliche    Zoologie.     XXXV.  1-XXXVI.  2.     I.  V. 
Williamson  Fund. 

Zoologischer  Anzeiger,  69-96.     The  Editor. 
Lisbon.     Associacao  dos   Engenheiros  civis    Portuguezis.     Revista  Nos.  122- 

124,  129-142.     The  Society. 
Liverpool.     Free  Public  Library,  Museum  and  Walker  Art  Gallery,  28th  an- 
nual report.     The  Trustees. 

Literary  and  Philosophical  Society.     Proceedings,  Nos.  33  and^4.     The 
Society. 
London.     Annals  and  Magazine  of  Natural  History.     Dec.  1880-Nov.  1881.     I. 
V.  AVilliamson  Fund. 

Astronomical  Register,  Dec.  1880-Nov.  1881.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Chemists'  Journal.     III.  6-5.     The  Editor. 

Curtis's  Botanical  Magazine.     Nos.  1126-1137.    I.V.Williamson  Fund. 

Electrician.     VII.  14,  20-26.     The  Editor. 

Entomological  Society.     Transactions,  1880.     The  Society. 

Gardener's  Chronicle.     Nos.  360-411.     The  Editor. 

Geological  .\'agazine.     Dec.  1880-Nov.  1881.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Geological  Society.     Quarterly  Journal,  No.  144—147  ;  List,  1881  and  Cata- 
logue of  Library.     The  Society. 

Hardwicke's  Science  Gossip,  Dec.  1880-Nov.  1881.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Ibis.     Oct.  1880-July  1881.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Journal  of  Anatomy  and    Physiology,  XV.  2-XVI.  1.      I.  V.  Williamson 
Fund. 

Journal  of  Botany.     Dec.  1880-Nov.  1881.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Journal  of  Conchology.     II.  1-12;  III.  2,  8.     The  Editor. 

Journal  of   Physiology.     III.    1,    2   and    Supplement.     I.  V.   Williamson 
Fund. 

Journal  of  Science.     Dec.  1880-Nov.  1881.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
*Linnean  Society.     Journal,  Botany,  Nos.  103-107;   Zoology,  Nos.  80-83. 
Transactions,  Botany  I.  7-9  ;   Zoology  II.  1.     List,  1879.     The  Society. 

London,  Edinburgh  and  Dublin  Philosophical  Magazine.     Dec.  1880-Nov. 
1881.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Mineralogical  Society  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland.      Mineralogical  Mag- 
azine I.  19,  20.     The  Society. 

Nature.     Nos.  577-628.     The  Editor. 

Notes  and  Queries.     Nov.  1880-Oct.  1881.     The  Editor. 

Popular  Science  Review.     Jan-Oct.  1881.     I.  V.   Williamson  Fund. 

Quarterly*  Journal  of  Microscopical  Science.     Jan. -Oct.  1881.     I.  V.  Wil- 
liamson Fund. 

Royal  Asiatic  Society  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland.     Journal,  XII.  4-XIII. 
3.     The  Society. 

Royal  Geographical  Society.      Proceedings,  n.  s.  II.  9-III.  8.     Journal, 
Vols.  49  and  50  ;  Index  Catalogue  of  Library.     The  Society. 

Royal  Institution   of  Great  Britain.     Proceedings,  IX.  3  and  List.     The 
Society. 


526  ADDITIONS    TO    THE   LIBRARY.  [1881. 

Royal  Microscopical  Society.   Journal,  III.  6 -Ser.  2,  I.  1-5.  The  Society, 
lloyal  Society.     Proceedings  Nos.  l'J7-205.       Philosophical  Transactions. 

Vols    171  and  17:^.     The  Society. 
Society  of  Arts.     Journal,  Vol.  28.     The  Society. 
Triibner's  American  and  Oriental  Literary  Record.       Nos.  155-160.     The 

Publi>hers. 
Zoological  Society.    Proceedings,  1880,  No.  8-1881,  No.  2.     Transactions, 

XL  3-5.     The  Society. 
Zoologist.     Dec.  1881-Nov.  1882.     L  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
London,  Ca.     Canadian  Entomologist,  XII.  11-XllI.  11.      The  Editor. 
Louvain.     University   Catiiolique.     Annuaire,  45me  Annue.     Sixteen  Theses. 

Bibliographie  Academique,  1880.     The  University. 
Liibeck.     Naturhistorische  Museum.     Jahresbericht,  1880.     The  Society. 
Luxembourg.     Institut  Royal.     Publications,  T.  18.     The  Society. 
Lyon.     Academic  des  Sciences  etc.     Memoires.     Classe    des  Sciences,    XXIV. 
Classe  des  LettVes,  XIX.     The  Society. 
Lyon  Scientifique  et  Industrie!,  2e  An.  Nos.  5-8.     Dr.  F.  V.  Hayden. 
Soci<it6  d' Agriculture  etc.     Annales,  5me  Ser.,  II.     The  Society. 
Societe  Linneetine.     Annales,  n.  s.  T.  28.     The  Society. 
Madrid.     .Memorial  de  Ingenieros.     An.   35.       No.    22- An.  36,  No.  21.     The 

Editor. 
Manchester  Literary    and    Philosophical   Society.     Proceedings,  Vols.  16-19. 

Memoirs,  VI.     The  Society. 
Metz.     Sociote  d'Histoire  Naturelle.      Bulletin,  2e  Ser.,  13er  and  14er  Cah. 

The  Society. 
Mexico.     Ministerio  de    Fomento.     Anales,  III,  IV.     Boletin,  1881.     Depart- 
ment of  Works,  Mexico. 
Museo  Nacional.     Anales,  II.  3,  4.     The  Director. 
Revista  cientilica  Mexicana,  I.  12-16.     The  Editor. 
Sociedad  de  Geogratia  y  Esfadistica   de  la  Republica  Mexicana.    Boletin, 

3a  Ep.  V.  1-11.     The  Society. 
Sociedad    Mexicana  de    Historia  Natural.     La  Naturaleza,  IV.  21-V.  8. 
The  Society. 
Middletown,     Scientific  Association.     Occasional  Papers,  I.     The  Society. 

Wesleyan  University  Museum.     10th  annual  report.     The  Curator. 
Milan.     R.  Istituto  Lombardo  di    Scienze  e  Lettere.     Rendiconti,  Ser.  2a,  XI 
and  XII.     Meraoire  XIV.  2.     The  Society. 
Regio    Istituto  tecbnico  superiore.       Relazione  del  Viaggio  d'Istruzione. 
Programma  1880-81.     The  Society. 
Milwaukee.     Naturhistorische    Verein.     Jahresbericht,    1870-1874,    1880-81. 
Mons.     Societe  des  Sciences,  etc.,  du  Hainaut.      Memoirs,  4e  Ser.,  T.  4me. 

The  Society. 
Montpellier.   Academic  des  Sciences  et  Lettres.    Memoires,  Section  des  Sciences, 

IX.  3;  X.  1.     Section  de  Medicine,  V.  2.     The  Society. 
Montreal.     Annuaire  de  Ville- Marie,  I.  2.     M.  Huguet-Latour. 
Canadian  Naturalist,  IX.  7  and  8  ;  X.  1.     The  Editor. 
Numismatic  and  Antiquarian  Society.      Canadian  Antiquarian,  IX.  3  and 
4;  X.  2.     The  Society. 
Moscow.     Society  Imp^riale  des  Naturalistes.     Bulletin,  1879,  No.  2  ;   1880, 

No.  4.     The  Society. 
Munich.     Gesellschaft  fiir  Anthropologic,  Ethnologie  und  Urgeschichte.  Bei- 
triige,  IV.  1-3.     The  Society. 
K.  Sternwarte.     Beobachtungen,  1880.     The  Director. 
K.   B.  Akademie  der    Wissenschaften.     Sitzungsberichte  der  math.  phys. 
Classe  1880,  No.  3-1881,  No.  1.     Abhandlung,  historische  Classe,  XV.  2, 
3 ;   philos-philol.     Classee   XV.  1-3 ;    mathem-physikal.    Classe,    XIII. 
3.     Tne  Society. 
MUnster.     Westfalischen    Provinzial-Verein    fiir    Wissenschaft    und    Kunst. 
Jahresbericht,  Ser  and  9er.     The  Society. 


ADDITIONS   TO    LIBRARY.  527 

Nancy.     Society  des  Sciences.     Bulletin,  Ser.  2.   T.  III.  10-12.     The  Soeiety. 
Naples.     R.    Istituto  dlncoraggiamento  alle   Scienze  naturali,  economiche    e 

technologische.     Atti,  XV.  XVII.     The  Society. 
Neubrandenburg.     Verein  der  Freunde  der  Naturgeschichte  in  Mecklenburg. 

Archiv,  33er  and  34er  Jahrg.     The  Society. 
Neuchatel.     Societe  des  Sciences  Naturelles.     Bulletin,  XII.  1.      The  Society. 
Newcastle-upon-Tyne.     North  of  England  Institute  of  Mining  and  Mechanical 

Engineers.     Transactions,  General  Index,  Vols.  1-25.     The  Society. 
New  Haven.     American   Journal    of  Science,    Dec,    1880-Nov.    1881.      The 
Editor. 
Connecticut  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences.      Memoirs,  I.  3  and  4.     The 

Society. 
Yale  College.     SchefReld  Scientific  School.     Annual  Reports,  2-11.     Cat- 
alogue, 1881-82.    The  Trustees. 
New  Vork.     Academy  of  Sciences.     Annals,  II.  1-6.     Transactions,  1881-82. 
The  Society. 
American  Chemical  Society.     Journal,  II.  8,     The  Society. 
American  Geographical  Society.     Bulletin,  1880,  No.  2-1881,  No.   1.     The 

Society. 
American  Journal  of  Microscopy.     V.  11-VI.  8.     The  Editor. 
American  Monthly  Microscopical  Journal,  II,  1-10.     The  Editor. 
American  Museum  of  Natural  History.     2d,  9th  and  12th  annual  reports. 

The  Trustees. 
Forest  and  Stream.     XV.  18-XVII.  17.     The  Editor. 
Index  Medicus.  II.  12  and  Index.     Wm.  S.  Vaux. 
Journal  of  Comparative    Medicine  and  Surgery.     II.   1,  3  and    4.     The 

Editor. 
Library  Journal.     V.  11-VI.  10.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Lyceum  of  Natural  History.     Annals,  X.  12,  13,  XI.  7  and  8.     Proceed- 
ings, I.  pp.  237,  June  1,  1874.     The  Society. 
Monthly  Index  to  current  periodical  literature.     II.  l-III.  5. 
New  York  Medical  Eclectic,  Nov.  1880,-Sept.  1881.     The  Editor. 
New  York  Medical  Journal,  XXXII.  12-XXXIV.  5.     The  Editor. 
Papilio,  I.  9..     The  Editor. 

Popular  Science  Monthly.     Jan -Dec.  1881.     The  Editor. 
Science.     Nos.  23-74.     The  Editor. 
The  Sea  World.     IIL  9.     The  Editor. 

Torrey  Botanical  Club.     Bulletin,  VII.  11-VIII.  11.     The  Society. 
Normal.     Illinois  State  Laboratory  of  Natural  History.     Bulletin,  Nos.  2  and 

3.     The  Director. 
Offenbach   am   Main.      Verein  fiir  Naturkunde.     Bericht,  19er-21er.      The 

Society. 
Orleans.      Societe    d' Agriculture,  Sciences,    etc.     Memoires,   XXI.    4.     The 

Society. 
Palermo.     II  Naturalista  Siciliano,  Anno  I.  1.     The  Editor. 
Paris.     Academic  des  Sciences.     Comptes  Rendus,  Vol.  90.     The  Society. 

Annales  des  Mines.  7me  Ser.  XVII.  5-XIX.  3.  Minister  of  Public  Works, 

France. 
Annales  de  philosophie  chretienne,  51e  annee.     The  Editor. 
Annales  des  Sciences  Geologique,  XI.  3-6,  title  etc.     The  Editor- 
Annales  des  Sciences  Naturelles.     Zoologie  et  Paleontologie,  X.  1-XI,  4. 

Botanique.     X.  2-XI.  6-     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 
Archives  de  Zoologie,  experimentale  et  generale.     1880,  No.  4-1881,  2. 
,  I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Ecole  polytechnique.     Journal,  T.  29me.     The  Director. 
Journal  de  Conchyliologie,  XX.  4-XXI.  2.     The  Editor. 
Journal  de  Micrographie,  5me  Annee.     Nos^  1-5.     The  Editor. 

35 


528  ADDITIONS   TO   LIBRARY. 

Museum  d'Historie  Naturelle.     Nouvelles  Archives,  2meSer.  III.  1  and  2. 

Rapports,  1880.     The  Directors. 
Revue   Internationale  des  Sciences.      3e  Ann6e  ll-4e  Ann^e   10.      The 

Editor.  , 

Revue  Scientifique  de  la  France  et  de  I'Etranger.     lOme,  An.  21-T.  28, 

No.  20.  .  The  Editor. 
Soci6t6  d'Acclimatation.     Bulletin,  Sept.  1880-Aout.  1881.     The   Society. 
Soci^te  Botanique   de  France.     Bulletin,   T.  27.     Comptes  Rendus,  4-6, 
Ses.  Ext.  a  Aurillac,  eta  Bayonne.     Rev.  Bibl.,  A-E.    Index  etc.  T.  28. 
Comptes  Rendus,  1-3.     The  Society. 
Soci6t6  Entomologique  de  France.     Annales,  X.  1-4.     The  Society. 
Soci6t6  Geologique  de  France.     Bulletin,  VIII.   Feuille,  18-IX.   5.     The 

Society. 
Soci^t(3  Mineralogique  de  France.     Bulletin,  I, -IV.  5.     The  Society. 
Soci^tg  Nationale  d' Agriculture  de  France.     Bulletin,  1880,  No.  7-1881, 

No.  7.     The  Society. 
Soci^t6  Zoologique.     Bulletin,  1880,  1-1881,  2.     The  Society. 
Penzance.     Royal  Geological  Society  of  Cornwall.     Transactions,  IX  ;   Index, 

X,  1,  2  and  3.     The  Society. 
Philadelphia.     The  American,  I,  18;  III,  66-68.     The  Editor. 

Am.  Entomological  Society.     Transactions,  VIII,  3-IX,  1.     Proceedings, 

Jan.,  1881.     Entomological  Section  of  the  Academy. 
Am.  Journal  of  Medical  Science,  Jan.-Oct.,  1881.     The  Editor. 
Am.  Journal  of  Pharmacy,  Dec,  1880-Nov.,  1881.     The  Editor. 
Am.  Naturalist,  Jan. -Nov  ,  1881.     The  Editor. 
Am.  Pharmaceutical   Association.      Proceedings,   28th  annual  meeting. 

The  Society. 
Am.  Philosophical  Society.    Proceedings,  Nos,  107  and  108.    Transactions, 

XV,  3.     The  Society. 
The  Dental  Cosmos,  Dec,  1880-Nov.,  1881.     The  Editor. 
Franklin  Institute.     Journal,  Dec,  1880-Nov.,  1881.     The  Society, 
Gardener's  Monthly,  Dec,  1880-Nov.,  1881.     The  Editor. 
Historical  Society  of  Pennsylvania.     Pennsylvania  Magazine,  IV,  4-V,  3. 

The  Society. 
Medical  News  and  Abstract,  Nos.  4-57-467.     The  Editor. 
Naturalists'  Leisure  Hour,  Dec,  1880-Sept.,  1881.     The  Editor. 
Stoddart's  Review,  Nos.  20-30.     The  Editor. 
Zoological  Society.     Annual  report,  9th.     The  Society, 
Pisa.     Nuovo  Giornale  Botanico  Italiano,  XII,  4-XIII,  1. 
Societa  Malacologia  Italiano.     BuUetino,  IV,  21-VI,  18. 
Societa  Toscana  di  Scienze  Naturali.     Adunanza,  14  Nov.,  1880-8  May, 
1881.     Memorie,  IV,  2.     The  Society. 
Portland.      Society  of  Natural  History.      Proceedings,   13th   meeting.      The 

Society. 
Poughkeepsie.     Society  of  Natural  Sciences.     Proceedings,  Oct.  1,  1879-July 

1,  1880.     The  Society, 
Prag.     K.  B.  Gesellschaft  der  Wissenschaften,  Sitzungsberichte,  1879,  1880. 

Jahresbericht,  1879,  1880.     Abhandlungen,  lOer  Bd.     The  Society. 
Princeton.     E.  M.  Museum  of  Geology  and  Archaeology  of  the  College  of  New 

Jersey.     Contributions,  I,  1.     The  Director. 
Quebec.     Literary  and  Historical  Society.     Sessions  of  1880-81.     The  Society. 
Regensburg.    K.  B.  Botanische  Gesellschaft.    Flora,  38er  Jahrg.    The  Society. 
Zoologisch-mineralogische  Verein,    Correspondenz-Blatt,  34er  Jahrg.    The 
Society. 
Rochester,     Academy  of  Sciences,    Catalogue  of  exhibits,  June  20,  1881.    The 
Society. 
Ward's  Natural  Science  Bulletin,  I,  1,     The  Editor, 
Rome.     R.  Accademia  dei  Lincei.     Atti,  V,  1-14.     The  Society. 


ADDITIONS   TO    LIBRARY.  529 

Rotterdam.     Soci6t^  Batave  de  Philosophie  exp(5rimentale.     Programme,  1880. 

The  Society. 
St.  Gallen.     Naturwissenschaftliche  Gesellschaft.     Bericht,  1878,  1879.     The 

Society. 
St.  Louis.     The  Valley  Naturalist,  II,  1-4.     The  Editor. 

St.  Petersburg.     K.  Akademie  der  Wissenschaften.     Repertorium  fiir  M<;teor- 
ologie,  Bd.  VII,  1,   and   supplement.     Band  II,  with  folio  atlas.     M^m- 
oires,    XXVII,    5-XXVIII,    2.      Bulletin,   XXVI,   2-XXVII,  2.      The 
Society. 
Hortus  Petropolitanus.     Acta  VII,  1.     The  Society. 
Physikalische  Observatorium.     Annalen,  1879,  1  and  2.     The  Director. 
Salem.     Essex  Institute.     Bulletin,  XII,  7-XIII,  9.     The  Society. 

Peabody  Academy  of  Sciences^     Memoirs,  I,  5  and  6.     The  Society. 
San  Francisco.     California  Academy  of  Sciences.     Proceedings,  Dec.  6,  1880 

and  June  6,  1881.     Memoirs,  I,  2.     The  Society. 
Santiago  de  Chile.     Universidad  de  Chile.     Anales,  le  Sec.  Julio,  1879-Junio, 

1880;  2e  Sec.  Feb.,  1879-Junio,  1880.     The  University. 
Staunton.     The  Virginias,  I,  11-11,  10.     The  Editor. 
Stettin.     Entomologische  Verein.     Zeitung,  Jahrg  ,  41.     The  Society. 
Stockholm.     Entomologisk  Tidskrift,  I,  8  and  4.     The  Editor. 
Stuttgart.     Kosmos,  V,  1-7.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 

Neues  Jahrbuch  fiir  Mineralogie,  Geologie  und  Palaeontologie,  1880,  II, 

2-1881,11,2.     The  Editor. 
Verein   fiir  vaterlandische   Naturkunde  in  WUrttemberg.      Jahreshefte, 
37er  Jahrg.     The  Society. 
Sydney.     Linnean  Society  of  New  South  Wales.     Proceedings,  V,  VI,  1  and  2. 
The  Society. 
Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales.     Journal  and  Proceedings,  Vol.  XIII. 
The  Society. 
Topeka.     Kansas  Academy  of  Sciences.     Transactions,  VII.     The  Society. 
Turin.     Accademia  Reale  delle  Scienze,     Atti  XIII,  1-8 ;  XIV,  1-7  ;  XV,  1-8 ; 
XVI,  1-4.     Memoria,  Ser.  2a,  T.  29-33.     The  Society. 
Regio  Osservatorio  della  Regia  Universita.     Bulletino,  Anni  12-14.     The 
Director. 
Toronto.     Entomological  Society.     Annual  report,  1880.     The  Society. 
Toulouse.     Acad^mie  des  Sciences,  etc.     Memoires,  II,  2^     The  Society. 
Trieste.      Societa  Adriatica  di  Scienze   Naturali.      Bollettina,   VI,   1.      The 

Society. 
Tromso.     Museum.     Aarshefter  III.     The  Director. 
Throndhjem.       K.   N.    Videnskabers   Selskab.       Skrifter   1S78,    1879,      The 

Society. 
Utrecht.     K.  Nederlandsch  Meteorologisch  Instituut.     Jaarboek,   1880.     The 

Director. 
Venice.     R.  Instituto  Veneto  di  Scienze.  Lettere  ed  Arti.     Atti,  III,  8;  IV ;  V, 

1,  2,  4-10  ;  VI,  1-9.     The  Society. 
Vienna.      Anthropologische    Gesellschaft.       Mittheilungen,   X,    8-12.       The 
Society. 
K.  Akademie  der  Wissenschaften.      Sitzungsberichte,   Mathem.-naturw. 
Classe.    Bd.  79,  I,  1-Bd.  88,  III,  2.    Register,  1876-80.    Denkschriften, 
Bd.  31,  40  and  42.     The  Society. 
K.  K.  Geologische  Reichsanstalt.     Jahrbuch,  1880,  4-1881,  1.     Verhand- 

lungen,  1880,  12-1881,  7.     The  Director. 
K.  K.  Zoologisch-botanische  Gesellschaft.     Verhandlungen,  XXX.     The 

Society. 
Osterreichische  Gesellschaft  fiir  Meteorologie.     Zeitschrift,  XV.     Dr.  F. 

V.  Hayden. 
Verein   zur   Verbreitung   naturw.    Kenntnisse.       Schriften,   XXI.      The 

Society. 
Wiener  lUustrirte  Garten-Zeitung,  1880,  No.  8-1881,  No.  9.     The  Editor. 
Zoologische  Institut.     Arbeiten,  III,  2,  3.     I.  V.  Williamson  Fund. 


530  ADDITIONS   TO    LIBRARY. 

Washington.     Anthropological  Society.      Abstract  of  Transactions,  1st  year. 

The  Society. 
Philosophical  Society.     Bulletin,  I-TII.     The  Society. 
United  States  National  Museum.     Proceedings,  1881,  pp.  1-208.     Depart- 
ment of  the  Interior. 
Wellington,     New  Zealand  Institute.     Transactions,  XIII.     The  Society. 
Wiesbaden,      Nassauische  Verein  fiir  Naturkunde.      .Jahrbucher  XXXI   and 

XXXII.     The  Society. 
Worcester.     American  Antiquarian   Society.     Proceedings,  n.  s.  I,   1  and  2. 

The  Society. 
Wiirzburg.      Physikalisch-medicinische  Qesellschaft.      Verhandlungen,    n.    f. 

XV,  1-4.     The  Society. 
Yokohoma.     Asiatic  Society  of  Japan.     Transactions,  VI,  3;    VII,  '2,  3;    30th 

Oct.,  187.--9th  Oct.,  1873.     The  Society. 
Seismological  Society  of  .Japan.     I.     Rev.  Dr.  Syle. 
Zurich.    Naturforschende  Gesellschaft.    Vierteljahrsschrift  XXIV,  XXV.    The 

Society. 


INDEX    TO   GENERA. 


531 


INDEX  TO   GENERA. 

1881. 


Abacocrinus 307 

Abracrinus 397 

Acanthocrinus 397 

Acniffia 87 

Acrosoma 431 

Actinometra 198 

Actinocrinus  179,188, 199, 201, 312, 879 

Adelocri,nus 231 

Agaricocrinus  190,  193,   201,  283,  402 

Albulii 114 

AUageci-inus 177 

Allopagus 424 

Alloprosallocrinus 193,287,  402 

Alnus 455 

Amblacrinus 402 

Ammophila 454 

Ampelopsis 442 

Amphoracrinus  187,  190,  198,  325,  402 

Antedon 212 

Antennarius 113,   116 

Anthemocrinus 382 

Apbyllon 161 

Apodicbtbys 114,  119 

Area 448 

Arcella 9,     10 

Arceutbobium 439 

Arcbaeocrinus 187,  363 

Argyreiosus 114 

Asparagus 112 

Aspidocrinus 402 

Aster 454 

Asterocrinus  402 

Astrocrinites —  402 

Astropodia 403 

Atberinopsis 114 

Atocrinus  231 

Atriplex 454 

Atta 67 

Balanocrinus 403 

Batocrinus  185,190,192,  201,  336,  403 


Belemnocrinus 178 

Betula 455 

Bigtionia 442 

Bracbiocrinus 403 

Branchiostoma 114 

Briarocrinus 270 

Bucardia _ 426 

Bulla 208 

Cacabocrinus 403 

Caelocrinus 403 

Calatbocri nus 403 

Campodea 82,     85 

Camponotus 60 

Carinifex 108 

Carpocrinus 279 

Carterella 150,   176,  460,  463 

Castanea 455 

Castanocrinus 403 

Centrocrinus 278  408 

Centropomas 114 

Cestracion 114 

Cbama 427 

Choanopoma 15 

Cboeropsis 128 

Clinus 114 

Clonocrinus 408 

Coccocrinus 191,  204,  232 

Codonites.  192 

Coeliocrinus 197 

CoUembola 83' 

Comatula 191 

Condylocrinus 394,  403 

Conocrinites 403 

Copbinus 403 

Cordylocrinus 234 

Cornus 459 

Coron ocrinus 403 

Cotinus 125 

Cotyledonocrinus 251 

Crassatella 445 


532 


INDEX    TO   GENERA. 


Cratajgus 455,  466 

Cremnobates 113,  116 

Cristatella 461 

Crotalocrinus 231 

CrumeojEcrinites 404 

Cryptodon 423 

Ctenocrinus 404 

Ctenopoma 16 

CucuUtea 445,  448 

Culicocrinus 190,  235 

Cupellnecrinus  404 

Cupulorcrinus    395 

Cyathocriaus 191,  203,  404 

Cylindrella 15 

Cynips 28 

Cynoscion 114 

Cystocrinus 404 

Oytocrinus 404 

Dffimonocrinites 404 

Decadactylocrinites 404 

Delphinus 137 

Desmidoerinus 282 

Dichocrinus 182,  187,  255,  404 

Diceras 425 

Difflugia 9,     10 

Dimerocrinus 371,  405 

Dimorphocrinus 240,  405 

Diodon 113 

Dolatocrinus  298 

Doliolocrinus 405 

Donacicrinites 405 

Dorycrinus 187,  190,  201,  350 

Draba 89,   161 

Echinus 405 

Edwardsocrinus 199,  405 

Epeira 163,  432 

Epiphegus 161 

Eretmocrinus 185,  201,  344 

Erisocrinus 196  197 

Eucladocrinus 194,  250 

Eucalyptocrinus 405 

Eucrinus 187,  370,  405 

Eugeniacrinites 405 

Eumetopias 113 

Eupachycrinus 196,  197 

Felsinotherium 147 

Forbesiocrinus 179,  405 

Formica 50,  67 

Fraxinus 455 

Freia 443 

Fritillaria Ill 

Gennfeocrinus 334 


Geocrinus 405 

Geophilus 82,  84 

Gil bertsocrinus 406 

Gillichthys 114 

Girella 114 

Gissocrinus 178 

Glosterocrinus 405 

Glyptaster 187,  367 

G!yptocrinus....l81,  187,  198,  359,  405 

Gobiesox 114 

Goniasteroidocrinus 406 

Granafocrinus 203 

Graphiocrinus 179 

Habrocrinus 406 

Hadrocrinus 396 

Halesia 459 

Halitherium 147 

Haplocrinus 231 

Harmocrinus 406 

Helix 95 

Hemiramphus 120 

Heterodontus 114 

Heteromeyenia 150,  461,  463 

Hexacrinus 182,  187,  252,  406 

Hieracium 429 

Hippagus 428 

Hippopotamus 126,  128 

Hydreionoorinus 196,  197 

Hyocrinus 191,  205 

Hypentelium 9 

Hypleurochilus 113 

Hyptiotes 168 

Ichthyocrinus 179 

Ichtodes 175 

IcosidactylocriHites 406 

Iphigenia 425 

laidora 98 

Isocardia 423 

Japyx 85 

Juniperus 440 

Lamium 90 

Lampterocrinus 373 

Latiarca 445 

Lecanocrinus 179 

Lecythocrinus 178 

Lepisma 82 

Lepismina 85 

Libocedrus 440 

Licnophora 448 

Limnsea 93 

Lithobius 82,  84 


INDEX   TO   GEXERA. 


533 


Lophiodon 148 

Lyniphia 175 

Lyonsiella 427 

Lyriocrinus 377,  406 

MachUis 81 

Macropus 468 

Macrostylocrinus 276,  407 

Magnolia 4-59 

Margaritophora 116 

Mariacrinus 181,  288,  407 

Marisa 1 93 

Marsupiocrinus 231,  236,  407 

Medusacrinus 407 

Megistocrma3..190,  198,  210,  309,  407 

Melocrinus 182,  292,  407 

Menticirrus 114 

Mespilocrinus 179 

Meyenia 149,  462,  463 

Micrococcus 438 

Microdesmus 114,  120 

Morunga 113 

Mustelus 114 

Myrmecocystus 17,  64,  69 

Myrmica 62 

Mytilus 88 

Mvxostoma 9 

Myxus 114 

Nacella 88 

Kicoletia 85 

Ollacrinus 210,  387 

Ophiocrinus 407 

Orca 113 

Ornithorynchus 471 

Ostrea 155,  158,  445 

Paludina 95 

Panopea 445 

Paralabrax 114 

Patelliocrinus 274 

Pecchiolia 424 

Pecten 158,  416 

Pectinat ella 461 

Pentacrinus ..~ 204 

Pentagonites 407 

Pentremiies 240 

Periechocrinus 182,  198,  301,  407 

Phillipsocrinus 407 

Phillyra 175 

Phcenicocrinus 408 

Pholadomva 445 

Pholas  ....' 445 

PhoUdichthys 113,  118 


Phoradendron 439 

Phyllospora 88 

Physa 93 

Phvsella 95 

Phypetocrinus 187,  193,  201,  829 

Pilobolus 464 

Pimelometopon 114 

Pinus 440 

Pionocrinus 408 

Planorbis  92 

Plantago _...  424 

Platycrinus...- 182,  188,  239,  408 

Pleurocrinus 409 

Pogonomyrmex 20 

Polydesmus 86 

Palyergus 67 

Polygonum 4-54 

Pomatocrinus 409 

Pompholyx 92 

Poteriocrinus 197 

Pradocrinus 409 

Pristipoma 114 

Prorastomus 148 

Pterotocrinus 229,  261,  409 

Pyxidocrinus 188,  409 

Qyiercus 20,  24,  121,  123,  455 

Reteocrinus „ 187,  210,  365 

Rhipiododendron 443 

Rhodocrinus 179,  188,   383,  410 

Rhus 125 

Ripidocrinus 379 

Robinia 456 

Saccocrinu3 410 

Sagenocrinu3 375,  410 

Salicornia 454 

SaUx 90,  442 

Salsola 454 

Sarcodes 161 

Schizocrinus 394,  410 

Scolopendrella 79,  84 

Scutella 158 

Scyphocrinus 297,  410 

Stereocrinus 300 

Selene 114 

Semicossyphus 114 

Serranus 114 

Spams 114 

Spartina 454 

Sphserocrinms 410 

Sphyrjena 114 

Sphyrna 114 

Spondylu3 155,  158 

Spongiophaga 460 


534 


INDEX  TO  GENERA. 


Spongilla 149,  461,  463 

Statice 4o4 

Steganoci'inus 187-323 

Stelidiocrinus 272 

Strix 433 

Strotocrinus 187-332 

Suaeda 4')4 

Symbathocrinus 191,  2U 

Syniplocarpus 175 

Syringocrinus  411 

Talarocrinus 259 

Talinum 161 

Taxocrinus  179.  411 

Tecliiidcrinus 290,  41 1 

T  egena  ri  a 175 

Teleiocrinus 201,  206,  320 

Tetrodon 113,  114 

Tetragnatha 175,  431 

Tetrainerocrinites 41 1 

Thylacocrinus  381 

Thys-anocriwus 411 

Tintinnus 443 


Trachurus 114 

Tracliyiiotus 114 

Trematocrinu? 41 1 

Triads 114 

Triacrinus 191 

Ti-igoiiia 425 

Triplaricrinites 41 1 

Trocb icrin i t es 411 

Try bliocri tins 411 

Turbinocrinus 411 

Ulmus 455 

Verticordia '. 423 

Viscum 440 

Vorticifex 109 

Zaiophus 137 

Zeuglodon 152 

Zonites 95 

Zoothamnia 443 


INDEX. 


535 


GENERAL  INDEX. 


Additions  to  Library,  511. 

Additions  to  Museum,  506 

Arango,  R.  Description  of  new  Spe- 
cies of  Terrestrial  MoUusca  of  Cuba, 
10,  15. 

Brock,  J.  P.  Announcement  of  death 
of.  162. 

Bryan,  Col.  T.  M.  Announcement  of 
death  of,  87 

Buckley,  S.  B.  Quercus  rubra  L.,  var. 
Texana,  111,  123;  Quercus  Durandii, 
111,  121  ;  Rhus  cotinoides.  111,  125. 

By-laws.  Amendment  to  Art.  3,  Chap. 
XV.,  443. 

Chapman,  Dr.  H  C.  Resignation  as 
member  of  Council,  91  ;  Observa- 
tions on  the  Hippotamus,  112,  126  ; 
On  a  foetal  Kangaroo  and  its  Mem- 
branes, 459,  468. 

Chaudoir,  M.  de.  Announcement  of 
death  of,   145. 

Clay,  Jos.  A.  Announcement  of  death 
of,  87. 

Coates,  B.  H.  Announcement  of  death 
of,  439. 

Elections  during  1881,  505. 

Gould,  .John.  Announcement  of  death 
of,  87. 

Hart,  Dr.  H.  C.  Announcement  of 
death  of,  14. 

Heilprin,  Angelo.  Delivery  of  introduc- 
tory lecture,  78;  Notes  on  the  Ter- 
tiary Geology  of  the  Southern  United 
States,  149,  151  ;  Revision  of  the 
Cis-Mississippi  tertiary  Pectens  of 
the  United  States,  176,  416 ;  Remarks 
on  the  MoUuscan  genera,  Hippagus, 
Verticordiaand  Pecchiola,  415.  428  ; 
Note  on  the  approximate  Position 
of  the  Eocene  Deposits  of  Maryland, 
429,  444 ;  Revision  of  the  Tertiary 
Species  of  Area  of  the  Eastern  and 
Southern  United  States,  439,  448. 
Report  of  Professor  of  Invertebrate 
Palaeontology,  498. 


Hemphill,  H.  On  the  variations  of 
AcmfBa  pelta  E'^ch,  87. 

Henszey,  W.  C.  Report  of  Treasurer, 
502. 

He^-s,  R.  J.  Report  of  Biological  and 
Microscopical  Section,  490. 

Horn,  Geo.  H.  Report  of  Correspond- 
ing Secretary,  486.. 

Humphrey,  Rev.  Z.  M.  Announce- 
ment of  death  of,  459. 

Index  to  Genera,  535. 

Jessup,  A.  E.  Announcement  of  death 
of.  162. 

Kilvington,  R.  Announcement  of 
death  of,  415. 

Koenig,  G.  A.  Election  as  Member  of 
Council,  111. 

Leidy,  Jos.  Rhizopods  as  food  for 
young  fishes,  9  ;  Report  of  Curators, 
489. 

Lewis,  H.  C.  Delivery  of  introductory 
lecture,  78;  Report  of  Professor  of 
Mineralogy,  499. 

Lewis,  Dr.  .Jas.  Announcement  of 
death  of.  111. 

Library,  additions  to,  511. 

Lockington,  W.  N.  List  of  fishes  col- 
lected by  Mr.  W.  J.  Fisher,  upon  the 
Coast  of  Lower  California,  1876-77, 
with  descriptions  of  new  Species,  89; 
113 

Lovering,  Jos.  S.  Announcement  of 
death  of.  111. 

McCook,  Rev.  H.  C.  The  Honey-Ants 
of  the  Garden  of  the  Gods,  14,  17  ; 
The  Snare  of  the  Ray  Spider,  Epeira 
Radiosa,  anew  form  of  Orb-web,  163; 
How  orb-weaving  spiders  make  the 
frame-work  or  foundations  of  webs, 
430. 

Martindale,  Isaac  C.  Election  as 
member  of  Finance  Committee,  14. 

Meehan,  Thos.  Note  on  treeless 
praries,  11 ;  Motility  in  plants,  89; 
Sexual     characters     in     Fritillaria 


536 


INDEX. 


atropurpurea,  111  ;  Sarcodes  san- 
guinea,  160;  Talinum  teretifolium, 
161;  Notes  on  Misletoes,  430; 
Dimorphism  in  the  Willow  442, 
Color  in  Autumn  Leaves,  454;  On 
Movements  and  Paralysis  in  the 
Leaves  of  Robinia,  456  ;  Pilobolus 
crystallinus,  463  ;  Varying  influ- 
ence of  heat  on  flower -buds  and 
leaf-buds,  466  :  Report  of  Botanical 
Section,  494. 

Morris,  Henry.  Announcement  of 
death  of,  467. 

Museum,  additions  to,  506. 

Nolan,  Edw.  J.  Report  of  Recording 
Secretary,  485;  Report  of  Librarian, 
487. 

Officers  for  1882,  505. 

Parker,  Chas.  F.  Report  of  Curator 
in  Charge,  489. 

Perot,  Chas.  P.  Election  as  Member 
of  Council,  14. 

Potts,  E.  Some  new  genera  of  fresh 
water  sponges,  149;  A  new  form  of 
fresh-water  sponge,  176  ;  The  genus 
Carterella  vs.  Spongiophaga  Potts, 
460. 

Rand,  Theo.  D.  Report  of  Mineralog- 
ical  Section,  497. 

Redfield,  J.  H.  On  Hieracium  auran- 
tiacum,  429;  Note  upon  Plantago 
elongata,  429;  Report  of  Conserva- 
tor of  Botanical  Section,  494. 

Report  of  the  President,  472. 

Report  of  the  Recording  Secretary, 
485. 

Report  of  the  Corresponding  Secre- 
tary, 486. 

Report  of  the  Librarian,  487. 

Report  of  the  Curators,  489. 

Report  of  the  Biological  and  Micro- 
scopical Section,  490. 

Report  of  the  Botanical  Section,  494. 


Report  of  the  Conchological  Section, 
491. 

Report  of  the  Entomological  Section, 
496. 

Report  of  the  Mineralogical  Section, 
497. 

Report  of  the  Professor  of  Invertebrate 
Palaeontology,  498. 

Report  of  the  Professor  of  Mineralogy, 
499. 

Report  of  the  Treasurer,  502. 

Ridings,  J.  H.  Report  of  Entomologi- 
cal Section,  496. 

Roberts,  S.  R.  Report  of  Conchologi- 
cal Section,  491. 

Rupchenberger,  W.  S.  W.  Report  of 
Committee  on  Resignation  of,  465 ; 
Report  of  President,  472. 

Ryder,  J.  A.  On  the  structure,  affin- 
ities and  species  of  Scolopendrella, 
78,  79. 

Scott,  Thos.  A.  Announcement  of 
death  of.  111. 

Starr,  Thos.  W.  Announcement  of 
death  of,  87. 

Stearns,  R.  E.  C.  Observations  on 
Planorbis,  87,  92. 

Tryon,  Geo.  W,  Jr.  Report  of  Con- 
servator of  Conchological  Section, 
491. 

Wachsmuth,  Chas.  and  F.  Springer. 
Revision  of  the  Palfeocrinoidea, 
Fart  II,  Family  Sphseroidocrinidae, 
including  the  subfamilies  Platycrin- 
idoe,  RhodocrinidcE  and  Actinocrini- 
d£e.  111,  177. 

Welsh,  John,  Jr.  Announcement  of 
death  of,  415. 

Whelen,  Edw.  S.  Resignation  of,  as 
Member  of  Council  and  Finance 
Committee,  14. 

Wood,  Dr.  H.  C.  On  the  nature  of  the 
diphtheritic  contagium,  435. 


PROC.  A.  N,  S,  PHILA,,  1881 


PLXVII, 


PROG.  A.  N.  S.  PHILA.,  1881. 


PL  XVIII 


PROC. ACAD. NAT  SCI   PHILALA1881, 


PL.XX. 


f- 


1 


1L_USTRATED  BY  THE    ZOOLOGICAL    SOC  I  ETY,  PH  I  LAD  f 


CHAPMAN    ON   FOETAL   KANGAROO 


mr 


PROCEEDINGS 


.^tdtlemg  of  ^Htittctl  ^t\mt% 


i 


PHILADELPHIA. 


PART  1.—JANVABY—MAY,  1881. 


PUBLICATION  COMMITTEE. 

JosEPft  Leidy,  M.  D.,  Geo.  H.  Horn,  M.  D., 

Wm.  S.  Vaxjx,  Thomas  Meehan, 

J.  H.  Redfield. 

EDITOR:    Edward  J.  Xolan.  M.  D. 


PHILADELPHIA: 
ACADEMY    OF    NATURAL    SCIENCES, 

S.  W.  Cor.  of  19th  and  Race  Streets. 

1881. 


PUBLICATIONS  OF  THE 
ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES 

OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


Ei^ht  volumes  of  the  New  Series  of  the  Jouknal  (Quarto)  have  been  issued — 1847  to 
1881.  The  {)rice  per  volume  of  four  parts  is  $10,  or  $3  per  part,  to  subscribers;  and  to  others, 
$12.50  per  volume,  or  $-1.75  per  part.  Vol.  VII  contain.s  "The  Extinct  Mammalian  Fauna 
of  Dakota  and  Nebraska,  with  a  Synopsis  of  the  Mammalian  Remains  of  North  America." 
Illustrated  with  thirty  plates.     By  Joseph  Leidy,  M.D.,  LL.D. 

The  FiKST  Series  of  the  Journal,  1817  to  1842,  in  eight  volumes,  octavo,  may  be 
obtained  at  $40  to  members,  and  to  the  public,  $48. 

The  First  Series  of  the  Proceedings  of  the  Society,  published  in  octavo,  1841  to 
1856,  of  which  eight  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1856,  may  be  obtained  at  $24  to 
members ;  and  to  the  public,  $30. 

The  Second  Series  of  the  Proceedings,  commencing  January  1,  1857  (of  which 
fourteen  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1870),  may  be  obtained  at  $42  to  members,  or  $3 
per  volume  separately;  and  to  the  public,  $3.76  per  volume. 

The  Third  Series  op  the  Proceedings,  Illustrated,  commencing  January  1,  1871, 
(of  which  ten  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1880),  is  published  at  $5  per  annum,  payable 
in  advance,  to  subscribers;  single  volumes,  $6.25. 

American  Journal  op  Conchologv,  1865-71.  Seven  vols.,  8vo.  Containing  2500 
pages,  illiistrated  by  one  hundred  and  fifty  plates,  many  of  theiu  colored,  besides  about  a 
thousand  wood  engravings.  Published  at  $70.  Price  reduced  to  $42  for  the  set.  Separate 
volume?,  $10  each. 

3B003C.S    X^Olt.    S.A.XjSI. 

The  AcAPEMY  has  the  following  works  for  sale  at  the  prices  aflSxed  r 
Description  of  Shells  of  North  America,  with  68  colored  plates.      By  Thomas  Say. 

1830-34.     $10.60. 
Monograph  of  thk  Unionid.e  of  North  America.     By  T.  A.  Conrad.      60    uncolored 

].latcs,  octavo,  1840.     $8. 
Monograph  op  the  Terrestrial  Mollusca  op  the  United  States.     With  illustrations 

of  all  the  species.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Fine  edition,  plate  paper,  with  duplicate 

plates,  colored  and  tinted,  $20  ;    colored  edition,  $13.50  ;    plain  edition,  $8.50.      Only 

one  hundred  copies  printed,  which  have  been  mostly  sold. 

Monograph  of  the  Fresh  Water  TTnivalve  Mollusca  of  the  United  States.    By  S.  S. 

Haldeman,  1840-44.     With  Continuation  to  1871.     By  George  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     2 

vols.,  with  many  colored   plates.      Fine    edition,  duplicate  plates,  $40;    with  colored 

plates,  $25;  with  plain  plates,  $18. 

Either  the  original  work  or  the  continuation  furnished  separately,  if  desired. 
Synonymy  of  the  Species  op  Strepomatid^  (Melanians)  op  the  United  States.     By 

Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  $2  ;  paper,  $1.75. 
List  of  American  Writers  on  Recent  Conchology,  with  the  Titles  of  their  Memoirs 

and  Dates  of  Publication.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  $2  ;  paper,  $1.75. 
Monograph  of  the  Order  Pholadacea   and   other    Papers.      By  Geo.  AV.  Tryon,  Jr. 

Cloth,  $2;  paper,  $1.75. 
Complete  Writings  on  Recent  and  Fossil  C©nchology  of  C.  S.  Rafinesque.     Edited 

by  Wm.  G.  Binney  and  G.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     $2.50. 
Observations  on  the   Genus  Unio.     By  Isaac  Lea,  LL.  D.     4to,  Vols.  1  to  13.     With 

Index,  Nos.  1,  2  and  3,  complete.     Illustrated  with  several  hundred  fine  lithographic 

plates.     $60. 

Same,  Vols.  2  to  13  inclusive,  except  Vols.  4  and  12.     Each  volume  separately,  .$5. 
Synopsis  of  Gknus  Unio.     By  Isaac  Lea,  LL.  D.     Fourth  edition.     $3. 
Contributions  to  Geology.     By  Isaac  Lea.     $5. 
Fossil  Foot-Marks.     By  Isaac  Lea.     Large  folio,  text  and  plate.     $2. 

Same,  plate  alone.     50  cents. 

Notice  to  Booksellers. — All  the  publications  of  the  Society  will  be  sup- 
plied to  Booksellers  at  a  discount  of  20  per  cent  on  the  prices  charged  to  the  public. 

Application  to  be  made  to  Edwaud  J.  Nolan,  M.D.,  at  the  Hall  of  the 
Academy,  corner  of  Nineteenth  and  Race  Streets. 

London,  TRUBNER  &  CO., 

No.  57  and  59  Ludgate  Hill,  E.  C. 
May,  1881. 


coisrTE:NrTS. 


Leipy,  Jos.,  M.  D.     Rliizopods  as  Food  for  Young  Fishes.         9 

Meehan,  Thos.     Xote  on  Treeless  Prairies.  .         .         .11 

Arango,  Rafael.     Descriptions  of  new  species  of  Terres- 
trial Mollusca  of  Cuba.  .         .         .         .         .         .15 

McCooK,  Rev.  H.  C.     The  Honey  Ants  of  the  Garden  of 

the  Gods.     (Plates  I-X.) IT 

Ryder,  John  A.     The  Structure,  Affinities  and  Species  of 

Scolopendrella.        ,         ,         .         .         .         .         .         .TO 

Hemphill,  Henry.      On  the  Variations  of  AcniJBa  pelta, 

Esch 81 

Meehan,  Thos.     Motilit}'  in  Plants 89 

Stearns,  R.  E.  C.     Observations  on  Planorbis.    ...       92 

Meehan,  Thos.     Sexual  Characters  in  Fritellaria  atropur- 

purea,  Nutt .         .111 


;il.OAm't  ruiNTINO  HC  -SE    7S4  1  718  «»NSOM  »T.,  PHILACELPHL 


i 


m 


-m 


PROCEEDTNGS 


^^cariemg  of  5i«itttal  $riettt^$ 


PHTLADKT.PHIA. 


PART  I L— JUNE  AXD  JULY,   1HHU 


PUBLICATION  COMMITTEE. 

Joseph  Leidy,  M.  D.,  Geo.  H.  Horn,  M,  D., 

Wm.  S.  Vaux,  Thomas  Meehan, 

J.  II.  Redpibld. 

EDITOR:    Edward  J.  Nolan.  M.  I). 


m 


PHILADELPHIA: 
ACADEMY    OF    NATURAL    SCIENCES, 

S.  W.  Oor.  of  19th  ami  Race  Streets. 
1881. 


PUBLICATIONS  OF  THE 
ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES 

OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


Eio^ht  voluiufs  of  the  New  Series  of  the  Joubnal  (Quarto)  have  been  issued — 1847  to 
1881.  The  price  per  vohime  of  four  parts  is  $10,  or  $3  per  part,  to  subscribers;  and  to  others, 
$12.50  per  volume,  or  $5.75  per  part.  Vol.  VII  contains  "The  Extinct  Mammalian  Fauna 
of  Dakota  and  Nebraska,  with  a  Synopsis  of  the  Mammalian  Remains  of  North  America." 
Illustrated  with  thirty  plates.     By  Josei'h  Leidv,  M.D.,  LL.D. 

The  First  Seriks  op  the  Journal,  1817  to  1842,  in  eight  volumes,  octavo,  may  be 
obtained  at  $40  to  members,  and  to  the  jjublic,  $48. 

The  First  Series  op  the  Proceedings  of  the  Society,  published  in  octavo,  1841  to 
1866,  of  which  eight  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1856,  may  be  obtained  at  $24  to 
members;  and  to  the  public,  $30. 

The  Second  Series  op  the  Proceedings,  commencing  January  1,  1857  (of  which 
fourteen  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1870),  ma.V  be  obtained  at  $42  to  members,  or  $3 
per  volume  separately;  and  to  the  public,  $3.75  per  volume. 

The  Third  Series  of  the  Proceedings,  Illustrated,  commencing  January  1,  1871, 
(of  which  ten  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1880),  is  published  at  $5  per  annum,  payable 
in  advance,  to  subscribers ;  single  volumes,  $6.25. 

American  Journal  of  Conchology,  18(55-71.  Seven  vols.,  8vo.  Containing  2500 
pages,  illustrated  by  one  hundred  and  fifty  plates,  many  of  them  colored,  besides  about  a 
thousand  wood  engravings.  Published  at  $70.  Price  reduced  to  $42  for  the  set.  Separate 
volumes,  $10  each. 

The  Academy  has  the  following  works  for  sale  at  the  prices  afEx-edr 
Description  of  Shells  of  North  America,  with  t)8  colored  plates.      By  Thomas  Say. 

1830-3.4.     $10.50. 
Monograph  op  the.Unionid^  op  North  America.      By  T.  A.  Conrad.      60    uneolored 

])lates,  octavo,  1840.     $8. 
Monograph  of  the  Terrestrial  Mollusca  of  the  United  States.     With  illustrations 

of  all  the  species.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.   ■  Fine  edition,  plate  paper,  with  duplicate 

plates,  colored  and  tinted,  $20  ;    colored  edition,  .$13.50  ;    plain  edition,  $8.50.      Only 

one  hundred  copies  printed,  which  have  been  mostly  sold. 

Monograph  op  the  Fresh  Water  T^nivalve  Mollusca  of  the  United  States.    By  S.  S. 

Haldeman,  .1840-44.     With  Continuatfon  to  1871.     By  George  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     2 

vols.,  with  many  colored   plates.       Fine    edition,  duplicate  plates,  $40 ;    with  colored 

plates,  $25;  with  plain  plates,  $18. 

Either  the  original  work  or  the  continuation  furnished  separately,  if  desired. 
Synonymy  of  the  Species  of  Strepomatid.e  (Melanians)  of  the   United  States.     By 

Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  $2  ;  paper,  $1.75. 
List  of  American  Writers  on  Recent  Conchology,  with  the  Titles  of  their  Memoirs 

and  Dates  of  Publication.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  $2;  paper,  $1.75. 
Monograph  of  the  Order  Pholadacea   and    other    Papers.      By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr. 

Cloth,  $2;  paper,  $1.75. 
Complete  Writings  on  Recent  and  Fossil  CeNCHOLOGY  op  C.  S.  Rafinesque.     Edited 

by  Wm.  G.  Binney  and  G.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     $2,50. 
Observations  on  the   Genus  Unio.     By  Isaac   Lea,  LL.  D.     4to,  Vols.  1  to  13.     With 

Index,  Nos.  1,  2  and  3,  complete.     Illustrated  with  several  hundred  fine  lithographic 

plates.     $60. 

Same,  Vols.  2  to  13  inclusive,  except  Vols.  4  and  12.     Each  volume  separately,  $6. 
Synopsis  op  Genus   Unio.     By  Isaac  Lea,  LL.  D.     Fourth  edition.     $3. 
Contributions  to  Geology.     By  Isaac  Lea.     $5. 
Fossil  Foot-Marks.     By  Isaac  Lea.     Large  folio,  text  and  plate.     $2. 

Same,  plate  alone.     50  cents. 

Notice  to  Booksellers. — All  the  publications  of  the  Society  will  be  sup- 
plied to  Booksellers  at  a  discount  of  30  per  cent,  on  the  prices  charged  to  the  public. 

Application  to  be  made  to  Edward  . I.  Nolan,  M.D.,  at  the  Hall  of  the 
Academy,  corner  of  Nineteenth  and  Race  Streets. 

London,  TRUBNER  &  CO., 

No.  57  and  59  Ludgate  Hill,  E.  C. 

Nov.,  1881. 


CONTE^NTTS. 


LociviNGTON,  W.  N.  List  of  the  Fishes  collected  b}'  Mr."\\ 
J.  Fisher,  upon  the  coasts  of  Lower  California,  1876-71 
with  descriptions  of  New  Species,  ... 

Buckley,  S.  T>.     Quercus  Durandii.       .         ,         .         . 

Buckley,  S.  B.     Quercus  rul)ra  L.,  var  Texana. 

Buckley,  S.  B.     Rhus  cotinoides  Nutt. 

Chapman,  Henry  C,  M.  I).  Observations  upon  the  Hippo 
potamus.     (Plates  XI-XVL)  .... 


Potts,  E.     Some  new  Genera  of  Fresh-Water  Sponges. 

Heilprin,  Angelo.     Notes  on  the  Tertiary  Geology  of  the 
Southern  United  States.  ..... 

Meehan,  Thomas.     Sarcodes  sanguinea. 

Meeman,  Thomas.     Talinum  teretifoliuin.     . 

McCoOK,  Rev.  Henry  C.     The  Snare  of  the  Ray  Spider 
(Epeira  radiosa),  a  new  form  of  Orb-web. 

Potts,  Edw.     A  new  form  of  Fresh-water  Sponge. 

Wachsmuth,  Chas.,  and  Frank  Springer.     Revision  of  the 
Palseocrinoidea.     Part  IL       . 


113 
121 
123 
123 


12r, 

14:9 

151 
KiO 
IBl 

1(53 
17G 

1(7 


724  U  781  SANSOM  ST.,  I 


PROCEEDINGS 


^^tadmg  0f  ^attttal  ^timm 


PHILADELPHIA. 


PABT  III.— AUGUST  to  DECE^IBEJR,  1881. 


PUBLICATION  COMMITTEE. 

Joseph  Leidy,  M.  D.,  Geo,  H.  Horn,  M.  D., 

Wm.  S.  Vatjx,  Thomas  Meehan, 

J.  H.  Redfield. 

EDITOR:    Edward  J.  Xolan.  M.  D. 


PHILADELPHIA: 
ACADEMY    OF    NATURAL    SCIENCES, 

S.  W.  Cor.  of  19th  and  Race  Streets. 
1882. 


PUBLICATIONS  OF  THE 
ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES 

OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


Eight  volumes  of  the  New  Series  of  the  Jocrnal  (Quarto)  have  been  issued — 1847  to 
1881.  The  price  per  volume  of  four  parts  is  $10,  or  $3  per  part,  to  subscribers;  and  toothers, 
$12.50  per  volume,  or  $3.75  per  part.  Vol.  VII  contains  "The  Extinct  Mammalian  Fauna 
of  Dakota  and  Nebraska,  with  a  Synopsis  of  the  Mammalian  Remains  of  North  America." 
Illustrated  with  thirty  plates.     By  Joseph  Leidy,  M.D.,  LL.D. 

The  First  Series  of  ihe  Journal,  1817  to  1842,  in  eight  volumes,  octavo,  may  be 
obtained  at  $40  to  members,  and  to  the  public,  $48. 

The  First  Series  of  the  Proceedings  of  the  Society,  published  in  octavo,  1841  to 
1866,  of  which  eight  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1856,  may  be  obtained  at  $24  to 
members;  and  to  the  public,  $30. 

The  Second  Series  of  the  Proceedings,  commencing  January  1,  1857  (of  which 
fourteen  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1870),  may  be  obtained  at  $42  to  members,  or  $3 
per  volume  separately ;  and  to  the  public,  $3.75  per  volume. 

The  Third  Series  of  the  Proceedings,  Illustrated,  commencing  January  1,  1871, 
(of  which  eleven  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31, 1881),  is  published  at  $5  per  annum,  payable 
in  advance,  to  subscribers ;  single  volumes,  $6.25. 

American  Journal  of  Conchology,  1865-71.  Seven  vols.,  8vo.  Containing  2500 
pages,  illustrated  by  one  hundred  and  fifty  plates,  many  of  them  colored,  besides  about  a 
thousand  wood  engravings.  Published  at  $70.  Price  reduced  to  $42  for  the  set.  Separate 
volumes,  $10  each. 

The  Academy  has  the  following  works  for  sale  at  the  prices  aflBxed: 

Description  op  Shells  op  North  America,  with  68  colored  plates.     By  Thomas  Say. 

1830-34.     $10.50. 
Monograph  of  the  Terrestrial  Mollusca  of  the  United  States.     With  illustrations 

of  all  the  species.     By  GrEO.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Fine  edition,  plate  paper,  with  duplicate 

plates,  colored  and  tinted,  $20  ;    colored  edition,  $13.50  ;    plain  edition,  $8.50.      Only 

one  hundred  copies  printed,  which  have  been  mostly  sold. 
Monograph  of  the  Fresh  Water  TTnivalve  Mollusca  of  the  United  States.    By  S.  S. 

Haldeman,  1840-44.     With  Continuation  to  1871.     By  George  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     2 

vols.,  with  many  colored   plates.      Fine   edition,  duplicate  plates,  $40 ;    with  colored 

plates,  $25;  with  plain  plates,  $18. 

Either  the  original  work  or  the  continuation  furnished  separately,  if  desired. 
Synonymy  of  the  Species  of  Strepomatid^  (Melanians)  op  the  United  States.     By 

Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  $2  ;  paper,  $1.75. 
List  of  American  Writers  on  Recent  Conchology,  with  the  Titles  of  their  Memoirs 

and  Dates  of  Publication.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  $2;  paper,  $1.75. 
Monograph  of  the  Order  Pholadacea   and   other    Papers.      By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr. 

Cloth,  $2  ;  paper,  $1.75. 
Complete  Writings  on  Recent  and  Fossil  CeNCHOLOGY  op  C.  S.  Rafinesqub.     Edited 

by  Wm.  G.  Binney  and  G.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     $2.50. 
Observations  on  the   Genus  Unio.     By  Isaac  Lea,  LL.  D.     4to,  Vols.  1  to  13,     With 

Index,  Nos.  1,  2  and  3,  complete.     Illustrated  with  several  hundred  fine  lithographic 

plates.     $60. 

Same,  Vols.  2  to  13  inclusive,  except  Vols.  4  and  12.     Each  volume  separately,  $5. 
Synopsis  op  Genus  Unio.     By  Isaac  Lea,  LL.  D.     Fourth  edition.     $3. 
Contributions  TO  Geology.     By  Isaac  Lea.     $5. 
Fossil  Foot-Marks.     By  Isaac  Lea.     Large  folio,  text  and  plate.     $2. 

Same,  plate  alone.     50  cents. 

Notice  to  Booksellers. — All  the  publications  of  the  Society  will  be  sup- 
plied to  Booksellers  at  a  discount  of  20  per  cent,  on  the  jirices  charged  to  the  public. 

Application  to  be  made  to  Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.D.,  at  the  Hall  of  the 
Academy,  corner  of  Nineteenth  and  Race  Streets. 

London,  TRUBNER  &  CO., 

No.  57  and  59  Ludgate  Hill,  E.  C. 

March,  1882. 


CONTETSJ^TS. 


Wachsmuth,  Chas.,  and  Frank  Springer.     Revision  of  the 

Palieocrinoidea.     Part  II.    Conclusion.     (Plates  17.  18 

and  19). '     . 

Heilprin,  Angelo.     a  revision  of  the  Cis-Mississippi  Ter- 
tiary Pectens  of  the  United  States,         .... 
Heilprin,  Angelo.      Remarks   on   the  Mollusean   Genera 

Hippagus,  Verticordia  and  Pecchiolia,  .... 
Redfield,  J.  H.     On  Hieraeium  aurantiacum. 
Redfield,  J.  H.     Note  upon  Plantago  elongata,  Pursh., 
McCooK,  Rev.  H.  C.     How  Orb-Weaving  Spiders  make  the 

Framework  or  Foundations  of  Webs,     .... 
Wood,  Dr.  H.  C.     On  the  Nature  of  the  Diphtheritic  Con- 

tagium,   .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         . 

Meehan,  Thos.     Notes  on  Mistletoes, 

Meeiian,  Thos.     Dimorphism  in  a  Willow,  .... 
Ryder,  John  A.  Occurrence  of  the  same  species  of  Protozoa 

on  both  sides  of  the  Atlantic,         ..... 
Heilprin,  Angelo.     Note  on  the  approximate  position  of 

the  Eocene  deposits  of  Maryland,  .         .         .         . 

Heilprin,  Angelo.     A  revision  of  the  tertiary  species  of 

Area  of  the  Eastern  and  Southern  United  States, 
Meehan,  Thos.     Color  in  Autumn  Leaves, 
Meehan,  Thos.    On  Movements  and  Paralysis  in  the  Leaves 

of  Robinia,     ......... 

Potts,  Edw.    The  Genus  Carterella  vs.  Spongiophaga  Pottsi, 
Meehan,  Thos.     Pilobolus  crystallinus,        .         .         .         . 

Report  of  Committee  appointed  to  prepare  an  expression 

of  the  Academy's  appreciation  of  Dr.  Ruschenberger's 

services  to  the  Society,  . 
Meehan,  Thos.     Varying  Influence  of  Heat  on  Flower-buds 

and  Leaf-buds,        .... 
Chapman,  Dr.  H.  C.     On  a  fojtal  Kangaroo  and  its  mem 

branes.     (Plate  20), 

Report  of  the  President,        ...... 

Report  of  the  Recording  Secretary,      .... 

Report  of  the  Corresponding  Secretary,        ... 
Report  of  the  Librarian,        ...... 

Report  of  the  Curators,  ...... 

Report  of  the  Biological  and  Microscopical  Section,    . 
Report  of  the  Conchological  Section,    .... 

Report  of  the  Botanical  Section,  .... 

Report  of  tlie  Entomological  Section,  .... 

Report  of  the  Mineralogical  Section,    .... 

Report  of  the  Professor  of  Invertebrate  Paleontology, 
Report  of  the  Professor  of  Mineralogy, 
Report  of  the  Treasurer. 

Officers  for  1882, 

Elections  during  1881.  .... 
Additions  to  the  Museum, 
Additions  to  the  Librarj', 


305 

416 

423 
429 
429 

430 

435 
439 
442 

442 

444 

448 
454 

456 
460 
463 

465 

466 

468 
41-2 
485 
486 
48t 
489 
490 
491 
494 
496 
49T 
498 
499 
502 
505 
505 
506 
511 


I  k  Tit  SANSOM  ST.,  PHIL^DELPnlJ 


MBL/WHOI  LIBRARY 


UH    IfiRF    E